JP7834992B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some modern gaming machines transition to a time-saving mode (so-called b-time-saving mode) when the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number.

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-74510

Incidentally, the b-time-saving game state is sometimes set to be more advantageous to the player in terms of the expected value of profits that can be obtained when a jackpot occurs, compared to the normal game state. In this case, the expected value of profits that the player can obtain will be lower for a certain period immediately before transitioning to the b-time-saving game state compared to after transitioning to the b-time-saving game state.

The objective of this invention is to improve the gameplay of a gaming machine that can transition to a shortened game state (b).

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, a display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (special pattern, decorative pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means is characterized in that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, it notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.

A perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Figure 1 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine. Figure 1 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine. Figure 1 shows a front view of an example of the game board of a gaming machine. Figure 1 shows a front view of an example of the game board of a gaming machine. Figure 1 shows a front view of an example of the game board of a gaming machine. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. A block diagram showing an example of the memory area of the main control unit of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A block diagram showing an example of a general data storage area in the memory area of the main control unit shown in Figure 8. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area in the memory area of the main control unit. A schematic diagram showing an example of a performance information display device for a main control unit. This figure shows an example of the display on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. This figure shows an example of the display on the setting value display section of a performance information display device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for main timer interrupt processing performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process executed by the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the first special symbol hold command, which is executed in the start-up prize-winning process shown in Figure 18. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the general data in the general game control process, as shown in Figure 22. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process shown in Figure 22. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for initiating the special feature variation in the special feature game control process, as shown in Figure 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for changing game settings, which is performed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the specific performance information update process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. Figure 36 shows an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for operation detection processing executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation detection process performed in the operation detection process of Figure 43. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation detection pattern determination process performed in the operation detection process shown in Figure 43. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operating conditions. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. This figure shows an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (performance pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command judgment process shown in Figure 47. This figure shows an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (performance pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command judgment process shown in Figure 47. Figure 51(A) shows an example of the colors of the decorative patterns, and Figure 51(B) shows an example of the first stop pattern selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command judgment process of Figure 47. Figure 52(A) shows an example of the first reserved image display unit, the variable image display unit, and the previously variable image display unit set on the symbol display unit in the normal game state, and Figure 52(B) shows an example of the second reserved image display unit and the variable image display unit set on the symbol display unit in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. This figure shows an example of how the held image changes in the first held image display unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the jackpot game presentation, which is executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42. A diagram illustrating the conventional sequence of performances for a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A diagram illustrating the sequence of performance execution for a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows an example of a distribution table used when distributing jackpot types in the main control device of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing performed by the audio lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart illustrating an example of the command determination process. A flowchart illustrating an example of the command determination process. A diagram showing an example screen in the symbol display section of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the pending continuous performance processing executed in the command judgment process in Figure 59. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing a continuous hold animation. Figure 62 shows an example of a table used in the continuous hold animation processing. This diagram shows an example of a stopping pattern combination for decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner in the pattern display section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special effect processing that is executed in the command determination process of Figure 59. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) that is executed in the command judgment process in Figure 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) that is executed in the command judgment process in Figure 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 60. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for setting stop symbol combinations. A diagram illustrating the sequence of performance sequences in a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart illustrating the differences between the command determination process of the third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. A flowchart illustrating the differences between the command determination process of the third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. A flowchart illustrating the differences between the second special effect setting process in the third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. A flowchart illustrating the differences between the third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment in the variation type (performance pattern) setting process. A flowchart illustrating the differences between the second embodiment and the second embodiment in the process of setting the variation type (performance pattern). A flowchart illustrating the differences between the second embodiment and the second embodiment in the process of setting the variation type (performance pattern). A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Figure 82 is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the feather mechanism of a gaming machine. A cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the feather mechanism. Figure 82 shows an example of a table and other components used in the main control unit of a gaming machine. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process in the main process of Figure 88. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special feature variation start process executed in the special feature game control process in the main process shown in Figure 88. A time chart showing an example of game progression during a minor win game played on the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the minor win game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 88. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for controlling minor wins in games. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for controlling minor wins in games. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for controlling minor wins in games. Figure 82 shows an example of the game flow (transition of game states) in a gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 88. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for transitioning between game states. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for transitioning between game states. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for transitioning between game states. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for transitioning between game states. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for transitioning between game states. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for transitioning between game states. A flowchart illustrating an example of the command determination process performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) that is executed in the command judgment process in Figure 104. This diagram shows an example of the presentation patterns for special feature games performed in the second time-saving game state (the presentation pattern for continuing the second time-saving game state and the presentation pattern for transitioning to the third time-saving game state). This figure shows an example of the screen display for the symbol display section during a special symbol game played in the second time-saving game state. This figure shows an example of the screen display for the symbol display section during a special symbol game played in the second time-saving game state. This figure shows an example of the screen display for the symbol display section during a special symbol game played in the second time-saving game state. This figure shows an example of the screen display for the symbol display section during a special symbol game played in the second time-saving game state. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 104. This diagram shows an example of the relationship between the number of time-saving game rounds and the combination of symbols that stop on the reels. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time reduction count counter processing executed in the command determination process in Figure 104. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) in the command judgment process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. This diagram shows an example of the presentation patterns (first presentation pattern and second presentation pattern) during the second time-saving game state. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting stop symbol combinations, which is executed during command judgment processing. This figure shows an example of setting the number of time-saving game rounds when transitioning to the third time-saving game state in a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing in the main processing executed by the main control device of a game machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows an example of the screen display for the symbol display section during a special symbol game played in the second time-saving game state. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the audio lamp control device of a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows an example of the screen display for the symbol display section during a special symbol game played in the second time-saving game state. A diagram showing the game flow of a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. a. A timing chart showing an example of the timing of the end of the first special game that was started in the shortened time game state. A front view showing an example of a game board. A block diagram showing an example of a special feature hold storage area provided in the RAM of the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A flowchart showing the procedure for setting the first special symbol hold command, which is executed in the start-up prize-winning process shown in Figure 18. A flowchart showing the procedure for the through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the data for the regular game data that is executed in the regular game control process shown in Figure 132. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process shown in Figure 132. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special feature data setting process executed in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special game start process executed in the special game control process of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special game termination process executed in the special game control process of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special feature data setting process executed in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special game start process executed in the special game control process of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special game termination process executed in the special game control process shown in Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time-saving game count counter processing executed in the command judgment process in Figure 149. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the first variation type (performance pattern) executed in the command judgment process in Figure 149. This diagram shows an example screen in the graphic display section. This diagram shows an example screen in the graphic display section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the second variation type (performance pattern) executed in the command judgment process shown in Figure 149. Figure 155(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first time attack performance termination process executed in the command determination process of Figure 149, and Figure 155(B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second time attack performance termination process executed in step S4432 of the command determination process of Figure 149. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of a gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of operation of the first rotating mechanism component installed on the game board. A side view showing the area around the first rotating component, partially cut away. This diagram shows an example of how the first rotating mechanism component can be seen when it performs a performance independently. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of the operation of the left second rotating mechanism member and the right second rotating mechanism member provided on the game board. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. A side view showing the area around the first rotating mechanism member and the second rotating mechanism member on the left (second rotating mechanism member on the right), with a portion of the view cut away. A front view showing an example of operation of the first rotating mechanism member, the second rotating mechanism member on the left, and the second rotating mechanism member on the right. A table showing the types of notification modes provided by the first rotating mechanism member, the second rotating mechanism member on the left, and the second rotating mechanism member on the right. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. A time chart showing an example of the operation of a rotating mechanism in a special-feature game. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the operation effect of the rotating mechanism component, which is executed in the command determination process shown in Figure 171. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the special game effects that are executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the special game effects that are executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42. A diagram showing an example of the main components of a gaming machine system including a gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment of the present invention. A time chart showing an example of output of a jackpot signal from a gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment of the present invention to a hall computer. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process of Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for outputting the jackpot signal, which is performed in the main process shown in Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for outputting the jackpot signal, which is performed in the main process shown in Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. This diagram illustrates examples of background images and other visuals displayed on the symbol display area in various game states. This diagram illustrates examples of background images and other visuals displayed on the symbol display area in various game states. A time chart showing other examples of jackpot signals output to the hall computer. A time chart showing other examples of jackpot signals output to the hall computer. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the 12th embodiment of the present invention. Figure 192 is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the feather mechanism of a gaming machine. A cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the feather mechanism. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process executed by the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the first special symbol hold command, which is executed in the start-up prize-winning process shown in Figure 200. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the second special symbol hold command, which is executed in the start-up prize-winning process shown in Figure 200. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process in the main process of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 208. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for initiating the special feature variation in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 208. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special feature variation pattern setting process B, which is executed in the special feature variation start process of Figure 210. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special feature variation pattern setting process B, which is executed in the special feature variation start process of Figure 210. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special feature variation pattern setting process B, which is executed in the special feature variation start process of Figure 210. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the minor win game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the minor win game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the minor win game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (variation pattern) that is executed in the command determination process shown in Figure 223. This diagram shows examples of the symbol display screen in various game states. A diagram illustrating an example of a one-shot notification sequence during the RUSH mode. A diagram showing an example of a battle sequence in the RUSH mode. A diagram showing an example of a battle sequence in the RUSH mode. A diagram showing an example of a result sequence and a branching sequence. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of the operation of a movable rotating mechanism component installed on a game board. A side view showing the area around a movable rotating component, partially cut away. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine, as shown in Figure 230. A block diagram showing an example of the memory area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 230. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A block diagram showing an example of a general data hold storage area in the memory area of the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the data for the regular game data, which is performed in the regular game control process shown in Figure 242. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process in Figure 242. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process of Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 246. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for initiating the special feature variation in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 246. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 241. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the audio lamp control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for operation detection processing executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 243. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation detection process performed in the operation detection process shown in Figure 254. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation detection pattern determination process performed in the operation detection process of Figure 254. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operating conditions. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 243. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 243. This figure shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 259. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 259. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special game effects, which is executed in the command judgment process shown in Figure 259. This figure shows an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (performance pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 259. This figure shows an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (performance pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 259. A diagram illustrating the timing of movement of a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the movement of a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive pattern of a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive pattern of a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive data for driving a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive pattern and drive data of a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive pattern and drive data of a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive pattern of a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive data for driving a movable rotating component. A diagram illustrating the drive pattern and drive data of a movable rotating component. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting up special effects and effects in Figure 262. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the button effect setting process executed in the special game effect setting process shown in Figure 262. A diagram to explain button animations. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the special game effects that are executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 243. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the movable rotating mechanism, which is performed in the special game performance control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the button effect control process executed in the special game effect control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the button effect control process executed in the special game effect control process shown in Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the jackpot game presentation, which is executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 243. A diagram illustrating the drive data for driving a movable rotating component. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment of the present invention. This diagram illustrates the special electric prize winning mechanism of the gaming machine shown in Figure 291. This diagram illustrates the special electric prize winning mechanism of the gaming machine shown in Figure 291. Figure 294(A) is a block diagram showing an example of a part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 291, Figure 294(B) is a diagram showing the prize balls awarded for various winning slots, and Figure 294(C) is a diagram showing the types of signals output to the outside of the gaming machine. A diagram showing the output configurations of various signals output to the outside of a gaming machine. A diagram showing the output configurations of various signals output to the outside of a gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. A diagram illustrating examples of transitions in game states. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the general data in the general game control process, as shown in Figure 301. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process shown in Figure 301. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 305. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for initiating the special feature variation in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 305. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for managing the number of special game plays performed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for managing the number of special game plays performed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special jackpot game control process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special jackpot game control process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special jackpot game control process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special jackpot game control process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special electric start-up control process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the V-winning jackpot game, which is executed in the main processing shown in Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the signal output processing procedure performed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. This diagram shows an example screen in the graphic display section. This diagram shows an example screen in the graphic display section. A diagram showing an example screen in the graphic display section. A flowchart illustrating this. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Figure 328 is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the feather mechanism of a gaming machine. A cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the feather mechanism. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine, as shown in Figure 328. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the display control device for the gaming machine shown in Figure 328. An explanatory diagram showing the image displayed when the power is turned on. (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating back view A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating back view B. An explanatory diagram showing the back C. A schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table. A schematic diagram illustrating an example of an additional data table. A schematic diagram illustrating an example of a data transfer table. A schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing examples of tables used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 328, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation flow of a special feature game presentation. A diagram showing an example of a re-draw animation for special game animations. A diagram showing an example of a re-draw animation for special game animations. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process executed by the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the general data that is executed in the general game control process shown in Figure 347. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process shown in Figure 347. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process of Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 351. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for initiating the special feature variation in the special feature game control process shown in Figure 351. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for managing the number of special game plays performed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for managing the number of special game plays performed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the minor win game control process executed in the main process of Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the minor win game control process executed in the main process of Figure 346. (A) is a diagram showing an example of break-even point calculation, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the opening sequence for a minor win game. This diagram shows an example image of the opening sequence for a minor win game. (A) is a diagram showing a modified version of the opening sequence for a minor win game (border notification), and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing example images of modified versions of the opening sequence for a minor win game (border notification). (A) is an example image of border notification in special feature games, and (B) is an example image of V-entry display in minor win games. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in the main process shown in Figure 346. A flowchart showing an example of the main processing procedure performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 328. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for vibration sensor input monitoring and effect processing performed in the main process shown in Figure 369. A flowchart showing an example of the command determination process procedure executed in the main process shown in Figure 369. A flowchart showing an example of the command determination process procedure executed in the main process shown in Figure 369. A flowchart showing an example of the command determination process procedure executed in the main process shown in Figure 369. A flowchart showing an example of the command determination process procedure executed in the main process shown in Figure 369. A flowchart showing an example of the command determination process procedure executed in the main process shown in Figure 369. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 328. A flowchart showing an example of the main processing procedure performed by the display control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 328. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command interrupt processing performed by the display control device, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for V interrupt processing performed by the display control device. A flowchart showing an example of the command determination process performed in the V interrupt handling in Figure 378(B). (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the reserved ball count command processing executed in the command determination process of Figure 379, (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the confirmed command processing executed in the command determination process of Figure 379, and (C) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the demo command processing executed in the command determination process of Figure 379. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing a variable pattern command executed in the command determination process of Figure 379, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing a stop type command executed in the command determination process of Figure 379. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the continuous notification command processing executed in the command determination process of Figure 379, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the back image change command processing executed in the command determination process of Figure 379. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing an operation button operation command executed in the command judgment process of Figure 379, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing an error command executed in the command judgment process of Figure 379. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for display setting processing executed by the V interrupt processing in Figure 378(B). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for display setting processing executed by the V interrupt processing in Figure 378(B). (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the pending image setting process performed in the display setting process of Figure 385, (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the warning image setting process performed in the display setting process of Figure 385, and (C) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation process performed in the display setting process of Figure 385. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the comparison process performed in the display setting process in Figure 385. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the button update process executed in the display settings process shown in Figure 385. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the transfer setting process executed in the V interrupt processing of Figure 378(B), and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the resident image transfer setting process executed in the transfer setting process of Figure 389(A). Figure 389(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal image transfer setting process performed in the transfer setting process. A flowchart showing an example of the drawing process procedure executed by the V interrupt handler in Figure 378(B).

The following descriptions of embodiments of the present invention will be made with reference to the attached drawings to facilitate understanding of the invention. Furthermore, the following embodiments are merely examples of the present invention and do not limit the technical scope of the invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a game machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 55.

[Outline configuration of the gaming machine 10]
Here, Figure 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figures 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and Figures 4 to 6 are front views of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereafter, the front, back, left, right, and up and down directions used in this embodiment will be defined by the front-to-back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in Figures 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in a gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to the island equipment (not shown) of the gaming hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example to explain the gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to other gaming machines such as revolving-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrangement ball gaming machines, and jackpot gaming machines.

[Configuration of the front frame 11]
The front frame 11 is rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14. Similarly, the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Furthermore, the back pack unit 13 is rotatably supported at its left end by the inner frame 12, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illuminated unit 27, among other components.

The operation button 20 is located in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see Figure 7) that switches the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 (described later) depending on whether or not the button is pressed. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to determine the operation status of the operation button 20 (operated or not). This operation button 20 is used to trigger operation button effects and other features that are executed in special feature games that display the results of the jackpot lottery to the player, triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period.

Furthermore, the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23; it may be located at any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is accessible to the player. Also, there may be more than one operation button 20. Additionally, the operation button 20 may be equipped with a jog dial. In this case, by operating the jog dial, when performing various game settings, the player can provisionally select desired items from various settings screens, such as the performance stage (background performance), characters, and music during jackpot games, as well as game settings such as the frequency of selection of predetermined performances and the jackpot expectation rate. The provisionally selected items can then be selected by operating the operation button 20.

Furthermore, the operating means that accepts input from the player, such as the operation button 20, may be one or multiple. Examples of such operating means include, in addition to the operation button 20, a rotatable handle, a rotatable lever, a push-in member that can move back and forth (up and down), a touch panel provided on the symbol display unit 341 or sub-movable display unit 38 (described later), or a combination of two or more of these operating means (for example, an operating means capable of rotation and movement). These operating means may also be equipped with the operation button 20 (for example, an operating means with the operation button 20 or touch panel on a handle or lever).

The selection/determination unit 21 is operated by the player. For example, it accepts the player's press during a standby state when no game is being played, and is used to allow the player to configure various game settings. These game settings include, for example, the settings for characters appearing in game animations, the execution frequency of various animations such as button animations, and the probability of winning a jackpot in various animations. This selection/determination unit 21 includes multiple selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from the options (items) on various setting screens when performing various game settings, and include the upper selection button 211, lower selection button 212, left selection button 213, and right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) when the confirm button 21B is operated. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is equipped with an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d, respectively, which switch the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5, as shown in Figure 7. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 based on the input signals of each switch 211a to 211d.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is determined that an operation has been performed on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 when it is detected that an operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started. Of course, it is also possible to determine that an operation has been performed on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 when it is detected that an operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has finished.

On the other hand, the confirmation button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The confirmation button 21B also includes a confirmation operation switch 21Ba, which switches the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 (described later). The confirmation operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output interface of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the confirmation operation switch 21Ba based on the input signal from the switch 21Ba.

Furthermore, instead of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the confirmation button 21B, the symbol display unit 341 and the sub-movable display unit 38, described later, could be equipped with a touch panel that accepts player input, and this touch panel could be provided as the operating means. Alternatively, instead of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214), a rotating element such as a jog dial could be provided. Also, while the selection switches 211a-211d and the confirmation switch 21Ba (see Figure 7) are contact-type switches, they could also be, for example, piezoelectric elements, as long as they can be used to detect whether or not a player has made an operation.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game balls. In the game machine 10, the basic game is played by launching game balls from the game ball launching mechanism 32 (described later) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched towards the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is located below the panel 25 and is used to store game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 (described later), and to guide the stored game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 32 in a single line. The lower tray 24 is located further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store any game balls that are surplus from the upper tray 23.

Panel 25 is made of colorless or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. Speakers 26 are a pair of speakers located on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and they perform sound output effects. Note that the installation position of speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Furthermore, the lighting unit 27 incorporates light sources such as indicator lamps and LEDs, and performs lamp effects through lighting color and flashing patterns such as on or off.

[Composition of inner frame 12]
As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 comprises a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that in Figure 2, the details on the surface of the game board 31 are omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The control unit 33 is located on the rear side of the game board 31 and includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the game machine 10, commands (control signals) for instructing control content are transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in Figure 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general prize entry opening 313, a first prize entry opening 314, a second prize entry opening 315, a variable prize entry opening 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an out opening 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display unit 36, a sub-movable display unit 38, and a movable prize component 39.

The inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 towards the game area on the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312, any game balls that do not enter the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, or the variable prize slot 316 are discharged from the out slot 318.

Here, as shown in Figure 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 comprises a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid and supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launching rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the launching handle 22, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game board 31. Furthermore, the game ball launching mechanism 32 may use a motor or other driving means to launch the game balls instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4, the general prize entry point 313, the first prize entry point 314, the second prize entry point 315, the variable prize entry point 316, and the out entry point 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-to-back direction. On the back side of the game board 31, ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see Figure 7) are provided, corresponding to the general prize entry point 313, the first prize entry point 314, the second prize entry point 315, and the variable prize entry point 316, respectively, and capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls. Furthermore, game balls that have passed through the openings of the general prize entry point 313, the first prize entry point 314, the second prize entry point 315, and the out entry point 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 7), which will be described later. The through gates 317L and 317R are through gates that penetrate vertically, through which game balls can pass, and are equipped with ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see Figure 7) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 317L and 317R. On the game board 31, game balls launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 may pass through through gate 317L, and game balls launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 may pass through through gate 317R. Then, when the ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see Figure 7) detect the passage of a game ball, a normal winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second prize pocket 315. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, the electric mechanism 315b, described later, is opened, allowing game balls to enter the second prize pocket 315. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to enter the second prize slot 315 not only in the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time reduction game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), but also in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) by launching the game balls into the left-hand area of the game board 31.

Furthermore, the high-probability mode has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot (see Figure 9(B)), making it easier to transition to a jackpot game state where a jackpot game is executed. Conversely, the low-probability mode has a low probability of resulting in a jackpot (see Figure 9(A)), making it difficult to transition to a jackpot game state where a jackpot game is executed. Additionally, the high-frequency support mode has a high probability of resulting in a normal win (see Figure 12(B)), and because the electric mechanism 315b (described later) operates frequently, it is easier for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. Conversely, the low-frequency support mode has a low probability of resulting in a normal win (see Figure 12(A)), and because the electric mechanism 315b operates infrequently, it is harder for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315.

The ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the ball exit sensor 318a (see Figure 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331. The detection results from the ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the ball exit sensor 318a are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sends a command to the payout control device 7 to dispense game balls based on the detection results from the ball entry sensors 313a-316a. Hereinafter, the detection of game ball entry by the ball entry sensors 313a-316a may be referred to as a "win." The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) also counts the number of balls that have been released based on the detection results from the ball exit sensor 318a. The number of balls released here matches the number of game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, while the ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the ball exit sensor 318a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, they may be any sensors capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls using other detection methods.

Furthermore, the second prize slot 315 is equipped with an electric mechanism (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315. The electric mechanism 315b is opened and closed by a drive mechanism such as a solenoid located on the back side of the game board 31. When the electric mechanism 315b is open, game balls can enter the second prize slot 315; when the electric mechanism 315b is closed, entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 is restricted.

Furthermore, the variable prize entry point 316 is equipped with an opening/closing door 319 that switches between restricting the entry of game balls into the variable prize entry point 316 and restricting its entry. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a drive mechanism, such as a solenoid, located on the back side of the game board 31. When the opening/closing door 319 is open, game balls can enter the variable prize entry point 316. When the opening/closing door 319 is closed, entry of game balls into the variable prize entry point 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable prize entry point 316 during round play in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, and otherwise remains in a position that closes the variable prize entry point 316. As a result, game balls launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 during round play in a jackpot game can enter the variable prize entry point 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, the ball entry sensor 314a or ball entry sensor 315a detects this, and the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result. The lottery result from the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, which then controls the display on the variable display unit 34 and other displays according to the lottery result.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, and the variable prize slot 316 is detected by the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, a preset number of prize balls are dispensed. For example, the number of prize balls dispensed when a ball enters the general prize slot 313 is 10, when a ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 is 3, and when a ball enters the variable prize slot 316 is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, if the result of the lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot game state, and the round game described later, in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened, is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), allowing for the expectation of a large payout of prize balls.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, a jackpot lottery is conducted. If the lottery result is a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes the 5R jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R probability variation jackpot game state) and the 16R probability variation jackpot game state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an opening and closing execution mode in which a round game is performed in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened until a predetermined time has elapsed or until the variable prize slot 316 has entered the upper limit number (for example, 9 balls) or more. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state that includes an opening and closing execution mode in which 16 rounds of gameplay are performed. It offers the potential for a larger payout of prize balls than the 5R jackpot game state, making it a more advantageous game state for the player.

As shown in Figure 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341, such as a liquid crystal display, which is positioned to be visible through an opening 31A formed approximately in the center of the game board 31. This symbol display unit 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display unit 341 displays various image effects, such as a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 in response to balls entering the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, and special symbol game effects executed in conjunction with the variable display effects. Furthermore, the symbol display unit 341 may have a dot matrix display, plasma display, organic EL display, etc., or it may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display, and it may further have a touch panel that accepts touch operations from the player.

For example, the display of changing decorative patterns in the pattern display unit 341 is achieved by sequentially scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns, each numbered "1" through "9," in vertical, horizontal, or diagonal directions. Other characters or patterns may be displayed between the decorative patterns. In this embodiment, however, there are no secondary patterns, and the decorative patterns consist of nine types, numbered "1" through "9."

In the gaming machine 10, during special symbol games, the display of decorative symbols is executed such that all decorative symbols stop moving after a predetermined display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol movement display on the symbol display unit 341. More specifically, during the display of decorative symbols, all decorative symbols first move along a predetermined movement direction (e.g., horizontal, vertical), and then the movement of multiple decorative symbols stops sequentially. Then, once the movement of decorative symbols on all lines has stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the decorative symbols ends.

When the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 has finished changing, the symbol display unit 341 will display a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative symbols will indicate or suggest the result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," or a "5R normal jackpot," a state in which decorative symbols of the same type are lined up on the active lines will be displayed, indicating that it is a jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of decorative symbols on the active lines, but it is not always indicated. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," a state in which the symbol combination set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot, such as "777," is lined up on the active lines will be displayed, or a state in which the same decorative symbol combination other than "777" is lined up on the active lines will be displayed. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the display will show either a combination of decorative symbols pre-set to indicate a 5R probability variation jackpot, such as "333," lined up on the active payline, or a combination of the same decorative symbols other than those indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 5R probability variation jackpot, such as "777" or "333," lined up on the active payline. If the lottery result is a "5R regular jackpot," the display will show a combination of the same decorative symbols other than those pre-set to indicate a regular jackpot, such as "222" or "444," lined up on the active payline. If the lottery result is a "miss," a different combination of decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") lined up on the active payline will be displayed.

Furthermore, the symbol display unit 341 displays a special game animation that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, along with the display of the changing decorative symbols during the special game. If the draw result is a "16R probability-changing jackpot," and a combination of jackpot symbols other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R probability-changing jackpot is displayed on the active lines, a special game animation will be performed to indicate that it is either a 5R probability-changing jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, the jackpot animation will include an upgrade animation that clearly indicates that the draw result for the special game is a 16R probability-changing jackpot. Similarly, if the draw result is a "5R probability-changing jackpot," and a combination of jackpot symbols other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a probability-changing jackpot is displayed on the active lines, a special game animation will be performed to indicate that it is a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, during the jackpot game animation, an upgrade animation will be performed to clearly indicate that the result of the lottery for the special symbol game is a 5R probability variation jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays the jackpot game sequence, including the opening sequence, the opening/closing execution mode sequence, and the ending sequence.

The sub-movable display unit 38 is equipped with a display device 381, such as a liquid crystal display, and is located in the left-hand area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. This sub-movable display unit 38 is connected to the MPU 61 via the input/output I/F 62 of the display control device 6 (see Figure 7). Based on display variation pattern commands transmitted from the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 61 controls the display device 381 to execute image effects in special feature games and jackpot games, together with the symbol display unit 341.

The display device 381 may be a dot matrix display, plasma display, organic EL display, etc., or a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, the sub-movable display unit 38 may have a touch panel in addition to the display device 381 to receive touch input from the player.

Furthermore, the sub-movable display unit 38 is movable in the left-right direction D3 between the standby position (shown by the dashed line in Figure 5, the position shown in Figure 4) and the operating position (shown by the solid line in Figure 5).

Here, as shown in Figure 7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 38a that supplies driving force to the sub-movable display unit 38, and a return detection unit 38b for detecting when the sub-movable display unit 38 has returned to the standby position. The motor 38a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, etc., and the return detection unit 38b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. The sub-movable display unit 38 and the motor 38a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the motor 38a moves the sub-movable display unit 38 to the right (operating direction) from the standby position (see Figure 4) to the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5), or to the left (return direction) from the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5) to the standby position (see Figure 4), depending on the rotation direction of the motor 38a. For example, the sub-movable display unit 38 moves from the standby position (see Figure 4) to the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5) when the motor 38a rotates in the forward direction, and conversely, moves from the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5) to the standby position (see Figure 4) when the motor 38a rotates in the reverse direction.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor driver 38c to which the motor 38a and the return detection unit 38b are connected. The motor driver 38c is connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c controls the motor 38a according to control instructions from the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c can also acquire detection results from the return detection unit 38b and transmit them to the sound lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver 38c may be omitted, and the motor 38a and the return detection unit 38b may be directly connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

Such a sub-movable display unit 38 operates in special feature games and jackpot games to execute effects related to the results of the jackpot lottery. For example, in special feature games, the sub-movable display unit 38 operates as a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, as well as as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation of the lottery result being a jackpot. Furthermore, in jackpot games, the sub-movable display unit 38 can operate as an upgrade effect (such as a round number upgrade effect or an upgrade effect from a normal jackpot to a probability-increasing jackpot) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more favorable to the player than the result suggested by the special feature game effect. It can also operate as a confirmed consecutive win effect that notifies the player that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during the holding of the right to execute a special feature game after the jackpot game has ended.

Furthermore, the standby and operating positions of the sub-movable display unit 38 are not limited to the left-hand region on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, but may be in other positions. Also, the number of sub-movable display units 38 is not limited to one, but may be multiple, and multiple sub-movable display units 38 may cooperate, interlock, follow, or track each other. In addition to the left-right direction D3, the sub-movable display unit 38 may be movable in other directions. For example, the sub-movable display unit 38 may be movable in the up-down direction D2, diagonally, etc., and may also be rotatable in clockwise or counterclockwise directions. Furthermore, the sub-movable display unit 38 is optional, and one or more immovable display devices may be provided instead.

As shown in Figure 4, the main display unit 36 comprises a regular symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first special symbol reserve count display unit 364, and a second special symbol reserve count display unit 365, all located in the upper right portion of the game board 31.

The regular symbol display unit 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing regular symbols (regular symbols), and displays the result of the regular symbol winning lottery, which determines whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b triggered by a win in the through gates 317L and 317R, by the combination of on/off states of the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) displays the result of the regular symbol winning lottery by flashing the LED pair (displaying the regular symbols in a variable state) when a win is triggered in the through gates 317L and 317R, and then turning each LED on or off (displaying the regular symbols as stopped) after the variable display time has elapsed. The display of the lottery result in the regular symbol winning lottery using the variable and stopped displays of the regular symbols (regular symbols) is referred to as "regular symbol game" or "regular symbol game."

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery), which determines whether or not to execute the jackpot game triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314, by a combination of the on/off states of the seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) displays the result of the jackpot lottery by flashing the seven segments of the 7-segment display device (variable display of the first special symbol) when a ball enters the first prize slot 314, and then lighting or extinguishing each segment (stop display of the first special symbol) after the variation display time has elapsed. The display of the jackpot lottery result through the variation and stop display of the first special symbol (first special symbol) is referred to as the "first special symbol game" or "first special symbol game."

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery), which determines whether or not to execute the jackpot game triggered by a ball entering the second prize slot 315, by a combination of the on/off states of the seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) displays the result of the jackpot lottery by flashing the seven segments of the 7-segment display device (variable display of the second special symbol) when a ball enters the second prize slot 315, and then turning each segment on or off (stop display of the second special symbol) after the variation display time has elapsed. The display of the jackpot lottery result through the variation and stop display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is referred to as the "second special symbol game" or "second special symbol game."

In the following, the first special symbol (First Special Symbol) and the second special symbol (Second Special Symbol) may be referred to as "Special Symbol" or "Special Symbol," and the first special symbol game (First Special Symbol Game) and the second special symbol game (Second Special Symbol Game) may be referred to as "Special Symbol Game" or "Special Symbol Game."

The first special symbol reserve count display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the first special symbol reserve count N, which is the number of rights to execute the first special symbol game that arise from a win in the first prize slot 314, by the number of LEDs that are lit.

The second special symbol reserve count display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the second special symbol reserve count M, which is the number of rights to execute the second special symbol game that arise from a win in the second prize entry slot 315, by the number of LEDs that are lit.

The movable component member 39 is movable vertically along the surface of the pattern display unit 341 between a predetermined standby position shown in Figure 4 (indicated by a dashed line in Figure 6), located above the pattern display unit 341, and an operating position shown by a solid line in Figure 6, which is set below the standby position. The operating position (see solid line in Figure 6) is closer to the center of the pattern display unit 341 than the standby position (see Figure 4). Furthermore, when the movable component member 39 is in the operating position (see solid line in Figure 6), it has a higher coverage rate on the surface of the pattern display unit 341 compared to when it is in the standby position (see Figure 4). In addition, multiple lamps 391 are arranged in an annular pattern around the periphery of the movable component member 39. In this embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged on the movable component member 39, and each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off. Furthermore, each of the multiple lamps 391 is, for example, an LED lamp and can light up in multiple colors, including white, yellow, green, red, or a mixture thereof. In this way, each lamp 391 can be individually lit and extinguished, and can light up in multiple colors. For example, when the movable mechanism member 39 is activated, the lighting pattern, lighting color, and number of lit lamps 391 can indicate the likelihood (expected jackpot) that the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the special feature game is a jackpot, or it can be made clear that the lottery result is a jackpot. For example, regarding the lighting color, the expected jackpot is set to increase in the order of white, yellow, green, and red. Also, by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and lighting color, it is possible to execute a rainbow lamp effect to clearly indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movable mechanism member 39 is exposed through the opening 31A in the standby position (see Figure 4). It is also conceivable to utilize the lamps 391 exposed through the opening 31A to perform a visual effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery. For example, in this embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed through the opening 31A (see Figure 4), it is conceivable to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot based on which of these lamps 391 is lit. In addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is also conceivable to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot using the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, the movable mechanism member 39 may be completely hidden in the standby position, without being exposed through the opening 31A. The gaming machine 10 may also have multiple movable mechanism members 39. Moreover, the movable mechanism member 39 may be composed of multiple separate movable members combined, be transformable into two or more forms, or include a display such as a liquid crystal display. Of course, the movable mechanism member 39 is not limited to covering a portion of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341, but may cover the entire display screen. Additionally, the central part of the movable mechanism member 39 may be configured as an illuminated section that can be turned on and off. In this case, it becomes possible to perform an effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot or clearly indicates a jackpot by turning on or flashing the illuminated section.

Such movable mechanism components 39 are operated in special feature games and jackpot games to execute effects related to the results of the jackpot lottery. For example, in special feature games, the movable mechanism component 39 operates as a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, as well as as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation of the lottery result being a jackpot. Furthermore, in jackpot games, the movable mechanism component 39 operates as an upgrade effect (a round number upgrade effect or an upgrade effect from a normal jackpot to a probability-increasing jackpot effect performed in jackpot games) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more favorable to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special feature game effect. It can also be operated as a confirmed consecutive win effect that notifies that there is a jackpot lottery result among the reserved rights to perform a special feature game performed after the end of a jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 39a that supplies driving force to the movable mechanism member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting when the movable mechanism member 39 has returned to the standby position. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, etc., and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. The movable mechanism member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the motor 39a moves the movable mechanism member 39 downward (operating direction) from the standby position (see Figure 4) to the operating position (see solid line in Figure 6), or upward (return direction) from the operating position (see solid line in Figure 6) to the standby position (see Figure 4), depending on the rotation direction of the motor 39a. For example, the movable component 39 moves from the standby position (see Figure 4) to the operating position (see solid line in Figure 6) when the motor 39a rotates in the forward direction, and conversely, moves from the operating position (see solid line in Figure 6) to the standby position (see Figure 4) when the motor 39a rotates in the reverse direction.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to control instructions from the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c can also acquire the detection result from the return detection unit 39b and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5. Alternatively, the motor driver 39c may be omitted, and the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

Furthermore, each lamp 391 of the movable component 39 is individually connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The sound lamp control device 5 can individually light and extinguish each lamp 391, and can also light up in multiple colors.

Furthermore, the game board 31 may also be equipped with magnetic sensors and radio wave sensors (both not shown). Magnetic sensors can be installed, for example, around the first prize entry point 314 and the variable prize entry point 316. The magnetic sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection results from the magnetic sensors are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity if someone attempts to illegally guide game balls into the first prize entry point 314 or the variable prize entry point 316 using magnets. On the other hand, radio wave sensors can be installed, for example, around the first prize entry point 314 and the second prize entry point 315. The radio wave sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results from the radio wave sensors are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity if someone attempts to illegally input radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to cause false detection of game ball entry. The radio wave sensors can detect radio waves in the range of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

[Back Pack Unit 13]
As shown in Figure 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The dispensing mechanism 130 comprises a tank 131 for storing game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the gaming hall, and a dispensing device 132 for dispensing game balls from the tank 131 towards the upper tray 23. If the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 132 are dispensed into the lower tray 24.

The peripheral control unit 140 comprises a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls dispensed by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launching mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the game machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control devices and drive means installed within the game machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 7 to 16.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in Figure 7, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs the main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 performs a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller. The MPU 41 also incorporates a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 and other components. Furthermore, some or all of the processing performed by the main control unit 4 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The input/output interface (I/F) 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control unit 4 and outputs control signals from the main control unit 4. The input/output interface 42 is also connected to ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and ball exit sensor 318a. The MPU 41 determines whether game balls have entered the general prize entry opening 313, the first prize entry opening 314, the second prize entry opening 315, and the variable prize entry opening 316, and whether game balls have passed through the through gates 317L and 317R, based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, and 317Ra. The MPU 41 also counts the number of balls that have been exited (number of balls launched) based on the detection signal from the ball exit sensor 318a. Furthermore, the input/output interface 42 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the power supply control device 9.

The MPU 41 then outputs commands to the audio lamp control device 5, including commands such as the regular pattern variation command, the electric mechanism opening command, the electric mechanism closing command, the special pattern variation command, the first special pattern hold command, the second special pattern hold command, the special pattern shift command, the jackpot game start command, the opening start command, the opening end command, the opening execution mode start command, the round game start command, the round game end command, the interval start command, the interval end command, the opening execution mode end command, the ending start command, the ending end command, the jackpot game end command, and the game setting value change command.

The "Normal Symbol Variation Pattern Command" is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the variation display time (normal symbol variation pattern) of the normal symbols during normal symbol gameplay and the lottery result in the normal symbol winning draw. The normal symbol variation pattern command is set in step S1709 of the normal symbol variation start processing shown in Figure 24, based on the information stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 412c (see Figure 11), described later, when the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36 begins. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command may also be a command that only notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the variation display time (normal symbol variation pattern) of the normal symbols during normal symbol gameplay. In this case, the command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the normal symbol winning draw is set as a separate command from the normal symbol variation pattern command.

The electric mechanism release command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is to be released (activated). The electric mechanism release command is set in step S1809 of the normal game control process shown in Figure 25 (described later) when the electric mechanism 315b is released (activated).

The electric mechanism closing command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is to be closed (returned). The electric mechanism closing command is set in step S1816 of the normal game control process shown in Figure 25 (described later) when the electric mechanism 315b is closed (returned).

The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the display time for the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game and the result of the jackpot lottery. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it includes information regarding the type of jackpot. The special symbol variation pattern command is set in step S2105 of the special symbol variation start processing shown in Figure 28, described later, based on the information stored in the special symbol hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8), described later, when the display of the variation of the special symbols starts in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. The special symbol variation pattern command includes information that can identify the type of special symbol when variation starts, but the special symbol variation pattern command for when variation of the first special symbol starts and the special symbol variation pattern command for when variation of the second special symbol starts may be set as separate special symbol variation commands. Furthermore, the special symbol variation pattern command may also be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the display time and only the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game. In this case, the command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and type of jackpot in the jackpot lottery will be set as a separate command from the special symbol variation pattern command.

The first special symbol hold command and the second special symbol hold command are commands that notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the display time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation pattern), and the first special symbol hold number N or the second special symbol hold number M stored in the special symbol hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) described later, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, and the number of first special symbol hold numbers N or the second special symbol hold number M increases. The first and second special symbol hold commands are set in the first special symbol hold command setting process (step S1207 or S1209 of the first special symbol hold command setting process in Figure 19) or the second special symbol hold command setting process (step S1110) in the start-up prize-winning process shown in Figure 18, based on the information stored in the special symbol hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8), when the number of first special symbol hold commands N or the number of second special symbol hold commands M increases.

The special symbol shift command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the special symbol win/loss information, which indicates the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve area REA1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first special symbol reserve area REB1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see Figure 8), has shifted when the number of first special symbol reserve reserves N or M of the second special symbol reserve reserve decreases due to the start of a special symbol game (display of special symbols). The special symbol shift command is set in step S2008 of the special symbol data setting process shown in Figure 27, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is to begin, that is, that the game state is transitioning to the jackpot game state. It is set in step S2204 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29 (described later) when transitioning to the jackpot game state.

The opening start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is about to begin. It is set in step S2208 of the jackpot game control process (as shown in Figure 29 below) when the opening of the jackpot game begins. Note that the opening start command can be omitted because the audio lamp control device 5 can be notified of the jackpot game opening by the jackpot game start command.

The opening end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game has ended. It is set in step S2214 of the jackpot game control process (shown in Figure 30 below) when ending the opening of the jackpot game.

The "Open/Close Execution Mode Start Command" is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the open/close execution mode for a jackpot game is to be started. It is set in step S2216 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 30 (described later) when starting the open/close execution mode for a jackpot game.

The round game start command is a command used in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game to start each round game and to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating which round the game is currently in. This command is set in step S2217 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 30 (described later) when starting each round game. Alternatively, a separate command indicating the round number of the upcoming round game may be set at the start of each round game, and this command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command used in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the current round game is ending. It is set in step S2229 of the jackpot game control process (Figure 31, described later) when ending each round game.

The interval start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the interval between rounds of gameplay during the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. It is set in step S2233 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 31 (described later) when the interval starts.

The interval end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the interval between rounds of gameplay has ended during the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. It is set in step S2239 of the jackpot game control process (Figure 32, described later) when the interval ends.

The "Open/Close Execution Mode Termination Command" is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game is ending. It is set in step S2241 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 31 (described later) when the open/close execution mode is ending.

The ending start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is about to begin. It is set in step S2242 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 31 (described later) when the ending begins.

The ending completion command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game has ended. It is set in step S2248 of the jackpot game control process (as shown in Figure 32 below) when the ending is completed.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game has ended. It is set in step S2250 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29 (described later) when the jackpot game ends.

The game setting change command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game setting has been changed and that the changed game setting is correct. It is set in step S2408 of the game setting change process shown in Figure 35 (described later) when the game setting is changed.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control unit 4 to the audio lamp control unit 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, the main control unit 4 is equipped with an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means of supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing, described later, performed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 activates and executes the main timer interrupt processing described later each time a rising or falling edge of the clock signal occurs. The oscillator circuit and frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140 as needed, supplying the control-main operating clock for the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140. Alternatively, the clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140.

ROM 411 is a non-volatile memory unit that pre-stores control programs and parameter information. RAM 412 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing performed by the MPU 41. For example, RAM 412 is used for setting commands transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5, etc. Note that RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

Here, referring to Figure 8, the memory area used by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 of the gaming machine 10 for performing jackpot and regular symbol jackpot draws will be explained. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the draw counter storage area 412a, special symbol hold storage area 412b, and regular symbol hold storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform tasks such as setting the jackpot draw results and the display time for special symbol fluctuations, and setting the regular symbol jackpot draw results and the display time for regular symbol fluctuations.

The lottery counter storage area 412a stores the following lottery counters: a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine the miss type when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. The lottery counter storage area 412a also stores the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation display time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. Furthermore, the lottery counter storage area 412a stores the following lottery counters: a normal win random number counter C4, a normal win type random number counter C5, a normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2. The normal win random number counter C4 is used for the normal symbol win lottery, determining whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b of the second prize slot 315. The normal win type random number counter C5 is used to determine the normal symbol win type (short opening or long opening) when the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a normal win. The normal win random number initial value counter CIN2 is used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. The normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is used to determine the display time of the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36.

Furthermore, each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS2 is used as a loop counter, where the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short intervals, and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery results, the display time for special symbol variations, the jackpot type and the losing type, as well as the regular symbol win lottery results, the display time for regular symbol variations, and the regular symbol win type.

The special feature hold storage area 412b comprises a first special feature hold storage area REA, a second special feature hold storage area REB, and a special feature execution area AE. The first special feature hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a first special feature hold count storage area NAA. The second special feature hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a second special feature hold count storage area NAB.

When a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA. Also, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB. Furthermore, a separate lottery counter storage area 412a (such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a special symbol variation type counter CS1) may be provided for each of the first special symbol hold storage area REA and the second special symbol hold storage area REB.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery results for the jackpot draw for the special symbol game, which is executed based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 to the fourth hold storage area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA, and the first hold storage area REB1 to the fourth hold storage area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the display time (special symbol variation pattern) for the special symbols (decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341) in the special symbol game, either in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1, second reserve area REA2, third reserve area REA3, and fourth reserve area REA4, in that order of priority. The first special symbol reserve count memory area NAA stores the number of special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 as the first special symbol reserve count N.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the available areas of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB in the following order of priority: first reserve area REB1, second reserve area REB2, third reserve area REB3, and fourth reserve area REB4. The second special symbol reserve count memory area NAB stores the number of special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 as the second special symbol reserve count M.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 has a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved symbols in the first reserved symbol storage area REA1 to the fourth reserved symbol storage area REA4, and the first reserved symbol storage area REB1 to the fourth reserved symbol storage area REB4, respectively. This allows for the storage of up to four records each of special symbol win/loss information as entry history into the first and second prize entry slots 314 and 315.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, it is conceivable that both the first and second prize entry points 314 and 315 are provided with a maximum of eight retention areas. In this case as well, it is possible to retain up to eight special symbol win/loss information entries as prize history. The storage processing of the special symbol win/loss information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The special symbol execution area AE is a memory area used to move special symbol win/loss information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB when the display of a special symbol variation is started in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. Specifically, the special symbol win/loss information in the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the special symbol execution area AE, and if there is no special symbol win/loss information in the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB and the second special symbol hold count M stored in the second special symbol hold count storage area NAB is 0, the special symbol win/loss information in the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the second special symbol game takes precedence over the first special symbol game. In the high-frequency support modes, namely the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, the second special symbol game is primarily executed by shooting the game balls into the right-hand area of the game board 31, a technique known as "right-hand shooting."

Furthermore, in another embodiment, if the difference between the number of reserved special figures N stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the first special figure reserved storage area REA and the number of reserved special figures M stored in the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB of the second special figure reserved storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved area with the larger number will be prioritized and moved to the special figure execution area AE. Also, in another embodiment, the special figure success/failure information from the first reserved area REA1 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB will be moved alternately to the special figure execution area AE.

Then, at the start of each special symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as special symbol win/loss information in the special symbol execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserve area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the second reserve area REA2 shifts to the first reserve area REA1, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 shifts to the second reserve area REA2, and the special symbol win/loss information stored in the fourth reserve area REA4 shifts to the third reserve area REA3.

Similarly, if the first holding area REB1 of the second special feature holding storage area REB is moved to the special feature execution area AE, the special feature success/failure information stored in the second holding area REB2 shifts to the first holding area REB1, the special feature success/failure information stored in the third holding area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the special feature success/failure information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17 (described later) by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 637, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial jackpot random number counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial jackpot random number counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 are stored in the first to fourth prize slots REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 or the second special symbol reserve storage area REA2.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are set in two types according to the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table memory area of ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode (normal game state or time-saving game state) and the high probability mode (probability variation game state). Here, Figure 9(A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Figure 9(B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in Figures 9(A) and 9(B), multiple win/loss tables are provided for low-probability mode and high-probability mode, respectively, where the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery (jackpot probability) differs according to the game setting value. Both the low-probability mode and high-probability mode win/loss tables contain six win/loss tables, corresponding to six game setting values from 1 to 6. The probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, making it more advantageous for the player.

With game setting 1, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 821 (0 to 820) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 1, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 2, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 845 (0 to 844) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 2, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 3, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 3, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/75.4 (869/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 4, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 4, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 5, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 5, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 6, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately four times that of low probability mode, approximately 1/69.6 (941/65536).

Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is anything other than a random number that results in a jackpot, the jackpot lottery will result in a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/loss table and the high-probability mode win/loss table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot draw for the same game setting are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a jackpot are not common. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot do not have to be consecutive values; some or all of them may be discrete values.

Furthermore, while there are six low-probability mode win/loss tables and six high-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values, only one win/loss table is needed for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six. It is also conceivable to have multiple low-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to multiple game setting values, while having only one high-probability mode win/loss table. That is, it is conceivable to have multiple game setting values for the low-probability mode, and no tiered game setting values for the high-probability mode, resulting in a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to have a uniform jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and multiple game setting values for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 19, and resets to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315. In the game machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411 sets the corresponding value of the jackpot type counter C2 for each of the two types of jackpots: probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots.

Here, Figure 9(C) shows an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in Figure 9(C), if the type of special game is the first special game triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 (0-9), the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 5 (10-14), and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 (15-19). On the other hand, if the type of special game is the second special game triggered by a ball entering the second prize slot 315, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 (0-4), the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 (5-14), and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 (15-19). In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are both set to 75%, but the probability of a 16R jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. Specifically, in the jackpot game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode), the expected value of game balls obtained when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot is set higher compared to the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b).

Furthermore, in both the first and second special symbol games, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability-increasing jackpot, the game transitions to a probability-increasing game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the game machine 10, there is no upper limit set on the number of special symbol games that can be played in the probability-increasing game state, and the game machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop probability-increasing machine.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a regular jackpot, the game transitions to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state (time-saving game count). If the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol game counts, the game transitions to the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, after the execution of the upper limit of special symbol games. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100; it may be any other number.

Furthermore, the transition from the probability variation state to the normal state may not be limited to the execution of the maximum number of special symbol games, but may also occur, for example, when the state transition lottery (downgrade lottery) is won. In this case, it is conceivable that the transition (downgrade) from the probability variation state to the normal state will not occur until a predetermined number of special symbol games have been executed, and that this predetermined number will be guaranteed as the minimum number of special symbol games executed in the probability variation state. This prevents the number of special symbol games executed in the probability variation state from being significantly reduced.

In this embodiment, separate distribution tables are set for the first prize slot 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second prize slot 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game upon winning. The probability of winning a different type of jackpot differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315. However, it is also possible that the probability of winning a different type of jackpot is the same for both the first and second special symbol games. Furthermore, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability variation machine; it can also be configured as an ST machine including a V-ST machine, or a mixed type 1 and type 2 machine, etc.

Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "miss," based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special feature execution area AE.

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability-changing jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the variable prize entry point 316 is opened in a predetermined manner five times during the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability-changing jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game. Regarding the opening manner of the variable prize entry point 316 in each round game, for example, it is conceivable to open the variable prize entry point 316 once. Of course, it is also conceivable to open the variable prize entry point 316 multiple times in some or all of the round games.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a probability variation game state, which is a high-probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b. In this embodiment, the probability variation game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," or a "5R normal jackpot."

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R regular jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode with a low probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the results of a predetermined number of jackpot draws, such as 100 times, or it ends if the player is notified that the jackpot has been won before the predetermined number of draws has elapsed.

Furthermore, in special feature games, it is conceivable to conduct a lottery to determine whether the game state changes from a probability variation state to a time-saving game state or a normal game state. Note that if the lottery result in a jackpot is a loss, the game state will not transition from a probability variation state to a jackpot state or a time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the case where the game machine 10 has three types of jackpots—5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot—is used as an example for explanation. However, it is not limited to this, and other types of jackpots such as 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, and 16R normal jackpot are also conceivable.

Furthermore, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17 (described later) by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 or the second special symbol reserve storage area REA2 store the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time the game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result for the variable display shown on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in a jackpot is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area of the ROM 411 sets the corresponding value of the reach random number counter C3 for three types of misses: a front/back miss reach where the final stopping symbol stops one position before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs; a non-front/back miss reach where the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs; and a complete miss where no reach occurs.

Here, Figure 9(D) shows an example of a table of miss types. In the example shown in Figure 9(D), the random number values for a near miss (near or near miss) are 0 to 8, the random number values for a near miss (other than near miss) are 9 to 38, and the random number values for a complete miss are 39 to 238. Note that in special feature games that result in a 5R probability-changing jackpot, a 16R probability-changing jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, i.e., special feature games that transition to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines that a near miss has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, "reach" refers to a state in which, between the start of the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341 and the display of the symbols at their stop, the symbols are more likely to form a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot. For example, in this state, two of the three stop positions of the decorative symbols on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 are the same symbol, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the reach state of the symbol display unit 341, story-based presentation processing is performed, such as displaying videos of predetermined characters to suggest the level of expectation, or player-participation-type presentation processing is performed, where the player's actions on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the presentation. It is also possible that the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or displayed in a reduced or enlarged state during the execution of these presentation processes.

The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 determines the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time) which indicates the variation display time of the special symbols (decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, according to the result of the jackpot lottery. In this way, once the special symbol variation pattern type is determined, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (performance pattern) in the general special symbol game, such as the high-speed variation performance (basic performance, non-reach performance), the Maru-reach performance, the Super-reach performance, and the Special-reach performance, according to the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time). The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing shown in Figure 21 (described later) is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time of the main processing. The first to fourth retention areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol retention storage area REA1 or the second special symbol retention storage area REA2 store the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 at the time the game ball enters the first prize entry point 314 or the second prize entry point 315.

The MPU 41 then determines a special symbol variation pattern, indicating the display time of the special symbol variation, based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and a variation table (see Figures 10(A) to 10(C)) that is pre-set according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the special symbol variation pattern type by referring to the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(A)), the probability variation jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(B)), or the losing variation table (see Figure 10(C)) that are pre-stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. These variation tables may be provided separately for low probability mode and high probability mode. Furthermore, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for 5R probability variation jackpots and 16R probability variation jackpots, respectively.

Here, Figures 10(A), 10(B), and 10(C) show examples of variation tables. In the normal jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(A), the probability variation jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(B), and the miss variation table shown in Figure 10(C), the special feature variation patterns are pre-associated according to the value of the special feature variation type counter CS1. The MPU 41 then refers to the normal jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(A) if the jackpot lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the probability variation jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(B) if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot" or a "16R probability variation jackpot," and the miss variation table shown in Figure 10(C) if the lottery result is a "miss," thereby determining the type of special feature variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 10(A) and 10(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. When special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the special game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the normal reach performance pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a normal reach performance. When special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 60s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the special game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the super reach performance pattern. The Super Reach演出 pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a Super Reach performance. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the Special Reach performance pattern, which has the longest variation display time of 90s, as the variation type (performance pattern), and the special game performance is executed in accordance with the Special Reach performance pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The Special Reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a Special Reach performance.

As shown in Figure 10(C), in the losing variation table, the correspondence between the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the special symbol variation pattern is defined according to the type of stop display of the decorative symbols when a loss occurs (front/back loss reach, reach other than front/back loss, complete loss), which is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, if the stop display type when a loss occurs is a front/back loss reach or a reach other than front/back loss, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, if the stop display type when a loss occurs is a complete loss, one of the special symbol variation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. When special symbol variation pattern "04" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a no-reach performance pattern (7-second non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the special symbol game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the 7-second non-reach performance pattern. Furthermore, if special symbol variation pattern "05" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a variation type (performance pattern type) of a no-reach performance pattern (10-second non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds, and the special symbol game performance is executed in accordance with the 10-second non-reach performance pattern in the symbol display unit 341, etc.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, when a special symbol variation pattern "04" results in a loss, the variation display for the losing pattern is executed, where the variation display of decorative symbols stops with a combination of losing symbols, without any accompanying pre-announcement effects such as the display of characters or messages. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, when a special symbol variation pattern "05" results in a loss, the variation display for the losing pattern is executed, where the variation display of decorative symbols stops with a combination of losing symbols, accompanied by pre-announcement effects such as the display of characters or messages. Also, when a loss occurs during the variation display for special symbol variation pattern "05," a player-participation operation effect that reflects the player's operation of the operation button 20 may be executed as a pre-announcement effect.

Furthermore, the types of special pattern variations are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 10(A), 10(B), and 10(C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach sequences are provided for the normal reach sequence sequence corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "01," each with different characters, storylines, etc. One of these normal reach sequences is selected and executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, multiple types of super reach sequences with different characters and stories are available as super reach sequences that are executed in the super reach sequence sequence corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "02". One of these super reach sequences is selected and executed. Super reach sequences are reach sequences with a longer variation time than normal reach sequences, and are executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than that of normal reach sequences, but lower than that of special reach sequences.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach sequences are available, each with different characters and storylines, which are executed in the special reach sequence sequence corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "03". One of these special reach sequences is selected and executed. A special reach sequence is a reach sequence with a longer variation time than a normal reach sequence, and can develop from, for example, a normal reach sequence or a super reach sequence. A special reach sequence is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot is higher than that of a normal reach sequence or a special reach sequence.

Furthermore, the performance patterns corresponding to the special symbol variation patterns may include player-participation performances that reflect the player's actions on the operation button 20. These include, for example, single-shot performances where a single press is reflected in the performance, rapid-fire performances where rapid-fire button presses are reflected in the performance, and long-press performances where long-press operations on the operation button 20 are reflected in the performance.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the display time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (the display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341), it inputs a special symbol variation pattern command indicating that special symbol variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03", with an "A" added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Also, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03", with a "B" added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which have a "C" added before the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Also, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," which have a "D" added before the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "05" to indicate that it is a miss. In other words, the special symbol variation pattern command includes not only the special symbol variation pattern (the time of special symbol gameplay), which is the display time of the special symbols' variation, but also information that identifies the result of the jackpot lottery. The audio lamp control device 5, based on the special symbol variation pattern command, can determine not only the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol game time), which is the variation display time of the special symbols, but also the result of the jackpot lottery. Based on the variation display time of the special symbols (special symbol game time) and the result of the jackpot lottery, it determines the variation type (performance pattern) displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and details such as the stop display combination of the decorative symbols. Then, based on the determined details such as the variation type (performance pattern), the audio lamp control device 5 displays the decorative symbols in variation and stop displays on the symbol display unit 341, executes image performances in accordance with the variation display of the decorative symbols, executes audio performances via the speaker 26 in accordance with the variation display of the decorative symbols, and executes illumination performances (lamp performances) via the illumination unit 27.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process to determine the display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcontroller, the MPU 41 can reliably perform the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, since the details of the variation patterns of the decorative symbols actually displayed in the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation patterns.

The fluctuation tables shown in Figures 10(A) to 10(C) are used commonly across various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and probability-changing game state). However, individual fluctuation tables may be set for each game state, and separate fluctuation tables may also be set for high-frequency support mode (time-saving game state and probability-changing game state) and low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, when individual fluctuation tables are set for each game state or support mode, the average value of the fluctuation display time will be set longer in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) than in the time-saving game state and probability-changing game state (high-frequency support mode). Also, when different fluctuation tables are set for the time-saving game state and the probability-changing game state, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be set longer in the time-saving game state than in the probability-changing game state, or vice versa.

Here, Figure 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the general diagram hold storage area 412c of the memory area of the main control device 4 shown in Figure 8. As shown in Figure 11, the general diagram hold storage area 412c includes the first general diagram hold area SE1, the second general diagram hold area SE2, the third general diagram hold area SE3, the fourth general diagram hold area SE4, the general diagram variable hold number storage area SNA, and the general diagram execution area SAE.

The first to fourth reserve areas of the regular diagram (SE1 to SE4) are memory areas that store the regular winning random number counter C4, the regular winning type random number counter C5, and the regular winning variation type counter CS2, which are acquired as regular winning/losing information used in the regular winning lottery when a game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R.

The Normal Diagram Fluctuation Reserved Count Storage Area SNA stores the number of Normal Diagram First Reserved Area SE1 to Normal Diagram Fourth Reserved Area SE4, where Normal Diagram win/loss information is stored. In other words, the Normal Diagram Fluctuation Reserved Count Storage Area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of reserved rights to execute Normal Diagram games.

The regular symbol execution area SAE is a memory area used to move the regular symbol win/loss information from the regular symbol first reserve area SE1 when the regular symbol variation display starts in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36. Then, at the start of one regular symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a regular symbol win lottery based on the numerical information (values of the regular win random number counter C4, the regular win type random number counter C5, and the regular symbol variation type counter CS2) stored as regular symbol win/loss information in the regular symbol execution area SAE, using the regular symbol win/loss table (see Figures 12(A) and 12(B)) and the regular symbol win type distribution table (see Figures 12(C) and 12(D)) described below, and determines the regular symbol variation display time for the regular symbols using the regular symbol variation table (not shown). At this time, if the validity information of the general diagram stored in the first general diagram holding area SE1 is moved to the general diagram execution area SAE, the validity information of the general diagram stored in the second general diagram holding area SE2 is shifted to the first general diagram holding area SE1, the validity information of the general diagram stored in the third general diagram holding area SE3 is shifted to the second general diagram holding area SE2, and the validity information of the general diagram stored in the fourth general diagram holding area SE4 is shifted to the third general diagram holding area SE3.

The normal win random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17 (described later) by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win random number counter C4 at the time a game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal ball hold storage area 412c, specifically in the normal ball hold storage area SE1 to the normal ball hold storage area SE4. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, a normal win lottery is conducted based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the normal ball hold storage area 412c to determine whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b for a predetermined period of time.

Here, Figures 12(A) and 12(B) show an example of a normal draw win/loss table. In this embodiment, two types of normal draw win/loss tables are set: the low-frequency support mode normal draw win/loss table shown in Figure 12(A) and the high-frequency support mode normal draw win/loss table shown in Figure 12(B). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the normal draw win probability differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, with the high-frequency support mode having a higher normal draw win probability than the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 12(A) is the table used for the normal symbol win lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 12(A), in the low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 is set to 0, and a value of 1 to 299 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 is set to 0 to 1 to 299 to 300. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal symbol win is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is set low.

The high-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 12(B) is the table used for the normal symbol win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which includes the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 12(B), in the high-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, unlike the low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a loss, while a value of 1 to 299 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a normal symbol win. In other words, in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal symbol win is set to 299/300, which is higher than in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is also increased.

Furthermore, the probability of a normal win in low-frequency support mode and the probability of a normal win in high-frequency support mode are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 12(A) and 12(B), and can be changed as appropriate.

The normal win type random number counter C5 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17 (described later) by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win type random number counter C5 at the time a game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal win type first reserve area SE1 to the normal win type fourth reserve area SE4 of the normal win type reserve storage area 412c. Furthermore, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C4 stored in the normal win type first reserve area SE1 to the normal win type fourth reserve area SE4 indicates a normal win, the type of normal win (short-open normal win and long-open normal win), i.e., the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b, is set based on the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 stored in the normal win type first reserve area SE1 to the normal win type fourth reserve area SE4.

Here, Figures 12(C) and 12(D) show an example of a per-roll type distribution table. In this embodiment, two types of per-roll type distribution tables are set: the low-frequency support mode per-roll type distribution table shown in Figure 12(C) and the high-frequency support mode per-roll type distribution table shown in Figure 12(D). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the distribution probabilities for per-roll types (per short-open per-roll and per long-open per-roll) differ between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

In this case, when a short-opening normal win occurs, the electric mechanism 315b is opened for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), allowing the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315 for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). However, in this short-opening normal win game, because the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is short, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315, and in most cases, the game ball does not enter the second prize slot 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening regular win, the electric mechanism 315b is open for a longer period (e.g., 6 seconds) than in a short-opening regular win game. This allows the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315 for a longer period (e.g., 6 seconds) than in a short-opening regular win game. In this long-opening regular win game, the longer opening time of the electric mechanism 315b makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315, and it is possible to reserve the right to execute the second special win game up to the maximum number (e.g., 4).

The low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 12(C) is the table used for the normal win lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 12(C), in the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 0 and 99, it is set to a short-open normal win, and when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 100 and 199, it is set to a long-open normal win. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the distribution rate between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short-opening normal wins and long-opening normal wins in normal gameplay mode (low-frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution ratio for long-opening normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins is zero) or nearly zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins is one or two).

The high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 12(D) is a table used for normal win抽選 in the probability variation game state and time reduction game state, which are high-frequency support modes. As shown in Figure 12(D), in the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, a value of 0 for the normal win type random number counter C5 is set to a short-open normal win, and a value of 1 to 199 for the normal win type random number counter C5 is set to a long-open normal win. In other words, in the probability variation game state and time reduction game state (high-frequency support mode), it is set to be easier to be allocated to a long-open normal win than a short-open normal win. Of course, the distribution rate between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins in the probability variation game state and time reduction game state (high-frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in Figure 12(D) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is also possible to set the distribution rate of short-open normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for short-open normal wins is zero).

Furthermore, the opening of the electric mechanism 315b is not limited to once per regular win, but may occur multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of the electric mechanism 315b during a single regular win may be of one type or multiple types.

The regular ball variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 99, for example. This is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process shown in Figure 21 (described later) is executed, and repeatedly in step S1414 within the remaining time of the main process. The values of the regular ball variation type counter CS2 at the time a game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R are stored in the regular ball hold storage area 412c, specifically in the regular ball hold storage area SE1 to the regular ball hold storage area SE4. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the regular ball variation display time is determined by referring to the regular ball variation display table (not shown) based on the value of the regular ball variation type counter CS2 stored in the regular ball hold storage area 412c.

The general-purpose variable display table (not shown) includes, for example, a high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table, which is referenced when the system is in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table, which is referenced when the system is in low-frequency support mode. In both the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display tables, multiple general-purpose variable display times are set, for example, corresponding to the value of the general-purpose variable type counter CS2. Furthermore, typically, the high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table is set to have a shorter average general-purpose variable display time than the low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table. For example, some of the variable display times set in the high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table may be longer than some of the variable display times set in the low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table, and all of the variable display times set in the high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table may be longer than all of the variable display times set in the low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table.

Furthermore, a common display table for the general diagram fluctuations may be set for both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. The display time for general diagram fluctuations set in at least one of the general diagram fluctuation display tables (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) may be limited to one type. Additionally, the display time for general diagram fluctuations may be set according to the number of reserved general diagram fluctuations X. For example, the display time may be shortened as the number of reserved general diagram fluctuations X increases, and the display time may be lengthened as the number of reserved general diagram fluctuations X decreases.

Here, Figure 13 is a block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, payout performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the following as game information: "Number of balls paid out," "Number of balls paid out from general prize slots," "Number of balls paid out from first prize slots," "Number of balls paid out from second prize slots," "Number of balls paid out from variable prize slots," "Setting value," "Base information," "Continuous prize ratio information," "Prize ratio information," "Cumulative number of jackpot draws," "Unit jackpot draws," "Number of jackpots," and "Number of consecutive misses." Of this game information, "Game setting value," "Base information," "Continuous prize ratio information," "Prize ratio information," and "Unit jackpot draws" correspond to game information (performance information) related to payout performance.

The "Number of Out Balls" is the cumulative number of game balls launched into the game board 31 during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "Number of Out Balls" is stored as the count of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a during the sensor detection process in step S1001 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17 (described later).

The "General Prize Ball Payout Count" is the cumulative number of game balls dispensed for winning in the general prize slot 313 during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "General Prize Ball Payout Count" is updated when, during normal gameplay, the ball entry sensor 313a detects a win in the general prize slot 313. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing shown in Figure 21 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to dispense the number of prize balls corresponding to the win in the general prize slot 313. The value is updated by adding the number of balls dispensed for the current win.

The "Number of Balls Dispensed from the First Prize Port" is the cumulative number of game balls dispensed for entries into the first prize port 314 during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "Number of Balls Dispensed from the First Prize Port" is updated when, during normal gameplay, the ball entry sensor 314a detects an entry into the first prize port 314. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing shown in Figure 21 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to dispense the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the first prize port 314. The value of this value is updated by adding the number of balls dispensed for the current entry.

The "Number of Balls Payout from the Second Prize Port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out for entries into the second prize port 315 during the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "Number of Balls Payout from the Second Prize Port" is updated when, during the time-saving game state, an entry into the second prize port 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing shown in Figure 21 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the second prize port 315. The value is updated by adding the number of balls paid out for this entry.

The "Variable Prize Outlet Payout Count" is the cumulative value of game balls dispensed for entries into the variable prize outlet 316 during a jackpot game. This "Variable Prize Outlet Payout Count" is updated when, during a jackpot game, the ball entry sensor 316a detects an entry into the variable prize outlet 316. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing shown in Figure 21 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to dispense the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the variable prize outlet 316. The value is updated by adding the number of balls dispensed for the current entry.

The "Game Setting Value" is used to select the low-probability mode win/failure table (see Figure 9(A)) and the high-probability mode win/failure table (see Figure 9(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/failure determination). In other words, the "Game Setting Value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as described later, six setting values (six different low-probability mode win/failure tables (see Figure 9(A)) and high-probability mode win/failure tables (see Figure 9(B))) with different jackpot probabilities are prepared. The "Game Setting Value" is updated in the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35, described later.

"Base information" refers to information about the "base," which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "base" is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the "general prize slot" and the "first prize slot" to the "number of balls out" in the normal game state. Expressed as a formula, "base" = 100 × ("number of balls paid out from the general prize slot" + "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot") / "number of balls out." "Base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2 from two instances prior. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the 60,000-ball base B2 from two instances prior are updated each time the number of balls out reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 36 below (steps S2505 and S2506). Specifically, when the most recent number of balls dispensed reaches 60,000, the "base" is saved as the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and when the number of balls dispensed before that reached 60,000, the "base" is saved as the previous 60,000-ball base B2, both as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Furthermore, until the counter value of the number of balls dispensed reaches 60,000, the calculation is performed using the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, when the calculation is performed using the current base BL until the counter value of the number of balls dispensed reaches 60,000, the "base information" stores "number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot," "number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot," and "number of balls dispensed" separately from the previously explained "number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot," "number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot," and "number of balls dispensed," specifically for base calculation.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL," "previous 60,000 ball base B1," and "the previous 60,000 ball base B2," and the history of the last two 60,000 ball bases is retained. However, it is also possible to retain the history of three or more past 60,000 ball bases. Furthermore, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present.

The "Continuous Prize Ratio Information" is information regarding the "Continuous Prize Ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable prize slot to the total number of balls paid out from all prize slots that pay out prize balls (general prize slot 313, first prize slot 314, second prize slot 315, and variable prize slot 316). The "Continuous Prize Ratio" can be expressed by the formula: "Continuous Prize Ratio" = 100 × "Number of Balls Paid from Variable Prize Slot" / "Total Number of Balls Paid". The "Continuous Prize Ratio Information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 36, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "Continuous Prize Ratio Information" is stored as the cumulative continuous prize ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present. Furthermore, "consecutive bonus payout ratio information" may also refer to the consecutive bonus payout ratio over a certain period (for example, over a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), over a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1000 times) are performed during normal gameplay, or over a period until the number of balls dispensed reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, "consecutive bonus payout ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive bonus payout ratio and the consecutive bonus payout ratio over a certain period.

The "prize payout ratio information" is information regarding the "prize payout ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out by the second prize payout slot and the variable prize payout slot to the total number of balls paid out by all prize payout slots (general prize payout slot 313, first prize payout slot 314, second prize payout slot 315, and variable prize payout slot 316) that pay out prize balls. The "prize payout ratio" can be expressed by the formula: "prize payout ratio" = 100 × ("number of balls paid out by second prize payout slot" + "number of balls paid out by variable prize payout slot") / "total number of balls paid out". The "prize payout ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 36 below. In this embodiment, the "prize payout ratio information" is stored as the cumulative prize payout ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present. Furthermore, "prize payout ratio information" may also refer to the prize payout ratio over a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), for the period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1000 times) are performed during normal gameplay, or for the period until the number of balls dispensed reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, "continuous prize payout ratio information" may include both the cumulative prize payout ratio and the prize payout ratio over a certain period.

The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is the number of times a jackpot draw has been performed in normal gameplay mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the start of business at the gaming hall until the present. In other words, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also the cumulative number of times the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 has been displayed in a variable state, triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314 in normal gameplay mode. The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is increased by 1 each time the variable display of the first or second special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in step S2106 of the special symbol variable start processing shown in Figure 28 below. Furthermore, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit jackpot draw count" is the number of times a jackpot draw was received (the number of times the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display unit of the main display unit 36 was executed) triggered by a certain number of negative ball wins in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) when balls entered the first prize slot 314. In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls", and the difference in balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot" and the "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot" from the "number of balls out". In other words, the "unit jackpot draw count" is the number of times the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display unit 362 was performed on average per 1000 yen when a game hall provides 250 balls for every 1000 yen spent (the number of times a jackpot draw was received). Note that the "unit jackpot draw count" may also be the number of times a jackpot draw was received per a certain number of "number of balls out" in the normal game state. The "Unit Jackpot Draw Count" is updated in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 36, described later. In this embodiment, the "Unit Jackpot Draw Count" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present. The "Unit Jackpot Draw Count" may also be for a specific period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1000 times) are performed during normal gameplay, or for a period until the number of balls dispensed reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative unit jackpot draw count and the unit jackpot draw count over a specific period may be stored as game information.

The "Number of Jackpots" is the number of times a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery conducted from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. The "Number of Jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time a jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process, for example, as shown in Figure 29 below. Furthermore, the "Number of Jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "Consecutive Losses Count" is the number of consecutive losses in the jackpot lottery during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). It is reset to 0 if the lottery result is a jackpot. The "Consecutive Losses Count" is incremented by 1 in step S2106 of the special symbol variation start processing shown in Figure 28 (described later) when the variation display of the first or second special symbol is started in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. If the result of the win/fail judgment based on the low probability mode win/fail table in step S2103 is a loss, the count is reset to 0 if the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot. In this embodiment, the "Consecutive Losses Count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "Consecutive Losses Count" may be configured not to be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 14, the performance information display device 4A displays the "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display unit 45, a setting value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, Figure 15 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in Figure 15, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10 and is positioned in a visible location when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see Figure 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. While it is preferable to provide the performance display monitor 43 on the main control device 4, it may also be provided on a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or on other components of the gaming machine other than the main control unit 331. Furthermore, it is also conceivable to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display unit 362 and/or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

The 7-segment displays 431-434 can display the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F". When displaying the letter "B," a dot is illuminated to distinguish it from the number "8," displaying "8." Similarly, when displaying the letter "D," a dot is illuminated to distinguish it from the number "0," displaying "0." Furthermore, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," a dot may be illuminated to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet letter.

The performance display monitor 43 consists of four 7-segment displays 431-434. The two leftmost 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments that display the "base type" using an abbreviation, while the two rightmost 7-segment displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the two leftmost 7-segment displays 431 and 432 (identification segments) will display the abbreviation "BL" for the current base BL as "8." and "L," respectively, while the two rightmost 7-segment displays 433 and 434 (ratio segments) will display the base value "31" as "3" and "1." In other words, the four 7-segment displays 431-434 will display "8.", "L," "3," and "1" from left to right.

The performance display switch 44 switches the power on and off of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431-434) all at once when pressed, and is located in an easily accessible position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see Figure 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the power is turned on to the performance display switch 44, power is supplied to the four 7-segment displays 431-434, enabling the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. Conversely, when the power is turned off to the performance display switch 44, power to the four 7-segment displays 431-434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in locations other than the main control unit 4.

Here, Figure 15(A) shows an example of the display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in Figure 15(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, and therefore the base information is not displayed. As shown in Figures 15(B) to 15(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as long as the performance display switch 44 is not turned off, the "base information" loops in the following order: current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → the time before last 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in Figure 15(B), the current base BL is shown to be 28%, in the example shown in Figure 15(C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is shown to be 34%, and in the example shown in Figure 15(D), the time before last 60,000 ball base B2 is shown to be 32%. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 15(A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431-434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

Furthermore, the programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as the programs that calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2, and the programs that sequentially display the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 at regular intervals, are stored in ROM 47, which is provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if there is sufficient capacity in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41, the programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in ROM 411. Alternatively, the programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous bonus ratio information" or "bonus ratio information," instead of, or in addition to, the "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display; it may also be composed of other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 14, the setting value display unit 45 displays the aforementioned game setting values for selecting the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) and the high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured as a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display; it may also be configured as other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display, and the game setting values may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off with a press operation, and allows the setting value to be changed by a rotation operation when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has the function of a contact-type switch that is switched on and off with a press operation, and the function of a rotary switch where the contacts are switched by a rotation operation (rotation by a predetermined angle). Here, Figure 16 shows an example of the display on the setting value display unit 45 of the main control device 4.

As shown in Figure 16(A), when the setting value display unit 45 is off and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is powered on, and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is lit and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the power to the 7-segment display is cut off, and the setting value display unit 45 turns off.

As shown in Figure 16(B), when the setting value display unit 45 is lit, a rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 changes. In the illustrated example, rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right increases the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left decreases the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 changes due to rotation, the changed number is saved as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed and the power to the 7-segment display is turned off while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the number that was displayed immediately before the power was turned off is determined as the setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 can perform a jackpot lottery based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) or a high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method for changing the setting value is not limited to rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45. For example, the setting value may be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see Figure 1); the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 may be changed by repeatedly pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see Figure 1) and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45; or a key may be inserted into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4, etc., and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 may be changed by rotating the key and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A, which includes a setting value display unit 45, is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is located on the rear side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is located on the rear side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select between a state in which it is visible from the outside of the game machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state in which it is not visible. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 is not visible unless the game board 31 is opened. Therefore, the setting value is not revealed to the player by the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. Furthermore, the setting value display unit 45 is turned off when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while it is lit. Therefore, by maintaining the setting value display unit 45 in an off state during the gaming hall's operating hours, even if the game board 31 is opened due to a ball jam or other issue in the gaming machine 10, making the setting value display unit 45 visible, the setting value is not revealed to the player by the setting value display unit 45.

On the other hand, the setting value display unit 45, when in its off state, is illuminated when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, and the number corresponding to the game setting value is hidden. Therefore, outside of the gaming hall's operating hours, by opening the game board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 is illuminated, allowing the game setting value to be confirmed based on the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45. Furthermore, the game setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting value during operating hours while allowing for easy changes to the setting value outside of operating hours.

In this embodiment, the performance information display device 4A is provided on the main control device 4. However, the performance information display device 4A may be provided separately from the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or separately from the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 7, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and executes the display of changing patterns and effects in the pattern display unit 341 based on the control signals input from the main control unit 331.

[Voice Lamp Control Device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output interface 52, among other things. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller. The MPU 51 also has a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built into it.

ROM 511 is a non-volatile memory unit that pre-stores control programs and parameter information. ROM 511 also stores information such as audio and lamp flashing patterns used in special game effects and jackpot game effects. RAM 512 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by MPU 51. Note that RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 by executing processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 via the MPU 51, thereby inputting commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the special symbol game effects and jackpot game effects described later, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output interface 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output interface 52. Commands such as special pattern variation commands, first special pattern hold commands, second special pattern hold commands, and special pattern shift commands are input from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5. The audio lamp control device 5 also outputs display variation pattern commands, etc., to the display control device 6. In other embodiments, a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives commands from the main control device 4 and inputs those commands to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable. Furthermore, in other embodiments, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 comprises a single control device that possesses the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable.

Furthermore, the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27 are connected to the input/output interface 52. The sound lamp control device 5, via the MPU 51, controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the flashing pattern of the lighting unit 27 based on commands input from the main control device 4. An operation switch 20a is also connected to the input/output interface 52. This allows the MPU 51 to detect when an operation is performed on the operation button 20 and, based on the detection result, control the image game effects executed on the pattern display unit 341, the sound output effects from the speaker 26, and the lamp effects based on the flashing pattern of the lighting unit 27.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined calculations based on commands input from the main control unit 4, such as general pattern variation commands, electric mechanism opening commands, electric mechanism closing commands, special pattern variation commands, first special pattern hold commands, second special pattern hold commands, special pattern shift commands, jackpot game start commands, opening start commands, opening end commands, opening/closing execution mode start commands, round game start commands, round game end commands, interval start commands, interval end commands, opening/closing execution mode end commands, ending start commands, ending end commands, jackpot game end commands, and game setting value change commands.

Specifically, when a special symbol variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command, transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to that special symbol variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S3107 in the command determination process in Figure 47), and starts displaying the pattern variation in the pattern display unit 341. At this time, if the special symbol variation pattern command indicates a miss, the pattern display unit 341 displays a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes pattern variation display and performance display by controlling the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on display variation pattern commands and the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output interface 62, among other components. The input/output interface 62 is connected to the audio lamp control device 5 and the graphic display unit 341. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller, and it incorporates a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits, such as a timer circuit for timing and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 and other components. Furthermore, some or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The ROM 611 stores control programs, as well as multiple types of images used for the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341, including decorative symbols, variation symbols, preview images, reach images, jackpot images, and loss images. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include both still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variation display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used, the display timing, and the display time for the variation symbols. The display control device 6 then uses the MPU 61 to display images on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing performed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output interface 72, among other components. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller. The MPU 71 also has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built into it.

ROM 711 is a non-volatile memory unit that pre-stores control programs and parameter information. RAM 712 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing performed by MPU 71. Note that RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

The input/output interface 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball dispensing device 100 are connected to the input/output interface 72.

As described above, the dispensing device 132 dispenses game balls from the tank 131 towards the upper tray 23. It comprises a drive unit 132a, such as a motor, which drives a ball-stopping member that switches between dispensing and not dispensing game balls, and a dispensing sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be dispensed. The dispensing control device 7 dispenses a desired number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results from the dispensing sensor 132b. The dispensing control device 7 is also provided with a state reset switch 73. The state reset switch 73 is operated, for example, to resolve a ball jam (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 132.

The ball dispensing device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball dispensing device 100 can dispense a number of gaming balls corresponding to a predetermined amount, within the range of the amount stored on a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball dispensing device 100, in response to the operation of a ball dispensing operation device (not shown) located on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, when a control signal to dispense a predetermined number of gaming balls is input from the ball dispensing device 100 to the dispensing control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the dispensing device 132, and the predetermined number of gaming balls are dispensed. The recording medium is not limited to a card; for example, it may be a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Furthermore, the ball dispensing device 100 may also be capable of dispensing a predetermined number of gaming balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launching mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 to supply game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 then detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 according to that amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is equipped with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation performed by the player. A voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. Based on this, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that the greater the rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch force of the game balls from the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is equipped with a touch sensor 21a for detecting when a player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of game balls. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to stop the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism 32 if the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or if the ball stop switch 21b is being operated by the player. This prevents gameplay in situations where, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotated position and the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Additionally, the player can stop the launch of game balls by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any time using their thumb while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, and a +5V voltage for logic used in the control unit. The power control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control unit 4, sound lamp control unit 5, display control unit 6, dispensing control unit 7, firing control unit 8, etc.

The power control device 9 is equipped with a power switch 90 for turning the gaming machine 10 on and off, and a RAM erase switch 91 which is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

Furthermore, the power control device 9 is equipped with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means, which are charged by the power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Also, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is interrupted, the control device can be operated for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been interrupted, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. For example, if the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it determines that a power outage has occurred when that DC voltage falls below a preset 22V. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt their ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
Next, the processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described with reference to Figures 17 to 41. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is activated periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed in the event of a power outage. In this embodiment, the startup process, NMI interrupt process, etc. will not be explained, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In addition, in the startup process, it is checked whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and the execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4]
Here, Figure 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for the main timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4. The main timer interrupt processing is performed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be explained below with reference to Figure 17.

<Step S1001>
As shown in Figure 17, in step S1001, the MPU 41 performs sensor detection processing to determine the detection status of sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, it determines the detection status of ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, ball exit sensor 318a, etc. At this time, if the MPU 41 detects that a game ball has entered any of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, or 317Ra, it stores that information as prize entry detection information in the RAM 412. Also, if a ball is detected to have been exited by the ball exit sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of balls that have been exited stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of balls that have been exited in the game information storage area 412d.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the initial value counter for jackpot random numbers CIN1 and the initial value counter for regular random numbers CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the initial value counter for jackpot random numbers CIN1 and the initial value counter for regular random numbers CIN2, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal jackpot random number counter C4, and the normal jackpot type random number counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal jackpot random number counter C4, and the normal jackpot type random number counter C5, and clears the counter values to 0 if they reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Subsequently, the MPU 41 performs a starting prize-winning process in response to a prize being awarded in the first prize-winning slot 314 or the second prize-winning slot 315 (step S1004), and then performs a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the starting prize-winning process will be described later with reference to Figure 18.

The launch control process enables the launch of game balls under the condition that the player is touching the launch handle 22, as detected by the touch sensor 21a, and the ball stop switch 21b, which stops the launch, is not operated. The launch control process also disables the launch of game balls if the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or if the ball stop switch 21b is operated. The MPU 41 issues a launch command to the launch control device 8 when the launch of game balls is enabled.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, when a game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 performs a through-gate process to update the information stored in the RAM 412's regular data hold storage area 412c, and then terminates the main timer interrupt process. Details of the through-gate process will be described later with reference to Figure 20.

[Startup and Prize Entry Processing]
Here, Figure 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. The start-up prize-winning process will be explained below with reference to Figure 18.

<Step S1101>
As shown in Figure 18, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there was a win in the first prize slot 314. If the MPU 41 determines that there was a win in the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), it proceeds to step S1102. If it determines that there was no win in the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: No), it proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special feature number N stored in the first special feature number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved features (4 in this embodiment). If the first special feature number N is the maximum number of reserved features (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special feature number N is not the maximum number of reserved features (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 performs a process to add 1 to the first special feature number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described later, and stores these counter values in the RAM 412 in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol win/loss information for the first special symbol hold acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of the jackpot win/loss determination in step S2102 or S2103 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 28, and executes a first special symbol hold command setting process to set the first special symbol hold command in RAM 412 based on the result of this check. Details of the first special symbol hold command setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 19.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a win in the second prize slot 315. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been a win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1106: Yes), it proceeds to step S1107. If it determines that there has been no win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1106: No), it terminates the start prize process.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols M stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved second special symbols M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start prize entry process. On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 performs an update process in which 1 is added to the number of reserved second special symbols M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described later, and stores these counter values in the RAM 412 in the first empty reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol win/loss information for the second special symbol hold acquired in step S1109 before it becomes the subject of the jackpot win/loss determination in step S2102 or S2103 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 28, and executes a second special symbol hold command setting process to set the second special symbol hold command in RAM 412 based on the result of this check. Here, the second special symbol hold command setting process is the same as the first special symbol hold command setting process, which will be described later with reference to Figure 19, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that the second special symbol hold command setting process can be performed by replacing "first special symbol hold command" with "second special symbol hold command" and "number of first special symbol holds N" with "number of second special symbol holds M" in the first special symbol hold command setting process of Figure 19.

[First Special Feature Hold Command Setting Process]
Here, Figure 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the first special symbol hold command, which is executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 18. The first special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first special symbol hold command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or miss), the special symbol variation display time, and the number of first special symbols held N. The first special symbol hold command setting process will be explained below with reference to Figure 19.

<Step S1201>
As shown in Figure 19, the MPU 41 reads the number of first special symbols N from the first special symbol retention storage area NAA of the first special symbol retention storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special symbol retention from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in high probability mode. If it is in high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process moves to step S1203. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in high probability mode (step S1202: No), i.e., in low probability mode, the process moves to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in high probability mode based on the probability variation game state flag. The probability variation game state flag is a flag that indicates whether or not it is in a probability variation game state, i.e., whether or not it is in high probability mode. In the game state transition process described later, this probability variation game state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of Figure 34 when the game state transitions from a probability variation jackpot game state to a probability variation game state, and is set to OFF in step S2309 of Figure 33 when the game state transitions from a probability variation game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode success/failure table (see Figure 9(B)) which is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 described later, and performs a success/failure determination based on the high probability mode success/failure table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode success/failure table (see Figure 9(A)) which is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 described later, and performs a success/failure determination based on the low probability mode success/failure table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table saved in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 (described later) according to the game setting value. However, in step S1203 or S1204, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 (described later) may be read, and the win/loss determination may be performed by selecting the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that game setting value one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), i.e., it is a miss, the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, if the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 18, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read out. Note that the reserve area in which the special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 18 among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 can be determined by the value of the number of reserves N stored in the first special symbol reserve count storage area NAA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reserve count N into the first special symbol reserve command. In this way, the first special symbol reserve command includes the first special symbol reserve count N read in step S1201. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first special symbol reserve command can recognize which of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 the first special symbol win/loss information corresponds to by referring to the reserve count N included in the first special symbol reserve command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery was a loss, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reserve number N into the first special symbol reserve command (step S1209).

Furthermore, the first special feature hold command, set in step S1207 or S1209 of the first special feature hold command setting process, is stored in RAM 412 and, after being transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process shown in Figure 21 (described later) executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, is erased. Moreover, the content of the first special feature hold command described here is merely an example; if the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp similar content to the first special feature hold command, it is not limited to what is described here. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special feature hold command may be included in other commands.

[Through-gate processing]
Here, Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the through-gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. In the through-gate processing, when a game ball passes through the through-gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular ball hold storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through-gate processing will be explained below with reference to Figure 20.

<Step S1301>
As shown in Figure 20, in the through-gate processing, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the left through-gate 317L (step S1301). Whether or not a game ball has passed through the through-gate 317L is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection processing of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. If the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has passed through the left through-gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), it proceeds to step S1303, and if it determines that a game ball has not passed through the left through-gate 317L (step S1301: No), it proceeds to step S1302.

<Step S1302>
If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: No), it determines whether the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302). Whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 317R is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 during the sensor detection process in step S1001 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), it proceeds to step S1303. If it determines that the game ball has not passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: No), it terminates the through gate processing.

<Step S1303>
If the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), or if it determines that a game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), it determines whether the number of variable normal figure reserved balls X stored in the variable normal figure reserved ball storage area SNA set in the normal figure reserved ball storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment) (step S1303). If the number of variable normal figure reserved balls X is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1303: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing, and if the number of variable normal figure reserved balls X is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1303: No), it proceeds to step S1304.

<Steps S1304 and S1305>
If the number of reserved normal figure variations X is not the maximum number of reserved numbers (step S1303: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved normal figure variations X (step S1304), obtains the counter values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described later, stores the counter values in the first empty reserved area SE1 to the fourth reserved area SE4 of the normal figure reserved storage area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1305), and terminates the through gate processing.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
Next, with reference to Figure 21, the main processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described. In the main processing, the main control processing for the progress of regular games, special games, and jackpot games is performed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 is performed as a periodic process with a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S1413 and S1414 is performed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 until the next cycle.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Figure 21, in step S1401, the MPU 41 performs external output processing to send output data, such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17 or in the previous main processing, to control devices such as the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140. For example, if commands such as the regular figure variation pattern command, electric mechanism open command, electric mechanism close command, special figure variation pattern command, first special figure hold command, second special figure hold command, special figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, opening/closing execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, opening/closing execution mode end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game end command, and game setting value change command are set in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sends those commands to the audio lamp control device 5. Also, in the prize ball command setting processing of step S1403 described later in the main processing, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has occurred in the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, the variable prize slot 316, etc., based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a win has occurred, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command in the RAM 412 indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to that win. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the general prize slot 313 or the first prize slot 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out in the general prize slot or the first prize slot, which is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to a value that includes the number of balls paid out due to the current win. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a ball enters the second prize pocket 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls dispensed from the second prize pocket stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls dispensed from the current prize. In addition, in the jackpot game state, if a ball enters the variable prize pocket 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls dispensed from the variable prize pocket stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls dispensed from the current prize.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a regular game control process to control the progress of the regular game. Details of the regular game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 22 to 24.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a regular winning game control process that controls the progress of the regular winning game, which is executed when the result of the regular winning lottery is a win. Details of the regular winning game control process will be described later with reference to Figure 25.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol game control process to control the progress of the special symbol game. Details of the special symbol game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 26 to 28, but in the special symbol game control process, when the display of the special symbol variation starts, the special symbol variation pattern command necessary for displaying the symbol variation in the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412 that indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process that controls the progress of the jackpot game, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 29 to 32.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process that controls the transition between various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state, probability variation jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state). Details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to Figures 33 and 34.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. This game setting value change process controls the display or hiding of the setting value, or the modification of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, in response to operations on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the game setting value change process will be described later with reference to Figure 35.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it be limited to the startup process that is initiated when the power is turned on, or between the end of the startup process and the start of game ball launching. This would prevent the game setting values from being changed during the operating hours of the gaming hall, as the game setting values cannot be changed after the player has started playing until the next power-on.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 performs a specific performance information update process among the game information. In this embodiment, the base information and other information are updated as specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to Figures 36 and 37.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes the display control process for the performance display monitor 43. This display control process for the performance display monitor 43 executes a process to display the base information updated in the specific performance information update process in step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to Figures 38 to 41.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), it proceeds to step S1401 and executes each of the processes from S1401 onwards as described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), it repeatedly executes steps S1413 and S1414 until the timing for executing the next main process arrives, that is, for the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process arrives, until it determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes).

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the initial value counter for jackpot random numbers CIN1 and the initial value counter for regular random numbers CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the initial value counter for jackpot random numbers CIN1 and the initial value counter for regular random numbers CIN2, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2. Specifically, it adds 1 to the counter values of the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2, and if the counter values reach their maximum values, it clears them to 0. After updating the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2, the MPU 41 returns to step S1412.

[General Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular symbol game control process executed in step S1404 of the main process in Figure 21. In the regular symbol game control process, processes such as controlling the display of the regular symbols changing and stopping in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 are executed. The regular symbol game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 22.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Figure 22, in the regular symbol game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the regular symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the regular symbols are currently being displayed (regular symbol game is in progress), is on (step S1501). The regular symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the display of the regular symbols variation (regular symbol game) starts in the regular symbol variation start process shown in Figure 24, which will be described later, and is set to off in step S1510 of the regular symbol game control process when the regular symbols stop (regular symbol game ends).

If the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal symbol game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal symbol game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if a normal symbol game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is open (a normal symbol winning game is being played), is on (step S1502). The "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in the normal symbol winning game control process shown in Figure 25, described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric mechanism 315b is closed.

If the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is ON (Step S1502: Yes), i.e., if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is OFF (Step S1502: No), i.e., if a regular winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, if a regular winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "jackpot game in progress" flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29 below, the "jackpot game in progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game flag is on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the regular game control process if a jackpot game is currently in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the regular game is not started while a jackpot game is in progress.

Of course, the regular game may be started while the jackpot game is in progress. In this case, according to the support mode type before the jackpot game starts (whether it is a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode), that is, according to the game state before transitioning to the jackpot game state, a win/loss determination for the regular win lottery is performed based on the win/loss information (values of the regular win random number counter C4, the regular win type random number counter C5, and the regular win variation type counter CS2) that has been moved from the regular win first reserve area SE1 of the regular win reserve storage area 412c to the regular win execution area SAE. In other words, if the game state before a jackpot is executed is a high-frequency support mode (either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state), the normal symbol jackpot draw (normal symbol win or loss), the normal symbol jackpot type (long-open normal symbol win or short-open normal symbol win), and the normal symbol variation display time are set based on the normal symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 12(B)), normal symbol jackpot type table (see Figure 12(D)), and normal symbol variation table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before a jackpot is executed is a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the normal symbol jackpot draw (normal symbol win or loss), the normal symbol jackpot type (long-open normal symbol win or short-open normal symbol win), and the normal symbol variation display time are set based on the normal symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 12(A)), normal symbol jackpot type table (see Figure 12(C)), and normal symbol variation table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1503: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of regular figure variable reserves X stored in the regular figure variable reserves storage area SNA set in the regular figure reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the number of regular figure variable reserves X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the regular figure game control process, and if the number of regular figure variable reserves X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process proceeds to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved regular diagrams X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 performs regular diagram data setting processing for the regular diagram success/failure information stored in the regular diagram reservation storage area 412c (step S1505), and proceeds to step S1506. Details of the regular diagram data setting processing will be described later with reference to Figure 23.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a regular symbol variation start process to cause the regular symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the variation of the regular symbols based on the information stored in the regular symbol hold storage area 412c, and then terminates the regular symbol game control process. Details of the regular symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 24.

<Step S1507>
If the "Normal Game Display in Progress" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if a normal game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on (step S1507). In the big win game control process shown in Figure 29 below, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a big win game ends.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is ON (Step S1507: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. Conversely, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is OFF (Step S1507: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1507: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variation display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol that is being displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end of normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), that is, if it is not time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol game control process.

<Steps S1509-S1511>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is on (Step S1501: Yes) and the "Big Win Game" flag is on (Step S1507: Yes), that is, if a big win game is started while a normal symbol game is in progress, or if the normal symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbols has elapsed (Step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the display of the fluctuating normal symbols (end of the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the display of the normal symbols on the symbols corresponding to the result of the normal symbol win lottery for the normal symbol game (Step S1509), and sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols are fluctuating (the normal symbol game is in progress), to off (Step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols have stopped displaying, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, to on (Step S1511), and ends the normal symbol game control process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal diagram winning game control process shown in Figure 25 (described later) to determine whether or not it is time to start the normal diagram winning game (to open the electric mechanism 315b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the changing normal symbols stops (ends the normal symbol game) not only when the normal symbol display time has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game begins during the execution of a normal symbol game. In other words, if a jackpot game begins, the normal symbol stops (ends the normal symbol game).

[General drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general data setting process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of Figure 22. In the general data setting process, the contents of the general data hold storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 in Figure 11 are updated. The general data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 23.

<Steps S1601-S1603>
As shown in Figure 23, in the general diagram data setting process, first the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved general diagrams X stored in the general diagram variation reserve number storage area SNA (step S1601), and moves the general diagram success/failure information from the first general diagram reserve area SE1 to the general diagram execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general diagram success/failure information stored in the second general diagram reserve area SE2 to the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the general diagram success/failure information from the second general diagram reserve area SE2 is moved to the first general diagram reserve area SE1, the general diagram success/failure information from the third general diagram reserve area SE3 is moved to the second general diagram reserve area SE2, and the general diagram success/failure information from the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 is moved to the third general diagram reserve area SE3.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
Here, Figure 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Figure 22. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result in the normal symbol win lottery. The normal symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 24.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Figure 24, in the normal variation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), is on (step S1701). The high-frequency support mode flag is set to on in step S2313 of Figure 34 when a jackpot game ends in the game state transition process described later, and is set to off in step S2307 of Figure 33 when the game state transitions from a probability variation game state or time-saving game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state, or in step S2326 of Figure 34 when the game state transitions from a time-saving game state to a normal game state.

If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S1701: Yes), i.e., the game is in a high-frequency support mode (either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1702. If the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S1701: No), i.e., the game is in a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
If the game is in a high-frequency support mode, either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 12(B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 12(D)) to determine whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to the values of a normal win.

On the other hand, if the game is in a normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), a normal win/loss determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 12(C)).

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
If the MPU 41 has determined whether a regular win is possible (step S1702 or S1703), it determines whether the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win where the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time (step S1704). If the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open regular win flag to ON to indicate that the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win (step S1705), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the win/fail determination is not a long-open regular win (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the win/failure determination is not a long-opening regular-circle win (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win in which the second prize slot 315 is briefly opened (step S1706). If the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-circle win flag to ON to indicate that the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win (step S1707), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the win/failure determination is not a short-opening regular-circle win (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the win/failure determination is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1705), if the short-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1707), or if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation pattern setting process to set the normal symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 in normal symbol gameplay, by referring to the normal symbol variation display table (not shown). As mentioned above, the normal symbol variation display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal symbol variation table that is referenced when the high-frequency support mode is active, and a low-frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table that is referenced when the low-frequency support mode is active. Therefore, in this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the normal symbol variation pattern is set based on the normal symbol variation display table corresponding to the support mode type. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table is set to have a shorter average display time for regular symbol variations than the low-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode, the time during which regular symbol gameplay is performed is shorter compared to low-frequency support mode.

Then, in addition to the regular diagram variation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 sets a regular diagram variation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/fail judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the regular diagram winning lottery) and the type of support mode (whether it is a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode) (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The regular symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the regular symbol variation pattern command, causes the symbol display unit 341 and other components to execute effects corresponding to the regular symbol game, such as effects indicating that the regular symbol game is being played or effects indicating the result of the regular symbol winning lottery.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Variation Pattern Command" only needs to be a command that notifies the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 of the normal diagram variation pattern; the result of the normal diagram winning lottery and the type of support mode do not necessarily need to be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 as a normal diagram variation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal diagram winning lottery can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Normal Diagram Winning Lottery Result Command" when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Support Mode Type Command" that can identify the type of support mode after transitioning to high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts displaying the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, which indicates that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variation state, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being played (step S1711), and ends the normal symbol variation start process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 22 to determine whether the normal symbol game is currently running (normal symbol fluctuation display is active).

[General Winning Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal win game control process executed in step S1405 of the main process in Figure 21. In the normal win game control process, when the result of the normal win lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allow state, which permits the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315, and a restrict state, which restricts it, by controlling the opening and closing of the electric mechanism 315b. The normal win game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 25.

<Step S1801>
As shown in Figure 25, in the normal symbol win game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game. The normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol stops being displayed in the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 22.

If the normal symbol variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
If the normal diagram change stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when a normal diagram win game can be started, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29 below, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forcibly terminated by the start of a jackpot game, the normal winning game will not start even if the result of the normal winning lottery for that normal winning game is a normal winning game. That is, in this embodiment, a normal winning game will not start while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, a new normal winning game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the flag indicating a jackpot game is off (step S1802: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S1803). The flag indicating a long-opening regular win is a flag that indicates the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win, and is set to on in step S1705 of the regular win variation start process in Figure 24 when the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular win lottery for a completed regular win game is a long-opening regular win. If the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1804, and if the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long-opening regular-ball win flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-ball win lottery for the completed regular-ball game is a long-opening regular-ball win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in the long-opening regular-ball win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize pocket 315), as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referenced in step S1815 of the regular-ball win game control process to determine the return timing of the electric mechanism 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular-ball win flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is not a long-opening regular symbol win, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the short-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S1806). The short-opening regular symbol win flag is a flag that indicates the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win, and is set to on in step S1707 of the regular symbol variation start process in Figure 24 when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a short-opening regular symbol win. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1807. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short-opening regular-number win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-number win lottery for the completed regular-number game is a short-opening regular-number win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in the short-opening regular-number win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize slot 315), as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-number win flag to OFF (step S1808) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809-S1811>
If the result of the regular prize draw is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long-open regular prize flag or short-open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric mechanism 315b (step S1809). This opens the second prize slot 315, allowing game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism open command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1810), sets an electric mechanism open flag to ON to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric mechanism release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the sound lamp control device 5 can then initiate an effect indicating, for example, that the electric mechanism 315b is released to the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the electric mechanism release command.

<Step S1812>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a win, the process of opening the electric mechanism 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or if both the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are set to off (the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss) (steps S1803 and S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended), to off (step S1812), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S1813>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which is set to turn on when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal symbol winning game is in progress. If the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the regular winning game control process (step S1814), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process.

<Steps S1816-S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to reset the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 resets the electric mechanism 315b (step S1816). This closes the second prize opening 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism closing command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric mechanism open flag to off, indicating that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1818), and terminates the normal winning game control process.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to terminate the animation indicating that the electric mechanism is open, for example, in the symbol display unit 341, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

[Special Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main process in Figure 21. In the special symbol game control process, the contents of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is controlled, for example, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 is controlled. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to Figure 26.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Figure 26, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on. In the big win game control process shown in Figure 29, described later, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a big win game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the special feature game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S1901: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the special feature game is not started while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, the special feature game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1901: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Special Symbol Variation Display in Progress" flag, which indicates that the first or second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (the first or second special symbol game is in progress), is on (step S1902). The "Special Symbol Variation Display in Progress" flag is set to on in step S2107 when the variation display of the first or second special symbol starts in the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 28, described later, and is set to off in step S1909 when the first or second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the said special symbol game control process.

If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S1902: Yes), meaning the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is off (step S1902: No), meaning the special symbol is not being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is not in progress) when a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol is changing is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special symbol is not changing when the jackpot game is not in progress (the special symbol game is not in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special symbol reserve count N stored in the first special symbol reserve count storage area NAA of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b and the second special symbol reserve count M stored in the second special symbol reserve count storage area NAB are 0 (step S1903).

The MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process if both the number of reserved special symbols N and the number of reserved special symbols M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), that is, if there is no reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game. On the other hand, if either the number of reserved special symbols N or the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, if there is a reservation of at least one of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, if there is a reserve for the right to execute the first special symbol game and a reserve for the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process related to the special symbol win/loss information data (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (step S1904), and proceeds to step S1905. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 27.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to begin the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 28.

<Step S1906>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol is changing is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing (the special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol change display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set in the special symbol change pattern setting process in step S2104 of the special symbol change start process in Figure 28 described later, has elapsed since the start of the changing display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S1906). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the special symbol that is changing and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, if the variation display time has not elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: No), that is, if it is not time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process.

<Steps S1907-S1909>
When the display time for the first or second special symbol has elapsed since the start of the display of the first or second special symbol's variation (step S1906: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop the special symbol display and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1907). The MPU 41 then sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the first or second special symbol has stopped (step S1908), and sets the special symbol variation display in progress flag to OFF, indicating that the first or second special symbol is currently displaying variation (the special symbol game is in progress) (step S1909), and ends the special symbol game control process.

[Special drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of Figure 26. In the special feature data setting process, the contents of the special feature hold storage area 412b, which is set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, are updated. The special feature data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 27.

<Step S2001>
As shown in Figure 27, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0. If the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, there are no reserved special symbols for the second special symbol game and there are reserved special symbols for the first special symbol game (see step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in Figure 26), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, there are reserved special symbols for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2005. In other words, by determining whether the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0, the MPU 41 prioritizes starting the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game. However, the first special symbol game may be started with priority over the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order (retention order) of the game balls entering the first or second prize slot 314 or 315, so that either the first or second special symbol game is executed. Furthermore, without assigning a priority to the start of the first and second special symbol games, they may be executed independently of each other, or they may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol variation).

<Step S2002-S2004>
If the second special symbol hold number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol hold number N stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NAA of the first special symbol hold storage area REA (step S2002), and moves the special symbol success/failure information from the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol success/failure information from the second hold area REA2 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol win/loss information from the second holding area REA2 of the first special symbol holding storage area REA is moved to the first holding area REA1, the special symbol win/loss information from the third holding area REA3 is moved to the second holding area REA2, and the special symbol win/loss information from the fourth holding area REA4 is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Step S2005-S2007>
If the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved special symbols M stored in the number of reserved special symbols memory area NAB of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB (step S2005), and moves the special symbol success/failure information from the first reserve area REB1 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol success/failure information from the second reserve area REB2 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special symbol win/loss information from the second reserve area REB2 is moved to the first reserve area REB1, the special symbol win/loss information from the third reserve area REB3 is moved to the second reserve area REB2, and the special symbol win/loss information from the fourth reserve area REB4 is moved to the third reserve area REB3. When the processing in step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special symbol win/loss information for the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 to the fourth special symbol hold storage area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA, or the first special symbol hold storage area REB1 to the fourth special symbol hold storage area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB, has shifted, and terminates the special symbol data setting process. This special symbol shift command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold displayed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol shift command.

[Special Feature Fluctuation Start Processing]
Here, Figure 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of Figure 26. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started when the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 starts to change, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 28.

<Step S2101>
As shown in Figure 28, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is a probability variation game state, which is a high probability mode. Whether or not it is a high probability mode is determined by whether or not the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a probability variation game state, is set to ON. The probability variation game state flag is set to ON in the game state transition process described later, in step S2317 in Figure 34 when the game state transitions from a probability variation jackpot game state to a probability variation game state, and is set to OFF in step S2309 in Figure 33 when the game state transitions from a probability variation game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state.

If the game state is a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (Step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2102. If the game state is not a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (Step S2101: No), i.e., if the game state is a low-probability mode (a time-saving game state or a normal game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2103.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the game state is a high-probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 9(B)) which is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 below, and performs a win/fail judgment based on the high-probability mode win/fail table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the game state is not a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (step S2101: No), that is, if the game state is a low-probability mode (a time-saving game state or a normal game state), the MPU 41 reads the low-probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 9(A)) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 below, and performs a win/fail judgment based on that low-probability mode win/fail table (step S2103).

In steps S2102 and S2103, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table saved in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35, as described later. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 may be read, and the win/loss determination may be performed by selecting the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that game setting value one by one.

<Step S2104>
If a determination of success or failure is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 sets the display time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36 in the special symbol game as a special symbol variation pattern (step S2104).

Furthermore, the display time for the variation of the first or second special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(A)) if the result of the win/failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot; based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(B)) if the result of the win/failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability variation jackpot; and based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the loss variation table (see Figure 10(C)) if the result of the win/failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a loss.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is the result of the win/fail determination in step S2102 or S2103, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S2104, and then proceeds to step S2106. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "A01" to "A03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" added to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "B01" to "B03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "B" added to indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "C01" to "C03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "C" added to indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "D01" to "D08," which is a special symbol variation pattern with a "D" added to indicate that it is a miss, as the special symbol variation pattern command in RAM 412. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (pre- and post-miss reach, reach other than pre- and post-miss, complete miss) in the special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by initiating the display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, and then proceeds to step S2107.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 starts displaying the special symbols, it adds 1 to the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Additionally, if the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S2103 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d. If the win/loss result is a jackpot, the "number of consecutive losses" is reset to 0.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag to ON, indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the special symbol game is in progress), and proceeds to step S2108. The "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is referenced in step S1902 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 26 to determine whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the special symbol game is in progress) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the special symbol variation has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), to off, and proceeds to step S2109. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 26 when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 is displayed as stopped, and is referenced in step S2202 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 29, described later, to determine whether or not it is the right timing to start a jackpot game.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), is on. The time-saving game state flag is set to on in the game state transition process described later, when a normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 in Figure 34, and is set to off when the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to the jackpot game state or the normal game state in step S2310 in Figure 33 or step S2325 in Figure 34.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), i.e., the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2110. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2109: Yes), i.e., the time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol variation start process.

<Step S2110>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state (step S2110), and terminates the special symbol variation start process. The time-saving count counter is set in step S2320 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 34 below, when the game state transitions from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the time-saving counter is set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a time-saving game state. However, the time-saving counter may also be set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a probability variation game state. That is, by setting the maximum number of special symbol plays performed in the probability variation game state to a finite number, the game machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST (Special Time) machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can be configured to transition to the normal game state without transitioning from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state when the normal jackpot game, which is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a normal jackpot, ends. In this case, the time-saving game counter is not set after the normal jackpot game ends.

[Big Win Game Control Processing]
Here, Figures 29 to 32 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 of the main process in Figure 21. The jackpot game control process executes processes that control the progress of the jackpot game, such as controlling the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable prize entry opening 316. The jackpot game control process will be explained below with reference to Figures 29 to 32.

<Step S2201>
As shown in Figure 29, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on. The "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 of the big win game control process when a big win game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 of the big win game control process when a big win game is ended.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211. On the other hand, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is OFF (step S2201: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S2201: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that a special symbol has stopped being displayed, is on. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 26 when a special symbol is stopped being displayed, and is set to off in step S2108 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 28 when the variation display of the special symbol begins. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a jackpot game by determining whether a special symbol game that was started when a jackpot game was not currently being played has finished.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), meaning the special symbol has stopped and the jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2203. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), meaning the special symbol is still in a variation state and the jackpot game cannot be started, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state (while the special symbol game is being executed). However, it is also possible to make it possible to start (execute) the jackpot game while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state (while the special symbol game is being executed). For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable state, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state. Specifically, as described above, by making it possible to change to simultaneous variation of the first and second special symbols, the second special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed, and the first special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the second special symbol game is being executed. Furthermore, the jackpot game for the first special symbol game and the jackpot game for the second special symbol game may be executed simultaneously. Alternatively, if the conditions for starting the other jackpot game are met while one of the jackpot games is running, the other jackpot game may be started after the first jackpot game has finished.

<Step S2203>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol was stopped and displayed is a jackpot. Whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol was stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined, for example, based on the special symbol win/loss information for the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 41.

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, where the special symbol is displayed, is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), it proceeds to step S2204. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, where the special symbol is displayed, is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), i.e., the jackpot lottery result is a loss, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2204>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 to start the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game or normal jackpot game) (step S2204), and proceeds to step S2205. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game performance according to the type of jackpot game based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to ON, indicating the start of a jackpot game, and proceeds to step S2206. The jackpot game start flag is referenced in step S2301 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 33, described later, when determining whether to transition the game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 41 sets the "In-Bonus Game" flag to ON, indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, and proceeds to step S2207. The "In-Bonus Game" flag is referenced in step S2201 of the jackpot game control process, as well as in step S1503 of the regular game control process in Figure 22 and step S1901 of the special game control process in Figure 26, in order to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 41 sets a round counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the open/close execution mode, and then proceeds to step S2208. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round counter to "5" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round counter to "16" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S2209. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time for the opening, and proceeds to step S2210. The opening time counter is referenced in step S2213 of Figure 30 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening" flag to ON, indicating that the opening is in progress, and terminates the jackpot game control process. The "Opening" flag is referenced in step S2211 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S2211>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the opening is in progress is on (step S2211).

If the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), i.e., the opening process is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2212 in Figure 30. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), i.e., the opening process is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2222.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), i.e., if the opening is in progress, as shown in Figure 30, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the opening (step S2212), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2213). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to finish the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2214. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2213: No), i.e., it is not time to end the opening, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 sets an opening end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game has ended (step S2214). The opening end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the opening effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening in Progress" flag, which indicates that the opening is in progress, to off (step S2215), and proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets an open/close execution mode start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that an open/close execution mode in which multiple rounds of gameplay (5 or 16 rounds) are to be started, and then proceeds to step S2217. The open/close execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the open/close execution mode effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the open/close execution mode start command.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that a round game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S2218. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start round game effects corresponding to each round game, including displaying the number of rounds on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game start command.

In this embodiment, while each round game features are executed individually, the round game features may also consist of a single series of features executed in the open/close execution mode, displaying the number of rounds in each round game. In this case, an interval feature may not be performed between round games, or an interval feature displaying the number of rounds in the next round game may be performed.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 41 deducts 1 from the round counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, it opens the variable prize entry opening 316 by operating the opening/closing door 319 (step S2219), and proceeds to step S2220.

<Steps S2220 and S2221>
In step S2220, the MPU 41 sets a round game flag to ON to indicate that a round game is in progress, and further sets a round game time counter to indicate the remaining time for the round game (step S2221), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S2224 of Figure 31 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to terminate the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 to its original position and close the variable prize entry opening 316) due to the elapsed time.

<Step S2222>
Returning to Figure 29, if the Opening flag is off (step S2211: No), i.e., the opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Round Game flag, which indicates that a round game is in progress, is set to on (step S2222). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether a round game is in progress.

If the round game flag is ON (step S2222: Yes), i.e., if a round game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2223 in Figure 31. On the other hand, if the round game flag is OFF (step S2222: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2226.

<Steps S2223 and S2224>
If the Round Game in Progress flag is ON (Step S2222: Yes), that is, if a round game is in progress, as shown in Figure 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the round game time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the round game. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (Step S2224). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed time (by closing the variable prize slot by returning the opening/closing door 319).

If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed prescribed time (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the elapsed prescribed time (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2225.

<Step S2225>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the round game due to the elapsed time (the variable prize slot is closed by returning the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize slot 316 (step S2225). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize slot 316 is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 when a game ball is detected entering the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17.

If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2226. If no game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S2225: No), the jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ball count counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize slot 316 during that round of play (step S2226). The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the ball count counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S2227), that is, whether it is time to end the round of play (close the variable prize slot by returning the opening/closing door 319) due to the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable prize slot 316.

If the value of the ball count counter after addition has reached 10 (step S2227: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable prize slot 316 (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the ball count counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S2227: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable prize slot 316 (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2228>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), or if the value of the ball entry counter reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable prize entry opening by returning the opening/closing door 319 to its original position (step S2228), and proceeds to step S2229. That is, if it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed time or the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable prize entry opening 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable prize entry opening 316 and ends the round game.

<Steps S2229-S2231>
In step S2229, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game has ended. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize entry slot 316 during the round game (step S2230), sets the round game flag, which indicates that the round game is currently running, to off (step S2231), and proceeds to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
In step S2232, the MPU 41 determines whether the round counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode, is 0 (step S2232), that is, whether it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode (there are still rounds to be played).

If the round counter of MPU 41 is 0 (step S2232: Yes), i.e., it is time to terminate the opening/closing execution mode, MPU 41 proceeds to step S2241. On the other hand, if the round counter of MPU 41 is not 0 (step S2232: No), i.e., there are unexecuted rounds of gameplay, MPU 41 proceeds to step S2233.

<Step S2233>
If the round counter is not zero (step S2232: No), that is, if there are unplayed rounds, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 to start the interval between rounds (step S2233), and proceeds to step S2234. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the interval effect on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval start command.

In this embodiment, an interval animation is performed during the interval between rounds of gameplay. However, the interval animation may be omitted, and during the interval, the round game animation for the previously played round may be continued, or the round game animation for the next round may be performed.

<Steps S2234 and S2235>
In step S2234, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, indicating that an interval between rounds of gameplay is currently being performed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter (step S2235) that indicates the remaining time in the interval, and terminates the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referenced in step S2238 of Figure 32 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start a round of gameplay).

<Step S2236>
Returning to Figure 29, if the Round Game in Progress flag is off (step S2222: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Interval in Progress flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is in progress, is on (step S2236). The Interval in Progress flag is set to on in step S2234 of Figure 31 in the jackpot game control process when an interval begins, and is set to off in step S2240 of Figure 32 in the jackpot game control process when an interval ends.

If the interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), i.e., the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2237 in Figure 32. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S2236: No), i.e., the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2245.

<Steps S2237 and S2238>
If the interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), that is, if an interval between rounds is being performed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the interval, as shown in Figure 32 (step S2237). The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2238), that is, whether it is time to end the interval (start round play).

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2239. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2238: No), i.e., it is not time to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2239 and S2240>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the interval has ended. The interval end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the interval effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag, which indicates that the interval between round games is being executed, to off (step S2240), and proceeds to step S2217. By proceeding to step S2217 in Figure 30, the processes of steps S2217 to S2221 related to the start of a round game are executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2241>
Returning to Figure 31, if the round counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ending (step S2241), and proceeds to step S2242. The opening/closing execution mode termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening/closing execution mode termination command.

<Step S2242>
In step S2242, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S2243. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the ending effect on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2243 and S2244>
In step S2243, the MPU 41 sets an ending flag to ON, indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter that indicates the remaining time for the ending (step S2244), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S2247 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 32 to determine whether it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S2245>
Returning to Figure 29, if the Interval flag is off (step S2236: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being performed, it is determined whether the Ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being performed, is on (step S2245).

If the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), i.e., the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2246 in Figure 32. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), i.e., the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2250.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
If the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, as shown in Figure 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the ending (step S2246). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2247). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2248. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2247: No), i.e., it is not time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2248 and S2249>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is ending. The ending end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the ending effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to off (step S2249), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2250>
Returning to Figure 29, if the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, if it is not during the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game has ended (step S2250), and proceeds to step S2251. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the jackpot game effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S2251 and S2252>
In step S2251, the jackpot game end flag is set to ON, indicating that the jackpot game has ended. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S2312 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 34, described later, to determine whether or not to transition from the jackpot game state to the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "In Progress Jackpot Game" flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played, to off (step S2252), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition process]
Here, Figures 33 and 34 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Figure 21. The game state transition process controls the transition between various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state, probability variation jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state). The game state transition process will be explained below with reference to Figures 33 and 34.

<Step S2301>
As shown in Figure 33, in step S2301, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates the start of a jackpot game, is on. In the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29, the jackpot game start flag is set to on in step S2205 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), i.e., it is time to start a jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2302. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is OFF (step S2301: No), i.e., it is not time to start a jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2312 in Figure 34.

<Steps S2302 and S2303>
If the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is to be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S2302) and determines whether the jackpot game to be started is a probability variation jackpot game (step S2303). Whether the jackpot game to be started is a probability variation jackpot game is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the special symbol execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412.

If the MPU 41 decides to start a bonus round (Step S2303: Yes), it proceeds to step S2304. Conversely, if it decides not to start a bonus round (Step S2303: No), i.e., if it decides to start a regular bonus round, it proceeds to step S2305.

<Step S2304>
When starting a probability variation jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation jackpot game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in a probability variation jackpot game state where a probability variation jackpot game is being executed (step S2304), and proceeds to step S2305. The probability variation jackpot game state flag is referenced in step S2315 of Figure 34 of the game state transition process to determine whether to transition the game state to a probability variation game state or a normal game state when ending a jackpot game.

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is on. The normal game state flag is set to on in step S2324 of Figure 34 of the game state transition process when transitioning from a time-saving game state to a normal game state, and is set to off in step S2306 of the game state transition process when transitioning from a normal game state to a jackpot game state (probability-changing jackpot game state or normal jackpot game state).

If the normal game state flag is on (step S2305: Yes), i.e., the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S2306) and terminates the game state transition process. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), i.e., the game is not in the normal game state but in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, if it is not in the normal game state but in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that it is in high-frequency support mode, to off (step S2307), and proceeds to step S2308.

<Steps S2308 and S2309>
In step S2308, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation game state, is on. The probability variation game state flag is set to on in step S2317 of Figure 34 when transitioning from a probability variation jackpot game state to a probability variation game state during the game state transition process, and is set to off in step S2309 when transitioning from a probability variation game state to a jackpot game state (probability variation jackpot game state or normal jackpot game state).

If the probability variation game state flag is on (step S2308: Yes), i.e., the game is in a probability variation state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state flag to off (step S2309) and terminates the game state transition process. On the other hand, if the probability variation game state flag is off (step S2308: No), i.e., the game is neither in a normal game state nor a probability variation state, but in a time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2310.

<Steps S2310 and S2311>
If the probability variation game state flag is off (step S2308: No), that is, if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the time-saving game state, to off (step S2310). Then, the MPU 41 clears the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played in the time-saving game state (step S2311), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S2312>
If the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), that is, if it is not time to start a jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game end flag, which indicates the end of the jackpot game, is on, as shown in Figure 34 (step S2312). The jackpot game end flag is set to on in step S2251 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 29 when the jackpot game is ending.

If the jackpot game termination flag is ON (step S2312: Yes), i.e., the jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2313. On the other hand, if the jackpot game termination flag is OFF (step S2312: No), i.e., it is not time to terminate the jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2322.

<Steps S2313 and S2314>
If the jackpot game termination flag is on (step S2312: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag to on, indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode (step S2313), and sets the jackpot game termination flag to off, indicating that the jackpot game is ending (step S2314), and proceeds to step S2315.

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variation jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation jackpot game state where a probability variation jackpot game is being executed, is turned on. The probability variation jackpot game state flag is set to turn on in step S2304 of Figure 33 when the game state transition process transitions from a probability variation game state, normal game state, or time-saving game state to a probability variation jackpot game state, and is set to turn off in step S2318 when the game transitions from a probability variation jackpot game state to a probability variation game state.

If the probability variation jackpot game state flag is ON (step S2315: Yes), i.e., the game is in the probability variation jackpot game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2316. On the other hand, if the probability variation jackpot game state flag is OFF (step S2315: No), i.e., the game is not in the probability variation jackpot game state but in the normal jackpot game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2319.

<Step S2316>
If the probability variation jackpot game state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), that is, if the game is in the probability variation jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a probability variation game state command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the game is in the probability variation game state (step S2316), and proceeds to step S2317. The probability variation game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the probability variation game state in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the probability variation game state command.

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in a probability variation game state, and proceeds to step S2318. The probability variation game state flag is referenced in step S2308 of Figure 33 in the game state transition process to identify the game state when a jackpot game is started.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation jackpot game state, to off, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S2319>
If the probability variation jackpot game state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, if the game is in a normal jackpot game state rather than a probability variation jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in a time-saving game state (step S2319), and proceeds to step S2320. The time-saving game state command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the time-saving game state in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the time-saving game state command.

<Steps S2320 and S2321>
In step S2320, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving counter that indicates the remaining number of special symbol plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving counter to the upper limit of the number of special symbol plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state (100 times in this embodiment). The time-saving counter is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state in step S2110 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 28, and is referenced in step S2323 of the game state transition process to determine whether or not to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state after a predetermined number of special symbol games have been performed.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, to ON (step S2321), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S2322>
If the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), that is, if it is not time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that it is in a time-saving game state, is on (step S2322).

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), i.e., the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2323. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2322: No), i.e., the time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S2323>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state, is 0 (step S2323). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game will transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state after a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played.

If the value of the time-saving game counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, if the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state after executing the specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2324. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving game counter is not 0 (step S2323: No), that is, if the game does not transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S2324-S2326>
If the value of the time-saving game count counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, if the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state after executing a specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the normal game state (step S2324). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state (step S2325), and sets the high-frequency support mode flag to OFF, indicating that the game is in high-frequency support mode (step S2326), and terminates the game state transition process.

[Game setting value change process]
Here, Figure 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game setting value change process executed in step S1409 of the main process in Figure 21. In the game setting value change process, processing is executed to control the display or hiding of the setting value, or the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, in response to operations on the setting value change operation unit 46. The setting value change process will be explained below with reference to Figure 35.

<Step S2401>
As shown in Figure 35, in step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Game Setting Value Display" flag, which indicates that the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, is on. The "Game Setting Value Display" flag is set to on in step S2405, described later in the game setting value change process, when the power to the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on, causing the game setting value to be displayed on the setting value display unit 45. It is set to off in step S2412, described later in the game setting value change process, when the power to the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off, causing the game setting value to be hidden from the setting value display unit 45.

If the "Displaying Game Setting Value" flag is on (step S2401: Yes), i.e., if the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2406. On the other hand, if the "Displaying Game Setting Value" flag is off (step S2401: No), i.e., if the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2402.

<Step S2402>
If the flag indicating that the game setting value is being displayed is off (step S2401: No), that is, if the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 determines whether the power to the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S2402), that is, whether an operation to turn on the power to the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46.

If the power to the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), that is, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is operated to turn on the power to the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2403. On the other hand, if the power to the setting value display unit 45 cannot be switched from off to on (step S2402: No), that is, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is not operated to turn on the power to the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 terminates the game setting value change process.

<Steps S2403-S2405>
When the power to the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2403), and displays a number indicating the read game setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2404). This allows the current game setting value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value display flag indicating that the game setting value is being displayed on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2405), and terminates the setting value change process.

<Step S2406>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a rotation operation to change the game setting value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2407, and if the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2409.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process to change the display on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2407). For example, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one greater than the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation, and conversely, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one less than the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation.

Furthermore, if the setting value display unit 45 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "6", the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "1". If the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "1", the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "6". Alternatively, the unit may be prevented from rotating further to the right when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "6", and prevented from rotating further to the left when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "1".

Then, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number currently displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value (step S2408), and terminates the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is ultimately saved as the valid game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, by turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the game setting value can be finalized.

In step S2408, the MPU 41 sets a game setting change command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and that the changed game setting value has been changed.

<Step S2409>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power to the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409), that is, whether an operation to turn off the power to the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. If the power to the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2410, and if the power to the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S2409: No), the setting value change process is terminated.

<Steps S2410-S2412>
If the power to the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) and a high probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) corresponding to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and saves them to the RAM 412 (step S2410).

In step S2410, the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) and the high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) are selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. In other words, since the same game setting value is selected for both the low-probability mode and high-probability mode win/loss tables, changing the game setting value is easy. However, it may be possible to change the setting value for the low-probability mode and the game setting value for the high-probability mode individually. In this case, for example, it becomes possible to set the low-probability mode setting value to "1" and the high-probability mode setting value to "6," thus allowing for different setting levels (numerical values) for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

Then, the MPU 41 hides the numbers corresponding to the game setting values on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2411), sets the setting value display flag to off (step S2412), and terminates the setting value change process.

[Specific performance information update process]
Here, Figure 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the specific performance information update process executed in step S1410 of the main process in Figure 21. In the specific performance information update process, specific performance information such as base information is updated. Figure 37 is a diagram showing an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process in Figure 36. The specific performance information update process will be explained below with reference to Figures 36 and 37.

<Steps S2501 to S2503>
As shown in Figure 36, in step S2501, the MPU 41 reads various payout numbers for current base calculation from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, for example, the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot" and the "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot" in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and further reads the "number of balls out" in the normal game state for current base calculation from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2502). Then, the MPU 41 calculates the "Current Base BL," which is the ratio of the total number of balls dispensed from the "General Prize Entry" and the "Number of Balls Dispensed from the First Prize Entry" to the "Number of Balls Dispensed" in the normal game state, based on the "Number of Balls Dispensed from the General Prize Entry," the "Number of Balls Dispensed from the First Prize Entry," and the "Number of Balls Dispensed Out," in the normal game state for current base calculation, and updates the "Current Base BL" stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2503), and proceeds to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of balls that have been played in the normal game state for current-based calculations, which was read from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S2502, has reached 60,000 balls. If the number of balls that have been played in the normal game state for current-based calculations has reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2505. If the number of balls that have been played has not reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2509.

<Steps S2505 to S2508>
If the number of balls output in the normal game state used for current base calculation has reached 60,000 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the various base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S2505 to S2507). Specifically, as shown in Figures 37(A) and 37(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base from the time before last (step S2505), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000-ball base B1 (step S2506), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S2507).

Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot, the number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot, and the number of balls out, which are stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 for base calculations, to 0 (step S2508), and proceeds to step S2509.

<Step S2509>
If the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 is updated (steps S2505 to S2508), or if the number of balls output has not reached 60,000 (step S2504: No), MPU 51 reads the information necessary for calculation of other specific performance information other than the base information (for example, the number of unit jackpot draws, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the bonus item ratio) from the game information storage area 412d, calculates the other specific performance information based on the read information, updates the values of the other specific performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S2509), and terminates the specific performance information update process.

[Display control processing for performance display monitor]
Here, Figures 38 to 41 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43, which is executed in step S1411 of the main process in Figure 21. The display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be explained below with reference to Figures 38 to 41.

<Step S2601>
As shown in Figure 38, in step S2601, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL display flag, which indicates that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is set to ON in step S2606, described later in the display control process, or in step S2630 in Figure 41, when the display of the current base BL is started on the performance display monitor 43.

If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), i.e., the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2608 in Figure 39. On the other hand, if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), i.e., the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2602.

<Step S2602>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S2601: No), that is, if the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag, which indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed, is set to on on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2602). Here, the B1 display flag is set to on in step S2612 of Figure 39, described later, in the display control process when the display of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is started on the performance display monitor 43.

If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2617 in Figure 40. On the other hand, if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), that is, if the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2603.

<Step S2603>
If the B1 display flag is set to off (step S2602: No), that is, if the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag, which indicates that the 60,000-ball base B2 from two sessions ago was displayed on the performance display monitor 43, is set to on (step S2603). Here, the B2 display flag is set to on in step S2621 of Figure 40, described later, in the display control process when the display of the 60,000-ball base B2 from two sessions ago begins on the performance display monitor 43.

If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, if the performance display monitor 43 shows a B2 based on 60,000 balls from two rounds ago, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2626 in Figure 41. On the other hand, if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2603: No), that is, if the performance display monitor 43 does not show a B2 based on 60,000 balls from two rounds ago, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2604.

<Step S2604>
If the B2 display flag is set to off (step S2603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2604). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2605. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S2604: No), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S2605-S2607>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2605). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 37(A), then "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 37(B), then "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag on the performance display monitor 43 to turn on, indicating that the current base BL is being displayed (step S2606). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a BL display time counter on the performance display monitor 43 to indicate the remaining display time of the current base BL in order to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2607), and then terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), that is, if the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, as shown in Figure 39, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter, which is set in step S2607 of Figure 38 on the performance display monitor 43 and indicates the remaining display time of the current base BL (step S2608), and determines whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2609). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2610. On the other hand, if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2614.

<Steps S2610-S2613>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag, which indicates that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2610), and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1, which is included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2611). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 37(A), then "8.", "1", "3", and "3", indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was 33%, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 37(B), then "8.", "1", "2", and "9", indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was 29%, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. The MPU 41 then sets the B1 display flag to ON, indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2612). Furthermore, in order to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2613), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S2614>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614). If the MPU 41 determines that the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), it proceeds to step S2615, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2614: No), it terminates the display control process.

Furthermore, if the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431-434 on the performance display monitor 43 is cut off, causing the letters and numbers indicating the current base BL to turn off.

<Steps S2615 and S2616>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag, which indicates that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2615). Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the value of the BL display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43, to 0 (step S2616), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2617 and S2618>
Returning to Figure 38, if the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, then, as shown in Figure 40, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter, which is set in step S2613 of Figure 39 and indicates the remaining display time for the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2617), and determines whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2618). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base B2 from the one before that.

If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base B2, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2619. On the other hand, if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base B2, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2623.

<Steps S2619-S2622>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the time before that 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag, which indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2619), and displays the time before that 60,000 ball base B2, which is included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2620). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 37(A), then "8.", "2", "3", and "2", indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B2 was 32%, will be displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 37(B), then "8.", "2", "3", and "3", indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B2 was 33%, will be displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON, indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B2 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2621). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a B2 display time counter on the performance display monitor 43 that indicates the remaining display time for the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in order to display the previous 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2622), and then terminates the display control process.

<Step S2623>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the time before that 60,000-ball base B2, the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the process moves to step S2624, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2623: No), the display control process ends.

Furthermore, if the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431-434 on the performance display monitor 43 is cut off, causing the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to turn off.

<Steps S2624 and S2625>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag, which indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed, to off on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2624), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S2625), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2626 and S2627>
Returning to Figure 38, if the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, if the performance display monitor 43 is displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B2, then, as shown in Figure 41, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter, which is set in step S2622 of Figure 40 and indicates the remaining display time for the previous 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2626), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2627). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL.

If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B2 to the current base BL, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2628. On the other hand, if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B2 to the current base BL, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2632.

<Steps S2628-S2631>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, which indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2628), and displays the current base BL, which is included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2629). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 37(A), then "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 37(B), then "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. The MPU 41 then sets the BL display flag to ON to indicate that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2630), sets a BL display time counter to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2631), and ends the display control process.

<Step S2632>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL, the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the process moves to step S2633, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2632: No), the display control process ends.

Furthermore, if the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431-434 on the performance display monitor 43 is cut off, causing the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000-ball base B2 to turn off.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, base information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden when the performance display switch 44 is turned off. However, the base information may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 at all times while the gaming machine 10 is powered on, or it may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the front frame 11 is open.

<Steps S2633 and S2634>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, which indicates that the previous-to-last 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed, to off on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2633). Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the value of the B2 display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time for the previous-to-last 60,000-ball base B2, to 0 (step S2634), and terminates the display control process.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, referring to Figures 42 to 54, the processing performed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, it is conceivable that some or all of the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be performed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Also, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 performs control processing for the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27, startup processing when the audio lamp control device 5 is powered on, and NMI interrupt processing during power outages, but these processes will not be explained here.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of the audio lamp control device 5]
Here, Figure 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51, for example, performs sub-timer interrupt processing as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in Figure 42, the MPU 51 executes the following processes in the sub-timer interrupt processing: counter update processing (step S2701), operation detection processing (step S2702), command determination processing (step S2703), special feature game performance control processing (step S2704), and jackpot game performance control processing (step S2705).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the performance pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, and the variation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the performance pattern type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when they reach their maximum values. The performance pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (performance pattern) based on the special variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance pattern type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. The first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol that is stopped first based on the special variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 decrements the variation display counter by 1. This variation display counter is used to measure the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to determine the remaining variable display time, whether the display is in progress, and whether the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has finished.

[Operation detection process]
Next, an example of the operation detection process procedure performed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42 will be described. Here, Figure 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation detection process procedure.

As shown in Figure 43, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes the following: operation button operation detection process (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), selection button operation detection process (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), confirm button operation detection process (step S2805), and confirm operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2801 of the operation detection process), the operation status of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process is executed to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. Here, Figure 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to Figure 44.

<Steps S2901-S2903>
As shown in Figure 44, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S2901). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S2902). After that, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag (step S2903), and terminates the operation detection process.

Thus, in the operation button operation detection process, the execution of steps S2901 to S2903 stores the operation history of the operation button 20, with the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals stored in RAM 512 as the first to third detection flags. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state as the second detection flag, and the operation state two operations prior as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 43, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag consists of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of on and off states of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 is continuing (see Figure 46(A)). Also, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 has started (see Figure 46(A)). Also, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see Figure 46(A)). And, if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that no operation has been performed on the operation button 20 (see Figure 46(A)). Here, Figure 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for determining the operation detection pattern. Figure 46(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. The operation button operation detection process will be explained below with reference to Figures 45 and 46(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in Figure 60, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag, which indicates the operation state of the operation button 20 three steps prior, is set to ON (step S3001). Here, if the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the operation button 20 two steps prior, is set to on (step S3002). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is set to on (step S3003). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off (step S3004), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off (see Figure 46(A)). The first operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, if the first operation pattern flag is set on, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and send this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and can grasp the duration of continuous operation of the operation button 20 based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is sent consecutively. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the duration for which the operation button 20 has been continuously pressed, making it possible to execute an operation button animation based on the long press operation.

<Step S3005>
If the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the operation button 20 two steps prior, is on (step S3005). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is on (step S3006). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and the first and third operation pattern flags off (step S3007). That is, when the operation pattern "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as three operation states for the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and the first and third operation pattern flags off (see Figure 46(A)), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state (whether or not operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, by using the second operation pattern flag to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, the operation states of the operation button 20 for three cycles are reflected. This prevents false detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and prevents the start of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is on (step S3008). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and the first and second operation pattern flags to off (step S3009), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states for the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and sets the first and second operation pattern flags to off (see Figure 46(A)). The third operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), or the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S3010), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, if an operation pattern other than the above occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three operations, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to off (see Figure 46(A)). The MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in an unoperated state if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 43, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection button operation process, the lower selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Processing of operation of the upper selection button>
In the Up Selection Button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the Up Selection Button 211 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the Up Selection Button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the Up Selection Button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "Up Selection Operation Detection Flag".

<Processing of operation of the down selection button>
In the down selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the down selection button 212 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the down selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the down selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "down selection operation detection flag".

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the left selection button 213 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right-select button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the right selection button 214 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 43, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an upper operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the upper selection button 211 from the operation history of the upper selection button 211, which is determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, "operation detection flag" should be read as "upper selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "upper selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 46(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the upper selection button 211 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the up selection button 211 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., as a result of three operation states, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to off. Note that if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is not being operated.

<Detection of lower selection operation pattern determination process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a down operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the down selection button 212 from the operation history of the down selection button 212, which is determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, "operation detection flag" should be read as "down selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "down selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 46(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first down selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the down selection button 212 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second down selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the down selection button 212 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the down selection button 212 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third down selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the down selection button 212 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the down selection button 212 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the down selection button 212 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third down selection operation detection flags to off. Note that if all of the first to third down selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the down selection button 212 is not being operated.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213, which is determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, "operation detection flag" should be read as "left selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "left selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 46(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second and third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operations of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the left selection button 213 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs as three operation states for the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the left selection button 213 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is not in operation when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a first right selection operation detection flag, a second right selection operation detection flag, and a right operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, "operation detection flag" should be read as "right selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "right selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 46(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operations of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the right selection button 214 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., as a result of three operation states, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is not being operated.

[Detection of OK button operation]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 43, in the confirm button operation detection process (step S2805), the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the confirm button 21B and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the confirm button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 44, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the confirm button operation detection process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, "operation detection flag" should be read as "confirm button operation detection flag".

[Decision operation detection pattern determination process]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the decision button 21B from the operation history of the decision button 21B, which is determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. Here, the decision operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 45, "operation detection flag" should be read as "decision operation detection flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 46(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operation states of the select button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second select operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third select operation pattern flags to OFF. The second select operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the select button 21B has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the select button 21B has begun).

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 detects that the operation patterns "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occur as three operation states for the select button 21B, it sets the third select operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second select operation pattern flags to OFF. The third select operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the select button 21B has changed from an operational state to a non-operational state (i.e., whether the operation of the select button 21B has ended).

Furthermore, if the MPU 41 detects that the operation state of the select button 21B for three presses is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., it sets all of the first to third select operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third select operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the select button 21B is not being operated.

[Command determination process]
Next, an example of the command determination process procedure executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42 will be described. Here, Figures 47 and 48 are flowcharts of an example of the command determination process procedure.

<Step S3101>
As shown in Figure 47, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it has received a command from the main control unit 4 (step S3101). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3101: Yes), it proceeds to step S3102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3101: No), it terminates the command determination process.

Commands received from the main control unit 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512. The MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Furthermore, if a command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S3101 and is subject to processing, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area and stored, for example, in the processing operation storage area.

<Step S3102>
If a command is received (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3102). A special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the display time of the special symbols' variation in special symbol games (special symbol variation pattern) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is a special pattern variation command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3103; if the received command is not a special pattern variation command (step S3102: No), the process proceeds to step S3107.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
If the received command is a special feature variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (performance pattern) setting process (step S3103) and a stop symbol combination setting process (step S3104) based on the special feature variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. The details of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process and the stop symbol combination setting process will be described below.

[Setting the type of variation (performance pattern)]
In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process, the special game performances to be executed by various performance means (symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, movable mechanism member 39, sub-movable display unit 38) in the special game are set. Specifically, based on the special game variation pattern command, the MPU 51 refers to the variation type table (see Figure 49) to set the variation type (performance pattern) and variation display time, and further sets the performance pattern type based on the performance pattern type selection table (see Figure 50) corresponding to the variation type (performance pattern).

Here, Figure 49 shows an example of a variation type table referenced by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (performance pattern).

As shown in Figure 49, the variation type table defines the variation display time and variation type (performance pattern) content corresponding to the special variation pattern command. For example, the special variation pattern command "A01," where the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special variation pattern is "01," is associated with a variation display time of "30s" and a variation type of "normal reach performance pattern." Similarly, the special variation pattern command "B02," where the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and the special variation pattern is "02," is associated with a variation display time of "60s" and a variation type of "super reach performance pattern," and the special variation pattern command "C03," where the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and the special variation pattern is "03," is associated with a variation display time of "90s" and a variation type of "special reach performance pattern." Furthermore, the special symbol variation pattern command "D04," where the lottery result is "miss" and the special symbol variation pattern is "04," is associated with a variation display time of "7s" and a variation type of "non-reach animation pattern." Similarly, the special symbol variation pattern command "D05," where the lottery result is "miss" and the special symbol variation pattern is "05," is associated with a variation display time of "10s" and a variation type of "non-reach animation pattern."

Furthermore, Figures 50(A) to 50(C) show examples of performance pattern type selection tables. Each performance pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (performance pattern). Specifically, Figure 50(A) is the normal reach performance pattern type selection table referenced when the final individual performance type in a special symbol game performance is a normal reach performance; Figure 50(B) is the super reach performance pattern type selection table referenced when the final individual performance type in a special symbol game performance is a super reach performance; and Figure 50(C) is the special reach performance pattern type selection table referenced when the final individual performance type in a special symbol game performance is a special reach performance.

In this embodiment, we will explain using the example of a case where there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 50, the performance type table for cases where the variation type is "no reach" is omitted.

In the normal reach animation pattern selection table shown in Figure 50(A), "Animation Pattern X1" to "Animation Pattern X5" are defined as animation patterns corresponding to the counter value of the animation pattern type counter, depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and miss). When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (animation pattern) is a normal reach animation pattern, it selects the animation pattern corresponding to the counter value of the animation pattern type counter from the normal reach animation pattern selection table according to the lottery result. Here, animation patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach animation pattern selection table are, for example, animations in which a normal reach animation is executed after the end of a high-speed variation animation in which the decorative symbols change rapidly, and the final individual animation type is a normal reach animation.

Furthermore, in the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table shown in Figure 50(B), "Performance Pattern Y1" to "Performance Pattern Y5" are defined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter, according to the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a Super Reach Performance Pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table are, for example, performances that, after the end of a high-speed variation performance, are executed as a normal reach performance, and then develop into a Super Reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance duration than a normal reach performance. Note that the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table may also include Super Reach Performance Patterns that develop into a Super Reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in Figure 50(C), "Performance Pattern Z1" to "Performance Pattern Z5" are defined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, if the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances that are executed as normal reach performances and super reach performances after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develop into a special reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the normal reach performance and super reach performance, and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern type selection table may also include special reach performance patterns that develop into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without going through at least one of the normal reach performance and super reach performance.

[Stop Symbol Combination Setting Process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process, the symbol combinations are set for when multiple decorative symbols (for example, three) that are displayed in a variable manner by the symbol display unit 341 in special symbol games are stopped and displayed on the active lines. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the stop symbol combinations by referring to the first stop symbol selection table (see Figure 51(B)) based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

Here, Figure 51(A) shows the relationship between the type of decorative pattern and the color of the decorative pattern. As shown in Figure 51(A), in this embodiment, the numbers "1" to "9" are set as decorative patterns. Of these numbers, "3" and "7" are red, "1," "5," and "9" are green, and "2," "4," "6," and "8" are red. In this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is announced by the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed on one or more active lines set on the pattern display unit 341. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, decorative patterns of the same number are stopped and displayed on the active line in a sequence of identical numbers. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed on the active line in a sequence other than identical numbers.

Furthermore, it is conceivable to create differences in the player's advantage based on the type of decorative symbol (number, color). For example, odd numbers could be more advantageous to the player than even numbers, and among odd numbers, red "3" and "7" could be set to be more advantageous to the player than green "1," "5," and "9." In this case, for example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated or suggested by the combination of decorative symbols displayed when the reels stop. For example, if the combination of symbols that stops is "777," it could be clearly indicated that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot; if the combination of symbols that stops is "333," it could be clearly indicated that it is a probability variation jackpot; and if the combination of symbols that stops is an even number with repeating digits, it could be suggested that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the combination of decorative symbols that stops may be clearly indicated or suggested by the expected probability (jackpot expectation) that the result of the jackpot lottery for a specific reserve in the special game executed after the special game will be a jackpot. For example, during the special game leading up to the execution of a special game for a specific held symbol, scattered symbols of the same color may be displayed as so-called "chance symbols," and the probability of a big win may be explicitly indicated or suggested as a so-called pre-announcement effect based on the color of the scattered symbols (chance symbols). Specifically, the probability of a big win in the special game for a specific held symbol may be set so that red scattered symbols (chance symbols) have the highest probability, green scattered symbols (chance symbols) have the next highest probability, and blue scattered symbols have the lowest probability, and scattered symbols (chance symbols) of a color corresponding to the variation pattern and win/loss information of the special game for the specific held symbol may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and stop symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the decorative symbol that is first displayed in the symbol display unit 341; the second stop symbol is the decorative symbol that is second displayed; and the final stop symbol is the symbol that is last displayed.

Here, Figure 51(B) shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in Figure 51(B), the first stop symbol selection table defines the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) that will be initially displayed by the symbol display unit 341. Note that Figure 51(B) assumes that the decorative symbols are "1" through "9", that "333" indicates a probability variation jackpot (either a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot), that "777" indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that any other repeating numbers besides "333" and "777" indicate a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R Regular Jackpot," the symbols "3" and "7" are not assigned as the first stop symbols. Instead, the first stop symbol is determined by a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7." In other words, if the lottery result is a "5R Regular Jackpot," the symbol combinations "333" or "777," which indicate a 5R Probability Jackpot or a 16R Probability Jackpot (Probability Jackpot), will not be displayed as stop symbols.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the number "7" is not assigned as the first stop symbol. Instead, the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols other than "7" at a predetermined probability. In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the symbol combination "777," which indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" combination, which indicates a 5R probability variation jackpot, may be displayed as the stop symbol. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the symbol stop display result may be a symbol combination other than the "333" combination, which suggests a 5R regular jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," and the first stop symbol is a decorative symbol other than "3" (excluding "7"), the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability variation upgrade animation to clearly indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9," and the first stop symbol is determined from these decorative symbols with a predetermined probability. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," a combination of repeating digits other than the "777" combination that indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot may be displayed as the stop symbol. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," the stop symbol display result may be a combination of repeating digits other than the "777" combination that suggests a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. And, when the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R probability variation upgrade animation to clearly indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol, and then determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol. This determines the combination of stop symbols that will be displayed on the active lines of the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss," there is a distribution to all decorative symbols from "1" to "9," and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the lottery result is a "miss" and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol based on the type of miss selected based on the miss type table (see Figure 9(D)) and the first stop symbol that was determined earlier. For example, if the miss type is a near miss (miss before and after), the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, if the miss type is a near miss (not a near miss before or after), the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Furthermore, if the aforementioned "miss" type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined independently of the first and second stop symbols. Note that the stop symbol combination for decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, or the first stop symbol may be determined only by the sound lamp control device 5, while the second and final stop symbols are determined by the display control device 6.

<Step S3105>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 47, in step S3105, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the received special pattern variation command in the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special pattern variation command. The variation display counter is then decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process in Figure 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variation is being displayed, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the variation display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3106>
In step S3106, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the performance pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S3104, and then terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and performance image of the decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the variation display and performance display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type and performance type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the pattern display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the display of multiple decorative patterns (for example, three) while a preset display time for variation has elapsed, and then sequentially stops displaying the variations of the multiple decorative patterns. During the display of the decorative patterns, various effects corresponding to the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed in the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, etc.

Furthermore, when the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, it sets, for example, the "Special Feature Game Performance" flag to ON. This "Special Feature Game Performance" flag indicates that a special feature game performance is being executed.

<Step S3107>
If the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol shift command (step S3107). A special symbol shift command is a command that indicates that the special symbol win/loss information, which shows the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see Figure 8), has shifted when the number of first special symbol reserves N or the number of second special symbol reserves M decreases due to the start of a special symbol game (display of special symbol variation).

If the received command is a special-purpose shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3108. If the received command is not a special-purpose shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3110.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
If the received command is a special feature shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special feature data setting process (step S3108) and the special feature data image display process (step S3109), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the special feature data setting process performed in step S3108 is a process of shifting (updating) the data of special feature win/loss information (special feature data) stored in the special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. The special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, and stores special feature data equivalent to that of the special feature hold storage area 412b. The special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes the first special feature hold storage area corresponding area, the second special feature hold storage area corresponding area, and the special feature execution area corresponding area, respectively, for the first special feature hold storage area REA, the second special feature hold storage area REB, and the special feature execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special feature hold storage area 412b. Furthermore, the first special feature hold storage area corresponding region includes the first to fourth special feature hold area corresponding region (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth hold areas REA1 to REA4 (see Figure 8) of the first special feature hold storage area REA in the special feature hold storage area 412b, and the first special feature hold number storage area corresponding region (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first special feature hold number storage area. In addition, the second special feature hold storage area corresponding region includes the second special feature hold area corresponding region (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first to fourth hold areas REB1 to REB4 (see Figure 8) of the second special feature hold storage area REB in the special feature hold storage area 412b, and the second special feature hold number storage area corresponding region (see Figure 8) corresponding to the second special feature hold number storage area.

On the other hand, the special figure data image display process performed in step S3109 is a process that shifts the image related to the special figure data (special figure data image) (see Figures 52 and 53) displayed on the symbol display unit 341, based on the special figure data stored in the special figure hold storage area corresponding region (not shown) of the RAM 512, which was shifted (updated) in step S3108.

Here, Figure 52 shows examples of special symbol data images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 before and after receiving a special symbol shift command. Specifically, Figures 52(A1) and 52(A2) show examples of special symbol data images before receiving a special symbol shift command, Figure 52(B1) shows an example of a special symbol data image after receiving a special symbol shift command for the first special symbol game in the display state of the special symbol data image shown in Figure 52(A1), and Figure 52(B2) shows an example of a special symbol data image after receiving a special symbol shift command for the second special symbol game in the display state of the special symbol data image shown in Figure 52(A2).

As shown in Figures 52(A1) and 52(A2), the special figure data image is displayed in the special figure data image display units 75, 76, and 77 set in the figure display unit 341. The special figure data image display units 75, 76, and 77 correspond to the special figure execution area (not shown), the first special figure hold storage area, and the second special figure hold storage area corresponding to the aforementioned special figure hold storage area (not shown) set in the RAM 512, and include the special figure variation image display area 75, the first special figure hold image display area 76, and the second special figure hold image display area 77.

The special symbol variation image display area 75 is an area that displays the special symbol game image for the special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area, which corresponds to the special symbol execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. In the special symbol variation image display area 75, the special symbol game image is displayed when special symbol data is stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area, while the special symbol game image is not displayed when special symbol data is not stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area. In other words, the special symbol game image is displayed during the special symbol variation display and is hidden when the special symbol stops. To put it another way, the display of the special symbol game image clearly indicates that the special symbol game is in progress, and the hiding of the special symbol game image clearly indicates the end of the special symbol game.

In the examples shown in Figures 52(A1) and 52(A2), special feature data is stored in the special feature execution area, and the special feature game image (the circular area with cross-hatching) is displayed in the special feature variation image display area 75.

The first special symbol hold image display area 76 is an area that displays the first special symbol hold image for the first special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area, which corresponds to the first special symbol hold storage area REA (see Figure 8) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This first special symbol hold image display area 76 includes the first special symbol hold image display area 761, the first special symbol hold image display area 762, the first special symbol hold image display area 3, and the first special symbol hold image display area 464, corresponding to the first special symbol hold area corresponding areas (not shown) of the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding area in the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area. Furthermore, in the first special symbol hold image display area 76, the first special symbol hold image is displayed when special symbol data is stored in any of the first special symbol hold area 1 to 4 corresponding areas (not shown). Conversely, the first special symbol hold image is not displayed when no special symbol data is stored in any of the first special symbol hold area 1 to 4 corresponding areas (not shown). In other words, if there are holds for the first special symbol game, the first special symbol hold image is displayed in a number corresponding to the number of first special symbol holds N, and is not displayed if there are no holds for the first special symbol game. In other words, the number of first special symbol holds N for the first special symbol game is indicated based on the number of first special symbol hold images displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 52(A1), the first special symbol hold image is displayed in the first to third hold image display areas 761 to 763, while the first special symbol hold image is not displayed in the first special symbol fourth hold image display area 764. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 52(A1), special symbol data is stored in the first to third hold area corresponding to the first special symbol hold area (not shown) within the first special symbol first to fourth hold area corresponding area, while special symbol data is not stored in the first special symbol fourth hold area corresponding area, indicating that the number of first special symbol holds N for the first special symbol game is 3.

The second special symbol hold image display area 77 is an area that displays the second special symbol hold image for the second special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area, which corresponds to the second special symbol hold storage area REB (see Figure 8) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This second special symbol hold image display area 77 includes the second special symbol first hold image display area 771, the second special symbol second hold image display area 772, the second special symbol third hold image display area 773, and the second special symbol fourth hold image display area 774, corresponding to the second special symbol first to fourth hold area corresponding areas (not shown) of the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding area in the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area. Furthermore, in the second special symbol hold image display area 77, the second special symbol hold image is displayed when special symbol data is stored in any of the second special symbol 1st to 4th hold area corresponding areas (not shown). Conversely, the second special symbol hold image is not displayed when no special symbol data is stored in any of the second special symbol 1st to 4th hold area corresponding areas (not shown). In other words, if there are holds for the second special symbol game, the number of second special symbol hold images corresponding to the number of second special symbol holds M is displayed, and if there are no holds for the second special symbol game, no images are displayed. In other words, the number of second special symbol holds M for the second special symbol game is indicated based on the number of second special symbol hold images displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 52 (A2), the second special feature hold image is displayed in the second special feature 1st to 2nd hold image display areas 771 to 772, while the second special feature hold image is not displayed in the second special feature 3rd to 4th hold image display areas 773 to 774. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 52 (A2), the special feature data is stored in the second special feature 1st to 2nd hold area corresponding area (not shown) within the second special feature 1st to 4th hold area corresponding area, while the special feature data is not stored in the second special feature 3rd to 4th hold area corresponding area, indicating that the number of second special feature holds M for the second special feature game is 2.

Then, in the special feature data image display processing, if the received special feature shift command is for the first special feature, that is, if the first special feature game is started, the special feature game image is displayed in the special feature variation image display area 75 based on the special feature data stored in the special feature execution area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area (not shown) of the special feature hold storage area, and furthermore, the first special feature hold image is displayed in the first special feature hold image display area 76 based on the special feature data stored in the first special feature hold storage area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area (not shown) of the special feature hold storage area. For example, in a state where the number of reserved special symbols N for the first special symbol shown in Figure 52(A1) is 3 and the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol is 0, when a new special symbol game starts due to the end of a special symbol game, as shown in Figure 52(B1), the special symbol game image is displayed in the special symbol variation image display area 75, and the first special symbol reserved image is displayed in the first special symbol 1st to 2nd reserved image display areas 761 to 762 of the first special symbol reserved image display area 76. That is, as shown in Figures 52(A1) and 52(B1), when a new first special symbol game is started, the first special symbol hold image that was displayed in the first special symbol hold image display area 761 of the first special symbol hold image display area 76 before the start of the first special symbol game is shifted to the special symbol variation image display area 75 as the special symbol game image, and each of the first special symbol hold images that was displayed in the first special symbol second and third hold image display areas 762 and 763 of the first special symbol hold image display area 76 before the start of the first special symbol game is shifted to the first special symbol first and second hold image display areas 761 and 762 of the first special symbol hold image display area 76.

On the other hand, in the special feature data image display processing, if the received special feature shift command is for the second special feature, that is, if the second special feature game is started, the special feature game image is displayed in the special feature variation image display area 75 based on the special feature data stored in the special feature execution area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area (not shown) of the special feature hold storage area, and furthermore, the second special feature hold image is displayed in the second special feature hold image display area 77 based on the special feature data stored in the second special feature hold storage area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area (not shown) of the special feature hold storage area. For example, in a state where the number of reserved special symbols N for the second special symbol shown in Figure 52(A2) is 1 and the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol is 2, when a new special symbol game starts when the special symbol game ends, as shown in Figure 52(B2), the special symbol game image is displayed in the special symbol variation image display area 75, and the reserved special symbol image is displayed in the second special symbol first reserved image display area 771 of the second special symbol reserved image display area 77. Specifically, as shown in Figures 52(A2) and 52(B2), when a new second special symbol game is initiated, the second special symbol hold image that was displayed in the second special symbol first hold image display area 771 of the second special symbol hold image display area 77 before the start of the second special symbol game is shifted to the special symbol variation image display area 75 as the special symbol game image, and the second special symbol hold image that was displayed in the second special symbol second hold image display area 772 of the second special symbol hold image display area 77 before the start of the second special symbol game is shifted to the second special symbol first hold image display area 771 of the second special symbol hold image display area 77.

Furthermore, the special symbol data images in the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may be continuously displayed from the start to the end of the special symbol game, but they may also be hidden for a period during the execution of the special symbol game. For example, if a super reach or special reach effect is performed during the special symbol game, the special symbol data images may be hidden during the execution of these effects so as not to obstruct the view of these effects. In this case, the special symbol data images may be redisplayed before or after the end of the super reach or special reach effect, or they may remain hidden. Also, when the special symbol data images are hidden, it is conceivable to display images such as numbers indicating the number of reserved special symbols for the first special symbol game (N) or the number of reserved special symbols for the second special symbol game (M) during the period when the special symbol data images are hidden.

The special feature data images in the special feature data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may, depending on their display mode, explicitly indicate or suggest the expected probability (jackpot probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game or the reserved special feature game will be a jackpot. For example, multiple display modes (such as color, shape, pattern, effect, or combinations of two or more of these) corresponding to the jackpot probability may be set as special feature data images, and a predetermined display mode for the special feature data image may be set from the multiple display modes based on the result of the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, when explicitly indicating or suggesting the jackpot probability based on the display mode of the special feature data image, the display mode of the special feature data image may be changed (so-called reserved change) until the special feature game for the special feature data image ends. In this case, the change in the display mode of the special feature data image is performed, for example, so that the jackpot probability becomes the same or higher (promotion), and changes that lower the jackpot probability (demotion) are not performed. Of course, when a change in the display pattern of the special symbol data image that lowers the probability of a big win (a downgrade change) is implemented, it is also conceivable to make it so that the probability of a big win actually increases. Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the timing of the change in the display pattern of the special symbol data image; possible timings include the start of the special symbol game (the timing when the special symbol data image shifts), or after a certain period has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game (for example, from the start of the special symbol game until the start of the reach animation, during the execution of the reach animation, or before and after the development to a reach animation with a higher probability of a big win).

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 52, three types of special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 are set: the special symbol variation image display area 75, the first special symbol hold image display area 76, and the second special symbol hold image display area 77. However, it is also conceivable to change the display content of the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 according to the game state. For example, in a normal game state, the second special symbol hold image display area 77 may not be displayed, and the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the first special symbol hold image display area 76 may be displayed. In a probability variation game state and a time-saving game state, the first special symbol hold image display area 76 may not be displayed, and the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the second special symbol hold image display area 77 may be displayed.

<Step S3110>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 47, if the received command is not a special feature shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S3110). The first special feature hold command includes information indicating that the number of first special feature holds N for the first special feature game will increase, information regarding the increased number of first special feature holds N, and information regarding the special feature variation pattern (special feature variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery for the increasing first hold.

If the received command is a first special-purpose drawing hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3111. If the received command is not a first special-purpose drawing hold command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3113.

<Steps S3111 and S3112>
If the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special feature hold information update process (step S3111) and the first special feature hold image display process (step S3112), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special figure hold information update process executed in step S3111 is a process that adds (updates) special figure validity information data (special figure data) to the first special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the first special figure hold information update process, the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 (see Figure 8) of the first special figure hold storage area REA of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the first special figure 1 to 4 hold area corresponding area (not shown) which is set to correspond to the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the said special figure validity information is stored. For example, when special feature win/loss information is stored in the second holding area REA2 (see Figure 8) of the first special feature holding storage area REA in the special feature holding storage area 412b, the special feature data is stored in the first special feature second holding area corresponding area (not shown) set in conjunction with the second holding area REA2. Furthermore, in the first special feature holding information update process, 1 is added to the first special feature holding count N stored in the first special feature holding count storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special feature holding storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the first special feature image display process executed in step S3112 adds the first special feature image to the first special feature image display area 76 based on the special feature data added (updated) in the first special feature image storage area corresponding to step S3112 (not shown).

Here, Figure 53 shows examples of special symbol data images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 before and after receiving the first special symbol hold command or the second special symbol hold command. Specifically, Figure 53(A) shows an example of a special symbol data image before receiving the first special symbol hold command or the second special symbol hold command, and Figure 53(B) shows an example of a special symbol data image after receiving the first special symbol hold command for the first special symbol game, in the display state of the special symbol data image shown in Figure 53(A).

Figure 53(A) shows the display of the special symbol variation image, with one first special symbol hold image and two second special symbol hold images displayed. In other words, the example shown in Figure 53(A) indicates that the special symbol game is in progress, with one first special symbol hold image N for the first special symbol game and two second special symbol hold images M for the second special symbol game.

Then, in the first special symbol hold image display process, which is executed when the first special symbol hold command is received in the display state of the special symbol data shown in Figure 53(A), that is, when the number of holds for the first special symbol game increases to two, the first special symbol hold image is displayed in the first special symbol second hold image display area 762 of the first special symbol hold image display area 76, as shown in Figure 53(B), based on the special symbol data stored in the first special symbol second hold area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding area in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3113>
If the received command is not a first special symbol hold command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol hold command (step S3113). The second special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the number of second special symbol holds M for the second special symbol game will increase, information regarding the increased number of second special symbol holds M, and information regarding the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery for the increasing second hold.

If the received command is a second special-print hold command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3114. If the received command is not a second special-print hold command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3116.

<Steps S3114 and S3115>
If the received command is a second special feature hold command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special feature hold information update process (step S3114) and the second special feature hold image display process (step S3115), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the second special figure hold information update process executed in step S3114 is a process that adds (updates) special figure validity information data (special figure data) to the second special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the second special figure hold information update process, the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 (see Figure 8) of the second special figure hold storage area REB of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the second special figure first to fourth hold area corresponding area (not shown) which is set to correspond to the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the said special figure validity information is stored. For example, when special feature win/loss information is stored in the third hold area REB3 (see Figure 8) of the second special feature hold storage area REB in the special feature hold storage area 412b, the special feature data is stored in the first special feature third hold area corresponding area (not shown) set in conjunction with the third hold area REB3. Furthermore, in the second special feature hold information update process, 1 is added to the second special feature hold count M stored in the second special feature hold count storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special feature hold storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the second special feature image display process executed in step S3115 adds the second special feature image to the second special feature image display area 77 based on the special feature data added (updated) in step S3114 to the area corresponding to the second special feature image storage area (not shown).

Here, Figure 53(C) shows an example of the special feature data image after receiving the second special feature hold command for the second special feature game, in the display state of the special feature data image shown in Figure 53(A).

In the second special symbol hold image display process, which is executed when a second special symbol hold command is received in the display state of the special symbol data shown in Figure 53(A), that is, when the number of holds for the second special symbol game increases to three, the second special symbol hold image is displayed in the second special symbol third hold image display area 773 of the second special symbol hold image display area 77, as shown in Figure 53(C), based on the special symbol data stored in the second special symbol third hold area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding area within the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3116>
If the received command is not a second special symbol hold command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116). A jackpot game start command is a command that indicates the start of a jackpot game, and is set in step S2204 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a jackpot game is to be started.

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3117. If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3119.

<Steps S3117 and S3118>
If a jackpot game start command is received (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game performance setting process (step S3117), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON (step S3118), and terminates the command judgment process.

The jackpot game animation setting process executes the settings for the jackpot animation, including the opening animation, opening/closing execution mode animation (round game animation and interval animation), and ending animation, which are performed during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag indicates that a big win game is currently being played. In step S3201 of the big win game presentation control process (Figure 54, described later), this flag is referenced to determine whether or not a big win game is currently being played, i.e., whether or not to control the progress of the big win game presentation.

<Step S3119>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3119). An opening start command is a command that indicates the start of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set in step S2208 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be started.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3120; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3121.

<Step S3120>
If an opening start command is received (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening performance start flag to ON (step S3120) and terminates the command determination process. The opening performance start flag is a flag that starts the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3202 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below to determine whether or not to start the opening performance.

<Step S3121>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3121). An opening end command is a command that indicates the end of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set in step S2214 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 30, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be ended.

If the received command is an opening/closing command (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3122. If the received command is not an opening/closing command (step S3121: No), the process proceeds to step S3123 in Figure 48.

<Step S3122>
If an opening end command is received (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening performance end flag to ON (step S3122) and terminates the command determination process. The opening performance end flag is a flag that terminates the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3205 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below to determine whether or not to terminate the opening performance.

<Step S3123>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), as shown in Figure 48, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3123). A round game start command is a command that indicates the start of a round game in opening/closing execution mode, and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time. It is set in step S2217 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 30, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a round game in opening/closing execution mode is to be started.

If the received command is a round game start command (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3124. If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3126.

<Steps S3124 and S3125>
If a round game start command is received (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to ON (step S3124), sets round number information indicating which round the game is in to RAM 512 (step S3125), and terminates the command judgment process. The round game performance start flag is referenced in step S3208 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below to determine whether or not to start each round game performance of the opening/closing execution mode.

<Step S3126>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3126). A round game end command is a command that indicates the end of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set in step S2229 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 31, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the round game is to be ended.

If the received command is a round game end command (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3127. If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3128.

<Step S3127>
If a round game end command is received (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S3127) and terminates the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced in step S3211 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below when determining whether or not to end the round game performance.

<Step S3128>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3128). An interval start command is a command that indicates the start of an interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S2233 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 31, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when an interval is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3129; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the process proceeds to step S3130.

<Step S3129>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to ON (step S3129) and terminates the command determination process. The interval performance start flag is referenced in step S3214 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below when determining whether or not to start the interval performance.

<Step S3130>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3130). An interval end command is a command that indicates the end of the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S2239 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 32, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the interval is to be ended.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3131; if the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3132.

<Step S3131>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to ON (step S3131) and terminates the command determination process. The interval performance end flag is referenced in step S3217 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below when determining whether or not to terminate the interval performance.

<Step S3132>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3132). An ending start command is a command that indicates the start of the ending in a jackpot game, and is set in step S2242 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 31, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3133; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the process proceeds to step S3134.

<Step S3133>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON (step S3133) and terminates the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referenced in step S3220 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below when determining whether or not to start the ending performance.

<Step S3134>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3134). An ending end command is a command that indicates the end of the jackpot game, and is set in step S2248 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 32, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be terminated.

Here, if the received command is an ending command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3135; if the received command is not an ending command (step S3134: No), the process proceeds to step S3136.

<Step S3135>
If the received command is an ending termination command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance termination flag to ON (step S3135) and terminates the command determination process. The ending performance termination flag is referenced in step S3223 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 54 below when determining whether or not to terminate the ending performance.

<Step S3136>
If the received command is not an ending command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136). A jackpot game end command is a command that indicates the end of a jackpot game, and is set in step S2250 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the jackpot game is to be ended.

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3137. If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3139.

<Step S3137>
If the received command is a jackpot game termination command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, to off (step S3137), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3138>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control unit 4 (step S3138), and then terminates the command determination process.

[Big Win Game Performance Control Processing]
Next, an example of the procedure for the jackpot game performance control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42 will be explained. In the jackpot game performance control process, a process is executed to control the jackpot game performance according to the progress of the jackpot game, based on the jackpot game performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S3117 of the command judgment processing in Figure 47. Here, Figure 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game performance control process. The jackpot game performance control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 54.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Figure 54, in the jackpot game performance control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether the jackpot game flag is set to ON or OFF (step S3201). The jackpot game flag is a flag that indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and it is set to ON in step S3118 of the command determination process in Figure 47 when a jackpot game start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game is in progress.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3202. On the other hand, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 51 terminates the big win game performance control process.

<Step S3202>
If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "Opening Performance Start" flag is set to ON (step S3202). The opening performance start flag is a flag that starts the opening performance of a big win game, and is set to ON in step S3120 of the command judgment process in Figure 47 when the opening start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the opening performance.

If the opening sequence start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3203. On the other hand, if the opening sequence start flag is set to OFF (step S3202: No), i.e., it is not time to start the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3205.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
If the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 executes the process to start the opening performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S3117 of the command judgment process in Figure 47 (step S3203). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening performance start flag to OFF (step S3204) and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3205>
If the opening performance start flag is set to off (step S3202: No), that is, if it is not time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening performance end flag is set to on (step S3205). The opening performance end flag is a flag that ends the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on when an opening end command is received in step S3122 of the command judgment process in Figure 47. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening performance.

If the opening sequence completion flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3206. On the other hand, if the opening sequence completion flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), i.e., it is not time to end the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3208.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the opening performance (step S3206). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening performance end flag to OFF (step S3207) and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3208>
If the opening performance end flag is set to off (step S3205: No), that is, if it is not time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game performance start flag is set to on (step S3208). The round game performance start flag is a flag that starts the round game performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S3124 of the command judgment process in Figure 48 when a round game start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game performance.

If the round game performance start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3209. On the other hand, if the round game performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), i.e., it is not time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3211.

<Steps S3209 and S3210>
If the round game performance start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 executes the process to start the round game performance of the jackpot game performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S3117 of the command judgment process in Figure 47 (step S3209). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to OFF (step S3210) and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3211>
If the round game performance start flag is set to off (step S3208: No), that is, if it is not time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game performance end flag is set to on (step S3211). The round game performance end flag is a flag that ends the round game performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S3127 of the command judgment process in Figure 48 when a round game end command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the round game performance.

If the round game performance completion flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3212. On the other hand, if the round game performance completion flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), i.e., it is not time to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3214.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
If the round game performance termination flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), that is, if it is time to terminate the round game performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to terminate the round game performance (step S3212). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance termination flag to OFF (step S3213) and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3214>
If the round game performance end flag is set to off (step S3211: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance start flag is set to on (step S3214). The interval performance start flag is a flag that starts the interval performance of the jackpot game, and is set to on in step S3129 of the command judgment process in Figure 48 when an interval start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game performance.

If the interval performance start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3215. On the other hand, if the interval performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3214: No), i.e., it is not time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3217.

<Steps S3215 and S3216>
If the interval performance start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the interval performance of the jackpot game performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S3117 of the command judgment process in Figure 47 (step S3215). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to OFF (step S3216) and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3217>
If the interval performance start flag is set to off (step S3214: No), that is, if it is not time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance end flag is set to on (step S3217). The interval performance end flag is a flag that ends the interval performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S3131 of the command determination process in Figure 48 when an interval end command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the interval performance.

If the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3218. On the other hand, if the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3217: No), i.e., it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3220.

<Steps S3218 and S3219>
If the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the interval performance (step S3218). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to OFF (step S3219) and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3220>
If the interval performance end flag is set to off (step S3217: No), that is, if it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to on (step S3220). The ending performance start flag is a flag that starts the ending performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S3133 of the command judgment process in Figure 48 when an ending start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending performance.

If the ending sequence start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3221. On the other hand, if the ending sequence start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), i.e., it is not time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3223.

<Steps S3221 and S3222>
If the ending sequence start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the ending sequence of the jackpot game sequence set in the jackpot game sequence setting process in step S3117 of the command judgment process in Figure 47 (step S3221). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending sequence start flag to OFF (step S3222) and terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

<Step S3223>
If the ending sequence start flag is set to off (step S3220: No), that is, if it is not time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending sequence end flag is set to on (step S3223). The ending sequence end flag is a flag that ends the ending sequence of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S3135 of the command determination process in Figure 48 when an ending sequence end command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending sequence.

If the ending sequence termination flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the ending sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3224. On the other hand, if the ending sequence termination flag is set to OFF (step S3223: No), i.e., it is not time to end the ending sequence, the MPU 51 terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

<Steps S3224 and S3225>
If the ending sequence termination flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), that is, if it is time to terminate the ending sequence, the MPU 51 executes a process to terminate the ending sequence (step S3224). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending sequence termination flag to OFF (step S3225) and terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

[Other embodiments]
The following describes other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention. In the other embodiments described below, the same configurations and processing procedures as those described in the first embodiment described above will not be explained. It is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the other embodiments described below as desired.

[Second Embodiment]
As mentioned above, some gaming machines reserve the right to execute a game using the first special symbol (first special symbol game) triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot. In such gaming machines, when a predetermined reserve occurs (for example, a reserve where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, or a reserve with a long display time), the same, similar, or similar type of performance (reserve consecutive performance) that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation that the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined reserve will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games for a predetermined number of reserves at the time the predetermined reserve occurs.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, some gaming machines are equipped with a second prize slot into which game balls can be entered when an electric mechanism such as an electric tulip opens. The game triggered by a game ball entering this second prize slot (second special symbol game) takes precedence over the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot. The reason the second special symbol game takes precedence over the first special symbol game is that it may offer greater benefits to the player (e.g., a higher probability of winning a bonus round, a higher average number of rounds), while the first special symbol game may result in disadvantages not present in the second special symbol game (e.g., a return to normal gameplay).

In some gaming machines, a special effect (second special effect) is performed that explicitly indicates or suggests that a bonus (for example, the execution of a probability-increasing jackpot game after the second special effect ends) will be granted when a jackpot symbol stops or a near-win occurs during the second special effect game.

However, in a gaming machine where the second special symbol game takes precedence over the first special symbol game, and the second special symbol special effect is executed during the second special symbol game, as shown in Figure 55(A), if the hold-continuous effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively for multiple first special symbol games (Special 1 current variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2), as shown in Figure 55(B), if a game ball enters the second prize slot during the execution of Special 1 current variation, as shown in Figure 55(C), the second special symbol game will be executed after the end of the variation (Special 1 current variation) in which the hold-continuous effect is being executed, and the second special symbol special effect will be executed during that second special symbol game, causing the hold-continuous effect to be interrupted.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55(D), if the first special symbol game is executed after the second special symbol game has finished, and the planned continuous hold animation for the first special symbol game is not performed (Pattern 1), if the player remembers that the continuous hold animation was performed before the second special symbol game, they may feel a sense of unease when the continuous hold animation is not performed, potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game. In particular, if the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) has been executed infrequently, the player is more likely to remember that the continuous hold animation was performed before the second special symbol game, and therefore more likely to feel a sense of unease when the continuous hold animation is not performed after the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) has finished.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55(E), if the first special symbol game is executed after the second special symbol game has finished, and the continuous hold animation is restarted (Pattern 2), there is a concern that if the player has forgotten that the continuous hold animation was executed before the second special symbol game, they may feel uncomfortable with the continuous hold animation being executed, and the enjoyment of the game may decrease. In particular, if the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) is executed many times, the time until the continuous hold animation is restarted becomes longer, increasing the likelihood that the player has forgotten that the continuous hold animation was executed before the second special symbol game, and thus increasing the likelihood that the player will feel uncomfortable with the continuous hold animation being restarted after the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) has finished.

In contrast, the gaming machine according to this embodiment has two modes for opening the second prize entry point by the electric mechanism: a first opening of a first duration (a short opening that makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second prize entry point), and a second opening of a second duration (a longer opening that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second prize entry point), which is longer than the first duration.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game (for example, special 1 variation + special 1 hold 1 + special 1 hold 2 (see Figure 55(A))), if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to a short opening of the second prize slot, as shown in Figure 56(A), the continuous hold animation that was being performed in the first special symbol game will continue to be performed in the second special symbol game which is executed after the end of the first special symbol game as a variation. In other words, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed during the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to a brief opening of the second prize slot, the second special symbol animation will not be performed in the second special symbol game triggered by the game ball entering the second prize slot when the second prize slot is briefly open, and the continuous hold animation will continue to be performed. Therefore, when a continuous hold animation is being performed during the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel any discomfort when the continuous hold animation is not performed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second prize slot during a brief opening of the second prize slot. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the continuous hold animation not being performed in the first special symbol game that is performed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second prize slot is briefly open, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot compared to when it is fully open (fewer balls enter). Since players are more likely to remember that a continuous hold animation was performed before the second special symbol game, the effect of having the continuous hold animation continue without the second special symbol special animation being performed when a game ball enters the second prize slot during a short opening is highly significant.

Furthermore, in the case of a short opening where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot, it is expected that the number of game balls entering the second prize slot will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation is executed continuously during the second special feature game when game balls enter the second prize slot in the case of a short opening, the number of consecutive executions of the continuous hold animation will not increase significantly. Thus, it is unlikely that players will feel any discomfort with the continuous hold animation being executed continuously during the second special feature game. On the contrary, the continuous hold animation being executed continuously during the second special feature game allows for the effective use of the continuous hold animation in that game.

In this embodiment, if the second prize slot is only partially open and a game ball enters the second prize slot, resulting in the second special feature game, the second special feature special effect is not executed, and the hold-continue effect continues to be executed. However, the hold-continue effect is restarted in the first special feature game, which is executed after the second special feature game ends. However, it is not necessary to restart the hold-continue effect in the first special feature game.

Incidentally, the "Reserve Consecutive Performance" is sometimes performed as a performance to clearly indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. For example, if a predetermined Reserve Consecutive Performance is performed consecutively for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 4 times) of special symbol games, it may be clearly indicated that the result of the jackpot lottery for the predetermined number of special symbol games is a jackpot. On the other hand, if the second special symbol game is played by a game ball entering the second special symbol slot when the second special symbol slot is only partially open, and the second special symbol special performance is not performed, then the Reserve Consecutive Performance may be performed for more than the predetermined number of special symbol games. Therefore, if the Reserve Consecutive Performance is performed consecutively without the second special symbol special performance being performed during a second special symbol game played by a game ball entering the second special symbol slot when the second special symbol slot is only partially open, and that Reserve Consecutive Performance is a predetermined Reserve Consecutive Performance, then the predetermined Reserve Consecutive Performance may be performed more than the predetermined number of times. In other words, if a predetermined sequence of hold animations is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first-symbol games, and the predetermined sequence of hold animations is executed consecutively in the second-symbol game, a discrepancy may arise between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by the predetermined sequence of hold animations and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a discrepancy arises between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by the predetermined consecutive hold animation and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, a process is executed that prevents the number of consecutive special game rounds in which the predetermined consecutive hold animation is performed from reaching the predetermined number. For example, in a special game round before the predetermined number of consecutive special game rounds in which the predetermined consecutive hold animation is performed, or in a special game round after the predetermined number has been reached, the predetermined consecutive hold animation is not executed, and instead, a different consecutive hold animation is performed.

Thus, in this embodiment, if a situation arises where there is a discrepancy between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by a predetermined continuous hold animation and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, the type of continuous hold animation is changed and executed so that the number of consecutive special game plays in which the predetermined continuous hold animation is performed does not reach a predetermined number. This prevents a discrepancy between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by the predetermined continuous hold animation and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the hold-continuous performance is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first special feature games (for example, Special 1 (the relevant variation) + Special 1 (hold 1) + Special 1 (hold 2) (see Figure 55(A))), when a game ball enters the second prize slot due to the extended opening of the second prize slot, the second special feature performance is executed in the second special feature game, which is executed after the end of the first special feature game (Special 1 (the relevant variation)), as shown in Figure 56(B). However, at the time of execution of this second special feature performance, it is explicitly or implicitly indicated that the hold-continuous performance had been executed prior to the execution of the second special feature performance. For example, in the image display means where the second special feature performance is displayed as an image, the type of hold-continuous performance that was executed prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is displayed as a captured image, etc. Of course, the explicit indication or suggestion that the hold-continuous performance was executed prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is not limited to displaying a captured image of the hold-continuous performance on the image display means; as described later, other methods may also be used.

Thus, in this embodiment, by explicitly indicating or suggesting that a consecutive hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special animation, it is prevented for the player from forgetting that a consecutive hold animation was performed before the second special animation. Furthermore, the player can understand that the consecutive hold animation will resume after the end of the second special animation. Therefore, even when the consecutive hold animation resumes after the end of the second special animation, the feeling of unease regarding its execution after the end of the second special animation is significantly reduced. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of a consecutive hold animation that was performed before the end of the second special animation.

In particular, when the second prize slot is opened for a long time in a game with a long-opening normal winning slot, players tend to be more engrossed in whether or not a game ball will enter the second prize slot compared to when the second prize slot is opened for a short time in a game with a short-opening normal winning slot. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special winning slot game. Also, when the second prize slot is opened for a long time in a game with a long-opening normal winning slot, game balls are more likely to enter the second prize slot (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot is opened for a short time in a game with a short-opening normal winning slot, resulting in more second special winning slot games where the second special animation is performed (the execution time of the second special animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold animation before the execution of the second special feature animation (when the second special feature animation begins) and the resumption of the continuous hold animation upon the end of the second special feature animation becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game during which the second special feature animation is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a continuous hold animation was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature animation is highly effective.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 57 to 81.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, referring to Figure 57, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Distribution Table]
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability variation machine, but the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as an ST machine. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a different distribution table used in the main control device 4 to determine the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 57 is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.

In the example shown in Figure 57, when the type of special game is the first special game triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314, there are 10 random numbers (0-9) that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot, 5 random numbers (10-14) that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5 random numbers (15-19) that result in a 5R normal jackpot. On the other hand, when the type of special game is the second special game triggered by a ball entering the second prize slot 315, there are 10 random numbers (0-9) that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot, 10 random numbers (10-19) that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot, and there are no random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot. In other words, in the game machine 10, the probability of a probability variation jackpot in the first special game is 75%, while the probability of a probability variation jackpot in the second special game is 100%. Therefore, when the second prize slot 315 is opened wide due to a long-opening regular symbol win, if the second special symbol game triggers a win in the jackpot lottery, it will result in a 100% guaranteed continuous jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is announced during the subsequent reserve charge release (see Figures 61(B) and 61(C)) when the reserve for the second special symbol game triggered by a long-opening regular symbol win is released, it will result in a continuous jackpot.

Furthermore, in both the first and second special symbol games, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability-increasing jackpot, the game transitions to a probability-increasing game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (ST rounds) that can be played in the probability-increasing game state. If the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game transitions to a normal game state after the execution of the upper limit of special symbol games. Note that the number of special symbol games in the probability-increasing game state is not limited to 100; it may be any other number.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a regular jackpot, the game transitions to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state (time-saving rounds). If the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game transitions to a regular game state after the execution of the upper limit of special symbol games. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100; it may be any other number.

Furthermore, the transition from the probability variation state to the normal state may not be limited to when the maximum value of the special symbol game is executed; for example, it may also occur when the state transition lottery (downgrade lottery) is won.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 5 performs sub-timer interrupt processing and the like, as in the first embodiment described above. However, the command determination process in this embodiment differs in some steps from that of the first embodiment. In the following, with reference to Figures 58 to 60, the command determination process of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the command determination process in the first embodiment described above.

[Command determination process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, processing is performed to control the effects to be executed in the graphic display unit 341, etc., according to the type of command received.

Figures 58 to 60 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the command determination process procedure in this embodiment.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Figure 58, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3301). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3301: Yes), it proceeds to step S3302; if it has not received a command (step S3301: No), it terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3302>
If a command is received (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a general diagram variation pattern command (step S3302). If the MPU 51 receives a general diagram variation pattern command (step S3302: Yes), it proceeds to step S3303. If the received command is not a general diagram variation pattern command (step S3302: No), it proceeds to step S3307.

The regular symbol variation pattern command includes information regarding the variation display time of the regular symbols on the regular symbol display unit 361, the lottery results in the regular symbol win lottery, and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode, low-frequency support mode).

<Step S3303>
If a general diagram variation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is a high-frequency support mode based on the information regarding the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) included in the received general diagram variation pattern command (step S3303).

If the MPU 51 is in high-frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), it terminates the command determination process. Alternatively, if the MPU 51 is in high-frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), it may set the high-frequency support mode flag to ON before terminating the command determination process.

On the other hand, if MPU 41 is not in high-frequency support mode (step S3303: No), i.e., in low-frequency support mode, it proceeds to step S3304. Note that if MPU 51 is in low-frequency support mode (step S3303: No), and the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON, it may set the high-frequency support mode flag to OFF before terminating the command determination process.

<Step S3304>
If it is not in high-frequency support mode (step S3303: No), i.e., in low-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is set to ON (step S3304). In the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when a jackpot game is started, and to OFF in step S2252 when a jackpot game ends.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON (step S3304: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to OFF (step S3304: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3305.

<Step S3305>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot is in progress is set to off (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the lottery for the regular win for the regular win game to be started is a long-open win, based on the information regarding the result of the regular win lottery included in the received regular win variation pattern command (step S3305).

If the result of the lottery for a regular win in the regular game being initiated is a long-open win (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3306. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for a regular win in the regular game being initiated is not a long-open win (step S3305: No), that is, if the result of the lottery for a regular win is a short-open win or a miss, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3306>
If the result of the lottery for a regular win in the regular game that is about to start is a long-open win (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long-open flag to ON (S3306) and terminates the command determination process. That is, the long-open flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the lottery for a regular win in the regular game in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), which is neither a big win game nor a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), is a long-open win in which a long-open regular game is executed, allowing game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 due to the long opening of the electric mechanism 315b. This long-open flag is referenced in step S3308, described later, when determining whether the opening mode of the second prize slot 315 in a regular win game in the normal game state is a long-open.

<Step S3307>
If the received command is not a regular pattern variation command (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an electric mechanism opening command indicating that the opening of the electric mechanism 315b allows game balls 99 to enter the second prize pocket 315 (the regular winning game begins) (step S3307).

If the received command is a general pattern variation command (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3308. If the received command is not a general pattern variation command (step S3307: No), the process proceeds to step S3312 in Figure 59.

<Step S3308>
If the received command is a regular pattern variation command (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the long-open flag, which indicates that the lottery result in the regular pattern win lottery is a long-open win, is set to ON (step S3308).

If the long-open flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), that is, if the lottery result in the general drawing is a long-open win, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3309. On the other hand, if the long-open flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), that is, if the lottery result in the general drawing is a short-open win, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the long-open flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long-open flag to OFF (step S3309), executes a process to start the long-open electric mechanism performance (step S3310), and then proceeds to step S3311.

The "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect is a feature that clearly indicates to the player, via the symbol display unit 341 or the like, that the electric mechanism 315b is in its long-open state. Here, Figure 61(A) shows an example of the screen on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect. In the example of Figure 61(A), during the execution of the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect, the symbol display unit 341 displays the text image "Hold Charge Chance" indicating that the second prize slot 315 is in its long-open state, and the text image "Put the ball in the tulip below" prompting the player to shoot the game ball 99 towards the second prize slot 315. Of course, the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect is not limited to the example in Figure 61(A) and may take other forms. For example, the electric mechanism opening animation may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, or it may perform sound effects using the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the animations on the symbol display unit 341.

The process for initiating the long-opening electric mechanism animation is executed only when the long-opening flag is set to ON. However, as mentioned above, the long-opening flag is not set to ON during jackpot play, probability variation play, or time-saving play (high-frequency support mode). In other words, the long-opening electric mechanism animation is executed when the second prize slot 315 is fully open during normal play (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode). It is not executed when the second prize slot 315 is only partially open during normal play (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode), during jackpot play, or during probability variation or time-saving play (high-frequency support modes). Of course, the long-opening electric mechanism animation may also be executed during probability variation or time-saving play, in addition to when the second prize slot 315 is only partially open during normal play (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode).

<Step S3311>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 58, in step S3311, the MPU 51 sets the "Electric Device Long Open" flag to ON, indicating that the electric device 315b is in a long open state, and terminates the command determination process. The "Electric Device Long Open" flag is referenced in step S3319 of Figure 59, described later, to determine whether a game ball 99 that enters the second prize slot 315 is intended for the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315.

<Step S3312>
If the received command is not a regular symbol variation pattern command (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol shift command, as shown in Figure 59 (step S3312). A special symbol shift command is a command that indicates that the special symbol win/loss information, which shows the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first special symbol reserve storage area REB1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see Figure 8), has shifted when the number of first special symbol reserves N or the number of second special symbol reserves M decreases due to the start of a special symbol game (display of special symbol variation).

If the received command is a special-purpose shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3313. If the received command is not a special-purpose shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3317.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special figure data setting process (step S3313) and the special figure data image display process (step S3314), and then proceeds to step S3315. In this embodiment, the special figure data setting process (step S3313) and the special figure data image display process (step S3314) are executed in the same manner as the special figure data setting process (step S3108) and the special figure data image display process (step S3109) in the command determination process shown in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above.

<Steps S3315 and S3316>
In step S3315, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the long-open prize counter is 0. The value of the long-open prize counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special feature games among the second special feature games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is open for a long time (during the execution of the long-open regular feature game).

If the value of the long-open prize counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, if there are no unexecuted second special feature games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 while the second prize slot 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long-open regular feature game), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3317. On the other hand, if the value of the long-open prize counter is not 0 (step S3315: No), that is, if there are any unexecuted second special feature games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 while the second prize slot 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long-open regular feature game), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long-open prize counter (step S3316) and terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3317 and S3318>
If the value of the long-open prize counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, if there are no unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long-open regular symbol win game), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the short-open prize counter is 0 or not (step S3317). The value of the short-open prize counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is short-open (during the execution of the short-open regular symbol win game).

If the value of the short-open prize counter is 0 (step S3317: Yes), that is, if there are no unexecuted second special feature games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 while the second prize slot 315 is short-open (during the execution of the short-open regular prize game), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the value of the short-open prize counter is not 0 (step S3317: No), that is, if there are any unexecuted second special feature games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 while the second prize slot 315 is short-open (during the execution of the short-open regular prize game), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the short-open prize counter (step S3318) and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3319>
If the received command is not a special feature shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S3319). As described above, the first special feature hold command includes information indicating that the number of first special feature holds N for the first special feature will increase, information regarding the number of holds N after the increase, and information regarding the fluctuation pattern for the increasing holds (fluctuation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery).

If the received command is a first special-purpose print hold command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3320. If the received command is not a first special-purpose print hold command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3323.

<Steps S3320-S3322>
If the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special feature hold information update process (step S3320) and the first special feature hold image display process (step S3321). In this embodiment, the first special feature hold information update process (step S3320) and the first special feature hold image display process (step S3321) are executed in the same manner as the first special feature hold information update process (step S3111) and the first special feature hold image display process (step S3112) in the command determination process shown in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes the pending continuous performance setting process (step S3322) and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the consecutive hold animation setting process is a process that sets consecutive hold animations for a predetermined hold in the first special symbol hold, which explicitly or suggest the likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot. These animations are performed consecutively in a predetermined number of first special symbol games leading up to the first special symbol game in which the predetermined hold becomes the relevant variation, or in the second special symbol game for a predetermined number of holds executed before the predetermined hold. Details of the consecutive hold animation setting process will be explained later with reference to Figures 62 to 65.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a series of hold animations are performed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special feature games, if the animation performed in each first special feature game is performed in a single first special feature game for a single hold that is executed before the predetermined hold, it does not strictly qualify as a "sequential animation," but for convenience, it will be included in the series of hold animations.

<Step S3323>
If the received command is not a first special symbol hold command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol hold command (step S3323). As described above, the second special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the number of second special symbol holds M for the second special symbol game will increase, information regarding the number of holds M after the increase, and information regarding the variation pattern for the increasing holds (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery).

If the received command is a second special print hold command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3324. If the received command is not a second special print hold command (step S3323: No), the process proceeds to step S3330 in Figure 60.

<Steps S3324 and S3325>
If the received command is a second special feature hold command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special feature hold information update process (step S3324) and the second special feature hold image display process (step S3325), and then proceeds to S3326. In this embodiment, the second special feature hold information update process (step S3324) and the second special feature hold image display process (step S3325) are executed in the same manner as the second special feature hold information update process (step S3114) and the second special feature hold image display process (step S3115) in the command determination process shown in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3326>
In step S3326, the MPU 51 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to ON. The "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag indicates that the second prize slot 315 is in a long open state (a long open regular winning game is being executed). Therefore, when the MPU 51 receives the second special symbol hold command, if the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to ON, it can determine that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 is triggered by the long opening of the second prize slot 315 (execution of a long open regular winning game). On the other hand, when the MPU 51 receives the second special symbol hold command, if the electric mechanism long-opening flag is set to off, it can determine that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315 is not triggered by the long opening of the second prize opening 315 (execution of a long-opening regular symbol win game), but rather by the short opening of the second prize opening 315 (execution of a short-opening regular symbol win game).

If the MPU 51 flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to ON (step S3326: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3327. If the electric mechanism is fully open flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to OFF (step S3326: No), the process proceeds to step S3329.

<Step S3327>
If the flag indicating that the electric mechanism is in full open state is set to ON (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the full open prize counter (step S3327) and proceeds to step S3328. In this way, the value of the full open prize counter is increased by 1 when the second prize opening 315 is in full open state (a full open regular prize game is being executed) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special prize game has not reached the upper limit, and 99 game balls are entered into the second prize opening 315. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the value of the full open prize counter is decreased by 1 when the second special prize game is executed triggered by 99 game balls entering the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is in full open state (step S3316). In other words, the value of the long-open prize counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special feature games among the second special feature games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is open for an extended period (during the execution of a long-open regular feature game).

<Step S3328>
In step S3328, the MPU 51 performs a second special effect setting process to execute a second special effect in the second special effect game.

Here, the second special feature is executed on the condition that the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" flag is set to ON. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" flag is not set to ON during jackpot gameplay, probability variation gameplay, or time-saving gameplay (high-frequency support mode). It is set to ON when the result of the regular jackpot lottery in normal gameplay (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode) is a long-opening jackpot. In other words, the second special feature is executed in a long-opening regular jackpot game, which is performed based on the result of the regular jackpot lottery in normal gameplay (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode) being a long-opening jackpot, triggered by the arrival of game ball 99 in the second prize entry point 315.

Of course, the electric mechanism's long-opening animation may also be executed based on the entry of 99 game balls into the second prize slot 315 during the short-opening of the second prize slot 315 in normal gameplay (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode), or during the opening of the second prize slot 315 in probability-changing gameplay or time-saving gameplay.

Here, Figures 61(B) and 61(C) show examples of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special feature animation. Specifically, Figure 61(B) is an example of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special feature animation when the hold-continuous animation is not executed after the second special feature animation is executed, and Figure 61(C) is an example of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special feature animation when the hold-continuous animation is executed before the execution of the second special feature animation and the hold-continuous animation is executed after the execution of the second special feature animation (see Figure 56(B)).

In the examples of Figures 61(B) and 61(C), during the execution of the second special effect, the symbol display unit 341 displays the text image "Reserve Charge Released" and the text image "If you hit a jackpot while Reserve Charge is released, you will enter a probability variation mode!".

The text image "Hold Charge Released" clearly indicates to the player that the variation display is being executed when the second prize slot 315 is fully opened during a long-open normal-play game, triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315. This "Hold Charge Released" text image is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 in an area adjacent to the aforementioned special symbol variation image display area 75 and the second special symbol hold image display area 77, without obstructing the variation display of the decorative symbols. This makes it possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player that the second special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol data images (the special symbol game image and the second special symbol hold image) displayed in the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the second special symbol hold image display area 77 is the second special symbol game triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 during the long-open state, without obstructing the variation display of the decorative symbols.

The text image, "If you hit a jackpot while the reserve charge is released, you will enter a probability variation mode!", is displayed to the player as a probability variation jackpot, provided that the decorative symbols stop and display as jackpot symbols (e.g., matching numbers) in the special symbol game. This text image is displayed in the upper adjacent area of the symbol display unit 341, in a location that does not obstruct the display of the changing decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315, if the lottery result is a jackpot, there is no distribution of a normal jackpot; it is always a probability-increasing jackpot (see Figure 57). Therefore, in this embodiment, as a second special effect triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 during a long-open normal jackpot game in the normal game state, it becomes possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot type is a probability-increasing jackpot when the lottery result in a jackpot game is a jackpot, without interfering with the display of the changing decorative symbols.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in Figures 61(B) and 61(C), when the second special feature is executed, the special feature data images (the special feature game image and the second special feature hold image) are displayed in the special feature variation image display area 75 and the second special feature hold image display area 77 of the symbol display unit 341. The special feature game image displayed in the special feature variation image display area 75 indicates that it is a variation display for the second special feature game, and the second special feature hold image displayed in the second special feature hold image display area 77 indicates that the right to execute the second special feature game is reserved. The special feature data images displayed in the special feature variation image display area 75 and the second special feature hold image display area 77 may be displayed in a different manner than the special feature data images when the second special feature is not executed. In other words, the special symbol data image when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 during a long opening can be displayed in a different manner than the special symbol data image when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 during a short opening. In this case, not only is the special effect for the second special symbol executed, but the display manner of the special symbol data image also makes it clear to the player that the change display and hold are for a game ball 99 entering the second prize slot 315 during a long opening. This makes it easier to distinguish between the change display and hold for a game ball 99 entering the second prize slot 315 during a short opening.

Furthermore, unlike the second special effect shown in Figure 61(B), the second special effect shown in Figure 61(C) displays the captured image 78 in the lower left region (the region adjacent to the decorative symbol display area) that does not obstruct the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341.

The captured image 78 is the display screen of the continuous hold animation that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special animation game before the execution of the second special animation, as will be described later. In this embodiment, the image is displayed as a reduced-size image (an image with a changed size) of the animation screen while maintaining its appearance. This captured image 78 is displayed when the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special animation game before the execution of the second special animation, and when the continuous hold animation is being executed during the first special animation game after the execution of the second special animation (see Figure 56(B)). In other words, the captured image 78 explicitly or suggests during the execution of the second special animation that the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special animation game before the execution of the second special animation, and that the continuous hold animation will be executed during the first special animation game after the execution of the second special animation.

Thus, in this embodiment, the captured image 78 clearly or suggests that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. Therefore, the possibility of the player forgetting that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced, and the player can understand that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. As a result, even if the continuous hold animation is resumed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation, the player's feeling of discomfort regarding the continuous hold animation being performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was performed before the execution of the second special animation after the completion of the second special animation.

In particular, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, players become more engrossed in whether or not the game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Also, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 more easily (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening, resulting in more second special symbol games in which the second special symbol animation is executed (the execution time of the second special symbol animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold animation before the execution of the second special feature animation (when the second special feature animation begins) and the resumption of the continuous hold animation upon the end of the second special feature animation becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game during which the second special feature animation is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a continuous hold animation was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature animation is highly effective.

Furthermore, since the image is a reduced version of the screen of the hold-continuous performance that was being performed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance, the type of hold-continuous performance being performed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of hold-continuous performance being performed during the first special symbol game after the completion of the second special symbol performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, although the details will be described later, four types of hold-continuous performances are set: same-color symbol performance, chance symbol performance, mini-character performance, and zone performance (mode performance) (see Figures 64 and 65). In the capture image 78 shown in Figure 61(C), it is clearly indicated or suggested that during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance, a chance symbol performance was being performed where the decorative symbol stopped at "113" (see Figure 65), which is a chance symbol. This allows players to understand not only that a continuous hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, but also the type of continuous hold animation. Therefore, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable when the continuous hold animation resumes during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was running before the second special feature animation ends is further prevented.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the captured image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341. However, it is preferable to display the captured image across the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation, or both. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change animation, where the stage animation (background animation) from the previous special feature game is changed in the current special feature game. By displaying the captured image across the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation, the transition from the execution of the second special feature animation in the second special feature game to the execution of the hold-continuous animation in the first special feature game can be performed smoothly and without any sense of incongruity.

In this embodiment, the captured image 78 was displayed as a reduced image in the lower left region of the pattern display unit 341. However, it may also be displayed in other regions, for example, outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed. By displaying the captured image 78 as a reduced image outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed, the display of the captured image 78 is prevented from obstructing the visibility of the changing decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the captured image 78 may be displayed in its original form without being reduced in size, as long as it does not obstruct the visibility of the changing decorative symbols. For example, as described later, when a continuous hold animation is performed by the stopping of a specific perfect miss (same-colored symbols) or a predetermined perfect miss (chance symbol), displaying the specific perfect miss (same-colored symbols) or the predetermined perfect miss (chance symbol) on the back side of the decorative symbols prevents obstruction of the visibility of the changing decorative symbols even when the captured image 78 is displayed in its original form without being reduced in size. When the captured image 78 is displayed in its original form without being reduced in size, the size of the captured image 78 is set to be large, making it easy for the player to recognize that the captured image 78 is being displayed.

Furthermore, the captured image 78 may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special feature game as an image with a lower density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) than the image of the first special feature continuous performance, for example as a lower density image than the decorative symbols, preferably as an image with a density that allows the image of the lower layer below the captured image 78 to be seen, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the captured image 78 to be seen. That is, the captured image 78 may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as a modified version of the image of the hold continuous performance that was being performed in the first special feature game, similar to when it is displayed as a reduced image. In this way, by displaying the captured image 78 as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special feature continuous performance, that is, as a modified version of the image of the hold continuous performance that was being performed in the first special feature game, it becomes possible to display the captured image 78 without being restricted by the display area of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to overlay the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the captured image 78, not only outside the fluctuation area of the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the second special game. Furthermore, by overlaying the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the captured image 78, it becomes possible to easily view the captured image 78 even when the player is intently watching the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, by displaying the captured image 78 on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special game as an image with a density that allows the image of the lower layer below the captured image 78 to be visible, or as an image with a density that allows the back side of the captured image 78 to be visible, it becomes possible to see the changing display of the decorative symbols even when the captured image 78 is displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbols. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the captured image 78 even when they are intently watching the changing display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, by enabling the display of the captured image 78 without being restricted by the display area of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341, it becomes possible to visually confirm the display of the decorative symbols even when the reduction ratio of the captured image 78 is set high. Even when the captured image 78 is displayed without reduction, it becomes possible to visually confirm the display of the decorative symbols. As a result, even when the captured image 78 is displayed as an image with lower density than the image of the first special symbol continuous performance, the size of the captured image 78 can be set larger, ensuring sufficient visibility of the captured image 78.

When the captured image 78 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special feature game as an image of a lower layer than the captured image 78 with a visible density, or as an image of the back side of the captured image 78 with a visible density, it is also possible to display only the outline of the captured image 78. For example, when the first special feature continuous performance is displayed by a combination of decorative symbols that stop and are displayed, such as a chance symbol performance or a same-color symbol performance (see Figure 65), the captured image 78 may be set to display only the outline that allows recognition of the type of decorative symbol (only the outline of the numbers). In this way, when the captured image 78 is displayed as an outline that allows recognition of the type of decorative symbol, it becomes possible to see the changing display of the decorative symbol even if the captured image 78 is displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the captured image 78 even when they are intently watching the changing display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the captured image 78 only needs to clearly or suggest that a continuous hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation was performed, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation was performed. There are no particular restrictions on the timing of the capture during the continuous hold animation. For example, the timing of the capture during the continuous hold animation may be at the start of the continuous hold animation (when the decorative symbols start to change), during its execution (while the decorative symbols are displayed), or at its end (when the decorative symbols stop changing).

Furthermore, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, is not limited to the display of the capture image 78, but may be done by any other method as long as the variation of the decorative symbols is visible. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 78, such as a text image, icon image, character image, or an image combining two or more of these. In other words, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as an image that has been changed to an image different from the animation image of the continuous hold animation that was performed in the first special feature game. In this way, by displaying the explicit or suggestive information as an image that differs from the image used in the continuous hold animation performed in the first special game, it becomes possible to display it in various positions on the symbol display unit 341 without obstructing the visibility of the changing decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, the type of specific image may be associated with the type of the consecutive hold animation. By associating the type of specific image with the type of consecutive hold animation in this way, it becomes possible not only to determine that a consecutive hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, but also to identify the type of consecutive hold animation that was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, based on the type of specific image displayed.

Furthermore, even when explicitly indicating or suggesting, by displaying a specific image, that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, the specific image may be displayed as a lower density image than the decorative symbols, preferably as an image of a lower layer than the capture image 78 with a visible density, or as an image of the back side of the capture image 78 with a visible density, or as an image showing only the outline. Moreover, even when displaying the specific image in these display modes, the specific image may be superimposed on the decorative symbols that are displayed in the second special feature game, either in front of or behind the decorative symbols, or displayed outside the variable area of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, while the captured image 78 and specific images may be displayed for the entire duration of the execution of the second special symbol game, they may also be displayed for only a portion of the execution period, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or for both a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game. There are no particular limitations on the display period of the captured image 78 and specific images. Also, when the second special symbol game is executed multiple times consecutively, the captured image 78 and specific images do not need to be displayed for all of the second special symbol games. For example, they may be displayed only for the first second special symbol game executed, only for the last second special symbol game executed, or for both the first and last second special symbol games. The number of times the captured image 78 and specific images are displayed may differ from the number of times the second special symbol special effects are executed.

Furthermore, the second special effect is not limited to the examples in Figures 61(B) and 61(C), and may take other forms. For example, the second special effect may display other images, such as character images, in place of or in addition to the text images, or it may perform a predetermined sound effect using the speaker 26 in place of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

Furthermore, the second special effect only needs to be an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a bonus will be granted to the player when certain conditions are met. It is not necessarily required that the effect be conditional on the decorative symbols stopping and displaying a winning symbol (e.g., matching numbers), and that the type of jackpot when this condition is met is a probability-increasing jackpot. Examples of predetermined conditions include the decorative symbols becoming a "reach" (a near-winning combination) or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those where the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 is always a probability-increasing jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied not only to loop probability-increasing machines like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, but also to ST machines such as V-ST machines and Type 1 & 2 mixed machines, where the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 includes wins other than probability-increasing jackpots.

<Step S3329>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 59, if the flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to off (step S3326: No), that is, if the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 is triggered by a short opening (execution of a short-open regular winning game), then the value of the short-open prize counter is increased by 1 (step S3329), and the command determination process is terminated. In this way, the value of the short-open prize counter is increased by 1 when the second prize slot 315 is in a short opening state (execution of a short-open regular winning game) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special game has not reached the upper limit when a game ball 99 is entered into the second prize slot 315. On the other hand, the value of the short-opening prize counter is used in setting the variation type (performance pattern) to be executed in the special feature game when the number of special feature games in which the reserve continuous performance is executed increases due to the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during a short opening, in order to avoid the inconvenience caused by the chance event performance as a reserve continuous performance being executed consecutively in four or more special feature games (the jackpot confirmation performance being executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss), as will be explained in detail later (see step S3655 in Figure 71 and step S3664 in Figure 72).

<Step S3330>
If the received command is not a second special feature hold command (step S3323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an electric feature close command, as shown in Figure 60. The electric feature close command is a command indicating that the electric feature 315b has been closed, and is set in step S1817 of the regular feature hit game control process shown in Figure 25, which is executed by the main control device 4 when the electric feature 315b is closed.

If the received command is an electric mechanism closing command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3331. If the received command is not an electric mechanism closing command (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3335.

<Step S3331>
If the received command is an electric mechanism closing command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the electric mechanism long-open flag is set to ON (step S3331). The electric mechanism long-open flag indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is in a long-open state due to the execution of a long-open winning game, and is set to ON in step S3311 of the command determination process when an electric mechanism open command is received.

If the MPU 51 flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to ON (step S3331: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3332. If the electric mechanism is fully open flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to OFF (step S3331: No), the process proceeds to step S3334.

<Steps S3332 and S3333>
If the "Electric mechanism long open" flag is set to ON (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process to terminate the electric mechanism long open animation (see Figure 61(A)) which clearly indicates or suggests to the player that the electric mechanism 315b is in a long open state due to the execution of a long open winning game (step S3332), sets the "Electric mechanism long open" flag to OFF (step S3333), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3334>
If the long-opening flag for the electric mechanism is set to off (step S3331: No), the MPU 51 sets the short-opening/closing flag to on (step S3334) and terminates the command determination process. The short-opening/closing flag indicates that the electric mechanism 315b, which was briefly open during a short-opening regular winning game, has been closed. This short-opening/closing flag is used in step S3652 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Figure 71 to determine whether or not the chance event will be executed consecutively for four or more special game rounds, as the short-opening of the electric mechanism 315b causes the game ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is not an electric mechanism closing command (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special feature variation pattern command. If the received command is a special feature variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3336. On the other hand, if the received command is not a special feature variation pattern command (step S3335: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S3340) and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is a special feature variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (performance pattern) setting process to set the variation type (performance pattern) to be executed in the special feature game (step S3336), and then proceeds to step S3337. Details of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 67 to 72.

<Step S3337>
In step S3337, the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process to set the stop display combinations of decorative symbols in the special game, and then proceeds to step S3338. Details of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 73 and 74.

<Step S3338>
In step S3338, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter and proceeds to step S3339. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. The variation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the variation display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3339>
In step S3339, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the variation type (performance pattern type) and the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341, and then terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (performance pattern type) set in step S3336 and the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols set in step S3337. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores performance images and variation images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes performance display and variation display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the variation type (performance pattern) and combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the pattern display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the display of multiple decorative patterns (for example, three) while a preset display time for variation has elapsed, and then sequentially stops the display of the variations of the multiple decorative patterns. While the decorative patterns are being displayed, various effects corresponding to the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed in the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, etc.

[Hold Continuous Performance Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for the pending continuous performance setting process, which is executed in step S3322 of the command determination process in Figure 59, will be explained with reference to Figures 62 to 65. The pending continuous performance setting process is the process of setting the type of pending continuous performance when it is possible to start a pending continuous performance. Here, Figures 62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the pending continuous performance setting process.

<Step S3401>
In the pending continuous performance setting process, in step S3401, the MPU 51 first determines whether the flag for "in-progress jackpot game" is active, that is, whether the first special symbol game is playable. The flag for "in-progress jackpot game" is set to ON in the command determination process if it is determined that a jackpot game start command has been received (step S3118 in Figure 47), and is set to OFF if it is determined that a jackpot game end command has been received (step S3137 in Figure 48).

If the jackpot game flag is set to ON (Step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the continuous performance setting process for the held symbols. On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is set to OFF (Step S3401: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
If the game is not in a jackpot state (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the game is in high-frequency support mode, is set to ON (step S3402). In other words, in step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in high-frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of Figure 34 when a jackpot game ends during the game state transition process. It is set to OFF in step S2307 of Figure 33 when the game state transitions from a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state, or in step S2326 of Figure 34 when the game state transitions from a time-saving game state to a normal game state.

Here, in step S3402, the reason for determining whether or not the game is in high-frequency support mode is to ensure that the continuous hold animation is executed in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) and not in the probability variation game state or the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode). Of course, the continuous hold animation may also be executed in either or both of the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode).

If the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), i.e., the system is in high-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 terminates the pending continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), i.e., the system is in low-frequency support mode instead of high-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
If the frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S3402: No), that is, if it is in low frequency support mode instead of high frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S3403). The pending continuous performance execution flag is a flag that indicates that a pending continuous performance has started, and is set to on in step S3611 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 68 below when it is planned that a pending continuous performance will be executed in the first special feature game that is executed immediately following the first special feature game in which the pending continuous performance starts.

If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the pending continuous performance setting process because there is no need to set the pending continuous performance since it is already being executed. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3404.

<Step S3404>
If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special performance execution flag is set to on (step S3404). The second special performance execution flag is a flag that indicates that the second special performance has started, and is set to on in step S3636 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 68 of Figure 70 described later, when it is scheduled that the second special performance will be executed in the second special game that is executed immediately after the second special game in which the second special performance starts.

If the flag for executing the second special effect is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the continuous hold effect setting process because the second special effect is already being executed and there is no need to set the continuous hold effect. On the other hand, if the flag for executing the second special effect is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3405.

<Step S3405>
If the flag for executing the second special feature animation is set to off (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the number of reserved first special feature games N after the increase is 2 or more, when the number of reserved rights to execute the first special feature game increases due to the entry of a game ball 99 into the first prize slot 314. That is, the MPU 51 sets a reserved continuous animation, with one of the conditions being that there is at least one reserved right for the first special feature game when a game ball 99 enters the first prize slot 314.

If the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol after the increase N is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3406. In other words, the continuous reserved ball animation can be initiated when a game ball 99 enters the first prize entry point 314 while the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol N is between 1 and 3.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N in the first special symbol, after the increase due to the entry of 99 game balls into the first prize slot 314, is not 2 or more (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 terminates the reserved ball continuous performance setting process. In other words, the reserved ball continuous performance is not triggered by the entry of 99 game balls into the first prize slot 314 when the number of reserved balls N is 0.

<Step S3406>
If the increased number of reserved first special symbols N is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the display time of the reserved first special symbol game is 30 seconds or more, based on the information regarding the variation pattern (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery) for the increasing reserved symbols included in the first special symbol reserved command. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the reserved symbol that could trigger the start of a reserved continuous performance is a first special symbol game in which a performance involving a reach should be executed.

If the MPU 51 determines that the display time for the variation of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or longer (step S3406: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a reach-related animation should be performed, the process proceeds to step S3407.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that the display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold should execute a completely losing animation without a reach, the process proceeds to step S3410.

<Steps S3407-S3409>
If the display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or longer (step S3406: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a reach-inducing animation should be performed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is a jackpot or not, based on the information regarding the variation pattern for the increased hold (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery) included in the first special symbol hold command (step S3407).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased number of reserved symbols is a jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a reserved symbol continuous performance setting process based on the reserved symbol continuous performance pattern type setting table for jackpot performances (see Figure 64) described later, according to the number of reserved symbols N in the first special symbol game (step S3408), and then proceeds to step S3411 in Figure 63.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased number of reserved symbols is not a jackpot (step S3407: No), that is, if a losing reach animation should be performed, the MPU 51 performs a reserved symbol continuous animation setting process based on the reserved symbol continuous animation pattern type setting table for losing reaches (see Figure 64), described later, according to the number of reserved symbols N (step S3409), and then proceeds to step S3411 in Figure 63.

<Step S3410>
If the display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased number of reserved symbols is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased number of reserved symbols should execute a completely losing animation without a reach, the MPU 51 executes a reserved continuous animation setting process based on the reserved continuous animation pattern type setting table for completely losing reaches (see Figure 64) described later, according to the number of reserved symbols N (step S3410), and proceeds to step S3411 in Figure 63.

Here, Figures 64(A) to 64(C) show examples of the retention continuous performance pattern type setting tables. Specifically, Figure 64(A) is the retention continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the number of first special symbol retentions N after the increase is 4, Figure 64(B) is the retention continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the number of first special symbol retentions N after the increase is 3, and Figure 64(C) is the retention continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the number of first special symbol retentions N after the increase is 2.

As shown in Figures 64(A) to 64(C), there are four types of hold-continuous performance patterns: same-colored symbol performance, chance symbol performance, mini-character performance, and zone performance (mode performance). In Figures 64(A) to 64(C), "same-colored symbol 3 times" means that the same-colored symbol performance is executed consecutively in 3 first special symbol games, "same-colored symbol 2 times" means that the same-colored symbol performance is executed consecutively in 2 first special symbol games, and "same-colored symbol 1 time" means that the same-colored symbol performance is executed only in 1 first special symbol game. Similarly, "chance symbol X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 4), "mini-character performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3), and "zone performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3) mean that the chance symbol performance, mini-character performance, or zone performance is executed in X first special symbol games. In other words, "○○X times" means that a single type of consecutive hold animation is executed consecutively a predetermined number of times during the first special feature game. Of course, the consecutive hold animation is not limited to a single type of consecutive hold animation executed consecutively a predetermined number of times during the first special feature game; multiple types of consecutive hold animations (for example, mini-character animations and zone animations) may be executed simultaneously in a single first special feature game, as long as the combination is feasible as an animation.

Furthermore, regarding the consecutive hold animations, regardless of the number of reserved symbols (N) in the first special symbol sequence, the chance symbol animation is set to be the most frequently triggered compared to other consecutive hold animations such as the same-colored symbol animation. On the other hand, the zone animation (mode animation) is set to be the least frequently triggered among the consecutive hold animations.

Furthermore, in Figures 64(A) to 64(C), "-" indicates that the consecutive hold animation is not set. The "-" where the consecutive hold animation is not set accounts for the majority of the random number distribution, regardless of the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol, N. Therefore, the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation being performed is lower than the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation not being performed. Moreover, the fewer the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol, N, the greater the random number distribution for the "-" where the consecutive hold animation is not set. In other words, the fewer the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol, N, the lower the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation being performed, and the more the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol, N, N, the higher the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation being performed.

Here, the same-colored pattern effect, chance symbol effect, mini-character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) are effects that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol game for the hold that triggered the start of the consecutive hold effect is a jackpot. For example, "Chance Symbol 4 Times," in which the chance symbol effect is performed four times in a row during the first special symbol game, can only be set when the number of first special symbol holds N is 4 and the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (see Figure 64 (A)). It is not set when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (a losing reach or a complete miss), so "Chance Symbol 4 Times" is a jackpot confirmation effect that clearly indicates the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. On the other hand, all consecutive hold effect effects other than "Chance Symbol 4 Times" are effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. In other words, the consecutive hold animations other than "four chance symbols," such as the same-colored symbol animation, the mini-character animation, and the zone animation (mode animation), do not constitute a guaranteed jackpot animation that explicitly indicates a jackpot result, even if they are executed four or more times.

Thus, by clearly indicating or suggesting the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special game, which triggered the continuous hold animation, will be a jackpot, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the continuous hold animation. Furthermore, when the continuous hold animation is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the jackpot lottery result will transition to a special game state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, excluding the "four chance symbols" that clearly indicate a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot in consecutive hold-and-reserve animations is set as follows, assuming the same number of times the first special symbol game is played in which the consecutive hold-and-reserve animation is executed: for example, the mini-character animation is set to the lowest probability, the same-colored symbol animation and the chance symbol animation are set to roughly the same (identical or nearly identical) level, and the zone animation (mode animation) is set to the highest probability.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the continuous hold animation is scheduled to be executed consecutively for multiple first special symbol games, in the second special symbol game, which is executed based on the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 by the execution of a short-opening normal symbol win game, the second special symbol special animation is not executed, and the continuous hold animation continues to be executed. In this case, when the number of times the continuous hold animation is executed in the first special symbol game and the number of times the continuous hold animation is executed in the second special symbol game are added together, the number of special symbol games in which the continuous hold animation is executed may be four or more.

Here, if a chance symbol animation is being performed as part of a continuous hold animation, and the number of special game rounds in which the continuous hold animation is performed exceeds four, then, as mentioned above, the continuous hold animation becomes a jackpot confirmation animation, clearly indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Therefore, if a jackpot is not included in the jackpot lottery results for special game rounds performed from the fourth round onward after the start of the predetermined chance symbol animation as part of the continuous hold animation, then if the chance symbol animation continues to be performed for four or more consecutive rounds, an inconsistency will arise between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content clearly indicated by the continuous hold animation.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a chance symbol animation is being performed as a continuous hold animation, and the number of special game rounds in which the continuous hold animation is performed is four or more, the continuous hold animation is changed to an animation other than the chance symbol animation, for example, a same-colored symbol animation that does not explicitly indicate a jackpot even if it is performed four or more times, before the chance symbol animation is performed consecutively in the four special game rounds. This prevents inconsistencies between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the continuous hold animation.

As mentioned above, even if a consecutive hold animation other than a chance symbol animation is executed for four or more consecutive first-symbol games, it does not constitute a guaranteed jackpot animation, but rather an animation that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. Therefore, even if the number of special-symbol games in which a consecutive hold animation is executed exceeds four, if an animation other than a chance symbol animation is being executed as a consecutive hold animation, the type of consecutive hold animation will continue to be executed without changing the type of consecutive hold animation. Of course, even if a type of consecutive hold animation does not cause any problems when executed consecutively for a predetermined number of special-symbol games (for example, four times), the type of consecutive hold animation may be changed before the scheduled number of special-symbol games are executed.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot between the predetermined consecutive hold animation (the "chance symbol" animation) before the change and the specific consecutive hold animation (the "same-colored symbol" animation) after the change is set to be the same or approximately the same. For example, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the "chance symbol" animation and the "same-colored symbol" animation is set to be between -5% and +5%, and the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the "chance symbol" animation and the "same-colored symbol" animation is set to be between -2.5% and +2.5%. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot between the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change and the specific consecutive hold animation after the change is set to be the same or approximately the same.

In this way, by setting the expected probability of a jackpot for the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change and the specific consecutive hold animation after the change to be the same or nearly the same, when the type of consecutive hold animation is changed, for example from a chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, the expected probability of a jackpot for the changed consecutive hold animation does not decrease significantly. Therefore, a decrease in the expected probability of a jackpot due to a change in the consecutive hold animation is prevented, thus preventing a decline in player interest and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Here, as mentioned above, the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold animation, the "chance symbol" animation, is set higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold animation, the "same-colored symbol" animation. That is, in this embodiment, the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is set higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change. By setting the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change, the occurrence of problems is appropriately avoided when a predetermined consecutive hold animation (e.g., the "chance symbol" animation), which has a high probability of causing problems, is displayed consecutively.

Furthermore, not only when changing the type of consecutive hold animation to prevent inconsistencies between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the consecutive hold animation, but also when changing the type of consecutive hold animation, if the display time for the variation of the hold for the first special symbol game that triggered the start of the consecutive hold animation is long, that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for that hold is a jackpot, or if a reach animation with a high probability of a jackpot is executed, the type of consecutive hold animation may be changed so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change compared to the predetermined consecutive hold animation type before the change. For example, if the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the mini-character animation with the lowest probability of a jackpot, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a chance eye animation, same-colored symbol animation, or zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of a jackpot than the mini-character animation. If the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the chance eye animation or same-colored symbol animation, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of a jackpot than the chance eye animation and same-colored symbol animation. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the modified specific consecutive hold animation and the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the modification is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

In this way, by changing the type of consecutive hold animation so that the changed animation has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the pre-changed consecutive hold animation, the perceived probability of a jackpot suggested to the player by the change in the type of consecutive hold animation is improved. This allows players to enjoy the game while anticipating a change in the type of consecutive hold animation when the pre-changed animation is displayed. Furthermore, when the type of consecutive hold animation is changed from the pre-changed animation to the new consecutive hold animation, players can enjoy the game with a greater expectation that the jackpot lottery result in the special feature game where the changed consecutive hold animation is executed will be a jackpot, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the zone effect (mode effect) with the highest probability of a big win has the lowest selection rate among the consecutive hold effects. That is, in this embodiment, when the type of consecutive hold effect is changed from a predetermined consecutive hold effect such as a chance symbol effect or a same-color symbol effect to a specific consecutive hold effect such as a zone effect (mode effect), it is conceivable to set a high selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold effect with a low probability of a big win before the change, and a high selection rate for the specific consecutive hold effect with a high probability of a big win after the change.

By setting a higher selection rate for the predetermined consecutive reserve animation with a low probability of winning the jackpot before the change, and a higher selection rate for a specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot after the change, the frequency of the predetermined consecutive reserve animation before the change increases. This increases the opportunities for players to anticipate the change to the specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Conversely, by setting a lower selection rate for the specific consecutive reserve animation after the change, the frequency of the specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot decreases. This further enhances the enjoyment of the game by increasing the player's satisfaction when the animation changes to the specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot.

The timing for changing the type of the consecutive hold animation can be any time when there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the predetermined consecutive hold animation. For example, it can be any time from the special feature game executed after the special feature game executed at the stage when it is discovered that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the consecutive hold animation, until the special feature game in which an inconsistency occurs (for example, the special feature game executed for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined consecutive hold animation). In other words, the timing for changing the type of consecutive hold animation can be either the first special feature game or the second special feature game, as long as there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the consecutive hold animation.

Here, if the timing of the change in the type of the pending continuous performance occurs during the first special symbol game, then if executing the pending continuous performance consecutively would cause problems in the first special symbol game that resumes after the second special symbol game ends, these problems are avoided.

Furthermore, when the type of continuous hold animation is changed in the first special feature game that resumes after the second special feature game ends, if continuing to execute the previous continuous hold animation would cause inconvenience, the number of special feature games in which the previous continuous hold animation is displayed is maximized. In this way, by maximizing the number of special feature games in which the previous continuous hold animation is displayed, even if continuing to execute the previous continuous hold animation would cause inconvenience, players can enjoy the previous continuous hold animation to the fullest extent.

On the other hand, if the timing of the change in the type of continuous hold animation is during the second special symbol game, and if an inconvenience occurs due to the continuous execution of the predetermined continuous hold animation before the change, the occurrence of the inconvenience in the second special symbol game will be avoided. Furthermore, even if an inconvenience occurs in the first special symbol game which resumes after the end of the second special symbol game, the occurrence of the inconvenience will be avoided before the first special symbol game resumes.

Furthermore, if the timing of the change in the type of consecutive hold animation is such that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined consecutive hold animation, and this occurs in the special feature game that follows the special feature game being played at that point, the inconsistency will be immediately avoided once it is understood that the predetermined consecutive hold animation will cause problems.

On the other hand, in special feature games where the timing of the change in the type of consecutive hold animation occurs inconsistently with the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined consecutive hold animation, it is possible to maximize the player's expectation by having the predetermined consecutive hold animation displayed consecutively. Therefore, the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the change from the predetermined consecutive hold animation to a specific consecutive hold animation is reduced, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Of course, even if a series of hold-and-reserve animations other than the chance-eye animation is being performed, and the number of times the hold-and-reserve animation is performed in the special feature game exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. In other words, even if no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. By changing the type of hold-and-reserve animation when no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively in many special feature games, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the consecutive performance of a single type of hold-and-reserve animation in many special feature games.

Furthermore, there are no restrictions on the combination of the type of pending continuous animation before the change and the type of pending continuous animation after the change. The combination should be determined within a range that does not create inconsistencies between the jackpot lottery results and the pending continuous animation. For example, if the pending continuous animation is set to a same-colored symbol animation, and the number of special gameplay rounds in which the pending continuous animation is performed exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., four or more times), the pending continuous animation may be changed to an animation other than the same-colored symbol animation, such as a chance symbol animation.

Furthermore, the change in the consecutive hold animation is not limited to just one change; it may be done multiple times.

Here, the same-color symbol effect is an effect where all the decorative symbols displayed at the stop are the same color, and the combination of decorative symbols displayed is a specific combination that is not a jackpot combination (for example, a triple where all decorative symbols are the same) or a losing combination (for example, a combination where the left and right symbols are the same and only the middle symbol is different).

For example, as shown in Figure 51(A) above, if the decorative symbols "3" and "7" are set to red, the odd-numbered decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" ("1", "5", and "9") are set to green, and the even-numbered decorative symbols ("2", "4", "6", and "8") are set to blue, there are many possible combinations of same-colored symbols that result in a complete miss. However, it is preferable that the specific combination of same-colored symbols that stops and is displayed as a complete miss in the same-colored symbol performance is a distinctive symbol combination. For example, as shown in Figure 65, a possible combination of same-colored symbols that stops and is displayed as a specific complete miss in the same-colored symbol performance is one in which the left and middle symbols are the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and middle symbols. In this way, by having a distinctive combination of same-colored symbols that stops and is displayed as a specific complete miss in the same-colored symbol performance, players can easily understand that the same-colored symbol performance has been executed. Furthermore, in the same-color symbol animation, when a specific combination of same-color symbols that represents a complete miss is displayed, the speaker 26 may output a unique special sound specific to the execution of the same-color symbol animation. This also allows the player to easily understand that the same-color symbol animation has been performed.

The Chance Symbol演出 (Chance Symbol演出) is a feature in which a predetermined complete miss (a symbol that is not the same color) is displayed when the decorative symbols that stop are of different colors. For the same reasons as in the Same-Color Symbol演出 (Chance Symbol演出), the predetermined complete miss (Chance Symbol) displayed in the Chance Symbol演出 is preferably a distinctive symbol combination. For example, as shown in Figure 65, a possible predetermined complete miss (Chance Symbol) displayed in the Chance Symbol演出 is a combination where all decorative symbols are odd numbers, the left and middle symbols are the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and middle symbols. Furthermore, in the Chance Symbol演出, to allow the player to easily understand that the Chance Symbol演出 has been performed, a specific special sound unique to the Chance Symbol演出 may be output from speaker 26 when the predetermined complete miss (Chance Symbol) is displayed.

The mini-character effect is an effect in which mini-characters are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Mini-characters are, for example, miniature versions of characters that appear in the game machine 10's effects, or versions of those characters with enlarged heads, such as by making them two heads tall. There are no particular restrictions on the display manner of the mini-characters in the mini-character effect, but when the mini-character effect is performed in an effect other than the continuous hold effect, it is preferable that it be displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from other mini-character effects. Examples of mini-character effects in the continuous hold effect include mini-characters crossing the symbol display unit 341 to the left, right, top, bottom, or diagonally. Furthermore, when a hold display image is displayed for the first hold of the first special symbol game, the mini-characters may be displayed near the hold display image to suggest that the mini-character effect is related to the first hold of the first special symbol game.

Zone effects (mode effects) are effects that indicate the upcoming occurrence of reach effects or effects with a high probability of winning a jackpot by displaying special background effects (for example, background effects including text images such as "○○ Zone" or "○○ Mode") as background effects for decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, the continuous hold animation includes a same-color symbol animation and a chance symbol animation. The same-color symbol animation and the chance symbol animation are animations in which decorative symbols (e.g., numbers) stop and are displayed at specific complete misses as same-color symbols or predetermined misses as chance symbols. Because the player can easily understand that the continuous hold animation is being performed based on the combination of decorative symbols displayed, they can enjoy the game while anticipating that the continuous hold animation will be performed consecutively when it is executed, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a hold-continuous performance is executed by stopping and displaying a specific complete miss or a predetermined complete miss, and as described above, if the display of the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that a hold-continuous performance was executed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature performance, it becomes possible to display the capture image 78 in various forms without obstructing the visibility of the decorative symbol changes in the second special feature game. For example, the capture image 78 can display the image of the hold-continuous performance in the first special feature game in its original form, or it can be displayed as a reduced image, an image with reduced density, an image of the outline, etc. This allows for the clear indication or suggestion of the hold-continuous performance being executed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature performance through various effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure for setting the pending continuous performance, when any of the setting processes in steps S3408 to S3410 is completed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting to execute the pending continuous performance was made in that setting process (step S3411), as shown in Figure 63. If the setting to execute the pending continuous performance is made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3412, and if the setting to execute the pending continuous performance is not made (step S3411: No), the pending continuous performance setting process is terminated.

<Step S3412>
If the setting to execute the pending continuous performance is made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the pending continuous performance setting flag to indicate that the setting to execute the pending continuous performance has been made (step S3412), and proceeds to step S3413. The pending continuous performance setting flag is referenced in step S3602 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Figure 67 to determine whether or not it is the first special feature game to start the pending continuous performance.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 sets a reserve consecutive performance execution counter that indicates the number of remaining first special game rounds for which the reserve consecutive performance will be executed. For example, if the reserve consecutive performance is set to "Chance Eye X times" (where X is a positive integer from 1 to 4), the MPU 51 sets the value of the reserve consecutive performance execution counter to "X".

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
When the pending consecutive performance execution counter is set, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance event is set as the pending consecutive performance (step S3414). If a chance event is set as the pending consecutive performance (step S3414: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance event flag to ON to indicate that a chance event is set as the pending consecutive performance (step S3415), and terminates the pending consecutive performance setting process. On the other hand, if a chance event is not set as the pending consecutive performance (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3416.

<Steps S3416 and S3417>
If no chance symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a same-colored symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S3416). If the same-colored symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S3416: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol flag to ON to indicate that the same-colored symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S3417), and terminates the pending continuous animation setting process. On the other hand, if the same-colored symbol animation is not set as the pending continuous animation (step S3416: No), that is, if a mini-character animation or a zone animation (mode animation) is set as the pending continuous animation, the MPU 51 terminates the pending continuous animation setting process.

[Second Special Feature Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the second special effect, which is performed in step S3228 of the command determination process in Figure 59, will be explained with reference to Figure 66. The second special effect setting process is a process that enables the start of the second special effect in the second special game, which is performed when the electric mechanism 315b is opened for a long time during a long-opening normal game in the low-frequency support mode, and a game ball 99 enters the second prize entry 315. Here, Figure 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the second special effect.

<Step S4201>
As shown in Figure 66, in the second special effect setting process, in step S3501, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second special effect setting flag is set to ON. The second special effect setting flag is a flag that enables the start of the second special effect in the second special game, and is set to ON in step S3503, which will be described later. The second special effect setting flag is also referenced in step S3635 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process shown in Figure 70, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start the second special effect in the second special game.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the second special effect setting process. If the second special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Steps S3502 and S3503>
If the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3502). The second special effect execution flag is a flag that indicates that the second special effect will be started, and is set to on in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process shown in Figure 70 below when the second special effect will be executed in the next second special game.

If the second special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the second special effect setting process. Conversely, if the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 sets the second special effect setting flag to ON (step S3503) and terminates the second special effect setting process. In this way, by setting the second special effect setting flag to ON, it becomes possible to set the second special effect for the second special game, which is executed when the electric mechanism 315b is opened fully during a long-open normal game in the normal game state, resulting in a game ball 99 entering the second prize pocket 315, in step S3642 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process shown in Figure 70 (described later).

[Setting the type of variation (performance pattern)]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) executed in step S3336 of the command determination process in Figure 60 will be explained with reference to Figures 67 to 72. The variation type (performance pattern) setting process is the process of setting the variation type (performance pattern) for the first special game or the second special game, which is executed when a variation pattern command is received. Here, Figures 67 to 72 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern).

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 67, in the variation type (performance pattern) setting process, in step S3601, the MPU 51 first determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0. Here, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, if there are reserved symbols for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game. That is, by determining whether the number of reserved second special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0, it is determined whether to execute the second special symbol game or the first special symbol game. Then, if the number of reserved second special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3602 and executes the process of setting the performance for the first special symbol game. On the other hand, if the number of reserved symbols M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3635 in Figure 70 and executes the process of setting the effects for the second special symbol game.

<Step S3602>
If the number of reserved symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S3602). The reserved continuous performance setting flag is a flag that indicates that the setting to execute the reserved continuous performance has been made, and is set to ON in step S3412 when the setting to execute the reserved continuous performance has been made in the reserved continuous performance setting process shown in Figure 63, which is executed when the first special symbol reserved command is received.

Then, if the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is executed in the first special game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3605 in Figure 68. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to off (step S3602: No), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special game, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S3603). The pending continuous performance execution flag is a flag that indicates that a pending continuous performance has started, and is set to on in step S3611, described later in the variation (performance pattern) type setting process in Figure 68, when it is planned that a pending continuous performance will be executed in the first special game that is executed immediately following the first special game in which the pending continuous performance starts.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, if the pending continuous performance is executed in the first special feature game executed as that variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3620 in Figure 69. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special feature game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
If the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to off (step S3603: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is executed in the first special game, the settings for the normal performance are made, that is, the same type of variation (performance pattern type) as in the first embodiment described above is set, and the variation type (performance pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Steps S3605-S3608>
If the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is executed in the first special feature game, as shown in Figure 68, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance setting flag to OFF (step S3605) and sets the pending continuous performance set in any of steps S3408 to S3410 in Figure 62 as the pending continuous performance for the first special feature game to be executed as that special feature game (step S3606). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance will be executed (step S3607), and determines whether the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3608). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the first special feature game to be executed as that special feature game is the last first special feature game in which the pending continuous performance will be executed.

Then, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is 0 (step S3608: Yes), that is, if the first special animation game to be executed as the special animation game is the last first special animation game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, if the first special animation game to be executed as the special animation game is not the last first special animation game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3609 and S3610>
If the value of the count counter for the number of pending consecutive performances after subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, if the first special feature game to be executed as the special feature game is not the last first special feature game in which the pending consecutive performance is executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special feature game to be executed as the special feature game is a jackpot (step S3609). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special feature game, or whether the pending first special feature game is executed.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3609: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 clears the reserved continuous performance execution counter, which indicates the remaining number of executions of the reserved continuous performance, in order to make the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game the last first special symbol game for which the reserved continuous performance is executed (step S3610), and proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3609: No), that is, if a reserved first special symbol game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3611.

<Step S3611>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3609: No), that is, if the first special symbol game that was held in reserve after the end of the special symbol game is executed, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance execution flag to ON, indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started (step S3611), and proceeds to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 and S3613>
When the pending consecutive performance execution flag, which indicates that a pending consecutive performance has started, is set to ON, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3612). The chance eye flag is a flag that indicates that a chance eye performance is set as a pending consecutive performance, and is set to ON in step S3415 of the pending consecutive performance setting process shown in Figure 63, which is executed when the first special symbol pending command is received, if a chance eye performance is set as a pending consecutive performance.

Then, if the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S3612: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance symbol count counter, which indicates the number of times the first special symbol game was played in the chance symbol sequence executed as a continuous hold sequence (step S3613), and terminates the setting process for the variation type (sequence pattern).

In this embodiment, the upper limit for the number of times the first special symbol game in the consecutive chance event sequence is 4 times if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the consecutive hold sequence is a jackpot, and 3 times if it is a miss (see Figure 64). Therefore, by referring to the value of the chance event counter, inconsistencies between the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the consecutive hold sequence and the number of times the chance event sequence is executed in the first special symbol game are prevented.

On the other hand, if the chance flag is set to off (step S3612: No), the MPU 51 terminates the setting process for the variation type (performance pattern).

<Steps S3614-S3616>
If the first special symbol game to be executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed (step S3608 or step S3610), that is, if the value of the hold-continuous performance execution counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the hold-continuous performance is executed, is 0, then it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye performance is set as the hold-continuous performance, is set to ON (step S3614).

If the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol flag to OFF (step S3615), and sets the final chance symbol flag to ON (step S3616) to indicate that the chance symbol animation to be executed as a continuous animation in the special feature game is the last chance symbol animation, and then terminates the variation type (animation pattern) setting process. The final chance symbol flag is referenced in step S3702 of the stop symbol combination setting process shown in Figure 73 below to determine whether or not to set a chance symbol as a stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, if the chance flag is set to off (step S3614: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3617.

<Steps S3617-S3619>
If the chance flag is set to off (step S3614: No), it is determined whether the same-colored symbol flag, which indicates that a same-colored symbol performance is set as a retained continuous performance, is set to on (step S3617). If the same-colored symbol flag is set to on (step S3617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol flag to off (step S3618), and sets the final same-colored symbol flag to on (step S3619), which indicates that the same-colored symbol performance to be executed as a retained continuous performance in the special game is the last same-colored symbol performance, and terminates the variation type (performance pattern) setting process. The final same-colored symbol flag is referenced in step S3706 of the stop symbol combination setting process in Figure 73 described later, in order to determine whether or not to set a same-colored symbol as a stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, if the same-colored symbol flag is set to off (step S3617: No), that is, if the last consecutive hold animation performed in the special symbol game is neither a chance symbol animation nor a same-colored symbol animation, the MPU 51 terminates the animation type (animation pattern) setting process.

<Step S3620>
If the flag indicating that a pending consecutive performance has started is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, if a pending consecutive performance is performed in the first special game to be executed as the special game, then, as shown in Figure 69, the MPU 51 sets the pending consecutive performance for the special game (step S3620) and proceeds to step S3621.

For the special feature game, the consecutive hold animation set in any of steps S3408 to S3410 of the consecutive hold animation setting process in Figure 62 is set. However, as described later, if a fourth chance-eye animation can be set as a guaranteed jackpot animation even though the result of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game is a loss, a process is executed to change the consecutive hold animation performed for the special feature game from a chance-eye animation to a same-colored symbol animation to prevent inconsistencies between the jackpot lottery result and the consecutive hold animation (step S3662 in Figure 72).

<Step S3621>
If a continuous hold animation for the special game is set (step S3620), the MPU 51 determines whether the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye animation is set as a continuous hold animation, is set to ON (step S3621). If the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the process moves to step S3622. If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3621: No), the process moves to step S3625.

<Steps S3622-S3624>
If the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye animation is set as a pending continuous animation, is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter, which indicates the number of times the chance eye animation has been performed as a pending continuous animation in the first special feature game (step S3622), and determines whether the value of the chance eye count counter after the addition is 4 (step S3623). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the special feature game in question is the first special feature game in which the fourth chance eye animation is performed as a pending continuous animation.

If the value of the chance event counter after addition is 4 (step S3623: Yes), the chance event temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3624), and the process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the value of the chance event counter after addition is not 4 (step S3623: No), the process proceeds to step S3625.

As mentioned above, the upper limit of the chance symbol count counter (the number of times the chance symbol animation is executed consecutively as a consecutive hold animation in the first special symbol game) is 4 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the chance symbol animation as a consecutive hold animation is a jackpot. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of holds for the first special symbol game is 4, and the number of first special symbol games in which the consecutive hold animation is executed consecutively is also 4. When the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as identical numbers, and it is not possible to stop and display a chance symbol. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the chance symbol consecutively in four first special symbol games, in the fourth first special symbol game which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, for example, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the high-speed spinning game before the reach animation is executed, and then, after the reach animation, it is stopped and displayed as identical numbers. Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the continuous hold animation is a jackpot, and the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation is executed consecutively for four first special symbol games, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the decorative symbols stop with matching numbers in the fourth first special symbol game. Therefore, in step S3624, the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON in order to temporarily stop and display the chance symbol before the decorative symbols stop with matching numbers. This chance symbol temporary stop flag is referenced in step S3709 of Figure 74 when setting the combination of decorative symbol stop display for the fourth first special symbol game when the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation is executed consecutively for four first special symbol games.

<Step S3625>
If the chance flag is set to off (step S3621: No), or if the value of the chance count counter after addition is not 4 (step S3623: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3625). That is, the MPU 51 determines, in the same way as step S3609 in Figure 68 above, whether a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, or whether the reserved first special symbol game is executed.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game being executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3625: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game being executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3625: No), that is, if the first special symbol game that was held in reserve is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3626.

<Steps S3626 and S3627>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3625: No), that is, if the first special symbol game that was held in reserve is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the reserved continuous performance will be executed (step S3626). The MPU 51 then determines whether the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, whether the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance will be executed (step S3627).

Then, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, if the first special animation game to be executed as the special animation game is the last first special animation game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3629. On the other hand, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is not 0 (step S3627: No), that is, if the first special animation game to be executed as the special animation game is not the last first special animation game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 terminates the setting process for the variation type (animation pattern).

<Step S3628>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3625: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 clears the reserve continuous performance execution counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the reserve continuous performance is executed (step S3628), in order to make the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game the last first special symbol game in which the reserve continuous performance is executed, and proceeds to step S3629.

<Step S3629>
If the value of the count of executions of the pending continuous performance after subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), or if the count of executions of the pending continuous performance, which indicates the remaining number of executions of the pending continuous performance, is cleared (step S3628), that is, if the first special feature game to be executed as the special feature game is the last first special feature game in which the pending continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance execution flag, which indicates that the pending continuous performance has started, to off (step S3629), and proceeds to step S3630.

<Step S3630>
In step S3630, the MPU 51 determines whether the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye animation is set as a pending continuous animation, is set to ON. If the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3631, and if the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3633.

<Steps S3631 and S3632>
If the chance flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance flag to OFF (step S3631), clears the chance count counter (step S3632), and terminates the setting process for the variation type (performance pattern).

<Steps S3633 and S3634>
If the chance flag is set to off (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the same-colored symbol flag, which indicates that the same-colored symbol performance is set as a continuous hold performance, is set to on (step S3633). If the same-colored symbol flag is set to on (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol flag to off (step S3634) and terminates the setting process for the variation type (performance pattern).

On the other hand, if the same-colored symbol flag is set to off (step S3633: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is not a chance symbol performance or a same-colored symbol performance, but a mini-character performance or a zone performance (mode performance), the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

<Step S3635>
If, in step S3601 of Figure 67, it is determined that the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3601: No), that is, if there are reserved balls for the second special symbol game, then, as shown in Figure 70, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635). The second special symbol special effect setting flag is a flag used to start the second special symbol special effect (see Figures 61(B) and 61(C)) in the second special symbol game being executed as the special symbol game. This second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON in step S3503 of the second special symbol special effect setting process in Figure 66 when a second special symbol reserved ball command is received, which is transmitted when the second prize-winning slot 315 is opened for a long time in a long-open regular symbol game, resulting in a game ball 99 being entered into the second prize-winning slot 315.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3636. If the second special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3635: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Steps S3636 and S3637>
If the second special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special effect execution flag to ON, indicating that the second special effect has started (step S3636), and also sets the second special effect setting flag to OFF (step S3637), and proceeds to step S3638.

<Step S3638>
In step S3638, the MPU 51 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag, which indicates that the second prize slot 315 is long open (a long-open winning game is being executed), is set to ON. If the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to ON (Step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3639. If the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to OFF (Step S3638: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3642.

<Steps S3639 and S3640>
If the "Electric mechanism long opening" flag is set to ON (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to terminate the electric mechanism long opening animation (see Figure 87(A)) (step S3639), sets the "Electric mechanism long opening" flag to OFF (step S3640), and proceeds to step S3642. That is, the electric mechanism long opening animation (see Figure 87(A)) is terminated when either the start of the second special animation (see Figure 61(A)) or the chain of the electric mechanism 315b is met. In other words, the second special animation is executed with priority over the electric mechanism long opening animation.

<Step S3641>
If it is determined in step S3635 that the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3635: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special effect execution flag, which is set to on in step S3636 when the second special effect is started, is set to on (step S3641).

Then, if the second special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3642. If the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3641: No), the process proceeds to step S3652 in Figure 71.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
In step S3642, the MPU 51 sets the second special feature game animation for the second special feature game to be executed as the special feature game. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous animation execution flag is set to ON (step S3643). The pending continuous animation execution flag is a flag that indicates that the pending continuous animation has started, and is set to ON in step S3611 of Figure 68 above when it is scheduled that the pending continuous animation will be executed in the first special feature game to be executed after the first special feature game in which the pending continuous animation was executed. That is, in step S3643, it is determined whether the pending continuous animation will be resumed in the first special feature game to be executed after all second special feature games in which the second special feature animation is executed have finished.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3644. If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), the process proceeds to step S3645.

<Step S3644>
If the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the capture image display information in the display variation pattern command sent from the sound lamp control device 5 to the display control device 6 (step S3644) in order to display a capture image 78 (see Figure 61(C)) on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special symbol game performance, which is executed after all second special symbol games in which the second special performance is executed have finished, indicating that the pending continuous performance will be resumed in the first special symbol game. Then, the process moves to step S3645. As a result, the capture image 78 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special symbol game performance (see Figure 61(C)).

Furthermore, if the flag for executing the hold-continuous performance is set to off (step S3643: No), that is, if the hold-continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after all second special symbol games in which the second special symbol performance is executed, the processing in step S3644 is skipped. Therefore, if the hold-continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after all second special symbol games in which the second special symbol performance is executed, the capture image 78 will not be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the second special symbol game performance (see Figure 61(B)).

Here, the captured image is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the continuous hold animation that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation. This captured image 78 is displayed when the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and when the continuous hold animation is being executed during the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation (see Figure 61(B)). In other words, the captured image 78 explicitly or suggests during the execution of the second special feature animation that the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that the continuous hold animation will be executed during the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation.

Thus, in this embodiment, the captured image 78 clearly or suggests that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. Therefore, the possibility of the player forgetting that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced, and the player can understand that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. As a result, even if the continuous hold animation is resumed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation, the player's feeling of discomfort regarding the continuous hold animation being performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was performed before the execution of the second special animation after the completion of the second special animation.

In particular, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, players become more engrossed in whether or not the game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Also, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 more easily (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening, resulting in more second special symbol games in which the second special symbol animation is executed (the execution time of the second special symbol animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold animation before the execution of the second special feature animation (when the second special feature animation begins) and the resumption of the continuous hold animation upon the end of the second special feature animation becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game during which the second special feature animation is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a continuous hold animation was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature animation is highly effective.

Furthermore, since the captured image 78 is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the hold-continuous performance that was being performed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, the type of hold-continuous performance being performed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of hold-continuous performance being performed during the first special symbol game after the completion of the second special symbol special performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, four types of hold-continuous performances are set: same-color symbol performance, chance symbol performance, mini-character performance, and zone performance (mode performance) (see Figure 64), but in the captured image 78 shown in Figure 61(C), it is clearly indicated or suggested that during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, a chance symbol performance was being performed where the decorative symbol stopped at "113" (see Figure 65), which is a chance symbol. This allows players to understand not only that a continuous hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, but also the type of continuous hold animation. Therefore, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable when the continuous hold animation resumes during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was running before the second special feature animation ends is further prevented.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the captured image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341. However, for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and/or at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation, the captured image may be displayed across the entire symbol display unit 341. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change animation, where the stage animation (background animation) from the previous special feature game is changed in the current special feature game. By displaying the captured image across the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and/or at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation, the transition from the execution of the second special feature animation in the second special feature game to the execution of the hold-continuous animation in the first special feature game can be performed smoothly and without any sense of incongruity.

<Step S3645>
If the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to off (step S3643: No), or if the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to on (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51, when it has set the display variation pattern command to display captured image information (step S3644), determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game executed as the special feature game is a jackpot (step S3645). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game is executed after the execution of the second special feature game executed as the special feature game.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3646. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3649.

<Step S3646>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the long-open entry counter (step S3646) and proceeds to step S3647. Here, the value of the long-open entry counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second entry hole 315 while the second entry hole 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long-open regular jackpot game). That is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, the MPU 51 sets the number of unexecuted second special symbol games to 0.

<Steps S3647 and S3648>
In step S3647, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous performance execution flag, which indicates that a pending continuous performance has started, is set to ON (step S3647). If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance execution flag to OFF (step S3648) and proceeds to step S3651. If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3648: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3651.

<Steps S3649 and S3650>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long-open prize counter (step S3649) and determines whether the value of the long-open prize counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3650). If the value of the long-open prize counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3651, and if the value of the long-open prize counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3650: No), the performance setting process is terminated.

Here, if the value of the long-open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), that is, if the second special feature game is the last second special feature game in which the second special feature effect is executed, the processing in steps S3647 and S3648 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S3651. As a result, if the reserve continuous effect execution flag is set to ON, the reserve continuous effect execution flag is not set to OFF. Therefore, the reserve continuous effect is resumed in the first special feature game executed after the last second special feature game in which the second special feature effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the continuous hold animation is resumed in the first special feature game executed after the last second special feature game in which the second special feature animation is performed. However, if the value of the long-open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), the process may be moved to step S3647, thereby preventing the continuous hold animation from resuming in the first special feature game executed after the last second special feature game in which the second special feature animation is performed.

<Step S3651>
In step S3651, the MPU 51 sets the special effect execution flag, which indicates that the second special effect has started, to off, and terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. As a result, the second special effect to be executed in the second special effect game, which is executed as the special effect game, is executed as the final second special effect.

<Steps S3652 and S3653>
If it is determined in step S3641 that the flag for executing the second special effect is set to off (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the flag indicating that the electric mechanism 315b, which was briefly open during the short-open normal-win game, has been closed is set to on (step S3652), as shown in Figure 71. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 is restricted due to the end of the short-open normal-win game, and whether the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize slot 315 does not increase.

Then, if the short-open/closed flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the short-open/closed flag to OFF (step S3653) and proceeds to step S3654. On the other hand, if the short-open/closed flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in Figure 72.

<Step S3654>
If the short-open/closed flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), or if the short-open/closed flag is set to OFF (step S3653), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S3654). The chance symbol flag is a flag that indicates that a chance symbol performance is set as a retained continuous performance. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance symbol performance is set as a retained continuous performance when the electric mechanism 315b, which was briefly open in the short-open normal winning game, is closed, and determines whether or not a chance symbol performance is executed as a retained continuous performance in the second special game which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 in the short-open normal winning game.

Then, if the chance flag is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3655. If the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3654: No), the process proceeds to step S3658 in Figure 72.

<Steps S3655 and S3656>
If the chance event flag is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 adds the value of the chance event count counter, the value of the hold continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3655), and determines whether the added value is 4 or more (step S3656).

Here, the value of the Chance Eye Count Counter represents the number of times the Chance Eye演出 (Chance Eye演出) was executed as a continuous hold animation during the first special symbol game, and the value of the Continuous Hold Animation Count Counter represents the number of remaining first special symbol games during which the continuous hold animation is executed. Therefore, the sum of the Chance Eye Count Counter value and the Continuous Hold Animation Count Counter value is the number of first special symbol games during which the initially set continuous hold animation is executed. Furthermore, the Short Opening Entry Counter value represents the number of second special symbol games executed when 99 game balls enter the second entry slot 315 during a short opening normal symbol win game, and also the number of second special symbol games during which the continuous hold animation is executed. Therefore, the sum of the Chance Eye Count Counter value, the Continuous Hold Animation Count Counter value, and the Short Opening Entry Counter value is the maximum number of special symbol games (first and second special symbol games) during which the Chance Eye演出 (Chance Eye演出) is executed consecutively as a continuous hold animation.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, if the chance symbol animation is performed consecutively in four or more special symbol games as part of a continuous hold animation, it becomes a jackpot confirmation animation that clearly indicates a jackpot. Therefore, when the chance symbol animation is set as a continuous hold animation, and the second special symbol game is executed triggered by the entry of 99 game balls into the second prize slot 315 during a short-opening normal symbol jackpot game, if the jackpot lottery result for each special symbol game in which the chance symbol animation is performed is a loss, an inconsistency may arise between the result clearly indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Therefore, when a chance symbol animation is set as a continuous hold animation, by determining whether the sum of the chance symbol count counter, the continuous hold animation count counter, and the short-open winning counter is 4 or more, it becomes possible to determine in advance whether there may be an inconsistency between the result explicitly shown by the continuous execution of the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Then, if the sum of the value of the chance event counter, the value of the hold-continuous performance counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3657. If the sum is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), the process proceeds to step S3658 in Figure 72.

<Step S3657>
If the sum of the value of the chance event counter, the value of the hold-continuous performance counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is 4 or more (Step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special feature games, including the second special feature game executed as the special feature game in question, is a loss (Step S3657). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special feature games, including the second special feature game executed as the special feature game in question.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game in question, is a loss (step S3657: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3660 in Figure 72. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game in question, is not a loss (step S3657: No), and if a jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game in question, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in Figure 72.

<Steps S3658 and S3659>
If the short-open/closed flag is set to off (step S3652: No), if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3654: No), if the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the hold-continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), or if a jackpot is included in the jackpot lottery results for all subsequent special feature games, including the second special feature game executed as the special feature game in question (step S3657: No), then, as shown in Figure 72, the MPU 51 executes the process in step S3658. That is, if there is no inconvenience in the chance eye performance being executed four or more times in a row as a hold-continuous performance in the special feature game, the MPU 51 determines in step S3658 whether the hold-continuous performance execution flag, which indicates that a hold-continuous performance has started, is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a hold-continuous performance as a performance for the second special feature game executed as the variation in question.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance as the performance for the second special feature game to be executed as the special feature game (step S3659), and executes the processes of steps S3625 to S3634 in Figure 69 above.

On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3658: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is not set as the performance for the second special feature game to be executed as the special feature game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3604 in Figure 67, sets a normal performance as the performance for the second special feature game to be executed as the special feature game (setting the performance in the same way as in the first embodiment described above), and terminates the setting of the variation type (performance pattern).

Thus, when the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to ON (step S3658: Yes), by setting the pending continuous performance as a performance for the second special feature game to be executed as the special feature game (step S3659), when the pending continuous performance is being executed in the first special feature game as the special feature game, and it is scheduled that the pending continuous performance will be executed in the next pending first special feature game, even if a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to a short opening of the second prize slot 315, the second special feature performance will not be executed in the second special feature game resulting from the game ball 99 entering the second prize slot 315 when the second prize slot 315 is short-opened, and the pending continuous performance will continue to be executed. Therefore, when a player is experiencing a continuous hold animation during a first special symbol game, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special symbol game, they will not feel any discomfort if the continuous hold animation is not performed after the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during its short opening. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the non-performance of the continuous hold animation in the first special symbol game that follows the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second prize slot 5 is briefly open, it is more difficult for game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when it is fully open (fewer balls enter). Since players are more likely to remember that a continuous hold animation was performed before the second special feature game, the effect of having the continuous hold animation continue without the second special feature animation being executed during the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 (when the second prize slot 315 is briefly open) is significant.

Furthermore, in the case of a short opening of the second prize slot 315, where it is difficult for game balls 99 to enter, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize slot 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation is executed continuously in the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 in the case of a short opening, the number of consecutive executions of the continuous hold animation will not increase significantly. Thus, it is unlikely that players will feel any discomfort with the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game. On the contrary, the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game allows for the effective use of the continuous hold animation in the second special feature game.

<Steps S3660 and S3661>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special feature games, including the second special feature game executed as the special feature game in question, is a loss (step S3657 in Figure 71: Yes), that is, if there is a possibility of inconsistency between the result indicated by the continuous execution of the chance eye effect as a hold-continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery, the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S3660) and clears the value of the chance eye count counter (step S3661), thereby restricting the continuous execution of the chance eye effect.

<Steps S3662 and S3663>
If processing is performed to restrict the continuous execution of the chance symbol effect (steps S3660 and S3661), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol effect as the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game to be executed as the special symbol game (step S3662), and sets the same-colored symbol to ON to indicate that the same-colored symbol is set as the reserved continuous effect (step S3663), and proceeds to step S3664. In other words, the MPU 51 changes the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game to be executed as the special symbol game from the chance symbol effect to the same-colored symbol effect.

Here, as mentioned above, the "Chance Symbol" animation becomes a guaranteed jackpot animation when it is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games. Therefore, by changing the consecutive hold animation for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game from the "Chance Symbol" animation to the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation, the consecutive execution of the "Chance Symbol" animation in four or more special symbol games is avoided. This prevents inconsistencies between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the "Chance Symbol" animation as a consecutive hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation is an animation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, and even if it is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, it does not become a guaranteed jackpot animation. Therefore, by changing the consecutive hold animation for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game from the "Chance Symbol" animation to the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation, even if the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, the result of the jackpot lottery will not be indicated as a jackpot by the consecutive hold animation, thus preventing inconsistencies between the consecutive hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, when the consecutive hold animation changes from a chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, the consecutive hold animation is executed consecutively for multiple special feature games. However, the consecutive hold animation may be interrupted by executing a special feature game that displays images of complete misses (neither chance symbols nor same-colored symbols) between the time the chance symbol animation changes to the same-colored symbol animation. In this case, it is prevented that the player will feel uncomfortable with the consecutive hold animation being executed consecutively for four or more special feature games. Furthermore, by interrupting the consecutive hold animation, it is possible to give the player the illusion that a new consecutive hold animation, the same-colored symbol animation, has started after the chance symbol animation as a consecutive hold animation has ended. This allows for a smooth and seamless transition from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation, and also makes it appear as if the change from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation did not occur. By making it appear as if the switch from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation did not occur, the inconvenience caused by the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation can be avoided without the player noticing. By the way, in order to avoid the inconvenience of the chance symbol animation being executed four or more times consecutively in a special symbol game, if the chance symbol animation is changed to a same-colored symbol animation, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-colored symbol animation is executed will be a loss. Therefore, there is a concern that players will realize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-colored symbol animation is executed will be a loss. Therefore, by disguising the fact that the change from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation did not occur, it is possible to prevent players from realizing that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-colored symbol animation is executed will be a loss.

<Step S3664>
If the continuous hold animation for the second special feature game, which is executed as the special feature game, is changed from a chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short-opening prize counter to the value of the continuous hold animation execution count counter (step S3664).

Here, the value of the "Reserved Consecutive Performance Execution Count Counter" indicates the number of remaining special feature games in which the reserved consecutive performance will be executed. The value of the "Short Opening Entry Counter" is the number of game balls 99 that enter the second entry slot 315 when the second entry slot 315 is briefly open (a short opening normal feature win game is being executed) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special feature game has not reached its upper limit. Therefore, the MPU 51 adds the value of the "Short Opening Entry Counter" to the value of the "Reserved Consecutive Performance Execution Count Counter" to reset the value of the "Reserved Consecutive Performance Execution Count Counter," which indicates the number of remaining special feature games in which the reserved consecutive performance will be executed, to a value that includes the number of reserved consecutive performances executed in the second special feature game.

<Steps S3665 and S3666>
When the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter is reset (step S3664), the MPU 51 clears the value of the short-open prize counter (step S3665), sets the short-open close flag to off (step S3666), executes the processes of steps S3625 to S3634 in Figure 69 above, and terminates the performance type setting process.

[Stop Symbol Combination Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination, which is performed in step S3337 of the command determination process in Figure 60, will be explained with reference to Figures 73 and 74. The stop symbol combination setting process is the process of setting the symbol combinations when decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game are displayed as stop symbols. Here, Figures 73 and 74 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination.

<Step S3701>
As shown in Figure 73, in the stop symbol combination setting process, in step S3701, the MPU 51 first determines whether the chance symbol flag, which indicates that a chance symbol effect is set as a hold continuous effect, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a chance symbol (see Figure 65) as the stop symbol combination.

Then, if the chance flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3704; if the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the process proceeds to step S3702.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
If the chance symbol flag is set to off (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final chance symbol flag, which indicates that the chance symbol performance to be performed as a continuous hold performance in the special symbol game is the last chance symbol performance, is set to on (step S3702).

Then, if the final chance flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final chance flag to OFF (step S3703) and proceeds to step S3704. On the other hand, if the final chance flag is set to OFF (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
If the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), or if the last chance symbol flag that was set to ON is set to OFF (step S3703), the MPU 51 sets a chance symbol (see Figure 65) as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed, and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

Furthermore, in this special game, the type of chance symbol to be displayed at the stop can be determined by setting up a chance symbol type selection table that associates a chance symbol type counter with individual chance symbols. The chance symbol can then be selected from this table based on the value of the chance symbol type counter when setting the stop symbol combination.

<Step S3705>
If the chance symbol flag and the final chance symbol flag are set to off (step S3702: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the same-color symbol flag, which indicates that the same-color symbol performance is set as a hold-continuous performance, is set to on (step S3705). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the same-color symbol (see Figure 65) as the stop symbol combination.

Then, if the same-color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3708; if the same-color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3705: No), the process proceeds to step S3706.

<Steps S3706 and S3707>
If the same-colored symbol flag is set to off (step S3705: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final same-colored symbol flag, which indicates that the same-colored symbol performance to be performed as a continuous hold performance in the special symbol game is the last same-colored symbol performance, is set to on (step S3706).

Then, if the final same-color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final same-color pattern flag to OFF (step S3707) and proceeds to step S3708. On the other hand, if the final same-color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3709 in Figure 74.

<Step S3708>
If the same-color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3705: Yes), or if the last same-color pattern flag that was set to ON is set to OFF (step S3707), the MPU 51 sets the same-color pattern (see Figure 65) as the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed at stop (step S3708), and terminates the stop pattern combination setting process.

Furthermore, regarding the type of same-colored symbol to be displayed as a stop during the fluctuation, it is conceivable to set up a same-colored symbol type selection table that associates a same-colored symbol type counter with individual same-colored symbols, and then select the same-colored symbol from the same-colored symbol type selection table based on the value of the same-colored symbol type counter when setting the stop symbol combination.

<Step S3709>
If no combination of chance symbols and same-color symbols are set as the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON, as shown in Figure 74 (step S3709). The chance symbol temporary stop flag is a flag used to temporarily stop and display the chance symbol before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, during the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbols before a reach) when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a jackpot and the fourth chance symbol performance is executed as a continuous hold performance in the special symbol game.

Then, if the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3710; if the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to OFF (step S3709: No), the process proceeds to step S3713.

<Steps S3710-S3712>
If the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed (step S3710), and sets the matching symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed (step S3711). Then, the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol temporary stop flag to OFF (step S3712), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

The chance combinations that trigger a temporary stop can be set in the same manner as in step S3704 described above. The matching combinations that trigger a stop can be set in the same manner as in step S3104 of the command determination process in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3713>
If no combination of decorative symbols to be displayed as a stop symbol or a matching color symbol is set, and no combination of decorative symbols to be displayed as a stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed as a normal setting (setting the combination of decorative symbols in the same way as in the first embodiment described above), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the opening modes of the second prize entry point 315 by the electric mechanism 315b are set as follows: a short opening, which makes it difficult for game balls 99 to enter the second prize entry point 315, and a long opening, which is longer than the short opening, making it easier for game balls 99 to enter the second prize entry point 315. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second special symbol game for the second reserved ball takes precedence over the first special symbol game for the first reserved ball.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game, if a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to a short opening of the second prize slot 315, the continuous hold animation that was being performed in the first special symbol game will continue to be performed in the second special symbol game which is performed after the end of the first special symbol game as a variation. In other words, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to a short opening of the second prize slot 315, the second special symbol animation will not be performed in the second special symbol game resulting from the game ball 99 entering the second prize slot 315 when the second prize slot 315 is short-opened, and the continuous hold animation will continue to be performed. Therefore, when a player is experiencing a continuous hold animation during a first special symbol game, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special symbol game, they will not feel any discomfort if the continuous hold animation is not performed after the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during its short opening. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the non-performance of the continuous hold animation in the first special symbol game that follows the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second prize slot 5 is briefly open, it is more difficult for game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when it is fully open (fewer balls enter). Since players are more likely to remember that a continuous hold animation was performed before the second special feature game, the effect of having the continuous hold animation continue without the second special feature animation being executed during the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 (when the second prize slot 315 is briefly open) is significant.

Furthermore, in the case of a short opening of the second prize slot 315, where it is difficult for game balls 99 to enter, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize slot 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation is executed continuously in the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 in the case of a short opening, the number of consecutive executions of the continuous hold animation will not increase significantly. Thus, it is unlikely that players will feel any discomfort with the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game. On the contrary, the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game allows for the effective use of the continuous hold animation in the second special feature game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a chance symbol animation, which guarantees a jackpot when executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, is determined to be executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, and if the results of the jackpot lottery for the fourth and subsequent special symbol games from the first special symbol game in which the chance symbol animation began are all misses, the consecutive hold animation is changed from the chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, which does not guarantee a jackpot even when executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, before the number of special symbol games in which the chance symbol animation is executed reaches four. This prevents the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation in four or more special symbol games, thereby preventing inconsistencies between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation as a consecutive hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next reserved first special symbol game, when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to the long opening of the second prize slot 315, the second special symbol special animation is performed in the second special symbol game which is performed after the end of the first special symbol game as a variation, and a captured image 78 of the continuous hold animation that was performed in the first special symbol game is displayed. In other words, the captured image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special animation. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player may forget that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special animation, and allows the player to understand that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special animation. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation resumes during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation has been executed, the player's discomfort with the continuous hold animation resuming during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation has been executed is significantly reduced. As a result, the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was running before the second special feature animation has been executed is prevented.

In particular, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, players become more engrossed in whether or not the game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Also, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 more easily (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening, resulting in more second special symbol games in which the second special symbol animation is executed (the execution time of the second special symbol animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold animation before the execution of the second special feature animation (when the second special feature animation begins) and the resumption of the continuous hold animation upon the end of the second special feature animation becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game during which the second special feature animation is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a continuous hold animation was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature animation is highly effective.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first embodiment are possible to the extent applicable.

[Third Embodiment]
In the second embodiment described above, in a gaming machine in which the opening mode of the second prize slot by the electric mechanism is set to a first opening (short opening) which is a first time, and a second opening (long opening) which is a second time, longer than the first time, when a game ball enters the second prize slot in a game where the reserve continuous performance is scheduled to be performed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games, the reserve continuous performance is performed continuously in the second special symbol game when the game ball enters the second prize slot in the case of a short opening, while in the second special symbol game when the game ball enters the second prize slot in the case of a long opening, the second special symbol special performance is performed, and it is explicitly stated or suggested at the time of the execution of the second special symbol special performance that the reserve continuous performance was performed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

However, in addition to the short and long opening modes, there are various other opening modes for the second prize slot operated by the electric mechanism in a gaming machine. For example, there are opening modes where the second prize slot has only one opening time, opening modes where the second prize slot opens multiple times per regular spin, and opening modes where the opening time of the second prize slot differs between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the opening modes for the second prize slot are not necessarily limited to short and long openings.

Furthermore, in gaming machines, the opening configuration of the second prize slot generally includes configurations that facilitate the entry of game balls into the second prize slot, such as the long opening configuration described in the second embodiment above. On the other hand, even during gameplay, there are situations where game balls do not flow down the game area of the game board. For example, this can occur when a player stops shooting game balls during a reach animation or when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol reaches its limit, or when game balls do not reach the game area of the game board due to a shooting malfunction or other reasons. Therefore, even if the second prize slot is opened in a manner that facilitates the entry of game balls, the number of game balls entering the second prize slot may be small due to delays in shooting game balls by the player or due to a shooting malfunction. For example, even if the second prize slot is opened in such a way that the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol game can reach the maximum limit, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol game may not reach the maximum limit, resulting in a small number of balls entering the second prize slot, similar to the number of balls entering the second prize slot during a short opening, such as two or fewer.

In the second embodiment described above, when the opening mode of the second prize slot is long-open, regardless of the number of balls entering the second prize slot, the special effect for the second special feature game is executed in response to the balls entering the second prize slot, corresponding to the long-open opening mode of the second prize slot. On the other hand, as described above, even when the opening mode of the second prize slot is long-open, the number of balls held in the second special feature game may not reach the upper limit, and the number of balls entering the second prize slot may be a small number, such as two or fewer, similar to the number of balls entering the second prize slot when it is short-open. Therefore, even though the opening mode of the second prize slot is short-open, a situation similar to when the effect for a long-open opening is executed occurs. In other words, a substantial inconsistency arises between the opening mode of the second prize slot and the effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game, which is a special symbol game, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game (for example, Special 1 current variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2 (see Figure 55(A))), regardless of the opening mode of the electric mechanism, when a game ball enters the second prize slot due to the opening of the second prize slot, the animation in the second special symbol game, which is performed when a game ball enters the second prize slot, differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is greater than zero but less than a predetermined number (for example, one or two) or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number (three or more). Specifically, as shown in Figure 75(A), if the number of balls entering the second prize slot is greater than zero but less than a predetermined number (for example, one or two), the continuous hold animation is performed continuously in the second special symbol game, similar to the short opening of the second prize slot in the second embodiment described above. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 75(B), if the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more), the second special feature animation is executed in the second special feature game, similar to the long-open second prize slot in the second embodiment described above. Furthermore, it is explicitly indicated or suggested at the time of the execution of the second special feature animation that a continuous hold animation had been executed prior to the execution of the second special feature animation.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the continuous hold animation is scheduled to be executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special feature games, if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to its opening, the animation executed in the second special feature game differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the continuous hold animation not being executed in the first special feature game executed after the second special feature game, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the second prize slot. Furthermore, it prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the continuous hold animation being resumed after the second special feature animation has finished.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special symbol game that has been held, if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to the opening of the second prize slot, the animation performed in the second special symbol game will differ depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number. This makes it possible to handle cases where the number of game balls entering the second prize slot is small, even when the second prize slot is opened in an opening and closing manner that facilitates the entry of game balls.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the second embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 76 to 81.

This embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special feature game, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special feature game that has been held, the animation in the second special feature game, which is triggered by the entry of game balls into the second prize slot, is set to be different depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is less than or equal to a predetermined number (e.g., 1 or 2 balls) or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more balls). Therefore, this embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in some of the processing procedures in the command determination process, the second special feature animation setting process, and the animation type setting process.

[Command determination process]
The command determination process in this embodiment differs from that of the second embodiment described above in its processing when a second special feature hold command and an electric mechanism close command are received.

Figures 76 and 77 are flowcharts illustrating the differences between the command determination process and the second embodiment described above.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 76, in the command determination process of this embodiment, if a second special symbol hold command is received (step S3323: Yes), and the second special symbol hold information update process (step S3324) and the second special symbol hold image display process (step S3325) are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the electric play opening prize counter (step S3801) and terminates the command determination process. That is, in the command determination process of this embodiment, instead of distinguishing between short opening and long opening and counting the number of balls entering the second prize opening 315 as in the second embodiment described above, the number of balls entering the second prize opening 315 is counted in the electric play opening prize counter without distinguishing between short opening and long opening. Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the second embodiment described above, even if a second special symbol hold command is received, the second special symbol special effect setting process is not executed. Instead, it is executed in step S3802 of Figure 77, which will be described later, on the condition that an electric mechanism closing command is received (step S3330: Yes).

Furthermore, the electric payout counter is referenced in step S3901 of the second special effect setting process shown in Figure 78 (described later) to determine whether or not to execute the second special effect.

<Step S3802>
As shown in Figure 77, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives an electric mechanism closing command (step S3330: Yes), it executes the second special effect setting process when the electric mechanism is closed, without distinguishing between short-open and long-open cases (step S3802). That is, in this embodiment, the second special effect setting process, which was executed when the second special effect hold command was received in the second embodiment described above, is set when the electric mechanism closing command is received.

[Second Special Feature Setting Process]
The second special feature setting process in this embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above, in that it determines whether or not to execute the second special feature based on whether or not the second special feature is short-lived or long-lived, in that it determines whether or not to execute the second special feature based on the number of balls that enter the second prize-winning opening 315 until the electric mechanism 315b closes.

Here, Figure 78 is a flowchart illustrating the differences between the second special effect setting process in this embodiment and the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S3901-S3903>
As shown in Figure 78, when the electric mechanism 315b is closed, if both the second special effect setting flag and the second special effect execution flag are set to off (No in both steps S3501 and S3502), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the electric mechanism opening prize counter, which indicates the number of game balls 99 that have entered the second prize entry opening 315, is 3 or more (step S3901).

If the value of the electric payout counter is 3 or greater (Step S3901: Yes), the second special payout special effect setting flag is set to ON in order to start the second special payout special effect (Step S3902), and the second special payout special effect setting process is terminated.

If the value of the electric payout counter is not 3 or greater (step S3901: No), that is, if the value of the electric payout counter is 2 or less, the flag indicating that the second special feature special effect will not be started is set to ON (step S3903), and the second special feature special effect setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the second special feature animation is executed when the value of the electric payout counter is 3 or more. However, the second special feature animation may also be executed when the value of the electric payout counter is 4 or more, or when the value of the electric payout counter is 2 or more, etc.

[Setting the type of variation (performance pattern)]
The variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above, in that, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the electric mechanism 315b, the second special performance is set for the second special game as a special game when the electric mechanism 315b is opened for a long time, regardless of the number of game balls 99 that enter the second prize slot 315.

Figures 79 to 81 are flowcharts illustrating the differences between this embodiment and the second embodiment described above in the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

<Steps S4001 to S4003>
As shown in Figure 79, when a special effect for the second special symbol game is set for the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the value of the electric payout counter (step S4001). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric payout counter (step S4002) and determines whether the value of the electric payout counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4003).

In other words, in this embodiment, instead of the short-opening and long-opening prize counters of the second embodiment described above, a common electric-operated opening prize counter is provided for both short-opening and long-opening. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long-opening prize counter in the second embodiment described above, the processing of steps S4001 to S4003 related to the electric-operated opening prize counter is executed.

<Step S4004>
If it is determined in step S3641 that the second special feature special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4004 in Figure 80 and determines whether the second special feature special effect not set flag, which indicates that the second special feature special effect will not be started, is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special feature game in question is the first special feature game to be executed when the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize pocket 315 is two or less.

Then, if the second special feature special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), that is, if the second special feature game is the first special feature game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second prize entry point 315, the MPU 51 sets the second special feature special effect setting flag to OFF (step S4005) and proceeds to step S3654.

On the other hand, if the second special feature special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4004: No), that is, if the second special feature game is not the first special feature game executed when the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize entry point 315 is two or less, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in Figure 81 and then executes the same process as in the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S4005 to Steps S4008>
If the flag indicating that the second special effect will not be started is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the flag indicating that the second special effect will not be started to OFF (step S4005), and proceeds to step S3654, thereby executing the same process as in the second embodiment described above.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, a common electric power opening prize counter is provided for both short and long openings, instead of the short opening prize counter and long opening prize counter of the second embodiment described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, the processing related to the long opening prize counter in the second embodiment described above is replaced by the processing of step S4006 related to the electric power opening prize counter, and the processing of steps S4007 and S4008 in Figure 81.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero (for example, one or two balls), the continuous hold animation is continuously executed in the second special feature game, similar to the short opening of the second prize slot 315 in the second embodiment described above. On the other hand, if the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 exceeds a predetermined number (three or more balls), the second special feature animation is executed in the second special feature game, similar to the long opening of the second prize slot 315 in the second embodiment described above. Therefore, even in gaming machines other than those where the opening mode of the second prize slot 315 by the electric mechanism 315b is set to either a short opening that makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315 or a long opening that makes it easy for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315—that is, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the second prize slot 315—a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the non-execution of the reserve continuous performance in the first special symbol game, which is executed after the end of the second special symbol game, is prevented. Furthermore, a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the reserve continuous performance that was being executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, after the end of the second special symbol special performance, is also prevented.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special-feature game, and when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 due to its opening, the animation performed in the second special-feature game differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 is less than or equal to a predetermined number, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 exceeds a predetermined number. This allows for handling cases where the number of game balls entering the second prize slot 315 is small, even when the second prize slot 315 is opened in a manner that facilitates ball entry.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first and second embodiments are possible to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, various modifications are possible in the second and third embodiments described above. For example, in the second and third embodiments described above, a reduced image of the continuous hold animation performed in the first special game was displayed as the capture image 78 in the lower left region of the symbol display unit 341. However, the capture image 78 may be displayed by other methods as long as the variation of the decorative symbols is visible. For example, the capture image 78 may be displayed as a background animation on the back side of the decorative symbols across the entire symbol display unit 341, or it may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols with a visible density (transparency), or only the outline may be displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the second special feature animation was performed, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the second special feature animation was performed, is not limited to the display of the capture image 78. Other methods are acceptable as long as the variation of the decorative symbols is clearly visible. For example, such explicit indication or suggestion, indicating that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the second special feature animation was performed, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 78, such as an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these.

Furthermore, while the capture image 78 may be displayed for the entire duration of the execution of the second special symbol game, it may also be displayed for a portion of the execution period, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or for both a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game. There are no particular limitations on the display period of the capture image 78. Also, when the second special symbol game is executed multiple times consecutively, the capture image 78 does not need to be displayed for all of the second special symbol games. For example, it may be displayed only for the first second special symbol game executed, only for the last second special symbol game executed, or for both the first and last second special symbol games. The number of times the capture image 78 is displayed may differ from the number of times the second special symbol special effect is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, such as a captured image, and the fact that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, may be indicated or suggested by display means other than the symbol display unit 341 on which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. For example, such indication or suggestion may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 which displays a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the game machine 10. Also, if there is a display means other than the symbol display unit 341 on which the variable display of decorative symbols and image animations are performed, such as a sub-LCD display unit, the indication or suggestion may be displayed on this sub-LCD display unit or other display means. In this way, the fact that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, can be clearly indicated or suggested by other display means, such as a sub-LCD display separate from the symbol display unit 341 where the image animation is performed. This allows the indication or suggestion to be displayed on the other display means without interfering with the display of the decorative symbols or image animation on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, both the variable display/image animation and the indication or suggestion can be displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

Furthermore, the second special effect is not limited to the examples in Figures 61(B) and 61(C), and may take other forms. For example, the second special effect may display other images, such as character images, in place of or in addition to the text images, or it may perform a predetermined sound effect using the speaker 26 in place of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

Furthermore, the second special effect only needs to be an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a bonus will be granted to the player when certain conditions are met. It is not necessary for the decorative symbols to stop and display as a winning symbol (e.g., matching numbers), nor is it necessary for the effect to be a probability-increasing jackpot when these conditions are met. Examples of predetermined conditions include the decorative symbols becoming a "reach" (a near-win) or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those where the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 is always a probability-increasing jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied not only to loop probability-increasing machines like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, but also to ST machines such as V-ST machines and Type 1/Type 2 mixed machines, where the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 includes wins other than probability-increasing jackpots.

Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, the continuous hold animation and the second special symbol special animation were executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and were not executed in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes. However, the continuous hold animation and the second special symbol special animation may be executed in both or one of the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes.

Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, when a continuous hold animation is executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games, except for the exception to avoid inconsistencies where the chance-eye animation is executed consecutively for four or more special symbol games, a single type of continuous hold animation is executed for each first special symbol game. However, different continuous hold animations may be executed for each first special symbol game, and multiple types of continuous hold animations (e.g., mini-character animation and zone animation) may be executed simultaneously in a single first special symbol game, as long as the combination is feasible as an animation.

Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be any timing at which no inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the predetermined reserved continuous performance. For example, it may be any time from the special symbol game executed after the special symbol game executed at the stage when it is determined that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the reserved continuous performance, until the special symbol game in which an inconsistency occurs (for example, the special symbol game executed for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined reserved continuous performance). In other words, the timing for changing the type of reserved continuous performance may be either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, as long as no inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the reserved continuous performance.

Of course, even if a series of hold-and-reserve animations other than the chance-eye animation is being performed, and the number of times the hold-and-reserve animation is performed in the special feature game exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. In other words, even if no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. By changing the type of hold-and-reserve animation when no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively in many special feature games, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the consecutive performance of a single type of hold-and-reserve animation in many special feature games.

Furthermore, not only when changing the type of consecutive hold animation to prevent inconsistencies between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the consecutive hold animation, but also when changing the type of consecutive hold animation, if the display time for the variation of the hold for the first special symbol game that triggered the start of the consecutive hold animation is long, that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for that hold is a jackpot, or if a reach animation with a high probability of a jackpot is executed, the type of consecutive hold animation may be changed so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change compared to the predetermined consecutive hold animation type before the change. For example, if the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the mini-character animation with the lowest probability of a jackpot, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a chance eye animation, same-colored symbol animation, or zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of a jackpot than the mini-character animation. If the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the chance eye animation or same-colored symbol animation, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of a jackpot than the chance eye animation and same-colored symbol animation. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the modified specific consecutive hold animation and the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the modification is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

Furthermore, the change in the pending sequence animation is not limited to just one change; it may be performed multiple times.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Other variations]
In the embodiments and modifications described above, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but it may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as iron (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as iron (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as iron (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the inner frame 12 is openable and closable relative to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 is openable and closable relative to the inner frame 12. However, the gaming machine 10 may lock the inner frame 12 to the front frame 11 in a way that prevents it from being opened, and lock the back pack unit 13 to the inner frame 12 in a way that prevents it from being opened, using a locking means such as a single cylinder lock. Alternatively, a locking means for preventing the inner frame 12 from being opened relative to the front frame 11 and a locking means for preventing the back pack unit 13 from being opened relative to the inner frame 12 may be provided separately. In addition, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the left end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, thereby enabling the inner frame 12 to be openable and closable relative to the front frame 11. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the right end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, thereby enabling the inner frame 12 to be openable and closable relative to the front frame 11. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the left end of the back pack unit 13 in a front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, thereby enabling the back pack unit 13 to open and close relative to the inner frame 12. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the right end of the back pack unit 13 in a front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, thereby enabling the back pack unit 13 to open and close relative to the inner frame 12. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the game board 31 provided by the game machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the game machine 10 is configured to have an upper tray 23 and a lower tray 24. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray 24 is omitted and only the upper tray 23 is provided. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front is adopted, but a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on another part, such as the left side when viewed from the front, may also be adopted. Also, a configuration in which multiple launch handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on both the right and left sides when viewed from the front, may also be adopted. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a configuration in which a touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the launch handle 22) is adopted, but a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted may also be adopted for the launch handle 22. In addition, in the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for the launching means capable of launching the game balls, for example, a configuration in which the game balls are launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game balls are launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, may be adopted. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, when the launch handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, the system is configured to launch one game ball every 0.6 seconds, for example (100 game balls per minute). However, the system may also be configured to launch fewer than 100 game balls per minute (for example, 60), or 100 or more game balls per minute (for example, 200). The system may also be configured to launch game balls when the launch handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. The system may also be configured to launch game balls one at a time by flicking a lever. In addition, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the system is configured to include a speaker 26 as a means for outputting sound. However, the system may also be configured to include an earphone jack in addition to the speaker 26, or in place of the speaker 26. With this configuration, the player can connect their own earphones or headphones to the earphone jack, allowing them to fully enjoy the sounds of the game machine 10 they are playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding game machines 10. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a 7-segment display device is provided as a means for displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which begins to change based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315. However, other configurations can be used as means for displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol. For example, a configuration in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, or a configuration equipped with halogen lamps may be used. In addition, in the second and third embodiments described above, the predetermined suggestion information was a capture image 78 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 where the decorative symbols change, but the predetermined suggestion information may be displayed on a display means other than the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is conceivable to set up a dedicated display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information, but it is also conceivable to use a display means already provided in the gaming machine 10. That is, the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed, for example, on a 7-segment display unit 39 that displays a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the gaming machine 10, or on the main display unit 36 (normal symbol display unit 361, first special symbol display unit 362, second special symbol display unit 363, first special symbol reserve number display unit 364, and second special symbol reserve number display unit 365). Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a configuration was adopted in which two LED lamps were provided as means for displaying normal symbols that start to be displayed based on the passing of a game ball through the through gates 317L and 317R, but other configurations can be adopted as means for displaying normal symbols. For example, a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration equipped with a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, or a configuration equipped with halogen lamps may be adopted. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for the display means such as the pattern display unit 341 capable of displaying decorative patterns. For example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a plasma display device, a drum-rotating display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a configuration combining two or more of these may be adopted. Also, in the second and third embodiments described above, when a predetermined suggestive information is to be displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously by continuously displaying the capture image 78 displayed on the pattern display unit 341. However, the suggestive information to be displayed is not limited to the capture image 78; other information may also be displayed. For example, it may be information that was displayed in the first special symbol game immediately before the execution of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in which a chance-eye effect was continuously displayed. This could be the entire screen of the first special symbol game or a textual description of the images displayed on that screen. In that case, it may be the type of effect that was continuously displayed at that time, the number of big wins, the number of spins since the end of the big win, the number of reserved balls, the number of balls fired, etc., and it may be a combination of multiple of these, or just one of them. Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, combinations of stopped symbols such as chance symbol effects were used as the hold-continuous effects, but the system is not limited to this, as long as the player can visually perceive the continuity of the effects. For example, the display shown on the back of the symbols during the reel spin may be displayed continuously for multiple rounds of the first special symbol game, and may be, for example, a specific character, characters that suggest continuous display, a display displayed as part of the background image, or the background itself. Similarly, the effects that are changed may be, as long as the player can visually perceive that a continuous effect has been changed, for example, it may be changed to an effect that displays a specific character. In addition, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, the decorative symbols are not limited to numbers, but can be various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, or combinations of two or more of these. For example, the decorative symbols may be the alphabet, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, or combinations of two or more of these. In addition, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be, for example, two or fewer, or four or more. Furthermore, if a configuration with only one row of decorative symbols is adopted, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") stops. Also, if a configuration with two or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line (effective line). In addition, in the second and third embodiments described above, a zone effect (mode effect) with a high probability of winning a jackpot was set as the hold-continuous effect, but the hold-continuous effect may also include background effects other than zone effects (mode effects). That is, multiple background effects may be set as the hold-continuous effect, and in this case, it is conceivable to set the jackpot probability of the multiple background effects to be different. Furthermore, when multiple background effects with different jackpot probability are set as the hold-continuous effect, if a low-probability background effect with a low jackpot probability is executed as the hold-continuous effect, it is conceivable to change from the low-probability background effect to a high-probability background effect with a higher jackpot probability. Of course, multiple background effects with similar levels of expectation of winning a jackpot may be set, for example, multiple low-expectation background effects with low expectations of winning a jackpot, and the background effects may be changed amongst the low-expectation background effects. Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for special electric mechanisms such as opening and closing doors 319 that open and close large prize openings such as variable prize openings 316. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a rotating shaft extending substantially horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the large prize opening can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft; a configuration may be adopted in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-to-back direction of the game board 31; or a configuration may be adopted in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a wing-type member rotating left and right (clockwise and counterclockwise). Furthermore, while the embodiments and modifications described above have described so-called loop probability variation machines, in a game machine that transitions to a game state advantageous to the player, such as a probability variation game state, after the end of a jackpot game, on the condition of a V-entry in a jackpot game, such as a V-ST machine, a V-entry is provided in the large entry opening, such as the variable entry opening 316. The V-entry may be one that can always be entered when the large entry opening is open, but a configuration may be adopted in which it is opened when specific conditions are met. Specific conditions include, for example, the execution of a specific round game (for example, the first round game, the final round game). Also, if the V-entry is configured to be opened when specific conditions are met, a configuration can be adopted in which a movable member capable of opening and closing the V-entry is provided in the V-entry, and the V-entry is opened and closed by controlling the operation of the movable member. Furthermore, if the V-entry is opened when specific conditions are met, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-entry is closed by the entry of a game ball into the V-entry or after a certain period of time has elapsed. Other changes to the effects (continuous hold effects) may include the types of decorative symbols used in the first special game,

The background color of the special symbol game may be the color tone of the background of the first special symbol game, or it may be a part of the background of the first special symbol game, or it may be the entire background of the first special symbol game. The timing of the change may be at the start of the variation of the first special symbol game, in the middle of the variation, at the timing when a specific event (e.g., a reach is established, a super reach develops, a special reach develops) occurs during the variation, or at the time the symbols stop. For example, the background effect (specific effect image) of a part or the whole before a specific event occurs may be changed to a different type of background (predetermined effect image) at the timing when the specific event (e.g., a reach is established, a super reach develops, a special reach develops) occurs. In addition, there may be multiple large prize slots, for example, there may be a configuration in which a large prize slot with a V prize slot and a large prize slot without a V prize slot are provided separately. Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for the ordinary electric mechanism 315b, which switches whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of game balls into the starting prize entry opening, such as the second prize entry opening 315. For example, a tulip-type ordinary electric mechanism (so-called electric chu) can be adopted in which a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened to the left and right; a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending substantially horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the starting prize entry opening can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft; a configuration in which the starting prize entry opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board 31; and a configuration in which the starting prize entry opening is opened and closed by the wing members rotating left and right (clockwise and counterclockwise). Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modified examples described above, the number of prize balls set for each prize entry point (general prize entry point 313, first prize entry point 314, second prize entry point 315, variable prize entry point 316, etc.) is merely an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each prize entry point, it is possible to realize multiple types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a so-called loop probability variation machine, which is a type 1 gaming machine, was explained. However, in addition to loop probability variation machines, there are also type 1 and type 2 mixed gaming machines. In a type 1 and type 2 mixed machine, two types of jackpot games can be performed: type 1 jackpot games and type 2 jackpot games. A type 1 jackpot game is performed, for example, after the end of a special feature game that clearly indicates that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. After the end of a type 1 jackpot game, the game transitions to a time-saving game state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second prize pocket as a benefit state. On the other hand, a type 2 jackpot game is performed when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize pocket in the time-saving game state is a minor win, and the game ball is entered into a predetermined prize pocket in a minor win game based on that minor win.

Furthermore, in various types of gaming machines, it is conceivable that the game could transition to a time-saving mode if the jackpot draw result is a loss. For example, the type of loss in the jackpot draw could be a time-saving symbol stop failure (where the time-saving symbol is displayed), or it could be a case of consecutive losses in a predetermined number of jackpot draws (e.g., 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) in a low-probability mode (a so-called "ceiling").

Furthermore, in gaming machines, it is crucial to increase the attention and interest of the game to enhance players' motivation to play. Specifically, when adopting a configuration where the conditions for a time-saving game are met and the game transitions to a time-saving game state when the time-saving symbols fail to stop, it is important to add new gameplay elements that increase attention and interest, thereby enhancing players' motivation to play.

This gaming machine, as a specific configuration of the present invention, includes a "condition for gameplay fulfillment" as a first or second trigger, a "profitable state" as a predetermined state executed by a predetermined state execution means, a "low profitable state" as a first state and a "high profitable state" as a second state that the state execution means can execute, and a "state in which the high profitable condition is fulfilled" as a specific state.

The first and second triggers are those that result in the fulfillment of the game conditions at different times. Examples of the first and second triggers include: achieving a predetermined result in a predetermined lottery; a game ball entering a predetermined area; the game ball entering the predetermined area being detected by a detector and triggering a lottery; the trigger for a predetermined lottery being fulfilled; a predetermined game state being established; a specific game state occurring as a result of the predetermined game state being established; a specific game state ending; and any combination thereof.

The predetermined state can be any state that grants a benefit during a predetermined period, or a state that is highly likely to grant a benefit. Examples of predetermined states include a predetermined number of time-saving game states, a predetermined number of probability-changing game states, a predetermined time-saving game state, a predetermined probability-changing game state, a predetermined jackpot state during a predetermined period, a predetermined minor jackpot state during a predetermined period, or any combination thereof.

The first and second states are controlled to have at least two benefit states, a higher and a lower state, where a predetermined event is controlled in a manner favorable to the player, and a state where the predetermined event is controlled in a manner even more favorable to the player than the first state, resulting in a relative difference in the player's benefit. Examples of the first and second states include causing a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action, increasing the probability of causing a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action, setting the probability of causing a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action to 100%, performing a lottery to cause a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action with a predetermined probability, increasing the time it takes for a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action, and any combination thereof.

Furthermore, in this gaming machine, a specific value is determined when a second trigger is established under a predetermined state. The specific value can be any numerical value that can determine the execution period. Examples of specific values include the number of times a predetermined game state is executed, a reference value that serves as the basis for its execution, specific time data, specific random values, or any combination thereof.

The specified state is simply a state in which a high-profit condition is met, which allows for the determination that a high profit should be granted when a predetermined profit is given. Examples of high-profit conditions include exceeding or falling below a predetermined threshold for a predetermined number of times, exceeding or falling below a predetermined threshold for a predetermined time, achieving a predetermined judgment result, or storing predetermined information. Furthermore, any method is acceptable for determining whether or not a high-profit condition is met, as long as it is feasible, including software-based determination, hardware-based determination, or a combination thereof.

The execution period can be determined based on specific values. Examples of execution periods include the number of special symbol plays, the duration of the game, the number of times game balls enter various prize slots, the number of times game balls pass through the through gate, the number of times variable prize slots are opened, the variation time of various variable symbols, the display time of the stopping results of various variable symbols, the time of granting benefits as a result of the stopping results of various variable symbols, and any combination of these.

In this embodiment, the game machine includes a jackpot, a minor win, and a loss as results of a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning slot, which is accessible with the support of an electric mechanism. Furthermore, the game machine in this embodiment includes two time-saving game states: a short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), which is a low-profit state with a short opening time for the electric mechanism, and a long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), which is a high-profit state with a long opening time for the electric mechanism.

The short-opening time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) is entered after the completion of a Type 1 jackpot game in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) when the conditions for the second time-saving game state are met. The benefit of this state is that the opening time of the second prize slot is set to a short period (e.g., 0.6 seconds) that makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot. Thus, in the short-opening time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), it is difficult to receive the second special jackpot lottery because it is difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot, making it difficult to execute minor jackpot games. Furthermore, it is a low-benefit state because it is difficult or impossible to enter the V prize slot, which provides an opportunity to execute a Type 2 jackpot game during minor jackpot games. As a result, in the short-opening time-saving game state, Type 2 jackpot games are difficult to execute, or practically not executed.

On the other hand, the long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is entered when the predetermined conditions described later are met in the short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state). In this state, the opening time of the second prize slot is set to a long duration (e.g., 3 seconds) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the second prize slot. Thus, in the long-open time-saving game state, because it is easy for game balls to enter the second prize slot, it is easier to receive the second special prize draw, making it easier to execute minor prize games. Furthermore, game balls can enter the V prize slot, which provides an opportunity to execute two types of prize games during minor prize games. Therefore, the long-open time-saving game state is a highly advantageous state for players compared to the short-open time-saving game state, as it makes it easier to execute two types of prize games.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second special feature jackpot lottery result, triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot, includes jackpots, minor wins, and misses, as described above. However, a "miss" is also defined as a "time-saving symbol stop miss," where a time-saving symbol is displayed after the end of the second special feature game, allowing the player to transition to a long-time-saving game state. When this time-saving symbol stop miss is set, the conditions for time-saving gameplay are met, potentially leading to a transition to the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the predetermined conditions for transitioning from a low-profit state, such as a short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), to a high-profit state, such as a long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), are: firstly, the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbols do not stop; and secondly, the number of time-saving game rounds (specific value) set for the time-saving game state in response to the said time-saving symbol stop failure is greater than the remaining number of time-saving game rounds (predetermined unexecuted value) in the short-open time-saving game state (specific condition fulfilled). In this case, the high-profit condition is fulfilled, and the game transitions to the high-profit state, the long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). For example, if the number of time-saving game spins set for a time-saving game state that fails to stop on the time-saving symbol is 50, then if the remaining number of time-saving game spins in that short-open time-saving game state is 49 or less, the high-profit condition is met, and the game transitions to the high-profit long time-saving game state (second state). However, if the remaining number of time-saving game spins in that short-open time-saving game state is 50 or more, the high-profit condition is not met, and the game does not transition to the long time-saving game state, remaining in the low-profit short time-saving game state (second time-saving game state).

Thus, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, in order to transition to a time-saving game state (the third time-saving game state, which is the long-open time-saving game state in this embodiment), which is a high-profit state in which two types of big win games can be executed via a small win game, it is necessary to transition to a time-saving game state (the second time-saving game state, which is the short-open time-saving game state in this embodiment), which is a low-profit state in which the player transitions after the end of a first type of big win game when the conditions for time-saving games are met. Furthermore, the high-profit state is met and the player transitions when the result of the big win lottery in the short-open time-saving game state (the second time-saving game state) is a time-saving symbol stop failure, and the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for that time-saving symbol stop failure is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in that time-saving game state (the second time-saving game state). In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment has stricter conditions for transitioning to the long-open time-saving game state, a high-profit state where two types of jackpot games can be played, compared to conventional Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machines. Furthermore, a novel gameplay element is added that utilizes the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds set for when the time-saving symbols fail to stop. As a result, in this embodiment, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of time-saving symbols in the short-open time-saving game state, a low-profit state transitioned to after the end of a Type 1 jackpot game when the conditions for time-saving game play are met. They can also enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game transitions to the long-open time-saving game state, a high-profit state where two types of jackpot games can be played, when the time-saving symbols are displayed. This increases the level of attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the player's motivation to play in a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from a low-profit state, such as a short-opening time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), to a high-profit state, such as a long-opening time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), are that the result of the jackpot lottery in the low-profit state, such as a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and that the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for such failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the short-opening time-saving game state, thus fulfilling the conditions for a high-profit state. Thus, in the short-open time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of games) set as a specific value for that failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in that short-open time-saving game state, the conditions for a high-profit state are met and the game transitions from the low-profit short-open time-saving game state to the high-profit long-open time-saving game state. In this way, the fewer the remaining number of time-saving games in the low-profit short-open time-saving game state (the more times the special symbol game is played in the short-open time-saving game state), the easier it is to transition to the high-profit long-open time-saving game state. As a result, as the number of remaining time-saving game rounds decreases in the low-profit short-open time-saving game state (as the number of special symbol game rounds in the second time-saving game increases), the expectation of time-saving symbols stopping and the attention to whether or not the game will transition to the high-profit long-open time-saving game state increases. This further enhances the level of attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the players' motivation to play.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 82 to 113. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again, even if they were already described in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of the gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 84. Here, Figure 82 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 83 and 84 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the feather mechanism 83 provided on the game board 31 shown in Figure 82.

As shown in Figure 82, the game machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with two through gates 317L and 317R, similar to the first embodiment described above. Through gate 317L is located in the left-side area of the game board 31, allowing game balls launched into the left-side area of the game board 31 to pass through. This left-side through gate 317L has a ball entry sensor 317La (see Figure 7), which determines whether or not a game ball has passed through through gate 317L. Through gate 317R is located in the right-side area of the game board 31, allowing game balls launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 to pass through. This right-side through gate 317R has a ball entry sensor 317Ra (see Figure 7), which determines whether or not a game ball has passed through through gate 317R.

In this way, by providing through gates 317L and 317R in the left and right regions of the game board 31, regardless of whether the game ball is launched into the left or right region of the game board 31, the conditions for the regular lottery game are met based on the game ball passing through the through gates 317L and 317R, and the regular winning lottery is executed. If the result of the regular winning lottery is a win, the regular winning game is executed, and in this regular winning game, the electric mechanism 315b opens, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second prize slot 315. That is, in this embodiment, not only in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), but also in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) by launching the game ball 99 into the left region of the game board 31, it is possible to enter the second prize slot 315.

Furthermore, unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine rather than a loop probability variation machine, and is equipped with a feather mechanism 83 located in the right-hand region of the game board 31. The feather mechanism 83 is activated during the minor win game, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second special symbol game is a minor win. It provides the trigger for the execution of the Type 2 jackpot game by allowing game balls to enter the V-entry slot 833 (described later) during the minor win game.

The wing mechanism 83 is located above the variable prize entry opening 316 and to the right of the symbol display section 341. As shown in Figure 83, the wing mechanism 83 has an entry opening 831 for introducing game balls 99 into the wing mechanism 83, and a movable wing section 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (position of the solid line in Figure 83) that closes the entry opening 831 and an open position (position of the dashed line in Figure 83) that opens the entry opening 831. When the movable wing section 832 is in the standby position and the entry opening 831 is closed by the movable wing section 832, game balls 99 cannot be introduced into the wing mechanism 83. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 84(A) and 84(B), when the movable wing section 832 is in the open position and the entry opening 831 is open, the movable wing section 832 can receive game balls 99. The game balls 99 received by the movable wing section 832 can be introduced into the wing mechanism 83 via the entry opening 831. The movable wing section 832 is activated to the open position when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by a ball entering the second prize entry opening 315 is a minor win (see Figures 87(A) and 87(B)), opening the entry opening 831 for a predetermined time, for example, the time it takes for 1 to 3 game balls 99 to enter the wing mechanism 83 (1.8 seconds or less). Of course, the opening time of the entry opening 831 during a minor win can be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

The wing mechanism 83 contains a V-prize entry port 833, a normal prize entry port 834, and a V-prize entry port opening/closing unit 835. Each of the V-prize entry port 833 and the normal prize entry port 834 is equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects when a game ball enters either the V-prize entry port 833 or the normal prize entry port 834. The V-prize entry port opening/closing unit 835 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (see Figure 84(A)) that closes the V-prize entry port 833 and an open position (see Figure 84(B)) that opens the V-prize entry port 833. Normally, the V-prize entry port opening/closing unit 835 is in standby position, closing the V-prize entry port 833. When the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor prize, it is activated at a predetermined timing, opening the V-prize entry port 833.

Here, the predetermined timing at which the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 is activated is set according to the game state in which a jackpot lottery is performed in which the lottery result is a minor win, as described later. Specifically, the predetermined timing is set to the opening (first opening) of the first minor win game performed by the minor win when the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-opening time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state) described later is a minor win (see Figure 87(A)) (see Figures 91(A) and 91(C)). The first opening of the first minor win game is performed before the execution of the movable wing operation game in which the entry slot 831 is opened by the operation of the movable wing unit 832. Therefore, when the predetermined timing at which the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 is activated in the first minor win game is set to the first opening, no game balls 99 are entered into the V-entry slot 833. Therefore, in the first minor win game, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first and second time-saving game states is a minor win, no game balls 99 are entered into the V-entry slot 833. Furthermore, in the short-open time-saving game states (first and second time-saving game states), the two types of jackpot games described later are not executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a minor win.

On the other hand, the predetermined timing at which the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 is activated is set to the movable wing operation game of the second minor prize game executed by the minor prize when the result of the big prize lottery in the long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) described later is a minor prize (see Figure 87(B)). (See Figures 91(B) and 91(C)). In the movable wing operation game, the introduction opening 831 is opened by the activation of the movable wing 832, and game balls 99 can enter the inside of the wing mechanism 83 through the introduction opening 831. Therefore, when the predetermined timing at which the V-prize opening opening/closing unit 835 is activated is set to the movable wing operation game, game balls 99 that have entered the inside of the wing mechanism 83 can enter the V-prize opening 833. Therefore, in the second minor win game, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is a minor win, game balls 99 can be entered into the V-entry slot 833. In the third time-saving game state, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a minor win, the two types of jackpot games described later may be executed.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to Figures 85 to 87, various tables and the like used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

[Table of success/failure rates for general diagrams, etc.]
Here, Figure 85 shows an example of a normal win/loss table. In this embodiment, two types of normal win/loss tables are set: the normal game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 85(A) and the time-saving game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 85(B). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of winning a normal win differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, with the probability of winning a normal win being set higher in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state.

The normal game state win/loss table shown in Figure 85(A) is the table used for the win lottery in the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 85(A), in the normal game state win/loss table, a value of 0 for the random number counter C4 indicates a win, while a value between 1 and 299 indicates a loss. In other words, the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) has a win probability of 1/300 in the win lottery, resulting in a low-profit state where the second prize slot 315 is less likely to open.

The time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 85(B) is the table used for the normal symbol win lottery in the time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 85(B), in the time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table, unlike the normal game state normal symbol win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a loss, and a value of 1 to 299 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a normal symbol win. In other words, in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal symbol win in the normal symbol win lottery is set to 299/300, which is higher than the probability of a normal symbol win in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and it is a high-profit state where the second prize entry point 315 is more likely to open.

Thus, in this low-frequency support mode, the second prize slot 315 is less likely to open, and therefore, the player is unlikely to gain any particular benefit from the opening of the second prize slot 315.

In this embodiment, as described later, three time-saving game states are set: the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. However, the probability of winning with a regular symbol is set to be the same in all three time-saving game states. Of course, the probability of winning with a regular symbol may be set to differ depending on the type of time-saving game state. Furthermore, the probability of winning with a regular symbol in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) and the probability of winning with a regular symbol in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 85(A) and 85(B), and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the game state that references the time-saving game state regular symbol win/loss table may include the special symbol probability fluctuation state and the time-saving game state.

Here, Figure 85(C) shows an example of the relationship between the type of game state and the opening mode (opening time) of the electric mechanism 315b in the normal win game, which is executed when the result of the normal win lottery is a normal win.

As shown in Figure 85(C), when the result of the regular win lottery is a regular win, the electric mechanism 315b is opened during the regular win game, allowing the game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315. However, the opening mode (opening time) of the electric mechanism 315b during the regular win game is set according to the game state in which the regular win lottery was performed.

Specifically, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the first time-saving game state (see Figure 96) triggered by a missed time-saving symbol stop in the normal game state, and the second time-saving game state (see Figure 96) triggered by a Type 1 jackpot, the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is set to 0.6 seconds (short opening), which is the same as the launch interval of the game balls 99. In this short opening, the expected number of balls entering when game balls 99 are launched continuously is set to one or less. For example, for 3 to 5 normal jackpots, approximately one game ball 99 will enter the second prize slot 315.

On the other hand, the third time-saving game state (see Figure 96), which can be entered when the second time-saving game state is active, is a high-profit state in which the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is set to 3 seconds (long opening), which is five times the interval between the launch of the game balls 99. In this long opening state, the expected number of balls to enter when the game balls 99 are launched continuously is set to one or more. For example, approximately 1 to 3 game balls 99 enter the second prize pocket 315 for one normal win.

Furthermore, even if the game state when the game balls 99 enter the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), if the game state when the display of the regular symbols starts is one of the various time-saving game states, the variation time and the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b will be determined by the conditions of the time-saving game state. Also, even if the game state when the game balls 99 enter the through gates 317L and 317R is one of the various time-saving game states, if the game state when the display of the regular symbols starts is the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the variation time and the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b will be determined by the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, if 99 game balls enter through gates 317L and 317R during a spin of regular symbols in a time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), resulting in one ball being held, and the game state at the time the spinning regular symbols stopped is still in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), then the spinning of the regular symbols corresponding to the held ball will begin with various draws performed under the conditions of the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) before the spinning regular symbols stopped, then the spinning of the regular symbols corresponding to the held ball will begin with various draws performed under the conditions of the normal game state (low-frequency support mode).

Furthermore, if 99 game balls enter through gates 317L and 317R during the reel spinning of regular symbols in normal game mode (low-frequency support mode), resulting in one ball being held, and the game state at the time the reel spinning regular symbols stop is still normal game mode (low-frequency support mode), then the reel spinning of the regular symbols corresponding to the held ball will begin with various draws performed under the conditions of the low-profit normal game mode (low-frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the time-saving game mode (high-frequency support mode) and the high-profit conditions have been met by the time the reel spinning regular symbols stop, then the reel spinning of the regular symbols corresponding to the held ball will begin with various draws performed under the conditions of the high-profit time-saving game mode (high-frequency support mode).

Furthermore, the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b during normal gameplay, the first time-saving gameplay state, the second time-saving gameplay state, and the third time-saving gameplay state is not limited to the example shown in Figure 85(C) and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 85(C), only one type of opening time for the electric mechanism 315b is set for each game state as a normal winning game. However, multiple types of opening times for the electric mechanism 315b in a normal winning game may be set for at least one of the game states: normal game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, and third time-saving game state.

[First Special Feature Jackpot Win/Loss Table]
The first special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used for the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when the conditions for the special symbol lottery game are met, specifically when a game ball 99 enters the first prize slot 314. Here, Figure 86(A) shows an example of the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 86(A), the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table includes six jackpot win/loss tables corresponding to six game setting values from 1 to 6. In each jackpot win/loss table, the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is either a jackpot or a loss, depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random value). Furthermore, in the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table, the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot lottery increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 (in descending order of game setting value), making it more advantageous for the player.

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 1, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 206 random values ranging from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 2, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 202 random values ranging from 0 to 211 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 3, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 218 random values ranging from 0 to 217 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 4, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 224 random values ranging from 0 to 223 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 5, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 230 random values ranging from 0 to 229 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 6, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 236 random values between 0 and 235 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536).

Then, when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is conducted based on the jackpot success/failure table selected according to the game settings, the jackpot game is executed if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the first special feature jackpot success/failure table of this embodiment, the jackpot random values were consecutive values, but the jackpot random values may not be consecutive values, and some or all of them may be discrete values.

Furthermore, while there are six tables for determining whether the first special symbol jackpot is achieved, corresponding to the six game setting values, only one such table is necessary, and the game setting values are not limited to six levels.

[Table for distributing types of big wins in the first special feature, type 1]
The First Special Feature Type 1 Jackpot Distribution Table is used to distribute the type of First Special Feature Type 1 jackpot when the result of the First Special Feature Jackpot drawing is a jackpot. Here, Figure 86(B) shows an example of the First Special Feature Type 1 Jackpot Distribution Table.

As shown in Figure 86(B), in the first special feature type 1 jackpot distribution table, out of 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 19, 19 random values from 0 to 18 represent 2R short-open time-saving jackpots, and the single random value of 19 represents a 16R short-open time-saving jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, two types of first special feature type 1 jackpots are set: 2R short-open time-saving jackpots and 16R short-open time-saving jackpots. The distribution rate for 2R short-open time-saving jackpots is set to 95%, and the distribution rate for 16R short-open time-saving jackpots is set to 5%.

Here, if the result of the lottery in the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot, the conditions for a jackpot game are met, and as a benefit state for winning the jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened is repeated twice. If the result of the lottery in the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a 16R short-open time-saving jackpot, the conditions for a jackpot game are met, and as a benefit state for winning the jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened is repeated 16 times. In both the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot and the 16R short-open time-saving jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots ends, the benefit state transitions to the second time-saving game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. Also, during any jackpot, the execution period of the variation display time of the normal symbols, the confirmation display time, or the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is controlled in low-frequency support mode. In this second time-saving game state, the electric mechanism 315b opens frequently because the probability of a regular win occurring in the lottery triggered by the passing of game balls 99 through gates 317L and 317R is high (see Figure 85(B)). However, because the time the electric mechanism 315b is open is short (0.6 seconds), it is a short-open time-saving game state where a large number of game balls 99 cannot be expected to enter the second prize entry point 315 (see Figure 85(C)).

Furthermore, the upper limit (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state, which is entered after the completion of a jackpot game based on the first special feature type 1 jackpot, is set to the number of rounds that can be performed using the number of game balls (expected payout or expected net payout) that the player can acquire through a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game. This allows the player to perform the specified number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state using approximately the number of game balls acquired through a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game, without significantly reducing their remaining balls. This prevents the player from suffering a major disadvantage upon transitioning to the second time-saving game state, while simultaneously providing a chance to transition to the third time-saving game state (described later), which allows for a transition to a type 2 jackpot game state via a minor jackpot game state.

Furthermore, if the maximum number of game balls that enter the variable prize slot 316 in each round of gameplay is set to 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for entering the variable prize slot 316 is set to 10, then the expected payout in the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game becomes 200 balls. Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper limit (specified number) of the number of time-saving gameplay rounds in the second time-saving game state is set to 100 rounds, which is the number of rounds that can be performed by launching approximately 150 to 200 game balls.

Thus, when the first special jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of 99 game balls into the first prize slot 314, results in a jackpot, a Type 1 jackpot game is executed as a benefit state granted for winning the jackpot, consisting of a predetermined number of rounds of gameplay. Furthermore, a second time-saving game state is triggered after the completion of this Type 1 jackpot game.

[Special Feature Variation Table No. 1]
The first special symbol variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game that is executed for the first special symbol jackpot lottery when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 86(C) shows an example of the first special symbol variation table.

As shown in Figure 86(C), in the first special pattern variation table, special pattern variation patterns are pre-associated according to the value of the special pattern variation type counter CS1. In this first special pattern variation table, one of special pattern variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special pattern variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special pattern variation table, of the 200 values of the special pattern variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, the 10 random values from 0 to 9 correspond to special pattern variation pattern "01" with a variation display time of 30 seconds, the 110 random values from 10 to 119 correspond to special pattern variation pattern "02" with a variation display time of 60 seconds, and the 80 random values from 120 to 199 correspond to special pattern variation pattern "03" with a variation display time of 90 seconds.

If special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a special symbol variation display time of 30s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a normal reach performance. If special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach performance pattern with a special symbol variation display time of 60s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the super reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a super reach performance. Furthermore, if special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a special reach performance pattern with the longest special symbol variation display time of 90s as the variation type (performance pattern), and the special reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc. A Special Reach演出 pattern is a special reach演出 pattern in which the final individual演出 type in the special feature game is a Special Reach演出.

[Table for Classifying Unspecified Type of Special Feature No. 1]
The first special symbol miss type distribution table is used to distribute the type of miss when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 86(D) shows an example of the first special symbol miss type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 86(D), the first special symbol miss type distribution table defines the miss type according to the value (random number) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss type distribution table, out of 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 9 random numbers from 0 to 8 are for forward/backward misses, 30 random numbers from 9 to 38 are for reaches other than forward/backward misses, 199 random numbers from 39 to 237 are for complete misses, and 1 random number at 238 is for a time-saving symbol stop miss.

Here, "reach" refers to a state in the symbol display unit 341 where, between the start of the display of the decorative symbols and the time the symbols stop, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is likely to occur. For example, in this state, the same decorative symbol stops at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the reach state in the symbol display unit 341, story-based presentations are executed, such as displaying videos of predetermined characters to suggest the level of expectation, or player-participation presentations where the player's actions on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the presentation. It is also possible that the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or displayed in a reduced or enlarged state during the execution of these presentations.

Furthermore, a front/back miss reach is a miss where, after a reach occurs using decorative symbols, the final stopping symbol stops one position before or after the reach symbol. A reach other than a front/back miss is a miss where, after a reach occurs using decorative symbols, the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol. In addition, a complete miss and a time-saving symbol stop miss are misses where no reach occurs using decorative symbols (non-reach misses). In addition, a time-saving symbol stop miss is a miss where a specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination) (see Figure 112) among the non-reach symbol combinations is displayed as the stop, and after the display of this specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination), the game transitions to the first time-saving game state described later. This first time-saving game state is one of the high-frequency support modes, but it is a short-open time-saving game state where the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is short (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)). A complete miss occurs when, among the non-reach symbol combinations, no symbol combinations other than specific symbol combinations (time-saving symbol combinations) are displayed as stop symbols.

[First Special Symbol Failure Variation Table]
The first special symbol miss variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game that is executed for the first special symbol jackpot lottery when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 86(E) shows an example of the first special symbol miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 86(E), the first special symbol miss variation table defines the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special symbol according to the type of miss and the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. This first special symbol miss variation table includes a first special symbol miss variation table for miss reaches (pre- and post-miss reaches and reaches other than pre- and post-miss reaches), a first special symbol miss variation table for complete misses, and a first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses.

In the first special symbol miss variation table for losing reaches (both consecutive and non-consecutive misses), one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss variation table for losing reaches (both consecutive and non-consecutive misses), out of 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, 100 random values from 0 to 99 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "01" with a special symbol variation display time of 30 seconds, 50 random values from 100 to 149 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "02" with a special symbol variation display time of 60 seconds, and 50 random values from 150 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "03" with a special symbol variation display time of 90 seconds.

In the first special symbol miss variation table for complete misses, either special symbol variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss variation table for complete misses, of the 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, 150 random values from 0 to 149 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "04," which has a special symbol variation display time of 7 seconds, and 50 random values from 150 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05," which has a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds.

In the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses, one of the special symbol variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses, out of 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, 100 random values from 0 to 99 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "04" with a special symbol variation display time of 7 seconds, 50 random values from 100 to 149 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05" with a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds, 30 random values from 150 to 179 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "06" with a special symbol variation display time of 15 seconds, and 20 random values from 180 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05" with a special symbol variation display time of 20 seconds. In other words, when the time-saving symbols fail to stop, special symbol variation patterns with shorter display times are more likely to be selected.

Here, after the first special symbol game ends when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the game transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (see Figure 96). Then, in the first special symbol failure variation table for failures to stop the time-saving symbols, the upper limit (specified number) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, which is a short-open time-saving game state, is defined according to the special symbol variation pattern (specified number of times) set according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol failure variation table for failures to stop the time-saving symbols, the upper limit (specified number) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state corresponds to 5 times for special symbol variation pattern "04", 10 times for special symbol variation pattern "05", 20 times for special symbol variation pattern "06", and 30 times for special symbol variation pattern "07". As mentioned above, when the time-saving symbol stops and fails to result in a win, special symbol variation patterns with shorter display times are more likely to be selected. Therefore, when setting the upper limit (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving gameplay rounds in the first time-saving game state, those with fewer time-saving gameplay rounds are more likely to be selected. Furthermore, by including the time-saving symbol stop failure as a result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, it becomes possible to transition from the low-frequency support mode, the normal game state, to the high-frequency support mode, the first time-saving game state (short-open time-saving game state). Thus, the ability to transition from the normal game state to the high-frequency support mode, the first time-saving game state (short-open time-saving game state), reduces the monotony that tends to occur in the normal game state, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Thus, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of 99 game balls into the first prize slot 314, is a failure to stop on the time-saving symbol, then the first time-saving game state will be entered after the end of the first special symbol game in which the lottery result was a failure to stop on the time-saving symbol.

In this embodiment, the upper limit (predetermined number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds in the first time-saving game state is defined by the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses. However, this upper limit (predetermined number of times) may be set by a distribution table provided separately from the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the type of special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) for time-saving symbol stop misses corresponds to the prescribed number of time-saving game rounds. However, the prescribed number of time-saving game rounds may be set independently of the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time). Also, time-saving symbol stop misses may be excluded as a miss in the first special symbol jackpot lottery.

[Short-Opening Second Special Symbol Jackpot Win/Loss Table]
The short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to the short-opening of the electric mechanism 315b. That is, the short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 based on the result of the lottery for a regular symbol win in the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state being a regular symbol win. Here, Figure 87(A) shows an example of the short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 87(A), the short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is set in common for six game setting values from 1 to 6. In the short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table, as the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, one of a jackpot, a minor win, or a miss is selected according to the value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in a short opening, unlike the first special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize slot 314, the lottery result includes a minor win in which the feather mechanism 83 (see Figures 83 and 84) is activated. Specifically, in the short-opening second special feature jackpot win/loss table, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, values from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, values from 206 to 58,980 correspond to minor wins, and values from 58,981 to 65,535 correspond to losses. That is, in the second special feature jackpot lottery, which is triggered when the electric mechanism 315b is briefly opened and game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the minor win probability to approximately 1/1.15, and the loss probability to approximately 1/10.

[Long Opening Second Special Symbol Jackpot Win/Loss Table]
The long-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to the long-opening of the electric mechanism 315b. That is, the long-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 based on the result of the regular symbol win lottery in the third time-saving game state being a regular symbol win. Here, Figure 87(B) shows an example of the long-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 87(B), the long-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is set in common for six game setting values from 1 to 6. In the long-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table, as the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, one of a jackpot, a minor win, or a miss is selected according to the value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in long-open mode, unlike the first special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize slot 314, the lottery result includes a minor win in which the feather mechanism 83 (see Figures 83 and 84) is activated. Specifically, in the long-opening second special feature jackpot win/loss table, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, values from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, values from 206 to 65,529 correspond to minor wins, and values from 65,530 to 65,535 correspond to losses. That is, in the second special feature jackpot lottery, which is triggered when the electric mechanism 315b is fully opened and 99 game balls enter the second prize slot 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the minor win probability to approximately 1/1.003, and the loss probability to approximately 1/318.1. Compared to the short-opening second special feature jackpot win/loss table, the loss probability is set lower, and the minor win probability is set higher.

In this embodiment, a single short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and a long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table were provided common to the six game setting values. However, one or both of these tables may be set for each game setting value. Furthermore, it is also conceivable to combine the short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and the long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table into a single second special symbol jackpot success/failure table.

[Second Special Symbol Winning Variation Table]
The second special symbol win variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game, which is executed for the second special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315, when the result of the lottery is a win (jackpot or small win). Here, Figure 87(C) shows an example of the second special symbol win variation table.

As shown in Figure 87(C), the second special symbol win variation table is provided according to the type of win (jackpot and minor win), and includes a second special symbol win variation table for jackpots and a second special symbol win variation table for minor wins.

The second special symbol variation table for big wins has pre-associated special symbol variation patterns according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. In this second special symbol variation table for big wins, either special symbol variation pattern "01" or "06" is selected depending on the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special symbol variation table for big wins, of the 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, the 100 random values from 0 to 99 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "01," which has a special symbol variation display time of 30 seconds, and the 100 random values from 100 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "06," which has a special symbol variation display time of 15 seconds.

In the second special symbol win variation table for minor wins, special symbol variation pattern "05" is selected regardless of the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special symbol win variation table for minor wins, all 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 (0 to 199) correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05," which has a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol win variation table had one type of special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) set for when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery was a minor win. However, multiple types of such special symbol variation patterns (special symbol variation display times) may be set.

[Second Special Feature Failure Variation Table]
The second special symbol miss variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that is executed for the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315, when the lottery result is a miss. Here, Figure 87(D) shows an example of the second special symbol miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 87(D), in the second special feature deviation variation table, the special feature variation pattern (special feature variation display time) is associated with the value (random value) of the special feature variation type counter CS1, and one of the special feature variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special feature variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special symbol miss variation table, out of the 239 special symbol variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 238, 167 random values from 0 to 166 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "04" with a special symbol variation display time of 7 seconds; 36 random values from 167 to 202 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05" with a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds; 24 random values from 203 to 226 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "06" with a special symbol variation display time of 15 seconds; and 12 random values from 227 to 238 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "07" with a special symbol variation display time of 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol miss variation table had four types of special symbol variation patterns (special symbol variation display time) set for when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery was a miss. However, the number of special symbol variation patterns (special symbol variation display time) may be set to something other than four, for example, one type.

[Table for distributing the number of playable rounds during reduced playtime]
The time-saving game count distribution table is used to determine whether or not to transition to the third time-saving game state after the completion of the second special feature game, which is executed for the second special feature jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state, if the lottery result is a loss. It is also used to set the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Here, Figure 87(E) shows an example of the time-saving game count distribution table.

As shown in Figure 87(E), in the time-saving game count distribution table, the upper limit of the time-saving game count (predetermined number of times) is associated with the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Depending on the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1, one of 10, 30, 50, or 100 times is selected. Furthermore, in the time-saving game count distribution table, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time), is used to set the upper limit of the time-saving game count (predetermined number of times), and this upper limit of the time-saving game count (predetermined number of times) is associated with the type of special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time).

Specifically, in the time-saving game count distribution table, out of the 239 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 238, 167 random values from 0 to 166 correspond to 10 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games for special symbol variation pattern "04", which has a special symbol variation display time of 7 seconds; 36 random values from 167 to 202 correspond to 30 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games for special symbol variation pattern "05", which has a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds; 24 random values from 203 to 226 correspond to 50 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games for special symbol variation pattern "06", which has a special symbol variation display time of 15 seconds; and 12 random values from 227 to 238 correspond to 100 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games for special symbol variation pattern "07", which has a special symbol variation display time of 20 seconds. In other words, the upper limit (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving gameplay rounds is set as follows: 10 rounds (approximately 70%), 30 rounds (approximately 15%), 50 rounds (approximately 10%), and 100 rounds (approximately 5%). The higher the specified number of rounds, the less likely it is to be selected.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game count distribution table had the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game count set in accordance with the type of special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time). However, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game count does not necessarily have to correspond to the type of special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving game count distribution table always resulted in a time-saving symbol stop failure when the second special symbol jackpot lottery was unsuccessful. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that only a portion of the cases where the second special symbol jackpot lottery is unsuccessful result in a time-saving symbol stop failure.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game count distribution table of this embodiment, four types of upper limits (prescribed counts) for the number of time-saving game counts were set according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. However, the upper limit (prescribed count) for the number of time-saving game counts may be set to a type other than four, for example, one type.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game count distribution table of this embodiment, the upper limit (predetermined number of times) for the time-saving game count is associated with the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. While the upper limit (predetermined number of times) for the time-saving game count is set using the variation type counter, it is also possible to set a distribution counter for allocating the time-saving game count and use this distribution counter to set the upper limit (predetermined number of times) for the time-saving game count.

[Table for distributing jackpot types during the third time-saving game state]
The third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table is used to distribute the types of jackpots in the third time-saving game state. Jackpots in the third time-saving game state include a Type 1 jackpot, which occurs when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a Type 2 jackpot, which occurs when a game ball 99 enters the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 during a minor win game that is executed when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a minor win. In the third time-saving game state, a common third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table is used to distribute the types (number of rounds) of Type 1 and Type 2 jackpots. Here, Figure 87(F) shows an example of the third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 87(F), in the third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table, out of 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19, 5 random values from 0 to 4 represent 16R long-open time-saving jackpots, and 15 random values from 5 to 19 represent 5R long-open time-saving jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, for both Type 1 and Type 2 jackpots in the third time-saving game state, two types are set: 16R long-open time-saving jackpots and 5R long-open time-saving jackpots. The distribution rate for 16R long-open time-saving jackpots is set to 25%, and the distribution rate for 5R long-open time-saving jackpots is set to 75%.

Here, if the type of jackpot is a 16R long-open time-saving jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game. If the type of jackpot is a 5R long-open time-saving jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened is repeated 5 times during the jackpot game. In both the 16R long-open time-saving jackpot and the 5R long-open time-saving jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots ends, the system returns to the third time-saving game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. This third time-saving game state is a long-open time-saving game state where the probability of a regular win occurring in the lottery, which is triggered when the game balls 99 pass through the through gates 317L and 317R, is high, resulting in a high frequency of opening of the electric mechanism 315b (see Figure 85(B)). Because the electric mechanism 315b remains open for a longer period (3 seconds), a large number of game balls 99 can be expected to enter the second prize entry point 315 (see Figure 85(C)).

Thus, in the third time-saving game state, if the result of the second special feature jackpot lottery, which is executed when 99 game balls enter the second prize slot 315, is a jackpot, a Type 1 jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of rounds is executed, and the third time-saving game state is entered after the completion of the Type 1 jackpot game.

Furthermore, while a common distribution table is used for both Type 1 and Type 2 jackpots in the third time-saving game state, it is also permissible to use different distribution tables for Type 1 and Type 2 jackpots.

[Second Special Feature Type 1 Jackpot Distribution Table]
The second special feature type 1 jackpot distribution table is used to distribute the type of second special feature type 1 jackpot when the result of the second special feature jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a jackpot. Here, Figure 87(G) shows an example of the second special feature type 1 jackpot distribution table.

As shown in Figure 87(G), in the second special feature type 1 jackpot distribution table, out of 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 19, 19 random values from 0 to 18 represent 2R short-opening time-saving jackpots, and the single random value of 19 represents a 16R short-opening time-saving jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, two types of second special feature type 1 jackpots are set: 2R short-opening time-saving jackpots and 16R short-opening time-saving jackpots. The distribution rate for 2R short-opening time-saving jackpots is set to 95%, and the distribution rate for 16R short-opening time-saving jackpots is set to 5%.

Here, if the result of the lottery for the second special feature jackpot in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state is a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened is repeated twice during the jackpot game. If the result of the lottery for the second special feature jackpot in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state is a 16R short-open time-saving jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game. Then, in both the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot and the 16R short-open time-saving jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots ends, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. In this second time-saving game state, the electric mechanism 315b opens frequently because the probability of a regular win occurring in the lottery triggered by the passing of game balls 99 through gates 317L and 317R is high (see Figure 85(B)). However, because the time the electric mechanism 315b is open is short (0.6 seconds), it is a short-open time-saving game state where a large number of game balls 99 cannot be expected to enter the second prize entry point 315 (see Figure 85(C)).

Thus, in either the first or second time-saving game state, if the result of the second special feature jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize entry point 315, is a jackpot, then as a benefit state for winning the jackpot, a Type 1 jackpot game is executed, consisting of a predetermined number of rounds of gameplay, and after the completion of the Type 1 jackpot game, the second time-saving game state is activated.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
Next, referring to Figures 88 to 103, the processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the main timer interrupt processing is the same as in the first embodiment described above, but some of the processing in the main processing differs from the main processing in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 21). Here, Figure 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
As shown in Figure 88, the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that some of the processing of the regular game control processing (step S1404), special game control processing (step S1406), and game state transition processing (step S1408) is performed, and the minor win game control processing (step S1407-1) is also performed. The following describes the steps that differ from the first embodiment in the regular game control processing (step S1404) and special game control processing (step S1406), and then describes the entire procedure of the minor win game control processing (step S1407-1) and game state transition processing (step S1408).

[General Game Control Processing]
The regular game control process executed in step S1404 of the main process in Figure 88 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in the regular game variation start process. The regular game variation start process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 89.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
In the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and various flags are set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol win lottery.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Figure 89, in the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3301). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol game) is a normal game state. In other words, it determines whether the game state is a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, or a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode, when the variation of normal symbols starts, and makes a determination of whether the normal symbol win is based on the support mode at the start of the variation of normal symbols.

Furthermore, the normal game state flag is set to "on" in step S3629 of Figure 98, step S3649 of Figure 99, step S3667 of Figure 100, or step S3701 of Figure 102 when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state during the game state transition process described later. Conversely, it is set to "off" in steps S3608, S3612, or S3616 of Figure 97 when transitioning from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3302. Conversely, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), i.e., if the game is in one of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3305.

<Steps S3302-S3304>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), that is, if it is in low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 makes a determination of whether the normal game state normal game state normal game state win/loss table (see Figure 85(A)) is correct (step S3302), and determines whether the result of the win/loss determination is a normal game state win (step S3303).

Furthermore, whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a regular win is determined based on the regular win random number counter C4, which is stored as a specific value in the regular win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11) after the game balls 99 enter the through gates 317L and 317R.

The MPU 41, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the normal game state normal win/loss table is a normal win (step S3303: Yes), sets the short-open normal win flag to ON (step S3304) and proceeds to step S3309. The short-open normal win flag indicates that the result of the normal win lottery is a short-open win. It is referenced in step S1806 of the normal win game control process in Figure 25 of the first embodiment described above when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to a short opening as the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the normal game state normal win/loss table is not a normal win (step S3303: No), that is, if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3301: No), that is, if it is one of the first to third time-saving game states which are high-frequency support modes, the MPU 41 makes a determination of whether the normal game win lottery is successful or not based on the time-saving game state normal game win success/failure table (see Figure 85(B)) (step S3305), and determines whether the result of the success/failure determination is a normal game win or not (step S3306).

Furthermore, whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a regular win is determined based on the value of the regular win random number counter C4, which is obtained by the entry of the game balls 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R, and stored as a specific value in the regular win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11), similar to the aforementioned step S3302.

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the win/loss judgment based on the time-saving game state normal win/loss table is a normal win (step S3306: Yes), it proceeds to step S3307. If the result of the win/loss judgment is not a normal win (step S3306: No), i.e., the result of the win/loss judgment is a loss, it proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3307 and S3308>
If the result of the win/loss determination based on the regular symbol win/loss table for the time-saving game state is a regular symbol win (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that it is the third time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3307). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the display of the regular symbols (regular symbol game) is the third time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of Figure 99, step S3694 of Figure 101, or step S3723 of Figure 103 when transitioning from another game state to the third time-saving game state during the game state transition process described later. Conversely, it is set to OFF in steps S3657, S3661, or S3668 of Figure 100 when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular-symbol win flag to ON (step S3308) and proceeds to step S3309. The long-opening regular-symbol win flag indicates that the result of the regular-symbol win lottery is a long-opening win. It is referenced in step S1803 of the regular-symbol win game control process in Figure 25 of the first embodiment described above, when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the long-opening as the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b.

On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3307: No), that is, if it is in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3304, sets the short-open normal win flag to on, and then proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss (step S3303 or S3306: No), if the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3304), or if the long-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3308), the MPU 41 starts displaying the variation of the regular symbols on the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3309). Then, the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, indicating that the regular symbols are being displayed in a variation, i.e., that the regular symbol game is being played (step S3310), and ends the regular symbol variation start process.

The execution period for the normal symbol variation display time, the confirmation display time, or the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b when the normal symbol variation display is initiated in the normal symbol display unit 361 is set based on the normal symbol win random number counter C4, the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and various time-saving game state flags, which are specific values obtained by the entry of game balls 99 into each prize entry point 314, 315 and stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11), as described in the first embodiment above. The normal symbol variation display time when the normal symbol variation display is initiated in the normal symbol display unit 361 is determined by referring to the game state at the time the normal symbol variation display is initiated, i.e., the various time-saving game state flags.

[Special Game Control Processing]
The special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main process in Figure 88 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in the special symbol variation start process. Here, Figure 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start process. The special symbol variation start process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 90.

[Special Feature Fluctuation Start Processing]
In the special symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the variation display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game, or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game, are controlled.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 90, in step S3401, the MPU 41 determines whether the special feature game to be started is the first special feature game. Whether the special feature game to be started is the first special feature game is determined, for example, based on the correct/incorrect information moved to the special feature execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special feature hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 in step S2003 or S2006 of the special feature data setting process in Figure 27 of the first embodiment described above.

If the special game to be started is the first special game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, if the special game to be started is not the first special game (step S3401: No), i.e., if the special game to be started is the second special game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3403.

<Step S3402>
If the special feature game to be started is the first special feature game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 makes a win/loss determination based on the first special feature jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86(A)) and the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as win/loss information (numerical information) stored in the special feature execution area AE of the special feature reserve storage area 412b (step S3402), and proceeds to step S3406. The result of the win/loss determination in step S3402 is stored in the RAM 413.

<Steps S3403-S3405>
If the special game to be started is not the first special game (step S3401: No), that is, if the special game to be started is the second special game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the third time-saving game state, is on (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the second special game is the third time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the third time-saving game state flag is set to "on" in step S3644 of Figure 99 or step S3694 of Figure 101 when transitioning from another game state to the third time-saving game state during the game state transition process described later. Conversely, it is set to "off" in steps S3657, S3661, or S3668 of Figure 100 when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is on (step S3403: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the second special symbol game is the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss determination (step S3404) based on the long-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87(B)) and the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as win/loss information (numerical information) stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b, and proceeds to step S3406. The result of the win/loss determination in step S3404 is stored in the RAM 413.

On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is off (step S3403: No), that is, if the game state when starting the second special symbol game is the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss determination (step S3405) based on the win/loss information (numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the win/loss information (numerical information) stored in the short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87(A)) and the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b, and proceeds to step S3406. The result of the win/loss determination in step S3405 is stored in the RAM 413.

<Step S3406>
If the MPU 41 has made a success or failure determination in step S3402, S3404, or S3405, it determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is on (step S3406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting a special feature game is a normal game state or one of the first to third time-saving game states.

Furthermore, the normal game state flag is set to "on" in step S3629 of Figure 98, step S3650 of Figure 99, step S3667 of Figure 100, or step S3701 of Figure 102 when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state during the game state transition process described later. Conversely, it is set to "off" in steps S3608, S3612, or S3616 of Figure 97 when transitioning from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is ON (step S3406: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the special feature game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3413. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is OFF (step S3406: No), that is, if the game state when starting the special feature game is one of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), that is, if the game state when starting the special feature game is one of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, or third time-saving game state) (step S3407), and proceeds to step S3408.

The time-saving game counter is set in step S3605 in Figure 97, and in steps S3672, S3679, S3686, and S3693 in Figure 101 when transitioning from the normal game state or various jackpot game states to one of the first to third time-saving game states. It is also set in step S3643 in Figure 101 when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third game state. Conversely, when starting a special symbol game in one of the first to third time-saving game states, the counter is decremented by 1 in step S3407 of the special symbol variation start process.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 determines whether the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-saving game state, is turned on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the special feature game is the second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the second time-saving game state flag is set to "on" in steps S3673, S3680, S3687 in Figure 101, or step S3711 in Figure 102, when transitioning from another game state to the second time-saving game state during the game state transition process described later. Conversely, it is set to "off" in steps S3636, S3640, S3647, or S3651 in Figure 99 when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to another game state.

If the second time-saving game state flag is ON (step S3408: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the special feature game is the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, if the second time-saving game state flag is OFF (step S3408: No), that is, if the game state when starting the special feature game is not the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3413.

<Step S3409>
If the second time-saving game state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the special symbol game is the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines, based on the result of the win/loss determination in step S3402 or step S3405, whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (step S3409).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3410. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3409: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3413.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the time-saving count counter (the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state) from the number of time-saving games set for the failure to stop the time-saving symbols (see Figures 86(E) and 87(E)) (step S3410), and determines whether the subtracted value is greater than 0 (step S3411). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of time-saving games set for the failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. If the subtracted value is greater than 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to S3412, and if the subtracted value is 0 or less (S3411: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to S3413.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving game counter (the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state) from the number of time-saving game rounds set for the failure to stop the time-saving symbol (see Figures 86(E) and 87(E)) is greater than 0, the game transitions from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. If the subtraction value is less than 0, the game does not transition to the third time-saving game state, and the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state remains unchanged.

In this embodiment, the game state transitions from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state when the subtraction value exceeds 0. However, the game state may also transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state when the subtraction value is 0, not just when the subtraction value exceeds 0. In other words, the game state may transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state when the subtraction value is 0 or greater.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the subtraction value is 0 or less, the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is maintained without change. However, if the subtraction value is 0 or less, the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state may be changed by adding the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol failure, or it may be changed to (or replaced with) the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol failure.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the special symbol game started in the second time-saving game state is the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the game transitions from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the special symbol game ends, provided that the subtraction value exceeds 0. However, only when the special symbol game started in the second time-saving game state is the second special symbol game, the game may transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the special symbol game ends. In other words, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, if the jackpot lottery is for the first special symbol game, the game may not transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. Furthermore, regarding the types of outcomes when the jackpot lottery result for the first special symbol game is a loss, the "short-time symbol stop failure" category may be omitted. In that case, if the special symbol game started in the second short-time game state is the first special symbol game, the game will not transition from the second short-time game state to the third short-time game state after the end of the first special symbol game.

The execution period for the variation display time, confirmation display time, or opening period (number of rounds) of the variable prize pocket 316 for the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game, or for the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game, is set based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and various time-saving game state flags, which are specific values acquired by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize pocket 314 and the second prize pocket 315, and stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b, as described in the first embodiment above. The variation display time for each special symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 is started is determined by referring to the game state at the time the variation display of each special symbol is started, i.e., various time-saving game state flags. Even if the game state when the game balls 99 enter each prize slot 314 and 315 is the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), if the game state when the special symbol variation display starts is one of the various time-saving game states, the execution period of the special symbol variation time and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable prize slot 316 will be determined by the conditions of the time-saving game state. Furthermore, even if the game state when the game balls 99 enter each prize slot 314 and 315 is one of the various time-saving game states, if the game state when the special symbol variation display starts is the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the execution period of the special symbol variation time and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable prize slot 316 will be determined by the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, if 99 game balls enter the respective winning slots 314 and 315 while the special symbols are spinning during a time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), and one ball is held in reserve, and the game state is still in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) when the spinning special symbols stop, the spinning of the special symbols corresponding to the held ball will begin with various draws performed under the conditions of the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) before the spinning special symbols stop, the spinning of the special symbols corresponding to the held ball will begin with various draws performed under the conditions of the normal game state (low-frequency support mode).

Furthermore, if 99 game balls enter the respective winning slots 314 and 315 during the reel spinning of special symbols in normal game mode (low-frequency support mode), resulting in one ball being held, and the game state is still normal game mode (low-frequency support mode) when the reeling special symbols stop, the reel spinning of the special symbols corresponding to the held game ball will begin with various draws conducted under the conditions of normal game mode (low-frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to time-saving game mode (high-frequency support mode) before the reeling special symbols stop, the high-profit conditions will be met, and the reel spinning of the special symbols corresponding to the held game ball will begin with various draws conducted under the conditions of time-saving game mode (high-frequency support mode).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, each time the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the subtraction value is calculated in relation to the upper limit of the number of time-saving game rounds (prescribed number of rounds) set for that failure to stop the time-saving symbols. However, if, in the second time-saving game state, prior to the failure to stop the time-saving symbols, there is one or more jackpot lottery results in which the subtraction value at that time is 0 or less, then it may be determined whether or not to transition to the third time-saving game state based on whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving round counter from the upper limit of the number of time-saving game rounds (prescribed number of rounds) set for that one or more failures to stop the time-saving symbols exceeds 0. In other words, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the system may determine whether to transition to the third time-saving game state based on whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving counter from the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for that failure to stop the time-saving symbols in the second time-saving game state exceeds 0. That is, the system may determine whether the high-profit conditions are met not only based on the result of the time-saving symbol failure in the current jackpot lottery, but also based on the results of previous jackpot lotteries. In this case, the more times the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the higher the probability that the subtracted value will exceed 0 and the system will transition to the third time-saving game state. This can increase the player's attention to the display of the time-saving symbols in the second time-saving game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Step S3412>
If the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state transition flag to ON to transition the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3412). This third time-saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S3641 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 99 below to determine whether or not to transition the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern of the special symbol game, in the special symbol variation display time counter, based on the result of the win/failure determination in step S3402, S3404, or S3405. Specifically, if the result of the win/failure determination in step S3402 is a jackpot, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the special symbol variation display time counter based on the first special symbol type 1 jackpot variation table (see Figure 86(C)), and if the result of the win/failure determination in step S3402 is a miss, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the special symbol variation display time counter based on the first special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 86(E)) corresponding to the type of miss. Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3404 or step S3405 is a big win or a small win, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the second special symbol display unit 363 to the special symbol variation display time counter based on the second special symbol win variation table (see Figure 87(C)) corresponding to the type of win, and if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3404 or step S3405 is a loss, it sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the second special symbol display unit 363 to the special symbol variation display time counter based on the second special symbol loss variation table (see Figure 87(D)).

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in step S3402, S3404, or S3405, and the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) set in step S3413. As a result, in step S1401 of the external output processing in the next main processing (see Figure 88) executed by the MPU 41, the special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "2R short-open time-saving jackpot," the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "A01" to "A03" and "A06," which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" or "06" with an "A" added to indicate that it is a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Also, if the lottery result is a "16R short-open time-saving jackpot," the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "B01" to "B03" and "B06," which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" or "06" with a "B" added to indicate that it is a 16R short-open time-saving jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is "losing," the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "D01" to "D07," which is a special symbol variation pattern with a "D" added to indicate that it is a losing pattern, as the special symbol variation pattern command in RAM 412. Also, if the lottery result is "losing," the MPU 41 includes information in the special symbol variation pattern command indicating whether it is a front/back losing reach, a reach other than a front/back losing reach, a complete loss, or a time-saving symbol stop loss.

<Steps S3415 and S3416>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 starts the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, and further sets the special symbol displaying flag to ON to indicate that the special symbol (first or second special symbol) is being displayed in a changing manner (special symbol game is being played) (step S3416), and then ends the changing start process.

Furthermore, the "Special Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is referenced in step S1902 of the special symbol game control process shown in Figure 26 of the first embodiment described above, in order to determine whether the special symbols are currently being displayed in a variable state (i.e., the special symbol game is in progress) in the special symbol display units 362 and 363 of the main display unit 36.

[Small win game control processing]
In the mini-win game control process executed in step S1407-1 of the main processing in Figure 88 of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the operation of the feather mechanism 83 in the mini-win game, which is executed based on the fact that the result of the big win lottery, which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315, is a mini-win. The mini-win game in this embodiment includes a first mini-win game, which is executed when the result of the second special-symbol big win lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a mini-win, and a second mini-win game, which is executed when the result of the second special-symbol big win lottery in the third time-saving game state is a mini-win. Here, Figure 91 is a time chart showing an example of the progress of the mini-win game.

As shown in Figures 91(A) and 91(B), the minor prize game (first minor prize game or second minor prize game) includes an opening (first opening or second opening) in which the entry port 831 of the wing mechanism 83 remains closed, and a movable wing activation game in which the entry port 831 is opened by the activation of the movable wing portion 832 of the wing mechanism 83. The time of the first opening of the first minor prize game (e.g., 3 to 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the time of the second opening of the second minor prize game (e.g., 2 to 9 seconds). Furthermore, the difference between the time of the first opening of the first minor prize game and the time of the second opening of the second minor prize game (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) is set to be greater than the operating time of the V-entry port opening/closing section 835 (e.g., 0.1 to 1 second), which will be described later.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 91(C), in minor win games, the operating timing and operating time (opening time) of the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 are set the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special symbol jackpot lottery is executed. Of course, one or both of the operating timing and operating time (opening time) of the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 may be set based on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special symbol jackpot lottery is executed, and it is not necessarily required to set them the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state. For example, it is conceivable to set one or both of the operating timing and operating time (opening time) of the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 in the first minor win game executed based on the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the first and second time-saving game states to be different from those of the second minor win game executed based on the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in minor win games, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) is set to be the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) can be set to differ depending on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed. For example, it is conceivable to set the execution time of the movable wing operation game for the first minor win game, which is performed based on the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the first and second time-saving game states, to be shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game for the second minor win game, which is performed based on the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movable wing operation during a minor win is performed for a fixed time (a certain period of time) regardless of whether or not a game ball 99 enters the V-entry slot 833. However, the movable wing operation may be configured to terminate before the fixed time elapses if a game ball 99 enters the V-entry slot 833.

Furthermore, although the mini-win game of this embodiment does not have a set ending, the ending may be executed after the movable wing operation game ends. In this case, it is conceivable that the ending could indicate whether or not a game ball 99 entered the V-entry slot 833 via the symbol display unit 341 or the like.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(A) and 91(C), in the first minor win game, which is executed when the result of the second special feature jackpot lottery in the first and second time-saving game states is a minor win, the operating timing of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 is set to the first opening. In the first opening, as described above, the entry opening 831 of the wing mechanism 83 remains closed, so no game balls 99 are introduced into the wing mechanism 83. Therefore, in the first minor win game, no game balls 99 enter the V-entry opening 833, and the second type of jackpot game does not occur. As a result, in the first and second time-saving game states, even if the first minor win game is executed due to a minor win in the jackpot lottery, the second type of jackpot game is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 91(B) and 91(C), in the second minor win game, which is executed when the result of the second special feature jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a minor win, the operation timing of the V-entry opening opening 835 of the wing mechanism 83 is set to the movable wing operation game. In the movable wing operation game, as described above, the introduction opening 831 is opened when the movable wing 832 is operated, so that game balls 99 can be introduced into the wing mechanism 83. Therefore, in the second minor win game, a type 2 jackpot game can occur when game balls 99 enter the V-entry opening 833. As a result, in the third time-saving game state, a type 2 jackpot game can be executed based on the fact that the second minor win game is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win. In other words, while minor wins are included in the jackpot lottery results in all three time-saving game states (1st, 2nd, and 3rd), it is only in the 3rd time-saving game state that it is possible to generate two types of jackpot games. This adds a novel gameplay element, as will be explained in detail later, where players transition from the 2nd time-saving game state (which is entered after the end of a 1-type jackpot game) to the 3rd time-saving game state (which allows for the generation of two types of jackpot games). This increases attention and interest in the game, enhancing its appeal.

In the first minor prize game of this embodiment, the operating timing of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 was set to the first opening to prevent game balls 99 from entering the V-entry opening 833. However, part or all of the operating timing of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to the movable wing operation game. Specifically, in the first minor prize game, the operating timing of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 may be set to span from the first opening to the movable wing operation game, thereby making it impossible or difficult for game balls 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833. Furthermore, in the first minor win game, the entire timing of the operation of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 may be set to the movable wing operation game, and the operation time of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to be short (for example, 0.02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833. Here, the effect of making it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833 in the first minor win game is as described above, but on the other hand, there is a concern that if it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833 in the first minor win game, the players' attention and interest in the minor win game will decrease. In contrast, if it is made difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry slot 833 during the first minor win game, there is still a possibility that the game ball 99 will enter the V-entry slot 833 during the first minor win game, thus suppressing the decline in player attention and interest in the minor win game.

Next, the specific processing procedure for the minor win game control process in this embodiment will be described. Figures 92 to 95 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the minor win game control process procedure.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 92, in the mini-win game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the first or second special symbol has stopped being displayed, is set to ON (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing has become such that the mini-win game can be started when the first or second special symbol is stopped being displayed. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 26 when the first or second special symbol is stopped being displayed.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is the right timing to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3510 in Figure 93.

<Step S3502>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game is a minor win (step S3502). Whether the result of the big win lottery is a minor win is determined based on the result of the big win lottery stored in the RAM 413 when a win/loss determination is made in step S3402, S3404, or S3405 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 90.

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game is a minor win (step S3502: Yes), it proceeds to step S3503. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win (step S3502: No), it terminates the minor win game control process.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a minor win (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-entry slot opening/closing unit operation standby flag to ON (step S3503). The V-entry slot opening/closing unit operation standby flag indicates that the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 is not in operation and is waiting to operate. This V-entry slot opening/closing unit operation standby flag is referenced in step S3510 of Figure 93 in the minor win game control process to determine whether or not the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 is not in operation. Then, the MPU 41 sets a V-entry slot opening/closing unit operation standby time counter that indicates the remaining time until the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 starts operating (step S3504), and proceeds to step S3505.

Furthermore, the V-prize opening/closing mechanism's operation waiting time counter is decremented by 1 in step S3511 of Figure 93 each time the mini-prize game control process is executed. This counter is then referenced in step S3512 of Figure 93 during the mini-prize game control process to determine whether it is time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the third time-saving game state is in effect, is set to ON (step S3505). Here, if the result of the big win lottery is a minor win, the first minor win game is executed in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state (see Figure 93(A)), and the second minor win game is executed in the third time-saving game state (see Figure 93(B)). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the minor win game will start the first minor win game or the second minor win game.

Furthermore, the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of Figure 99, step S3694 of Figure 101, or step S3719 or S3723 of Figure 103 when transitioning from another game state to the third time-saving game state during the game state transition process described later. Conversely, it is set to OFF in steps S3657, S3661, or S3668 of Figure 100 when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), i.e., if the second minor win game is to be started because the third time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506. On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3505: No), i.e., if the first minor win game is to be started because the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3508.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), that is, if the second mini-bonus game is started because the third time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 sets the second opening flag to ON to indicate that the second opening of the second mini-bonus game (see Figure 93(B)) is being executed (step S3506), sets the second opening time counter which indicates the remaining time of the second opening (the time until the movable wing operation game of the second mini-bonus game (see Figure 93(B)) is started) (step S3507), and terminates the mini-bonus game control process.

The second opening flag is referenced in step S3526 of Figure 94 to determine whether the second opening of the second minor win game is being executed. Furthermore, the second opening time counter is decremented by 1 in step S3527 of Figure 94 each time the minor win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3528 of Figure 94 to determine whether it is time to end the second opening (to start the movable wing operation game of the second minor win game).

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3505: No), that is, if the first mini-bonus game is started because the game is in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the first opening flag to on, indicating that the first opening of the first mini-bonus game (see Figure 93(A)) is being executed (step S3508), sets the first opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the first opening (the time until the movable wing operation game of the first mini-bonus game (see Figure 93(A)) is started) (step S3509), and terminates the mini-bonus game control process.

The first opening flag is referenced in step S3522 of Figure 94 to determine whether the first opening of the first minor win game is being executed. Furthermore, the first opening time counter is decremented by 1 in step S3523 of Figure 94 each time the minor win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3524 of Figure 94 to determine whether it is time to end the first opening (to start the movable wing operation game of the first minor win game).

<Step S3510>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to off (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a small win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the V-entry opening opening/closing part operation standby flag, which indicates that the V-entry opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 is not in operation and is waiting to operate, is set to on (step S3510). If the V-entry opening opening/closing part operation standby flag is set to on (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3511, and if the V-entry opening opening/closing part operation standby flag is set to off (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3517.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
If the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter, which indicates the remaining time until the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 of the wing mechanism device 83 starts operating (step S3511), and determines whether the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 and open the V-prize opening 833.

If the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 of the wing mechanism 83 and open the V-prize opening 833, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, if the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3512: No), that is, if it is not time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 (open the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3522 in Figure 94.

<Steps S3513-S3516>
If the value of the V-prize opening/closing unit operation waiting time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 and open the V-prize opening 833, the MPU 41 operates the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 (step S3513) and sets the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag to ON, indicating that the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 is operating (step S3514).

Furthermore, the V-prize opening/closing mechanism activation flag is referenced in step S3517, described later in the minor prize game control process, to determine whether or not the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 is operating.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a V-prize opening/closing unit operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 (step S3515), sets the V-prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag to off (step S3516), and proceeds to step S3522 in Figure 94.

Furthermore, the V-prize opening/closing time counter is decremented by 1 each time the mini-prize game control process is executed, in step S3518 described later in the mini-prize game control process. This counter is then referenced in step S3519 described later in the mini-prize game control process to determine whether it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833).

<Step S3517>
If the V-prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to off (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag, which indicates that the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 is in operation, is set to on (step S3517). If the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag is set to on (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2018, and if the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag is set to off (step S3517: No), the process proceeds to step S3522 in Figure 94.

<Steps S3518 and S3519>
If the V-prize opening/closing operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V-prize opening/closing operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operating time of the V-prize opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3518), and determines whether the value of the V-prize opening/closing operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3519). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833).

If the value of the V-prize opening/closing time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing part 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3520. On the other hand, if the value of the V-prize opening/closing time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3519: No), that is, if it is not time to return the V-prize opening/closing part 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3522 in Figure 94.

<Steps S3520 and S3521>
If the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 returns the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 to its original position (step S3520), sets the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation flag, which indicates that the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 is operating, to off (step S3521), and proceeds to step S3522 in Figure 94.

<Step S3522>
As shown in Figure 94, in step S3522, the MPU 41 determines whether the first opening flag, which indicates that the first opening of the first mini-game (see Figure 91(A)) is being executed, is set to ON. The first opening flag is set to ON in step S3509 of Figure 92 in the mini-game control process when the first opening of the first mini-game is started.

If the first opening flag is set to ON (step S3522: Yes), i.e., the first opening of the first minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3523. On the other hand, if the first opening flag is set to OFF (step S3522: No), i.e., the first opening of the first minor win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3526.

<Steps S3523-S3525>
If the first opening flag is set to ON (step S3522: Yes), that is, if the first opening of the first minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the first opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the first opening time (the time until the movable wing operation game of the first minor win game (see Figure 91(A)) starts) (step S3523), and determines whether the first opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3524). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to finish the first opening and start the movable wing operation game (see Figure 91(A)) in the first minor win game.

If the first opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), that is, in the first minor win game, it is the timing to finish the first opening and start the movable wing operation game, then the MPU 41 sets the first opening flag, which indicates that the first opening is being executed, to off (step S3525), and proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, if the first opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3524: No), that is, in the first minor win game, it is neither the timing to finish the first opening nor the timing to start the movable wing operation game, then the MPU 41 terminates the minor win game control process.

<Step S3526>
If the first opening flag for the first minor win game is set to off (step S3522: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second opening flag, which indicates that the second opening of the second minor win game (see Figure 91(B)) is being executed, is set to on. The second opening flag is set to on in step S3507 of Figure 92 in the minor win game control process when the second opening of the second minor win game (see Figure 91(B)) is started.

If the second opening flag is set to ON (step S3526: Yes), i.e., the second opening of the second minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3527. On the other hand, if the second opening flag is set to OFF (step S3526: No), i.e., the second opening of the second minor win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3533 in Figure 95.

<Steps S3527-S3529>
If the second opening flag is set to ON (step S3526: Yes), that is, if the second opening of the second minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the second opening time (the time until the movable wing operation game of the second minor win game (see Figure 91(B)) starts) (step S3527), and determines whether the second opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3528). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to finish the second opening and start the movable wing operation game (see Figure 91(B)) in the second minor win game.

If the second opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3528: Yes), that is, in the second minor win game, it is the timing to finish the second opening and start the movable wing operation game, then the MPU 41 sets the second opening flag, which indicates that the second opening is being executed, to off (step S3529), and proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, if the second opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3529: No), that is, in the second minor win game, it is neither the timing to finish the second opening nor the timing to start the movable wing operation game, then the MPU 41 terminates the minor win game control process.

<Step S3530>
If the first opening flag for the first minor win game or the second opening flag for the second minor win game is turned off (step S3525 or S3529), that is, if it is the time to end the opening in the first minor win game or the second minor win game and start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 starts the movable wing operation game by operating the movable wing part 832 of the wing mechanism device 83 (step S3530), and proceeds to step S3531.

Furthermore, in the movable wing operation game, activating the movable wing section 832 of the wing mechanism 83 opens the entry port 831 of the wing mechanism 83, allowing game balls 99 to enter the inside of the wing mechanism 83.

<Steps S3531 and S3532>
In step S3531, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation flag to ON, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is operating (that a movable wing operation game is being performed) (step S3531). Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operating time of the movable wing 832 (the remaining time of the movable wing operation game) (step S3532), and terminates the small win game control process.

The movable wing activation flag is referenced in step S3533 of Figure 95 during the mini-win game control process to determine whether the movable wing 832 is activated (the movable wing activation game is being executed). Furthermore, the movable wing activation time counter is decremented by 1 each time the mini-win game control process is executed, in step S3534 of Figure 95 during the mini-win game control process. This counter is referenced in step S3535 of Figure 95 during the mini-win game control process to determine whether it is time to return the movable wing 832 to its original position (end the movable wing activation game).

<Step S3533>
If the second opening flag is set to off (step S3522: No), that is, neither the first opening nor the second opening is performed, then, as shown in Figure 95, the MPU 41 determines whether the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing operation game is being performed, is set to on (step S3533). If the movable wing operation flag is set to on (step S3533: Yes), that is, the movable wing operation game is being performed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3534. On the other hand, if the movable wing operation flag is set to off (step S3533: No), that is, the movable wing operation game is not being performed, the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Steps S3534 and S3535>
If the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), that is, if the movable wing operation game is being performed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the movable wing operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the movable wing 832 (remaining time of the movable wing operation game) (step S3534). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the movable wing operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3535). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the movable wing 832 to its original position and close the entry opening 831 to end the movable wing operation game (minor win game).

If the value of the movable blade operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the movable blade 832 (the movable blade operation game (minor win game)) to end, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3536. On the other hand, if the value of the movable blade operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3533: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the movable blade 832 (the movable blade operation game (minor win game)) to end, the MPU 41 terminates the minor win game control process.

<Steps S3536 and S3537>
If the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the movable wing 832 (the timing to end the movable wing operation game (minor win game)), the MPU 41 ends the movable wing operation game (minor win game) by returning the movable wing 832 (step S3536). Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is operating (the movable wing operation game is being executed), to off (step S3536), and ends the minor win game control process.

[Game state transition process]
In the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main processing shown in Figure 88 of this embodiment, a process for transitioning between various game states is executed. Here, Figure 96 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition (game flow) in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 96, in this embodiment, the game states include a normal game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state, a Type 1 jackpot game state, a Type 2 jackpot game state, and a minor jackpot game state.

In the normal game state, the electric mechanism 315b operates for short periods at a low frequency (see Figures 85(A) and 85(C)). The first special jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the first prize slot 314, is conducted based on the first special jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86(A)). The second special jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315, is conducted based on the short-open second special jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87(A)).

The game transitions to the normal game state without transitioning from the first to third time-saving game states to the jackpot game state, after the results of the jackpot lottery for a specified number of times have been announced (the specified number of special symbol games have been executed). Furthermore, the game returns to the normal game state if, in the current normal game state, the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, and the game transitions to the minor win game state, and if no game balls 99 enter the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 (V-entry failure) during that minor win game state.

On the other hand, from the normal game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is announced as a jackpot, the game transitions to the Type 1 jackpot game state; if the result of the jackpot lottery is announced as a minor win, the game transitions to the minor win game state; and if the result of the jackpot lottery is announced as a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (time-saving symbols stop), the game transitions to the Type 1 time-saving game state. Note that from the normal game state, the game does not transition to the Type 2 time-saving game state, the Type 3 time-saving game state, or the Type 2 jackpot game state.

The first time-saving game state is a game state in which the electric mechanism 315b is operated for short periods at a high frequency, causing the second prize slot 315 to open frequently (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)). The first special symbol jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize slot 314, is executed based on the first special symbol jackpot success/failure table (see Figure 86(A)). The second special symbol jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315, is executed based on the short-open second special symbol jackpot success/failure table (see Figure 87(A)).

The first time-saving game state is entered when, during normal gameplay, the result of the jackpot lottery is not a time-saving symbol stop (time-saving symbol stop). Furthermore, the first time-saving game state is entered when, in the first time-saving game state, the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, and the game state is entered into the minor win game state, and if no game balls 99 enter the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 during the minor win game state (V-non-entry), the game state returns from the minor win game state.

On the other hand, from the first time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is announced as a jackpot, the game transitions to the Type 1 jackpot game state; if the result of the jackpot lottery is announced as a minor win, the game transitions to the minor win game state; and if the results of the lottery for the specified number of jackpot lotteries are announced (the specified number of special symbol games are performed) without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game transitions to the normal game state. Note that the first time-saving game state does not transition to the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, or the Type 2 jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the first time-saving game state may be omitted, and at least two types of time-saving game states, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, should be set. If the first time-saving game state is omitted, the time-saving symbol stop miss will be omitted from the miss types in the first special symbol miss distribution table (see Figure 86(D)) used for the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize slot 314.

The second time-saving game state is a game state in which, similar to the second time-saving game state, the electric mechanism 315b is operated for short periods at a high frequency, causing the second prize slot 315 to open frequently (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)). The first special symbol jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize slot 314, is executed based on the first special symbol jackpot success/failure table (see Figure 86(A)). The second special symbol jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315, is executed based on the short-open second special symbol jackpot success/failure table (see Figure 87(A)).

The second short-time game state, which is a profitable state, is entered when the game transitions to a Type 1 jackpot game based on a jackpot result in the jackpot lottery during the normal game state or the first short-time game state, and the conditions for the short-time game state are met after the end of the Type 1 jackpot game. Furthermore, the second short-time game state is entered when the game transitions to a minor win game state based on a minor win result in the jackpot lottery during the second short-time game state, and if no game balls 99 enter the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 (V-non-entry), the game returns from the minor win game state.

On the other hand, from the second time-saving game state, as will be explained in detail later, if the result of the jackpot lottery is reported as a failure to stop the time-saving symbols that meet the predetermined conditions, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state. Furthermore, from the second time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is reported as a jackpot, the game will transition to the Type 1 jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is reported as a minor win, the game will transition to the minor win game state. Also, from the second time-saving game state, if the results of the lottery for the predetermined number of jackpot lotteries are reported (the predetermined number of special symbol games are executed) without transitioning to either the jackpot game state or the third time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state. Note that the second time-saving game state does not transition to the first time-saving game state or the Type 2 jackpot game state.

The third time-saving game state differs from the first and second time-saving game states in that the electric mechanism 315b operates for extended periods at a high frequency, causing the second prize slot 315 to open frequently (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)). The first special feature jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the first prize slot 314, is performed based on the first special feature jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86(A)). The second special feature jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315, is performed based on the short-open second special feature jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87(B)). In the third time-saving game state, the electric mechanism 315b operates for a longer period compared to the first and second time-saving game states. This makes it easier for game balls 99 to enter the second prize entry point 315, thus making it a more advantageous time-saving game state for the player than the first and second time-saving game states, where the electric mechanism 315b operates for a shorter period.

The third time-saving game state is entered when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is reported to be a time-saving symbol miss that meets predetermined conditions. Furthermore, the third time-saving game state is entered when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a minor win, and the game state is entered again when no game balls 99 enter the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 (V-non-entry) in the minor win game state. Here, the predetermined condition is that the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss in the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state (see Figure 87(E)) exceeds the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state (see steps S3409 to S3412 in the special symbol variation start processing in Figure 90).

On the other hand, from the third time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is announced as a jackpot, the game transitions to the Type 1 jackpot game state. If the result of the jackpot lottery is announced as a minor win, the game transitions to the minor win game state. Furthermore, from the third time-saving game state, if the results of the lottery for the specified number of jackpot lotteries are announced (the specified number of special symbol games are executed) without transitioning to either the Type 1 jackpot game state or the Type 2 jackpot game state via the minor win game state, the game transitions to the normal game state. Note that from the third time-saving game state, the game does not transition to the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the Type 2 jackpot game state.

Next, the specific processing procedure for the game state transition process in this embodiment will be described. Here, Figures 97 to 103 are flowcharts showing an example of the game state transition process procedure.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 97, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the normal game state, is set to ON (step S3601). The normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3629 in Figure 98, step S3650 in Figure 99, step S3667 in Figure 100, or step S3701 in Figure 102 when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state, while it is set to OFF in steps S3608, S3612, or S3616 in Figure 97 when transitioning from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), i.e., the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), i.e., the game is in a state other than the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3617 in Figure 98.

<Step S3602>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, if the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variable special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is possible to transition from the normal game state to another game state (Type 1 jackpot game state, minor jackpot game state, or first time-saving game state) because the special symbol has stopped (the special symbol game has ended).

Furthermore, the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process in the first embodiment described above (Figure 26) when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that has been varied is displayed as stopped.

If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is a timing when it is possible to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3603. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, if it is not a timing when it is possible to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3603>
If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is a timing when it is possible to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the special symbol stop display is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3603).

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3603: Yes), it proceeds to step S3604. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3603: Yes), it proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3604-S3608>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (step S3604). The MPU 41 then sets the upper limit (predetermined number of times) of the special symbol game to be executed in the first time-saving game state (see Figure 86(E)) in the time-saving count counter (step S3605), and sets the first time-saving game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in the first time-saving game state (step S3606). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the command to transition to the first time-saving game state (step S3607), sets the normal game state flag to OFF to indicate that it is in the normal game state (step S3608), and terminates the game state transition process.

The first time-saving game state transition command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state. It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the external output processing in the main processing shown in Figure 88. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the effects corresponding to the first time-saving game state in the special feature game based on the first time-saving game state transition command.

<Step S3609>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot (step S3609). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3610, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3610-S3612>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (Step S3610). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal Type 1 jackpot game state flag to ON, indicating that it has transitioned from the normal game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (Step S3611), and sets the normal game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the normal game state (Step S3612), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3613>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is not a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3609: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win (Step S3613). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a minor win (Step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to Step S3614. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win (Step S3613: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a time-saving symbol stop miss (reach miss or complete miss), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3614-S3616>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a minor win (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the minor win game state (step S3614). The MPU 41 then sets the normal minor win game state flag to ON, indicating that it has transitioned from the normal game state to the minor win game state (step S3615), and sets the normal game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S3616), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3617>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3601: No), that is, if the game state is other than the normal game state, as shown in Figure 98, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the first time-saving game state, is set to on, that is, whether or not the game is in the first time-saving game state (step S3617).

Furthermore, the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3606 of Figure 97 when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state during the game state transition process.

If the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), i.e., the first time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3618. On the other hand, if the first time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3617: No), i.e., the first time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3631 in Figure 99.

<Step S3618>
If the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), that is, if the first time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variable special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is possible to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state (Type 1 jackpot game state, minor jackpot game state, or normal game state) because the special symbol has stopped (the special symbol game has ended).

Furthermore, the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process in the first embodiment described above (Figure 26) when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that has been varied is displayed as stopped.

If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), and it is a timing when it is possible to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3619. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to OFF, i.e., if it is not a timing when it is possible to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3619>
If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), and it is a time when it is possible to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the special symbol stop display is a type 1 jackpot (step S3619).

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stop is a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3619: Yes), it proceeds to step S3620. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3619: No), it proceeds to step S3623.

<Steps S3620-S3622>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (Step S3620). The MPU 41 then sets the flag for the first time-saving Type 1 jackpot game state, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the first time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state, to ON (Step S3621), and sets the flag for the first time-saving game state, which indicates that the game state is the first time-saving game state, to OFF (Step S3622), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3623>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbols is not a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3619: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win (Step S3623). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbols is a minor win (Step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to Step S3624, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win (Step S3623: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to Step S3627.

<Steps S3624-S3626>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a minor win (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-saving game state to the minor win game state (step S3624). The MPU 41 then sets the first time-saving minor win game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the first time-saving game state to the minor win game state, to ON (step S3625), and sets the first time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the first time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3616), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3627>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is not a minor win (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving game counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, is 0 (step S3627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the time-saving game counter for the first time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the time-saving counter for the first time-saving game state is set in step S3605 of Figure 97 when the game state transition process transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state, and is deducted each time a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is started in step S3407 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 90.

If the value of the time-saving game count counter for the first time-saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, if the special symbol game has been played up to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game count in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving game count counter is not 0 (step S3627: No), that is, if the special symbol game has not been played up to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game count in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3628-S3630>
If the value of the time-saving game count counter for the first time-saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, if the special game has been played up to the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (predetermined number of times) in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3628). The MPU 41 then sets the normal game state flag to ON, indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S3629), and sets the first time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the first time-saving game state (step S3630), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3631>
If the first time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3617: No), that is, if it is not the first time-saving game state, then, as shown in Figure 99, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates that it is the second time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3631).

Furthermore, the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3673 of Figure 101 (described later) when the game state transitions from the first jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state during the game state transition process.

If the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), i.e., the second time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3632. On the other hand, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3631: No), i.e., the second time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3652 in Figure 100.

<Step S3632>
If the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), that is, if the second time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variable-display special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition from the second time-saving game state to another game state (Type 1 jackpot game state, minor jackpot game state, third time-saving game state, or normal game state) because the special symbol has stopped displaying (the special symbol game has ended).

Furthermore, the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process in the first embodiment described above (Figure 26) when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that has been varied is displayed as stopped.

If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is a timing when it is possible to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3633. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, if it is not a timing when it is possible to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3633>
If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is a timing when it is possible to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the special symbol stop display is a type 1 jackpot (step S3633).

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stop is a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3633: Yes), it proceeds to step S3634. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3633: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3637.

<Steps S3634-S3636>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (Step S3634). The MPU 41 then sets the second time-saving Type 1 jackpot game state flag to ON, indicating that it has transitioned from the second time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (Step S3635), and sets the second time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state (Step S3636), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3637>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is not a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3633: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win or not (Step S3637).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stop is a minor win (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3638. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win (step S3637: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Steps S3638-S3640>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a minor win (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the minor win game state (step S3638). The MPU 41 then sets the second time-saving minor win game state flag to ON, indicating that it has transitioned from the second time-saving game state to the minor win game state (step S3639), and sets the second time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state (step S3640), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3641>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is not a minor win (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3641). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to transition the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

The third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3412 of the variation start process in Figure 90 when the result of the jackpot lottery for a special symbol game that ended due to the special symbol stopping display is a time-saving symbol stop failure. This flag is set ON if the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving game counter (which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state) from the number of time-saving games set for that time-saving symbol stop failure (see Figure 87(E)) is greater than 0 (i.e., the number of time-saving games set for that time-saving symbol stop failure is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).

If the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), that is, if the game state is to be transitioned from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3642. On the other hand, if the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3641: No), that is, if the game state is not to be transitioned from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3648.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
If the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3642), sets the upper limit (predetermined number of times) of the special symbol game to be executed in the third time-saving game state in the time-saving game count counter (step S3643), and proceeds to step S3644.

Here, the value of the time-saving game counter is set to the value corresponding to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. Specifically, as shown in Figure 87(E), the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving game counter to "10" when 10 time-saving game rounds are selected, to "30" when 30 time-saving game rounds are selected, to "50" when 50 time-saving game rounds are selected, and to "100" when 100 time-saving game rounds are selected. In other words, when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving game rounds is updated to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols.

Here, as mentioned above, the third time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the first and second time-saving game states because the electric mechanism 315b operates for a longer period of time compared to the first and second time-saving game states, making it easier for game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315. Furthermore, in the first and second time-saving game states, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, it is not possible for game balls 99 to enter the V prize slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83. In contrast, in the third time-saving game state, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, it is possible for game balls 99 to enter the V prize slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 during the minor win game. Therefore, unlike the first and second shortened game states, the third shortened game state is more advantageous to the player than the first and second shortened game states because it allows for the execution of two types of jackpot games based on the entry of game balls 99 into the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 during a minor win game.

Thus, when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving game rounds is updated to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state results in a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. This allows for effective utilization of the value of the time-saving game rounds determined due to that failure to stop the time-saving symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the number of time-saving game rounds set for that failure is greater than the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state. This provides a gameplay feature where the fewer time-saving game rounds remaining in the second time-saving game state there are, the easier it is to transition to the third time-saving game state. This increases attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the number of time-saving game rounds set for that failure is less than or equal to the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state, the number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state will not be changed. However, for example, the number of time-saving game rounds set for that failure to stop the time-saving symbols may be added to the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state. This increases the number of jackpot lottery rounds required to determine whether or not to transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, thus maintaining the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous third time-saving game state for a longer period. This can increase attention and interest in the game, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

<Steps S3644 and S3645>
In step S3644, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state flag to ON, which indicates that the game is in the third time-saving game state, and also sets a third time-saving game state A transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is transitioning from the second time-saving game to the third time-saving game state (step S3645), and then proceeds to step S3646.

The command to transition to the third time-saving game state A is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the main processing shown in Figure 88. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the effects corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

<Steps S3646 and S3647>
In step S3646, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions to the third time-saving game state, to off, and further sets the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-saving game state, to off (step S3647), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3648>
If the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to off (step S3641: No), that is, if the game state is not to be transitioned from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, is 0 (step S3627).

Furthermore, the time-saving counter for the second time-saving game state is set in steps S3672, S3679, or S3686 of Figure 101 when the game state transition process transitions from the first jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state. It is then deducted each time a special symbol game (first or second special symbol game) is started in step S3407 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 90.

If the value of the time-saving game count counter for the second time-saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, if the special symbol game has been played up to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game count in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3649. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving game count counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), that is, if the special symbol game has not been played up to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game count in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3649-S3651>
If the value of the time-saving game count counter for the second time-saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, if the special game has been played up to the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving game counts in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3648). The MPU 41 then sets the normal game state flag to ON, indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S3650), and sets the second time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state (step S3651), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3652>
If the second time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), that is, if it is not the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that it is the third time-saving game state, is set to on, as shown in Figure 100 (step S3652).

The third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of Figure 99, step S3694 of Figure 101, or step S3719 or S3723 of Figure 103 when the game state transition process transitions from another game state to the third time-saving game state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), i.e., the third time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3653. On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), i.e., the third time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3669 in Figure 89.

<Step S3653>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), that is, if the third time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variable-display special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition from the third time-saving game state to another game state (Type 1 jackpot game state, minor jackpot game state, normal game state) because the special symbol has stopped displaying (the special symbol game has ended).

Furthermore, the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process in the first embodiment described above (Figure 26) when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that has been varied is displayed as stopped.

If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), that is, if it is a timing when it is possible to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3654. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3653: No), that is, if it is not a timing when it is possible to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3654>
If the special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), that is, if it is a timing when it is possible to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the special symbol stop display is a type 1 jackpot (step S3654).

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which ended due to the display of the special symbol's stop, is a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3654: Yes), it proceeds to step S3655. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3654: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3658.

<Steps S3655-S3657>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3655: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (Step S3655). The MPU 41 then sets the third time-saving Type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the third time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state, to ON (Step S3656), and sets the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the third time-saving game state, to OFF (Step S3657), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3658>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbols is not a Type 1 jackpot (Step S3654: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor jackpot (Step S3658). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbols is a minor jackpot (Step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to Step S3659. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor jackpot (Step S3658: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to Step S3662.

<Steps S3659-S3661>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a minor win (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to the minor win game state (step S3659). The MPU 41 then sets the third time-saving minor win game state flag to ON, indicating that it has transitioned from the third time-saving game state to the minor win game state (step S3660), and sets the third time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the third time-saving game state (step S3661), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3662>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is not a minor win (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3662).

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping, is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3662: Yes), it proceeds to step S3663. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3665.

<Step S3663>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a resetting process for the time-saving game count counter for the third time-saving game state (step S3663), and proceeds to step S3664. In this resetting process, for example, if the number of time-saving games selected for the failure to stop the time-saving symbol (predetermined number) (see Figure 87(E)) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 resets the value of the time-saving game count counter for the third time-saving game state to the number of time-saving games (predetermined number).

Thus, when the number of time-saving game rounds selected for a missed time-saving symbol stop (predetermined number) (see Figure 87(E)) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state, resetting the value of the time-saving game round counter to the prescribed number of time-saving game rounds increases the number of jackpot draws (special symbol games) performed in the third time-saving game state. This allows for a greater enjoyment of the benefits of the third time-saving game state, specifically the benefit of being able to perform two types of jackpot games based on the entry of game balls 99 into the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 during minor jackpot games.

Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the processing of the time-saving counter may be reset independently of the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the number of time-saving games selected for that failure (predetermined number) (see Figure 87(E)) may be changed to the number of time-saving games selected for that failure (predetermined number), regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the number of time-saving games selected for that failure (predetermined number) (see Figure 87(E)) may be maintained without resetting the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in that third time-saving game state.

<Step S3664>
In step S3664, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving counter reset command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the time-saving counter reset process has been executed (step S3664), and then terminates the game state transition process. The time-saving counter reset command includes information about the changed time-saving game count, in addition to the fact that the time-saving counter reset process has been executed, if there has been a change in the value of the time-saving counter. The time-saving counter reset command is then transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process shown in Figure 76, and when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the time-saving counter reset command, it resets the value of the time-saving counter.

<Step S3665>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the display of the special symbol stopping is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving count counter, which indicates the number of time-saving games remaining in the third time-saving game state, is 0 or not (step S3665).

The time-saving counter for the third time-saving game state is set in step S3643 of Figure 99, step S3693 of Figure 101, or step S3724 of Figure 103 when the game state transition process transitions from the second time-saving game state, the first type jackpot game state, or the second type jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state. It is then deducted each time a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is started in step S3407 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 90.

If the value of the time-saving game count counter for the third time-saving game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, if the special symbol game has been played up to the upper limit (prescribed number of time-saving game plays) in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3666. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving game count counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), that is, if the special symbol game has not been played up to the upper limit (prescribed number of time-saving game plays) in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3666 to S3668>
If the value of the time-saving game count counter for the third time-saving game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, if the special game has been played up to the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3666). The MPU 41 then sets the normal game state flag to ON, indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S3667), and sets the third time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the third time-saving game state (step S3668), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3669>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3652: No), that is, if it is not the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 101 (step S3669).

The "Normally, Type 1 Jackpot Game State Flag" indicates that the game state has transitioned from the normal game state to the Type 1 Jackpot Game State. This flag is set to "on" in step S3611 of Figure 97 of the game state transition process when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the Type 1 Jackpot Game State.

If the MPU 41 is normally in a Type 1 jackpot game state state, and the flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), that is, if it is in a Type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from a normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3670. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is normally in a Type 1 jackpot game state state, and the flag is set to OFF (step S3669: No), that is, if it is not in a Type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from a normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3676.

<Step S3670>
Normally, if the Type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), that is, if the game has transitioned from the normal game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the Type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3670). Whether or not the Type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined, for example, based on the jackpot game end flag, which is set to ON when the jackpot game is terminated in the jackpot game control process in step S1407 of the main process in Figure 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in Figure 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the first type of jackpot game has ended (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3671. If the first type of jackpot game has not ended (step S3670: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3671 and S3672>
When a Type 1 jackpot game ends (Step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the Type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state (Step S3671), sets the upper limit (predetermined number of times) of the special symbol game to be executed in the second time-saving game state in the time-saving game counter (Step S3672), and proceeds to Step S3673.

Here, the value of the time-saving game count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot. Specifically, when the MPU 41 transitions from the Type 1 jackpot game state to the Type 2 time-saving game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state, it sets the value of the time-saving game count counter to "100" (see Figures 86(B) and 87(G)).

<Steps S3673 to S3675>
In step S3673, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the second time-saving game state, and further sets a second time-saving game state transition command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning to the second time-saving game state (step S3674). This second time-saving game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioning to the second time-saving game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) in the second time-saving game state, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 88. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) based on the second time-saving game state transition command and execute the effects corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Normal Type 1 Jackpot Game State" flag, which indicates that the game has transitioned from the normal game state to a Type 1 jackpot game state, to off (step S3675), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3676>
Normally, if the Type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3669: No), that is, if it is not a Type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first time-saving Type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3676).

The "First Time-Saving Type 1 Jackpot Game State Flag" indicates that the game state has transitioned from the "First Time-Saving Game State" to the "Type 1 Jackpot Game State." This flag is set to "ON" in step S3621 of Figure 98 of the game state transition process when the game state transitions from the "First Time-Saving Game State" to the "Type 1 Jackpot Game State."

If the flag for the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), that is, if the game state is a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3677. On the other hand, if the flag for the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to OFF (step S3676: No), that is, if the game state is not a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3683.

<Step S3677>
If the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), that is, if the game state is a type 1 jackpot game state that has been transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3677). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag, which is set to ON when the process to end the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of Figure 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in Figure 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the first type of jackpot game has ended (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3678. If the first type of jackpot game has not ended (step S3677: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3678 and S3679>
When a Type 1 jackpot game ends (Step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the Type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state (Step S3678), sets the upper limit (predetermined number of times) of the special symbol game to be played in the second time-saving game state in the time-saving game counter (Step S3679), and proceeds to Step S3680.

Here, the value of the time-saving game counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state is a jackpot. Specifically, when the MPU 41 transitions from the Type 1 jackpot game state, which is entered based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state, to the second time-saving game state, the value of the time-saving game counter is set to "100" (see Figures 86(B) and 87(G)).

<Steps S3680-S3682>
In step S3680, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the second time-saving game state, and also sets a second time-saving game state transition command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning to the second time-saving game state (step S3681). This second time-saving game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioning to the second time-saving game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) in the second time-saving game state, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 88. As a result, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the second time-saving game state transition command, it can grasp the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) and execute the effects corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag indicating the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state, which is the state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, to off (step S3682), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3683>
If the flag for the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to off (step S3676: No), that is, if it is not a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the flag for the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to on (step S3683).

The second time-saving mode type 1 jackpot game state flag indicates that the game state has transitioned from the second time-saving mode to the type 1 jackpot game state. It is set to ON in step S3636 of Figure 99 when the game state transitions from the second time-saving mode to the type 1 jackpot game state.

If the flag for the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to ON (step S3683: Yes), that is, if the game state is a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3684. On the other hand, if the flag for the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to OFF (step S3683: No), that is, if the game state is not a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3690.

<Step S3684>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3684). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag, which is set to ON when the process to end the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of Figure 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in Figure 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the first type of jackpot game has ended (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3685. If the first type of jackpot game has not ended (step S3684: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3685 and S3686>
When a Type 1 jackpot game ends (Step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the Type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state (Step S3685), sets the upper limit (predetermined number of times) of the special symbol game to be played in the second time-saving game state in the time-saving game counter (Step S3686), and proceeds to Step S3687.

Here, the value of the time-saving game counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a jackpot. Specifically, when the MPU 41 transitions from the Type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, it sets the value of the time-saving game counter to "100" (see Figures 86(B) and 87(G)).

<Steps S3687-S3689>
In step S3687, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the second time-saving game state, and further sets a second time-saving game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning to the second time-saving game state (step S3688). This second time-saving game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioning to the second time-saving game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) in the second time-saving game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) based on the second time-saving game state transition command and execute the effects corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag indicating the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state, which is a transition from the second time-saving game state to a type 1 jackpot game state, to off (step S3689), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3690>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3683: No), that is, if it is not a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3690).

The third time-saving Type 1 jackpot game state flag indicates that the game state has transitioned from the third time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state. It is set to ON in step S3656 of Figure 88 when the game state transitions from the third time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state.

If the flag for the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to ON (step S3690: Yes), that is, if the game state is a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3691. On the other hand, if the flag for the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state is set to OFF (step S3690: No), and the game state is not a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3697 in Figure 102.

<Step S3691>
If the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3691: Yes), that is, if the game is in the type 1 jackpot game state which has been transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3691). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag, which is set to ON when the process to end the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of Figure 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in Figure 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the first type of jackpot game has ended (step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3692. If the first type of jackpot game has not ended (step S3691: No), i.e., if it is not the first type of jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3692 and S3693>
When a Type 1 jackpot game ends (Step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the Type 1 jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state (Step S3692), sets the upper limit (predetermined number of times) of the special symbol game to be executed in the third time-saving game state in the time-saving game counter (Step S3693), and proceeds to Step S3694.

Here, the value of the time-saving game counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a jackpot. Specifically, when the MPU 41 transitions from the Type 1 jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state, it sets the value of the time-saving game counter to "50" (see Figure 87(F)).

<Steps S3694-S3696>
In step S3694, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the third time-saving game state, and further sets a third time-saving game state B transition command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3695). This third time-saving game state B transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioning from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) in the third time-saving game state, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 88. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (predetermined number) based on the third time-saving game state B transition command and execute the effects corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag indicating the transition from the third time-saving game state to a type 1 jackpot game state to off (step S3696), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3697>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3690: No), and the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal small jackpot game state flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 102 (step S3697).

The "Normal Minor Win Game State Flag" indicates that the game state has transitioned from the "Normal Game State" to the "Minor Win Game State." It is set to "On" in step S3615 of Figure 97 during the game state transition process when the game state transitions from the "Normal Game State" to the "Minor Win Game State."

If the MPU 41 is set to ON (Step S3697: Yes), that is, if the game state is a minor win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3698. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is set to OFF (Step S3697: No), that is, if the game state is not a minor win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3702.

<Step S3698>
Normally, if the small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3697: Yes), that is, if the game state is a small win game state which has been transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game has ended or not (step S3698). Whether the small win game has ended or not is determined based on the small win game end flag, which is set to ON when the movable wing part 832 of the wing mechanism 83 is returned to its original position in step S3536 of the small win game control process in Figure 95.

If the minor win game has ended (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3699. If the minor win game has not ended (step S3698: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3699 to S3701>
If the minor win game ends (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal minor win game state flag to off (step S3699) and transitions the game state from the minor win game state to the normal game state (step S3700). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is now normal, to on (step S3701), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3702>
Normally, if the small win game state flag is set to off (step S3697: No), that is, if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first time-saving small win game state flag is set to on (step S3702).

The first time-saving mini-win game state flag indicates that the game state has transitioned from the first time-saving game state to the mini-win game state. It is set to ON in step S3625 of Figure 98 during the game state transition process when the game state transitions from the first time-saving game state to the mini-win game state.

If the flag for the first time-saving mini-win game state is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), that is, if the game state is a mini-win game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3703. On the other hand, if the flag for the first time-saving mini-win game state is set to OFF (step S3702: No), that is, if the game state is not a mini-win game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3707.

<Step S3703>
If the first time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to ON (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the mini-win game has ended (step S3703). Whether the mini-win game has ended is determined, for example, based on the mini-win game end flag which is set to ON when the movable wing portion 832 of the wing mechanism 83 is returned to its original position in step S3036 of the mini-win game control process in Figure 95.

If the minor win game has ended (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704. If the minor win game has not ended (step S3703: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3704-S3706>
If the minor win game ends (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving minor win game state flag to off (step S3704) and transitions the game state from the minor win game state to the first time-saving game state (step S3705). Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving game state flag to on, indicating that it is in the first time-saving game state (step S3706), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3707>
If the first time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to off (step S3702: No), that is, if the game state is not a mini-win game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to on (step S3707).

The second time-saving mini-win game state flag indicates that the game state has transitioned from the second time-saving game state to the mini-win game state. It is set to "on" in step S3639 of Figure 99 during the game state transition process when the game state transitions from the second time-saving game state to the mini-win game state.

If the second time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to ON (step S3707: Yes), that is, if the game state is a mini-win game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708. On the other hand, if the second time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to OFF (step S3707: No), that is, if the game state is not a mini-win game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3712 in Figure 103.

<Step S3708>
If the second time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to ON (step S3707: Yes), that is, if the game state is the mini-win game state which has been transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the mini-win game has ended or not (step S3708). Whether the mini-win game has ended or not is determined based on the mini-win game end flag, which is set to ON when the movable wing part 832 of the wing mechanism device 83 is returned to its original position in step S3036 of the mini-win game control process in Figure 95.

If the minor win game has ended (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3709. If the minor win game has not ended (step S3708: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3709-S3711>
If the minor win game ends (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving minor win game state flag to off (step S3709) and transitions the game state from the minor win game state to the second time-saving game state (step S3710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag to on, indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state (step S3711), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3712>
If the second time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to off (step S3707: No), that is, if the game state is not a mini-win game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 103 (step S3712).

The third time-saving mini-win game state flag indicates that the game state has transitioned from the third time-saving game state to the mini-win game state. This flag is set to "on" in step S3660 of Figure 100 during the game state transition process when the game state transitions from the third time-saving game state to the mini-win game state.

If the flag for the third time-saving mini-win game state is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), that is, if the game state is a mini-win game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3713. On the other hand, if the flag for the third time-saving mini-win game state is set to OFF (step S3712: No), that is, if the game state is not a mini-win game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3720.

<Step S3713>
If the third time-saving mini-win game state flag is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), that is, if the game state is the mini-win game state which has been transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the mini-win game has ended or not (step S3713). Whether the mini-win game has ended or not is determined based on the mini-win game end flag, which is set to ON when the movable wing part 832 of the wing mechanism 83 is returned to its original position in step S3036 of the mini-win game control process in Figure 95.

If the minor win game has ended (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714. If the minor win game has not ended (step S3713: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
If the minor win game ends (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving minor win game state flag to off (step S3714). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball 99 has entered the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3715). Whether or not a game ball 99 has entered the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 is determined based on the V-entry flag, which is set to on when the ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that a game ball 99 has entered the V-entry slot 833 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of Figure 88.

If a game ball 99 enters the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3716. If a game ball 99 does not enter the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3718.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
If a game ball 99 enters the V-entry opening 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from a minor win game state to a two-type jackpot game state (step S3716), sets the two-type jackpot game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in a two-type jackpot game state (step S3717), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3718 and S3719>
If no game ball 99 enters the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the minor win game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3718), sets the third time-saving game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in the third time-saving game state (step S3719), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3720>
If the flag for the third time-saving mini-win game state is set to off (step S3712: No), that is, if the game state is not the mini-win game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag for the second type of jackpot game state, which indicates that the game state is the second type of jackpot game state, is set to on (step S3720). The flag for the second type of jackpot game state is set to on in step S3717 when the game state transitions from the third time-saving game state to the second type of jackpot game state.

If the Type 2 Jackpot Game State Flag is set to ON (Step S3720: Yes), i.e., the game is in the Type 2 Jackpot Game State state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3721. On the other hand, if the Type 2 Jackpot Game State Flag is set to OFF (Step S3720: No), i.e., the game is not in the Type 2 Jackpot Game State state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3721>
If the Type 2 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3720: Yes), that is, if the Type 2 jackpot game state is active, the MPU 41 determines whether the Type 2 jackpot game has ended (step S3721). Whether the Type 2 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag, which is set to ON when the process to end the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of Figure 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in Figure 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the two types of jackpot games have ended (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3722. If the two types of jackpot games have not ended (step S3721: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3722-S3724>
If the two-type jackpot game ends (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the two-type jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3722), and sets the third time-saving game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in the third time-saving game state (step S3723). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving count counter (step S3724) and proceeds to step S3725.

Here, the value of the time-saving game count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving game rounds selected when a jackpot game is executed in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when transitioning from the second jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving game count counter to "50" (see Figure 87(F)).

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
In step S3725, the MPU 41 sets a command to transition to third time-saving game state B, which notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state. It then sets the two-type jackpot game state flag to off, indicating that it is in the two-type jackpot game state (step S3726), and terminates the game state transition process.

Here, the command to transition to the third time-saving game state B includes information indicating that the game state is transitioning from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving game rounds (predetermined number) in the third time-saving game state. This command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing shown in Figure 88. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the number of time-saving game rounds (predetermined number) based on the command to transition to the third time-saving game state B, and can execute the effects corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, referring to Figures 104 to 113, the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, a part of the command determination processing among the processing of the voice lamp control device 5 differs from the first embodiment described above.

[Command determination process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to that command is executed. However, it differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above in that it performs processes such as setting and managing the number of time-saving game rounds in various time-saving game states. Here, Figure 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment described above, as shown in Figure 42.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 104, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3801: Yes), it proceeds to step S3802, and if it has not received a command (step S3801: No), it terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3802>
If a command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a command to transition to the first time-saving game state (step S3802). The command to transition to the first time-saving game state is a command that indicates that the game state will transition from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. This command to transition to the first time-saving game state is set in step S3607 of Figure 97 in the game state transition process when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state.

If the received command is a command to transition to the first time-saving game state (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3803. If the received command is not a command to transition to the first time-saving game state (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
If the received command is a command to transition to the first time-saving game state (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the first time-saving game state (step S3803). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game count counter based on the information regarding the number of time-saving games included in the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3804), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3805>
If the received command is not a command to transition to the first time-saving game state (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a command to transition to the second time-saving game state (step S3805). The command to transition to the second time-saving game state is a command that indicates that the game state will transition from the first type jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state. This command to transition to the second time-saving game state is set in steps S3674, S3681, or S3688 of Figure 101 in the game state transition process when the game state will transition from the first type jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state.

If the received command is a command to transition to the second time-saving game state (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3806. If the received command is not a command to transition to the second time-saving game state (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3808.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
If the received command is a command to transition to the second time-saving game state (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the second time-saving game state (step S3806). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game count counter based on the information regarding the number of time-saving games included in the command to transition to the second time-saving game state (step S3807), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3808>
If the received command is not a command to transition to the second time-saving game state (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a command to transition to the third time-saving game state A (step S3808). The command to transition to the third time-saving game state A is a command that indicates that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. This command to transition to the third time-saving game state A is set in step S3645 of Figure 99 in the game state transition process when the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-saving game state A (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3809. If the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-saving game state A (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3812.

<Steps S3809-S3811>
If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-saving game state A (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the third time-saving game state (step S3809). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game count counter based on the information regarding the number of time-saving games included in the command to transition to the third time-saving game state A (step S3810).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving game state transition flag to ON (step S3811), indicating that the game state is transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, and terminates the command determination process. The third time-saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S3904 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 105 (described later) to determine whether or not to set the third time-saving game state transition performance (see Figures 106(B) and 110(D)), which clearly indicates a transition to the third time-saving game state.

<Step S3812>
If the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-saving game state A (step S3808: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command to transition to the third time-saving game state B (step S3812). The command to transition to the third time-saving game state B is a command that indicates that the game state will transition from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state. This command to transition to the third time-saving game state B is set in step S3695 of Figure 101 in the game state transition process when the game state will transition from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state.

If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-saving game state B (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3813. If the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-saving game state B (step S3812: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-saving game state B (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the third time-saving game state (step S3813). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game count counter based on the information regarding the number of time-saving games included in the command to transition to the third time-saving game state B (step S3814), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3815>
If the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-saving game state B (step S3812: No), it is determined whether the received command is a time-saving game count reset command (step S3815). The time-saving game count reset command is a command that notifies that a decision has been made on whether or not to reset the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, and if the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is to be reset, it includes information on the changed number of time-saving games. This time-saving game count reset command is set in step S3664 of Figure 100 in the game state transition process when the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is to be reset.

If the received command is a time-saving counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3816. If the received command is not a time-saving counter reset command (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3817.

<Step S3816>
If the received command is a command to reset the time-saving game counter (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the time-saving game counter reset process (step S3816). In this time-saving game counter reset process, if the time-saving game counter reset command includes information about the changed number of time-saving games, the value of the time-saving game counter is changed; if the time-saving game counter reset command does not include information about the changed number of time-saving games, the value of the time-saving game counter is not changed.

<Step S3817>
If the received command is not a time-saving count reset command (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3817). A special symbol variation pattern command is a command that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game and the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time). This special symbol variation pattern command is set in step S3414 of Figure 90 in the special symbol variation start process when setting the variation display time (special symbol variation pattern) for the special symbols.

If the received command is a special pattern variation command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3818. If the received command is not a special pattern variation command (step S3817: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3823.

<Steps S3818-S3820>
If the received command is a special feature variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the performance type setting process (step S3818) and the stop symbol combination setting process (step S3819), and then proceeds to step S3820.

The details of the procedure for setting the type of performance are described later with reference to Figures 105 to 110. In this performance type setting procedure, the performances to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, and lighting unit 27 are set according to the game state, etc. Furthermore, the details of the procedure for setting the combination of stopped symbols are described later with reference to Figures 111 and 112. In this stop symbol combination setting procedure, the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed by the symbol display unit 341 is set based on the results of the jackpot lottery, etc.

<Steps S3820 and S3821>
In step S3820, the MPU 51 sets the display time of the decorative symbols based on the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) included in the special symbol variation pattern command (step S3820). Then, the MPU 51 sends a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to specify the variation type (performance pattern) set in step S3818 and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 set in step S3819 (step S3821), and proceeds to step S3822.

The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (performance pattern) set in step S3818 and the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341, set in step S3819. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the performance images and variation images of the decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the variation display and performance display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols and the variation type (performance pattern) corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S3822>
In step S3822, the MPU 51 executes the time-saving count counter processing and terminates the command determination processing. The details of the time-saving count counter processing procedure will be described later with reference to Figure 113, but in this time-saving count counter processing, a time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving game plays in the time-saving game state is managed.

<Step S3823>
If the received command is not a special pattern variation command (step S3817: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands, including the processing in steps S3107 to S3134 of the command determination process shown in Figures 47 and 48 in the first embodiment described above (step S3823), and then terminates the command determination process.

[Setting the type of variation (performance pattern)]
In the command determination process shown in Figure 104, when a special symbol variation pattern is received, the variation type (performance pattern) setting process executed in step S3818 sets the performance to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, etc., according to the game state. Here, Figure 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 105, the MPU 51 first determines whether the first time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the first time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3901). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the first time-saving game state. The first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the command to transition to the first time-saving game state is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 104.

If the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3901: Yes), i.e., the first time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 sets the pre-set first time-saving game state animation based on the information included in the special symbol variation pattern command (variation display time, jackpot lottery result) (step S3902), and then terminates the variation type (animation pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the first time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3901: No), i.e., the first time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3903.

<Step S3903>
If the first time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3903). The second time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S3806 when a command to transition to the second time-saving game state is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 104.

If the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), i.e., the second time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3904. On the other hand, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No), i.e., the second time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3907.

<Step S3904>
If the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), that is, if the game is in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 determines whether the third time-saving game state transition flag, which indicates that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, is set to ON based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies predetermined conditions (step S3904). The third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3811 when a third time-saving game state A transition command, which indicates that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, is received in the command determination process in Figure 104.

If the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), that is, if the game state transitions from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3906. On the other hand, if the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3904: No), that is, if the game state does not transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state (if the second time-saving game state continues), the process proceeds to step S3905.

<Steps S3905 and S3906>
If the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to off (step S3904: No), that is, if the game state does not transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state (if the second time-saving game state continues), the MPU 51 sets a second time-saving game state continuation animation as a second time-saving game state animation to indicate that the second time-saving game state continues (step S3905), and then terminates the animation type setting process.

On the other hand, if the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), that is, if the game state transitions from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets a third time-saving game state transition animation as the second time-saving game state animation, which clearly indicates that the game state is transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3906), and then terminates the animation type setting process.

Here, Figure 106(A) shows an example of a continuation pattern for the second time-saving game state, and Figure 106(B) shows an example of a transition pattern for the third time-saving game state, which is also a second time-saving game state.

As shown in Figures 106(A) and 106(B), the second time-saving game state presentation (the second time-saving game state continuation presentation and the third time-saving game state transition presentation) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. Of course, the second time-saving game state presentation (the second time-saving game state continuation presentation and the third time-saving game state transition presentation) does not necessarily have to be a battle presentation; it could also be a mission presentation (for example, a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the result of the jackpot lottery based on the success or failure of a mission given to the character).

Furthermore, Figure 107 shows an example screen of the symbol display unit 341 for explaining the second time-saving game state presentation. Specifically, Figure 107(A) shows an example screen at the start of a battle, Figure 107(B) is an enlarged view of the HP display unit 75 on the battle start screen, and Figures 107(C) to 107(E) show example images of the gauge display unit 75.

As shown in Figure 107(A), the screen of the symbol display unit 341 at the start of a battle includes a text image that reads "Battle Start" to indicate that the battle is beginning, and an HP image that shows the hit points (HP) representing the damage the enemy character can withstand. The enemy character's HP ranges from 0 to 100, and an HP of 0 means the enemy character is defeated, i.e., the player character wins. Furthermore, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 at the start of a battle includes a text image that reads "Enter RUSH when enemy HP reaches 0," indicating that if the enemy character's HP reaches 0, the game will enter a third time-saving game state (RUSH) that allows transitioning to two types of jackpot game states via a minor win game.

The HP image is then displayed on the HP display unit 75, which is located in the upper right corner of the graphic display unit 341. The HP display unit 75 displays the HP gauge 76 and HP counter 77, which indicate the enemy character's HP.

As shown in Figure 107(B), the HP gauge 76 represents the enemy character's HP as a gauge, and includes a large gauge 761 and a small gauge 762. Each gauge of the large gauge 761 represents 10 HP. Each gauge of the small gauge 762 represents 1 HP. In the example shown in Figure 107(B), the large gauge 761 has 9 gauges and the small gauge 762 has 9 gauges, meaning the enemy character's HP is 99. In the example shown in Figure 107(C), the large gauge 761 has 3 gauges and the small gauge 762 has 1 gauge, meaning the enemy character's HP is 31. In the example shown in Figure 107(D), the large gauge 761 has 1 gauge and the small gauge 762 has 0 gauges, meaning the enemy character's HP is 1. Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 107(E), since both the large gauge 761 and the small gauge 762 are at 0, it indicates that the enemy character's HP is 0, and that the ally character has defeated the enemy character. This means the game state transitions from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

On the other hand, HP Counter 77 displays the enemy character's HP numerically. In the example shown in Figure 107(B), HP Counter 77 shows the number "99," meaning the enemy character's HP is 99. In the example shown in Figure 107(C), HP Counter 77 shows the number "31," indicating the enemy character's HP is 31. In the example shown in Figure 107(D), HP Counter 77 shows the number "1," indicating the enemy character's HP is 1. Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 107(E), HP Counter 77 shows the number "0," indicating the enemy character's HP is 0, signifying that the ally character has defeated the enemy character, meaning the game state transitions from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the HP of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum number of remaining time-saving game rounds, including the relevant change in the second time-saving game state. For example, in the example shown in Figure 107(A), it means that the maximum number of remaining time-saving game rounds, including the relevant special game round, in the second time-saving game state is 99. Thus, the HP value of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum number of remaining time-saving game rounds, including the relevant change in the second time-saving game state, and the player can determine the maximum number of remaining time-saving game rounds, including the relevant change in the second time-saving game state, from the HP of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle.

Returning to the explanation in Figure 106(A), the "Second Time-Saving Game State Continuation" animation is an animation that indicates the continuation of the Second Time-Saving Game State. In the example shown in Figure 106(A), eight animation patterns, A1 to A8, are set as the Second Time-Saving Game State Continuation animation patterns. In each of patterns A1 to A8, since the Second Time-Saving Game State Continuation animation indicates the continuation of the Second Time-Saving Game State, the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character will not be a victory for the ally character, but a draw. Furthermore, the enemy character's HP after the battle will not become 0, but will ultimately be maintained at the value at the start of the battle.

Furthermore, in patterns A1 to A4, the allied character attacks first in battle (see Figure 96(A)). In patterns A1 and A2, the enemy character defends against the allied character's attack (see Figure 108(A)). In this case, the enemy character's HP does not change. On the other hand, in patterns A3 and A4, the allied character's attack hits the enemy character (see Figure 108(C)). In this case, the enemy character's HP is either halved (pattern A3) or reduced to 1 (pattern A4).

Furthermore, in patterns A5 to A8, the enemy character attacks first in battle (see Figure 109(A)). In patterns A5 and A6, the ally character defends against the enemy character's attack (see Figure 109(B)). On the other hand, in patterns A7 and A9, the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see Figure 109(C)). In patterns A5 to A8, because the enemy character attacks first, the enemy character's HP does not change.

In patterns A2 through A8, excluding pattern A1, a button animation is executed. This button animation could include, for example, a long-press animation (see Figure 110(A)) that prompts the player to long-press the control button 20 and reduces the enemy character's HP based on the player's long-press operation, or a rapid-press animation (see Figure 110(B)) that prompts the player to repeatedly press the control button 20 and reduces the enemy character's HP based on the player's repeated presses. Of course, the button animation could also be a single-press animation (one-hit animation) that prompts the player to single-press the control button 20 and displays that the battle result with the enemy character is a draw based on the player's single-press operation.

In Pattern A1, the button animation is not executed, and the enemy character's HP is displayed as it was at the start of the battle, along with an image indicating that the final battle result is a draw (see Figure 110(C)).

On the other hand, the transition animation for the third time-saving game state shown in Figure 106(B) indicates that the game state is transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. In the example shown in Figure 106(B), eight animation patterns, B1 to B8, are set as the transition animation patterns for the third time-saving game state. Each of patterns B1 to B8 indicates that the transition animation for the third time-saving game state may transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. Therefore, the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is a victory for the ally character, and the enemy character's HP after the battle ends is ultimately 0 (see Figure 110(D)).

Furthermore, patterns B1 to B8 correspond to patterns A1 to A8, but differ from patterns A1 to A8 in that the final outcome of the battle between the allied character and the enemy character is that the allied character wins, and the enemy character's HP ultimately becomes 0 after the battle.

Furthermore, if the special feature game in question is the last special feature game in the second time-saving game state, the final screen in patterns A1 to A8 (or patterns B1 to B8) will display an image showing an ally character being defeated by an enemy character, along with an image indicating the end of the second time-saving game state (see Figure 110(E)).

<Step S3907>
Returning to the explanation of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Figure 105, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3903: No), that is, if it is not the second time-saving game state, it is determined whether or not the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that it is the third time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3907). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S3809 when the command to transition to the third time-saving game state A is received in the command determination process in Figure 104.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3907: Yes), i.e., the third time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3908. On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3907: No), i.e., the game is in normal game mode and not the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3907: Yes), that is, if the third time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 51 sets a pre-set third time-saving game state effect for the third time-saving game state based on the information contained in the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time), jackpot lottery result) (step S3908), and then terminates the effect type setting process.

<Step S3909>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), that is, if the game is in normal game state and not in third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets a pre-set normal game state effect (see Figure 50) for the normal game state based on the information contained in the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time), result of the jackpot lottery) (step S3909), and then terminates the effect type setting process.

[Stop Symbol Combination Setting Process]
In the command determination process shown in Figure 104, when a special symbol variation pattern is received, the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 sets the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the results of the jackpot lottery, etc. Here, Figure 111 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 111, the MPU 51 first determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S4001). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol is determined, for example, based on the result of the win/failure determination included in the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the MPU 51 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (step S4001: Yes), it proceeds to step S4003 and sets the time-saving symbols to be set for the failure to stop the time-saving symbols as a stop symbol combination (see Figure 112). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination other than the time-saving symbols based on the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4002), and then terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

Here, Figure 112 is a diagram showing the relationship between the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss and the combination of stopping symbols (time-saving symbols) for a time-saving symbol miss. As shown in Figure 112, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds is set to 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, and 100 rounds (see Figures 86(E) and 87(E)). Furthermore, regarding the combinations of symbols that result in a missed time-saving symbol stop (time-saving symbols), the upper limit of the number of time-saving game rounds (specified number of rounds) of 5 rounds corresponds to "443" and "445", 10 rounds to "665" and "667", 20 rounds to "998" and "991", 30 rounds to "554" and "556", 50 rounds to "332" and "334", and 100 rounds to "775" and "778".

Furthermore, the combination of symbols that stop when the time-saving symbols fail to stop (the time-saving symbols) is characterized by a certain regularity: the left and middle symbols have the same number, and the right symbol is shifted by one position relative to the left and middle symbols. This distinctive combination allows players to easily recognize when the time-saving symbols have stopped. Additionally, a specific, unique sound may be emitted when the time-saving symbols stop. This also allows players to easily recognize when the time-saving symbols have stopped.

Of course, the time-saving symbols are not limited to the example shown in Figure 112, and other distinctive combinations are also possible; they do not necessarily have to be distinctive combinations. Furthermore, it is not necessary to associate two combinations of time-saving symbols with a single upper limit (specified number of time) for time-saving gameplay; one combination is sufficient, or there may be three or more combinations. It is also not necessary to associate the same number of time-saving symbols with all upper limits (specified number) for time-saving gameplay.

<Steps S4003 and S4004>
Returning to the explanation of the stop symbol combination setting process in Figure 111, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the failure to stop the time-saving symbol is 5 (step S4003). Whether the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the failure to stop the time-saving symbol is 5 is determined, for example, based on the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) included in the special symbol variation pattern command and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the MPU 51 determines that the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol miss is 5 (Step S4003: Yes), it sets "443" or "445" (see Figure 112) as the stop symbol combination corresponding to 5 time-saving game rounds (Step S4004), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol miss is not 5 (Step S4003: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S4005.

<Steps S4005 and S4006>
If the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol failure is not 5 (Step S4003: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol failure is 10 (Step S4005).

If the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is 10 (Step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "665" or "667" (see Figure 112) as the stop symbol combination corresponding to 10 time-saving game rounds (Step S4006), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is not 10 (Step S4005: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S4007.

<Steps S4007 and 3508>
If the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol failure is not 10 (Step S4005: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol failure is 20 (Step S4007).

If the MPU 51 determines that the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is 20 (Step S4007: Yes), it sets "998" or "991" (see Figure 112) as the stop symbol combination corresponding to 20 time-saving game rounds (Step S4008), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is not 20 (Step S4007: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S4009.

<Steps S4009 and S4010>
If the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol failure is not 20 (Step S4007: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (specified number) set for the time-saving symbol failure is 30 (Step S4009).

If the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is 30 (Step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "554" or "556" (see Figure 112) as the stop symbol combination corresponding to 30 time-saving game rounds (Step S4010), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is not 30 (Step S4009: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S4011.

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
If the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol failure is not 30 (Step S4009: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol failure is 50 (Step S4011).

If the upper limit (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is 50 (Step S4011: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "332" or "334" (see Figure 112) as the stop symbol combination corresponding to 50 time-saving game rounds (Step S4012), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol miss is not 50 (Step S4011: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S4013.

<Step S4013>
If the upper limit (specified number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol failure is not 50 (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the upper limit (specified number) of the number of time-saving game rounds is 100, and therefore sets "775" or "778" (see Figure 112) as the stop symbol combination corresponding to 100 time-saving game rounds (step S4013), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

[Time-saving count processing]
In the command determination process shown in Figure 104, when a special pattern variation pattern is received, the time-saving count counter process executed in step S3822 performs a process to manage the time-saving count counter. Here, Figure 113 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time-saving count counter process.

<Step S4101>
In the time-saving game count counter processing of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 113, the MPU 51 first determines whether the first time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the first time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4101). The first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the command to transition to the first time-saving game state is received in the command determination processing shown in Figure 104.

If the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), i.e., the first time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if the first time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), i.e., the first time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4105.

<Steps S4102-S4104>
If the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, if the first time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state (step S4102), and determines whether the value of the time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4103). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special symbol game in the first time-saving game state.

If the value of the time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4103: Yes), i.e., it is the last special symbol game in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the first time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4104) and terminates the time-saving game count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving game count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4103: No), i.e., it is not the last special symbol game in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Step S4105>
If the first time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4101: No), that is, if the game is not in the first time-saving game state, it is determined whether the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates the game is in the second time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4105). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S3806 when a command to transition to the second time-saving game state is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 104.

If the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), i.e., the second time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4106. On the other hand, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4105: No), i.e., the second time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4109.

<Steps S4106-S4108>
If the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), that is, if the second time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state (step S4106), and determines whether the value of the time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special symbol game in the second time-saving game state.

If the value of the time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4107: Yes), i.e., it is the last special symbol game in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the second time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4108) and terminates the time-saving game count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving game count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4107: No), i.e., it is not the last special symbol game in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Step S4109>
If the second time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4105: No), that is, if the game is not in the second time-saving game state, it is determined whether the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates the game is in the third time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4109). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the third time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state transition flag is set to on in step S3811 when a third time-saving game state A transition command is received in the command determination process in Figure 104, which indicates that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4109: Yes), i.e., the third time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4110. On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4109: No), i.e., the third time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Steps S4110-S4112>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4109: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state (step S4110), and determines whether the value of the time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4111). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the last special symbol game in the third time-saving game state.

If the value of the time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), i.e., it is the last special symbol game in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4112) and terminates the time-saving game count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving game count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), i.e., it is not the last special symbol game in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which two types of jackpot games can be executed via a minor jackpot game, the condition is to transition to the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state that is entered after the end of the first type of jackpot game when the conditions for time-saving games are met. Furthermore, the high-profit condition is met when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, is a time-saving symbol miss that is greater than the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds remaining in the second time-saving game state. In other words, in this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which two types of jackpot games can be executed, are made stricter than in conventional type 1 and type 2 mixed machines, and furthermore, a novel gameplay feature is added that utilizes the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds set for time-saving symbol misses as a condition for transitioning to the third open time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state. As a result, in this embodiment, after the end of a Type 1 jackpot game, the conditions for a time-saving game are met, and in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state to which the player transitions, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the time-saving symbols. Furthermore, if the time-saving symbols are displayed, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, a high-profit state where a Type 2 jackpot game can be played. This increases the player's interest and enjoyment of the game, thereby improving their motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the high-profit condition for transitioning from the low-profit second time-saving game state (short-open time-saving game state) to the high-profit third time-saving game state (long-open time-saving game state) is that the result of the jackpot lottery in the low-profit second time-saving game state is a state in which the number of time-saving symbol misses exceeds the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds remaining in the second time-saving game state. Thus, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state (a low-profit state) results in more time-saving symbol misses than the remaining number of time-saving game rounds (the upper limit of the number of time-saving game rounds), and the game transitions from the low-profit second time-saving game state to the high-profit third time-saving game state, the fewer time-saving game rounds remaining in the second time-saving game state (the more special symbol games are played in the second time-saving game state), the more likely it is to transition to the high-profit third time-saving game state. This adds a gameplay element where, as the number of time-saving game rounds remaining in the second time-saving game state decreases (the more special symbol games are played in the second time-saving game state), the expectation of time-saving symbols stopping and the attention to whether or not the game will transition to the high-profit third time-saving game state increases. Therefore, as the number of time-saving game rounds remaining in the second time-saving game state decreases (as the number of special symbol games played in the second time-saving game state increases), the expectation of time-saving symbols stopping and the attention to whether or not the game will transition to the high-profit third time-saving game state increase, thus increasing the level of attention and interest in the game and further enhancing the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state transitioning to after the end of a jackpot game based on the first special figure 1 jackpot, is set to the number of rounds that can be performed by the number of game balls (expected payout) that the player can acquire through a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game (the number of rounds in which the player's ball count does not decrease). This allows the player to perform the prescribed number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state without significantly reducing their ball count. Therefore, it is possible to prevent significant disadvantages in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, while providing a chance to transition to the third time-saving game state, a high-profit state that allows transition to a 2-type jackpot game state via a minor jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to third embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is entered after the end of a first-type jackpot game when the conditions for a time-saving game are met, is a time-saving symbol stop failure, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for that time-saving symbol stop failure is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the player is moved to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in that it is possible to move to a second-type jackpot game state via a minor jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, we explained the case where multiple types (four types) of upper limits (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds are set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the first prize slot 314 is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the second to third time-saving game states is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case in which a second time-saving game state presentation is performed in the second time-saving game state is described, specifically a second time-saving game state continuation presentation that indicates the continuation of the second time-saving game state, or a third time-saving game state transition presentation that indicates the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

In contrast, this embodiment shares the same characteristics as the fourth embodiment described above in that, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the upper limit (predetermined number of times) set for that failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in the second time-saving game state, the game transitions to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that, in the second time-saving game state, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize entry opening 315 is a single type, N times (50 times in this embodiment).

Furthermore, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that, as a second time-saving game state presentation, the first presentation is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and from the special symbol games that exceed the predetermined number after the transition to the second time-saving game state, a second presentation different from the first presentation is executed.

As mentioned above, the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs after the completion of a Type 1 jackpot game, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-saving game state) is a jackpot, and the conditions for time-saving game are met (see Figure 96). The upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is set to a fixed number of M times (100 times in this embodiment) (see Figure 86(B)). Therefore, if the maximum number of time-saving game rounds set when the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of 99 game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state results in a time-saving symbol failure, and the maximum number of time-saving game rounds set is one type (N rounds), then until "M-N" rounds of special symbol games are played after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the maximum number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol failure in the second time-saving game state will not exceed the remaining time-saving rounds in that second time-saving game state, and the game will not transition to the third time-saving game state. On the other hand, if more than "M-N" rounds of special symbol games are played after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the maximum number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol failure in the second time-saving game state may exceed the remaining time-saving rounds in that second time-saving game state, and therefore the game may transition to the third time-saving game state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, a novel gameplay element is added where the outcome of the jackpot lottery is less important than whether the result of the time-saving symbol stop is a miss after more than M-N special symbol games have been played since transitioning to the second time-saving game state. This increases the player's attention and interest in the special symbol games in the second time-saving game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state演出 (performance/animation) executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., is more important after the special symbol game has been played more than "M-N" times since transitioning to the second time-saving game state. That is, by executing different performances during the period from transitioning to the second time-saving game state until a predetermined number of special symbol games (e.g., "M-N" times) have been played, and after the special symbol game has been played more than that predetermined number of times, the important and unimportant periods in the second time-saving game state can be clearly indicated or suggested to the player. For example, it is possible to execute a "pinch" performance as the first performance during all or part of the unimportant period in the second time-saving game state, indicating whether the second time-saving game state will be maintained, while executing a "chance" performance as the second performance during all or part of the important period in the second time-saving game state, indicating whether or not the game will transition to the third time-saving game state. This increases the player's attention and interest in the special symbol game during the second time-saving game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined number of times" the special symbol game is executed after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, where the first and second effects are switched as the second time-saving game state effect, coincides with the "M-N" times it becomes possible to transition to the third time-saving game state due to a time-saving symbol failing to stop. Thus, when the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times coincide, the player can understand which special symbol game will enable transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state, based on the change in the second time-saving game state effect from the first effect to the second effect. This allows the player to enjoy the game while paying attention to the change in the second time-saving game state effect from the first effect to the second effect, and also to enjoy the game by focusing on the second effect once it has been changed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times do not necessarily have to be the same, but it is preferable that the difference between the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times be small. The absolute value of this difference should be set to, for example, 20% or less of the upper limit (predetermined number of times) of the number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state, preferably 10% or less, and more preferably 5% or less. In this way, if the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times do not match, the player cannot accurately grasp the special symbol game that enables transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. This allows the player to enjoy the game by focusing on at what stage the special symbol game that enables transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state is executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Of course, the features of this embodiment can also be applied to the aforementioned fourth embodiment, in which there are multiple types of upper limits (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. In this way, by applying the features of this embodiment when there are multiple types of upper limits (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, it becomes impossible to accurately identify the special symbol game that allows transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, just as in the case where the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times do not coincide, players can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on at what stage the special symbol game that allows transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state is executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs after the completion of a Type 1 jackpot game, which is executed when the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state (or the first time-saving game state) is successful and the conditions for time-saving gameplay are met. The upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is set to a fixed number of M times (100 times in this embodiment) (see Figure 86(B)). However, multiple upper limits (prescribed number) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be set. By setting multiple upper limits (prescribed number) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the gameplay becomes more complex, as not only the number of special symbol games played from the transition to the second time-saving game state until the jackpot lottery result in a time-saving symbol miss, but also the magnitude of the upper limit (prescribed number) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state becomes important.

Furthermore, when setting multiple upper limits (prescribed number of plays) for the number of plays in the second time-saving game state, it is conceivable to set all of these upper limits (prescribed number of plays) M to a number greater than one type of upper limit (prescribed number of plays) N set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of 99 game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss on the time-saving symbol stop. This allows for a gameplay element where the size of the upper limit (prescribed number of plays) for the number of plays in the second time-saving game state becomes important, without compromising the gameplay element where the timing of the jackpot lottery result in a miss on the time-saving symbol stop is crucial.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described fourth embodiment, with reference to Figures 114 to 117.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
As described above, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that, when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop failure, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) set is one type (50 times in this embodiment). Specifically, in this embodiment, the second special symbol miss variation table when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure differs from the fourth embodiment. Here, Figure 114 shows an example of the second special symbol miss variation table when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure.

[Second Special Feature Failure Variation Table]
As shown in Figure 114, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a loss, all time-saving symbols will stop and fail. And when the time-saving symbols stop and fail, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds is set to 50 rounds.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
As described above, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that, as a second time-saving game state presentation, the first presentation is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and from the special symbol games that exceed the predetermined number after the transition to the second time-saving game state, a second presentation different from the first presentation is executed. Specifically, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in step S3318 and the stop symbol combination setting process in step S3319, which are executed when a special symbol variation pattern command is received in the command judgment process of Figure 104.

[Setting the type of variation (performance pattern)]
In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the first performance is set as the second time-saving game state performance when the number of unexecuted time-saving games is 50 or more, and a second performance different from the first performance is set when the number of unexecuted time-saving games is less than 50. Here, Figure 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation type (performance pattern) setting process executed in step S3318 of the command determination process in Figure 104.

<Steps S4201 and S4202>
In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 115, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in the second time-saving game state.

If the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), i.e., the second time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4202 and sets either the first or second performance as the second time-saving game state performance based on the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in that state.

On the other hand, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4201: No), i.e., if the second time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 sets other effects besides the second time-saving game state effect based on the game state, the jackpot lottery result, the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time), etc. (step S4202), and then terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

Here, Figure 116(A) shows an example of the pattern of the first performance as a second time-saving game state performance, and Figure 116(B) shows an example of the pattern of the second performance as a second time-saving game state performance.

As shown in Figures 116(A) and 116(B), the second time-saving game state presentation (first and second presentations) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. In the second time-saving game state presentation (first and second presentations), one character attacks, and in response, the other character either defends against the attack of the first character or the attack of the first character hits the other character. Finally, the result of the battle is displayed.

As shown in Figure 116(A), the first animation, as an animation for the second time-saving game state, is an animation that is executed when the number of remaining time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more, as will be described later. In this first animation, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (when the symbol combination corresponding to the failure to stop the time-saving symbols is displayed), it is explicitly or implied that the game state will not transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the end of the special symbol game. In the example shown in Figure 116(A), the first animation includes eight animation patterns, C1 to C8, and in each of patterns C1 to C8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the battle result is a draw, which explicitly or implies that the game state will not transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, even if the symbol combination corresponds to the failure to stop the time-saving symbols. Furthermore, if the jackpot lottery result is a win (either a big win or a small win), the battle result will be a victory for the allied character, explicitly indicating or suggesting that it was a win. Of course, it is also possible to have the battle result be a draw when the jackpot lottery result is a win (either a big win or a small win). In this case, the jackpot lottery result will be explicitly indicated or suggested by the combination of symbols that stop, rather than the battle result.

Furthermore, in patterns C2, C4, and C6-C8, after the battle between allied and enemy characters, button-pressing animations such as long-press and rapid-press animations (see Figures 110(A) and 110(B)) are executed, followed by the display of the battle results.

Furthermore, in patterns C7 and C8, after an enemy character's preemptive attack hits an ally character, an indication that the ally character is in danger is displayed (see Figure 116(C)). This danger indication is specific to the first sequence, which is executed when the remaining number of time-saving game spins in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more, and is not displayed in the second sequence. Of course, the danger indication may also be displayed in the second sequence.

Furthermore, patterns C1 to C8 of the first presentation are set based, for example, on the result of the jackpot lottery. Additionally, patterns C7 and C8, which display a "pinch" indicator, are more likely to be set when the jackpot lottery result is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (i.e., a jackpot or a minor win), and less likely to be selected when the jackpot lottery result is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. This allows players to understand that when a "pinch" indicator is displayed, the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols is low.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (jackpot or minor win) that does not result in a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the game may execute animations other than patterns C1 to C8. In other words, patterns C1 to C8 may be set as special animations for cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols.

As shown in Figure 116(B), the second animation, which is a second time-saving game state animation, is an animation that is executed when the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is less than 50, as will be described later. In this second animation, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop failure (when the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol stop failure is displayed), it is explicitly or suggested that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the end of the special symbol game. In the example shown in Figure 116(B), the second animation includes eight animation patterns, D1 to D8. In each of patterns D1 to D8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop failure, it is explicitly or suggested that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state by the result of the battle being a victory for the ally character. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (jackpot or minor win), it is explicitly or suggested that it is a win by the result of the battle being a draw. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (a big win or a small win), the battle result may be a victory for the allied character. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery would be explicitly or implicitly indicated by the combination of symbols that stop, rather than by the battle result.

Furthermore, in patterns D2, D4, and D6-D8, after the battle between allied and enemy characters, button-pressing animations such as long-press and rapid-press animations (see Figures 110(A) and 110(B)) are performed, followed by the display of the battle results.

Furthermore, in patterns D7 and D8, after an ally character's preemptive attack hits an enemy character, an indication that the ally character has a chance is displayed (see Figure 116(D)). This chance indication is unique to the second sequence, which is executed when the remaining number of time-saving game spins in the second time-saving game state is less than the predetermined number of 50 spins, and is not displayed in the first sequence. Of course, the chance indication may also be displayed in the first sequence.

Furthermore, patterns D1 to D8 of the second presentation are set based, for example, on the result of the jackpot lottery. Also, patterns D7 and D8, which display a chance indicator, are more likely to be set when the jackpot lottery result is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and less likely to be selected when the jackpot lottery result is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (i.e., a jackpot or a minor win). This allows players to understand that when a chance indicator is displayed, there is a high probability that the jackpot lottery result is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (jackpot or minor win) that does not result in a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the game may execute animations other than patterns D1 to D8. In other words, patterns D1 to D8 may be set as special animations for cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols.

<Steps S4203-S4205>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) in Figure 115, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, if the second time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 51 identifies the number of unexecuted time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, excluding the special symbol game, based on the value of the time-saving game counter (step S4203), and determines whether the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more (step S4204).

If the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more (Step S4204: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first performance (see Figure 116(A)) from patterns C1 to C8 based on the result of the jackpot lottery (Step S4205), and then terminates the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

On the other hand, if the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is not 50 or more (step S4204: No), that is, if the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is less than 50, the MPU 51 sets the second performance (see Figure 116(B)) from patterns D1 to D8 based on the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4206), and terminates the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

[Stop Symbol Combination Setting Process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbol does not stop, the time-saving symbol is set as the stop symbol combination. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not that the time-saving symbol does not stop, (i.e., if it is a jackpot or a minor win), a symbol other than the time-saving symbol is set. Here, Figure 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 of the command determination process in Figure 104.

<Step S4301>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 117, first the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S4301). If the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4302. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S4301: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a failure to stop the time-saving symbol, a jackpot or a minor win, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbols do not stop (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time-saving symbols as the combination of stopped symbols. In this embodiment, the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbols do not stop is one type. Therefore, there only needs to be at least one type of time-saving symbol that is displayed when stopped in the second time-saving game state, and there may be one type or multiple types.

<Step S4303>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (Step S4301: No), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a time-saving symbol stop miss, a jackpot, or a minor win, the stop symbol combination is set to a symbol combination other than a time-saving symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a time-saving symbol stop miss, the stop symbol combination is set according to the type of miss, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the stop symbol combination is set to a double number, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the stop symbol combination is set to a symbol other than a miss or a double number.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, a novel gameplay element is added where, rather than whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols after transitioning to the low-profit second time-saving game state and executing a specific number of special symbol games (50 times), it becomes more important whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols after executing more than a specific number of special symbol games (50 times) after transitioning to the low-profit second time-saving game state. Therefore, the player's attention and interest in the special symbol games in the second time-saving game state are increased, and the enjoyment of the game is enhanced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, the second time-saving game state performance, which is executed by the symbol display unit 341, is more important after a specific number of special symbol games (50 times) have been played since transitioning to the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state. That is, by performing different performances from the period from transitioning to the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, until a specific number of special symbol games (50 times) have been played, and after the special symbol games have been played beyond that specific number, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player the unimportant period and the important period in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state. During the unimportant period in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, a pinch performance is executed as the first performance to indicate whether the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, will be maintained, while during the important period in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, a chance performance is executed as the second performance to indicate whether or not the player will transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state. This increases players' attention to and interest in special feature games during the second time-saving game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol gameplays performed after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, where the first and second effects are switched as the second time-saving game state effect, coincides with the number of times the game becomes playable when the time-saving symbols fail to stop. Thus, by coinciding the timing of the switch in the second time-saving game state effect with the timing of transitioning to the high-profit third time-saving game state, it becomes possible to understand that the game is playable in the high-profit third time-saving game state based on the change from the first to the second effect in the second time-saving game state effect. This enhances the enjoyment of the game, as players can enjoy the game's progression while paying attention to the change in the second time-saving game state effect from the first to the second effect, and also focus on the second effect when it is selected.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to fourth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is entered after the end of a first-type jackpot game when the conditions for a time-saving game are met, is a time-saving symbol stop failure, and the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for that time-saving symbol stop failure (predetermined number of games) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (when a predetermined condition is met), the player is moved to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in that it is possible to move to a second-type jackpot game state via a minor jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment described above, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is performed after the predetermined conditions are met during the special feature game.

Furthermore, the case where the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state is set to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving game rounds set for the failure to stop the time-saving symbols was explained.

In contrast, this embodiment shares the same characteristics as the fourth embodiment described above in that, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the upper limit (predetermined number of times) set for that failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in the second time-saving game state, the game transitions to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state.

Figure 118 shows an example of the settings for the third time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 118(A), in this embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is performed after the number of special symbol game executions in the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit K (predetermined number K) of the number of time-saving game executions in the third time-saving game state is set to the difference (J-L) between the upper limit J (predetermined number J) of the number of time-saving game executions set for time-saving symbol stop misses when the predetermined conditions are met, and the remaining number of time-saving game executions L in the second time-saving game state. For example, as shown in Figure 118(B), the upper limit K (prescribed number of times K) for the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state is set to 30 times, since the upper limit J (prescribed number of times J) for the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss that satisfies the predetermined conditions is 50 times, and the remaining number of time-saving game rounds L in the second time-saving game state is 20 times, then K = J - L = 50 - 20 = 30.

In this embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is performed after the number of special symbol games played in the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number. Here, as mentioned above, the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving games played in the second time-saving game state is set to the number of times playable by the number of game balls (expected payout) that the player can acquire through, for example, a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game (the number of times the player's ball count does not decrease). Therefore, by performing the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the number of special symbol games played in the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to secure a large number of games from the transition to the second time-saving game state until the first two-type jackpot game based on a minor win in the third time-saving game state. This suppresses a rapid increase in payouts and ball count after the transition to the second time-saving game state. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling aspect of the game machine 10.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state is set to the difference between the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol stop failure where the predetermined condition is met, and the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state increases as the upper limit (predetermined number) set for a time-saving symbol stop failure where the predetermined condition is met increases, and as the remaining number of time-saving game rounds at the time of execution of the special symbol game where the predetermined condition is met decreases, making the situation in the third time-saving game state more favorable to the player. In other words, in this embodiment, the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol stop failure where the predetermined condition is met, and the timing of when the predetermined condition is met, become important factors in gameplay. This enhances attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the initial setting value for the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state is set to the difference between the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss where the predetermined conditions are met, and the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state. However, the initial setting value may be set to the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss where the predetermined conditions are met, or it may be set to the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, with reference to Figure 119.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in the procedure for transitioning to the third time-saving game state during the game state transition process and the procedure for setting the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state. Here, Figure 119 is a flowchart showing an example of a part of the game state transition process in this embodiment.

[Game state transition process]
In the game state transition process of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, and the process is executed to set the upper limit of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state to the difference between the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol miss when the predetermined conditions are met and the remaining number of time-saving games L in the second time-saving game state.

<Step S4401>
In the game state transition process of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 119, when the game state is the second time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended due to the stopping display of the special symbols is neither a type 1 jackpot nor a minor jackpot (step S3637: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401). The third time-saving game state transition flag is a flag that indicates that a predetermined condition for transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state has been met, and is set to ON in step S3412 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 90.

If the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4402. If the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4401: No), the game state transition process terminates.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
If the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the flag for transitioning to the third time-saving game state to OFF (step S4402) and determines whether the value of the time-saving game counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, is 0 or not (step S4403).

If the value of the time-saving counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4404. If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0 (step S4403: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S4404 to S4406>
If the value of the time-saving counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state (step S4404). The MPU 51 then sets the third time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that it is in the third time-saving game state (step S4405), and sets the second time-saving game state flag to OFF, indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state (step S4406), and proceeds to step S4407.

<Step S4407>
In step S4407, the MPU 51 sets the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state to the difference between the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol stop failure that triggered the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, and the remaining number of time-saving game rounds (value of the time-saving round counter) in the second time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds when transitioning to the third time-saving game state after the end of the two types of jackpots is set to a fixed number of 50 rounds, similar to the fourth embodiment described above (see Figure 87(F)). However, the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds when transitioning to the third time-saving game state after the end of the two types of jackpots may be the same as the initial setting value set when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, or it may be set from among multiple types of time-saving game rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is performed after the number of times the special feature game is played in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, as mentioned above, the upper limit (predetermined number of times) for the number of time-saving games played in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, is set to the number of times that can be played by the number of game balls (expected payout) that the player can acquire through the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game (the number of times the player's number of balls does not decrease). Therefore, the transition from the low-profit second time-saving game state to the high-profit third time-saving game state occurs after the number of special symbol games in the low-profit second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number. This allows for a greater number of games to be played from the transition to the low-profit second time-saving game state until the first two-type jackpot game is executed based on a minor win in the high-profit third time-saving game state. This suppresses a rapid increase in ball payouts and ball holdings after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the gambling aspect of the game machine 10.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the conditions for transitioning to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, are met, the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state is set to the difference between the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss and the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, becomes higher the more the upper limit (predetermined number) of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss that satisfies the transition conditions is met, and the fewer the remaining number of time-saving game rounds at the time of execution of the special symbol game that satisfies the transition conditions, making the situation in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, more advantageous to the player. In other words, in this embodiment, the gameplay is enhanced by the fact that the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol miss that satisfies the transition condition, and the timing at which the predetermined condition is met. This increases attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to fifth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is entered after the end of a first-type jackpot game when the conditions for a time-saving game are met, is a time-saving symbol stop failure, and the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for that time-saving symbol stop failure (predetermined number of games) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (when a predetermined condition is met), the player is moved to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in that it is possible to move to a second-type jackpot game state via a minor jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the probability of a minor win (approximately 1/1) in the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315, is set higher than the probability of losing, was explained (see Figures 87(A) and 87(B)).

In contrast, this embodiment shares the same characteristics as the fourth embodiment described above in that, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the upper limit (predetermined number of times) set for that failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in the second time-saving game state, the game transitions to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, contrary to the fourth embodiment described above, the probability of losing in the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 during the second and third time-saving game states, is set higher than the probability of winning a small prize. For example, the probability of losing is set to approximately 1/1.

In this embodiment, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 during the second time-saving game state, is set higher than the probability of winning a minor prize. This makes it easier to transition to the third time-saving game state compared to the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. On the other hand, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 during the third time-saving game state, is set higher than the probability of winning a minor prize. This makes it more difficult to achieve two types of jackpots compared to the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, the gameplay is enhanced by the challenge of how to win a minor prize in the jackpot lottery after transitioning to the third time-saving game state. This increases attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described fourth embodiment, with reference to Figures 120 to 123.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
In this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot lottery, which is triggered when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315, differs from that of the fourth embodiment described above. Here, Figure 120 is a diagram showing an example of the second special symbol jackpot win/loss table in this embodiment. Specifically, Figure 120(A) is a diagram showing an example of the short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table in states other than the third time-saving game state (normal game state, first time-saving game state, and second time-saving game state), and Figure 120(B) is a diagram showing an example of the second special symbol jackpot win/loss table in the long-open third time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 120(A), the short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table of this embodiment is set commonly for six game setting values from 1 to 6. In this short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table, as the result of the jackpot lottery, one of a jackpot, a minor win, or a miss is selected according to the value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in a short opening, unlike the first special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize slot 314, the lottery result includes a minor win in which the feather mechanism 83 (see Figures 82 to 84) is activated. Specifically, in the short-opening second special feature jackpot win/loss table, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, values from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, values from 206 to 207 correspond to minor wins, and the remaining random values correspond to losses. That is, in the jackpot lottery triggered by the short-opening of the electric mechanism 315b, which allows 99 game balls to enter the second prize entry point 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the minor win probability to approximately 1/32768, and the loss probability to approximately 1/1.003. Therefore, the result of the jackpot lottery is almost always a loss.

As shown in Figure 120(B), the long-open second special feature jackpot win/loss table is set in common for six game setting values from 1 to 6. In the long-open second special feature jackpot win/loss table, as the result of the jackpot lottery, one of a jackpot, a minor win, or a miss is selected according to the value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special feature jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the long-open state, unlike the first special feature jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the first prize slot 314, the lottery result includes a minor win in which the feather mechanism 83 (see Figures 82 to 84) is activated. Specifically, in the long-open second special feature jackpot win/loss table, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, values from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, values from 206 to 65,529 correspond to minor wins, and the remaining random values correspond to losses. That is, in the second special feature jackpot lottery, which is triggered when the electric mechanism 315b is opened long enough, causing 99 game balls to enter the second prize slot 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the minor win probability to approximately 1/30, and the loss probability to approximately 1/1.038. Therefore, the result of the jackpot lottery is almost always a loss.

In this embodiment, a single short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and a long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table were provided common to the six game setting values. However, one or both of the short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and the long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table may be set for each game setting value. It is also conceivable to combine the short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and the long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table into a single second special symbol jackpot success/failure table.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
The processing of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is the same as in the fourth embodiment described above, but the second time-saving game state presentation and the third time-saving game state presentation differ from those in the fourth embodiment described above.

<Second Shortened Gameplay State Presentation>
The second time-saving game state presentation is executed as a mission presentation in which an ally character acquires a special move, and it is made clear that the game will transition to the third time-saving game state once the ally character acquires the special move. Here, Figure 121 is a diagram showing an example of the screen in the symbol display unit 341 during the second time-saving game state presentation. Specifically, Figure 121(A) is an example of the start screen of the special move acquisition mission, Figure 121(B) is an example of the screen during the mission challenge, Figure 121(C) is an example of the screen when the special move is acquired successfully (mission successful), and Figure 121(D) is an example of the screen when the special move is not acquired successfully (mission failed).

As shown in Figure 121(A), at the start of the special move acquisition mission, the text image of the mission objective, "Destroy the large rock to acquire the special move," and the text image of the mission objective, "Enter RUSH mode after acquiring the special move," are displayed.

As shown in Figure 121(B), during the mission challenge, an image of an allied character punching a large rock and the words "Finishing Punch!" are displayed.

As shown in Figure 121(C), successful acquisition of a special move (mission success) displays the text image "Special Move Acquired," the text image "Entering RUSH," and an image of an allied character smiling upon acquiring the special move.

As shown in Figure 121(D), a failure to acquire a special move (mission failure) displays the text images "Failure" and "Special Move Not Acquired," along with an image of a friendly character saddened by the failure to acquire the special move.

<Third Shortened Gameplay State Presentation>
The third time-saving game state sequence is performed as a battle sequence between an ally character and an enemy character. If the ally character defeats the enemy character, it is indicated that the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win. Furthermore, in the third time-saving game state sequence, if the ally character attacks with a special move, it is confirmed that the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win.

Here, Figure 122(A) shows an example of the pattern for the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and Figure 122(B) shows an example of the pattern for the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (jackpot or small win).

As shown in Figures 122(A) and 122(B), the third time-saving game state presentation (the non-winning third time-saving game state presentation and the winning third time-saving game state presentation) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. In the third time-saving game state presentation (the non-winning third time-saving game state presentation and the minor winning third time-saving game state presentation), one of the characters attacks, and either the other character defends against the attack or the attack hits the other character. Ultimately, the result of the battle is displayed, indicating whether the third time-saving game state continues or not.

As shown in Figure 122(A), the "Loss in Third Time-Saving Game State" animation is performed when the jackpot lottery result in the Third Time-Saving Game State animation is a loss. It explicitly or implicitly indicates that the minor jackpot game will not be played after the end of the special game, and the Third Time-Saving Game State will be maintained. Here, in the Third Time-Saving Game State, the majority of jackpot lottery results are losses (1/1.038) (see Figure 120(B)). Therefore, the "Loss in Third Time-Saving Game State" animation is performed in most cases during the Third Time-Saving Game State. In the example shown in Figure 122(A), the "Loss in Third Time-Saving Game State" animation includes eight animation patterns, E1 to E8. In each pattern E1 to E8, the battle result ultimately indicates whether the Third Time-Saving Game State will continue or not, with the battle result showing "Continue," explicitly or implicitly indicating that the Third Time-Saving Game State will be maintained without transitioning to the minor jackpot game state (see Figure 123(B)).

Furthermore, in patterns E2, E4, and E6-E8, after the battle between allied and enemy characters, button-pressing animations such as long-press or rapid-press animations (see Figure 123(A)) are performed, and then the battle result is displayed as "Continued".

As shown in Figure 122(B), the "Winning Third Time-Saving Game State" animation is performed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the "Winning Third Time-Saving Game State" animation is a win (jackpot or minor win). It explicitly or implicitly indicates that a jackpot game or minor win game will be performed after the end of the special symbol game. In the example shown in Figure 122(B), the "Winning Third Time-Saving Game State" animation includes eight animation patterns, F1 to F8. In each of the F1 to F8 patterns, it is ultimately explicitly or implicitly indicated that the game transitions to either the jackpot game state or the minor win game state, by displaying the battle result as "Victory" (see Figure 123(C)).

Furthermore, in patterns F2, F4, and F6-F8, after the battle between allied and enemy characters, button-pressing animations such as long-press or rapid-press animations (see Figure 123(A)) are performed, and then the battle result is displayed as "Victory".

As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state (low-profit state), is set higher than the probability of winning a minor prize. Therefore, it is easier to transition to the third time-saving game state (high-profit state) than in the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the third time-saving game state (high-profit state), the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315, is set higher than the probability of winning a minor prize. Therefore, it is more difficult to achieve two types of jackpots than in the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. For this reason, in this embodiment, the gameplay is enhanced by the challenge of how to win a minor prize in the jackpot lottery after transitioning to the third time-saving game state. This increases attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to sixth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the probability of winning a regular symbol is set to be the same in all of the first to third time-saving game states. However, the probability of winning a regular symbol may be set to differ depending on the type of time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the type of losing result in the jackpot lottery during normal gameplay includes a loss due to the stopping of the time-saving symbols. However, the type of losing result in the jackpot lottery during normal gameplay may be omitted. In this case, the first time-saving game state is omitted as a time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned fourth to seventh embodiments, a single short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and a long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table were provided common to the six game setting values. However, one or both of the short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and the long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table may be set for each game setting value. Alternatively, it is conceivable to combine the short-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table and the long-opening second special symbol jackpot success/failure table into a single second special symbol jackpot success/failure table.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned fourth to seventh embodiments, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds was set corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern (variation display time). However, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving game rounds does not necessarily have to correspond to the type of special symbol variation pattern (variation display time). Also, in the time-saving symbol stop miss type distribution table of this embodiment, a time-saving symbol stop miss was always observed when the jackpot lottery result was a miss. However, it is also possible to configure it so that a portion of the jackpot lottery results in a time-saving symbol stop miss.

Furthermore, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the subtraction value of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit (predetermined number) of the number of time-saving game rounds set for a time-saving symbol failure in the second time-saving game state is less than 0, the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is maintained without change. However, if the subtraction value is less than 0, the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the sum of the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol failure, or it may be changed to the number of time-saving game rounds set for the time-saving symbol failure (it may be replaced).

Furthermore, in the minor win games of the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) is set to be the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special symbol jackpot lottery is executed. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) can be different depending on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special symbol jackpot lottery is executed. For example, it is conceivable to set the execution time of the movable wing operation game for minor win games executed based on the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the first and second time-saving game states to be shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game for minor win games executed based on the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the first minor prize game of the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the operating timing of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 was set to the first opening to prevent game balls 99 from entering the V-entry opening 833. However, some or all of the operating timing of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to the movable wing operation game. Specifically, in the first minor prize game, the operating timing of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 may be set to span from the first opening to the movable wing operation game, thereby making it impossible or difficult for game balls 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833. Furthermore, in the first minor win game, the entire timing of the operation of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 may be set to the movable wing operation game, and the operation time of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to be short (for example, 0.02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833. Here, the effect of making it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833 in the first minor win game is as described above, but on the other hand, there is a concern that if it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry opening 833 in the first minor win game, the players' attention and interest in the minor win game will decrease. In contrast, if it is made difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V-entry slot 833 during the first minor win game, there is still a possibility that the game ball 99 will enter the V-entry slot 833 during the first minor win game, thus suppressing the decline in player attention and interest in the minor win game.

Furthermore, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the number of time-saving game rounds set for that failure is less than or equal to the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state, the number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state is not changed. However, for example, the number of time-saving game rounds set for that failure may be added to the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the second time-saving game state. This increases the number of jackpot lottery rounds used to determine whether or not to transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, thus maintaining the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous third time-saving game state for the player for a longer period. This can increase attention and interest in the game, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the number of time-saving game rounds selected for a time-saving symbol miss is greater than the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving game rounds is reset to the specified number. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol miss, the number of time-saving game rounds may be reset independently of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol miss. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol miss, the number of time-saving game rounds selected for that time-saving symbol miss may be changed to the specified number of time-saving game rounds selected for that time-saving symbol miss, regardless of whether it is greater than or less than the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the third time-saving game state. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the number of time-saving games selected for that failure (the predetermined number) may be maintained without resetting the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in that third time-saving game state.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The gaming machine, as a specific configuration of the present invention, includes "start ball entry" as a starting condition, "variable game" as a game round operation, "game control unit" as a game means, "display unit" as a predetermined display means, "profitable game state" as a predetermined game state, and "value assigned to game results" as game value.

The starting condition can be any trigger that initiates a game performed by various actions. Examples of starting conditions include triggers for the execution of a variable display that announces the results of a predetermined lottery. Specifically, starting conditions that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: the entry of game balls into various prize slots; the execution of a predetermined lottery upon entry of game balls into predetermined prize slots; the passage (entry) of game balls into a predetermined area; the execution of a predetermined lottery upon passage (entry) of game balls into a predetermined area; the entry of game balls into the first prize slot 314; the execution of a jackpot lottery upon entry of game balls into the first prize slot 314; the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315; the execution of a jackpot lottery upon entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315; the passage of game balls through the through gate 317; the execution of a regular win lottery upon passage of game balls through the through gate 317; and any combination thereof.

The game round operation can be any game performed by various actions. Examples of game round operations that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, jackpot games and minor jackpot games in which a predetermined prize slot such as the variable prize slot 316 is opened; regular symbol games performed by the display of changing regular symbols on the regular symbol display unit 361; regular symbol jackpot games in which the electric mechanism 315b provided in the second prize slot 315 is activated; first special symbol games performed by the display of changing first special symbols on the first special symbol display unit 362; second special symbol games performed by the display of changing second special symbols on the second special symbol display unit 363; and any combination thereof.

The game means can be any means capable of controlling the operations necessary for various games. Examples of game means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, the MPU 41 that controls the display of variations in ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display unit 361, the display of variations in the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362, the display of variations in the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, the display of the first special symbol retention count N on the first special symbol retention count display unit 364, the display of the second special symbol retention count M on the second special symbol retention count display unit 365, the operation of the electric mechanism 315b, and the operation of the opening and closing door 319 of the variable prize entry opening 316; the MPU 51 that controls the display of variations in the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol on the symbol display unit 341, the various effects performed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the lighting unit 27; and any combination thereof.

The predetermined display means can be any means capable of displaying predetermined information, such as the variation of symbols in various games. Examples of predetermined display means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, a main display unit 36 equipped with a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a symbol display unit 341 that displays the variation of decorative symbols, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined game state is any game state that is advantageous in some respect compared to the normal game state. Examples of predetermined game states that, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, include: a jackpot game state or a minor jackpot game state in which movable members such as the opening/closing door 319, which are not operated in the normal game state, are operated; a time-saving game state (described later as a, b, and c time-saving game states) which is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric mechanism 315b is more easily operated than in the normal game state (a low-frequency support mode), making it easier for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315; a probability variation game state in which the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal game state; and any combination thereof.

The game value only needs to be significant in the progression of the game. Examples of game value include direct or indirect value related to acquiring game balls or predetermined lotteries, value related to the effects performed by the symbol display unit 341, and any combination thereof. Specifically, as long as the spirit of the present invention can be realized, game value may include, for example, the execution of a jackpot game in which a large number of balls can be expected to be acquired (opening of the variable prize slot 316), the execution of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game, the execution of a regular win game in a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state described later) (long opening of the second prize slot 315), and the execution of a regular win game in a normal game state (short opening of the second prize slot 315). Examples include: releasing the game, executing a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a regular win in the shortened play state (a, b, and c described later), executing a lottery for a regular win in the normal play state, transitioning to the shortened play state (a, b, and c described later), executing high-probability-of-a-jackpot effects, jackpot-confirming effects, and premium effects on the symbol display unit 341, and any combination thereof.

Here, in the first embodiment described above, a gaming machine was described in which the first special symbol game, which is executed as a variable game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 as the starting ball entry, and the second special symbol game, which is executed as a variable game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 as the starting ball entry, are not executed in overlap (parallel) but rather the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game, thus functioning as a loop probability variation machine.

Furthermore, since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probability variation machine, after the end of a jackpot game, it transitions to a time-saving game state (so-called a time-saving game state) which is a more advantageous profit game state than the normal game state, thereby guaranteeing a jackpot in the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine could be configured such that, when a specific symbol (a so-called time-saving symbol) is displayed on a display unit such as the main display unit 36 or the symbol display unit 341, and the time-saving symbol fails to stop, the machine transitions to a time-saving game state (a so-called c-time-saving game state) as an added value to the special symbol game result.

Furthermore, in gaming machines, it is crucial to increase the level of attention and interest in the game to enhance players' motivation to play. Specifically, when adopting a configuration where a missed stop on a time-saving symbol triggers a transition to a time-saving game state as a value added to the special symbol game result, it is important to add new gameplay elements that increase the level of attention and interest in the game and enhance players' motivation to play.

In contrast, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is a simultaneous variation machine in which a first special symbol game, in which the first special symbol is varied based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning opening 314 as the starting ball entry, and a second special symbol game, in which the second special symbol is varied based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning opening 315 as the starting ball entry, can be executed in overlapping (parallel) on the main display unit 36 as a display unit, under the control of the MPU 41 as a game control unit. Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment transitions to a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state), which is a more advantageous profit game state than the normal game state, after the end of a jackpot game. However, an upper limit (maximum number of a time-saving game rounds) is set for the number of special symbol games as variation games in the a time-saving game state, and the machine is configured as an ST machine that transitions to the normal game state when the maximum number of a time-saving game rounds of special symbol games have been executed in the a time-saving game state. In this embodiment, as described later, the probability of hitting a jackpot in the time-saving game state (a) is set to 1/150, the maximum number of time-saving game rounds (a) is set to 200, and the expected probability of hitting a jackpot in the time-saving game state (a) is 73.8%.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is a variable game, can transition to the c-time-saving game state as an added value to the special symbol game result when a specific symbol (time-saving symbol) fails to stop and is displayed on the main display unit 36 as a display device. The c-time-saving game state, like the a-time-saving game state, has an upper limit (maximum c-time-saving game count) on the number of special symbol games, but the maximum c-time-saving game count is set to the number of times in which a jackpot is substantially guaranteed. That is, the c-time-saving game state is a more advantageous profit game state than the a-time-saving game state, which does not guarantee a jackpot, because a jackpot is substantially guaranteed. In this embodiment, as described later, the jackpot probability in the c-time-saving game state is set to 1/150, the maximum a-time-saving game count is set to 2000, and the jackpot expectation rate in the c-time-saving game state is 99.9998%.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped on the main display unit 36 during normal gameplay, the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state as a value added to the special symbol game result. Conversely, when the time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped on the main display unit 36 during the a-time-saving game state, the a-time-saving game state is maintained without transitioning to the c-time-saving game state. Also, when the time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped on the main display unit 36 during the b-time-saving game state or c-time-saving game state (described later), the current game state, either the b-time-saving game state or the c-time-saving game state, is maintained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is a variable game started in the a-time-saving game state as a profitable game state, is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the execution time of the first special symbol game (the display time of the first special symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display unit) includes the possibility of executing a second special symbol game, which is a variable game with a maximum of a time-saving game counts. That is, in this embodiment, the game machine may execute a second special symbol game, which is a variable game with a maximum of a time-saving game counts, during the execution of the first special symbol game which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is a variable game started in the a-time-saving game state as a profitable game state, is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. Furthermore, if, during the execution of the first special symbol game, which is a variable game initiated in the a-time-saving game state (a-state), the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game (a-state) is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the second special symbol game (a-state) is executed with the maximum number of a-time-saving game rounds, the game state transitions from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. As a result, the first special symbol game (a-state), which is a variable game initiated in the a-time-saving game state (a-state), ends in the normal game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a value added to the result of the first special symbol game initiated in the a-time-saving game state (a-state), the game can transition to the c-time-saving game state, where a jackpot is substantially guaranteed.

Thus, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol game is started in the a-time-saving game state, which is a profitable game state that transitions to the normal game state by executing the special symbol game as a variable game with an upper limit of number of times (a-time-saving game times), and the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is that the time-saving symbols do not stop, the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the a-time-saving game state, and is substantially guaranteed to result in a jackpot, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the first special symbol game, in the a-time-saving game state which transitions to after the jackpot game ends, will start as a variable game in which the time-saving symbols will stop and be displayed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game is started in the a-time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbols are displayed in a stopped state, a novel gameplay feature is realized in which the game is played so that the game state transitions from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game, by executing the second special symbol game up to the maximum number of times which is the termination condition of the a-time-saving game state, so that the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is displayed in a stopped state after the transition from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state, and so that game balls are entered into the second prize slot 315 in order to execute the second special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is a variable game started in the a-time-saving game state (a) as a profitable game state, is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed as a value added to the result of the special symbol game. That is, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, in the a-time-saving game state (a) as a profitable game state, it can also be expected that the jackpot game will be executed if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game, which is a variable game, started during the execution of the first special symbol game, is a jackpot. In other words, the same kind of excitement as the a-time-saving game state (a) of conventional gaming machines is maintained, where it can be expected that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot in the a-time-saving game state (a) as a profitable game state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game while a first special symbol game is being executed in a time-saving game state a, which is a profitable gaming state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the expectation of transitioning to a time-saving game state c, where a jackpot is substantially guaranteed, can be maintained. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefit of the jackpot game being executed as the added value for the result of the second special symbol game. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game while a first special symbol game is being executed in a time-saving game state a, which is a profitable gaming state, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a loss, it can be expected that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, similar to the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines, and a novel gaming feature is realized in which the player can enjoy the benefit corresponding to the lottery result.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment utilizes the characteristics of a simultaneous variation machine, in which the first and second special symbols can simultaneously vary on the main display unit 36, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. This is achieved by utilizing a time-saving game state (a) which is a profitable game state where a maximum number of time-saving game rounds can be played after the end of a jackpot game; a time-saving game state (c) which is a state where a jackpot is practically guaranteed and can be entered upon a stop display indicating a missed time-saving symbol; and the aforementioned novel gameplay that enhances the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the gameplay of a conventional gaming machine in time-saving game state (a), where a jackpot game is expected to be executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 124 to 155.

[Gameplay of the gaming machine 10]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a so-called simultaneous variation machine, in which the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 (see Figure 126) of the main display unit 36 and the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (see Figure 126) of the main display unit 36 can be executed simultaneously. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game can be executed in parallel and simultaneously. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a novel gameplay experience that takes advantage of the characteristics of a simultaneous variation machine and enhances the enjoyment of the game is realized.

Here, Figure 124 shows the game flow of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. The game flow of the gaming machine 10 will be explained below with reference to Figure 124.

As shown in Figure 124, the gaming machine 10 can perform normal gameplay, jackpot gameplay, and time-saving gameplay.

The normal game state is a low-frequency support mode in which the electric mechanism 315b provides support for the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 at a low frequency. In this low-frequency support mode, the operation frequency (operation probability) of the electric mechanism 315b is lower than in the high-frequency support mode (see Figure 12(A)), and the operation time when the electric mechanism 315b is activated is set to be shorter (see Figure 12(C)). In other words, in the normal game state, it is difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315.

The jackpot game state is a state that is entered after a special symbol game in which the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot has ended (after the special symbols have stopped and been displayed) during normal gameplay or time-saving gameplay, and during which the jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is a game state in which a predetermined number of rounds are played, in which the variable prize entry opening 316 is opened by the operation of the opening/closing door 319, making it possible to acquire a large number of game balls. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player compared to normal gameplay or time-saving gameplay, as it allows for the acquisition of a large number of game balls.

The time-saving game state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric mechanism 315b provides frequent support for the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315. Compared to the low-frequency support mode, this high-frequency support mode has a higher activation frequency (activation probability) of the electric mechanism 315b (see Figure 12(B)), and the activation time of the electric mechanism 315b is set to be longer (see Figure 12(D)). In other words, the time-saving game state makes it easier for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. Therefore, the time-saving game state is more advantageous than the normal game state because it increases the chances of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an upper limit is set on the number of special feature games (time-saving games) that can be performed in the time-saving game state (number of time-saving games). In this embodiment, three time-saving game states are set: a, b, and c, each with different transition triggers.

The "a-Shortened Play Mode" is a game mode that is entered after a jackpot game ends. In the a-Shortened Play Mode, the maximum number of playable shortened play sessions (special symbol games) is set to 200. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see Figure 128(A)), the probability of winning a jackpot in the a-Shortened Play Mode is approximately 73.8%, meaning that winning a jackpot is highly likely in this mode. Conversely, the probability of not winning a jackpot in the a-Shortened Play Mode is approximately 26.2%, meaning that winning a jackpot is not guaranteed in this mode. Furthermore, if the maximum number of special symbol games (200 in this embodiment) are executed without winning a jackpot in the a-Shortened Play Mode, the game transitions to the normal play mode, which is a low-frequency support mode.

b. The shortened play state is a game state that is entered when a predetermined number of special symbol games are played without winning a jackpot in the normal play state. The predetermined number of plays required to enter the shortened play state is selected from, for example, a range of 2.5 to 3.0 times the denominator of the jackpot probability. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is 1/150, the predetermined number of plays required to enter the shortened play state is selected from a range of 375 to 450 plays, and in one example, it is set to 400 plays.

On the other hand, in the b-time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of playable time-saving games (special symbol games) (number of time-saving games) is set to a number that substantially guarantees a jackpot in the b-time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of playable time-saving games (special symbol games) in the b-time-saving game state (number of time-saving games) is set to 2000 times. Meanwhile, in this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see Figure 128(A)), the probability of winning a jackpot in the b-time-saving game state is approximately 99.9998%, thus substantially guaranteeing a jackpot in the b-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, if the maximum number of special symbol games (2000 in this embodiment) are played without winning a jackpot in the b-time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, similar to the a-time-saving game state. However, since a jackpot is practically guaranteed in the b-time-saving game state, a transition from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state is practically impossible.

Furthermore, the upper limit on the number of time-saving games (special symbol games) that can be played in the b-time-saving game state (number of time-saving games) should be set to the number of times in the b-time-saving game state that is practically guaranteed to result in a jackpot, and is not limited to 2000 times. Of course, it is also conceivable to set the upper limit on the number of time-saving games (special symbol games) that can be played in the b-time-saving game state (number of time-saving games) to the number of times in the b-time-saving game state that is not practically guaranteed to result in a jackpot.

The c-time-saving game state is a game state that is entered when the time-saving symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 (see Figure 126) of the main display unit 36 during normal gameplay. In other words, the c-time-saving game state is entered when the game state at the end of the first special symbol game, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a type of loss (see Figures 128(C) and 128(D)), is the normal game state with the lowest profit. This state is independent of the game state at the time of the jackpot lottery announcement or the game state at the start of the first special symbol game. In other words, the transition to the c-time-saving game state is a benefit granted in the normal game state with the lowest profit.

Furthermore, in the c-time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of playable time-saving games (special symbol games) (number of time-saving games) is set to a number that substantially guarantees a jackpot in the c-time-saving game state, similar to the b-time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of playable time-saving games (special symbol games) (number of time-saving games) in the c-time-saving game state is set to 2000 times, similar to the b-time-saving game state. The probability of winning a jackpot in the c-time-saving game state is approximately 99.9998%, similar to the b-time-saving game state, thus substantially guaranteeing a jackpot in the c-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, if the maximum number of special symbol games (2000 in this embodiment) are executed without winning a jackpot in the c-time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, similar to the a-time-saving game state and b-time-saving game state. Since a jackpot is practically guaranteed in the c-time-saving game state, a transition from the c-time-saving game state to the normal game state is practically impossible.

On the other hand, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 (see Figure 126), if the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed is a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state, the game will not transition to the c time-saving game state, and the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed will be maintained. For example, if the time-saving symbol is displayed in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state will be maintained; if the time-saving symbol is displayed in the a time-saving game state, the a time-saving game state will be maintained; if the time-saving symbol is displayed in the b time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state will be maintained; and if the time-saving symbol is displayed in the c time-saving game state, the c time-saving game state will be maintained.

As mentioned above, in the gaming machine 10, the display of the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol display unit 362 (see Figure 126) and the display of the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol display unit 363 (see Figure 126) can be executed simultaneously. Therefore, the game state may differ between the start and stop of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362.

Here, Figures 125(A) and 125(B) are timing charts showing an example of the timing of the end of the first special game started in the a-time-saving game state. In Figures 125(A) and 125(B), the rectangular waves shown in pulse form correspond to one special game, and the rectangular waves for the second special game executed in the a-time-saving game state are shown without specifying the number. As shown in Figure 125(A), when the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (see Figure 126) starts in the a-time-saving game state, if the display time of the first special symbol in the display (execution time of the first special game) is shorter than the total time that the second special game will be executed for the remaining number of time-saving games, the first special game will end in the a-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the first special symbol game indicates that the time-saving symbol stop was a miss as a result of the jackpot lottery, the time-saving game state (a) is maintained even after the first special symbol game ends. In contrast, as shown in Figure 125(B), if the first special symbol display unit 362 (see Figure 126) begins displaying the first special symbol in the time-saving game state (a), and the display time of the first special symbol in that display (the execution time of the first special symbol game) is longer than the total execution time of the second special symbol game for the remaining time-saving game counts up to the upper limit, the game state transitions from the time-saving game state (a) to the normal game state, and the first special symbol game ends in the normal game state. Therefore, if the first special symbol game indicates that the time-saving symbol stop was a miss as a result of the jackpot lottery, the time-saving game state (c) is transitioned after the first special symbol game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, if the first special symbol's variation display starts in the a-time-saving game state, and the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, where the first special symbol is displayed as stopped in the a-time-saving game state, is a time-saving game state (a) is maintained. However, in this case, the player may be given a benefit. This allows the first special symbol game to end in the a-time-saving game state in response to a time-saving symbol miss, thus maintaining the a-time-saving game state without transitioning to the c-time-saving game state. Even if the player experiences an unpleasant feeling, such unpleasantness can be mitigated by the benefit provided, and interest in the game can be increased, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Here, if the time-saving symbol stops incorrectly and the time-saving game state (a) is maintained, the benefits granted to the player could include, for example, the opening of the variable prize slot 316 by the operation of the opening/closing door 319, the opening of the second prize slot 315 by the operation of the electric mechanism 315b, the execution of a minor win game, the display of a premium image on the symbol display unit 341, the release of a premium song as a song that can be output from the speaker 26 during a big win game, and the explicit display or suggestion of the game setting value that defines the big win probability (see Figures 9(A) and 9(B)).

Thus, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol game is started in the a-time-saving game state, which transitions to the normal game state after the maximum number of special symbol games have been played, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is that the time-saving symbols do not stop, the machine transitions to the c-time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the a-time-saving game state, and where a jackpot is substantially guaranteed, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the first special symbol game, in the a-time-saving game state transitioned to after the jackpot game ends, will start with the time-saving symbols displayed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a first special symbol game is started in the a-time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, a novel gameplay feature is realized in which the game is played so that, by the time the first special symbol game ends, the second special symbol game is executed for the maximum number of times that the a-time-saving game state is terminated, so that the game state transitions from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game, that is, after the transition from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed, and so that game balls are entered into the second prize slot 315 in order to execute the second special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, in the a-time-saving game state, it can also be expected that the jackpot game will be executed if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game started during the execution of the first special symbol game is a jackpot. In other words, the same kind of excitement as the a-time-saving game state of conventional gaming machines is maintained, where it is expected that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot in the a-time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed while the first special symbol game is being played in the a-time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the expectation of transitioning to the c-time-saving game state, where a jackpot is substantially guaranteed, can be maintained. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefits of the jackpot game being played. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed while the first special symbol game is being played in the a-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a loss, a novel gameplay experience is realized where, similar to the a-time-saving game state of conventional gaming machines, the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery can be expected to be a jackpot, and the player can enjoy the benefits corresponding to that lottery result.

Thus, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 utilizes the characteristics of a simultaneous variation machine, where the first and second special symbols can vary simultaneously, to achieve the aforementioned novel gameplay that enhances the enjoyment of the game. This is achieved by utilizing a time-saving game state (a) that can be entered after the end of a jackpot game, allowing for a maximum number of time-saving game rounds; a time-saving game state (c) that can be entered upon a stop display indicating a missed time-saving symbol stop, essentially guaranteeing a jackpot; and the aforementioned novel gameplay that enhances the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the gameplay of a conventional gaming machine in time-saving game state (a), where a jackpot game is expected to be executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

Furthermore, the upper limit on the number of time-saving games (special symbol games) that can be played in the c-time-saving game state (number of time-saving games) should be set to the number of times that effectively guarantees a jackpot in the c-time-saving game state. It is not limited to 2000 times, and it does not necessarily have to be set to the same number as in the b-time-saving game state. Of course, it is also conceivable to set the upper limit on the number of time-saving games (special symbol games) that can be played in the c-time-saving game state (number of time-saving games) to the number of times that effectively does not guarantee a jackpot in the c-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbol stop failure is set for the first special symbol game, but not for the second special symbol game (see Figures 128(C) to 128(E)). Therefore, the time-saving symbol will not be displayed as a result of the second special symbol game on the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (see Figure 126). Of course, the time-saving symbol stop failure may be set for the second special symbol game, so that the time-saving symbol can be displayed as a result of the second special symbol game on the second special symbol display unit 363 (see Figure 126). Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display unit 363 (see Figure 126) as a result of the second special symbol game, the player may be given some kind of benefit, such as the opening of the variable prize slot 316 by the operation of the opening/closing door 319, the opening of the second prize slot 315 by the operation of the electric mechanism 315b, the execution of a minor prize game, the display of a premium image on the symbol display unit 341, the release of a premium song as a song that can be output from the speaker 26 during a big win game, or the explicit display or suggestion of the game setting value that defines the big win probability (see Figures 9(A) and 9(B)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a normal game state and a time-saving game state are set, and a game state equivalent to the probability variation game state in the first embodiment described above is not set. However, for example, a probability variation game state may be set instead of the time-saving game state. In other words, the game machine 10 does not keep the probability of a jackpot constant between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, but rather it is conceivable to set the probability of a jackpot in a part of the high-frequency support mode to be at least higher than that in the low-frequency support mode. In this case, whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a failure to stop the time-saving symbols can be determined by referring to the game state at the time the jackpot lottery is executed or at the start of the special symbol game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery (when the special symbols start to change), but it is preferable to determine it by referring to the game state at the end of the special symbol game (when the special symbols stop and are displayed). In this embodiment, the game machine 10 executes the start and stop indication of the first special symbol's variation (execution of the first special symbol game) and the start and stop indication of the second special symbol's variation (execution of the second special symbol game) independently, simultaneously, and in parallel with each other. Therefore, when one special symbol stops (end of one special game), it is expected that the game state during the variation indication of the other special symbol (execution of the other special game) will differ from the game state at the start of the variation of the other special symbol (start of the other special game). Consequently, when determining the result of the jackpot lottery by referring to the game state at the end of the special symbol game (when the special symbol stops), even if the game state differs between the start and end of the special symbol game, the timing for determining the jackpot lottery result only needs to be done once. This simplifies the process of determining the jackpot lottery result and improves the reliability of the process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, three types of time-saving game states are set: a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state, and c-time-saving game state. However, it is also conceivable to omit b-time-saving game state and set only two types: a-time-saving game state and c-time-saving game state.

[Composition of inner frame 12]
Here, Figure 126 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in Figure 126, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, an out opening 318, and a variable display unit 34 (pattern display section 341) similar to those of the first embodiment described above. The game board 31 is also similar to the first embodiment in that it is provided with a main display section 36, a first prize opening 314, a second prize opening 315, a variable prize opening 316, and a through gate 317, but these differ from the first embodiment described above.

Note that while the game board 31 in Figure 126 has numerous nails installed, these are omitted in the drawing. Also, in the game board 31 of Figure 126, the sub-movable display unit 38 and movable mechanism member 39, which were provided in the game board 31 of the first embodiment described above, are omitted; however, one or both of these may be provided in the game board 31.

The main display unit 36 is located on the lower right side of the game board 31 and includes a regular symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first special symbol reserve count display unit 364, and a second special symbol reserve count display unit 365.

The regular symbol display unit 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing regular symbols (regular symbols), and each LED lights up and turns off during the regular symbol game, which is triggered when a game ball passes through the through gate 317. The regular symbol game is performed to announce the result of the regular symbol win lottery, which is triggered when a game ball passes through the through gate 317. If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a regular symbol win, the regular symbol win game is performed, in which the second prize entry opening 315 is opened by the operation of the electric mechanism 315b.

The on/off switching of the LED pairs (normal symbols) in the normal symbol display unit 361 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the normal symbol win lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) triggers the LED pairs to flash (displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner) when a game ball passes through the through gate 317. After the normal symbol variable display time set during the normal symbol win lottery has elapsed, the normal symbol game is executed by turning each LED on or off (displaying the normal symbols as stationary) according to the result of the normal symbol win lottery.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, letters, and other symbols as the first special symbol (first special symbol). The 7-segment display device includes 7 segments, each of which is illuminated or extinguished during the first special symbol game, which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314. The first special symbol game is executed to announce the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is also executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314. If the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened by the operation of the opening/closing door 319.

The on/off states of each segment of the 7-segment display device in the first special symbol display unit 362 are controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) triggers the flashing of the seven segments of the 7-segment display device (displaying the first special symbol in a variable state) when a game ball enters the first prize entry point 314. After the variable display time for the first special symbol, set during the first special symbol jackpot lottery, the first special symbol game is executed by turning each segment on or off (displaying the first special symbol in a stationary state) according to the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery includes jackpots and misses, as described later (see Figure 128(A)). Jackpots include 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots (see Figure 128(A)). Misses as a result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery include, as in the first embodiment described above, front/back misses, non-front/back misses, and complete misses, and also include misses where the time-saving symbols stop (see Figures 128(C) and 128(D)). Then, in the first special symbol display unit 362, the first special symbol game is started when the display of the symbols (first special symbols) begins to change based on the execution of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, and after the elapsed time of the first special symbol change display time set for the first special symbol game, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is displayed stopped. For example, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "1", "5", or "9" are displayed; if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "3" or "7" are displayed; if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a near miss (missing both forward and backward), the numbers "2" or "4" are displayed; if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a near miss (other than missing both forward and backward), the numbers "6" or "8" are displayed; if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol miss, the number "0" is displayed; and if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss, something other than a number is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the number "0" corresponds to the time-saving symbol.

Furthermore, the correspondence between the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery and the type of the first special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 is not limited to the example described above. For example, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number may be displayed, or the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery may be displayed using letters of the alphabet. The number (types) of special symbols corresponding to the type of result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is also not limited to the example described above, and multiple types of time-saving symbols may be set.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, letters, and other symbols as the second special symbol (second special symbol). The 7-segment display device includes seven segments, each of which lights up or turns off during the second special symbol game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot 315. The second special symbol game is performed to announce the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot 315. If the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is performed in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened by the operation of the opening/closing door 319.

The on/off states of each segment of the 7-segment display device in the second special symbol display unit 363 are controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) triggers the flashing of the seven segments of the 7-segment display device (displaying the second special symbol) when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315. After the second special symbol variation display time, set during the second special symbol jackpot lottery, the second special symbol game is executed by turning each segment on or off (displaying the second special symbol as stationary) according to the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the results of the second special symbol jackpot lottery include 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots (see Figure 128(A)), similar to the results of the first special symbol jackpot lottery. However, there are no set "time-saving symbol stop misses" as misses, and, similar to the first embodiment described above, there are "front/back miss reach," "reach other than front/back miss," and "complete miss reach" (see Figure 128(E)). Then, in the second special symbol display unit 363, the second special symbol game is started when the display of the symbols (second special symbols) begins to change based on the execution of the second special symbol jackpot lottery. After the elapsed time of the second special symbol change display set for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is displayed stopped. For example, if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "1", "5", or "9" will be displayed; if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "3" or "7" will be displayed; if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a near miss (missing both ways), the numbers "2" or "4" will be displayed; if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a near miss (other than missing both ways), the numbers "6" or "8" will be displayed; and if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss, nothing other than a number will be displayed.

Furthermore, the correspondence between the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery and the type of second special symbol displayed in the second special symbol display unit 363 is not limited to the example described above. For example, if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number may be displayed, or the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery may be displayed using letters of the alphabet. The number of special symbols corresponding to the type of result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is also not limited to the example described above.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display of the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol display unit 362 is performed regardless of whether the display of the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol display unit 363 is currently running. Conversely, the display of the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol display unit 363 is performed regardless of whether the display of the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol display unit 362 is currently running. That is, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game can be performed independently, simultaneously, and in parallel.

Furthermore, the display of the regular symbols (normal symbols) in the normal symbol display unit 361 is performed to notify the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, which is different from the jackpot lottery. Therefore, it can be performed independently, simultaneously, and in parallel with the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 and the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363.

The first special symbol reserve count display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the first special symbol reserve count N, which is the number of rights to execute the first special symbol game that arise from a win in the first prize slot 314, by the number of LEDs that are lit.

The second special symbol reserve count display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the second special symbol reserve count M, which is the number of rights to execute the second special symbol game that arise from a win in the second prize entry slot 315, by the number of LEDs that are lit.

Furthermore, the main display unit 36 in this embodiment may be provided on the upper right side of the game board 31, similar to the main display unit 36 in the first embodiment described above, or it may be provided in other locations.

The first prize entry point 314 provides an opportunity for the first special prize draw based on the entry of the game ball. In this embodiment, the first prize entry point 314 consists of a central first prize entry point 314C and a right first prize entry point 314R.

The central first prize slot 314C is located below the symbol display unit 341 (below the center of the game board 31), similar to the first prize slot 314 in the first embodiment described above. This central first prize slot 314C is equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects when a game ball enters the central first prize slot 314C.

In this embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawings, the central first prize slot 314C is designed so that game balls launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 and flowing down the left side of the symbol display section 341 can enter, while game balls launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 and flowing down the right side of the symbol display section 341 cannot or will have difficulty entering. That is, in order to trigger the first special prize draw upon a game ball entering the central first prize slot 314C, it is recommended to launch the game ball into the left-hand area of the game board 31, i.e., to play left-handed.

The right first prize slot 314R is located to the right of the symbol display unit 341 (center right of the game board 31). This right first prize slot 314R is equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects when a game ball enters the right first prize slot 314R.

In this embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawings, the right first prize slot 314R is designed to accept game balls that have been launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 and flowed down the right side of the symbol display section 341. However, the frequency (possibility) of game balls launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 entering the right first prize slot 314R is lower than the frequency (possibility) of game balls launched into the left-side area of the game board 31 entering the central first prize slot 314C, by adjusting the arrangement of the nails driven around the right first prize slot 314R. For example, the frequency (possibility) of game balls launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 entering the right first prize slot 314R is set to about one or two balls during the period until the second special symbol game is executed a specified number of times (200 times in this embodiment) in the time-saving game state. This means that if it is easy for game balls to enter the right first prize slot 314R, then one or more first special symbol reserves will accumulate when game balls enter the right first prize slot 314R during the a time-saving game state, preventing the first special symbol game from being executed continuously during the a time-saving game state. This reduces the possibility that the first special symbol game, which was started in the a time-saving game state, will end in the normal game state, and prevents the player from easily transitioning to the c time-saving game state. In addition, to prevent the player from easily transitioning to the c time-saving game state, it is also conceivable to shorten the time of the first special symbol game (first special symbol variation display time) triggered by a game ball entering the central first prize slot 314C during the a time-saving game state. This makes it possible to counter strategies that involve using both right-handed and left-handed play during the a time-saving game state. Specifically, in the a-time-saving game state, by appropriately shooting to the left, it is possible to maintain the accumulation of the first special symbol reserve and continuously execute the first special symbol game. On the other hand, by shooting to the right, it is possible to reduce the remaining number of time-saving game plays in the a-time-saving game state by executing the second special symbol game. However, by setting the time of the first special symbol game (first special symbol variation display time) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the central first prize slot 314C to a short time, for example, to 0.5 seconds or less than 1 second, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of the first special symbol reserve, thereby preventing the continuous execution of the first special symbol game and enabling countermeasures against exploitative play by using both right-handed and left-handed shooting during the a-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, it is impossible or difficult for game balls launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 and flowing down the left side of the symbol display section 341 to enter the right-hand first prize slot 314R. In other words, in order to trigger the first special prize draw upon a game ball entering the right-hand first prize slot 314R, it is recommended to launch the game ball into the right-hand area of the game board 31, a technique known as "right-handed play."

Thus, in order to get the game ball into the central first prize slot 314C, it is recommended to shoot the game ball into the left-hand area of the game board 31, a technique known as left-handed shooting. Conversely, in order to get the game ball into the right first prize slot 314R, it is recommended to shoot the game ball into the right-hand area of the game board 31, a technique known as right-handed shooting.

In this embodiment, a normal game state is provided as a game state, which is a low-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning is low (see Figure 12(A)) and the electric mechanism 315b is less likely to be activated. Furthermore, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the right first prize slot 314R compared to the central first prize slot 314C. Therefore, in the normal game state, where the electric mechanism 315b is less likely to be activated, so-called left-handed play is encouraged, where game balls are launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31, in order to get game balls into the central first prize slot 314C, which is easier to enter than the right first prize slot 314R.

The second prize slot 315 provides an opportunity for a second special jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball. In this embodiment, the second prize slot 315 is located to the right of the symbol display section 341, directly above the right first prize slot 314R, and is capable of receiving game balls that have been launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 and flowed down the right side of the symbol display section 341.

Furthermore, the second prize slot 315 is equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the entry of a game ball into the right first prize slot 314R. In addition, the second prize slot 315 is equipped with an electric mechanism 315b that switches between a state where the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 is restricted and a state where the entry of game balls is permitted. The electric mechanism 315b operates during the regular win game, which is executed when the result of the regular win lottery, triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 317, is a regular win. That is, the electric mechanism 315b restricts the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 when not executing the regular win game, and allows the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 when executing the regular win game.

In this embodiment, the game state is set to a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning is high (see Figure 12(B)) and the electric mechanism 315b is easily activated. The second prize entry point 315 is launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, and game balls that flow down the right side of the symbol display section 341 can enter. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, in order to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode, so-called right-handed shooting, where game balls are launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, is encouraged.

The variable prize slot 316 is a slot into which game balls can be inserted during a jackpot game, which is executed when the result of the first or second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variable prize slot 316 is equipped with an opening/closing door 319. During a jackpot game, the opening/closing door 319 is activated, opening the variable prize slot 316 and allowing game balls to enter it.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable prize entry point 316 is located on the lower side of the right-hand region of the game board 31. When the variable prize entry point 316 is opened during a jackpot game, although not clearly shown in the diagram, game balls launched into the right-hand region of the game board 31 can enter the variable prize entry point 316, while game balls launched into the left-hand region of the game board 31 cannot. Therefore, during a jackpot game, so-called "right-handed shooting," where game balls are launched into the right-hand region of the game board 31, is encouraged.

Furthermore, the variable prize entry point 316 is not limited to the right-hand area of the game board 31; for example, it may be provided in the left-hand area of the game board 31 or below the central first prize entry point 314C. In this case, when the variable prize entry point 316 is opened during a jackpot game, game balls launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 can enter the variable prize entry point 316. Alternatively, the variable prize entry point 316 may be designed to allow both game balls launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 and game balls launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 to enter.

The through gate 317 provides a trigger for executing a regular win lottery, which determines whether or not to activate the electric mechanism 315b (whether or not to execute a regular win game) based on the passage of the game ball. In the first embodiment described above, two through gates 317L and 317R are provided, with a through gate 317L in the left area of the game board 31 and a through gate 317R in the right area of the game board 31. However, in this embodiment, only one through gate 317 is provided, directly above the second prize entry point 315 to the right of the symbol display section 341. This allows game balls launched into the right area of the game board 31 and flowing down the right side of the symbol display section 341 to pass through. Furthermore, a ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in the second prize entry point 315, and this sensor detects the passage of a game ball through the through gate 317.

As mentioned above, in the time-saving game state, in order to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode in which the electric mechanism 315b operates frequently, so-called right-handed shooting, where the game balls are launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, is encouraged. The through gate 317 allows game balls that have been launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 and flowed down the right side of the symbol display section 341 to pass through. Based on whether the game balls pass through the through gate 317, a general winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate the electric mechanism 315b (open the second prize slot 315). Therefore, in the time-saving game state, by performing so-called right-handed shooting, where the game balls are launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, it is possible not only to pass the game balls through the through gate 317 but also to enter the second prize slot 315. Thus, by continuously performing right-handed shooting without switching between right-handed and left-handed shooting, the benefits of the time-saving game state can be maximized.

Thus, in this embodiment, during normal gameplay, left-handed play is encouraged to get the game ball into the central first prize slot 314C; during time-saving gameplay, right-handed play is encouraged to get the game ball through the through gate 317 and into the second prize slot 315 when the electric mechanism 315b is activated; and during jackpot gameplay, right-handed play is encouraged to get the game ball into the variable prize slot 316 when the opening/closing door 319 is activated.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, referring to Figures 127 to 129, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Special Feature Holding Storage Area 412b]
While the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability variation machine, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variation machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can vary simultaneously. Therefore, the configuration of the special symbol hold storage area 412b of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment described above. Here, Figure 127 is a block diagram showing an example of the special symbol hold storage area 412b provided in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 128 and 129 show an example of a table used in the main control device 4.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variation machine, and therefore, unlike the first embodiment described above, special symbol execution areas AEA and AEB are individually provided for each special symbol hold storage area REA and REB. Specifically, as shown in Figure 127, the first special symbol execution area AEA is provided for the first special symbol hold storage area REA, and the second special symbol execution area AEB is provided for the second special symbol hold storage area REB. When the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36, the first special symbol win/loss information stored in the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA is moved to the first special symbol execution area AEA. Furthermore, when the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 begins displaying the second special symbol, the second special symbol win/loss information stored in the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB is moved to the second special symbol execution area AEB.

[Big Win/Loss Table]
In this embodiment, there is no game state corresponding to the high-probability mode of the first embodiment described above (probability variation game state). Instead, there are two game states, a normal game state and a time-saving game state, where the probability of winning a jackpot (jackpot probability) is the same. Specifically, as shown in Figure 128(A), in this embodiment, there is one jackpot win/loss table used when drawing jackpots, and this jackpot win/loss table is used in common for both the normal game state and the time-saving game state. In the jackpot win/loss table, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 437 random values ranging from 0 to 436 are designated as jackpots, and the remaining random values are designated as losses. In other words, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is uniformly set at approximately 1/150.

[Big Win Type Distribution Table]
In this embodiment, no jackpots corresponding to the probability variation jackpots of the first embodiment described above are set, and only jackpots corresponding to the normal jackpots of the first embodiment described above are set. That is, in this embodiment, only jackpots that transition to the a-time reduction game state after the jackpot game ends are set. Specifically, as shown in Figure 128(B), in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are set: 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots. In the jackpot type distribution table, of the 20 jackpot type counter values from 0 to 19, 10 values from 0 to 9 are defined as 5R jackpots, and 10 values from 10 to 19 are defined as 16R jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, the distribution ratio between 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots is 1:1.

If the jackpot lottery result is a 5R jackpot, a 5R jackpot game is executed, in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened and closed five times by the operation of the opening/closing door 319. After this 5R jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the a-time-saving game state. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery result is a 16R jackpot, a 16R jackpot game is executed, in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened and closed sixteen times by the operation of the opening/closing door 319. After this 16R jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the a-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the a-time-saving game state, as described above, the frequency of support for the entry of game balls into the second prize pocket 315 by the electric mechanism 315b is high (see Figure 12(B)), and the operating time of the electric mechanism 315b when it is activated is set to be longer (see Figure 12(D)), making it easier for game balls to enter the second prize pocket 315. Therefore, the a-time-saving game state is more advantageous than the normal game state in that it increases the chances of winning a jackpot. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (special feature games) that can be performed in the a-time-saving game state (number of time-saving games) is set to 200 times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a common jackpot type table is used when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot. However, different jackpot type tables may be provided for the cases where the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

[Outcast Classification Table]
In this embodiment, three types of loss type distribution tables are set: a normal game state first special symbol loss type distribution table used for losses in the first special symbol jackpot lottery in normal game state (see Figure 128(C)), a time-saving game state first special symbol loss type distribution table used for losses in the first special symbol jackpot lottery in time-saving game state (see Figure 128(D)), and a second special symbol loss type distribution table used for losses in the second special symbol jackpot lottery (see Figure 128(E)).

As shown in Figures 128(C) and 128(D), in this embodiment, the types of misses in the first special symbol jackpot lottery are set as follows, similar to the first embodiment described above: front/back miss reach, reach other than front/back miss, and complete miss. Furthermore, a time-saving symbol stop miss, which was not set in the first embodiment, is also set. Here, a time-saving symbol stop miss indicates that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss, and this is indicated by the stopping display of a specific symbol set as a time-saving symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36. In this embodiment, as described above, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, and this is indicated in the normal game state (when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 in the normal game state), the game state transitions to the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the distribution table for the type of miss in the first special symbol during normal gameplay shown in Figure 128(C), the distribution rate for the time-saving symbol stop miss is set to 0.42%, whereas in the distribution table for the type of miss in the first special symbol during time-saving gameplay shown in Figure 128(D), the distribution rate for the time-saving symbol stop miss is set to 50.21%. In other words, in the first special symbol jackpot lottery during normal gameplay, the probability of the time-saving symbol stop miss is low, while in the first special symbol jackpot lottery during time-saving gameplay, the probability of the time-saving symbol stop miss is high. To put it another way, when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is conducted during normal gameplay, the lottery result is less likely to result in a time-saving symbol stop miss, while when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is conducted during time-saving gameplay, the lottery result is more likely to result in a time-saving symbol stop miss. As a result, based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in normal gameplay, transitioning to the time-saving gameplay state is less likely.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is likely to be a miss when the time-saving symbols stop. However, in order to transition to the time-saving game state (c), the condition is that the time-saving symbols must be displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (b), the number of time-saving game rounds is set to 2000 (see Figure 124), and a jackpot is practically guaranteed. Therefore, the maximum number of special symbol rounds are not practically executed in the time-saving game state (b), and as a result, the transition from the time-saving game state (b) to the normal game state is practically nonexistent. Therefore, even if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the b-time-saving game state is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the first special symbol game, which was started in the b-time-saving game state to notify the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, will not end in the normal game state. In other words, the first special symbol, which began to display a variation in response to the first special symbol jackpot lottery, will not be displayed as stopped in the normal game state. As a result, based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the b-time-saving game state, the game will not transition to the c-time-saving game state.

Of course, the number of time-saving game rounds that can be played in time-saving game state b may be set to a range where a jackpot is not guaranteed in time-saving game state b, similar to time-saving game state a. Furthermore, it may be possible to transition to time-saving game state c based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in time-saving game state b. In other words, even when transitioning to time-saving game state b is possible, it is conceivable to provide the same gameplay as when transitioning to time-saving game state a.

Furthermore, the distribution rate for the time-saving symbol stop failure when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss is not limited to the example of the first special symbol loss type distribution table shown in Figures 128(C) and 128(D), and can be changed in various ways. For example, it is conceivable to set the distribution rate for the time-saving symbol stop failure when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery performed in the normal game state is a loss to be about the same as the jackpot probability (1/150 = 0.67%). In this case, in the normal game state, a game element is added in which lottery result, a jackpot or a time-saving symbol stop failure, which have roughly the same probability, will be obtained first. Also, it is conceivable to set the distribution rate for the time-saving symbol stop failure when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery performed in the time-saving game state is a loss to 100%, or to make it close to 100%. In this case, if the first special symbol game is started in the a-time-saving game state, the probability that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game will be a failure to stop on the time-saving symbols is 100% or approximately 100%. Therefore, players can enjoy the game in the a-time-saving game state by focusing only on the timing of when the first special symbol stops and is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a common first special symbol miss type distribution table is set for all time-saving game states (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state). However, a separate first special symbol miss type distribution table may be set for each time-saving game state. Alternatively, a common first special symbol miss type distribution table may be set for two of the three time-saving game states, and a different first special symbol miss type distribution table may be set for the remaining one. For example, a miss type distribution table with a low distribution rate for time-saving symbol misses, such as the first special symbol miss type distribution table for time-saving game states shown in Figure 128(D), may be set for time-saving game states b and c, and a miss type distribution table with a low distribution rate for time-saving symbol misses, similar to the first special symbol miss type distribution table for normal game states shown in Figure 128(C), may be set for time-saving game states b and c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 128(E), the types of misses in the second special symbol jackpot lottery are the same as in the first embodiment described above: front/back miss reach, reach other than front/back miss, and complete miss. The time-saving symbol stop miss is not set. That is, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbol stop miss is set as a result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, and not as a result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery. Therefore, the game does not transition to the time-saving game state when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315.

[Big Win Fluctuation Table]
In this embodiment, there is only one type of jackpot variation table, as shown in Figure 129(A), which differs from the first embodiment described above, in that two types of jackpot variation tables (see Figures 10(A) and 10(B)) are provided according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot). In other words, in this embodiment, only jackpots corresponding to the normal jackpot of the first embodiment described above are set, and jackpots corresponding to the probability variation jackpot of the first embodiment described above are not set, so there is only one jackpot variation table. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the jackpot variation table is common to both 5R jackpots and 12R jackpots.

Furthermore, in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, three types of special symbol variation patterns are set: special symbol variation pattern "01" with a special symbol variation display time of 30 seconds, special symbol variation pattern "02" with a special symbol variation display time of 60 seconds, and special symbol variation pattern "03" with a special symbol variation display time of 90 seconds. In the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, special symbol variation patterns with longer display times are more likely to be selected. Specifically, in this jackpot variation table, the distribution rates for each special symbol variation pattern are set to 5% for special symbol variation pattern "01", 25% for special symbol variation pattern "02", and 70% for special symbol variation pattern "03". Thus, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, special symbol variation patterns with longer display times are more likely to be selected; therefore, the longer the special symbol variation display time, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot.

[Outlier Variation Table]
In this embodiment, four types of losing variation tables are set, as shown in Figures 129(B) to 129(D), which are used when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, which is different from the first embodiment described above, in that there is only one type of losing variation table (see Figure 10(C)). Specifically, in this embodiment, four types of losing variation tables are set: the first special symbol losing variation table A, which is used when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss in the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state shown in Figure 128(B); the first special symbol losing variation table B, which is used when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss in the time-saving game state shown in Figure 128(C); the normal game state second special symbol losing variation table, which is used when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss in the normal game state shown in Figure 128(D); and the time-saving game state second special symbol losing variation table, which is used when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss in the time-saving game state shown in Figure 128(E). Furthermore, in the miss variation table of this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, the special symbol variation display time for front/back miss reaches, reaches other than front/back misses, and complete misses is set as the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation pattern for front/back miss reaches and reaches other than front/back misses is the same as in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 10(C)).

Furthermore, unlike the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol miss variation table A and the first special symbol miss variation table B shown in Figures 129(B) and 129(C) have the special symbol variation display time for a time-saving symbol stop miss set as the special symbol variation pattern. However, in the first special symbol miss variation table A and the first special symbol miss variation table B, the special symbol variation pattern for a time-saving symbol stop miss is the same as for a complete miss. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the miss type is a complete miss or a time-saving symbol stop miss from the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time).

Furthermore, in the first special symbol miss variation table A shown in Figure 129(B), the special symbol variation patterns are set so that the display time for special symbol variations for complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses is shorter than that for front/back miss reaches and reaches other than front/back misses. Specifically, for complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses, special symbol variation pattern "04" has a special symbol variation display time of 7 seconds, special symbol variation pattern "05" has a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds, and special symbol variation pattern "06" has a special symbol variation display time of 15 seconds. The special symbol variation display times for all of special symbol variation patterns "04" to "06" are set shorter than the special symbol variation display times for front/back miss reaches and reaches other than front/back misses.

On the other hand, in the first special symbol miss variation table B shown in Figure 129(C), the special symbol variation patterns are set so that the special symbol variation display time for complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses is longer than in the first special symbol miss variation table A shown in Figure 129(B). Specifically, for complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses, special symbol variation pattern "07" with a special symbol variation display time of 50 seconds, special symbol variation pattern "08" with a special symbol variation display time of 100 seconds, and special symbol variation pattern "09" with a special symbol variation display time of 150 seconds are set. The special symbol variation display times for all of special symbol variation patterns "07" to "09" are set to be longer than the special symbol variation display times for complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses in the first special symbol miss variation table A shown in Figure 129(B).

As mentioned above, based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state, it is difficult to transition to the c-time-saving game state, and based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the b-time-saving game state, it is practically impossible to transition to the c-time-saving game state. Furthermore, based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the c-time-saving game state, it is impossible to transition to the c-time-saving game state. In the case of a complete miss, it is understood that there was no jackpot early in the execution of the first special symbol game. Therefore, in the first special symbol miss variation table A, which is used when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state, b-time-saving game state, and c-time-saving game state is a miss, special symbol variation patterns "04" to "06", which have a short special symbol variation display time, are set for complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses, where transition to the c-time-saving game state and a jackpot are unlikely, in order to terminate the first special symbol game early.

In contrast, in the a-time-saving game state, the first special symbol jackpot lottery, as mentioned above, has a higher expectation of transitioning to the c-time-saving game state based on the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery being a time-saving miss, compared to the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state and b-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the first special symbol miss variation table B used in the a-time-saving game state shown in Figure 129(C), special symbol variation patterns "07" to "09" with longer special symbol variation display times are set for time-saving symbol stop misses where a transition to the c-time-saving game state is expected, in order to enhance the sense of anticipation during the variation display in the first special symbol game. Furthermore, in order to prevent it from being possible to determine whether the miss type is a time-saving symbol stop miss or a complete miss when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the a-time-saving game state is a miss, special symbol variation patterns "07" to "09" with longer special symbol variation display times are also set for complete misses.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol miss variation table B, the special symbol variation patterns "07" to "09," which have a longer special symbol variation display time, are set. As described later, this increases the likelihood that the first special symbol game, which started in the a-time-saving game state, will end in the normal game state that follows the end of the a-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol miss variation tables (normal game state second special symbol miss variation table and time-saving game state second special symbol miss variation table) used for the second special symbol jackpot lottery shown in Figures 129(D) and 129(E), since time-saving symbol stop miss is not set as a type of miss when the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss (see Figure 128(E)), no special symbol variation pattern is set for time-saving symbol stop misses. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the special symbol variation display time for front/back miss reaches, reaches other than front/back misses, and complete misses is set as the special symbol variation pattern.

In the second special symbol miss variation table for normal gameplay shown in Figure 129(D), a special symbol variation pattern "06" is set for a complete miss, with a special symbol variation display time of 15 seconds. Except for the fact that three types of special symbol variation patterns "06" for complete misses are set, it is the same as the miss variation table of the first embodiment described above (see Figure 10(C)).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the second prize entry point 315 is provided in the right-side area of the game board 31, and the right first prize entry point 314R is provided in the right-side area of the game board 31. However, in normal gameplay, the frequency of support for game balls entering the second prize entry point 315 by the electric mechanism 315b is low, and the operating time of the electric mechanism 315b is short, making it difficult for game balls to enter the second prize entry point 315. Also, since it is more difficult for balls to enter the right first prize entry point 314R than the central first prize entry point 314C, in normal gameplay, left-handed shooting, where game balls are launched into the left-side area of the game board 31, is encouraged in order to advance the game by getting game balls into the central first prize entry point 314C. Thus, in this embodiment, countermeasures against right-handed shooting in normal gameplay are implemented by significantly increasing the disadvantages of shooting game balls to the right-hand area of the game board 31 during normal gameplay. However, it is also conceivable that countermeasures against right-handed shooting in normal gameplay could be implemented by setting a longer duration for part or all of the display time of the second special symbol during the second special symbol game in normal gameplay to increase the disadvantages of right-handed shooting.

On the other hand, the second special symbol miss variation table for the time-saving game state shown in Figure 129(E) differs from the normal game state second special symbol miss variation table shown in Figure 129(D), which has three special symbol miss variation patterns for complete misses, and the aforementioned miss variation table of the first embodiment (see Figure 10(C)), which has two special symbol miss variation patterns for complete misses, in that only one special symbol miss variation pattern is set for complete misses.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol miss variation table for the time-saving game state, similar to the first embodiment described above, three types of special symbol variation patterns are set for both forward/backward miss reaches and reaches other than forward/backward misses: special symbol variation pattern "01" with a special symbol variation display time of 30 seconds, special symbol variation pattern "02" with a special symbol variation display time of 60 seconds, and special symbol variation pattern "03" with a special symbol variation display time of 90 seconds. In the second special symbol miss variation table for the time-saving game state of this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a forward/backward miss reach or a reach other than forward/backward miss, the special symbol variation pattern with a shorter display time is more likely to be selected, and the special symbol variation pattern with a longer display time is less likely to be selected. Specifically, in the second special symbol miss variation table for the time-saving game state, the distribution rates for each special symbol variation pattern are set to 50% for special symbol variation pattern "01", 30% for special symbol variation pattern "02", and 20% for special symbol variation pattern "03".

Here, referring to Figure 129(A), in the jackpot variation table explained earlier, special symbol variation patterns with longer display times are more likely to be selected. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, special symbol variation patterns with longer display times are more likely to be selected; therefore, the longer the special symbol variation display time, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In contrast, referring to Figure 129(E), in the second special symbol miss variation table explained earlier, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a near miss (either forward or backward miss) or a near miss (other than forward or backward miss), special symbol variation patterns with shorter display times are more likely to be selected, and special symbol variation patterns with longer display times are less likely to be selected. Therefore, in the second special symbol game started in the time-saving game state, the longer the variation display time of the second special symbol, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot.

By the way, as mentioned above, the time-saving game state includes the time-saving game state a which is entered after the end of a jackpot game. If the first special symbol game, which is started in this time-saving game state a and in which the time-saving symbols are displayed, is displayed as stopped in the normal game state which is entered after the end of the time-saving game state a due to the execution of the maximum number of special symbol games, then the player will enter the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a, and in which a jackpot is practically guaranteed. Furthermore, if the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbols are displayed as stopped, is started in the time-saving game state a, and the display time of the second special symbol game, which is started during the execution of the first special symbol game, is long, the number of times the second special symbol game can be executed during the execution of the first special symbol game will decrease. As a result, the longer the display time of the second special symbol game during the execution of the first special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state, the lower the probability of being able to transition to the normal game state by executing the remaining number of second special symbol games up to the upper limit of the a-time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the longer the display time of the second special symbol's variation, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Thus, by setting the game so that the longer the variation display time of the second special symbol game, which begins during the execution of the first special symbol game, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, a novel gameplay experience is realized where the gameplay in the a-time-saving game state changes from a gameplay experience where the player gains the benefit of transitioning to the c-time-saving game state based on executing the remaining number of second special symbol games up to the maximum number of times in the a-time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game (a gameplay experience where the timing of transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state is important when the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, begins), to a gameplay experience where the player gains the benefit of executing a jackpot game based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot, similar to the a-time-saving game state in conventional gaming machines (a gameplay experience where the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is important).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the longer the display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game, which is started during the execution of the first special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state, the lower the probability of transitioning to the advantageous c-time-saving game state. Conversely, the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery. Therefore, in this embodiment, the decrease in interest in playing in the c-time-saving game state, which is caused by the lower probability of transitioning to the advantageous c-time-saving game state, can be suppressed by increasing the expectation of a jackpot. This suppresses the decrease in interest in playing in the c-time-saving game state and prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state's second special symbol miss variation table, only the special symbol variation pattern "10," which has a significantly shorter special symbol variation display time of 0.5 seconds compared to a complete miss, is set. On the other hand, as mentioned above, when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss, the distribution rate of a complete miss as a type of miss is high (see Figure 128 (E)). Therefore, in time-saving game states (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state), where game balls are more likely to enter the second prize pocket 315 with the support of the electric mechanism 315b, many second special symbol games can be executed in a short time. As a result, for example, in the b time-saving game state and c time-saving game state, where the upper limit of the number of time-saving game rounds is 2000, it becomes possible to shorten the time required from transitioning to these time-saving game states until the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. This allows players to progress through the game without experiencing significant stress, even if the number of spins required to reach a jackpot in the special feature lottery is large.

In this embodiment, when a time-saving symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 in the normal game state, which is transitioned from the time-saving game state a by executing a predetermined number of special symbol games (200 times) in the time-saving game state a, the game transitions to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than both the time-saving game state a and the normal game state. That is, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in the time-saving game state a is started, the timing of the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is important. Therefore, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 is started in the time-saving game state a, it is important to execute the second special symbol game until the upper limit number of times in the time-saving game state a is reached during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and to transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state before the time-saving symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362. Specifically, in the a-time-saving game state, for the first special symbol game where the time-saving symbols are displayed, a longer display time for the first special symbol increases the number of times the second special symbol game is executed during the display, and the higher the probability of transitioning to the normal game state when the first special symbol stops. Therefore, a longer display time is preferable. On the other hand, for the second special symbol where the display of the variable symbol starts in the a-time-saving game state, a shorter display time for the variable symbol reduces the time until the maximum number of special symbol games in the a-time-saving game state are executed, i.e., the time until transitioning to the normal game state. Therefore, a shorter display time for the second special symbol is preferable.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol miss variation table B used in the time-saving game state a shown in Figure 129(C), the variation display time of the first special symbol is set to be long (50 seconds, 100 seconds, or 150 seconds) when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss or the time-saving symbol fails to stop. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state second special symbol miss variation table used in time-saving game states including the time-saving game state a shown in Figure 129(E), the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to be significantly short (0.5 seconds) when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss. Therefore, in this embodiment, a long variation display time for the first special symbol is selected for the first special symbol when the variation display starts in the time-saving game state a, while a short variation display time is selected for the second special symbol when the variation display starts in the time-saving game state a. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is realistic that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which started in the a-time-saving game state, will stop displaying in the normal game state, which is transitioned from the a-time-saving game state after the execution of the specified number of special symbol games (200 times) in the a-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state is a complete miss or a time-saving symbol stop miss, the longest first special symbol variation display time is 150 seconds for special symbol variation pattern "09", whereas when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state is a complete miss, the second special symbol variation display time is 0.5 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "10"). And, if 0.5 seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation display time for all second special symbol games in the a-time-saving game state, and the second special symbol games are executed consecutively for a specified number of times, that is, the shortest time in the a-time-saving game state will be 100 seconds (= 0.5 seconds x 200 times), which is shorter than the 150 seconds for special symbol variation pattern "09" that can be set for the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, if 150 seconds is selected as the variation display time for the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state, there is a possibility that the first special symbol game will end in the normal game state at that point. In this way, multiple variation display times are set for the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state, and by including one that is longer than the shortest time in the a-time-saving game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the longest special symbol variation display time will be selected when the first special symbol game starts in the a-time-saving game state, thus improving the enjoyment of the game in the a-time-saving game state.

The details of the Time Attack sequence will be described later, but the Time Attack sequence is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery, announced by the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state, is a miss when the time-saving symbols stop. In this Time Attack sequence, the symbol display unit 341 displays the first decorative symbol 78 in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state, and displays the second decorative symbol 79 in accordance with the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game started during the execution of the first special symbol game. Furthermore, it displays a remaining time image corresponding to the remaining variation display time (remaining time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game, and a remaining spins image corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining spins) until the maximum number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state is reached (see Figures 153(A) to 153(F)).

Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state (a), is a time attack sequence is executed if the time-saving symbol stops incorrectly. The player can then focus on the remaining time image, the remaining spin count image, the display of the first decorative symbol 78's movement and stop, and the display of the second decorative symbol 79's movement and stop, and enjoy the game's progression by focusing on the time attack sequence executed in the time-saving game state (a).

Specifically, when the Time Attack sequence is executed, by checking the remaining time image, the player can understand the display time of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol 78) in that first special symbol game. Therefore, the player can enjoy inferring the likelihood of transitioning the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. For example, if, based on the remaining time image at the start of the Time Attack sequence, it is confirmed that the special symbol variation pattern "09," which has the longest display time of 150 seconds for the first special symbol game, has been set, the player can determine that there is a high probability of transitioning the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. Therefore, when the Time Attack sequence starts, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on the remaining time image.

Furthermore, after the time attack sequence is executed, for example, by focusing on the first decorative symbol 78, it can be confirmed that the first special symbol game has not ended, and by checking the remaining time image, the time remaining until the first special symbol game ends can be confirmed. On the other hand, by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79, it can be confirmed that the second special symbol game has started or ended, and by checking the remaining spins image, the number of second special symbol games required to transition the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state can be confirmed. Therefore, by confirming that the first decorative symbol 78 is not displayed as stopped, and by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79 to confirm that the second special symbol game has started or ended, the player can confirm that the second special symbol game has ended while the first special symbol game is in progress (while the first special symbol is being displayed as fluctuating), and that the remaining spins have decreased according to the remaining spins image. This allows players to enjoy the game while anticipating that the second decorative symbol 79 will also change display while the first decorative symbol 78 is changing, and that the second decorative symbol 79, once it begins to change, will stop displaying quickly.

Furthermore, after the time attack sequence begins, the remaining display time for the first special symbol in the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the number of second special symbol games required before transitioning to normal gameplay can be confirmed based on the remaining spins image. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins image, players can enjoy the game's progression while anticipating that the rate of decrease in remaining spins will be higher than the rate of decrease in remaining time. They can also enjoy the game's progression by inferring the possibility of transitioning to normal gameplay during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time (confirmed based on the remaining time image) and the remaining spins (confirmed based on the remaining spins image) decrease and approach zero, players can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on which of the remaining time or remaining spins will reach zero first.

Furthermore, if a long display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is set after the time attack sequence has started, and the player focuses on the second decorative symbol 79, the player may feel aversion to the fact that the remaining spins are not decreasing because the second decorative symbol 79 does not stop and display for a long time. Moreover, the longer the display time for the second decorative symbol 79, the lower the probability of transitioning to the normal game state, which may also cause aversion, potentially reducing the player's interest in the game during the time attack sequence. In contrast, in this embodiment, the display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game, which starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state, is set so that the longer the display time for the second special symbol, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot. This suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game during the time attack sequence caused by the second decorative symbol 79 not stopping and displaying for a long time.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
Unlike the aforementioned first embodiment of the game machine 10, which is configured as a loop probability variation machine, the game machine 10 of this embodiment does not have a probability variation game state set and is configured as a simultaneous variation machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can vary simultaneously. Furthermore, as mentioned above, part of the configuration of the game board 31 differs from that of the aforementioned first embodiment of the game machine 10. Therefore, part of the processing performed by the main control device 4 differs from that of the aforementioned first embodiment of the game machine 10. Specifically, the processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment differs in the first special symbol hold command setting processing, through gate processing, normal symbol game control processing, normal symbol winning game control processing, special symbol game control processing, jackpot game control processing, and game state transition processing. These processing will be described below with reference to Figures 130 to 147.

[First Special Feature Hold Command Setting Process]
Here, Figure 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the first special symbol hold command, which is executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 18. The first special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first special symbol hold command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or miss), the special symbol variation display time, and the number of first special symbols held N. The first special symbol hold command setting process will be explained below with reference to Figure 130.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Figure 130, the MPU 41 reads the number of first special symbols N from the first special symbol retention storage area NAA of the first special symbol retention storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special symbol retention from the RAM 412 (step S3301).

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the first special symbol hold is a jackpot, based on whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. Here, if the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3303. On the other hand, if the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S3302: No), i.e., it is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3305.

<Step S3303>
If the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the value of a jackpot win (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3303). For example, if the first special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 18, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the first special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read. Note that the reserve area in which the first special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 18 among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 can be determined by the value of the number of reserves N stored in the first special symbol reserve count storage area NAA.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reserve count N into the first special symbol reserve command, and then terminates the first special symbol reserve command setting process. In this way, the first special symbol reserve command includes the first special symbol reserve count N read in step S3301, so the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first special symbol reserve command can recognize which of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 the first special symbol win/loss information corresponds to by referring to the reserve count N included in the first special symbol reserve command.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S3302: No), i.e., it is a miss, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3305). Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the jackpot lottery result was a miss, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reserve number N into the first special symbol reserve command (step S3306), and terminates the first special symbol reserve command setting process.

Furthermore, the first special feature hold command, set in step S3304 or S3306 of the first special feature hold command setting process, is stored in RAM 412 and, after being transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process shown in Figure 21 (described later) executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, is erased. Moreover, the content of the first special feature hold command described here is merely an example; it is not limited to what is described here, as long as the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp similar content to the first special feature hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special feature hold command may be included in other commands.

Furthermore, since the process for setting the second special symbol hold command is the same as the process for setting the first special symbol hold command, a detailed explanation will be omitted. However, the process for setting the second special symbol hold command simply requires replacing "first special symbol hold command" with "second special symbol hold command" and "number of first special symbol holds N" with "number of second special symbol holds M" in the first special symbol hold command setting process.

[Through-gate processing]
In this embodiment, there is only one through gate 317, which differs from the first embodiment described above, in that there are two through gates 317L and 317R. Therefore, the through gate processing differs from that of the first embodiment. Here, Figure 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure for through gate processing. In the through gate processing of this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the through gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular ball hold storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through gate processing will be described below with reference to Figure 131.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 131, in the through-gate processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the through-gate 317 (step S3401). Whether or not a game ball has passed through the through-gate 317 is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection processing of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. If the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has passed through the through-gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), it proceeds to step S3402, and if it determines that a game ball has not passed through the through-gate 317 (step S3401: No), it terminates the through-gate processing.

<Step S3402>
If the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), it determines whether the number of variable normal balls X stored in the variable normal ball number storage area SNA set in the normal ball number storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment) (step S3402). If the number of variable normal balls X is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing, and if the number of variable normal balls X is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S3402: No), it proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the number of reserved normal figure variations X is not the maximum number of reserved numbers (step S3402: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved normal figure variations X (step S3403), obtains the counter values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described later, stores the counter values in the first empty reserved area SE1 to the fourth reserved area SE4 of the normal figure reserved storage area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S3404), and terminates the through gate processing.

[General Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular symbol game control process executed in step S1404 of the main process in Figure 21. In the regular symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the display of the regular symbols changing and stopping in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. The regular symbol game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 132.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Figure 132, in the regular symbol game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the regular symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the regular symbols are currently being displayed (regular symbol game is being executed), is on (step S1501). The regular symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the display of the regular symbols variation (regular symbol game) starts in the regular symbol variation start process shown in Figure 134, which will be described later, and is set to off in step S1510 of the regular symbol game control process when the regular symbols stop (regular symbol game ends).

If the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal symbol game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal symbol game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if a normal symbol game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is open (a normal symbol winning game is being played), is on (step S1502). The "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in the normal symbol winning game control process shown in Figure 135, described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric mechanism 315b is closed.

If the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is ON (Step S1502: Yes), i.e., if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is OFF (Step S1502: No), i.e., if a regular winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, if a regular winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "jackpot game in progress" flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29, the "jackpot game in progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game flag is on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the regular game control process if a jackpot game is currently in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the regular game is not started while a jackpot game is in progress.

Of course, the regular game may be started while the jackpot game is in progress. In this case, according to the support mode type before the jackpot game starts (whether it is a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode), that is, according to the game state before transitioning to the jackpot game state, a win/loss determination for the regular win lottery is performed based on the win/loss information (values of the regular win random number counter C4, the regular win type random number counter C5, and the regular win variation type counter CS2) that has been moved from the regular win first reserve area SE1 of the regular win reserve storage area 412c to the regular win execution area SAE. In other words, if the game state before a jackpot is executed is a high-frequency support mode (either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state), the normal symbol jackpot draw (normal symbol win or loss), the normal symbol jackpot type (long-open normal symbol win or short-open normal symbol win), and the normal symbol variation display time are set based on the normal symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 12(B)), normal symbol jackpot type table (see Figure 12(D)), and normal symbol variation table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before a jackpot is executed is a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the normal symbol jackpot draw (normal symbol win or loss), the normal symbol jackpot type (long-open normal symbol win or short-open normal symbol win), and the normal symbol variation display time are set based on the normal symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 12(A)), normal symbol jackpot type table (see Figure 12(C)), and normal symbol variation table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the electric mechanism opening flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if a regular symbol win game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of regular symbol variation reserves X stored in the regular symbol variation reserves storage area SNA set in the regular symbol reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the number of regular symbol variation reserves X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the regular symbol game control process, and if the number of regular symbol variation reserves X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process moves to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved regular diagrams X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 performs regular diagram data setting processing for the regular diagram success/failure information stored in the regular diagram reservation storage area 412c (step S1505), and proceeds to step S1506. Details of the regular diagram data setting processing will be described later with reference to Figure 133.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a regular symbol variation start process to cause the regular symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the variation of the regular symbols based on the information stored in the regular symbol hold storage area 412c, and then terminates the regular symbol game control process. Details of the regular symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 134.

<Step S1507>
If the "Normal Game Display in Progress" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if a normal game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on (step S1507). In the big win game control process shown in Figure 29, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a big win game ends.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is ON (Step S1507: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. Conversely, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is OFF (Step S1507: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1507: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variation display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol that is being displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end of normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), that is, if it is not time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol game control process.

<Steps S1509-S1511>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is on (Step S1501: Yes) and the "Big Win Game" flag is on (Step S1507: Yes), that is, if a big win game is started while a normal symbol game is in progress, or if the normal symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbols has elapsed (Step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the display of the fluctuating normal symbols (end of the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the display of the normal symbols on the symbols corresponding to the result of the normal symbol win lottery for the normal symbol game (Step S1509), and sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols are fluctuating (the normal symbol game is in progress), to off (Step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols have stopped displaying, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, to on (Step S1511), and ends the normal symbol game control process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal diagram winning game control process shown in Figure 135 to determine whether or not it is time to start the normal diagram winning game (to release the electric mechanism 315b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the changing normal symbols stops (ends the normal symbol game) not only when the normal symbol display time has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game begins during the execution of a normal symbol game. In other words, if a jackpot game begins, the normal symbol stops (ends the normal symbol game).

[General drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general data setting process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of Figure 132. In the general data setting process, the contents of the general data hold storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 in Figure 11 are updated. The general data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 133.

<Steps S1601-S1603>
As shown in Figure 133, in the general diagram data setting process, first the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved general diagrams X stored in the general diagram variation reserve number storage area SNA (step S1601), and moves the general diagram success/failure information from the first general diagram reserve area SE1 to the general diagram execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general diagram success/failure information stored in the second general diagram reserve area SE2 to the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the general diagram success/failure information from the second general diagram reserve area SE2 is moved to the first general diagram reserve area SE1, the general diagram success/failure information from the third general diagram reserve area SE3 is moved to the second general diagram reserve area SE2, and the general diagram success/failure information from the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 is moved to the third general diagram reserve area SE3.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
Here, Figure 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Figure 132. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result in the normal symbol win lottery. The normal symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 134.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Figure 134, in the normal variation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state), is turned on (step S1701). Here, the time-saving game state flag includes the a time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in b time-saving game state, and the c time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in c time-saving game state. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether any of the a time-saving game state flag, the b time-saving game state flag, and the c time-saving game state flag are set to turn on. The a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the a-time-saving game state in step S4319 of the game state transition process in Figure 144, the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the b-time-saving game state in step S4303 of the game state transition process in Figure 144, and the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the c-time-saving game state in step S4308 of the game state transition process in Figure 144.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), i.e., the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1702. If the time-saving game state flag is off (step S1701: No), i.e., the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 12(B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 12(D)) to determine whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to the values of a normal win.

On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S1701: No), that is, if the game is in the normal game state which is the low-frequency support mode, a normal win/loss determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 12(C)).

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
If the MPU 41 has determined whether a regular win is possible (step S1702 or S1703), it determines whether the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win where the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time (step S1704). If the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open regular win flag to ON to indicate that the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win (step S1705), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the win/fail determination is not a long-open regular win (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the win/failure determination is not a long-opening regular-circle win (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win in which the second prize slot 315 is briefly opened (step S1706). If the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-circle win flag to ON to indicate that the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win (step S1707), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the win/failure determination is not a short-opening regular-circle win (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the win/failure determination is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1705), if the short-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1707), or if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation pattern setting process to set the normal symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 in normal symbol gameplay, by referring to the normal symbol variation display table (not shown). As mentioned above, the normal symbol variation display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal symbol variation table that is referenced when the high-frequency support mode is active, and a low-frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table that is referenced when the low-frequency support mode is active. Therefore, in this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the normal symbol variation pattern is set based on the normal symbol variation display table corresponding to the support mode type. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table is set to have a shorter average display time for regular symbol variations than the low-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode, the time during which regular symbol gameplay is performed is shorter compared to low-frequency support mode.

Then, in addition to the regular diagram variation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 sets a regular diagram variation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/fail judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the regular diagram winning lottery) and the type of support mode (whether it is a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode) (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The regular symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the regular symbol variation pattern command, causes the symbol display unit 341 and other components to execute effects corresponding to the regular symbol game, such as effects indicating that the regular symbol game is being played or effects indicating the result of the regular symbol winning lottery.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Variation Pattern Command" only needs to be a command that notifies the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 of the normal diagram variation pattern; the result of the normal diagram winning lottery and the type of support mode do not necessarily need to be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 as a normal diagram variation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal diagram winning lottery can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Normal Diagram Winning Lottery Result Command" when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Support Mode Type Command" that can identify the type of support mode after transitioning to high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts displaying the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, which indicates that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variation state, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being played (step S1711), and ends the normal symbol variation start process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 22 to determine whether the normal symbol game is currently running (normal symbol fluctuation display is active).

[General Winning Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal win game control process executed in step S1405 of the main process in Figure 21. In the normal win game control process, when the result of the normal win lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allow state, which permits the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315, and a restrict state, which restricts it, by controlling the opening and closing of the electric mechanism 315b. The normal win game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 135.

<Step S1801>
As shown in Figure 135, in the normal symbol win game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game. The normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol stops being displayed in the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 132.

If the normal symbol variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1812.

<Step S1802>
If the "Normal Symbol Change Stop" display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when a normal symbol win game can be started, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on (step S1802). In the big win game control process shown in Figure 29, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a big win game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forcibly terminated by the start of a jackpot game, the normal winning game will not start even if the result of the normal winning lottery for that normal winning game is a normal winning game. That is, in this embodiment, a normal winning game will not start while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, a new normal winning game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the flag indicating a jackpot game is off (step S1802: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S1803). The flag indicating a long-opening regular win is a flag that indicates the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win, and is set to on in step S1705 of the regular win variation start process in Figure 134 when the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular win lottery for a completed regular win game is a long-opening regular win. If the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1804, and if the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long-opening regular-ball win flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-ball win lottery for the completed regular-ball game is a long-opening regular-ball win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in the long-opening regular-ball win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize pocket 315), as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referenced in step S1815 of the regular-ball win game control process to determine the return timing of the electric mechanism 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular-ball win flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is not a long-opening regular symbol win, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the short-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S1806). The short-opening regular symbol win flag is a flag that indicates the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win, and is set to on in step S1707 of the regular symbol variation start process in Figure 134 when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a short-opening regular symbol win. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1807. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short-opening regular-number win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-number win lottery for the completed regular-number game is a short-opening regular-number win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in the short-opening regular-number win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize slot 315), as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-number win flag to OFF (step S1808) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809-S1811>
If the result of the regular prize draw is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long-open regular prize flag or short-open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric mechanism 315b (step S1809). This opens the second prize slot 315, allowing game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism open command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1810), sets an electric mechanism open flag to ON to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric mechanism release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the sound lamp control device 5 can then initiate an effect indicating, for example, that the electric mechanism 315b is released to the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the electric mechanism release command.

<Step S1812>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a win, the process of opening the electric mechanism 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or if both the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are set to off (the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss) (steps S1803 and S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended), to off (step S1812), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S1813>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which is set to turn on when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal symbol winning game is in progress. If the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the regular winning game control process (step S1814), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process.

<Steps S1816-S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to reset the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 resets the electric mechanism 315b (step S1816). This closes the second prize opening 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism closing command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric mechanism open flag to off, indicating that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1818), and terminates the normal winning game control process.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to terminate the animation indicating that the electric mechanism is open, for example, in the symbol display unit 341, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

[Special Game Control Processing]
In the special symbol game control process of this embodiment, the game machine 10 is configured as a simultaneous variation machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can vary simultaneously. Therefore, the control process for the first special symbol game and the control process for the second special symbol game are executed separately, which differs from the special symbol game control process of the first embodiment described above. Here, Figure 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process of this embodiment.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 136, in step S3501, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the first special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable state (the first special symbol game is in progress) is on. The flag indicating that the first special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable state is set to on in step S3706 when the variable display of the first special symbol starts in the first special symbol game start process shown in Figure 138, described later, and is set to off in step S3823 when the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the first special symbol game end process shown in Figure 139, described later.

If the flag indicating "First Special Symbol Variation Display" is on (step S3501: Yes), i.e., the first special symbol is in a variation display state (the first special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3507. On the other hand, if the flag indicating "First Special Symbol Variation Display" is off (step S3501: No), i.e., the first special symbol is not in a variation display state (the first special symbol game is not being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
If the flag indicating that the first special symbol is changing is off (step S3501: No), that is, if the first special symbol is not changing (the first special symbol game is not being played), the MPU 41 determines whether the number of first special symbol reserves N stored in the first special symbol reserves storage area NAA (see Figure 127) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b is 0 (step S3502).

If the number of reserved special symbols N in the first special symbol sequence is 0 (step S3502: Yes), that is, if there is no reserved right to execute the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3508. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols N in the first special symbol sequence is not 0 (step S3502: No), that is, if there is a reserved right to execute the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the number of reserved special symbols N is not 0 (step S3502: No), that is, if there is a reserved right to execute the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes the first special symbol data setting process with respect to the data of the first special symbol win/loss information (first special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (see Figure 127) (step S3503), and proceeds to step S3504. Details of the first special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 137.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is set to ON. The "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON when a big win game is started in step S2206 of the big win game control process in Figure 29, and is set to OFF when a big win game is ended in step S2252 of the big win game control process in Figure 29.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON (step S3504: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3505. Conversely, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to OFF (step S3504: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506.

<Step S3505>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is set to ON (step S3504: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 executes the first special feature execution area data rewriting process, and then proceeds to step S3506 to execute the first special feature start process.

Here, in the first special feature execution area data rewriting process, the first special feature variation display time among the first special feature data stored in the first special feature execution area AEA (see Figure 127) of the special feature hold storage area 412b is rewritten to 7 seconds (see Figure 129), which is the shortest variation display time set for the first special feature. Of course, in the first special feature execution area data rewriting process, it is also conceivable to rewrite the first special feature variation display time to a time other than 7 seconds, for example, an extremely short time of 1 second or less.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol execution area data rewriting process is executed, the first special symbol start process in step S3506 is executed, so that the first special symbol game is executed even if a jackpot game is in progress. This is because, as mentioned above, if the game transitions to the a-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, the hold for the first special symbol game is carried over to the a-time-saving game state, preventing the first special symbol game from being executed continuously in the a-time-saving game state. In addition, by shortening the display time of the first special symbol variation through the first special symbol execution area data rewriting process, the carry over of the hold for the first special symbol game to the a-time-saving game state is more reliably prevented. This prevents strategies that intentionally hold back the right to execute the first special symbol game before or during the jackpot game, thereby making it easier for the first special symbol game to end in the normal game state that transitions to the end of the a-time-saving game state. Furthermore, as a countermeasure against exploitative play, as mentioned above, if the entry of a game ball into the central first prize slot 314C triggers the start of the first special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state, it is also conceivable to set the display time of the first special symbol game to a short duration.

<Step S3506>
If the first special symbol execution area data rewriting process is performed while a jackpot game is in progress (step S3506), or if a jackpot game is not in progress (step S3504: No), the MPU 41 performs the first special symbol game start process to begin the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (start the first special symbol game) (step S3506), and then proceeds to step S3508. Details of the first special symbol game start process will be described later with reference to Figure 138.

<Step S3507>
If the flag indicating that the first special symbol is changing is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol is changing (the first special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 executes the first special symbol game termination process to stop the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (end the first special symbol game) (step S3507), and then proceeds to step S3508. Details of the first special symbol game termination process will be described later with reference to Figure 139.

<Step S3508>
When the first special symbol game start process in step S3506 or the first special symbol game end process in step S3507 is executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the second special symbol is in a variation display state (the second special symbol game is being executed), is on (step S3508). The second special symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S4005 when the variation display of the second special symbol starts in the second special symbol game start process shown in Figure 141 described later, and is set to off in step S4116 when the second special symbol is displayed as stopped in the first special symbol game end process shown in Figure 142 described later.

If the flag indicating "Second Special Symbol Variation Display" is on (step S3508: Yes), i.e., the second special symbol is in a variation display state (the second special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, if the flag indicating "Second Special Symbol Variation Display" is off (step S3508: No), i.e., the second special symbol is not in a variation display state (the second special symbol game is not being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3509.

<Step S3509>
If the flag indicating that the second special symbol is changing is off (step S3508: No), that is, if the second special symbol is not changing (the second special symbol game is not in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether the number of second special symbol reserves M stored in the second special symbol reserve count storage area NAB (see Figure 127) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b is 0 (step S3509).

If the number of reserved special symbols M is 0 (step S3509: Yes), that is, if there is no reserved right to execute the special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S3509: No), that is, if there is a reserved right to execute the special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3510.

<Step S3510>
If the number of reserved second special symbols M is not 0 (step S3509: No), that is, if there is a reserved right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is set to ON (step S3510). The "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON when the big win game is started in step S2206 of the big win game control process in Figure 29, and is set to OFF when the big win game is ended in step S2252 of the big win game control process in Figure 29.

The MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process if the flag indicating a jackpot game is set to ON (step S3510: Yes). That is, if a jackpot game is in progress, the second special symbol game will not start. Therefore, the right to execute the second special symbol game is carried over to the a-time-saving game state, which is entered after the jackpot game ends. This is because carrying over the right to execute the second special symbol game to the a-time-saving game state does not constitute the same kind of strategy as when the right to execute the first special symbol game is carried over to the a-time-saving game state. Rather, carrying over the right to execute the second special symbol game to the a-time-saving game state means that when the a-time-saving game state is entered, the second special symbol game will start before the first game ball enters the second prize slot 315. This provides the player with the benefit of ending the a-time-saving game state relatively early.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is set to off (step S3510: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3511.

<Step S3511>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is set to off (step S3510: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 executes a second special symbol data setting process (step S3511) for the second special symbol win/loss information data (second special symbol data) stored in the special symbol hold storage area 412b (see Figure 127), and then proceeds to step S3512. Details of the second special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 140.

<Step S3512>
In step S3512, the MPU 41 executes a second special symbol game start process to begin the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (start of the second special symbol game) (step S3512), and then terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the second special symbol game start process will be described later with reference to Figure 141.

<Step S3513>
If the flag indicating that the second special symbol is changing is on (step S3508: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol is changing (the second special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 executes the second special symbol game termination process to stop the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (end the first special symbol game) (step S3513), and terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the second special symbol game termination process will be described later with reference to Figure 142.

[First Special Drawing Data Setting Process]
Here, Figure 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special feature data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3503 of the special feature game control process in Figure 136. In the first special feature data setting process, the contents of the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 127) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. The first special feature data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 137.

<Steps S3601 to S3604>
As shown in Figure 137, in step S3601, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special figures N stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the first special figure reserved storage area REA, and then moves the first special figure success/failure information from the first storage area REA1 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA to the first special figure execution area AEA (step S3602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the first special figure success/failure information from the second storage area REA2 to the fourth storage area REA4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA one by one (step S3603). Specifically, in step S3603, the first special feature hit/miss information from the second holding area REA2 of the first special feature holding storage area REA is moved to the first holding area REA1, the first special feature hit/miss information from the third holding area REA3 is moved to the second holding area REA2, and the first special feature hit/miss information from the fourth holding area REA4 is moved to the third holding area REA3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a first special feature shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the first special feature hit/miss information from the first holding areas REA1 to the fourth holding areas REA4 of the first special feature holding storage area REA has been shifted, and terminates the first special feature data setting process. This first special feature shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can change the number of reserved displays corresponding to the first reserved symbol displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the first reserved symbol shift command.

[First Special Feature Game Start Processing]
Here, Figure 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special symbol game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3506 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 136. In the first special symbol game start process, a process is executed to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 (start the first special symbol game). The first special symbol game start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 138.

<Steps S3701 and S3702>
As shown in Figure 138, in step S3701, the MPU 41 reads the jackpot win/failure table (see Figure 128(A)) and performs a win/failure determination based on the jackpot win/failure table. Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the win/failure determination is a time-saving symbol stop failure (step S3702).

If the result of the win/loss determination is that the time-saving symbol failed to stop (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3703. If the result of the win/loss determination is not that the time-saving symbol failed to stop (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704.

<Step S3703>
If the result of the win/failure determination is that the time-saving symbol did not stop (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop failure flag to ON, indicating that the result of the win/failure determination is that the time-saving symbol did not stop (step S3703), and proceeds to step S3704. The time-saving symbol stop failure flag is referenced in step S3806 of Figure 139, described later, to determine whether or not to proceed to the time-saving game state a.

<Step S3704>
If the flag indicating a time-saving symbol stop failure is set to ON (step S3703), or if the result of the win/failure determination is not a time-saving symbol stop failure (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 sets the display time of the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 in the first special symbol game as the first special symbol variation pattern (step S3704), and proceeds to step S3705.

Furthermore, the display time for the first special symbol variation (first special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table (see Figure 129(A)) if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3701 is a jackpot. If the result of the win/loss determination in step S3701 is a loss, the variation is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and either the first special symbol loss variation table A (see Figure 129(B)) or the first special symbol loss variation table B (see Figure 129(C)), which is selected according to the game state at the start of the first special symbol game.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is the result of the win/fail determination in step S3701, and the first special symbol variation pattern set in step S3704, and then proceeds to step S3706. The first special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the first special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 41 starts the first special symbol game by initiating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36, and then proceeds to step S3707.

<Step S3707>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 sets the "First Special Symbol Variation Display" flag to ON, which indicates that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the first special symbol game is in progress), and proceeds to step S3708. The "First Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is referenced in step S3501 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 136 to determine whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the first special symbol game is in progress) in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 41 sets the first special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the first special symbol has stopped varying (the first special symbol game has ended), to off, and terminates the first special symbol variation start process.

[First Special Game Ending Process]
Here, Figure 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special symbol game termination process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3507 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 136. In the first special symbol game termination process, a process is executed to stop the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (terminating the first special symbol game). The first special symbol game termination process will be described below with reference to Figure 138.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 139, in step S3801, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special feature variation display time set as the first special feature variation pattern in the first special feature variation pattern setting process in step S3704 of the first special feature game start process in Figure 138 has elapsed, that is, whether it is time to end the first special feature game.

If the first special symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), that is, if it is time to terminate the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802. On the other hand, if the first special symbol variation display time has not elapsed (step S3801: No), that is, if it is not time to terminate the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the first special symbol game termination process.

<Step S3802>
When the first special symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is a jackpot is determined, for example, based on the win/loss determination information among the first special symbol data stored in the first special symbol execution area AEA (see Figure 127) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3803. If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special symbol jackpot flag to ON, which indicates that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game to be started is a jackpot (step S3803). The first special symbol jackpot flag is referenced in step S4201 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 143 below to determine whether or not to start the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the ceiling count counter, which indicates the number of times the special symbol game has been played in the normal game state (step S3804), and proceeds to step S3820. The ceiling count counter is referenced in step S3911 of the first special symbol game termination process or in step S4109 of the second special symbol game termination process shown in Figure 143 below, to determine whether or not to proceed to the b-time-saving game state based on whether the special symbol game has been played a predetermined number of times (450 times in this embodiment).

<Step S3805>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3805). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is a normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), that is, if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3806. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3805: No), that is, if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3813.

<Step S3806>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), that is, if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol stops) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving symbol stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, is set to ON (step S3806). In other words, if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol stops) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss. In other words, in this embodiment, the decision to transition to the c time-saving game state is made based on the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol stops moving), not at the start of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol starts moving).

If the time-saving symbol stop failure flag is set to ON (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3807. If the time-saving symbol stop failure flag is set to OFF (step S3806: No), the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Steps S3807-S3809>
If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c-time-saving game state transition flag to ON to transition the game state from the normal game state to the c-time-saving game state (step S3807), and sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to OFF (steps S3807 and S3808). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to OFF (step S3809), and terminates the first special symbol game termination process.

<Steps S3810-S3812>
If the flag for the time-saving symbol stop failure is set to off (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling count counter (step S3810). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling count counter after the addition is 450 (step S3811), that is, whether the number of times the special symbol game has been played in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times).

If the value of the ceiling count counter after addition is 450 (step S3811: Yes), that is, if the number of special symbol game executions in the normal game state reaches the specified number (450 times), the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to ON (step S3812), which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state, and proceeds to step S3820. The b-time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4302 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 144 to determine whether or not to transition the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after addition is not 450 (step S3811: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3805: No), that is, if the game state at the end of the first special game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving symbol stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, is set to on (step S3813).

If the time-saving symbol stop failure flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop failure flag to OFF (step S3814) and proceeds to step S3815. On the other hand, if the time-saving symbol stop failure flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 skips step S3814 and proceeds to step S3815.

<Step S3815>
If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to off (step S3814), or if the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to off (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3815). Here, the time-saving game state flag includes a time-saving game state flag a, a time-saving game state flag b, a time-saving game state flag b, and a time-saving game state flag c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether any of the time-saving game state flag a, b, or c is set to on. The a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the a-time-saving game state in step S4319 of the game state transition process in Figure 144, the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the b-time-saving game state in step S4303 of the game state transition process in Figure 144, and the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the c-time-saving game state in step S4308 of the game state transition process in Figure 144.

If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3815: Yes), i.e., the game is in a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3816. If the time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3815: No), i.e., the game is not in a time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3816 and S3817>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3815: Yes), that is, if the game is in a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter, which indicates the remaining number of games in the time-saving game state (step S3816). Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3817). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games.

If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), that is, if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of a specified number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3818. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3817: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3818 and S3819>
If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), that is, if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is in the time-saving game state, to off (step S3818). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, to on (step S3819), and proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3820-S3823>
In step S3820, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game (step S3820). The MPU 41 then sets the first special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the first special symbol has been displayed as stopped (step S3821), sets the first special symbol variation stop command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the first special symbol has been displayed as stopped (step S3822), and further sets the first special symbol variation display in ON flag to OFF, indicating that the first special symbol is currently displaying variation (the first special symbol game is in progress) (step S3823), and ends the first special symbol game control process.

[Second Special Drawing Data Setting Process]
Here, Figure 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special feature data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3511 of the special feature game control process in Figure 136. In the second special feature data setting process, the contents of the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 127) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. The first special feature data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 140.

<Steps S3901-S3904>
As shown in Figure 140, in step S3901, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved second special figures M stored in the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB of the second special figure reserved storage area REB, and then moves the second special figure success/failure information from the first storage area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB to the second special figure execution area AEB (step S3902). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the second special figure success/failure information from the second storage area REB2 to the fourth storage area REB4 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB one by one (step S3903). Specifically, in step S3903, the second special figure success/failure information from the second special figure hold storage area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the second special figure success/failure information from the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the second special figure success/failure information from the fourth hold area REB4 is moved to the third hold area REB3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a second special figure shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the second special figure success/failure information from the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second special figure hold storage area REB has been shifted, and terminates the second special figure data setting process. This second special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can change the number of reserved displays corresponding to the second special feature reserved displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the second special feature shift command.

[Second Special Feature Game Start Processing]
Here, Figure 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special symbol game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3512 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 136. In the second special symbol game start process, a process is executed to start the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (start the second special symbol game). The second special symbol game start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 141.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
As shown in Figure 141, in step S4001, the MPU 41 reads the jackpot win/failure table (see Figure 128(A)) and performs a win/failure determination based on the jackpot win/failure table. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the display time of the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 for the second special symbol game as the second special symbol variation pattern (step S4002), and proceeds to step S4003.

Furthermore, the display time for the second special symbol variation (second special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table (see Figure 129(A)) if the result of the win/loss determination in step S4001 is a jackpot. If the result of the win/loss determination in step S4001 is a loss, the variation is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal game state second special symbol loss variation table (see Figure 129(D)) or the time-saving game state second special symbol loss variation table (see Figure 129(E)) selected according to the game state at the start of the second special symbol game.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game, which is the result of the hit/fail determination in step S4001, and the second special symbol variation pattern set in step S4002, and then proceeds to step S4004. The second special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the second special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 starts the second special symbol game by initiating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, and then proceeds to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 41 sets the "Second Special Symbol Variation Display" flag to ON, which indicates that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the second special symbol game is in progress), and proceeds to step S4006. The "Second Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is referenced in step S3508 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 136 to determine whether the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the second special symbol game is in progress) in the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 41 sets the second special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the second special symbol variation has stopped (the second special symbol game has ended), to off, and terminates the second special symbol variation start process.

[Second Special Feature Game Termination Process]
Here, Figure 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special symbol game termination process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3513 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 136. In the second special symbol game termination process, a process is executed to stop the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (terminating the second special symbol game). The second special symbol game termination process will be explained below with reference to Figure 142.

<Step S4101>
As shown in Figure 142, in step S4101, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol variation display time set as the second special symbol variation pattern in the second special symbol variation pattern setting process in step S4102 of the second special symbol game start process in Figure 141 has elapsed, that is, whether it is time to end the second special symbol game.

If the display time for the second special symbol variation has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), i.e., it is time to terminate the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if the display time for the second special symbol variation has not elapsed (step S4101: No), i.e., it is not time to terminate the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the second special symbol game termination process.

<Step S4102>
When the time for displaying the second special symbol variation has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is a jackpot is determined, for example, based on the win/fail judgment information among the second special symbol data stored in the second special symbol execution area AEB (see Figure 127) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4103. If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4105.

<Steps S4103 and S4104>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second special symbol jackpot flag to ON, which indicates that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game to be started is a jackpot (step S4103). The second special symbol jackpot flag is referenced in step S4204 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 143 below to determine whether or not to start the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the ceiling count counter, which indicates the number of times the special symbol game has been played in the normal game state (step S4104), and proceeds to step S4117. The ceiling count counter is referenced in step S3911 of the first special symbol game termination process in Figure 139, or in step S4109 of the second special symbol game termination process, to determine whether or not to proceed to the b-time-saving game state based on whether the special symbol game has been played a predetermined number of times (450 times in this embodiment).

<Steps S4105 and S4106>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving symbol stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery was a time-saving symbol stop miss, is set to ON (step S4105).

If the time-saving symbol stop failure flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop failure flag to OFF (step S4106) and proceeds to step S4107. On the other hand, if the time-saving symbol stop failure flag is set to OFF (step S4105: No), the MPU 41 skips step S4106 and proceeds to step S4107.

<Step S4107>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S4107). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is a normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), that is, if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4108. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), that is, if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4112.

<Steps S4108-S4111>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), that is, if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game (when the second special symbol stops) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling count counter (step S4108). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling count counter after the addition is 450 (step S4109), that is, whether the number of times the special symbol game has been played in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times).

If the value of the ceiling count counter after addition is 450 (step S4109: Yes), that is, if the number of special symbol game executions in the normal game state reaches the specified number (450 times), the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to ON (step S4110), which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state, and then clears the ceiling count counter (step S4111), and proceeds to step S4117. The b-time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4302 of the game state transition process in Figure 144 to determine whether or not to transition the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after addition is not 450 (step S4107: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4117.

<Step S4112>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4107: No), that is, if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4112). Here, the time-saving game state flag includes a time-saving game state flag a, a time-saving game state flag b, a time-saving game state flag b, and a time-saving game state flag c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not any of the time-saving game state flag a, b, or c is set to on. The a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the a-time-saving game state in step S4319 of the game state transition process in Figure 144, the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the b-time-saving game state in step S4303 of the game state transition process in Figure 144, and the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state transitions to the c-time-saving game state in step S4308 of the game state transition process in Figure 144.

If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), i.e., the game is in a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4113. If the time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4112: No), i.e., the game is not in a time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4117.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), that is, if the game is in a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter, which indicates the remaining number of games in the time-saving game state (step S4113). Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4114). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games.

If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), that is, if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of a specified number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4115. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4114: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4117.

<Steps S4115 and S4116>
If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), that is, if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is in the time-saving game state, to off (step S4115). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, to on (step S4116), and proceeds to step S4116.

<Steps S4117-S4120>
In step S4117, the MPU 41 displays the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game (step S4117). The MPU 41 then sets the second special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the second special symbol has been displayed in a stopped state (step S4118), sets a second special symbol variation stop command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the second special symbol has been displayed in a stopped state (step S4119), and further sets the second special symbol variation display in OFF, indicating that the second special symbol is currently displaying in a variation state (the second special symbol game is in progress) (step S4120), and ends the second special symbol game control process.

[Big Win Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 of the main process in Figure 21. In the jackpot game control process, processes are executed to control the progress of the jackpot game, such as controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 319 provided in the variable prize entry opening 316. The jackpot game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 143.

<Step S4201>
As shown in Figure 143, in step S4201, the MPU 41 first determines whether the first special feature jackpot flag is set to ON. The first special feature jackpot flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the first special feature jackpot lottery for the completed first special feature game is a jackpot. In step S3803 of the first special feature game termination process in Figure 139, it is set to ON if the result of the first special feature jackpot lottery for the completed first special feature game is a jackpot.

If the first special symbol jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4202. If the first special symbol jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), the process proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
If the first special feature jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special feature jackpot flag to OFF (step S4102) and proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4203>
If the first special symbol jackpot flag is set to off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol jackpot flag is set to on (step S4203). The second special symbol jackpot flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery for the completed second special symbol game is a jackpot, and in step S4103 of the second special symbol game termination process in Figure 142, it is set to on if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery for the completed second special symbol game is a jackpot.

If the second special symbol jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4204. If the second special symbol jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4203: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4204>
If the second special feature jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second special feature jackpot flag to OFF (step S4104) and proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on (step S4205). If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4206. If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is off (step S4205: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2204 in Figure 29 and executes the process to start the big win game.

<Steps S4206 and S4207>
If the "In-Progress Jackpot Game" flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the "Jackpot Game Reserved" flag is set to on (step S4206) to enable a jackpot game based on the result of a jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol game that ended during the execution of the current jackpot game, after the end of the currently running jackpot game. The value of the jackpot game reserved counter, which indicates the number of reserved jackpot games, is increased by 1 (step S4207). The jackpot game reserved flag is referenced in step S4209 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 143 below to determine whether there are any unexecuted jackpot games, and the jackpot game reserved counter is decremented in step S4210 of the jackpot game control process when a reserved jackpot game is started. The MPU 41 then proceeds to step S2211 in Figure 29 and executes the process to continue the jackpot game.

Furthermore, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which begins during the execution of a jackpot game, is a jackpot, it is possible to rewrite the result of that first special symbol jackpot lottery to a loss.

<Step S4208>
If the second special feature jackpot flag is set to off (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S4208). If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211 in Figure 29 and executes the process to continue the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game reserve flag is set to on, which allows for the execution of a jackpot game based on the result of a jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol game that ended during the execution of a jackpot game, after the end of the currently running jackpot game (step S4209).

If the jackpot game reserve flag is set to ON (step S4209: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210. If the jackpot game reserve flag is set to OFF (step S4209: No), the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S4210-S4212>
If the jackpot game reserve flag is set to ON (step S4209: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot reserve counter, which indicates the number of jackpot games reserved (step S4210), and determines whether the value of the jackpot reserve counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4211).

If the value of the jackpot reserve counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot reserve flag to off (step S4212), proceeds to step S2204 in Figure 29, and executes the process to start the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot reserve counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2204 in Figure 29 and executes the process to start the jackpot game.

[Game state transition process]
Here, Figures 144 to 147 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Figure 21. The game state transition process controls the transition between various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and jackpot game state). The game state transition process will be explained below with reference to Figures 144 to 147.

<Step S4301>
As shown in Figure 144, in step S4301, it is first determined whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON. If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4302, and if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4301: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4317.

<Step S4302>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions to the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4302). If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4303, and if the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4307.

<Steps S4303-S4306>
If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to ON to indicate that the player is in the b-time-saving game state (step S4303), and sets a b-time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the player has transitioned to the b-time-saving game state (step S4304). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state transition flag to OFF (step S4305), sets the normal game state flag to OFF to indicate that the player is in the normal game state (step S4306), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4307>
If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to off (step S4302: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the c-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions to the c-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4307). If the c-time-saving game state transition flag is set to on (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4308, and if the c-time-saving game state transition flag is set to off (step S4307: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4312.

<Steps S4308-S4311>
If the c-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c-time-saving game state flag to ON to indicate that the game is in the c-time-saving game state (step S4308), and sets a c-time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has transitioned to the c-time-saving game state (step S4309). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the c-time-saving game state transition flag to OFF (step S4310), sets the normal game state flag to OFF to indicate that the game is in the normal game state (step S4311), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4312>
If the time-saving game state transition flag is set to off (step S4307: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game will start, is set to on (step S4312). If the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4313, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S4312: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S4313-S4316>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in a jackpot game state (step S4313), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has transitioned to a jackpot game state (step S4314). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4315), sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S4316), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4317>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4301: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a jackpot state, is set to on (step S4317). If the jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4318, and if the jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S4317: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4322 in Figure 145.

<Step S4318>
If the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game end flag, which indicates the end of the jackpot game, is set to ON (step S4318). If the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4319, and if the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S4318: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S4319-S4321>
If the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the a-time-saving game state (step S4319), and sets the a-time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has transitioned to the a-time-saving game state (step S4320). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to OFF (step S4321), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4322>
If the jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S4317: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates the a-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4322), as shown in Figure 145. If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4322: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4323, and if the a-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4322: No), the process proceeds to step S4333 in Figure 146.

<Step S4323>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4322: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which transitions to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4323). If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4324, and if the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4323: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4328.

<Steps S4324-S4327>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that the game is in the normal game state (step S4324), and sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4325). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4326), sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4327), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4328>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S4323: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game will start, is set to on (step S4328). If the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4329, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S4328: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S4329-S4332>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in a jackpot game state (step S4329), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has transitioned to a jackpot game state (step S4330). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4331), sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4332), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4333>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4322: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4333), as shown in Figure 146. If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4334, and if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4333: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4344 in Figure 147.

<Step S4334>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which transitions to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4334). If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4335, and if the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4334: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4339.

<Steps S4335-S4338>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that the game is in the normal game state (step S4335), and sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4336). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4337), sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4338), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4339>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S4334: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game will start, is set to on (step S4339). If the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4340, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S4339: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S4340-S4343>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in a jackpot game state (step S4340), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has transitioned to a jackpot game state (step S4341). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4342), sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4343), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4344>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4333: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the c-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4344), as shown in Figure 147. If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4344: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4345, and if the c-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4344: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S4345>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4344: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which transitions to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4345). If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4346, and if the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4345: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4350.

<Steps S4346-S4349>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that the game is in the normal game state (step S4346), and sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4347). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4348), sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4349), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4350>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S4345: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game will start, is set to on (step S4350). If the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4351, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S4350: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S4351-S4354>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in a jackpot game state (step S4351), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has transitioned to a jackpot game state (step S4352). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4353), sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4354), and terminates the game state transition process.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the processing of the sound lamp control device 5 differs from that of the first embodiment described above because the gaming machine 10 is a simultaneous variation machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can change simultaneously.

[Command determination process]
Here, Figures 148 and 149 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the command determination process procedure executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42. The game state transition process will now be explained with reference to Figures 148 and 149.

<Step S4401>
In the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines in step S4401 whether or not a command has been received. If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4401: Yes), it proceeds to step S4402, and if it has not received a command (step S4401: No), it terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
If a command is received (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal game state transition command indicating that the game has transitioned to a normal game state (step S4402). If the received command is a normal game state transition command (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in a normal game state (step S4403), and terminates the command determination process. The normal game state flag is referenced in step S4901 of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Figure 151 to determine whether the game is in a normal game state. On the other hand, if the received command is not a normal game state transition command (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4404.

<Steps S4404 and S4405>
If the received command is not a command to transition to a normal game state (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a command to transition to a jackpot game state, indicating that the game has transitioned to a jackpot game state (step S4404). If the received command is a command to transition to a jackpot game state (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game state flag, indicating that the game is in a jackpot game state, to ON (step S4405), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a command to transition to a jackpot game state (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4406.

<Steps S4406-S4408>
If the received command is not a command to transition to a jackpot game state (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a command to transition to a time-saving game state, indicating that the game has transitioned to a time-saving game state (step S4406). If the received command is a command to transition to a time-saving game state (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the a time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in a time-saving game state (step S4407). The a time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4501 of the time-saving game count counter processing in Figure 150, or in step S4603 of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting processing in Figure 151, in order to determine whether the game is in a time-saving game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the a time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the a time-saving game state (step S4408), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a time-saving game state transition command (step S4406: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4409.

<Steps S4409-S4411>
If the received command is not a time-saving game state transition command (step S4406: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a time-saving game state transition command indicating a transition to the time-saving game state (step S4409). If the received command is a time-saving game state transition command (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state (step S4410). The time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4505 of the time-saving game count counter processing in Figure 150, or in step S4605 of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting processing in Figure 151, in order to determine whether the game is in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state (step S4411), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a b-time-saving game state transition command (step S4409: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4412.

<Steps S4412-S4414>
If the received command is not a b-time-saving game state transition command (step S4409: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a c-time-saving game state transition command indicating a transition to the c-time-saving game state (step S4412). If the received command is a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4412: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the c-time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the c-time-saving game state (step S4413). The c-time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4509 of the time-saving game count counter processing in Figure 150 to determine whether the game is in the c-time-saving game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the c-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the c-time-saving game state (step S4414), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4412: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4415 in Figure 149.

<Step S4415>
If the received command is not a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4412: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol variation pattern command, as shown in Figure 149 (step S4415). If the received command is a first special symbol variation pattern command (step S4415: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4416, and if the received command is not a first special symbol variation pattern command (step S4415: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4421.

<Step S4416>
If the received command is a first special pattern variation command (step S4415: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the time-saving game count counter processing to manage the time-saving game count counter (step S4416), and then proceeds to step S4417. The time-saving game count counter processing will be explained below with reference to Figure 150.

[Shortened play count processing]
Here, Figure 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time-saving game count counter processing executed in the command judgment process of Figure 149.

<Step S4501>
In the time-saving game count counter processing of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 150, the MPU 51 first determines whether the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the a-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4501). The a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S4407 when the a-time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination processing shown in Figure 148.

If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4502. On the other hand, if the a-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4505.

<Steps S4502-S4504>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), that is, if the a-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the a-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in the a-time-saving game state (step S4502), and determines whether the value of the a-time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4503). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state.

If the value of the a-time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4503: Yes), i.e., it is the last special feature game in the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the a-time-saving game state flag to off (step S4504) and terminates the time-saving game count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the a-time-saving game count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4503: No), i.e., it is not the last special feature game in the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Step S4505>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4501: No), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is not active, then it is determined whether the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates the b-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4505). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether the b-time-saving game state is active. The b-time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S4410 when the b-time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 148.

If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4506. On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4505: No), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4509.

<Steps S4506-S4508>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), that is, if the b-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the b-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in the b-time-saving game state (step S4506), and determines whether the value of the b-time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special symbol game in the b-time-saving game state.

If the value of the b-time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), i.e., it is the last special feature game in the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to off (step S4508) and terminates the time-saving game count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the b-time-saving game count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: No), i.e., it is not the last special feature game in the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Step S4509>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4505: No), i.e., if the b-time-saving game state is not active, it is determined whether the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates the c-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4509). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether the c-time-saving game state is active. The c-time-saving game state transition flag is set to on in step S4413 when a c-time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process in Figure 148, indicating that the game state will transition from a-time-saving game state to c-time-saving game state.

If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4509: Yes), i.e., the c-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4510. On the other hand, if the c-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4509: No), i.e., the c-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Steps S4510-S4512>
If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the c-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in the c-time-saving game state (step S4510), and determines whether the value of the c-time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4511). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the last special symbol game in the c-time-saving game state.

If the value of the c-time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4511: Yes), i.e., it is the last special feature game in the c-time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the c-time-saving game state flag to off (step S4512) and terminates the time-saving game count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the c-time-saving game count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4511: No), i.e., it is not the last special feature game in the c-time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Steps S4417 and S4418>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 149, in step S4417, the MPU 51 executes a first variation type (performance pattern) setting process to set the performance to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., for the first special symbol game. Details of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 151. Then, the MPU 51 executes a process to set the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78 (see Figure 152), which is displayed as a variation in response to the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game, and is displayed as a stop in response to the stop display of the first special symbol (step S4418). For example, regarding the stopping symbol combinations for the first decorative symbol 78, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol is a jackpot, a combination of identical numbers is set. If it is a near miss, a combination is set where the numbers of the left and right symbols are the same and the number of the middle symbol is different. If it is a time-saving symbol stop miss, a specific combination of scattered numbers (a combination with a characteristic such as ascending order like "123" or descending order like "321") is set. If it is a complete miss, scattered numbers other than the specific combination are set.

Here, Figures 152 and 153 show examples of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, Figure 152(A) shows an example of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in normal gameplay mode, and Figure 152(B) shows an example of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in time-saving gameplay mode (a time-saving gameplay mode, b time-saving gameplay mode, and c time-saving gameplay mode).

In normal gameplay, left-handed play, where the game ball is launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31, is encouraged. When left-handed play is performed, the second special symbol game is not executed, and the first special symbol game is executed instead. Therefore, as shown in Figure 152(A), in normal gameplay, the first decorative symbol 78, which is displayed in accordance with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game and stopped in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol, is displayed largely in the center of the symbol display unit 341. However, when the second special symbol game is executed in normal gameplay, the second decorative symbol 79, which is displayed in accordance with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game and stopped in accordance with the stop display of the second special symbol, is displayed smaller than the first decorative symbol 78 in the upper right corner of the symbol display unit 341.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state), right-handed shooting, where the game ball is launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, is encouraged. When right-handed shooting is performed in the time-saving game state, the support of the electric mechanism 315b makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second prize pocket 315, thus making it easier to perform the second special symbol game. On the other hand, the right first prize pocket 314R, located in the right-hand area of the game board 31, is difficult for the game ball to enter, so when right-handed shooting is performed, it is difficult to perform the first special symbol game. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, by shooting to the right, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, and the first special symbol game is executed less frequently than the second special symbol game. As shown in Figure 152(B), except during the execution of the time attack performance described later, which is performed in the time-saving game state a, in principle, in time-saving game states including time-saving game state a, the variation and stop displays of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the second special symbol game, are displayed prominently in the center of the symbol display unit 341. The variation and stop displays of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to the first special symbol, which is displayed variation and stop in the less frequently executed first special symbol game, are displayed less prominently than the variation and stop displays of the first decorative symbol 78 in the upper right part of the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (a, b, and c), an image is displayed indicating the remaining number of time-saving game spins until the maximum number of spins in that state is reached. In the example shown in Figure 152(B), the text image "120 spins remaining" displayed in the upper right of the symbol display unit 341 indicates the remaining number of time-saving game spins until the maximum number of spins in that state is reached. The image indicating the remaining number of time-saving game spins until the maximum number of spins in that state is reached is not limited to the example shown in Figure 152(B) and may take other forms. For example, it may be "120 spins remaining," "LAST 120 spins," "ST 120 spins," "120 spins," or "120."

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (a, b, and c), the second decorative symbol 79 is displayed larger than the first decorative symbol 78 in a clearly visible central position on the symbol display unit 341. However, the display positions of the first and second decorative symbols 78 and 79 may be reversed, or the first decorative symbol 78 may be displayed larger than the second decorative symbol 79 to make it more prominent. Also, the first and second decorative symbols 78 and 79 may be displayed side-by-side in vertical, horizontal, or diagonal directions, and their sizes may be approximately the same.

<Steps S4419 and S4420>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 149, in step S4419, the MPU 51 sets the display time of the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol variation counter based on the first special symbol variation pattern information included in the received first special symbol variation pattern command. The first special symbol variation counter is then decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the symbol variation is currently being displayed, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the first special symbol variation counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the first special symbol variation counter becomes 0.

Then, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 (step S4420) to identify the performance pattern type set in step S4417 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78 set in step S4418, and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and performance image of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the variation display and performance display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and performance type of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4421>
If the received command is not a first special pattern variation command (step S4415: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special pattern variation command (step S4421). If the received command is a second special pattern variation command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4422; if the received command is not a second special pattern variation command (step S4421: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4427.

<Step S4422>
If the received command is a second special pattern variation command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a time-saving game count counter process to manage the time-saving game count counter (step S4422), and then proceeds to step S4423. The time-saving game count counter process in step S4422 is the same as the time-saving game count counter process in step S4416, which was explained with reference to Figure 150, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

<Steps S4423 and S4424>
In step S4423, the MPU 51 executes a second variation type (performance pattern) setting process to set the performance to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., for the second special symbol game. Details of the second variation type (performance pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 154. Then, the MPU 51 executes a process to set the stop symbol combinations of the second decorative symbol 79 (see Figure 152), which is displayed in accordance with the variation display of the second special symbol and stopped in accordance with the stop display of the second special symbol (step S4425). For example, as for the stop symbol combinations of the second decorative symbol 79, if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol is a jackpot, a set of identical numbers is set; if it is a near miss, a combination is set where the numbers of the left and right symbols are the same and the number of the middle symbol is different; and if it is a complete miss, a scattered set is set.

<Steps S4425 and S4426>
In step S4425, the MPU 51 sets the display time for the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol variation counter based on the second special symbol variation pattern information included in the received second special symbol variation pattern command. The second special symbol variation counter is then decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. Based on the second special symbol variation counter, the MPU 51 can determine whether the symbol variation is currently being displayed, the remaining time for the variation display, and so on. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the second special symbol variation counter becomes 0.

Then, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 (step S4426) to identify the performance pattern type set in step S4423 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79 set in step S4424, and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and performance image of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the variation display and performance display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and performance type of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4427>
If the received command is not a second special pattern variation command (step S4421: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special pattern variation stop command (step S4427). The first special pattern variation stop command is set when the first special pattern is displayed as stopped in step S3822 of the first special pattern variation termination process in Figure 139.

If the received command is a first special-pattern change stop command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4428. If the received command is not a first special-pattern change stop command (step S4427: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4430.

<Step S4428>
If the received command is a command to stop the first special symbol variation (step S4427: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the time attack performance flag, which indicates that the time attack performance described later is in progress, is on (step S4428). The time attack performance flag is set to on in step S4607 of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Figure 151 when the first special symbol game starts in the a time-saving game state and the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and is set to off in step S4803 of the first time attack performance in Figure 155(A) or step S4903 of the second time attack performance in Figure 155(B) when the time attack performance ends.

If the time attack performance flag is on (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4429. If the time attack performance flag is off (step S4428: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S4429>
If the time attack performance flag is on (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first time attack performance termination process to terminate the time attack performance based on the stop display of the first special symbol (end of the first special symbol game) (step S4429), and terminates the command determination process. Details of the first time attack performance termination process will be described later with reference to Figure 155(A).

<Step S4430>
If the received command is not a first special feature variation stop command (step S4427: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special feature variation stop command (step S4430). The second special feature variation stop command is set when the second special feature is displayed as stopped in step S4119 of the second special feature variation termination process in Figure 142.

If the received command is a second special-pattern change stop command (step S4430: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4431. If the received command is not a second special-pattern change stop command (step S4430: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4433.

<Step S4431>
If the received command is a command to stop the second special feature variation (step S4430: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the time attack effect flag, which indicates that the time attack effect described later is in progress, is on (step S4431). The time attack effect is set to on in step S4607 of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Figure 151 when the time attack effect is started.

If the time attack performance flag is on (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4432. If the time attack performance flag is off (step S4431: No), the command determination process ends.

<Steps S4432 and S4433>
If the time attack performance flag is on (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the a-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played in the a-time-saving game state, is 0 (step S4432). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special feature game that is ending this time is the last special feature game in the a-time-saving game state.

If the value of the a-time-saving game count counter is 0 (step S4432: Yes), that is, if the second special feature game ending this time is the last special feature game in the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 51 executes the second time attack performance termination process to end the time attack performance based on the stop display of the second special feature (end of the a-time-saving game state) (step S4433), and then terminates the command judgment process. Details of the second time attack performance termination process will be described later with reference to Figure 155(B). On the other hand, if the value of the a-time-saving game count counter is not 0 (step S4432: Yes), that is, if the second special feature game ending this time is not the last special feature game in the a-time-saving game state and the a-time-saving game state continues, the MPU 51 terminates the command judgment process.

<Step S4434>
If the received command is not a command to stop the second special pattern variation (step S4430: No), the MPU 51 performs processing for other commands (step S4433) and terminates the command determination process.

[First variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Here, Figure 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the first variation type (performance pattern) that is performed in step S4417 of the command determination process in Figure 149.

<Step S4601>
As shown in Figure 151, in the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S4601). If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4602, and if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4603.

<Step S4602>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state animation (step S4602) and terminates the first variation type (animation pattern) setting process. The normal game state animation is the same as the animation in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S4603>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4603). If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4603: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4604, and if the a-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4603: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4609.

<Step S4604>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4603: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the a-time-saving game state effect (step S4604) and proceeds to step S4605. In the a-time-saving game state effect processing, for example, the following are executed: setting a background effect unique to the a-time-saving game state, setting the display of the remaining number of time-saving game turns, setting the display of the remaining time for the first special symbol game, and setting the display position of the first decorative symbol 78. The display of the remaining number of time-saving game turns is set by referring to the value of the a-time-saving game turn counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving game turns in the a-time-saving game state and is managed by the time-saving game turn counter processing in Figure 150. The display of the remaining time for the first special symbol game is set by referring to the first special symbol variation display counter, which is set for the variation display time in step S4419 of the command judgment processing in Figure 149.

<Step S4605>
In step S4605, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game to be started is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. Whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols is determined based on the information regarding the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game included in the first special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game being started is a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4606. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game being started is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S4605: No), the MPU 51 terminates the setting process for the first variation type (performance pattern).

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that is initiated is a jackpot, a near miss (missing both front and back symbols), or a near miss (other than a near miss), the near miss animation (see Figure 50) may be executed in the same way as the normal game state animation.

<Steps S4606 and S4607>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game that is started is that the time-saving symbols do not stop (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time attack performance (see Figure 153) (step S4606), sets the time attack performance flag to ON to indicate that the time attack performance is set (step S4607), and proceeds to step S4608.

Thus, in the a-time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game results in a time-saving loss, the time attack sequence is executed. If the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a time-saving loss, the time attack sequence is not executed. Therefore, the player can understand that the start of the time attack sequence indicates a situation where they can expect to transition to the c-time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the a-time-saving game state. This allows the player to enjoy the game while anticipating a transition to the c-time-saving game state when the time attack sequence begins.

On the other hand, in the a-time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game that starts in the a-time-saving game state is a time-saving failure, a time attack performance is executed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a time-saving failure, the time attack performance is not executed. This allows the player to choose to stop shooting game balls until the first special symbol game ends if the time attack performance is not executed when the first special symbol game starts in the a-time-saving game state. This makes it possible to avoid the a-time-saving game state ending by executing the second special symbol game up to the upper limit in the a-time-saving game state while the first special symbol game is being played, in which there is no possibility of transitioning to the c-time-saving game state, and to leave open the possibility of transitioning to the c-time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the Time Attack sequence does not begin when the first special symbol game starts in the a-time-saving game state, the player can choose to adjust the remaining number of time-saving game plays up to the maximum number in the a-time-saving game state by executing a certain number of second special symbol games before the first special symbol game ends, and then stop launching game balls until the first special symbol game ends. This increases the likelihood that, if a new first special symbol game starts in the a-time-saving game state (which is maintained after the end of the first special symbol game), the player will be able to execute the remaining number of time-saving game plays up to the maximum number in the a-time-saving game state before the new first special symbol game ends.

Here, Figure 153 shows an example of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the time attack sequence is executed in the time-saving game state (a). Specifically, Figures 153(A) and 153(B) are examples of the screen at the start of the time attack sequence, Figure 153(C) is an example of the screen during the time attack sequence, Figure 153(D) is an example of the screen when the time attack is successful, and Figures 153(E) and 153(F) are examples of the screen when the time attack fails.

As shown in Figures 153(A) to 153(F), the Time Attack sequence is a sequence that, in a time attack format, checks whether the second special symbol game has been played up to the maximum number of times in the a-time-saving game state while the first special symbol game, which is started in the a-time-saving game state, is being played. In this Time Attack sequence, if the second special symbol game has been played up to the maximum number of times in the a-time-saving game state while the first special symbol game, which is started in the a-time-saving game state, is being played, a success sequence is being played (Figures 153(A) to 153(D)). If the second special symbol game has not been played up to the maximum number of times in the a-time-saving game state while the first special symbol game, which is started in the a-time-saving game state, is being played, a failure sequence is being played (Figures 153(A) to 153(C), 153(E), and 153(F)).

As shown in Figures 153(A) to 153(F), in the time attack mode, the symbol display unit 341 displays a remaining time image corresponding to the remaining display time (remaining time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state, and a remaining spins image corresponding to the number of time-saving games (remaining spins) that can be played in the a-time-saving game state at the time the first special symbol game started. The remaining time image is displayed from the upper center to the right of the symbol display unit 341. The remaining spins image is displayed directly below the remaining time image on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it easy to view both the remaining time image and the remaining spins image simultaneously.

In the remaining time image, the remaining time is displayed by a remaining time seconds counter and a remaining time gauge. As the remaining time decreases, the number displayed in seconds on the remaining time seconds counter decreases, and the length of the remaining time gauge shortens. Furthermore, if the remaining time reaches zero before the remaining rotations, the number displayed in seconds on the remaining time seconds counter and the length of the remaining time gauge are displayed as zero (Figures 153(E) and 153(F)).

On the other hand, in the remaining rotations image, the remaining rotations are displayed by a remaining rotations counter and a remaining rotations gauge. As the remaining rotations decrease, the value displayed on the remaining rotations counter decreases, and the length of the remaining rotations gauge shortens. Furthermore, if the remaining rotations reach zero before the remaining time, the remaining rotations image displays both the value on the remaining rotations counter and the length of the remaining rotations gauge as zero (see Figure 153(D)).

Here, the time attack sequence includes both success and failure sequences. However, the intermediate progress is displayed similarly for both the success and failure sequences until the time attack result is announced (see Figures 153(E) and 153(F)) (see Figures 153(A) to 153(C)).

As shown in Figure 153(A), in the time attack sequence, the starting screen displays an explanatory image for the time attack in the center of the symbol display unit 341, along with the remaining time image and the remaining spin count image. In the example shown in Figure 153(A), the explanatory image for the time attack is displayed as the text "Reduce the remaining spin count to 0 before the remaining time gauge reaches 0." Note that the explanatory image for the time attack is not limited to the form shown in Figure 153(A) and may be other.

As shown in Figure 153(B), in the time attack sequence, an explanatory image of the time attack is displayed as the starting screen, followed by a time attack start image indicating that the time attack is beginning. In the example shown in Figure 153(B), the time attack start image is displayed as the text image "Time Attack START". Note that the time attack start image is not limited to the form shown in Figure 153(B); it may be other, or it may be omitted altogether.

As shown in Figure 153(C), the time attack sequence displays images prompting the player to shoot to the right and images prompting the player to enter the second prize slot 315. In the example shown in Figure 153(C), the text "Shoot to the right" is displayed directly below the remaining spins image, and the text "Keep putting the balls in!" is displayed directly above the second special symbol hold image display area 77. Note that the images prompting the player to shoot to the right and the images prompting the player to enter the second prize slot 315 may be displayed in other ways or may be omitted.

Furthermore, the first decorative symbol 78, which is displayed in a variable and stopped manner in accordance with the variable and stopped manner of the first special symbol, is displayed largely in the center of the symbol display unit 341, while the second decorative symbol 79, which is displayed in a variable and stopped manner in accordance with the variable and stopped manner of the second special symbol, is displayed smaller than the variable display of the first decorative symbol 78 in the lower left of the symbol display unit 341. As a result, in the time attack performance, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed more prominently than the variable display of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the second special symbol. Here, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is displayed in a time-saving game state is started, the timing of the transition from the a time-saving game state to the normal game state is important. That is, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is displayed in a time-saving game state is started, the timing of the first decorative symbol 78 being displayed in a stopped manner is important. Therefore, in the Time Attack mode, contrary to the general display of the first and second decorative symbols 78 and 79 in the aforementioned time-saving game state, the variation display of the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed more prominently than the variation display of the second decorative symbol 79.

As shown in Figure 153(D), if the remaining spins reach 0 before the remaining time, that is, if the second special symbol game is played up to the maximum number of times in the a-time-saving game state while the first special symbol game is being played in the a-time-saving game state, a success animation is performed to indicate that the time attack has been successful. Specifically, in this success animation, the second decorative symbol 79 is displayed stopped based on the end of the second special symbol game, and the remaining spins image is displayed as 0, with the remaining spins counter showing a value of 0, and the length of the remaining spins gauge displayed as 0.

Furthermore, in the success animation, a success notification image is displayed in the center of the symbol display unit 341 to inform the player that they have succeeded in the time attack. In the example shown in Figure 153(D), the success notification image is displayed as the text image "Success! Long Time-Saving Game Acquired!". Here, "Long Time-Saving Game" refers to the time-saving game state c, which has a higher maximum number of spins than the time-saving game state a, and effectively guarantees a big win. By displaying "Long Time-Saving Game Acquired," the player is informed that they have transitioned to a game state with more time-saving spins than the time-saving game state a. Note that the notification of transitioning to the time-saving game state c is not limited to the text image "Long Time-Saving Game Acquired"; it may also be a text image of another form, or by other methods such as audio notification.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 153(E) and 153(F), if the remaining time reaches 0 before the remaining number of spins, that is, if the second special symbol game is not executed up to the maximum number of spins in the a-time-saving game state while the first special symbol game is being played in the a-time-saving game state, a failure animation is executed to indicate that the time attack has failed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 153(E), in this failure animation, based on the end of the first special symbol game, the first decorative symbol 78 stops and is displayed as a time-saving symbol (in the example shown in Figure 153(E), it is "123"), and the remaining time image displays 0 as the number of seconds displayed on the remaining time seconds counter, and the length of the remaining time gauge is displayed as 0.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 153(F), in the failure sequence, after the first decorative symbol 78 stops, a failure notification image is displayed in the center of the symbol display unit 341 to inform the player that they have failed the time attack. In the example shown in Figure 153(F), the failure notification image is displayed as the text image "Failure! Time-saving mode continues!". Here, "Time-saving mode continues" means that the time-saving game state a is maintained. Note that the notification that the time-saving game state a is continued is not limited to the text image "Time-saving mode continues," but may also be a text image of another form, or it may be a different method such as audio notification.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state (a), is a time attack sequence is executed if the time-saving symbol stops incorrectly. The player can then focus on the remaining time image, the remaining spin count image, the display of the first decorative symbol 78's movement and stop, and the display of the second decorative symbol 79's movement and stop, and enjoy the game's progression by focusing on the time attack sequence executed in the time-saving game state (a).

Specifically, when the Time Attack sequence is executed, by checking the remaining time image, the player can understand the display time of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol 78) in that first special symbol game. Therefore, the player can enjoy inferring the likelihood of transitioning the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. For example, if, based on the remaining time image at the start of the Time Attack sequence, it is confirmed that the special symbol variation pattern "09," which has the longest display time of 150 seconds for the first special symbol game, has been set, the player can determine that there is a high probability of transitioning the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. Therefore, when the Time Attack sequence starts, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on the remaining time image.

Furthermore, after the time attack sequence is executed, for example, by focusing on the first decorative symbol 78, it can be confirmed that the first special symbol game has not ended, and by checking the remaining time image, the time remaining until the first special symbol game ends can be confirmed. On the other hand, by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79, it can be confirmed that the second special symbol game has started or ended, and by checking the remaining spins image, the number of second special symbol games required to transition the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state can be confirmed. Therefore, by confirming that the first decorative symbol 78 is not displayed as stopped, and by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79 to confirm that the second special symbol game has started or ended, the player can confirm that the second special symbol game has ended while the first special symbol game is in progress (while the first special symbol is being displayed as fluctuating), and that the remaining spins have decreased according to the remaining spins image. This allows players to enjoy the game while anticipating that the second decorative symbol 79 will also change display while the first decorative symbol 78 is changing, and that the second decorative symbol 79, once it begins to change, will stop displaying quickly.

Furthermore, after the time attack sequence begins, the remaining display time for the first special symbol in the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the number of second special symbol games required before transitioning to normal gameplay can be confirmed based on the remaining spins image. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins image, players can enjoy the game's progression while anticipating that the rate of decrease in remaining spins will be higher than the rate of decrease in remaining time. They can also enjoy the game's progression by inferring the possibility of transitioning to normal gameplay during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time (confirmed based on the remaining time image) and the remaining spins (confirmed based on the remaining spins image) decrease and approach zero, players can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on which of the remaining time or remaining spins will reach zero first.

Furthermore, if a long display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is set after the time attack sequence has started, and the player focuses on the second decorative symbol 79, the player may feel aversion to the fact that the remaining spins are not decreasing because the second decorative symbol 79 does not stop and display for a long time. Moreover, the longer the display time for the second decorative symbol 79, the lower the probability of transitioning to the normal game state, which may also cause aversion, potentially reducing the player's interest in the game during the time attack sequence. In contrast, in this embodiment, the display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game, which starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state, is set so that the longer the display time for the second special symbol, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot. This suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game during the time attack sequence caused by the second decorative symbol 79 not stopping and displaying for a long time.

In this embodiment, during the time attack sequence, the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed larger than the second decorative symbol 79 in a clearly visible central position on the symbol display unit 341. However, the display positions of the first and second decorative symbols 78 and 79 may be reversed, or the second decorative symbol 79 may be displayed larger than the first decorative symbol 78 to make it more prominent. Furthermore, the first and second decorative symbols 78 and 79 may be displayed side-by-side in vertical, horizontal, or diagonal directions, and their sizes may be approximately the same.

Furthermore, in the Time Attack sequence, just as the Time Attack sequence is not executed in the Time-Saving Game state, including the Time-Saving Game state (a), an image showing the remaining number of Time-Saving Game plays up to the maximum number of plays in the Time-Saving Game state (the text image "120 plays remaining" in Figure 152(B)) may also be displayed. In this case, the Time Attack sequence may also display an image showing the remaining number of plays of the second special symbol game that should be completed during the execution of the first special symbol game necessary to transition to the Time-Saving Game state (remaining spins image (remaining spins display, remaining spins gauge) (see Figure 153)) in a more emphasized manner than the image showing the remaining number of Time-Saving Game plays (the text image "120 plays remaining" in Figure 152(B)). For example, the remaining spin count image could be displayed in larger letters than the image showing the remaining number of time-saving game rounds (the "120 spins remaining" text image in Figure 152(B)), displayed in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, or have effects added to the remaining spin count image. By displaying the remaining spin count image in a more emphasized manner than the image showing the remaining number of time-saving game rounds (the "120 spins remaining" text image in Figure 152(B)), the remaining spin count image becomes easier to see. This makes it easier for players to visually predict the remaining number of rounds for the second special symbol game, which should end during the execution of the first special symbol game necessary to transition to the time-saving game state, based on the visually obtained information, thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the Time Attack mode, it is conceivable to display the remaining spins image (remaining spins) until the maximum number of spins in the time-saving mode is reached in a more prominent manner than the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge) that shows the remaining time for the first special feature game. For example, the remaining spins image could be displayed in larger characters than the remaining time image, in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, or with added effects. By displaying the remaining spins image in a more prominent manner than the remaining time image, the remaining spins image becomes easier to see. This makes it easier for players to visually estimate the remaining spins until the maximum number of spins in the time-saving mode is reached, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Conversely, in time attack sequences, the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge) showing the remaining time for the first special symbol game could be displayed in a more emphasized manner than the remaining spins image, which shows the remaining number of time-saving game rounds (remaining spins) until the maximum number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state is reached. For example, the remaining time image could be displayed in larger characters than the remaining spins image, in a more eye-catching color such as red or gold, or with added effects. By displaying the remaining time image in a more emphasized manner than the remaining spins image, the remaining time image becomes easier to see, making it easier for players to predict the remaining time for the first special symbol game based on visually obtainable information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time attack sequence is executed when the first special symbol game is started to announce that the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols in the time-saving game state a. However, the time attack sequence may also be executed in part or all of the cases when the first special symbol game is started to announce that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete failure in the time-saving game state a. Thus, by having a time attack sequence executed in part or all of the cases where the first special game, which notifies that the jackpot lottery result is a complete miss in the a-time-saving game state, is initiated, it becomes possible to implement a strategy to counter exploits by intentionally not letting game balls enter the second prize slot 315 when the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played in the a-time-saving game state is low, and then actively letting game balls enter the second prize slot 315 when the first special game begins. This allows for the execution of the second special game with the remaining number of time-saving games during the execution of the first special game, thereby increasing the likelihood that the first special game will end after transitioning to the normal game state.

Furthermore, if a time attack sequence is to be executed in part or all of the cases where the first special symbol game is started to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete miss in the time-saving game state, the time attack sequence may explicitly indicate or suggest the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game will be a miss when the time-saving symbols stop. The probability that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game will be a miss when the time-saving symbols stop can be explicitly indicated or suggested by the display manner (for example, color, presence or absence of effects, size of effects, color of effects) of one or more of the images displayed in the time attack sequence, such as the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge), remaining spins image (remaining spins display, remaining spins gauge), first decorative symbol 78, second decorative symbol 79, "Right-Handed Shot" text image, and "Keep putting the balls in!" text image. Furthermore, the display methods of various images used to explicitly indicate or suggest the expected level may be designed to change at predetermined timings, for example, when the remaining number of playable time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (a) reaches a specific number. Alternatively, the explicit indication or suggestion of the expected level could be conveyed by executing specific animations, such as cut-in animations or mini-character animations, at predetermined timings, for example, when the remaining number of playable time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (a) reaches a specific number, and the explicit indication or suggestion could be conveyed through the type of animation used. In this way, by explicitly indicating or suggesting the expected outcome of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game being a miss on the time-saving symbol stop, it becomes possible to enjoy the progress of the time attack animation while expecting the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game to be a miss on the time-saving symbol stop, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the display of the remaining time for the first special feature game may correspond to the actual remaining time, it is also conceivable to display a shorter remaining time than the actual time. In this case, even when the remaining time display for the first special feature game reaches zero, the game continues, making it difficult to recognize when the game will end. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while hoping that the first special feature game will continue for as long as possible after the remaining time display reaches zero.

Furthermore, the remaining time for the first special game does not necessarily need to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. For example, it is also conceivable to provide a display device other than the symbol display unit 341 and display the time on this device.

Furthermore, the time attack presentation is not limited to the example described with reference to Figure 153, and may take other forms. For example, a countdown timer such as [○○:○○:○○] may be displayed as the remaining time image. In addition, as a time attack presentation, for example, the remaining time of the first special symbol game, which starts in the time-saving game state, may be clearly indicated or suggested by means other than numbers or gauges, such as in a battle presentation or mission presentation. Specifically, for example, in a battle presentation, a friendly character and an enemy character may battle, and the remaining time of the first special symbol game may be displayed as the friendly character's hit points (HP). The initial value of the friendly character's HP may then suggest the variable display time set for the first special symbol game. Also, if the friendly character takes damage from an enemy character's attack, the friendly character's HP may decrease, and when the friendly character's HP reaches 0, the first special symbol game may end (the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol 78 may stop).

<Step S4608>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 151, in step S4608, the MPU 51 executes a change display position setting process to change the change display position of the first decorative symbol 78, which was set in step S4604, from the upper right area of the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 152(B)) to the central area of the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 153(C)). At the same time, it executes a process to change the change display position of the second decorative symbol 79 from the central area of the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 152(B)) to the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 153(C)), and then terminates the first change type (performance pattern) setting process. As a result, the change display positions of the first decorative symbol 78 and the second decorative symbol 79 are changed from the positions shown in Figure 152(B) to the display positions in the time attack performance shown in Figure 153(C), and the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed in a manner that is more conspicuous than the second decorative symbol 79. In other words, in the time attack mode, as mentioned above, the timing of the first decorative symbol 78 stopping is important, so the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed in a more prominent manner than the second decorative symbol 79.

<Step S4609>
If the time-saving game state flag (a) is set to off (step S4603: No), it is determined whether the time-saving game state flag (b) indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state is set to on (step S4609). If the time-saving game state flag (b) is set to on (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4610, and if the time-saving game state flag (b) is set to off (step S4605: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4611.

<Step S4610>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4609: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b-time-saving game state animation. In the b-time-saving game state animation processing, for example, settings are made for background animations specific to the b-time-saving game state, settings are made for displaying the remaining number of time-saving game turns, and settings are made for displaying the first decorative symbol 78. The display of the remaining number of time-saving game turns is set by referring to the value of the b-time-saving game turn counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving turns in the b-time-saving game state and is managed by the time-saving game turn counter processing in Figure 150.

<Step S4611>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4609: No), that is, since it is neither the normal game state, a-time-saving game state, nor b-time-saving game state, it can be determined that it is the c-time-saving game state. Therefore, the MPU 51 sets the c-time-saving game state effect. In the c-time-saving game state effect processing, for example, the setting of a background effect unique to the c-time-saving game state, settings related to the display of the remaining number of time-saving games, and settings related to the display position of the first decorative symbol 78 are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set by referring to the value of the c-time-saving game counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the c-time-saving game state and is managed by the time-saving game counter processing in Figure 150.

[Second variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Here, Figure 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the second variation type (performance pattern) that is performed in step S4423 of the command determination process in Figure 149.

<Step S4701>
As shown in Figure 154, in the second variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S4701). If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4702. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), that is, if the game is in a time-saving game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4703.

<Step S4702>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state animation (step S4702) and terminates the second variation type (animation pattern) setting process. In the normal game state animation setting process, settings related to the display position of the second decorative symbol 79 are performed.

<Step S4703>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4701: No), that is, if the game is in a time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game state animation (step S4703) and proceeds to step S4704. In the time-saving game state animation processing, for example, settings are made for background animations specific to the time-saving game state, settings are made for displaying the remaining number of time-saving game turns, and settings are made for displaying the second decorative symbol 79. The display of the remaining number of time-saving game turns is set by referring to the value of the time-saving game turn counter managed by the time-saving game turn counter processing in Figure 150, for example.

<Step S4704>
In step S4704, the MPU 51 determines whether the time attack performance flag, which indicates that a time attack performance is being executed, is set to ON. The time attack performance flag is set to ON in step S4607 of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Figure 151 when the first special symbol game starts in the time-saving game state and the result of the big win lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. It is set to OFF in step S4803 of the first time attack performance in Figure 155(A) or in step S4903 of the second time attack performance in Figure 155(B) when the time attack performance ends.

If the Time Attack performance flag is set to ON (Step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4705. If the Time Attack performance flag is set to OFF (Step S4704: No), the second variation type (performance pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Step S4705>
If the Time Attack performance flag is set to ON (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to change the display position of the second decorative symbol 79 in the second special symbol game from the central area of the symbol display unit 341 set in step S4703 (see Figure 152(B)) to the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 153(C)) (step S4705), and terminates the second variation type (performance pattern) setting process. As a result, in the Time Attack performance, the display of the second decorative symbol 79 is set to the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 153(C)).

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game that is initiated is a jackpot, a near miss (missing both front and back symbols), or a near miss (other than a near miss), the near miss animation (see Figure 50) may be executed in the same way as the normal game state animation.

[End of first time attack sequence]
Here, Figure 155(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first time attack performance termination process, which is executed in step S4429 of the command determination process in Figure 149.

The first time attack sequence termination process is the process that initiates the time attack sequence. It is executed when the time attack sequence flag is set to ON upon receiving the first special symbol variation stop command (both steps S4427 and S4428 are Yes in the command determination process shown in Figure 149). Specifically, the first time attack sequence termination process is executed when the first special symbol is displayed as stopped during the first special symbol game while the time attack sequence is running in the a-time-saving game state. In other words, if the second special symbol game has not been played up to the maximum number of times in the a-time-saving game state before the first special symbol game (display of the first special symbol variation) that started in the a-time-saving game state ends, the time attack sequence is terminated due to a time attack failure.

<Step S4801>
As shown in Figure 155(A), in the first time attack performance termination process, the MPU 51 first displays a time attack failure image (the text image "Failure! Time reduction continues!" in Figure 153(F)) on the symbol display unit 341 (step S4801), and then proceeds to step S4802.

<Steps S4802 and S4803>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes the time attack performance setting termination process (step S4802), then sets the time attack performance flag to ON to indicate that the time attack performance is being executed (step S4803), and terminates the first time attack performance termination process.

In the time attack performance termination setting process, the time until the time attack failure image is erased is set in the symbol display unit 341, and the display positions of the first decorative symbol 78 and the second decorative symbol 79 in the symbol display unit 341 are changed to the positions they would be in if the time attack performance were not being performed (see Figure 152(B)).

[End of second time attack sequence]
Here, Figure 155(B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second time attack performance termination process, which is executed in step S4432 of the command determination process in Figure 149.

The second time attack sequence termination process is the process that initiates the time attack sequence. It is executed when the time attack sequence flag is set to ON upon receiving the second special symbol variation stop command, and when the a-time-saving game count counter is 0 (in the command judgment process in Figure 149, steps S4430 to S4432 are all Yes). In other words, the second time attack sequence termination process is executed when the time attack sequence is running in the a-time-saving game state, and the second special symbol game ending this time is the last special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state. That is, if the second special symbol game (the variation display of the second special symbol) that started in the a-time-saving game state has reached the maximum number of times allowed in the a-time-saving game state, the time attack sequence will terminate due to the success of the time attack.

<Step S4901>
As shown in Figure 155(B), in the second time attack performance termination process, the MPU 51 first displays a time attack success image (the text image "Success! Long time reduction obtained!" in Figure 153(D)) on the symbol display unit 341 (step S4901), and then proceeds to step S4902.

<Steps S4902 and S4903>
In step S4902, the MPU 51 executes the time attack performance termination setting process, and further sets the time attack performance flag to ON to indicate that the time attack performance is being executed (step S4903), and terminates the second time attack performance termination process.

In the time attack performance termination setting process, the time until the time attack success image is erased is set in the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 153(A)).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variable game in which a first special symbol game, in which the first special symbol is varied based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning slot 314 as the starting ball entry, and a second special symbol game, in which the second special symbol is varied based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning slot 315 as the starting ball entry, can be executed in overlapping (parallel) on the main display unit 36 as a display unit, under the control of the MPU 41 as a game control unit. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as an ST machine in which an upper limit value (maximum number of a time-saving game rounds) is set for the number of special symbol games as variable games in the a time-saving game state, which is a profitable game state to which the player transitions after the end of a jackpot game, and the player transitions to the normal game state when the maximum number of a time-saving game rounds of special symbol games have been executed in the a time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is a variable game, can transition to the c-time-saving game state as an added value to the special symbol game result when a specific symbol (time-saving symbol) is not displayed as a time-saving symbol on the main display unit 36, which acts as a display device.

Thus, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol game is started in the a-time-saving game state, which is a profitable game state that transitions to the normal game state by executing the special symbol game as a variable game with an upper limit of number of times (a-time-saving game times), and the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is that the time-saving symbols do not stop, the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the a-time-saving game state, and is substantially guaranteed to result in a jackpot, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the first special symbol game, in the a-time-saving game state which transitions to after the jackpot game ends, will start as a variable game in which the time-saving symbols will stop and be displayed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a first special symbol game is started in the a-time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, a novel gameplay feature is realized in which the game is played so that, by the time the first special symbol game ends, the second special symbol game is executed for the maximum number of times that the a-time-saving game state is terminated, so that the game state transitions from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game, that is, after the transition from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed, and so that game balls are entered into the second prize slot 315 in order to execute the second special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is a variable game started in the a-time-saving game state (a) as a profitable game state, is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed as a value added to the result of the special symbol game. That is, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, in the a-time-saving game state (a) as a profitable game state, it can also be expected that the jackpot game will be executed if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game, which is a variable game, started during the execution of the first special symbol game, is a jackpot. In other words, the same kind of excitement as the a-time-saving game state (a) of conventional gaming machines is maintained, where it can be expected that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot in the a-time-saving game state (a) as a profitable game state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game while a first special symbol game is being executed in a time-saving game state a, which is a profitable gaming state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the expectation of transitioning to a time-saving game state c, where a jackpot is substantially guaranteed, can be maintained. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefit of the jackpot game being executed as the added value for the result of the second special symbol game. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game while a first special symbol game is being executed in a time-saving game state a, which is a profitable gaming state, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a loss, it can be expected that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, similar to the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines, and a novel gaming feature is realized in which the player can enjoy the benefit corresponding to the lottery result.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the aforementioned novel gameplay that enhances the enjoyment of the game, while also maintaining the gameplay of the conventional gaming machine's a-time-saving game state, where the jackpot game is expected to be executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery. This is achieved by utilizing the a-time-saving game state, which is a profitable gameplay state to which a maximum number of time-saving games can be executed after the jackpot game ends; the c-time-saving game state, which is a state to which a jackpot is substantially guaranteed and which can be entered by the stop display of a time-saving symbol failure; and the characteristics of a simultaneous variation machine, in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously on the main display unit 36, which serves as the display unit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to seventh embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In this embodiment, a portion of the display time for the fluctuations set in the jackpot fluctuation table and the second special symbol miss fluctuation table for the time-saving game state differs from that of the eighth embodiment described above.

[Big Win Fluctuation Table]
As shown in Figure 156(A), in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, in addition to the special feature variation pattern "01" with a special feature variation display time of 30 seconds, the special feature variation pattern "02" with a special feature variation display time of 60 seconds, and the special feature variation pattern "03" with a special feature variation display time of 90 seconds, a special feature variation pattern "11" is set as a variation display time that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery announced in the special feature game is a jackpot. The special feature variation pattern "11" has a special feature variation display time of 200 seconds, which is longer than the maximum variation display time set when the result of the jackpot lottery by the first special feature game is announced as a loss in the a time-saving game state, i.e., the special feature variation display time of the special feature variation pattern "09" is 150 seconds (see Figure 129(C)). In other words, it is longer than any of the special feature variation display times set for the first special feature game that announces a loss in the a time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, the distribution rate of special symbol variation pattern "11" is set to 10%.

[Shortened Play State 2nd Special Symbol Miss Variation Table]
As shown in Figure 156(B), in the second special symbol miss variation table for the time-saving game state of this embodiment, a special symbol variation pattern "11" with a special symbol variation display time of 200 seconds is set as the variation display time that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery announced in the special symbol game is a miss, similar to the jackpot variation table shown in Figure 156(A). Furthermore, in the second special symbol miss variation table for the time-saving game state of this embodiment, the distribution rate of special symbol variation pattern "11" is set to an extremely low value of 0.5%.

Incidentally, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, if the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, and the first special symbol game ends after the a-time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state or the a-time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the first special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, a time attack sequence (see Figure 153) is executed. Therefore, if the variation display time set for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game started during the execution of the time attack sequence is long, it becomes disadvantageous to end the first special symbol game, which started in the a-time-saving game state and resulted in a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, in the normal game state. In particular, if the display time for the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol game, which is started during the execution of the first special symbol game, is set to 200 seconds, which is the maximum display time for the second special symbol variation pattern "11" in the a-time-saving game state, then the second special symbol game cannot possibly end during the execution of the first special symbol game, which has a maximum display time of 150 seconds, and it becomes impossible to end the first special symbol game in the normal game state. In other words, in this embodiment, the display time for the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol game in a time-saving game state, including the a-time-saving game state, includes a display time that makes it impossible to end the second special symbol game, which is started during the execution of the first special symbol game, during the execution of the first special symbol game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, while the distribution rate of special symbol variation pattern "11" in the jackpot variation table is set to 10%, the distribution rate of special symbol variation pattern "11" in the time-saving game state's second special symbol miss variation table is set to an extremely low value of 0.5%. Therefore, in time-saving game state a, if special symbol variation pattern "11" with a special symbol variation display time of 200 seconds is selected for the second special symbol game, the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by that second special symbol game will be a jackpot increases. That is, if the longest variation display time in time-saving game state a is set as the variation display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the time attack performance, the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by that second special symbol game will be a jackpot increases.

Thus, in the a-time-saving game state, if the second special symbol game starts during the execution of a time attack sequence based on the first special symbol game which starts to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss due to the time-saving symbol stopping, and the second special symbol game is started during this sequence, a long display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is disadvantageous in that it would end the first special symbol game in the normal game state and transition to the advantageous c-time-saving game state. However, if the special symbol variation pattern "11" is selected, the probability of a jackpot increases. Therefore, in situations where the display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is long during the execution of the time attack sequence, which is disadvantageous to the player and could potentially decrease their interest in the game, increasing the probability of a jackpot in the second special symbol game prevents a decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the time attack sequence. Rather, it enhances the enjoyment of the game because players can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping for a jackpot even in the unfavorable situation during the execution of the time attack sequence.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to eighth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Tenth Embodiment]
The present invention provides, as a specific configuration, a "light-emitting body" as a means of emitting light, an "information acquisition process" as a means of acquiring information, a "determination process" as a means of determining, a "rotating body" as a rotating means which is either a first rotating means or a second rotating means, and a "visibility state" as a state which is either a first state or a second state.

The light-emitting means only needs to be capable of emitting light that is visible when viewed from the front of the game board. It may be capable of emitting light not only towards the front, but also in directions other than the front (for example, directions along the surface of the game board, such as left and right, vertical directions, or diagonal directions). Examples of light-emitting means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include liquid crystal displays, dot matrix displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, pixels (dots) of these displays, various lamps such as LED lamps, and any combination thereof.

The information acquisition means can be any process that acquires information in order to perform some kind of processing. Examples of information acquisition means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, processes for acquiring commands transmitted from the main control unit, processes for acquiring commands transmitted from the voice lamp control unit, processes for acquiring detection information from various sensors and switches, processes for acquiring a normal hit random number counter, processes for acquiring a normal hit type counter, processes for acquiring a normal hit initial value counter, processes for acquiring a normal variation type counter, processes for acquiring a jackpot random number counter, processes for acquiring a jackpot type counter, processes for acquiring a reach random number counter, processes for acquiring a jackpot initial value counter, processes for acquiring a special variation type counter, and any combination thereof.

The determination means can be any determination process performed based on various information. Examples of determination means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: a process for determining the type of command transmitted from the voice lamp control device; a process for determining the detection content of various sensors and switches; a process for determining the value of the regular hit random number counter (a process for determining whether or not it is a regular hit); a process for determining the value of the regular hit type counter (a process for determining the type of regular hit); a process for determining the value of the regular hit random number initial value counter (a process for determining the initial value of the regular hit random number counter); a process for determining the value of the regular hit variation type counter (a process for determining the display time of the regular hit variation); a process for determining the value of the jackpot random number counter (a process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot); a process for determining the value of the jackpot type counter (a process for determining the type of jackpot); a process for determining the value of the reach random number counter (a process for determining whether or not to perform a reach, and if so, the type of reach); a process for determining the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter (a process for determining the initial value of the jackpot random number counter); a process for determining the value of the special hit variation type counter (a process for determining the display time of the special hit variation); and any combination thereof.

The rotating means only needs to be rotatable. Examples of rotating means that can realize the spirit of this invention include, for example, those rotatable at one fixed position, those rotatable at multiple positions, those with a constant rotation speed, those with an inconsistent rotation speed, those rotatable in one direction, those rotatable in multiple directions, those that are movable, those that are immovable, those that can move along one path, those that can move along multiple paths, those that can move linearly, those that can move non-linearly, those that can rotate while moving, those that can rotate while moving, those that are deformable (such as by expanding or contracting), those whose form can be changed by connection, joining, or separation, those that are entirely translucent, those that are partially translucent, those that are not translucent, those that are rotated by a control means such as an MPU, those that are rotated by interference from other objects such as game balls, those that are rotated by interference from game balls such as windmills, and any combination thereof.

The state should be one that is visible to the player. Examples of states that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, a state in which the form of the rotating means changes, the illumination state of one or more light-emitting means, the rotation state of one or more rotating means, the movement state of one or more rotating means, the illumination state of a light-emitting means visible through the rotating means, a state in which the rotating means blocks the light emitted from the light-emitting means, a state in which one rotating means is visible through another rotating means, the movement state of one or more rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is close to another rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is separated from another rotating means, and any combination thereof.

By the way, in conventional gaming machines, a rotating body or other decorative element is installed on the game board, and this rotating body is rotated as needed during the display of special symbols (decorative symbols) in special symbol games or during jackpot games.

However, many rotating bodies have a light-emitting element integrated into their underside. While the light-emitting element illuminates during rotation, the underside of the rotating body becomes invisible. Therefore, conventional decorative applications using rotating bodies rely solely on the rotating body itself, resulting in insufficient improvement in decorative appeal.

In contrast, the present invention makes it possible to create a first viewing state in which the light from the light-emitting element can be seen through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body, and a second viewing state in which the second rotating body can be seen through the rotating plate portion as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion, blocking the light. This allows for the creation of a high level of decorative appeal using two rotating bodies, the first and second rotating bodies.

In this embodiment, there is a first viewing state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, can be seen through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is the first rotating body; and a second viewing state in which the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, which is the second rotating body, moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, causing the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R to block the light of a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is the light-emitting element, and the left second rotating mechanism member or the right second rotating mechanism member, which is the second rotating body, can be seen through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is the first rotating body. Thus, because the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is movable on the back side of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (which acts as the first rotating body), the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (as the first rotating body) and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R (as the second rotating body) can result in two visible states for the player: a first visible state and a second visible state. Therefore, the decorations performed by the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (as the first rotating body) and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R (as the second rotating body) are diversified.

For example, in this embodiment, in the first viewing state, where the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to the way the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. Specifically, the visibility of light in a specific area of the symbol display section 341, which acts as a light-emitting element and is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, allows for the execution of decorations that provide information about the game to the player. For example, decorations that announce that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (instant notification effect), decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later, and decorations that announce that a jackpot has been drawn during the holding of the right to execute a special symbol game after the jackpot game has ended (holding consecutive win confirmation effect).

Furthermore, when the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which acts as the first rotating body, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R blocks the light from a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R becomes visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. In this second viewing state, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to the viewing manner of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R as seen through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. Specifically, depending on how the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, it becomes possible to perform decorations that provide information about the game to the player, such as decorations that notify the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (instant notification effect), as well as effects that clearly indicate or suggest the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot, as well as decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, as well as decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be performed later, and as well as a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during the reservation of the right to perform the special feature game performed after the jackpot game has ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first viewing state is one in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the second rotating body, thereby the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38 By having a second viewing state in which R blocks light from a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R becomes visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the decorations performed by the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R as the second rotating body are diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 157 to 173.

[Composition of inner frame 12]
Figure 157 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in Figure 157, the game board 31 is provided with a plurality of nails (reference numerals omitted), a windmill 310, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general prize entry opening 313, a first prize entry opening 314, a second prize entry opening 315, a variable prize entry opening 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an out opening 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display unit 36, a first rotating mechanism member 37, a left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and a right second rotating mechanism member 38R.

Multiple nails are driven around the variable display unit 34 on the game board 31, which is molded from transparent resin, and define the movement path of the game balls that are launched onto the game board 31 and flow down along it. Since the game balls are launched by the launcher at 0.6-second intervals, multiple game balls flow down the game board 31 when a player is continuously shooting balls. Game balls launched into the left-side area of the game board 31 move down while rotating, colliding with nails and other objects driven into the left-side area of the game board 31, and following various paths such as a path that can pass through the through gate 317L, a path that interferes with the windmill 310, a path that can enter the general prize pocket 313, and a path that can enter the first prize pocket 314. Here, the game balls launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 flow down the game board 31 with or without passing through the through gate 317, and branch into game balls that enter the general prize pocket 313 and game balls that flow down toward the windmill 310. If a game ball enters the general prize pocket 313, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed as prize balls by the payout device. The game balls that flow down toward the windmill 310 flow toward the windmill 310 from multiple positions above the windmill 310. The game balls whose flow paths are divided by the windmill 310 branch into game balls that flow down toward the first prize pocket 314 and game balls that flow down toward the second prize pocket 315. The game balls that flow down toward the first prize pocket 314 flow down through random trajectories due to multiple nails that have been driven in, and either enter the first prize pocket 314 or flow downwards. The game balls flowing down toward the second prize opening 315 are guided by multiple nails that have been driven in, following random trajectories toward the second prize opening 315. If the electric mechanism 315b is activated, the balls enter the second prize opening 315. If the electric mechanism 315b is not activated, the balls flow down without entering the second prize opening 315 and enter the out opening 318. Meanwhile, the game balls launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 move down while rotating along various paths, such as a path that can pass through the through gate 317R, a path that can enter the variable prize opening 316 when the opening/closing door 319 is activated, and a path that can enter the second prize opening 315 when the electric mechanism 315b is activated. When the balls enter the first prize opening 314 and the second prize opening 315, a jackpot lottery is performed according to the game state. In other words, in this embodiment, multiple nails are positioned so that left-handed shooting (launching game balls to the left side of the game board 31) is advantageous in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and so that right-handed shooting (launching game balls to the right side of the game board 31) is advantageous in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode). Therefore, in this embodiment, left-handed shooting is encouraged in the normal game state, and right-handed shooting is encouraged in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state.

The windmill 310 is integrally molded from transparent resin and includes a bearing portion (not shown), a front rotating plate portion (positioned on the front side of the game machine when installed), and multiple contact plates (to which the game balls make contact). One windmill 310 is provided in the center of the left-side area of the game board 31. Because the windmill 310 is molded from transparent resin, the back side of the front rotating plate portion (not shown) is visible when viewed from the front. The switching of light from decorative light-emitting elements on the game board and light-emitting elements for game board illumination (not shown) located on the back side of the game board can be seen through the front rotating plate portion of the windmill 310. In other words, when the windmill 310 is viewed from the front side of the game machine, the illumination state of the back side of the front rotating plate portion is visible when nothing is present on the back side of the front rotating plate portion. The front rotating plate portion (not shown) is partially painted or notched for decoration, and although it is integrally molded from transparent resin, it is configured to have different light transmittances. The windmill 310 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in a front view due to interference from game balls. Game balls flowing down from above the windmill 310 travel along random trajectories due to nails driven into the game board 31 and strike one of the contact plates of the windmill 310 from multiple directions. At this time, depending on the timing, multiple game balls may flow down towards the windmill 310 and strike the contact plates simultaneously. When a game ball strikes a contact plate, the kinetic energy of the game ball is transmitted to the windmill 310, and the transmitted kinetic energy causes the entire windmill 310 to rotate around its axis. Multiple contact plates of the windmill 310 (not shown) distribute game balls that flow down from the upper left of the game board 31 and strike one of the contact plates of the windmill 310 to either the left or right side of the windmill 310's axis of rotation. At this time, since the windmill 310 is molded from transparent resin, the game balls flow down from the area outside the front rotating plate, flow down to the back side of the front rotating plate and come into contact with the contact plate, and the windmill 310, which is rotated by the kinetic energy of the game balls, can be seen from the front of the game machine as it sorts the game balls. Game balls sorted to the left by the windmill 310 move along a path that makes it impossible to enter the first prize opening 314. On the other hand, game balls sorted to the right by the windmill 310 can move along a path that makes it possible to enter the first prize opening 314. In other words, the windmill 310 sorts game balls that flow down from the upper left of the game board 31 and interfere with the windmill 310 into a left path that is disadvantageous to the player in that it makes it impossible to enter the first prize opening 314, and a right path that is advantageous to the player in that it makes it possible to enter the first prize opening 314. Then, when the kinetic energy transmitted from the game ball becomes zero, the rotation stops and the windmill comes to a stationary state. Because the windmill 310 is molded from transparent resin, multiple viewing states are possible through the front rotating plate section, which allows visibility of the back side. These include a state where the game board's illumination is visible, a state where the game board's lights are off, and a state where the game balls are moving towards the back of the front rotating plate section.

The arrangement of the multiple nails is not limited to the example shown in Figure 157 and can be changed as appropriate. Similarly, the number and arrangement of the windmills 310 are not limited to the example shown in Figure 157 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple windmills 310 may be provided, and in addition to being provided in the left-hand area of the game board 31, they may also be provided in the right-hand area of the game board 31. Furthermore, the windmills 310 are always capable of rotation. Therefore, they can rotate whenever a game ball makes contact with them, and may rotate while a player is playing the pinball game, whether during a jackpot, during a variation game, or even when the variation game is stopped.

The variable display unit 34 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332 and includes a pattern display unit 341 that displays still images or moving images visible from the front. The pattern display unit 341 is configured to be, for example, a liquid crystal display, dot matrix display, plasma display, or organic EL display. In other words, the pattern display unit 341 only needs to be capable of displaying still images or moving images by emitting light to the front.

In this embodiment, the light-emitting means of the present invention is configured as a pattern display unit 341 capable of emitting light toward the front. However, the light-emitting means of the present invention only needs to be capable of emitting light that is visible when viewed from the front of the game board. It may be capable of emitting light toward the front, or it may be capable of emitting light toward directions other than the front (for example, directions along the surface of the game board (e.g., horizontal directions such as left and right, vertical directions such as up and down, diagonal directions)).

Here, Figures 158 to 161 are reference drawings used to explain the first rotating mechanism member 37. Specifically, Figure 158 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is in the operating position in its reduced state; Figure 159 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is in the operating position in its enlarged state; Figure 160 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37; and Figure 161 is a side view showing the periphery of the first rotating mechanism member 37 with a portion broken off.

As shown in Figures 158 to 161, the first rotating mechanism member 37, as will be described in detail later, is capable of moving up and down, rotating, and expanding and contracting by the first rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), and operates in special feature games and jackpot games to perform effects that provide the player with predetermined information related to the game, either independently or in cooperation with the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, as will be described later. Here, the prescribed information related to the game includes information that explicitly or suggestively indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a jackpot; information that explicitly or suggestively indicates the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a jackpot; information that explicitly or suggestively indicates the expected probability that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a jackpot; information that explicitly or suggestively indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special symbol game, which is executed after the completion of the special symbol game, is a jackpot when there is a reservation of the right to execute the special symbol game; and information that explicitly or suggestively indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special symbol game, which is executed after the completion of the jackpot game, is a jackpot when there is a reservation of the right to execute the special symbol game (information that explicitly or suggestively indicates a so-called reserved consecutive win).

In this embodiment, the first rotating mechanism member 37 works in cooperation with the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R during special feature games to clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot) and whether or not there are consecutive wins.

The first rotating mechanism member 37 has a flower-like shape when viewed from the front in its reduced state and is positioned on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The installation location of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is not limited to the front side of the symbol display unit 341; for example, it may be installed on the path of the game balls. In this case, it is conceivable to protect the first rotating mechanism member 37 with nails to prevent collisions with game balls. Of course, when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned on the path of the game balls, protection from the game balls may be provided not only by nails but also by materials such as resin. Furthermore, when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned on the path of the game balls, it may be designed to be subject to the action of the game balls. That is, the first rotating mechanism member 37 may or may not be subject to the action of the game balls. The first rotating mechanism member 37 comprises a plurality of plate-like members 370, 371, a rotating shaft 372, and a plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373.

The multiple plate-like members 370 and 371 have a shape resembling flower petals and include a first plate-like member 370 and a second plate-like member 371. Each plate-like member 370 and 371 is, for example, entirely formed of resin.

The first plate-shaped member 370 includes a translucent region 370A, which is circular in front view and has light-transmitting properties that allow the back side to be seen. The translucent region 370A is formed to have higher light transmittance than other regions of the first plate-shaped member 370. When the entire first plate-shaped member 370 is formed of resin, the translucent region 370A is formed of, for example, a transparent resin or a translucent resin. Note that regions of the first plate-shaped member 370 other than the translucent region 370A may be formed to allow the back side to be seen, or to make the back side invisible or difficult to see.

Such a translucent region 370A can be formed, for example, by forming a transparent resin molded product, which is a pre-processed product of the first plate-shaped member 370, by resin molding, and then applying paint to the areas of the resin molded product other than the region that will become the translucent region 370A. Alternatively, the translucent region 370A can also be formed by insert molding, for example, a circular-shaped member formed from a transparent or translucent resin.

Furthermore, the translucent region 370A may be either colored transparent or colorless transparent, as long as it has higher translucency than other regions of the first plate-shaped member 370 and allows visibility of the back side. Also, the front view shape of the translucent region 370A is not limited to a circle; other shapes are also possible. Additionally, the translucent region 370A may be formed as a through-hole. When the translucent region 370A is formed as a through-hole, it can be formed more easily than when it is formed by insert molding.

Furthermore, the translucent region 370A may be formed as a magnifying lens. In this way, when the translucent region 370A is formed as a magnifying lens, the display of predetermined information visible through the translucent region 370A is magnified, making it easier for the player to grasp the predetermined information. For example, if the information display sections 383L, 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the information display sections 383R, 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are visible through the translucent region 370A, the information presented by the information display sections 383L, 384L, 383R, 384R (e.g., type of jackpot, whether or not there are consecutive wins) will be magnified. Also, if a predetermined area of the symbol display section 341 is visible through the translucent region 370A, the information presented in the predetermined area (e.g., the result of the jackpot lottery) will be magnified. This makes it possible to implement a so-called "instant notification" feature in special-feature games, which clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first plate-like member 370 was provided with a translucent region 370A that had higher light transmission than the surrounding area. However, it is not necessarily required to set up a translucent region 370A; for example, the first plate-like member 370 may be formed so that its overall light transmission is uniform or substantially uniform.

On the other hand, the second plate-shaped member 371 has basically the same appearance as the first plate-shaped member 370, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. However, it differs from the first plate-shaped member 370 in that it does not have a translucent region 370A. Furthermore, the second plate-shaped member 371 can be modified in the same way as the first plate-shaped member 370, to the extent that it is applicable.

The rotating shaft 372 is the part to which rotational driving force is input from the first rotating mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), described later, and extends in the front-to-back direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display unit 341. The rotating shaft 372 is brought into a predetermined rotational state by the input of rotational force from the first rotating mechanism 37a according to the control of the MPU 51, and is brought into a non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) when the input of rotational force from the first rotating mechanism 37a is stopped according to the control of the MPU 51.

Furthermore, the rotational speed of the rotating shaft 372 (the multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371) in a predetermined rotational state, i.e., the rotational speed of the first rotating component member 37, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, or even changeable in rotational speed or direction.

Multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are fixed radially to the rotation axis 372 in a front view. Therefore, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are rotatable around the rotation axis 372 as the rotation of the rotation axis 372 occurs. The rotation axis 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to the lifting shaft 374, and its movement in the forward and backward direction is restricted by a regulating ring 376. Here, the lifting shaft 374 moves the rotation axis 372 in the vertical direction, and moves the rotation axis 372 in the vertical direction by a driving force input from the first rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), which will be described later. As a result, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is able to move in the vertical direction as a whole when the rotation axis 372 moves in the vertical direction. In other words, the first rotating mechanism member 37 can move downward to approach the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, and can move upward to move away from the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R.

Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 supports one plate-shaped member 370, 371, and is capable of sliding the supported plate-shaped members 370, 371 along the radial direction of the rotation axis 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 converts the rotational force input from, for example, the first rotating component drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), described later, into a linear force, thereby sliding the supported plate-shaped members 370, 371 along the radial direction of the rotation axis 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can employ a known mechanism for converting rotational force into a linear force. Specifically, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can be an actuator containing one or more components such as a rack, screw shaft, ball screw, endless belt, wire, chain, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, or rollers. Furthermore, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 may utilize magnetic or electromagnetic force.

Thus, in the first rotating mechanism member 37, the rotation axis 372 is rotatably supported by the lifting shaft 374, and plate-shaped members 370 and 371 are slidably supported one by one by multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 arranged radially from the rotation axis 372. Therefore, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is movable vertically, rotatable around the rotation axis 372, and expandable/contractable around the rotation axis 372 on the front side of the symbol display section 341.

Here, Figure 169 is a block diagram showing an example of the main components of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10.

As shown in Figure 169, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled for vertical movement, rotation, and expansion/contraction via a first rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 37a controlled by the MPU 51. The first rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 via an input/output interface 52. This first rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 37a includes, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting when the first rotating mechanism member 37 has returned to its standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors and DC motors, and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor and a contact sensor. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 372, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 and the lifting shaft 374 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 372, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 and the lifting shaft 374. The first rotating mechanism member 37 is movable vertically on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 between a predetermined standby position shown in Figure 157 (a position shown by a dashed line in Figure 158) in which the first rotating mechanism member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A, and an operating position shown by a solid line in Figure 158, which is set lower than the standby position and in which the entire first rotating mechanism member 37 is exposed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 160, the first rotating mechanism member 37 can rotate counterclockwise on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by inputting rotational force to the rotation shaft 372. The rotation position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 can be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the first rotating mechanism member 37 rotates in the operating position. Moreover, the first rotating mechanism member 37 can expand and contract by inputting driving force to the expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, causing the plate-shaped members 370 and 371 to slide radially along the rotation shaft 372 on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The first rotating mechanism member 37 can rotate on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in both the contracted state (see Figure 160(A)) and the expanded state (see Figure 160(B)).

Furthermore, the first rotating mechanism 37a has a motor driver connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver can also acquire detection results from the return detection unit and transmit them to the sound lamp control device 5. Alternatively, the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and the return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration of the first rotating mechanism 37a, and similarly, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration of the first rotating mechanism 37a. That is, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration for moving the first rotating mechanism 37 up and down, rotating, and expanding and contracting.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating mechanism member 37 is not limited to that provided by a motor, but may also be obtained by a solenoid or by the action of game balls. Specifically, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating mechanism member 37 can be power obtained from the out balls discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the out port 318, or power obtained from game balls other than the out balls flowing down the game board 31. As an example, it is conceivable that a rotating body such as a gear is constantly rotated by the action of game balls moving on the front or back side of the game board 31, and the rotational force of the rotating body is transmitted to the first rotating mechanism member 37 by connecting the rotating body to the first rotating mechanism member 37 as needed, thereby rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating mechanism member 37. As another example, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating mechanism 37 could be the electricity generated by the action of the game balls moving along the front or back side of the game board 31. For example, electricity could be generated by the rotation of a rotating body due to the action of the game balls, or by the deformation of a piezoelectric element due to the collision of the game balls with the piezoelectric element. Furthermore, the electricity generated by the action of the game balls could be stored or used. Specifically, the electricity generated by the action of the game balls could be stored in a power storage device, and this stored electricity could be used to rotate and expand/contract the first rotating mechanism 37.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is in an enlarged state in the operating position, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, which are located on the back side of the first rotating mechanism member 37 and on the front side of the pattern display section 341, can move behind the multiple plate-shaped members 370 and 371 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 when they move to the operating position (see Figures 165 to 167). Therefore, when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is in an enlarged state in the operating position, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R move behind the multiple plate-like members 370 and 371 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, thereby blocking the light from a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front, and making the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-like member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (see Figure 167). On the other hand, if the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are not behind the multiple plate-like members 370 and 371 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the light from a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front can be seen through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-like member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37.

Thus, in this embodiment, there are two states: one in which the light from a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front is visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and another in which the light from a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front is blocked, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. As a result, two states can be achieved by the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, thus diversifying the effects performed by the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R. For example, when the light from a specific area emitted from the symbol display section 341 toward the front can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to the way the light from the specific area is seen through the translucent area 370A. Specifically, depending on the way the light from the specific area is seen through the translucent area 370A, it becomes possible to perform effects that provide the player with predetermined information about the game (for example, information regarding the results of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game or the reserved special symbol game). On the other hand, when the light from a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 toward the front is blocked, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, it becomes possible to perform a presentation that provides the player with predetermined information regarding the game (for example, information regarding the results of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game or the reserved special feature game) depending on how the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A.

Furthermore, in the two states realized by the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, the effects that provide the player with predetermined information about the game include, for example, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a jackpot, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a jackpot, and an effect that indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a jackpot. Examples include effects that explicitly or suggest the expected level of wins, effects that explicitly or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special symbol game, which is executed after the completion of the special symbol game, is a jackpot (reservation pre-announcement effects), and effects that explicitly or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special symbol game, which is executed after the completion of the jackpot game, is a jackpot (so-called reserved consecutive win effects). Thus, by having two types of states realized by the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, the effects executed by the operation of the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the first rotating mechanism member 37 can independently perform a presentation that provides the player with predetermined information about the game. For example, by displaying an image corresponding to predetermined information on the symbol display unit 341, and making the image visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37, a presentation that provides the player with predetermined information about the game can be performed. In this case, it is also conceivable to display multiple images corresponding to predetermined information about the game to the player, and make one of these images visible through the translucent area 370A, thereby performing a presentation that provides the player with predetermined information about the game.

Figures 162(A) to 162(C) illustrate visual examples when the first rotating mechanism 37 independently performs a roulette animation in a special game to indicate whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not. Specifically, Figure 162(A) is an example image of the symbol display unit 341 in the roulette animation, Figure 162(B) is a visual example when the roulette animation indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and Figure 162(C) is a visual example when the roulette animation indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss.

As shown in Figure 162(A), in a special game, when the first rotating mechanism 37 independently performs a roulette animation to inform the player whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not, the symbol display unit 341 displays multiple notification images 40A to 40E (five in the illustrated example). These multiple notification images 40A to 40E include two jackpot notification images 40A and 40B that indicate a jackpot, and three loss notification images 40C to 40E that indicate a loss. The jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E are displayed in a distinguishable manner. In the example shown in Figure 162(A), the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B are displayed as black circles, and the loss notification images 40C to 40E are displayed as white circles, thus making them distinguishable.

Furthermore, the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and the miss notification images 40C to 40E only need to be displayed in a way that allows them to be distinguished. They are not limited to circles; they may be displayed in other shapes, and are not limited to black or white; they may be displayed in other colors. Additionally, the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and the miss notification images 40C to 40E may be distinguished using text or symbols. For example, jackpot notification images 40A and 40B could be displayed as images that explicitly or suggest a jackpot, such as "Win," "WIN," or "○," while miss notification images 40C to 40E could be displayed as images that explicitly or suggest a miss, such as "Out," "LOSE," or "×." Also, instead of, or in addition to, multiple notification images 40A to 40E, an image suggesting the probability of a jackpot may be displayed. For example, in addition to text images such as "Chance," "Big Chance," "Super Hot," or "Guaranteed" (indicating a jackpot), the probability of a jackpot could be displayed as "○○%."

Furthermore, the multiple notification images 40A to 40E are displayed on the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is in a reduced state. In the example shown in Figure 162(A), the multiple notification images 40A to 40E are displayed at equal intervals on the lower half of the arc of the rotational trajectory. This allows the first rotating mechanism member 37, rotating in a reduced state, to stop at a position corresponding to one of the multiple notification images 40A to 40E, making it possible to view any of the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the losing notification images 40C to 40E through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370. In other words, five stopping positions for the first rotating mechanism member 37 in the roulette presentation are set, each allowing any of the multiple notification images 40A to 40E to be viewed through the translucent region 370A.

For example, if the first rotating mechanism member 37, which rotates in a reduced state, is a jackpot, it stops at a position where the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B are visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 (see Figure 162(B)). On the other hand, if the first rotating mechanism member 37, which rotates in a reduced state, is a loss, it stops at a position where the loss notification images 40C to 40E are visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 (see Figure 162(C)).

In this embodiment, the multiple notification images 40A to 40E were displayed on the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating mechanism member 37 was in a reduced state. However, the multiple notification images 40A to 40E may also be displayed on the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating mechanism member 37 was in an enlarged state. In this case, by controlling the stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 rotating in the enlarged state, it is possible to make any of the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, five notification images 40A to 40E were arranged at equal intervals in the lower half of the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370. However, the number of notification images 40A to 40E is not particularly limited as long as it includes two or more types capable of notifying different information, such as jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and loss notification images 40C to 40E. Moreover, the multiple notification images 40A to 40E do not necessarily need to be arranged at equal intervals. Furthermore, the multiple notification images 40A to 40E may be displayed not only in the lower half of the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A, but also in different ranges than those shown in Figure 162(A), such as the upper half, left half, right half, or the entire rotational trajectory.

Here, Figure 162(D) shows an example of the rotation pattern of the first rotating mechanism 37 in a roulette-style presentation in a special-feature game, where the first rotating mechanism 37 alone notifies whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not. This pattern represents the viewing order of the notification images 40A to 40E visible through the translucent region 370A. In Figure 162(D), "40A," "40B," etc., indicate that the first rotating mechanism 37 is temporarily stopped or stopped at a position where the corresponding notification images 40A to 40E are visible through the translucent region 370A. Figure 162(E) shows an example of a stopping pattern in the roulette presentation.

As shown in Figure 162(D), in this embodiment, six types of rotation patterns, A to F, are set for the first rotating mechanism member 37 in the roulette presentation. Details of rotation patterns A to F will be described later. Which of rotation patterns A to F is executed is determined randomly, for example, based on a predetermined lottery. Furthermore, which of the multiple notification images 40A to 40E is ultimately visible through the translucent area 370A, i.e., the final stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37, is determined, for example, by a predetermined lottery based on the jackpot lottery result.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 162(E), in this embodiment, four types of stopping patterns, A to D, are set for the roulette animation. That is, in the roulette animation, after one of the rotation patterns A to F is executed, one of the stopping patterns A to D is executed, causing the first rotating mechanism member 37 to stop at a predetermined final position. The result of the jackpot lottery—whether it is a jackpot or a loss—is then indicated by the type of notification image 40A to 40E, which is visible through the translucent area 370A.

In the rotation pattern A shown in Figure 162(D), the initial stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is such that the jackpot notification image 40A can be seen through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162(B)). Subsequently, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is intermittently rotated clockwise by predetermined angles (for example, 45°), so that the jackpot notification image 40B, the miss notification image 40C, the miss notification image 40D, and the miss notification image 40E can be seen sequentially through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern A, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is rotated clockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 180°), making the jackpot notification image 40A visible again through the translucent area 370A. Then, as needed, it is intermittently rotated clockwise in predetermined angles (e.g., 45°) until, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery, one of the notification images 40A to 40E is stopped or temporarily stopped in a state where it is visible through the translucent area 370A.

In rotation pattern B, similar to rotation pattern A, the initial stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is such that the jackpot notification image 40A is visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162(B)). Subsequently, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is intermittently rotated clockwise in predetermined angles (e.g., 45°) increments, so that the jackpot notification image 40B, the miss notification image 40C, the miss notification image 40D, and the miss notification image 40E are sequentially visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern B, contrary to rotation pattern A, the mechanism is intermittently rotated counterclockwise in predetermined angles (e.g., 45°) as needed, so that, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery, one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A and either stops or temporarily stops.

In rotation pattern C, the initial stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is such that the loss notification image 40E can be seen through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162(C)). Subsequently, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is intermittently rotated counterclockwise by predetermined angles (e.g., 45°) increments, so that the loss notification image 40D, loss notification image 40C, jackpot notification image 40B, and jackpot notification image 40A can be seen sequentially through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern C, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is rotated counterclockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 180°), making the loss notification image 40E visible again through the translucent area 370A. Then, as needed, it is intermittently rotated counterclockwise in predetermined angles (e.g., 45°) until, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery, one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A, at which point it stops or is temporarily stopped.

In rotation pattern D, similar to rotation pattern C, the initial stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is such that the loss notification image 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162(C)). Subsequently, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is intermittently rotated counterclockwise in predetermined angles (e.g., 45°) increments, so that the loss notification image 40D, loss notification image 40C, jackpot notification image 40B, and jackpot notification image 40A are sequentially visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern D, contrary to rotation pattern C, the mechanism is intermittently rotated clockwise in predetermined angles (e.g., 45°) as needed, so that, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery, one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A and either stops or temporarily stops.

In rotation pattern E, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is rotated at high speed in a clockwise direction, and then stops or temporarily stops in a state where one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A.

In rotation pattern F, contrary to rotation pattern E, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is rotated at high speed in a counterclockwise direction, and then stops or temporarily stops in a state where one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A.

The stopping pattern A shown in Figure 162(E) is a pattern in which the first rotating mechanism 37 stops directly at a predetermined final stopping position, and the first rotating mechanism 37 does not rotate again afterward.

Stop Pattern B is a pattern in which, before the final stop, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is alternately rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) between a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A and a position where the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent area 370A. Afterward, it stops at a predetermined final stop position where either the jackpot notification image 40B or the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent area 370A. This Stop Pattern B is executed when the final stop position is determined to be either a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A, or a position where the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent area 370A.

Stop patterns C and D can be executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and the final stopping position is determined to be a position where the jackpot notification image 40B can be seen through the translucent area 370A. Specifically, in stop pattern C, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is temporarily stopped at a position where the loss notification image 40C can be seen through the translucent area 370A, and then the first rotating mechanism member 37 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°) so that the first rotating mechanism member 37 stops at a position where the jackpot notification image 40B can be seen through the translucent area 370A. On the other hand, in stop pattern D, similar to stop pattern C, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is temporarily stopped in a position where the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent area 370A. Then, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is rotated clockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 135°), causing it to stop in a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A.

Thus, in the roulette presentation using the first rotating mechanism 37, the combination of rotation patterns A to F and stopping patterns A to D of the first rotating mechanism 37 allows for greater diversification and variety in the presentation and decorative elements. Furthermore, players can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on the notification images 40A to 40E, which are ultimately visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism 37, as the roulette presentation is executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the rotation and stopping patterns in the roulette presentation using the first rotating mechanism 37 are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 162(D) and 162(E), but can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a roulette-style presentation was described in which the first rotating mechanism 37 alone announces whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a miss in a special feature game. However, the roulette presentation by the first rotating mechanism 37 may also be performed in a special feature game as a presentation to announce whether it is a probability-increasing jackpot or a regular jackpot, or, if a regular jackpot is announced in a special feature game, it may be performed as an upgrade presentation in a jackpot game to announce that it is a probability-increasing jackpot.

Furthermore, in the roulette presentation of this embodiment, the notification images 40A to 40E displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. However, instead of making the notification images 40A to 40E displayed on the symbol display unit 341 visible, multiple lamps such as LEDs may be arranged on the back side of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and the luminescence pattern of the lamps visible through the translucent area 370A—for example, color, on, off, flashing—may indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won, or the type of jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is made movable along a linear path in the vertical direction. However, it may also be movable in directions other than vertical, such as left-right or diagonal directions, or along non-linear paths such as meandering or arc-shaped paths, or it may be movable along multiple different paths. Additionally, the first rotating mechanism member 37 may be immovable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the standby position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is set to a position where a portion is exposed from the opening 31A, and the operating position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is set to the center of the symbol display section 341. However, the standby position and the operating position are not particularly limited and may be set, for example, around the symbol display section 341 in a front view, directly above or inside the various prize entry points 313-316, or around the windmill 310 as a rotating body. Also, at least one of the standby position and the operating position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 may be set to multiple positions.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first rotating component member 37 was made expandable and contractible by the sliding movement of multiple plate-like members 370 and 371. However, the first rotating component member 37 may not be expandable or contractible, and may consist of only one plate-like member.

Here, Figures 163 to 167 are diagrams illustrating the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R. Specifically, Figure 163 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are in the operating position, Figure 164 is a front view showing an example of the rotation of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, and Figure 165 shows the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is in an enlarged state in the operating position. Figure 166 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the rotating mechanism member 38R is in the operating position. Figure 166 is a side view showing a portion of the area around the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L (right second rotating mechanism member 38R), with a breakaway section. Figure 167 is a front view of the game board 31 showing an example of the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R.

As shown in Figures 163 to 167, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are positioned on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. As will be described in detail later, they are independently capable of vertical movement and rotation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by the left second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38La or the right second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38Ra (see Figure 169). In special feature games and jackpot games, they operate in cooperation with the first rotating mechanism member 37 to perform effects that provide the player with predetermined game information related to the game.

Furthermore, the installation locations of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are not limited to the front side of the symbol display unit 341; they may, for example, be installed on the path of the game balls. In this case, it is conceivable to protect the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R from collisions with game balls using nails. Of course, when the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are placed on the path of the game balls, protection from the game balls may be provided not only by nails but also by materials such as resin. Also, when the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are placed on the path of the game balls, they may be subjected to the action of the game balls. That is, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may or may not be subjected to the action of the game balls.

The second rotating mechanism member 38L on the left works in cooperation with the first rotating mechanism member 37 to display predetermined game information related to the game during special feature games and jackpot games. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is used in special feature games when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, and is used to clearly indicate the type of 5R jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot). This second rotating mechanism member 38L on the left comprises a rotating main body 381L and a rotating shaft 382L.

The rotating main body 381L is formed in a plate shape having an oval shape when viewed from the front, and is positioned on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating main body 381L is provided with an information display unit 383L at one end and an information display unit 384L at the other end. At least the information display unit 383L at one end and the information display unit 384L at the other end of the rotating main body 381L are formed so that their back sides are invisible or difficult to see. This allows the information display units 383L and 384L to block light emitted from the front side of the pattern display unit 341. Note that the entire rotating main body 381L may be formed so that its back side is invisible or difficult to see, or only the information display units 383L and 384L may be formed so that their back sides are invisible or difficult to see, while the other parts are translucent.

In this embodiment, the information display section 383L at one end displays "SMALL," and the information display section 384L at the other end displays "small." As will be described in detail later, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the "SMALL" text on the information display section 383L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is stopped at a predetermined position. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, the "small" text on the information display section 384L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is stopped at a predetermined position (see Figure 168).

In other words, in this embodiment, a 5R jackpot is indicated by the letters "SMALL" and "small" being visible through the translucent region 370A, and it is possible to distinguish between a probability-increasing jackpot and a regular jackpot depending on whether the letters are uppercase or lowercase.

In this embodiment, the distinction between a guaranteed jackpot and a regular jackpot is made possible by whether the characters visible through the translucent area 370A are uppercase or lowercase letters of the alphabet. However, the distinction may also be made by the type of characters, such as kanji, hiragana, numbers, or symbols. Furthermore, the distinction may also be made by the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent area 370A. For example, a guaranteed jackpot may be indicated when the characters or symbols visible through the translucent area 370A are rainbow-colored, and a regular jackpot may be indicated when the characters or symbols visible through the translucent area 370A are a color other than rainbow-colored (e.g., black).

Furthermore, the information display sections 383L and 384L of the rotating main body 381L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L can be easily formed by painting or other means, but they may also be formed using various display devices such as liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, and dot matrix displays. In this case, the display modes of the information display sections 383L and 384L will be diversified, making it possible to provide the player with more diverse information about the game using the left second rotating mechanism member 38L. This allows for a greater diversification of the effects performed using the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The rotating shaft 382L is the part to which rotational driving force is input from the left second rotating mechanism 38La (see Figure 169), which will be described later. This rotating shaft 382L is fixed to the center of the rear side of the rotating main body 381L on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, so as to extend in the front-rear direction toward the pattern display unit 341. The rotating shaft 382L is put into a rotating state when rotational force is input from the left second rotating mechanism 38La according to the control of the MPU 51, and is put into a non-rotating state when the input of rotational force from the left second rotating mechanism 38La is stopped according to the control of the MPU 51. As a result, the rotating main body 381L can rotate together with the rotating shaft 382L around the rotating shaft 382L, and the entire left second rotating mechanism 38L can rotate. In other words, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L can move upward to approach the first rotating mechanism member 37, and can move downward to move away from the first rotating mechanism member 37.

Furthermore, the rotational speed of the rotating shaft 382L (rotating main body 381L) in a predetermined rotational state, i.e., the rotational speed of the left second rotating component member 38L, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, or even changeable in rotational speed or direction.

The rotating shaft 382L is rotatably supported by a support ring 386L fixed to the lifting shaft 385L, and its movement in the forward and backward direction is restricted by a regulating ring 387L. Here, the lifting shaft 385L can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382L on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by a driving force input from the left second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38La (see Figure 169), which will be described later. As a result, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L can move vertically between a standby position (see Figures 157 and 158) where it is visible without passing through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and an operating position (see Figure 163) where a portion is visible through the translucent region 370A.

As shown in Figure 169, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is controlled for vertical movement and rotation via a left second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38La controlled by the MPU 51. The left second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38La is connected to the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 via an input/output I/F 52. This left second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38La includes, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting when the left second rotating mechanism member 38L has returned to its standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors and DC motors, and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor and a contact sensor. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 382L and the lifting shaft 385L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 382L and the lifting shaft 385L. The left second rotating mechanism member 38L is made movable vertically between a standby position (see Figure 158) and an operating position (see Figure 163) by the driving force input from the motor to the lifting shaft 385L. In addition, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is made rotatable counterclockwise on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by the rotation of the rotation shaft 382L, which is rotated by the driving force input from the motor to the rotation shaft 382L. The rotation position of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L may be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is rotated in the operating position.

Furthermore, the motor driver for the left second rotating mechanism 38La is connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver can also acquire detection results from the return detection unit and transmit them to the sound lamp control device 5. Alternatively, the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and the return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration of the left second rotating component drive mechanism 38La. That is, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration for moving the left second rotating component drive mechanism 38La up and down and rotating it.

Furthermore, the rotating main body 381L is positioned closer to the pattern display unit 341 than the multiple plate-shaped members 370 and 371 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. Therefore, as described later, in the enlarged state when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is moved down to the operating position (see Figure 159), when the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is moved up to the operating position (see Figure 163), the information display unit 383L at one end and the information display unit 384L at the other end can be positioned on the back side of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 (see Figures 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating mechanism member 37 rotates in an enlarged state at the operating position, and the rotating main body 381L rotates at the operating position (see Figures 165 and 166), the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the rotational trajectory of the information display sections 383L and 384L of the rotating main body 381L in the left second rotating mechanism member 38L intersect, and at a predetermined timing in special feature games or jackpot games, the translucent region At the point where 370A and the information display units 383L and 384L intersect, the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L are set to a predetermined stopping state. This blocks the light emitted from the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, allowing the displays on the information display units 383L and 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, located behind the translucent area 370A, to be visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 167(A)).

The second rotating mechanism member 38R on the right works in cooperation with the first rotating mechanism member 37 to display predetermined game information related to the game in special feature games and jackpot games. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is used in special feature games when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R jackpot. This second rotating mechanism member 38R on the right comprises a rotating main body 381R and a rotating shaft 382R.

The rotating main body 381R is formed in a plate shape having an oval shape when viewed from the front, and is positioned on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating main body 381R is provided with an information display unit 383R at one end and an information display unit 384R at the other end. At least the information display unit 383R at one end and the information display unit 384R at the other end of the rotating main body 381R are formed so that their back sides are invisible or difficult to see. This allows the information display units 383R and 384R to block light emitted from the front side of the pattern display unit 341. Note that the entire rotating main body 381R may be formed so that its back side is invisible or difficult to see, or only the information display units 383R and 384R may be formed so that their back sides are invisible or difficult to see, while the other parts are translucent.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 383R at one end displays "BIG," and the information display unit 384R at the other end displays "big." As will be described in detail later, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and the reserved right to perform the special symbol game includes a jackpot lottery result, the "BIG" characters on the information display unit 383R are visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is stopped at a predetermined position (see Figure 168). In other words, the "BIG" characters on the information display unit 383R are used to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a 16R jackpot and a reserved consecutive win. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R regular jackpot, and the jackpot lottery result is not included among the reserved rights to perform the special symbol game, the word "big" on the information display unit 384R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is stopped at a predetermined position (see Figure 168). That is, the word "big" on the information display unit 384R is used to clearly indicate or suggest that it is a 16R jackpot and there are no reserved consecutive wins.

In other words, in this embodiment, the characters visible through the translucent region 370A are the letters "BIG" and "big," indicating a 16R jackpot. The presence or absence of a reserved jackpot can be distinguished by whether the letters are uppercase or lowercase.

In this embodiment, the presence or absence of a reserved bonus round can be distinguished by whether the characters visible through the translucent area 370A are uppercase or lowercase letters of the alphabet. However, the presence or absence of a reserved bonus round can also be distinguished by the type of characters, such as kanji, hiragana, numbers, or symbols. Furthermore, the presence or absence of a reserved bonus round can also be distinguished by the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent area 370A. For example, if the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent area 370A is rainbow-colored, a reserved bonus round may be executed, and if the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent area 370A is a color other than rainbow-colored (e.g., black), it may be indicated that a reserved bonus round will not be executed.

Furthermore, the information display sections 383R and 384R of the rotating main body 381R in the right second rotating mechanism member 38R can be easily formed by painting or other means, but they may also be formed using various display devices such as liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, and dot matrix displays. In this case, the display modes of the information display sections 383R and 384R will be diversified, making it possible to provide the player with more diverse information about the game using the right second rotating mechanism member 38R. This allows for a greater diversification of the effects performed using the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The rotating shaft 382R is the part to which rotational driving force is input from the right second rotating mechanism 38La (see Figure 169), which will be described later. This rotating shaft 382R is fixed to the center of the rear side of the rotating main body 381R, extending in the front-to-back direction toward the pattern display unit 341, on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating shaft 382R is brought into a predetermined rotational state by the input of rotational force from the right second rotating mechanism 38Ra according to the control of the MPU 51, and is brought into a non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) by the stopping of the input of rotational force from the right second rotating mechanism 38Ra according to the control of the MPU 51. As a result, the rotating main body 381R can rotate together with the rotating shaft 382R around the rotating shaft 382R, and the entire right second rotating mechanism 38R can rotate.

Furthermore, the rotational speed of the rotating shaft 382R (rotating main body 381R) in a predetermined rotational state, i.e., the rotational speed of the right second rotating component member 38R, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, or even changeable in rotational speed or direction.

The rotating shaft 382R is rotatably supported by a support ring 386R fixed to the lifting shaft 385R, and its movement in the forward and backward direction is restricted by a regulating ring 387R. Here, the lifting shaft 385R can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382R on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by a driving force input from the right second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38Ra (see Figure 169), which will be described later. As a result, the right second rotating mechanism member 38R can move vertically between a standby position (see Figures 157 and 158) in which it is visible without passing through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and an operating position (see Figure 163) in which a part of it is visible through the translucent region 370A. In other words, the right second rotating mechanism member 38R can move upward to approach the first rotating mechanism member 37, and can move downward to move away from the first rotating mechanism member 37.

As shown in Figure 169, the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is controlled for vertical movement and rotation via a right second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38Ra controlled by the MPU 51. The right second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38Ra is connected to the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 via an input/output I/F 52. This right second rotating mechanism member drive mechanism 38Ra includes, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting when the right second rotating mechanism member 38R has returned to its standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors and DC motors, and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor and a contact sensor. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 382R and the lifting shaft 385R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 382R and the lifting shaft 385R. The right second rotating mechanism member 38R is made movable vertically between a standby position (see Figure 158) and an operating position (see Figure 163) by the driving force input from the motor to the lifting shaft 385R. In addition, the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is made rotatable counterclockwise on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by the rotation of the rotation shaft 382R, which is rotated by the driving force input from the motor to the rotation shaft 382R. The rotation position of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is rotated in the operating position.

Furthermore, the motor driver for the second rotating component drive mechanism 38Ra on the right is connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver can also acquire detection results from the return detection unit and transmit them to the sound lamp control device 5. Alternatively, the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and the return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration of the second rotating component drive mechanism 38Ra. That is, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration for moving the second rotating component drive mechanism 38Ra up and down and rotating it.

Furthermore, the rotating main body 381R is positioned closer to the pattern display unit 341 than the multiple plate-shaped members 370 and 371 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. Therefore, as described later, in the enlarged state when the first rotating mechanism member 37 is moved down to the operating position (see Figure 159), when the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is moved up to the operating position (see Figure 163), the information display unit 383R at one end and the information display unit 384R at the other end can be positioned on the back side of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 (see Figures 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating mechanism member 37 rotates in an enlarged state at the operating position, and the rotating main body 381R rotates at the operating position (see Figures 165 and 166), the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the rotational trajectory of the information display sections 383R and 384R of the rotating main body 381R in the right second rotating mechanism member 38R intersect, and therefore, at a predetermined timing in special feature games and jackpot games, the translucent region At the point where 370A and the information display units 383R and 384R intersect, the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are set to a predetermined stopping state. This blocks the light emitted from the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, allowing the displays on the information display units 383R and 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, located behind the translucent area 370A, to be visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 167(B)).

Thus, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing during a special feature game or a jackpot game, the first rotating mechanism member 37, which rotates in the operating position, is set to a predetermined stop state, while the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, which rotate in the operating position, are also set to a predetermined stop state. This allows the information display units 383L, 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or 383R, 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R to be visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (see Figure 167(B)). Therefore, in this embodiment, depending on the type of information display unit 383L, 384L, 383R, 384R that is visible through the translucent region 370A, predetermined information for the game (information regarding the type of jackpot and whether or not there are consecutive wins) is presented, and the player can grasp this information. Therefore, when the first rotating mechanism 37, the left second rotating mechanism 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism 38R are activated during special feature games or jackpot games, players can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on the types of information display units 383L, 384L, 383R, and 384R, which are visible through the translucent area 370A, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are movable in the vertical direction. While they are designed to move along a linear path in the vertical direction, they may also be movable in other directions, such as left-right or diagonally. They may also be movable along non-linear paths, such as meandering or arc-shaped paths, and may even be able to move along multiple different paths.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are rotatable in one direction, counterclockwise. However, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may also be rotatable in one direction, clockwise, in addition to counterclockwise, or their rotation direction may change during rotation.

Here, Figure 168 is a table showing the notification patterns for the first rotating mechanism member 37, the second rotating mechanism member on the left 38L, and the second rotating mechanism member on the right 38R.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are set to a predetermined stopping state at a predetermined position, the information display units 383L, 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the information display units 383R, 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R can be seen through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (see Figure 167). Since the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is provided with two information display units 383L, 384L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is provided with two information display units 383R, 384R, there are four ways in which the information can be seen through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. Therefore, in this embodiment, there are four types of notification methods for predetermined information related to the game.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 168, the types of notification modes for predetermined information regarding the game include notification mode A, notification mode B, notification mode C, and notification mode D.

In notification mode A, the information display section 383R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is made visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, thereby making the word "BIG" visible through the translucent area 370A. In this notification mode A, by making the player see the word "BIG" during the special feature game, the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special feature game is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and the reservation of the right to execute the special feature game at the start of the special feature game includes one where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.

In notification mode B, the information display section 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is made visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, allowing the word "big" to be seen through the translucent area 370A. In this notification mode B, by allowing the player to see the word "big" during the special feature game, the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special feature game is notified that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

In notification mode C, the information display section 383L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is made visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, thereby making the word "SMALL" visible through the translucent area 370A. In this notification mode C, by making the player see the word "SMALL" during the special feature game, the result of the jackpot lottery announced by that special feature game is a 5R probability variation jackpot.

In notification mode D, the information display section 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, making the word "small" visible through the translucent area 370A. In this notification mode C, by making the player see the word "small" during the special feature game, the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special feature game is announced as a 5R regular jackpot.

In this embodiment, the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are rotatable by drive mechanisms 37a, 38La, and 38Ra controlled by the MPU 51. However, it is also conceivable that at least one of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may be set to a predetermined rotation state when a game ball interferes with it. In this way, by setting at least one of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R to a predetermined rotation state when a game ball interferes with it, the player can grasp the timing when at least one of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is set to a predetermined rotation state. This allows players to focus on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, thereby understanding the timing at which the information display units 383L, 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, or the information display units 383R, 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R become visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are operated in a special feature game that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball as a rotating body into the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315. In this special feature game, the result of the jackpot lottery for that special feature game is notified when the fluctuating decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (the decorative symbols are slightly moving but not completely stopped) and then stopped (the decorative symbols are completely stopped). The operation examples of the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R in the special feature game will be explained below with reference to Figure 170, which is a timing chart showing an example of their operation.

As shown in Figure 170(A), when a special symbol game is started when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, the decorative symbols begin to change. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a jackpot, the decorative symbols temporarily stop and are displayed as matching numbers, as shown in Figure 170(B), and then stop and are displayed as matching numbers, as shown in Figure 170(F). In this embodiment of the special symbol game, as shown in Figures 170(C) to 170(E), the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are activated during the timing between when the decorative symbols shown in Figure 170(B) temporarily stop and are displayed as matching numbers, and when the decorative symbols shown in Figure 170(F) stop and are displayed as matching numbers. In other words, in this embodiment, after the result of the jackpot lottery in the special feature game is initially announced as a jackpot, the type of jackpot is announced by the activation of the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R, and then the result of the jackpot lottery is definitively announced by the stopping display of the decorative symbols.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game is a jackpot, as shown in Figures 170(B) and 170(C), after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as matching numbers, and after a waiting time T1 has elapsed since the display of the changing decorative symbols began, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is moved downward from the waiting position to the operating position (see Figure 158), while the left-rotating mechanism member 38L and the right-rotating mechanism member 38R are moved upward from the waiting position to the operating position (see Figure 163). Then, as shown in Figure 170(C), the first rotating mechanism member 37 is enlarged in the operating position, and the enlarged first rotating mechanism member 37, the left-rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right-rotating mechanism member 38R each rotate in their respective operating positions (see Figure 165). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 170(C), after a rotation time T2 has elapsed from the start of operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R, the rotation of the enlarged first rotating mechanism member 37, the left rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right rotating mechanism member 38R is stopped (see Figure 165(D)). Then, after a return waiting time T3 has elapsed from the time the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R stops, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is retracted and returned to its standby position, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are returned to their standby positions (see Figure 165(E)).

Here, the stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is determined by the type of jackpot announced by the special game. For example, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), the stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is set so that the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37 intersects with the rotation trajectory of the information display units 383L and 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the translucent area 370A stops at a position where the translucent area 370A can be stopped, and the announcement mode C or D can be realized (see Figures 167(B) and 168). In other words, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), the stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is set to a position where the information display section 383L ("SMALL" characters) or information display section 384L ("small" characters) of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is set to a position where the light-transmitting region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 intersects with the rotational trajectory of the information display units 383R and 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, thereby enabling notification mode A or B (see Figures 167(A) and 168). In other words, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the stopping position of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is set to a position where the information display section 383R (the word "BIG") or information display section 384R (the word "big") of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37.

Furthermore, the stopping position of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is determined by the type of jackpot announced by the special game. For example, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is set so that the information display unit 383L stops at the position where the rotation trajectory of the information display unit 383L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37, and the announcement mode C can be realized (see Figures 167(B) and 168). In other words, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is set so that the information display unit 383L (the word "SMALL") is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R regular jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is set so that the information display unit 384L stops at the position where the rotational trajectory of the information display unit 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L intersects with the rotational trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37, thereby setting the notification mode D to a position where it can be realized (see Figures 167(B) and 168). That is, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R regular jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is set so that the information display unit 384L (the word "small") is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37.

Furthermore, if the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot, there are no particular restrictions on the stopping position of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L; it can be determined as appropriate.

Furthermore, the stopping position of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is determined by the type of jackpot announced by the special game and whether or not there are consecutive wins. For example, if the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot and consecutive wins are performed, the stopping position of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is set so that the information display unit 383L stops at the position where the rotation trajectory of the information display unit 383R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37, and notification mode A can be realized (see Figures 167(A) and 168). In other words, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot and a retained consecutive win is executed, the stopping position of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is set so that the information display unit 383R (the word "BIG") is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot and no consecutive wins are performed, the stopping position of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is set so that the information display unit 383R stops at the position where the rotation trajectory of the information display unit 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37, and notification mode B can be realized (see Figures 167(A) and 168). That is, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot and no consecutive wins are performed, the stopping position of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is set so that the information display unit 384R (the word "big") is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37.

Furthermore, if the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), there are no particular restrictions on the stopping position of the second rotating mechanism member 38R; it can be determined as appropriate.

Furthermore, while this embodiment describes a case where the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are activated to notify the type of jackpot and whether or not there are consecutive wins, they may also be activated to notify (explicitly or implicitly) other information as predetermined information for the game, such as the performance to be performed later (that a super reach performance or special reach performance will be performed, the type of super reach performance or special reach performance), or the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, while this embodiment describes the case where the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are activated between the temporary stop display and the stop display of the decorative symbols in the special feature game, they may also be activated at other timings in the special feature game. For example, the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R may be activated at the start of the special feature game, during the execution of the high-speed variation animation (basic animation, non-reach animation) until the start of the reach animation, and at the start and during the execution of various reach animations. That is, the notification of the type of jackpot by the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R may be performed not only after the jackpot is announced by the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols, but also before the jackpot is announced.

Furthermore, although this embodiment describes the case in which the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are operated in a special feature game, the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R may also be operated in a jackpot game. In this case, the information display units 383L and 384L of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, or the information display units 383R and 384R of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, become visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. This allows for the display of predetermined information for the game, such as the execution of a so-called "reserved consecutive win" after the end of the jackpot game, or that the type of jackpot displayed to the player in the special feature game is more advantageous to the player. In other words, the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R make it possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation演出 (performance/animation) or a jackpot type upgrade performance from a normal jackpot to a probability variation jackpot. Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the timing at which the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are activated during a jackpot game; they may be activated during the opening, round, or ending of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R work together to perform four notification modes (see Figure 168). However, as mentioned above, the first rotating mechanism member 37 can perform roulette-style effects and other effects on its own (see Figure 162). Therefore, the game machine 10 can also be configured with only the first rotating mechanism member 37, omitting the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the first rotating mechanism member 37 and either the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R can move from the standby position to the operating position to perform the effects based on the four notification modes (see Figure 168), it is also possible to perform the effects based on the four notification modes (see Figure 168) by having either the first rotating mechanism member 37 or either the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R move from the standby position to the operating position. That is, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may be located anywhere as long as it can move relative to the back side of the first rotating mechanism member 37 and block the light in a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figures 171 to 174, the processing performed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be explained.

This embodiment differs from the first embodiment, which includes a sub-movable display unit 38 and a movable mechanism member 39, in that it includes a first rotating mechanism member 37, a left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and a right second rotating mechanism member 38R as the mechanism for performance. Therefore, the processing related to the operation control of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R differs from the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, a portion of the command determination processing and special feature game performance control processing in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42, executed by the sound lamp control device 5, differs from the first embodiment. The following will explain the command determination processing and special feature game performance control processing of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

[Command determination process]
First, we will explain an example of the command determination process procedure performed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42. Here, Figure 171 is a flowchart showing an example of the command determination process procedure.

As shown in Figure 171, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when a special feature variation pattern command is received, the processes in steps S3101 to S3106 are executed, similar to the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, a rotation mechanism operation effect setting process is executed (step S3301) to set the rotation mechanism operation effect, which is performed by activating the first rotation mechanism member 37, the left second rotation mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotation mechanism member 38R.

[Setting process for the operation of rotating mechanism components]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the rotation mechanism operation effect, which is performed in step S3301 of the command determination process in Figure 171, will be described. Here, Figure 172 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the rotation mechanism operation effect.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 172, in the rotation mechanism member operation performance setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S3401). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot is determined based on the win/loss information for the jackpot lottery included in the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability variation jackpot (Step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3402. If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (Step S3401: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3405.

<Step S3402>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability variation jackpot (Step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved right to execute the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game includes a jackpot result, that is, whether or not a so-called reserved consecutive win will be executed (Step S3402). Whether or not the reserved right to execute the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game includes a jackpot result is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information data (special symbol data) stored in the aforementioned special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5.

If the MPU 51 finds that the result of the jackpot lottery among the reserved rights to execute the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3402: Yes), that is, if a so-called reserved consecutive win is executed, the process proceeds to step S3403. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 finds that the result of the jackpot lottery among the reserved rights to execute the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3402: No), that is, if a so-called reserved consecutive win is not executed, the process proceeds to step S3404.

<Step S3403>
If the reserved right to execute the special game at the start of the special game includes one in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3402: Yes), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a 16R probability variation jackpot and a so-called reserved consecutive win is executed, the MPU 51 sets notification mode A as the rotating mechanism member operation effect (step S3403) and proceeds to step S3409. As described above, notification mode A is a mode in which the information display section 383R (the word "BIG") of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special feature game is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot among the reserved rights to execute the special feature game at the start of the special feature game (see Figure 168).

<Step S3404>
If the number of reserved rights to execute the special feature game at the start of the special feature game does not include any that result in a jackpot (step S3402: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special feature game is a 16R probability variation jackpot and so-called reserved consecutive wins are not executed, the MPU 51 sets notification mode B as the rotating mechanism member operation effect (step S3404) and proceeds to step S3409. As described above, notification mode B is a mode in which the information display section 384R (the word "big") of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special feature game is a 16R probability variation jackpot (see Figure 168).

<Step S3405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (Step S3401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R probability variation jackpot (Step S3405). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot is determined based on the win/loss information for the jackpot lottery included in the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R probability variation jackpot (Step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3406. If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is not a 5R probability variation jackpot (Step S3405: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a 5R probability variation jackpot (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets notification mode C as the rotating mechanism member operation effect (step S3406), and proceeds to step S3409. As described above, notification mode C is a mode in which the information display section 383L ("SMALL" characters) of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a 5R probability variation jackpot (see Figure 168).

<Step S3407>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is not a 5R probability variation jackpot (Step S3405: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R normal jackpot or not (Step S3407). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot or not is determined based on the win/loss information for the jackpot lottery included in the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a 5R regular jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is not a 5R regular jackpot (step S3407: No), i.e., the jackpot lottery result is a loss, the MPU 51 terminates the rotation mechanism operation effect setting process without setting the rotation mechanism operation effect.

<Step S3408>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a 5R regular jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 sets notification mode D as the rotating mechanism member operation effect (step S3408), and proceeds to step S3409. As described above, notification mode D is a mode in which the information display section 384L (the word "small") of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, and it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a 5R regular jackpot (see Figure 168).

<Step S3409>
If any of notification modes A to D is set as the rotating mechanism member operation effect (steps S3403, S3404, S3406, or S3408), the MPU 51 sets the rotating mechanism member operation effect setting flag to ON to indicate that the rotating mechanism member operation effect has been set (step S3409), and proceeds to step S3410. The rotating mechanism member operation effect setting flag is referenced in step S3501 of the special game effect control processing shown in Figure 173, described later, in order to determine whether or not each of the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R is in a standby state for operation.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 identifies the variation type (performance pattern) set for the special feature game in step S3103, which is executed when a special feature variation pattern command is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 171. Furthermore, it sets an operation standby counter according to the identified variation type (performance pattern) (step S3410) and terminates the rotation mechanism operation performance setting process. The operation standby counter indicates the remaining time until each rotation mechanism 37, 38L, 38R starts operating, and is set to a value corresponding to the waiting time T1 (see Figure 170) from the start timing of the variation of the decorative symbols according to the variation type (performance pattern) set for the special feature game.

[Special Game Performance Control Processing]
Next, an example of the procedure for the special game performance control processing executed in step S2704 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42 will be described. Here, Figures 173 and 174 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the special game performance control processing.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 173, in the special game performance control processing of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the rotating mechanism member operation performance setting flag, which indicates that the rotating mechanism member operation performance has been set, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether each of the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R is in a standby state for operation.

If the rotating mechanism operation effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if each rotating mechanism component 37, 38L, and 38R are in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the rotating mechanism operation effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, if each rotating mechanism component 37, 38L, and 38R are not in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3509 in Figure 174.

<Steps S3502-S3504>
If the rotating mechanism member operation effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R is in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation standby counter set in step S3411 of the rotating mechanism member operation effect setting process in Figure 172 (step S3502), and determines whether the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3503). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the start timing for the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R.

If the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), i.e., it is the start timing for the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3505. On the other hand, if the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3503: No), i.e., it is not the start timing for the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R, the MPU 51 executes other processing related to the special feature game performance other than the control related to the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R (step S3504), and then terminates the special feature game performance control processing.

<Steps S3505-S3508>
If the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), that is, if it is the start timing for the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 starts the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3505). Specifically, the MPU 51 moves the first rotating mechanism member 37 from the standby position to the operation position and enlarges the first rotating mechanism member 37 (see Figures 158 and 159), and further rotates the first rotating mechanism member 37 in a counterclockwise direction (see Figures 160 and 165). The MPU 51 also moves the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R from the standby position to the operation position and rotates the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R in a counterclockwise direction.

Furthermore, the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may start operating simultaneously, or they may start operating with a time difference. For example, after the first rotating mechanism member 37 is enlarged in its operating position, the upward movement of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may begin. Also, the rotation of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may begin simultaneously or with a time difference.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the mechanism rotation operation flag to ON (step S3506), indicating that each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R is rotating, and sets the mechanism rotation operation counter (step S3507), which indicates the remaining rotation time T2 (see Figure 170) until the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R is stopped. The mechanism rotation operation flag is referenced in step S3509 of Figure 174, described later, to determine whether each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R is rotating or not.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the rotating mechanism member operation effect setting flag to off (step S3508), performs other processing related to the special game effect other than the control of the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R (step S3504), and then terminates the special game effect control processing.

<Step S3509>
If the rotating mechanism member operation performance setting flag is set to off (step S3501: No), that is, if the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are not in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the mechanism rotation operation flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 174 (step S3509). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R are rotating.

If the mechanism rotation activation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), i.e., each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R are rotating, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3510. On the other hand, if the mechanism rotation activation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), i.e., each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R are not rotating, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3516.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
If the mechanism rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), that is, if each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the mechanism rotation operation counter set in step S3507 of Figure 173 (step S3510), and determines whether the value of the mechanism rotation operation counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3511). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R.

If the value of the mechanism rotation operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3512. On the other hand, if the value of the mechanism rotation operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3511: No), that is, if it is not time to stop the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R, the MPU 51 executes other processing related to the special feature game performance other than the control related to the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R (step S3504 in Figure 173), and terminates the special feature game performance control processing.

<Steps S3512-S3514>
If the value of the rotating mechanism operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 stops the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3512). In other words, the MPU 51 stops the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R at a position corresponding to the notification mode A to D (see Figure 168) set in steps S3403, S3404, S3406, or S3408 of the rotating mechanism member operation performance setting process in Figure 172.

Furthermore, the rotation stopping timing of the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may be simultaneous or with a time difference, but it is preferable that they stop rotating simultaneously. This is because, when the rotations are stopped with a time difference, the stopping positions of the rotating mechanism members 37, 38L, and 38R that stopped first make it easier to infer the information visible through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37.

Furthermore, when stopping the rotation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R with a time difference, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R first. This is because, once the rotation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped, it becomes easy to determine whether the object visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37 is the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the mechanism rotation stop flag to ON (step S3513), indicating that the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R has stopped in the operating position. It also sets the rotation mechanism return counter (step S3514), which indicates the remaining return waiting time T3 (see Figure 170) until each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R returns to its standby position, and proceeds to step S3515.

Furthermore, the mechanism rotation stop flag is referenced in step S3516, described later, to determine whether the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R has stopped in the operating position. In addition, each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R remains in a stopped state in the operating position until the return waiting time T3 (see Figure 170) has elapsed, that is, until the value of the rotating mechanism return counter becomes 0. As a result, notification modes A to D (see Figure 168) realized at the stopped position of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R are maintained until the return waiting time T3 (see Figure 170) has elapsed, that is, until the value of the rotating mechanism return counter becomes 0. Therefore, from the time each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped until the recovery waiting time T3 (see Figure 170) has elapsed, the player can see either the information display section 383L ("SMALL" text), information display section 384L ("small" text) of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, or the information display section 383R ("BIG" text), or information display section 384R ("big" text) of the right second rotating mechanism member 38R through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. As a result, the player can determine the type of jackpot resulting from the jackpot lottery for the special feature game when the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R stops, and if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, they can determine whether or not a reserved continuous win will be executed. Therefore, when the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R begins, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on where each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R stops and what characters are visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating mechanism member 37.

<Step S3515>
In step S3515, the MPU 51 sets the mechanism rotation operation flag to off. Then, the MPU 51 performs other processing for the special game performance other than the control related to the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in Figure 173), and terminates the special game performance control processing.

<Step S3516>
If the mechanism rotation operation flag is set to off (step S3509: No), that is, if each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R is not rotating, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the mechanism rotation stop flag is set to on (step S3516). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped in the operating position.

If the mechanism rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516: Yes), that is, if the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R is stopped in the operating position, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3517. On the other hand, if the mechanism rotation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3516: No), that is, if the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R is not stopped in the operating position, the MPU 51 performs other processing related to the special feature game performance other than the control of the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R (step S3504 in Figure 173), and then terminates the special feature game performance control processing.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
If the mechanism rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516: Yes), that is, if the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped in the operating position, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the rotating mechanism return counter set in step S3514 (step S3517), and determines whether the value of the rotating mechanism return counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3518). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to return each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R to the standby position.

If the value of the rotating mechanism return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), that is, if it is time to return each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R to the standby position, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3519. On the other hand, if the value of the rotating mechanism return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3518: No), that is, if it is not time to return each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R to the standby position, the MPU 51 executes other processing related to the special feature game performance other than the control related to the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R (step S3504 in Figure 173), and terminates the special feature game performance control processing.

<Steps S3519 and S3520>
If the value of the rotating mechanism return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), that is, if it is time to return each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, 38R to the standby position, the MPU 51 shrinks the first rotating mechanism member 37 and then returns it to the standby position, and returns the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R to the standby position (step S3519).

Furthermore, the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may begin returning to their original positions simultaneously, or they may begin returning to their original positions with a time difference.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the mechanism rotation stop flag, which indicates that the rotation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R has stopped at the operating position, to off (step S3520). Furthermore, it performs other processing related to the special feature game performance, other than the control of the operation of each rotating mechanism member 37, 38L, and 38R (step S3504 in Figure 173), and terminates the special feature game performance control processing.

Thus, in this embodiment, there is a first viewing state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, can be seen through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is the first rotating body; and a second viewing state in which the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R, which is the second rotating body, moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, causing the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R to block the light of a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is the light-emitting element, and the left second rotating mechanism member or the right second rotating mechanism member, which is the second rotating body, can be seen through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which is the first rotating body. Thus, because the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is movable on the back side of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (which acts as the first rotating body), the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (as the first rotating body) and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R (as the second rotating body) can result in two visible states for the player: a first visible state and a second visible state. Therefore, the decorations performed by the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (as the first rotating body) and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R (as the second rotating body) are diversified.

For example, in this embodiment, in the first viewing state, where the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to the way the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. Specifically, the visibility of light in a specific area of the symbol display section 341, which acts as a light-emitting element and is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, allows for the execution of decorations that provide information about the game to the player. For example, decorations that announce that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (instant notification effect), decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later, and decorations that announce that a jackpot has been drawn during the holding of the right to execute a special symbol game after the jackpot game has ended (holding consecutive win confirmation effect).

Furthermore, when the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, which acts as the first rotating body, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R blocks the light from a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R becomes visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. In this second viewing state, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to the viewing manner of the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R as seen through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37. Specifically, depending on how the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, it becomes possible to perform effects that provide information about the game to the player, such as an effect that notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (instant notification effect), an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the type of effect to be performed later, and a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during the reservation of the right to perform the special feature game performed after the end of the jackpot game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first viewing state is one in which the light from the pattern display section 341, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element, is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the first rotating body, and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37 as the second rotating body, so that the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38 The second visible state, where R blocks the light from the pattern display section 341 (which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like as a light-emitting element) and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating mechanism member 37, allows for a wider variety of decorations to be performed by the operation of the first rotating mechanism member 37 (as the first rotating body) and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R (as the second rotating body), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the first and second bodies of revolution are movable in a manner that allows them to move closer together and further apart, they may also be made movable by making the first body immobile while making the second body movable, or conversely, they may be made movable by making the second body immobile while making the first body movable. In other words, if the first and second bodies of revolution are movable in a manner that allows them to move closer together and further apart, then one of them may be immobile.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are movable so as to be able to move closer to and further apart from each other. However, the first rotating mechanism member 37 may be made immovable while the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are made movable so as to be able to move closer to and further apart from each other. Conversely, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may be made immovable while the first rotating mechanism member 37 is made movable so as to be able to move closer to and further apart from each other. That is, if the first rotating mechanism member 37 and the left second rotating mechanism member 38L and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are able to move closer to and further apart from each other, then the first rotating mechanism member 37 and either the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R may be made immovable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a special feature game, the first and second rotating bodies are operated to block light from a specific area emitted from the light source toward the front, thereby realizing a visible state in which the second rotating body behind the first rotating body is visible. However, in a state in which game balls other than those in special feature games, such as a jackpot game, are launched onto the game board 31, the light from a specific area emitted from the light source toward the front may also be blocked, thereby realizing a visible state in which the second rotating body behind the first rotating body is visible. For example, in a jackpot game, by making the second rotating body behind the first rotating body visible, it is possible to perform an upgraded performance that notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is more favorable to the player than the result of the jackpot lottery announced in the special feature game that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. It is also possible to perform a confirmed consecutive win performance that notifies the player that the reserved right to execute a special feature game after the end of the jackpot game includes a jackpot lottery result.

Specifically, in this embodiment, during a special feature game, the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R are activated to block light from a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 to the front, thereby making the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R behind the first rotating mechanism member 37 visible. However, in a state where game balls other than those in special feature games, such as a jackpot game, are launched onto the game board 31, the light from a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 to the front may also be blocked, thereby making the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R behind the first rotating mechanism member 37 visible. Furthermore, for example, in a jackpot game, by making the left second rotating mechanism 38L or the right second rotating mechanism 38R behind the first rotating mechanism 37 visible, it is possible to perform an upgrade animation that notifies the player that the actual jackpot lottery result is more favorable to the player than the result of the jackpot lottery announced in the special symbol game that triggered the jackpot game. It is also possible to perform a confirmed consecutive win animation that notifies the player that the reserved right to play the special symbol game after the jackpot game ends includes a jackpot lottery result.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in special feature games and jackpot games, by making the light from a specific area emitted from the light-emitting element towards the front through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body visible, it is possible to execute promotion effects and confirmed consecutive win effects depending on the content displayed in the specific area. Also, in special feature games, by making the light from a specific area emitted from the light-emitting element towards the front through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body visible, it is possible to execute an instant notification effect that announces the result of the jackpot lottery as a jackpot, an effect preview effect that announces effects to be executed later, and an effect stock effect, depending on the content displayed in the specific area.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in special feature games and jackpot games, by making the light from a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 to the front side through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37 visible, it is possible to execute upgrade effects and confirmed consecutive win effects depending on the content displayed in the specific area. Furthermore, in special feature games, by making the light from a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 to the front side through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating mechanism member 37 visible, it is possible to execute an instant notification effect that announces the result of the jackpot lottery as a jackpot, an effect preview effect that announces effects to be executed later, and an effect stock effect, depending on the content displayed in the specific area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first and second rotating bodies is controlled by the MPU 51. However, at least one of the first and second rotating bodies may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from another. For example, the first rotating body may start rotating in response to interference from the second rotating body moving toward it, or in response to interference from a game ball moving toward it.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R is controlled by the MPU 51. However, at least one of the rotating mechanism members—the first rotating mechanism member 37, the left second rotating mechanism member 38L, and the right second rotating mechanism member 38R—may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from another. For example, the first rotating mechanism member 37 may start rotating in response to interference from the left second rotating mechanism member 38L or the right second rotating mechanism member 38R moving toward the first rotating mechanism member 37, or in response to interference from a game ball moving toward the first rotating mechanism member 37.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to ninth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Embodiment 11]
The present invention provides, as a specific configuration, a "judgment processing" as a judgment means, a "display control" as a variable display means, a "hold storage processing" as a holding means, a "start ball entry unit" as a first start ball entry means or a second start ball entry means, a "disadvantageous state control" as an unfavorable state, a "favorable state control" as an advantageous state, "output information" as predetermined identification information, an "information output unit" or "information output processing" as a first output means, an "information stop processing" as an output stop means, a "hold number storage area" or "hold number storage processing" as a storage means, "output information" as specific identification information, an "information output unit" or "information output processing" as a second output means, and an "output method" as an output mode.

The determination means can be any process that performs various determinations. As long as the spirit of the present invention can be realized, the determination means can include, for example, a determination process for whether or not to transition to a game state, a determination process for whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, a determination process for whether or not to transition to a probability variation game state, a determination process for whether or not to transition to a time reduction game state, a determination process for whether or not to transition to a normal game state, a jackpot determination process for whether or not to execute a jackpot game, a jackpot determination process for whether or not to execute a jackpot game when a game ball enters the first prize slot, a jackpot determination process for whether or not to execute a jackpot game when the first special symbol starts to change triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, and a determination process for whether or not to execute a jackpot game when a game ball enters the second prize slot. Examples include: a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game when a game ball enters the winning slot; a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game when the second special symbol starts to change after a game ball enters the second winning slot; a determination process to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot determination process; a normal symbol win determination process to determine whether or not to execute a normal symbol win game; a normal symbol win determination process to determine whether or not to execute a normal symbol win game when a game ball passes through the through gate; a normal symbol win determination process to determine whether or not to execute a normal symbol win game when the normal symbol starts to change after a game ball passes through the through gate; and any combination of these.

The variable display means can be any display control for the variable display of patterns on various types of displays. Examples of variable display means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, display control for the variable display of patterns on liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, dot matrix displays, plasma displays, 7-segment displays, on/off display control for LED lamps, display control for the variable display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display unit, display control for the variable display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display unit, display control for the variable display of ordinary patterns in the ordinary pattern display unit, display control for the variable display of decorative patterns in the pattern display unit, and any combination thereof.

The holding means can be any storage process for various types of holdings. The holding means may include, for example, storage processing for the number of holdings for the right to play the first special symbol game, which is the number of holdings for the right to play the first special symbol game; storage processing for the increased number of holdings for the first special symbol game when a game ball enters the first prize slot; storage processing for the decreased number of holdings for the first special symbol game when the number of holdings for the first special symbol game decreases due to the start of variation of the first special symbol; storage processing for the number of holdings for the right to play the second special symbol game, which is the number of holdings for the right to play the second special symbol game; and storage processing for the second special symbol game when a game ball enters the second prize slot. Examples include: storing the increased number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved symbols increases; storing the decreased number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases due to the start of the second special symbol variation; storing the number of reserved normal symbol variations, which is the number of reserved rights to play normal symbol games; storing the increased number of reserved normal symbol variations when the number of reserved normal symbol variations increases as a result of a game ball passing through the through gate; storing the decreased number of reserved normal symbol variations when the number of reserved normal symbol variations decreases due to the start of the normal symbol variation; and any combination of these.

The first or second ball entry means may be any ball entry section that provides a trigger to initiate the display of changing symbols upon entry of a game ball. Examples of the first or second ball entry means, as long as they realize the spirit of the present invention, include: a mechanism that provides a trigger to initiate the display of changing symbols on various displays (liquid crystal displays, dot matrix displays, plasma displays, 7-segment displays, etc.) upon entry of a game ball; a first prize entry point that provides a trigger to initiate the display of changing symbols on the first special symbol display section; a second prize entry point that provides a trigger to initiate the display of changing symbols on the second special symbol display section; a through gate that provides a trigger to initiate the display of changing symbols on the normal symbol display section; a mechanism that provides a trigger to initiate the display of changing decorative symbols on the symbol display section; and any combination thereof.

An unfavorable state can be any control that puts the player at a disadvantage with respect to various games. Examples of unfavorable states, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, include: a control that lowers the probability of a jackpot being won in the jackpot lottery; a control that restricts the execution of jackpot games; a control that restricts the execution of regular jackpot games; a control that restricts the entry of game balls into the winning slot that triggers a special game; a control that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning slot that triggers a second special game using an electric mechanism; a control that shortens the allowed entry time when game balls are allowed into the winning slot that triggers a special game; and a control that shortens the operating time (allowed entry time) of the electric mechanism that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning slot that triggers a second special game. Examples of such controls include: a control that reduces the frequency of allowing game balls to enter the winning slot that triggers a special game; a control that reduces the frequency of operation of the electric mechanism that restricts game balls entering the second winning slot that triggers a second special game; a control that reduces the probability of a normal win in the normal win lottery determining whether or not to allow game balls to enter the winning slot that triggers a special game; a control that reduces the probability of a normal win in the normal win lottery determining whether or not to activate the electric mechanism that restricts game balls entering the second winning slot that triggers a first special game; a control that lengthens the execution time of the normal win game that notifies the result of the normal win lottery; and any combination thereof.

An advantageous state is any control that makes the player's game more advantageous in relation to various games. Examples of advantageous states, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, include: a control that makes the probability of a jackpot being high in the jackpot lottery; a control that allows the execution of a jackpot game; a control that allows the execution of a regular jackpot game; a control that allows the entry of game balls into an entry slot that provides an opportunity to execute a special jackpot game; a control that allows the entry of game balls into a second entry slot that provides an opportunity to execute a second special jackpot game using an electric mechanism; a control that lengthens the allowed entry time when the entry of game balls into an entry slot that provides an opportunity to execute a special jackpot game is permitted; and a control that lengthens the operating time (allowed entry time) of an electric mechanism that restricts the entry of game balls into a second entry slot that provides an opportunity to execute a second special jackpot game. Examples of such controls include: increasing the frequency of allowing game balls to enter the winning slot that triggers the special feature game; increasing the frequency of operation of the electric mechanism that restricts game balls from entering the second winning slot that triggers the second special feature game; increasing the probability that the result of the regular win lottery, which determines whether or not to allow game balls to enter the winning slot that triggers the special feature game, will be a regular win; increasing the probability that the result of the regular win lottery, which determines whether or not to activate the electric mechanism that restricts game balls from entering the second winning slot that triggers the second special feature game, will be a regular win; shortening the execution time of the regular win game that notifies the result of the regular win lottery; and any combination thereof.

The specified identification information can be any output information corresponding to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) or a favorable state (e.g., a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state, which are high-frequency support modes). Examples of predetermined identification information that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, output information corresponding to the type of special game performed in a special game state, output information corresponding to the type of game state transitioned to after the special game ends, output information corresponding to the type of advantageous state, output information corresponding to the start of a special game state, output information corresponding to being in a special game state, output information corresponding to the end of a special game state, information corresponding to the start of an advantageous state, output information corresponding to being in an advantageous state, output information corresponding to the end of an advantageous state, output information corresponding to the start of a probability variation game state, output information corresponding to being in a probability variation game state, output information corresponding to the end of a probability variation game state, output information corresponding to the start of a time-saving game state, output information corresponding to being in a time-saving game state, output information corresponding to the end of a time-saving game state, output information output in response to a change in game state when the display of changing symbols begins when the game state changes, and any combination thereof.

The first output means may be an output unit that outputs predetermined identification information or a process that outputs predetermined identification information. The first output means may be, for example, a process that causes an external output terminal board, an output terminal unit provided on an external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing unit such as an MPU or CPU, an information output display unit provided for information output, etc., a process that causes an external output terminal board, an output terminal unit provided on an external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing unit such as an MPU or CPU, an information output display unit provided for information output, a process that outputs predetermined identification information by a processing unit such as an MPU or CPU, a process that outputs predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of special game performed in a special game state, a process that outputs predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of game state to which the special game transitions after the special game ends, a process that outputs predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of advantageous state, a process that outputs predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of a special game state, a process that outputs predetermined identification information corresponding to being in a special game state, and special Examples of such processes include: outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of a game state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of an advantageous state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to being in an advantageous state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of an advantageous state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of a probability variation game state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to being in a probability variation game state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of a probability variation game state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of a time-saving game state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to being in a time-saving game state; outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of a time-saving game state; and any combination thereof.

The output stopping means can be any process that stops the output of predetermined identification information. Any output stopping means that can realize the spirit of the present invention may include, for example, a process that stops the output of predetermined identification information to an information output display unit provided for information output; a process that stops the output of information by a processing unit such as an MPU or CPU; a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the type of special game performed in a special game state; a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the type of game state to which the special game transitions after the special game ends; a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the type of advantageous state; a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the start of a special game state; a process that stops the output of information corresponding to being in a special game state; and a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the end of a special game state. Examples include processes such as stopping the output of information corresponding to the start of a favorable state, stopping the output of information corresponding to being in a favorable state, stopping the output of information corresponding to the end of a favorable state, stopping the output of information corresponding to the start of a probability variation game state, stopping the output of information corresponding to being in a probability variation game state, stopping the output of information corresponding to the end of a probability variation game state, stopping the output of information corresponding to the start of a time-saving game state, stopping the output of information corresponding to being in a time-saving game state, stopping the output of information corresponding to the end of a time-saving game state, and any combination thereof.

The memory means can be any means capable of storing information for various types of holds. As long as the spirit of the present invention can be realized, for example, a memory area set in a RAM or other memory, a memory area set in a RAM or other memory of the main control unit, a memory area set in a RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control unit or display control unit, a memory area set in a RAM or other memory of the main control unit to store the number of special hold rights, which is the number of holds for executing special hold games, a memory area set in a RAM or other memory of the main control unit to store the increased number of special hold rights when the number of special hold rights increases, a memory area set in a RAM or other memory of the main control unit to store the decreased number of special hold rights when the number of special hold rights decreases, a memory area to store the first special hold number, which is the number of holds for executing the first special hold game, and the holding of the right to execute the first special hold game The memory set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit stores the increased number of reserved first special symbols when the number of reserved first special symbols increases, the memory set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit stores the decreased number of reserved first special symbols when the number of reserved first special symbols decreases, the memory set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit stores the number of reserved second special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game, the memory set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit stores the increased number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols increases, the memory set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit stores the decreased number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases, and the memory set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit stores the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the normal symbol game. The memory area, the memory area that stores the number of reserved regular symbols after an increase when the number of reserved regular symbols increases, the memory area that stores the number of reserved regular symbols after a decrease when the number of reserved regular symbols decreases, the memory area that stores the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the first special symbol game, the memory area that stores the number of reserved first special symbols after an increase when the number of reserved first special symbol games increases, the memory area that stores the number of reserved first special symbol after a decrease when the number of reserved first special symbol games decreases, and the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game. A memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control device or display control device that stores the number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols increases, a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control device or display control device that stores the number of reserved second special symbols after the increase when the number of reserved second special symbols increases, a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control device or display control device that stores the number of reserved second special symbols after the decrease when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases, a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control device or display control device that stores the number of reserved regular symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to play regular symbols, a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control device or display control device that stores the number of reserved regular symbols after the increase when the number of reserved regular symbols increases, and a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control device or display control device that stores the number of reserved regular symbols after the decrease when the number of reserved regular symbols decreases A memory area set in the RAM of the sound lamp control device or display control device that stores the number of active reserves, a memory area that stores the number of remaining special symbol reserves, which is the number of reserved rights to execute special symbol games at the end of high-frequency support mode (advantageous state such as probability variation game state or time reduction game state), a memory area that stores the number of remaining special symbol reserves after a decrease when the number of remaining special symbol reserves, which is the number of reserved rights to execute special symbol games at the end of high-frequency support mode (advantageous state such as probability variation game state or time reduction game state), a memory area set in the RAM of the main control device that stores the number of remaining special symbol reserves, which is the number of reserved rights to execute special symbol games at the end of high-frequency support mode (advantageous state such as probability variation game state or time reduction game state), and the execution of special symbol games at the end of high-frequency support mode (advantageous state such as probability variation game state or time reduction game state) A memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit that stores the number of remaining special symbols after a decrease in the number of remaining special symbols, which is the number of reserved special symbols that are A memory area that stores the remaining number of special symbols, which is the number of special symbols held; a memory area that stores the remaining number of special symbols after a decrease in the number of special symbols held; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit that stores the remaining number of special symbols, which is the number of special symbols held for the right to execute the special symbol game; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit that stores the remaining number of special symbols after a decrease in the number of special symbols held; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit that stores the remaining number of special symbols after a decrease in the number of special symbols held; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control unit or display control unit that stores the remaining number of special symbols held; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control unit or display control unit that stores the remaining number of special symbols after a decrease in the number of special symbols held; and the end of high-frequency support mode (advantageous state such as probability variation game state or time reduction game state). Examples include: a memory area for storing the number of reserved special symbols for the right to execute the second special symbol game at that time; a memory area for storing the number of reserved special symbols after a decrease in the number of reserved special symbols; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit for storing the number of reserved special symbols for the right to execute the second special symbol game; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the main control unit for storing the number of reserved special symbols after a decrease in the number of reserved special symbols; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control unit or display control unit for storing the number of reserved special symbols; a memory area set in the RAM or other memory of the sound lamp control unit or display control unit for storing the number of reserved special symbols after a decrease in the number of reserved special symbols; and any combination thereof.

The specific identification information only needs to be information that is output in response to a change in the game state when the display of changing symbols for various holds stored in the memory means begins. Specific identification information may include, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, output information relating to the number of reserved special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the first special symbol game; output information relating to the number of reserved special symbols after an increase when a game ball enters the first prize slot; output information relating to the number of reserved special symbols after a decrease when the number of reserved special symbols decreases due to the start of variation of the first special symbol; output information relating to the number of reserved special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game; output information relating to the period during which the second special symbol game is executed based on the right to execute the second special symbol game; output information relating to the number of reserved special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game when transitioning from advantageous information (e.g., a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state which is a high-frequency support mode) to an unfavorable state (a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode); and advantageous information (e.g., a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state which is a high-frequency support mode). Examples of output information include: output information output in response to a change in game state when the game state transitions from a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state to a disadvantageous state (normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode), output information regarding the increased number of reserved second special symbols when a game ball enters the second prize slot, output information regarding the decreased number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases due to the start of variation of the second special symbols, output information regarding the number of reserved normal symbol variations, which is the number of reserved rights to play normal symbol games, output information regarding the increased number of reserved normal symbol variations when a game ball passes through the through gate, output information regarding the decreased number of reserved normal symbol variations when the number of reserved normal symbol variations decreases due to the start of variation of normal symbols, and any combination thereof.

The second output means may be an output unit that outputs specific identification information or a process that outputs specific identification information. The second output means may include, for example, a process that causes an external output terminal board, an output terminal unit provided on the external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing unit such as an MPU or CPU, an information output display unit provided for information output, etc., provided that it can realize the spirit of the present invention, a process that causes an external output terminal board, an output terminal unit provided on the external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing unit such as an MPU or CPU, an information output display unit provided for information output, a process that outputs specific identification information by a processing unit such as an MPU or CPU, a process that outputs specific identification information relating to the first special symbol reserve number, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the first special symbol game, and the first special symbol reserve number after the increase when a game ball enters the first prize slot. Process to output specific identification information regarding the number of reserved symbols; process to output specific identification information regarding the number of reserved symbols after the decrease when the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol decreases due to the start of variation of the first special symbol; process to output specific identification information regarding the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game; process to output specific identification information regarding the period during which the second special symbol game is executed based on the right to execute the second special symbol game; process when transitioning from advantageous information (for example, a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state which are high-frequency support modes) to an unfavorable state (a normal game state which is low-frequency support mode) The process outputs specific identification information regarding the number of reserved special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game; the process outputs specific identification information regarding the period during which the second special symbol game is executed based on the right to execute the second special symbol game when transitioning from advantageous information (e.g., a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state, which are high-frequency support modes) to an unfavorable state (a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode); the process displays the information on the information output display unit; and the process outputs specific identification information regarding the increased number of reserved special symbols when the number of reserved special symbols increases due to a game ball entering the second prize slot. Examples of such processes include: outputting specific identification information regarding the number of reserved special symbols after a decrease due to the start of a variation in the second special symbol; outputting specific identification information regarding the number of reserved symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to play regular symbol games; outputting specific identification information regarding the number of reserved symbols after an increase due to a game ball passing through a through gate; outputting specific identification information regarding the number of reserved symbols after a decrease due to the start of a variation in the regular symbol; and any combination thereof.

The output mode should be such that the output of different information can be distinguished. Examples of output modes that realize the spirit of the present invention include: sound information and light information, sound information and image information, sound information and signal information, light information and image information, light information and signal information, image information and signal information, output period, signal type such as level signals and pulse signals, output interval (output pitch), output level, continuous output period of high-level signals, continuous output period of low-level signals, output start interval of high-level signals, output start interval of low-level signals, level difference between high-level signals and low-level signals, continuous output period of ON signals, continuous output period of OFF signals, output start interval of ON signals, output start interval of OFF signals, level difference between ON signals and OFF signals, and any combination thereof.

Incidentally, in modern gaming machines, various game states are set according to the machine's game specifications. To help players understand these diverse game states, various devices installed in the gaming machine and the gaming hall are used to provide notification. Therefore, there is a need to provide more appropriate notification according to each game state. This invention was invented to address this problem, and aims to provide a gaming machine that provides more appropriate notification according to each game state. Specifically, for example, a gaming machine outputs various signals, such as jackpot signals, to the outside of the machine via an external output terminal board. These signals output to the outside of the gaming machine are used, for example, to manage game data in a hall computer installed in the gaming hall, and also to display various data such as the number of jackpots and the number of consecutive jackpots on a data display attached to the gaming machine.

Here, some gaming machines transition to high-frequency support modes, such as a probability variation mode or a time-saving mode, after a jackpot game ends. Furthermore, the signals output from the gaming machine to the outside include a jackpot signal, which is continuously output from the start of the jackpot game (based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state) until the transition back to the normal game state after the high-frequency support mode ends. In other words, the output of this jackpot signal from the gaming machine stops when the transition back to the normal game state occurs, and the count of consecutive jackpots displayed on the data display ends when the output of this jackpot signal stops.

Meanwhile, the hall computer in the gaming hall manages the number of consecutive jackpots, which is the number of jackpot games from the initial jackpot to the transition to normal gameplay, based on the jackpot signal. Furthermore, when the hall computer receives a jackpot signal, it outputs a corresponding signal to the data display unit attached to the gaming machine. This allows the data display unit to display the number of consecutive jackpots upon receiving the corresponding signal.

In this way, by displaying the number of consecutive jackpots on the data display, players can enjoy the game by being motivated to increase their number of consecutive jackpots. For example, they can enjoy the game by being motivated to see if their number of consecutive jackpots exceeds the expected number of jackpots, or by breaking their personal best record for consecutive jackpots.

Furthermore, when a gaming machine transitions from high-frequency support mode to normal gameplay, a "Second Special Symbol Reserve," which is the right to execute the Second Special Symbol Game, may remain. It is also possible that the result of the jackpot lottery for this Second Special Symbol Reserve is a jackpot. When a jackpot game is initiated based on the result of the jackpot lottery for this Second Special Symbol Reserve being a jackpot, the output of the jackpot signal to the outside of the gaming machine is stopped due to the transition to normal gameplay before the start of the jackpot game. Therefore, the hall computer and data display in the gaming hall restart the jackpot count from 1.

However, the benefit of the second special symbol hold is obtained when the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode triggered by a jackpot game. Furthermore, jackpots triggered based on the jackpot lottery result for the second special symbol hold are also called "re-spins" or "hold streaks," and from the player's perspective, it is perceived as a continuing jackpot streak. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed based on the second special symbol hold, if the jackpot streak count restarts from 1, a discrepancy arises between the player's perception and the jackpot streak count displayed on the data display. As a result, there is a concern that the motivation to increase the jackpot streak displayed on the data display will decrease, leading to a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

In contrast, the present invention allows for the determination of a predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on predetermined identification information output externally by the first output means, and for the determination of a period during which a predetermined fluctuation display due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state can be executed based on specific identification information output externally in a different output manner from the predetermined identification information by the second output means. Therefore, for example, a data display attached to a gaming machine can display special games executed based on a predetermined fluctuation display due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state as part of the number of consecutive special games. As a result, when a predetermined special game state is transitioned triggered by a hold at the end of the advantageous state, a discrepancy between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games perceived by the player is prevented. This prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by recognizing that the display is a predetermined variation due to a hold at the end of a favorable state based on specific identification information output externally by the second output means in a different output manner than the predetermined identification information, it becomes possible to have, for example, a data display attached to the gaming machine perform an effect indicating that the predetermined variation display due to a hold at the end of a favorable state is in effect. This effect clearly indicates to the player that even after the end of a favorable state, there is a period during which the number of consecutive wins in special games can be increased. This can increase the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive wins and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Specifically, in this embodiment, during a jackpot game state and a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which can identify the state, is continuously output externally via the external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit through the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as an information output processing. For example, the hall computer 102 of a gaming hall can determine that the game is in a jackpot state and a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information. As a result, the hall computer 102 can determine the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control. On the other hand, the data display unit 103, which is attached to the gaming machine 10, can display the number of consecutive jackpots from the start of the first jackpot game until the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control, based on the information (signals) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which is output information from the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, the MPU 41, as information output processing, outputs an extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information via the external output terminal board 101 as information output unit. This extended signal allows for the identification of a period during which the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the reserved rights stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB of the second special symbol reserved number storage area REB set in the RAM 412 as a reserved number storage area, or in the special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area set in RAM 512, can be executed. For example, the hall computer 102 of a gaming hall can understand, based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that a predetermined display of the reserved symbols at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control is being executed. As a result, the hall computer 102 can determine, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that a predetermined variation display indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 as a judgment process is a jackpot game, and that this variation display is due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as a favorable state control. Therefore, the hall computer 102 can count jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variation display due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as a favorable state control, including them in the count of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game, which is determined based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information. Consequently, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variation display due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as part of the count of consecutive jackpot games.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information is output for a predetermined period of time. For example, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect indicating that it is a period in which it is possible to display the variation of decorative symbols corresponding to the hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control. Specifically, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control, the data display 103 can display text images such as "Consecutive Win Challenge," "Consecutive Win Chance," "Jackpot Challenge," and "Probability Variation Jackpot Chance" as an effect that clearly indicates or suggests to the player that it is possible to increase the number of consecutive jackpots. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that it is a period in which it is possible to increase the number of consecutive jackpots even after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control. This can increase the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive wins and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Thus, in this embodiment, based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output via the external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit through the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as an information output processing unit, it is possible to determine whether the game is in a jackpot state and a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control. Furthermore, based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output by the information output unit or the MPU 41 and external output terminal board 101 as information output processing units, it is possible to determine whether the display is a predetermined variation due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control. As a result, the data display 103 attached to the game machine 10 can include the jackpot game executed based on the predetermined variation display due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed as a result of a hold at the end of a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) as a control of advantageous states, a discrepancy between the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive jackpot games perceived by the player is prevented. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 is prevented, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 175 to 189.

[Game System]
First, with reference to Figure 175, a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described. Here, Figure 175 is a diagram showing an example of the main parts of a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 175, the gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102, and a data display 103.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with an external output terminal board 101, which serves as an information output unit that outputs game information of the gaming machine 10 to an external device such as a hall computer 102. This external output terminal board 101 has, for example, a plurality of output terminals (not shown), and each output terminal (not shown) is connected by wiring (not shown) to an input/output I/F 42 that communicates data with the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, enabling data communication (reception). As a result, the game information of the gaming machine 10 is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 as various signals via the corresponding output terminal (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101. In addition, each output terminal (not shown) can output one predetermined type of signal to the outside. That is, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of output terminal (not shown) and the type of signal that can be output to the outside. For example, terminal 1 of the multiple output terminals (not shown) can output the jackpot signal 1 described later, and terminal 2 of the multiple output terminals (not shown) can output the jackpot signal 2 described later.

Furthermore, multiple output terminals (not shown) are connected to the hall computer 102 on the gaming hall side via wiring or other means, enabling data communication (transmission). This allows the hall computer 102 to obtain game information of the gaming machine 10, which is output from each output terminal (not shown) of the gaming machine 10. As a result, the gaming hall can understand the game status and condition of each gaming machine 10. The gaming hall can also select the necessary output terminals (not shown) from the multiple output terminals (not shown) and connect them to the hall computer 102 via wiring or other means. This allows the gaming hall to selectively obtain game information managed by the gaming hall by selecting the output terminals (not shown) to connect to the hall computer 102, enabling efficient management of necessary game information and displaying the necessary game information on the data display 103.

Here, game information that is signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, for example, that the game is in progress, that a jackpot game has started (that a jackpot game is in progress), that the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), that the game is in low-frequency support mode (normal game state), that a special symbol game has started (that a special symbol game is in progress), the number of game balls launched (number of balls out), the number of balls dispensed, and the difference in the number of balls. Therefore, the amusement hall can manage, based on the game information signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable games for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games between jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games from the last jackpot to the current variable game, and the payout and net payout for the current day and the past few days. Furthermore, the hall can manage the game status and state of each gaming machine 10, such as whether it is currently playing, in the middle of a jackpot, in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state), or in low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game information output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, as described later, information indicating that when transitioning from a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) to a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the special symbol game in that low-frequency support mode is the second special symbol game triggered by the second special symbol hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode. This allows the hall computer 102 to manage the jackpot game executed as a result of the second special symbol game triggered by the second special symbol hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode, including it in the count of consecutive jackpots.

The data display unit 103 displays, for example, the game status and gameplay of the gaming machine 10, and is installed, for example, above each gaming machine 10 in the island equipment of a gaming hall. This data display unit 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 by wiring or the like to enable data communication (reception), and by receiving game information managed by the hall computer 102, it can display the game status and gameplay based on this game information. Specifically, the data display unit 103 can display, for example, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable games for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games played between jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games played from the last jackpot to the current variable game, the number of balls and tokens dispensed and the net number of balls for the current day and the past few days, whether the game is currently in progress, whether a jackpot is currently in progress, whether the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state), and whether the game is in low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game information signaled from the hall computer 102 to the data display 103 includes, as described later, information indicating that when transitioning from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the special symbol game in that low-frequency support mode is the second special symbol game triggered by the second special symbol hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode. This makes it possible for the data display 103 to include and display the number of consecutive big wins for the jackpot game triggered by the second special symbol game triggered by the second special symbol hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 10, game information that identifies the player as being in a jackpot state is output to an external device such as the hall computer 102 as a jackpot signal 1, and game information that identifies the player as being in a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state/time reduction game state) is output to an external device such as the hall computer 102 as a jackpot signal 2.

Here, Figure 176 is a time chart showing an example of the output of a jackpot signal from the gaming machine 10 to an external device such as the hall computer 102. Specifically, Figure 176(A) is a time chart showing an example of the output of jackpot signal 1, and Figures 176(B) and 176(C) are time charts showing examples of the output of jackpot signal 2.

As shown in Figure 176(A), the jackpot signal 1 outputs information indicating that a jackpot game (jackpot game state) is in progress to an external device such as the hall computer 102. For example, it is output from terminal 1 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101. This jackpot signal 1 is output as a high-level signal at the start of a jackpot game (when transitioning to the jackpot game state). The output of the jackpot signal 1 continues during the jackpot game (jackpot game state). Furthermore, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped by becoming a low-level signal at the end of a jackpot (when transitioning to high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state)). Therefore, the hall computer 102 can determine that a jackpot game is in progress during the period when it is receiving the jackpot signal 1. In addition, during the period when it is receiving the jackpot signal 1, the hall computer 102 outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal 1 to the data display 103. This allows the data display 103 to indicate that a jackpot is in progress based on the jackpot signal 1 output from the hall computer 102, and to count up the number of jackpots and consecutive jackpots. The indication of a jackpot in progress on the data display 103 could include text displays such as "Jackpot," "Jackpot in Progress," or "BONUS," as well as flashing numbers indicating the number of jackpots and consecutive jackpots, or a rainbow-colored display of numbers indicating the number of jackpots and consecutive jackpots.

As shown in Figure 176(B), the jackpot signal 2 includes at least a basic signal and an extension signal that continues to be output after the basic signal stops if there is a second special symbol hold (remaining second special symbol hold), which is the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state). This jackpot signal 2, for example, both the basic signal and the extension signal, are output from terminal 2 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101.

The basic signal is output information for outputting information to an external device such as the hall computer 102 that indicates that a jackpot game is in progress (jackpot game state) or that the machine is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). The information is output as a level signal. This basic signal is continuously output as a high-level signal during jackpot game play (jackpot game state) and high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). Specifically, the basic signal starts outputting as a high-level signal at the start of a jackpot game, is temporarily suspended by becoming a low-level signal at the end of the jackpot game, resumes outputting as a high-level signal at the start of high-frequency support mode, and becomes a low-level signal at the end of high-frequency support mode. In other words, the basic signal is continuously output during jackpot gameplay (jackpot game state) and high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). While the output is temporarily stopped for a short period during transitions between the jackpot game state and the probability variation game state or time-saving game state, overall, the output remains continuous.

In this embodiment, the continuous output of the jackpot signal 2 includes cases where the output suspension period of the jackpot signal 2 is less than or equal to a specific period (e.g., 1 second or less), and the jackpot signal 2 is re-output within that specific period. For example, in this embodiment, if the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily suspended at the end of a jackpot game, the jackpot signal 2 is re-output upon transitioning to the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). In this case, since the output suspension period of the jackpot signal 2 is short (less than or equal to the specific period), this corresponds to a case where the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily suspended at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), the jackpot signal 2 is re-output upon the start of a jackpot game. In this case, since the output suspension period of the jackpot signal 2 is short (less than or equal to the specific period), this corresponds to a case where the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game transitions to the normal game state after executing the maximum number of special symbol games (predetermined number of times) that can be played in the high-frequency support mode, and there is a second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the right to execute the second special symbol game, at the end of the high-frequency support mode, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output as an extension signal. This extension signal differs from the basic signal, which is output as a level signal, in its output method. It is output as a pulse signal or on/off signal with alternating output periods and output stop periods. However, the output stop period for the extension signal is set to be less than or equal to the aforementioned specific period. Therefore, although the extension signal includes the output stop period, it is considered to be continuously output, and the jackpot signal 2 is considered to be continuously output even during the output of the extension signal. In other words, the cessation of the jackpot signal 2 as output information means that the jackpot signal is stopped for a predetermined period exceeding the specific period.

The extension signal is activated when the number of special symbol games corresponding to the number of special symbol holds in the second special symbol game end without a jackpot game being executed. In this case, the output of jackpot signal 2 is completely stopped without being re-output within the aforementioned specific period. This results in the output of jackpot signal 2 being stopped.

Furthermore, if there are no reserved second special symbol symbols (remaining reserved second special symbol symbols), which are the right to execute the second special symbol game, at the end of the extended signal high-frequency support mode, the signal will not be output, and the jackpot signal 2 will only output the basic signal.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 176(C), if the second special symbol hold includes a symbol that results in a jackpot, then when the second special symbol game that notifies the jackpot ends due to the elapsed time between the cessation of the second special symbol's variation display and the confirmation display time, the output of the jackpot signal 2, which is output as an extension signal, is stopped. The basic signal is then re-output at the start of the jackpot game that begins after the end of the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the output stop period from the end of the second special symbol game (stopping of the extension signal) to the start of the jackpot game (output of the basic signal) is short (less than a specific period). Therefore, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output in the pattern of basic signal → extension signal → basic signal.

In this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to an external device such as the hall computer 102 during the jackpot game state and the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state). For example, the hall computer 102 in a gaming hall can determine whether the game is in the jackpot game state or the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2. This allows the hall computer 102 to determine the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state). Meanwhile, the data display unit 103, which is attached to the gaming machine 10, can display the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) based on the information (signals) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 output from the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state), the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output for a predetermined period of time. As a result, for example, the hall computer 102 of the gaming hall can understand, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, that the second special symbol game based on the reservation at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) is being executed. Consequently, when a jackpot game is executed after the completion of the second special symbol game, the hall computer 102 can understand, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, that it is the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol reservation at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state). Therefore, the hall computer 102 can count the jackpot game executed based on the second special symbol game using the second special symbol hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game, which is determined based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2. As a result, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display the jackpot game executed based on the second special symbol game using the second special symbol hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games. This prevents a discrepancy between the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive jackpot games perceived by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 is prevented, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. However, the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 only need to have distinctly different output modes. For example, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Furthermore, the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, or as pulse signals or on/off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

Furthermore, the signal indicating the execution period for the second special symbol game (remaining reserved second special symbol) at the end of a favorable state (probability variation game state or time reduction game state) does not necessarily need to be output externally to the hall computer 102 or other device as a jackpot signal 2. The signal indicating the execution period for the second special symbol game (remaining reserved second special symbol) only needs to be color-coded to distinguish it from other signals. For example, it may be output externally as jackpot signal 1 from the output terminal (terminal 1) of the multiple output terminals (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101, which serves as an information output unit, to which jackpot signal 1 is output. Alternatively, it may be output externally as a signal separate from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 from an output terminal (other than terminal 1 and terminal 2) of the multiple output terminals (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101, which serves as an information output unit, to which jackpot signal 1 is output (terminal 1) and jackpot signal 2 is output (terminal 2).

[Big Win Type Distribution Table]
Here, Figure 177(A) shows an example of a distribution table used in the main control device 4 for distributing the types of jackpots. As shown in Figure 177(A), when the type of special game is the first special game triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 (0 to 9), the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 5 (10 to 14), and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 (15 to 19). On the other hand, when the type of special game is the second special game triggered by a ball entering the second prize slot 315, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 (0 to 9), the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 (10 to 19), and there are no random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the completion of a probability variation jackpot game when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the game transitions to a probability variation game state, which is a high-frequency support mode and a high-probability mode. After the completion of a normal jackpot game when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the game transitions to a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode. That is, after the completion of a jackpot game triggered by the first special symbol game, there is a 75% chance of transitioning to a probability variation game state and a 25% chance of transitioning to a time-saving game state. On the other hand, after the completion of a jackpot game triggered by the second special symbol game, there is a 100% chance of transitioning to a probability variation game state and there is no transition to a time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the probability variation game state ends when a predetermined number of special symbol games (for example, 100 times) are executed in succession and the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and the game transitions to a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode. In other words, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is a probability variation machine, but unlike the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment which is configured as a loop probability variation machine, it is configured as a so-called ST machine in which an upper limit is set on the number of special symbol games that can be played in the probability variation game state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state ends when a predetermined number of special symbol games (for example, 100 times) are played in succession in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and the game transitions to a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode.

[General Diagram Win/Loss Table]
Here, Figures 177(B) and 177(C) show an example of a normal draw win/loss table. In this embodiment, two types of normal draw win/loss tables are set: the low-frequency support mode normal draw win/loss table shown in Figure 177(B) and the high-frequency support mode normal draw win/loss table shown in Figure 177(C). That is, in this embodiment, the normal draw win probability differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, with the high-frequency support mode having a higher normal draw win probability than the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 177(B) is the table used for the normal symbol win lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 177(B), in the low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 is set to 0, and a value of 1 to 299 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 is set to 0 to 1 to 299 to 300. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the probability of a normal symbol win is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is set low.

The high-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 177(C) is the table used for the normal symbol win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. As shown in Figure 177(C), in the high-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, contrary to the low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a loss, and a value of 1 to 299 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a normal symbol win. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state and time reduction game state), the probability of a normal symbol win is set to 299/300, which is higher than in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), and the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is also increased.

Furthermore, the probability of a normal win in low-frequency support mode and the probability of a normal win in high-frequency support mode are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 177(B) and 177(C), but can be changed as appropriate.

[Table of Classification by General Diagram]
Here, Figures 177(D) and 177(E) show an example of a per-roll type distribution table. In this embodiment, two types of per-roll type distribution tables are set: the low-frequency support mode per-roll type distribution table shown in Figure 177(D) and the high-frequency support mode per-roll type distribution table shown in Figure 177(E). That is, in this embodiment, the distribution probabilities for per-roll types (per short-open per-roll and per long-open per-roll) differ between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

In this case, when a short-opening normal win occurs, the electric mechanism 315b is opened for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), allowing the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315 for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). However, in this short-opening normal win game, because the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is short, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315, and in most cases, the game ball does not enter the second prize slot 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening regular win, the electric mechanism 315b is open for a longer period (e.g., 6 seconds) than in a short-opening regular win game. This allows the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315 for a longer period (e.g., 6 seconds) than in a short-opening regular win game. In this long-opening regular win game, the longer opening time of the electric mechanism 315b makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315, and it is possible to reserve the right to execute the second special win game up to the maximum number (e.g., 4).

The low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 177(D) is the table used for the normal win lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 177(D), in the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 0 and 99, it is set to a short-open normal win, and when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 100 and 199, it is set to a long-open normal win. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the distribution rate between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short-opening normal wins and long-opening normal wins in low-frequency support mode (normal gameplay state) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution ratio for long-opening normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins is zero) or nearly zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins is one or two).

The high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 177(E) is the table used for the normal win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. As shown in Figure 177(E), in the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, a value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is set to 0 for a short-open normal win, and a value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is set to 1 to 199 for a long-open normal win. In other words, in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state and time reduction game state), it is set to be easier to be allocated to a long-open normal win than a short-open normal win. Of course, the distribution rate between short-opening normal wins and long-opening normal wins in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state and time-saving game state) is not limited to the example shown in Figure 177(E) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution rate of short-opening normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for short-opening normal wins is zero).

Furthermore, the opening of the electric mechanism 315b is not limited to once per regular win, but may occur multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of the electric mechanism 315b during a single regular win may be of one type or multiple types.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
The main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, but as shown in Figure 178, the jackpot signal output processing is performed, and some of the processing procedures are different. Below, the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, and the processing necessary for explaining this embodiment.

[General Winning Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal win game control process performed in step S1405 of the main processing of the main control device 4 in Figure 178 in this embodiment. The normal win game control process in this embodiment includes a step in which, if the game transitions from a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to a low-frequency support mode (normal game state) during the execution of a normal win game, the second prize entry opening 315 is closed by the return of the electric mechanism 315b, thereby immediately and forcibly terminating the normal win game.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 179, in the normal symbol win game control process of this embodiment, when the normal symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped displaying (the normal symbol game has ended), is turned on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 performs the same process as in the first embodiment described above, such as opening the electric mechanism 315b if the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a win (steps S1801 to S1812).

On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped displaying (that the normal symbol game has ended), is off (step S1801: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start a normal symbol winning game, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric mechanism open flag, which is set to on when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set to on (step S3401). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol winning game is currently in progress. If the electric mechanism open flag is set to on (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the normal symbol winning game is currently in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, if the electric mechanism open flag is set to off (step S3401: No), that is, if the normal symbol winning game is not currently in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S3402 and S3403>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the regular winning game control process (step S3402), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position due to the elapsed operating time of the electric mechanism 315b. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3403: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position due to the elapsed operating time of the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3406. On the other hand, if the value of the release time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3403: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric mechanism 315b due to the elapsed operating time of the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3404.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3403: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric mechanism 315b due to the elapsed operating time of the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which indicates a transition from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state), is set to ON (step S3404). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to forcibly terminate the normal game by returning the electric mechanism 315b and closing the second prize entry opening 315 due to the transition from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3635 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 183 below, when transitioning from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), i.e., if the game is transitioning from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S3405) and proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), i.e., if the game is transitioning from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state) and it is time to forcibly terminate the normal win game, the MPU 41 terminates the normal win game control process.

<Steps S3406-S3408>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3403: Yes), or if the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes) and the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3405), that is, if it is time to reset the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 resets the electric mechanism 315b (step S3406). This closes the second prize slot 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism closing command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S3407), sets an electric mechanism open flag to OFF to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3408), and terminates the normal game control process.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to terminate the animation indicating that the electric mechanism is open, which is performed, for example, in the symbol display unit 341, which acts as an information output unit outputting moving image information, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

[Special Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main processing of the main control device 4 in Figure 178 in this embodiment. In the special symbol game control process of this embodiment, the special symbol game does not end after the special symbol variation display time has elapsed, but rather includes a step in which the special symbol variation stop state is maintained for a certain period of time (confirmation display time) after the special symbol variation display has stopped. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol game does not end immediately when the special symbol variation display stops, but rather ends after the confirmation display time has elapsed after the special symbol variation display has stopped. As a result, if a jackpot game is started after the end of the special symbol game, the jackpot signal 1 is output after the confirmation display time has elapsed. Furthermore, if the special symbol game in question is the last second special symbol game (final remaining reserved game) executed by the second special symbol reserve at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 will be stopped after the confirmation display time, which is the termination condition for the second special symbol game, has elapsed.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 180, in the special feature game control processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41, when the flag indicating a jackpot game is off (step S1901: No) and the flag indicating a special feature variation is off (step S1902: No), that is, when it is the timing to start a special feature game, executes a process to start a special feature game, similar to the first embodiment described above (steps S1904 and S1905), provided that the reserved right to execute a special feature game is in the special feature reserved storage area set as a reserved number storage area in the RAM 41 of the main control device 4 (step S1903: Yes). In other words, in the special symbol game control processing of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, the right to execute the second special symbol game is reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserve storage area set in the RAM 41 of the main control device 4 as a reserve number storage area, and the right to execute the second special symbol game is reserved and stored in the reserve number storage area, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game, for which the right was reserved and stored when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), by shooting the game ball to the right side of the game board 31, it is possible to continuously execute the second special symbol game while maintaining the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating that the special symbol variation is being displayed is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the first or second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (while the special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in step S2104 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 28 has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3501). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop displaying the special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variation.

If the special symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop displaying the special symbol that is currently being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the variation display time has not elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not time to stop displaying the special symbol that is currently being displayed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3505.

<Steps S3502-S3504>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop displaying the variable special symbol, the MPU 41 stops displaying the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S3502). The MPU 41 then turns on the confirmed display flag, which indicates that the stopped display state of the special symbol is maintained for a certain period of time (confirmed display time), and further sets a confirmed display counter that indicates the remaining time of the confirmed display time (step S3504), and ends the special symbol game control process.

<Step S3505>
If the variation display time has not elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not the timing to stop the variation display of the special symbol, the MPU 41 determines whether the confirmation display flag, which is set to ON in step S3503 to indicate that a confirmation display is in progress, is set to ON (step S3505).

If the confirmation display flag is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506. Conversely, if the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (step S3505: No), i.e., if the confirmation display is not active, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
If the "Confirmation Display in Progress" flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is in progress, is set to ON (Step S3505: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the confirmation display counter, which indicates the remaining time for the confirmation display set in Step S3504 (Step S3506), and determines whether the value of the confirmation display counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (Step S3507). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the special game.

If the value of the confirmed display counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3507: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the special game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3508. On the other hand, if the value of the confirmed display counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3507: No), i.e., it is not time to end the special game, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
If the value of the confirmed display counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3507: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has stopped displaying (step S3508), and sets the special symbol variation display in ON, indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the process of changing (the special symbol game is in progress) (step S3509), and ends the special symbol game control process.

[Game state transition process]
Here, Figures 181 to 183 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main processing of the main control device 4 in Figure 178 in this embodiment. The game state transition process in this embodiment includes a step in which various flags necessary to output jackpot signal 1 or jackpot signal 2 in the jackpot signal output process in Figure 184, which will be described later, are set.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 181, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates the start of a jackpot game, is on or off (step S3601). In the jackpot game control process of Figure 29, the jackpot game start flag is set to on in step S2205 when a jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 when a jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), i.e., it is time to start a jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is OFF (step S3601: No), i.e., it is not time to start a jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3615 in Figure 182.

<Steps S3602-S3604>
If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is to start, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to off (step S3602) and determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to on (step S3603). The normal game state flag is set to on in step S3634 of Figure 183 of the game state transition process when the game transitions from a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state to a normal game state.

If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S3604) and proceeds to step S3613. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), i.e., the game is not in a normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3605.

<Steps S3605-S3607>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3603: No), that is, if the game is not in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the probability variation game state, is set to on (step S3605). The probability variation game state flag is set to on in step S3624 of Figure 182 of the game state transition process when the game transitions to the probability variation game state due to the end of a probability variation jackpot game.

If the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation game state, is set to ON (step S3605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state flag to OFF (step S3606) and proceeds to step S3608.

On the other hand, if the probability variation game state flag is set to off (step S3605: No), i.e., if the game is not in the probability variation game state, the MPU 41 can determine that the game is in the time-saving game state. Therefore, it sets the time-saving game state flag, which indicates the time-saving game state, to off (step S3607), and proceeds to step S3608. Note that the time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S3627 of Figure 182 of the game state transition process when the game transitions to the time-saving game state due to the end of a normal jackpot game.

<Steps S3608-S3610>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 sets the Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop A flag to ON. The Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop A flag is a flag that indicates that the basic signal of Jackpot Signal 2 is stopped when a jackpot game begins.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode (indicating a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state) to off (step S3609), clears the value of the support count counter (indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in high-frequency support mode) (step S3610), and proceeds to step S3611.

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
In step S3611, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is a probability variation jackpot game (step S3611). Whether the jackpot game to be started is a probability variation jackpot game is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the special symbol execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412.

If the jackpot game being started is a probability variation jackpot game (step S3611: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation jackpot game state flag to ON (step S3612), indicating that the game is in a probability variation jackpot game state where a probability variation jackpot game is being executed, and proceeds to step S3613. The probability variation jackpot game state flag is referenced in step S3621 of Figure 182 of the game state transition process to determine whether to transition the game state to a probability variation game state or a normal game state when the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot game being started is not a probability variation jackpot game (step S3611: No), i.e., if the jackpot game being started is a normal jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3613 and S3614>
When a jackpot game is about to start, the MPU 41, upon completion of steps S3602 to S3612, sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to ON (step S3613), which starts outputting the jackpot signal 1 to an external device such as the hall computer 102, and proceeds to step S3614. The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is referenced in step S3701 of the jackpot signal output processing shown in Figure 184 below to determine whether or not to start outputting the jackpot signal 1.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output start flag to ON (step S3614), which initiates the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 to an external device such as the hall computer 102, and terminates the game state transition process. The jackpot signal 2A output start flag is referenced in step S3707 of the jackpot signal output process (described later in Figure 184) to determine whether or not to start outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2.

<Step S3615>
If the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, if it is not time to start a jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game end flag, which indicates the end of the jackpot game, is on, as shown in Figure 182 (step S3615). The jackpot game end flag is set to on in step S2251 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 29 when the jackpot game is ending.

If the jackpot game termination flag is ON (step S3615: Yes), i.e., the jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3616. On the other hand, if the jackpot game termination flag is OFF (step S3615: No), i.e., it is not time to terminate the jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3628 in Figure 183.

<Steps S3616-S3620>
If the jackpot game termination flag is on (step S3615: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), to on (step S3616).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a support count counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in high-frequency support mode (step S3617). The support count counter is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol game is started in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) in step S2110 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 28. It is then referenced in step S3629 of Figure 183 in the game state transition process to determine whether to transition from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to normal game state after a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the Jackpot Signal 1 Output Stop Flag to ON (step S3618) to stop the output of Jackpot Signal 1 to an external device such as the hall computer 102, and also sets the Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop Flag to ON (step S3619) to stop the output of the basic signal of Jackpot Signal 2 to an external device such as the hall computer 102. The Jackpot Signal 1 Output Stop Flag is referenced in step S3704 of the Jackpot Signal Output Processing shown in Figure 184 to determine whether or not to stop the output of Jackpot Signal 1 to an external device such as the hall computer 102. Similarly, the Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop Flag is referenced in step S3710 of the Jackpot Signal Output Processing shown in Figure 184 to determine whether or not to stop the output of the basic signal of Jackpot Signal 2 to an external device such as the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end flag, which indicates the end of a jackpot game, to off (step S3620), and sets the jackpot signal 2A output start flag, which starts the output of the basic signal of jackpot signal 2, to on (step S3621), and then proceeds to step S3622.

<Step S3622>
In step S3622, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variation jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation jackpot game state where a probability variation jackpot game is being executed, is turned on. The probability variation jackpot game state flag is set to turn on in step S3612 of Figure 181 when the game state transition process transitions from a probability variation game state, a normal game state, or a time-saving game state to a probability variation jackpot game state.

If the probability variation jackpot game state flag is ON (step S3622: Yes), i.e., the game is in the probability variation jackpot game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3623. On the other hand, if the probability variation jackpot game state flag is OFF (step S3622: No), i.e., the game is not in the probability variation jackpot game state but in the normal jackpot game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3626.

<Step S3623>
If the probability variation jackpot game state flag is on (step S3622: Yes), that is, if the game is in the probability variation jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a probability variation game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in the probability variation game state (step S3623), and proceeds to step S3624. The probability variation game state command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute special effects, including background effects (see Figure 189 (B1)) corresponding to the probability variation game state, on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the probability variation game state command.

<Step S3624>
In step S3624, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in a probability variation game state, and proceeds to step S3625. The probability variation game state flag is referenced in step S3605 of Figure 181 during the game state transition process to identify the game state when a jackpot game is started.

<Step S3625>
In step S3625, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation jackpot game state, to off, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3626>
If the probability variation jackpot game state flag is off (step S3622: No), that is, if the game is in a normal jackpot game state rather than a probability variation jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in a time-saving game state (step S3626), and proceeds to step S3627. The time-saving game state command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol effect, including a background effect (see Figure 189 (B2)) corresponding to the time-saving game state, on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the time-saving game state command.

<Step S3627>
In step S3627, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, to ON, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3628>
If the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3616: No), that is, if it is not time to end the jackpot game, then, as shown in Figure 183, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that it is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), is on (step S3628).

If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3628: Yes), i.e., the MPU 41 is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), the process proceeds to step S3629. On the other hand, if the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S3628: No), i.e., the MPU 41 is not in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3629>
If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3628: Yes), that is, if the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the support count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol plays that can be performed in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), is 0 (step S3629). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to normal game state by performing a predetermined number of special symbol plays.

If the value of the support count counter is 0 (step S3629: Yes), that is, if it is time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state after executing the specified number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3630. On the other hand, if the value of the support count counter is not 0 (step S3629: No), that is, if it is not time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3630>
If the value of the support count counter is 0 (step S3629: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when it is possible to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state by executing the specified number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the special symbol game has ended, is set to ON (step S3630). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state by the end of the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, if it is time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state due to the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3631. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), that is, if it is not time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state because the special symbol game has not ended, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3631-S3633>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, if it is the time to transition from high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) to normal game state due to the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation game state, is set to ON (step S3631).

If the probability variation game state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state flag to OFF (step S3632) and proceeds to step S3634. Conversely, if the probability variation game state flag is set to OFF (step S3631: No), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag, indicating that the game is in a time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3633) and proceeds to step S3634.

<Steps S3634-S3638>
In step S3634, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in a normal game state (step S3634), and also sets the normal game state transition flag to ON, indicating that the game is transitioning to a normal game state (step S3635). The normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3404 of the normal prize game control process in Figure 179 to determine whether or not to forcibly terminate the normal prize game (forcibly close the second prize slot 315) based on the transition to the normal game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that it is in a normal game state (step S3636), and sets the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that it is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), to off (step S3637).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag to ON (step S3638), which stops the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 based on the transition to the normal game state, and terminates the game state transition process.

[Big Win Signal Output Processing]
Here, Figures 184 and 185 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot signal output process performed in step S3301 of the main processing of the main control device 4 in Figure 178 in this embodiment.

<Step S3701>
As shown in Figure 184, in the jackpot signal output processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is on or off (step S3701). The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is a flag that causes the hall computer 102 to start outputting jackpot signal 1, indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. It is set to on in step S3613 of the game state transition processing in Figure 181 when a jackpot game is started.

If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3702. Conversely, if the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is off (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
If the flag for starting output of the jackpot signal 1 is on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1, which indicates that the game is in a jackpot state (a jackpot game is in progress), as a high-level signal from terminal 1 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101 (step S3702). As a result, the hall computer 102 can understand that the game machine 10 is in a jackpot state (a jackpot game is in progress) by receiving the jackpot signal 1. The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal 1 to the data display 103, so that the data display 103 can display that the game is in a jackpot state (a jackpot game is in progress) and can display the number of jackpot games, including the jackpot game in question. In addition, if the hall computer 102 receives the jackpot signal 1 while receiving the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, it can understand that the jackpot is started based on a special symbol game that was started in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state). Then, the hall computer 102 outputs a signal to the data display 103 indicating that the jackpot was started based on a special symbol game that was started in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state) (or a signal that counts up the number of consecutive jackpots), so that the data display 103 can display the number of consecutive jackpots.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to off (step S3703), and terminates the jackpot signal output processing.

<Step S3704>
If the Jackpot Signal 1 Output Start Flag is off (Step S3701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the Jackpot Signal 1 Output Stop Flag is on (Step S3704). The Jackpot Signal 1 Output Stop Flag is a flag that stops the output of Jackpot Signal 1 to the hall computer 102, indicating that a jackpot game is in progress (a jackpot game is being played). It is set to on in step S3618 of the game state transition process in Figure 182 when the jackpot game is terminated.

If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is on (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3705. Conversely, if the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3707.

<Steps S3705 and S3706>
If the flag to stop outputting the jackpot signal 1 is on (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output of the jackpot signal 1, which indicates that the game is in a jackpot state (a jackpot game is in progress), by setting it to a low level (step S3702). As a result, the hall computer 102 can understand that the jackpot state (jackpot game) on the game machine 10 has ended because the output of the jackpot signal 1 has stopped. The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal to the data display 103 indicating that the output of the jackpot signal 1 has stopped, so the data display 103 can stop displaying that the game is in a jackpot state (a jackpot game is in progress).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to off (step S3706), and terminates the jackpot signal output processing.

<Step S3707>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is on (step S3707). The jackpot signal 2A output start flag is a flag that causes the hall computer 102 to start outputting the basic signal of jackpot signal 2, which indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is in progress) or a high-frequency support mode (a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state). It is set to on in step S3614 of the game state transition process in Figure 181 when a jackpot game is started, or in step S3614 when the game ends and the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode (a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state).

If the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is on (step S3707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708. Conversely, if the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is off (step S3707: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3710.

<Steps S3708 and S3709>
If the flag for starting output of the jackpot signal 2A is on (step S3707: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates that the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), as a high-level signal through information output processing, for example, from terminal 2 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101 which serves as an information output unit (step S3702). As a result, the hall computer 102 can receive the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 and understand that the game machine 10 is in a jackpot game state or high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal corresponding to the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 to the data display 103, so that the data display 103 can display that the game is in a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is in progress) or high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output start flag to off (step S3709), and terminates the jackpot signal output processing.

<Step S3710>
If the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is off (step S3707: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is on (step S3710). The jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is a flag that stops the output of the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer 102, which indicates that the game is in a jackpot state (a jackpot game is in progress) or a high-frequency support mode (a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state), based on the start or end of a jackpot game. It is set to on when a jackpot game is started in step S3608 of the game state transition process in Figure 181, or when a jackpot game is ended in step S3619 of the game state transition process in Figure 182.

If the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is on (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3705. Conversely, if the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3707.

<Steps S3711 and S3712>
If the Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop A flag is on (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output of the jackpot signal by setting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates that the game is in a jackpot state (a jackpot game is in progress) or a high-frequency support mode (a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state), to a low level (step S3711). As a result, the hall computer 102 can determine that the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) in the game machine 10 has ended when the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped and the output stop period exceeds a specific period. The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal to the data display 103 indicating that the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) has ended, so the data display 103 can stop displaying that it is in high-frequency support mode.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag to off (step S3712), and terminates the jackpot signal output processing.

<Step S3713>
If the Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop A flag is off (step S3710: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop B flag is on (step S3713). The Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop B flag is a flag that stops the output of the basic signal of the Jackpot Signal 2 to the hall computer 102, which indicates that the game is in a Jackpot state (in the middle of a Jackpot game) or a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), based on the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). In step S3638 of the game state transition process in Figure 183, it is set to on when the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) ends.

If the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is on (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714. Conversely, if the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is off (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3722 in Figure 185.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
If the Jackpot Signal 2A Output Stop B flag is on (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output by information stop processing by setting the basic signal of Jackpot Signal 2, which indicates that the game is in a Jackpot state (in the middle of a Jackpot game) or High Frequency Support Mode (Probability Variation Game State or Time-Saving Game State), to a low level (step S3714). As a result, the hall computer 102 can determine that the High Frequency Support Mode (Probability Variation Game State or Time-Saving Game State) in the game machine 10 has ended when the output of the basic signal of Jackpot Signal 2 is stopped and the output stop period exceeds a specific period. The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal to the data display 103 indicating that the High Frequency Support Mode (Probability Variation Game State or Time-Saving Game State) has ended, so the data display 103 can stop displaying that it is in High Frequency Support Mode.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag to off (step S3715), and proceeds to step S3716.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
In step S3716, the MPU 41 identifies the second special feature number M. The second special feature number M can be identified by referring to the second special feature number storage area NAB (see Figure 8) of the second special feature number storage area REB set in the RAM 41 of the main control device 4.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the identified number of reserved second special symbols M is 0 (step S3717). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether there are any reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols), which are the reserved right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state).

The MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process if the number of reserved second special symbols M is 0 (step S3717: Yes), that is, if there are no reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols) which are the reserved right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). In other words, if there are no reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols) which are the reserved right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 175) described later is not output, and the output is stopped by setting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 to a low level in step S3715. Therefore, by maintaining the jackpot signal 2 at a low level for a specified period of time, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is completely stopped. As a result, the hall computer 102 can recognize that the high-frequency support mode (probability-increasing game state or time-saving game state) has ended, and can therefore stop displaying the high-frequency support mode on the data display 103.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols M is not 0 (step S3717: No), that is, if there are reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols) which are the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), the process proceeds to step S3718.

<Step S3718>
If the number of reserved second special symbols M is not 0 (step S3717: No), that is, if there are reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols) which are the reserved right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), the MPU 41 outputs an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 175) from, for example, terminal 2 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101 (step S3718), and proceeds to step S3719. That is, the extension signal is output from the same output terminal as the basic signal on the external output terminal board 101.

In this way, by outputting the extended signal from the same output terminal as the basic signal on the external output terminal board 101, which acts as an information output unit, the hall computer 102 can recognize the extended signal as a jackpot signal 2, just like the basic signal. Furthermore, because the extended signal is output from the same output terminal as the basic signal on the external output terminal board 101, there is no need to provide a new output terminal or wiring for outputting the extended signal.

The extension signal continues to be output until the value of the second special symbol reserve counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol at the end of the high-frequency support mode (remaining number of reserved second special symbols), reaches 0, or until a jackpot game is started before the value of the second special symbol reserve counter reaches 0 (see steps S3727 to S3730 in Figure 185). Furthermore, as described later, if there are remaining reserved second special symbols at the end of the high-frequency support mode, the second special symbol reserve counter is set in the memory area, for example, in RAM 412 (see step S3719).

Here, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 has a different output method than the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2. Specifically, while the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, thus the basic signal and the extension signal have different output methods (see Figure 175). Therefore, a hall computer 102 capable of distinguishing between the output methods of the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, for example, a hall computer 102 that stores and can execute a program capable of distinguishing between the output methods of the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, can distinguish and recognize whether the received jackpot signal 2 is the basic signal or the extension signal. As a result, when the hall computer 102 receives a jackpot signal 1 indicating a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is in progress) while receiving a jackpot signal 2, it can determine whether the jackpot game was initiated based on a special symbol game played in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), or based on a special symbol game played using a second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the right to play the second special symbol game at the end of high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the gaming hall can choose whether or not to include jackpot games initiated based on special symbol games played using a second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the right to play the second special symbol game at the end of high-frequency support mode, in the jackpot winning streak count, and also choose whether or not to display them in the jackpot winning streak count on the data display 103.

Furthermore, by outputting the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer 102 in a way that is distinguishable from the basic signal, the hall computer 102 can, while the second special symbol game is being played in response to the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), display text images or other visuals on the data display 103 that clearly indicate or suggest to the player that it is possible to increase the number of consecutive jackpots, such as "Consecutive Win Challenge," "Consecutive Win Chance," "Jackpot Challenge," or "Probability Variation Jackpot Chance."

In this embodiment, since the basic signal and extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 are output from the same output terminal on the external output terminal board 101, which serves as the information output unit, if the hall computer 102 on the store side is not configured to distinguish between the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, such a hall computer 102 will not distinguish between the extension signal and the basic signal and will simply perceive it as the jackpot signal 2. Therefore, even if the hall computer 102 on the store side is not configured to distinguish between the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, if the hall computer 102 receives the jackpot signal 2 while receiving the jackpot signal 2, it can count the jackpot in the number of consecutive jackpots by including the jackpot in the number of consecutive jackpots when the jackpot signal 2 is received. Therefore, the hall computer 102 can display on the data display 103 that the jackpot game triggered by the second special symbol game (a game where the right to execute the second special symbol game is held in reserve at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) is included in the number of consecutive jackpots. In this case, the data display 103 cannot display an indication that it is the execution period of the second special symbol game (a game where the right to execute the second special symbol game is held in reserve at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state)), for example, an indication that it is a special symbol game that can increase the number of consecutive jackpots after the end of the high-frequency support mode. However, data processing can be simplified because there is no need to distinguish between the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. However, the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 only need to have different output methods. For example, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Alternatively, the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, or as pulse signals or on/off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is also conceivable that the basic signal and extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 be output in the same output manner. That is, from the start of the first jackpot game until the execution of the second special symbol game (for the retained right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) is completed, the jackpot signal 2 may be continuously output to an external device such as the hall computer 102 on the store side in the same output manner. Even in this case, the hall computer 102 on the store side can count the jackpot game executed triggered by the remaining retained second special symbol in the jackpot consecutive win count by performing simplified data processing based on the jackpot signal 2, similar to the case where the hall computer 102 is configured to distinguish between the basic signal and extension signal of the jackpot signal 2. Therefore, the number of jackpot consecutive wins, including the jackpot game executed triggered by the remaining retained second special symbol, can be displayed on the data display 103 by simple data processing.

<Steps S3719-S3721>
In step S3719, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol hold count counter corresponding to the second special symbol hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode in a memory area set in the RAM 412. Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot signal 2B output command indicating that the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output (step S3720), and sets the jackpot signal 2B output flag indicating that the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output to ON (step S3721), and terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3722>
If the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is off (step S3713: No), as shown in Figure 185, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2B output in progress flag, which indicates that the extended signal of jackpot signal 2 is being output, is set to on (step S3722).

If the flag indicating that the jackpot signal 2B is being output is set to ON (step S3722: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3723. If the flag indicating that the jackpot signal 2B is being output is set to OFF (step S3722: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3723>
If the flag indicating that the jackpot signal 2B is being output is set to ON (step S3722: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the first or second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state is set to ON (step S3723). The flag indicating that the variable state is being displayed is set to ON in step S2107 when the variable display of the first or second special symbol starts in the special symbol variable start process shown in Figure 28, and is set to OFF in step S1909 when the first or second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the said special symbol game control process.

If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3724. If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is set to OFF (step S3723: No), the process proceeds to step S3727.

<Step S3724>
If the Special Symbol Variation Display Flag is set to ON (Step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the Subtraction Stop Flag is set to ON (Step S3724). The Subtraction Stop Flag is a flag used to stop the subtraction of the value of the Second Special Symbol Reserve Counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted Second Special Symbol Games among the Second Special Symbol Reserves (Second Special Symbol Remaining Reserves), which are the reserved rights to execute the Second Special Symbol Game at the end of the High Frequency Support Mode (Probability Variation Game State or Time-Saving Game State). The flag is set to ON in Step S3726, described below, when the value of the Second Special Symbol Reserve Counter is subtracted due to the execution of the Second Special Symbol Game.

If the subtraction stop flag is set to ON (step S3724: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output processing. If the subtraction stop flag is set to OFF (step S3724: No), the process proceeds to step S3725.

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
If the subtraction stop flag is set to off (step S3724: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second special symbol hold count counter (step S3725), sets the subtraction stop flag to on (step S3726), and terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Steps S3727 and S3728>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol variation is being displayed is set to off (step S3723: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the special symbol variation has stopped, which indicates that the special symbol game has ended, is set to on (step S3727).

If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3727: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the subtraction stop flag to OFF (step S3728) and proceeds to step S3729. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3727: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Steps S3729 and S3730>
In step S3729, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3729). That is, it determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game, which is executed based on the second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is the reserved right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), is a jackpot.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed special symbol game is a jackpot (Step S3729: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the second special symbol reserve counter (Step S3730) and proceeds to Step S3732. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed special symbol game is not a jackpot (Step S3729: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to Step S3731.

<Step S3731>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3729: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game executed based on the second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is the reserved right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), is not a jackpot but a miss, then the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the second special symbol reserve counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol reserves (second special symbol remaining reserve), is 0 (step S3731). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the completed second special symbol game is the second special symbol game executed based on the last second special symbol remaining reserve among the second special symbol remaining reserves.

If the value of the second special symbol reserve counter is 0 (step S3731: Yes), i.e., the completed second special symbol game is the second special symbol game executed based on the last remaining second special symbol reserve, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3732. On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol reserve counter is not 0 (step S3731: No), i.e., the completed second special symbol game is not the second special symbol game executed based on the last remaining second special symbol reserve, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Steps S3732-S3734>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed second special symbol game is a jackpot and the second special symbol reserve counter is cleared (step S3730), or if the completed second special symbol game is a second special symbol game executed based on the last remaining second special symbol reserve among the remaining second special symbol reserves (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 (step S3732) and sets a jackpot signal 2B output stop command to indicate that the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 has been stopped (step S3733). That is, if a jackpot game is executed after the completion of any second special symbol game executed based on a second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is a reserve of the right to execute a second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), or if the execution of all second special symbol games for the remaining second special symbol reserves has been completed, the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. In other words, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output during the execution period of the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the hold on the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 makes it possible to identify that it is the execution period of the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol remaining hold.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Outputting Jackpot Signal 2B" flag, which indicates that the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output, to off (step S3734), and terminates the jackpot signal output process.

Thus, in the jackpot signal output processing, an extension signal that can identify that it is the execution period of the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the hold of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode, is continuously output as jackpot signal 2 after the basic signal output stops. Therefore, when the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 is output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the hall computer 102 can understand that the period during which the extension signal is received is when the second special symbol game is being executed based on the second special symbol remaining hold. Therefore, when the hall computer 102 receives jackpot signal 1, which indicates that it is in a jackpot game state (execution of a jackpot game) during the period during which the extension signal is received, it can understand that the jackpot game is a jackpot game executed based on the second special symbol remaining hold. As a result, the hall computer 102 can manage the number of consecutive wins by including jackpot games triggered by remaining reserved 2nd special symbols in the count of consecutive wins, even if the jackpot game was triggered by a special symbol game executed in the normal game state transitioned to after the high-frequency support mode ends, if the jackpot game was executed based on a remaining reserved 2nd special symbol game. This allows the hall computer 102 to display jackpot games triggered by remaining reserved 2nd special symbols in the count of consecutive wins on the data display 103, thus preventing a discrepancy between the number of consecutive wins displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive wins perceived by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive wins displayed on the data display 103 is prevented, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, some of the steps of the command determination process performed by the voice lamp control device 5 differ from those of the first embodiment described above.

[Command determination process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a process is executed to set the type of background effect (stage effect) to be displayed behind the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 during special symbol games, depending on the game state. Here, Figures 186 and 187 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process of this embodiment. The output method when the symbol display unit 341 displays an image as output information is mainly the display of moving images.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 186, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3801: Yes), it proceeds to step S3802; if it has not received a command (step S3801: No), it terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If a command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a probability variation game state command indicating a transition to a probability variation game state (step S3802). The probability variation game state command is set in step S3623 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 182 when the game transitions to a probability variation game state.

If the MPU 51 receives a command indicating a probability variation game state (step S3802: Yes), it sets the probability variation game state flag to ON (step S3803) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a probability variation game state command (step S3802: No), it proceeds to step S3804.

<Steps S3804 and S3805>
If no probability variation game state command has been received (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a time-saving game state command indicating a transition to a time-saving game state (step S3804). The time-saving game state command is set in step S3627 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 182 when the game transitions to a time-saving game state.

If the MPU 51 receives a time-saving game state command (step S3804: Yes), it sets the time-saving game state flag to ON (step S3804) to indicate that the game is in time-saving game state, and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a time-saving game state command (step S3804: No), it proceeds to step S3806.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
If no time-saving game state command has been received (step S3804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal game state command indicating a transition to the normal game state (step S3806). The normal game state command is set in step S3636 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 183 when the game transitions to the normal game state.

If the MPU 51 receives a time-saving game state command (step S3806: Yes), it sets the normal game state flag to ON (step S3807) to indicate that it is in the normal game state, and proceeds to step S3808. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a normal game state command (step S3806: No), it proceeds to step S3812.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether the probability variation game state flag is set to ON. The probability variation game state flag is a flag that indicates that the game is in the probability variation game state, and is set to ON in step S3803 of the command determination process when the game transitions to the probability variation game state.

If the probability variation game state flag is set to ON (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the probability variation game state flag to OFF (step S3809) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the probability variation game state flag is set to ON (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3810.

<Steps S3810 and S3811>
If the probability variation game state flag is set to ON (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the time reduction game state flag is set to ON (step S3810). The time reduction game state flag is a flag that indicates that the game is in the time reduction game state, and is set to ON in step S3805 of the command determination process when the game transitions to the time reduction game state.

If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S3811) and terminates the command determination process. Conversely, if the time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3812>
If no normal game state command is received (step S3806: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot signal 2B output command (step S3812). The jackpot signal 2B output command is a command indicating that an extended signal of jackpot signal 2 has been output, and is set in step S3733 of the jackpot signal output process in Figure 185 when the output of the extended signal begins.

If the MPU 51 receives a command indicating that the jackpot signal 2B is being output (step S3812: Yes), it proceeds to step S3813. If it does not receive a command indicating that the jackpot signal 2B is being output (step S3812: No), it proceeds to step S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
If the MPU 51 receives the command "Outputting Jackpot Signal 2B" (step S3812: Yes), it sets the "Outputting Extension Signal" flag to ON, indicating that the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 is being output (step S3813). In other words, based on the "Outputting Extension Signal" flag, the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the period in which the second special symbol game (variation display) is being executed is based on the second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the hold of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the number of second special symbol reserves (remaining second special symbol reserves), which are the number of second special symbol game rights reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), into the memory area set in the RAM 512 (step S3814).

As mentioned above, the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 has a special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes a second special symbol hold number storage area corresponding area (not shown) capable of storing the second special symbol hold number M. Therefore, the MPU 51 can identify the remaining second special symbol holds by referring to the second special symbol hold number M stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area corresponding area (not shown) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state and time-saving game state).

<Step S3815>
If the command "Outputting Jackpot Signal 2B" has not been received (Step S3812: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it has received a command to stop the output of the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates that the output of the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 has been stopped (Step S3815).

If the MPU 51 receives a command to stop outputting the jackpot signal 2B (step S3815: Yes), it proceeds to step S3816. If it does not receive a command to stop outputting the jackpot signal 2B (step S3815: No), it proceeds to step S3818 in Figure 187.

<Steps S3816 and S3817>
If a command to stop outputting the jackpot signal 2B is received (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the extended signal output flag, which indicates that the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output, to off (step S3816), clears the number of remaining unexecuted second special symbols (step S3817), and terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3818 and S3819>
If the jackpot signal 2B output stop command has not been received (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command, as shown in Figure 187 (step S3818). The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that includes the display time of the special symbol variation in the special symbol game to be started, the result of the jackpot lottery, etc., and is set in step S2105 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 28 when the special symbol variation is started (the special symbol game is started).

If the MPU 51 receives a special pattern variation command (step S3818: Yes), it proceeds to step S3820. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive a special pattern variation command (step S3818: No), it executes processing based on other commands (step S3819) and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3820>
When a special feature variation pattern command is received (step S3818: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3820). The normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3807 of the command determination process in Figure 186 when the game transitions to a normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3820: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3821. If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3820: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3824.

<Steps S3821-S3823>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3820: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the extended signal output flag, which indicates that the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output, is set to ON (step S3821). The extended signal output flag is set to ON in step S3813 of the command determination process in Figure 186 when the output of the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 begins.

If the extended signal output flag is set to ON (step S3821: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the normal game state A performance setting process (step S3822) and then terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the extended signal output flag is set to OFF (step S3821: No), the MPU 51 executes the normal game state B performance setting process (step S3823) and then terminates the command determination process.

Furthermore, in the normal game state A performance setting process and the normal game state B performance setting process, based on the display time of the special symbols included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery, etc., a process similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above is executed, thereby setting the performance to be executed in the special symbol game.

Furthermore, the background image (background effect) displayed behind the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 differs between the normal game state A and the normal game state B.

Figures 188 and 189 show examples of images such as background images (background effects) that are displayed as output information on the symbol display unit 341 in various game states.

Figure 188(A) shows the background effects during normal gameplay. As shown in Figure 188(A), during normal gameplay, a predetermined background effect is selected from multiple types and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 through video information output processing. The multiple types of background effects include a basic background effect that is set by default, a pre-read zone background effect that is set when certain conditions are met, and a normal transition background effect that is set when transitioning from high-frequency support mode (probability variation gameplay state or time-saving gameplay state) to normal gameplay. Different background images are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for the basic background effect, the pre-read zone background effect, and the normal transition background effect.

The basic background effects are those that are set except when pre-read zone background effects or normal transition background effects are set, and include background effects A, B, C, and D. Of course, there is no limit to the number of basic background effects; they can be set as appropriate.

Each background effect A-D is set consecutively until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, except when the pre-read zone background effect or the background effect during normal transition is set. When a predetermined number of specific games have been played, another background effect A-D is set. Here, the predetermined number of special symbol games played until another background effect A-D is set may be a fixed number, such as 10 or 15, or a non-fixed number set from a predetermined range. Furthermore, the change to another background effect A-D may be performed by conducting a background effect change lottery, and only if a background effect change is determined in that lottery. Alternatively, the change may occur in the special symbol game following the special symbol game in which a super reach effect or special reach effect (executed when the jackpot lottery result is a loss) was played. In addition, the change may occur in the special symbol game following the special symbol game in which the pre-read zone background effect (executed when the jackpot lottery result is a loss) was played.

Furthermore, the setting order of background effects A through D could be predetermined, such as background effect A → background effect B → background effect C → background effect D → background effect A → ... In this case, if background effects A through D are changed in a different order than predetermined—for example, in reverse order (from background effect A to background effect D) or if a skip occurs (from background effect A to background effect C)—it could be considered that the probability of a jackpot being achieved (jackpot probability) would increase. Of course, the setting order of background effects A through D does not necessarily have to be predetermined; they could be set randomly through a lottery or other means.

Furthermore, while there are no specific restrictions on the content of background effects A through D, possible background effects can reflect the protagonist's daily activities. For example, a school stage background depicting the protagonist going to school, a school stage background depicting the protagonist's activities during classes and breaks, an after-school stage background depicting the protagonist's activities after school, and a home stage background depicting the protagonist's activities at home. Additionally, background effects A through D may be seasonal, such as spring, summer, autumn, and winter stage backgrounds, and should be set as appropriate.

Furthermore, the pre-announcement zone background effect has a higher probability of triggering a jackpot than the basic background effects (background effects A-D), but it is set less frequently than the basic background effects. During this pre-announcement zone background effect, an image indicating that the pre-announcement zone background effect is being performed is displayed, such as an image labeled "○○ Zone".

Furthermore, the pre-read zone background effect can be set when there are multiple "First Special Symbol Reserves," which are the reserved rights to execute the First Special Symbol game. It is set consecutively for multiple Special Symbol games (e.g., 2 to 4 times) corresponding to the number of First Special Symbol Reserves (Number of First Special Symbol Reserves N). Additionally, the pre-read zone background effect can be set when the First Special Symbol Reserves include those with a long display time for the First Special Symbol's variation, such as when a Special Reach effect is executed. Therefore, when the pre-read zone background effect is executed, there is a high probability that a Special Reach effect, which has a high chance of resulting in a jackpot, will be executed. In this respect, as mentioned above, the chance of a jackpot is higher than with the basic background effect.

Furthermore, while one type of pre-announcement zone background animation is sufficient, multiple types may also be set. In this case, it is preferable to set the animations so that the probability of a big win differs depending on which animation is performed. Also, when multiple types of pre-announcement zone background animations are set, it is conceivable to switch to a different animation during the execution of one animation. For example, if multiple types of pre-announcement zone background animations with different probability levels of a big win are set, it is conceivable to switch (upgrade) to a pre-announcement zone background animation with a higher probability level during the execution of an animation with a lower probability level of a big win.

Furthermore, the background effects during normal transitions, as mentioned above, are background effects set when transitioning from high-frequency support mode (probability-increasing game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state, and include normal transition background effects A and normal transition background effects B, which are output information as moving images.

The background animation A during normal transitions is set when there is a reserved right to execute the second special symbol game (second special symbol remaining reserved) at the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, background animation A during normal transitions is initiated when the display of the second special symbol game, which will be executed for the second special symbol remaining reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode, begins, and image information is output in response to the change in game state. Therefore, the player can identify the period during which background animation A is being executed as a period during which the second special symbol game, which will be executed for the second special symbol remaining reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode, may be executed.

Furthermore, the background animation A during normal transitions is set when there is a second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode. During the execution period of the second special symbol game in which this background animation A is executed, an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, indicating that it is the execution period, is output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 on the store side. In other words, while the background animation A during normal transitions is being executed, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 on the store side. Therefore, when the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 on the store side, if the data display 103 executes the aforementioned animation (for example, a text image animation such as "Consecutive Wins Challenge") that indicates the period during which the number of consecutive jackpots can be increased after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), the execution period of that animation can be linked to the execution period of the background animation A during normal transitions. This allows players to understand that the period after the end of the high-frequency support mode is a period during which the number of consecutive big wins can be increased, based on both the background animation A displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the animation displayed on the data display unit 103. Therefore, players can easily and reliably understand that the period after the end of the high-frequency support mode is a period during which the number of consecutive big wins can be increased. In particular, even players who are not aware that the background animation A during the normal transition indicates a period during which the number of consecutive big wins can be increased after the end of the high-frequency support mode can easily and reliably understand this based on the animation displayed on the data display unit 103.

The normal transition background effect B is set when there are no second special symbol reserves (second special symbol remaining reserves), which are the reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game, at the end of the high-frequency support mode. This normal transition background effect B is set continuously, for example, until a predetermined number of special symbol games are executed. Once the predetermined number of specific games have been played, the basic background effects (background effects A-D) are set. Here, the predetermined number of special symbol games played from the normal transition background effect B to the basic background effects (background effects A-D) may be a fixed number, such as 10 or 15, or a non-fixed number set from a predetermined range. Furthermore, the change from the normal transition background effect B to the basic background effects (background effects A-D) may be performed by conducting a termination lottery for the normal transition background effect B, and only if it is determined in that lottery to terminate the setting of the normal transition background effect B.

Furthermore, when the normal transition background animation (Normal Transition Background Animation A and Normal Transition Background Animation B) ends and the basic background animation (Background Animations A-D) begins, the type of basic background animation initially set may be fixed (for example, Background Animation A) or may be set randomly by lottery or other means. Also, the timing for ending the normal transition background animation (Normal Transition Background Animation A and Normal Transition Background Animation B) and starting the basic background animation (Background Animations A-D) is preferably at a timing when all corresponding second special symbol games can be executed, at least when there are remaining second special symbol reserves at the end of the high-frequency support mode. The normal transition background animation (Normal Transition Background Animation A and Normal Transition Background Animation B) may be displayed for a longer period. In that case, the start timing of the basic background animation may be determined by lottery.

Furthermore, while two types of background effects are currently set for normal transitions—Normal Transition Background Effects A and Normal Transition Background Effects B—depending on the presence or absence of a second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), it is also possible to set only one type of normal transition background effect, so that the same normal transition background effect is used regardless of whether or not there is a second special symbol remaining reserve.

In this embodiment, a unique background animation is set for transitions from high-frequency support mode (probability-increasing game state or time-saving game state) to normal game state. However, it is also conceivable that a basic background animation (background animations A to D) be set when transitioning from high-frequency support mode to normal game state. In other words, the background animation for transitions to normal game state may be omitted. In this case, the basic background animation (background animations A to D) initially set when transitioning to normal game state may be fixed (for example, background animation A), or it may be set randomly through a lottery or similar method.

Here, Figures 188(B), 188(C), and 189(A) show examples of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during a jackpot game. Specifically, Figures 188(B), 188(C), and 189(A) are examples of images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when transitioning from a normal game state, a probability variation game state, or a time-saving game state to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 188(B), the opening of a jackpot game displays images such as an image indicating the start of the jackpot game and an image showing the number of consecutive jackpots. In the example shown in Figure 188(B), the text image "Jackpot Game" indicates the start of the jackpot game, and the text image "Xth Time" indicates the number of consecutive jackpots.

As shown in Figure 188(C), in the opening/closing execution mode for a jackpot game, images are displayed, for example, showing the current round number, the current number of balls (discarded balls) relative to the number of balls (discarded balls) that can be obtained in that jackpot game, and the total number of balls (discarded balls) since the start of the first jackpot game. In the example shown in Figure 188(C), the text image "Round X" represents the round number, the text image "800/1200" represents the current number of balls (discarded balls) relative to the number of balls (discarded balls) that can be obtained in that jackpot game, and the text image "Total 3800 balls" represents the total number of balls (discarded balls) since the start of the first jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 189(A), at the end of a jackpot game, an image is displayed indicating, for example, the end of the jackpot game, or an image showing the total number of balls dispensed since the start of the first jackpot game. In the example shown in Figure 188(C), the text image "Jackpot Ended" indicates the end of the jackpot game, and the text image "5200 Balls Discounted" shows the total number of balls dispensed since the start of the first jackpot game.

When a jackpot game ends, the game transitions to either a high-frequency support mode, specifically a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state. Figure 189 (B1) shows an example screen in the probability variation game state, and Figure 189 (B2) shows an example screen in the time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 189 (B1), during a bonus round, an image indicating that the game is in a bonus round and an image indicating the maximum number of special symbol plays possible in that bonus round are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 189 (B1), the text image "○○RUSH" indicates that the game is in a bonus round, and the text image "ST50 times" indicates the maximum number of special symbol plays possible in that bonus round.

Furthermore, although not clearly shown in Figure 189 (B1), a background animation unique to the probability variation game state is displayed during the probability variation game state.

As shown in Figure 189 (B2), during the time-saving game mode, an image indicating that the time-saving game mode is active and an image indicating the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in that time-saving game mode are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 189 (B2), the text image "XX Mode" indicates that the time-saving game mode is active, and the text image "50 Remaining Time-Saving Games" indicates the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in that time-saving game mode.

Furthermore, although not clearly shown in Figure 189 (B2), a background animation specific to the time-saving game mode is displayed.

Furthermore, when transitioning from a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state to a jackpot game state, the same effects as when transitioning from a normal game state to a jackpot game state are executed (see Figures 188(B), 188(C), and 189(A)). On the other hand, when transitioning from a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state to a normal game state without transitioning to a jackpot game state, as described above, in the special symbol game, depending on whether or not the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the probability variation game state or time-saving game state is reserved, the symbol display unit 341 executes either the normal transition background effect A or the normal transition background effect B, which are unique to transitioning to a normal game state.

Furthermore, although the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a so-called ST (Special Time) machine, the arrangement of the first prize entry point 314, the second prize entry point 315, the through gates 317L and 317R, and the variable prize entry point 316 is the same as that of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, which is configured as a loop probability variation machine. Therefore, in normal gameplay, left-handed shooting, where the game balls are launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31, is advantageous to the player and is therefore encouraged. In probability variation gameplay and time-saving gameplay, right-handed shooting, where the game balls are launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, is advantageous to the player and is therefore encouraged. For this reason, at the start of a jackpot game, for example, at the opening of the jackpot game, an image prompting the player to shoot to the right (in Figure 188(B), an image of the words "Shoot to the Right" and an image of a right-pointing arrow) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, as shown in Figure 188(B). On the other hand, when transitioning from a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state to a normal game state, for example, as shown in Figure 188(C), an image prompting the player to shoot to the left (in Figure 188(C), an image of the words "Shoot Left" and a left-pointing arrow) is displayed in front of the normal transition background image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as a background effect during the transition to the normal state. In this way, when the area on the game board 31 where the game balls are encouraged to be shot changes due to the transition in game state, the encouraged shooting area on the game board 31 is clearly indicated on the symbol display unit 341. By shooting the game balls as indicated on the symbol display unit 341, the player can avoid shooting unnecessary game balls.

<Steps S3824 and S3825>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 187, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3820: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation game state, is set to on (step S3824). The probability variation game state flag is set to on in step S3803 of the command determination process in Figure 186 when the game transitions to a probability variation game state.

If the probability variation game state flag is set to ON (step S3824: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the probability variation game state presentation setting process (step S3825) and then terminates the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the probability variation game state flag is set to OFF (step S3824: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3826.

Here, in the probability variation game state effect setting process, based on the display time of the special symbols included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc., a process similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command judgment process in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above is executed, thereby setting the effects to be executed in the special symbol game. Furthermore, in the probability variation game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect) indicating the probability variation game state is set, along with a text image indicating that the game is in the probability variation state (for example, a text image of "○○RUSH") and an image indicating the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in that probability variation game state (for example, a text image of "ST50 times") are set (see Figure 189 (B1)).

<Steps S3826 and S3827>
If the probability variation game state flag is set to off (step S3824: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3826). The time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S3805 of the command determination process in Figure 186 when the game transitions to a time-saving game state.

If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3826: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the time-saving game state presentation setting process (step S3827) and then terminates the command judgment process. Conversely, if the time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3826: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command judgment process.

Here, in the time-saving game state effect setting process, based on the display time of the special symbols included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc., a process similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command judgment process in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above is executed, thereby setting the effects to be executed in the special symbol game. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect) indicating the time-saving game state is set, along with a text image indicating that the time-saving game state is active (for example, a text image of "XX Mode") and an image indicating the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the current probability variation game state (for example, a text image of "50 time-saving rounds remaining") (see Figure 189 (B2)).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the jackpot game state and the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which is output information that can identify the state, is continuously output externally via the external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as an information output processing. For example, the hall computer 102 of a gaming hall can understand that the game is in the jackpot game state and the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information. As a result, the hall computer 102 can understand the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control. On the other hand, the data display unit 103, which is attached to the gaming machine 10, can display the number of consecutive jackpots from the start of the first jackpot game until the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control, based on the information (signals) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which is output information from the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, the MPU 41, as information output processing, outputs an extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information via the external output terminal board 101 as information output unit. This extended signal allows for the identification of a period during which the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the reserved rights stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB of the second special symbol reserved number storage area REB set in the RAM 412 as a reserved number storage area, or in the special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area set in RAM 512, can be executed. For example, the hall computer 102 of a gaming hall can understand, based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that a predetermined display of the reserved symbols at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control is being executed. As a result, the hall computer 102 can determine, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that a predetermined variation display indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 as a judgment process is a jackpot game, and that this variation display is due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as a favorable state control. Therefore, the hall computer 102 can count jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variation display due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as a favorable state control, including them in the count of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game, which is determined based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information. Consequently, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variation display due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as part of the count of consecutive jackpot games.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information is output continuously for a predetermined period. For example, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect indicating that it is possible to display the changing decorative symbols corresponding to the hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control. Specifically, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control, the data display 103 can display text images such as "Consecutive Win Challenge" or "Jackpot Challenge" to clearly indicate or suggest to the player that it is possible to increase the number of consecutive jackpots. This clearly indicates to the player that it is possible to increase the number of consecutive jackpots even after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) as an advantageous state control. This can increase the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive wins and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Thus, in this embodiment, by providing more detailed notifications according to each game state, the control of each game state can be more effectively performed. Specifically, based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output via the external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as an information output processing unit, it is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot game state or a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control. Furthermore, based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output by the information output unit or the MPU 41 and external output terminal board 101 as information output processing units, it is possible to determine that it is a predetermined fluctuation display due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control. As a result, the data display 103 attached to the game machine 10 can display jackpot games executed based on a predetermined fluctuation display due to a hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control, including the number of consecutive jackpot games in the display. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed as a result of a hold at the end of a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) as a control of advantageous states, a discrepancy between the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive jackpot games perceived by the player is prevented. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 is prevented, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the present invention has been explained using a so-called ST machine as an example. However, the technical concept of the present invention can be applied to gaming machines that transition to at least one of the high-frequency support modes, namely the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, after the end of a jackpot game. For example, the present invention can be applied not only to ST machines but also to loop probability variation machines, type 1 and type 2 mixed machines, and the like.

In a Type 1/Type 2 mixed machine, in addition to jackpots and misses, a minor win is also set as a result of the jackpot lottery. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, a minor win game is executed. In the minor win game, for example, it is possible to enter the V-entry slot, which generates a jackpot game, by entering the game ball. In addition to when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed when a game ball enters the V-entry slot. In a Type 1/Type 2 mixed machine where such a minor win game is executed, the output of jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 differs from that of an ST (Special Time) machine where a minor win game is not set.

Here, Figure 190 shows an example of the output of jackpot signal 1 in a Type 1/Type 2 mixed machine, and Figure 191 shows an example of the output of jackpot signal 2 in a Type 1/Type 2 mixed machine. Note that Figures 190 and 191 show examples where a time-saving game is executed after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in Figure 190(A), in the minor win game of a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine, the jackpot signal 1 is not output during the time-saving game state, nor is it output at the start of the minor win game. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 190(B), in the minor win game of a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine, the jackpot signal 1 is output when a game ball enters the V-entry slot (V-entry). The jackpot signal 1, which is output when a game ball enters the V-entry slot, continues to be output even in the jackpot game that starts after the minor win game ends, triggered by a game ball entering the V-entry slot.

As shown in Figure 191(A), in the minor win game of a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine, the jackpot signal 2 is output during the time-saving game state and also during the execution of the minor win game. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 190(B), in the minor win game of a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine, the jackpot signal 2 continues to be output even during the jackpot game that begins after the minor win game ends, triggered by a game ball entering the V-entry slot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the right to perform a variable display is reserved in the reserved number storage area at the end of the advantageous state control, specific output information indicating that it is a period during which a predetermined variable display corresponding to the reserved right can be performed is output continuously to the predetermined output information that enables the jackpot game state control and the advantageous state control. However, this specific output information may be output continuously to specific output information separate from the predetermined output information identification information.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when there is a second special symbol hold (second special symbol remaining hold), which is the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state), a specific identification signal that can identify that it is the execution period for the second special symbol game for the second special symbol remaining hold is output as an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 until the execution of the second special symbol game for the second special symbol remaining hold is completed. However, this specific identification signal may be output as jackpot signal 1, or as a signal separate from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, predetermined output information is output as a level signal, and specific output information is output as a pulse signal or on/off signal. However, the predetermined output information and the specific output information extension signal only need to have different output methods. For example, the predetermined output information may be output as a pulse signal or on/off signal, and the specific output information may be output as a level signal. Alternatively, the predetermined output information and the specific output information extension signal may be output as level signals with different levels, or the predetermined output information and the specific output information may be output as pulse signals or on/off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. However, the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 only need to have different output modes. For example, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Furthermore, the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, or as pulse signals or on/off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to tenth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
The gaming machine, as a specific configuration of the present invention, includes a "numerical storage processing" as a first numerical information setting means and a second numerical information setting means, a "subtraction processing" as a subtraction means, a "display effect" as a specific effect, an "effect display processing" as an effect display means, a "game state" as a specific game state and a predetermined game state, an "update processing" as an update means, and a "correspondence display" as a specific correspondence display.

The first numerical information setting means and the second numerical information setting means can be any process that sets (stores) various numerical information related to the game. The first numerical information setting means and the second numerical information setting means can be any process that can realize the spirit of the present invention, for example, a process that sets (stores) numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by the start of a prize win in a predetermined storage area; a process that sets (stores) numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by the first special symbol jackpot lottery executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot in a predetermined storage area; a process that sets (stores) numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by the second special symbol jackpot lottery executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot in a predetermined storage area; a process that sets (stores) numerical information corresponding to the display time of the first special symbol variation for the first special symbol game in a predetermined storage area; a process that sets (stores) numerical information corresponding to the display time of the second special symbol variation for the second special symbol game in a predetermined storage area; and a process that reports the large The process involves setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result of the winning lottery in a predetermined memory area, setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game in a predetermined memory area, setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by the regular symbol winning lottery in a predetermined memory area, setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the display time of the regular symbol fluctuation for the regular symbol game in a predetermined memory area, setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result of the regular symbol winning lottery announced by the regular symbol game in a predetermined memory area, setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of rounds played in the jackpot game in a predetermined memory area, setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special symbol game in high support mode (a state in which the operation frequency or probability of operation of the electric mechanism provided in the second prize slot is high), and The process involves setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special symbol games to be played in the time-saving game state (a), a high-support mode transitioned to after the end of a winning game, in a predetermined memory area; setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special symbol games to be played in the time-saving game state (b), a high-support mode transitioned to after the end of a winning game by a specific number of special symbol games, in a predetermined memory area; setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special symbol games to be played in the time-saving game state (c), a high-support mode transitioned to after the end of a special symbol game where the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop failure, in a predetermined memory area; setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games required until transitioning to the time-saving game state (b), in a predetermined memory area; and setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games N, which is the number of rights to play the first special symbol game, in a predetermined memory area. Examples of the following processes include: a process for storing information; a process for setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved rights for executing the second special symbol game (M) in a predetermined memory area; a process for setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved rights for executing the regular symbol game (X) in a predetermined memory area; a process for setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved rights for executing the regular symbol game (N) in a predetermined memory area; a process for setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved rights for the first special symbol game (N) displayed on the display device in a predetermined memory area; a process for setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved rights for the second special symbol game (M) displayed on the display device in a predetermined memory area; a process for setting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved regular symbol game (X) displayed on the display device; a process for setting (storing) the number of reserved images for the first special symbol game (N) displayed on the display device in a predetermined memory area; a process for setting (storing) the number of reserved images for the second special symbol game (M) displayed on the display device in a predetermined memory area; and any combination thereof.

The subtraction means can be any process that subtracts various numerical information. As long as it can realize the spirit of the present invention, the subtraction means can include, for example, a process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game, a process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game, a process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the display time of the regular symbol in the regular symbol game, a process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the number of rounds played in a jackpot game, a process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in high support mode, a process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state, b process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state, c process that subtracts numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state, b the necessary remaining Examples of the following processes include subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of special symbol games played, subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (N), which is the number of reserved rights to play the first special symbol game, subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (M), subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved regular symbol games (X), subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved regular symbol games (X), subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (N) displayed on the display device, subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (M) displayed on the display device, subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved regular symbol games (X) displayed on the display device, subtracting the number of reserved special symbol images corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (N) displayed on the display device, subtracting the number of reserved special symbol images corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (M) displayed on the display device, and any combination thereof.

The update means can be any process that updates various numerical information. As long as the spirit of the present invention can be realized, the update means may include, for example, a process that updates numerical information in a predetermined storage area that stores numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by a jackpot lottery; a process that updates numerical information corresponding to the display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game; a process that updates numerical information corresponding to the display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game; a process that updates numerical information corresponding to the display time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game; a process that updates numerical information corresponding to the number of rounds played in a jackpot game; a process that updates numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in high support mode; a process that updates numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state; b process that updates numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state; c process that updates numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state. Examples of processes include updating numerical information corresponding to b, updating numerical information corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games required before transitioning to the time-saving game state, updating numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (N), which is the number of reserved rights to execute the first special symbol game, updating numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (M), which is the number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game, updating numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved regular symbol games (X), updating numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved regular symbol games (X), updating numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (N) displayed on the display device, updating numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (M) displayed on the display device, updating numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved regular symbol games (X) displayed on the display device, updating the number of reserved special symbol images displayed on the display device corresponding to the number of reserved special symbol games (M), and any combination thereof.

The specific performance can be any performance that is performed in a predetermined game state. Examples of specific performances that can realize the spirit of the present invention include performances performed during the execution of the first special symbol game, performances performed during the execution of the second special symbol game, performances performed during the execution of a jackpot game, performances performed during the execution of a minor jackpot game, performances performed during the execution of a normal symbol game, performances performed during the execution of a normal symbol jackpot game, performances performed during the execution of a low support mode (a state in which the operation frequency or probability of the electric mechanism provided in the second prize slot is low), performances performed during the execution of a high support mode, performances performed in a state in which a jackpot game is likely to occur, and performances performed in a state in which the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot favorable to the player is high. The following are examples of the types of animations that can be performed: animations that can be performed when a minor win is likely to occur, animations that can be performed when there is a high probability that the result of the big win lottery will be a minor win that is advantageous to the player, a) animations that can be performed while the time-saving game state is in progress, b) animations that can be performed while the time-saving game state is in progress, c) animations that can be performed while the time-saving game state is in progress, animations that can be performed while the first special symbol game is in progress in normal game state, animations that can be performed while the second special symbol game is in progress in normal game state, a) animations that can be performed while the first special symbol game is in progress in time-saving game state, a) animations that can be performed while the second special symbol game is in progress in time-saving game state, b) animations that can be performed while the first special symbol game is in progress in time-saving game state, b) a) An effect performed during the execution of the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state, a) An effect performed during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state, c) An effect performed during the execution of the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state, an effect performed during the execution of the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot in the normal game state, an effect performed during the execution of the second special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot in the normal game state, a) An effect performed during the execution of the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot in the time-saving game state, a) When a game ball enters the second prize slot in the time-saving game state Examples include: a) an effect performed during the execution of the second special feature game triggered by a certain event; b) an effect performed during the execution of the first special feature game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot in the time-saving game state; b) an effect performed during the execution of the second special feature game triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot in the time-saving game state; c) an effect performed during the execution of the first special feature game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot in the time-saving game state; c) an effect performed during the execution of the second special feature game triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot in the time-saving game state; and any combination thereof.

The performance display means can be any process that displays a performance in a predetermined game state. Examples of performance display means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: a process for displaying a performance for a first special symbol game, a process for displaying a performance for a second special symbol game, a process for displaying a performance for a jackpot game, a process for displaying a performance for a minor jackpot game, a process for displaying a performance for a regular symbol game, a process for displaying a performance for a regular symbol jackpot game, a process for displaying a performance for a low support mode, a process for displaying a performance for a high support mode, a process for displaying a performance in a state where a jackpot game is likely to occur, a process for displaying a performance in a state where the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot favorable to the player is high, and minor jackpots. Process to display effects when a game is likely to occur, process to display effects when the probability of the big win lottery result being a small win favorable to the player is high, a) process to display effects in a time-saving game state, b) process to display effects in a time-saving game state, c) process to display effects in a time-saving game state, process to display effects in a normal game state, process to display effects in a normal game state, a) process to display effects for the first special symbol game in a time-saving game state, a) process to display effects for the second special symbol game in a time-saving game state, b) process to display effects for the first special symbol game in a time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state Process to display an effect for the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state, process to display an effect for the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state, process to display an effect for the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state, process to display an effect for the first special symbol game that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot in the normal game state, process to display an effect for the second special symbol game that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot in the normal game state, process to display an effect for the first special symbol game that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot in the time-saving game state, process to display an effect for the first special symbol game that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot in the time-saving game state Examples include: a process to display an effect for the second special game triggered by a certain event; a process to display an effect for the first special game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot in the time-saving game state; a process to display an effect for the second special game triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot in the time-saving game state; c process to display an effect for the first special game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot in the time-saving game state; c process to display an effect for the second special game triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot in the time-saving game state; and any combination thereof.

The specified game state can be any game state in which a specific game from among multiple types of games can be played. Examples of specific game states that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: a game state in which the first special symbol game can be played, a state in which the right to play the first special symbol game is reserved, a game state in which the second special symbol game can be played, a state in which the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, a game state in which the second special symbol game can be played, a game state in which a jackpot game can be played, a game state in which a minor jackpot game can be played, a game state in which a normal symbol game can be played, a game state in which a normal symbol jackpot game can be played, a game state in low support mode, a normal game state in low support mode and low probability mode with a low jackpot probability, a game state in high support mode, and a high support mode and jackpot probability. Examples include the high-probability mode known as the "probability variation" game state, the high-support mode and low-probability mode known as the "time-saving" game state, a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state, c-time-saving game state, game states where big wins are more likely to occur, game states where the probability of the big win lottery result being a big win favorable to the player is high, game states where small wins are more likely to occur, game states where the probability of the big win lottery result being a small win favorable to the player is high, game states where shooting the game balls to the left side of the game board (so-called left-handed shooting) is encouraged, game states where shooting the game balls to the right side of the game board (so-called right-handed shooting) is encouraged, and any combination of these.

The specific corresponding display can be any display that corresponds to various numerical information. Examples of specific corresponding displays that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: a display corresponding to the number of rounds in a jackpot game, a display corresponding to the payout in the jackpot game, a display corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpots, a display corresponding to the total payout during consecutive jackpots, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the probability variation game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games required to transition to the b time-saving game state in the normal game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state, b display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state, c remaining Examples of displays include: a display corresponding to the number of special symbol plays; a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol plays that can be performed when a jackpot is likely to occur; a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol plays that can be performed when the probability of a jackpot favorable to the player is high in the jackpot lottery; a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol plays that can be performed when a minor win is likely to occur; a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol plays that can be performed when the probability of a minor win favorable to the player is high in the jackpot lottery; a display corresponding to the number of reserved rights for the first special symbol play (N); a display corresponding to the number of reserved rights for the second special symbol play (M); and any combination thereof.

Incidentally, gaming machines are equipped with multiple types of game states, each with different conditions for occurrence and game value. The machine also provides notifications indicating the current game state. While most game states exist independently without overlap, some may occur simultaneously. For example, conventionally, fulfilling certain conditions during a lower-value game state could lead to a higher-value game state. In this case, since the transition to a desirable game state is observed by the player, the notification is switched based on the game state change.

However, if a game state of lower value occurs during a given game state, switching the notification to the lower-value state is not necessarily what the player wants. Therefore, it is desirable to appropriately control the notification when game states overlap.

Furthermore, the gaming machine may be equipped with a first prize entry point that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game, and a second prize entry point that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game. The second prize entry point is equipped with an electric mechanism 315b, which switches between a state where the entry of game balls into the second prize entry point is restricted and a state where it is permitted. In this case, the game state can be set to a low-support mode, where the operation frequency or probability of the electric mechanism 315b is low, or a high-support mode, where the operation frequency or probability of the electric mechanism 315b is high. The game state may also be set to a normal game state, where the jackpot probability is low and the low-support mode is active, or a time-saving game state, where the jackpot probability is low and the high-support mode is active. In addition to a time-saving game state (a), which can be entered after the end of a jackpot game, a time-saving game state (c), which can be entered when the jackpot lottery result is a time-saving symbol miss, may also be set.

On the other hand, in gaming machines, various effects are executed according to the game state and situation. For example, after a jackpot game ends, an effect (such as a RUSH effect) may be executed to indicate that the game is in a favorable state where jackpots are more likely to continue. In RUSH effects, the jackpot lottery result is announced through predetermined effects such as battle effects and mission effects. Also, in the c-time-saving game state, a c-time-saving game state effect is executed to indicate that the game is in the c-time-saving game state. In the c-time-saving game state effect, a background image unique to the c-time-saving game state and an image indicating that the game is in the c-time-saving game state are displayed, as well as an image showing the remaining number of special symbol games in the c-time-saving game state.

However, the game may transition to a time-saving mode during the execution of a RUSH sequence. In this case, if the time-saving mode sequence takes priority over the RUSH sequence, the RUSH sequence will terminate prematurely and switch to the time-saving mode sequence. Therefore, it becomes impossible to check the results of the jackpot lottery during RUSH sequences such as battle sequences and mission sequences. As a result, if the game switches to the time-saving mode sequence during a RUSH sequence, the RUSH sequence becomes meaningless, raising concerns about a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In contrast, in this invention, even if a specific condition is met during the execution of the second game turn while a specific performance is being executed, the specific corresponding display does not start. Furthermore, in this invention, even if an update condition is met during the execution of the second game turn while a specific performance is being executed, the updated specific corresponding display does not start. Thus, by preventing the specific corresponding display from starting when a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game turn while a specific performance is being executed, the specific performance is prevented from being terminated prematurely by the specific corresponding display, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the premature termination of the specific performance.

On the other hand, in this invention, based on the completion of a specific performance, a specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the completion of the specific performance is initiated. In this way, by initiating a specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the completion of the specific performance, the specific corresponding display can be initiated without prematurely terminating the specific performance. Therefore, a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the failure to initiate the specific corresponding display is prevented.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a which is transitioned to after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, the second special symbol reserve number M, which corresponds to the number of second reserves for the right to execute the second special symbol game as a second game round operation executed based on game balls entering the second prize slot 315 as a second ball entry means, is set in the second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB as a first counting means in step S1108 (see Figure 200) of the start prize entry processing as a numerical storage process, and the second special symbol reserve number M set in the second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB is subtracted in step S3806 (see Figure 209) of the special symbol data setting processing as a subtraction process based on the start of the second special symbol game for the said second special symbol reserve as a subtraction condition, and the second special symbol reserve number M set in the second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB is subtracted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the second special feature game executed based on the game balls entering the second prize entry point 315 in the time-saving game state, the RUSH effect, as a display effect, is set in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, which is an effect display process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the termination of a special game that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery, as a specific condition, is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state. In the c-time-saving game state, a second numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special game plays that can be performed is set in the c-time-saving game counter, which is the second counting means, in step S4211 (see Figure 217) of the game state transition process, which is the numerical storage process. Also, in this embodiment, the remaining number of special game plays that can be performed in the c-time-saving game state is updated in step S3724 (see Figure 208) of the special game control process, based on the start of a special game, which is the update condition. Based on the updated value of the c-time-saving game counter, a display (effect) of the remaining number of c-time-saving games can be executed as a corresponding display.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the second special symbol game executed based on the game balls entering the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game, if the game transitions to the time-saving game state c, based on the jackpot lottery result being a miss in stopping the time-saving symbols during the execution of the RUSH performance as a display performance in the variation type (performance pattern) setting process as a performance display process, the display (performance) of the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c, which is the corresponding display in the time-saving game state c, is not executed while the RUSH performance is being executed. Thus, when the game transitions to the c-time-saving mode during the RUSH sequence, the display (animation) of the remaining c-time-saving game counts in the c-time-saving mode is not executed during the RUSH sequence. Therefore, even if the game transitions to the c-time-saving mode based on a jackpot lottery result where the time-saving symbols fail to stop, the RUSH sequence is prevented from ending prematurely due to the display (animation) of the remaining c-time-saving game counts. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the RUSH sequence ending prematurely.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state during the execution of the RUSH performance (a display effect), the remaining number of c-time-saving game plays will be displayed (performed) after the RUSH performance ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state at the time of the RUSH performance's end is initiated. In this way, by initiating the display of the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state at the time of the RUSH performance's end, the display of the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state can be initiated without interrupting the RUSH performance. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the failure to start displaying the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 192 to 229. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again, even if they were already described in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of the gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 192 to 194. Here, Figure 192 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 193 and 194 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the feather mechanism 83 provided on the game board 31 shown in Figure 192.

[Through Gate 317R]
As shown in Figure 192, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a through gate 317R is provided only in the right-hand region of the game board 31, and no through gate is provided in the left-hand region of the game board 31. Here, as explained in the first embodiment above, the second prize pocket 315 can receive game balls that have been launched into the right-hand region of the game board 31. The second prize pocket 315 is also provided with an electric mechanism 315b that switches between a state in which the entry of game balls into the second prize pocket 315 is restricted and a state in which it is permitted. The electric mechanism 315b is activated when the result of the lottery for a regular win, which is performed when a game ball passes through the through gate 317R, is a regular win (see Figures 205 and 206). Therefore, in order to activate the electric mechanism 315b and get a game ball into the second prize pocket 315, it is necessary to shoot the game ball to the right, into the right-hand region of the game board 31. In this embodiment, since a through gate is not provided in the left-side region of the game board 31, step S1301 is omitted in the through gate processing shown in Figure 20.

[Feather accessory device 83]
Unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine rather than a loop probability variation machine, and is equipped with a feather mechanism 83 provided in the right-side area of the game board 31. The feather mechanism 83 is activated in the minor win game, which is executed when the result of the big win lottery in the second special symbol game is a minor win, and provides an opportunity to execute the Type 2 big win game by having a game ball enter the V-entry slot 833 described later during the minor win game.

The wing mechanism 83 is located above the variable prize entry opening 316 and to the right of the symbol display section 341. As shown in Figure 83, the wing mechanism 83 has an entry opening 831 for introducing game balls 99 into the wing mechanism 83, and a movable wing section 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (position of the solid line in Figure 193) that closes the entry opening 831 and an open position (position of the dashed line in Figure 193) that opens the entry opening 831. When the movable wing section 832 is in the standby position and the entry opening 831 is closed by the movable wing section 832, game balls 99 cannot be introduced into the wing mechanism 83. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 194(A) and 194(B), when the movable wing section 832 is in the open position and the entry opening 831 is open, the movable wing section 832 can receive game balls 99. The game balls 99 received by the movable wing section 832 can be introduced into the wing mechanism 83 via the entry opening 831. The movable wing section 832 is activated to the open position when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by a ball entering the second prize entry opening 315 is a minor win (see Figure 198(A)), opening the entry opening 831 for a predetermined time, for example, the time it takes for 1 to 3 game balls 99 to enter the wing mechanism 83 (1.8 seconds or less). Of course, the opening time of the entry opening 831 during a minor win can be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

The wing mechanism 83 contains a V-prize entry point 833, a normal prize entry point 834, and a V-prize entry point opening/closing unit 835. Each of the V-prize entry point 833 and the normal prize entry point 834 is equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects when a game ball enters either the V-prize entry point 833 or the normal prize entry point 834. The V-prize entry point opening/closing unit 835 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (see Figure 194(A)) that closes the V-prize entry point 833 and an open position (see Figure 194(B)) that opens the V-prize entry point 833. Normally, the V-prize entry point opening/closing unit 835 is in standby position, closing the V-prize entry point 833. When the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor prize, it is activated at a predetermined timing, opening the V-prize entry point 833.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to Figures 195 to 199, various tables and the like used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

[Table of success/failure rates for general diagrams, etc.]
Here, Figure 195 shows an example of a normal win/loss table. In this embodiment, two types of normal win/loss tables are set: the normal game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 195(A) and the time-saving game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 195(B). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of winning a normal win differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, with the probability of winning a normal win being set higher in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state.

The normal game state win/loss table shown in Figure 195(A) is used for the win lottery in the normal game state, which is a low-support mode where the operation frequency or probability of the electric mechanism 315b installed in the second prize slot 315 is low. As shown in Figure 195(A), in the normal game state win/loss table, a value of 0 for the win lottery random number counter C4 is set to 0, and a value of 1 to 299 for the win lottery random number counter C4 is set to 0 to 0 to 1 to 299 to 1 to 299. In other words, the normal game state (low-support mode) is a low-profit state where the probability of winning in the win lottery is set to 1/300, and the second prize slot 315 is less likely to open.

The time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 195(B) is used for the normal symbol win lottery in the time-saving game state, which is a high-support mode where the operation frequency or probability of the electric mechanism 315b installed in the second prize slot 315 is high. As shown in Figure 195(B), in the time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table, contrary to the normal game state normal symbol win/loss table, if the value of the normal symbol win random number counter C4 is 0, it is a loss, and if the value of the normal symbol win random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299, it is set as a normal symbol win. In other words, in the time-saving game state (high-support mode), the probability of a normal symbol win in the normal symbol win lottery is set to 299/300, which is higher than the probability of a normal symbol win in the normal game state (low-support mode), and it is a high-profit state where the second prize slot 315 is more likely to open.

Thus, in this low-support mode, the second prize slot 315 is less likely to open, and therefore, the player is unlikely to gain any particular benefit from the opening of the second prize slot 315.

In this embodiment, as described later, the following time-saving game states are set: a time-saving game state which is entered after the end of a jackpot game; b time-saving game state which is entered after a predetermined number of variable game spins (e.g., 1000 spins) following the end of a jackpot game; and c time-saving game state which is entered when the jackpot lottery result is a time-saving symbol stop failure. However, the probability of a normal symbol win is set to be the same in all of the time-saving game states a to c. Of course, the probability of a normal symbol win may be set to differ depending on the type of time-saving game state. Furthermore, the probability of a normal symbol win in the normal game state (low support mode) and the probability of a normal symbol win in the time-saving game state (high support mode) are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 195(A) and 195(B), and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the game state that refers to the time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table may be the special symbol probability variation state or the time-saving game state.

Here, Figures 195(C) and 195(D) show an example of a normal chart variation table. In this embodiment, two types of normal chart variation tables are set: the normal game state normal chart variation table shown in Figure 195(C) and the time-saving game state normal chart variation table. That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the normal chart variation time differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, with the normal chart variation time being set shorter in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 195(C), in the normal game state normal diagram variation table, the normal diagram variation type counter CS2 is set to 30 seconds when its value is between 0 and 98, and to 1 second when its value is 99. That is, in the normal game state, the normal diagram variation time is set to be long, and the operating frequency of the electric mechanism 315b (the opening frequency of the second prize entry point 315) is set to be low.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 195(D), in the time-saving game state normal diagram variation table, the value of the normal diagram variation type counter CS2 is set to 1 second when it is between 0 and 99. That is, in the time-saving game state, the normal diagram variation time is set to be shorter, and the operating frequency of the electric mechanism 315b (the opening frequency of the second prize entry point 315) is set to be higher.

Here, Figure 195(E) shows an example of the relationship between the type of game state and the opening mode (opening time) of the electric mechanism 315b in the normal win game, which is executed when the result of the normal win lottery is a normal win.

As shown in Figure 195(E), when the result of the regular win lottery is a regular win, the electric mechanism 315b is opened during the regular win game, allowing game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315. However, the opening mode (maximum opening time) of the electric mechanism 315b during a regular win game is set according to the game state in which the regular win lottery was performed. In this embodiment, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the electric mechanism 315b closes when five game balls enter the second prize slot 315, and the maximum number of game balls that can enter the second prize slot 315 with one opening of the electric mechanism 315b is set to five.

Specifically, in the normal game state (low support mode) and the time-saving game state (c), which is entered when the jackpot lottery result is a miss on the time-saving symbol stop, the maximum opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is set to 0.1 seconds (short opening), which is shorter than the interval between game ball launches (0.6 seconds). In this short opening, even if game balls are continuously launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game balls to enter the second prize entry point 315. Therefore, in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (c), left-handed shooting (launching game balls into the left-hand area of the game board 31) is encouraged. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (c), the maximum number of time-saving game rounds is set to 10, 20, 30, or 40 rounds depending on the type of time-saving symbol stop miss. The game transitions to the normal game state when the special symbol game round with the maximum number of time-saving game rounds, resulting in a jackpot lottery miss, is executed.

As mentioned above, the player transitions to the time-saving game state (c) when the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. Furthermore, as will be described later, in the special game when the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 are displayed in a combination corresponding to the failure to stop the time-saving symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, multiple types (four types) are set as the maximum number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state (c), and the time-saving symbols corresponding to the maximum number of time-saving games are displayed. For example, as described below, in case A, where the time-saving symbols fail to stop and the maximum number of time-saving game rounds is 10, the non-reach symbols "119" or "991" will be displayed. In case B, where the maximum number of time-saving game rounds is 20 and the time-saving symbols fail to stop, the non-reach symbols "554" or "556" will be displayed. In case C, where the maximum number of time-saving game rounds is 30 and the time-saving symbols fail to stop, the non-reach symbols "332" or "334" will be displayed. In case D, where the maximum number of time-saving game rounds is 40 and the time-saving symbols fail to stop, the non-reach symbols "776" or "778" will be displayed (see Figure 198 (D)). This allows the player to understand from the combination of symbols that stop and display that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol failure, and furthermore, to understand the maximum number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (c) is set to four types. However, it is also possible to set the maximum number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (c) to one to three types, or to set multiple types other than four. Furthermore, the maximum number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (c) can also be changed in various ways.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (a) which is entered after the jackpot game ends, the maximum opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is set to 15 seconds (long opening), which is 25 times the interval between game ball launches. During this long opening, if game balls are launched continuously into the right-hand area of the game board 31, it is possible to enter the maximum number of winning balls, which is 5. Therefore, in time-saving game state (a), right-hand shooting (launching game balls into the right-hand area of the game board 31) is encouraged. Furthermore, in time-saving game state (a), the maximum number of time-saving game rounds is set to 1, and the game returns to normal game state after one regular jackpot game is played.

Furthermore, in the b-time-saving game state, which is entered after a predetermined number of variable game spins (e.g., 1000 spins) following the end of a jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is set to 3 seconds (medium opening), which is five times the interval between game ball launches. In this medium opening state, the expected number of balls entering when 99 game balls are launched consecutively is set to 1 or more. For example, for one regular jackpot, approximately 1 to 3 game balls will enter the second prize slot 315. Therefore, in the b-time-saving game state, right-handed shooting (launching game balls into the right-hand area of the game board 31) is encouraged. Also, in the b-time-saving game state, the maximum number of time-saving game spins is set to 500. The game returns to the normal game state after 500 special game spins where the jackpot lottery result is a loss.

In this embodiment, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the second prize slot 315 will close when five game balls enter it, causing the electric mechanism 315b to return to its original position.

Furthermore, the maximum opening time and maximum number of openings of the electric mechanism 315b during normal gameplay in various game states are not limited to the example shown in Figure 195(E) and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 195(E), only one type of maximum opening time and maximum number of openings for the electric mechanism 315b are set for each game state as a normal winning game. However, for at least one of the game states—normal game state, a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state, and c-time-saving game state—multiple types of maximum opening time and at least one of the maximum opening times for the electric mechanism 315b in a normal winning game may be set.

[First Special Feature Jackpot Win/Loss Table]
The first special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used for the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314. Here, Figure 196(A) shows an example of the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 196(A), the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table includes six jackpot win/loss tables corresponding to six game setting values from 1 to 6. In each jackpot win/loss table, the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is either a jackpot or a loss, depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random value). Furthermore, in the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table, the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot lottery increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 (in descending order of game setting value), making it more advantageous for the player.

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 1, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 206 random values ranging from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 2, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 202 random values ranging from 0 to 211 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 3, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 218 random values ranging from 0 to 217 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 4, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 224 random values ranging from 0 to 223 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 5, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 230 random values ranging from 0 to 229 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536).

In the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 6, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 236 random values between 0 and 235 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536).

Then, when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is conducted based on the jackpot success/failure table selected according to the game settings, the jackpot game is executed if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the first special feature jackpot success/failure table of this embodiment, the jackpot random values were consecutive values, but the jackpot random values may not be consecutive values, and some or all of them may be discrete values.

Furthermore, while there are six tables for determining whether the first special symbol jackpot is achieved, corresponding to the six game setting values, only one such table is necessary, and the game setting values are not limited to six levels.

[Table for distributing the type of big win in the first special feature]
The first special feature jackpot type distribution table is used to distribute the type of jackpot when the result of the first special feature jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, is a jackpot. Here, Figure 196(B) shows an example of the normal-a time-saving first special feature jackpot type distribution table, and Figure 196(C) shows an example of the b time-saving-c time-saving first special feature jackpot type distribution table.

The Normal-a Time-Saving First Special Symbol Jackpot Type Distribution Table shown in Figure 196(B) is used when the game state at the start of the First Special Symbol variation is either the Normal game state or the a Time-Saving game state. In the Normal-a Time-Saving First Special Symbol Jackpot Type Distribution Table, out of 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19, 12 random values from 0 to 11 represent 4R Time-Saving Jackpots, and 8 random values from 12 to 19 represent 4R Normal Jackpots. In this embodiment, two types of First Special Symbol Jackpots are set: 4R Time-Saving Jackpots and 4R Normal Jackpots. The distribution rate for 4R Time-Saving Jackpots is set to 60%, and the distribution rate for 4R Normal Jackpots is set to 40%.

Here, if the result of the first special feature jackpot lottery is a 4R time-saving jackpot or a 4R regular jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed, in which the variable prize entry point 316 is opened and the round game is repeated twice.

In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on this 4R time-saving jackpot ends, the game transitions to the high-support mode, the a time-saving game state. In this a time-saving game state, the electric mechanism 315b operates only once, but its maximum opening time is set to 15 seconds, which is 25 times the ball launch interval of 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be awarded with one opening of the electric mechanism 315b is 5. Therefore, when transitioning to the a time-saving game state, a maximum of 5 second special symbol games can be executed. In the case of a 4R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on this 4R normal jackpot ends, the game transitions to the low-support mode, the normal game state.

The b-c time-saving first special symbol jackpot type distribution table shown in Figure 196(C) is used when the game state at the start of the first special symbol variation is the b time-saving game state or the c time-saving game state. In the b-c time-saving first special symbol jackpot type distribution table, all 20 random values (random values) of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values from 0 to 19 are 4R time-saving jackpots. That is, when a first special symbol jackpot occurs in the b time-saving game state or the c time-saving game state, after the jackpot game executed based on that first special symbol jackpot ends, it will always transition to the a time-saving game state, resulting in a so-called RUSH direct hit jackpot. Furthermore, RUSH refers to a state advantageous to the player, where the probability of a minor win resulting from the jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 is high (20% in this embodiment (see Figure 198(A))), and jackpot games triggered by minor wins are more likely to be executed consecutively.

[First Special Feature Jackpot Fluctuation Table]
The first special symbol jackpot variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game that is executed for the first special symbol jackpot lottery when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 196(D) shows an example of the first special symbol jackpot variation table.

As shown in Figure 196(D), in the first special symbol jackpot variation table, special symbol variation patterns are pre-associated according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. In this first special symbol jackpot variation table, one of special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol jackpot variation table, of the 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, the 10 random values from 0 to 9 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "01" with a variation display time of 30 seconds, the 110 random values from 10 to 119 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "02" with a variation display time of 60 seconds, and the 80 random values from 120 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "03" with a variation display time of 90 seconds.

If special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a special symbol variation display time of 30s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a normal reach performance. If special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach performance pattern with a special symbol variation display time of 60s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the super reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a super reach performance. Furthermore, if special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a special reach performance pattern with the longest special symbol variation display time of 90s as the variation type (performance pattern), and the special reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc. A Special Reach演出 pattern is a special reach演出 pattern in which the final individual演出 type in the special feature game is a Special Reach演出.

[Table for Classifying Unspecified Type of Special Feature No. 1]
The first special symbol miss type distribution table is used to distribute the type of miss when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 196(E) shows an example of the first special symbol miss type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 196(E), the first special symbol miss type distribution table defines the miss type according to the value (random number) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss type distribution table, out of 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 9 random numbers from 0 to 8 are reach misses (neither front nor back), 30 random numbers from 9 to 38 are reach misses (other than front or back), and 200 random numbers from 39 to 238 are complete misses.

Here, "reach" refers to a state in the symbol display unit 341 where, between the start of the display of the decorative symbols and the time the symbols stop, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is likely to occur. For example, in this state, the same decorative symbol stops at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the reach state in the symbol display unit 341, story-based presentations are executed, such as displaying videos of predetermined characters to suggest the level of expectation, or player-participation presentations where the player's actions on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the presentation. It is also possible that the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or displayed in a reduced or enlarged state during the execution of these presentations.

Furthermore, a "front-back miss" is a miss where, after a reach occurs using decorative symbols, the final stopping symbol stops one position before or after the reach symbol. A "non-front-back miss" is a miss where, after a reach occurs using decorative symbols, the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol. A "complete miss" is a miss where no reach occurs using decorative symbols (a non-reach miss).

Furthermore, while the first special symbol miss type distribution table does not currently include a "c" (short-time game state) miss that results in a transition to the short-time game state, it is permissible to include a "short-time game state" miss as a miss type.

[First Special Symbol Failure Variation Table]
The first special symbol miss variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game that is executed for the first special symbol jackpot lottery when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 196(F) shows an example of the first special symbol miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 196(F), the first special symbol miss variation table defines the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special symbol according to the type of miss and the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. This first special symbol miss variation table includes a first special symbol miss variation table for miss reaches (pre- and post-miss reaches and reaches other than pre- and post-miss reaches) and a first special symbol miss variation table for complete misses.

In the first special symbol miss variation table for losing reaches (both consecutive and non-consecutive misses), one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss variation table for losing reaches (both consecutive and non-consecutive misses), out of 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, 100 random values from 0 to 99 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "01" with a special symbol variation display time of 30 seconds, 50 random values from 100 to 149 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "02" with a special symbol variation display time of 60 seconds, and 50 random values from 150 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "03" with a special symbol variation display time of 90 seconds.

In the first special symbol miss variation table for complete misses, either special symbol variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss variation table for complete misses, of the 200 values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, 150 random values from 0 to 149 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "04," which has a special symbol variation display time of 7 seconds, and 50 random values from 150 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05," which has a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds.

[b-Shortened Time - c-Shortened Time 2nd Special Symbol Big Win/Loss Table]
The b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used for the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315 during the b-time-saving game state and the c-time-saving game state. Here, Figure 197(A) shows an example of the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 197(A), the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/fail table is the same as the first special symbol jackpot win/fail table described above (see Figure 196(A)). In this embodiment, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/fail table is set separately from the first special symbol jackpot win/fail table (see Figure 196(A)). However, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/fail table may be omitted, and the first special symbol jackpot win/fail table (see Figure 196(A)) may be used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery during the b-time-saving and c-time-saving game states.

[b Shortened Time - c Shortened Time 2nd Special Symbol Jackpot Type Distribution Table]
The b-time-saving-c-time-saving-second-special-symbol-jackpot-type distribution table is used to distribute the jackpot type when the game state at the start of the second-special-symbol-changing is either the normal game state or the a-time-saving-game state, and the result of the second-special-symbol-jackpot-draw, which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, is a jackpot. Here, Figure 197(B) shows an example of the b-time-saving-c-time-saving-second-special-symbol-jackpot-type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 197(B), in the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot type distribution table, all 20 random values (random values) of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 from 0 to 19 represent 4R time-saving jackpots. That is, if a second special symbol jackpot occurs in the b-time-saving game state or the c-time-saving game state, the game will always transition to the a-time-saving game state after the jackpot game executed based on that second special symbol jackpot ends, resulting in a so-called RUSH direct jackpot. RUSH, as described later, is a player-favorable state where the probability of a minor win resulting from the jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 is high (20% in this embodiment (see Figure 198(A))), and jackpot games triggered by minor wins are more likely to be executed consecutively.

[b Shortened Time - c Shortened Time 2nd Special Symbol Big Win Variation Table]
The first special symbol jackpot variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game executed for the second special symbol jackpot lottery when the game state at the start of the variation of the second special symbol is either the b time-saving game state or the c time-saving game state, and the result of the lottery in the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 197(C) is a diagram showing an example of the b time-saving - c time-saving second special symbol jackpot variation table.

As shown in Figure 197(D), the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot variation table is the same as the first special symbol jackpot variation table (see Figure 196(D)) described above. In this embodiment, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot variation table is set separately from the first special symbol jackpot variation table (see Figure 196(D)). However, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot variation table may be omitted, and the first special symbol jackpot variation table (see Figure 196(D)) may be used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery during the b-time-saving game state and the c-time-saving game state.

[b Shortened Hours - c Shortened Hours 2nd Special Symbol Missing Type Distribution Table]
The b-time-saving-c-time-saving-second-special-symbol-miss-type distribution table is used to distribute the type of miss when the game state at the start of the second-special-symbol-reducing-game state is either the b-time-saving-game state or the c-time-saving-game state, and the result of the second-special-symbol-jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 197(D) shows an example of the b-time-saving-c-time-saving-second-special-symbol-miss-type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 197(D), the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol miss type distribution table is the same as the first special symbol miss type distribution table described above (see Figure 196(E)). In this embodiment, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol miss type distribution table is set separately from the first special symbol miss type distribution table (see Figure 196(E)). However, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol miss type distribution table may be omitted, and the first special symbol miss type distribution table (see Figure 196(E)) may be used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the b-time-saving game state and the c-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the b-time-saving mode - c-time-saving mode second special symbol miss type distribution table, the time-saving mode symbol stop miss that transitions to the c-time-saving mode game state is not set as a miss type, but it is also possible to set the time-saving mode symbol stop miss as a miss type.

[b Shortened Time - c Shortened Time 2nd Special Symbol Failure Variation Table]
The b-time-saving-c-time-saving second special symbol miss variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game executed for the second special symbol jackpot lottery when the game state at the start of the variation of the second special symbol is either the b-time-saving game state or the c-time-saving game state, and the result of the lottery for the second special symbol jackpot is a miss. Here, Figure 197(E) shows an example of the first special symbol miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 197(E), the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol miss variation table is the same as the first special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 196(F)) described above. In this embodiment, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol miss variation table is set separately from the first special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 196(F)). However, the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol miss variation table may be omitted, and the first special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 196(F)) may be used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the b-time-saving game state and the c-time-saving game state.

[Normal - a Time-saving 2nd Special Symbol Big Win/Loss Table]
The normal-a time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table is used for the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315 during normal gameplay and a time-saving gameplay. Here, Figure 198(A) shows an example of the normal-a time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 198(A), the normal-a time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table differs from the aforementioned first special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196(A)). Instead of a "jackpot" being set as the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, only two types of outcomes are set: "minor win" and "miss." The minor win probability and the miss probability are set identically for all game settings. Specifically, in the normal-a time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table, out of 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 13,107 random values ranging from 0 to 13,106 correspond to jackpots, while the remaining random values correspond to misses. The minor win probability is set to approximately 1/5 (13,107/65,536).

Furthermore, the probability of a minor win, as defined by the normal-a time-saving second special feature jackpot win/loss table, is not limited to the example shown in Figure 198(A) and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the normal-a time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table, "jackpot" may be set as the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set to be the same as in the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196 (A)) so that the probability differs for each game setting value.

[a Time-saving 2nd Special Symbol Miss Type Distribution Table]
The a-Shortened Time Second Special Symbol Miss Type Distribution Table is used to distribute the type of miss when the game state at the start of the second special symbol variation is the a-Shortened Time game state, and the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 198(B) shows an example of the a-Shortened Time Second Special Symbol Miss Type Distribution Table.

As shown in Figure 198(B), the a-time-saving second special symbol miss type distribution table differs from the first special symbol miss type distribution table (see Figure 196(E)) in that it does not include forward/backward misses or non-forward/backward misses as miss types; only complete misses are set. Specifically, in the a-time-saving second special symbol miss type distribution table, all random values of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238 are set to complete misses.

Furthermore, in the a-Time-Saving Second Special Symbol Miss Type Distribution Table, you may set forward/backward miss reach and reach other than forward/backward miss as miss types. Also, in the a-Time-Saving Second Special Symbol Miss Type Distribution Table, although the time-saving symbol stop miss that transitions to the c-Time-Saving Game state is not set as a miss type, you may set the time-saving symbol stop miss as a miss type.

[Normal game state, second special symbol miss type distribution table]
The Normal Game State Second Special Symbol Miss Type Distribution Table is used to distribute the type of miss when the game state at the start of the second special symbol's variation is the normal game state, and the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 198(C) shows an example of the Normal Game State Second Special Symbol Miss Type Distribution Table.

As shown in Figure 198(C), the normal game state second special symbol miss type distribution table differs from the aforementioned first special symbol miss type distribution table (see Figure 196(E)). Instead, it does not include forward/backward misses or non-forward/backward misses as miss types, but rather includes complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses. Specifically, in the normal game state second special symbol miss type distribution table, out of 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 227 random values from 0 to 226 represent complete misses, and 12 random values from 227 to 238 represent time-saving symbol stop misses (time-saving symbol stop misses A to D) that transition to the time-saving game state. That is, in the normal game state second special symbol miss type distribution table, the probability of a time-saving symbol stop miss (time-saving symbol stop misses A to D) is set to approximately 5%.

As shown in Figures 198(C) and 198(D), in this embodiment, there are four types of time-saving symbol stop misses: c) time-saving symbol stop miss, a) time-saving symbol stop miss, b) time-saving symbol stop miss, C, and D, each with a different maximum number of time-saving game rounds that can be played in the time-saving game state. The probability of each time-saving symbol stop miss A to D is set to 3/239 (approximately 1.25%).

The "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss A" is set when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be played in the time-saving game state is 10, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 227 to 229. Then, in the special symbol game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss A," the decorative symbol displayed on the symbol display unit 341 stops at either "119" or "991." In other words, "119" and "991" are associated with "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss A" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and "119" and "991" as decorative symbol stop display combinations correspond to the time-saving symbols.

The "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss B" is set when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be played in the time-saving game state is 20, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 230 to 232. Then, in the special symbol game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss B", the decorative symbol displayed on the symbol display unit 341 stops at either "554" or "556". In other words, "554" and "556" are associated with "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss B" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and "554" and "556" as decorative symbol stop display combinations correspond to the time-saving symbols.

The "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss C" occurs when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be played in the time-saving game state is 30, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 233 to 235. When the result of the jackpot lottery is "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss C," the special symbol game played will stop at either "332" or "334" on the symbol display unit 341. In other words, "332" and "334" are associated with the "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss C" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and these combinations correspond to the time-saving symbols.

The "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss D" is set when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be played in the time-saving game state is 40, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 236 to 238. Then, in the special symbol game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss D", the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 stop at either "776" or "778". In other words, "776" and "778" are associated with the "Time-Saving Symbol Stop Miss D" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and "776" and "778" as decorative symbol stop display combinations correspond to the time-saving symbols.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss with the time-saving symbols stopping, the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 will stop and display as time-saving symbols. Therefore, even in situations where the decorative symbols do not result in a winning combination and the jackpot lottery result is a miss, the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the time-saving symbols will stop and display. Furthermore, the player can understand the maximum number of time-saving game rounds that can be played in the time-saving game state based on the type of time-saving symbols (the type of combination of decorative symbols that stop and display). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the time-saving symbols that result in the most time-saving game rounds will stop and display.

In this embodiment, four types of time-saving symbol stop misses are set, but the number of time-saving symbol stop misses is not limited to four types, nor does it need to be multiple types; for example, there may be one type. Furthermore, when multiple types of time-saving symbol stop misses are set, the probability (distribution) of each time-saving symbol stop miss does not need to be equal; the probability (distribution) of some or all of the time-saving symbol stop misses may differ from that of the others.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of time-saving symbols are associated with one type of time-saving symbol failure, but one type of time-saving symbol may be associated with one type of time-saving symbol failure, and the number of time-saving symbols associated with some or all of the time-saving symbol failures may differ from the number of time-saving symbols associated with other time-saving symbol failures. Moreover, multiple types of maximum time-saving game rounds may be associated with one type of time-saving symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the jackpot lottery result is a failure to stop on the time-saving symbol, the decorative symbol displayed on the symbol display unit 341 will stop on the time-saving symbol. In addition to this, or instead, a (time-saving) symbol corresponding to a failure to stop on the time-saving symbol may be set as the stop display symbol for the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362, or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363. In this case, the type of the stop display symbol for the first special symbol, or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363, may be associated with the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state (maximum number of time-saving games).

Furthermore, while the aforementioned distribution table for the type of miss in the second special symbol during normal gameplay includes a setting for a miss at the stop of the time-saving symbol, other miss type distribution tables do not include a setting for a miss at the stop of the time-saving symbol (see Figures 196(E), 197(D), and 198(B)). In other words, the only time the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss at the stop of the time-saving symbol is during the second special symbol jackpot lottery at the start of the second special symbol in normal gameplay, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315.

In this embodiment, the regular winning game is executed once in the time-saving game state a, with a maximum opening time of 15 seconds and a maximum number of winning balls set to 5 during this single regular winning game (see Figure 195(E)). Therefore, when the regular winning game is executed based on the transition to the time-saving game state a (when the second winning slot 315 is opened by the operation of the electric mechanism 315b), it becomes possible to execute a total of 5 second special symbol games, including the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in addition to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on up to 4 second special symbol reserves (so-called remaining reserves). Furthermore, while the maximum opening time for a regular winning game in the a-time-saving game state is 15 seconds, the variation display time (variation pattern) of the second special game that starts in the a-time-saving game state is 40 seconds (see Figure 199(A)). Therefore, the regular winning game ends before the second special game, which is the first to be executed after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state, ends, causing a transition from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. As a result, the second special game based on the second special game reserve (remaining reserve) that is executed after the end of the second special game starts in the normal game state. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the maximum opening time of the electric mechanism 315b during a regular win game in normal gameplay is 0.1 seconds (see Figure 195(E)), and it is impossible or extremely difficult to get game balls into the second prize slot 315 in normal gameplay. Therefore, left-handed shooting, where game balls are launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31, is encouraged. Consequently, the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 based on a regular win game in normal gameplay does not substantially trigger the second special win game. Therefore, the second special win game in normal gameplay is the second special win game that was held in reserve by the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 during a regular win game, which is executed when the game transitions to the time-saving game state a after the end of a time-saving jackpot game. In other words, the normal game state second special symbol miss type distribution table is referenced when, in the time-saving game state (a) transitioning after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315 due to the operation of the electric mechanism 315b, and if the number of second special symbol reserves M is 1 or more (if there are remaining reserves), the second special symbol game is started based on those second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described later, when a regular winning game is executed based on the transition of the display animation to the a-time-saving game state (when the second prize entry point 315 is opened by the operation of the electric mechanism 315b), in addition to the said fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on a maximum of four second special symbol reserves (so-called remaining reserves) is executed a total of five times in the second special symbol game, and a RUSH animation, which includes a battle animation, is performed as a display animation in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The battle animation is a remaining reserve animation that is executed for the second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) triggered by the transition to the a-time-saving game state, as described later. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery result is a miss (the time-saving symbols stop), the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state. In this c-time-saving game state, a c-time-saving game effect (such as a unique background effect or a display effect showing the remaining time-saving rounds) specific to this state is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc., to identify that the game is in the c-time-saving game state (see Figure 225(C)).

Thus, in state a (time-saving game), only one regular winning game is executed. After the completion of this regular winning game, the game transitions from state a (time-saving game) to the normal game state. If, among the remaining reserved spins executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in state a (time-saving game), there is a spin that indicates a jackpot draw result of a time-saving symbol stop failure, the game transitions to state c (time-saving game) after the completion of the second special symbol game that indicated a time-saving symbol stop failure. In other words, in this embodiment, a game state in which a second special symbol game, including remaining reserved spins, can be executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in state a (time-saving game), and the normal game state or state c (time-saving game) occur simultaneously.

Furthermore, the second special symbol game (a jackpot streak state, the so-called RUSH state), which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state, including the remaining reserved balls, is a game state with high game value because it is easy to trigger a jackpot game (see Figure 198(A)), thus making jackpot games more likely to occur. In contrast, in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, it is difficult or impossible to enter the game ball into the second prize slot 315, so the jackpot lottery is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314, making it difficult to trigger a jackpot game (see Figure 198(A)). Therefore, the game state in which the second special symbol game, including remaining reserved balls, can be executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry point 315 during the a-time-saving game state, is a game state with higher game value than the normal game state and the c-time-saving game state because it makes it easier to trigger a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RUSH effect is executed as a display effect in the second special symbol game, including the remaining reserved balls, which is triggered when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315 in the a-time-saving game state (see Figures 226 to 228). In particular, the battle effect is executed as a display effect for the second special symbol game corresponding to the remaining reserved balls. On the other hand, in the normal game state, a unique display effect that clearly indicates or suggests that it is the normal game state is executed (see Figure 225(A)), and in the c-time-saving game state, a unique display effect that clearly indicates or suggests that it is the c-time-saving game state is executed (see Figure 225(C)). Therefore, if the remaining reserved balls include a jackpot lottery result where the time-saving symbol stops and fails, and the display prioritizes the normal game state animation or the time-saving game state animation, which are executed in response to the normal game state or time-saving game state, which have lower game value, over the battle animation executed for the second special symbol game corresponding to the remaining reserved balls, which have higher game value, the battle animation will be cut short, and the symbol display unit 341 will not be able to determine the result of the battle (whether a small win occurred or not). Therefore, in this embodiment, the battle animation (RUSH animation as a specific animation) executed in a game state in which the second special symbol game corresponding to the remaining reserved balls, which have higher game value, can be executed, is given priority over the normal game state animation and the time-saving game state animation, which may be executed in the normal game state and time-saving game state, which have lower game value than the game state in which the battle animation is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, when game states with different game values are executed simultaneously, the display animation for the game state with the higher game value is given priority. As a result, when a battle sequence is initiated as a display effect, the game state will not be interrupted by overlapping game states, and the outcome of the battle sequence will be used to inform the player of whether a minor win has occurred. In particular, even if the remaining reserved spins include a big win draw result where the time-saving symbol fails to stop, and the game transitions to the time-saving game state based on that failure, the battle sequence as a display effect will still be used to inform the player of whether a minor win has occurred based on the battle result.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the a-time-saving game state, only one regular winning game is executed. After the completion of this regular winning game, the game transitions from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. If, among the remaining reserved balls executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, there is one that notifies that the jackpot lottery result is a time-saving symbol stop failure, the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state by the game control of the MPU 41 after the completion of the second special symbol game that notified that the time-saving symbol stop failure. In other words, at the end of the battle performance as a display effect, the game is in either the normal game state or the c-time-saving game state. Therefore, if the jackpot lottery for remaining reserved balls, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 during the a-time-saving game state, is unsuccessful, then after the RUSH display animation ends, either the normal game state animation or the c-time-saving game state animation will be displayed, depending on the game state at the end of the RUSH animation (whether or not the time-saving symbols stopped unsuccessfully).

Here, both the normal game state and the time-saving game state (c) share the characteristic of making it difficult to win a jackpot (see Figure 196(A)). However, in the normal game state, the distribution of time-saving jackpots that trigger RUSH entry (a state with a high probability of consecutive jackpots) is 50% (see Figure 196(B)), whereas in the time-saving game state (c), the distribution of time-saving jackpots that trigger RUSH entry (a state with a high probability of consecutive jackpots) is 100% (see Figure 196(C)). Therefore, a jackpot in the time-saving game state (c) is a jackpot that directly triggers RUSH. For this reason, the time-saving game state (c) is a game state with higher game value for the player than the normal game state because of the high distribution of time-saving jackpots that trigger RUSH entry (a state with a high probability of consecutive jackpots). In other words, after the RUSH animation (as a display effect) ends, either a normal game state animation or a time-saving game state animation is executed as a display effect. However, from the player's perspective, it is preferable for the time-saving game state animation to be executed after the RUSH animation ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the RUSH animation ends, a branching animation (described later) is executed as a display effect that clearly indicates or suggests whether the time-saving game state animation or the normal game state animation will be executed (see Figure 229). As a result, even if the battle animation, which is executed based on the remaining reserved balls, informs the player that a minor win has not been achieved, the time-saving game state animation, which offers a chance for a direct RUSH hit, is executed immediately after the battle animation ends, allowing the player to maintain interest in the game and thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Table for distributing jackpot types upon winning a V prize]
The V-entry jackpot type distribution table is used to determine the type of jackpot game to be executed based on whether a game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 during a minor win game. Here, Figure 198(E) shows an example of the V-entry jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 198(E), the V-entry jackpot type distribution table includes 16R time-saving jackpots and 4R time-saving jackpots as jackpot types. A 16R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot where 16 rounds of gameplay are executed in the opening/closing execution mode, and after the completion of the 16R time-saving jackpot game, the game transitions to the a time-saving game state. A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot where 4 rounds of gameplay are executed in the opening/closing execution mode, and after the completion of the 4R time-saving jackpot game, the game transitions to the a time-saving game state. In the V-entry jackpot type distribution table, values 0-3 of the jackpot type counter (0-19) represent 16R time-saving jackpots, and values 4-19 represent 4R time-saving jackpots. That is, in the V-entry jackpot type distribution table, the probability (distribution) of a 16R time-saving jackpot is 20%, and the probability (distribution) of a 4R time-saving jackpot is 80%.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot games are set for games that are executed based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry slot 833 during a minor win game. However, there may be one type of jackpot game, or three or more types, and the number of rounds played in the jackpot game is not limited to 4R and 16R.

[a Time-saving second special feature variation table]
The a-time-saving second special symbol variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game when the game state at the start of the variation of the second special symbol is the a-time-saving game state. Here, Figure 199(A) shows an example of the a-time-saving second special symbol variation table.

As shown in Figure 199(A), the a-time-saving second special symbol variation table differs from the first special symbol jackpot variation table (see Figure 196(D)) and the first special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 196(F)) mentioned above. This table is referenced regardless of whether the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot or a miss, and only one variation pattern (variation display time) of special symbol variation pattern "08" with a variation time of 40 seconds is set. This ensures that the game can reliably transition from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state during the execution of the first second special symbol game when transitioning to the a-time-saving game state. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when transitioning to the a-time-saving game state, a RUSH effect is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc. However, in the first second special symbol game when transitioning to the a-time-saving game state, a button effect is executed as a one-shot notification effect among the RUSH effects (see Figure 226(D)), and the result of a minor win is announced by this button effect. Furthermore, by setting only one variation pattern (variation display time) of 40 seconds in the second special feature variation table for the time-saving feature, it becomes possible to execute the button prompts before the battle sequence in the RUSH sequence at a good tempo, allowing for a smooth transition to the battle sequence.

[Normal gameplay state, second special symbol hold, second special symbol variation table]
The Normal Game State Second Special Symbol Reserve Second Special Symbol Variation Table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game when the game state at the start of the variation of the second special symbol is the normal game state. In other words, the Normal Game State Second Special Symbol Reserve Second Special Symbol Variation Table is used when starting the second special symbol game for the second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) triggered by a transition to the a-time-saving game state. Here, Figure 199(B) shows an example of the Normal Game State Second Special Symbol Reserve Second Special Symbol Variation Table.

As shown in Figure 199(B), the second special symbol fluctuation table for normal gameplay differs from the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation table (see Figure 196(D)) and the first special symbol miss fluctuation table (see Figure 196(F)) mentioned above. This table is referenced regardless of whether the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot or a miss, and the type of second special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) is set according to the remaining reserve pattern. In this embodiment, eight types, 1 to 8, are set as the remaining reserve patterns.

As shown in Figures 199(C) and 199(D), Remaining Reserve Pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), there is one remaining second special symbol reserve, and the result of the jackpot lottery for that one remaining second special symbol reserve is a loss. Remaining Reserve Pattern 2 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), there are two remaining second special symbol reserves, and the result of the jackpot lottery for those two remaining second special symbol reserves is a loss. Remaining Reserve Pattern 3 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), there are three remaining second special symbol reserves, and the result of the jackpot lottery for those three remaining second special symbol reserves is a loss. Remaining Reserve Pattern 4 is a pattern where, after transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the second special symbol game that started first after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), the number of remaining second special symbol reserves is 4, and the result of the jackpot lottery for these 4 remaining second special symbol reserves is a loss.

On the other hand, remaining reserve pattern 5 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the second special symbol game that was started first after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), the number of remaining second special symbol reserves is 1 to 4, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the first second special symbol game started among the second special symbol reserves is a minor win. Remaining reserve pattern 6 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the second special symbol game that was started first after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), the number of remaining second special symbol reserves is 2 to 4, the result of the jackpot lottery for the first second special symbol game started among the second special symbol reserves is a miss, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the second second special symbol game started among the second special symbol reserves is a minor win. Remaining Reserve Pattern 7 is a pattern where, after transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), there are 3 to 4 remaining second special symbol reserves. The jackpot lottery results for the first and second second special symbol games started during this period are misses, and the jackpot lottery result for the third second special symbol game started during this period is a minor win. Remaining Reserve Pattern 8 is a pattern where, after transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state (the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state has ended), there are 4 remaining second special symbol reserves. The jackpot lottery results for the first three second special symbol games started during this period are misses, and the jackpot lottery result for the fourth second special symbol game started during this period is a minor win.

As shown in Figures 199(B) and 199(D), in this embodiment, for remaining reserved patterns 1 and 5, a special feature variation pattern "09" with a second special feature variation display time of 120 seconds is set as the second special feature variation pattern for one second special feature remaining reserved, and a 120-second second special feature game is executed once for the remaining reserved second special feature. For remaining reserved patterns 2 and 6, a special feature variation pattern "02" with a second special feature variation display time of 60 seconds is set as the second special feature variation pattern for each of the first two remaining reserved second special feature, and a 60-second second special feature game is executed twice for the remaining reserved second special feature. For remaining reserved patterns 3 and 7, a special feature variation pattern "10" with a second special feature variation display time of 40 seconds is set as the second special feature variation pattern for each of the first three remaining reserved second special feature, and a 40-second second special feature game is executed three times for the remaining reserved second special feature. For remaining reserved patterns 4 and 8, a special feature variation pattern "01" is initially set as the second special feature variation pattern for each of the four remaining second special feature reserved symbols, with a second special feature variation display time of 30 seconds. Four 30-second second special feature games are then executed for each of the remaining second special feature reserved symbols. In other words, for each remaining reserved symbol pattern, the total variation display time of the second special feature games executed in that pattern is standardized to 120 seconds. Therefore, the battle sequence (remaining reserved symbol sequence) in the RUSH sequence described later is executed as a display sequence that completes in 120 seconds, making it difficult to determine how many times the second special feature game was executed for each of the remaining second special feature reserved symbols during the battle sequence.

Furthermore, the total display time of the second special symbol game played in each remaining reserve pattern is not limited to 120 seconds and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the display times of the second special symbol game played in each remaining reserve pattern do not necessarily have to be equal. Moreover, the total display times of the second special symbol game played in each remaining reserve pattern do not need to be uniform and may differ for each remaining reserve pattern; multiple display times may be associated with each remaining reserve pattern.

[Main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4]
The main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, but the procedures for setting the first special symbol hold command and setting the second special symbol hold command in the start prize entry processing differ from those of the first embodiment described above.

[Startup and Prize Entry Processing]
Here, Figure 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. The start-up prize-winning process will be explained below with reference to Figure 18.

<Step S1101>
As shown in Figure 200, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a win in the first prize slot 314. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been a win in the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), the specific condition is met and the process moves to step S1102. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been no win in the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: No), the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols N stored in the first special symbol reserved symbol storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved symbols (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved special symbols N is the maximum number of reserved symbols (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols N is not the maximum number of reserved symbols (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process by adding 1 to the number of reserved special symbols N (step S1103). When numerical information is stored in the first special symbol reserved symbol storage area NAA, the system enters a first special symbol reserved game state in which the first special symbol game can be played.

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 performs numerical storage processing, acquiring the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described later. The MPU 412 then performs processing to store these counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b of the RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol win/loss information for the first special symbol hold acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of the jackpot win/loss determination in step S2102 or S2103 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 28, and executes a first special symbol hold command setting process to set the first special symbol hold command in RAM 412 based on the result of this check. Details of the first special symbol hold command setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 19.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a win in the second prize slot 315. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been a win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1106: Yes), it proceeds to step S1107. If it determines that there has been no win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1106: No), it terminates the start prize process.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols M stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved second special symbols M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start prize entry process. On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process by adding 1 to the number of reserved second special symbols M (step S1108). When numerical information is stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, the system enters a first special symbol reserved game state in which the second special symbol game can be executed.

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 performs numerical storage processing by acquiring the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described later. The MPU 412 then performs processing to store these counter values in the first available reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b of the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol win/loss information for the second special symbol hold acquired in step S1109 before it becomes the subject of the jackpot win/loss determination in step S2102 or S2103 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 28, and executes a second special symbol hold command setting process to set the second special symbol hold command in RAM 412 based on the result of this check. Here, the second special symbol hold command setting process is the same as the first special symbol hold command setting process, which will be described later with reference to Figure 19, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that the second special symbol hold command setting process can be performed by replacing "first special symbol hold command" with "second special symbol hold command" and "number of first special symbol holds N" with "number of second special symbol holds M" in the first special symbol hold command setting process of Figure 19.

[First Special Feature Hold Command Setting Process]
Here, Figure 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the first special symbol hold command, which is executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 200. The first special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first special symbol hold command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or loss type), the special symbol variation display time, and the number of first special symbols held N. The first special symbol hold command setting process will be explained below with reference to Figure 201.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
As shown in Figure 201, in the first special symbol hold command setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first reads the number of first special symbol holds N from the first special symbol hold number storage area NAA of the first special symbol hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special symbol hold from the RAM 412 (step S3301). Then, the MPU 41 refers to the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196(A)) and determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot or not based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (step S3302). If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3303. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), i.e., it is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3305.

<Step S3303>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start-up prize is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3303). For example, if the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 of the start-up prize processing in Figure 200, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read. Note that the reserve area in which the special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start-up prize processing in Figure 200 among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 can be determined by the value of the first special symbol reserve number N stored in the first special symbol reserve number storage area NAA.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special symbol variation type counter CS1 (special symbol variation pattern), and the first special symbol reserve count N to the first special symbol reserve command, and then terminates the first special symbol reserve command setting process.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start-up win is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), i.e., it is a miss, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3305). Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (miss type), the special symbol variation type counter CS1 (special symbol variation pattern) and the first special symbol reserve number N to the first special symbol reserve command (step S3306), and terminates the first special symbol reserve command setting process.

Thus, the first special symbol hold command set in step S3304 or S3306 includes the first special symbol hold number N read in step S3301. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5, upon receiving the first special symbol hold command, can recognize which of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 the first special symbol win/fail information corresponds to by referring to the first hold number N included in the first special symbol hold command. This allows the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 to control the display of the first special symbol hold image (see Figures 225(A) and 225(C)) as a corresponding display for the first special symbol game in the first special symbol hold image display area 76.

Furthermore, the first special feature hold command, set in step S3307 or S3309 of the first special feature hold command setting process, is stored in RAM 412 and, after being transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process shown in Figure 202 (described later) executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, is erased. Moreover, the content of the first special feature hold command described here is merely an example; it is not limited to what is described here, as long as the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp similar content to the first special feature hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special feature hold command may be included in other commands.

[Second Special Feature Hold Command Setting Process]
Here, Figure 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the second special symbol hold command, which is executed by the MPU 41 in step S1110 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 200. The second special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the command is a second special symbol hold command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol variation display time, and the number of second special symbols held M. The second special symbol hold command setting process will be explained below with reference to Figure 202.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 202, in the second special feature hold command setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game is in a normal game state (step S3401). Whether or not the game is in a normal game state is determined in steps S4216, S4222, and S4228 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 218, based on the normal game state flag which is set to ON when transitioning from a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state) to a normal game state.

If the MPU 41 is in a normal game state (step S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3409. If it is not in a normal game state (step S3401: No), the process proceeds to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
If the game is not in the normal game state (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the a-time-saving game state (step S3402). Whether or not it is in the a-time-saving game state is determined in step S4246 of the game state transition process in Figure 219, based on the a-time-saving game state flag which is set to ON after the end of the time-saving jackpot game.

If the MPU 41 is in the a-time-saving game state (step S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the a-time-saving game state (step S3402: No), i.e., in either the a-time-saving game state or the c-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the game is not in a time-saving game state (step S3402: No), that is, if the game is in a time-saving game state or c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 reads the number of second special symbol reserves M from the second special symbol reserve count storage area NAB of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each second special symbol reserve from the RAM 412 (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 refers to the b time-saving - c time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 197(A)) and determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start entry is a jackpot or not based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (step S3404). If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start entry is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3405. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start-up prize is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), that is, if it is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start-up prize is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3405). For example, if the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REB3 in step S1104 of the start-up prize processing in Figure 200, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REB3 are read. Note that the reserve area in which the special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start-up prize processing in Figure 200 among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 can be determined by the value of the second special symbol reserve number M stored in the second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special symbol variation type counter CS1 (special symbol variation pattern), and the second special symbol reserve count M to the second special symbol reserve command, and then terminates the second special symbol reserve command setting process.

<Steps S3407 and S3408>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start-up win is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), i.e., it is a miss, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3407). Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (miss type), the special symbol variation type counter CS1 (special symbol variation pattern) and the second special symbol reserve number M to the second special symbol reserve command (step S3408), and terminates the second special symbol reserve command setting process.

<Steps S3409-S3411>
If the game is in a normal play state (step S3401: Yes), or in a time-saving play state (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern "08" as the special symbol variation pattern, which has a variation display time of 40 seconds (step S3409). The MPU 41 then reads the number of second special symbol reserves M from the second special symbol reserve count memory area NAB of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each second special symbol reserve from the RAM 412 (step S3410). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot lottery result (jackpot type, minor win, miss type), the special symbol variation pattern, and the number of second special symbol reserves M as the second special symbol reserve command (step S3411), and then terminates the second special symbol reserve command setting process.

Thus, the second special symbol hold command set in step S3406, S3408, or S3411 includes the second special symbol hold number M read in step S3403 or S3410. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5, upon receiving the second special symbol hold command, can recognize which of the second hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 the second special symbol win/fail information corresponds to by referring to the second special symbol hold number M included in the command. This allows the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 to control the display of the second special symbol hold image (see Figures 225(B) and 225(D)) as a corresponding display for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol hold image display area 77.

Furthermore, the information set in the second special feature hold command, which is set in steps S3406, S3408, or S3411 of the second special feature hold command setting process, is stored in RAM 412 and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process shown in Figure 203, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and then erased. Moreover, the content of the second special feature hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to what is described here, as long as the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp similar content to the second special feature hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the second special feature hold command may be included in other commands.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
The main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 21), but as shown in Figure 203, the small win game control processing is executed, and some of the processing procedures differ. Below, the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, and the processing necessary for explaining this embodiment.

[General Game Control Processing]
The regular game control process performed in step S1404 of the main process in Figure 203 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in the regular game variation start process. The regular game variation start process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 204.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
In the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and if the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a win, a flag related to the normal symbol win type (opening mode of the electric mechanism 315b) is set.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 204, in the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not it is in a normal game state (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol game) is in a normal game state. In other words, it determines whether it is in a normal game state which is a low support mode or a time-saving game state which is a high support mode when the variation of normal symbols starts, and makes a determination of whether or not a normal symbol win occurs based on the support mode type when the variation of normal symbols starts.

Whether or not the game is in a normal game state is determined in steps S4216, S4222, and S4228 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 218, based on the normal game state flag that is set to ON when transitioning from a time-saving game state (a) time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state, or c) time-saving game state to a normal game state.

If the MPU 41 is in a normal game state (step S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3402. If it is not in a normal game state (step S3402: No), the process proceeds to step S3405.

<Steps S3502-S3504>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is in low support mode, the MPU 41 makes a determination of whether the normal game state normal game state normal game state win/loss table (see Figure 195(A)) is correct (step S3502), and determines whether the result of the win/loss determination is a normal game state win (step S3503).

Furthermore, whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a regular win is determined based on the regular win random number counter C4, which is stored in the regular win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11) and obtained by the entry of the game ball 99 into 317R.

The MPU 41, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the normal game state normal win/loss table is a normal win (step S3503: Yes), sets the short-open normal win flag to ON (step S3504) and proceeds to step S3511. The short-open normal win flag indicates that the result of the normal win lottery is a short-open win (see Figure 195(E)) where the maximum opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is 0.1 seconds. This flag is referenced in step S3609 of the normal win game control process shown in Figure 204 (described later) when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the short-open as the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the normal game state normal win/loss table is not a normal win (step S3503: No), that is, if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3511.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
If the game is not in a normal game state (Step S3501: No), that is, in a time-saving game state which is a high-support mode (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state), the MPU 41 makes a determination of whether the normal win lottery is successful or not based on the time-saving game state normal win success/failure table (see Figure 195(B)) (Step S3505), and determines whether the result of the success/failure determination is a normal win or not (Step S3506).

Furthermore, whether the result of the win/loss determination is a regular win or not is determined based on the value of the regular win random number counter C4, which is stored in the regular win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11), and is obtained by the entry of the game ball 99 into the through gate 317R, similar to step S3502 described above.

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the win/loss judgment based on the time-saving game state normal win/loss table is a normal win (step S3506: Yes), it proceeds to step S3507. If the result of the win/loss judgment is not a normal win (step S3506: No), i.e., the result of the win/loss judgment is a loss, it proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the result of the win/loss determination based on the regular symbol win/loss table for the time-saving game state is a regular symbol win (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the a time-saving game state (step S3507). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the display of the regular symbols (regular symbol game) is the a time-saving game state. Whether or not it is the a time-saving game state is determined in step S4246 of the game state transition process in Figure 219, based on the a time-saving game state flag which is set to ON after the end of the time-saving jackpot game.

If the MPU 41 is in the a-time-saving game state (step S3507: Yes), it sets the long-opening regular-symbol win flag to ON (step S3508) and proceeds to step S3511. The long-opening regular-symbol win flag indicates that the result of the regular-symbol win lottery is a long-opening win (see Figure 195(E)) where the maximum opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is 15 seconds. This flag is referenced in step S3603 of the regular-symbol win game control process shown in Figure 205 (described later) when determining whether to set the opening counter value to the time corresponding to the long-opening as the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the a-time-saving game state (step S3507: No), it proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3509 and S3510>
If the game is not in the a-time-saving game state (step S3507: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in the b-time-saving game state (step S3509). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the display of the regular symbols (regular symbol game) is the b-time-saving game state. Whether or not the game is in the b-time-saving game state is determined based on the b-time-saving game state flag, which is set to ON in step S4203 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when the game transitions from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state based on the execution of a specified number of special symbol games (for example, 500 times) after the end of a jackpot game, in which the jackpot lottery result is a loss.

If the MPU 41 is in the b-time-saving game state (step S3509: Yes), it sets the medium-opening normal-symbol win flag to ON (step S3509) and proceeds to step S3511. The medium-opening normal-symbol win flag indicates that the result of the normal-symbol win lottery is a medium-opening win (see Figure 195(E)) where the maximum opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is 3 seconds. This flag is referenced in step S3606 of the normal-symbol win game control process shown in Figure 205 (described later) when determining whether to set the opening counter value to the time corresponding to the medium-opening as the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the b-time-saving game state (step S3507: No), it proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss (step S3503 or S3506: No), if the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3504), if the long-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3508), or if the medium-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3510), the MPU 41 starts displaying the variation of the regular symbols on the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3511). Then, the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, indicating that the regular symbols are being displayed in a variation, i.e., that the regular symbol game is being played (step S3512), and ends the regular symbol variation start process.

[General Winning Game Control Processing]
Here, Figures 205 and 206 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for the normal win game control process executed in step S1405 of the main process in Figure 203. In the normal win game control process, when the result of the normal win lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allow state, which permits the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315, and a restrict state, which restricts it, by controlling the opening and closing of the electric mechanism 315b. The normal win game control process will be explained below with reference to Figures 205 and 206.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 205, in the normal symbol win game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S3601). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game. The normal symbol change stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol stops being displayed in the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 22.

If the normal symbol variation stop indicator flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop indicator flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3616 in Figure 206.

<Step S3602>
If the normal diagram change stop display flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when a normal diagram win game can be started, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S3602). In the jackpot game control process in Figure 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 when a jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the normal win game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forcibly terminated by the start of a jackpot game, the normal win game will not start even if the result of the normal win lottery for that normal win game is a normal win. That is, in this embodiment, a normal win game will not start while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, a new normal win game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S3602: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the flag indicating a jackpot game is off (step S3602: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S3603). The flag indicating a long-opening regular win is a flag that indicates the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win, and is set to on in step S3508 of the regular win variation start process in Figure 204 when the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular win lottery for a completed regular win game is a long-opening regular win. If the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3604, and if the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to off (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3606.

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
If the long-opening regular-ball win flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-ball win lottery for the completed regular-ball game is a long-opening regular-ball win, the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set a value corresponding to 15 seconds (see Figure 195(E)), which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in a long-opening regular-ball win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize pocket 315), as the value of the opening time counter (step S3604). The opening time counter is referenced in step S3618 of the regular-ball win game control process to determine the return timing of the electric mechanism 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular-ball win flag to OFF (step S3605) and proceeds to step S3612.

<Step S3606>
If the long-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S3603: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is not a long-opening regular symbol win, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the medium-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S3606). The medium-opening regular symbol win flag is a flag that indicates the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a medium-opening regular symbol win, and is set to on in step S3510 of the regular symbol variation start process in Figure 204 when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a medium-opening regular symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a medium-opening regular symbol win. If the medium-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3607, and if the medium-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S3606: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3607 and S3608>
If the middle-opening regular-number win flag is set to ON (step S3606: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-number win lottery for the completed regular-number game is a middle-opening regular-number win, the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set a value corresponding to the 3 seconds (see Figure 195(E)) which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in a middle-opening regular-number win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize pocket 315), as the value of the opening time counter (step S3607). Then, the MPU 41 sets the middle-opening regular-number win flag to OFF (step S3608) and proceeds to step S3612.

<Step S3609>
If the medium-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S3606: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is not a medium-opening regular symbol win, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the short-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S3609). The short-opening regular symbol win flag is a flag that indicates the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win, and is set to on in step S3504 of the regular symbol variation start process in Figure 204 when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a short-opening regular symbol win. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3610. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to OFF (step S3609: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3612.

<Steps S3610 and S3611>
If the short-opening regular-number win flag is set to ON (step S3609: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-number win lottery for the completed regular-number game is a short-opening regular-number win, the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds (see Figure 195(E)), which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in a short-opening regular-number win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize slot 315), as the value of the opening time counter (step S3610). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-number win flag to OFF (step S3611) and proceeds to step S3612.

<Steps S3612-S3614>
If the result of the regular prize draw is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long-open regular prize flag, medium-open regular prize flag, or short-open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (steps S3605, S3608, or S3611), the MPU 41 activates the electric mechanism 315b (step S3612). This opens the second prize slot 315, allowing game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism open command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3613), sets an electric mechanism open flag to ON to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3614), and proceeds to step S3615.

The electric mechanism release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the audio lamp control device 5 can then initiate a display animation, for example, on the symbol display unit 341, indicating that the electric mechanism 315b is released.

<Step S3615>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a win, the process of opening the electric mechanism 315b is executed (steps S3603 to S3614), or if both the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are set to off (the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss) (steps S3602, S3606 and S3609 are all No), the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended), to off (step S3615), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S3616>
If the normal figure variation stop display flag is off (step S3601: No), as shown in Figure 206, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric mechanism open flag, which is set to turn on when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in step S3614 of the normal figure winning game control process, is set to on (step S3616). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal figure winning game is in progress. If the electric mechanism open flag is set to on (step S3616: Yes), that is, if a normal figure winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3617. On the other hand, if the electric mechanism open flag is set to off (step S3616: No), that is, if a normal figure winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal figure winning game control process.

<Steps S3617 and S3618>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is set to ON (step S3616: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 performs an update process by subtracting 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S3604, S3607, or S3610 of the regular winning game control process (step S3617), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3619. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3618: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process.

<Steps S3619-S3621>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), that is, if it is time to reset the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 resets the electric mechanism 315b (step S3619). This closes the second prize opening 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism closing command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S3620), sets the electric mechanism open flag to off to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3621), and proceeds to step S3822.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to terminate the display animation, for example, the symbol display unit 341, which indicates that the electric mechanism is open, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

<Step S3622>

In step S3822, the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates the a-time-saving game state, is set to ON. The a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON after the end of the time-saving jackpot game in step S4246 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 219.

If the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3823. If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3622: No), the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S3623 and S3624>
If the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON, which transitions the game state to the normal game state (step S3623). The normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S4215 of the game state transition process in Figure 218 when determining whether or not to transition the game state from a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S3624), and terminates the normal game control process.

In this embodiment, in the normal game win control process, when a normal game win is performed in the a-time-saving game state, based on the end of the normal game win, the normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3623 to transition the game state from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state, and the a-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF in step S3624. In other words, in this embodiment, when a normal game win is started in the a-time-saving game state, the game state transitions from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state by the execution of a normal game win (operation of the electric mechanism 315b once). As described above, when a regular winning game is executed based on a transition to the time-saving game state (when the second prize entry point 315 is opened by the operation of the electric mechanism 315b), it becomes possible to execute a total of five second special symbol games: the current variation display of the second special symbol, plus the variation displays of the second special symbol based on up to four second special symbol reserves (so-called remaining reserves). The second special symbol games based on the remaining reserves of the second special symbol begin in the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state (a).

[Special Game Control Processing]
Here, Figures 207 and 208 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main process in Figure 203. In the special symbol game control process, the contents of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is controlled, for example, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 is controlled. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to Figures 207 and 208.

<Step S3701>
As shown in Figure 207, in the special game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on (step S3701). In the big win game control process of Figure 29, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S2206 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S2252 when a big win game is finished.

The MPU 41 terminates the special feature game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S3701: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the special feature game is not started while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, the special feature game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S3701: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3702.

<Step S3702>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S3701: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (in progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game) is on (step S3702). The flag indicating that a variation is in progress is set to on in step S3915 when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts in the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 208 described later, and is set to off in step S3710 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the said special symbol game control process.

If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S3702: Yes), meaning the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3706. On the other hand, if the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is off (step S3702: No), meaning the special symbol is not being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is not in progress) when a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3703.

<Step S3703>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol is changing is off (step S3702: No), that is, if the special symbol is not changing when the jackpot game is not in progress (the special symbol game is not in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special symbol reserve count N stored in the first special symbol reserve count storage area NAA of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b and the second special symbol reserve count M stored in the second special symbol reserve count storage area NAB are 0 (step S3703).

The MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process if both the number of reserved special symbols N and the number of reserved special symbols M are 0 (step S3703: Yes), that is, if there is no reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game. On the other hand, if either the number of reserved special symbols N or the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S3703: No), that is, if there is a reservation of at least one of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704.

<Step S3704>
If either the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M is not 0 (step S3703: No), that is, if there is a reserve for the right to execute the first special symbol game and a reserve for the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process related to the special symbol win/loss information data (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (step S3704), and proceeds to step S3705. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 209.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to initiate the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 210.

<Step S3706>
If the flag indicating that a special symbol is currently changing is on (step S3702: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing (while the special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol change display time has elapsed from the start of the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game for the first special symbol set in the first special symbol change pattern setting process in step S3903 of the special symbol change start process shown in Figure 210 below, or for the second special symbol set in the second special symbol change pattern setting processes A and B in steps S3907 or S3909 of the same special symbol change start process (step S3706). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the special symbol that is currently changing and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3706: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S3707. On the other hand, if the variation display time has not elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3706: No), that is, if it is not time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process.

<Steps S3707-S3710>
When the display time for the first or second special symbol has elapsed since the start of the display of the first or second special symbol's variation (step S3706: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop the special symbol display and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game (step S3707). The MPU 41 then sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the first or second special symbol has stopped (step S3708), and sets a special symbol game end command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the special symbol game has ended (step S3709). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag, which indicates that the first or second special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation state (special symbol game is in progress), to off (step S3710), and proceeds to step S3711 in Figure 208.

<Steps S3711 and S3712>
In step S3711 of Figure 208, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter is 0. The remaining setting counter indicates the remaining number of second special symbol games (special variations) that are executed for second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) resulting from the entry of game balls into the second prize pocket 315 triggered by the opening of the electric mechanism 315b in the a-time-saving game state. It is set in step S4015 of the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B in Figure 211, or in step S4019 or S4023 in Figure 212.

If the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of special variations for the remaining reserved symbols of the second special symbol, is 0 (step S3711: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a special variation termination command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the special variation has ended (step S3712), and terminates the special symbol game control process. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3713.

<Step S3713>
If the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the ceiling count counter flag, which indicates that a ceiling count counter showing the remaining number of special symbol games until the game state is transitioned to the b time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3713). The ceiling count counter is set in step S4251 of the game state transition process in Figure 219 when the jackpot game ends, and the ceiling count counter flag is set to ON in step S4252 of the game state transition process when the ceiling count counter is set.

If the ceiling count counter flag, which indicates that the ceiling count counter is set, is set to ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714. If the ceiling count counter flag is set to OFF (step S3713: No), the process proceeds to step S3717.

<Steps S3714-S3716>
If the ceiling count counter flag, which indicates that the ceiling count counter is set, is set to ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the ceiling count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games until the game state transitions to the b-time-saving game state (step S3714), and then proceeds to step S3715.

In step S3715, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling count counter after subtraction is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition the game state to the b-time-saving game state. If the value of the ceiling count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3715: Yes), i.e., it is time to transition the game state to the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state transition flag to ON (step S3716) and terminates the special feature game control process. On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3715: No), i.e., it is not time to transition the game state to the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special feature game control process.

<Steps S3717 and S3718>
If the ceiling count counter flag, which indicates that the ceiling count counter is set, is set to off (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation display is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (step S3717). Here, a failure to stop the time-saving symbols is a jackpot lottery result in which the game state transitions to the c time-saving game state after the end of the fluctuation display. That is, in step S3717, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition to the c time-saving game state after the fluctuation display stops.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols (step S3717: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c-time-saving game state transition flag to ON (step S3718) to transition the game state to the c-time-saving game state, and terminates the special symbol game control process. The c-time-saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S4208 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when determining whether or not to transition the game state to the c-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation display is not a failure to stop the time-saving symbol (step S3717: No), that is, if the game state is not transitioned to the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3719.

<Step S3719>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation display is not a time-saving symbol stop failure (step S3717: No), that is, if the game state is not transitioned to the c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the b time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3719). The b time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S4203 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state.

If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3720. If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3719: No), the process proceeds to step S3723.

<Steps S3720-S3722>
If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the b-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the b-time-saving game state (step S3720), and then proceeds to step S3721. The b-time-saving game count counter is set in step S4205 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state.

In step S3721, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the b-time reduction counter after subtraction is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition the game state from the b-time reduction game state to the normal game state. If the value of the b-time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3721: Yes), i.e., it is time to transition the game state from the b-time reduction game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON (step S3722) and terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if the value of the b-time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3721: No), i.e., it is not time to transition the game state from the b-time reduction game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

<Step S3723>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3719: No), that is, if the game state is not the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the c-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3723). The c-time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S4209 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the c-time-saving game state.

If the MPU 41 has the c-time-saving game state flag set to ON (step S3723: Yes), it proceeds to step S3724. If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3723: No), it terminates the special feature game control process.

<Steps S3724-S3726>
If the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the c-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the c-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played in the c-time-saving game state (step S3724), and then proceeds to step S3725. The c-time-saving game count counter is set in step S4211 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the c-time-saving game state.

In step S3725, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the c-time reduction count counter after subtraction is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition the game state from the c-time reduction game state to the normal game state. If the value of the c-time reduction count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3725: Yes), i.e., it is time to transition the game state from the c-time reduction game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON (step S3726) and terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if the value of the c-time reduction count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3725: No), i.e., it is not time to transition the game state from the c-time reduction game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

[Special drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed by the MPU 41 in step S3704 of the special feature game control process in Figure 207. In the special feature data setting process of this embodiment, the contents of the special feature hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. The special feature data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 209.

The special symbol hold storage area 412b in this embodiment is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. However, as shown in Figure 8, the first special symbol hold storage area REA (first hold area REA1, second hold area REA2, third hold area REA3, fourth hold area REA4, and first special symbol hold count storage area NAA) is a memory area for storing information on whether the hold of the right to execute the first special symbol game for the first starting win triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize opening 314 is correct, and the second special symbol hold storage area REA is for storing information on whether the hold of the right to execute the second special symbol game for the second starting win triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 is correct. The system includes a second special symbol hold storage area REB (first hold area REB1, second hold area REB2, third hold area REB3, fourth hold area REB4, and second special symbol hold count storage area NAB), which is a storage area for storing information on whether a hold is successful or not; and a special symbol execution area AE, which is a storage area for moving special symbol success/failure information stored in the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB, when the display of special symbol variations begins in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 209, in the special feature data setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the number of reserved special features M for the second special feature game is 0 (step S3801). If the number of reserved special features M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), that is, there are no reserved special features for the second special feature game and there are reserved special features for the first special feature game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special features M is not 0 (step S3801: No), that is, there are reserved special features for the second special feature game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3806. In other words, by determining whether the number of reserved special features M for the second special feature game is 0, the MPU 41 prioritizes starting the second special feature game over the first special feature game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game. However, the first special symbol game may be started with priority over the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order (retention order) of the game balls entering the first or second prize slot 314 or 315, so that either the first or second special symbol game is executed. Furthermore, without assigning a priority to the start of the first and second special symbol games, they may be executed independently of each other, or they may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol variation).

<Steps S3802-S3804>
If the second special symbol hold count M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process to subtract 1 from the first special symbol hold count N stored in the first special symbol hold count storage area NAA of the first special symbol hold storage area REA (step S3802), and moves the first special symbol success/failure information from the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3803). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the first special symbol success/failure information from the second hold area REA2 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA one by one (step S3804). Specifically, in step S3804, the first special feature win/loss information from the second holding area REA2 of the first special feature holding storage area REA is moved to the first holding area REA1, the first special feature win/loss information from the third holding area REA3 is moved to the second holding area REA2, and the first special feature win/loss information from the fourth holding area REA4 is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S3804 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3805.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the first special symbol win/loss information for the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA has shifted, and terminates the special symbol data setting process. This first special symbol shift command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays (see Figures 225(A) and 225(C)) corresponding to the first special symbol hold displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the first special symbol shift command.

<Steps S3806-S3808>
If the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 performs a subtraction process to subtract 1 from the number of reserved special symbols M stored in the number of reserved special symbols memory area NAB of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB of the number of reserved special symbols (step S3806), and moves the success/failure information of the number of reserved special symbols from the first reserve area REB1 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3807). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success/failure information of the number of reserved special symbols from the second reserve area REB2 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB one by one (step S3808). Specifically, in step S3808, the second special symbol win/loss information from the second holding area REB2 is moved to the first holding area REB1, the second special symbol win/loss information from the third holding area REB3 is moved to the second holding area REB2, and the second special symbol win/loss information from the fourth holding area REB4 is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the processing in step S3807 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3809.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the second special symbol win/loss information for the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB has shifted, and terminates the special symbol data setting process. This second special symbol shift command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays (see Figures 225(B) and 225(D)) corresponding to the second special symbol hold displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the second special symbol shift command.

[Special Feature Fluctuation Start Processing]
Here, Figure 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3705 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 207. In the special symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started when the first special symbol variation display starts on the first special symbol display unit 362 based on the initial entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314, or when the second special symbol variation display starts on the second special symbol display unit 363 based on the initial entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start process will be described below with reference to Figure 28.

<Step S3901>
As shown in Figure 210, in the special symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3901). If the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3902. If the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3901: No), that is, if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3904.

<Steps S3902 and S3903>
If the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a first special symbol jackpot lottery based on the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196(A)) (step S3902), then performs the first special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S3903), and proceeds to step S3910.

In the first special symbol variation pattern setting process, the MPU 41, based on the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in step S3902, refers to the first special symbol jackpot variation table (see Figure 196(D)) or the first special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 196(F)) and sets the first special symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game that is about to begin.

<Step S3904>
If the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3901: No), that is, if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether the b time-saving game state, which indicates that the game is in the b time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3504). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the second special symbol variation display (second special symbol game) is the b time-saving game state. The b time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S4203 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when the game transitions from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state based on the execution of a specified number of special symbol games (for example, 500 times) after the end of a jackpot game in which the jackpot lottery result is a loss.

If the MPU 41 is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), indicating that the b-time-saving game state is active, the process proceeds to step S3906. Conversely, if the MPU 41 is set to OFF (step S3904: No), the process proceeds to step S3905.

<Step S3905>
If the b-time-saving game state, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to off (step S3904: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c-time-saving game state, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3505). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the second special symbol variation display (second special symbol game) is the c-time-saving game state.

If the MPU 41 is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), indicating that the game is in the c-time-saving game state, it proceeds to step S3906. Conversely, if the MPU 41 is set to OFF (step S3905: No), it proceeds to step S3908. That is, if the game state when initiating the second special symbol variation display (second special symbol game) is either the normal game state or the a-time-saving game state, rather than the b-time-saving game state or the c-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3908.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
If the b-time-saving game state, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), or if the c-time-saving game state, which indicates that the game is in the c-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the second special symbol variation display (second special symbol game) is the b-time-saving game state or the c-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 performs a second special symbol jackpot lottery based on the b-time-saving-c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 197(A)) (step S3906), then executes the second special symbol variation pattern setting process A (step S3907), and proceeds to step S3910.

In the second special symbol variation pattern setting process A, the MPU 41, based on the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery in step S3906, refers to either the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot variation table (see Figure 197(C)) or the b-time-saving - c-time-saving second special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 197(E)), and sets the second special symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that is about to begin.

<Steps S3908 and S3909>
If the time-saving game state is set to off (step S3905: No), that is, if the game state when starting the second special symbol variation display (second special symbol game) is not the time-saving game state or the time-saving game state, but the normal game state or the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 performs a second special symbol jackpot lottery based on the normal-a time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 198(A)) (step S3908), then performs the second special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S3908), and proceeds to step S3910.

In the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B, the MPU 41, based on the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery in step S3908, refers to either the time-saving second special symbol variation table (see Figure 199(A)) or the normal second special symbol variation table (see Figure 199(B)) to set the second special symbol variation pattern, which is the duration of the second special symbol variation display in the second special symbol game that is about to begin. Details of the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B will be described later with reference to Figures 211 to 213.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery in step S3902, S3906, or S3908 and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S3903, S3907, or S3909, and then proceeds to step S3911. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance as a display performance on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "4R time-saving jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "A01" to "A03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" added to indicate that it is a 4R time-saving jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "4R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "B01" to "B03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "B" added to indicate that it is a 4R normal concave jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "minor win", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "C01", "C02", "C08" to "C010", which are special symbol variation patterns "01", "02", "08" to "010" with a "C" added to indicate that it is a minor win, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the jackpot lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "D01" to "D05" or "D08" to "D10" as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, by adding a "D" to the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "05" or "08" to "10" to indicate that it is a miss. Also, if the jackpot lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (pre- and post-miss reach, reach other than pre- and post-miss, complete miss, time-saving symbol stop miss) in the special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S3911>
When a special symbol variation pattern command is set, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variation display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (step S3911). Specifically, if the MPU 41 is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot 314, it starts the first special game by starting the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362, and if the MPU 41 is triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot 315, it starts the second special symbol game by starting the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, indicating that the special symbols are being displayed (the special symbol game is in progress) (step S3911), and ends the special symbol variation start process.

[Second Special Feature Variation Pattern Setting Process B]
Here, Figures 211 to 213 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the second special pattern variation setting process B, which is executed by the MPU 41 in step S3909 of the special pattern variation start process in Figure 207. In the second special pattern variation pattern setting process B of this embodiment, the contents of the special pattern hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. The second special pattern variation pattern setting process B will be described below with reference to Figures 211 to 213.

<Step S4001>
As shown in Figure 211, in the second special pattern variation setting process B of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to ON. The a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON after the end of the time-saving jackpot game in step S4246 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 219.

If the MPU 41 has the "a" time-saving game state flag set to "on" (step S4001: Yes), it proceeds to step S4002. If the "a" time-saving game state flag is set to "off" (step S4001: No), it proceeds to step S4006.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
If the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set the variation display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game to 40 seconds of variation pattern "08" (see Figure 199(A)) (step S4002), and sets a special variation start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the second special symbol game is starting in the a-time-saving game state (step S4003), and then proceeds to step S4004. That is, the MPU 41 notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that a special variation is starting in which the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a small win is high and the jackpot game is likely to be executed.

The special variation start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the audio lamp control device 5 can initiate the RUSH effect (see Figure 226) as a specific effect, which is a display effect that informs the player that the special variation has a high probability of resulting in a minor win and is more likely to result in a jackpot.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a minor win. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a minor win (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is not a minor win (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is not a minor win (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the MPU 41 sets the special variation start flag to ON, indicating that the special variation will be started (step S4005), and terminates the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B. The special variation start flag is referenced in the next step S4006 to determine whether the second special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game that is executed immediately after the second special symbol game that was started in the a-time-saving game state and resulted in a miss notification (the second special symbol game based on the remaining reserves due to the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state).

<Step S4006>
If the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to off (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variation start flag is set to on (step S4006). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special symbol game to be started is a second special symbol game that is executed immediately after the second special symbol game that notifies a loss and was started in a time-saving game state (a second special symbol game based on the remaining reserves due to the entry of game balls into the second prize pocket 315 in a time-saving game state).

If the special variation start flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), i.e., the second special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game executed immediately after the second special symbol game that notified a loss in the a-time-saving game state (the second special symbol game based on the remaining reserves due to the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4007. On the other hand, if the special variation start flag is set to OFF (step S4006: No), i.e., the second special symbol game to be started is not the second special symbol game executed immediately after the second special symbol game that notified a loss in the a-time-saving game state (the second special symbol game based on the remaining reserves due to the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4024 in Figure 213.

<Steps S4007 and S4008>
If the special variation start flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game that is executed immediately after the second special symbol game that notifies a loss and was started in the a-time-saving game state (the second special symbol game based on the remaining reserves due to the entry of game balls into the second prize pocket 315 in the a-time-saving game state), then the MPU 41 sets the special variation start flag to OFF (step S4007) and proceeds to step S4008.

<Steps S4008 and S4009>
In step S4008, the MPU 41 identifies the remaining reserve pattern (see Figures 199(B) to 199(D)) and the number of remaining reserves for the remaining reserves, which are the reserved rights to perform the second special symbol game at the end of the second special symbol game that was first performed based on the entry of game balls into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state (step S4008), sets a remaining reserve pattern command (step S4009), and proceeds to step S4010.

The remaining reserve pattern command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the remaining reserve pattern and the number of remaining reserves based on the number of game balls entered into the second prize entry point 315 during the time-saving game state. This remaining reserve pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the battle sequence (see Figures 227 and 228) of the RUSH sequence as a display sequence based on the remaining reserve pattern command. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 5 can manage the number of remaining reserves based on the remaining reserve pattern command, and as a result, it becomes possible to display the number of remaining reserves as the second special reserve image, which is a display sequence, on the symbol display unit 341.

<Steps S4010 and S4011>
In step S4010, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reserved pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 1 or remaining reserved pattern 5.

If the remaining reserved pattern corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 1 or remaining reserved pattern 5 (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set 120 seconds, which is special symbol variation pattern "08", as the display time for the second special symbol variation for the second special symbol game, which is a remaining reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state (step S4011), and terminates the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the remaining reserved pattern does not correspond to either remaining reserved pattern 1 or remaining reserved pattern 5 (step S4010: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4012.

<Step S4012>
If the remaining reserved pattern does not correspond to either remaining reserved pattern 1 or remaining reserved pattern 5 (step S4010: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reserved pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 2 or remaining reserved pattern 6 (step S4012).

If the remaining pending pattern matches either remaining pending pattern 2 or remaining pending pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4013. If the remaining pending pattern does not match either remaining pending pattern 2 or remaining pending pattern 6 (step S4012: No), the process proceeds to step S4016 in Figure 212.

<Step S4013>
If the remaining reserved pattern corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 2 or remaining reserved pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set 60 seconds, which is special feature variation pattern "02", as the display time for the second special feature variation for the second special feature game, which is a remaining reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state (step S4011), and then proceeds to step S4014.

<Steps S4014 and S4015>
In step S4014, the MPU 41 sets the remaining reserve pattern 2,6 flag to ON, indicating that the remaining reserve pattern is either remaining reserve pattern 2 or remaining reserve pattern 6. Then, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process to set the remaining setting counter, which indicates the number of remaining reserves based on the number of game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state, to 1 (step S4015), and ends the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4016>
If the remaining reserved pattern does not correspond to either remaining reserved pattern 2 or remaining reserved pattern 6 (step S4012: No), then, as shown in Figure 212, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reserved pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 3 or remaining reserved pattern 7 (step S4016).

If the remaining pending pattern matches either remaining pending pattern 3 or remaining pending pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4017. If the remaining pending pattern does not match either remaining pending pattern 3 or remaining pending pattern 7 (step S4016: No), the process proceeds to step S4020.

<Step S4017>
If the remaining reserved pattern corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 3 or remaining reserved pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set 40 seconds, which is special feature variation pattern "10", as the display time for the second special feature variation for the second special feature game, which is a remaining reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state (step S4017), and then proceeds to step S4018.

<Steps S4018 and S4019>
In step S4018, the MPU 41 sets the remaining reserve pattern 3,7 flag to ON, indicating that the remaining reserve pattern is either remaining reserve pattern 3 or remaining reserve pattern 7. Then, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process to set the remaining setting counter, which indicates the number of remaining reserves based on the number of game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state, to 2 (step S4019), and ends the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4020>
If the remaining reserved pattern does not correspond to either remaining reserved pattern 3 or remaining reserved pattern 7 (step S4016: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reserved pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 4 or remaining reserved pattern 8 (step S4020).

If the remaining reserved pattern matches either remaining reserved pattern 4 or remaining reserved pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4021. If the remaining reserved pattern does not match either remaining reserved pattern 4 or remaining reserved pattern 8 (step S4020: No), the second special figure variation pattern setting process B is terminated.

<Step S4021>
If the remaining reserved pattern corresponds to either remaining reserved pattern 4 or remaining reserved pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set 30 seconds, which is special feature variation pattern "01", as the display time for the second special feature variation for the second special feature game, which is a remaining reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state (step S4021), and then proceeds to step S4022.

<Steps S4022 and S4023>
In step S4022, the MPU 41 sets the remaining reserve pattern 4,8 flag to ON, indicating that the remaining reserve pattern is either remaining reserve pattern 4 or remaining reserve pattern 8. Then, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process to set the remaining setting counter, which indicates the number of remaining reserves based on the number of game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state, to 3 (step S4023), and ends the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4024>
If the special variation start flag is set to off (step S4006: No), that is, if the second special symbol game to be started is not the second special symbol game that is executed immediately after the second special symbol game that notifies a loss and was started in the a time-saving game state (the second special symbol game based on the remaining reserves due to the entry of game balls into the second prize pocket 315 in the a time-saving game state), then, as shown in Figure 212, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reserve pattern 2,6 flags, which indicate that the remaining reserve pattern is either remaining reserve pattern 2 or remaining reserve pattern 6, are set to on (step S4024).

If the remaining pending pattern 2 and 6 flags are set to ON (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4025. If the remaining pending pattern 2 and 6 flags are set to OFF (step S4024: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4029.

<Steps S4025-S4028>
If the remaining reserve pattern 2 and 6 flags are set to ON (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set 60 seconds, which is the special feature variation pattern "02", as the display time for the second special feature game, which is a remaining reserve based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state (step S4025). Then, the MPU 41 performs a subtraction process to subtract 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reserves based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state (step S4026), and determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4027).

If the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4027: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining hold pattern 2 and 6 flags to OFF (step S4028) and terminates the second special figure variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4027: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special figure variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4029>
If the remaining hold pattern 2 and 6 flags are set to off (step S4024: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining hold pattern 3 and 7 flags, which indicate that the remaining hold pattern is either remaining hold pattern 3 or remaining hold pattern 7, are set to on (step S4029).

If the remaining pending pattern 3 and 7 flags are set to ON (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4030. If the remaining pending pattern 3 and 7 flags are set to OFF (step S4029: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4034.

<Steps S4030-S4033>
If the remaining reserve pattern 3 and 7 flags are set to ON (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set 40 seconds, which is the special feature variation pattern "10", as the display time for the second special feature game, which is a remaining reserve based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state (step S4030). Then, the MPU 41 performs a subtraction process to subtract 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reserves based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state (step S4031), and determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4032).

If the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4032: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining hold pattern 3 and 7 flags to OFF (step S4033) and terminates the second special figure variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4032: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special figure variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4034>
If the remaining hold pattern 3 and 7 flags are set to off (step S4029: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining hold pattern 4 and 8 flags, which indicate that the remaining hold pattern is either remaining hold pattern 4 or remaining hold pattern 8, are set to on (step S4034).

If the remaining hold pattern 4 and 8 flags are set to ON (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4035. If the remaining hold pattern 4 and 8 flags are set to OFF (step S4034: No), the second special figure variation pattern setting process B is terminated.

<Steps S4035-S4038>
If the remaining reserve pattern 4 and 8 flags are set to ON (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set 30 seconds, which is the special feature variation pattern "01", as the display time for the second special feature game, which is a remaining reserve based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state (step S4035). Then, the MPU 41 performs a subtraction process to subtract 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reserves based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state (step S4036), and determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4037).

If the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4037: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining hold pattern 4 and 8 flags to OFF (step S4037) and terminates the second special figure variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4037: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special figure variation pattern setting process B.

In this embodiment, the jackpot lottery is performed according to the game state at the start of the special symbol variation; however, the jackpot lottery may also be performed according to the game state when the game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315.

[Small win game control processing]
Here, Figures 214 to 216 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the minor prize game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-1 of the main process in Figure 203. In the minor prize game control process of this embodiment, in the minor prize game, which is executed based on the result of the big prize lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, a process is executed to control the operation of the feather mechanism 83.

<Step S4101>
As shown in Figure 214, in the mini-bonus game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the first or second special symbol has stopped being displayed, is set to ON (step S4101). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing has become such that the mini-bonus game can be started when the first or second special symbol is stopped being displayed. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON when the first or second special symbol is stopped being displayed in step S3709 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 207.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, if it is the right time to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, if it is not the right time to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4106.

<Step S4102>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game is a minor win (step S4102). Whether the result of the big win lottery is a minor win is determined based on the result of the big win lottery stored in the RAM 413 when a big win lottery is performed in step S3808 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 210.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game is a minor win (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4103. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win (step S4102: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 terminates the minor win game control process.

<Steps S4103 to S4105>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a minor win (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the minor win game start flag to ON, indicating that the minor win game is about to begin (step S4103). The MPU 41 then sets the opening flag to ON, indicating that the opening of the minor win game is being executed (step S4104), and as a numerical storage process, it sets an opening time counter that indicates the remaining time for the opening (step S4105), and then terminates the minor win game control process.

<Step S4106>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to off (step S4101: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag, which indicates that the opening of the minor win game is being executed, is set to on.

If the opening flag is set to ON (step S4106: Yes), i.e., the opening for the minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4107. On the other hand, if the opening flag is set to OFF (step S4106: No), i.e., the opening for the minor win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4115 in Figure 215.

<Steps S4107-S4109>
If the opening flag is set to ON (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the opening of the minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 performs an update process to subtract 1 from the value of the opening time counter that indicates the remaining time of the opening (step S4107), and determines whether the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4108). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to finish the opening of the minor win game and to start the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing mechanism device 83.

If the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4108: Yes), i.e., in a minor win game, it is the timing to finish the opening and start the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing mechanism 83, then the MPU 41 sets the opening flag, which indicates that the opening is being performed, to off (step S4105), and proceeds to step S4110. On the other hand, if the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4108: No), i.e., in a minor win game, it is not the timing to finish the opening and start the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing mechanism 83, then the MPU 41 terminates the minor win game control process.

<Step S4110>
In a minor win game, when the opening has finished and it is time to start the operation of the movable wing section 832, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S4110), and proceeds to step S4111 (step S4110). In this way, when the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing mechanism 83 is started in a minor win game, the entry port 831 of the wing mechanism 83 is opened, and it becomes possible for game balls to enter the inside of the wing mechanism 83.

<Steps S4111 and S4112>
In step S4111, the MPU 41 sets the movable blade operation flag to ON, indicating that the movable blade 832 is in operation (step S4111). Then, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 41 performs a process to set a movable blade operation time counter that indicates the remaining operating time of the movable blade 832 (step S4112), and proceeds to step S4113.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
In step S4113, the MPU 41 sets the V-prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag to ON, indicating that it is waiting for the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 to operate (step S4113). Then, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process to set a V-prize opening/closing unit operation standby time counter, which indicates the remaining time until the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 starts operating (step S4114), and ends the small prize game control process.

<Step S4115>
If the opening flag is set to off (step S4106: No), that is, if the opening for the minor prize game has not been performed, the MPU 41 determines whether the V-entry slot opening/closing unit operation standby flag, which indicates that the V-entry slot opening/closing unit 835 is waiting to operate, is set to on (step S4115), as shown in Figure 215. If the V-entry slot opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to on (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4116, and if the V-entry slot opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to off (step S4115: No), the MPU proceeds to step S4122.

<Steps S4116 and S4117>
If the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby flag is set to ON (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process by subtracting 1 from the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter, which indicates the remaining time until the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 of the wing mechanism device 83 starts operating (step S4116), and determines whether the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4117). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 and open the V-prize opening 833.

If the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 of the wing mechanism 83 and open the V-prize opening 833, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4118. On the other hand, if the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation standby time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4117: No), that is, if it is not time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 (open the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4130 in Figure 216.

<Steps S4118-S4121>
If the value of the V-prize opening/closing unit operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the operation of the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 and open the V-prize opening 833, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 (step S4118) and sets the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag to ON, indicating that the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 is operating (step S4119).

Then, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 41 performs a process to set a V-prize opening/closing unit operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 (step S4120), sets the V-prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag to off (step S4121), and proceeds to step S4130 in Figure 216.

<Step S4122>
If the V-prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to off (step S4115: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag, which indicates that the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 is in operation, is set to on (step S4122). If the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag is set to on (step S4122: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2023, and if the V-prize opening/closing unit operation flag is set to off (step S4122: No), the MPU proceeds to step S4130 in Figure 216.

<Step S4123>
If the V-entry slot opening/closing operation flag is set to ON (step S4122: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is set to ON (step S4123). The V-entry flag is set to ON in step S4125 when a game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83.

If the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is set to ON (step S4123: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4126. If the V-entry flag is set to OFF (step S4123: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4124.

<Steps S4124 and S4125>
If the V-winning flag is set to off (step S4123: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S4124). Whether or not a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 is determined, for example, by whether or not the entry sensor (not shown) detects that a game ball 99 has entered the V-winning opening 833 during the prize ball command setting process in step S1403 of the main process in Figure 203.

If a game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S4124: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-entry flag to ON (step S4125) and proceeds to step S4126. On the other hand, if no game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S4124: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4126.

<Steps S4126 and S4127>
In step S4126, the MPU 41 performs an update process by subtracting 1 from the V-entry opening opening operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operating time of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83. Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the V-entry opening opening/closing operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4127). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-entry opening 833).

If the value of the V-prize opening/closing time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing part 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4128. On the other hand, if the value of the V-prize opening/closing time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4127: No), that is, if it is not time to return the V-prize opening/closing part 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4130 in Figure 216.

<Steps S4128 and S4129>
If the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 returns the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 to its original position (step S4128), sets the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation flag, which indicates that the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 is in operation, to off (step S4129), and proceeds to step S4130 in Figure 216.

<Step S4130>
As shown in Figure 216, in step S4130, the MPU 41 determines whether the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is operating, is set to ON. If the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S4130: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4131, and if the movable wing operation flag is set to OFF (step S4130: No), the mini-win game control process is terminated.

<Steps S4131 and S4132>
If the movable blade operation flag is set to ON (step S4130: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process by subtracting 1 from the value of the movable blade operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the movable blade 832 (step S4131). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4132). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the movable blade 832 to its original position and close the entry opening 831 to end the mini-win game.

If the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the movable vane 832 and close the entry opening 831 to end the mini-win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4133. On the other hand, if the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4132: No), that is, if it is not time to return the movable vane 832 and close the entry opening 831 to end the mini-win game, the MPU 41 terminates the mini-win game control process.

<Steps S4133 to S4135>
If the value of the movable blade operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the mini-game by returning the movable blade 832 to its original position (step S4133). The MPU 41 then sets the movable blade operation flag, which indicates that the movable blade 832 is operating, to off (step S4134), and sets the mini-game termination flag, which indicates that the mini-game has ended, to on (step S4135), thereby terminating the mini-game control process.

[Transition process for game state]
Here, Figures 217 to 220 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of the main process in Figure 203. In the game state transition process of this embodiment, processes for transitioning between various game states are executed. The game state transition process will be described below with reference to Figures 217 to 220.

<Step S4201>
As shown in Figure 217, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S4201). The normal game state flag is set to ON in steps S4216, S4223, or S4226 in Figure 218 when the game state transitions to the normal game state, while it is set to OFF in steps S4207, S4213, steps S4238, S4248 in Figure 219, or step S4263 in Figure 220 when the game state transitions from the normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), i.e., the game state is the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4202. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), i.e., the game state is anything other than the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4214 in Figure 218.

<Step S4202>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4202). The b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3716 of the special feature game control process in Figure 208 when a special feature game in which the jackpot lottery result is a loss is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) after the jackpot game has ended.

If the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4203. If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Steps S4203 and S4204>
If the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to ON to indicate that the game state is the b-time-saving game state (step S4203), and sets the b-time-saving game state transition command (step S4204).

The b-time-saving game state transition command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the b-time-saving game state, and further includes information regarding the maximum number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the b-time-saving game state. This b-time-saving game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a display effect specific to when the game state is the b-time-saving game state (background effect, right-hand play display, display of remaining b-time-saving game plays, chance notification, display of the number of reserved second special symbol games, etc.) (see Figure 225(B)) based on the b-time-saving game state transition command, and further enables the management of the remaining number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the b-time-saving game state through update processing.

In this embodiment, information regarding the maximum number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the b time-saving game state is included in the b time-saving game state transition command and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. However, this information may also be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 as a command different from the b time-saving game state transition command.

<Steps S4205-S4207>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set a b-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played in the b-time-saving game state. The maximum number of time-saving games that can be played in the b-time-saving game state is set to, for example, 500 times (see Figure 195(E)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state transition flag and the normal game state flag to off (steps S4206 and S4207), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4208>
If the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state, is set to off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the c-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the c-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4208). The c-time-saving game state transition flag is set to on in step S3718 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 208 when the special symbol game ends in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols.

If the MPU 41 has set the c-time-saving game state transition flag (which transitions the game state from normal game state to c-time-saving game state) to ON (step S4208: Yes), it proceeds to step S4209. If the c-time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4202: No), it terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4209 and S4210>
If the c-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the c-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is in the c-time-saving game state, to ON (step S4209), and sets the c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4210).

The c-time-saving game state transition command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the c-time-saving game state, and further includes information regarding the maximum number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the c-time-saving game state. This c-time-saving game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a display effect specific to when the game state is the c-time-saving game state (background effect, left-hand play display, display of remaining c-time-saving game plays, chance notification, display of first special symbol game hold) (see Figure 225(C)) based on the c-time-saving game state transition command, and further enables the management of the remaining number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the c-time-saving game state through update processing.

In this embodiment, information regarding the maximum number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state (c) is included in the time-saving game state transition command and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. However, this information may also be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 as a command different from the time-saving game state transition command.

<Steps S4211-S4213>
In step S4211, the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to set the remaining number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state c into the time-saving game counter. The maximum number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state c is set to 10 times (time-saving symbol stop miss A), 20 times (time-saving symbol stop miss B), 30 times (time-saving symbol stop miss C), or 40 times (time-saving symbol stop miss D), depending on the type of time-saving symbol stop miss (see Figure 198(D)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state transition flag and the normal game state flag to off (steps S4212 and S4213), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4214>
If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, is set to off (step S4201: No), that is, if the game state is other than the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4214), as shown in Figure 218.

If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4214: Yes), i.e., the game state is the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4215. On the other hand, if the a-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4214: No), i.e., the game state is neither the normal game state nor the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4220.

<Step S4215>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4214: Yes), that is, if the game state is the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON in step S3623 of the normal game state control process in Figure 206 when a normal game that started in the a-time-saving game state is terminated.

If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state (a) to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4216. If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4215: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S4216 and S4217>
If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that the game state is the normal game state (step S4216), and sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4217).

The command to transition to the normal game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute effects specific to the normal game state (such as background effects and display effects like the first special symbol game hold display (first special symbol hold image)) (see Figure 225(A)) based on the command to transition to the normal game state.

<Steps S4218 and S4219>
In step S4218, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to off, and further, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag to off (step S4219), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4220>
If the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a-time-saving game state, is set to off (step S4214: No), that is, if the game state is other than the normal game state or a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is b-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4220).

If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4220: Yes), i.e., the game state is the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4221. On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4220: No), i.e., the game state is neither the normal game state, the a-time-saving game state, nor the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4226.

<Step S4221>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4220: Yes), that is, if the game state is the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4221). The normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON in step S3722 of the special game control process in Figure 208 when the special game of the b-time-saving game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times (see Figure 195(E))).

If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4222. If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4221: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S4222 and S4223>
If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that the game state is the normal game state (step S4222), and sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4223).

The command to transition to the normal game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute effects specific to the normal game state (background effects, display effects such as the hold indicator for the first special symbol game) (see Figure 225(A)) based on the command to transition to the normal game state.

<Steps S4224 and S4225>
In step S4224, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to off, and further, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to off (step S4225), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4226>
If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the b-time-saving game state, is set to off (step S4220: No), that is, if the game state is anything other than the normal game state, a-time-saving game state, and b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the c-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4226).

If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4226: Yes), i.e., the game state is the c-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4227. On the other hand, if the c-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4226: No), i.e., the game state is neither the normal game state, a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state, nor c-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4232 in Figure 219.

<Step S4227>
If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4226: Yes), that is, if the game state is the c-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the c-time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON in step S3726 of the special game control process in Figure 208 when the special game of the c-time-saving game is executed a predetermined number of times (10, 20, 30, or 40 times (see Figure 198 (D))) according to the type of time-saving miss stop miss.

If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4228. If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4227: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S4228 and S4229>
If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that the game state is the normal game state (step S4228), and sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4229).

The command to transition to the normal game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute effects specific to the normal game state (background effects, display effects such as the hold indicator for the first special symbol game) (see Figure 225(A)) based on the command to transition to the normal game state.

<Steps S4230 and S4231>
In step S4230, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to off, and further sets the c-time-saving game state flag to off (step S4231), ending the transition process for the game state.

<Step S4232>
If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4226: No), that is, if the game state is not the normal game state, a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state, or c-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game state flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 219 (step S4232). The jackpot game state flag indicates that the game state is the jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, and is set to on in step S4234 when a jackpot game is started.

If the MPU 41 has the jackpot game state flag set to ON (step S4232: Yes), indicating that the game state is a jackpot game state where a jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4245. Conversely, if the jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S4232: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4233.

<Steps S4233 and S4234>
If the jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S4232: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game will be started, is set to on (step S4233). The jackpot game start flag is set to on in step S2205 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 29 when a jackpot game is to be started.

If the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is about to begin, is set to ON (step S4233: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed, to ON (step S4234), and proceeds to step S4235. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4233: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4253 in Figure 220.

<Steps S4235 and S4236>
In step S4235, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is a time-saving jackpot in which the game state will transition to the a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. If the jackpot game to be started is a time-saving jackpot in which the game state will transition to the a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (step S4235: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time-saving game state transition flag to ON, which will transition the game state to the a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (step S4236), and proceeds to step S4237. If the jackpot game to be started is not a time-saving jackpot (step S4235: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4237.

<Steps S4237 and S4238>
In step S4237, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game is started based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the normal game state being a jackpot.

If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4237: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is started based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S4238) and proceeds to step S4244. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4237: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4239.

<Steps S4239-S4241>
In step S4239, the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game is started based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the b-time-saving game state being a jackpot.

If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4239: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is started based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4240). Then, as an update process, the MPU 41 executes a process to clear the b-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed when the game state is the b-time-saving game state (step S4241), and proceeds to step S4244.

On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4239: No), that is, if the jackpot game to be started is not based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4242.

<Steps S4242 and S4243>
In step S4242, the MPU 41 sets the c-time-saving game state flag to off, and further, as an update process, the MPU 41 clears the c-time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played when the game state is the c-time-saving game state (step S4243), and then proceeds to step S4244.

<Step S4244>
If the MPU 41 performs various processes such as setting a flag related to the game state before the start of a jackpot game to off (steps S4234 to S4243), it sets the jackpot game start flag to off (step S4244) and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4245-S4249>
If the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, is set to ON (step S4232: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is ending, is ON or OFF (step S4245). The jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S2251 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 29 when the jackpot game is ending.

If the jackpot game termination flag is on (step S4245: Yes), i.e., the jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4246. On the other hand, if the jackpot game termination flag is off (step S4245: No), i.e., the jackpot game is not to be terminated, the MPU 41 terminates the transition process for the game state.

<Steps S4246-S4252>
If the jackpot game termination flag is on (step S4245: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to the a-time-saving game state based on the termination of the jackpot game, is set to on (step S4246).

If the MPU 41 has set the a-time-saving game state transition flag (step S4246: Yes) to ON, which transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to the a-time-saving game state based on the end of a jackpot game, then the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag (step S4247) to ON, indicating that the game state is the a-time-saving game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state transition command (step S4248) to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the a-time-saving game state, and proceeds to step S4251.

The command to transition to the a-time-saving game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to initiate a special effect (such as background effects, RUSH display, right-hand play display, display of remaining a-time-saving game rounds, and display of the number of reserved second special symbol games) (see Figure 225(D)) based on the a-time-saving game state transition command.

In this embodiment, since the number of time-saving game rounds (the number of times the second prize entry point 315 opens) when the game state is in the a-time-saving game state is set to 1, the a-time-saving game state transition command does not include information indicating the maximum number of time-saving game rounds that can be performed when the game state is in the a-time-saving game state. Of course, the a-time-saving game state transition command may include information indicating the maximum number of time-saving game rounds that can be performed when the game state is in the a-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the time-saving game state transition flag is set to off (step S4246: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is the normal game state (step S4249). Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4250), and proceeds to step S4251.

The command to transition to the normal game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute effects specific to the normal game state (background effects, display effects such as the hold indicator for the first special symbol game) (see Figure 225(A)) based on the command to transition to the normal game state.

<Steps S4251 to S4254>
In step S4251, the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a jackpot game state, is set to off (step S4251), and the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game has ended, is also set to off (step S4252). Furthermore, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 41 performs a process to set the ceiling count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games required before the game state transitions to the b time-saving game state, to a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) (step S4253), and sets the ceiling count counter flag, which indicates that the ceiling count counter has been set, to on (step S4254), and then terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4255>
If the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is about to begin, is set to off (step S4233: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the minor jackpot game state flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 220 (step S4255). The minor jackpot game state flag indicates that the game state is the minor jackpot game state in which a minor jackpot game is being played, and is set to on in step S4257 when a minor jackpot game is about to begin.

If the MPU 41 has the "minor win game state" flag set to "on" (step S4255: Yes), indicating that the game state is a minor win game state where a minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4259. Conversely, if the "minor win game state" flag is set to "off" (step S4255: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4256.

<Steps S4256-S4258>
If the minor win game status flag is set to off (step S4255: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the minor win game start flag, which indicates that a minor win game will be started, is set to on (step S4256). The minor win game start flag is set to on in step S4103 of the minor win game control process in Figure 214 when a minor win game is to be started.

If the mini-win game start flag, which indicates that a mini-win game is about to begin, is set to ON (step S4256: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the mini-win game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the mini-win game state in which a mini-win game is being executed, to ON (step S4257), and sets the mini-win game start flag, which indicates that a mini-win game is about to begin, to OFF (step S4258), and terminates the game state transition process. On the other hand, if the mini-win game start flag is set to OFF (step S4256: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4259>
If the mini-win game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a mini-win game state in which a mini-win game is executed, is set to ON (step S4255: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the mini-win game end flag, which indicates that the mini-win game is ending, is ON or OFF (step S4259). The mini-win game end flag is set to ON in step S4132 of the mini-win game control process in Figure 216 when the mini-win game is ending.

If the mini-win game termination flag is on (step S4259: Yes), i.e., the mini-win game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4260. On the other hand, if the mini-win game termination flag is off (step S4259: No), i.e., the mini-win game is not to be terminated, the MPU 41 terminates the transition process for the game state.

<Steps S4260 and S4261>
If the minor win game termination flag is on (step S4259: Yes), that is, if the minor win game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 sets the minor win game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the minor win game state in which the minor win game is being executed, to off (step S4260), and sets the minor win game termination flag, which indicates that the minor win game is to be terminated, to off (step S4261), and proceeds to step S4262.

<Step S4262>
In step S4262, the MPU 41 determines whether the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is set to ON. The V-entry flag is set to ON in step S4125 of the small win game control process in Figure 215 when a game ball enters the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83.

If the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4263. Conversely, if the V-entry flag is set to OFF (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4266.

<Steps S4263 and S4264>
If the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game will begin, to ON (step S4263), and also sets the a-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state to a-time-saving game state after the jackpot game has ended (step S4264). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83, to OFF (step S4265), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4266 and S4267>
If the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry opening 833 of the feather mechanism device 83, is set to off (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, to on (step S4266). Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4267), and terminates the game state transition process.

The command to transition to the normal game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute effects specific to the normal game state (background effects, display effects such as the hold indicator for the first special symbol game) (see Figure 225(A)) based on the command to transition to the normal game state.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, referring to Figures 221 to 223, the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, a part of the command determination processing among the processing of the voice lamp control device 5 differs from the first embodiment described above.

[Command determination process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to that command is executed. However, it differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above in that a performance display process is executed to perform a RUSH performance as a specific performance for the second special feature game which is executed based on the game balls that enter the second prize pocket 315 in the time-saving game state. Here, Figures 221 to 223 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment described above, as shown in Figure 42.

<Step S4501>
As shown in Figure 221, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S4501). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4501: Yes), it proceeds to step S4502; if it has not received a command (step S4501: No), it terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4502>
If a command is received (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal game state transition command (step S4502). A normal game state transition command indicates a transition to the normal game state and is set in steps S4217, S4223, S4229 in Figure 218 or step S4250 in Figure 219 during the game state transition process when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state.

If the received command is a command to transition to the normal game state (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4503. If the received command is not a command to transition to the normal game state (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4505.

<Steps S4503 and S4504>
If the received command is a command to transition to the normal game state (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the normal game state (step S4503). The normal game state flag is referenced in step S4618 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 224 below, when determining whether or not to set a performance corresponding to the normal game state. Then, the MPU 51 sets the game state flag corresponding to the game state before transitioning to the normal game state to OFF (step S4504), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4505>
If the received command is not a command to transition to the normal game state (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a command to transition to the b time-saving game state (step S4505). The b time-saving game state transition command indicates that the game will transition to the b time-saving game state, and is set in step S4204 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 217 when the game transitions from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state.

If the received command is a b-time-saving game state transition command (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4506. If the received command is not a b-time-saving game state transition command (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4509.

<Steps S4506-S4508>
If the received command is a command to transition to the b-time-saving game state (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the b-time-saving game state (step S4506). The b-time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4619 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 224 below, when determining whether or not to set a performance corresponding to the b-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 51 executes a process to set the maximum number of special feature games that can be played in the b-time-saving game state as the value of the b-time-saving game counter in the storage area for the b-time-saving game counter set in the RAM 512 (step S4507). The value of the b-time-saving game counter is decremented (updated) by 1 in the time-saving game counter update process of step S4539 of the command determination process when a special feature is started in the b-time-saving game state, that is, when a variation pattern command is received in the b-time-saving game state. In other words, the value of the b-time-saving game counter set in the storage area for the b-time-saving game counter in the RAM 512 indicates the maximum remaining number of special feature games that can be played in the b-time-saving game state. Then, by referring to the value of the b-time-saving game counter, the MPU 51 can determine the maximum remaining number of special feature games that can be played in the b-time-saving game state. As a result, the MPU 51 can display the remaining maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in the b-time-saving game state as a display effect on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 225(B)).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag to off for the game state before transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (step S4508), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4509>
If the received command is not a b-time-saving game state transition command (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4509). A c-time-saving game state transition command that satisfies specific conditions indicates a transition to a specific game state, the c-time-saving game state, and is set in step S4210 of the game state transition process in Figure 217 when transitioning from the normal game state to the c-time-saving game state.

If the received command is a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4510. If the received command is not a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4509: No), the process proceeds to step S4513 in Figure 222.

<Steps S4510-S4512>
If the received command is a command to transition to the c-time-saving game state (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the c-time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the c-time-saving game state (step S4510). The c-time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4621 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 224 below, when determining whether or not to set a performance corresponding to the specific game state, the c-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, as a numerical storage process, the MPU 51 executes a process to set the maximum number of special feature games that can be played in the c-time-saving game state as the value of the c-time-saving game counter in the storage area for the c-time-saving game counter set in the RAM 512 (step S4511). The value of the c-time-saving game counter is decremented (updated) by 1 in the time-saving game counter update process of step S4539 of the command determination process when a special feature is started in the c-time-saving game state, that is, when a variation pattern command is received in the c-time-saving game state. In other words, the value of the c-time-saving game counter set in the storage area for the c-time-saving game counter in the RAM 512 indicates the maximum remaining number of special feature games that can be played in the c-time-saving game state as specific numerical information. Then, by referring to the value of the c-time-saving game counter as second numerical information, the MPU 51 can determine the maximum remaining number of special feature games that can be played in the c-time-saving game state. As a result, the MPU 51 can display the remaining maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state as a specific corresponding display on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 225(B)).

In this embodiment, the player transitions to the time-saving game state (c) when the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols. The result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols only for the jackpot lottery (win/loss determination) announced by the second special symbol game that starts in the normal game state (see Figure 198(C)). In the normal game state, the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is low and the operation time is short, so it is not possible to expect game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (a), which is transitioned to after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, multiple game balls can enter the second prize slot 315 with a single operation of the electric mechanism 315b, and multiple second special symbol games can be executed based on the number of game balls that enter the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state (a). Furthermore, if multiple game balls enter the second prize slot 315 during the time-saving game state (a), the first second special symbol game will start in the time-saving game state (a), and the second special symbol game triggered by the remaining balls entering the second prize slot 315 (the second special symbol game using remaining reserved balls) will start in the normal game state. In other words, the game transitions to the time-saving game state (c) when the results of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game using remaining reserved balls include a miss in the time-saving symbol stop.

Here, if the game transitions to the a-time-saving game state after a jackpot game, the RUSH effect is displayed as a special effect for the second special symbol game, which is executed based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state. In the RUSH effect, if multiple game balls enter the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, the one-shot notification effect (see Figure 226) is displayed as a display effect for the second special symbol game started in the a-time-saving game state, and the battle effect (see Figures 227 and 228) is displayed as a display effect for the second special symbol game (second special symbol game for remaining reserves) that is started after transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state. As mentioned above, the time-saving symbol stop miss is only possible for the jackpot lottery for remaining reserves that is started in the normal game state. Therefore, while a battle sequence is being executed, the game may transition from the normal game state to the c-time-saving game state. However, even if the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state while a battle sequence is being executed, the battle sequence, which is a display sequence, is not interrupted, and the battle sequence is executed for the second special symbol game corresponding to a predetermined number of remaining reserved symbols. As a result, even if the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state while a battle sequence is being executed, the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in the c-time-saving game state is not displayed as a specific corresponding display in the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, by prioritizing the execution of the battle sequence, the c-time-saving game state sequence, which is unique to the c-time-saving game state, is not executed as a display sequence. On the other hand, when the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state, the c-time-saving game counter is set. In the time-saving game counter update process in step S4539 of the command judgment process described later, the remaining maximum number of special symbol games playable in the c-time-saving game state is updated. This allows the remaining maximum number of special symbol games playable in the c-time-saving game state to be displayed as a specific corresponding display on the symbol display unit 341 after the battle sequence ends, based on the value of the c-time-saving game counter as specific numerical information. Furthermore, the c-time-saving game state sequence can be initiated.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S4512), which is the game state before transitioning to the time-saving game state, and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4513>
If the received command is not a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4509: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol shift command (step S4513). The first special symbol shift command indicates that the first special symbol win/loss information of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA has shifted, and is set in step S3805 of the special symbol data setting process in Figure 209 when the first special symbol win/loss information of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA has shifted.

If the received command is a first special-purpose shift command (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4514. If the received command is not a first special-purpose shift command (step S4513: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4516.

<Steps S4514 and S4515>
If the received command is a first special feature shift command (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special feature data update process (step S4514), executes the first special feature data image display process as a performance display process (step S4515), and then terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4516>
If the received command is not a first special figure shift command (step S4513: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special figure shift command (step S4516). The second special figure shift command indicates that the second special figure validity information of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second special figure holding storage area REB has shifted, and is set in step S3809 of the special figure data setting process in Figure 209 when the second special figure validity information of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second special figure holding storage area REB has shifted.

If the received command is a second special-purpose shift command (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4517. If the received command is not a second special-purpose shift command (step S4516: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4519.

<Steps S4517 and S4518>
If the received command is a second special feature shift command (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special feature data update process (step S4517), executes the second special feature data image display process as a performance display process (step S4518), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 contains a special feature hold storage area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 (see Figure 8). This special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes the first special feature hold storage area corresponding area, the second special feature hold storage area corresponding area, and the special feature execution area corresponding area, respectively, for the first special feature hold storage area REA, the second special feature hold storage area REB, and the special feature execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the audio lamp control device 5 stores special feature win/loss information data (special feature data) equivalent to that in the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) of the main control device 4.

Then, in the first special figure data update process executed in step S4514, the same process as steps S3802 to S3804 in the special figure data setting process shown in Figure 209, which is executed by the main control device 4, is performed as the update process. Specifically, in this first special figure data setting process, the number of first special figures held N stored in the first special figure held number storage area corresponding to the first special figure held storage area is deducted by 1, the first special figure validity information (first special figure data) is moved from the first held area corresponding to the first special figure held storage area corresponding to the first special figure held storage area corresponding to the special figure execution area, and the first special figure validity information (first special figure data) in the second held area REA2 to the fourth held area corresponding to the first special figure held storage area corresponding to the first special figure held storage area is shifted one by one.

Furthermore, in the second special drawing data update process executed in step S4517, the same process as in steps S3806 to S3808 of the special drawing data setting process shown in Figure 209, which is executed by the main control device 4, is performed. Specifically, in this second special drawing data setting process, as a subtraction process, the number of second special drawing reserved M stored in the second special drawing reserved number storage area corresponding to the second special drawing reserved storage area is subtracted by 1. As an update process, the second special drawing validity information (second special drawing data) is moved from the first reserved area corresponding to the second special drawing reserved storage area corresponding to the special drawing execution area, and the second special drawing validity information (second special drawing data) in the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area corresponding to the second special drawing reserved storage area corresponding to the second special drawing reserved storage area is shifted one by one.

On the other hand, in the first special feature data image display processing performed in step S4515, the image related to the first special feature data (first special feature data image) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figures 225(A) and 225(C)) is shifted based on the first special feature data stored in the special feature hold storage area corresponding to the RAM 512 (not shown) that was shifted (updated) in step S4514.

Here, Figure 225 shows examples of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in various game states. Specifically, Figure 225(A) is an example of the screen in a normal game state excluding the RUSH performance, Figure 225(B) is an example of the screen in the b time-saving game state, Figure 225(C) is an example of the screen in the c time-saving game state, and Figure 225(D) is an example of the screen during the RUSH performance. The symbol display unit 341 is equipped with special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 corresponding to various game states. These special feature data image display units 75, 76, and 77 correspond to the special feature execution area (not shown), the first special feature hold storage area, and the second special feature hold storage area, respectively, which are set in the RAM 512. These units include the special feature variation image display area 75, the first special feature hold image display area 76, and the second special feature hold image display area 77.

As shown in Figures 225(A) and 225(C), during normal gameplay and the time-saving gameplay state (excluding RUSH mode), the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 are configured as the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the first special symbol hold image display area 76, while the second special symbol hold image display area 77 is not configured. That is, during normal gameplay and the time-saving gameplay state (excluding RUSH mode), the variation image is displayed in the special symbol variation image display area 75 based on the first special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area (not shown) of the special symbol hold storage area (not shown). The first special symbol hold image display area 76 displays the first special symbol hold image as a corresponding display based on the first special symbol data stored in the special symbol hold storage area (not shown). The second special symbol hold image as a corresponding display based on the second special symbol data stored in the special symbol hold storage area (not shown) is not displayed.

Here, in normal gameplay and the time-saving gameplay state, as described above, players are encouraged to shoot the game balls to the left side of the game board 31, a technique known as left-handed shooting, and to enter the first prize entry point 314 to receive the first special symbol jackpot lottery. Therefore, in normal gameplay and the time-saving gameplay state (excluding during the RUSH performance), the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 are configured with the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the first special symbol hold image display area 76 (displaying the first special symbol hold image as a corresponding display), while the second special symbol hold image display area 77 is not configured (the second special symbol hold image as a corresponding display is not displayed). This allows the player to be encouraged to shoot left-handed.

Then, in the first special symbol data image display processing of step S4514, which is executed in normal gameplay states and c-time-saving gameplay states (excluding RUSH performances), the variable image and the first special symbol hold image as a corresponding display are displayed based on the content shifted (updated) in the processing of step S4514 as an update means, and based on the first special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) and the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding area. As a result, the number of first special symbol hold images as corresponding displays displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is one less than at the end of the previous first special symbol game (see Figures 52(A1) and 52(B1)).

Furthermore, during normal gameplay and the c-time-saving gameplay state (excluding RUSH performance), the first special symbol hold image is displayed as the corresponding display for the fluctuation image, and the second special symbol hold image is not displayed as the corresponding display. However, the second special symbol hold image may be displayed as the corresponding display during normal gameplay or the c-time-saving gameplay state (excluding RUSH performance). That is, both the first and second special symbol hold images may be displayed as the corresponding display during normal gameplay and the c-time-saving gameplay state (excluding RUSH performance).

As shown in Figures 225(B) and 225(D), during the b-time-saving game state and RUSH performance, the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 are set as the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the second special symbol hold image display area 77, while the first special symbol hold image display area 76 is not set. That is, during the b-time-saving game state and RUSH performance, the variation image is displayed in the special symbol variation image display area 75 based on the second special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area (not shown), the second special symbol hold image is displayed as a corresponding display in the second special symbol hold image display area 77 based on the second special symbol data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area (not shown), and the first special symbol hold image is not displayed as a corresponding display based on the first special symbol data stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area (not shown).

Here, during the b-time-saving game state and the RUSH performance, as described above, it is encouraged to shoot the game balls to the right side of the game board 31, so-called right-handed shooting, and to enter the second prize entry point 315 to receive the second special symbol jackpot lottery. Therefore, during the b-time-saving game state and the RUSH performance, the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 are set to display the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the second special symbol hold image display area 77 (displaying the second special symbol hold image as the corresponding display), while the first special symbol hold image display area 76 is not set (displaying the first special symbol hold image as the corresponding display), thereby suggesting to the player that right-handed shooting is encouraged.

However, during the RUSH sequence, shooting the game balls to the right side of the game board 31 is advantageous to the player and therefore encouraged. As long as the player shoots to the right appropriately (intentionally), unless, for example, a malfunction occurs in launching the game balls, the game balls will not enter the first prize slot 314. However, during the RUSH sequence, in order to be in high support mode, the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol M tends to be the maximum number, and when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol M is the maximum number, there is no need to enter the game balls into the second prize slot 315. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol M is the maximum number, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is not the maximum number, the player may intentionally shoot to the left to make the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol the maximum number, so that the first special symbol game can be played immediately after the RUSH performance ends. In addition, even if the player tries to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game board 31, a malfunction in the game ball launch may cause the game ball to be launched to the left side of the game board 31 against the player's will. Thus, even during the RUSH performance, when shooting to the right is encouraged, the game ball may be launched to the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first prize pocket 314 even during the RUSH performance. Even if a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 due to an unrecommended gameplay (for example, left-handed play during RUSH mode), the game machine does not invalidate the entry and processes it as a legitimate entry. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 under specific conditions, a first special symbol hold command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5, and information is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. Numerical information related to the first special symbol is stored through numerical storage processing, but the first special symbol hold image is not displayed as a corresponding display during RUSH mode. In other words, during the RUSH sequence, the first special symbol hold image is not displayed as a corresponding indicator. However, when a game ball enters the first prize entry point 314, an update process is executed, and the data of the first special symbol win/loss information (first special symbol data) in the first special symbol hold storage area (not shown) of the special symbol hold storage area corresponds to the special symbol hold storage area corresponds to the special symbol hold storage area.

Then, in the second special symbol data image display processing of step S4518, which is executed during the b-time-saving game state and RUSH performance, the variable image and the second special symbol hold image as a corresponding display are displayed based on the content shifted (updated) in step S4517, and based on the second special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area (not shown) and the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the second special symbol hold storage area. As a result, the number of second special symbol hold images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is one less than at the end of the previous second special symbol game (see Figures 52(A2) and 52(B2)).

Furthermore, during the b-time-saving game state or RUSH performance, the fluctuating image and the second special symbol hold image are displayed as the corresponding display, while the first special symbol hold image is not displayed as the corresponding display. This is because displaying the first special symbol hold image as the corresponding display for the first special symbol game, which does not perform fluctuating displays, would only hinder the player's ability to see the necessary images, as the information obtained from that image is unnecessary. However, the first special symbol hold image may be displayed as the corresponding display during the b-time-saving game state or RUSH performance. That is, both the first and second special symbol hold images may be displayed as the corresponding display during normal game states (excluding RUSH performance) and the c-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, various game state transitions are performed, but the display modes of the first and second special symbol hold images as corresponding displays in the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may differ before and after the transition of the game state. For example, when the game state transitions from the c-time-saving game state to the normal game state, the display state of the first special symbol hold image as a corresponding display is maintained, while the hidden state of the second special symbol hold image as a corresponding display is maintained (see Figure 225(C) → Figure 225(A)). On the other hand, when the game state transitions from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state, the first special symbol hold image as a corresponding display changes from a hidden state to a displayed state, while the second special symbol hold image as a corresponding display changes from a displayed state to a hidden state (Figure 225(B) → Figure 225(A)).

Furthermore, when the game state transitions from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state, even in the normal game state, the RUSH effect is executed as a specific effect for the second special symbol game, which is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state. During this RUSH effect, the display state of the second special symbol hold image as the corresponding display is maintained, and the hidden state of the first special symbol hold image as the corresponding display is maintained (see Figure 225(D)). Of course, even if a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 while the RUSH effect is running, the hidden state of the first special symbol hold image as the corresponding display is maintained. In this case, the number of first special symbol holds N stored in the first special symbol hold count storage area corresponding to the first special symbol hold storage area set in RAM 512 is updated by an update process.

In contrast, if the RUSH performance ends without a jackpot being executed, the first special symbol hold image, which was previously hidden, is displayed in the first special symbol hold storage area (not shown) of the special symbol hold storage area area set in RAM 512 at that time, based on the data of the first special symbol win/loss information (first special symbol data), while the second special symbol hold image, which was previously displayed, is hidden (Figure 225(D) → Figure 225(A)). That is, the display mode of the first and second special symbol hold images as corresponding displays in the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 changes upon the end of the RUSH performance as a specific performance.

<Step S4519>
As explained in Figure 222, if the received command is not a second special symbol shift command (step S4516: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol hold command (step S4519). The first special symbol hold command indicates that the information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 has been updated, and is set in step S3304 or S3306 of the first special symbol hold command setting process in Figure 200 when the information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 is updated as a result of a game ball entering the first prize slot 314.

If the received command is a first special-purpose print hold command (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4520. If the received command is not a first special-purpose print hold command (step S4519: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4522.

<Steps S4520 and S4521>
If the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 performs an update process for the first special feature hold information (step S4520), and as a display process, it performs a display process for the first special feature hold image as a corresponding display (step S4521), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the update process for the first special feature data held in step S4520 is a process of adding (updating) the data for the first special feature validity information (first special feature data) to the first special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area 412b of the main control device 4. Specifically, in the update process for the first special feature data held in storage, the first special feature data corresponding to the first special feature data held in storage information stored in the first special feature data held in storage area REA1 to the fourth special feature data held in storage area REA4 (see Figure 8) of the special feature data held in storage area REA1 to the fourth special feature data held in storage area REA4 (see Figure 8) is stored in the first special feature data held in storage area REA1 to the fourth special feature data held in storage area REA4 (see Figure 8). For example, when the first special feature data is stored in the second special feature data storage area REA2 (see Figure 8) of the first special feature data storage area REA in the special feature data storage area 412b, the first special feature data is stored in the first special feature data storage area corresponding to the second special feature data storage area (not shown), which is set in accordance with the second special feature data storage area REA2. Furthermore, in the update process for the first special feature data storage information, the number of first special feature data stored in the first special feature data storage area corresponding to the special feature data storage area (not shown) is increased by 1, and the increased numerical information is stored through numerical storage processing.

On the other hand, the display process of the first special feature held image as a corresponding display, executed in step S4521, involves adding the first special feature held image as a corresponding display to the first special feature held image display area 76, based on the first special feature data added (updated) in step S4520 to the first special feature held storage area corresponding region (not shown).

<Step S4522>
If the received command is not a first special symbol hold command (step S4519: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol hold command (step S4522). A second special symbol hold command indicates that the information stored in the second special symbol hold storage area REB1 has been updated, and is set in steps S3403, S3406, or S3408 of the second special symbol hold command setting process in Figure 202 when the information stored in the second special symbol hold storage area REA1 is updated as a result of a game ball entering the second prize entry 315.

If the received command is a second special print hold command (step S4522: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4523. If the received command is not a second special print hold command (step S4522: No), the process proceeds to step S4525 in Figure 223.

<Steps S4523 and S4524>
If the received command is a second special feature hold command (step S4522: Yes), the MPU 51 performs an update process for the second special feature hold information (step S4523), and as a display process, it performs a display process for the second special feature hold image as the corresponding display (step S4524), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the update process for the second special feature data held in step S4523 is a process of adding (updating) the data for the second special feature validity information (second special feature data) to the second special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the special feature data held in storage area 412b of the main control device 4. Specifically, in the update process for the second special feature data held in storage, the second special feature data corresponding to the second special feature data held in storage information stored in the first of the first to fourth special feature data held in storage areas (see Figure 8) of the second special feature data held in storage area REB of the special feature data held in storage area 412b of the main control device 4 is stored in the first to fourth special feature data held in storage area corresponding to the first to fourth special feature data held in storage area REB1 to fourth special feature data held in storage area REB4 (see Figure 8). For example, when the second special figure win/loss information is stored in the second special figure hold storage area REB2 (see Figure 8) of the second special figure hold storage area REB in the special figure hold storage area 412b, the second special figure data is stored in the second special figure second hold area corresponding area (not shown) set in accordance with the second special figure hold area REB2. Furthermore, in the update process of the second special figure hold information, 1 is added to the second special figure hold count M stored in the second special figure hold count storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure hold storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the display process of the second special feature image held as a corresponding display, executed in step S4524, involves adding the second special feature image held as a corresponding display to the second special feature image held image display area 77, based on the second special feature data added (updated) in step S4523 to the second special feature image held storage area corresponding region (not shown).

<Step S4525>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 222, if the received command is not a second special symbol hold command (step S4522: No), as shown in Figure 223, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special variation start command (step S4525). The special variation start command indicates that it is the second special symbol game that is first executed after transitioning to the a time-saving game state based on a game ball entering the second prize slot 315 in the a time-saving game state, and is set in step S4003 of the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B in Figure 211 when the first second special symbol game is started in the a time-saving game state.

If the received command is a special variation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4526. If the received command is not a special variation start command (step S4525: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4527.

<Step S4526>
If the received command is a special variation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the RUSH effect start flag to ON (step S4526) to start the RUSH effect, which is a special effect that signals that the second special symbol game is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry 315 in the a-time-saving game state (a state in which the probability of a small win is high and a big win game is likely to be executed), and terminates the command judgment process. The RUSH effect start flag is referenced in step S4601 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Figure 224 described later to determine whether or not to set the RUSH effect, and the RUSH effect is set if the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON.

The RUSH sequence is set for the second special symbol game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, and is set for the first to fifth rounds of the second special symbol game, as described above. This RUSH sequence includes a one-shot notification sequence (see Figure 226) executed for the first round of the second special symbol game after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state, and a battle sequence (see Figures 227 and 228) executed for the second to fifth rounds of the second special symbol game after transitioning to the a-time-saving game state. Furthermore, the RUSH sequence includes a result sequence and a branching sequence as display sequences executed after the battle sequence ends, if all rounds of the second special symbol game, triggered by game balls entering the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, result in a loss (see Figure 229).

Here, Figure 226 shows an example of a one-shot notification sequence that is executed at the beginning of the RUSH sequence. As shown in Figure 226, the one-shot notification sequence is executed as a button press sequence. In this one-shot notification sequence, an image resembling the operation button 20 is first displayed, prompting the player to press the operation button 20 (see Figure 226(A)).

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a minor win, the player's operation of the control button 20 activates the movable mechanism 39 (see Figure 226(B)). After the movable mechanism 39 returns to its original position, the decorative symbols stop and display as matching numbers (see Figure 226(A)), informing the player that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game was a minor win.

On the other hand, if the jackpot draw for the second special feature game is unsuccessful, the movable mechanism 39 will not be activated by the player's operation button 20 (see Figure 226(D)). The player will be notified that the jackpot draw for the second special feature game was unsuccessful when the decorative symbols stop and display as scattered numbers other than matching ones (see Figure 226(E)).

Figures 227 and 228 show examples of battle sequences that may be executed after the RUSH sequence's one-shot notification sequence. In the battle sequence, the outcome of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character indicates whether or not the second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) for executing the second special symbol game at the end of the RUSH sequence's one-shot notification sequence contains any minor wins in the jackpot lottery. Note that the battle sequence will not be executed if there are no second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) for executing the second special symbol game at the end of the RUSH sequence's one-shot notification sequence; it will only be executed if there is one or more such remaining reserves.

As shown in Figure 227(A), in this embodiment, there are three types of battle sequences: Patterns A to D. Patterns A and B are selected when the allied character is defeated by the enemy character, and the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win among the second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) for the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the RUSH sequence's one-shot notification sequence. Patterns C and D are selected when the allied character is defeated by the enemy character, and the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win among the second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) for the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the RUSH sequence's one-shot notification sequence.

In battle animation pattern A, the text image indicating the start of the battle is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 227(B)), the enemy character attacks first (see Figure 227(D)), the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see Figure 228(B2)), and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (see Figure 228(B3)).

In battle animation pattern B, the text image "Battle Start" is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 227(B)), the ally character attacks first (see Figure 227(C)), the enemy character defends against the ally character's attack (see Figure 228(B1)), the enemy character counterattacks (see Figure 227(D)), the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see Figure 228(B2)), and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (see Figure 228(B3)).

In battle animation pattern C, the text image indicating the start of the battle is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 226(B)), the allied character attacks first (see Figure 226(C)), the allied character's attack hits the enemy character (see Figure 228(A1)), and the allied character defeats the enemy character (see Figure 228(A3)).

In battle animation pattern D, the text image "Battle Start" is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 226(B)), the enemy character attacks first (see Figure 227(D)), the ally character defends against the enemy character's attack (see Figure 228(A2)), the ally character counterattacks (see Figure 227(C)), the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (see Figure 228(A1)) → the ally character defeats the enemy character (see Figure 228(A3)).

The battle sequence is executed according to the number of times the second special symbol game is played, corresponding to the type of remaining reserved pattern. Specifically, in remaining reserved patterns 1 and 5, the battle sequence is executed for one second special symbol game; in remaining reserved patterns 2 and 6, the battle sequence is executed for two second special symbol games; in remaining reserved patterns 3 and 7, the battle sequence is executed for three second special symbol games; and in remaining reserved patterns 4 and 8, the battle sequence is executed for one second special symbol game. In other words, in remaining reserved patterns 2 to 4 and 6 to 9 (excluding remaining reserved patterns 1 and 5), the battle sequence is executed for multiple second special symbol games at once. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 while the battle sequence is in progress (when the number of first special symbol reserves N stored in the first special symbol reserve count storage area of the first special symbol reserve storage area set in RAM 512 is increased by an update process), the second special symbol game takes priority. As a result, until a predetermined number of second special symbol games that are the target of the battle sequence are completed, that is, until the number of second special symbol reserves M stored in the second special symbol reserve count storage area of the second special symbol reserve storage area set in RAM 512 is reduced to 0 by a subtraction process due to the execution of the second special symbol game (the number of second special symbol reserve images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 becomes 0), the first special symbol game based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 while the battle sequence is in progress will not be started. In this way, the battle sequence will not be interrupted based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 while the battle sequence is in progress. Furthermore, the first special feature game, based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 during the battle sequence, will begin after the battle sequence has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 225(D), during the RUSH special effect, images such as an image indicating that RUSH is in progress ("Big Win RUSH" text image), an image indicating the number of Big Win RUSH rounds ("RUSH x 3" text image), and an image indicating the total number of balls dispensed during the Big Win RUSH ("3000 balls" text image) are displayed for at least a portion of the duration of the RUSH effect. Some or all of these images may be omitted, and it is also conceivable to display an image indicating the remaining number of special symbol plays available during the Big Win RUSH.

Furthermore, Figure 229(A) shows an example screen during the result sequence, and Figures 229(B) to 229(D) show examples screens during the branching sequence. Figures 229(E) and 229(F) show examples screens after the branching sequence has ended.

The result and branching sequences shown in Figure 229 are executed when all of the second special symbol games, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, result in a loss. Specifically, if there is one second special symbol game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, the result and branching sequences are executed after the one-shot notification sequence (see Figure 226(E)) which indicates a loss. If there are two to five second special symbol games triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, the sequences are executed after the battle sequence (see Figure 228(B3)) which indicates a loss.

As shown in Figure 229(A), the result display shows images related to the results of a series of jackpot games (consecutive jackpot games), including the initial jackpot game which can be triggered by the first jackpot game without going through a minor jackpot game. Specifically, in the result display of this embodiment, along with the text image "Result Announcement," an image showing the number of consecutive jackpots ("RUSH 5 times" text image) and an image showing the total number of balls dispensed in the consecutive jackpot games ("Total Balls Dispensed 2600" text image) are displayed. This allows the player to understand the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls dispensed.

Furthermore, even if the game transitions to the "a" time-saving mode after the first big win without going through a minor win, if all of the second special symbol games executed after the ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the first "a" time-saving mode result in a loss, this will be considered a single big win, not a consecutive big win. However, for the sake of simplicity, a single big win will also be referred to as a consecutive win. In the case of a single big win, the number of consecutive wins will be 1, and the image indicating the number of consecutive big wins will display the text "RUSH 1 time".

Furthermore, while the number of consecutive big wins displayed in the result presentation of this embodiment included the first big win without going through a minor win, it is also possible to exclude the first big win and count the number of consecutive big wins, then display that number.

Furthermore, in the result presentation of this embodiment, an image prompting the player to shoot to the left (an image of a left-pointing arrow and an image of the words "Shoot Left") is displayed. Here, in this embodiment, if all of the second special symbol games, which are executed when a game ball enters the second prize pocket 315 in the a-time-saving game state, result in a miss, and all of the second special symbol games have finished (the RUSH presentation has finished), the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is either the normal game state or the c-time-saving game state. That is, the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is the normal game state if all of the second special symbol games are misses, and the game state is the c-time-saving game state if one of the second special symbol games is a time-saving symbol stop miss. Furthermore, in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state (c), left-handed shooting, where the game balls are launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31, is encouraged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the time-saving game state (a) after the end of a time-saving jackpot game (during the execution of the RUSH performance) or during a jackpot game, right-handed shooting, where the game balls are launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31, is encouraged, as described above. That is, when the end of the RUSH performance is announced, switching from right-handed to left-handed shooting is encouraged. Therefore, by displaying an image prompting left-handed shooting in the result performance, the player can understand that the area of the game board 31 where the game balls are launched has changed.

As shown in Figure 229(B), the branching sequence is executed as a button press sequence. Specifically, in the branching sequence of this embodiment, along with the text image "Choice of Fate" indicating that the branching sequence is being executed, an image resembling the operation button 20 and the text image "Press!!" are displayed to prompt the player to press the operation button 20.

Here, as mentioned above, if all of the second special symbol games, which are executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, result in a loss, and all of the second special symbol games have finished (the RUSH effect has ended), the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is either the c-time-saving game state or the normal game state. In the c-time-saving game state, the distribution of time-saving jackpots when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot is 100% (see Figure 196(C)), whereas in the normal game state, the distribution of time-saving jackpots when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot is 50% (see Figure 196(C)). Therefore, the c-time-saving game state is a more advantageous game state for the player compared to the normal game state.

Then, as shown in Figure 229(C), in the branching sequence, if all of the second special symbol games, which are executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, result in a loss, and all of the second special symbol games have finished (the RUSH sequence has finished), then if the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is the c-time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state, then the text image "Congratulations!" will be displayed. This means that, when all of the second special feature games, which are executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the c-time-saving game state, result in a loss, and all of the second special feature games have finished (the RUSH effect has ended), the game state at the end of the last executed second special feature game (the start of the next executed first special feature game) is clearly indicated or suggested to the player as being in the c-time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 229(D), in the branching sequence, if all of the second special symbol games, which are executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state, result in a loss, and all of the second special symbol games have finished (the RUSH sequence has finished), then if the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is the normal game state, which is less favorable than the c-time-saving game state, then the text image "Too bad..." will be displayed. This means that, when all of the second special feature games, which are executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 during the time-saving game state (c), result in a loss, and all of the second special feature games have finished (the RUSH effect has ended), the game state at the end of the last executed second special feature game (the start of the next executed first special feature game) will be clearly indicated or suggested to the player as a normal game state, which is less favorable than the time-saving game state (c).

Furthermore, when displaying the text images "Congratulations!" or "Too bad..." during a branching sequence, an image prompting the player to shoot left (a left-pointing arrow image and the text "Shoot Left") will be displayed. In other words, the image prompting the player to shoot left will be displayed throughout the execution of the branching sequence. Of course, the image prompting the player to shoot left may be displayed only for a portion of the execution of the branching sequence, or it may be omitted altogether.

Furthermore, after the branching sequence that explicitly or suggests the player is in the c-time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 229(C), an image related to gameplay in the c-time-saving game state is displayed, as shown in Figure 229(E). The text images "Big Win! RUSH Guaranteed!!" and "Sudden Chance" are examples of images related to gameplay in the c-time-saving game state. In this way, the display of images related to gameplay in the c-time-saving game state allows the player to understand that the RUSH sequence has ended and the player is in the c-time-saving game state. When the player is in the c-time-saving game state, if there is a reserved right to execute the first special symbol after the RUSH sequence ends, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved images N will be displayed as a corresponding display. That is, if a reserved right to execute the first special symbol occurs when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 during the execution of the RUSH sequence, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved images N at the end of the RUSH sequence will be displayed as a corresponding display.

Furthermore, an image prompting the player to shoot to the left (an image of a left-pointing arrow and an image of the words "Shoot Left") is displayed. This allows the player to understand that switching from shooting to the right to shooting to the left is desirable, preventing them from suffering disadvantages by continuing to shoot to the right. The image prompting the player to shoot to the left only needs to be displayed for a certain period of time after it is displayed. For example, it may be displayed until the c-state game ends, or until a certain number of special symbol games are played, or until a certain amount of time has passed, or until a certain number of game balls are shot to the left consecutively.

Furthermore, during the execution of the "c-time-saving game mode" animation, a display showing the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the "c-time-saving game mode" (a text image displaying "8 games remaining") is shown.

Furthermore, players can determine the number of times the second special symbol game was played in the time-saving game state during the execution of the RUSH performance, based on the c-time-saving game count display when an image related to gameplay in the c-time-saving game state is shown. They can also determine which remaining reserved symbols resulted in a jackpot draw where the time-saving symbols failed to stop. For example, in the example shown in Figure 229(E), the c-time-saving game count display shows the text image "8 times remaining." Based on this c-time-saving game count display, players can determine that the initially set c-time-saving game count was 10, and that two special symbol games have already been played in the c-time-saving game state. They can also retrospectively determine that the jackpot draw announced by the second special symbol game played three times prior resulted in a jackpot draw where the time-saving symbols failed to stop.

On the other hand, after the branching sequence that explicitly or suggests the normal game state as shown in Figure 229(D) has ended, images related to gameplay in the normal game state are displayed, as shown in Figure 229(F). The text images "Big Win! RUSH Guaranteed!!" and "Sudden Chance" correspond to images related to gameplay in the time-saving game state. In this way, the display of images related to gameplay in the normal game state allows the player to understand that the RUSH sequence has ended and the game is in the normal game state. Furthermore, in the normal game state, if there is a reserved right to execute the first special symbol after the RUSH sequence has ended, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved images N will be displayed as corresponding displays. That is, if a reserved right to execute the first special symbol occurs when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 during the execution of the RUSH sequence, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved images N at the end of the RUSH sequence will be displayed as corresponding displays.

Furthermore, an image prompting the player to shoot left-handed (an image of a left-pointing arrow and an image of the words "Shoot Left-Handed") is displayed. This allows the player to understand that switching from right-handed to left-handed shooting is desirable, preventing them from suffering disadvantages by continuing to shoot right-handed. The image prompting the player to shoot left-handed only needs to be displayed for a certain period of time after it is displayed. For example, it may be displayed until a certain number of special game rounds are played, or until a certain amount of time has passed, or until a certain number of game balls are shot left-handed consecutively.

In this embodiment, the result animation is executed before the branching animation; however, the branching animation may be executed before the result animation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the result animation (see Figure 229(A)) and the branching animation (see Figures 229(B) to (F)) are executed separately. However, some or all of one of the result animations or branching animations may be executed in conjunction with the other. For example, in the example screen of the result animation shown in Figure 229(A), the image shown in Figure 229(B) may also be displayed. Similarly, in the example screens of the branching animations shown in Figures 229(C) and 229(E), the result image shown in Figure 229(A) may also be displayed.

Furthermore, although the result animation and branching animation were described as part of the RUSH animation in this embodiment, one or both of the result animation and branching animation may be executed as separate animations from the RUSH animation. In other words, in this embodiment, the result animation and branching animation are executed in the second special symbol game, which is the last of the remaining reserved balls to be played. However, one or both of the result animation and branching animation may be executed in the first special symbol game (at the start) which is played after the completion of the second special symbol game, which is the last of the remaining reserved balls to be played.

<Step S4527>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 223, if the received command is not a special variation start command (step S4525: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a remaining reserve pattern command (step S4527). The remaining reserve pattern command is set in step S4009 of the second special variation pattern setting process B in Figure 211 when a remaining reserve pattern (see Figure 199) is set based on the entry of game balls into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state a.

If the received command is a pending pattern command (step S4527: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4528. If the received command is not a pending pattern command (step S4527: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4532.

<Steps S4528-S4531>
If the received command is a pending pattern command (step S4527: Yes), the MPU 51 stores the pending pattern in the RAM 512 based on the pending pattern command (step S4528), and sets the battle performance start flag to ON to start the battle performance in the RUSH performance (step S4529). The battle performance start flag is referenced in step S4604 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 224 below to determine whether or not to start the battle performance, and the battle performance is set if the battle performance flag is set to ON.

Furthermore, based on the information regarding the number of remaining pending items included in the pending item pattern command, the MPU 51 performs a numerical storage process, setting the value of the pending item counter in the storage area for the pending item counter set in the RAM 512 (step S4530). Then, the MPU 51 sets the pending item counter flag to ON, indicating that the pending item counter is set (i.e., there are pending items) (step S4531), and terminates the command determination process.

In step S4530 of the command determination process, the value of the remaining reserved ball counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of rights to execute the second special feature game (remaining reserved balls) at the end of the first executed second special feature game, based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, since the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special feature game is set to 4, the remaining reserved balls will be one of 1 to 4. Then, in the memory area for the remaining reserved ball counter set in RAM 512, the value of the remaining reserved ball counter is set to 1 if the remaining reserved balls are 1, to 2 if the remaining reserved balls are 2, to 3 if the remaining reserved balls are 3, and to 4 if the remaining reserved balls are 4.

Furthermore, the value of the remaining reserved ball counter is decremented (updated) by one each time a second special symbol game for that remaining reserved ball is completed in step S4542 of the command determination process described later. Therefore, the value of the remaining reserved ball counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among those that can be executed based on that remaining reserved ball. As a result, the MPU 51 can display the number of unexecuted second special symbol games for the remaining reserved balls on the symbol display unit 341 by referring to the remaining reserved ball counter.

Here, as will be explained in detail later, for the second special symbol game executed based on the remaining reserved balls, the battle animation (see Figures 227 and 228) is set based on the remaining reserved ball pattern (see Figure 199(D)) identified based on the remaining reserved ball pattern command in the variation type (animation pattern) setting process described later. For example, in the case of remaining reserved ball pattern 1, the battle animation is executed for one second special symbol game for one remaining reserved ball; in the case of remaining reserved ball pattern 2, the battle animation is executed for two second special symbol games for two remaining reserved balls; in the case of remaining reserved ball pattern 3, the battle animation is executed for three second special symbol games for three remaining reserved balls; and in the case of remaining reserved ball pattern 4, the battle animation is executed for four second special symbol games for four remaining reserved balls. In other words, the value of the remaining reserved ball counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the remaining reserved balls by being deducted (updated) by one each time a second special symbol game for a given remaining reserved ball is completed, matches the number of unexecuted second special symbol games on which the battle animation is executed. Therefore, the battle sequence continues to run until the value of the remaining reserved count counter, which is set in RAM 512, reaches 0.

<Step S4532>
If the received command is not a remaining hold pattern command (step S4527: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special variation termination command (step S4532). The special variation termination command is set in step S3712 of the special feature game control process in Figure 208 when the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of special variations for the remaining hold of the second special feature based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state, is 0.

If the received command is a special variation termination command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4533. If the received command is not a special variation termination command (step S4532: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4534.

<Step S4533>
If the received command is a special variation termination command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the RUSH performance termination flag to ON (step S4533) and terminates the command determination process. The RUSH performance termination flag is referenced in step S4612 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process shown in Figure 224 below to determine whether or not to terminate the RUSH performance. If the RUSH performance termination flag is set to ON, the RUSH performance is terminated.

<Step S4534>
If the received command is not a special variation termination command (step S4532: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special variation pattern command (step S4534). A special variation pattern command is set in step S3910 of the special variation start process in Figure 210 when a special variation pattern is set for the first special variation game or the second special variation game.

If the received command is a special pattern variation command (step S4534: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4535. If the received command is not a special pattern variation command (step S4534: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4540.

<Step S4535>
If the received command is a special feature variation pattern command (step S4534: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a variation type (performance pattern) setting process as a performance display process, which sets the variation type (performance pattern) to be executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., during the special feature game (step S4535), and then proceeds to step S4536. Details of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 224.

<Step S4536>
In step S4536, the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process, similar to the stop symbol combination setting process in step S3104 of the command determination process in the first embodiment described above, to set the symbol combinations when multiple decorative symbols (for example, three) that are displayed in a variable manner by the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game are stopped and displayed on the active line, and then proceeds to step S4537.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the combination of symbols that stop on the decorative symbols will be set to correspond to the type of failure to stop the time-saving symbols (see Figure 198(D)). Specifically, if the failure to stop the time-saving symbols is A, the combination of symbols that stop on the decorative symbols will be set to "119" or "991"; if the failure to stop the time-saving symbols is B, the combination will be set to "554" or "556"; if the failure to stop the time-saving symbols is C, the combination will be set to "332" or "334"; and if the failure to stop the time-saving symbols is D, the combination will be set to "776" or "778".

<Step S4537>
In step S4537, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the received special pattern variation command in the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special pattern variation command. The variation display counter is then decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variation is being displayed, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the variation display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S4538>
In step S4538, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the performance pattern type set in step S4535 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S4536, and then terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and performance image of the decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the variation display and performance display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type and performance type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4539>
In step S4539, the MPU 51 executes a time-saving counter update process and terminates the command determination process. In this time-saving counter update process, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the b time-saving counter or c time-saving counter set in the storage area for the b time-saving counter or c time-saving counter set in RAM 512, and stores the value after the subtraction. Specifically, if the b time-saving game state flag, which is set to ON in step S4506 of the command determination process, is set to ON, that is, if the b time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the b time-saving counter set in the storage area for the b time-saving counter set in RAM 512. Furthermore, in the time-saving count counter update process, if the c time-saving game state flag, which is set to ON in step S4510 of the command determination process, is set to ON, i.e., the c time-saving game state is active, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the c time-saving count counter set in the storage area for the c time-saving count counter set in the RAM 512.

<Step S4540>
If the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4534: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol game end command (step S4540). The special symbol game end command is set in step S3709 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 207 when a special symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

If the received command is a special feature game end command (step S4540: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4541. If the received command is not a special feature variation pattern command (step S4540: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4545.

<Steps S4541 to S4544>
If the received command is a special feature game termination command (step S4540: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the remaining reserved count counter flag, which indicates that the remaining reserved count counter is set, is set to ON (step S4541). The remaining reserved count counter flag is a flag that indicates that the remaining reserved count counter is set, which shows the number of unexecuted second special feature games among the remaining reserved games, which are the reserved rights to execute the second special feature game at the end of the second special feature game that was first executed based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state.

If the remaining reserved count counter flag is set to ON (step S4541: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a subtraction process, which subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining reserved count counter (step S4542). That is, during the execution of the battle sequence in the RUSH sequence, which is a specific sequence, the MPU 51 updates the value of the remaining reserved count counter stored in the memory area set in the RAM 512 at the end of the second special symbol game. In this way, during the execution of the battle sequence, the value of the remaining reserved spins counter stored in the memory area set in RAM 512 at the end of the second special symbol game is updated (decremented). For example, even if the remaining reserved spins include a result where the jackpot lottery results in a failed time-saving symbol stop that transitions to the time-saving game state c, by referring to the value of the remaining reserved spins counter stored in the memory area set in RAM 512, the battle sequence can continue to run until the value of the remaining reserved spins counter becomes 0. Furthermore, once the value of the remaining reserved spins counter becomes 0, it becomes possible to execute the c time-saving game state sequence (see Figure 225(C)) as a display sequence, which is specific to the c time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the remaining pending count counter flag is set to off (step S4541: No), i.e., if no processing is required for the remaining pending count, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the remaining reserved count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4543). If the value of the remaining reserved count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4543: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the remaining reserved count counter flag to off (step S4544) and terminates the command determination process. In other words, the MPU 51 terminates the management (updating) of the remaining reserved count when the value of the remaining reserved count counter becomes 0. To put it another way, the battle sequence ends when the value of the remaining reserved count counter in the memory area set for the remaining reserved count counter in RAM 512 becomes 0.

On the other hand, if the value of the remaining reserved count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4543: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process. That is, if the value of the remaining reserved count counter is not 0, the MPU 51 continues to manage (update) the remaining reserved count. In other words, the battle sequence continues as long as the value of the remaining reserved count counter in the memory area set in RAM 512 does not become 0.

In this embodiment, the value of the remaining reserved ball counter is updated (subtracted) when the special symbol variation pattern is received, i.e., at the start of the special symbol game. However, the value of the remaining reserved ball counter may also be updated (subtracted) at the end of the special symbol game.

Furthermore, while the system currently manages (updates) the number of remaining reserved balls identified from the remaining reserved ball pattern command, it is also possible to identify the number of second special symbol games executed in the battle sequence based on the remaining reserved ball pattern identified from the remaining reserved ball pattern command, and manage (updates) the number of said second special symbol games. In this case, the number of second special symbol games executed in the battle sequence can be managed by setting a battle sequence counter corresponding to the number of second special symbol games in the memory area set in RAM 512, and updating this battle sequence counter at the start (or end) of the second special symbol game. This allows the MPU 51 to identify the second special symbol game that will end the battle sequence by referring to the value of the battle sequence counter.

<Step S4545>
If the received command is not a special pattern variation command (step S4540: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S4545) and terminates the command determination process.

[Setting the type of variation (performance pattern)]
Here, Figure 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) in this embodiment. In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the variation type (performance pattern) to be executed in the special game by the symbol display unit 341, etc. is set according to the game state type, etc. The variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment includes a process for setting a one-shot notification performance and a process for setting a battle performance as performance display means for setting a RUSH performance as a specific performance.

<Step S4601>
In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the RUSH performance start flag is set to ON or not (step S4601). The RUSH performance start flag is a flag that starts the RUSH performance as a specific performance, and is set to ON in step S4524 of the command determination process in Figure 223 when a special variation start command is received.

If the RUSH performance start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4602. If the RUSH performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4604.

In this embodiment, by determining whether the RUSH performance start flag is set to ON in step S4601, it becomes possible to execute the RUSH performance as a specific performance, prioritizing it over the b-time-saving game state performance and c-time-saving game state performance, as a display performance. For example, if the remaining reserves of the second special symbol based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state are started in the normal game state, and if the jackpot lottery result among these remaining reserves is a time-saving symbol stop failure, then the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state after the end of the second special symbol game in which the jackpot lottery result was a time-saving symbol stop failure. In this case, when the c-time-saving game state performance corresponding to the c-time-saving game state is executed as a display performance, the battle performance that was being executed as a RUSH performance up to that point is terminated midway.

In response to this, by determining whether the RUSH effect flag is set to ON or not, it becomes possible to execute the RUSH effect as a display effect, prioritizing it over the time-saving game state effect. As a result, the battle effect being executed as a RUSH effect is prevented from ending prematurely.

In this embodiment, the RUSH animation, as a display effect, is executed with priority over the c-time-saving game state animation to prevent the battle animation from ending prematurely. However, the transition to the c-time-saving game state may also be delayed until the RUSH animation ends (all remaining reserved second special symbol games have ended) to prevent the battle animation from ending prematurely.

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
If the RUSH performance start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the process of setting the aforementioned one-shot notification performance (see Figure 226) included in the RUSH performance (step S4602). Then, the MPU 51 sets the RUSH performance start flag to OFF (step S4603) and terminates the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

<Step S4604>
If the RUSH performance start flag is set to off (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the battle performance start flag is set to on (step S4604). The battle performance start flag is a flag that starts the battle performance as a RUSH performance when the RUSH performance is to be executed as a specific performance, and is set to on in step S4527 of the command judgment process in Figure 223 when the remaining reserve pattern command is received. That is, the battle performance is executed when the result of the big win lottery for the second special symbol game, which is executed for the first time after the transition to the time-saving game state, is a loss, and when there are remaining reserves for the second special symbol game at the end of the second special symbol game.

If the battle animation start flag is set to ON (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4605. Conversely, if the battle animation start flag is set to OFF (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4611.

<Steps S4605 and S4606>
If the battle performance start flag is set to ON (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 identifies the remaining reserved pattern stored in the RAM 512 in step S4526 of the command determination process in Figure 223 (step S4605). Then, as a performance display process, the MPU 51 executes a process to set the aforementioned battle performance included in the RUSH performance as a specific performance (see Figures 227 and 228) as the display performance based on the remaining reserved pattern (step S4606), and proceeds to step S4607.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 during the a-time-saving game state, a one-shot notification animation is performed for the first game ball to enter the second prize slot 315 during the a-time-saving game state, and a battle animation is set when a remaining reserve pattern is set for the second and subsequent game balls to enter the second prize slot 315 during the a-time-saving game state. That is, when the second special symbol game ends based on the first game ball to enter the second prize slot 315 during the a-time-saving game state, if there are second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves), a battle animation is performed, and if there are multiple such remaining reserves, the battle animation is set collectively for the second special symbol games performed based on the multiple second special symbol reserves. Specifically, if the remaining reserved ball patterns 1-4 (see Figure 199(C)) result in all jackpot draws being unsuccessful, then battle animation pattern A or B (see Figure 227(A)) is set, resulting in the ally character's defeat. If the remaining reserved ball patterns 5-8 (see Figure 199(C)) include a minor win among the jackpot draw results, then battle animation pattern C or D (see Figure 227(A)) is set, resulting in the ally character's victory. Furthermore, if there are multiple such remaining reserved balls, the battle animation is set collectively for the second special symbol game played based on multiple second special symbol reserved balls, preventing multiple battle animations from being performed for the same remaining reserved ball.

<Steps S4607 and S4608>
In step S4607, the MPU 51 sets the battle animation already set flag to ON, and then sets the battle animation start flag to OFF (step S4608), and proceeds to step S4609.

The "Battle Performance Pre-Setting Flag" indicates that, at the end of the second special feature game based on the first ball entry into the second prize slot 315 during the time-saving game state, there are one or more (2 to 4) second special feature reserves (remaining reserves), and that a battle performance is set for these remaining reserves. This flag is referenced in step S4611 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process to determine whether or not a battle performance is set.

Furthermore, during the execution of the RUSH演出 (special performance) (instant notification performance and battle performance), as mentioned above, images such as an image indicating that RUSH is in progress ("Big Win RUSH" text image), an image indicating the number of Big Win RUSHs ("RUSH x 3" text image), an image indicating the total number of balls dispensed during that Big Win RUSH ("3000 balls" text image), and an image indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played during the Big Win RUSH are displayed (see Figure 225(D)). These images may be set simultaneously when setting the instant notification performance or battle performance, or they may be set at a different timing than when setting the instant notification performance or battle performance.

<Steps S4609 and S4610>
In step S4609, the MPU 51 determines whether the battle sequence set in step S4606 is battle sequence pattern A or battle sequence pattern B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a battle sequence in which an allied character is defeated in battle (see Figure 227(A)) has been set.

If the battle animation set in step S4606 is either battle animation pattern A or battle animation pattern B (step S4609: Yes), and a battle animation in which an allied character is defeated in battle (see Figure 227(A)) is set, the MPU 51 executes a process to set a branch animation (see Figure 229) as the display animation (step S4610), and then terminates the variation type (animation pattern) setting process.

Here, battle animation pattern A or battle animation pattern B (see Figure 227(A)), in which an ally character is defeated in battle, is set when all the jackpot draws for the remaining reserved spins during the execution of the battle animation are unsuccessful. In other words, the branching animation as a display animation (see Figure 229) is executed after the end of the battle animation when it is explicitly or implicitly stated to the player that the high probability state of consecutive jackpots will end due to the defeat of an ally in the battle animation. As mentioned above, during the execution of the battle animation for the remaining reserved spins, the game is either in a normal game state or a time-saving game state. This time-saving game state has a higher game value than the normal game state because the probability of a time-saving jackpot, which provides an opportunity to transition to a high probability state of consecutive jackpots, is higher than in the normal game state. Therefore, the branching animation (see Figure 229) explicitly or implicitly states whether or not the game is in one of the two game states with different game value for the player, that is, whether or not it is the time-saving game state, which has higher game value for the player. Thus, by executing a branching animation that clearly or suggestively indicates whether the player is in the c-time-saving game state, which offers high game value to the player, even in situations where the player's interest in the game decreases due to the defeat of an ally character in a battle animation ending the high probability state for consecutive big wins, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating that the branching animation will clearly or suggest that they are in the c-time-saving game state, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game is prevented.

On the other hand, if the battle animation set in step S4606 is not battle animation pattern A or battle animation pattern B (step S4609: No), that is, if a minor win is included in the result of the big win lottery for the remaining reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state, and a battle animation pattern C or battle animation pattern D (see Figure 227(A)) in which an ally character wins the battle is set, the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (animation pattern) setting process.

<Step S4611>
If the battle performance start flag is set to off (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the battle performance already set flag is set to on (step S4611). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a battle performance is set for the second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) at the end of the second special symbol game based on the first entry of a game ball into the second prize pocket 315 in the time-saving game state.

If the Battle Performance Pre-Setting Flag is set to ON (Step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4612. If the Battle Performance Pre-Setting Flag is set to OFF (Step S4611: No), the process proceeds to step S4617.

<Step S4612>
If the Battle Performance Pre-Setting Flag is set to ON (Step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the RUSH Performance Termination Flag, which terminates the RUSH performance as a specific performance, is set to ON (Step S4612). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to terminate the RUSH performance (battle performance) when a battle performance is being executed.

If the RUSH performance end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4613. On the other hand, if the RUSH performance end flag is set to OFF (step S4612: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the RUSH performance (battle performance), the MPU 51 terminates the setting process for the relevant variation type (performance pattern).

<Steps S4613 to S4616>
If the RUSH performance end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the Battle Performance Already Set Flag, which indicates that a battle performance is set, to OFF (step S4613), and sets the RUSH Performance End Flag, which terminates the RUSH performance, to OFF (step S4614), and terminates the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

Furthermore, as part of the update process, the MPU 51 executes a process to clear the remaining reserved count counter (step S4615), sets the remaining reserved count counter flag to off (step S4616), and terminates the setting process for the variation type (performance pattern). In other words, the MPU 51 terminates the management (update) of the remaining reserved count when the RUSH performance (battle performance) ends. Specifically, the MPU 51 terminates the management (update) of the remaining reserved count when the battle performance as a display performance ends while the remaining reserved count is not zero (i.e., when the remaining reserved count includes those where the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win).

<Steps S4617 and S4618>
If the Battle Performance Pre-Setting Flag is set to OFF (Step S4611: No), that is, if the Battle Performance (RUSH Performance) is not currently being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the Normal Game State Flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (Step S4617).

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state animation as the display animation (step S4618) and terminates the animation type (animation pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4619.

Furthermore, if the RUSH sequence ends without a minor win occurring (i.e., if an ally character is defeated in the battle sequence), in the normal game state after the RUSH sequence ends, the second special symbol reserve image corresponding to the number of second special symbol reserves M will not be displayed. Instead, the first special symbol reserve image corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserves N at the end of the RUSH sequence will be displayed as the corresponding image (see Figure 225(A)). In other words, when the RUSH sequence ends, the display of the special symbol reserve image as the corresponding image switches from the second special symbol reserve image to the first special symbol reserve image. This suggests to the player that they should switch from right-hand play to left-hand play based on the end of the RUSH sequence.

<Steps S4619 and S4620>
If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to off (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a b-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4619).

If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4619: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b-time-saving game state animation as the display animation (step S4620) and terminates the animation type (animation pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4619: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4621.

Furthermore, in the b-time-saving game state, a different background (stage) animation is displayed, and this background animation (stage) allows for identification of the b-time-saving game state. Also, as shown in Figure 225(B), the b-time-saving game state animation displays images related to gameplay in the b-time-saving game state. In the example shown in Figure 225(B), the text images "Big Win Guaranteed RUSH!!", "Right-Handed Play", and "Ceiling Chance" correspond to images related to gameplay in the b-time-saving game state. Additionally, while the b-time-saving game state animation is running, the text image "50 Remaining Plays" is displayed as a corresponding indicator showing the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the b-time-saving game state.

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to off (step S4619: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the c-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4621).

If the c-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4621: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the c-time-saving game state animation as the display animation (step S4622) and terminates the animation type (animation pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the c-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4621: No), the MPU 51 terminates the animation type (animation pattern) setting process.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the c-time-saving game state演出 (performance/presentation) is performed in the c-time-saving game state, excluding the execution of the RUSH performance. However, a different background performance (stage performance) is executed as a display performance, and it is possible to identify the c-time-saving game state as a specific game state based on this background performance (stage performance). Also, as shown in Figure 225(C), the c-time-saving game state performance displays images related to gameplay in the c-time-saving game state. In the example shown in Figure 225(C), the text images "RUSH confirmed with a big win!!", "Hit left", and "Sudden chance" correspond to images related to gameplay in the c-time-saving game state. In addition, while the c-time-saving game state performance is being executed, the text image "10 remaining" (remaining c-time-saving game count display) is displayed as a specific corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-time-saving game state.

As described above, in this invention, even if a specific condition is met during the execution of the second game turn while a specific performance is being executed, the specific corresponding display will not start. Furthermore, in this invention, even if an update condition is met during the execution of the second game turn while a specific performance is being executed, the updated specific corresponding display will not start. Thus, by preventing the specific corresponding display from starting when a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game turn while a specific performance is being executed, the specific performance is prevented from being terminated prematurely by the specific corresponding display, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the premature termination of the specific performance.

On the other hand, in this invention, based on the completion of a specific performance, a specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the completion of the specific performance is initiated. In this way, by initiating a specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the completion of the specific performance, the specific corresponding display can be initiated without prematurely terminating the specific performance. Therefore, a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the failure to initiate the specific corresponding display is prevented.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a which is transitioned to after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, the second special symbol reserve number M, which corresponds to the number of second reserves for the right to execute the second special symbol game as a second game round operation executed based on game balls entering the second prize slot 315 as a second ball entry means, is set in the second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB as a first counting means in step S1108 (see Figure 200) of the start prize entry processing as a numerical storage process, and the second special symbol reserve number M set in the second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB is subtracted in step S3806 (see Figure 209) of the special symbol data setting processing as a subtraction process based on the start of the second special symbol game for the said second special symbol reserve as a subtraction condition, and the second special symbol reserve number M set in the second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB is subtracted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the second special feature game executed based on the game balls entering the second prize entry point 315 in the time-saving game state, the RUSH effect, as a display effect, is set in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, which is an effect display process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the termination of a special game that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery, as a specific condition, is a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state. In the c-time-saving game state, a second numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special game plays that can be performed is set in the c-time-saving game counter, which is the second counting means, in step S4211 (see Figure 217) of the game state transition process, which is the numerical storage process. Also, in this embodiment, the remaining number of special game plays that can be performed in the c-time-saving game state is updated in step S3724 (see Figure 208) of the special game control process, based on the start of a special game, which is the update condition. Based on the updated value of the c-time-saving game counter, a display (effect) of the remaining number of c-time-saving games can be executed as a corresponding display.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the second special symbol game executed based on the game balls entering the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game, if the game transitions to the time-saving game state c, based on the jackpot lottery result being a miss in stopping the time-saving symbols during the execution of the RUSH performance as a display performance in the variation type (performance pattern) setting process as a performance display process, the display (performance) of the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c, which is the corresponding display in the time-saving game state c, is not executed while the RUSH performance is being executed. Thus, when the game transitions to the c-time-saving mode during the RUSH sequence, the display (animation) of the remaining c-time-saving game counts in the c-time-saving mode is not executed during the RUSH sequence. Therefore, even if the game transitions to the c-time-saving mode based on a jackpot lottery result where the time-saving symbols fail to stop, the RUSH sequence is prevented from ending prematurely due to the display (animation) of the remaining c-time-saving game counts. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the RUSH sequence ending prematurely.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the game transitions to the c-time-saving game state during the execution of the RUSH performance (a display effect), the remaining number of c-time-saving game plays will be displayed (performed) after the RUSH performance ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state at the time of the RUSH performance's end is initiated. In this way, by initiating the display of the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state at the time of the RUSH performance's end, the display of the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state can be initiated without interrupting the RUSH performance. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the failure to start displaying the remaining number of special symbol plays available in the c-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the RUSH sequence includes a one-shot notification sequence and a battle sequence. However, one of these sequences may be omitted, or other sequences, such as a mission sequence, may be performed instead of one or both of the sequences.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the battle sequence is set collectively for the remaining reserved balls of the second special feature game that are executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315 during the time-saving game state (a). However, if there are multiple such reserved balls, the sequence may be set individually for each reserved ball.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to eleventh embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[13th Embodiment]
The present invention provides a specific configuration of a gaming machine that includes a "start ball entry unit" as a starting ball entry means, a "lottery process" as a win/loss lottery means, a "display effect" as a specific effect, a "display control process" as a display control means, a "movable body" as a movable means, a "movable body control process" as a movable control means, "information" as specific information, a "sequential operation" as a series of specific operations, a "return side position" as a first position, a "drive side position" as a second position, a "termination determination condition" as a termination condition, and a "termination determination" as a determination means.

The starting ball entry means is provided in the game area and only needs to be capable of accepting game balls. Examples of starting ball entry means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: an entry point that triggers a special game upon the entry of a game ball; an entry point (first prize entry point) that triggers a first special game upon the entry of a game ball; an entry point (second prize entry point) that triggers a second special game upon the entry of a game ball; an entry point (through gate) that triggers a regular game upon the entry of a game ball; an entry point that activates a movable body (electric mechanism, wing mechanism) upon the entry of a game ball; and a small prize entry point. Examples include: an entry point in the game that allows balls to enter and triggers a jackpot upon entry; an entry point in the game that allows balls to enter during a minor win and triggers a time-saving game state upon entry; an entry point in the game that allows balls to enter during a jackpot and triggers a probability-increasing game state upon entry; an entry point in the game that allows balls to enter during a jackpot and triggers a time-saving game state upon entry; and any combination thereof.

The win/loss lottery means can be any process that performs various types of lotteries. Examples of win/loss lottery means that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: a process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot; a process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a minor win; a process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a regular win; a process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a game state in which a movable part (electric mechanism, wing-type mechanism, etc.) is operated at a high frequency or high probability to a game state in which a movable part is operated at a low frequency or low probability; a process for performing a lottery to drop from a probability variation game state to a normal game state; a process for performing a lottery to drop from a time-saving game state to a normal game state; and any combination thereof.

The specific performance can be any performance that is executed by a display device in accordance with the results of various lotteries. Specific performances include, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, for example, a display performance performed by a display means equipped with a liquid crystal display, a display performance performed by a display means equipped with a dot matrix display, a display performance performed by a display means equipped with a plasma display, a display performance performed by a display means equipped with an organic EL display, a performance performed by a display means according to the result of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game, a performance performed by a display means according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a minor win game, a performance performed by a display means according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a regular win game, a performance performed according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a game state in which a movable body (electric mechanism, feather mechanism, etc.) is operated at a high frequency or with a high probability to a game state in which a movable body is operated at a low frequency or with a low probability, a performance performed according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a probability variation game state to a normal game state, a performance performed according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a time reduction game state to a normal game state, a performance performed by a display means in a special game according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game, and a performance performed according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game. In the first special symbol game, an effect is performed by the display means, depending on the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will occur, an effect is performed by the display means in the second special symbol game, depending on the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will occur, an effect is performed by the display means in the jackpot game if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, an effect is performed by the display means in the first special symbol game if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, and in the second special symbol game if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot. In the first special game, the following effects are performed by the display means: when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the effects are performed by the display means in the special game, when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the effects are performed by the display means in the second special game, when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the effects are performed by the display means in the special game, when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a time-saving game state, when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a time-saving game state In the case of a picture game, the effects performed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery results in a time-saving game state; in the case of a second special picture game, the effects performed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot; in the case of a jackpot game, the effects performed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery results in a probability variation jackpot game state (transition to a probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game); in the case of a jackpot lottery results in a time-saving jackpot game state (transition to a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game).が、 Examples of the effects that can be performed include: effects performed on the display means during a normal winning game when the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a normal winning game occurs is a loss; effects performed on the display means according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a game state in which the movable parts are operated at a high frequency or high probability to a game state in which the movable parts are operated at a low frequency or low probability; effects performed on the display means according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a probability variation game state to a normal game state; effects performed on the display means according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a time reduction game state to a normal game state; and any combination thereof.

The display control means can be any process that determines and executes a display from among multiple display modes. As long as it can realize the spirit of the present invention, the display control means may include, for example, a process that determines and executes a display performance from among multiple display modes for a display means equipped with a liquid crystal display; a process that determines and executes a display performance from among multiple display modes for a display means equipped with a dot matrix display; a process that determines and executes a display performance from among multiple display modes for a display means equipped with a plasma display; a process that determines and executes a display performance from among multiple display modes for a display means equipped with an organic EL display; a process that determines and executes a display performance from among multiple display modes for a display means according to the result of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game; and a process that determines and executes a display performance from among multiple display modes for a display means according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a minor jackpot game. The process involves determining and executing an effect to be performed on the display means from among multiple effect display modes, depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a regular winning game; determining and executing an effect to be performed from among multiple effect display modes, depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a game state in which movable parts (electric mechanisms, feathers, etc.) are operated at a high frequency or high probability to a game state in which movable parts are operated at a low frequency or low probability; determining and executing an effect to be performed from among multiple effect display modes, depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a probability variation game state to a normal game state; determining and executing an effect to be performed from among multiple effect display modes, depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a time reduction game state to a normal game state; and determining and executing an effect to be performed on the display means in a special game from among multiple effect display modes, depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big win game. The process of determining and executing the following: the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the first special feature game from among multiple performance display modes according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will occur; the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the second special feature game from among multiple performance display modes according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will occur; the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the jackpot game from among multiple performance display modes according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will occur; the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the special feature game from among multiple performance display modes if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the first special feature game from among multiple performance display modes if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot The process of determining and executing a set of effects to be performed on the display means in the second special game when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a big win, the process of determining and executing a set of effects to be performed on the display means in the special game when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the process of determining and executing a set of effects to be performed on the display means in the special game when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the process of determining and executing a set of effects to be performed on the display means in the first special game when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the process of determining and executing a set of effects to be performed on the display means in the second special game when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the process of determining and executing a set of effects to be performed on the display means in the special game when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a time-saving game state, from among multiple set of effects The process of determining and executing from among multiple display modes for the performance to be performed by the display means in the first special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving game state, the process of determining and executing from among multiple display modes for the performance to be performed by the display means in the second special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving game state, the process of determining and executing from among multiple display modes for the performance to be performed by the display means in the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, the process of determining and executing from among multiple display modes for the performance to be performed by the display means in the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a probability-increasing jackpot game state (transition to a probability-increasing game state after the jackpot game ends), the process of determining and executing from among multiple display modes for the performance to be performed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving jackpot game state (the jackpot The process of determining and executing an effect to be performed by the display means from among multiple effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to create a normal jackpot game state (transition to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends), the process of determining and executing an effect to be performed by the display means from among multiple effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to create a normal jackpot game state (transition to a normal game state after the jackpot game ends), the process of determining and executing an opening effect to be performed by the display means at the opening of the jackpot game from among multiple effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to create a jackpot, the process of determining and executing an opening execution mode effect to be performed by the display means at the opening execution mode of the jackpot game from among multiple effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to create a jackpot If the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, the process of determining and executing a round game performance to be performed by the display means from among multiple performance display modes; if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, the process of determining and executing an interval performance to be performed by the display means during the interval of the jackpot game from among multiple performance display modes; if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, the process of determining and executing an ending performance to be performed by the display means during the ending of the jackpot game from among multiple performance display modes; if the result of the lottery is to generate a jackpot, the process of determining and executing a performance to be performed by the display means during the normal game from among multiple performance display modes, depending on the result of the lottery to generate a normal game or not; if the result of the lottery to generate a normal game or not is a normal win, the process of performing an ending performance to be performed by the display means during the normal game Examples include: a process of determining and executing a performance from multiple performance display modes; a process of determining and executing a performance to be performed on the display means in a normal winning game when the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a normal winning game occurs is a loss; a process of determining and executing a performance to be performed on the display means from multiple performance display modes according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a game state in which the movable body is operated at a high frequency or high probability to a game state in which the movable body is operated at a low frequency or low probability; a process of determining and executing a performance to be performed on the display means from multiple performance display modes according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a probability variation game state to a normal game state; a process of determining and executing a performance to be performed on the display means from multiple performance display modes according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to drop from a time reduction game state to a normal game state; and any combination thereof.

The movable means only needs to be provided in the game area and be operable during the display of the effects. As long as the spirit of the present invention can be realized, the movable means may be, for example, those that operate during the display of effects in special-symbol games (first special-symbol game or second special-symbol game), those that operate during the display of effects in jackpot games, those that operate during the display of effects in minor-prize games, those that operate during the display of effects in regular-symbol games, those that can move along a linear path, those that can move along a non-linear path, those that can move along a curved path, those that can move back and forth between two positions, those that are rotatable, those that can rotate by the tip of the movable means moving along an arc-shaped path around a pivot point, those that can change shape, those in which multiple movable members are combined or separated, those in which at least a part is enlargeable or shrinkable, those equipped with a display unit such as a liquid crystal display, those equipped with a light-emitting unit that can emit light, those that operate as effects, and special-symbol games (first special-symbol game or second special-symbol game) : Operated as part of the game's presentation; Operated to inform the player whether a predetermined presentation will be performed in a special feature game (first special feature game or second special feature game); Operated to inform the player whether a super reach will be performed; Operated to inform the player whether a special reach will be performed; Operated to inform the player whether a state is more advantageous than the previously indicated state; Operated to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a high probability of a big win; Operated to inform that it is a probability-increasing big win; Operated to inform that it is a probability-increasing big win with a higher expected payout after suggesting that it is a normal big win; Operated to inform that it is a probability-increasing big win after suggesting that it is a normal big win; Operated to inform that it is a time-saving big win after suggesting that it is a normal big win. , which are operated to announce a time-saving jackpot after suggesting a regular jackpot, which are operated to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball entry slot (open or close the ball entry slot), which are operated to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball entry slot (open or close the ball entry slot) that provides an opportunity to execute a special feature game (first special feature game or second special feature game) upon entry of game balls, which are operated in a special feature game (first special feature game or second special feature game), which are operated in a jackpot game, which are operated at the opening of a jackpot game, which are operated in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, which are operated in the round game of the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, which are operated at the interval of the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, which are operated at the ending of a jackpot game, round Examples include devices that operate to open or close ball entry openings (variable prize entry openings) in do-games, devices that operate to open or close ball entry openings (V prize entry openings) in round games that, upon ball entry, trigger a transition to a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) after the end of a jackpot game, devices that operate to open or close ball entry openings that, upon ball entry, award prize balls in minor jackpot games, devices that operate to open or close ball entry openings (V prize entry openings) in minor jackpot games that, upon ball entry, trigger a jackpot game after the end of a minor jackpot game, devices that operate to switch the flow path of the game balls, launching hammers that are movable to launch game balls, ball feeding devices that move game balls to a position where they can be launched by the launching hammers, and any combination thereof.

The movable control means can be any process that determines and executes the mode of movement of the movable means. As long as the spirit of the present invention can be realized, the movable control means may include, for example, a process that determines and executes the mode of movement of the movable means during the display of a special effect in a special effect game (first special effect game or second special effect game), a process that determines and executes the mode of movement of the movable means during the display of a special effect in a big win game, a process that determines and executes the mode of movement of the movable means during the display of a special effect in a small win game, a process that determines and executes the mode of movement of the movable means during the display of a special effect in a regular win game, a process that determines a mode of movement in which the movable means moves along a linear path and moves the movable means along a linear path, a process that determines a mode of movement in which the movable means moves along a non-curved path and moves the movable means along a non-curved path, or a process that determines a mode of movement in which the movable means moves along a curved path A process to determine a movable mode in which the movable means moves along a curved path and move the movable means along that curved path; a process to determine a path in which the movable means moves back and forth between two positions and move the movable means back and forth between two positions; a process to determine a movable mode in which the movable means rotates and rotates the movable means; a process to determine a movable mode in which the tip of the movable means moves along an arc-shaped path around a pivot point and rotate the movable means; a process to determine a movable mode in which the shape of the movable means changes and change the shape of the movable means; a process to determine a movable mode in which multiple movable members are joined or separated and join multiple movable members; a process to determine a movable mode in which at least a part of the movable means is enlarged or reduced and enlarged or reduced Processes to reduce size; process to determine the mode of movement of a movable means equipped with a display unit such as an LCD display and move the movable means; process to determine the mode of movement of a movable means equipped with a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light and move the movable means; process to determine the mode of movement of the movable means as a performance and move the movable means as a performance; process to determine the mode of movement of the movable means as a performance in a special game (first special game or second special game) and move the movable means in a special game; process to determine the mode of movement of the movable means to inform the player whether or not a predetermined performance in a special game (first special game or second special game) is being performed and move the movable means; process to determine the mode of movement of the movable means to inform the player whether or not a super reach is being performed and move the movable means Processes to activate the movable means, process to activate the movable means after determining a movable mode to inform the player whether or not a special reach will be performed, process to activate the movable means after determining a movable mode to inform whether or not the state is more advantageous than the state previously indicated, process to activate the movable means after determining a movable mode to activate the movable means in a movable mode that clearly indicates or suggests that there is a high probability of a big win, process to activate the movable means after determining a movable mode to inform that it is a probability-increasing big win with a higher expected payout, process to activate the movable means after indicating that it is a normal big win Process of determining the mode of movement and moving the movable means, process of determining the mode of movement and moving the movable means to indicate that it is a regular jackpot and then announce that it is a time-saving jackpot, process of determining the mode of movement and moving the movable means to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball entry opening (open or close the ball entry opening), process of determining the mode of movement of the movable means in the special game (first special game or second special game) and moving the movable means in the special game (first special game or second special game), jackpot The process of determining the movement mode of the movable means in the game and moving the movable means in the jackpot game, the process of determining the movement mode of the movable means in the opening of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the opening, the process of determining the movement mode of the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode, the process of determining the movement mode of the movable means in the round game of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the round game, the process of determining the movement mode of the movable means in the interval of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the interval, the process of determining the movement mode of the movable means in the ending of the jackpot game and The process involves moving a movable means during a round game, determining the mode of movement of a movable means that opens or closes an entry point (variable prize entry point) that is opened and closed during a round game, and moving the movable means during a round game, determining the mode of movement of a movable means that allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the entry point by the movable means (opening or closing the entry point), determining the mode of movement of a movable means that allows or restricts the entry of game balls into an entry point that provides an opportunity to execute a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) upon entry of a game ball, and moving the movable means. Examples include: determining the mode of movement of a movable means that opens or closes an entry point (V-prize entry point) that provides a trigger for a game, and then moving the movable means; determining the mode of movement of a movable means that opens or closes an entry point (V-prize entry point) that opens or closes in round games and provides a trigger for transitioning to a probability variation game state after the end of a jackpot game when a game ball enters, and then moving the movable means; determining the mode of movement of a movable means that opens or closes an entry point (V-prize entry point) that opens or closes in round games and provides a trigger for transitioning to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game when a game ball enters, and then moving the movable means; and any combination thereof.

The specific information is set in a single setting process corresponding to various modes of movement of the movable means, and the data set in the single setting process should enable the movable means to perform a series of operations. The specific information could include, for example, a task table (drive data 1) that causes the movable means to perform a series of operations through multiple processes, a task table (drive data 1) that controls the drive source (e.g., a motor) of the movable means to perform a series of operations through multiple processes, information for operating the movable means in various modes of movement in special games (first special game or second special game), information for operating the movable means in various modes of movement in big win games, information for operating the movable means in various modes of movement in small win games, Information on operating the movable means in various movable modes in a regular game, information on operating the movable means in various movable modes along a linear path, information on operating the movable means in various movable modes along a nonlinear path, information on operating the movable means in a movable mode along a curved path, information on operating the movable means in a movable mode that moves the movable means back and forth at least once between two positions, information on rotating the movable means in various movable modes, information on rotating the movable means by moving the tip of the movable means in a movable mode along an arc-shaped path around a pivot point, and changing the shape of the movable means Information corresponding to various movable modes to be transformed, information corresponding to various movable modes to be combined or separated from multiple movable members, information corresponding to various movable modes to enlarge or reduce at least a part of the movable means, information to open and close an entry opening into which a game ball can be entered in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, information to open and close a prize entry opening into which a special game is triggered when a game ball is entered in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, information to open and close a prize entry opening into which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball is entered in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, special game (first special game or the first Information on opening a slot for awarding prize balls upon entry of game balls in a special game, opening and closing it in various movable modes by the operation of a movable means; information on opening a slot for awarding prize balls upon entry of game balls in a jackpot game, opening and closing it in various movable modes by the operation of a movable means; information on opening and closing a slot for awarding prize balls upon entry of game balls in the opening and closing execution mode of a jackpot game, opening and closing it multiple times in various movable modes by the operation of a movable means; information on opening a slot for awarding prize balls upon entry of game balls in a round game of a jackpot game, opening it in various movable modes by the operation of a movable means Information to close, information set in correspondence to the operation of all or part of the movable mode of one movable means, information corresponding to the operation of the movable means common to multiple movable modes, information indicating the time-series operation of all or part of the movable mode of one movable means (scenario data, drive data), information corresponding to the time-series operation of the movable means common to multiple movable modes (scenario data, drive data), numerical information set in correspondence to the total or part of the operating time in the movable mode of one movable means, numerical information set in correspondence to the total or part of the number of operations in the movable mode of one movable means, numerical information set in correspondence to the total or part of the number of repetitions included in the movable mode of one movable means, numerical information set in correspondence to all or part of the waiting period until the next operation of one of the movable modes of one movable means is started, numerical information set in correspondence to all or part of the waiting period until the operation of the movable means is started, numerical information set in correspondence to all or part of the number of times the ball entry opening into which a game ball can be entered is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, all or the maximum number of times the ball entry opening into which a game ball can be entered is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means Numerical information set in response to a part of the game balls, Numerical information set in response to all or part of the remaining number of times the ball entry opening into which the game balls can be entered is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, Numerical information set in response to all or part of the number of times the ball entry opening into which prize balls are awarded when game balls are entered in a jackpot game is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, Numerical information set in response to all or part of the number of times the ball entry opening into which prize balls are awarded when game balls are entered is repeatedly opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the opening and closing execution mode of a jackpot game, and in the round game of a jackpot game Examples include numerical information set to correspond to all or part of the number of times the ball entry slot, which awards prize balls upon entry of game balls, is opened and closed by the movable mechanism; numerical information set to correspond to all or part of the maximum number of times the ball entry slot, which awards prize balls upon entry of game balls, is opened and closed by the movable mechanism during a round of a jackpot game; numerical information set to correspond to all or part of the remaining number of times the ball entry slot, which awards prize balls upon entry of game balls, is opened and closed by the movable mechanism during a round of a jackpot game; and any combination thereof.

The series of specific operations can be any operations performed within the range of motion of the movable means. Examples of the series of specific operations, provided they realize the spirit of the present invention, include: a continuous operation performed within the range of motion of the movable means; an operation in which the movable means reciprocates at least once between a starting point (return position) and a turning position (drive position); an operation in which the movable means reciprocates at least once between a standby position (return position) when the movable means is not driven and the maximum movable position (the position furthest from the standby position (drive position)) when the movable means is driven; an operation in which the movable means reciprocates at least once with an intermediate position between the standby position and the maximum movable position as the starting point (return position) or turning position (drive position); and an operation with the standby position as the starting point (return position) and the intermediate position as the turning position (drive position). An action in which the movable means is moved back and forth at least once as a position; an action in which the movable means is moved back and forth at least once with the intermediate position as the starting point (return side position) and the maximum movable position as the turning point (drive side position); an action in which the movable means is moved back and forth at least once with one of two different intermediate positions as the starting point (return side position) and the other intermediate position as the turning point (drive side position); an action that includes moving the movable means in the direction toward the standby position at least once; an action that includes moving the movable means in the direction toward the maximum movable position at least once; an action that moves the movable means in the direction toward the standby position at least once to position the movable means at the standby position (return side position) or in its vicinity; to the maximum movable position The operation involves moving the movable means in the direction it is pointed to to position it at least once at the maximum movable position (drive side position) or near thereto, moving the movable means in the direction pointed towards the standby position (return side position) to position it at an intermediate position at least once, moving the movable means in the direction pointed towards the maximum movable position (drive side position) to position it at an intermediate position at least once, rotating the movable means at a predetermined position, rotating the movable means at the standby position (return side position), rotating the movable means at the maximum movable position (drive side position), rotating the movable means at an intermediate position, opening and closing the prize slot at least once by activating the movable means, special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) Examples of actions include: an action in a game where a movable mechanism is activated to open and close the ball entry opening at least once; an action in a jackpot game where a movable mechanism is activated to open and close the prize entry opening at least once; an action in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game where a movable mechanism is activated to open and close the prize entry opening at least once; an action in the round game of a jackpot game where a movable mechanism is activated to open and close the prize entry opening at least once; an action in a minor win game where a movable mechanism is activated to open and close the ball entry opening at least once; an action in a regular win game where a movable mechanism is activated to open and close the ball entry opening at least once; and any combination thereof.

The first and second positions may be different positions set within the movable range of the movable means. The first and second positions are, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, for example, a standby position (return side position) when the movable means is in a non-driven state, the maximum movable position (the position furthest from the standby position (drive side position)) when the movable means is in a driven state, an intermediate position set between the standby position and the maximum movable position (the position furthest from the standby position), a position among the intermediate positions that is closer to the standby position than the maximum movable position, a position among the intermediate positions that is near the standby position, a position among the intermediate positions that is closer to the maximum movable position than the standby position, a position among the intermediate positions that is near the maximum movable position, the starting point when the movable means performs a reciprocating motion (return side position), the turning point when the movable means performs a reciprocating motion (drive side position), the rotation position when the movable means performs a rotational motion, a position in which the movable means performs an expansion or contraction motion, a position in which a plurality of movable members perform a coupling or separation motion, a position in which an entry opening into which a game ball can be entered is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), and a special game (first special game or The ball entry point that generates the second special symbol game is either closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), and in a jackpot game, balls are allowed to enter, and when a game ball enters, prize balls are awarded, and the ball entry point is either closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), and in a jackpot game, balls are allowed to enter, and when a game ball enters, a probability variation game state is generated, and the ball entry point is either closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), and in a jackpot game, balls are allowed to enter, and when a game ball enters, Examples include a position to close (return side position) or open (drive side position) the ball entry opening that generates a time-saving game state, a position to close (return side position) or open (drive side position) the ball entry opening that allows ball entry in a minor win game and triggers a major win game upon ball entry, a position to close (return side position) or open (drive side position) the ball entry opening that allows ball entry in a minor win game and triggers a time-saving game state upon ball entry, and any combination thereof.

The termination condition can be any condition that terminates a specific sequence of operations of the movable means. The termination conditions, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, include, for example, the maximum operating time of the movable means elapsed, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the maximum operating time of the movable means being 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) being at its maximum value, the maximum number of movements of the movable means elapsed, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the maximum number of movements of the movable means being 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) being at its maximum value, all processing defined by the operation data set for the operation of the movable means being completed, the number of times the movable means returns to its predetermined position being a specified number, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) defining the number of times the movable means returns to its predetermined position being 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) being at its maximum value, the specified number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means being completed, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the specified number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means being 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) being at its maximum value, and the specified number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in the special game being completed. The following conditions must be met: the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the special game must be met, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the special game must be 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) must be at its maximum value, the player must operate the operating means that can be operated by the player, the player must operate the operating means within a predetermined period, the predetermined period must be met without the player operating the operating means, the player must operate the operating means within a predetermined period set for the maximum operating time of the movable means, the player must not operate the operating means within a predetermined period set for the maximum operating time of the movable means, the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the jackpot game must be met, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the jackpot game must be 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) must be at its maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the minor prize game must be met, the subtractive numerical information ( The subtractive counter (or similar) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; the specified number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a regular winning game are completed; the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the specified number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a regular winning game is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; the specified number of openings and closings of the prize slot opened and closed by the operation of the movable means are completed; the subtractive numerical information set in accordance with the specified number of openings and closings of the prize slot by the operation of the movable means is at its maximum value. The report (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; in the special game (first special game or second special game), the prescribed number of openings and closings of the prize slot, which are opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, have been completed; in the special game (first special game or second special game), the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the prescribed number of openings and closings of the prize slot by the operation of the movable means is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; in the jackpot game, the operation of the movable means Examples of errors include: the completion of a predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot; in a jackpot game, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot by the operation of the movable means (a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot) being 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) being at its maximum value; in a minor-win game, the completion of a predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot by the operation of the movable means; in a regular-win game, the completion of a predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot by the operation of the movable means; in a regular-win game, the completion of a predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot by the operation of the movable means being 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) being at its maximum value; an error occurring in the operation of the movable means; and any combination of these.

The determination means only needs to determine whether or not the termination condition has been met. As long as the spirit of the present invention can be realized, the determination means could include, for example, determining whether or not the maximum operating time of the movable means has elapsed; determining whether or not the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the maximum operating time of the movable means is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; determining whether or not the maximum number of movements of the movable means has elapsed; determining whether or not the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the maximum number of movements of the movable means is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; and determining whether or not the operation data set for the operation of the movable means Determination of whether all specified processes have been completed; determination of whether the number of times the movable means has returned to its predetermined position is the specified number; determination of whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that defines the number of times the movable means has returned to its predetermined position is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; determination of whether the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means has been completed; determination of whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; determination of whether the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the special game The following are the criteria for determining whether the operation has finished, whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the special game is 0 or whether the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value, whether the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated by the player, whether the operating means has been operated by the player within a predetermined period, whether the predetermined period has elapsed without the operating means being operated by the player, and whether the operating means has been operated by the player within a predetermined period set for the maximum operating time of the movable means. Determination of whether or not the operation means has been performed; determination of whether or not the operation means has not been operated by the player within the predetermined period set to the maximum operating time of the movable means; determination of whether or not the prescribed number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a jackpot game has been completed; determination of whether or not the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the prescribed number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a jackpot game is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; determination of whether or not the prescribed number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a minor win game has been completed; determination of whether or not the operation means has been operated by the player within the predetermined period set to the maximum operating time of the movable means; determination of whether or not the operation means has been operated by the player; determination of whether or not the prescribed number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a minor win game has been completed Determination of whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; Determination of whether the specified number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a regular winning game have been completed; Determination of whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in accordance with the specified number of back-and-forth movements of the movable means in a regular winning game is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; Determination of whether the specified number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot, which are opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, have been completed; Determination of whether the specified number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot, which are opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, are set in accordance with the specified number of openings and closings of the prize-winning slot, Determination of whether the specified subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; Determination of whether the specified number of openings and closings of the prize slot, which are opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) have been completed; Determination of whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the specified number of openings and closings of the prize slot by the operation of the movable means in a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; In a jackpot game, the movable means Determining whether the predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize slots, which are opened and closed by the mechanism, have been completed; determining whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize slots, which are opened and closed by the movable mechanism in a big win game (a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to the type of big win), is 0 or whether the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; determining whether the predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize slots, which are opened and closed by the movable mechanism in a small win game, have been completed; setting in response to the predetermined number of openings and closings of the prize slots, which are opened and closed by the movable mechanism in a small win game. Examples of the following are determined: whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; whether the specified number of openings and closings of the prize slot, which are opened and closed by the movable means in a regular winning game, have been completed; whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the specified number of openings and closings of the prize slot by the movable means in a regular winning game is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; whether an error has occurred in the operation of the movable means; and any combination of these.

Incidentally, gaming machines are equipped with movable parts that are driven in various types of games. These movable parts are operated in a continuous motion, including reciprocating movements, in special feature games that announce the results of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering a prize slot, and in jackpot games that are executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. Therefore, in controlling these movable parts, it is desirable to perform operation control and termination control of the movable parts with greater efficiency.

In amusement machines, movable parts are operated while display effects are being executed on the display means. Multiple movement modes are provided for the movable parts to enhance entertainment value. These movement modes include the movement trajectory, number of movements, and amount of movement, as well as combinations thereof. The movable parts perform various movements between a predetermined initial position and a limiting movement position. At this time, the control unit that controls the movable parts is required to control the movable parts more efficiently by sharing control and data for common movement modes in order to simplify control and reduce data volume. This reduces the amount of drive data used for a single movement mode, thereby reducing the memory load, and also reduces the number of times drive data is read or temporarily stored (set) when operating the movable parts (control load). When the movable parts are operated based on common drive data, all control processing based on the common drive data is completed before the next movement of the movable parts is executed based on drive data individually set according to each movement mode.

However, even when executing common movement modes, the termination conditions and timing for ending the common movement mode and transitioning to the next operation may differ depending on the movement mode being executed. Therefore, conventional movable body control systems have not been able to efficiently control the termination of a predetermined movement mode and the transition to the next operation.

In contrast, the present invention aims to efficiently perform termination control of a predetermined movable mode and transition control to the next operation.

Specifically, in gaming machines, the entertainment value and enjoyment of the game are enhanced by moving a type of movable mechanism, such as a special effect mechanism, during the execution of display effects on the display means in various games. For example, the movable mechanism is driven during the execution of display effects on the display means to suggest that a Super Reach (SP Reach) or Special Reach (SPSP Reach) will develop in a special feature game, and after announcing a regular jackpot in a special feature game, it is driven to suggest that a probability variation jackpot has been achieved in that special feature game or in the jackpot game executed after the end of that special feature game. In this case, after a series of movements such as a back-and-forth motion, the movable mechanism will perform an action that provides an announcement favorable to the player, or an action that provides an announcement unfavorable to the player, according to the content of the subsequent announcement (or the movable mechanism will not be moved).

Furthermore, in the control of a performance prop, which is a type of movable body, when the movable body is moved in one movable mode determined from multiple movable modes, a single common drive data (see Figure 269) is used for the common operation in those movable modes (for example, a continuous operation such as the reciprocating motion described above). This drive data is stored in ROM, read from ROM in accordance with the common operation of the movable body in various movable modes, and set (temporarily stored) in RAM in a single setting process. It is a group of data that uses the information set in a single setting process to execute the common continuous operation of the movable body through multiple processes. Specifically, in this embodiment, the drive data is set as a task table that controls a stepping motor to execute three types of reciprocating motions with different amounts of movement and movement trajectories of the movable body as a continuous operation common to multiple movable modes. By sequentially executing the processes defined by this task table, a continuous operation is performed in which the movable body moves back and forth from the top to the center of the display means, gradually advancing before returning to its initial position. In this way, by setting a single common drive data for a common continuous motion across multiple motion modes, the amount of drive data used for a single motion mode can be reduced, thereby lessening the memory load on the ROM. Furthermore, the control burden, such as reading drive data from the ROM and setting it in RAM (temporary storage) when operating the movable body, is also reduced. When the movable body operates based on the common drive data, all control processing based on the common drive data is completed before the next operation of the movable body is executed based on drive data individually set according to each motion mode.

On the other hand, during a predetermined period set within the execution time of the continuous movement of the movable body, the player's operation of the operation button 20 may be considered valid. Even in this case, the next movement of the movable body is executed based on individually set drive pattern data, not at the moment the operation of the operation button 20 is performed, but only after all control processing based on the common drive pattern data has been completed.

However, the timing at which the operation button 20 is operated during the predetermined period in which operation of the operation button 20 is considered valid is not uniform but variable. Therefore, the time from when the operation button 20 is operated until the control processing of the movable body based on common drive data is completed is not uniform but variable. In other words, after the operation button 20 is operated and the termination condition for a common continuous operation in multiple modes of movement is met, the termination control of the movable body for that common continuous operation may not be executed immediately. As a result, the time from the start of the next operation executed after the common operation of the movable body becomes uneven, which may prevent a smooth transition of the movable body's operation from the common continuous operation to the next operation. Consequently, the player may feel uncomfortable with the inability to smoothly transition the movable body's operation. In particular, if, for example, the operation button 20 is operated immediately after the start of a predetermined period during which operation of the operation button 20 is considered valid, the time until the next action by the movable body is executed is longer compared to when the operation button 20 is operated immediately before the end of that predetermined period. Because the next action cannot be performed immediately after the operation button 20 is operated, players are likely to feel uncomfortable with the delay in the next action. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the movable body may be operated during the execution of display effects in special feature games and jackpot games to indicate whether or not to perform various notifications. In this case, the discomfort that players feel with the operation of the movable body can reduce the effectiveness of the effects produced by the movable body.

In contrast, in this invention, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the movable control means determines a specific movement pattern for the movable means based on the result of the draw by the win/fail lottery means, while a specific performance pattern is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, in this invention, while the specific performance pattern is displayed by the display control means, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set in accordance with the movement pattern.

Furthermore, in this invention, when a series of specific operations on a movable means are performed by a movable control means based on specific information set in accordance with a movable mode during the display of a specific performance by the display control means, the determination means determines whether the termination condition of the series of specific operations has been met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position. In this way, when a series of specific operations on a movable means are performed by a movable control means based on specific information set in accordance with a movable mode during the display of a specific performance by the display control means, the determination means determines whether the termination condition of the series of specific operations has been met each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position, by the movable control means. Furthermore, in the present invention, if the determination means determines that the termination condition is met during a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on specific information, the termination means stops the movement of the movable means located at or near the first position, thereby terminating the series of specific operations. That is, in the present invention, even before all movable control of the movable means based on specific information is terminated during a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on specific information, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific operations each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, provided that the termination condition is met. As a result, if the termination condition is met during the execution of a series of specific operations of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on specific information can be stopped and the series of specific operations terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition has been met. Consequently, if it is determined that the termination condition for a series of specific operations has been met, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be terminated immediately, thereby enabling smooth termination control of the movable means. Therefore, in this invention, a smooth transition from one specific operation of the movable means to the next is possible. This allows the series of specific operations of the movable means to be terminated without causing any discomfort to the player, even after the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been determined. Consequently, if other individual operations are performed immediately after the completion of the series of specific operations of the movable means, a smooth transition from the series of specific operations to the other individual operations is possible, preventing the player from experiencing discomfort during the transition. This makes it possible to operate the movable means for performance purposes even when a specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, without impairing the performance effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in the first or second special symbol game that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery executed by a lottery process triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 (which serve as the ball entry starting unit), the display effects are set by the special symbol game effect setting process (which serves as the display control process), and the display effects are executed in the symbol display unit 341 upon receiving a display variation pattern command in the display control device 6 (which serves as the display control process). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movement mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which serves as a movable body, is determined from a plurality of movement modes A to D during the execution of the display effects by the mechanism operation effect setting process (which serves as the movable body control process), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which serves as a movable body, is moved based on one movement mode determined from the plurality of movement modes A to D during the execution of the display effects by the movable rotating mechanism control process (which serves as the movable body control process).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation as a continuous operation across multiple movement modes A to D, and where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition may be uncertain, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data). After the completion of the operation in drive patterns A to C, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved in one of the continuous operation drive patterns D to G based on the information of individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each movement mode A to D. In this way, by moving the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the information of one drive data 1 for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation across multiple movement modes A to D, the amount of drive data used for one movement mode A to D can be reduced, thereby reducing the memory load. In addition, the control burden, such as reading and temporarily storing drive data when operating the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is also reduced.

In this embodiment, when the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, and where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination determination condition is uncertain, is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), it is determined whether the termination determination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation, has been fulfilled, that is, whether the player has operated the operation button 20, at the timing when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 returns from the intermediate operating position 1 or intermediate operating position 2, which is the driving position, to the standby position or intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position. If the termination determination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, has not been fulfilled, the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, continues. On the other hand, if the termination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, is met (i.e., if the player operates the operation button 20), the operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the information in drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), will be terminated, even if it is in the middle of the operation. Then, based on the information in the individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each movable mode A to D determined according to the notification content, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 will be moved in the operation in drive patterns D to G, which are individual operations as continuous operations.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D is performed based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), and the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), it is determined whether or not the termination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation, has been met (whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20) at the timing when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 returns from the drive side position to the return side position. In other words, in the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation, it is determined whether or not the termination condition has been met, which is whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20, each time the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned in the return side position. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the termination condition has been met during the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the common drive patterns A to C (i.e., when it is determined that the player has made an operation on the operation button 20), the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is located in the return position, is stopped, and the operation in the common drive patterns A to C is terminated. As a result, if the termination condition for the operation in the common drive patterns A to C is met while the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the common drive patterns A to C is being executed, the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be stopped and the operation in the common drive patterns A to C can be terminated when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned in the return position after the termination condition has been met. Consequently, when it is determined that the termination condition for the common operation in drive patterns A to C has been met, the common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive patterns A to C can be terminated immediately. Therefore, it is possible to immediately transition to the next operation from the meeting of the termination condition for a continuous operation that is common to multiple movement modes A to D and whose timing of meeting the termination condition may be uncertain. As a result, after the termination conditions for multiple movement modes A to D are met, the operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 can be terminated without causing any discomfort to the player, and the movable body can be smoothly transitioned to the next operation. Therefore, when other individual operations are executed immediately after the common operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is completed, a smooth transition from the common operation to the other individual operation is possible, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort during the transition from the common operation to the other individual operation. This makes it possible to operate the movable rotating mechanism 37 without impairing the effect of the display or performance during the execution of a display or performance in the first or second special feature game.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 230 to 289. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again, even if they were already described in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of the gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 230 to 234. Here, Figures 230 to 232 are front views showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, Figure 233 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 provided on the game board 31, and Figure 234 is a side view showing the area around the movable rotating mechanism member 37 with a portion cut off.

[Configuration of the front frame 11]
As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illuminated unit 27, among other things.

The operation button 20 is located in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see Figure 7) that switches the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 (described later) depending on whether or not the button is pressed. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to determine the operation status (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20, as described later (see Figures 256 and 257). This operation button 20 is operated to trigger operation button effects (see Figure 277) that are executed in special feature game effects performed in special feature games that clearly indicate the results of the jackpot lottery to the player, triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game balls. In the game machine 10, when the player rotates the launch handle 22 as a predetermined game operation, the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 (described later) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation, thereby performing the basic game. For example, depending on the predetermined game operation performed by the player on the launch handle 22, it is possible to launch the game balls into the left side area of the game board 31, a so-called left-handed shot, and to launch the game balls into the right side area of the game board 31, a so-called right-handed shot. In this embodiment, during normal gameplay, left-handed play is encouraged to insert game balls into the first prize slot 314, which serves as the starting ball entry point, and to execute the first special feature game. During probability variation gameplay and time-saving gameplay, right-handed play is encouraged to insert game balls into the through gate 317R and the second prize slot 315, which serves as the starting ball entry point, and to execute the second special feature game. During jackpot gameplay, right-handed play is encouraged to insert game balls into the variable prize slot 316. Therefore, players can prevent disadvantages by performing the prescribed game operation on the launch handle 22 according to the game state.

[Composition of inner frame 12]
As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball launching mechanism 32, a game board 31, and the like.

As shown in Figure 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 comprises a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and by performing a reciprocating motion, which is a continuous movement of a movable body, between a return-side position and a drive-side position, it supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launching rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that causes the launching hammer, which is a movable body, to perform a reciprocating motion, which is a continuous movement, between a return-side position and a drive-side position, thereby launching the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, when the player performs a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the launch handle 22, and one game ball is launched towards the game area every 0.6 seconds. Note that the game ball launching mechanism 32 may use other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323 to launch the game balls.

As shown in Figure 230, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general prize entry opening 313, a first prize entry opening 314 and a second prize entry opening 315 as starting ball entry means, a variable prize entry opening 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an out opening 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display unit 36, and a movable rotating mechanism member 37 as a movable means.

The inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the launched game balls toward the game area on the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, or the variable prize slot 316 are discharged from the out slot 318. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, or the variable prize slot 316, a predetermined number of prize balls are dispensed. For example, if a ball enters the general prize slot 313, 10 prize balls are dispensed; if a ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, 3 prize balls are dispensed; and if a ball enters the variable prize slot 316, 10 prize balls are dispensed.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R, no prize balls are paid out, but the entry of a game ball into the through gates 317L and 317R triggers a process for determining whether a win or loss is achieved, specifically a general prize draw. If the general prize draw results in a win, the general prize game is played. In this general prize game, the movable electric mechanism 315b is activated, opening the second prize entry point 315, which is the starting ball entry point. In other words, a movement control process is executed for the electric mechanism 315b, determining one movement mode from several available movement modes (short opening of 0.1 seconds, long opening of 6 seconds). In the general prize game, according to the selected movement mode, the electric mechanism 315b performs a continuous reciprocating motion between a standby position (return side position) that closes the second prize entry point 315 and an operating position (drive side position) that opens the second prize entry point 315. Thus, in a regular winning game, the opening of the second prize slot 315 allows the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315.

In this embodiment, two operating modes are set: one in which the second prize entry opening 315 is open for 0.1 seconds, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the second prize entry opening 315, and another in which the second prize entry opening 315 is open for 6 seconds, making it easy for game balls to enter the second prize entry opening 315 (see Figures 240(C) and 240(D)). Therefore, in the operation control processing for the electric mechanism 315b, one operating mode is determined from the two operating modes, where the ease of game ball entry into the second prize entry opening 315 differs and the timing of the termination determination condition may be unpredictable. The electric mechanism 315b then performs continuous operation in the determined operating mode.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, which serve as the starting ball entry point, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4), which executes the win/fail lottery means, performs a process related to the jackpot lottery as the win/fail lottery process. The result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is notified by a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) in which a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the special symbol game ends. In this jackpot game, a predetermined number of round games (for example, 5 or 16 times) are repeatedly executed in the opening/closing execution mode. In each round game, the movable opening/closing door 319 moves back and forth between a standby position (return side position) that closes the variable prize slot 316 and an operating position (drive side position) that opens the variable prize slot 316. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the movable control process for the opening/closing door 319 involves determining the number of rounds of play (for example, 5 or 16) based on the result of the jackpot lottery. The determined number of rounds are then executed, causing the opening/closing door 319 to repeatedly move back and forth in a continuous motion. Thus, during a jackpot, the variable prize entry point 316 is repeatedly opened by the continuous motion of the opening/closing door 319, allowing for the expectation of a large payout of prize balls.

As shown in Figures 230 to 234, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, can move up and down, rotate, and expand and contract by the mechanism drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 235), as will be described in detail later, and is operated in special feature games to provide the player with predetermined information related to the game. In this embodiment, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is operated in one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes in order to inform the player whether or not a predetermined performance (super reach performance or special reach performance) will be performed, or to inform the player whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot after suggesting that the result is a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variation jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, various notifications are given to the player depending on the movable mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, and four movable modes are set corresponding to the content of the notifications. Specifically, there are four modes of operation: Mode A (SP Development Notification), which notifies the player that a Super Reach animation will be performed; Mode B (SPSP Development Notification), which notifies the player that a Special Reach animation will be performed; Mode C (Probability Increase Notification), which notifies the player that it is a probability-increasing jackpot; and Mode D (No Development Notification, No Probability Increase Notification), which notifies the player that a predetermined animation (Super Reach animation or Special Reach animation) will not be performed, or that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot) (see Figure 266).

Furthermore, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 may be moved in order to provide the player with predetermined information related to the game during a jackpot game. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery in a special feature game is clearly indicated as a regular jackpot, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 may be moved in the jackpot game as a probability-increase promotion effect to announce that the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability-increase jackpot. Also, if there is a reserved right to perform a special feature game, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 may be moved in the jackpot game to announce that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special feature game performed after the end of the jackpot game is a jackpot (so-called reserved consecutive win announcement).

Furthermore, in the special feature game, by moving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, it may be possible to inform the player whether the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special feature game is a jackpot, or whether there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special feature game is a jackpot, depending on the manner of movement.

The movable rotating mechanism member 37 has a flower-like shape when viewed from the front in its reduced state and is positioned on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The installation location of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is not limited to the front side of the symbol display unit 341; it can be changed as long as it is movable and visible to the player. The movable rotating mechanism member 37 comprises multiple plate-like members 370, a rotating shaft 372, and multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373.

The multiple plate-like members 370 have the same or substantially the same shape, mimicking flower petals, and are, for example, entirely made of resin. Of course, at least one of the multiple plate-like members 370 may have a different shape. Furthermore, the multiple plate-like members 370 do not necessarily have to be shaped like flower petals.

The rotating shaft 372 is the part to which rotational driving force is input from the mechanism 37a (see Figure 235), described later, and extends in the front-to-back direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display unit 341. The rotating shaft 372 is in a rotating state when rotational force is input from the mechanism 37a according to the control of the MPU 51, and is de-rotated when the input of rotational force from the mechanism 37a is stopped according to the control of the MPU 51.

Furthermore, the rotational speed of the rotating shaft 372 (multiple plate-shaped members 370) in the rotating state, i.e., the rotational speed of the movable rotating component member 37, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, or even changeable in rotational speed or direction.

Multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are fixed radially to the rotation axis 372 in a front view. Therefore, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are rotatable around the rotation axis 372 as the rotation of the rotation axis 372 occurs. The rotation axis 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to the lifting shaft 374, and its movement in the forward/backward direction is restricted by a regulating ring 376. Here, the lifting shaft 374 moves the rotation axis 372 vertically, and the rotation axis 372 is moved vertically by a driving force input from the later-described mechanism drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 235). As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is able to move vertically as a whole when the rotation axis 372 moves vertically.

Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 supports one plate-shaped member 370, and is capable of sliding the supported plate-shaped member 370 along the radial direction of the rotation axis 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 slides the supported plate-shaped member 370 along the radial direction of the rotation axis 372 by converting the rotational force input from, for example, the component drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 235), described later, into a linear force. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can employ a known mechanism for converting rotational force into a linear force. Specifically, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can be an actuator containing one or more components such as a rack, screw shaft, ball screw, endless belt, wire, chain, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, or rollers. Furthermore, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 may utilize magnetic or electromagnetic force.

Thus, in the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the rotation axis 372 is rotatably supported by the lifting shaft 374, and plate-shaped members 370 and 371 are slidably supported one by one by multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 arranged radially from the rotation axis 372. Therefore, the first rotating mechanism member 37 is movable vertically, rotatable around the rotation axis 372, and expandable/contractable around the rotation axis 372 on the front side of the symbol display section 341.

Here, Figure 235 is a block diagram showing an example of the main components of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10.

As shown in Figure 235, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled for vertical movement, rotation, and expansion/contraction via a mechanism drive mechanism 37a controlled by the MPU 51. The mechanism drive mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 via an input/output interface 52. This mechanism drive mechanism 37a includes, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 has returned to its standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors and DC motors, and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor and a contact sensor. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 372, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 and the lifting shaft 374 of the movable rotating gimmick member 37 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 372, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 and the lifting shaft 374. The movable rotating gimmick member 37 is movable vertically on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 between a standby position (shown by a dashed line in Figure 231), which is a predetermined return-side position shown in Figure 230 where the movable rotating gimmick member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A, and an operating position (shown by a solid line in Figure 231), which is the position where the movable rotating gimmick member 37 is moved the furthest downward and the entire movable rotating gimmick member 37 is exposed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 233, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can rotate counterclockwise on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by inputting rotational force to the rotation shaft 372. The rotation position of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 rotates in the operating position. Moreover, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can expand and contract by inputting driving force to the expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, causing each plate-shaped member 370 to slide radially along the rotation shaft 372 on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The movable rotating mechanism member 37 can rotate on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in both the contracted state (see Figure 233(A)) and the expanded state (see Figure 233(B)).

Furthermore, the motor driver of the mechanism 37a is connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver can also acquire detection results from the reset detection unit and transmit them to the sound lamp control device 5. Alternatively, the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and the reset detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output interface 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

Furthermore, there are no particular limitations on the configuration for moving the movable rotating component 37 up and down, rotating, and expanding and contracting. For example, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the movable rotating component 37 is not limited to that provided by a motor; it may also be provided by other driving sources such as a solenoid.

Here, referring to Figure 236, the memory area used by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 of the gaming machine 10 for performing jackpot and regular symbol jackpot draws will be explained. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the draw counter storage area 412a, special symbol hold storage area 412b, and regular symbol hold storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute processes related to jackpot draws, which are win/loss draw processes, and set the display time for special symbol variations, as well as execute processes related to regular symbol jackpot draws, which are win/loss draw processes, and set the display time for regular symbol variations.

The lottery counter storage area 412a stores the following lottery counters used to execute the process related to the jackpot lottery, which is the process of determining whether or not to play a jackpot game: a jackpot random number counter C1 used for determining whether or not to play a jackpot game; a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot; and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the type of loss when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss.

Furthermore, the lottery counter storage area 412a stores the following counters for the lottery: the initial value counter CIN1 for the jackpot random number counter C1, which is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1; and the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which is used to determine the variation display time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

Furthermore, the lottery counter storage area 412a stores the following lottery counters used to execute the lottery process for determining whether or not to win the regular prize draw: a regular prize random number counter C4 used for determining whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b of the second prize slot 315, and a regular prize type random number counter C5 used when determining the regular prize type (short opening or long opening) if the result of the regular prize draw is a regular prize.

Furthermore, the lottery counter storage area 412a stores the following lottery counters: the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, used for setting the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4; and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, used for determining the variation display time of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36.

Furthermore, each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS2 is used as a loop counter, where 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and it returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when executing the jackpot lottery process, setting the display time for special symbols, and setting the jackpot and miss types, as well as when executing the jackpot lottery process, setting the display time for regular symbols, and setting the regular symbol win types.

The special feature hold storage area 412b comprises a first special feature hold storage area REA, a second special feature hold storage area REB, and a special feature execution area AE. The first special feature hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a first special feature hold count storage area NAA. The second special feature hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a second special feature hold count storage area NAB.

When a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, which serves as the starting ball entry point, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA. Also, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, which serves as the starting ball entry point, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB. Furthermore, a separate lottery counter storage area 412a (such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a special symbol variation type counter CS1) may be provided for each of the first special symbol hold storage area REA and the second special symbol hold storage area REB.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery results for the jackpot draw for the special symbol game, which is executed based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 to the fourth hold storage area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA, and the first hold storage area REB1 to the fourth hold storage area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the display time (special symbol variation pattern) for the special symbols (decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341) in the special symbol game, either in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first prize entry point 314, which serves as the starting ball entry area, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the available areas of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1, second reserve area REA2, third reserve area REA3, and fourth reserve area REA4, in that order of priority. The first special symbol reserve count memory area NAA stores the number of special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 as the first special symbol reserve count N.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315, which serves as the starting ball entry point, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the available areas of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB in the order of priority: first reserve area REB1, second reserve area REB2, third reserve area REB3, and fourth reserve area REB4. The second special symbol reserve count memory area NAB stores the number of special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 as the second special symbol reserve count M.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 has a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls in the first reserved ball storage area REA1 to the fourth reserved ball storage area REA4 of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area REA, and the first reserved ball storage area REB1 to the fourth reserved ball storage area REB4 of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area REB. This allows for the storage of up to four records each of special symbol win/loss information as entry history into the first prize entry point 314 and the second prize entry point 315, which serve as the starting ball entry points.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, it is conceivable that the first and second prize entry points 314 and 315, which serve as the starting ball entry points, are both provided with a maximum of eight retention areas. In this case as well, it is possible to retain up to eight sets of special symbol win/loss information as prize history. The storage processing of the special symbol win/loss information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The special symbol execution area AE is a memory area used to move special symbol win/loss information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB when the display of a special symbol variation is started in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. Specifically, the special symbol win/loss information in the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the special symbol execution area AE, and if there is no special symbol win/loss information in the first hold area REB1 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB and the second special symbol hold count M stored in the second special symbol hold count storage area NAB is 0, the special symbol win/loss information in the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the second special symbol game takes precedence over the first special symbol game. In the high-frequency support modes, namely the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, the second special symbol game is primarily executed by shooting the game balls into the right-hand area of the game board 31, a technique known as "right-hand shooting."

Furthermore, in another embodiment, if the difference between the number of reserved special figures N stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the first special figure reserved storage area REA and the number of reserved special figures M stored in the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB of the second special figure reserved storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved area with the larger number will be prioritized and moved to the special figure execution area AE. Also, in another embodiment, the special figure success/failure information from the first reserved area REA1 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB will be moved alternately to the special figure execution area AE.

Then, at the start of each special symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as special symbol win/loss information in the special symbol execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserve area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the second reserve area REA2 shifts to the first reserve area REA1, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 shifts to the second reserve area REA2, and the special symbol win/loss information stored in the fourth reserve area REA4 shifts to the third reserve area REA3.

Similarly, if the first holding area REB1 of the second special feature holding storage area REB is moved to the special feature execution area AE, the special feature success/failure information stored in the second holding area REB2 shifts to the first holding area REB1, the special feature success/failure information stored in the third holding area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the special feature success/failure information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17, for example, by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 637, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial jackpot random number counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial jackpot random number counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time a game ball enters the first prize entry point 314 or the second prize entry point 315, which serve as the starting ball entry points, are stored in the first to fourth prize entry areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 or the second special symbol reserve storage area REA2.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are set in two types according to the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table memory area of ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode (normal game state or time-saving game state) and the high probability mode (probability variation game state). Here, Figure 237(A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Figure 237(B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in Figures 237(A) and 237(B), multiple win/loss tables are provided for low-probability mode and high-probability mode, respectively, where the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery (jackpot probability) differs according to the game setting value. Both the low-probability mode and high-probability mode win/loss tables contain six win/loss tables, corresponding to six game setting values from 1 to 6. The probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, making it more advantageous for the player.

With game setting 1, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 821 (0 to 820) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 1, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 2, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 845 (0 to 844) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 2, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately four times that of low probability mode, approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536).

With game setting 3, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 3, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/75.4 (869/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 4, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 4, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 5, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 5, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 6, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately four times that of low probability mode, approximately 1/69.6 (941/65536).

Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is anything other than a random number that results in a jackpot, the jackpot lottery will result in a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/loss table and the high-probability mode win/loss table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot draw for the same game setting are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a jackpot are not common. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot do not have to be consecutive values; some or all of them may be discrete values.

Furthermore, while there are six low-probability mode win/loss tables and six high-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values, only one win/loss table is needed for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six. It is also conceivable to have multiple low-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to multiple game setting values, while having only one high-probability mode win/loss table. That is, it is possible to have multiple game setting values for the low-probability mode, and no tiered game setting values for the high-probability mode, resulting in a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to have a uniform jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and multiple game setting values for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 19, and resets to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315. In the game machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411 sets the corresponding value of the jackpot type counter C2 for each of the two types of jackpots: probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots.

Here, Figure 237(C) shows an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in Figure 237(C), if the type of special game is the first special game triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314, which is the starting ball entry area, the number of random numbers resulting in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 (0-9), the number of random numbers resulting in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 5 (10-14), and the number of random numbers resulting in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 (15-19). On the other hand, if the type of special game is the second special game triggered by a ball entering the second prize slot 315, which is the starting ball entry area, the number of random numbers resulting in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 (0-4), the number of random numbers resulting in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 (5-14), and the number of random numbers resulting in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 (15-19).

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a continuous bonus jackpot in both the first and second special symbol games is set to the same 75%, but the probability of a 16R continuous bonus jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. In other words, in the continuous bonus game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode), the expected value of game balls obtained when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot is set higher compared to the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b).

Furthermore, in both the first and second special symbol games, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability-increasing jackpot, the game transitions to a probability-increasing game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the game machine 10, there is no upper limit set on the number of special symbol games that can be played in the probability-increasing game state, and the game machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop probability-increasing machine.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a regular jackpot, the game transitions to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state (time-saving game count). If the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol game counts, the game transitions to the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, after the execution of the upper limit of special symbol games. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100; it may be any other number.

Furthermore, the transition from the probability variation state to the normal state may not be limited to the execution of the maximum number of special symbol games, but may also occur, for example, when the state transition lottery (downgrade lottery) is won. In this case, it is conceivable that the transition (downgrade) from the probability variation state to the normal state will not occur until a predetermined number of special symbol games have been executed, and that this predetermined number will be guaranteed as the minimum number of special symbol games executed in the probability variation state. This prevents the number of special symbol games executed in the probability variation state from being significantly reduced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, separate distribution tables are set for the first prize entry point 314, which serves as the trigger for executing the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second prize entry point 315, which serves as the trigger for executing the second special symbol game upon winning. The probability of winning a different type of jackpot differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first prize entry point 314 or the second prize entry point 315. However, it is also conceivable that the probability of winning a different type of jackpot is the same for both the first and second special symbol games. Additionally, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability variation machine; it could also be configured as an ST machine including a V-ST machine, or a mixed type 1 and type 2 machine, etc.

Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "miss," based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special feature execution area AE.

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize entry opening 316 is opened in a predetermined manner is repeated 5 times, based on the movable body configuration of the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body set for a 5R jackpot. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game is repeated 16 times, based on the movable body configuration of the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body set for a 16R jackpot. In other words, in a jackpot game, information corresponding to the movable body configuration according to the number of round games in the jackpot game, which is determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process, is set, and based on this information, the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body, moves back and forth in a continuous motion between a standby position, which is the return side position that closes the variable prize entry opening 316, and an operating position, which is the drive side position that opens the variable prize entry opening 316, according to the number of round games in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, as described later, each round of game ends when the maximum opening time of the variable prize slot 316 has elapsed, or when the maximum number of prize balls enter before the maximum opening time has elapsed due to appropriate predetermined game operations performed by the player on the launch handle 22. Therefore, the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition for each round of game may be uncertain. Because the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition may be uncertain, the period during which the movable opening/closing door 319 is moved to the operating position (drive side position) in each round of game is also uncertain. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 319 is continuously operated, the period during which the opening/closing door 319 is moved to the operating position (drive side position) includes at least a first period (for example, when the maximum number of prize balls enter before the maximum opening time of the variable prize slot 316 has elapsed) and a second period that is longer than the first period (for example, when the maximum opening time of the variable prize slot 316 has elapsed).

Furthermore, because the timing of the termination condition being met can be unpredictable, the termination timing of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) can also be unpredictable, resulting in an unpredictable execution period for the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game). In other words, the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) includes, depending on the type of jackpot game, a first period corresponding to the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) for at least 5R probability variation jackpot games and 5R normal jackpot games, and a second period that is longer than the first period corresponding to the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) for 16R probability variation jackpot games.

In this embodiment, as described later, during one round of play in a jackpot game, the movable opening/closing door 319 moves back and forth once between a standby position (return position) where it closes the variable prize entry opening 316 and an operating position (drive position) where it opens the variable prize entry opening 316. However, in at least one of the multiple rounds of play executed in a single jackpot game, the movable opening/closing door 319 moves back and forth multiple times between the standby position (return position) where it closes the variable prize entry opening 316 and the operating position (drive position) where it opens the variable prize entry opening 316. By adopting a continuous motion mode in which the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition may be unpredictable, it is also conceivable to set multiple opening/closing modes of the variable prize entry opening 316 (movement modes of the movable opening/closing door 319) for a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described later, the maximum opening time of the variable prize entry point is uniform in each round of the jackpot game. However, by setting multiple maximum opening times for the variable prize entry point in each round of the game, it is also conceivable to set multiple opening and closing modes of the variable prize entry point 316 (movement modes of the movable opening/closing door 319) for the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game ends with the movable opening/closing door 319 in the standby position (return side), the game transitions to a probability variation game state, which is a high-probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the movable electric mechanism 315b, through the first control. In this embodiment, the probability variation game state continues until the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the MPU 41 is determined to be a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," or a "5R normal jackpot."

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R regular jackpot, after the jackpot game ends with the movable opening/closing door 319 in the standby position (return side), the second control transitions to a time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode with a low probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the movable electric mechanism 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the jackpot result after a predetermined number of draws, such as 100 draws, or it ends if the player is notified that the draw is a jackpot before the predetermined number of draws has elapsed.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, it is conceivable to perform a lottery process in the special feature game to determine whether or not to transition from the probability variation game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state. Note that if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the game will not transition from the probability variation game state to the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the case where the game machine 10 has three types of jackpots—5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot—is used as an example for explanation. However, it is not limited to this, and other types of jackpots such as 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, and 16R normal jackpot are also conceivable.

Furthermore, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17, by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 or the second special symbol reserve storage area REA2 store the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time the game ball enters the first prize entry point 314 or the second prize entry point 315, which are the starting ball entry points.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result for the variable display shown on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in a jackpot is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area of the ROM 411 sets the corresponding value of the reach random number counter C3 for three types of misses: a front/back miss reach where the final stopping symbol stops one position before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs; a non-front/back miss reach where the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs; and a complete miss where no reach occurs.

Here, Figure 237(D) shows an example of a table of miss types. In the example shown in Figure 237(D), the random number values for a near miss are 0 to 8, the random number values for a reach other than a near miss are 9 to 38, and the random number values for a complete miss are 39 to 238. Note that in special feature games that result in a 5R probability-changing jackpot, a 16R probability-changing jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, i.e., special feature games that transition to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, "reach" refers to a state in which, between the start of the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341 and the display of the symbols at their stop, the symbols are more likely to form a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot. For example, in this state, two of the three stop positions of the decorative symbols on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 are the same symbol, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the reach state of the symbol display unit 341, story-based presentation processing is performed, such as displaying videos of predetermined characters to suggest the level of expectation, or player-participation-type presentation processing is performed, where the player's actions on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the presentation. It is also possible that the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or displayed in a reduced or enlarged state during the execution of these presentation processes.

The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 determines the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time) which indicates the variation display time of the special symbols (decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, according to the result of the jackpot lottery. The special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 as a special symbol variation pattern command along with the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. The sound lamp control device 5 controls the display effects on the variable display unit 34 (symbol display section 341) and the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, during special feature games (first special feature game or second special feature game) and jackpot games by executing display control processing and movement control processing based on special feature game (first special feature game or second special feature game). Specifically, when a special feature game is started, display control processing is executed according to the result of the jackpot lottery to determine the display effects to be executed in the special feature game, and the determined display effects are executed on the symbol display section 341 during the special feature game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, display control processing is executed when the jackpot is started to determine the display effects to be executed in the jackpot game, and the determined display effects are executed on the symbol display section 341 during the jackpot game. Furthermore, sound effects from the speaker 26 and lamp effects from the lighting section 27 are executed as part of the display effects in which this jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, when the special feature game begins, a movement control process is executed according to the result of the jackpot lottery. This allows the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 during the special feature game to be determined from multiple movement patterns. If a continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is determined, the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is executed during the special feature game. Additionally, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a movement control process is executed when the jackpot begins. This allows the display effects to be determined during the jackpot game. If a continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is determined, the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is executed during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing shown in Figure 241 (described later) is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time of the main processing. The first to fourth retention areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol retention storage area REA1 or the second special symbol retention storage area REA2 store the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 at the time the game ball enters the first prize entry point 314 or the second prize entry point 315, which are the starting ball entry points.

The MPU 41 then determines a special symbol variation pattern, indicating the display time of the special symbol variation, based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and a pre-set variation table (see Figures 238(A) to 238(C)) determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the special symbol variation pattern type by referring to the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 238(A)), the probability variation jackpot variation table (see Figure 238(B)), or the losing variation table (see Figure 238(C)) pre-stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. These variation tables may be provided separately for low probability mode and high probability mode. Furthermore, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for 5R probability variation jackpots and 16R probability variation jackpots, respectively.

Here, Figures 238(A), 238(B), and 238(C) show examples of variation tables. In the normal jackpot variation table shown in Figure 238(A), the probability variation jackpot variation table shown in Figure 238(B), and the miss variation table shown in Figure 238(C), the special feature variation patterns are pre-associated according to the value of the special feature variation type counter CS1. The MPU 41 then refers to the normal jackpot variation table shown in Figure 238(A) if the jackpot lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the probability variation jackpot variation table shown in Figure 238(B) if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot" or a "16R probability variation jackpot," and the miss variation table shown in Figure 238(C) if the lottery result is a "miss," thereby identifying the type of special feature variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 238(A) and 238(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1.

Here, when the special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referenced, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the special game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the normal reach performance pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referenced, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movable control process to determine the movable mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 when an effect corresponding to the normal reach effect pattern is executed as a display effect on the symbol display unit 341. This mode is either movable mode C (see Figure 266(C)) as a continuous operation to announce a probability variation jackpot, or movable mode D (see Figure 266(D)) as a continuous operation to announce a normal jackpot. During the execution of the effect corresponding to the normal reach effect pattern on the symbol display unit 341, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates in movable mode C (see Figure 266(C)) or movable mode D (see Figure 266(D)).

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected while the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referenced, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 determines a super reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 60s as the variation type (performance pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the special game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the super reach performance pattern. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is a super reach performance.

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referenced, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movable control process to determine the movable mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 when a display effect corresponding to the super reach effect pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341. This mode is determined as a continuous operation to announce the development of a super reach effect (see Figure 266(A)), a continuous operation to announce a probability variation jackpot (see Figure 266(C)), or a continuous operation to announce a normal jackpot (see Figure 266(D)). During the execution of the effect corresponding to the super reach effect pattern on the symbol display unit 341, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates in movable mode A (see Figure 266(A)), movable mode C (see Figure 266(C)), or movable mode D (see Figure 266(D)).

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected while the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referenced, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 determines the special reach performance pattern, which has the longest variation display time of 90s, as the variation type (performance pattern), and the special game performance is executed in accordance with the special reach performance pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is the special reach performance.

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referenced, the movable control processing by the sub-control unit 332 will execute an effect corresponding to the special reach effect pattern as a display effect on the symbol display unit 341. In such cases, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 will have two modes of movement: a continuous operation to announce that it will develop into a super reach effect (see Figure 266(A)), and a dynamic operation to announce that it will develop into a special reach effect. Mode B (see Figure 266(A)) and either Mode C (see Figure 266(C)) as a continuous operation to announce a probability variation jackpot, or Mode D (see Figure 266(D)) as a continuous operation to announce a normal jackpot, are determined. During the execution of the animation corresponding to the super reach animation pattern on the symbol display unit 341, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates in Mode A (see Figure 266(A)), Mode B (see Figure 266(B)), and Mode C (see Figure 266(C)) or Mode D (see Figure 266(D)).

As shown in Figure 238(C), in the losing variation table, the correspondence between the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the special symbol variation pattern is defined according to the type of stop display of the decorative symbols when a loss occurs (front/back loss reach, reach other than front/back loss, complete loss), which is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, if the stop display type when a loss occurs is a front/back loss reach or a reach other than front/back loss, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Then, when the losing variation table is referenced and one of the special variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected, similar to when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referenced and one of the special variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movable control process to determine a predetermined reach performance pattern (normal reach performance pattern, super reach performance pattern, or special reach performance pattern) according to the type of special variation pattern "01" to "03" as the variation type (performance pattern), and the symbol display unit 341, etc., executes a special game performance according to the predetermined reach performance pattern.

Furthermore, when the losing variation table is referenced and the special variation pattern "01" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movement control process. When the display unit 341 executes an effect corresponding to the normal reach effect pattern, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is determined to operate in movement mode D (see Figure 266(D)) as a continuous operation to indicate that the effect will not develop into a super reach effect. During the execution of the effect corresponding to the normal reach effect pattern on the display unit 341, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates in movement mode D (see Figure 266(D)).

Furthermore, when the losing variation table is referenced and the special variation pattern "02" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movable control process to determine the movable rotating mechanism member 37's movement mode when a display effect corresponding to the super reach effect pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341. This determines two movement modes: Movement mode A (see Figure 266(A)) as a continuous operation to indicate that the effect will develop into a super reach effect, and Movement mode D (see Figure 266(D)) as a continuous operation to indicate that the effect will not develop into a special reach effect. During the execution of the normal reach effect pattern on the symbol display unit 341, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates in both movement mode A (see Figure 266(A)) and movement mode D (see Figure 266(D)).

Furthermore, when the losing variation table is referenced and the special variation pattern "03" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movable control process to determine the movable rotating mechanism member 37's movement mode when a special reach effect pattern is executed as a display effect on the symbol display unit 341. This mode determines two continuous movements: Movement mode A (see Figure 266(A)) to indicate development into a super reach effect, and Movement mode B (see Figure 266(B)) to indicate development into a special reach effect. During the execution of the normal reach effect pattern on the symbol display unit 341, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates in both Movement Mode A (see Figure 266(A)) and Movement Mode B (see Figure 266(B)).

On the other hand, if the stop display type upon a miss is a complete miss, either special symbol variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. If special symbol variation pattern "04" is selected, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 determines a no-reach performance pattern (7-second non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the special symbol game performance is executed according to the 7-second non-reach performance pattern in the symbol display unit 341, etc. If special symbol variation pattern "05" is selected, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 determines a no-reach performance pattern (10-second non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the special symbol game performance is executed according to the 10-second non-reach performance pattern in the symbol display unit 341, etc. Note that if the stop display type upon a miss is a complete miss, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is not moved.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, when a special symbol variation pattern "04" results in a loss, the variation display for the losing pattern is executed, where the variation display of decorative symbols stops with a combination of losing symbols, without any accompanying pre-announcement effects such as the display of characters or messages. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, when a special symbol variation pattern "05" results in a loss, the variation display for the losing pattern is executed, where the variation display of decorative symbols stops with a combination of losing symbols, accompanied by pre-announcement effects such as the display of characters or messages. Also, when a loss occurs during the variation display for special symbol variation pattern "05," a player-participation operation effect that reflects the player's operation of the operation button 20 may be executed as a pre-announcement effect.

Furthermore, the types of special pattern variations are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 238(A), 238(B), and 238(C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach sequences are provided for the normal reach sequence sequence corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "01," each with different characters, storylines, etc. One of these normal reach sequences is selected and executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, multiple types of super reach sequences with different characters and storylines are available for execution in the super reach sequence sequence corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "02". One of these super reach sequences will be selected and executed. Super reach sequences are sequences with a longer variation time than normal reach sequences, and are executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot is higher than in normal reach sequences, but lower than in special reach sequences.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach sequences are available, each with different characters and storylines, which are executed in the special reach sequence sequence corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "03". One of these special reach sequences is selected and executed. A special reach sequence is a reach sequence with a longer variation time than a normal reach sequence, and can develop from, for example, a normal reach sequence or a super reach sequence. A special reach sequence is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot is higher than that of a normal reach sequence or a special reach sequence.

Furthermore, the performance patterns corresponding to the special symbol variation patterns may include player-participation performances that reflect the player's actions on the operation button 20. These include, for example, single-press performances where a single press is reflected in the performance, rapid-press performances where rapid pressing of the operation button 20 is reflected in the performance, and long-press performances where long-press performances of the operation button 20 are reflected in the performance.

In this embodiment, as described later, a single-shot operation animation is performed to inform the player whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Specifically, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is set to movable mode C (see Figure 266(C)) or movable mode D (see Figure 266(D)) in order to inform the player that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the single-shot operation animation is performed on the symbol display unit 341 until the termination condition (operation of the operation button 20 or expiration of the validity period) set during the execution of the operation of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations for movable modes C and D, is met (see Figure 277(C)).

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the display time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (the display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341), it inputs the special symbol variation pattern command indicating the special symbol variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03", with "A" added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03", with "B" added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R probability variation jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which has a "C" indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot added before the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03." Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," which has a "D" indicating a miss added before the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "05." In other words, the special symbol variation pattern command includes not only the special symbol variation pattern (the time of special symbol gameplay), which is the display time of the special symbols, but also information that identifies the result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the lottery process. The audio lamp control device 5, based on the special symbol variation pattern command, can determine not only the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol game time), which is the variation display time of the special symbols, but also the result of the jackpot lottery. Based on the variation display time of the special symbols (special symbol game time) and the result of the jackpot lottery, it determines the variation type (performance pattern) displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and details such as the stop display combination of the decorative symbols. Then, based on the determined details such as the variation type (performance pattern), the audio lamp control device 5 displays the decorative symbols in variation and stop displays on the symbol display unit 341, executes image performances in accordance with the variation display of the decorative symbols, executes audio performances via the speaker 26 in accordance with the variation display of the decorative symbols, executes illumination performances (lamp performances) via the illumination unit 27, and moves the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in predetermined movable modes A to D as needed.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process to determine the display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcontroller, the MPU 41 can reliably perform the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, since the details of the variation patterns of the decorative symbols actually displayed in the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation patterns.

The fluctuation tables shown in Figures 238(A) to 238(C) are used commonly across various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and probability-changing game state). However, individual fluctuation tables may be set for each game state, and separate fluctuation tables may also be set for high-frequency support mode (time-saving game state and probability-changing game state) and low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, when individual fluctuation tables are set for each game state or support mode, the average value of the fluctuation display time will be set longer in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) than in the time-saving game state and probability-changing game state (high-frequency support mode). Also, when different fluctuation tables are set for the time-saving game state and the probability-changing game state, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be set longer in the time-saving game state than in the probability-changing game state, or vice versa.

Here, Figure 239 is a block diagram showing an example of the general-purpose data hold storage area 412c of the memory area of the main control device 4 shown in Figure 236. As shown in Figure 239, the general-purpose data hold storage area 412c includes the first general-purpose data hold area SE1, the second general-purpose data hold area SE2, the third general-purpose data hold area SE3, the fourth general-purpose data hold area SE4, the general-purpose data variable hold number storage area SNA, and the general-purpose data execution area SAE.

The first to fourth reserve areas SE1 and SE4 are memory areas that store the normal win random number counter C4, the normal win type random number counter C5, and the normal win variation type counter CS2, which are acquired as normal win/loss information used in the normal win lottery performed when a game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R.

The Normal Diagram Fluctuation Reserved Count Storage Area SNA stores the number of Normal Diagram First Reserved Area SE1 to Normal Diagram Fourth Reserved Area SE4, where Normal Diagram win/fail information is stored. In other words, the Normal Diagram Fluctuation Reserved Count Storage Area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of reserved rights to execute Normal Diagram games.

The regular symbol execution area SAE is a memory area used to move the regular symbol win/loss information from the regular symbol first reserve area SE1 when the regular symbol variation display starts in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36. Then, at the start of one regular symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a regular symbol win lottery based on the numerical information (values of the regular win random number counter C4, the regular win type random number counter C5, and the regular symbol variation type counter CS2) stored as regular symbol win/loss information in the regular symbol execution area SAE, using the regular symbol win/loss table (see Figures 240(A) and 240(B)) and the regular symbol win type distribution table (see Figures 240(C) and 240(D)) described below, and determines the regular symbol variation display time for the regular symbols using the regular symbol variation table (not shown). At this time, if the validity information of the general diagram stored in the first general diagram holding area SE1 is moved to the general diagram execution area SAE, the validity information of the general diagram stored in the second general diagram holding area SE2 is shifted to the first general diagram holding area SE1, the validity information of the general diagram stored in the third general diagram holding area SE3 is shifted to the second general diagram holding area SE2, and the validity information of the general diagram stored in the fourth general diagram holding area SE4 is shifted to the third general diagram holding area SE3.

The normal win random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17, for example, by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win random number counter C4 at the time a game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal ball hold storage area 412c, specifically in the normal ball hold storage area SE1 to the normal ball hold storage area SE4. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, a normal win lottery is conducted based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the normal ball hold storage area 412c to determine whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b for a predetermined period of time.

Here, Figures 240(A) and 240(B) show an example of a normal win/loss table. In this embodiment, two types of normal win/loss tables are set: the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 240(A) and the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 240(B). That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal win in the normal win lottery performed in the lottery process to determine whether or not a normal win is achieved differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, with the probability of winning a normal win being set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 240(A) is used in the normal symbol win lottery performed during the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 240(A), in the low-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a normal symbol win, while a value between 1 and 299 indicates a loss. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal symbol win is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is reduced.

The high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 240(B) is used in the normal win lottery performed during the lottery process to determine whether or not a normal win is achieved in the high-frequency support mode, which includes both the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 240(B), in the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table, unlike the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal win random number counter C4 indicates a loss, while a value between 1 and 299 indicates a normal win. In other words, in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), the normal win probability is set to 299/300, which is higher than in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is also increased.

Furthermore, the probability of a normal win in low-frequency support mode and the probability of a normal win in high-frequency support mode are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 240(A) and 240(B), and can be changed as appropriate.

The normal win type random number counter C5 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17, for example, by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win type random number counter C5 at the time a game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal win type reserve storage area 412c, specifically in the normal win type reserve area SE1 to the normal win type reserve area SE4. Furthermore, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C4 stored in the normal win type reserve area SE1 to the normal win type reserve area SE4 determines the type of normal win (short-open normal win and long-open normal win), i.e., the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b.

Here, Figures 240(C) and 240(D) show an example of a distribution table for the type of regular win. In this embodiment, two types of distribution tables for the type of regular win are set: the low-frequency support mode distribution table shown in Figure 240(C) and the high-frequency support mode distribution table shown in Figure 240(D). That is, in this embodiment, the distribution probabilities for the types of regular wins (short-open regular wins and long-open regular wins) differ between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of maximum opening times for the second prize slot 315 in a regular win game are set, so that two types of opening and closing modes (movement modes of the movable electric mechanism 315b) in a regular win game can result in an undetermined timing for the fulfillment of the termination condition. Of course, there may be three or more types of opening and closing modes for the second prize slot 315 in a regular win game.

In this case, a short-opening normal-win game is executed, where the movable electric mechanism 315b opens for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), allowing the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315, which is the starting ball entry point, for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-opening normal-win game, information corresponding to the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set, and the movable electric mechanism 315b is moved from the standby position (return side) to the operating position (drive side). Subsequently, if the termination condition is met due to the elapsed opening time of the electric mechanism 315b, the electric mechanism 315b returns from the operating position (drive side) to the standby position (return side). In a short-opening normal-win game, because the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is short, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315, and in most cases, the game ball does not enter the second prize slot 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening win, the movable electric mechanism 315b is open for a longer period (for example, 6 seconds) than in a short-opening win, allowing the game ball to enter the second prize entry point 315, which is the starting ball entry point, for a longer period (for example, 6 seconds) than in a short-opening win. In this long-opening win, information corresponding to the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b (for example, 6 seconds) is set, and the movable electric mechanism 315b is moved from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position. Subsequently, if it is determined that the termination condition has been met due to the elapsed opening time of the electric mechanism 315b, the electric mechanism 315b returns from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. In the long-opening regular winning game, the extended opening time of the electric mechanism 315b makes it easier for game balls to enter the second winning slot 315, allowing the right to execute the second special winning game to be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, 4).

The low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 240(C) is a table used in the normal win lottery performed in the lottery process to determine whether or not it is a normal win in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 240(C), in the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 0 and 99, it is set to a short-open normal win, and if the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 100 and 199, it is set to a long-open normal win. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the distribution rate between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short-opening normal wins and long-opening normal wins in normal gameplay mode (low-frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution ratio for long-opening normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins is zero) or nearly zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins is one or two).

The high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 240(D) is a table used in the normal win lottery performed in the lottery process to determine whether or not it is a normal win in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, which are high-frequency support modes. As shown in Figure 240(D), in the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is 0, it is set to a short-open normal win, and if the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 1 and 199, it is set to a long-open normal win. In other words, in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (high-frequency support mode), it is set to be easier to be assigned a long-open normal win than a short-open normal win. Of course, the distribution rates for short-opening normal wins and long-opening normal wins in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) are not limited to the example shown in Figure 240(D) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution rate for short-opening normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for short-opening normal wins is zero).

Furthermore, the movement mode of the movable electric mechanism 315b is not limited to once per regular win game, but may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric mechanism 315b during a regular win game may be one type or multiple types. In other words, the movement mode of the electric mechanism 315b during a regular win game is not limited to the two types of short and long openings mentioned above, but can be changed in various ways.

The regular ball variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 99, for example. This is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process shown in Figure 241 (described later) is executed, and repeatedly in step S1414 within the remaining time of the main process. The regular ball variation type counter CS2 at the time a game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R, which are the starting ball entry points, is stored in the regular ball hold storage area 412c, specifically in the regular ball hold storage area SE1 to the regular ball hold storage area SE4. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the regular ball variation display time is determined by referring to the regular ball variation display table (not shown) based on the value of the regular ball variation type counter CS2 stored in the regular ball hold storage area 412c.

The general-purpose variable display table (not shown) includes, for example, a high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table, which is referenced when the system is in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table, which is referenced when the system is in low-frequency support mode. In both the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display tables, multiple general-purpose variable display times are set, for example, corresponding to the value of the general-purpose variable type counter CS2. Furthermore, typically, the high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table is set to have a shorter average general-purpose variable display time than the low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table. For example, some of the variable display times set in the high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table may be longer than some of the variable display times set in the low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table, and all of the variable display times set in the high-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table may be longer than all of the variable display times set in the low-frequency support mode general-purpose variable display table.

Furthermore, a common display table for the general diagram fluctuations may be set for both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. The display time for general diagram fluctuations set in at least one of the general diagram fluctuation display tables (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) may be limited to one type. Additionally, the display time for general diagram fluctuations may be set according to the number of reserved general diagram fluctuations X. For example, the display time may be shortened as the number of reserved general diagram fluctuations X increases, and the display time may be lengthened as the number of reserved general diagram fluctuations X decreases.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described later, during a regular winning game, the movable electric mechanism 315b moves back and forth once between a standby position (return side position) where it closes the second prize opening 315 and an operating position (drive side position) where it opens the second prize opening 315. However, by adopting a continuous movement mode in which the movable electric mechanism 315b moves back and forth multiple times between the standby position (return side position) where it closes the second prize opening 315 and the operating position (drive side position) where it opens the second prize opening 315 during a single regular winning game, it is also conceivable to set multiple opening and closing modes for the second prize opening 315 (movement modes of the movable electric mechanism 315b) during a regular winning game, which can result in an undefined timing for the fulfillment of the termination condition.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
Next, the processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described with reference to Figures 241 to 252. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is activated periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed in the event of a power outage. In this embodiment, the main process will be described.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
Next, with reference to Figure 241, the main processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described. In the main processing, the main control processing for the progress of regular games, special games, and jackpot games is performed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 is performed as a periodic process with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S1413 and S1414 is performed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 until the next cycle.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Figure 241, in step S1401, the MPU 41 performs external output processing to send output data, such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17 or the previous main processing, to control devices such as the sub-control unit 332 or peripheral control unit 140. For example, if commands such as the regular figure variation pattern command, electric mechanism open command, electric mechanism close command, special figure variation pattern command, first special figure hold command, second special figure hold command, special figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, opening/closing execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, opening/closing execution mode end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game end command, or game setting value change command are set in the RAM 412, then the MPU 41 sends the command to the audio lamp control device 5. Furthermore, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 described later in the main process, if a prize ball command is set in RAM 412, that prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has occurred in the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, the variable prize slot 316, etc., based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a win has occurred, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command in the RAM 412 indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to that win. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the general prize slot 313 or the first prize slot 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out in the general prize slot or the first prize slot, which is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to a value that includes the number of balls paid out due to the current win. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a ball enters the second prize pocket 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls dispensed from the second prize pocket stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls dispensed from the current prize. In addition, in the jackpot game state, if a ball enters the variable prize pocket 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls dispensed from the variable prize pocket stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls dispensed from the current prize.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a regular game control process to control the progress of the regular game. Details of the regular game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 242 to 244.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a regular winning game control process, which is a movable body control process that controls the progress of the regular winning game, and is executed when the result of the regular winning lottery is a win. Details of the regular winning game control process will be described later with reference to Figure 245.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol game control process to control the progress of the special symbol game. Details of the special symbol game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 246 to 248, but in the special symbol game control process, when the display of the special symbol variation starts, the special symbol variation pattern command necessary for displaying the symbol variation in the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command indicating the jackpot lottery result and the variation display time in the RAM 412 based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process, which is a movable body control process that controls the progress of the jackpot game, and is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 249 to 252.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process that controls the transition between various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state, probability variation jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state). Note that the game state transition process in this embodiment is the same as the game state transition process in the first embodiment described above with reference to Figures 33 and 34, so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. This game setting value change process controls the display or hiding of the setting value, or the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, in response to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. Since the game setting value change process in this embodiment is the same as the game setting value change process in the first embodiment described above with reference to Figure 35, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it be limited to the startup process that is initiated when the power is turned on, or between the end of the startup process and the start of game ball launching. This would prevent the game setting values from being changed during the operating hours of the gaming hall, as the game setting values cannot be changed after the player has started playing until the next power-on.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 performs a specific performance information update process among the game information. In this embodiment, the base information and the like are updated as specific performance information. Note that the specific performance information update process in this embodiment is the same as the specific performance information update process in the first embodiment described above with reference to Figures 36 and 37, so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes the display control process for the performance display monitor 43. This display control process for the performance display monitor 43 executes a process to display the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43. Note that the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 in this embodiment is the same as the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 in the first embodiment described above with reference to Figures 38 to 41, so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), it proceeds to step S1401 and executes each of the processes from S1401 onwards as described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), it repeatedly executes steps S1413 and S1414 until the timing for executing the next main process arrives, that is, for the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process arrives, until it determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes).

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the initial value counter for jackpot random numbers CIN1 and the initial value counter for regular random numbers CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the initial value counter for jackpot random numbers CIN1 and the initial value counter for regular random numbers CIN2, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2. Specifically, it adds 1 to the counter values of the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2, and if the counter values reach their maximum values, it clears them to 0. After updating the special-type variation counter CS1 and the general-type variation counter CS2, the MPU 41 returns to step S1412.

[General Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular symbol game control process executed in step S1404 of the main process in Figure 241. In the regular symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the display of the regular symbols changing and stopping in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. The regular symbol game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 242.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Figure 242, in the regular symbol game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the regular symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the regular symbols are currently being displayed (regular symbol game is in progress), is on (step S3201). The regular symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S3411 when the display of the regular symbols variation (regular symbol game) starts in the regular symbol variation start process shown in Figure 244, which will be described later, and is set to off in step S3210 of the regular symbol game control process when the regular symbols stop (regular symbol game ends).

If the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is on (step S3201: Yes), i.e., if a normal symbol game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3207. On the other hand, if the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is off (step S3201: No), i.e., if a normal symbol game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3202.

<Step S3202>
If the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Display" flag is off (step S3201: No), that is, if a normal diagram game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Device Open" flag, which indicates that the movable electric device 315b is open (a normal diagram winning game is being played), is on (step S3202). The "Electric Device Open" flag is set to on in step S3511 when the movable electric device 315b is opened (when the movable electric device 315b is in the operating position, which is the drive side position) in the normal diagram winning game control process as a movable body control process as shown in Figure 245 below, and is set to off in step S3518 when the electric device 315b is closed (when the movable electric device 315b is in the standby position, which is the return side position).

If the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is ON (Step S3202: Yes), i.e., if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is OFF (Step S3202: No), i.e., if a regular winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3203>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is off (step S3202: No), that is, if a regular winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "jackpot game in progress" flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S3203). In the jackpot game control process shown later in Figure 249, the "jackpot game in progress" flag is set to on in step S3906 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S3952 when a jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game flag is on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the regular game control process if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the regular game is not started while a jackpot game is in progress.

Of course, the regular game may be started while the jackpot game is in progress. In this case, according to the support mode type before the jackpot game starts (whether it is a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode), that is, according to the game state before transitioning to the jackpot game state, a win/loss determination for the regular win lottery is performed based on the win/loss information (values of the regular win random number counter C4, the regular win type random number counter C5, and the regular win variation type counter CS2) that has been moved from the regular win first reserve area SE1 of the regular win reserve storage area 412c to the regular win execution area SAE. In other words, if the game state before a jackpot is executed is a high-frequency support mode (either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state), the normal symbol jackpot draw (normal symbol win or loss), the normal symbol jackpot type (long-open normal symbol win or short-open normal symbol win), and the normal symbol variation display time are set based on the normal symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 240(B)), the normal symbol jackpot type table (see Figure 240(D)), and the normal symbol variation table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before a jackpot is executed is a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the normal symbol jackpot draw (normal symbol win or loss), the normal symbol jackpot type (long-open normal symbol win or short-open normal symbol win), and the normal symbol variation display time are set based on the normal symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 240(A)), the normal symbol jackpot type table (see Figure 240(C)), and the normal symbol variation table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S3203: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3204.

<Step S3204>
If the flag indicating a jackpot game is off (step S3203: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of normal figure variation reserves X stored in the normal figure variation reserves storage area SNA set in the normal figure reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S3204). If the number of normal figure variation reserves X is 0 (step S3204: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the normal figure game control process, and if the number of normal figure variation reserves X is not 0 (step S3204: No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3205>
If the number of reserved regular diagrams X is not 0 (step S3204: No), the MPU 41 performs regular diagram data setting processing for the regular diagram success/failure information stored in the regular diagram reservation storage area 412c (step S3205), and proceeds to step S3206. Details of the regular diagram data setting processing will be described later with reference to Figure 243.

<Step S3206>
In step S3206, the MPU 41 executes a regular symbol variation start process to cause the regular symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the variation of the regular symbols based on the information stored in the regular symbol hold storage area 412c, and then terminates the regular symbol game control process. Details of the regular symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 244.

<Step S3207>
If the "Normal Game Display in Progress" flag is on (step S3201: Yes), that is, if a normal game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on (step S3207). In the big win game control process shown in Figure 249 below, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S3906 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S3952 when a big win game ends.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is ON (step S3207: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3209. Conversely, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is OFF (step S3207: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3208.

<Step S3208>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S3207: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variation display (step S3208). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol that is being displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end of normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3209. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation display time has not elapsed (step S3208: No), that is, if it is not time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol game control process.

<Steps S3209-S3211>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is on (step S3201: Yes) and the "Big Win Game" flag is on (step S3207: Yes), that is, if a big win game is started while a normal symbol game is in progress, or if the normal symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbols has elapsed (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the display of the fluctuating normal symbols (end of the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the display of the normal symbols on the symbols corresponding to the result of the normal symbol win lottery for the normal symbol game (step S3209), and sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols are fluctuating (the normal symbol game is in progress), to off (step S3210). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols have stopped displaying, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, to on (step S3211), and ends the normal symbol game control process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is referenced in step S3501 of the normal diagram winning game control process shown in Figure 245 (described later) to determine whether or not it is time to start the normal diagram winning game (to release the movable motorized mechanism 315b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the changing normal symbols stops (ends the normal symbol game) not only when the normal symbol display time has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game begins during the execution of a normal symbol game. In other words, if a jackpot game begins, the normal symbol stops (ends the normal symbol game).

[General drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 243 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general data setting process performed by the MPU 41 in step S3205 of Figure 242. In the general data setting process, the contents of the general data hold storage area 412c in the storage area of the main control device 4 in Figure 239 are updated. The general data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 243.

<Steps S3301-S3303>
As shown in Figure 243, in the general diagram data setting process, first the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved general diagrams X stored in the general diagram variation reserve number storage area SNA (step S3301), and moves the general diagram success/failure information from the first general diagram reserve area SE1 to the general diagram execution area SAE (step S3302). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general diagram success/failure information stored in the second general diagram reserve area SE2 to the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 one by one (step S3303). Specifically, in step S3303, the general diagram success/failure information from the second general diagram reserve area SE2 is moved to the first general diagram reserve area SE1, the general diagram success/failure information from the third general diagram reserve area SE3 is moved to the second general diagram reserve area SE2, and the general diagram success/failure information from the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 is moved to the third general diagram reserve area SE3.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
Here, Figure 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3206 of Figure 242. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery results in the normal symbol win lottery. The normal symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 244.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 244, in the normal game state change start process, the MPU 41 determines whether the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state), is on (step S3401). The high-frequency support mode flag is set to on in step S2313 of Figure 34 when a jackpot game ends in the aforementioned game state transition process, and is set to off in step S2307 of Figure 33 when the game state transitions from a probability variation game state or time-saving game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state, or in step S2326 of Figure 34 when the game state transitions from a time-saving game state to a normal game state.

If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3401: Yes), i.e., the game is in a high-frequency support mode (either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. If the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S3401: No), i.e., the game is in a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3402 and S3403>
If the game is in a high-frequency support mode, either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S3402). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 240(B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 240(D)) to determine whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to the values of a normal win. In other words, if the game is in high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 performs a lottery process to determine whether it is a normal win or not based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table and the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table.

On the other hand, if the game is in a normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode (step S3401: No), a normal win/loss determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S3403). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win hold storage area 412c, correspond to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 240(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 240(C)). In other words, when the game is in low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 executes a lottery process to determine whether or not it is a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table and the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
If the MPU 41 has performed a lottery process to determine whether or not it is a regular win (step S3402 or S3403), it determines whether or not the result of the win/failure determination is a long-open regular win in which the second prize entry opening 315, which is the starting ball entry section, is opened for a long time (step S3404). If the result of the win/failure determination is a long-open regular win (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open regular win flag to ON to indicate that the result of the win/failure determination is a long-open regular win (step S3405), and proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the win/failure determination is not a long-open regular win (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3406.

<Steps S3406 and S3407>
If the result of the hit/fail determination is not a long-opening normal-circle hit (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the hit/fail determination is a short-opening normal-circle hit in which the second prize-winning opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is briefly opened (step S3406). If the result of the hit/fail determination is a short-opening normal-circle hit (step S3406: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening normal-circle hit flag to ON to indicate that the result of the hit/fail determination is a short-opening normal-circle hit (step S3407), and proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/fail determination is not a short-opening normal-circle hit (step S3406: No), that is, if the result of the hit/fail determination is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3408.

<Steps S3408 and S3409>
If the long-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3405), if the short-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3407), or if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss (step S3406: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation pattern setting process to set the normal symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 in normal symbol gameplay, by referring to the normal symbol variation display table (not shown). As mentioned above, the normal symbol variation display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal symbol variation table that is referenced when the high-frequency support mode is active, and a low-frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table that is referenced when the low-frequency support mode is active. Therefore, in this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the normal symbol variation pattern is set based on the normal symbol variation display table corresponding to the support mode type. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table is set to have a shorter average display time for regular symbol variations than the low-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode, the time during which regular symbol gameplay is performed is shorter compared to low-frequency support mode.

Then, in addition to the regular display variation pattern set in step S3408, the MPU 41 sets a regular display variation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the lottery process that determines whether or not it is a regular display win in step S3402 or S3403 (the result of the regular display win lottery) and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) (step S3409), and proceeds to step S3410.

The regular symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the regular symbol variation pattern command, causes the symbol display unit 341 and other components to execute effects corresponding to the regular symbol game, such as effects indicating that the regular symbol game is being played or effects indicating the result of the regular symbol winning lottery.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Variation Pattern Command" only needs to be a command that notifies the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 of the normal diagram variation pattern; the result of the normal diagram winning lottery and the type of support mode do not necessarily need to be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 as a normal diagram variation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal diagram winning lottery can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Normal Diagram Winning Lottery Result Command" when a win/loss determination is made in step S3402 or S3403, and the type of support mode can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Support Mode Type Command" that can identify the type of support mode after transitioning to high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 starts displaying the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S3410). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, which indicates that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variation state, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being played (step S3411), and ends the normal symbol variation start process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Symbol Variation Display" flag is referenced in step S3201 of the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 242 to determine whether the normal symbol game is currently running (normal symbol variation is being displayed).

[General game control processing for winning a prize]
Here, Figure 245 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal win game control process executed in step S1405 of the main process in Figure 241. In the normal win game control process, if the result of the normal win lottery, which determines whether or not it is a normal win, is a win, a movable body control process is executed that switches between an allowable state, which permits the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry section, and a restrictive state, by controlling the opening and closing of the movable body, the electric mechanism 315b, through continuous operation. The normal win game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 245.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 245, in the normal symbol win game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, which causes the movable motorized mechanism 315b to perform continuous operation. The normal symbol change stop display flag is set to on in step S3211 when the normal symbol stops being displayed in the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 242.

If the normal symbol variation stop display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop display flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513.

<Step S3502>
If the normal diagram change stop display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when a normal diagram win game can be started, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S3502). In the jackpot game control process shown later in Figure 249, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2906 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S3952 when a jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the normal win game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S3502: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forcibly terminated by the start of a jackpot game, the normal win game will not start even if the result of the normal win lottery for that normal win game is a normal win. That is, in this embodiment, a normal win game will not start while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, a new normal win game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S3502: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the flag indicating a jackpot game is off (step S3502: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S3503). The flag indicating a long-opening regular win is a flag that indicates the result of the regular win lottery, which is determined by a lottery process to determine whether or not it is a regular win, is a long-opening regular win. It is set to on in step S3405 of the regular win variation start process in Figure 244 when the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular win lottery for a completed regular win game is a long-opening regular win. If the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3504, and if the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to off (step S3503: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
If the long-opening regular ball win flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular ball win lottery by the lottery process for the completed regular ball game is a long-opening regular ball win, the MPU 41, as a movable body control process, executes a process to set the value of the opening time counter in order to perform a long-opening as the movable mode of the electric mechanism 315b, which is a movable body, based on information corresponding to the 6 seconds which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in a long-opening regular ball win game (the time during which game balls can be entered into the second prize pocket 315) (step S3504). The opening time counter is referenced in step S3515 of the regular ball win game control process to determine the timing to return the electric mechanism 315b from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular ball win flag to OFF (step S3505) and proceeds to step S3509.

<Step S3506>
If the long-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S3503: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is not a long-opening regular symbol win, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the short-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S3506). The short-opening regular symbol win flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the regular symbol win lottery by the lottery process that determines whether or not it is a regular symbol win is a short-opening regular symbol win, and is set to on in step S1707 of the regular symbol variation start process in Figure 24 when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a short-opening regular symbol win. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3507. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to OFF (step S3506: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3512.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the short-opening regular-ball win flag is set to ON (step S3506: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-ball win lottery by the lottery process for the completed regular-ball game is a short-opening regular-ball win, the MPU 41 performs a process as a movable body control process to set the value of the opening time counter in order to perform a short-opening as the movable mode of the electric mechanism 315b, which is a movable body, based on information corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in a short-opening regular-ball win game (the time during which game balls can be entered into the second prize pocket 315) (step S3507). The opening time counter is referenced in step S3515 of the regular-ball win game control process to determine the timing to return the electric mechanism 315b from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-ball win flag to OFF (step S3508) and proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3509-S3511>
If the result of the lottery process for a regular win is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular win (long-open regular win flag or short-open regular win flag) is set to OFF (step S3505 or S3508), the MPU 41 executes a movable body control process to move the movable body, the electric mechanism 315b, from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position (step S3509). This opens the second prize entry opening 315, which is the starting ball entry section, and puts it in an allowable state that allows game balls to enter the second prize entry opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism open command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3510), sets an electric mechanism open flag to ON to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3511), and proceeds to step S3512.

The electric mechanism release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the sound lamp control device 5 can initiate an effect, for example, to indicate to the symbol display unit 341, that the electric mechanism 315b is released, based on the electric mechanism release command.

<Step S3512>
If the result of the lottery process for a regular symbol win is a win, and a movable body control process is executed to open the movable motorized mechanism 315b (steps S3503 to S3511), or if both the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are set to off (the result of the lottery process for a regular symbol win is a loss) (both steps S3503 and S3506 are No), the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended), to off (step S3512), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S3513>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop" display flag is off (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which is set to turn on when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in step S3511 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set to on (step S3513). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal symbol winning game is in progress. If the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on (step S3513: Yes), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3514. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to off (step S3513: No), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S3514 and S3515>
If the flag indicating that the electric mechanism is open is set to ON (step S3513: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S3504 or S3507 of the regular winning game control process (step S3514), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3515). In other words, as a movable body control process, the MPU 41 makes a termination determination to determine whether it is time to return the movable electric mechanism 315b from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, based on the fulfillment of the termination determination condition.

If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to the standby position (return side position), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3516. On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3515: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric mechanism 315b to the standby position (return side position), the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S3516-S3518>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to the standby position which is the return side position, the MPU 41 returns the movable electric mechanism 315b from the operating position which is the drive side position to the standby position which is the return side position (step S3516). As a result, the second prize entry opening 315, which is the starting ball entry section, is closed, and the entry of game balls into the second prize entry opening 315 is restricted. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism closing command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S3517), and sets the electric mechanism open flag, which indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is open, to off (step S3518), and terminates the normal winning game control process.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to terminate the animation indicating that the electric mechanism is open, for example, in the symbol display unit 341, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the case in which the movable electric mechanism 315b is driven to the drive position only once during a single winning game (the case in which the second prize slot 315 is opened once) has been described. However, the electric mechanism 315b may be driven to the drive position multiple times during a single winning game (the second prize slot 315 may be opened multiple times). In this case, when the second prize slot 315 is closed (when the movable electric mechanism 315b is in the standby position, which is the return position), a termination determination is made to see if the termination determination condition for ending the winning game is met. The termination determination condition for the winning game is set when the second prize slot 315 is opened, and the termination determination is not performed when the second prize slot 315 is opened. This is because, since the winning game cannot be ended while the second prize slot 315 is open, a malfunction occurs in the control system if the second prize slot 315 is opened even though the winning game has ended. Furthermore, addressing this malfunction through control would increase unnecessary control. Therefore, by performing a termination check to determine if the termination condition for ending a regular winning game is met when the second prize entry opening 315 closes (when the electric mechanism 315b, as a movable body, is in the standby position, which is the return position), it becomes possible to efficiently execute the movement control and termination control of the electric mechanism 315b, which is a movable body. Of course, even if the electric mechanism 315b, as a movable body, is driven to the drive position only once during a regular winning game, the termination check to determine if the termination condition for ending a regular winning game is met when the second prize entry opening 315 closes may also be performed.

[Special Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 246 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main process in Figure 241. In the special symbol game control process, the contents of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is controlled, for example, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 is controlled. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to Figure 246.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 246, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on. In the big win game control process shown later in Figure 249, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S3906 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S3552 when a big win game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the special feature game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S3601: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the special feature game is not started while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, the special feature game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S3601: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S3601: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (in progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game) is on (step S3602). The flag indicating that a variation is in progress is set to on in step S3807 when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts in the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 248 described later, and is set to off in step S3609 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the special symbol game control process.

If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S3602: Yes), meaning the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3606. On the other hand, if the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is off (step S3602: No), meaning the special symbol is not being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is not in progress) when a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol is changing is off (step S3602: No), that is, if the special symbol is not changing when a jackpot game is not in progress (special symbol game is not in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special symbol reserve count N stored in the first special symbol reserve count storage area NAA of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b and the second special symbol reserve count M stored in the second special symbol reserve count storage area NAB are 0 (step S3603).

The MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process if both the number of reserved special symbols N and the number of reserved special symbols M are 0 (step S3603: Yes), that is, if there is no reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game. On the other hand, if either the number of reserved special symbols N or the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S3603: No), that is, if there is a reservation of at least one of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
If either the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M is not 0 (step S3603: No), that is, if there is a reserve for the right to execute the first special symbol game and a reserve for the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process related to the special symbol win/loss information data (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (step S3604), and proceeds to step S3605. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 247.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to begin the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 248.

<Step S3606>
If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S3602: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the process of displaying a variation (special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in step S3804 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 248 below, has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S3606). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the special symbol that is currently being displayed in variation and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3606: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S3607. On the other hand, if the variation display time has not elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S3606: No), that is, if it is not time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process.

<Steps S3607-S3609>
When the display time for the first or second special symbol has elapsed since the start of the display of the first or second special symbol's variation (step S3606: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop the special symbol display and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S3607). The MPU 41 then sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the first or second special symbol has stopped (step S3608), and sets the special symbol variation display in progress flag to OFF, indicating that the first or second special symbol is currently displaying variation (the special symbol game is in progress) (step S3609), and ends the special symbol game control process.

[Special drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 247 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting special feature data, which is performed by the MPU 41 in step S3604 of Figure 246. In the special feature data setting process, the contents of the special feature hold storage area 412b, which is set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, are updated. The special feature data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 247.

<Step S3701>
As shown in Figure 247, in step S3701, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0. If the number of reserved symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3701: Yes), that is, there are no reserved symbols for the second special symbol game and there are reserved symbols for the first special symbol game (see step S3603 in the special symbol game control process in Figure 246), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3702. On the other hand, if the number of reserved symbols M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3701: No), that is, there are reserved symbols for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3705. In other words, by determining whether the number of reserved symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0, the MPU 41 prioritizes starting the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game. However, the first special symbol game may be started with priority over the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order (retention order) of the game balls entering the first or second prize-winning slot 314 or 315, which are the starting ball entry points, so that either the first or second special symbol game is executed. Furthermore, without assigning a priority to the start of the first and second special symbol games, they may be executed independently of each other, or they may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol variation).

<Steps S3702-S3704>
If the second special symbol hold number M is 0 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol hold number N stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NAA of the first special symbol hold storage area REA (step S3702), and moves the special symbol success/failure information from the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3703). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol success/failure information from the second hold area REA2 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA one by one (step S3704). Specifically, in step S3704, the special symbol win/loss information from the second holding area REA2 of the first special symbol holding storage area REA is moved to the first holding area REA1, the special symbol win/loss information from the third holding area REA3 is moved to the second holding area REA2, and the special symbol win/loss information from the fourth holding area REA4 is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S3704 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708.

<Steps S3705-S3707>
If the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved special symbols M stored in the number of reserved special symbols memory area NAB of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB (step S3705), and moves the special symbol success/failure information from the first reserve area REB1 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3706). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol success/failure information from the second reserve area REB2 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB one by one (step S3707). Specifically, in step S3707, the special symbol win/loss information from the second reserve area REB2 is moved to the first reserve area REB1, the special symbol win/loss information from the third reserve area REB3 is moved to the second reserve area REB2, and the special symbol win/loss information from the fourth reserve area REB4 is moved to the third reserve area REB3. When the processing in step S3707 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special symbol win/loss information for the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 to the fourth hold storage area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA, or the first hold storage area REB1 to the fourth hold storage area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB, has shifted, and terminates the special symbol data setting process. This special symbol shift command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol shift command.

[Special Feature Fluctuation Start Processing]
Here, Figure 248 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3605 of Figure 246. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started when the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 starts to change, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 248.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 248, in step S3801, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is a probability variation game state, which is a high probability mode. Whether or not it is a high probability mode is determined by whether or not the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a probability variation game state, is set to ON. The probability variation game state flag is set to ON in the aforementioned game state transition process when the game state transitions from a probability variation jackpot game state to a probability variation game state in step S2317 of Figure 34, and is set to OFF in step S2309 of Figure 33 when the game state transitions from a probability variation game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state.

If the game state is a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (Step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802. If the game state is not a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (Step S3801: No), i.e., if the game state is a low-probability mode (a time-saving game state or a normal game state), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3803.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If the game state is a high-probability mode, which is a probability variation game state (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 237(B)) that is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 above, and performs a win/fail judgment based on the high-probability mode win/fail table (step S3802).

On the other hand, if the game state is not a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (step S3801: No), that is, if the game state is a low-probability mode (a time-saving game state or a normal game state), the MPU 41 reads the low-probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 237(A)) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35, and performs a win/fail judgment based on that low-probability mode win/fail table (step S3803).

In steps S3802 and S3803, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table saved in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35, according to the game setting value. However, in steps S3802 and S3803, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 may be read, and the win/loss determination may be performed by selecting the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that game setting value one by one.

<Step S3804>
If a determination of success or failure is made in step S3802 or S3803, the MPU 41 sets the display time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in the special symbol game as a special symbol variation pattern (step S3804).

Furthermore, the display time for the variation of the first or second special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 238(A)) if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a normal jackpot; based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see Figure 238(B)) if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a probability variation jackpot; and based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the loss variation table (see Figure 238(C)) if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a loss.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is the result of the win/fail determination in step S3802 or S3803, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S3804, and then proceeds to step S3806. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "A01" to "A03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" added to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "B01" to "B03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "B" added to indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "C01" to "C03", which are special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "C" added to indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, as the special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "D01" to "D08," which is a special symbol variation pattern with a "D" added to indicate that it is a miss, as the special symbol variation pattern command in RAM 412. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (pre- and post-miss reach, reach other than pre- and post-miss, complete miss) in the special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by initiating the display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, and then proceeds to step S3807.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 starts displaying the special symbols, it adds 1 to the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Additionally, if the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S3803 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d. If the win/loss result is a jackpot, the "number of consecutive losses" is reset to 0.

<Step S3807>
In step S3807, the MPU 41 sets the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag to ON, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the special symbol game is in progress), and proceeds to step S3808. The "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is referenced in step S3602 of the special symbol game control process shown in Figure 246 to determine whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the special symbol game is in progress) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the special symbol variation has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), to off, and proceeds to step S3809. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S3608 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 246 when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 is displayed as stopped, and is referenced in step S3902 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 249, described later, to determine whether it is the right timing to start a jackpot game.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), is on. The time-saving game state flag is set to on in the aforementioned game state transition process when a normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of Figure 34, and is set to off when the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to the jackpot game state or the normal game state in step S2310 of Figure 33 or step S2325 of Figure 34.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S3809: Yes), i.e., the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3810. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S3809: Yes), i.e., the time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol variation start process.

<Step S3810>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S3809: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state (step S3810), and terminates the special symbol variation start process. The time-saving count counter is set in step S2320 of the game state transition process in Figure 34 above when the game state transitions from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the time-saving counter is set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a time-saving game state. However, the time-saving counter may also be set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a probability variation game state. That is, by setting the maximum number of special symbol plays performed in the probability variation game state to a finite number, the game machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST (Special Time) machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can be configured to transition to the normal game state without transitioning from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state when the normal jackpot game, which is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a normal jackpot, ends. In this case, the time-saving game counter is not set after the normal jackpot game ends.

[Big Win Game Control Processing]
Here, Figures 249 to 252 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 of the main process in Figure 241. The jackpot game control process executes processes that control the progress of the jackpot game, such as a movable body control process that opens and closes the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body provided in the variable prize entry opening 316. The jackpot game control process will be explained below with reference to Figures 249 to 252.

<Step S3901>
As shown in Figure 249, in step S3901, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on. The "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S3906 of the big win game control process when a big win game is started, and is set to off in step S3952 of the big win game control process when a big win game is ended.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is ON (step S3901: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3911. On the other hand, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is OFF (step S3901: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3902.

<Step S3902>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S3901: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that a special symbol has stopped being displayed, is on. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S3608 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 246 when a special symbol is stopped being displayed, and is set to off in step S3808 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 248 when the variation display of the special symbol begins. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a jackpot game by determining whether a special symbol game that was started when a jackpot game was not currently being played has finished.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S3902: Yes), meaning the special symbol has stopped and the jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S3902: No), meaning the special symbol is still changing and the jackpot game cannot be started, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state (while the special symbol game is being executed). However, it is also possible to make it possible to start (execute) the jackpot game while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable state (while the special symbol game is being executed). For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable state, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state. Specifically, as described above, by making it possible to change to simultaneous variation of the first and second special symbols, the second special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed, and the first special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the second special symbol game is being executed. Furthermore, the jackpot game for the first special symbol game and the jackpot game for the second special symbol game may be executed simultaneously. Alternatively, if the conditions for starting the other jackpot game are met while one of the jackpot games is running, the other jackpot game may be started after the first jackpot game has finished.

<Step S3903>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S3902: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbol was stopped and displayed is a jackpot. Whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol was stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined, for example, based on the special symbol win/loss information for the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in RAM 41.

If the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, where the special symbol is displayed, is a jackpot (step S3903: Yes), it proceeds to step S3904. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, where the special symbol is displayed, is not a jackpot (step S3903: No), i.e., the jackpot lottery result is a loss, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3904>
If the result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 to start the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game or normal jackpot game) (step S3904), and proceeds to step S3905. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute jackpot game effects, such as display effects executed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the type of jackpot game, based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to ON, indicating the start of a jackpot game, and proceeds to step S3906. The jackpot game start flag is referenced in step S2301 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 33 above when determining whether to transition the game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 41 sets the "In-progress Jackpot Game" flag to ON, indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, and proceeds to step S3907. The "In-progress Jackpot Game" flag is referenced in step S3901 of the jackpot game control process, as well as in step S3203 of the regular game control process in Figure 242 and step S3601 of the special game control process in Figure 246, in order to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S3907>
In step S3907, the MPU 41 performs a movable body control process that sets a subtractive round counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played, based on information (round number information) set according to the maximum number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode, depending on the type of jackpot, and then proceeds to step S3908. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round counter to "5" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round counter to "16" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot. As a result, in round play, based on the information set as the round counter according to the type of jackpot, the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, moves back and forth between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the operating position, which is the drive side position, a number of times corresponding to the type of jackpot, and a movable body control process is performed in which a continuous operation is performed in which the timing of the fulfillment of the termination judgment condition is undefined depending on the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, the round counter is set as a subtractive counter, but it may also be set as an additive counter. If the round counter is set as an additive counter, for example, when the value of the round counter reaches a number corresponding to the maximum number of rounds played, the termination condition for the opening/closing execution mode is met, and the opening/closing execution mode is terminated when the MPU 51 determines that the termination condition has been met. In other words, when the termination determination is made that the termination condition for the opening/closing execution mode, whose timing is undefined, has been met, the MPU 41 executes a movable body control process that terminates the continuous operation of the movable opening/closing door 319.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that it is starting the opening of the jackpot game, and then proceeds to step S3909. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening effects, such as the display effects, to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the opening start command.

<Step S3909>
In step S3909, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive opening time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the opening, based on information (opening time information) set in accordance with the maximum opening time executed in the jackpot game, and proceeds to step S3910. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3913 of Figure 250 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

In this embodiment, the opening time counter is set as a subtractive counter, but it may also be set as an additive counter. If the opening time counter is set as an additive counter, for example, when the value of the opening time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the opening termination condition is met, and the opening is terminated when the MPU 41 determines that the termination condition has been met.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening" flag to ON, indicating that the opening is in progress, and terminates the jackpot game control process. The "Opening" flag is referenced in step S3911 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S3911>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is on (step S3901: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the opening is in progress is on (step S3911).

If the opening flag is on (step S3911: Yes), i.e., opening is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3912 in Figure 250. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3911: No), i.e., opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S3922.

<Sports S3912 and S3913>
If the opening flag is on (step S3911: Yes), i.e., if the opening is in progress, as shown in Figure 250, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S3912), and performs a termination determination to see if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the termination condition for the opening (step S3913). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to terminate the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), that is, if the MPU 41 determines that it is time to end the opening based on the determination that the opening termination condition has been met, it proceeds to step S3914. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3913: No), that is, if the MPU 41 determines that it is not time to end the opening based on the determination that the opening termination condition has not been met, it terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3914 and S3915>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the timing to end the opening is based on the determination that the opening termination condition has been met, the MPU 41 sets an opening termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is ending (step S3914). The opening termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing executed by the MPU 41 (see Figure 241). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the opening effects, such as the display effects, that are executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the opening termination command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening in Progress" flag, which indicates that the opening is in progress, to off (step S3915), and proceeds to step S3916.

<Step S3916>
In step S3916, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that an opening/closing execution mode in which multiple rounds of gameplay (5 or 16 times) are to be started, that is, that the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable part, is to be performed in a movable manner determined according to the type of jackpot, and then proceeds to step S3917. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start opening/closing execution mode effects, such as display effects, to be performed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3917>
In step S3917, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that a round game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S3918. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start round game effects, such as display effects, to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the round game start command, and can also display the number of rounds on the symbol display unit 341 in each round game.

In this embodiment, while each round of gameplay features are executed individually, the round gameplay features may also consist of a series of single display effects in the open/close execution mode, and in addition to these display effects, the number of rounds in each round of game may be displayed. In this case, interval effects may not be executed between rounds of gameplay, or an effect displaying the number of rounds in the next round of game to be played may be executed as an interval effect.

<Sport S3918 and S3919>
In step S3918, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the subtractive round counter, which is information indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode, and then performs a movable body control process to open the variable prize entry opening 316 by moving the movable opening/closing door 319 from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position (step S3919), and then proceeds to step S3920.

<Steps S3920 and S3921>
In step S3920, the MPU 41 sets a round game flag to ON to indicate that a round game is in progress, and then executes a movable body control process (step S3921) to set a subtractive round game time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the round game, based on the round game time information set in accordance with the maximum time of the round game (maximum operating time of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body), and ends the jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S3924 of Figure 351 of the jackpot game control process in order to perform an termination determination in the movable body control process to determine whether or not the termination determination condition has been met, which causes the round game to end after a predetermined time has elapsed (the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, to return from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position).

In this embodiment, the round game time counter is set as a subtractive counter, but it may also be set as an additive counter. If the round game time counter is set as an additive counter, for example, in the movable body control process, when the value of the round game time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum round game time, the round game termination condition is met, and the round game ends when the MPU 41 determines that the termination condition has been met.

<Step S3922>
Returning to Figure 249, if the Opening flag is off (step S3911: No), i.e., the opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Round Game flag, which indicates that a round game is in progress, is set to on (step S3922). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether a round game is in progress.

If the "Round Game in Progress" flag is ON (step S3922: Yes), i.e., if a round game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3923 in Figure 251. On the other hand, if the "Round Game in Progress" flag is OFF (step S3922: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3926.

<Steps S3923 and S3924>
If the Round Game in Progress flag is ON (step S3922: Yes), that is, if a round game is in progress, as shown in Figure 251, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the round game time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the round game. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3924). That is, as a movable body control process, the MPU 41 makes a termination determination to determine whether the termination determination condition has been met, which terminates the round game after a predetermined time has elapsed (the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, returns from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position).

If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), that is, if the MPU 41 determines that the round game will end due to the expiration of a predetermined time as determined by the termination determination in the movable body control process (returning the movable opening/closing door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive position, to the standby position, which is the return position), then the process proceeds to step S3928. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), that is, if the MPU 41 determines that the round game will not end due to the expiration of a predetermined time as determined by the termination determination in the movable body control process (returning the movable opening/closing door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive position, to the standby position, which is the return position), then the process proceeds to step S3925.

<Step S3925>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), that is, if the round game is not terminated due to the expiration of a predetermined time by the termination determination, the termination determination condition that causes the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable part, to return from the operating position, which is the drive position, to the standby position, is not met, then the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize slot 316 (step S3925). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize slot 316 is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 when a game ball is detected entering the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17.

If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3926. If no game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3925: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the additive ball count counter, which is information indicating the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize slot 316 during that round of play (step S3926). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ball count counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S3927), that is, as a movable body control process, whether the termination condition for ending the round of play (returning the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) has been met. In other words, the termination conditions for a round of play are the elapsed time and the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable prize slot 316, and the timing of when the termination conditions for a round of play are met is undefined, so during the execution of a round of play, the termination determination is performed to see whether any of these termination conditions have been met.

If the value of the ball count counter after addition reaches 10 (step S3927: Yes), that is, if the termination condition for ending the round game (returning the movable opening/closing door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position) is determined by the termination determination in the movable body control process, the process proceeds to step S3928. On the other hand, if the value of the ball count counter after addition does not reach 10 (step S3927: No), that is, if the termination condition for ending the round game (returning the movable opening/closing door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position) is determined by the termination determination in the movable body control process, the process terminates the jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the ball entry counter is set as an additive counter, but it may also be set as a subtractive counter. If the ball entry counter is set as a subtractive counter, for example, in the movable body control process, when the value of the ball entry counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum number of balls entered, the round game termination condition is met, and the round game ends when the MPU 41 determines that this termination condition has been met.

<Step S3928>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), or if the value of the ball entry counter reaches 10 (step S3927: Yes), the MPU 41, as a movable body control process, closes the variable prize entry opening by returning the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position (step S3928), and proceeds to step S3929. That is, if the MPU 41 determines that the termination condition for ending the round game has been met by the termination determination in the movable body control process, it closes the variable prize entry opening 316 by returning the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, and ends the round game.

<Steps S3929-S3931>
In step S3929, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game has ended. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effects, such as the display effects, that are executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize entry slot 316 during the round game (step S3930), sets the round game flag to off (step S3930), and proceeds to step S3932.

<Step S3932>
In step S3932, the MPU 41 performs a termination determination to determine whether the round counter, which is information indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode, is 0 (step S3932), that is, whether the termination condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode has been met as part of the movable body control processing.

If the round counter of the MPU 41 is 0 (step S3932: Yes), that is, if the termination condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is met by the termination determination in the movable body control process (there are no unexecuted rounds of gameplay), the process proceeds to step S3941. On the other hand, if the round counter of the MPU 41 is not 0 (step S3932: No), that is, if the termination condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is not met by the termination determination in the movable body control process (there are unexecuted rounds of gameplay), the process proceeds to step S3933.

Here, the reason why the termination condition for the opening/closing execution mode is set (opening on the 5th or 16th round) when the variable prize slot 316 is opened (when the opening/closing door 319, as a movable part, is in the operating position, which is the drive side position), and why the termination check is not performed when the variable prize slot 316 is opened, is that the opening/closing execution mode cannot be terminated while the variable prize slot 316 is open. Therefore, from a control perspective, the variable prize slot 316 would be opened even though the opening/closing execution mode has ended, causing a malfunction. Furthermore, addressing this malfunction through control would increase unnecessary control. Therefore, by performing a termination check to determine if the termination condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is met when the variable prize slot 316 is closed (when the opening/closing door 319, as a movable part, is in the standby position, which is the return side position), it becomes possible to efficiently perform the movement control and termination control of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable part.

<Step S3933>
If the round counter is not zero (step S3932: No), that is, if the termination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is not met by the termination determination in the movable body control processing (there are unexecuted round games), the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 to start the interval between round games (step S3933), and proceeds to step S3934. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing executed by the MPU 41 (see Figure 241). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start interval effects such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the interval start command.

In this embodiment, interval effects such as display effects are executed during the interval between round games. However, the interval effects may be omitted, and during the interval, round game effects such as display effects for the previously executed round game may be continued, or round game effects such as display effects for the next round game may be executed.

<Steps S3934 and S3935>
In step S3934, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, indicating that an interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive interval time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3935), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referenced in step S3938 of Figure 252 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether the termination condition for ending the interval (starting a round game) has been met, as part of the movable body control process.

<Step S3936>
Returning to Figure 249, if the Round Game in Progress flag is off (step S3922: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Interval in Progress flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is in progress, is on (step S3936). The Interval in Progress flag is set to on in step S3934 of Figure 251 in the jackpot game control process when an interval begins, and is set to off in step S3940 of Figure 252 in the jackpot game control process when an interval ends.

If the interval flag is on (step S3936: Yes), i.e., the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3937 in Figure 252. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S3936: No), i.e., the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3945.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
If the interval flag is on (step S3936: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3937), as shown in Figure 252. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3938), that is, whether the termination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) has been met, as the termination determination in the movable body control process.

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), that is, if the termination condition for ending the interval (starting a round game) in the movable body control processing is determined to be met, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3939. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3938: No), that is, if the termination condition for ending the interval (starting a round game) in the movable body control processing is determined to be not met, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control processing.

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), that is, if the termination condition for ending the interval (starting round play) is determined to be met in the termination determination in the movable body control processing, the MPU 41 sets an interval termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the interval has ended. The interval termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate interval effects such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the interval termination command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag, which indicates that the interval between round games is being executed, to off (step S3940), and proceeds to step S3917. By proceeding to step S3917 in Figure 250, the processes of steps S3917 to S3921 related to the start of a round game are executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3941>
Returning to Figure 251, if the round counter is 0 (step S3932: Yes), that is, if the termination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is met by the termination determination in the movable body control processing (there are no unexecuted round games), the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ending (step S3941), and proceeds to step S3942. The opening/closing execution mode termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effects (opening/closing execution mode effects), such as the display effects, executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the opening/closing execution mode termination command.

<Step S3942>
In step S3942, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S3943. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the ending effects, such as the display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
In step S3943, the MPU 41 sets an ending flag to ON, indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive ending time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3944), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3947 in Figure 252 of the jackpot game control process for determining whether or not to terminate the ending (jackpot game) when the termination conditions for the ending (jackpot game) are met.

In this embodiment, the ending time counter is set as a subtractive counter, but it may also be set as an additive counter. If the ending time counter is set as an additive counter, for example, when the value of the ending time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the ending termination condition is met, and the ending is terminated when the MPU 41 determines that the termination condition has been met.

<Step S3945>
Returning to Figure 249, if the Interval flag is off (step S3936: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being performed, it is determined whether the Ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being performed, is on (step S3945).

If the ending flag is on (step S3945: Yes), i.e., the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3946 in Figure 252. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S3945: No), i.e., the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3950.

<Steps S3946 and S3947>
If the ending flag is on (step S3945: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, as shown in Figure 252, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3946). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3947). In other words, the MPU 41 makes a termination determination to determine whether the termination condition of the ending has been met or not.

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), that is, if the termination check determines that the ending termination condition is met, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3948. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3947: No), that is, if the termination check determines that the ending termination condition is not met, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3948 and S3949>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is ending. The ending end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the ending effects, such as the display effects, that are executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to off (step S3949), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3950>
Returning to Figure 249, if the ending flag is off (step S3945: No), that is, if it is not during the opening, round play, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game has ended (step S3950), and proceeds to step S3951. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the jackpot game effects, such as the display effects, executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3951 and S3952>
In step S3951, the jackpot game end flag is set to ON to indicate that the jackpot game has ended. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S2312 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 34 above to determine whether or not to transition from the jackpot game state to the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "In Progress of Jackpot Game" flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played, to off (step S3952), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figures 253 to 287, the processing performed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, it is conceivable that some or all of the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be performed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Also, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 performs control processing for the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27, startup processing when the audio lamp control device 5 is powered on, and NMI interrupt processing during power outages, but these processes will not be explained here.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of the audio lamp control device 5]
Here, Figure 253 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51, for example, performs sub-timer interrupt processing as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in Figure 253, the MPU 51 executes the following processes in the sub-timer interrupt processing: counter update processing (step S2701), operation detection processing (step S2702), command determination processing (step S2703), special feature game performance control processing (step S2704), and jackpot game performance control processing (step S2705).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the performance pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, and the variation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the performance pattern type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when they reach their maximum values. The performance pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (performance pattern) based on the special variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance pattern type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. The first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol that is stopped first based on the special variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 decrements the variation display counter by 1. This variation display counter is used to measure the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to determine the remaining variable display time, whether the display is in progress, and whether the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has finished.

[Operation detection process]
Next, an example of the operation detection process procedure performed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 253 will be described. Here, Figure 254 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation detection process procedure.

As shown in Figure 254, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes the following: operation button operation detection process (step S4001), operation detection pattern determination process (step S4002), selection button operation detection process (step S4003), selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S4004), confirm button operation detection process (step S4005), and confirm operation detection pattern determination process (step S4006).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S4001 of the operation detection process), the operation status of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process is executed to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is determined at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, Figure 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to Figure 255.

<Steps S4101-S4103>
As shown in Figure 255, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S4101). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S4102). After that, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag (step S4103), and terminates the operation detection process.

Thus, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes in steps S4101 to S4103 are executed, and the operation status of the operation button 20 for the three most recent operations at 1 msec intervals is stored in the RAM 512 as the first to third detection flags. Specifically, the most recent operation status is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation status is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation status two operations prior is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 254, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S4002 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag consists of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of on and off states of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 is continuing (see Figure 257(A)). Also, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 has started (see Figure 257(A)). Also, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see Figure 257(A)). And, if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that no operation has been performed on the operation button 20 (see Figure 257(A)). Here, Figure 256 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for determining the operation detection pattern. Figure 257(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. The operation button operation detection process will be explained below with reference to Figures 256 and 257(A).

<Step S4201>
As shown in Figure 256, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag, which indicates the operation state of the operation button 20 three steps prior, is set to ON (step S4201). Here, if the first operation detection flag is ON (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4202, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4202>
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the operation button 20 two steps prior, is set to on (step S4202). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4203, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4203>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is set to on (step S4203). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4204, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4204>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on and the second and third operation pattern flags to off (step S4204), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on and sets the second and third operation pattern flags to off (see Figure 257(A)). The first operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, if the first operation pattern flag is set to on, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and send this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and can grasp the duration of continuous operation of the operation button 20 based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is sent consecutively. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the duration for which the operation button 20 has been continuously pressed, making it possible to execute an operation button animation based on the long press operation.

<Step S4205>
If the first operation detection flag is off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the operation button 20 two steps prior, is on (step S4205). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4206, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4206>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is on (step S4206). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4207, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4207>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and the first and third operation pattern flags off (step S4207). That is, when the operation pattern "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as three operation states for the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and the first and third operation pattern flags off (see Figure 257(A)), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state (whether or not operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, by using the second operation pattern flag to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, the operation states of the operation button 20 for three cycles are reflected. This prevents false detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and prevents the start of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S4208>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is on (step S4208). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and the first and second operation pattern flags to off (step S4209), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states for the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and sets the first and second operation pattern flags to off (see Figure 257(A)). The third operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S4210>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No), or the third operation detection flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S4210), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, if an operation pattern other than the above occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three operations, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to off (see Figure 257(A)). The MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in an unoperated state if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 254, in the selection button operation detection process (step S4003), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection button operation process, the lower selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Processing of operation of the upper selection button>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "upper selection operation detection flag".

<Processing of operation of the down selection button>
In the down selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the down selection button 212 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the down selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the down selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, "operation detection flag" should be read as "down selection operation detection flag".

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the left selection button 213 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, "operation detection flag" should be read as "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right-select button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the right selection button 214 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, "operation detection flag" should be read as "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 254, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S4004), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process, the MPU 41 sets an Up Operation Pattern Flag to determine the operation state for the Up Selection Button 211 from the operation history of the Up Selection Button 211, which is determined based on the first Up Selection Operation Detection Flag, the second Up Selection Operation Detection Flag, and the third Up Selection Operation Detection Flag. Here, the Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process is the same as the Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process in Figure 256, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process, in each step of the Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process in Figure 256, "Operation Detection Flag" should be read as "Up Selection Operation Detection Flag" and "Operation Pattern Flag" as "Up Selection Operation Pattern Flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 257(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the upper selection button 211 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the up selection button 211 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., as a result of three operation states, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to off. Note that if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is not being operated.

<Detection of lower selection operation pattern determination process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a down operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the down selection button 212 from the operation history of the down selection button 212, which is determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 256, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 256, "operation detection flag" should be read as "down selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "down selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 257(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first down selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the down selection button 212 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second down selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the down selection button 212 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the down selection button 212 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third down selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the down selection button 212 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the down selection button 212 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the down selection button 212 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third down selection operation detection flags to off. Note that if all of the first to third down selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the down selection button 212 is not being operated.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213, which is determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 256, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 256, "operation detection flag" should be read as "left selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "left selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 257(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second and third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operations of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the left selection button 213 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs as three operation states for the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the left selection button 213 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is not in operation when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a first right selection operation detection flag, a second right selection operation detection flag, and a right operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 256, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 256, "operation detection flag" should be read as "right selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "right selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 257(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operations of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the right selection button 214 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., as a result of three operation states, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is not in operation when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF.

[Detection of OK button operation]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 254, in the confirm button operation detection process (step S4005), the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the confirm button 21B and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the confirm button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the confirm button operation detection process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 255, "operation detection flag" should be read as "confirm button operation detection flag".

[Decision operation detection pattern determination process]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S4006), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the decision button 21B from the operation history of the decision button 21B, which is determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. Here, the decision operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 255, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 255, "operation detection flag" should be read as "decision operation detection flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 257(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operation states of the select button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second select operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third select operation pattern flags to OFF. The second select operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the select button 21B has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the select button 21B has begun).

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 detects that the operation patterns "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occur as three operation states for the select button 21B, it sets the third select operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second select operation pattern flags to OFF. The third select operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the select button 21B has changed from an operational state to a non-operational state (i.e., whether the operation of the select button 21B has ended).

Furthermore, if the MPU 41 detects that the operation state of the select button 21B for three presses is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., it sets all of the first to third select operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third select operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the select button 21B is not being operated.

[Command determination process]
Next, an example of the command determination process procedure executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 253 will be described. Here, Figures 258 and 259 are flowcharts of an example of the command determination process procedure.

<Step S4301>
As shown in Figure 258, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it has received a command from the main control unit 4 (step S4301). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4301: Yes), it proceeds to step S4302. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S4301: No), it terminates the command determination process.

Commands received from the main control unit 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512. The MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Furthermore, if a command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S4301 and is subject to processing, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area and stored, for example, in the processing operation storage area.

<Step S4302>
If a command is received (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4302). A special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the display time of the special symbols' variation in special symbol games (special symbol variation pattern) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is a special pattern variation command (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4303; if the received command is not a special pattern variation command (step S4302: No), the process proceeds to step S4307.

<Steps S4303 and S4304>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process (step S4303) and a variation type (performance pattern) setting process (step S4304) based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For details of the stop symbol combination setting process, please refer to Figures 260 and 261, and for details of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process,
This will be explained with reference to Figures 262 to 275.

<Step S4305>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 258, in step S4305, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the received special pattern variation command in the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special pattern variation command. The variation display counter is then decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process in Figure 253, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variation is being displayed, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the variation display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S4303 of the command determination process, and the performance pattern type set in step S4304, and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and performance image of the decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes display effects such as variation display and performance display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type and performance type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the pattern display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the display of multiple decorative patterns (for example, three) while a preset display time for variation has elapsed, and then sequentially stops displaying the variations of the multiple decorative patterns. During the display of the decorative patterns, various effects corresponding to the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed in the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, etc.

Furthermore, when the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, it sets, for example, the "Special Feature Game Performance" flag to ON. This "Special Feature Game Performance" flag indicates that a special feature game performance is being executed.

<Step S4307>
If the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol shift command (step S4307). A special symbol shift command is a command that indicates that the special symbol win/loss information, which shows the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first special symbol reserve storage area REB1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see Figure 236), has shifted when the number of first special symbol reserves N or the number of second special symbol reserves M decreases due to the start of a special symbol game (display of special symbol variation).

If the received command is a special-purpose shift command (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4308. If the received command is not a special-purpose shift command (step S4307: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4310.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
If the received command is a special feature shift command (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special feature data setting process (step S4308) and the special feature data image display process (step S4309), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the special feature data setting process performed in step S4308 is a process of shifting (updating) the data of special feature win/loss information (special feature data) stored in the special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. The special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 236) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, and stores special feature data equivalent to that of the special feature hold storage area 412b. The special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes the first special feature hold storage area corresponding area, the second special feature hold storage area corresponding area, and the special feature execution area corresponding area, respectively, for the first special feature hold storage area REA, the second special feature hold storage area REB, and the special feature execution area AE (see Figure 236) of the special feature hold storage area 412b. Furthermore, the first special feature hold storage area corresponding region includes the first to fourth special feature hold area corresponding region (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth hold areas REA1 to REA4 (see Figure 236) of the first special feature hold storage area REA in the special feature hold storage area 412b, and the first special feature hold number storage area corresponding region (see Figure 236) corresponding to the first special feature hold number storage area. In addition, the second special feature hold storage area corresponding region includes the second special feature hold area corresponding region (see Figure 236) corresponding to the first to fourth hold areas REB1 to REB4 (see Figure 236) of the second special feature hold storage area REB in the special feature hold storage area 412b, and the second special feature hold number storage area corresponding region (see Figure 236) corresponding to the second special feature hold number storage area.

On the other hand, the special feature data image display process performed in step S4309 is a process that shifts the image related to the special feature data (special feature data image) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special feature data stored in the special feature hold storage area corresponding region (not shown) of the RAM 512, which was shifted (updated) in step S4308.

Here, the special feature data image is displayed in the special feature data image display unit set in the symbol display unit 341 (not shown). The special feature data image display unit includes the special feature variation image display unit, the first special feature hold image display unit, and the second special feature hold image display unit, corresponding to the special feature execution area (not shown), the first special feature hold storage area, and the second special feature hold storage area corresponding to the aforementioned special feature hold storage area (not shown) set in the RAM 512.

The special symbol variation image display area is an area that displays the special symbol game image for the special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area, which corresponds to the special symbol execution area AE (see Figure 236) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. In this special symbol variation image display area, the special symbol game image is displayed when special symbol data is stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area, while the special symbol game image is not displayed when special symbol data is not stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area. In other words, the special symbol game image is displayed during the special symbol variation display and is hidden when the special symbol stops. To put it another way, the display of the special symbol game image clearly indicates that the special symbol game is in progress, and the hiding of the special symbol game image clearly indicates the end of the special symbol game.

The first special symbol hold image display area 76 is an area that displays the first special symbol hold image for the first special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area, which corresponds to the first special symbol hold storage area REA (see Figure 236) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This first special symbol hold image display area includes the first special symbol first hold image display area, the first special symbol second hold image display area, the first special symbol third hold image display area, and the first special symbol fourth hold image display area, corresponding to the first special symbol first to fourth hold area corresponding areas (not shown) of the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding area in the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area. Furthermore, in the display area for the first special symbol hold image, the first special symbol hold image is displayed when special symbol data is stored in any of the areas corresponding to the first special symbol hold areas 1 through 4 (not shown). Conversely, the first special symbol hold image is not displayed when no special symbol data is stored in any of the areas corresponding to the first special symbol hold areas 1 through 4 (not shown). In other words, if there are holds for the first special symbol game, the first special symbol hold image is displayed in a number corresponding to the number of first special symbol holds N, and is not displayed if there are no holds for the first special symbol game. In other words, the number of first special symbol holds N for the first special symbol game is indicated based on the number of first special symbol hold images displayed.

The second special symbol hold image display area is an area that displays the second special symbol hold image for the second special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area, which corresponds to the second special symbol hold storage area REB (see Figure 236) of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This second special symbol hold image display area includes the second special symbol first hold image display area, the second special symbol second hold image display area, the second special symbol third hold image display area, and the second special symbol fourth hold image display area, corresponding to the second special symbol first to fourth hold area corresponding areas (not shown) of the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding area in the aforementioned special symbol hold storage area corresponding area. Furthermore, in the second special symbol hold image display area, the second special symbol hold image is displayed when special symbol data is stored in any of the second special symbol 1st to 4th hold area corresponding areas (not shown). Conversely, the second special symbol hold image is not displayed when no special symbol data is stored in any of the second special symbol 1st to 4th hold area corresponding areas (not shown). In other words, if there are holds for the second special symbol game, the number of second special symbol hold images corresponding to the number of second special symbol holds M is displayed, and if there are no holds for the second special symbol game, no images are displayed. In other words, the number of second special symbol holds M for the second special symbol game is indicated based on the number of second special symbol hold images displayed.

Furthermore, in the special symbol data image display processing, if the received special symbol shift command is for the first special symbol, that is, if the first special symbol game is started, the special symbol game image is displayed in the special symbol variation image display area 75 based on the special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area (not shown). Additionally, the first special symbol hold image is displayed in the first special symbol hold image display area 76 based on the special symbol data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the first special symbol hold storage area (not shown).

On the other hand, in the special symbol data image display processing, if the received special symbol shift command is for the second special symbol, that is, if the second special symbol game is started, the special symbol game image is displayed in the special symbol variation image display area 75 based on the special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area (not shown). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold image is displayed in the second special symbol hold image display area 77 based on the special symbol data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the second special symbol hold storage area (not shown).

<Step S4310>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 258, if the received command is not a special feature shift command (step S4307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S4310). The first special feature hold command includes information indicating that the number of first special feature holds N for the first special feature game will increase, information regarding the increased number of first special feature holds N, and information regarding the special feature variation pattern (special feature variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery for the increasing first hold.

If the received command is a first special-purpose print hold command (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4311. If the received command is not a first special-purpose print hold command (step S4310: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4313.

<Steps S4311 and S4312>
If the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special feature hold information update process (step S4311) and the first special feature hold image display process (step S4312), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special figure hold information update process executed in step S4311 is a process that adds (updates) special figure validity information data (special figure data) to the first special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the first special figure hold information update process, the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 (see Figure 236) of the first special figure hold storage area REA of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the first special figure 1 to 4 hold area corresponding area (not shown) which is set to correspond to the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the said special figure validity information is stored. For example, when special feature win/loss information is stored in the second holding area REA2 (see Figure 236) of the first special feature holding storage area REA in the special feature holding storage area 412b, the special feature data is stored in the first special feature second holding area corresponding area (not shown) set in conjunction with the second holding area REA2. Furthermore, in the first special feature holding information update process, 1 is added to the first special feature holding count N stored in the first special feature holding count storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special feature holding storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the first special feature image display process executed in step S4312 adds the first special feature image to the first special feature image display area based on the special feature data added (updated) in the first special feature image storage area corresponding to step S4312 (not shown).

<Step S4313>
If the received command is not a first special symbol hold command (step S4310: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol hold command (step S4313). The second special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the number of second special symbol holds M for the second special symbol game will increase, information regarding the increased number of second special symbol holds M, and information regarding the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery for the increasing second hold.

If the received command is a second special-print hold command (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4314. If the received command is not a second special-print hold command (step S4313: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4316.

<Steps S4314 and S4315>
If the received command is a second special feature hold command (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special feature hold information update process (step S4314) and the second special feature hold image display process (step S4315), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the second special figure hold information update process executed in step S4314 is a process that adds (updates) special figure validity information data (special figure data) to the second special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the second special figure hold information update process, the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 (see Figure 236) of the second special figure hold storage area REB of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the second special figure first to fourth hold area corresponding area (not shown) which is set to correspond to the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the said special figure validity information is stored. For example, when special feature win/loss information is stored in the third hold area REB3 (see Figure 236) of the second special feature hold storage area REB in the special feature hold storage area 412b, the special feature data is stored in the first special feature third hold area corresponding area (not shown) set in conjunction with the third hold area REB3. Furthermore, in the second special feature hold information update process, 1 is added to the second special feature hold count M stored in the second special feature hold count storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special feature hold storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the second special feature image display process executed in step S4315 adds the second special feature image to the second special feature image display area 77 based on the special feature data added (updated) in step S4314 to the second special feature image storage area (not shown).

<Step S4316>
If the received command is not a second special symbol hold command (step S4313: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S4316). A jackpot game start command is a command that indicates the start of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3904 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 249, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a jackpot game is to be started.

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4317. If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4319.

<Steps S4317 and S4318>
If a jackpot game start command is received (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game performance setting process (step S4317), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON (step S4318), and terminates the command judgment process.

In the jackpot game performance setting process, a process is executed to set the jackpot performance, including the opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance), and ending performance, which are executed in the jackpot game. The opening performance and ending performance are display performances that are executed by display control processing in the symbol display unit 341, which is a control target different from the opening/closing door 319, when the variable prize entry opening 316 is closed by the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body. Specifically, the opening performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341 before the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 319 is started by the movable body control processing, and the ending performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341 after the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 319 is finished by the movable body control processing. The opening/closing execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance) is a display performance that is executed when the variable prize entry opening 316 is opened and closed by the movement of the opening/closing door 319 by the movable body control processing. In other words, the opening and closing of the variable prize slot 316 by the opening/closing door 319 is performed during the display of the opening/closing execution mode as a display effect on the symbol display unit 341.

This jackpot game presentation setting process executes a display control process to set the display effects to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the opening, opening/closing execution mode (round gameplay and interval), and ending of the jackpot game. Furthermore, it executes a process to set the sound effects on the speaker 26 and the lamp effects on the lighting unit 27 to be executed during the opening, opening/closing execution mode (round gameplay and interval), and ending of the jackpot game. Also, during the execution of the effects in the opening/closing execution mode (round gameplay and interval), the movable opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed.

Furthermore, the opening sequence, opening/closing execution mode sequence (round game sequence and interval sequence), and ending sequence may be one or more types. For example, if multiple types of opening sequences, opening/closing execution mode sequence (round game sequence and interval sequence), and ending sequences are set, it is conceivable to set sequences for different scenarios, such as a sequence for a probability-increasing jackpot, a sequence for a regular jackpot, and a sequence for when the probability-increasing game state continues.

Furthermore, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag indicates that a big win game is currently being played. In step S5201 of the big win game presentation control process (as shown in Figure 289 below), it is referenced to determine whether or not a big win game is currently being played, i.e., whether or not to control the progress of the big win game presentation.

<Step S4319>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S4319). An opening start command is a command that indicates the start of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3908 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 249, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be started.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4320; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S4319: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4321.

<Step S4320>
If an opening start command is received (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening performance start flag to ON (step S4320) and terminates the command determination process. The opening performance start flag is a flag that starts the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S5202 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below to determine whether or not to start the opening performance.

<Step S4321>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S4319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S4321). An opening end command is a command that indicates the end of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3914 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 250, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be ended.

If the received command is an opening/closing command (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4322. If the received command is not an opening/closing command (step S4321: No), the process proceeds to step S4323 in Figure 259.

<Step S4322>
If an opening end command is received (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening performance end flag to ON (step S4322) and terminates the command determination process. The opening performance end flag is a flag that terminates the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S5205 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below to determine whether or not to terminate the opening performance.

<Step S4323>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S4321: No), as shown in Figure 259, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S4323). A round game start command indicates the start of a round game in opening/closing execution mode and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. It is set in step S3917 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 250, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a round game in opening/closing execution mode is to be started.

If the received command is a round game start command (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4324. If the received command is not a round game start command (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4326.

<Steps S4324 and S4325>
If a round game start command is received (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to ON (step S4324), sets round number information indicating which round the game is in to RAM 512 (step S4325), and terminates the command judgment process. The round game performance start flag is referenced in step S5208 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below to determine whether or not to start each round game performance of the opening/closing execution mode.

<Step S4326>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S4326). A round game end command is a command that indicates the end of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set in step S3929 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 251, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the round game is to be ended.

If the received command is a round game end command (step S4326: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4327. If the received command is not a round game end command (step S4326: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4328.

<Step S4327>
If a round game end command is received (step S4326: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S4327) and terminates the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced in step S5211 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below when determining whether or not to end the round game performance.

<Step S4328>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S4326: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S4328). An interval start command is a command that indicates the start of an interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S3933 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 251, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when an interval is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4329; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S4328: No), the process proceeds to step S4330.

<Step S4329>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to ON (step S4329) and terminates the command determination process. The interval performance start flag is referenced in step S5214 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below to determine whether or not to start the interval performance.

<Step S4330>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S4328: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S4330). An interval end command is a command that indicates the end of the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S3939 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 252, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the interval is to be ended.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4331; if the received command is not an interval end command (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4332.

<Step S4331>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to ON (step S4331) and terminates the command determination process. The interval performance end flag is referenced in step S5217 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below when determining whether or not to terminate the interval performance.

<Step S4332>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S4332). An ending start command is a command that indicates the start of the ending in a jackpot game, and is set in step S3942 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 251, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4333; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S4332: No), the process proceeds to step S4334.

<Step S4333>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON (step S4333) and terminates the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referenced in step S5220 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below to determine whether or not to start the ending performance.

<Step S4334>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S4332: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S4334). An ending end command is a command that indicates the end of the jackpot game, and is set in step S3948 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 252, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be terminated.

Here, if the received command is an ending command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4335; if the received command is not an ending command (step S4334: No), the process proceeds to step S4336.

<Step S4335>
If the received command is an ending termination command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance termination flag to ON (step S4335) and terminates the command determination process. The ending performance termination flag is referenced in step S5223 of the jackpot game performance control process shown in Figure 289 below when determining whether or not to terminate the ending performance.

<Step S4336>
If the received command is not an ending command (step S4334: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336). A jackpot game end command is a command that indicates the end of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3950 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 249, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the jackpot game is to be ended.

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4337. If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4339.

<Step S4337>
If the received command is a jackpot game termination command (step S4336: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, to off (step S4337), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4338>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control unit 4 (step S4338), and then terminates the command determination process.

[Stop Symbol Combination Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination, which is performed in step S4303 of the command processing in Figure 258, will be explained. In the stop symbol combination setting procedure, the symbol combinations are set for when multiple decorative symbols (for example, three) that are displayed in a variable manner by the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game are stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the stop symbol combination based on the special symbol variation pattern command by referring to the first stop symbol selection table (see Figure 260), which will be described later. Here, Figure 260 is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table, and Figure 261 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination. The stop symbol combination setting procedure will be explained below with reference to Figures 260 and 261.

As shown in Figure 260, the first stop symbol selection table specifies the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be displayed first in the symbol display unit 341. Figure 260 assumes that the decorative symbols are "1" through "9," that "333" indicates a probability variation jackpot (either a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot), that "777" indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that any other repeating numbers besides "333" and "777" indicate a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R Regular Jackpot," the symbols "3" and "7" are not assigned as the first stop symbols. Instead, the first stop symbol is determined by a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7." In other words, if the lottery result is a "5R Regular Jackpot," the symbol combinations "333" or "777," which indicate a 5R Probability Jackpot or a 16R Probability Jackpot (Probability Jackpot), will not be displayed as stop symbols.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "5R probability-changing jackpot," the number "7" is not assigned as the first stop symbol. Instead, the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols other than "7" at a predetermined probability. That is, if the lottery result is a "5R probability-changing jackpot," the symbol combination "777," which indicates a 16R probability-changing jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is a "5R probability-changing jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" combination, which indicates a 5R probability-changing jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "5R probability-changing jackpot," the symbol stop display may show a symbol combination other than the "333" combination, which suggests a 5R regular jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R probability-increasing jackpot," there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9," and the first stop symbol is determined by a predetermined probability from among the decorative symbols from "1" to "9." That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-increasing jackpot," a combination of repeating digits other than the "777" combination that indicates a 16R probability-increasing jackpot may be displayed as the stop symbol. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-increasing jackpot," the stop symbol display result may be a combination of repeating digits other than the "777" combination that suggests a 5R probability-increasing jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot.

Then, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol, and then determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol. This determines the combination of stop symbols that will be displayed on the active lines of the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss," there is a distribution to all decorative symbols from "1" to "9," and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the lottery result is a "miss" and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol based on the type of miss selected based on the miss type table (see Figure 237 (D)) and the first stop symbol that was determined earlier. For example, if the miss type is a near miss (miss before and after), the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, if the miss type is a near miss (not a near miss before or after), the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Furthermore, if the aforementioned "miss" type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined independently of the first and second stop symbols. Note that the stop symbol combination for decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, or the first stop symbol may be determined only by the sound lamp control device 5, while the second and final stop symbols are determined by the display control device 6.

Here, Figure 261 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for setting stop symbol combinations. The following explanation will describe an example of the procedure for setting stop symbol combinations, referring to Figure 261.

<Steps S4401-S4403>
As shown in Figure 261, in the first stop symbol selection table, the MPU 51 first identifies the value of the first stop symbol type counter (step S4401) and then identifies the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4402). Then, based on the value of the first stop symbol type counter identified in step S4401 and the result of the jackpot lottery identified in step S4402, the MPU 51 sets the stop symbol combination (step S4403) and proceeds to step S4404.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery identified in step S4402 is a 16R probability variation jackpot. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4405. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4406.

<Step S4405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of stop symbols set in step S4403 is "777", which indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot. If the combination of stop symbols is "777" (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4406, and if the combination of stop symbols is not "777" (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4407.

<Step S4406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (Step S4404: No), or if the combination of stopped symbols is "777" (Step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag to ON (Step S4406) and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process. The 16R probability change non-upgrade flag is a flag that causes the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, to move according to the drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274) to execute a 16R probability change upgrade effect, and also causes a button effect (see Figure 277) to be executed before this 16R probability change upgrade effect is executed. This flag is referenced in step S4945 of Figure 281 or step S4953 of Figure 282 in the movable rotating mechanism control processing described later to determine whether or not to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 according to the drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274), or in step S4702 of the button effect setting processing of Figure 276 described later to determine whether or not to execute a button effect.

<Step S4407>
If the combination of stop symbols set in step S4403 is not "777", which indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation upgrade flag to ON and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process. The 16R probability upgrade flag is a flag that causes the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, to move according to drive pattern F (see Figures 266(C) and 272) to execute a 16R probability upgrade effect, and also causes a button effect (see Figure 277) to be executed before the execution of this 16R probability upgrade effect. It is referenced in step S4942 of Figure 281 or step S4950 of Figure 282 in the movable rotating mechanism control processing described later to determine whether or not to set drive data 4 to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 according to drive pattern F (see Figures 266(C) and 272), or in step S4701 of the button effect setting processing in Figure 276 described later to determine whether or not to execute a button effect.

[Setting the type of variation (performance pattern)]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (performance pattern) that is executed in step S4304 of the command processing in Figure 258 will be explained. In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process, the special game performances to be executed by various performance means (symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, movable rotating mechanism member 37) in the special game are set. The variation type (performance pattern) setting process will be explained below with reference to Figures 262 to 277.

<Step S4501>
As shown in Figure 262, in the variation type (performance pattern) setting process, the MPU 51 first refers to the variation type table (see Figure 263) based on the special figure variation pattern command to set the variation type (performance pattern) and variation display time, and then sets the performance pattern type based on the performance pattern type selection table (see Figure 264) corresponding to the variation type (performance pattern) (step S4501).

Figure 263 shows an example of a variation type table referenced by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (performance pattern).

As shown in Figure 263, the variation type table defines the variation display time and variation type (performance pattern) content corresponding to the special variation pattern command. For example, the special variation pattern command "A01," where the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special variation pattern is "01," is associated with a variation display time of "30s" and a variation type of "normal reach performance pattern." Similarly, the special variation pattern command "B02," where the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and the special variation pattern is "02," is associated with a variation display time of "60s" and a variation type of "super reach performance pattern," and the special variation pattern command "C03," where the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and the special variation pattern is "03," is associated with a variation display time of "90s" and a variation type of "special reach performance pattern." Furthermore, the special symbol variation pattern command "D04," where the lottery result is "miss" and the special symbol variation pattern is "04," is associated with a variation display time of "7s" and a variation type of "non-reach animation pattern." Similarly, the special symbol variation pattern command "D05," where the lottery result is "miss" and the special symbol variation pattern is "05," is associated with a variation display time of "10s" and a variation type of "non-reach animation pattern."

Furthermore, Figures 264(A) to 264(C) show examples of performance pattern type selection tables. Each performance pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (performance pattern). Specifically, Figure 264(A) is the normal reach performance pattern type selection table referenced when the final individual performance type in a special symbol game performance is a normal reach performance; Figure 264(B) is the super reach performance pattern type selection table referenced when the final individual performance type in a special symbol game performance is a super reach performance; and Figure 264(C) is the special reach performance pattern type selection table referenced when the final individual performance type in a special symbol game performance is a special reach performance.

In this embodiment, we will explain using the example of a case where there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 264, the performance type table for cases where the variation type is "no reach" is omitted.

In the normal reach animation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 264(A), "Animation Pattern X1" to "Animation Pattern X5" are defined as animation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the animation pattern type counter, depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and miss). When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (animation pattern) is a normal reach animation pattern, it selects the animation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the animation pattern type counter from the normal reach animation pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, animation patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach animation pattern type selection table are, for example, animations in which a normal reach animation is executed after the end of a high-speed variation animation in which the decorative symbols change rapidly, and the final individual animation type is a normal reach animation.

Furthermore, in the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table shown in Figure 264(B), "Performance Pattern Y1" to "Performance Pattern Y5" are defined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the Performance Pattern Type Counter, depending on the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a Super Reach Performance Pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the Performance Pattern Type Counter from the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table according to the lottery result. Here, Performance Patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table are, for example, performances that, after the end of a high-speed variation performance, are executed as a normal reach performance, and then develop into a Super Reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance duration than a normal reach performance. Note that the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table may also include Super Reach Performance Patterns that develop into a Super Reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in Figure 264(C), "Performance Pattern Z1" to "Performance Pattern Z5" are defined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, if the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances that are executed as normal reach performances and super reach performances after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develop into a special reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the normal reach performance and super reach performance, and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern type selection table may also include special reach performance patterns that develop into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without going through at least one of the normal reach performance and super reach performance.

<Steps S4502 and S4503>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 262, in step S4502, the MPU 51 determines whether the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a normal reach performance pattern. If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a normal reach performance pattern (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the Maru Reach flag (step S4503) and proceeds to step S4508. The normal reach flag is referenced in step S4601 of the mechanism activation performance setting process shown in Figure 275, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a normal reach performance pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4504.

<Steps S4504 and S4505>
If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a normal reach performance pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a super reach performance pattern (step S4504). If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a super reach performance pattern (step S4504: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a super reach flag (step S4505) and proceeds to step S4508. The super reach flag is referenced in step S4606 of the mechanism activation performance setting process shown in Figure 275 below. On the other hand, if the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a super reach performance pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4506.

<Steps S4506 and S4507>
If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a super reach performance pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a special reach performance pattern (step S4506). If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a special reach performance pattern (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a special reach flag (step S4507) and proceeds to step S4508. The special reach flag is referenced in step S4614 of the mechanism operation performance setting process shown in Figure 275 below. On the other hand, if the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a special reach performance pattern (step S4506: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4508.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 executes the mechanism operation and performance setting process and proceeds to step S4409. In the mechanism operation and performance setting process, although the details will be described later, if a super reach performance or a special reach performance is executed in the special feature game performance, or if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a jackpot, a movable body control process is executed to set the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body in the special feature game performance.

<Step S4409>
In step S4409, the MPU 51 executes the button effect setting process and terminates the special symbol game setting process. The button effect setting process, as will be described in detail later, sets an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20 before informing the player whether or not the movable rotating mechanism member 37 will upgrade to a 16R probability variation jackpot, from the time the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped on the active line with matching numbers during the execution period of the special symbol game effect until the decorative symbols are definitively stopped.

[Setting up special effects animations]
Next, we will explain the mechanism operation effect setting process that is executed in step S4508 of the special game effect setting process shown in Figure 262. Before that, however, we will first explain the operating timing and movement mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body.

Here, Figure 265 shows an example of the operating timing of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body. In this embodiment, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is operated to announce that the game will develop into a Super Reach performance, that it will not develop into a Super Reach performance, that it will develop into a Special Reach performance, that it will not develop into a Special Reach performance, that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in Figure 265, the operating timing of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is set according to the type of performance (performance pattern) set in step S4501 of the special game performance setting process shown in Figure 262.

Specifically, if the performance type (performance pattern) is a complete miss, the timing of the movable rotating mechanism 37's operation is not set. In other words, if the performance type (performance pattern) is a complete miss, the movable rotating mechanism 37 will not operate.

When the performance type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, the performance timing A is set as the activation timing of the movable rotating mechanism 37. Performance timing A is set towards the end of the normal reach performance and starts when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special feature game.

Then, in the case of a normal reach animation pattern, at the timing A of the mechanism's activation, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, operates in the movable mode C (see Figure 266(C) described later) to announce that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation upgrade), if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, it operates in the movable mode D (see Figure 266(D) described later) to announce that it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and operates in the movable mode D (see Figure 266(D) described later) to announce that it will not develop into a special reach (SP non-development), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss.

When the performance type (performance pattern) is a Super Reach performance pattern, the operating timing of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is set to mechanism operation timing A and mechanism operation timing B. Mechanism operation timing A is set towards the end of the normal reach performance and starts when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special symbol game. Mechanism operation timing B is set towards the end of the Super Reach performance and starts when time T2 has elapsed from the start of the special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the case of a Super Reach animation pattern, at the timing A of the mechanism's activation, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is activated in the movable mode A described later (see Figure 266(A)) to announce that a Super Reach will develop (SP development), regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process.

Furthermore, in the case of a Super Reach animation pattern, at the mechanism activation timing B, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates in the movable mode C (see Figure 266(C) described later) to announce that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation upgrade), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, if the result is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, if the result is a movable mode D (see Figure 266(D)) to announce that it will not develop into a Special Reach (SPSP non-development).

When the performance type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, the operating timing of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is set to mechanism operation timing A, mechanism operation timing B, and mechanism operation timing C. Mechanism operation timing A is set towards the end of the normal reach performance and starts when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special symbol game. Mechanism operation timing B is set towards the end of the super reach performance and starts when time T2 has elapsed from the start of the special symbol game. Mechanism operation timing C is set towards the end of the special reach performance and starts when time T3 has elapsed from the start of the special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the case of a special reach animation pattern, at the timing A of the mechanism's activation, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is activated in the movable mode A described later (see Figure 266(A)) to announce that a super reach will develop (SP development), regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process.

Furthermore, in the case of a special reach animation pattern, at the timing B of the mechanism's activation, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is activated in the movable mode A (see Figure 266(A)) described later, which announces that a special reach will develop (SPSP development), regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process.

Furthermore, in the case of a special reach animation pattern, at the timing C of the mechanism's activation, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, operates in the movable mode C (see Figure 266(C) described later) to announce that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation upgrade) if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and operates in the movable mode D (see Figure 266(D) described later) to announce that it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade) if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot.

Here, Figures 266(A) to 266(D) show examples of the movable modes of the movable rotating component member 37. As shown in Figures 266(A) to 266(D), in this embodiment, movable modes A, B, C, and D are set as the movable modes of the movable rotating component member 37.

The movable mode A shown in Figure 266(A) indicates that the game will develop into a Super Reach performance. After the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in movable mode A by the movable body control processing is completed, control is performed in the symbol display unit 341, which is a different control target from the movable rotating mechanism member 37, to display the Super Reach performance as a display performance by display control processing. The movable mode B shown in Figure 266(B) indicates that the game will develop into a Special Reach performance. After the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in movable mode B by the movable body control processing is completed, control is performed in the symbol display unit 341, which is a different control target from the movable rotating mechanism member 37, to display the Special Reach performance as a display performance by display control processing. The movable mode C shown in Figure 266(C) indicates that the game will be a 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, after the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in movable mode C by the movable body control processing is completed, control is performed in the symbol display unit 341, which is a different control target from the movable rotating mechanism member 37, to display a display performance indicating that the game will be a 16R probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, the movable mode D shown in Figure 266(D) indicates that the game will not develop into a super reach sequence, a special reach sequence, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. Even in this case, after the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in movable mode D by the movable body control processing is completed, control may be executed to display a display sequence in the symbol display unit 341, which is a different control target from the movable rotating mechanism member 37, through display control processing.

Thus, in this embodiment, the control executed after the completion of a series of specific operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 includes a control target different from the movable rotating mechanism member 37. By including a control target different from the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the control executed after the completion of the series of specific operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, it becomes possible to re-assign information to a control target different from the movable rotating mechanism member 37 after the completion of the series of specific operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. This makes it possible to re-assign information to the player at a control target different from the movable rotating mechanism member 37, even if the player misses the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 or does not understand the content provided by the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. Furthermore, in this embodiment, by including a control target different from the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the control executed after the completion of a series of specific operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, it becomes possible to explicitly indicate or suggest subsequent effects in response to the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. This allows players to focus on the movement of the movable rotating mechanism 37 and enjoy the game while anticipating that advantageous effects will be explicitly shown or suggested, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Movable modes A, B, C, and D all include a common continuous motion as the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body. In this common continuous motion, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved according to the drive patterns A, B, and C described later. In movable mode A shown in Figure 266(A), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved according to the drive pattern D described later, after the common continuous motion (drive patterns A, B, and C). In movable mode B shown in Figure 266(B), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved according to the drive pattern E described later, after the common continuous motion (drive patterns A, B, and C). In movable mode C shown in Figure 266(C), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved according to the drive pattern F described later, after the common continuous motion (drive patterns A, B, and C). In the movable mode D shown in Figure 266(D), the movable rotating component member 37 is moved according to the drive pattern G described later, after a common continuous operation (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 266(E), the ROM 511 of the sound lamp control device 5 is configured with a drive data storage area that stores drive data as information for operating the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, in a predetermined movable mode. This drive data storage area stores drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1), drive data 2 (mechanism operation scenario data 2), drive data 3 (mechanism operation scenario data 3), drive data 4 (mechanism operation scenario data 4), and drive data 5 (mechanism operation scenario data 5). When controlling the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, based on drive data 1, drive data corresponding to the movable mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is read from the drive data storage area set in the ROM 511, and the read drive data is set in a temporary storage area provided in the RAM 512. Then, the MPU 51 controls the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, based on drive data 1 set in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512. Here, while ROM 511 is suitable for storing drive data because it is a non-volatile memory, its slow read speed makes it unsuitable for directly reading drive data from ROM 511 to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37. Therefore, by setting the drive data read from the drive data storage area of ROM 511 into the temporary storage area of RAM 512 and controlling the operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 from there, it becomes possible to improve the operating speed of the movable rotating mechanism 37 compared to directly reading the drive data from the drive data storage area of ROM 511 to control its operation.

The drive data 1 (feature operation scenario data 1) will be described later with reference to Figure 269, but it is information that causes the movable rotating feature member 37, which is a movable body, to perform a common continuous operation in its movement modes A to D. That is, when it is decided to operate the movable rotating feature member 37, which is a movable body, in movement modes A to D, it is possible to cause the movable rotating feature member 37 to perform a common continuous operation by simply setting the drive data 1 read from the drive data storage area of the ROM 511 into the temporary storage area of the RAM 512 once. Furthermore, by controlling the common continuous operation of the movable rotating feature member 37 based on the drive data 1, it is possible to simplify the control of the movable rotating feature member 37 and reduce the amount of data. As a result, the amount of drive data used for one movement mode can be reduced, which reduces the memory load, and the control burden such as reading and temporarily storing drive data when operating the movable rotating feature member 37, which is a movable body, is also reduced. When the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is operated based on common drive data 1, after all control processing based on common drive data 1 is completed, the next operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is executed based on drive data 2 to 5, which are individually set according to each mode of movement for the subsequent operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37.

The details of the drive data 2 (mechanism operation scenario data 2) will be described later with reference to Figure 270(B), but it contains information on how to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in a specific operation, described later in drive pattern D (see Figure 270(A)), after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C), in the operation mode A of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 that announces the development of a super reach (SP development).

The details of the drive data 3 (mechanism operation scenario data 3) will be described later with reference to Figure 271(B), but in the movement mode B of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 that announces the development of a special reach (SPSP development), it contains information that, after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved as an individual operation in drive pattern E (see Figure 271(A)), which will be described later.

The drive data 4 (feature operation scenario data 4) will be described later with reference to Figure 273, but in the operation mode C of the movable rotating feature member 37 that announces a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation upgrade), it contains information that, after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C), the movable rotating feature member 37 is operated as an individual operation in drive pattern F (see Figure 272), which will be described later.

The drive data 5 (mechanism operation scenario data 5), whose details will be described later with reference to Figure 274(B), contains information for the movement mode D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which indicates that it will not develop into a Super Reach (SP non-development), will not develop into a Special Reach (SPSP non-development), or will not be a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade). This information involves moving the movable rotating mechanism member 37 with a specific drive pattern G (see Figure 274(A)) after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C).

Thus, movable modes A, B, C, and D all include a common continuous operation as the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. Of movable modes A to D, movable modes A, B, and C provide advantageous notifications to the player through the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. On the other hand, of movable modes A to D, movable mode D provides unfavorable notifications to the player through the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. That is, in this embodiment, after the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, by the common continuous operation of movable modes A to D is completed, a first control is executed in movable modes A to C to provide advantageous notifications to the player, and a second control is executed in movable mode D to provide unfavorable notifications to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, at the end of the continuous operation common to all modes A to D, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped moving while in the standby position, which is the return position. That is, in this embodiment, after the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 by the continuous operation common to all modes A to D is completed, in both cases—when a first control is executed in modes A to C to provide a notification favorable to the player, and when a second control is executed in mode D to provide a notification unfavorable to the player—the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is started while in the standby position, which is the return position. Therefore, when the continuous operation common to all modes A to D is completed, regardless of whether the subsequent control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is the first control or the second control, the subsequent control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be started smoothly and without any sense of incongruity. As a result, if the termination condition for a continuous operation is met, even if the timing of that termination determination is uncertain, the system can transition from the continuous operation to the next operation performed by drive patterns D to G, which are executed by the first and second controls.

Here, Figure 267(A) shows an example of the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive pattern A, which is a common continuous operation of the movable mechanism member 37; Figure 267(B) shows an example of the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive pattern B, which is a common continuous operation of the movable mechanism member 37; and Figure 268 shows an example of the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive pattern C, which is a common continuous operation of the movable mechanism member 37.

As shown in Figure 267(A), the common continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, known as drive pattern A, is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 makes two reciprocating movements between the standby position (see Figure 267(A1)), which is the return-side position, and the intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 267(A2)), which is the drive-side position (see Figure 267(A3)). The intermediate operating position 1 is set at a position closer to the standby position (near the standby position) between the standby position and the maximum operating position (the position furthest from the standby position) of the movable rotating mechanism member 37.

As shown in Figure 267(B), the common continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, known as drive pattern B, is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 makes two reciprocating movements between the standby position (see Figure 267(B1)), which is the return-side position, and the intermediate operating position 2 (see Figure 267(B2)), which is the drive-side position (see Figure 267(B3)). The intermediate operating position 2 is set to a position closer to the maximum operating position (the position furthest from the standby position) than the intermediate operating position 1 of the movable rotating mechanism member 37.

As shown in Figure 268, the common continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, known as drive pattern C, is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved from the standby position (see Figure 268(A1)) to the intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 268(A2)), then makes two round trips between the return-side position, intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 268(A2)), and the drive-side position, intermediate operating position 2 (see Figure 268(A3)), before returning from the intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 268(A2)) to the standby position (see Figure 268(A4)).

As described above, the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is realized based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1), which is information stored in the drive data storage area set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. Figure 269 shows an example of the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) stored in the drive data storage area. The drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) shown in Figure 269 is a data set that defines the control content and control sequence for performing the common continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, and is an example where the vertical movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting and lowering.

As shown in Figure 269, the drive data 1 (feature operation scenario data 1) operates the movable rotating feature member 37 in drive patterns A to C according to processing No. 01 to processing No. 29. Of processing No. 01 to processing No. 29, processing No. 01 to processing No. 09 correspond to the processing for drive pattern A, processing No. 10 to processing No. 17 correspond to the processing for drive pattern B, and processing No. 18 to processing No. 29 correspond to the processing for drive pattern C.

In the processing of processing No. 01 to processing No. 09 for drive pattern A, which is a continuous operation, first the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) is set in the temporary storage area of RAM 512, and then the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 200 msec (processing No. 01), and then the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 12 steps in the forward direction (processing No. 02). As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved 12 mm downward, and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. Then, after the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 12 msec (processing No. 03), the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 12 steps in the reverse direction (processing No. 04). As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved 12 mm upward after the stopped state of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 at the intermediate operating position 1 is maintained for 12 msec, so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position. As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 makes one round trip between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. After that, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 40 msec (process No. 05), and then by executing processes No. 06 to No. 09, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 makes one round trip between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position, similar to when the processes No. 02 to No. 05 described above were executed. As a result, processes No. 01 to No. By executing process 09, the movable rotating component member 37 performs the operation of drive pattern A, in which it makes two reciprocating movements between the standby position (see Figure 267(A1)), which is the return position, and the intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 267(A2)), which is the drive position.

For drive pattern B, which is a continuous operation, in processes No. 10 to No. 17, first the lifting stepping motor is rotated 36 steps in the forward direction (process No. 10). This moves the movable rotating mechanism member 37 downward by 36 mm, positioning it in the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. Then, after maintaining the lifting stepping motor in a stopped state for 36 msec (process No. 11), the lifting stepping motor is rotated 36 steps in the reverse direction (process No. 12), and the lifting stepping motor in a stopped state is maintained for 40 msec (process No. 13). This moves the movable rotating mechanism member 37 upward by 36 mm, positioning it in the standby position, which is the return side position, so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 completes one round trip between the standby position (return side position) and the intermediate operating position 2 (drive side position). Furthermore, process No. By executing processes 14 through 17, the movable rotating component member 37 makes one round trip between the standby position (return side) and the intermediate operating position 2 (drive side), similar to the case when processes 10 through 13 are executed. As a result, executing processes 10 through 17 executes drive pattern B, in which the movable rotating component member 37 makes two round trips between the standby position (return side) (see Figure 267 (B1)) and the intermediate operating position 2 (drive side) (see Figure 267 (B2)).

In the processes No. 18 to No. 29 for the continuous drive pattern C, the stepping motor for lifting is first rotated 12 steps in the forward direction (process No. 18), and the rotation of the stepping motor for lifting is stopped for 40 msec (process No. 19). As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved 12 mm downward, and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned from the standby position (see Figure 268 (A1)) to the intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 268 (A2)). As described above, the intermediate operating position 1 in drive pattern C is the return position in the reciprocating motion between the intermediate operating position 1 and the intermediate operating position 2 in drive pattern C. Then, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 24 more steps in the forward direction (process No. 20), and the rotation of the stepping motor for lifting is stopped for 24 msec (process No. 21). As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved downward by a further 24 mm, and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 2 (see Figure 267 (A3)). As described above, the intermediate operating position 2 in drive pattern C is the drive-side position in the reciprocating motion between the intermediate operating position 1 and the intermediate operating position 2 in drive pattern C. Furthermore, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the reverse direction by 24 steps (process No. 22), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 40 msec (process No. 23). As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved upward by 24 mm, and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return-side position (see Figure 268 (A2)), so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 makes one reciprocating motion between the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return-side position, and the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive-side position. After that, by executing processes No. 24 to No. 27, the aforementioned process No. Similar to the execution of processes 20 to 23, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 makes one round trip between the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position (see Figure 268 (A2)), and the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive position (see Figure 268 (A3)). As a result, by executing processes 20 to 27, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 makes two round trips between the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position (see Figure 268 (A2)), and the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive position (see Figure 268 (A3)). Furthermore, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 12 more steps in the reverse direction (process No. 28), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 40 msec (process No. 29). This returns the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to the standby position (see Figure 268 (A1)). As a result, processes 18 to 27 When process 29 is executed, the operation of drive pattern C is performed on the movable rotating component member 37.

Here, in drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is stopped at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive-side position when it is operated in drive pattern A, is set to 12 msec, corresponding to the number of steps (12 steps) of the upward and downward movement in the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. Also, in drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is stopped at the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive-side position when it is operated in drive pattern B, is set to 36 msec, corresponding to the number of steps (36 steps) of the upward and downward movement in the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. Furthermore, in drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is stopped at the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive-side position when it is operated in drive pattern C, is set to 24 msec, corresponding to the number of steps (24 steps) of the upward and downward movement in the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. In other words, in the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the stopping time at the drive-side position is set according to the amount of reciprocating movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, and the larger the amount of reciprocating movement, the longer the stopping time at the drive-side position is set. That is, in this embodiment, in the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, there are three types of periods during which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved to the drive-side position, including at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period. Furthermore, in the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the larger the amount of reciprocating movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the longer the stopping time at the drive-side position is set, resulting in a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 operates more slowly the larger the amount of reciprocating movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the continuous operation. In other words, by setting multiple periods during which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved to the drive-side position in the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, for example, by including at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period in the continuous operation, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be operated with various drive patterns, thereby diversifying the continuous operation. This makes it possible to improve the visual appeal when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved for performance purposes during the execution of display effects on the symbol display unit 341, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved to the drive-side position may include at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period, and may be set independently of the amount of movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the reciprocating motion.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the processes No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17, No. 23, No. 27, and No. 29 defined in the drive data 1 (feature operation scenario data 1) are being executed, a termination determination is performed to determine whether the termination determination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating feature member 37, which is a movable body based on the drive data 1, has been met. That is, multiple termination determinations are performed at different timings from the start of the continuous operation of the movable rotating feature member 37 based on the drive data 1. Then, as will be described in detail later, if a termination determination is made that the termination determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating feature member 37 based on the drive data 1 has been met, the continuous operation is terminated. In other words, the termination timing of the continuous operation of the movable rotating feature member 37 based on the drive data 1 is undefined. As a result, the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotating component member 37 based on the drive data 1 becomes indeterminate, and the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotating component member 37 based on the drive data 1 includes at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period.

On the other hand, the execution time of the special feature game, which is the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1, is set at the start of the special feature variation and is not changed during the variation of the special feature. As a result, the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 becomes indeterminate, and if the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 includes at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period, then the period after the end of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1, i.e., the remaining variation time of the special feature game, also becomes indeterminate. This makes it possible to execute display effects in the symbol display unit 341 according to the indeterminate remaining variation time of the special feature game. For example, it becomes possible to make the display effects when the remaining variation time of the special feature game is long different from the display effects when the remaining variation time of the special feature game is short. Furthermore, if the condition for determining the end of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 based on the drive data 1 is an operation of the operation button 20 by the player, the earlier the player operates the operation button 20, the longer the remaining variation time of the special feature game becomes. Therefore, when the remaining variation time of the special feature game is short, for example, when the player operates the operation button 20 late and the execution period of the continuous operation is longer than the first period (a second period), the default display effect is executed. Conversely, when the remaining variation time of the special feature game is long, for example, when the player operates the operation button 20 early and the execution period of the continuous operation is the first period, a premium effect can be executed. This makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 20 with the aim of executing a premium effect as the display effect.

Here, the movable body has various modes of movement consisting of multiple actions, and the mode of movement to be executed is determined by lottery or similar means. On the other hand, the modes of movement of the movable body have common actions. In this case, if drive data is set separately for each action of the movable body's modes of movement (e.g., moving slightly downward from the initial position, returning to the initial position from that downward position), then for each action, a series of processes must be performed, such as identifying the next action to be executed, reading the drive data for the next action from ROM and setting it in RAM, setting the termination condition for the currently executed action, and determining the termination. Furthermore, since the modes of movement of the movable body include multiple actions, if the aforementioned series of processes were to be performed for each action included in the currently executed mode of movement, the processing effort would be large, resulting in a heavy control burden. Moreover, if one action in one mode of movement of the movable body is common to one action in another mode of movement, storing the same drive data redundantly in ROM is wasteful due to the large amount of data. Therefore, by storing a single common drive data (data list, task data) in ROM for actions common to multiple movement modes of a movable body, it becomes possible to execute common actions in the movable body with a single read of the common drive data from ROM and a single setting of the common drive data in RAM. This reduces the amount of data required in ROM when executing common actions in a movable body, and simplifies control such as reading drive data from ROM and setting drive data in RAM.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is provided with multiple movable modes (movement modes A to D), and the operation of drive patterns A to C among these movable modes A to D is common. Furthermore, in this embodiment, drive data 1 for the continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) common to the multiple movable modes A to D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stored in ROM. Therefore, when the continuous operation common to the multiple movable modes A to D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is executed, drive data 1 is read once from ROM and set once in RAM. This reduces the amount of drive data required to realize each movable mode A to D, thereby reducing the memory load, and also reduces the control burden of reading and temporarily storing (setting) drive data when operating the movable rotating mechanism member 37.

Incidentally, even when a continuous operation common to multiple motion modes of a movable body is executed based on a single common drive data, some of these motion modes may have different termination conditions than other motion modes. That is, the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition for a continuous operation common to multiple motion modes of the movable body can be uncertain. For example, the termination condition may be set to require the player to perform an operation on the control device within a predetermined period set during the execution period of the common continuous operation. In other words, the termination timing of the continuous operation common to multiple motion modes of the movable body, and the timing of transitioning from the common continuous operation to the next operation, become uncertain. However, when a continuous operation common to multiple motion modes of a movable body is executed based on a single common drive data, the common continuous operation cannot be terminated, and the transition to the next operation cannot be made, until all processes (operations) defined by the single common drive data are completed.

Furthermore, to accommodate termination conditions that are met at unpredictable timings, if we were to perform a termination check for each operation in a common continuous operation, identify the next operation, read the drive data for the next operation from ROM, and set the drive data for the next operation in RAM, while this would allow for immediate transition to the next operation even if the termination condition is met at an unpredictable timing, it would increase the control and data burden, similar to the case where drive data is provided for each operation.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is operated in a drive pattern A where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition may be uncertain, when the movable body, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is positioned in a standby position which is the return position of the reciprocating motion after the execution of processes No. 05 and No. 09, a termination determination is made to determine whether the termination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data) has been fulfilled. Specifically, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S4948 of the movable rotating mechanism control process in Figure 282 that processes No. 05 and No. 09 have been executed, a termination determination is made in step S4949 of the said movable rotating mechanism control process to determine whether the player has performed an operation on the operation button 20, which is the termination condition. Then, process No. 05 or process No. If the termination condition is determined to be met during the execution of process 09, the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (stepping motor for lifting and lowering) based on drive data 1 is terminated without executing all the processes defined by drive data 1. That is, if the termination condition is determined to be met during the execution of process No. 05 or process No. 09, the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on drive data 1 is terminated with the movable mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, in the standby position, which is the return position.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is operated in a drive pattern B in which the timing of the fulfillment of the termination determination condition may be undefined, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned in a standby position which is the return position of the reciprocating motion after the execution of processes No. 13 and No. 17, a termination determination is made to determine whether or not the termination determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data) has been fulfilled. Specifically, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S4948 of the movable rotating mechanism control process in Figure 282 that processes No. 13 and No. 17 have been executed, a termination determination is made in step S4949 of the said movable rotating mechanism control process to determine whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation button 20, which is the termination determination condition. Then, process No. 13 or process No. If the termination condition is determined to be met during the execution of process 17, the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (stepping motor for lifting and lowering) based on drive data 1 is terminated without executing all the processes defined by drive data 1. That is, if the termination condition is determined to be met during the execution of process No. 13 or process No. 17, the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on drive data 1 is terminated with the movable mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, in the standby position, which is the return position.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is operated in a drive pattern C where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination determination condition may be undefined, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position of the reciprocating motion, after the execution of processes No. 23 and No. 27, a termination determination is made to determine whether or not the termination determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data) has been fulfilled. Specifically, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S4948 of the movable rotating mechanism control process in Figure 282 that processes No. 23 and No. 27 have been executed, a termination determination is made in step S4949 of the said movable rotating mechanism control process to determine whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation button 20, which is the termination determination condition. Then, process No. 23 or process No. If the termination condition is determined to be met during the execution of process 27, the process proceeds to process No. 28, and the control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (stepping motor for lifting and lowering) based on the drive data 1 is terminated by executing processes No. 28 and No. 29. That is, if the termination condition is determined to be met during the execution of process No. 23 or process No. 27, the movable rotating mechanism member 37, being a movable body, returns from the intermediate operating position 1 (the return position of the reciprocating motion) to the standby position, and then the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 is terminated.

In other words, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is operated in drive patterns A to C, where the timing of the termination condition being met is uncertain, based on drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to multiple movement modes A to D executed based on drive data 1, will terminate with the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the standby position, which is the return position, regardless of when the termination condition is met.

Thus, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, a series of continuous operations (drive patterns A to C) common to multiple movable modes A to D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition may be undefined, are executed based on information corresponding to a single common drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1). Therefore, compared to setting drive data for each operation included in each movable mode, the burden of control and data volume can be reduced as described above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, when a continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) is performed based on information corresponding to one drive data 1 (device operation scenario data 1) for a movable rotating device member 37, which is a movable body, and which is common to multiple movement patterns A to D, and for which the timing of the fulfillment of the termination determination condition is uncertain, a termination determination is made to determine whether or not the termination determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 based on the drive data 1 (device operation scenario data 1) has been fulfilled when the movable rotating device member 37 is located at the return position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating movement, or at the intermediate operation position 1. As a result, the termination determination of whether the termination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) has been met is performed at the return position of the movable rotating mechanism member 37's reciprocating motion. Therefore, if the termination determination determines that the termination condition has been met, when terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1), it is not necessary to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, or the distance the movable rotating mechanism member 37 moves can be reduced. Furthermore, since the termination determination of whether the termination condition for terminating the continuous operation based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) has been met is performed each time the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned at the return position of its reciprocating motion, multiple termination determinations are repeatedly performed during the continuous operation. As a result, when the termination determination determines that the termination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) is met, the continuous operation can be terminated not only immediately after the termination condition is determined to be met, but also immediately from the moment the termination condition is met. Therefore, it is possible to immediately transition to the next operation from the moment the termination condition is met for the continuous operation, which is common to multiple operation modes A to D and where the timing of the termination condition's fulfillment may be unpredictable.

Furthermore, because the system can immediately transition to the next operation upon the fulfillment of the termination condition for a continuous operation, which is common to multiple operational modes A to D and whose termination condition timing may be unpredictable, when transitioning from a common continuous operation across multiple operational modes A to D to the individual next operation of each operational mode A to D, a smooth transition between the common continuous operation and the different next operation is achieved, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort during the previous operation transition. This makes it possible to operate the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, without impairing its visual effect, even when it is operated for performance purposes.

In this embodiment, the drive data 1 is configured as a data set for controlling the stepping motor, and the processing No. being executed in the drive data 1 is identified, and it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a termination judgment based on the identified processing No. However, the drive data 1 may also be configured as a data set for executing a process that performs a termination judgment. For example, as shown in Figure 300, the drive data 1 can be configured as a data set in which a termination judgment is executed while the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is returning to the standby position, which is the return position of the reciprocating motion, i.e., in processing No. 06, processing No. 11, processing No. 16, processing No. 21, processing No. 28, processing No. 34, and processing No. 37. Even with such drive data 1, since a termination judgment is executed each time the movable rotating mechanism member 37 returns to the standby position, even if the termination judgment condition is met at an undefined timing, the burden on control and data volume can be reduced, and the system can immediately proceed to the next operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 after the termination judgment condition is met. Furthermore, since the termination determination of whether the common termination conditions for a continuous operation have been met can be made simply by executing the processes in the order specified in drive data 1, there is the advantage that it is not necessary to identify the process number being executed in drive data 1 in order to determine whether the common termination conditions for a continuous operation have been met.

Here, Figures 270(A) and 270(B) are diagrams illustrating drive pattern D. Drive pattern D is a pattern of individual actions performed after the completion of the continuous movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, in movable mode A, which announces the development of a Super Reach (SP development). Note that the drive data 2 (mechanism operation scenario data 2) shown in Figure 270(B) is an example where the vertical movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting and lowering.

As shown in Figure 270(A), drive pattern D is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is moved from the standby position (see Figure 270(A1)) to the maximum operating position (see Figure 270(A2)) where it is stopped for a certain period of time (e.g., 2 seconds), and then returns to the standby position (see Figure 270(A3)). In other words, in this embodiment, after the completion of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position and stopped for a certain period of time, thereby announcing that it will develop into a Super Reach (SP development).

As shown in Figure 270(B), drive pattern D is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, operates based on information corresponding to the drive data 2 (mechanism operation scenario data 2). This drive data 2 (mechanism operation scenario data 2) is for controlling the stepping motor for lifting and lowering according to processing No. 01 to processing No. 05.

In process No. 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 2 (feature operation scenario data 2) is read. This maintains the state in which the movable rotating feature member 37 is in the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 270 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 03, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is kept stopped for 2000 msec. This causes the movable rotating mechanism 37 to move 72 mm downwards, positioning it at its maximum operating position (the drive side position). This maximum operating position is maintained for 2 seconds (see Figure 270 (A2)).

In process No. 04, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 72 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 05, the stepping motor for lifting is kept stopped for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating mechanism 37 to move 72 mm upward, positioning it in the standby position, which is the return side position. As a result, in drive pattern D, the movable rotating mechanism 37 makes one round trip between the standby position (return side position) and the maximum operating position (drive side position).

Here, Figures 271(A) and 271(B) are diagrams illustrating drive pattern E. Drive pattern E is a pattern of individual actions performed after the completion of the continuous movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, in movable mode B, which announces the development of a special reach (SPSP development). Note that the drive data 3 (mechanism operation scenario data 3) shown in Figure 271(B) is an example where the vertical movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting and lowering, and the expansion and contraction of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for expansion and contraction.

As shown in Figure 271(A), drive pattern E is similar to drive pattern D in that it performs a reciprocating motion in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 271(A1)), to the maximum operating position of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is the drive position, for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) (see Figures 270(A2) to 270(A4)), and then returns to the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 270(A5)). However, it differs from drive pattern D in that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 expands and contracts (see Figures 270(A2) to 270(A4)) while it is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds). In other words, in this embodiment, after the completion of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved to its maximum operating position, and at the maximum operating position, it expands and contracts, thereby announcing that the game will develop into a Special Reach (SPSP development).

As shown in Figure 271(B), drive pattern E is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, operates based on information corresponding to the drive data 3 (mechanism operation scenario data 3). This drive data 3 (mechanism operation scenario data 3) is for controlling the stepping motor for lifting and the stepping motor for expanding and contracting according to processing No. 01 to processing No. 07.

In process No. 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 3 (feature operation scenario data 3) is read. This maintains the state in which the movable rotating feature member 37 is in the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 271 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. This moves the movable rotating component 37 downwards by 72 mm, positioning it at its maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see Figure 271 (A2)).

Furthermore, in processes No. 01 and No. 02, the rotation of the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is kept stopped.

In process No. 03, the rotation stop state of the lifting stepping motor is maintained for 2000 msec, while the expansion/contraction stepping motor rotates 50 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 04, the rotation stop state of the expansion/contraction stepping motor is maintained for 1900 msec. As a result, the movable rotating component member 37 is expanded to its maximum operating position, which is the drive-side position, and this expanded state is maintained (see Figure 271 (A3)).

In process No. 05, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is rotated 50 steps in the reverse direction. This returns the movable rotating component 37 to its contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive-side position (see Figure 271 (A4)).

In process No. 06, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 07, the rotation of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is stopped for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating component 37 to return to its standby position (see Figure 271 (A5)).

Furthermore, in processes No. 06 and No. 07, the rotation of the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is kept stopped.

Here, Figures 272 and 273 are diagrams illustrating drive pattern F. Drive pattern F is a pattern of individual operations executed after the completion of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, in movable mode B, which announces that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation upgrade). Note that the drive data 4 (mechanism operation scenario data 4) shown in Figure 273 is an example where the vertical movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting, the expansion and contraction of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for expansion and contraction, and the rotation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for rotation.

As shown in Figure 272, drive pattern F is similar to drive patterns D and E described above in that it performs a reciprocating motion in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 271(A1)), to the maximum operating position of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is the drive position, where it is stopped for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) (see Figures 270(A2) to 270(A4)), and then returns to the standby position (see Figure 270(A5)). However, it differs from drive pattern D in that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 expands and contracts and rotates (see Figures 270(A3) and 270(A4)) while it is stopped for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) at the maximum operating position, and it differs from drive pattern E in that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 rotates (see Figures 270(A3) and 270(A4)) while it is stopped for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) at the maximum operating position. In other words, in this embodiment, after the completion of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved to its maximum operating position, and at the maximum operating position, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 expands, contracts, and rotates, thereby announcing that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation upgrade).

As shown in Figure 273, drive pattern F is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, operates based on information corresponding to the drive data 4 (mechanism operation scenario data 4). This drive data 4 (mechanism operation scenario data 4) is for controlling the stepping motor for lifting, the stepping motor for expanding and contracting, and the stepping motor for rotating, according to processing No. 01 to processing No. 07.

In process No. 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 4 (feature operation scenario data 4) is read. This maintains the state in which the movable rotating feature member 37 is in the standby position, which is the return side position (see Figure 273 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. This moves the movable rotating component 37 downwards by 72 mm, positioning it at its maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see Figure 272 (A2)).

In processes No. 01 and No. 02, the rotation of the stepping motor for expansion/contraction and the stepping motor for rotation is kept stopped.

In process No. 03, the rotation stop state of the lifting stepping motor is maintained for 2000 msec, while the expansion/contraction stepping motor rotates 50 steps in the forward direction, and the rotation stepping motor rotates 2000 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 04, the rotation stop state of the expansion/contraction stepping motor is maintained for 1900 msec. As a result, the movable rotating component member 37 rotates in its expanded state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive-side position, and this expanded state of rotation is maintained (see Figure 272 (A3)).

In process No. 05, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is rotated 50 steps in the reverse direction, and the rotation of the stepping motor for rotation is stopped. As a result, the movable rotating component 37 is in a non-rotating, expanded state at its maximum operating position, which is the drive-side position (see Figure 272 (A4)).

In process No. 05, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is rotated 50 steps in the reverse direction. This returns the movable rotating component 37 to its contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive-side position (see Figure 271 (A4)).

In process No. 06, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 07, the rotation of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is stopped for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating component 37 to return to its standby position (see Figure 272 (A5)).

Furthermore, in processes No. 06 and No. 07, the rotation of the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is kept stopped.

Incidentally, drive pattern D is a drive pattern that is executed after the completion of the continuous operation of drive patterns A to C in movable mode A (see Figure 266(A)), and processing starts from a state where the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is in the standby position, which is the return side position (see Figure 270(B)). Drive pattern E is a drive pattern that is executed after the completion of the continuous operation of drive patterns A to C in movable mode B (see Figure 266(B)), and processing starts from a state where the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is in the standby position, which is the return side position (see Figure 271(B)). Drive pattern F is a drive pattern that is executed after the completion of the continuous operation of drive patterns A to C in movable mode C (see Figure 266(C)), and processing starts from a state where the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is in the standby position, which is the return side position (see Figure 273). Drive pattern G is a drive pattern executed after the completion of the continuous operation of drive patterns A to C in movable mode D (see Figure 266(D)), and processing begins from a state where the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is in the standby position, which is the return side position (see Figure 274(B)). In other words, the individual operations executed after the completion of the continuous operation common to multiple movable modes A to D all begin from a state where the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is in the standby position, which is the return side position.

On the other hand, the continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D ends with the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, in the standby position, which is the return position, as described above. In other words, the position of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 when the continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D ends, and the position of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 when the individual operations executed according to movement modes A to D begin after the completion of the continuous operation, are both the same standby position. Therefore, when the continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D ends, the individual operations executed according to movement modes A to D can be started smoothly and without any sense of incongruity. As a result, when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is made to execute a continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D, where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition may be uncertain, regardless of when the termination condition is fulfilled, the system can transition from the continuous operation common to movement modes A to D to operations specific to movement modes A to D.

Here, Figures 274(A) and 274(B) are diagrams illustrating drive pattern G. Drive pattern G is a pattern of individual actions performed after the completion of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, in movable mode D, which announces that the game will not develop into a Super Reach (SP non-development), will not develop into a Special Reach (SPSP non-development), or that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade). Note that the drive data 5 (mechanism operation scenario data 5) shown in Figure 271(B) is an example where the vertical movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting and lowering.

As shown in Figure 274(A), drive pattern G is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is stopped for a certain period of time (e.g., 0.04 seconds) at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive position (see Figure 274(A2)), from the standby position (see Figure 274(A1)), which is the return position, and then returns to the standby position (see Figure 274(A1)). In other words, in this embodiment, after the completion of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to each of the movable modes A to D, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 reciprocates between the standby position and the intermediate operating position 1. That is, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is not moved to its maximum movable position, and this indicates that it will not develop into a Super Reach (SP non-development), will not develop into a Special Reach (SPSP non-development), or the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process will not be a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade).

As shown in Figure 274(B), drive pattern G is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, operates based on information corresponding to the drive data 5 (mechanism operation scenario data 5). This drive data 5 (mechanism operation scenario data 5) is for controlling the stepping motor for lifting and lowering according to processing No. 01 to processing No. 05.

In process No. 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 5 (feature operation scenario data 5) is read. This maintains the state in which the movable rotating feature member 37 is in the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 274 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 03, the rotation of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is stopped for 40 msec. As a result, the movable rotating component 37 is moved 12 mm downwards, and the movable rotating component 37 is positioned in the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position (see Figure 274 (A2)).

In process No. 04, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 05, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating component 37 to return to its standby position (see Figure 274 (A1)).

Here, Figure 275 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the mechanism activation effect setting process executed in step S4508 of the special feature game effect setting process shown in Figure 262. In the mechanism activation effect setting process of this embodiment, a movable body control process is executed to set the movement timing and movement mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. An example of the procedure for the mechanism activation effect setting process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 275.

<Step S4601>
As shown in Figure 275, in the mechanism activation effect setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the normal reach flag, which indicates that a normal reach effect pattern is set as the special feature game effect for the special feature game (step S4601), is set to ON in step S4503 of the special feature game effect setting process if it is determined in step S4502 of the special feature game effect setting process shown in Figure 262 that a normal reach effect pattern is set.

If the normal reach flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4602; if the normal reach flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the process proceeds to step S4606.

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
If the normal reach flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4602), then sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4603), and proceeds to step S4604.

The T1 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach animation. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 at time T1, which is the start timing of mechanism activation timing A. In other words, when a normal reach animation pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is started when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 moves at mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4604 and S4605>
In step S4604, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a loss. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the SP non-development flag to ON (step S4604) to indicate that it is a loss that will not develop into a super reach (normal reach loss), and terminates the mechanism operation performance setting process. That is, by setting the SP non-development flag to ON, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a loss when a normal reach performance pattern is set, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved at mechanism operation timing A to announce that it will not develop into a super reach.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a loss (step S4604: No), i.e., if it is a jackpot, the mechanism activation effect setting process is terminated. Furthermore, if a normal reach effect pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a loss (i.e., it is a jackpot), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved at mechanism activation timing A to announce whether it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or not, depending on the type of jackpot.

<Step S4606>
If the normal reach flag is set to off (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the super reach flag, which indicates that a super reach animation pattern is set as a special feature animation for the special feature game, is set to on (step S4606). The super reach flag is set to on in step S4505 of the special feature animation setting process in Figure 262 if it is determined in step S4504 that a super reach animation pattern is set.

If the Super Reach flag is set to ON (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4607; if the Super Reach flag is set to OFF (step S4606: No), the process proceeds to step S4614.

<Steps S4607-S4609>
If the Super Reach flag is set to ON (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4607) and sets the T1 Drive flag to ON (step S4608). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the SP Development flag to ON, indicating that it will develop into a Super Reach (step S4609), and proceeds to step S4610.

The T1 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach animation. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 at time T1, which is the start timing of mechanism activation timing A. The SP development flag is a flag that indicates development into a super reach, and is referenced in step S4930 of the movable rotating mechanism control process shown in Figure 281 (described later) to determine whether or not to announce that development into a super reach will occur through the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. In other words, if a super reach animation pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is started when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 moves to announce that development into a super reach will occur at mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4610 and S4611>
In step S4610, the MPU 51 sets the T2 counter and then sets the T2 drive flag to ON (step S4611), and proceeds to step S4612.

The T2 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach animation. The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 at time T2, which is the start timing of mechanism activation timing B. In other words, when a super reach animation pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is started when the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 moves at mechanism activation timing B (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4612 and S4613>
In step S4612, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a loss. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to ON (step S4613) and terminates the mechanism operation performance setting process. The SPSP non-development flag is a flag that indicates a loss that does not develop into a special reach (super reach loss), and is referenced in step S4941 of the movable rotating mechanism control process shown in Figure 281, described later, in order to determine whether or not to announce that it will develop into a super reach by the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. In other words, by setting the SPSP non-development flag to ON, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a loss when a special reach performance pattern is set, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved at mechanism operation timing B to announce that it will not develop into a special reach.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a loss (step S4612: No), i.e., a miss, the mechanism activation effect setting process is terminated. Furthermore, if a super reach effect pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a loss (i.e., a jackpot), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved at mechanism activation timing B to announce whether it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or not, depending on the type of jackpot.

<Step S4614>
If the Super Reach flag is set to Off (Step S4606: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the Special Reach flag, which indicates that a Special Reach animation pattern is set as a Special Reach animation for the Special Reach game, is set to On (Step S4614). The Special Reach flag is set to On in Step S4507 of the Special Reach animation setting process in Figure 262 if it is determined in Step S4506 that a Special Reach animation pattern is set.

If the Special Reach flag is set to ON (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4615. On the other hand, if the Super Reach flag is set to OFF (step S4614: No), the MPU 51 terminates the setting process for the mechanism's activation effect. That is, if a non-reach effect pattern is set, the flag for activating the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is not set to ON, and the timing for activating the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is not set. As a result, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 does not move in non-reach effect patterns.

<Steps S4615-S4617>
If the special reach flag is set to ON (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4615) and sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4616). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the SP development flag to ON, indicating that it will develop into a super reach (step S4617), and proceeds to step S4618.

The T1 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach animation. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 at time T1, which is the start timing of mechanism activation timing A. The SP development flag is a flag that indicates development into a super reach, and is referenced in step S4930 of the movable rotating mechanism control process shown in Figure 281 (described later) to determine whether or not to announce that development into a super reach will occur through the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. In other words, if a special reach animation pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is started when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 moves to announce that development into a super reach will occur at mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4618-S4620>
In step S4618, the MPU 51 sets the T2 counter. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the T2 drive flag to ON (step S4619) and the SPSP development flag to ON, indicating that it will develop into a special reach (step S4620), and then proceeds to step S4621.

The T2 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach sequence. The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 at time T2, which is the start timing of mechanism activation timing B. In other words, when a special reach sequence pattern is set, if the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is started, causing the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to move to announce that the sequence will develop into a special reach at mechanism activation timing B (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
In step S4621, the MPU 51 sets the T3 counter. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to ON (step S4622), and terminates the setting process for the special effect operation.

The T3 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing C, which is set at the end of the special reach animation. The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 at time T3, which is the start timing of mechanism activation timing C. In other words, when a special reach animation pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is started when the T3 drive flag is on and the value of the T3 counter is 0, so that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 moves at mechanism activation timing C (see Figure 265).

[Button animation setting process]
Next, we will describe the button animation setting process executed in step S4509 of the special game animation setting process shown in Figure 262. Here, Figure 276 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the button animation setting process in this embodiment. The button animation setting process in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 276.

<Step S4701>
As shown in Figure 276, in the button animation setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the 16R probability upgrade flag is set to ON or OFF (step S4701). The 16R probability upgrade flag is a flag that causes the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, to move in a drive pattern F (see Figures 266(F) and 272) to execute a 16R probability upgrade animation, and also causes the button animation (see Figure 277) to be executed before the execution of this 16R probability upgrade animation. This 16R probability upgrade flag is set to ON in step S4407 of the stop symbol combination setting process in Figure 261 when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability jackpot and a combination other than "777" is set as the stop display combination of decorative symbols.

If the 16R probability increase flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4703. If the 16R probability increase flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), the process proceeds to step S4702.

<Step S4702>
If the 16R probability upgrade flag is set to off (step S4701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability non-upgrade flag is set to on (step S4702). The 16R probability non-upgrade flag is a flag that causes the 16R probability upgrade performance to be executed by moving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274), and also causes a button performance (see Figure 277) to be executed before the execution of this 16R probability upgrade performance. This 16R probability non-upgrade flag is set to on in step S4406 of the stop symbol combination setting process in Figure 261 when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 5R probability jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, or when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability jackpot, and a combination other than "777" is set as the stop display combination of decorative symbols.

If the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4703. If the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag is set to OFF (step S4702: No), the button effect setting process is terminated.

<Steps S4703 and S4704>
If the 16R probability change upgrade flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), or if the 16R probability change non-upgrade flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703). The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3 (see Figure 265), which is the start timing of the mechanism operation timing C set at the end of the special reach performance. When a special reach performance pattern is set, it is set to ON in step S4622 of the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing at which the movable rotating mechanism member 37 set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275 is last moved is the mechanism operation timing C set at the end of the special reach performance.

If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703: Yes), that is, if the timing for the last movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, as set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is the mechanism operation timing C set at the end of the special reach performance, the MPU 51 sets the T3 button performance flag to ON (step S4704) and terminates the button performance setting process. The T3 button performance flag is a flag that causes a button performance to be executed at mechanism operation timing C (see Figure 265) after time T3 has elapsed from the start of the special game, and is referenced in step S5107 of the button performance setting process in Figure 287, described later, to determine whether or not it is the timing to execute the button performance.

On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to off (step S4703: No), that is, if the timing for the last movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, as set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is not the mechanism operation timing C set at the end of the special reach performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4705.

Here, the button animation includes a display animation in which a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 when a 16R probability upgrade animation or a 16R probability non-upgrade animation is executed by the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body. The button animation is executed during a period in which pressing the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation is considered valid (button operation validity period). The button operation validity period is set to the mechanism operation timings A to C (see Figure 265) in which the 16R probability upgrade animation or the 16R probability non-upgrade animation is executed. The button animation starts when the button operation validity period begins and ends when the player presses the operation button 20 within the button operation validity period, or when the button operation validity period has elapsed. For example, as shown in Figure 277, in the button animation, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image resembling the operation button 20 and an image indicating the remaining period of the button operation validity period. Of course, the images in the button animation shown in Figure 277 are just examples and can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, if a button animation is being performed (within the button operation validity period) and the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation, the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to all movable modes A to D, will end upon fulfillment of the termination determination condition. Afterward, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 will move, executing either a 16R probability change upgrade animation or a 16R probability change non-upgrade animation. Also, if the operation button 20 is not operated by the player while a button animation is being performed (within the button operation validity period), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 will move after the button operation validity period has elapsed, executing either a 16R probability change upgrade animation or a 16R probability change non-upgrade animation.

<Steps S4705 and S4706>
If the T3 drive flag is set to off (step S4703: No), that is, if the timing at which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is last moved is not the mechanism operation timing C, which is set at the end of the special reach performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T2 drive flag is set to on (step S4703). The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2 (see Figure 265), which is the start timing of the mechanism operation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach performance, and is set to on in step S4611 of the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275 when a super reach performance pattern is set. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the timing at which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is last moved is the mechanism operation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach performance.

If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4705: Yes), that is, if the timing for the last movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275 is the mechanism operation timing B set at the end of the super reach performance, the MPU 51 sets the T2 button performance flag to ON (step S4705) and terminates the button performance setting process. The T2 button performance flag is a flag that executes a button performance at mechanism operation timing B (see Figure 265) after time T2 has elapsed from the start of the special feature game, and is referenced in step S5104 of the button performance setting process in Figure 287, described later, to determine whether or not it is the timing to execute the button performance.

On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to off (step S4705: No), that is, if the timing for the last movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, as set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is not mechanism operation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4707.

<Steps S4707 and S4708>
If the T2 drive flag is set to off (step S4705: No), that is, if the timing at which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is last moved is not mechanism operation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T1 drive flag is set to on (step S4707). The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1 (see Figure 265), which is the start timing of mechanism operation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach performance, and is set to on in step S4603 of the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275 when a normal reach performance pattern is set. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the timing at which the movable rotating mechanism member 37, set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is last moved is mechanism operation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach performance.

If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4707: Yes), that is, if the timing for the last movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, as set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275, is the mechanism operation timing A set at the end of the normal reach performance, then the MPU 51 sets the T1 button performance flag to ON (step S4708) and terminates the button performance setting process. The T1 button performance flag is a flag that executes a button performance at mechanism operation timing A (see Figure 265) after time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special feature game, and is referenced in step S5101 of the button performance setting process in Figure 287 (described later) to determine whether or not it is the timing to execute the button performance.

On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to off (step S4707: No), that is, if the timing for the last movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275 is not mechanism operation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach performance, the MPU 51 terminates the button performance setting process.

[Special Game Performance Control Processing]
Next, the special game performance control process executed in step S2704 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 53 will be described. In the special game performance control process of this embodiment, the special game performance executed in the special game is controlled based on the special game performance set in the special game performance setting process in Figure 262. Here, Figure 278 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special game performance control process. An example of the special game performance control process will be described below with reference to Figure 278.

<Step S4801>
In the special feature game performance control processing of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first executes a movable rotating feature control processing, which controls the operation of the movable rotating feature member 37, which is a movable body in the special feature game, based on the feature operation performance setting processing, which is a movable body control processing of Figure 275 (step S4801). Details of the movable rotating feature control processing will be described later with reference to Figures 279 to 286.

<Step S4802>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes a button effect control process that controls the execution of button effects in the special game based on the button effect setting process in Figure 276. Details of the button effect control process will be described later with reference to Figures 287 and 288.

<Step S4803>
In step S4803, the MPU 51 executes other performance control processing related to performances other than the mechanism activation performance and button performance in the special feature game.

[Control processing for movable rotating parts]
Next, an example of the movable rotating mechanism control process executed in step S4801 of the special game performance control process in Figure 278 will be described. In the movable rotating mechanism control process of this embodiment, a movable body control process is executed to control the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, based on the mechanism operation performance set in the mechanism operation performance setting process in Figure 275. Here, Figures 279 to 286 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating mechanism control process. The movable rotating mechanism control process will be described below with reference to Figures 279 to 286.

<Steps S4901 and S4902>
As shown in Figure 279, in the movable rotating mechanism control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4901). The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of the mechanism operation timing A (see Figure 265) set at the end of the normal reach performance.

If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4901: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism activation timing A begins (step S4902), and proceeds to step S4903. On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4901: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4903.

<Steps S4903 and S4904>
In step S4903, the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4903). The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of the mechanism operation timing B (see Figure 265) set at the end of the super reach performance.

If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4903: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism activation timing B begins (step S4904), and proceeds to step S4905. On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4903: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4905.

<Steps S4905 and S4906>
In step S4905, the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4905). The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3, which is the start timing of the mechanism operation timing C (see Figure 265) set at the end of the special reach performance.

If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4905: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism activation timing C begins (step S4906), and proceeds to step S4907. On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4905: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4907.

<Step S4907>
In step S4907, the MPU 51 determines whether the T1 drive flag is set to ON or OFF. If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4908. On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4907: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4910.

<Steps S4908 and S4909>
If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism operation timing A starts, is 0 (step S4908). That is, it determines whether it is time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body.

If the value of the T1 counter is 0 (step S4908: Yes), i.e., it is time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T1 drive flag to OFF (step S4908) and proceeds to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T1 counter is not 0 (step S4908: No), i.e., it is not time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4910>
If the T1 drive flag is set to off (step S4907: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to on (step S4910). If the T2 drive flag is set to on (step S4910: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4911. On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to off (step S4910: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4913.

<Steps S4911 and S4912>
If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism operation timing B starts, is 0 (step S4911). That is, it determines whether it is time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body.

If the value of the T2 counter is 0 (step S4910: Yes), i.e., it is time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T2 drive flag to OFF (step S4912) and proceeds to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter is not 0 (step S4911: No), i.e., it is not time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4913>
If the T2 drive flag is set to off (step S4910: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to on (step S4913). If the T3 drive flag is set to on (step S4913: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4914. On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to off (step S4913: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4920 in Figure 280.

<Steps S4914 and S4915>
If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4914: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism operation timing C starts, is 0 (step S4914). That is, it determines whether it is time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body.

If the value of the T3 counter is 0 (step S4914: Yes), i.e., it is time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to OFF (step S4915) and proceeds to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T3 counter is not 0 (step S4914: No), i.e., it is not time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4916>
When it is time to start driving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) (see Figure 269) (step S4916). The drive data 1 is information that causes the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, to execute a common continuous operation (drive pattern A to C) in the movement modes A to D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37. In other words, regardless of the movement mode, the MPU 51 controls the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the common drive data 1.

In this embodiment, the continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) common to multiple movement modes A to D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is executed based on information corresponding to a single common drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1). Furthermore, as mentioned above, the drive data 1 is stored in ROM, and when the continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is executed, the drive data 1 is read once from ROM and set once in RAM. The movable rotating mechanism member 37 is then moved by the continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D through a single read of the drive data 1 from ROM and a single setting of the drive data 1 in RAM. This reduces the amount of drive data required to realize each movement mode A to D, thereby reducing the memory load and also reducing the control burden of reading and temporarily storing drive data when operating the movable rotating mechanism member 37.

<Steps S4917-S4919>
In step S4917, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 scenario timer to cause the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to perform continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure defined in drive data 1 (see Figure 269) (step S4917), and sets the drive data 1 set flag to ON to indicate that drive data 1 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4918). Then, the MPU 51 starts processing No. 1 of drive data 1 (see Figure 269) (step S4919), and ends the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4920>
If the T3 drive flag is set to off (step S4913: No), as shown in Figure 280, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 1 set flag, which indicates that drive data 1 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is set to on (step S4920).

If the drive data 1 set flag is set to ON (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4921. If the drive data 1 set flag is set to OFF (step S4920: No), the process proceeds to step S4961 in Figure 283.

<Steps S4921-S4923>
If the drive data 1 set flag is set to ON (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 1 scenario timer (step S4921) and determines whether it is time to proceed to the next process specified in drive data 1 based on the updated value of the drive data 1 scenario timer (step S4922).

If it is time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 1 (step S4922: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 1 (step S4923) and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. For example, as shown in Figure 269, when process No. 5 in the drive data 1 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is in a stopped state, the process proceeds to process No. 6, which executes a process to rotate the stepping motor for lifting and lowering 12 steps in the forward direction.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 1 scenario timer updated in step S4921 and sequentially executing the following processes in drive data 1, all processes No. 1 to No. 29 in drive data 1 are executed. This results in the execution of a continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) common to multiple movement modes A to D for the movable rotating component member 37, which is a movable body.

On the other hand, if it is not the right time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4924.

<Step S4924>
If it is not time to proceed to the next process specified in drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the execution flag for process No. 28 is set to ON (step S4924). The execution flag for process No. 28 is a flag that causes process No. 28 in drive data 1 (see Figure 269) to be executed, and is set to ON in step S4959 of Figure 282, described later, when it is determined that the termination condition for continuous operation common to multiple movable modes A to D has been met (when it is determined that there has been an operation on the operation button 20) while the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is stopped at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position. In other words, the execution flag for process No. 28 in drive data 1 is set to ON when the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is terminated while the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped at the intermediate operating position 1. This flag, which skips processing to 28, terminates the continuous operation with the movable rotating mechanism member 37 returned to the standby position. This allows the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to be immediately returned to the standby position and the continuous operation to be terminated, even if it is not in the standby position.

Then, if the execution flag for process No. 28 is set to ON (step S4924: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4925. If the execution flag for process No. 28 is set to OFF (step S4924: No), the process proceeds to step S4927 in Figure 281.

<Steps S4925 and S4926>
If the execution flag for process No. 28 is set to ON (step S4924: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the process for process No. 28 of the drive data 1 (step S4925). Then, the MPU 51 resets the drive data 1 scenario timer (step S4926) and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer to the value at which process No. 28 is started when all processes of drive data 1 are executed. This allows the processes for process No. 28 and process No. 29 (see Figure 269) of drive data 1 to be executed sequentially, and the processing of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on drive data 1 can be terminated with the movable rotating mechanism member 37 returned to the standby position.

<Step S4927>
If it is not the time to proceed to the next process specified in drive data 1 (step S4922: No), as shown in Figure 281, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4927). That is, the MPU 51 makes a termination determination to determine whether it is the time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on drive data 1, based on the fulfillment of the termination determination condition, which is based on the completion of all processes specified by drive data 1.

If the MPU 51 determines that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1, based on the fulfillment of the termination condition (step S4927: Yes), i.e., the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 1, then the process proceeds to step S4928. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1, based on the failure to fulfill the termination condition (i.e., the incomplete completion of all processes defined by the drive data 1), then the process proceeds to step S4948 in Figure 282.

<Steps S4928 and S4929>
When the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4927: Yes), that is, when the termination condition is met and it is determined that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 1 scenario timer to cause the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to execute continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 1 (see Figure 269) (step S4948). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 set flag to off, indicating that the drive data 1 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4929), and proceeds to step S4930. That is, when the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4927: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4930>
In step S4930, the MPU 51 determines whether the SP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a Super Reach, is set to ON.

If the SP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a Super Reach, is set to ON (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4931. If the SP development flag is set to OFF (step S4930: No), the process proceeds to step S4933.

<Steps S4931 and S4932>
If the SP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a Super Reach, is set to ON (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the Drive Data 2 Not Set flag to ON (step S4931). The Drive Data 2 Not Set flag is a flag that prompts the setting of Drive Data 2, and is referenced in step S4961 of Figure 283, described later, to determine whether or not to set Drive Data 2.

Furthermore, drive data 2 is information that, in the movement mode A of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 that announces the development of a Super Reach (SP development), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved as an individual movement in drive pattern D (see Figures 266(A) and 270) after a common continuous movement (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP development flag to OFF (step S4932), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4933>
If the SP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a super reach, is set to off (step S4930: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the SP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a super reach, is set to on (step S4933).

If the SP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a Super Reach, is set to ON (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4934. If the SP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4933: No), the process proceeds to step S4936.

<Steps S4934 and S4935>
If the SP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a super reach, is set to ON (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4934). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes the drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of Figure 286, described later, to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5.

Furthermore, drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 which indicates that a Super Reach will not be achieved (SP non-development), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved as an individual movement in drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274) after a common continuous movement (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP non-development flag to OFF (step S4935), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4936>
If the SP non-development flag is set to off (step S4933: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SPSP development flag, which indicates development into a special reach, is set to on (step S4936).

If the SPSP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a Special Reach, is set to ON (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4937. If the SPSP development flag is set to OFF (step S4936: No), the process proceeds to step S4939.

<Steps S4937 and S4938>
If the SPSP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a special reach, is set to ON (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 not set flag to ON (step S4937). The drive data 3 not set flag is a flag that causes the drive data 3 to be set, and is referenced in step S4974 of Figure 284, described later, to determine whether or not to set the drive data 3.

Furthermore, drive data 3 is information that, in the movement mode B of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 which announces the development of a special reach (SPSP development), moves the movable rotating mechanism member 37 as an individual operation in drive pattern E (see Figures 266(B) and 271) after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP development flag to OFF (step S4938), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4939>
If the SPSP development flag is set to off (step S4936: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SPSP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a special reach, is set to on (step S4939).

If the SPSP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a special reach, is set to ON (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4940. If the SPSP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4939: No), the process proceeds to step S4942.

<Steps S4940 and S4941>
If the SPSP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a special reach, is set to ON (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4940). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that prompts the drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of Figure 286, described later, to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5.

Furthermore, drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 which indicates that a special reach will not be achieved (SPSP non-development), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved as an individual movement in drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274) after a common continuous movement (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to OFF (step S4941), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4942>
If the SPSP non-development flag is set to off (step S4939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 16R probability upgrade flag is set to on (step S4942). The 16R probability upgrade flag is a flag that causes the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, to move in drive pattern F (see Figures 266(C) and 272) to execute a 16R probability upgrade performance, and also causes a button performance (see Figure 277) to be executed before this 16R probability upgrade performance is executed.

If the 16R probability increase flag is set to ON (step S4942: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4943. If the 16R probability increase flag is set to OFF (step S4942: No), the process proceeds to step S4945.

<Steps S4943 and S4944>
If the 16R probability upgrade flag is set to ON (step S4942: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 not set flag to ON (step S4943). The drive data 4 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 4 to be set, and is referenced in step S4987 of Figure 285, described later, to determine whether or not to set drive data 4.

Furthermore, drive data 4 is information that, in the movement mode C of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 which indicates that a special reach will not be achieved (SPSP non-development), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved as an individual movement in drive pattern F (see Figures 266(C) and 272) after a common continuous movement (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability increase flag to OFF (step S4944), and terminates the control process for the movable rotating mechanism.

<Step S4945>
If the 16R probability upgrade flag is set to off (step S4942: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability non-upgrade flag is set to on (step S4945). The 16R probability non-upgrade flag is a flag that causes the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, to move in the drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274) to execute a 16R probability upgrade performance, and also causes a button performance (see Figure 277) to be executed before this 16R probability upgrade performance is executed.

If the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4946. If the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag is set to OFF (step S4945: No), the movable rotating mechanism control process is terminated.

<Steps S4946 and S4947>
If the 16R probability change non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4946). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes the drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of Figure 286, described later, to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5.

Furthermore, drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 which indicates that the game will not be upgraded to a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved as an individual operation in drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274) after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag to OFF (step S4947), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4948>
If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), as shown in Figure 282, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to perform a termination determination to determine whether the termination determination condition has been met (step S4948). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether it is one of the following processes to be executed based on the drive data 1: process No. 05, process No. 09, process No. 5, process No. 13, process No. 17, process No. 23, process No. 27, and process No. 29 (see Figure 269).

If it is time to determine whether the termination condition is met (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4949. If it is not time to determine whether the termination condition is met (step S4948: No), the movable rotating mechanism control process is terminated.

Here, as shown in Figure 269, the processes No. 05, No. 09, No. 5, No. 13, No. 17, No. 23, No. 27, and No. 29 (see Figure 269), which are executed based on the drive data 1, are performed at the timing when the movable rotating component member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position or intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position, from the drive side position, in the reciprocating motion of the movable body, which is a continuous operation in drive patterns A to C executed based on the drive data 1. In other words, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, when a series of movements (drive patterns A to C) common to multiple movable modes A to D for the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, are executed based on information corresponding to one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1), a termination determination is made to determine whether the termination determination condition for the continuous movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) has been met when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is located at the return position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating movement, or at the intermediate operation position 1. As a result, the termination determination of whether the termination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) has been met is performed at the return position of the movable rotating mechanism member 37's reciprocating motion. Therefore, if the termination determination determines that the termination condition has been met, when terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1), it is not necessary to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, or the distance the movable rotating mechanism member 37 moves can be reduced. Furthermore, since the termination determination of whether the termination condition for terminating the continuous operation based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) has been met is performed each time the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned at the return position of its reciprocating motion, multiple termination determinations are repeatedly performed during the continuous operation. As a result, when the termination determination determines that the termination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1) has been met, the continuous operation can be terminated not only immediately after it is determined that the termination condition has been met, but also immediately after the termination condition is met. Therefore, the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be terminated in the termination determination after it is determined that the termination condition has been met, and after the termination condition has been met, without causing any discomfort to the player. Therefore, when the individual movements of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 are executed according to drive patterns D to G specific to each of the movable modes A to D, following the completion of the continuous movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data 1), a smooth transition can be made from the continuous movement common to multiple movable modes A to D to the individual movements of each of the other movable modes A to D. This prevents the player from feeling any discomfort when transitioning from the continuous movement common to multiple movable modes A to D to the individual movements of each of the other movable modes A to D. As a result, even when the movable rotating mechanism member 37, being a movable body, is operated for the purpose of a performance, it becomes possible to operate the movable rotating mechanism member 37 without impairing its performance effect.

In this embodiment, in a continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, a movable body, a termination determination is made to determine whether the termination condition for the continuous operation has been met when the movable mechanism member 37 is located at the return position, which is the return side position, or at the intermediate operation position 1. However, while the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is being moved toward the drive side position during the continuous operation, no termination determination is made to determine whether the termination condition has been met. This is because if the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is immediately stopped moving while it is being moved toward the drive side position, it would be necessary to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to the starting position of the next operation at the start of the next operation in order to start the next operation in the continuous operation, or to start the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the next operation from the stop position on the drive side position at the time of the termination determination in the continuous operation. As a result, unnecessary or complex control would be required, and there is a risk that the transition from the continuous operation to the next operation will not be smooth. Therefore, during the continuous operation, while the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved toward the drive side position, no termination determination is performed to determine whether the termination condition is met. This eliminates the need for unnecessary or complex control, allowing for appropriate termination control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 during continuous operation. Furthermore, it enables smooth transitions from continuous operation to the next operation, allowing for optimal control of the movable rotating mechanism member 37's movement.

<Step S4949>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 269, if it is time to perform a termination determination to determine whether the termination condition has been met (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the player has performed a predetermined game operation, namely a press operation, on the operation button 20 (step S4949). That is, during the execution of the continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body based on the drive data 1, the MPU 51 performs a termination determination to determine whether the termination condition based on the predetermined game operation, namely a press operation, on the operation button 20 by the player has been met. Whether the player has performed an operation on the operation button 20 is determined in the operation detection pattern setting process in Figure 256 by whether the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" have occurred as three operation states for the operation button 20.

Thus, the condition for determining the end of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body based on the drive data 1, is a predetermined game operation by the player, which is a press operation on the operation button 20. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the timing for determining whether the end determination condition has been met is during the execution of processes No. 05, No. 09, No. 5, No. 13, No. 17, No. 23, No. 27, and No. 29 (see Figure 269), which are executed based on the drive data 1, and is the timing when the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position or intermediate operation position 1, which is the return position from the drive side position, in the reciprocating motion of the movable body, which is a continuous operation in drive patterns A to C executed based on the drive data 1. Therefore, even if the conditions for terminating continuous operation are met before all control processing for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is completed due to the player pressing the operation button 20, it is determined whether or not the conditions for terminating continuous operation are met when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned in the standby position or intermediate operation position 1, which is the return position. Therefore, if the conditions for terminating continuous operation are met before all control processing for the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is completed due to the player pressing the operation button 20, the continuous operation can be terminated when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned in the standby position or intermediate operation position 1 after the conditions for terminating continuous operation are met. As a result, the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be terminated immediately when the conditions for terminating continuous operation are met, so that the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be terminated without causing any discomfort to the player after the conditions for terminating continuous operation are met. Therefore, when the next operation (operation of drive pattern C or drive pattern D) is executed immediately after the completion of the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, a smooth transition from the continuous operation to the next operation is possible, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort when transitioning from a continuous operation to another operation. This makes it possible to operate the movable rotating mechanism member 37 for performance purposes even when the display effect on the symbol display unit 341 is being shown, without impairing the performance effect.

If the player performs a predetermined game operation by pressing the operation button 20 (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4950. If the player does not perform a predetermined game operation by pressing the operation button 20 (step S4949: No), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Step S4950>
When a player performs a predetermined game operation by pressing the operation button 20 (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability upgrade flag is set to ON (step S4950). The 16R probability upgrade flag is a flag that causes the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, to move in a drive pattern F (see Figures 266(C) and 272) to execute a 16R probability upgrade effect, and also causes a button effect (see Figure 277) to be executed before the execution of this 16R probability upgrade effect.

If the 16R probability increase flag is set to ON (step S4950: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4951. If the 16R probability increase flag is set to OFF (step S4950: No), the process proceeds to step S4953.

<Steps S4951 and S4952>
If the 16R probability increase flag is set to ON (step S4950: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 not set flag to ON (step S4951). The drive data 4 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 4 to be set, and is referenced in step S4987 of Figure 285, described later, to determine whether or not to set drive data 4.

Furthermore, drive data 4 is information that, in the movement mode C of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 that announces a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation upgrade), moves the movable rotating mechanism member 37 as an individual operation in drive pattern F (see Figures 266(C) and 272) after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability increase flag to OFF (step S4952), and terminates the control process for the movable rotating mechanism.

<Step S4953>
If the 16R probability upgrade flag is set to off (step S4950: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability non-upgrade flag is set to on (step S4953). The 16R probability non-upgrade flag is a flag that causes the 16R probability upgrade performance to be executed by moving the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274), and also causes a button performance (see Figure 277) to be executed before this 16R probability upgrade performance is executed.

If the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag is set to ON (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4954. If the 16R probability variation non-upgrade flag is set to OFF (step S4953: No), the movable rotating mechanism control process is terminated.

<Steps S4954 and S4955>
If the 16R probability change non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4954). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes the drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of Figure 286, described later, to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5.

Furthermore, drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 which indicates that the game will not be upgraded to a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved as an individual operation in drive pattern G (see Figures 266(D) and 274) after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag to OFF (step S4955), and proceeds to step S4956.

<Step S4956>
In step S4956, the MPU 51 determines whether the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is one of processing No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17 (see Figure 269). That is, at the timing when the MPU 51 determines that the termination determination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to multiple movable modes A to D, has been met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20), it determines whether the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped in the standby position.

If the MPU 51 determines that the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is any of processing No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, if the termination determination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D has been met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped in the standby position, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4956. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is any of processing No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4956. If none of the above conditions are met (step S4956: No), that is, if the termination condition common to multiple movable modes A to D, which terminates the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is met (an operation has been performed on the operation button 20), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is not stopped in the standby position, the process proceeds to step S4959.

<Steps S4957 and S4958>
If the processing of drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is any of processing No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, if the termination determination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D has been met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped in the standby position, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 1 scenario timer for causing the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to execute continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure defined in drive data 1 (see Figure 269) (step S4957). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 set flag to off, indicating that drive data 1 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4958), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. In other words, at the timing when it is determined that the termination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body, has been met (an operation has been performed on the operation button 20), if the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped in the standby position, the drive data 1 set flag is set to off to terminate the processing based on drive data 1, and the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is common to multiple movable modes A to D, is terminated with the movable rotating mechanism member 37 stopped in the standby position.

<Step S4959>
If the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is not one of processing No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17 (step S4956: No), that is, if the timing at which it is determined that the termination determination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D has been met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20) is not such that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped in the standby position, then the MPU 51 determines whether the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is one of processing No. 23 or No. 27 (see Figure 269) (step S4959). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing at which it is determined that the termination determination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D has been met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20) is such that the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped in the intermediate operating position 1.

If the MPU 51 determines that the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is either process No. 23 or No. 27 (see Figure 269) (step S4959: Yes), that is, if it determines that the termination determination condition common to multiple movable modes A to D for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 has been met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped at the intermediate operating position 1, the process proceeds to step S4960.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is neither of processing No. 23 or No. 27 (see Figure 269) (step S4959: No.), that is, if it determines that the termination determination condition common to multiple movable modes A to D for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 has been met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is not stopped at the intermediate operating position 1, then the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control processing.

<Step S4960>
If the processing of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is either processing No. 23 or No. 27 (see Figure 269) (step S4959: Yes), that is, if the termination determination condition for ending the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D is met (an operation has been made on the operation button 20), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is stopped at the intermediate operating position 1, the MPU 51 sets the execution flag for processing No. 28 to ON (step S4960) and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control processing.

Here, as mentioned above, the execution flag for process No. 28 is a flag that, by executing process No. 28 in drive data 1 (see Figure 269), returns the movable rotating mechanism member 37 to the standby position, and terminates the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 common to multiple movement modes A to D. In step S4924 of the movable rotating mechanism control process in Figure 280, this flag is referenced to determine whether or not to return the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is a movable body stopped at intermediate operation position 1, to the standby position, thereby terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 common to multiple movement modes A to D.

<Step S4961>
If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), that is, if the termination condition is not met because all processing defined by drive data 1 has not been completed, and it is determined that it is not the right time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on drive data 1, then, as shown in Figure 283, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 2 unset flag is set to ON (step S4961). The drive data 2 unset flag is a flag that causes drive data 2 to be set.

If the drive data 2 unset flag is set to ON (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4962. If the drive data 2 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4961: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4967.

<Steps S4962-S4966>
If the Drive Data 2 Not Set flag is set to ON (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the Drive Data 2 Not Set flag to OFF (step S4962) and sets the Drive Data 2 (Mechanism Operation Scenario Data 2) (see Figure 270(B)) (step S4963). The Drive Data 2 is information that, in the movement mode A (see Figure 266(A)) of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 that announces that it will develop into a Super Reach (SP development), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved in a separate operation, Drive Pattern D (see Figure 270(A)), after a common continuous operation (Drive Patterns A to C).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 scenario timer to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive pattern D according to the processing procedure defined in drive data 2 (see Figure 270(B)) (step S4964), and sets the drive data 2 set flag to ON to indicate that drive data 2 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4965). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts processing No. 1 of drive data 2 (step S4966), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control processing.

<Step S4967>
If the drive data 2 not set flag is set to off (step S4961: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 2 set flag, which indicates that drive data 2 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is set to on (step S4967).

If the drive data 2 set flag is set to ON (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4968. If the drive data 2 set flag is set to OFF (step S4967: No), the process proceeds to step S4974 in Figure 284.

<Steps S4968-S4970>
If the drive data 2 set flag is set to ON (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 2 scenario timer (step S4968) and determines whether it is time to proceed to the next process specified in drive data 2 based on the updated value of the drive data 2 scenario timer (step S4969).

If it is time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4969: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4970) and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. For example, as shown in Figure 270(B), when process No. 3 in the drive data 2 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is in a stopped state, the process moves to process No. 4, which executes a process to rotate the stepping motor for lifting and lowering in the reverse direction for 72 steps.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 2 scenario timer updated in step S4968 and sequentially executing the following processes in drive data 2, all processes No. 01 to No. 05 in drive data 2 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating component member 37, which is a movable body, is executed as an individual operation using drive pattern D (see Figure 270(A)).

On the other hand, if it is not the right time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4971.

<Step S4971>
If it is not the time to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4971). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 2, based on the fulfillment of the termination determination condition, which is based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 2.

If the MPU 51 determines that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 2, based on the fulfillment of the termination condition (step S4971: Yes), i.e., the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 2 (see Figure 270(B)), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4972. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 2, based on the failure to fulfill the termination condition (i.e., the incomplete completion of all processes defined by the drive data 2), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Steps S4972 and S4973>
When the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4971: Yes), that is, when the termination condition is met and it is determined that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 2, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 2 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the drive pattern D according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 2 (see Figure 270(B)) (step S4972). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 set flag to off, indicating that the drive data 2 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4973), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. In other words, when the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4971: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4974>
If the drive data 2 set flag is set to off (step S4967: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 3 not set flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 284 (step S4974). The drive data 3 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 3 to be set.

If the drive data 3 unset flag is set to ON (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4975. If the drive data 3 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4974: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4980.

<Steps S4975-S4979>
If the "Drive Data 3 Not Set" flag is set to ON (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the "Drive Data 3 Not Set" flag to OFF (step S4975) and sets the "Drive Data 3" (mechanism operation scenario data 3) (see Figure 271(B)) (step S4976). The "Drive Data 3" is information that, in the movement mode B (see Figure 266(B)) of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 that announces that it will develop into a special reach (SPSP development), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved by a drive pattern E (see Figure 271(A)) as an individual operation after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 scenario timer to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive pattern E according to the processing procedure defined in drive data 3 (see Figure 271(B)) (step S4977), and sets the drive data 3 set flag to ON to indicate that drive data 3 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4978). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts processing No. 1 of drive data 3 (step S4979), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control processing.

<Step S4980>
If the drive data 3 not set flag is set to off (step S4974: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 3 set flag, which indicates that drive data 3 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is set to on (step S4980).

If the drive data 3 set flag is set to ON (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4981. If the drive data 3 set flag is set to OFF (step S4980: No), the process proceeds to step S4987 in Figure 285.

<Steps S4981-S4983>
If the drive data 3 set flag is set to ON (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 3 scenario timer (step S4981) and determines whether it is time to proceed to the next process specified in drive data 3 based on the updated value of the drive data 3 scenario timer (step S4982).

If it is time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 3 (step S4982: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 3 (step S4983) and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. For example, as shown in Figure 271(B), when process No. 2 in the drive data 3 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting is rotating in the forward direction, the process is moved to process No. 3, which stops the stepping motor for lifting.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 3 scenario timer updated in step S4981 and sequentially executing the following processes in drive data 3, all processes No. 01 to No. 07 in drive data 3 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating component member 37, which is a movable body, is executed as an individual operation using drive pattern E (see Figure 271(A)).

On the other hand, if it is not the right time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4984.

<Step S4984>
If it is not the time to proceed to the next process as defined in the drive data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4984). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 3, based on the fulfillment of the termination determination condition, which is based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 3.

If the MPU 51 determines that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 3, based on the fulfillment of the termination condition (step S4984: Yes), i.e., the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 3 (see Figure 271(B)), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4985. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 3, based on the failure to fulfill the termination condition (i.e., the incomplete completion of all processes defined by the drive data 3), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Steps S4985 and S4986>
When the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4984: Yes), that is, when the termination condition is met and it is determined that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 3, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 3 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the drive pattern E according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 3 (see Figure 271(B)) (step S4985). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 set flag to off, indicating that the drive data 3 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4986), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. In other words, when the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4984: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4987>
If the drive data 3 set flag is set to off (step S4980: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 4 not set flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 285 (step S4987). The drive data 4 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 4 to be set.

If the drive data 4 unset flag is set to ON (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4988. If the drive data 4 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4987: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4993.

<Steps S4988-S4992>
If the Drive Data 4 Not Set flag is set to ON (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the Drive Data 4 Not Set flag to OFF (step S4988) and sets the Drive Data 4 (Mechanism Operation Scenario Data 4) (see Figure 273) (step S4989). The Drive Data 4 is information that, in the movement mode C (see Figure 266(C)) of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 that announces that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation upgrade), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved by a drive pattern F (see Figure 272) as an individual operation after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 scenario timer to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the drive pattern F according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 4 (see Figure 273) (step S4990), and sets the drive data 4 set flag to ON to indicate that drive data 4 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4991). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts processing No. 1 of drive data 4 (step S4992), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control processing.

<Step S4993>
If the drive data 4 not set flag is set to off (step S4987: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 4 set flag, which indicates that drive data 4 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is set to on (step S4993).

If the drive data 4-set flag is set to ON (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4994. If the drive data 4-set flag is set to OFF (step S4993: No), the process proceeds to step S5000 in Figure 286.

<Steps S4994-S4996>
If the drive data 4 set flag is set to ON (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 4 scenario timer (step S4994) and determines whether it is time to proceed to the next process specified in drive data 4 based on the updated value of the drive data 4 scenario timer (step S4995).

If it is time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 4 (step S4995: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 4 (step S4996) and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. For example, as shown in Figure 273, when process No. 2 in the drive data 4 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting is rotating in the forward direction, the process is moved to process No. 3, which stops the stepping motor for lifting.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 4 scenario timer updated in step S4994 and sequentially executing the following processes in drive data 4, all processes No. 01 to No. 07 in drive data 4 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating component member 37, which is a movable body, is executed as an individual operation using drive pattern F (see Figure 272).

On the other hand, if it is not the right time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4997.

<Step S4997>
If it is not the time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4997). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 4, based on the fulfillment of the termination condition, which is based on the completion of all processes specified by the drive data 4.

If the MPU 51 determines that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 4, based on the fulfillment of the termination condition (step S4997: Yes), i.e., the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 4 (see Figure 273), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4998. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 4, based on the failure to fulfill the termination condition (i.e., the incomplete completion of all processes defined by the drive data 4), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Steps S4998 and S4999>
When the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4997: Yes), that is, when the termination condition is met and it is determined that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 4, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 4 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the drive pattern F according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 4 (see Figure 273) (step S4998). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 set flag to off, indicating that the drive data 4 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S4999), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. In other words, when the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4997: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is terminated.

<Step S5000>
If the drive data 4 set flag is set to off (step S4993: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 5 not set flag is set to on, as shown in Figure 286 (step S5000). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 5 to be set.

If the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5001. If the drive data 5 unset flag is set to OFF (step S5000: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5006.

<Steps S5001 to S5005>
If the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to OFF (step S5001) and sets the drive data 5 (mechanism operation scenario data 5) (see Figure 274(B)) (step S5002). The drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D (see Figure 266(D)) of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 which announces that it will not develop into a super reach (SP non-development), will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development), or will not be a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation non-upgrade), the movable rotating mechanism member 37 will be moved in a specific operation, drive pattern G (see Figure 274(A)), after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 scenario timer to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive pattern F according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 5 (see Figure 274(B)) (step S5003), and sets the drive data 5 set flag to ON to indicate that the drive data 5 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S5004). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts processing No. 1 of the drive data 5 (step S5005), and then terminates the movable rotating mechanism control processing.

<Step S5006>
If the drive data 5 not set flag is set to off (step S5000: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 5 set flag, which indicates that drive data 5 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is set to on (step S5006).

If the drive data 4-set flag is set to ON (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5007. If the drive data 5-set flag is set to OFF (step S5006: No), the movable rotating mechanism control process is terminated.

<Steps S5007-S5009>
If the drive data 5 set flag is set to ON (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 5 scenario timer (step S5007) and determines whether it is time to proceed to the next process specified in drive data 5 based on the updated value of the drive data 5 scenario timer (step S5008).

If it is time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 5 (step S5008: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 5 (step S5009) and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. For example, as shown in Figure 274(B), when process No. 03 in the drive data 5 is being executed, i.e., when the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is stopped, the process is moved to process No. 04, causing the stepping motor for lifting and lowering to rotate in the reverse direction 12 steps.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 5 scenario timer updated in step S5007 and sequentially executing the following processes in drive data 5, all processes No. 01 to No. 05 in drive data 5 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating component member 37, which is a movable body, is executed as an individual operation using drive pattern G (see Figure 274(B)).

On the other hand, if it is not the right time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5010.

<Step S5010>
If it is not the time to proceed to the next process as defined in the drive data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S5010). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 5, based on the fulfillment of the termination condition, which is based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 5.

If the MPU 51 determines that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 5, based on the fulfillment of the termination condition (step S5010: Yes), i.e., the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 5 (see Figure 274(B)), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5011. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 5, based on the failure to fulfill the termination condition (i.e., the incomplete completion of all processes defined by the drive data 5), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process.

<Steps S5011 and S5012>
When the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S5010: Yes), that is, when the termination condition is met and it is determined that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the drive data 5, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 5 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the drive pattern G according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 5 (see Figure 274(B)) (step S5011). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 set flag to off, indicating that the drive data 5 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 (step S5012), and terminates the movable rotating mechanism control process. In other words, when the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S5010: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is terminated.

[Button animation control processing]
Next, the button animation control process. Here, Figures 287 and 288 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the button animation control process in this embodiment. The button animation control process will be described below with reference to Figures 287 and 288.

<Step S5101>
As shown in Figure 287, in the button effect control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the T1 button effect flag is set to ON or not (step S5101). The T1 button effect flag is a flag that causes a button effect to be executed at the mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265) after time T1 has elapsed since the start of the special feature game. When a 16R probability change upgrade effect or a 16R probability change non-upgrade effect is executed at mechanism activation timing A, it is set to ON in step S4708 of the button effect setting process in Figure 276.

If the T1 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), i.e., if the button effect is to be executed at the mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5102. On the other hand, if the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), i.e., if the button effect is not to be executed at the mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5104.

<Steps S5102 and S5103>
If the T1 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), that is, if the button effect is to be executed at the mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until mechanism activation timing A, set at the end of the normal reach effect, begins, is 0 (step S5102). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the button effect.

If the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the activation timing A of the special feature, set at the end of the normal reach animation, is 0 (step S5102: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the button animation, the MPU 51 sets the T1 button animation flag to off (step S5103), and proceeds to step S5110 in Figure 288.

On the other hand, if the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing A set at the end of the normal reach animation, is not 0 (step S5102: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the button animation, the MPU 51 terminates the button animation control process.

<Step S5104>
If the T1 button effect flag is set to off (step S5101: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at the mechanism activation timing A (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T2 button effect flag is set to on (step S5104). The T2 button effect flag is a flag that causes the button effect to be executed at the mechanism activation timing B (see Figure 265), which is time T2 after the start of the special feature game. It is set to on in step S4706 of the button effect setting process in Figure 276 when the 16R probability change upgrade effect or the 16R probability change non-upgrade effect is executed at mechanism activation timing B.

If the T2 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5104: Yes), i.e., if the button effect is to be executed at the mechanism activation timing B (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5105. On the other hand, if the T2 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5104: No), i.e., if the button effect is not to be executed at the mechanism activation timing B (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5107.

<Steps S5105 and S5106>
If the T2 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5104: Yes), that is, if the button effect is to be executed at the mechanism activation timing B (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism activation timing B set at the end of the super reach effect is to begin, is 0 (step S5105). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the button effect.

If the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the activation timing B of the mechanism set at the end of the super reach animation begins, is 0 (step S5105: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the button animation, the MPU 51 sets the T2 button animation flag to off (step S5106), and proceeds to step S5110 in Figure 288.

On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the mechanism activation timing B set at the end of the super reach sequence, is not zero (step S5105: No), i.e., if it is not the timing to start the button sequence, the MPU 51 terminates the button sequence control process.

<Step S5107>
If the T2 button effect flag is set to off (step S5104: No), that is, if the button effect is not performed at the mechanism activation timing B (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T3 button effect flag is set to on (step S5107). The T3 button effect flag is a flag that causes the button effect to be performed at the mechanism activation timing C (see Figure 265), which is time T3 after the start of the special feature game. It is set to on in step S4702 of the button effect setting process in Figure 276 when the 16R probability change upgrade effect or the 16R probability change non-upgrade effect is performed at the mechanism activation timing C.

If the T3 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5107: Yes), i.e., if the button effect is to be executed at the mechanism activation timing C (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if the T3 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5107: No), i.e., if the button effect is not to be executed at the mechanism activation timing C (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5114 in Figure 288.

<Steps S5108 and S5109>
If the T3 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5107: Yes), that is, if the button effect is to be executed at the mechanism activation timing C (see Figure 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the mechanism activation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect starts, is 0 (step S5108). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the button effect.

If the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the activation timing C of the special reach sequence begins, is 0 (step S5108: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the button sequence, the MPU 51 sets the T3 button sequence flag to off (step S5109), and proceeds to step S5110 in Figure 288.

On the other hand, if the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the activation timing C of the special reach sequence begins (set at the end of the sequence), is not zero (step S5108: No), i.e., if it is not the timing to start the button sequence, the MPU 51 terminates the button sequence control process.

<Steps S5110 and S5111>
When it is time to start the button animation, as shown in Figure 288, the MPU 51 sets a button animation start command to initiate the button animation (step S5110) and transmits this button animation start command to the display control device 6 (step S5111). As a result, the button animation as a display animation is started in the graphic display unit 341 under the control of the display control device 6.

<Steps S5112 and S5113>
In step S5112, the MPU 51 sets a button operation validity period timer corresponding to the period during which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is considered valid (button operation validity period). Then, the MPU 51 sets the operation validity period timer flag to ON, indicating that the button operation validity period timer is set (step S5113), and terminates the button performance control process.

<Step S5114>
In step S5114, the MPU 51 determines whether the operation validity period timer flag, which indicates that a button operation validity period timer is set, is set to ON. If the operation validity period timer flag is set to ON (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5115. On the other hand, if the operation validity period timer flag is set to OFF (step S5114: No), the MPU 51 terminates the button effect control process.

<Steps S5115 and S5116>
If the operation validity period timer flag is set to ON (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the button operation validity period timer (step S5115) and determines whether the value of the button operation validity period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step S5116). That is, it determines whether the button performance will end due to the expiration of the button operation validity period.

If the value of the button operation validity period timer after subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), i.e., the button operation validity period has elapsed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5119. On the other hand, if the value of the button operation validity period timer after subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), i.e., the button operation validity period has not elapsed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5117.

<Steps S5117 and S5118>
If the value of the button operation validity period timer after subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), that is, if the button operation validity period has not elapsed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player (step S5117). Whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player is determined by whether or not the operation pattern "OFF", "ON", "ON" has occurred as the operation state for three operations of the operation button 20 in the operation detection pattern setting process in Figure 256.

If the player operates the operation button 20 before the button operation validity period expires (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the button operation validity period timer (step S5118) and proceeds to step S5119. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the operation button 20 before the button operation validity period expires (step S5117: No), the MPU 51 terminates the button effect control process.

<Steps S5119-S5121>
If the value of the button operation validity period timer after subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), that is, if the button performance ends due to the expiration of the button operation validity period, or if the operation button 20 is operated by the player before the expiration of the button operation validity period (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the operation validity period timer flag, which indicates that the button operation validity period timer is set, to off (step S5119).

Then, the MPU 51 sets a button animation termination command (step S5120) to end the button animation, and transmits this button animation termination command to the display control device 6 (step S5121), thereby ending the button animation control process. As a result, the button animation as a display effect is terminated in the symbol display unit 341 by the control of the display control device 6.

[Big Win Game Performance Control Processing]
Next, an example of the procedure for the jackpot game performance control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 253 will be explained. In the jackpot game performance control process, a process is executed to control the jackpot game performance according to the progress of the jackpot game, based on the jackpot game performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment processing in Figure 258. Here, Figure 289 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game performance control process. The jackpot game performance control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 289.

<Step S5201>
As shown in Figure 289, in the jackpot game performance control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether the jackpot game flag is set to ON or OFF (step S5201). The jackpot game flag is a flag that indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and it is set to ON in step S4318 of the command determination process in Figure 258 when a jackpot game start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game is in progress.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5202. On the other hand, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to OFF (step S5201: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 51 terminates the big win game performance control process.

<Step S5202>
If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), that is, if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "Opening Performance Start" flag is set to ON (step S5202). The opening performance start flag is a flag that starts the opening performance of a big win game, and is set to ON in step S4320 of the command judgment process in Figure 258 when the opening start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the opening performance.

If the opening sequence start flag is set to ON (step S5202: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5203. On the other hand, if the opening sequence start flag is set to OFF (step S5202: No), i.e., it is not time to start the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5205.

<Steps S5203 and S5204>
If the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S5202: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the opening performance (step S5203). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start the display performance on the symbol display unit 341, which is one of the opening performances set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to start the audio performance on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to start the lamp performance on the decoration unit 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening sequence start flag to OFF (step S5204), and terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

<Step S5205>
If the opening performance start flag is set to off (step S5202: No), that is, if it is not time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening performance end flag is set to on (step S5205). The opening performance end flag is a flag that ends the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on when an opening end command is received in step S4322 of the command judgment process in Figure 258. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening performance.

If the opening sequence completion flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5206. On the other hand, if the opening sequence completion flag is set to OFF (step S5205: No), i.e., it is not time to end the opening sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5208.

<Steps S5206 and S5207>
If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the opening performance (step S5206). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display performance on the symbol display unit 341, which is part of the opening performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to end the audio performance on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to end the lamp performance on the decoration unit 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening sequence completion flag to OFF (step S5207), and terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

<Step S5208>
If the opening performance end flag is set to off (step S5205: No), that is, if it is not time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game performance start flag is set to on (step S5208). The round game performance start flag is a flag that starts the round game performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S4324 of the command judgment process in Figure 259 when a round game start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game performance.

If the round game performance start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5209. On the other hand, if the round game performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5208: No), i.e., it is not time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5211.

<Steps S5209 and S5210>
If the round game performance start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the round game performance of the jackpot game performance (step S5209). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start the display performance on the symbol display unit 341, which is one of the round game performances set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to start the audio performance on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to start the lamp performance on the decoration unit 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to off (step S5210), and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5211>
If the round game performance start flag is set to off (step S5208: No), that is, if it is not time to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game performance end flag is set to on (step S5211). The round game performance end flag is a flag that ends the round game performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S4327 of the command judgment process in Figure 259 when a round game end command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the round game performance.

If the round game performance completion flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5212. On the other hand, if the round game performance completion flag is set to OFF (step S5211: No), i.e., it is not time to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5214.

<Steps S5212 and S5213>
If the round game performance termination flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), that is, if it is time to terminate the round game performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to terminate the round game performance (step S5212). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to terminate the display performance on the symbol display unit 341, which is part of the round game performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to terminate the audio performance on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to terminate the lamp performance on the decoration unit 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance completion flag to OFF (step S5213), and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5214>
If the round game performance end flag is set to off (step S5211: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance start flag is set to on (step S5214). The interval performance start flag is a flag that starts the interval performance of the jackpot game, and is set to on in step S4329 of the command judgment process in Figure 259 when an interval start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game performance.

If the interval performance start flag is set to ON (step S5214: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5215. On the other hand, if the interval performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5214: No), i.e., it is not time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5217.

<Steps S5215 and S5216>
If the interval performance start flag is set to ON (step S5214: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the interval performance of the jackpot game performance (step S5215). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start the display performance on the symbol display unit 341, which is one of the interval performances set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to start the audio performance on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to start the lamp performance on the decoration unit 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval animation start flag to off (step S5216), and terminates the jackpot game animation control process.

<Step S5217>
If the interval performance start flag is set to off (step S5214: No), that is, if it is not time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance end flag is set to on (step S5217). The interval performance end flag is a flag that ends the interval performance of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S4331 of the command judgment process in Figure 259 when an interval end command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the interval performance.

If the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S5217: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5218. On the other hand, if the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5217: No), i.e., it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5220.

<Steps S5218 and S5219>
If the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S5217: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the interval performance (step S5218). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display performance at the symbol display unit 341, which is part of the interval performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to end the audio performance at the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to end the lamp performance at the decoration unit 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance completion flag to OFF (step S5219), and terminates the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5220>
If the interval performance end flag is set to off (step S5217: No), that is, if it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to on (step S5220). The ending performance start flag is a flag that starts the ending performance, and is set to on in step S4333 of the command determination process in Figure 259 when an ending start command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending performance.

If the ending sequence start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5221. On the other hand, if the ending sequence start flag is set to OFF (step S5220: No), i.e., it is not time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5223.

<Steps S5221 and S5222>
If the ending sequence start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the ending sequence of the jackpot game sequence (step S5221). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start the display sequence on the symbol display unit 341, which is one of the ending sequences set in the jackpot game sequence setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to start the audio sequence on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to start the lamp sequence on the decoration unit 27.

Here, the ending sequence is a display sequence performed on the symbol display unit 341, which is a control target different from the opening/closing door 319, after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, in which a series of specific operations are performed in which the opening/closing door 319, a movable body, moves back and forth between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the operating position, which is the drive side position, according to the number of rounds of play corresponding to the type of jackpot in the jackpot game. In this ending sequence, for example, information that can identify the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game, the number of balls dispensed in the jackpot game, the number of consecutive jackpots, and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive jackpots can be displayed. In addition, the ending sequence may also display information that can identify the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. For example, information that can identify whether the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a probability variation jackpot (meaning that the game will transition to a probability variation state after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (meaning that the game will transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends) may be displayed. The former information is displayed as text images such as "○○ RUSH Entry" after the opening/closing execution mode ends when the opening/closing door 319, a movable part, is stopped moving while in its standby position (return side). The latter information, on the other hand, is displayed as text images such as "○○ Chance Mode Entry" after the opening/closing execution mode ends when the opening/closing door 319, a movable part, is stopped moving while in its standby position (return side). In this way, the ending sequence displays information that identifies the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot, allowing players to rediscover the type of jackpot even if they have forgotten it.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending sequence start flag to OFF (step S5222), and terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

<Step S5223>
If the ending sequence start flag is set to off (step S5220: No), that is, if it is not time to start the ending sequence, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending sequence end flag is set to on (step S5223). The ending sequence end flag is a flag that ends the ending sequence of a jackpot game, and is set to on in step S4335 of the command determination process in Figure 259 when an ending sequence end command is received. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending sequence.

If the ending sequence termination flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the ending sequence, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5224. On the other hand, if the ending sequence termination flag is set to OFF (step S5223: No), i.e., it is not time to end the ending sequence, the MPU 51 terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

<Steps S5224 and S5225>
If the ending performance termination flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), that is, if it is time to terminate the ending performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to terminate the ending performance (step S5224). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to terminate the display performance on the symbol display unit 341, which is part of the ending performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process in step S4317 of the command judgment process in Figure 258, an audio control process to terminate the audio performance on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to terminate the lamp performance on the decoration unit 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending sequence termination flag to OFF (step S5225), and terminates the jackpot game sequence control process.

As described above, in this invention, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the movable control means determines a specific movement pattern for the movable means based on the result of the draw by the win/fail lottery means, while a specific performance pattern is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, in this invention, while the specific performance pattern is displayed by the display control means, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set in accordance with the movement pattern.

Furthermore, in this invention, when a series of specific operations on a movable means are performed by a movable control means based on specific information set in accordance with a movable mode during the display of a specific performance by the display control means, the determination means determines whether the termination condition of the series of specific operations has been met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position. In this way, when a series of specific operations on a movable means are performed by a movable control means based on specific information set in accordance with a movable mode during the display of a specific performance by the display control means, the determination means determines whether the termination condition of the series of specific operations has been met each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position, by the movable control means. Furthermore, in the present invention, if the determination means determines that the termination condition is met during a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on specific information, the termination means stops the movement of the movable means located at or near the first position, thereby terminating the series of specific operations. That is, in the present invention, even before all movable control of the movable means based on specific information is terminated during a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on specific information, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific operations each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, provided that the termination condition is met. As a result, if the termination condition is met during the execution of a series of specific operations of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on specific information can be stopped and the series of specific operations terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition has been met. Consequently, if it is determined that the termination condition for a series of specific operations has been met, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be terminated immediately, thereby enabling smooth termination control of the movable means. Therefore, in this invention, a smooth transition from one specific operation of the movable means to the next is possible. This allows the series of specific operations of the movable means to be terminated without causing any discomfort to the player, even after the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been determined. Consequently, if other individual operations are performed immediately after the completion of the series of specific operations of the movable means, a smooth transition from the series of specific operations to the other individual operations is possible, preventing the player from experiencing discomfort during the transition. This makes it possible to operate the movable means for performance purposes even when a specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, without impairing the performance effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in the first or second special symbol game that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery executed by a lottery process triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 (which serve as the ball entry starting unit), the display effects are set by the special symbol game effect setting process (which serves as the display control process), and the display effects are executed in the symbol display unit 341 upon receiving a display variation pattern command in the display control device 6 (which serves as the display control process). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movement mode of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which serves as a movable body, is determined from a plurality of movement modes A to D during the execution of the display effects by the mechanism operation effect setting process (which serves as the movable body control process), and the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which serves as a movable body, is moved based on one movement mode determined from the plurality of movement modes A to D during the execution of the display effects by the movable rotating mechanism control process (which serves as the movable body control process).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation as a continuous operation across multiple movement modes A to D, and where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination condition may be uncertain, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data). After the completion of the operation in drive patterns A to C, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is moved in one of the continuous operation drive patterns D to G based on the information of individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each movement mode A to D. In this way, by moving the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the information of one drive data 1 for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation across multiple movement modes A to D, the amount of drive data used for one movement mode A to D can be reduced, thereby reducing the memory load. In addition, the control burden, such as reading and temporarily storing drive data when operating the movable rotating mechanism member 37, is also reduced.

In this embodiment, when the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, and where the timing of the fulfillment of the termination determination condition is uncertain, is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), it is determined whether the termination determination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation, has been fulfilled, that is, whether the player has operated the operation button 20, at the timing when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 returns from the intermediate operating position 1 or intermediate operating position 2, which is the driving position, to the standby position or intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position. If the termination determination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, has not been fulfilled, the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, continues. On the other hand, if the termination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, is met (i.e., if the player operates the operation button 20), the operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 based on the information in drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), will be terminated, even if it is in the middle of the operation. Then, based on the information in the individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each movable mode A to D determined according to the notification content, the movable rotating mechanism member 37 will be moved in the operation in drive patterns D to G, which are individual operations as continuous operations.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D is performed based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), and the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in multiple movable modes A to D, is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (mechanism operation scenario data), it is determined whether or not the termination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation, has been met (whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20) at the timing when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 returns from the drive side position to the return side position. In other words, in the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive patterns A to C, which is a common operation, it is determined whether or not the termination condition has been met, which is whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20, each time the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned in the return side position. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the termination condition has been met during the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the common drive patterns A to C (i.e., when it is determined that the player has made an operation on the operation button 20), the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37, which is located in the return position, is stopped, and the operation in the common drive patterns A to C is terminated. As a result, if the termination condition for the operation in the common drive patterns A to C is met while the operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in the common drive patterns A to C is being executed, the movement of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 can be stopped and the operation in the common drive patterns A to C can be terminated when the movable rotating mechanism member 37 is positioned in the return position after the termination condition has been met. Consequently, when it is determined that the termination condition for the common operation in drive patterns A to C has been met, the common operation of the movable rotating mechanism member 37 in drive patterns A to C can be terminated immediately. Therefore, it is possible to immediately transition to the next operation from the meeting of the termination condition for a continuous operation that is common to multiple movement modes A to D and whose timing of meeting the termination condition may be uncertain. As a result, after the termination conditions for multiple movement modes A to D are met, the operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 can be terminated without causing any discomfort to the player, and the movable body can be smoothly transitioned to the next operation. Therefore, when other individual operations are executed immediately after the common operation of the movable rotating mechanism 37 is completed, a smooth transition from the common operation to the other individual operation is possible, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort during the transition from the common operation to the other individual operation. This makes it possible to operate the movable rotating mechanism 37 without impairing the effect of the display or performance during the execution of a display or performance in the first or second special feature game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to twelfth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Embodiment 14]
In gaming machines, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by setting various game states with different levels of profit. It is desirable that gaming machines appropriately control the transitions between each game state and that the control system is designed to avoid causing unnecessary disadvantages to the player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention solves the above problems,
The game is equipped with a launching mechanism that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area.
It is possible to perform a first game by launching game balls in a first direction, and a second game by launching game balls in a second direction different from the first direction.
A display means capable of performing a game with changing patterns,
Multiple starting means capable of generating starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means for assisting the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means that executes a special game as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result,
A gaming machine capable of generating a specific gaming state by switching the control state of the auxiliary means when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel,
A second ball entry means comprising an opening/closing mechanism that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area,
An opening execution means that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means that executes a special period game for a specific period, different from the special game, as a profit game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
In a predetermined game state where the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state.

A profit-making game is any game that can provide some kind of benefit to the player. As for profitable games, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, for example, a game in which a large prize slot (variable prize slot) is opened, a game in which a V prize slot provided in the large prize slot can be opened, a jackpot game, a probability variation jackpot game that generates a probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a time-saving jackpot game that generates a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a normal jackpot game that generates a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a latent probability variation jackpot game that generates a latent probability variation game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a jackpot game that generates a probability variation game state by a game ball entering a V prize slot provided in the large prize slot, a jackpot game that generates a time-saving game state by a game ball entering a V prize slot provided in the large prize slot, a round game in which the large prize slot is opened in a jackpot game, and provided in the large prize slot Examples include round games where a V-prize slot is opened, minor prize games where a large prize slot is opened for a short time, minor prize games where a jackpot is triggered by a game ball entering a V-prize slot located within the large prize slot, games executed based on a game ball entering a specific entry area located outside the large prize slot (variable prize slot), special electric start games where a special electric start slot is opened based on a game ball entering a special electric start slot, games executed based on a game ball entering a prize slot opened by the operation of an electric mechanism, special symbol variation games executed based on a game ball entering a prize slot opened by the operation of an electric mechanism, decorative symbol variation games executed based on a game ball entering a prize slot opened by the operation of an electric mechanism, normal symbol variation games executed based on a game ball entering a through gate, and any combination thereof.

A special game can be any game that can be granted when the result of a variable game is a predetermined result. Examples of special games that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, a game in which a large prize slot (variable prize slot) is opened, a game in which a V-prize slot provided in the large prize slot can be opened, a jackpot game, a probability variation jackpot game that generates a probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a time-saving jackpot game that generates a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a normal jackpot game that generates a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and a latent probability variation game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode). Examples include latent probability-changing jackpot games, jackpot games that trigger a probability-changing game state when a game ball enters a V-entry slot in the main prize slot, jackpot games that trigger a time-saving game state when a game ball enters a V-entry slot in the main prize slot, round games in which the main prize slot is opened during a jackpot game, round games in which the V-entry slot in the main prize slot is opened, minor jackpot games where the main prize slot is opened for a short time, minor jackpot games that trigger a jackpot when a game ball enters a V-entry slot in the main prize slot, and any combination thereof.

A "special period game" is a game distinct from a "special game," and can be any game executed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while an opening/closing mechanism capable of switching between an open and closed state is open. Examples of "special period games" that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, a game executed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area located outside a large prize entry area (variable prize entry area), a special electric start game where a special electric large prize entry area is opened based on a game ball entering a special electric start entry area, a game executed based on a game ball entering a prize entry area opened by the operation of an electric mechanism, a special symbol variation game executed based on a game ball entering a prize entry area opened by the operation of an electric mechanism, a decorative symbol variation game executed based on a game ball entering a prize entry area opened by the operation of an electric mechanism, a normal symbol variation game executed based on a game ball entering a through gate, and any combination thereof.

A specific game state is any game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without the execution of a special game. Examples of specific game states that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without the execution of a special game; a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without the execution of a jackpot game; a time-saving game state that occurs in a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without the execution of a special game; a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that occurs in a normal game state when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without the execution of a jackpot game; and a state where an upper limit is defined. Examples include: a normal game state that occurs when the number of predetermined variable game plays reaches the maximum limit without performing a special game in a probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode); a normal game state that occurs when the number of predetermined variable game plays reaches the maximum limit without performing a jackpot game in a probability variation game state with a defined maximum limit; a normal game state that occurs when the number of predetermined variable game plays reaches the maximum limit without performing a special game in a time-saving game state with a defined maximum limit; a normal game state that occurs when the number of predetermined variable game plays reaches the maximum limit without performing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state with a defined maximum limit; and any combination thereof.

The predetermined game state can be any game state different from the specified game state. The predetermined game state can be any game state that realizes the spirit of the present invention, such as a probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a latent probability variation game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a normal game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a probability variation game state transitioned to after the end of a jackpot game, a probability variation game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, a probability variation game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, a time-saving game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, a time-saving game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, a time-saving game state transitioned to after the end of a jackpot game (a) time-saving game state, a time-saving game state transitioned from a normal game state, or a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of predetermined variable games is reached without executing a jackpot game in a normal game state (b) time-saving game Examples of game states include: a time-saving game state (c time-saving game state) transitioned when a specific symbol stops during a variable game of special or decorative symbols; a normal game state transitioned after the end of a jackpot game; a normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; a normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; b normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; c normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; a jackpot game state transitioned from a probability variation game state; a jackpot game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; a jackpot game state transitioned from a latent probability variation game state; a jackpot game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; a minor jackpot game state transitioned from a probability variation game state; a minor jackpot game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; a minor jackpot game state transitioned from a latent probability variation game state; a minor jackpot game state transitioned from a time-saving game state; and any combination thereof.

The first control state is a control state in which the control state for the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions does not correspond to a specific game state. The first control state can be, for example, a control state for the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions in the starting means corresponding to a probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a control state corresponding to a probability variation game state and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to a probability variation game state and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to a probability variation game state and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a special symbol game at the ball entry point, or a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions in the starting means. Control state for auxiliary means, control state corresponding to time-saving game state and control state for electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of starting conditions at the ball entry gate, control state corresponding to time-saving game state and control state for electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of starting conditions for variable game at the ball entry gate, control state corresponding to time-saving game state and control state for electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of starting conditions for special symbol game at the ball entry gate, control state corresponding to latent probability variation game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) and control state for auxiliary means that assist in the fulfillment of starting conditions at the starting means, control state corresponding to latent probability variation game state and control state for electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of starting conditions at the ball entry gate, in relation to latent probability variation game state Control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for variable game at the ball entry point, control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for special symbol game at the ball entry point, control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for the starting means, control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a time-saving game state, control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry point, control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry point, control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry point Control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions, control state corresponding to the probability variation game state to which the game transitions after the end of a jackpot game, and control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, control state corresponding to the probability variation game state to which the game transitions after the end of a jackpot game, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point, control state corresponding to the probability variation game state to which the game transitions after the end of a jackpot game, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entry point, control state corresponding to the probability variation game state to which the game transitions after the end of a jackpot game, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for the special symbol game at the ball entry point, and the number of variable games Control states corresponding to a limited probability variation game state and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; Control states corresponding to a probability variation game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point; Control states corresponding to a probability variation game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable games at the ball entry point; Control states corresponding to a probability variation game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special symbol games at the ball entry point; Control states corresponding to a probability variation game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games and an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means. Control state for, Control state corresponding to a probability variation game state in which there is no upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry gate, Control state corresponding to a probability variation game state in which there is no upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable games at the ball entry gate, Control state corresponding to a probability variation game state in which there is no upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special symbol games at the ball entry gate, Control state corresponding to a time-saving game state in which there is an upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, Control state corresponding to a time-saving game state in which there is an upper limit on the number of variable games, at Control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions, control state corresponding to a time-saving game state where there is an upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable games at the ball entry point, control state corresponding to a time-saving game state where there is an upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special symbol games at the ball entry point, control state corresponding to a time-saving game state where there is no upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, control state corresponding to a time-saving game state where there is no upper limit on the number of variable games, and control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point, and in a time-saving game state where there is no upper limit on the number of variable games A control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable game at the ball entry point, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a special game at the ball entry point, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a special game at the ball entry point, a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a game at the starting means, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a game at the ball entry point, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable game at the ball entry point, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable game at the ball entry point, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable game at the ball entry point A control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a special game at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state transitioned from a normal game state, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a game at the starting means, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state transitioned from a normal game state, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a game at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state transitioned from a normal game state, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable game at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state transitioned from a normal game state, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a special game at the ball entry point, Control states corresponding to a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a jackpot game in the normal game state, and control states for auxiliary means that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state and control states for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry gate, a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state and control states for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable games at the ball entry gate, a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state and control states for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special symbol games at the ball entry gate, and when a specific symbol stops in a variable game of special symbols or decorative symbols, Control states corresponding to the shortened play state (c shortened play state) that is performed, and control states for auxiliary means that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, control states corresponding to the c shortened play state, and control states for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry gate, control states corresponding to the c shortened play state, and control states for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable play at the ball entry gate, control states corresponding to the c shortened play state, and control states for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special symbol play at the ball entry gate, control states corresponding to the normal play state that is transitioned to after the end of a jackpot game, and control states for auxiliary means that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, and transitions after the end of a jackpot game. Control states corresponding to normal gameplay states and control states for electric devices that assist in the fulfillment of starting conditions at the ball entry point; control states corresponding to normal gameplay states transitioned to after the end of a jackpot game and control states for electric devices that assist in the fulfillment of starting conditions for variable games at the ball entry point; control states corresponding to normal gameplay states transitioned to after the end of a jackpot game and control states for electric devices that assist in the fulfillment of starting conditions for special symbol games at the ball entry point; control states corresponding to normal gameplay states transitioned from a time-saving game state and control states for auxiliary means that assist in the fulfillment of starting conditions at the starting means; control states corresponding to normal gameplay states transitioned from a time-saving game state and electric devices that assist in the fulfillment of starting conditions at the ball entry point a Control state for an object, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from a time-saving game state, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable game at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from a time-saving game state, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special symbol game at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from a time-saving game state, a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from a time-saving game state, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable game at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from a time-saving game state A control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special feature games at the ball entry point, b control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, b control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point, b control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable games at the ball entry point, b time-saving game state A control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from c, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the start conditions for special symbol games at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from c, a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the start conditions at the start means, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from c, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the start conditions at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from c, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the start conditions for variable games at the ball entry point, a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioning from c, a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the start conditions for special symbol games at the ball entry point Examples include control states for electric mechanisms that assist in standing, control states corresponding to the jackpot game state transitioning from the probability variation game state and for auxiliary means that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means, control states corresponding to the jackpot game state transitioning from the probability variation game state and for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point, control states corresponding to the jackpot game state transitioning from the probability variation game state and for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for variable game at the ball entry point, control states corresponding to the jackpot game state transitioning from the probability variation game state and for electric mechanisms that assist in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for special symbol game at the ball entry point, and any combination thereof.

The second control state is one in which the control state for the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions corresponds to a specific game state. The second control state may, if it is possible to realize the spirit of the present invention, be, for example, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without executing a special game, and is a control state for the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without executing a special game, and is a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without executing a special game, and is a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry point; or a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game are reached without executing a special game, and is a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a special symbol game at the ball entry point. A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a jackpot game, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a jackpot game, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry gate; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a jackpot game, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry gate; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a jackpot game, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a special symbol game at the ball entry gate; executing a special game in a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a special game, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a special game in a normal game state, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry gate; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a special game in a normal game state, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry gate; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game is reached without executing a special game in a normal game state, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a special symbol A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that occurs when the number of executions of a variable game reaches a predetermined number of times, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; a assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point, and a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game, and a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game, and a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game, and a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game A control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times the limit is reached, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the limit without executing a special game in a probability variation game state with a defined upper limit, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry point; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the limit without executing a special game in a probability variation game state with a defined upper limit, and a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a special symbol game at the ball entry point; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the limit without executing a jackpot game in a probability variation game state with a defined upper limit, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; a probability variation game with a defined upper limit A control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a jackpot game, and is a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry gate. A control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a jackpot game in a probability variation game state with a defined maximum number of times, and is a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry gate. A control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a jackpot game in a probability variation game state with a defined maximum number of times, and is a control state for an electric mechanism that assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for a special symbol game at the ball entry gate. A control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a defined maximum number of times, and is a starting condition for the starting means. Control state for auxiliary means that assist in fulfilling conditions; control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a defined upper limit; control state for an electric mechanism that assists in fulfilling the starting conditions at the ball entry point; control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a defined upper limit; control state for an electric mechanism that assists in fulfilling the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entry point; control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a defined upper limit; control state for an electric mechanism that assists in fulfilling the starting conditions for a special symbol game at the ball entry point; when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the maximum number without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state with a defined upper limit. Examples include: a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the starting means; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state with a defined upper limit, and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions at the ball entry point; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state with a defined upper limit, and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entry point; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state with a defined upper limit, and assists in the fulfillment of the starting conditions for the special symbol game at the ball entry point; and any combination thereof.

Incidentally, in some gaming machines, if the number of special symbol variations in normal gameplay reaches a predetermined number without the special symbol jackpot game (a high-profit game) being executed, the machine transitions to a time-saving game state (the so-called b-time-saving game state, which is a control of the first profitable game state). The b-time-saving game state ends when a special symbol jackpot game is executed, or when the maximum number of special symbol variations that would result in a special symbol jackpot game have been executed. Furthermore, if the b-time-saving game state ends by the maximum number of special symbol variations being executed without a special symbol jackpot game being executed, the machine transitions to normal gameplay.

However, in a gaming machine, when transitioning from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state, even if the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number without a special symbol jackpot game being executed after transitioning to the normal game state, the game will not transition back to the b-time-saving game state. In other words, the b-time-saving game state does not occur in the normal game state transitioning from the b-time-saving game state (first auxiliary state control), while the b-time-saving game state may occur in the normal game state transitioning after the end of a special symbol jackpot game or the end of a probability-changing game state (second auxiliary state control). Therefore, the b-time-saving game state can only occur once between the execution of one special symbol jackpot game and the execution of the next special symbol jackpot game.

In contrast, in this invention, in a predetermined game state where the control state of the auxiliary means assisting in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable symbol game is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, when a specific period game, which is different from a special game as a profit game, ends based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for a predetermined period, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. That is, in this invention, even in a predetermined game state where the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, it is possible to generate a specific game state where the control state of the auxiliary means is the second control state by having a game ball enter a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open and executing a game for a predetermined specific period. This makes it possible to generate a specific game state again even after the specific game state has ended, thus preventing the game machine from being left idle because the specific game state has ended and no specific game state is generated, and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

More specifically, in this embodiment, players may be granted two types of games as game benefits: a special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, and a V-prize jackpot game, which is a low-profit game. The special jackpot game, as a high-profit game, is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is performed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 as a starting means, is a jackpot. The variable prize slot 316 is opened and closed multiple times, making it a game that offers great benefits to the player as it allows them to acquire a large number of game balls. On the other hand, the V-prize winning game, which is a low-profit game, is executed when a game ball enters the special electric V prize winning area 383, which is a specific entry area of the second entry means, which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is an opening/closing means of the second entry means, in the special electric start game which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37, which is a first entry means. In this game, it is possible to enter the special electric large prize winning area 381, but the number of game balls that can be obtained by entering the special electric large prize winning area 381 is small, making it a game with little profit for the player. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special electric start opening 37, the special electric large prize winning area 381, and the special electric V prize winning area 383 are located in positions into which game balls flowing down the second flow path 392, which is a specific flow path set in the right-side area of the game board 31, can enter. In other words, the V-prize winning game, which is a low-profit game, can be performed by launching game balls into the second channel 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a V-entry jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, ends, the maximum number of special symbol games, which are variable games that can generate the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is set. Here, the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is a time-saving game state to which a predetermined number of special symbol games (e.g., 1000 times) are executed without a special symbol jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, being performed in the low-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control, where the opening and closing frequency of the electric mechanism 315b, which is an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second entry opening 315 (frequency of ball entry support into the second entry opening 315 by the electric mechanism 315b), is defined. In other words, in this embodiment, the maximum number of special symbol games that can transition to the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is set by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second channel 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by setting a maximum value as the number of special feature games that can generate the first profitable game state control, b time-saving game state, by the player continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392, the maximum number of special feature games is set. Even if the game transitions from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state when the special feature jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, is executed without the special feature jackpot game being executed in the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, is reached, resulting in a first auxiliary state control where the b time-saving game state does not occur, the player can, by continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392, generate a second auxiliary state control that is capable of generating the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, according to the player's intention. Thus, in this embodiment, since the player can generate a state that is a second auxiliary state control capable of generating the first profitable game state control, b (time-saving game state), it becomes possible to improve the operating rate of a game machine where the first profitable game state control, b (time-saving game state), has ended without the special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the maximum number of special feature games that can generate the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), by the player continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392 is set, if the player ends the game while in the second auxiliary state control, which is capable of generating the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), the number of special feature games executed by the player while in the second auxiliary state control, which is capable of generating the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), can be cleared by executing a V-winning jackpot game as a small-benefit game by continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392 before ending the game. This prevents the disadvantages suffered by the player as a result of playing the game while in the second auxiliary state control, which is capable of generating the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), from becoming an advantage for others. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc., for each special feature game played while in the second auxiliary state control, which enables the creation of the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state). This investment can be prevented, by the player's intention, from becoming an asset to others who later play the machine—that is, becoming the target of so-called "hyena" behavior—by continuing to launch game balls towards the second channel 392.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 291 to 327. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again, even if they were already described in the first embodiment.

This gaming machine, as a specific configuration of the present invention, includes "Game Profit" as a profitable game, "High Profit Game" as a special game, "Small Profit Game" as a specific period game, "First Profit Game State Control" as a specific game state, "Second Profit Game State Control" as a predetermined game state, "First Auxiliary State Control" as a first control state, and "Second Auxiliary State Control" as a second control state.

[Configuration of the gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 291 to 293. Here, Figure 291 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 292 and 293 are diagrams for explaining the special electric prize winning device 38 of the gaming machine 31 shown in Figure 291.

[Configuration of the front frame 11]
As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illuminated unit 27, among other things.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game balls. In the game machine 10, when the player rotates the launch handle 22, the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32, which acts as the launching means, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation, thereby performing the basic game. For example, depending on a predetermined game operation performed by the player on the launch handle 22, a first game, a left-handed game, can be executed, launching the game balls into the left-hand area of the game board 31 (first direction), and a second game, a right-handed game, can be executed, launching the game balls into the right-hand area of the game board 31 (second direction). Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a right-handed game, a strong right-handed game, launching the game balls to the right of the separation unit 393 (described later), and a weak right-handed game, launching the game balls to the left of the separation unit 393, can be executed.

In this embodiment, during normal gameplay, left-handed play is encouraged to execute the first special symbol game as a variable game by inserting the game ball into the first prize slot 314, which serves as a starting means. Furthermore, during probability variation gameplay and various time-saving gameplay states (a. time-saving gameplay state, b. time-saving gameplay state), strong right-handed play is encouraged to execute the second special symbol game as a variable game by inserting the game ball into the through gate 317 and the second prize slot 315, which serves as a starting means. In the special symbol jackpot game, which is a highly profitable game for the player, strong right-handed play is encouraged to allow the game ball to flow down the first flow path 391 (described later) and enter the variable prize slot 316. Furthermore, weak right-handed play is encouraged in order to insert the game ball into the special electric start port 37 (described later) to execute the special electric start game, and to insert the game ball into the special electric V-entry port 383 of the special electric big prize device 38 (described later) to execute the V-entry jackpot game. Therefore, players can prevent disadvantages by performing the prescribed game operations recommended according to the game state on the launch handle 22.

[Composition of inner frame 12]
As shown in Figure 230, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, left and right general prize pockets 313, a first prize pocket 314 and a second prize pocket 315 as starting means, a through gate 317, an out pocket 318, a symbol display unit 341 as a display means, a main display unit 36 having a first special symbol display unit 362 and a second special symbol display unit 363 as display means, a special electric starting pocket 37, a special electric big prize device 38, a variable prize pocket 316, a first flow path 391, and a second flow path 392 as a specific path.

The inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the launched game balls toward the game area on the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312, game balls flowing down the left side of the game board 31 can enter the left general prize slot 313 and the first prize slot 314, while game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 31 can enter the right general prize slot 313, the second prize slot 315, the variable prize slot 316, the through gate 317, the special electric start slot 37, and the special electric large prize device 38. On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the left or right general prize slots 313, the first prize slot 314, the specific entry area of the second prize slot 315, the variable prize slot 316, the special electric start slot 37, or the special electric large prize device 38 are discharged from the out slot 318. When a game ball enters the left and right general prize slots 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, the variable prize slot 316, the special electric start slot 37, or the special electric large prize device 38, a predetermined number of prize balls are dispensed. For example, as shown in Figure 294(B), the number of prize balls is 10 when a ball enters the left and right general prize slots 313, 3 when a ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, 10 when a ball enters the variable prize slot 316, 1 when a ball enters the special electric start slot 37, and 1 when a ball enters the special electric large prize device 38 (the special electric V prize slot 383 or special electric normal prize slot 384, which are described later as specific prize areas). Note that the number of prize balls is 0 when a game ball enters the through gate 317.

Furthermore, based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4) executes processing related to the special symbol jackpot lottery. When the main control unit 331 performs the special symbol jackpot lottery, it executes a special symbol game as a small-profit game for a specific period, different from the large-profit game, as a game benefit to the player, and notifies the player of the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 is notified in the first special symbol game for a specific period, which is a small-profit game in which the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 362. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the through gate 317, the opening and closing mechanism opens the electric mechanism 315b for a predetermined period, and the result of the special prize draw, which is executed based on the game ball entering the second prize slot 315 which is in an open state, is announced by the specific period game execution mechanism during a specific period of the second special symbol game, which is a small-profit game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display unit 363.

Furthermore, if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a jackpot, after the completion of the special feature game, which is a small-profit game, a special feature jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, is executed as a game benefit for the player. In this special feature jackpot game, a predetermined number of round games (for example, 5 or 16 times) are repeatedly executed in the opening/closing execution mode. In each round game, the opening/closing door 319, which is the opening/closing means, is switched between a standby position with the variable prize entry opening 316 closed and an operating position with the variable prize entry opening 316 open. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the number of round games is determined from a plurality of round game numbers (for example, 5 or 16 times) according to the result of the jackpot lottery, and the opening/closing door 319 is repeatedly operated as the determined number of round games are executed. Thus, in the special feature jackpot game, the variable prize entry opening 316 is repeatedly opened by the opening/closing door 319, so the special feature jackpot game is a large-profit game in which a large payout of prize balls can be expected as a game benefit.

Here, the right-hand region of the game board 31, which enables the second game, right-handed play, is separated into two game regions by a separation section 393 made of resin or the like. The separation section 393 can also be provided by driving in multiple nails. The two game regions in the right-hand region of the game board 31 define a specific path for the game balls to flow down during right-handed play, and each game region is provided with a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means.

In the first area, which is the game area set to the right of the separation section 393 in the right-hand region of the game board 31, a first flow path 391 is defined as a specific path. Furthermore, a through gate 317 is provided in the first area as a first ball entry means, and a second prize entry opening 315 is provided as a specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means. Therefore, in right-handed play, game balls flowing down the first flow path 391 can enter both the through gate 317 and the second prize entry opening 315. Additionally, an electric mechanism 315b is provided in the second prize entry opening 315 as an opening and closing means of the second ball entry means. This electric mechanism 315b switches the second prize entry opening 315 between a closed state and an open state.

When a game ball enters the through gate 317, no prize balls are paid out. However, the entry of a game ball into the through gate 317 triggers the execution of a process related to the regular symbol win lottery, and the regular symbols are displayed in a changing manner to announce the result of the regular symbol win lottery. This is a regular symbol game that serves as a profit game. If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a regular symbol win, the process for the regular symbol win game, which serves as a profit game, is executed in which the second prize slot 315 is opened for a predetermined period of time by the opening and closing execution means. In this regular symbol win game, the electric mechanism 315b is activated to open the second prize slot 315. In other words, by executing an opening and closing control process for the electric mechanism 315b, one mode of movement is determined from several modes (for example, a short opening of 0.1 seconds, a long opening of 6 seconds (see Figures 12(A) and 12(B))). In a normal winning game, the electric mechanism 315b operates between a standby position where the second prize opening 315 is closed and an operating position where the second prize opening 315 is open, according to the selected mode of movement, thereby switching between the closed and open states of the second prize opening 315. In this way, when the second prize opening 315 is opened in a normal winning game, it becomes possible for game balls to enter the second prize opening 315.

Furthermore, multiple nails are driven above the through gate 317, creating a channel through which game balls can enter the through gate 317 and a channel through which game balls cannot enter the through gate 317. Some of the game balls that are launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 and flow down the first channel 391 enter the through gate 317. Also, multiple nails are driven above the second prize opening 315, creating a channel through which game balls can enter the second prize opening 315 and a channel through which game balls cannot enter the second prize opening 315. Some of the game balls that are launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 and flow down the first channel 391 enter the second prize opening 315 when the second prize opening 315 is opened based on the entry of game balls into the through gate 317. As described above, the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the through gate 317 is 0. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, the number of prize balls awarded is 3 (see Figure 294(B)), and the time the second prize slot 315 is open is 0.1 seconds for a short opening and 6 seconds for a long opening (see Figures 12(C) and 294(D)). In this embodiment, in both the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, b-time reduction game state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), when the first game is played in which game balls are launched into the right-hand region of the game board 31 and the game balls flow down a specific path, the first channel 391, the number of prize game balls that the player can obtain is configured to be less than the specified number when a specific number of game balls are sent down the first channel 391 by continuously launching game balls. This prevents the number of game balls from increasing by causing them to flow down the first channel 391 in both high-frequency support modes (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, b-time reduction game state) and low-frequency support modes (normal game state). In other words, since the region where the game balls flow can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotational operation on the launch handle 22 by the player, the player can freely launch the game balls so that they flow down the first channel 391, a specific path. However, because the system is configured so that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase even when the game balls flow down the first channel 391, this method of launching the game balls to flow down the first channel 391 is prevented from becoming a winning strategy.

In the second area, which is designated as a game area to the left of the separation section 393 in the right-hand region of the game board 31, a second flow path 392 is defined as a specific path. Furthermore, a special electric start port 37 is provided in the second area as a first ball entry means, and a special electric large prize device 38 is provided below the special electric start port 37 as a second ball entry means. Therefore, in right-handed gameplay, game balls flowing down the second flow path 392 can enter both the special electric start port 37 and the special electric large prize device 38.

The special electric start port 37 activates the special electric large prize device 38 upon entry of a game ball, and provides an opportunity to execute a special electric start game in which a game ball can be entered into the special electric V prize port 383 of the special electric large prize device 38, which will be described later. The special electric start port 37 is equipped with an entry sensor 37a (see Figure 294) that detects when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37.

Furthermore, in a special electric start game, if a game ball enters the special electric V-entry slot 383, that is, if the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 37a (see Figure 294), the V-entry jackpot game, which is a small-profit game as described later, will be executed.

Here, Figure 232(A) is a front view of the special electric prize winning device 38, Figure 232(B) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38, Figure 232(C) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38 along the line X1-X1 in Figure 232(A), Figure 232(D) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38 along the line X2-X2 in Figure 232(A), and Figure 233(A) shows the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric prize winning device 38 open, with the special electric V prize opening 3 Figure 233(B) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Figure 232(C) when a game ball can be entered into 83. Figure 233(B) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Figure 232(C) when the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large prize device 38 is open and a game ball cannot be entered into the special electric V prize opening 383. Figure 233(C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Figure 232(D) when the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large prize device 38 is open and a game ball cannot be entered into the special electric V prize opening 383.

As shown in Figures 232(A) and 232(B), the special electric large prize winning device 38 comprises a special electric large prize winning opening 381, a special electric opening/closing door 382, a special electric V prize winning opening 383 which is a specific ball entry area, a special electric normal prize winning opening 384, and a V prize winning opening opening/closing door 385 which is an opening/closing means.

The special electric prize slot 381 is open on the front side of the game board 31. The special electric opening/closing door 382 switches between a closed state, where game balls cannot enter the special electric prize slot 381 (as shown in Figures 232(C) and 232(D)), and an open state, where game balls can enter the special electric prize slot 381 (as shown in Figures 232(A) and 232(C)).

As shown in Figure 232(A), the special electric V-prize slot 383 allows game balls entered from the special electric large prize slot 381 to enter when the special electric V-prize slot 383 is open by the V-prize slot opening/closing door 385, which is the opening/closing mechanism. Furthermore, the special electric V-prize slot 383 is equipped with a ball entry sensor 383a (see Figure 294) that detects when a game ball has entered the special electric V-prize slot 383.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 232(B), when the special electric V-prize slot 383 is closed by the V-prize slot opening/closing door 385, game balls entered from the special electric large prize slot 381 cannot enter the special electric V-prize slot 383. However, as shown in Figure 232(C), game balls entered from the special electric large prize slot 381 can enter the special electric normal prize slot 384. Additionally, the special electric normal prize slot 384 is equipped with a ball entry sensor 384a (see Figure 294) that detects when a game ball enters the special electric V-prize slot 383.

The special electric prize winning device 38 is activated to execute the special electric start game, which is a small-profit game, based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37, which is the first ball entry means. In this special electric start game, the special electric prize winning opening 381 is switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, allowing game balls to enter the special electric prize winning opening 381.

Furthermore, the special electric prize winning device 38 is activated in the special electric start game to execute the V-prize winning game, which is a small-profit game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the special electric V-prize winning opening 383 of the special electric prize winning device 38. In this V-prize winning game, the special electric prize winning opening 381 is switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, making it possible for a game ball to enter the special electric prize winning opening 381.

Here, multiple nails are driven above the special electric start opening 37, creating a channel through which game balls can enter the special electric start opening 37 and a channel through which game balls cannot enter the special electric start opening 37. Therefore, some of the game balls launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 and flowing down the second channel 392 enter the special electric start opening 37. As mentioned above, the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the special electric start opening 37 is one (see Figure 294(B)). Therefore, when launching game balls towards the special electric start opening 37 to generate a special electric start game, the number of game balls the player can win is less than the number of game balls required to generate a special electric start game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a game ball entered through the special electric large prize slot 381 enters the special electric V prize slot 383, the number of prize balls awarded is 1. Similarly, when a game ball entered through the special electric large prize slot 381 enters the special electric normal prize slot 384, the number of prize balls awarded is 1 (see Figure 294(B)). Therefore, in special electric start games and V prize jackpot games, an increase in the number of game balls won by the player cannot be expected.

Thus, when game balls are launched toward the special electric start port 37 in order to generate a special electric start game, the number of profitable game balls that the player can acquire is less than the number of game balls required to generate a special electric start game (specific number of balls), and therefore, in special electric start games and V-winning jackpot games, an increase in the number of game balls the player can acquire cannot be expected. For this reason, in this embodiment, in both the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, b-time reduction game state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), when a game is performed as the first game in which game balls are launched into the right-hand region of the game board 31 and the game balls flow down in a specific path, the second flow path 392, is configured such that when a specific number of game balls flow down in the second flow path 392 by continuously launching game balls, the number of profitable game balls that the player can acquire is less than the specified number of balls. This prevents the number of game balls from increasing by directing them down the second channel 392 in high-frequency support modes (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, b-time reduction game state) and low-frequency support modes (normal game state). In other words, since the area where the game balls flow can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotational operation on the launch handle 22 by the player, the player can freely launch the game balls so that they flow down a specific path, the second channel 392, at any time. However, because the system is configured so that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase even when the game balls flow down the second channel 392, this method of launching game balls down the second channel 392 is prevented from becoming a winning strategy.

As shown in Figure 1, the variable prize entry point 316, which serves as a specific ball entry area, is located below the first and second ball entry means, which are provided in the two game areas in the right-hand region of the game board 31. The variable prize entry point 316 is also provided with an opening/closing door 319, which is an opening/closing means. As mentioned above, this opening/closing door 319 repeatedly switches between the closed and open states of the variable prize entry point 316 during the special jackpot game. In other words, the variable prize entry point 316 and the opening/closing door are a third ball entry means, distinct from the first and second ball entry means. Game balls can be entered into this variable prize entry point 316 by performing a right-hand shooting game, which is a second game, in which game balls are shot into the right-hand region of the game board 31. Specifically, game balls can be entered into the variable prize entry point 316 regardless of whether the game ball is shot into the game area to the right of the separation section 393 or the game area to the left of the separation section 393 in the right-hand region of the game board 31.

Thus, because the third ball entry means, which includes a variable prize entry opening 316 and an opening/closing door, is different from the first and second ball entry means, it becomes possible to offer the special prize jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, as a different game benefit to the player from the regular prize jackpot game and the V-prize jackpot game, which are low-profit games. Furthermore, because the third ball entry means is different from the first and second ball entry means, it is possible to execute the special prize jackpot game, the V-prize jackpot game, and the regular prize jackpot game independently. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the special prize jackpot game, the V-prize jackpot game, and the regular prize jackpot game simultaneously, or conversely, to realize a gameplay where two or more of the special prize jackpot game, the V-prize jackpot game, and the regular prize jackpot game are not executed simultaneously. For example, it is conceivable to prevent small-profit games from being played while large-profit games are being played, to enable large-profit games to be played while small-profit games are being played, to prevent other small-profit games from being played while small-profit games are being played, and to enable other small-profit games to be played while small-profit games are being played. Specifically, by preventing the special electric opening/closing door 382, which serves as an opening/closing means, from being activated while a special-symbol jackpot game is being played, it is possible to prevent a small-profit V-winning jackpot game from being started while a large-profit special-symbol jackpot game is being played, and by preventing the electric mechanism 315b, which serves as an opening/closing means, from being activated while a special-symbol jackpot game is being played, it is possible to prevent a small-profit regular-symbol jackpot game from being started while a large-profit special-symbol jackpot game is being played, and to prevent the special electric opening/closing door 382, which serves as an opening/closing means, from being activated while a small-profit special-symbol game is being played. Therefore, it is also possible to prevent the V-winning jackpot game from being executed, and to enable the special electric opening/closing door 382, which serves as an opening/closing means, to be activated during the execution of the special symbol game, which is a low-profit game, thereby starting the V-winning jackpot game. Furthermore, by preventing the electric mechanism 315b, which serves as an opening/closing means, from being activated during the execution of the special symbol game, which is a low-profit game, the regular symbol win game, which is a low-profit game, is prevented from being executed. Finally, by enabling the electric mechanism 315b, which serves as an opening/closing means, to be activated during the execution of the special symbol game, which is a low-profit game, the regular symbol win game, which is a low-profit game, can also be started.

In this way, by preventing small-profit games from being played while large-profit games are being played, and allowing large-profit games to be played while small-profit games are being played, a gameplay feature can be achieved that guarantees the profit from large-profit games as the game's profit. Furthermore, by preventing other small-profit games from being played while small-profit games are being played, a gameplay feature can be achieved that guarantees the profit from one type of small-profit game as the game's profit. Also, by allowing other small-profit games to be played while small-profit games are being played, a gameplay feature can be achieved that guarantees the profit from multiple small-profit games as the game's profit.

[Game System]
First, the gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 294(A) and 294(C). Here, Figure 294(A) is a block diagram showing an example of a part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 291, and Figure 294(C) is a diagram showing the types of signals output to the outside of the gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 294(A), the gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102, and a data display 103.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with an external output terminal board 101, which serves as a signal output means for outputting game information of the gaming machine 10 to an external device such as a hall computer 102. This external output terminal board 101 has, for example, a plurality of output terminal sections (not shown), and each output terminal section (not shown) is connected by wiring (not shown) to an input/output I/F 42 that communicates data with the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, enabling data communication (reception). As a result, game information of the gaming machine 10 is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 as various signals via the corresponding output terminal section (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101. Furthermore, each output terminal section (not shown) can output one predetermined type of signal to the outside. That is, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of output terminal section (not shown) and the type of signal that can be output to the outside. For example, as shown in Figure 294(C), among the multiple output terminals (not shown), terminal 1 can output a jackpot signal 1 as a special signal, terminal 2 can output a jackpot signal 2, terminal 3 can output a V-winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal, and terminal 4 can output a special symbol change stop signal as an identification signal.

As shown in Figure 295(A), the jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output during the execution of a special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game. This jackpot signal 1 allows for the identification of the current state of the special jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 295(B), the jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output during the execution of a special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, and during the execution of the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state) that is transitioned to after the jackpot game ends. This jackpot signal 2 allows identification of whether a special jackpot game is in progress or whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode that is transitioning to after the special jackpot game ends. Furthermore, by comparing jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2, for example, if both jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output, it can be identified that a special jackpot game is in progress. If jackpot signal 1 is not output but jackpot signal 2 is output, it can be identified that the game is in the high-frequency support mode that is transitioned to after the special jackpot game ends.

As shown in Figure 296(A), the V-winning jackpot game signal is a signal that is continuously output during the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, which is a low-profit game. This V-winning jackpot game signal allows identification of the V-winning jackpot game being in progress. The V-winning jackpot game signal may also be a pulse signal output only at the start of the V-winning jackpot game; in this case, the V-winning jackpot game signal indicates that the V-winning jackpot game has started. Furthermore, the V-winning jackpot game signal may also be a pulse signal output only at the end of the V-winning jackpot game; in this case, the V-winning jackpot game signal indicates that the V-winning jackpot game has ended.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game includes a special symbol jackpot game, which is a high-profit game executed when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a V-entry jackpot game, which is a low-profit game executed when a game ball enters the special electric start-up game, which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start-up opening 37, and the game ball enters the special electric V-entry opening 383. In this embodiment, when the special symbol jackpot game is executed, jackpot signals 1 and 2 are output, and no V-entry jackpot game signal different from jackpot signals 1 and 2 is output. Conversely, when the V-entry jackpot game is executed, jackpot signals 1 and 2 are not output, and a V-entry jackpot game signal is output.

In this way, when a V-winning jackpot game is executed, jackpot signals 1 and 2 are not output. This prevents the arcade's hall computer 102 from recognizing the V-winning jackpot game, which can be freely generated by the player, as a special-symbol jackpot game. As a result, the arcade can accurately manage the number of special-symbol jackpot games executed in the hall computer 102 and accurately display the number of special-symbol jackpot games executed on the data display 103.

Furthermore, when a V-winning jackpot game is executed, a V-winning jackpot game signal different from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 is output. This allows the arcade's hall computer 102 to understand that a V-winning jackpot game has been executed, i.e., that the number of special symbol game executions required to trigger the b-time-saving game state has been reset. This allows the arcade's hall computer 102 to understand the remaining number of special symbol game executions required from the end of the previous normal jackpot game until the b-time-saving game state is triggered, even when a V-winning jackpot game has been executed. Therefore, the arcade can use the remaining number of special symbol game executions required to trigger the b-time-saving game state, as determined by the hall computer 102, as a reference for deciding whether or not to reset the number of special symbol game executions required to trigger the b-time-saving game state to its maximum value by clearing the RAM before the arcade opens for business.

As shown in Figure 296(B), the special symbol variation stop signal is a pulse signal output when the special symbol is displayed as stopped. This special symbol variation stop signal allows identification of the end of the special symbol game. Therefore, the number of times the special symbol game has been played can be identified based on the special symbol variation stop signal. Alternatively, instead of the special symbol variation stop signal, a pulse signal may be output as a special symbol variation start signal when the special symbol variation display begins. This special symbol variation start signal allows identification of the start of the special symbol game, and therefore, the number of times the special symbol game has been played can be identified based on the special symbol variation start signal. Furthermore, instead of the special symbol variation stop signal, a special symbol variation signal may be continuously output while the special symbol variation display is active. This special symbol variation signal allows identification of the ongoing special symbol game, and therefore, the number of times the special symbol game has been played can be identified based on the special symbol variation signal.

As shown in Figure 294(A), multiple output terminals (not shown) are connected to the hall computer 102 on the gaming hall side via wiring or other means, enabling data communication (transmission). This allows the hall computer 102 to obtain game information corresponding to the game status and gameplay of the gaming machine 10 based on various signals output from each output terminal (not shown) of the gaming machine 10. As a result, the gaming hall can understand the game status and gameplay of each gaming machine 10 based on the various signals received by the hall computer 102. Furthermore, the gaming hall can select the necessary output terminals (not shown) from the multiple output terminals (not shown) and connect them to the hall computer 102 via wiring or other means. This allows the gaming hall to selectively obtain game information managed by the gaming hall by selecting the output terminals (not shown) to connect to the hall computer 102, enabling efficient management of necessary game information and display of necessary game information on the data display 103.

Here, examples of game information that is output as a signal from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 include: that the game is in progress, that a jackpot game has started (that a jackpot game is in progress), that the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), that the game is in low-frequency support mode (normal game state), that a special symbol game has started (that a special symbol game is in progress), the number of game balls launched (number of balls out), the number of balls dispensed, and the difference in the number of balls. Therefore, the amusement hall can manage, based on the game information signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable games for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games between jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games from the last jackpot to the current variable game, and the payout and net payout for the current day and the past few days. Furthermore, the hall can manage the game status and state of each gaming machine 10, such as whether it is currently playing, in the middle of a jackpot, in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state), or in low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

The data display unit 103 displays, for example, the game status and gameplay of the gaming machine 10, and is installed in the island equipment of a gaming hall, for example, above each gaming machine 10. This data display unit 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 by wiring or the like to enable data communication (reception), and by receiving game information managed by the hall computer 102, it can directly or indirectly display the game status and gameplay based on this game information. Specifically, the data display unit 103 can directly or indirectly display information such as the number of jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable games for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games played between jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of special symbol games played from the last jackpot to the current variable game, the number of balls and tokens dispensed and the net number of balls for the current day and the past few days, whether the game is currently in progress, whether a jackpot is currently in progress, whether the game is in high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time-saving game state), and whether the game is in low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
Next, the processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described with reference to Figures 297 to 321.

[Main timer interrupt handling]
In this embodiment, the main timer interrupt processing differs from that of the first embodiment described above in some steps of the through-gate processing because the through-gate 317 in this embodiment is provided only in the right-side area of the game board 31.

[Through-gate processing]
Here, Figure 297 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the through-gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. In the through-gate processing, when a game ball passes through the through-gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular ball hold storage area 412c (see Figure 11) of the RAM 412. The through-gate processing will be explained below with reference to Figure 297.

<Step S1301>
As shown in Figure 297, in the through-gate processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the through-gate 317, which is the first ball entry means (step S1301). Whether or not a game ball has passed through the through-gate 317 is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection processing of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. If the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has passed through the through-gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), it proceeds to step S1302, and if it determines that a game ball has not passed through the through-gate 317L (step S1301: No), it terminates the through-gate processing.

<Step S1302>
If the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), it determines whether the number of variable normal balls X stored in the variable normal ball number storage area SNA set in the normal ball number storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment) (step S1302). If the number of variable normal balls X is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1302: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing, and if the number of variable normal balls X is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1302: No), it proceeds to step S1303.

<Steps S1303 and S1304>
If the number of reserved normal figure variations X is not the maximum number of reserved numbers (step S1302: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved normal figure variations X (step S1303), obtains the counter values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 300 described later, stores the counter values in the first empty reserved area among the normal figure first reserved area SE1 to normal figure fourth reserved area SE4 of the normal figure reserved storage area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1304), and terminates the through gate processing.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
Next, with reference to Figure 300, the main processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. The main processing of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it performs the special symbol game count management processing (step S1406-1), the special electric start game control processing (step S1407-2), the V-winning jackpot game control processing (step S1407-3), and the signal output processing (step S1408-1). These processing will be described below, and processing necessary for understanding this embodiment will also be explained as appropriate.

Before explaining the main processing of the main control device 4, the transition of game states in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 298. Figure 298 shows an example of a transition of game states.

As shown in Figure 298(A), in this embodiment, the basic game states include a normal game state, a probability variation game state, a time-saving game state (a), a time-saving game state (b), and a special jackpot game state. The game state transitions when predetermined conditions are met.

The normal game state is a low-probability mode in which the special feature jackpot lottery is executed based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) where the probability of winning a jackpot as a result of the special feature jackpot lottery is low, and it is a mode in which it is difficult to transition to the special feature jackpot game state. In addition, the normal game state is a low-frequency support mode in which the operation frequency of the electric mechanism 315b is low and it is difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. For this reason, in the normal game state, left-handed play as the first game is encouraged, in which game balls are shot in the left area of the game board 31, which is the first direction, in order to enter the first prize slot 314 and execute the first special feature game. This normal game state is entered when a specified number of special feature games have been executed in the a-time-saving game state or b-time-saving game state without transitioning to the special feature jackpot game state. Specifically, the normal game state is reached either by executing, for example, 100 special symbol games without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (a), or by executing, for example, 1000 special symbol games without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (b). The normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state (a) is a second auxiliary state control that allows transitioning to the time-saving game state (b) after the end of a normal jackpot game by executing a predetermined number of special symbol games (for example, 1000 times) without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state. On the other hand, the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state (b) is a first auxiliary state control that does not transition to the time-saving game state (b) even if a predetermined number of special symbol games (for example, 1000 times) are executed after transitioning to the normal game state without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state.

The probability variation game state is a high-probability mode in which the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed based on a high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) which has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot, and it is a mode in which the transition to the special symbol jackpot game state is easy. Furthermore, the probability variation game state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric mechanism 315b operates frequently and game balls are more likely to enter the second prize slot 315. Therefore, in the probability variation game state, the strong right-hand shot game, a second game in which game balls are launched to the right of the separation section 393 in the right-hand region of the game board 31 (the second direction) in order to enter the second prize slot 315 and execute the second special symbol game, is encouraged. This probability variation game state is entered from the probability variation jackpot game state after the completion of the high-profit probability variation jackpot game.

The a-time-saving game state is a low-probability mode in which the special feature jackpot lottery is executed based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) where the probability of winning a jackpot as a result of the special feature jackpot lottery is low. It is a mode in which transition to the special feature jackpot game state is difficult. Furthermore, the a-time-saving game state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric mechanism 315b operates frequently, making it easier for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. Therefore, in the a-time-saving game state, strong rightward shooting of game balls is encouraged in the game area where the through gate 317 and the second prize slot 315 are located, i.e., the game area to the right of the separation section 393 in the right-hand area of the game board 31, in order to enter the second prize slot 315 and execute the second special feature game. This a-time-saving game state is entered from the normal jackpot game state after the completion of the normal jackpot game, which is a highly profitable game.

b. Shortened play state is a low-probability mode in which the special feature jackpot lottery is executed based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) in which the probability of winning a jackpot as a result of the special feature jackpot lottery is low, and it is a mode in which it is difficult to transition to the special feature jackpot play state. Also, b. Shortened play state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric mechanism 315b operates frequently and it is easy for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315. Therefore, in b. Shortened play state, in order to enter the game balls into the second prize slot 315 and execute the second special feature game, it is recommended to play by strongly shooting the game balls to the right of the separation section 393 in the game area where the through gate 317 and the second prize slot 315 are provided, that is, in the game area to the right of the separation section 393 in the right-hand area of the game board 31. This shortened play state (b) is entered after a regular jackpot game (which offers high profits) has ended, by executing a predetermined number of special symbol games (for example, 1000 times) without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state.

The special jackpot game state is a game state in which a special jackpot game is executed, which is a highly profitable game in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times in which the variable prize entry opening 316, which is the third ball entry means, is open until a predetermined time has elapsed or until a maximum number (for example, 9 balls) or more of game balls have entered. The special jackpot game state includes the 5R normal jackpot game state, the 5R probability variation jackpot game state, and the 16R probability variation jackpot game state. The 5R normal jackpot game state is a game state in which a 5R normal jackpot game is performed in which a round game is performed in which a round game is performed in which a round game is performed in which a round game is performed in which a round game is performed in which a round variation jackpot The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state in which a 16R probability variation jackpot game is played, and after the completion of this 16R probability variation jackpot game, the game transitions to a probability variation game state.

As shown in Figure 298(B), this embodiment further includes a V-winning jackpot game state as a game state. This V-winning jackpot game state is a game state in which a V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, is executed. The V-winning jackpot game is executed in the normal game state, probability variation game state, a-time-saving game state, and b-time-saving game state, in the special electric start game which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37, which is the first ball entry means, when a game ball enters the special electric V-winning opening 383, which is a specific ball entry area provided by the second ball entry means, which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is an opening/closing means provided by the second ball entry means. In other words, if a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 during the execution of a special symbol game (while the special symbol is changing), the special electric start game is executed. The operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 allows a game ball to enter the special electric V-prize port 383, making a V-prize jackpot game possible. Therefore, during the execution of a special symbol game (while the special symbol is changing), a V-prize jackpot game can be executed simultaneously with the special symbol game. As a result, the V-prize jackpot game state occurs independently of the normal game state, probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, and b-time reduction game state.

In this embodiment, the game state remains the same before and after the start and end of a V-winning jackpot game. Specifically, if a V-winning jackpot game occurs in the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained from before the start to after the end of the V-winning jackpot game. If a V-winning jackpot game occurs in the probability variation game state, the probability variation game state is maintained from before the start to after the end of the V-winning jackpot game. If a V-winning jackpot game occurs in the a-time reduction game state, the a-time reduction game state is maintained from before the start to after the end of the V-winning jackpot game. If a V-winning jackpot game occurs in the b-time reduction game state, the b-time reduction game state is maintained from before the start to after the end of the V-winning jackpot game. In other words, the game state does not change before and after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, which is a low-profit game, and therefore the player's game profit does not change.

In this way, by ensuring that the game state does not change before and after the execution of a V-winning jackpot game, it is prevented that the player will suffer any disadvantage as a result of the V-winning jackpot game, and the player's vested interests before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game are protected even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game. Specifically, if the game state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game is a probability variation game state, the high probability mode with a high probability of winning a special symbol jackpot in the special symbol jackpot lottery and the high frequency support mode with a high probability of winning a regular symbol in the regular symbol jackpot lottery are maintained even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game. Furthermore, if the game state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game is a time-saving game state or b time-saving game state, the high frequency support mode with a high probability of winning a regular symbol in the regular symbol jackpot lottery is maintained even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, and it does not affect the remaining number of time-saving game rounds. Therefore, this prevents players from suffering disadvantages if they intentionally trigger a V-winning jackpot, thus protecting their vested interests.

In this embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, or b-time reduction game state), it is possible to execute the second special feature game by causing the game balls to flow down the first channel 391, thereby entering the through gate 317 and the second prize entry opening 315. For this reason, in the high-frequency support mode, a strong right-shot game, in which the game balls are launched to the right of the separation section 393 in the right-side region of the game board 31, is encouraged. However, even if the player intends to execute a strong right-shot game and launches the game balls, it is conceivable that the game balls may flow down the second channel 392 against the player's will due to launch failures or mutual interference of the game balls. In this case, it is assumed that the game balls flowing down the second channel 392 will enter the special electric start port 37 against the player's will, thereby executing a special electric start game in which the game balls can enter the special electric V-entry port 383, and further, when the game balls enter the special electric V-entry port 383 during the special electric start game, a V-entry jackpot game will be executed. If the number of executions of the special symbol game until the b-time-saving game state is generated is reset when the special electric V-entry port 383 is activated based on the game balls flowing down the second channel 392 against the player's will, then if the game state is changed before and after the execution of the V-entry jackpot game, it will cause a great disadvantage to the player. For example, if a V-entry jackpot is executed during a highly advantageous probability-increasing game state, causing the game to transition to another game state—one less advantageous to the player than the probability-increasing game state (a low-probability mode for special symbol jackpot draws)—the player would lose the benefit of being in a high-probability mode for special symbol jackpot draws, resulting in a significant disadvantage for the player. In contrast, this embodiment prevents the game state from changing before and after the execution of a V-entry jackpot, thereby maintaining the player's benefits of being in a high-frequency support mode or high-probability mode even after the V-entry jackpot is executed, preventing significant disadvantage to the player.

In this embodiment, the V-winning jackpot game state occurs separately from (simultaneously with) the normal game state, probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, and b-time reduction game state. However, the V-winning jackpot game state may be configured so that it does not occur simultaneously with the normal game state, probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, or b-time reduction game state, and the game state may not change even when a V-winning jackpot game is executed. Even in this case, the player's game profit does not change before or after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, which is a low-profit game; the game profit before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game is maintained even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game.

Furthermore, if the game state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game (a low-profit game) is the normal game state, the normal game state will be maintained even after the V-winning jackpot game is executed. However, after the V-winning jackpot game is executed, the maximum number of special symbol game executions required to generate the b-time-saving game state (a first-profit game state control) is set.

Furthermore, if the game state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game is the normal game state of the first auxiliary state control transitioned from the b-time-saving game state, that is, the normal game state of the second profit game state control in which the b-time-saving game state cannot occur, the maximum value is set as the number of special symbol game executions required to generate the b-time-saving game state, thereby changing to the second auxiliary state control in which the b-time-saving game state can occur. In other words, in this embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state transitioned from the b-time-saving game state cannot occur, the V-winning jackpot game is executed, and after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, the game state is changed to the normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state can occur. In addition, the V-winning jackpot game is executed by inserting game balls into the special electric start port 37, which is the first ball entry means, and then inserting game balls into the special electric V-winning port 383, which is the specific ball entry area of the special electric jackpot device 38, which is the second ball entry means. Furthermore, the special electric start port 37 and the special electric big prize device 38 are located in the second area, which is a game area set to the left of the separation section 393 in the right-hand region of the game board 31. Therefore, by launching game balls towards the second area and using a weak right-hand shot to cause the game balls to flow down the second channel 392, the player can intentionally execute a V-prize jackpot game. This allows the player to change to a normal game state where the b-time-saving game state cannot occur by launching game balls towards the second area in a normal game state where the b-time-saving game state cannot occur. As a result, since the b-time-saving game state ends without the special prize jackpot game being executed, it is possible to provide the player with an incentive to start playing in a game machine where the b-time-saving game state cannot occur, thereby improving the utilization rate of the game machine.

On the other hand, if the game state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game is the normal game state of the second auxiliary state control transitioned from the a-time-saving game state, that is, the normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state can occur, then after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, the second auxiliary state control is maintained in the normal game state. However, similar to the normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state cannot occur, after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, the maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games required to generate the b-time-saving game state. Therefore, if a player ends the game in a state in which the b-time-saving game state can be generated, the player can execute the V-winning jackpot game by shooting the game ball towards the second area and causing the game ball to flow down the second channel 392 with a weak right-hand shot, thereby clearing the number of special symbol games executed by the player in a state in which the b-time-saving game state can be generated. This prevents the disadvantages incurred by the player due to playing the game while the b-time-saving game state is possible from becoming an advantage for others. In other words, the player invests time, money, and effort for each special feature game played while the b-time-saving game state is possible. This investment can be prevented, by the player's intention, from becoming an advantage for others who play the game later on the same machine—that is, from becoming the target of so-called "hyena" behavior—by launching the game balls towards the second area and causing them to flow down the second channel 392 through a weak right-hand shot.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 while a special jackpot game (a high-profit game) is in progress, the special electric start game will not be executed, and the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric big prize device 38 will not be activated. In this way, since no game ball enters the special electric V prize port 383 while a special jackpot game is in progress, a V prize jackpot game does not occur, and the game does not transition from the special jackpot state to the V prize jackpot state. Thus, by preventing a V prize jackpot game from occurring while a special jackpot game is in progress, the potential profits that the player could gain from the high-profit special jackpot game are prevented from being lost due to the small-profit V prize jackpot game.

Furthermore, while a V-winning jackpot game is in progress, the special symbol jackpot game can also be played. This means that the special symbol jackpot game can be played while a V-winning jackpot game is in progress, preventing the loss of profit from the high-profit special symbol jackpot game due to the low-profit V-winning jackpot game being played. This ensures that the profit from the special symbol jackpot game can be obtained appropriately.

Here, Figure 299 shows an example of a table used in the main control device 4. Specifically, Figure 299(A) shows an example of a special electric start success/failure table, Figure 299(B) shows an example of a low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, Figure 299(C) shows an example of a high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, and Figure 299(D) shows an example of a V-prize jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 299(A), the special electric start success/failure table is a table referenced by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 to determine whether or not to execute a special electric start game in which the special electric big prize device 38, the second ball entry means, is activated based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37, the first ball entry means. This table is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. This special electric start success/failure table has 16 special electric start random number counters set from 0 to 15, and all of the values of the special electric start random number counters are considered "winners." That is, if a success/failure determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37, a special electric start game, a small-profit game in which the special electric big prize device 38 is activated, is executed.

However, if a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 while a special jackpot game (a high-profit game) is being played, the win/loss determination is not performed. Therefore, the special electric start game is not played while a special jackpot game is being played, and consequently, the V-winning jackpot game is also not played while a special jackpot game is being played. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the result of the win/loss determination regarding whether or not to play the special electric start game based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 is a 1/1 win. However, it is conceivable to set it so that it can be a win at a predetermined probability other than 1/1, and it is also conceivable to set the probability of the win/loss determination being a win to differ depending on the game state, etc.

In this special electric start game, the special electric large prize opening 381 of the special electric large prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is the opening/closing means, allowing game balls to enter the special electric large prize opening 381. Furthermore, when the special electric large prize opening 381 is opened during the special electric start game, game balls can be entered into the special electric V prize opening 383, which is a specific ball entry area. Therefore, when the special electric start game is executed, a V prize jackpot game based on the entry of game balls into the special electric V prize opening 383 can be executed as a specific period game. In this embodiment, two types of special electric start games are set, each with a different maximum opening time for the special electric large prize opening 381 and the special electric V prize opening 383 (see Figures 299(B) and 299(C)). Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric start game includes a short-opening special electric start game in which the maximum opening time of the special electric large prize opening 381 and the special electric V prize opening 383 is 0.1 seconds, making it difficult for game balls to enter the special electric large prize opening 381 and the special electric V prize opening 383, and a long-opening special electric start game in which the maximum opening time of the special electric large prize opening 381 and the special electric V prize opening 383 is 1.2 seconds, making it easy for game balls to enter the special electric large prize opening 381 and the special electric V prize opening 383. In the short-opening special electric start game, it is difficult for game balls to enter the special electric V prize opening 383, so it is unlikely that a V prize jackpot game will occur as a result of executing the short-opening special electric start game. On the other hand, in the long-open special electric start game, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special electric V-entry slot 383, making it more likely for a V-entry jackpot to occur as a result of executing this long-open special electric start game.

The low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table shown in Figure 299(B) and the high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table shown in Figure 299(C) are tables referenced by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 to distribute the type of special electric start game when the result of the win/loss determination based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 is a win. These tables are stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4.

The low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table is used to distribute the type of special electric start game when the result of the win/loss judgment based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, is a win. In this low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, all values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are long-open special electric start games. In other words, special electric start games based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 in the normal game state make it easy for a game ball to enter the special electric V-prize port 383, and are likely to generate a V-prize jackpot game. Therefore, in the normal game state, where left-handed play (the first game) is encouraged, where the game ball is launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 (the first direction), it becomes possible to easily generate a V-winning jackpot and change the number of special symbol game executions required to generate the b-time-saving game state to its maximum value by switching from left-handed play to weak right-handed play (the second direction), where the game ball is launched to the left of the separation section 393 in the right-hand area of the game board 31.

On the other hand, the high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table is used to distribute the type of special electric start game when the result of the win/loss judgment based on the entry of game balls into the special electric start port 37 in the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, or b-time reduction game state) is a win. In this high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, all values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are short-open special electric start games. That is, special electric start games based on the entry of game balls into the special electric start port 37 in the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, or b-time reduction game state) make it difficult for game balls to enter the special electric V-entry port 383, and thus difficult to generate a V-entry jackpot game.

Incidentally, in the high-frequency support modes, namely the probability variation game state, the a-time reduction game state, or the b-time reduction game state, strong right-handed shooting, where the game ball is launched to the right of the separation section 393 in the right-hand area of the game board 31 (the second direction), is encouraged. On the other hand, a V-entry jackpot game can be generated by weak right-handed shooting, where the game ball is launched to the left of the separation section 393 in the right-hand area of the game board 31 (the second direction). However, even when attempting to perform the strong right-handed shooting game, which is encouraged in the high-frequency support modes, namely the probability variation game state, the a-time reduction game state, or the b-time reduction game state, it is quite possible that stray balls may flow down to the left of the separation section 393. In this case, a special electric start game may be executed when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37, and in this special electric start game, a V-entry jackpot game may be executed against the player's will when a game ball enters the special electric V-entry port 383. Therefore, by making it difficult to trigger a V-winning jackpot in the high-frequency support modes—the probability variation game state, the a-time reduction game state, or the b-time reduction game state—it is prevented from unintentionally changing the number of special symbol games required to trigger the b-time reduction game state to its maximum value.

In this embodiment, two different special electric start type distribution tables are set according to the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, that is, according to whether the recommended game ball launch is left-handed or right-handed. However, the same table may be used for both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, i.e., whether the recommended game ball launch is left-handed or right-handed. Furthermore, three or more tables may be set according to the game state.

As shown in Figure 299(D), the V-entry jackpot type distribution table is a table referenced by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 to distribute the type of V-entry jackpot game to be executed based on the entry of game balls into the special electric V-entry slot 383 during a special electric start game, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. In this V-entry jackpot type distribution table, all values of the jackpot type random number counter from 0 to 19 are set to jackpots, and no misses are set. Therefore, when game balls are entered into the V-entry jackpot game of the special electric jackpot device 38 during a special electric start game, the V-entry jackpot game is executed with 100% probability. In this V-prize winning game, the special electric large prize opening 381 of the special electric large prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is the opening/closing means. While this allows game balls to enter the special electric large prize opening 381, the special electric V-prize opening 383, which is a specific ball entry area of the special electric large prize device 38, remains closed. Therefore, in a V-prize winning game, game balls cannot enter the special electric V-prize opening 383, thus limiting the occurrence of new V-prize winning games based on game balls entering the special electric V-prize opening 383. Of course, it is also possible to allow game balls to enter the special electric V-prize opening 383 in a V-prize winning game; in that case, the system is configured so that new V-prize winning games are not generated even by game balls entering the special electric V-prize opening 383.

By the way, the special electric big prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means, awards one ball when a game ball enters the special electric V prize port 383 or the special electric normal prize port 384. Therefore, the maximum recovery rate of game balls in a V prize jackpot game is 100% (a difference of 0 balls) when all the shot game balls enter the special electric V prize port 383 or the special electric normal prize port 384, so no increase in game balls can be expected in a V prize jackpot game. Also, the award for a game ball entering the special electric start port 37, which is the second ball entry means, is also one ball. Furthermore, when a weak right-handed shot game is performed as a second game, which shoots game balls into the game area to the left of the separation section 393 in the right-hand region of the game board 31, some of the game balls flowing down the second channel 392 enter the special electric start port 37. As a result, when the player uses a weak right-handed shooting technique to direct the game balls down the second channel 392, an increase in the player's game ball count cannot be expected, and the player's remaining balls will decrease. Therefore, directing the game balls down the second channel 392 is prevented from becoming a winning strategy.

In this embodiment, the V-prize jackpot type distribution table was set to 100%, but even though the jackpot distribution is set to 100%, the jackpot distribution may be other than 100%.

[General Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 301 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular symbol game control process executed in step S1404 of the main process in Figure 300. The regular symbol game control process is a process related to the regular symbol game, which is a small-profit game. In this regular symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the display of the changing and stopping of the regular symbols on the regular symbol display unit 361, which is the display means of the main display unit 36. The regular symbol game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 301.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Figure 301, in the regular symbol game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the regular symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the regular symbols are currently being displayed (execution of a regular symbol game as a profit game), is on (step S1501). The regular symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the display of the regular symbols variation (regular symbol game) starts in the regular symbol variation start process shown in Figure 303, described later, and is set to off in step S1510 of the regular symbol game control process when the regular symbols stop (regular symbol game ends).

If the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal symbol game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal symbol game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the "Normal Figure Fluctuation Display" flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if a normal figure game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which indicates that the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means for the second ball entry means, is open (a normal figure winning game as a profit game is being played), is on (step S1502). The "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in the normal figure winning game control process shown in Figure 304, described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric mechanism 315b is closed.

If the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is ON (Step S1502: Yes), that is, if the MPU 41 is currently executing a regular winning game, which is awarded as a game benefit based on the result of the regular winning lottery being a regular winning game, then the regular winning game control process ends. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is OFF (Step S1502: No), that is, if the regular winning game is not currently being executed, then the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
If the "Electric mechanism open" flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, if a regular jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Special jackpot game in progress" flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game (a high-profit game) is in progress, is on (step S1503). In the special jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310 below, the "Special jackpot game in progress" flag is set to on in step S3406 when a special jackpot game is started, and to off in step S3452 when a special jackpot game is finished.

The MPU 41 terminates the regular game control process when the special jackpot game flag is on (step S1503: Yes), i.e., when the special jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the regular game, as a profit-generating game, is not started while the special jackpot game is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, the regular jackpot game, as a profit-generating game, is not started while the special jackpot game is in progress. Consequently, even when a game ball enters the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means, the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening/closing means in the second ball entry means, is not switched from the closed state to the open state while the special jackpot game is in progress, and the closed state of the second prize entry opening 315 in the second ball entry means is maintained.

Of course, it is also possible to start a regular game, which is a small-profit game, and a regular winning game, which is also a small-profit game. In this case, in the regular game, a win/fail judgment for the regular winning lottery is performed based on the win/fail information (values of the regular winning random number counter C4, the regular winning type random number counter C5, and the regular winning variation type counter CS2) that has been moved from the regular first reserve area SE1 of the regular reserve storage area 412c to the regular execution area SAE, according to the support mode type (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) before the start of the special winning game, which is a large-profit game, that is, according to the game state before transitioning to the special winning game state. In other words, if the game state before the special feature jackpot game is executed is a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state (a. time-saving game state, b. time-saving game state) which is a high-frequency support mode that is the first auxiliary state control, then the normal feature jackpot draw (normal feature win or loss), the normal feature jackpot type (long-open normal feature jackpot or short-open normal feature jackpot), and the normal feature variation display time are set based on the normal feature jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 12(B)), the normal feature jackpot type table (see Figure 12(D)), and the normal feature variation table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before the special jackpot game is executed is the normal game state, which is the second auxiliary state control, the normal jackpot draw (normal jackpot or miss), the normal jackpot type (long-open normal jackpot or short-open normal jackpot), and the normal jackpot variation display time are set based on the normal jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 12(A)), the normal jackpot type table (see Figure 12(C)), and the normal jackpot variation table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating a special jackpot game is off (step S1503: No), that is, if the special jackpot game, which is a highly profitable game, is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the special jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if the special jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of normal symbol variation reserves X stored in the normal symbol variation reserves storage area SNA set in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the number of normal symbol variation reserves X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol game control process, and if the number of normal symbol variation reserves X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process moves to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved regular diagrams X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 performs regular diagram data setting processing for the regular diagram success/failure information stored in the regular diagram reservation storage area 412c (step S1505), and proceeds to step S1506. Details of the regular diagram data setting processing will be described later with reference to Figure 302.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a regular symbol variation start process to cause the regular symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the variation of the regular symbols based on the information stored in the regular symbol hold storage area 412c, and then terminates the regular symbol game control process. Details of the regular symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 302.

<Step S1507>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if a normal symbol game, which is a small-profit game, is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Special Symbol Jackpot Game" flag, which indicates that a special symbol jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, is on (step S1507). In the special symbol jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310 below, the special symbol jackpot game flag is set to on in step S3406 when the special symbol jackpot game starts, and to off in step S3452 when the special symbol jackpot game ends.

If the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is ON (Step S1507: Yes), i.e., if the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is ON, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is OFF (Step S1507: No), i.e., if the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is OFF, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the special jackpot game flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, if the special jackpot game, which is a highly profitable game, is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variation display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol that is being displayed in the normal symbol display unit 361, which is the display means of the main display unit 36 (end of normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), that is, if it is not time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol game control process.

<Steps S1509-S1511>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is on (Step S1501: Yes) and the "Special Symbol Jackpot Game" flag is on (Step S1507: Yes), that is, if a special symbol jackpot game is started while a normal symbol game is being played, or if the normal symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbols has elapsed (Step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the display of the fluctuating normal symbols (end of the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the display of the normal symbols on the symbols corresponding to the result of the normal symbol jackpot lottery for the normal symbol game (Step S1509), and sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols are fluctuating (the normal symbol game is being played), to off (Step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols have stopped displaying, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, to on (Step S1511), and ends the normal symbol game control process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal diagram winning game control process shown in Figure 304 (described later) to determine whether or not it is time to start the normal diagram winning game as a profit game (to open the electric mechanism 315b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the changing normal symbols stops (ends the normal symbol game) not only when the normal symbol display time has elapsed, but also when a special symbol jackpot game is started during the execution of a normal symbol game. In other words, the normal symbol game, as a form of gameplay, is forcibly terminated before the normal symbol display time elapses when a special symbol jackpot game is started. Of course, the normal symbol game may also be configured to continue until the normal symbol display time elapses even when a special symbol jackpot game is started.

[General drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 302 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general data setting process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of Figure 301. In the general data setting process, the contents of the general data hold storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 in Figure 11 are updated. The general data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 302.

<Steps S1601-S1603>
As shown in Figure 302, in the general diagram data setting process, first the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved general diagrams X stored in the general diagram variation reserve number storage area SNA (step S1601), and moves the general diagram success/failure information from the first general diagram reserve area SE1 to the general diagram execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general diagram success/failure information stored in the second general diagram reserve area SE2 to the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the general diagram success/failure information from the second general diagram reserve area SE2 is moved to the first general diagram reserve area SE1, the general diagram success/failure information from the third general diagram reserve area SE3 is moved to the second general diagram reserve area SE2, and the general diagram success/failure information from the fourth general diagram reserve area SE4 is moved to the third general diagram reserve area SE3.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
Here, Figure 303 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Figure 301. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result in the normal symbol win lottery. The normal symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 303.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Figure 303, in the normal variation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state) as the first benefit game state control, which is the first auxiliary state control (step S1701). Whether or not it is high-frequency support is determined by whether or not any of the probability variation game state flag, a time-saving game state flag, or b time-saving game state flag is set to ON.

The probability variation game state flag is set to "on" when transitioning from another game state to the probability variation game state in the game state transition process described later with reference to Figures 316 to 320, and set to "off" when transitioning from the probability variation game state to another game state. Furthermore, the "a" time-saving game state is set to "on" when transitioning from another game state to the "a" time-saving game state in the game state transition process described later with reference to Figures 316 to 320, and set to "off" when transitioning from the "a" time-saving game state to another game state. Similarly, the "b" time-saving game state flag is set to "on" when transitioning from another game state to the "b" time-saving game state in the game state transition process described later with reference to Figures 316 to 320, and set to "off" when transitioning from the "b" time-saving game state to another game state.

If the MPU 41 is in high-frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), i.e., in a probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, or b-time reduction game state, the process proceeds to step S1702. If it is not in high-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), i.e., if the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode as the second benefit game state control, which is the second auxiliary state control, the process proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
If the game is in a high-frequency support mode, either a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 12(B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 12(D)) to determine whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to the values of a normal win.

On the other hand, if the game is in a normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), a normal win/loss determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table (see Figure 12(C)).

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
If the MPU 41 has determined whether a regular ball hit is correct (step S1702 or S1703), it determines whether the result of the correctness determination is a long-open regular ball hit, in which the second prize-winning opening 315, which is a specific ball-entry area in the second ball-entry means, is opened for a long time (step S1704). If the result of the correctness determination is a long-open regular ball hit (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open regular ball hit flag to ON, indicating that the result of the correctness determination is a long-open regular ball hit (step S1705), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the correctness determination is not a long-open regular ball hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the hit/fail determination is not a long-opening general-purpose hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the hit/fail determination is a short-opening general-purpose hit in which the second prize-winning opening 315, which is a specific ball-entry area in the second ball-entry means, is briefly opened (step S1706). If the result of the hit/fail determination is a short-opening general-purpose hit (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening general-purpose hit flag to ON to indicate that the result of the hit/fail determination is a short-opening general-purpose hit (step S1707), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/fail determination is not a short-opening general-purpose hit (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the hit/fail determination is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1705), if the short-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1707), or if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation pattern setting process to set the normal symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361, which is the display means of the main display unit 36, by referring to the normal symbol variation display table (not shown). As mentioned above, the normal symbol variation display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal symbol variation table that is referenced when the high-frequency support mode is active, and a low-frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table that is referenced when the low-frequency support mode is active. Therefore, in this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the normal symbol variation pattern is set based on the normal symbol variation display table corresponding to the support mode type. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table is set to have a shorter average display time for regular symbol variations than the low-frequency support mode's regular symbol variation display table. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode, the time during which regular symbol games are executed based on the entry of game balls into the through gate 317 is shorter compared to low-frequency support mode.

Then, in addition to the regular diagram variation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 sets a regular diagram variation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/fail judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the regular diagram winning lottery) and the type of support mode (whether it is a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode) (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The regular symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the regular symbol variation pattern command, causes the symbol display unit 341 and other components to execute effects corresponding to the regular symbol game, such as effects indicating that the regular symbol game is being played or effects indicating the result of the regular symbol winning lottery.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Variation Pattern Command" only needs to be a command that notifies the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 of the normal diagram variation pattern; the result of the normal diagram winning lottery and the type of support mode do not necessarily need to be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 as a normal diagram variation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal diagram winning lottery can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Normal Diagram Winning Lottery Result Command" when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode can be notified to the Audible Lamp Control Device 5 by setting a "Support Mode Type Command" that can identify the type of support mode after transitioning to high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts a regular symbol game, which is a small-profit game, by starting to display the regular symbols in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). The MPU 41 then sets the regular symbol variation display flag to ON, which indicates that the regular symbol game, which has been granted as a game profit based on the entry of game balls into the through gate 317, is being executed (step S1711), and ends the regular symbol variation start process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 300 to determine whether the normal symbol game is currently running (normal symbol fluctuation display is active).

[General game control processing for winning a prize]
Here, Figure 304 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 of the main process in Figure 300. The normal winning game control process is a process related to the normal winning game, which is a profit game. In this normal winning game control process, if the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, the process is executed to switch between a closed state, which restricts the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315, which is a specific entry area of the second entry means, and an open state, which allows game balls to enter the second prize opening 315, by controlling the opening and closing of the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means. The normal winning game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 304.

<Step S1801>
As shown in Figure 304, in the normal symbol win game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, which is a small-profit game. The normal symbol change stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol stops being displayed in the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 304.

If the normal symbol variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, which is awarded as a game benefit based on the result of the normal symbol win lottery being a normal symbol win, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
If the regular symbol variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when a regular symbol win game can be started, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a special symbol jackpot game, a high-profit game, is in progress, is on (step S1802). In the special symbol jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310 below, the special symbol jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3406 when the special symbol jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S3452 when the special symbol jackpot game is finished.

The MPU 41 terminates the normal win game control process if the special jackpot game flag is on (step S1802: Yes), that is, if the special jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, if the special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, is in progress, even if the result of the normal win lottery based on the game ball entering the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means, is a normal win, the normal win game, which is a low-profit game, is not started. In other words, in this embodiment, the normal win game is not started while the special jackpot game is in progress, and the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, does not switch the second prize opening 315, which is the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means, between a closed state and an open state. Of course, a new normal game or a normal win game may be started while the jackpot game is in progress. In contrast, while a special symbol game is in progress, a regular symbol win game may be initiated, and game balls can be entered into the second prize slot 315. This allows the right to execute the second special symbol game to be reserved by entering the second prize slot 315 while a special symbol game is in progress. Therefore, in high-frequency support modes (probability variation game state, a) time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state), it becomes possible to repeatedly execute the second special symbol game without causing excessive stress to the player.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating that a special jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1802: No), that is, if a special jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, if the Special Feature Jackpot Game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Long Open Normal Feature Hit flag is set to ON (step S1803). The Long Open Normal Feature Hit flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the Normal Feature Hit lottery is a Long Open Normal Feature Hit, and is set to ON in step S1705 of the Normal Feature Fluctuation Start Processing in Figure 304 when the result of the Normal Feature Hit lottery is a Long Open Normal Feature Hit. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the Normal Feature Hit lottery for the Normal Feature Game, which is a completed small-profit game, is a Long Open Normal Feature Hit. If the Long Open Normal Feature Hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1804, and if the Long Open Normal Feature Hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long-opening regular ball win flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular ball win lottery for the completed regular ball game is a long-opening regular ball win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing mechanism of the second ball entry means in the long-opening regular ball win game that is awarded as a game benefit (the time during which game balls can be entered into the second prize opening 315, which is the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means), as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referenced in step S1815 of the regular ball win game control process to determine the return timing of the electric mechanism 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular ball win flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is not a long-opening regular symbol win, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the short-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S1806). The short-opening regular symbol win flag is a flag that indicates the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win, and is set to on in step S1707 of the regular symbol variation start process in Figure 304 when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed small-profit regular symbol game is a short-opening regular symbol win. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1807. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short-opening regular-ball win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-ball win lottery for the completed regular-ball game is a short-opening regular-ball win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b that is the opening and closing mechanism of the second ball entry means in a short-opening regular-ball win game (the time during which game balls can be entered into the second prize opening 315, which is a specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means), as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-ball win flag to OFF (step S1808) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809-S1811>
If the result of the regular prize draw is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long open regular prize flag or short open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric mechanism 315b, which is an opening and closing means (step S1809). As a result, the second prize entry area 315, which is a specific ball entry area, is switched from a closed state to an open state, and game balls are allowed to enter the second prize entry area 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism open command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1810), sets an electric mechanism open flag to ON to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric mechanism release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the audio lamp control device 5 can initiate a display, for example, to indicate to the symbol display unit 341 (which serves as a display means) that the electric mechanism 315b is open.

<Step S1812>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a win, the process of opening the electric mechanism 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or if both the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are set to off (the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss) (steps S1803 and S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped displaying (that the regular symbol game, which is awarded as a game benefit based on the entry of game balls into the through gate 317, has ended), to off (step S1812), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S1813>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop" display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Device Open" flag, which is set to turn on when the electric device 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal symbol winning game, which is a small-profit game, is currently being played. If the "Electric Device Open" flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the "Electric Device Open" flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the flag indicating that the electric mechanism is open is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the regular winning game control process (step S1814), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, to switch the second prize entry opening 315, which is the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means, from the open state to the closed state. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S1816-S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric mechanism 315b (step S1816). This switches the second prize slot 315, which is a specific ball entry area, from the open state to the closed state, and restricts the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism close command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric mechanism open flag, which indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is open, to off (step S1818), and terminates the normal winning game control process.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to terminate the animation indicating that the electric mechanism is open, for example, in the symbol display unit 341, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

[Special Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 305 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main process in Figure 300. The special symbol game control process is a process related to the special symbol game, which is a small-profit game. In this special symbol game control process, the contents of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is controlled, for example, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362, which is a display means, or the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363, which is a display means, is controlled. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to Figure 305.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Figure 305, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the Special Jackpot Game in Progress flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game, a high-profit game, is in progress, is turned on. In the special jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310, described later, the Special Jackpot Game in Progress flag is set to on in step S3406 when the special jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S3452 when the special jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the special feature game control process if the special feature jackpot game flag is on (step S1901: Yes), i.e., if the special feature jackpot game is currently in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, if the special feature jackpot game (a high-profit game) is in progress, the special feature game (a low-profit game) will not be started. Of course, the special feature game may be started while the special feature jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating that a special jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1901: No), that is, if a special jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the Special Symbol Jackpot Game in Progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, if the Special Symbol Jackpot Game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Special Symbol Variation Display in Progress flag, which indicates that the first or second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (the first or second special symbol game is in progress), is on (step S1902). The Special Symbol Variation Display in Progress flag is set to on in step S2107 when the variation display of the first or second special symbol starts in the Special Symbol Variation Start Process shown in Figure 307 described later, and is set to off in step S1910 when the first or second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the said Special Symbol Game Control Process.

If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S1902: Yes), meaning the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is off (step S1902: No), meaning the special symbol is not being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is not in progress) when a special symbol jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol is changing is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special symbol is not changing when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special symbol reserve count N stored in the first special symbol reserve count storage area NAA of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b and the second special symbol reserve count M stored in the second special symbol reserve count storage area NAB are 0 (step S1903).

The MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process if both the number of reserved special symbols N and the number of reserved special symbols M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), that is, if there is no reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game. On the other hand, if either the number of reserved special symbols N or the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, if there is a reservation of at least one of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, if there is a reserve for the right to execute the first special symbol game and a reserve for the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process related to the special symbol win/loss information data (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (step S1904), and proceeds to step S1905. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 306.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to begin the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 307.

<Step S1906>
If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the process of displaying a variation (special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in step S2104 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 307 described later, has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S1906). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the special symbol that is currently displaying a variation and end the special symbol game, which is a small-profit game.

If the special symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, if the variation display time has not elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: No), that is, if it is not time to stop the variation display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process.

<Steps S1907-S1910>
When the display time for the first or second special symbol has elapsed since the start of the display of the first or second special symbol's variation (step S1906: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop the special symbol display and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, which are the display means of the main display unit 36, in a manner corresponding to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1907). The MPU 41 then sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the first or second special symbol has stopped (step S1908), and sets the special symbol game count flag to ON (step S1909). This special symbol game count count flag is referenced in step S3301 of the special symbol game count management process shown in Figure 308, described later, to determine whether to subtract the remaining number of special symbol games in the a-time-saving game state or the b-time-saving game state, or the remaining number of special symbol games until the b-time-saving game state is generated. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation stop signal output flag to ON (step S1909). This special symbol variation stop signal output flag is referenced in step S3819 of the signal output process described later, to determine whether to output a special symbol variation stop signal as an identification signal to the outside of the game machine 10 via terminal 4 of the multiple output terminals (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 (see Figure 294(A)). Then, the special symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the process of variation display (special symbol game is being executed), is set to OFF (step S1910), and the special symbol game control process is terminated.

[Special drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 306 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special feature data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of the special feature game control process in Figure 305. In the special feature data setting process, the contents of the special feature hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. The special feature data setting process will be explained below with reference to Figure 306.

<Step S2001>
As shown in Figure 306, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game, which is a low-profit game, is 0. If the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, there are no reserved special symbols for the second special symbol game but there are reserved special symbols for the first special symbol game, which is a low-profit game (see step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in Figure 305), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, there are reserved special symbols for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2005. In other words, by determining whether the number of reserved special symbols M for the second special symbol game is 0, the MPU 41 prioritizes starting the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game. However, the first special symbol game may be started with priority over the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order (retention order) of the game balls entering the first or second prize slot 314 or 315, so that either the first or second special symbol game is executed. Furthermore, without assigning a priority to the start of the first and second special symbol games, they may be executed independently of each other, or they may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol variation).

<Step S2002-S2004>
If the second special symbol hold number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol hold number N stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NAA of the first special symbol hold storage area REA (step S2002), and moves the special symbol success/failure information from the first hold area REA1 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol success/failure information from the second hold area REA2 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol win/loss information from the second holding area REA2 of the first special symbol holding storage area REA is moved to the first holding area REA1, the special symbol win/loss information from the third holding area REA3 is moved to the second holding area REA2, and the special symbol win/loss information from the fourth holding area REA4 is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Step S2005-S2007>
If the number of reserved special symbols M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved special symbols M stored in the number of reserved special symbols memory area NAB of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB (step S2005), and moves the special symbol success/failure information from the first reserve area REB1 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol success/failure information from the second reserve area REB2 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the number of reserved special symbols storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special symbol win/loss information from the second reserve area REB2 is moved to the first reserve area REB1, the special symbol win/loss information from the third reserve area REB3 is moved to the second reserve area REB2, and the special symbol win/loss information from the fourth reserve area REB4 is moved to the third reserve area REB3. When the processing in step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special symbol win/loss information for the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 to the fourth special symbol hold storage area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA, or the first special symbol hold storage area REB1 to the fourth special symbol hold storage area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB, has shifted, and terminates the special symbol data setting process. This special symbol shift command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol shift command.

[Special Feature Fluctuation Start Processing]
Here, Figure 307 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 305. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game), which is a small-profit game, is started when the first special symbol display unit 362, which is a display means, or the second special symbol display unit 363, starts to change, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 307.

<Step S2101>
As shown in Figure 307, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is in high probability mode. High probability mode is a probability variation game state in which the control state of the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in high-frequency support mode of the first auxiliary state control. Whether or not the game state is in high probability mode is determined by whether or not the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game state is in high probability mode, is set to ON. The probability variation game state flag is set to ON in the game state transition process described later, in step S3722 in Figure 316 when the game state transitions from a probability variation jackpot game state to a probability variation game state, and is set to OFF in step S3713 in Figure 316 when the game state transitions from a probability variation game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state.

If the game state is a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2102. If the game state is not a high-probability mode (a probability variation game state) (step S2101: No), i.e., if the game state is a low-probability mode (a) time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state, or normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2103.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (a) and time-saving game state (b), the control state of the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing mechanism for the second ball entry means, is the high-frequency support mode of the first auxiliary state control. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the control state of the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing mechanism for the second ball entry means, is the low-frequency support mode of the second auxiliary state control.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the game state is a high-probability mode, which is a probability variation game state (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 9(B)) that is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35, and performs a win/fail judgment based on the high-probability mode win/fail table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the game state is not a high-probability mode (a) or a probability variation game state (step S2101: No), that is, if the game state is a low-probability mode (a) a time-saving game state, b) a time-saving game state, or a normal game state, the MPU 41 reads the low-probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 9(A)) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35, and performs a win/fail judgment based on that low-probability mode win/fail table (step S2103).

Thus, in this embodiment, the special symbol jackpot lottery (win/loss determination) is performed based on whether the mode for the special symbol jackpot lottery at the start of the special symbol game is a high-probability mode or a low-probability mode. In other words, in this embodiment, high and low probabilities are set for the probability of winning a jackpot as a result of the special symbol jackpot lottery (special symbol jackpot probability), but the special symbol jackpot probability is not affected by the execution of specific period games, such as special electric start games, V-entry jackpot games, or regular symbol jackpot games. Therefore, in this embodiment, the execution of specific period games prevents the player from suffering any disadvantage regarding the special symbol jackpot probability.

In steps S2102 and S2103, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table saved in step S2410 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35, according to the game setting value. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process shown in Figure 35 may be read, and the win/loss determination may be performed by selecting the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that game setting value one by one.

<Step S2104>
If a determination of success or failure is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 sets the display time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36 in the special symbol game as a special symbol variation pattern (step S2104).

Furthermore, the display time for the variation of the first or second special symbol (special symbol variation pattern), which is a small-profit game, is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(A)) if the result of the win/failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot; based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(B)) if the result of the win/failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability variation jackpot; and based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the loss variation table (see Figure 10(C)) if the result of the win/failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a loss.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is the result of the win/fail determination in step S2102 or S2103, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S2104, and then proceeds to step S2106. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance on the display means, such as the symbol display unit 341, based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special feature variation patterns "A01" to "A03", which are special feature variation patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" added to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot, as the special feature variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special feature variation patterns "B01" to "B03", which are special feature variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "B" added to indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot, as the special feature variation pattern command in the RAM 412. In addition, if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 sets one of the special feature variation patterns "C01" to "C03", which are special feature variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "C" added to indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, as the special feature variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special symbol variation patterns "D01" to "D08," which is a special symbol variation pattern with a "D" added to indicate that it is a miss, as the special symbol variation pattern command in RAM 412. Also, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (pre- and post-miss reach, reach other than pre- and post-miss, complete miss) in the special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game, which is a small-profit game, by starting the display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, which are display means in the main display unit 36, and then proceeds to step S2107.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag to ON, indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variation state (the special symbol game is in progress), and terminates the special symbol variation start process. The "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is referenced in step S1902 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 305 to determine whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variation state (the special symbol game is in progress) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

[Special Game Count Management Processing]
Here, Figure 308 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for managing the number of special symbol game plays performed in step S1406-1 of the main process in Figure 300. In the special symbol game play count management process, based on the execution of special symbol games, which are small-profit games, a process is executed to manage the remaining number of time-saving game plays in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state and b time-saving game state), and the remaining number of special symbol game plays, which is the second auxiliary state control until the first profitable game state control, b time-saving game state, is generated. The special symbol game play count management process will be explained below with reference to Figure 308.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
As shown in Figure 308, in the special symbol game count management process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation count flag is set to ON (step S3301). The special symbol variation count flag is set to ON in step S1909 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 305 when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 is displayed as stopped.

If the special symbol variation count flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation count flag to OFF (step S3302) and proceeds to step S3303. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation count flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game count management process.

<Step S3303>
In step S3303, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game whose variation has stopped is a regular jackpot. If the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol game whose variation has stopped is a regular jackpot (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3304. If the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol game whose variation has stopped is not a regular jackpot (step S3303: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3311.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
If the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for a special symbol game whose fluctuations have stopped is a normal jackpot (S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the remaining number of special symbol games to be played until the b time-saving game state is generated to the maximum value of 1000 (step S3304). In other words, in this embodiment, the second auxiliary state control is activated after the end of a normal jackpot game, and the b time-saving game state is generated when 1000 special symbol games are played as small-profit games without a special symbol jackpot game being played after the end of a normal jackpot game (without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state). The MPU 41 also sets the remaining number of ceiling games to ON flag, which indicates that the ceiling games are set (the second auxiliary state control is activated) (step S3305), and proceeds to step S3306.

<Steps S3306 and S3307>
In step S3306, the MPU 41 sets the value of the a-time-saving remaining count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the a-time-saving game state, which is the second profit game state control, to its maximum value of 100. That is, in this embodiment, after the end of a normal jackpot game, the player transitions to the a-time-saving game state, which is granted as a game profit, and when 100 special symbol games are played without the special symbol jackpot game, which is a high profit game, being played (without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state), the a-time-saving game state ends and the player transitions to the normal game state, which is the first profit game state control. The MPU 41 also sets the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag to ON, which indicates that the a-time-saving remaining count counter is set (step S3307), and proceeds to step S3308.

<Step S3308>
In step S3308, the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the b-time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to ON. If the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3309. If the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special game count management process.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the b-time reduction remaining count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the value of the remaining b-time reduction remaining count counter that can be executed in the b-time reduction game state as the first profit game state control (step S3309), sets the b-time reduction remaining count counter flag, which indicates that the b-time reduction remaining count counter is set, to OFF (step S3310), and terminates the special feature game count management process.

<Step S3311>
If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special jackpot game whose fluctuations have stopped is not a regular jackpot (S3303: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special jackpot game whose fluctuations have stopped is a probability variation jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot) (step S3311). If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special jackpot game whose fluctuations have stopped is a probability variation jackpot (S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3312, and if the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special jackpot game whose fluctuations have stopped is not a probability variation jackpot (S3311: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3318 in Figure 309.

<Step S3312>
If the result of the special feature jackpot lottery for a special feature game whose fluctuations have stopped is a probability variation jackpot (S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the second auxiliary state control is set with the ceiling activation remaining count counter set, is on (step S3312). This ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is set to on in step S3305 of the special feature game count management process if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery for a special feature game whose fluctuations have stopped is a normal jackpot (step S3303: Yes), and the second auxiliary state control is set with the ceiling activation remaining count counter set (step S3304).

If the remaining count counter set flag for ceiling activation is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3313. If the remaining count counter set flag for ceiling activation is off (step S3312: No), the process proceeds to step S3315.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter Set Flag is ON (Step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that must be played before the b-time-saving game state occurs (Step S3313), and sets the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter Set Flag, which indicates that the second auxiliary state control is set with the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter ON (Step S3314), and proceeds to step S3315.

<Step S3315>
If the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is set to off (step S3314), or if the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the a time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to on (step S3315: Yes).

If the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3316. On the other hand, if the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3315: No), the MPU 41 executes the processes described in steps S3308 to S3310. If the b-time-saving remaining count counter is set, the b-time-saving remaining count counter is cleared, the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to OFF, and the special feature variation count management process is terminated.

<Steps S3316 and S3317>
If the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the value of the remaining a-time-saving remaining count counter that can be executed in the a-time-saving game state (step S3316), sets the a-time-saving remaining count counter flag, which indicates that the a-time-saving remaining count counter is set, to OFF (step S3317), and executes the processes of steps S3308 to S3310 described above. If the b-time-saving remaining count counter is set, the MPU 41 clears the b-time-saving remaining count counter and sets the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag to OFF, and terminates the special game count management process.

<Step S3318>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game whose fluctuations have stopped is not a probability variation jackpot (step S3311: No), then, as shown in Figure 309, it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the ceiling activation remaining count counter is set, is set to ON (step S3318).

If the ceiling activation count remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3319. If the ceiling activation count remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3318: No), the process proceeds to step S3325.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
If the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter (step S3319) and determines whether the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3320). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to generate the first profitable game state control, which is the b time-saving game state.

If the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter after the deduction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), i.e., if the b-time-saving game state is to be generated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3321. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter after the deduction is not 0 (step S3320: No), i.e., if the b-time-saving game state is not to be generated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3325.

<Steps S3321-S3324>
If the value of the remaining number of times the ceiling is activated after the deduction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, if the b time-saving game state is generated, the MPU 41 sets the value of the b time-saving remaining number counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the b time-saving game state, to the maximum value of 1000 (step S3321). In other words, in this embodiment, 1000 times is set as the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in the b time-saving game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag to ON, which indicates that the b time-saving remaining number counter has been set (step S3322).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state transition flag to ON to transition the game state to the b-time-saving game state (step S3323). This b-time-saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S3726 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 317 (described later) to determine whether or not to transition to the b-time-saving game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag to OFF (step S3324), and terminates the special symbol game count management process.

<Step S3325>
If the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter Set Flag is off (step S3318: No), or if the value of the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3320: Yes), i.e., if the b time-saving game state is not generated, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the a time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to on (step S3325).

If the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3326. If the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the process proceeds to step S3330.

<Steps S3326 and S3327>
If the a-time reduction remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the a-time reduction remaining count counter (step S3326) and determines whether the value of the a-time reduction remaining count counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3327). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the a-time reduction game state and transition to the normal game state.

If the value of the remaining a-time-saving game counter after the deduction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the a-time-saving game state and transition to the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3328. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining a-time-saving game counter after the deduction is not 0 (step S3327: No), that is, if it is not time to end the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special game count management process.

<Steps S3328 and S3329>
If the value of the remaining a-time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the a-time reduction game state and transition to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON to transition the game state to the normal game state (step S3328). This normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3731 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 318 below to determine whether or not to transition to the normal game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the a-time reduction remaining counter set flag to OFF (step S3329), and terminates the special game count management process.

<Step S3330>
If the time-saving remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to on (step S3330).

If the b-time reduction remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3331. If the b-time reduction remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the special game count management process is terminated.

<Steps S3331 and S3332>
If the b-time reduction remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the b-time reduction remaining count counter (step S3331) and determines whether the value of the b-time reduction remaining count counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3332). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to terminate the b-time reduction game state and transition to the normal game state.

If the value of the remaining b-time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), i.e., if the b-time reduction game state is to be terminated and the game state to be returned to normal, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3333. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining b-time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3332: No), i.e., if the b-time reduction game state is not to be terminated, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game count management process.

<Steps S3333 and S3334>
If the value of the remaining b-time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), that is, if the b-time reduction game state is to be terminated and the game state is to be transitioned to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON (step S3333). This normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3731 of Figure 318 or step S3737 of Figure 319 of the game state transition process described later, in order to determine whether or not to transition to the normal game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time reduction remaining counter set flag to OFF (step S3334) and terminates the special game count management process.

In this embodiment, the remaining ceiling activation counter is set when a special symbol variation (special symbol game) where the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot ends. However, the remaining ceiling activation counter may also be set when a special symbol variation (special symbol game) where the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot ends. Furthermore, the remaining ceiling activation counter may be set not at the end of the special symbol variation (special symbol game), but at the end of a normal jackpot game (when transitioning from the jackpot game state to the a-time reduction game state).

[Special Feature Jackpot Game Control Processing]
Here, Figures 310 to 313 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the special jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-1 of the main process in Figure 300. In the special jackpot game control process, processes are executed to control the progress of the special jackpot game, such as controlling the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable prize entry opening 316. The special jackpot game control process will be explained below with reference to Figures 310 to 313.

<Step S3400>
As shown in Figure 310, in the special jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special jackpot game flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game as a high-profit game is in progress, is on (step S3400). The special jackpot game flag is set to on in step S3406 of the special jackpot game control process when a special jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S3452 of the special jackpot game control process when a special jackpot game is ended.

If the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is ON (Step S3400: Yes), i.e., if the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is ON, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3411. Conversely, if the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is OFF (Step S3400: No), i.e., if the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is OFF, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3401.

<Step S3401>
If the Special Symbol Jackpot Game in Progress flag is off (step S3400: No), that is, if the Special Symbol Jackpot Game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Special Symbol Variation Stop flag, which indicates that the Special Symbol has stopped displaying, is on (step S3401). The Special Symbol Variation Stop flag is set to on in step S1908 of the Special Symbol Game Control Processing in Figure 305 when the Special Symbol has stopped displaying, and is set to off in step S2108 of the Special Symbol Variation Start Processing in Figure 307 when the variation display of the Special Symbol begins. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start the Special Symbol Jackpot Game as a high-profit game by determining whether the Special Symbol Game as a low-profit game that was started when the Special Symbol Jackpot Game was not in progress has ended.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S3401: Yes), meaning the special symbol has stopped and the special symbol jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S3401: No), meaning the special symbol jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is still in a variation state, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the special symbol jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, is not started (executed) when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the special symbol game, which is a low-profit game, is being executed). However, it is possible to start (execute) the special symbol jackpot game while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (the special symbol game is being executed). For example, the special symbol jackpot game may be started (executed) while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable state, and conversely, the special symbol jackpot game may be started (executed) while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state. Specifically, as described above, by making it possible to change to simultaneous variation of the first and second special symbols, the second special symbol game may be executed while the special symbol jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed, and the first special symbol game may be executed while the special symbol jackpot game for the second special symbol game is being executed. Furthermore, the special jackpot game for the first special jackpot game and the special jackpot game for the second special jackpot game may be executed simultaneously. Alternatively, if the start conditions for the other special jackpot game are met while one of the special jackpot games is being executed, the other special jackpot game may be started after the first special jackpot game has finished.

<Step S3402>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is displayed as stopped, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation stop flag to off (step S3402) and proceeds to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for a special symbol game in which a special symbol has stopped and displayed is a special symbol jackpot. Whether the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for a special symbol game in which a special symbol has stopped and displayed is a special symbol jackpot is determined, for example, based on the special symbol win/fail information for the special symbol jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 41.

If the special symbol is displayed and the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a special symbol jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3404. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol is not a special symbol jackpot (step S3403: No), i.e., the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol jackpot game control process.

<Step S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special symbol jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a special symbol jackpot game start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the type of special symbol jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game or normal jackpot game) to start the special symbol jackpot game (step S3404), and proceeds to step S3405. The special symbol jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol jackpot game performance according to the type of special symbol jackpot game based on the special symbol jackpot game start command.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets the special jackpot game start flag to ON, indicating the start of a special jackpot game as a high-profit game, and proceeds to step S3406. The special jackpot game start flag is referenced in step S3701 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 316 below, when determining whether to transition the game state to a probability variation jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag to ON, indicating that a special feature jackpot game is in progress, and proceeds to step S3407. The "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag is referenced in step S3400 of the special feature jackpot game control process, as well as in steps S1503 and S1507 of the regular game control process in Figure 301, step S1802 of the regular jackpot game control process in Figure 304, and step S1901 of the special feature game control process in Figure 305, in order to determine whether or not a special feature jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 sets a round counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode, and proceeds to step S3408. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round counter to "5" if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round counter to "16" if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that it is starting the opening of the special jackpot game, and then proceeds to step S3409. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening performance of the special jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening start command.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time for the opening, and proceeds to step S3410. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3413 of Figure 311 of the special jackpot game control process to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening" flag to ON, indicating that the opening is in progress, and terminates the special jackpot game control process. The "Opening" flag is referenced in step S3411 of the special jackpot game control process to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S3411>
If the flag indicating that a special feature jackpot game is in progress is on (step S3400: Yes), that is, if a special feature jackpot game as a high-profit game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the flag indicating that the opening is in progress is on (step S3411).

If the opening flag is on (step S3411: Yes), i.e., opening is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3412 in Figure 312. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3411: No), i.e., opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S3422.

<Steps S3412 and S3413>
If the opening flag is on (step S3411: Yes), i.e., if the opening is in progress, as shown in Figure 312, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the opening (step S3412), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3413). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to finish the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3414. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3413: No), i.e., it is not time to end the opening, the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 sets an opening end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the special feature jackpot game is ending (step S3414). The opening end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the opening performance of the special feature jackpot game that is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening in Progress" flag, which indicates that the opening is in progress, to off (step S3415), and proceeds to step S3416.

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 41 sets an open/close execution mode start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that an open/close execution mode, which is a game benefit in which multiple rounds of gameplay (5 or 16 rounds) are to be started, and proceeds to step S3417. The open/close execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the open/close execution mode effect of the special jackpot game, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the open/close execution mode start command.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that a round game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S3418. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start round game effects corresponding to each round game of the special jackpot game, including displaying the number of rounds on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game start command.

In this embodiment, while each round game features are executed individually, the round game features may also consist of a single series of features executed in the open/close execution mode, displaying the number of rounds in each round game. In this case, an interval feature may not be performed between round games, or an interval feature displaying the number of rounds in the next round game may be performed.

<Steps S3418 and S3419>
In step S3418, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, it opens the variable prize slot 316 by operating the opening/closing door 319 (step S3419), and proceeds to step S3420.

<Steps S3420 and S3421>
In step S3420, the MPU 41 sets a round game flag to ON to indicate that a round game is in progress, and further sets a round game time counter to indicate the remaining time for the round game (step S3421), and terminates the special jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S3424 of Figure 312 of the special jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to terminate the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 to its original position and close the variable prize entry opening 316) due to the elapsed time.

<Step S3422>
Returning to Figure 310, if the Opening flag is off (step S3411: No), i.e., the opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Round Game flag, which indicates that a round game is in progress, is set to on (step S3422). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether a round game is in progress.

If the round game flag is ON (step S3422: Yes), i.e., if a round game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3423 in Figure 312. On the other hand, if the round game flag is OFF (step S3422: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3436.

<Steps S3423 and S3424>
If the Round Game in Progress flag is ON (Step S3422: Yes), that is, if a round game is in progress, as shown in Figure 312, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the round game time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the round game. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (Step S3424). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed time (by closing the variable prize slot by returning the opening/closing door 319 to its original position).

If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed prescribed time (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3428. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the elapsed prescribed time (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3425.

<Step S3425>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the round game due to the elapsed time (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize slot 316 (step S3425). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize slot 316 is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 when a game ball is detected entering the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17.

If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3426. If no game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3425: No), the special jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S3426 and S3427>
If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize slot 316 during that round of play (step S3426). The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the ball entry counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S3427), that is, whether it is time to end the round of play (close the variable prize slot by returning the opening/closing door 319) due to the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable prize slot 316.

If the value of the ball count counter after addition reaches 10 (step S3427: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable prize slot 316 (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3428. On the other hand, if the value of the ball count counter after addition does not reach 10 (step S3427: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable prize slot 316 (the variable prize slot is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Step S3428>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), or if the value of the ball entry counter reaches 10 (step S3427: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game, the MPU 41 closes the variable prize entry opening by returning the opening/closing door 319 to its original position (step S3428), and proceeds to step S3429. That is, if it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed of a specified time or due to the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable prize entry opening 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable prize entry opening 316 and ends the round game.

<Steps S3429-S3431>
In step S3429, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game has ended. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game performance of the special jackpot game, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize entry slot 316 during the round game (step S3430), sets the round game flag, which indicates that the round game is currently running, to off (step S3431), and proceeds to step S3432.

<Step S3432>
In step S3432, the MPU 41 determines whether the round counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode, is 0 (step S3432), that is, whether it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode (there are still rounds to be played).

If the round counter of the MPU 41 is 0 (step S3432: Yes), i.e., it is time to terminate the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3441. On the other hand, if the round counter of the MPU 41 is not 0 (step S3432: No), i.e., there are unexecuted rounds of gameplay, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3433.

<Step S3433>
If the round counter is not zero (step S3432: No), that is, if there are unexecuted rounds of gameplay, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 to start the interval between rounds of gameplay (step S3433), and proceeds to step S3434. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the interval effect for the special jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval start command.

In this embodiment, an interval animation is performed during the interval between rounds of gameplay. However, the interval animation may be omitted, and during the interval, the round game animation for the previously played round may be continued, or the round game animation for the next round may be performed.

<Steps S3434 and S3435>
In step S3434, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, indicating that an interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3435), and terminates the special jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referenced in step S3438 of Figure 313 in the special jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start a round game).

<Step S3436>
Returning to Figure 310, if the Round Game in Progress flag is off (step S3422: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Interval in Progress flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is in progress, is on (step S3436). The Interval in Progress flag is set to on in step S3434 of Figure 312 in the special jackpot game control process when an interval begins, and is set to off in step S3440 of Figure 313 in the special jackpot game control process when an interval ends.

If the interval flag is on (step S3436: Yes), i.e., the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3437 in Figure 313. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S3436: No), i.e., the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3445.

<Steps S3437 and S3438>
If the interval flag is on (step S3436: Yes), that is, if an interval between rounds is being performed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the interval, as shown in Figure 313 (step S3437). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3438), that is, whether it is time to end the interval (start round play).

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3439. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3438: No), i.e., it is not time to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3439 and S3440>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the interval has ended. The interval end command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 310) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the interval performance of the jackpot game executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is being executed, to off (step S3440), and proceeds to step S3417. By proceeding to step S3417 in Figure 311, the processes of steps S3417 to S3421 related to the start of a round game are executed, and the special jackpot game control process ends.

<Step S3441>
Returning to Figure 312, if the round counter is 0 (step S3432: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode of the special feature jackpot game is ending (step S3441), and proceeds to step S3442. The opening/closing execution mode termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) of the special feature jackpot game when executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening/closing execution mode termination command.

<Step S3442>
In step S3442, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the special jackpot game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S3443. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the ending sequence of the special jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3443 and S3444>
In step S3443, the MPU 41 sets an ending flag to ON, indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining time for the ending (step S3444), and terminates the special jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3447 of the special jackpot game control process in Figure 313 to determine whether it is time to end the ending (special jackpot game).

<Step S3445>
Returning to Figure 310, if the Interval flag is off (step S3436: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being performed, it is determined whether the Ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being performed, is on (step S3445).

If the ending flag is on (step S3445: Yes), i.e., the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3446 in Figure 313. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S3445: No), i.e., the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3450.

<Steps S3446 and S3447>
If the flag indicating that the ending is in progress is on (step S3445: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the ending, as shown in Figure 313 (step S3446). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3447). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending (special jackpot game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the ending (special jackpot game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3448. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3447: No), i.e., it is not time to end the ending (special jackpot game), the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3448 and S3449>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (special jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the special jackpot game is ending. The ending end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the ending performance of the special jackpot game that is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to off (step S3449), and terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Step S3450>
Returning to Figure 310, if the ending flag is off (step S3445: No), that is, if it is not during the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 sets a special jackpot game termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the special jackpot game has ended (step S3450), and proceeds to step S3451. The special jackpot game termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the special jackpot game effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special jackpot game termination command.

<Steps S3451 and S3452>
In step S3451, the special jackpot game termination flag is set to ON, indicating that the special jackpot game has ended. The special jackpot game termination flag is referenced in step S3717 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 316, described later, to determine whether or not to transition from the special jackpot game state to the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a special feature jackpot game is currently being played, to off (step S3452), and terminates the special feature jackpot game control process.

[Special Electric Start Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 314 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special electric start game control process executed in step S1407-2 of the main process in Figure 300. In the special electric start game control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the progress of the special electric start game, which is a small-profit game, in which the special electric big prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is activated based on the entry of game balls into the special electric start port 37, which is the first ball entry means. The special electric start game control process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 314.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 314, in the special electric start game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric start port 37 (step S3501). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric start port 37 is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 when the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 37a is detected in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process shown in Figure 17.

If a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502. If no game ball enters the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Step S3502>
If a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the special jackpot game flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game, is in progress, is set to ON (step S3502). In the special jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310, the special jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special jackpot game is started, and to OFF in step S3452 when the special jackpot game is finished.

The MPU 41 terminates the special electric start game when the special jackpot game flag is on (step S3502: Yes), i.e., when the special jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the special electric start game is not started while the special jackpot game is in progress. By preventing the special electric start game (a low-profit game) from starting while the special jackpot game (a high-profit game) is in progress, the V-winning jackpot game (a low-profit game) is prevented from starting, thus preventing the profits obtained from the high-profit game from being hindered by the execution of the low-profit game.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a regular jackpot, the remaining number of special symbol games required to trigger the b time-saving game state (the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter) is set to the maximum value of 1000, and the a time-saving game state is triggered after the regular jackpot game ends. That is, after the special symbol jackpot game ends, the a time-saving game state is triggered, with the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter set to the maximum value of 1000.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is set to its maximum value of 1000 not only during a normal jackpot, but also after the V-entry jackpot game, which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 and the entry of a game ball into the special electric V-entry port 383 during the special electric start game. In other words, the special electric start game and the V-entry jackpot game are executed in order to set the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter to its maximum value of 1000.

Therefore, in a situation where a time-saving game state (a) is expected to occur, where the remaining ceiling activation count counter is set to its maximum value of 1000—that is, during a special jackpot game—there is no point in performing a special electric start game or a V-entry jackpot game to set the remaining ceiling activation count counter to its maximum value of 1000. Moreover, starting a special electric start game or a special jackpot game while a special jackpot game is in progress has the disadvantage of unnecessarily complicating the game's progression because it requires the execution of the special electric start game, the V-entry jackpot game, and the process of setting the remaining ceiling activation count counter to its maximum value of 1000.

In contrast, in this embodiment, during the execution of a special jackpot game in which a time-saving game state (a) is expected to occur (where the remaining ceiling activation count counter is set to its maximum value of 1000), the special electric start game is not initiated. Therefore, the processes for executing the special electric start game, executing the V-winning jackpot game, and setting the remaining ceiling activation count counter to its maximum value of 1000 are prevented from being executed unnecessarily, thus preventing the processes necessary for game progression from becoming overly complex.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating that a special jackpot game is in progress is off (step S3502: No), that is, if a special jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the Special Feature Jackpot Game in Progress flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, if the Special Feature Jackpot Game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the V-Entry Jackpot Game in Progress flag, which indicates that the V-Entry Jackpot Game, a small-profit game, is in progress, is set to on (step S3503). In the V-Entry Jackpot Game control process shown in Figure 315 below, the V-Entry Jackpot Game in Progress flag is set to on in step S3606 when the V-Entry Jackpot Game is started, and to off in step S3620 when the V-Entry Jackpot Game is finished.

If the V-winning jackpot game flag is ON (step S3503: Yes), i.e., if the V-winning jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the special electric start game. In other words, in this embodiment, the special electric start game is not started while the V-winning jackpot game is in progress. On the other hand, if the V-winning jackpot game flag is OFF (step S3503: No), i.e., if the V-winning jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3504.

<Step S3504>
If the flag indicating that a V-winning jackpot game is in progress is off (step S3503: No), that is, if a V-winning jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that a special electric start game, which is a small-profit game, is in progress is set to on (step S3504). In the special electric start game control process described later, the flag indicating that a special electric start game is in progress is set to on in step S3507 when the special electric start game is started, and to off in step S3516 when the special electric start game is finished.

If the Special Electric Start Game flag is ON (Step S3504: Yes), i.e., if the Special Electric Start Game is currently running, the MPU 41 terminates the Special Electric Start Game. In other words, in this embodiment, the Special Electric Start Game is not started while the Special Electric Start Game is running. On the other hand, if the Special Electric Start Game flag is OFF (Step S3504: No), i.e., if the Special Electric Start Game is not currently running, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3505.

<Step S3505>
If the Special Electric Start Game flag is off (Step S3504: No), that is, if the Special Electric Start Game is not in progress, the MPU 41 activates the Special Electric Opening Door 382, which is the opening and closing mechanism for the Special Electric Big Prize Device 38, which is the second ball entry means, thereby switching the Special Electric Big Prize Opening 381 from a closed state to an open state (Step S3505). This makes the Special Electric Big Prize Opening 381 ready for game balls to enter. The MPU 41 also activates the V Prize Opening Door 385, which is the opening and closing mechanism for the Special Electric Big Prize Device 38, which is the second ball entry means, thereby switching the Special Electric V Prize Opening 383, which is a specific ball entry area, from a closed state to an open state (Step S3506). This makes the Special Electric V Prize Opening 383 ready for game balls to enter, making it possible to start the V Prize Big Win Game, which is a small-profit game.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the "Special Electric Start Game in Progress" flag to ON (step S3507), indicating that the Special Electric Start Game is currently being executed, and proceeds to step S3508. The "Special Electric Start Game in Progress" flag is referenced in steps S3504 or S3515 of the Special Electric Start Game control process, and in step S3802 of the V-winning jackpot game control process shown in Figure 315 (described later), to determine whether or not the Special Electric Start Game is currently being executed.

Thus, the Special Electric Start Game cannot be started while a Special Symbol Jackpot Game, a V-Entry Jackpot Game, or a Special Electric Start Game is in progress, and the V-Entry Jackpot Game also cannot be started while a Special Symbol Jackpot Game, a V-Entry Jackpot Game, or a Special Electric Start Game is in progress. On the other hand, the Special Electric Start Game and the V-Entry Jackpot Game can be started while a Special Symbol Game is in progress. This allows the Special Electric Start Game and the V-Entry Jackpot Game to be started without waiting for the Special Symbol Game to finish, so the number of Special Symbol Game executions until the b-Time-Saving Game state is triggered can be reset immediately if desired. For example, if there is a reservation of the right to execute a Special Symbol Game, or if a reach animation is executed, it may take a lot of time for all Special Symbol Games to finish, but even in such cases, the number of Special Symbol Game executions until the b-Time-Saving Game state is triggered can be reset immediately. Furthermore, because the number of special game plays performed before the b-time-saving game state is triggered can be immediately reset, if the reset occurs during a special game play, that special game play can also be counted as one of the special game plays performed after the reset. Moreover, if there is a reserved right to perform a special game play, the number of special game plays related to that reserved right, performed after the reset, can also be counted as one of the special game plays performed after the reset. Therefore, for example, if the b-time-saving game state is triggered, preventing the b-time-saving game state from occurring, and the player resets the number of special game plays performed before the b-time-saving game state is triggered, making the b-time-saving game state possible again, the player's right to perform the special game play can be efficiently and effectively counted as one of the special game plays necessary to trigger the b-time-saving game state.

<Step S3508>
In step S3508, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing mechanism for the second ball entry means, is in a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state) as the second benefit game state control, which is the first auxiliary state control (step S3508). Whether or not it is high-frequency support is determined by whether or not any of the probability variation game state flag, a time-saving game state flag, or b time-saving game state flag is set to ON.

If the MPU 41 is in high-frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), i.e., in a probability variation game state, a) time-saving game state, or b) time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3509. If it is not in high-frequency support mode (step S3508: No), the process proceeds to step S3509.

<Step S3509>
If the game is in high-frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), that is, in a probability variation game state, a time reduction game state, or b time reduction game state, the MPU 41 sets a special electric operation time counter that indicates the remaining time until the special electric opening/closing door 382 is returned to its original position and the special electric large prize pocket 381 is switched from the open state to the closed state (step S3509), and terminates the special electric start game control process. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the special electric operation time counter to a value corresponding to the time set based on the high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table (see Figure 299(C)), that is, a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds.

Furthermore, the special electric power operation time counter is referenced in step S3514 of the special electric power start game control process to determine whether or not it is time to close the special electric power large prize entry opening 381.

<Step S3510>
If it is not in high-frequency support mode (step S3508: No), the MPU 41 determines whether it is in low-frequency support mode (normal game state) (step S3510). That is, if the electric mechanism 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode as the first benefit game state control, which is the second auxiliary state control, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1703.

If the MPU 41 is in low-frequency support mode (step S3510: Yes), i.e., in a normal game state, it proceeds to step S3511. If it is not in low-frequency support mode (step S3510: No), it terminates the special electric start game control process.

<Step S3511>
If the low-frequency support mode is active (step S3510: Yes), that is, if the game is in a normal play state, the MPU 41 sets a special electric operation time counter that indicates the remaining time until the special electric opening/closing door 382 is returned to its original position and the special electric large prize pocket 381 is switched from the open state to the closed state (step S3511), and terminates the special electric start game control process. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the special electric operation time counter to a value corresponding to the time set based on the low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table (see Figure 299 (B)), that is, a value corresponding to 1.2 seconds.

Furthermore, the special electric power operation time counter is referenced in step S3514 of the special electric power start game control process to determine whether or not it is time to close the special electric power large prize entry opening 381.

<Step S3512>
If no game balls are entered into the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the special electric start game flag, which indicates that a special electric start game is in progress, is set to ON (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a special electric start game is in progress. The special electric start game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when a special electric start game is started in the special electric start game control process, and is set to OFF in step S3516 when a special electric start game is ended.

If the Special Electric Start Game flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), i.e., if the Special Electric Start Game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, if the Special Electric Start Game flag is set to OFF (step S3512: No), i.e., if the Special Electric Start Game is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the Special Electric Start Game control process.

<Steps S3513 and S3514>
If the special electric start game flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), that is, if the special electric start game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the special electric operation time counter, which indicates the remaining time until the special electric opening/closing door 382 is returned to its original position and the special electric large prize opening 381 is switched from the open position to the closed position (step S3513), and determines whether the value of the special electric operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3514). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 to its original position and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open position to the closed position.

If the value of the special electric operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 to its original position and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3519. On the other hand, if the value of the special electric operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not time to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 to its original position and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the process proceeds to step S3515.

<Step S3515>
If the value of the special electric operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 to its original position and switch the special electric large prize slot 381 from the open state to the closed state, it is determined whether or not the V prize slot flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the special electric V prize slot 383, is set to ON (step S3515). The V prize slot flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the special electric start game control process when a game ball enters the special electric V prize slot 383.

If the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the special electric V-entry slot 383, is set to ON (Step S3515: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the special electric start game control process. If the V-entry flag is set to OFF (Step S3515: No), the process proceeds to Step S3516.

<Step S3516>
If the V-winning flag is set to off (step S3515: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric V-winning slot 383 (step S3516). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric V-winning slot 383 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 when the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 383a (see Figure 294) is detected in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17.

If a game ball enters the special electric V-prize entry port 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3517. If no game ball enters the special electric V-prize entry port 383 (step S3516: No), the special electric start game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
If a game ball enters the special electric V-entry slot 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-entry flag to ON to indicate that a game ball has entered the special electric V-entry slot 383 (step S3517), sets a V-entry command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that a game ball has entered the special electric V-entry slot 383 (step S3518), and then terminates the special electric start game control process.

The V-winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the V-winning command, causes the symbol display unit 341, etc., to execute a display that clearly indicates to the player that a game ball has entered the special electric V-winning slot 383 during the special symbol-start game.

<Steps S3519-S3521>
If the value of the special electric operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 to its original position and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the MPU 41 returns the special electric opening/closing door 382 to its original position and switches the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state (step S3519), and also returns the V prize opening opening/closing door 385 to its original position and switches the V prize opening 383 from the open state to the closed state (step S3520). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special electric start game in progress flag to off (step S3521), indicating that the special electric start game is in progress, and terminates the special electric start game control process.

[V-winning jackpot game control processing]
Here, Figure 315 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the V-winning jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-3 of the main process in Figure 300. In the V-winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the progress of the V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game in which the special electric jackpot device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is activated. The V-winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 315.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 315, in the V-winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the V-winning jackpot game flag, which indicates that a V-winning jackpot game is being executed, is set to ON (step S3601). The V-winning jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3606 of the V-winning jackpot game control process when a V-winning jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3620 of the V-winning jackpot game control process when a V-winning jackpot game is finished.

If the V-winning jackpot game flag is set to ON (Step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3611. If the V-winning jackpot game flag is set to OFF (Step S3601: No), the process proceeds to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
If the flag indicating that a V-winning jackpot game is in progress is set to off (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that a special electric start game is being played as a small-profit game is set to on (step S3602). The flag indicating that a special electric start game is in progress is set to on in step S3507 of the special electric start game control process in Figure 314 when the special electric start game is started, and is set to off in step S3521 of the special electric start game control process in Figure 314 when the special electric start game is finished.

If the Special Electric Start Game flag is set to ON (Step S3602: Yes), i.e., if the Special Electric Start Game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the V-winning jackpot game control process without starting the V-winning jackpot game. On the other hand, if the Special Electric Start Game flag is set to OFF (Step S3602: No), i.e., if the Special Electric Start Game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the Special Electric Start Game flag is set to OFF (Step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the Special Electric V-entry opening 383 of the Special Electric Big Prize Device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is set to ON in the Special Electric Start Game as a small-profit game (Step S3603). The V-entry flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the Special Electric Start Game control process in Figure 314 when a game ball enters the Special Electric V-entry opening 383 in the Special Electric Start Game.

If the V-winning flag is set to ON (Step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3604. If the V-winning flag is set to OFF (Step S3603: No), the V-winning jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3604-S3607>
If the V-winning flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game start flag to ON, indicating that the V-winning jackpot game will begin (step S3604).

Furthermore, the V-winning jackpot game start flag is referenced in step S3741 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 320 to determine whether or not to generate the V-winning jackpot game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the value of the round counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in the V-winning jackpot game, to 2 (step S3605). That is, in the V-winning jackpot game of this embodiment, two rounds of gameplay are performed as described above (see Figure 299(D)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game flag to ON, indicating that a V-winning jackpot game is being played (step S3606), and sets the V-winning flag to OFF, indicating that a game ball has entered the special electric V-winning slot 383 during the special electric start game (step S3607), before proceeding to step S3608.

<Steps S3608-S3610>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 operates the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric big prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means, to switch the special electric big prize opening 381 from the closed state to the open state, thereby opening the special electric big prize opening 381 (step S3608). Furthermore, it subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds of play to be performed in the V-winning jackpot game (step S3609). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special electric big prize opening opening time counter, which indicates the remaining opening time of the special electric big prize opening 381 (step S3610), and terminates the V-winning jackpot game control process. In this embodiment, the value of the special electric big prize opening opening time counter is set to a value corresponding to 30 seconds (see Figure 299(D)).

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
If the flag indicating that a V-winning jackpot game is in progress is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, if a V-winning jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the special electric large prize slot opening time counter, which indicates the remaining opening time of the special electric large prize slot 381 (step S3611), and determines whether the value of the special electric large prize slot opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3612). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special electric large prize slot 381 has elapsed.

If the value of the special electric prize slot opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3612: Yes), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric prize slot 381 has elapsed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3618. On the other hand, if the value of the special electric prize slot opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric prize slot 381 has not elapsed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3613.

<Step S3613>
If the value of the special electric large prize opening opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric large prize opening 381 has not elapsed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric normal prize opening 384 of the special electric large prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means (step S3613). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric normal prize opening 384 is determined based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412 when the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 384a (see Figure 294(A)) provided in the special electric normal prize opening 384 is detected in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17.

In addition, unlike in special electric start games, the special electric V-entry slot 383 of the special electric big-entry device 38 is not opened, and no game balls are entered into the special electric V-entry slot 383. Therefore, in the control process for this V-entry jackpot game, no process is executed to confirm the entry of game balls into the special electric V-entry slot 383.

If a game ball enters the special electric normal prize entry slot 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3614. If no game ball enters the special electric normal prize entry slot 384 (step S3613: No), the V-entry jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3614 and S3615>
If a game ball enters the special electric normal prize entry opening 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the special electric normal prize entry opening 384 (step S3614). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ball entry counter after the addition is 10 or not (step S3615). In other words, it determines whether the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the special electric normal prize entry opening 384, which is set for the round game of a V-entry jackpot game, has entered the special electric normal prize entry opening 384.

If the value of the ball count counter after addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), and the maximum number of game balls allowed into the special electric normal prize slot 384 set for the round game of the V-winning jackpot game has entered the special electric normal prize slot 384, the process proceeds to step S3616. On the other hand, if the value of the ball count counter after addition is not 10 (step S3615: No), the V-winning jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S3616 and S3617>
If the value of the ball count counter after addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), and the maximum number of game balls allowed into the special electric normal prize slot 384 set for the round game of the V-winning jackpot game enters the special electric normal prize slot 384, the MPU 41 clears the value of the ball count counter (step S3616), clears the special electric large prize slot opening time counter which indicates the remaining opening time of the special electric large prize slot 381 (step S3617), and proceeds to step S3618.

<Step S3618>
In step S3618, the MPU 41 returns the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means, to the open state and close the special electric large prize opening 381 (step S3618), and proceeds to step S3619. In other words, the MPU 41 ends the round of the V-winning jackpot game by closing the special electric jackpot 381 if the value of the special electric jackpot opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (the maximum opening time of the special electric jackpot 381 has elapsed) (Step S3612: Yes), or if the value of the ball entry counter is 10 due to game balls entering the special electric normal jackpot 384 (the maximum number of game balls set for the round of the V-winning jackpot game to enter the special electric normal jackpot 384 has entered the special electric normal jackpot 384) (Step S3614: Yes).

<Step S3619>
In step S3619, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in the V-winning jackpot game, is 0, that is, whether it is time to end the V-winning jackpot game.

If the value of the round counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in a V-winning jackpot game, is 0 (step S3619: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the V-winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3620.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in the V-winning jackpot game, is not zero (step S3619: No), that is, if it is not time to end the V-winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3608 and executes the next round of game.

<Steps S3620 and S3621>
If the value of the round counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in a V-winning jackpot game, is 0 (step S3619: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the V-winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the V-winning jackpot game is being played, to off (step S3620), and sets the V-winning jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the V-winning jackpot game is ending, to on (step S3621), and ends the V-winning jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition process]
Here, Figures 316 to 320 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Figure 300. In the game state transition process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the transition between various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state, probability variation jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state). The game state transition process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 316 to 320.

<Step S3701>
As shown in Figure 316, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special jackpot game start flag, which indicates the start of a special jackpot game, is on (step S3701). In the special jackpot game control process of Figure 310, the special jackpot game start flag is set to on in step S3405 when a special jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S3451 when a special jackpot game is ended.

If the special jackpot game start flag is ON (step S3701: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3702. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game start flag is OFF (step S3701: No), i.e., it is not time to start the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3716.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
If the special jackpot game start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), that is, if the special jackpot game is to start, the MPU 41 sets the special jackpot game state flag to on (step S3702) to indicate that the game is in a special jackpot state. The special jackpot game state flag is referenced in step S3716 of Figure 316 of the game state transition process to determine whether or not the game is in a special jackpot state.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to ON (step S3703), which initiates the output of the jackpot signal 1 (see Figure 295(A)) as a special signal from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101. The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is referenced in step S3801 of the signal output processing shown in Figure 321 to determine whether or not to initiate the output of the jackpot signal 1.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special jackpot game start flag to off (step S3704), and proceeds to step S3705.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 determines whether the special feature jackpot game to be started is a probability variation jackpot game. Whether the special feature jackpot game to be started is a probability variation jackpot game is determined based on the special feature win/loss information stored in the special feature execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special feature reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412.

If the MPU 41 decides to start a bonus round (Step S3705: Yes), it proceeds to step S3706. Conversely, if it decides not to start a bonus round (Step S3705: No), i.e., if it decides to start a regular bonus round, it proceeds to step S3707.

<Step S3706>
When a probability variation jackpot game is to be started (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state transition flag to ON (step S3706), which will transition to the probability variation jackpot game state after the end of the probability variation jackpot game, and proceeds to step S3707. The probability variation game state transition flag is referenced in step S3721 of Figure 316 of the game state transition process to determine whether to transition to the probability variation game state or the normal game state when the special feature jackpot game ends.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is on. The normal game state flag is set to on when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state (step S3732 in Figure 318 or step S3738 in Figure 319 of the game state transition process), and is set to off when transitioning from the normal game state to another game state (step S3708 in Figure 316 or step S3728 in Figure 317 of the game state transition process).

If the normal game state flag is on (step S3707: Yes), i.e., the system is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S3708) and proceeds to step S3711. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S3707: No), i.e., the system is in a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, a) time-saving game state, or b) time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3709.

<Steps S3709 and S3710>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S3707: No), that is, if it is not the normal game state of the high-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control, but the high-frequency support mode, which is the first profit game state control (probability variation game state, a-time reduction game state, or b-time reduction game state), the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time reduction game state flag, which indicates that it is the b-time reduction game state, is on (step S3709). The b-time reduction game state flag is set to on when transitioning from the normal game state to the b-time reduction game state (step S3727 in Figure 317 of the game state transition process), and is set to off when transitioning from the b-time reduction game state to the normal game state or the special jackpot game state (step S3710 in Figure 316 or step S3739 in Figure 319 of the game state transition process).

If the b-time-saving game state flag is on (step S3709: Yes), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to off (step S3710) and proceeds to step S3711. On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is off (step S3709: No), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
In step S3711, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output start flag to ON, which starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 295(A)) from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101. The jackpot signal 2 output start flag is referenced in step S3804 of the signal output processing in Figure 321 to determine whether or not to start outputting the jackpot signal 2.

Here, step S3711 is performed when the special symbol game started in the normal game state or the b-time-saving game state results in a notification that the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, when the special symbol game started in the normal game state or the b-time-saving game state results in a notification that the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is started at the end of the special symbol game (at the start of the special symbol jackpot game).

Furthermore, in the probability variation game state and the a-time reduction game state, the jackpot signal 2 is being output (see Figure 295(B)). Therefore, even if a special symbol game started in the probability variation game state or the a-time reduction game state indicates that the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the output of the jackpot signal 2 will not be started at the end of the special symbol game (at the start of the special symbol jackpot game).

<Steps S3712 and S3713>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is off (step S3709: No), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variation game state flag is on, i.e., whether the game is in a probability variation state. The probability variation game state flag is set to on when transitioning from a jackpot game state to a probability variation game state (see step S3722 in Figure 316 of the game state transition process), and is set to off when transitioning from a probability variation game state to a jackpot game state (see step S3713 in Figure 316 of the game state transition process).

If the probability variation game state flag is on (step S3712: Yes), i.e., the game is in a probability variation state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state flag to off (step S3713) and proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320. On the other hand, if the probability variation game state flag is off (step S3712: No), i.e., the game is not in a probability variation state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
If the probability variation game state flag is off (step S3712: No), i.e., not in the probability variation game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time reduction game state flag is on (step S3714), i.e., whether the game is in the a-time reduction game state. The a-time reduction game state flag is set to on when transitioning from the jackpot game state to the a-time reduction game state (see step S3724 in Figure 316 of the game state transition process), and is set to off when transitioning from the a-time reduction game state to the jackpot game state or the normal game state (see step S3715 in Figure 316 or step S3734 in Figure 318 of the game state transition process).

If the a-time-saving game state flag is on (step S3714: Yes), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag to off (step S3715) and proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320. On the other hand, if the a-time-saving game state flag is off (step S3714: No), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Step S3716>
If the special jackpot game start flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, if it is not time to start the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the special jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the special jackpot game state, is on (step S3716). The special jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S3702 of Figure 316 of the game state transition process when the game transitions to the special jackpot game state.

If the special jackpot game state flag is on (step S3716: Yes), i.e., the special jackpot game state is active (the special jackpot game is currently running), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3717. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), i.e., the special jackpot game state is not active (the special jackpot game is not currently running), the process proceeds to step S3725 in Figure 317.

<Step S3717>
If the special jackpot game state flag is on (step S3716: Yes), that is, if the special jackpot game state is active (if the special jackpot game is in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether the special jackpot game end flag, which indicates the termination of the special jackpot game, is on (step S3717). The special jackpot game end flag is set to on in step S3451 of the special jackpot game control process in Figure 310 when the special jackpot game is to end.

If the special jackpot game termination flag is ON (step S3717: Yes), i.e., the special jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3718. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game termination flag is OFF (step S3717: No), i.e., it is not time to terminate the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Steps S3718-S3720>
If the special feature jackpot game termination flag is ON (step S3717: Yes), that is, if the special feature jackpot game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag ON, which stops the output of the jackpot signal 1 (see Figure 295(A)) that is being output from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3718). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is referenced in step S3807 of the signal output processing in Figure 321 to determine whether or not to stop the output of the jackpot signal 1.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a special jackpot state, to off (step S3719), and sets the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the special jackpot game has ended, to off (step S3720), and proceeds to step S3721.

<Steps S3721-S3724-1>
In step S3721, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variation game state transition flag, which transitions from the special feature jackpot game state to the probability variation game state after the special feature jackpot game ends, is set to ON. The probability variation game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3706 of Figure 316 of the game state transition process when a probability variation jackpot game is started.

If the probability variation game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3721: Yes), that is, when transitioning from the special symbol jackpot game state to the probability variation game state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state flag to ON (step S3722) and sets a probability variation game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in the probability variation game state (step S3722-1).

The probability variation game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute special symbol effects corresponding to the probability variation game state on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the probability variation game state command (see Figure 326 (B1)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state transition flag to off (step S3723), and proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

On the other hand, if the probability variation game state transition flag is set to off (step S3721: No), that is, if the game transitions from the special symbol jackpot game state to the a-time reduction game state instead of the probability variation game state, the MPU 41 sets the a-time reduction game state flag to on (step S3724), sets the a-time reduction game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in the a-time reduction game state (step S3724-1), and then proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

The "a. Shortened Game Mode" command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the "a. Shortened Game Mode" command on the symbol display unit 341, etc. (see Figure 326 (B2)).

<Step S3725>
If the special jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), that is, if the special jackpot game state is not active (if the special jackpot game is not in progress), then, as shown in Figure 317, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to on (step S3725).

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3725: Yes), i.e., the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3726. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3725: No), i.e., the game is not in the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3730 in Figure 318.

<Step S3726>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3725: Yes), that is, if the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which is used to transition the game state to the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3726). The b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3323 of Figure 316 of the game state transition process when a normal jackpot game ends.

If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3726: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3727. If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3726: No), the process proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Steps S3727-S3729>
If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3726: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to ON to indicate that the player is in the b-time-saving game state (step S3727), and sets a b-time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the player is in the b-time-saving game state (step S3727-1).

The b-time-saving game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the b-time-saving game state command on the symbol display unit 341, etc. (see Figure 327 (B1)).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, to off (step S3728), sets the time-saving game state transition flag to off (step S3729), and proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Step S3730>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3725: No), that is, if it is not in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that it is in a-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3730), as shown in Figure 318.

If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3730: Yes), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3731. On the other hand, if the a-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3731: No), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3736 in Figure 319.

<Step S3731>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3730: Yes), that is, if the game is in the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag for transitioning the game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3731). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3328 of the special game count management process in Figure 309 when the a-time-saving game state is terminated and the game is transitioned to the normal game state.

If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3732. If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3731: No), the process proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Steps S3732-S3733>
If the normal game state b time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in the normal game state (step S3732), and sets a normal game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it is in the normal game state (step S3732-1).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute special symbol effects corresponding to the normal game state command on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag to ON (step S3733), which stops the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 295(B)) currently being output from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101, and proceeds to step S3734. The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is referenced in step S3810 of the signal output processing in Figure 321 to determine whether or not to stop the output of the jackpot signal 2.

<Steps S3734-S3735>
In step S3734, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a-time-saving game state, to off, and further sets the normal game state transition flag to off (step S3735), and proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Step S3736>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3730: No), that is, if the a-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates the b-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3736), as shown in Figure 319.

If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3736: Yes), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3737. On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3736: No), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Step S3737>
If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3736: Yes), that is, if the game is in the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag for transitioning the game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3737). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3333 of the special game count management process in Figure 309 when the b-time-saving game state is terminated and the game is transitioned to the normal game state.

If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3738. If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3737: No), the process proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Steps S3738 and S3738-1>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON to indicate that it is in the normal game state (step S3738), sets a normal game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it is in the normal game state (step S3738-1), and then proceeds to step S3739.

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute special symbol effects corresponding to the normal game state command on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the normal game state command.

<Steps S3739 and S3740>
In step S3739, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, to off, and further sets the normal game state transition flag to off (step S3740), and proceeds to step S3741 in Figure 320.

<Step S3741>
In step S3741, the MPU 41 determines whether the V-winning jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a V-winning jackpot game is to be started, is set to ON. The V-winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3604 of the V-winning jackpot game control process shown in Figure 315 when a V-winning jackpot game is to be started.

If the V-winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3742. If the V-winning jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S3741: No), the process proceeds to step S3744.

<Steps S3742 and S3743>
If the V-winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag to ON, which starts outputting the V-winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3742). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3743), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3744>
If the V-winning jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S3741: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-winning jackpot game execution flag, which indicates that the V-winning jackpot game is in progress, is set to on (step S3744). The V-winning jackpot game execution flag is set to on in step S3606 of the V-winning jackpot game control process in Figure 315 when the V-winning jackpot game is started.

If the V-winning jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (Step S3744: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3745. If the V-winning jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (Step S3744: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3745>
If the flag indicating that a V-winning jackpot game is in progress is set to ON (step S3744: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating that the V-winning jackpot game has ended is set to ON (step S3745). The V-winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S3621 of the V-winning jackpot game control process in Figure 315 when the V-winning jackpot game is to end.

If the V-winning jackpot game termination flag is set to ON (Step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3746. If the V-winning jackpot game termination flag is set to OFF (Step S3745: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3746>
If the V-winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag to ON, which stops the output of the V-winning jackpot game signal that is output as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3746), and proceeds to step S3747.

<Steps S3747 and S3748>
In step S3747, the MPU 41 sets the value of the remaining number of special feature games until the b-time-saving game state is triggered to the maximum value of 1000 as the ceiling activation remaining count counter. That is, in this embodiment, when a V-winning jackpot game ends, the ceiling activation remaining count counter is reset to the maximum value of 1000. The MPU 41 also sets the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag to ON (step S3748) to indicate that the ceiling activation remaining count counter is set, and proceeds to step S3749.

Thus, in this embodiment, when a V-winning jackpot game ends, the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter is reset to its maximum value of 1000, and the remaining ceiling activation counter set flag is set to ON. This allows the normal game state, which is the first auxiliary state control where the b time-saving game state cannot occur, to be changed to the normal game state, which is the second auxiliary state control where the b time-saving game state can occur. As a result, the player can generate the normal game state of the second auxiliary state control by executing a V-winning jackpot game, and thus generate the b time-saving game state anew. This provides the player with an incentive to start playing in the normal game state, which is the first auxiliary state control where the b time-saving game state cannot occur. On the other hand, in the normal game state, which is the second auxiliary state control where the b time-saving game state can occur, the number of special symbol games required to generate the b time-saving game state can be changed to the maximum value. This allows the game to end in a normal game state or other state where the b-time-saving game state can occur, by executing a V-winning jackpot game when ending the game. This prevents the number of special symbol games played up to the end of the game from being reflected in the number of special symbol games required to trigger the b-time-saving game state, thus preventing the game from becoming a target for other players' opportunistic "hyena" behavior.

<Steps S3749 and S3750>
In step S3749, the MPU 41 sets a ceiling activation count reset command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset (step S3749). The ceiling activation count reset command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special effect corresponding to the reset of the remaining number of ceiling activations in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ceiling activation count reset command (see Figure 327 (B2)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game termination flag to OFF (step S3750), and terminates the game state transition process.

[Signal output processing]
Here, Figure 321 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for signal output processing performed in step S1408-1 of the main processing in Figure 300. In the signal output processing of this embodiment, processing is performed to output various signals to the outside of the gaming machine 10. The signal output processing of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 321.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 321, in the signal output processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the jackpot signal 1 output start flag, which starts outputting the jackpot signal 1 (see Figure 295(A)) as a special signal from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (step S3801). The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON in step S3703 of the game state transition processing in Figure 316 when a special jackpot game is started.

If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802. If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the process proceeds to step S3804.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting jackpot signal 1 as a special signal (see Figure 295(A)) from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3802). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to OFF (step S3803) and terminates the signal output process.

<Step S3804>
If the Jackpot Signal 1 Output Start Flag is set to OFF (Step S3801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the Jackpot Signal 1 Output Stop Flag, which stops the output of Jackpot Signal 1 (see Figure 295(A)) as a special signal output from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (Step S3804). The Jackpot Signal 1 Output Stop Flag is set to ON in step S3718 of the game state transition process in Figure 316 when the special jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3805. If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3804: No), the process proceeds to step S3807.

<Steps S3805 and S3806>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output of jackpot signal 1 (see Figure 295(A)) as a special signal output from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3805). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to OFF (step S3806) and terminates the signal output processing.

<Step S3807>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to off (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2 output start flag, which starts the output of jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 295(B)) from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to on (step S3807). The jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to on in step S3711 of the game state transition process in Figure 316 when a special feature jackpot is announced by a special feature game that was started in the normal game state or the b time-saving game state, and the special feature game ends.

If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3808. If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3807: No), the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 295(B)) from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3808). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output start flag to OFF (step S3809) and terminates the signal output process.

<Step S3810>
If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to off (step S3807: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag, which stops the output of jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 295(B)) output from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to on (step S3810). The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to on in step S3733 of the game state transition process in Figure 318 when transitioning from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state.

If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3811. If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the process proceeds to step S3813.

<Steps S3811 and S3812>
If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output of jackpot signal 2 (see Figure 295(B)) which is output from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3811). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag to OFF (step S3812) and terminates the signal output processing.

<Step S3813>
If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to off (step S3810: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag, which starts outputting the V-winning jackpot game signal (see Figure 296(A)) as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to on (step S3813). The V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to on in step S3742 of the game state transition process in Figure 316 when a V-winning jackpot game is started (when the V-winning jackpot game state is created).

If the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3814. If the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the process proceeds to step S3816.

<Steps S3814 and S3815>
If the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the V-winning jackpot game signal (see Figure 296(A)) as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3814). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag to OFF (step S3815) and terminates the signal output process.

<Step S3816>
If the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to off (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag, which stops the output of the V-winning jackpot game signal (see Figure 296(A)) as an identification signal output from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to on (step S3816). The V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to on in step S3746 of the game state transition process in Figure 316 when the V-winning jackpot game ends (when the V-winning jackpot game state ends).

If the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3817. If the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3816: No), the process proceeds to step S3819.

<Steps S3817 and S3818>
If the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the V-winning jackpot game signal (see Figure 296(A)) as an identification signal output from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3817). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag to OFF (step S3818) and terminates the signal output processing.

<Step S3819>
If the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to off (step S3816: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop signal output flag, which outputs a special symbol variation stop signal as an identification signal from terminal 4 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to on (step S3819). The special symbol variation stop signal output flag is set to on in step S1909 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 305 when the special symbol game is to be terminated.

If the special figure variation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820. If the special figure variation stop signal output flag is set to OFF (step S3819: No), the process proceeds to step S3823.

<Step S3820>
If the special figure variation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure variation stop signal output flag to ON, indicating that the special figure variation stop signal is being output (step S3820), and proceeds to step S3821. The special figure variation stop signal output flag is referenced in step S3823 of the signal output processing to determine whether or not to stop the output of the special figure variation stop signal.

<Steps S3821 and S3822>
In step S3821, the MPU 41 starts outputting a special pattern change stop signal as an identification signal from terminal 4 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3821). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern change stop signal output flag to off (step S3822) and terminates the signal output process.

<Step S3823>
If the special figure variation stop signal output flag is set to off (step S3819: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure variation stop signal output flag, which indicates that the special figure variation stop signal is being output, is set to on (step S3823).

If the flag indicating that the special figure variation has stopped is set to ON (step S3823: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3824. If the flag indicating that the special figure variation has stopped is set to OFF (step S3823: No), the signal output process is terminated.

<Steps S3824 and S3825>
If the flag indicating that the special graph variation stop signal is being output is set to ON (step S3823: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the special graph variation stop signal as an identification signal output from terminal 4 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3824). Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag indicating that the special graph variation stop signal is being output to OFF (step S3825), and terminates the signal output process. In other words, in this embodiment, the special graph variation stop signal is output from the time the process of step S3820 of the previously executed signal output process is completed until the process of step S3824 of the next signal output process is completed. That is, the output period of the special graph variation stop signal corresponds to or approximately corresponds to the execution cycle of the main process in Figure 300, and the special graph variation stop signal is output as a pulse signal having a pulse width of, for example, 2 msec or approximately 2 msec.

Of course, when the special pattern fluctuation stop signal is output as a pulse signal, the pulse width does not need to be 2 msec or approximately 2 msec; other pulse widths are also acceptable, for example, integer multiples of 2 or more of the execution cycle of the main processing in Figure 300, or approximately integer multiples of 2. Furthermore, the special pattern fluctuation stop signal may be output as a signal other than a pulse signal.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, some of the steps of the command determination process performed by the voice lamp control device 5 differ from those of the first embodiment described above.

[Command determination process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, in special gameplay, a process is executed to perform background effects (stage effects) corresponding to various game states (for example, jackpot game state, probability variation game state, a time reduction game state, b time reduction game state, normal game state) as game state information displayed behind the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341, which serves as a display means. In addition, when a V-entry jackpot game ends, a process is executed to perform a ceiling remaining count reset effect on the symbol display unit 341, which serves as a display means, as game state information indicating that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset. Here, Figures 322 to 324 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process of this embodiment. The output method when the symbol display unit 341 displays an image as output information is mainly the display of moving images.

<Step S3901>
As shown in Figure 322, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3901). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3901: Yes), it proceeds to step S3902; if it has not received a command (step S3901: No), it terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3902>
If a command is received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special jackpot game start command (step S3902). The special jackpot game start command is a command that indicates the start of a special jackpot game as a high-profit game, and is set in step S3404 of the special jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a jackpot game is to be started.

If the received command is a special jackpot game start command (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3903. If the received command is not a special jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3905.

<Steps S3903 and S3904>
If a special jackpot game start command is received (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special jackpot game performance setting process (step S3903), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON to indicate that the special jackpot game is in progress (step S3904), and then terminates the command determination process.

The jackpot game flag is referenced in the jackpot game presentation control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 42 to control the jackpot game presentation (see step S3201 in Figure 54). Since the jackpot game presentation control process in this embodiment is the same as the jackpot game presentation control process in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 54), a detailed explanation is omitted.

Here, Figure 325 shows an example of a special jackpot game animation displayed on the symbol display unit 341, which serves as a display means.

Figure 325(A) shows an example of the opening sequence for a special jackpot game displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As shown in Figure 325(A), in the opening sequence, when a special jackpot game—a small-profit game where the special symbols are displayed in a specific period—ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a notification corresponding to the newly set game state being a special jackpot game state, based on the result of the special jackpot lottery announced by that special jackpot game being a jackpot. Specifically, in the opening sequence of this embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays the word "jackpot," which is game state information, and also displays the number of consecutive jackpots (the word "Xth time").

Figure 325(B) shows an example of a round game animation for a special jackpot game animation displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As shown in Figure 325(B), during the round game animation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a notification indicating that a round game is being played and which round of the game it is in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, in the round game animation of this embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays the text image "Round X" indicating the number of rounds currently being played in the jackpot game, and also displays images related to the number of game balls (number of balls dispensed) in the jackpot game (text images "800/1200" indicating the current number of balls dispensed relative to the number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, and "Total 3800 balls" indicating the total number of balls dispensed in the jackpot streak including the jackpot game).

Figure 325(C) is a diagram showing an example of the ending sequence of a special jackpot game sequence displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As shown in Figure 325(C), in the ending sequence, the symbol display unit 341 indicates that the jackpot game has ended and also clearly indicates the destination of the game state after the jackpot game has ended. Specifically, in the ending sequence of this embodiment, if the game transitions to a probability variation game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a text image of "○○ RUSH entered" as game state information, and if the game transitions to a time-saving game state, it displays a text image of "×× mode entered" as game state information. In addition, the ending sequence may display, instead of or in addition to the illustrated example, the following: a text image indicating the end of the jackpot game, a text image indicating the number of jackpot games including the jackpot game, and a text image indicating the total number of balls dispensed during the jackpot streak including the jackpot game, such as "△△△△ balls dispensed."

<Step S3905>
If the received command is not a special jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3905). An opening start command is a command that indicates the start of the opening of a special jackpot game, and is set in step S3408 of the special jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be started.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3906; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3907.

<Step S3906>
If an opening start command is received (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening performance start flag to ON (step S3906) and terminates the command determination process. The opening performance start flag is a flag that starts the opening performance of the special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, and is referenced in step S3202 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 to determine whether or not to start the opening performance.

<Step S3907>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3907). An opening end command is a command that indicates the end of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3414 of the special jackpot game control processing shown in Figure 311, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be ended.

If the received command is an opening/closing command (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3908. If the received command is not an opening/closing command (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
If an opening end command is received (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the opening performance end flag to ON (step S3908) and terminates the command determination process. The opening performance end flag is a flag that terminates the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3205 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 to determine whether or not to terminate the opening performance.

<Step S3909>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3909). A round game start command indicates the start of a round game in opening/closing execution mode and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time. It is set in step S3417 of the special jackpot game control processing shown in Figure 311, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a round game in opening/closing execution mode is to be started.

If the received command is a round game start command (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3910. If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3909: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3912.

<Steps S3910 and S3911>
If a round game start command is received (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to ON (step S3910), sets round number information indicating which round the game is in to RAM 512 (step S3911), and terminates the command judgment process. The round game performance start flag is referenced in step S3208 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 to determine whether or not to start each round game performance of the opening/closing execution mode performance.

<Step S3912>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3909: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3912). A round game end command is a command that indicates the end of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set in step S3429 of the special jackpot game control processing shown in Figure 312, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the round game is to be ended.

If the received command is a round game end command (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3913. If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3912: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3914.

<Step S3913>
If a round game end command is received (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S3913) and terminates the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced in step S3211 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 when determining whether or not to end the round game performance.

<Step S3914>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3912: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3914). An interval start command is a command that indicates the start of an interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S3433 of the special jackpot game control processing shown in Figure 312, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when an interval is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3915; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3914: No), the process proceeds to step S3916.

<Step S3915>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to ON (step S3915) and terminates the command determination process. The interval performance start flag is referenced in step S3214 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 when determining whether or not to start the interval performance.

<Step S3916>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3916). An interval end command is a command that indicates the end of the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S3439 of the special jackpot game control processing shown in Figure 313, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the interval is to be ended.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3917. If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3916: No), the process proceeds to step S3918 in Figure 323.

<Step S3917>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to ON (step S3917) and terminates the command determination process. The interval performance end flag is referenced in step S3217 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 when determining whether or not to terminate the interval performance.

<Step S3918>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3916: No), as shown in Figure 323, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3918). An ending start command is a command that indicates the start of the ending in a jackpot game, and is set in step S3442 of the special jackpot game control process shown in Figure 31, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3919; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3920.

<Step S3919>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON (step S3919) and terminates the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referenced in step S3220 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 when determining whether or not to start the ending performance.

<Step S3920>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3920). An ending end command is a command that indicates the end of the jackpot game, and is set in step S3448 of the special jackpot game control processing shown in Figure 313, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be terminated.

Here, if the received command is an ending command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3921; if the received command is not an ending command (step S3920: No), the process proceeds to step S3922.

<Step S3921>
If the received command is an ending command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance termination flag to ON (step S3921) and terminates the command determination process. The ending performance termination flag is referenced in step S3223 of the jackpot game performance control process in Figure 54 when determining whether or not to terminate the ending performance.

<Step S3922>
If the received command is not an ending command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special jackpot game termination command (step S3922). The special jackpot game termination command is a command that indicates the termination of the special jackpot game, and is set in step S3450 of the special jackpot game control process shown in Figure 310, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the special jackpot game is to be terminated.

Here, if the received command is a special jackpot game termination command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3923. If the received command is not a special jackpot game termination command (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3924.

<Step S3923>
If the received command is a special jackpot game termination command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game as a high-profit game is currently being played, to off (step S3923), and terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3924 and S3925>
If the received command is not a special jackpot game end command (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a probability variation game state command indicating a transition to a probability variation game state (step S3924). The probability variation game state command is set in step S3722-1 of the game state transition process in Figure 316 when the game transitions to a probability variation game state.

If the MPU 51 receives a command indicating a probability variation game state (step S3924: Yes), it sets the probability variation game state flag to ON (step S3925) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a probability variation game state command (step S3924: No), it proceeds to step S3926.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
If no probability variation game state command is received (step S3924: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an a-time reduction game state command indicating a transition to a-time reduction game state as a second profit game state control (step S3926). The a-time reduction game state command is set in step S3724-1 of the game state transition process in Figure 316 when the game transitions to a-time reduction game state.

If the MPU 51 receives the "a" time-saving game state command (step S3926: Yes), it sets the time-saving game state flag to "on" (step S3927) to indicate that the game is in the "a" time-saving game state, and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the "a" time-saving game state command (step S3926: No), it proceeds to step S3928.

<Steps S3928-S3930>
If a time-saving game state command has not been received (step S3926: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a time-saving game state command, which indicates a transition to the second profit game state control, b time-saving game state (step S3928). The time-saving game state command is set in step S3727-1 of the game state transition process in Figure 317 when the game transitions to the time-saving game state.

If the MPU 51 receives the b-time-saving game state command (step S3928: Yes), it sets the time-saving game state flag to ON (step S3929) and the normal game state flag to OFF (step S3930), indicating that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, and then terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the b-time-saving game state command (step S3928: No), it proceeds to step S3931.

<Steps S3931-S3933>
If no time-saving game state command has been received (step S3928: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal game state command indicating a transition to the normal game state, which is the first profitable game state control (step S3931). The normal game state command is set in step S3732-1 in Figure 318 or step S3738-1 in Figure 319 during the game state transition process when the game transitions to the normal game state.

When the MPU 51 receives a normal game state command (step S3931: Yes), it sets the normal game state flag to ON (step S3932), which indicates that the game is in the normal game state, and sets other game state flags corresponding to the game state before transitioning to the normal game state (a) time-saving game state flag or b) time-saving game state to OFF (step S3933), and then terminates the command determination process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a normal game state command (step S3931: No), the process proceeds to step S3934 in Figure 324.

<SPORTS S3934 and S3919>
If no normal game state command is received (step S3931: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command, as shown in Figure 324 (step S3934). A special symbol variation pattern command is a command that includes the display time of the special symbol variation in the special symbol game to be started, the result of the jackpot lottery, etc., and is set in step S2105 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 307 when a special symbol variation is started (a special symbol game is started).

If the MPU 51 receives a special pattern variation command (step S3934: Yes), it proceeds to step S3935. Conversely, if the MPU 51 does not receive a special pattern variation command (step S3934: No), it proceeds to step S3943.

<Step S3935>
When a special feature variation pattern command is received (step S3934: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3935). The normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3932 of Figure 324 in the command determination process when the game transitions to a normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3936. If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3935: No), the process proceeds to step S3937.

<Step S3936>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the normal game state performance setting process corresponding to the normal game state (step S3936), and then terminates the command determination process.

In this process, the normal game state presentation setting process is performed based on the display time of the special symbols included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the results of the jackpot lottery, etc. Similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process shown in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above, the presentation to be executed in the special symbol game is set. Furthermore, the normal game state presentation setting process sets a unique background image (background presentation, stage presentation) that indicates the normal game state. Therefore, the player can identify the normal game state based on the display of game state information, such as the background image (background presentation, stage presentation) unique to the normal game state.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3935: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the probability variation game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variation game state, is set to on (step S3937). The probability variation game state flag is set to on in step S3925 of Figure 323 in the command determination process when the game transitions to a probability variation game state.

If the probability variation game state flag is set to ON (step S3937: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the probability variation game state presentation setting process (step S3938) and then terminates the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the probability variation game state flag is set to OFF (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3939.

In this process, the probability variation game state presentation setting process is performed based on the display time of the special symbols included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery, etc. Similar processing to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process shown in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above is executed, thereby setting the presentation to be executed in the special symbol game. Furthermore, in the probability variation game state presentation setting process, a unique background image (background presentation, stage presentation) indicating the probability variation game state is set, and a text image indicating the probability variation game state (for example, a text image of "○○RUSH") is set (see Figure 326 (B1)). Therefore, the player can identify that they are in the probability variation game state based on the display of game state information such as the background image (background presentation, stage presentation) unique to the probability variation game state and the text image indicating the probability variation game state. Note that in the probability variation game state, the symbol display unit 341 may also display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in a probability variation jackpot game, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the first entry point 314, or when a game ball enters the through gate 317 of the electric mechanism, and the electric mechanism 315b is activated, resulting in a game ball entering the second entry point 315, is a probability variation jackpot, the game transitions to a special symbol game, which is a small-profit game where the special symbols are displayed in a variable state for a specific period. Also, the probability variation game state is entered after the end of the probability variation jackpot game. Therefore, in the symbol display unit 341, after the game state information is displayed as the ending image of the probability variation jackpot game (see Figure 326 (A1)), if the game transitions to the probability variation game state, game state information indicating that the game is in the probability variation game state is displayed (see Figure 326 (B1)).

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the probability variation game state flag is set to off (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the a-time reduction game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a-time reduction game state, is set to on (step S3939). The a-time reduction game state flag is set to on in step S3724 of Figure 316 during the game state transition process when the game transitions to the a-time reduction game state.

If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3939: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the a-time-saving game state presentation setting process (step S3940) and then terminates the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the a-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3941.

In the a-time-saving game state performance setting process, based on the display time of the special symbols included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery, etc., a process similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above is executed, thereby setting the performance to be executed in the special symbol game. In addition, in the a-time-saving game state performance setting process, a unique background image (background performance, stage performance) indicating that the a-time-saving game state is in is set, as well as a text image indicating that the a-time-saving game state is in progress (for example, a text image of "XX mode"), and the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the a-time-saving game state (for example, a text image of "100 time-saving plays remaining") are set (see Figure 326 (B2)). Therefore, the player can identify that the a-time-saving game state is in progress based on the display of game state information such as the background image (background performance, stage performance) unique to the a-time-saving game state and the text image indicating that the a-time-saving game state is in progress. Furthermore, during the probability variation game state, the symbol display unit 341 may display the number of consecutive wins and the number of balls dispensed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in a normal jackpot game, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, or when a game ball enters the through gate 317 of the electric mechanism, and the electric mechanism 315b is activated, resulting in a game ball entering the second prize slot 315, is a normal jackpot, the game transitions to a special symbol game, which is a small-profit game where the special symbols are displayed in a specific period of variation. Also, the game transitions to a probability variation game state after the end of the probability variation jackpot game. Therefore, in the symbol display unit 341, after the game state information is displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see Figure 326 (A2)), if the game transitions to the a-time reduction game state, game state information indicating that the game is in the a-time reduction game state is displayed (see Figure 326 (B2)).

Furthermore, in the a-time-saving game state setting process, it is determined whether or not it is the last special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state. If it is the last special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state, and the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery announced by that special symbol game is a loss, then at the end of that special symbol game as a specific period game, the a-time-saving end display is announced on the symbol display unit 341 as game state information indicating that the a-time-saving game state has ended (see Figure 327(A)). In this embodiment, for example, the text image "RUSH End" indicating the end of the a-time-saving game state is displayed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the a-time-saving end display is also used as the result screen for jackpot streaks, and the results of the jackpot streaks are displayed, such as the text image "RUSH Y times" indicating the number of jackpot streaks and the text image "7500 balls" indicating the number of balls dispensed during that jackpot streak.

<Steps S3941 and S3942>
If the a-time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the first profitable game state control, b-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3941). The b-time-saving game state flag is set to on in step S3727 of Figure 317 during the game state transition process when the game transitions to the b-time-saving game state.

If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the b-time-saving game state presentation setting process (step S3942) and then terminates the command determination process. Conversely, if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

Here, in the b-time-saving game state performance setting process, based on the display time of the special symbols included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc., a process similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command judgment process in Figure 47 of the first embodiment described above is executed, thereby setting the performance to be executed in the special symbol game. In addition, in the b-time-saving game state performance setting process, a unique background image (background performance, stage performance) indicating that the b-time-saving game state is in is set, as well as a text image indicating that the b-time-saving game state is in progress (for example, a text image of "Ceiling RUSH"), and the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the b-time-saving game state (for example, a text image of "1000 remaining") are set (see Figure 327 (B1)). Therefore, the player can identify that the b-time-saving game state is in progress based on the display of game state information such as the background image (background performance, stage performance) unique to the b-time-saving game state and the text image indicating that the b-time-saving game state is in progress. Furthermore, during the probability variation game state, the symbol display unit 341 may display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in a normal jackpot game, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, or when a game ball enters the through gate 317 of the electric mechanism, and the electric mechanism 315b is activated, resulting in a game ball entering the second prize slot 315, is a normal jackpot, the game transitions to a special symbol game, which is a small-profit game where the special symbols are displayed in a specific period of variation. Also, the game transitions to a probability variation game state after the end of the probability variation jackpot game. Therefore, in the symbol display unit 341, after the game state information is displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see Figure 326 (A2)), if the game transitions to the a-time reduction game state, game state information indicating that the game is in the a-time reduction game state is displayed (see Figure 326 (B2)).

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
If the received command is not a special feature variation pattern command (step S3934: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command, which indicates that the ceiling activation remaining count counter has been set (step S3943). The ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command is set in step S3748 of Figure 320 during the game state transition process when the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special feature games until the b time-saving game state is generated, is reset based on the execution of a V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game.

If the received command is a ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command (step S3943: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3944. On the other hand, if the received command is not a ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3945.

<Step S3944>
If the received command is a command to reset the remaining number of ceiling activations counter (step S3943: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a ceiling activation remaining count reset display on the symbol display unit 341 to indicate that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset (step S3944). For example, in this embodiment, the text image "Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Reset" is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 327 (B2)). Therefore, the player can identify that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset based on the ceiling activation remaining count reset display being displayed as game status information.

Here, the remaining ceiling activation count counter is reset after the V-entry jackpot game, which is a low-profit game played during a specific period, has ended. Furthermore, the V-entry jackpot game is executed based on the special electric start game, which is initiated by the entry of game balls into the special electric start port 37 as the first entry means, and based on the special electric V-entry port 383 as the specific entry area, which is the second entry means. In other words, by performing a weak right-hand shot game, shooting game balls to the left of the separation section 393 in the right-hand area of the game board 31 (the second direction), the player can generate a V-entry jackpot game and intentionally reset the remaining ceiling activation count. The reset of the remaining ceiling activation count can be confirmed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the ceiling activation count reset display as game status information.

Furthermore, it is conceivable that the display indicating the reset of the remaining number of ceiling activations should be displayed for a certain period after at least one V-winning jackpot game has ended. It is also conceivable that the display indicating the reset of the remaining number of ceiling activations could be shown on the standby screen (demo screen) that is accessed when neither special symbol games nor special symbol jackpot games are being played. It is also conceivable that it could be displayed by a predetermined operation of the player on the operation button 20 or selection button 21A. In this way, the player will be able to understand that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset before starting a game on the gaming machine 10.

Here, differences may arise in the players' knowledge and understanding of the functions and gameplay of the gaming machine 10. For example, some players may understand that the gaming machine 10 has a ceiling function that generates a b-time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode, after a predetermined number of special symbol games; that it has a ceiling activation remaining count reset function that sets the number of special symbol games required to generate the b-time-saving game state to its maximum value by entering the special electric V-entry port 383 of the special electric large-entry device 38; and that this ceiling activation remaining count reset function can be activated by causing game balls to flow down the second channel 392 through weak right-handed play. On the other hand, it is assumed that some players may not understand some of the functions and gameplay of the gaming machine 10. The ceiling function is widely understood because it is so widespread, and it is common practice in gaming halls to clearly indicate that a gaming machine has a ceiling function by using notations such as "Yu Time". On the other hand, while the gaming machine 10 has a function to reset the remaining number of times the ceiling can be triggered by weak right-hand play, such a distinctive function may be difficult for players to understand immediately until it becomes widely known. Therefore, some players may play without knowing about the ceiling trigger reset function or how to reset it.

In this embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, resetting the remaining number of ceiling activations can be freely performed at the player's discretion by causing the game balls to flow down the second channel 392 through a weak right-hand shot game that launches the game balls to the left of the separation unit 393. However, against the player's will, game balls may flow down the second channel 392 due to launch malfunctions or interference between game balls, and the remaining number of ceiling activations may be reset. Therefore, players who do not understand the ceiling activation remaining number reset function or method of resetting the ceiling activation remaining number of the gaming machine 10 cannot understand what has happened based solely on the ceiling activation remaining number reset display (see Figure 327 (B2)). As a result, they may continue playing under the mistaken belief that the remaining number of special symbol game plays required to generate the b time-saving game state is the same as the number before the ceiling activation remaining number reset. In that case, even though the player has performed the special feature game as intended, the ceiling will not be activated (the b-time-saving game state will occur). As a result, the player may feel distrust towards the game machine 10 and the display on the data display 103 (displaying the number of times the special feature game has been performed since the regular jackpot game ended), leading to a decrease in interest in the game machine 10 and potentially resulting in distrust towards the game hall, which is undesirable. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, it is preferable to indicate, for example, in the symbol display unit 341, that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset by the player's own actions, instead of, or in addition to, the display of the remaining number of ceiling activations (see Figure 327 (B2)). Specifically, it is conceivable that the symbol display unit 341 may clearly indicate that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset based on a game ball entering the special electric V-entry port 383 of the special electric jackpot device 38, using explanatory text images, or moving or still images including an image that mimics the special electric jackpot device 38. Furthermore, it is also conceivable to provide a pre-explanation of the gameplay process, not only when the remaining number of ceiling activations is reset, but also during special feature gameplay or during non-gameplay demo screens, explaining that the remaining ceiling activation count is reset based on the game ball entering the special electric V-entry slot 383 of the special electric large-prize device 38.

<Step S3945>
If the received command is not a command to reset the remaining number of ceiling activations counter (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S3945) and terminates the command determination process.

As described above, in this invention, in a predetermined game state where the control state of the auxiliary means assisting in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable symbol game is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, when a specific period game, which is different from a special game as a profit game, ends based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for a predetermined period, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. That is, in this invention, even in a predetermined game state where the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, it is possible to generate a specific game state where the control state of the auxiliary means is the second control state by having a game ball enter a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open and executing a game for a predetermined specific period. This makes it possible to generate a specific game state again even after the specific game state has ended, thus preventing the game machine from being left idle because the specific game state has ended and no specific game state is generated, and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

More specifically, in this embodiment, players may be granted two types of games as game benefits: a special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, and a V-prize jackpot game, which is a low-profit game. The special jackpot game, as a high-profit game, is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is performed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 as a starting means, is a jackpot. The variable prize slot 316, which is a third ball entry means, opens and closes multiple times, making it a game that offers great benefits to the player as it allows them to acquire a large number of game balls. On the other hand, the V-prize winning game, which is a low-profit game, is executed when a game ball enters the special electric V prize winning area 383, which is a specific entry area of the second entry means, which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is an opening/closing means of the second entry means, in the special electric start game which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37, which is a first entry means. In this game, it is possible to enter the special electric large prize winning area 381, but the number of game balls that can be obtained by entering the special electric large prize winning area 381 is small, making it a game with little profit for the player. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special electric start opening 37, the special electric large prize winning area 381, and the special electric V prize winning area 383 are located in positions into which game balls flowing down the second flow path 392, which is a specific flow path set in the right-side area of the game board 31, can enter. In other words, the V-prize winning game, which is a low-profit game, can be performed by launching game balls into the second channel 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a V-entry jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, ends, the maximum number of special symbol games, which are variable games that can generate the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is set. Here, the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is a time-saving game state to which a predetermined number of special symbol games (e.g., 1000 times) are executed without a special symbol jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, being performed in the low-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control, where the opening and closing frequency of the electric mechanism 315b, which is an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second entry opening 315 (frequency of ball entry support into the second entry opening 315 by the electric mechanism 315b), is defined. In other words, in this embodiment, the maximum number of special symbol games that can transition to the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is set by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second channel 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by setting a maximum value as the number of special feature games that can generate the first profitable game state control, b time-saving game state, by the player continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392, the maximum number of special feature games is set. Even if the game transitions from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state when the special feature jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, is executed without the special feature jackpot game being executed in the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, is reached, resulting in a first auxiliary state control where the b time-saving game state does not occur, the player can, by continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392, generate a second auxiliary state control that is capable of generating the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, according to the player's intention. Thus, in this embodiment, since the player can generate a state that is a second auxiliary state control capable of generating the first profitable game state control, b (time-saving game state), it becomes possible to improve the operating rate of a game machine where the first profitable game state control, b (time-saving game state), has ended without the special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the maximum number of special feature games that can generate the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), by the player continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392 is set, if the player ends the game while in the second auxiliary state control, which is capable of generating the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), the number of special feature games executed by the player while in the second auxiliary state control, which is capable of generating the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), can be cleared by executing a V-winning jackpot game as a small-benefit game by continuing to launch game balls toward the second channel 392 before ending the game. This prevents the disadvantages suffered by the player as a result of playing the game while in the second auxiliary state control, which is capable of generating the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state), from becoming an advantage for others. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc., for each special feature game played while in the second auxiliary state control, which enables the creation of the first beneficial game state control, b (time-saving game state). This investment can be prevented, by the player's intention, from becoming an asset to others who later play the machine—that is, becoming the target of so-called "hyena" behavior—by continuing to launch game balls towards the second channel 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to thirteenth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Embodiment 15]
In gaming machines that can transition to a value-granting state when the number of updates to predetermined counting information in a predetermined game state reaches a predetermined number of times, there is a need for improvement in the notification method to the player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention solves the above problems,
A launching mechanism capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area is provided in the game area where game balls can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, a display means is provided to display a predetermined pattern in a changing manner.
A variable ball entry means is provided in the aforementioned game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means for updating specific information based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the aforementioned change display,
A means for generating a predetermined profit state in a specific game state, which generates a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state,
A notification control means that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode,
A determination means that performs a predetermined determination based on whether a game ball enters the starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means that generates a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become a specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing prior to a predetermined period before the specific information becomes a predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.

The specific information can be any information that is updated based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the display of the specified symbols. Specific information may include, if the spirit of the present invention can be realized, various counters set in RAM, various commands, various flags, validity information and number of reserved items regarding the right to perform special symbol games, information regarding the right to perform regular symbol variations, various information stored at predetermined addresses in RAM, information stored in various buffers, a predetermined series of data, a pointer for determining the update position in the data series, a time-saving game count counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time-saving game count in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game count counter, b time-saving game count counter, c time-saving game count counter), a counter corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games until the b time-saving game state is generated (ceiling activation remaining count counter), a jackpot random number counter, a jackpot type counter, a reach random number counter, a special symbol variation type counter, a jackpot random number initial value counter, a regular symbol win random number counter, a regular symbol win type random number counter, a regular symbol variation type random number counter, a regular symbol win random value initial value counter, an opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the electric mechanism, and the remaining jackpot game Round counter corresponding to the number of rounds, opening time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the opening of the jackpot game, round game time counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time of the round game, ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the ending of the jackpot game, special symbol variation pattern command, stop type command, number of held balls command, confirmation display command, special symbol shift command, first special symbol hold command, second special symbol hold command, minor win game start command, profit display OP command, loss display OP command, minor win opening start command, minor win opening end command, movable wing operation start command, minor win game end command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game end command, special symbol variation display flag, special symbol variation Stop flag, Normal diagram variation display flag, Normal diagram variation stop display flag, Electric mechanism opening flag, Big win game start flag, Big win game in progress flag, Opening flag, Round game in progress flag, Interval flag, Ending flag, Big win game end flag, Small win game start flag, Small win opening flag, V-entry slot opening/closing part operation flag, Movable wing operation flag, V-entry flag, Small win game flag, Probability variation game state flag, Normal game state flag, Big win game state flag, Small win game state flag, normal game state flag, time-saving game state flag (a time-saving game state flag, b time-saving game state flag, c time-saving game state flag), special symbol win/fail information stored in the first special symbol reserve area for the right to execute the first special symbol game, information regarding the number of reserved special symbol games for the first special symbol game, special symbol win/fail information stored in the second special symbol reserve area for the right to execute the second special symbol game, information regarding the number of reserved special symbol games for the second special symbol game, special symbol win/fail information stored in the special symbol execution area for the special symbol variation, and normal symbol variation. This includes information stored in the general symbol hold storage area for the right to perform actions, information related to the number of general symbol fluctuations, a series of drawing lists set for the entire special symbol game when a special symbol game is performed, a series of drawing lists set for the entire jackpot game when a jackpot game is performed, a series of drawing lists set for the entire minor jackpot game when a minor jackpot game is performed, a pointer for determining the update position in the drawing list set for a special symbol game, a pointer for determining the update position in the drawing list set for a jackpot game, a pointer for determining the update position in the drawing list set for a minor jackpot game, information stored in the display data table buffer (display data table), information stored in the additional data table buffer (additional data table), information stored in the transfer data table buffer (transfer data table), drawing information stored in the frame buffer, and any combination thereof.

The update means can be any process that updates specific information. As long as it can realize the spirit of the present invention, the update means can include, for example, software processing, overwrite control processing, write control processing, load processing, hardware circuit processing, processing to update (add, subtract, initialize, clear) various counters set in RAM, processing to update (set) various commands, processing to update various flags (on/off switching processing), processing to update success/failure information and number of reserved information regarding the right to execute special gameplay, processing to update information related to the right to execute regular gameplay variation, processing to update various information stored at predetermined addresses in RAM, processing to update information stored in various buffers, processing to store a predetermined series of data in a predetermined storage area such as a buffer, processing to update (move) a pointer for grasping the update position in the data group, and a time-saving game counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time-saving gameplay in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game counter, b time-saving gameplay count) Process to update (subtract, add, initialize, clear) the counter, c) time-saving count counter), b) the remaining number of special symbol plays until the time-saving game state is activated (ceiling activation remaining count counter) (subtract or add), process to update the jackpot random number counter, process to update the jackpot type counter, process to update the reach random number counter, process to update the special symbol variation type counter, process to update the jackpot random number initial value counter, process to update the normal symbol jackpot random number counter, process to update the normal symbol jackpot type random number counter, process to update the normal symbol variation type random number counter, process to update the normal symbol random value initial value counter, process to update (subtract, add or clear) the opening time counter corresponding to the remaining opening time of the electric mechanism, process to update (subtract or add) the rounds counter corresponding to the remaining number of rounds in the jackpot game, corresponding to the remaining opening time of the jackpot game The following processes are performed: updating (subtracting or adding) the opening time counter, updating (subtracting, adding, or clearing) the round game time counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time of the round game, updating (subtracting or adding) the ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the ending of the jackpot game, updating (setting) the special symbol variation pattern command, updating (setting) the stop type command, updating (setting) the number of reserved balls command, updating (setting) the confirmation display command, updating (setting) the special symbol shift command, updating (setting) the first special symbol reserved command, updating (setting) the second special symbol reserved command, updating (setting) the small win game start command, updating (setting) the profit display OP command, updating (setting) the loss display OP command, updating (setting) the small win opening start command, and the small win opening end frame. Process to update (set) the end, process to update (set) the movable wing operation start command, process to update (set) the minor win game end command, process to update (set) the big win game start command, process to update (set) the opening start command, process to update (set) the opening end command, process to update (set) the round game start command, process to update (set) the round game end command, process to update (set) the interval start command, process to update (set) the interval end command, process to update (set) the ending start command, process to update (set) the ending end command, process to update (set) the big win game end command, process to update the special symbol variation display flag (on/off switching process), process to update the special symbol variation stop flag (on/off switching process), process to update the normal symbol variation display flag (on/off switching process) (Switching process), process to update the display flag for normal figure fluctuation stop (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the electric mechanism is open (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the jackpot game starts (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the jackpot game is in progress (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the opening is in progress (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the round game is in progress (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the interval is in progress (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the ending is in progress (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the jackpot game has ended (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the small win game starts (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the small win opening is in progress (on/off switching process), process to update the flag for when the V-entry slot is open/closed (On/Off switching process), process to update the movable wing operation flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the minor win game flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the V-winning flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the probability variation game state flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the normal game state flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the big win game state flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the minor win game state flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the normal game state flag (On/Off switching process), process to update the time-saving game state flag (a time-saving game state flag, b time-saving game state flag, c time-saving game state flag) (On/Off switching process), process to update the special symbol win/loss information (addition or shift) stored in the first special symbol hold area for the right to execute the first special symbol game, 1. Process to update (add or subtract) information regarding the number of reserved special symbol games; 2. Process to update (add or shift) special symbol win/loss information stored in the 2nd special symbol reserved area for the reserved right to execute a special symbol game; 3. Process to update (add or subtract) information regarding the number of reserved special symbol games; 4. Process to update (overwrite) special symbol win/loss information stored in the special symbol execution area for the reserved right to execute a normal symbol variation; 5. Process to update normal symbol win/loss information and information regarding the number of reserved normal symbol variation stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area for the reserved right to execute a normal symbol variation; 6. Process to update a series of drawing lists set for the entire special symbol game when executing a special symbol game (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM); 7. Process to update a series of drawing lists set for the entire jackpot game when executing a jackpot game (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM); 8. Process to update (add or subtract) information regarding the number of reserved special symbol games when executing a small win game. Examples of processes include updating a series of drawing lists set for the entirety of a single minor win game (storing them in a drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM), updating (moving) a pointer for determining the update position in the drawing list set for a special feature game, updating (moving) a pointer for determining the update position in the drawing list set for a major win game, updating (moving) a pointer for determining the update position in the drawing list set for a minor win game, updating information stored in the display data table buffer (display data table), updating information stored in the additional data table buffer (additional data table), updating information stored in the transfer data table buffer (transfer data table), updating drawing information stored in the frame buffer, and any combination thereof.

The specific game state can be any state related to the game. Examples of specific game states that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), a state in which the number of special symbol game executions in time-saving game state a is initialized by the start or end of a jackpot game, a state in which the number of special symbol game executions necessary to generate time-saving game state b is initialized by the start or end of a jackpot game, a state in which the number of special symbol game executions necessary to generate time-saving game state b is initialized by a RAM clear of the game machine, and a state in which a jackpot game occurs after the initialization of the number of special symbol game executions in time-saving game state a. a) Game state before it starts, b) Game state from the initialization of the number of special symbol game executions in the time-saving game state until the start of the jackpot game, c) Game state from the initialization of the number of special symbol game executions in the time-saving game state until the start of the jackpot game, state from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, probability variation game state, minor win game state, state where the opening is being executed in the minor win game, state where the V-entry slot is open in the minor win game, jackpot game state, state where the opening is being executed in the jackpot game, state where the opening is being executed in the jackpot game The state in which the game mode is running, the state in which each round of the game is being played during a jackpot game, the state in which the ending is being played during a jackpot game, the state from when a regular jackpot game starts until when it ends, the state in which the regular electric mechanism is operating (the second prize slot is open), the state of the variation of the predetermined symbols (the state from when the variation of the predetermined symbols starts until when it ends), the state of the variation of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (the state from when the variation of the special symbols starts until when it ends), the state of the variation of the special symbols when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, Examples include the state of special symbol variation when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the state of special symbol variation when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the state of normal symbol variation (the state from when the normal symbol variation starts until it ends), the state of normal symbol variation when the result of the normal symbol jackpot lottery is a win, the state of normal symbol variation when the result of the normal symbol jackpot lottery is a loss, the state in which movable parts installed on the game board are operating, the state in which various effects are being executed, the state in which effects are being executed in jackpot games, the state in which effects are being executed in special symbol games, and any combination of these.

The predetermined update state is any state in which specific information is updated based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the display of the predetermined symbols, and as a result, some benefit can be granted to the player. Examples of predetermined update states that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: a state in which a jackpot game can be started, a state in which a jackpot game can be ended, a state in which a minor jackpot game can be started, a state in which a minor jackpot game can be ended, a state in which a normal jackpot game can be started, a state in which a normal jackpot game can be ended, a state in which a probability variation game can be started, a state in which a probability variation game can be ended, a state in which a time-saving game can be started, a state in which a time-saving game can be ended, b state in which a time-saving game can be started, b state in which a time-saving game can be ended, c state in which a time-saving game can be started, c state in which a time-saving game can be ended, a state in which the display of the predetermined symbols can be started, and predetermined The display of the changing symbols can be ended, the display of the changing special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be started, the display of the changing special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be ended, the display of the changing special symbols can be started if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the display of the changing special symbols has started if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the display of the changing special symbols is in progress if the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the display of the changing special symbols has stopped if the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the display of the changing decorative symbols can be started, the display of the changing decorative symbols can be ended, the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot The display of decorative symbols changes when there is a win, the display of decorative symbols changes when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the display of decorative symbols changes when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the display of decorative symbols changes when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the display of decorative symbols changes has stopped, the display of normal symbols changes can be started, the display of normal symbols changes when the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a win, the display of normal symbols changes when the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a win, the display of normal symbols changes has stopped when the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a win, various counters The following states can be triggered: when the value of the random number counter becomes 0, when various counters reach a predetermined value or higher, when the subtractive counter (remaining ceiling activation counter) corresponding to the number of special symbol games required to trigger the b time-saving game state becomes 0, when the additive counter (remaining ceiling activation counter) corresponding to the number of special symbol games required to trigger the b time-saving game state becomes 0, when the value of the jackpot random number counter becomes the value corresponding to a jackpot, when the value of the jackpot random number counter becomes the value corresponding to a minor win, when the value of the random number counter becomes a minor win A state in which the value corresponding to the end of the probability variation jackpot game is reached, a state in which a probability variation game state can be generated based on the subtractive ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time becoming 0, a state in which a probability variation game state can be generated based on the additive ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time becoming a predetermined value or greater, a state in which a time-saving game state can be generated based on the subtractive ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time becoming 0, a state in which a time-saving game state can be generated based on the additive ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time becoming a predetermined value or greater A state in which a time-saving game state can be generated based on: a state in which a time-saving game state can be generated based on the subtractive ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of a normal jackpot game ending becoming 0; a state in which a time-saving game state can be generated based on the additive ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of a normal jackpot game ending becoming 0 or more; a state in which the value of the subtractive time counter corresponding to the remaining time of a minor jackpot game becomes 0 when a game ball enters the V-entry slot during the execution of a minor jackpot game; an additive time counter corresponding to the remaining time of a minor jackpot game when a game ball enters the V-entry slot during the execution of a minor jackpot game. Examples of states that trigger a special feature game include: the counter value exceeding a predetermined value; the state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire special feature game is updated (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM); the state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire special feature game has been executed to the end (the state in which the drawing process on the display means in the special feature game has ended); the state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire jackpot game has been executed to the end (the state in which the drawing process on the display means in the jackpot game has ended); the state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire minor jackpot game has been executed to the end (the state in which the drawing process on the display means in the minor jackpot game has ended); the state in which a pointer used to determine the update position in the drawing list for a special feature game indicates the last update position in the drawing list; the state in which a pointer used to determine the update position in the drawing list for a jackpot game indicates the last update position in the drawing list; the state in which a pointer used to determine the update position in the drawing list for a minor jackpot game indicates the last update position in the drawing list; and any combination of these states.

A predetermined benefit state is any state that grants some kind of benefit to the player. Examples of predetermined benefit states, if they allow the spirit of the present invention to be realized, include: a state where prize balls are more likely to be awarded; a jackpot game state; a minor jackpot game state; a state where the jackpot lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot; a state where the jackpot lottery result is more likely to be a minor jackpot; a probability game state; a state where the electric mechanism is more likely to operate; a state where the regular jackpot lottery result is more likely to be a win; a time-saving game state; b time-saving game state; c time-saving game state; a state in minor jackpot games where the expected payout is higher when a V-win is achieved than when a V-win is not achieved and the b time-saving game state occurs; a state in minor jackpot games where the expected payout is higher when a V-win is not achieved and the b time-saving game state occurs than when a V-win is achieved; a state in special symbol games where a specific effect is performed; a state in special symbol games where a jackpot confirmation effect is performed; a state in special symbol games where a probability variation jackpot confirmation effect is performed; and a state in special symbol games where a minor jackpot confirmation effect is performed. Examples of such states include: a state in which a special feature game shows a gameplay method that is advantageous in terms of expected payout; a state in which a special feature game shows that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout to hit the V-slot during a minor win; a state in which a special feature game shows that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout not to hit the V-slot during a minor win; a state in which a specific special feature is performed during a big win; a state in which a probability-increase special feature is performed during a big win; a state in which a consecutive win special feature is performed during a big win; a state in which a reserved-win special feature is performed during a big win; a state in which a special feature game shows that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout to hit the V-slot during a minor win than to not hit the V-slot and trigger the b-time-saving game state; a state in which a special feature game shows that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout to not hit the V-slot and trigger the b-time-saving game state than to hit the V-slot during a minor win; and any combination of these.

The notification method can be any method corresponding to a predetermined notification. Examples of notification methods that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, notification methods using images, notification methods using light, notification methods using sound, methods that notify the player of benefits, methods that notify the player of disadvantages, methods that notify future events, methods that notify that a prize ball is likely to be awarded, methods that notify that a jackpot game state is in progress, methods that notify that a minor win game state is in progress, methods that notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is likely to be a jackpot, methods that notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is likely to be a minor win, and A manner of notifying that the game is in a rate-based game state, a manner of notifying that the electric mechanism is in a state where it is easy to operate, a manner of notifying that the result of the regular drawing lottery is likely to be a win, a manner of notifying that the game is in a time-saving game state, b manner of notifying that the game is in a time-saving game state, c manner of notifying that the game is in a time-saving game state, a manner of notifying that in a small win game the expected value of payouts is higher when the V-slot is hit than when the time-saving game state b is generated without hitting the V-slot, a manner of notifying that in a small win game the expected value of payouts is higher when the V-slot is hit than when the time-saving game state b is generated without hitting the V-slot A manner of notifying that the expected value of payouts is higher if the player does not hit the V-slot during a minor win in a special symbol game; a manner of notifying that an animation is performed that indicates that the expected value of payouts is higher if the player does not hit the V-slot during a minor win in a special symbol game; a manner of displaying reach animations in a special symbol game (type of reach animation); a manner of notifying future reach animation types in a special symbol game (e.g., animation stock); a manner of notifying that some kind of animation will occur in a special symbol game. A manner of notifying the result of the jackpot lottery (e.g., timer effect), a manner of notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a manner of notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, a manner of notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, a manner of notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss and then that it is a jackpot (e.g., revival effect), a manner of notifying that the type of jackpot is more advantageous to the player (probability variation jackpot, RUSH entry guaranteed jackpot, jackpot with more rounds) (e.g., promotion animation), stopping patterns (stopping types) of predetermined symbols in special symbol games, stopping patterns (stopping types) of special symbols in special symbol games, stopping patterns of special symbols that indicate a jackpot in special symbol games, stopping patterns of special symbols that indicate a probability-increasing jackpot in special symbol games, stopping patterns of special symbols that indicate a normal win in special symbol games, stopping patterns of special symbols that indicate a time-saving jackpot in special symbol games, stopping patterns that indicate a minor win in special symbol games, stopping patterns that indicate a miss in special symbol games Stopping patterns, stopping patterns of decorative symbols in special feature games (types of stopping), stopping patterns of decorative symbols that indicate a jackpot in special feature games (e.g., stopping with matching numbers), stopping patterns of decorative symbols that indicate a probability variation jackpot in special feature games (e.g., stopping with matching 7s), stopping patterns of decorative symbols that indicate a normal jackpot in special feature games (e.g., matching even-numbered symbols), stopping patterns of decorative symbols that indicate a time-saving jackpot in special feature games, stopping patterns of decorative symbols that indicate a minor win in special feature games, in special feature games The stopping patterns of decorative symbols indicate a loss (e.g., non-double stop), the stopping patterns of decorative symbols indicate a near miss in special feature games, the stopping patterns of decorative symbols indicate a near miss other than a near miss in special feature games, the stopping patterns of decorative symbols indicate a complete loss in special feature games (e.g., scattered stop), and the stopping state of decorative symbols in special feature games changes from a state where they indicate a loss (e.g., non-double stop) to a state where they indicate a loss in special feature games (e.g., double stop). Examples include: the manner in which the stopping state of decorative symbols in special symbol games changes from a state indicating a jackpot (e.g., a state where all sevens are stopped) to a state indicating a more advantageous jackpot for the player (e.g., a jackpot with a guaranteed RUSH entry, or a jackpot with more rounds) (e.g., a state where all sevens are stopped); the stopping manner (stopping type) of ordinary symbols in ordinary symbol games; the stopping manner of ordinary symbols in ordinary symbol games indicating a win; the stopping manner of ordinary symbols in ordinary symbol games indicating a loss; and any combination thereof.

The notification control means can be any process that controls the notification mode. As long as it can realize the spirit of the present invention, the notification control means can include, for example, a process that controls the notification mode using images, a process that controls the notification mode using light, a process that controls the notification mode using sound, a process that controls the notification mode to inform the player of their benefits, a process that controls the notification mode to inform the player of their disadvantages, a process that controls the notification mode to inform future events, a process that controls the notification mode to inform that the game is in a state where prize balls are likely to be awarded, a process that controls the notification mode to inform that the game is in a jackpot state, a process that controls the notification mode to inform that the game is in a minor win state, a process that controls the notification mode to inform that the result of the jackpot lottery is likely to be a jackpot, and jackpot A process to control the system to notify that the result of the lottery is likely to be a minor win, a process to control the system to notify that it is in a probability game state, a process to control the system to notify that it is in a state where the electric mechanism is likely to operate, a process to control the system to notify that it is in a time-saving game state, b process to notify that it is in a time-saving game state, c process to notify that it is in a time-saving game state, a process to control the system to notify that it is in a state where it is in a time-saving game state, a process to control the system to notify that in a minor win game the expected value of payouts is higher when the ball enters the V-slot than when the ball does not enter the V-slot and the b time-saving game state is generated, a process to control the system to notify that the expected value of payouts is higher when the ball enters the V-slot in a minor win game, b process to notify that the ball does not enter the V-slot and the b time-saving game state is generated A process to control the system to notify that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout to trigger a certain event; a process to control the system to notify that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout to trigger a V-slot during a minor win in a special feature game; a process to control the system to notify that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout to not trigger a reach effect (type of reach effect) in a special feature game; a process to control the system to notify that it is more advantageous in terms of expected payout to trigger a reach effect in a special feature game (e.g., effect stock); a process to notify that some effect will occur in a special feature game. Processes to control the notification method (e.g., timer effect), process to control the notification method to indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, process to control the notification method to indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, process to control the notification method to indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, process to control the notification method to indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss and then a jackpot (e.g., revival effect), process to indicate that the type of jackpot is more advantageous to the player (e.g., probability variation jackpot, RUSH entry guaranteed jackpot, jackpot with more rounds) after indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (e.g., promotion effect) Process to control the outcome, process to control the stopping pattern (stop type) of a predetermined symbol in a special symbol game, process to control the stopping pattern (stop type) of a special symbol in a special symbol game, process to control the stopping pattern of a special symbol that indicates a big win in a special symbol game, process to control the stopping pattern of a special symbol that indicates a probability variation big win in a special symbol game, process to control the stopping pattern of a special symbol that indicates a normal win in a special symbol game, process to control the stopping pattern of a special symbol that indicates a time-saving big win in a special symbol game, process to control the stopping pattern that indicates a small win in a special symbol game, process to control the outcome of a miss in a special symbol game Processes to control the stopping pattern to notify that a win has occurred; processes to control the stopping pattern (stopping type) of decorative symbols in special feature games; processes to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to notify that it is a jackpot (e.g., stopping with matching numbers); processes to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to notify that it is a probability variation jackpot (e.g., stopping with matching 7s); processes to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to notify that it is a normal jackpot (e.g., matching even-numbered symbols); processes to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to notify that it is a time-saving jackpot; processes to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to notify that it is a minor win. Processes to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to indicate a loss (e.g., non-double stop), process to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to indicate a near miss (fore and after), process to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols to indicate a near miss (other than a near miss), process to control the stopping pattern of decorative symbols in special feature games to indicate a complete loss (e.g., scattered stop), process to change the stopping state of decorative symbols in special feature games from a state where they indicate a loss (e.g., non-double stop) to a state where they indicate a loss (e.g., double stop) Examples include: a process to control the stopping state of decorative symbols in special feature games to change from a state that signals a jackpot (e.g., a state where all sevens stop) to a state that signals a more advantageous jackpot for the player (e.g., a jackpot with a guaranteed RUSH entry, or a jackpot with more rounds) (e.g., a state where all sevens stop); a process to control the stopping state (stopping type) of ordinary symbols in regular feature games; a process to control the stopping state of ordinary symbols in regular feature games to signal a win; a process to control the stopping state of ordinary symbols in regular feature games to signal a loss; and any combination thereof.

The predetermined game conditions are any conditions that are met based on predetermined game operations performed by the player when the result of a predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result. Examples of predetermined game conditions that can realize the spirit of the present invention include: conditions that are met when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot; conditions that are met when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation win; conditions that are met when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time reduction win; conditions that are met when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot; conditions that are met when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win; conditions that are met when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss; conditions that are met in a jackpot game performed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot; conditions that are met when the player operates the launch handle to launch game balls in a jackpot game performed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot; and conditions that are met when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Conditions that are met when a game ball enters a designated prize slot in a jackpot game that is executed at the same time; conditions that are met when a game ball enters a designated prize slot by the player operating the launch handle to launch a game ball in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot; conditions that are met when a game ball enters the V prize slot in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot; conditions that are met in a probability variation jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot; conditions that are met when a game ball enters the V prize slot in a probability variation jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot; when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving jackpot. Conditions that are met in a time-saving jackpot game, conditions that are met in a normal jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, conditions that are met in a minor jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor jackpot, conditions that are met in a minor jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor jackpot, when the player operates the launch handle to launch the game ball, when the player operates the launch handle to launch the game ball, and the game ball enters the designated prize slot, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor jackpot, when the game ball enters the V prize slot. Examples of conditions that can be met include: conditions that are met by a ball entering the game; conditions that are met based on operation of control buttons; conditions that are met based on touch operation on the front of the game board; conditions that are met by the player operating the launch handle to launch a game ball; conditions that are met by the player operating the launch handle to launch a game ball, resulting in the game ball entering a designated prize slot; conditions that are met by the player operating the launch handle to launch a game ball into the left side of the game board; conditions that are met by the player operating the launch handle to launch a game ball into the right side of the game board; conditions that are met by the player operating the launch handle to launch a game ball into the right side of the game board; and any combination thereof.

The specific benefit can be any benefit granted when certain game conditions are met. Examples of specific benefits, if they allow the spirit of the present invention to be realized, include: a benefit granted when the result of a predetermined lottery is a specific result; a benefit granted when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot; execution of a jackpot game; execution of a probability-increasing jackpot game; occurrence of a probability-increasing game state based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry slot in a probability-increasing jackpot game; execution of a time-saving jackpot game; occurrence of a time-saving game state a based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry slot in a probability-increasing jackpot game; execution of a normal jackpot game; occurrence of a time-saving game state a based on the execution of a normal jackpot game; and a jackpot lottery. The following are possible outcomes: the benefit given when the result is a minor win, the execution of the minor win game, the execution of the major win game based on the entry of game balls into the V-entry slot in the minor win game, the benefit given when the result of the major win lottery is a loss, the reduction in the number of special game executions required to generate the b-time-saving game state when the result of the major win lottery is a loss, the benefit given when the result of the regular win lottery is a win, the execution of the regular win game, the benefit given when game balls enter the designated entry slots, the awarding of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the designated entry slots, and general prizes. Awarding of prize balls based on game balls entering the regular prize slot, awarding of prize balls based on game balls entering the first prize slot which triggers the start of the first special symbol game, awarding of prize balls based on game balls entering the second prize slot which triggers the start of the second special symbol game, awarding of prize balls based on game balls entering the variable prize slot (large prize slot) in a big win game, awarding of prize balls based on game balls entering the variable prize slot (large prize slot) in a small win game, execution of a big win lottery based on game balls entering the first prize slot, execution of the first special symbol game based on game balls entering the first prize slot Examples include: executing a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot; executing a second special symbol game based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot; executing a regular symbol jackpot lottery based on the entry (passage) of a game ball into the through gate; executing a regular symbol jackpot game based on the entry (passage) of a game ball into the through gate; executing a specific effect; executing a specific effect in the special symbol game; executing a jackpot confirmation effect in the special symbol game; executing an upgrade effect in the special symbol game; executing a revival effect in the special symbol game; executing a specific effect in the jackpot game; executing an upgrade effect in the jackpot game; and any combination thereof.

The means for generating profit can be any process that generates a specific profit. Examples of means for generating profit that can realize the spirit of the present invention include, for example, a process that generates a profit when the result of a predetermined lottery is a specific result, a process that generates a profit when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a process that executes a jackpot game, a process that executes a probability variation jackpot game, a process that generates a probability variation game state based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry slot in a probability variation jackpot game, a process that executes a time-saving jackpot game, a process that generates a time-saving game state a based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry slot in a probability variation jackpot game, a process that executes a normal jackpot game, a process that generates a time-saving game state a based on the execution of a normal jackpot game, and jackpots. Process to generate a bonus when the lottery result is a minor win; process to execute a minor win game; process to execute a major win game based on the entry of game balls into the V-entry slot in the minor win game; process to generate a bonus when the big win lottery result is a loss; process to subtract the number of special game executions required to generate the b-time-saving game state when the big win lottery result is a loss; process to generate a bonus when the regular win lottery result is a win; process to execute a regular win game; process to generate a bonus when game balls enter a designated entry slot; award prize balls based on the entry of game balls into a designated entry slot. The process of awarding prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general prize slot (normal prize slot), the process of awarding prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first prize slot which gives the opportunity to start the first special symbol game, the process of awarding prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot which gives the opportunity to start the second special symbol game, the process of awarding prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the variable prize slot (large prize slot) in a big win game, the process of awarding prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the variable prize slot (large prize slot) in a small win game, the process of executing a big win lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first prize slot, the process of executing the first special symbol game based on the entry of game balls into the first prize slot, the process of awarding prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot Examples of processes include: executing a jackpot lottery based on the ball's entry; executing a second special symbol game based on the ball's entry into the second prize slot; executing a regular symbol jackpot lottery based on the ball's entry (passage) through the through gate; executing a regular symbol jackpot game based on the ball's entry (passage) through the through gate; executing a specific animation; executing a specific animation in a special symbol game; executing a jackpot confirmation animation in a special symbol game; executing an upgrade animation in a special symbol game; executing a revival animation in a special symbol game; executing a specific animation in a jackpot game; executing an upgrade animation in a jackpot game; and any combination thereof.

By the way, in recent gaming machines, for example, in a predetermined game state such as a low probability mode (a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low), if the number of special symbol variations (for example, a counter corresponding to the number of special symbol games required to generate the b time-saving game state) reaches a predetermined number of times, the machine will transition to a predetermined benefit state, such as the b time-saving game state or the ceiling time-saving game state, as an update information. The notification for this transition is monotonous, for example, only notifying the remaining number of special symbol games required to reach the predetermined number, or displaying the same content until the predetermined number is reached, and further ingenuity is needed. Specifically, for example, in the b time-saving game state, which is a benefit game state, the second prize slot, which gives the opportunity to execute the jackpot lottery, is opened at a high frequency by the operation of an electric mechanism at a high frequency. Therefore, in the b time-saving game state, it is easier to receive prize balls and jackpot lotteries as benefits based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot. As a result, in the shortened game mode (b), players can receive a jackpot draw while suppressing the decrease in game balls. Therefore, compared to the normal game mode where entering the second prize slot is unnecessary or difficult, the number of game balls required to trigger a jackpot as a bonus can be reduced.

Furthermore, in recent gaming machines, the benefits awarded to players tend to be higher when a jackpot is triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot compared to when a jackpot is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot. For example, the probability of entering a state where a jackpot is more likely to occur (the so-called RUSH state) is more favorable when a game ball enters the second prize slot compared to when a game ball enters the first prize slot. In one example, the RUSH entry rate is set to 50% when a game ball enters the first prize slot, while it is set to 100% when a game ball enters the second prize slot. Therefore, the b-time-saving game state, which is a profitable game state, has a higher RUSH entry rate compared to the normal game state. As a result, the expected value of payouts after the first jackpot (the average total number of prize balls received by the player) is higher when the first jackpot occurs in the b-time-saving game state (low probability mode) compared to when the first jackpot occurs in the normal game state (low probability mode). Thus, the expected value of payouts is higher when the first jackpot occurs in the b-time-saving game state compared to the normal game state.

Here, in order to transition from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state, it is necessary to play a specified number of special feature games in the normal game state, where the number of game balls decreases more than in the b-time-saving game state. As a result, until the negative difference in balls in the normal game state (the difference between the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls launched) reaches a predetermined number, the expected value of the difference in balls when the first jackpot game is achieved in the normal game state (the average value of the difference between the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls launched) is higher than when the first jackpot game is achieved in the b-time-saving game state. On the other hand, once the negative difference in balls in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number, the expected value of the difference in balls when the first jackpot game is achieved in the b-time-saving game state becomes higher than when the first jackpot game is achieved in the normal game state. Thus, from the perspective of expected value of winning tokens, there are situations where it is more advantageous for the player to trigger a jackpot during normal gameplay, and situations where it is more advantageous for the player to transition to a time-saving game state before triggering a jackpot without triggering a jackpot during normal gameplay.

However, it is not possible to control the timing of jackpot wins in gaming machines. Therefore, jackpot wins may occur at times when the expected value of balls won in normal gameplay is negative, for example, just before transitioning to the time-saving gameplay state. Furthermore, in normal gameplay, the jackpot lottery is conducted based on the number of balls entering the first prize slot, resulting in the player not entering RUSH mode. In this case, the player does not receive the benefit of entering RUSH mode, which may decrease their interest and enjoyment of the game.

In contrast, in the present invention, when the result of a predetermined determination becomes a specific determination result, the specific information updated by the update means based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the variable display is notified by a first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, and the notification mode is switched to a second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. In this way, the fact that the result of a predetermined determination has become a specific determination result is notified by a first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, and the notification mode is switched to a second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. This makes it possible to determine whether the timing at which the result of the predetermined determination becomes a specific determination result is before the predetermined timing or after the specific timing has been reached. As a result, the player can determine whether it is advantageous to receive a specific benefit based on the specific determination result, that is, whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions, based on the type of notification mode that allows for the determination of the timing at which the specific determination result was reached. As a result, players can choose whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific benefit, or to not fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and not receive a specific benefit, and instead fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, thereby receiving a specific benefit at a time they deem advantageous. Therefore, players can avoid receiving a specific benefit when they deem it disadvantageous, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game caused by receiving a specific benefit at a time they deem disadvantageous.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is the result of a predetermined judgment, is a minor win, the fact that it is a minor win is announced by the first notification mode, which is a profit-indicating opening performance, until the break-even point, which is a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is specific information, becomes 0, is reached. After the break-even point, which is a specific timing, the fact that it is a minor win is announced by the second notification mode, which is a loss-indicating opening performance. In other words, in this embodiment, the profit or loss of the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at the stage in which the minor win game occurs is announced in a notification mode corresponding to the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at that stage in the opening of the minor win game. Therefore, when a minor win game occurs, the player can grasp the profit or loss of the profit that the player can obtain at that stage by paying attention to the opening performance of the minor win game, and the player can decide whether or not to generate a jackpot game based on the notification mode in the opening performance of the minor win game. As a result, it becomes possible to choose not to generate a jackpot when the expected value of the profit obtained by not generating a jackpot based on the minor win is higher, and to choose to generate a jackpot when the expected value of the profit obtained by generating a jackpot based on the minor win is higher. This allows players to avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (a state where players are close to reaching the ceiling limit) due to a jackpot occurring just before reaching that state, thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the notification mode of the opening sequence of the minor win game is switched after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing advantageous to the player, even if a minor win game occurs during a period near the break-even point where profit and loss judgment is difficult, it becomes possible to make a more reliable decision advantageous to the player based on the notification mode of the opening sequence of the minor win game.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 328 to 391. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again, even if they were already described in the first embodiment.

This gaming machine, as a specific configuration of the present invention, includes "update information" as specific information, "update processing" as an update means, "playing state" as a specific game state, "update completion state" as a predetermined update state, "profit game state" as a predetermined profit state, "notification display" as a notification method, "notification display control" as a notification control means, "bonus granting conditions" as predetermined game conditions, "bonus granting" as a specific profit, and "bonus granting control" as a profit generation means.

[Configuration of the gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 1 to 3, as well as Figures 328 to 330. Here, Figure 328 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 329 and 330 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the feather mechanism of the gaming machine shown in Figure 328.

[Configuration of the front frame 11]
As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illuminated unit 27, among other things.

The operation button 20 is located in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see Figure 7) that switches the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 depending on whether or not it is pressed. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to determine the operation status (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20, as described above (see Figures 45 and 46). This operation button 20 is used to trigger operation button effects in special feature games that display the results of the jackpot lottery to the player, triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period. It is also used to switch background effects (background stages) in special feature game effects, as well as to customize the game by adjusting the frequency of predetermined effects and selecting characters.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game balls. In the game machine 10, when the player rotates the launch handle 22 as a predetermined game operation, the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 (described later) with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation, thereby performing the basic game. For example, depending on the predetermined game operation performed by the player on the launch handle 22, it is possible to launch the game balls into the left side area of the game board 31, a so-called left-handed shot, and to launch the game balls into the right side area of the game board 31, a so-called right-handed shot. In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed shots are encouraged to enter the first prize entry area 314, which is the starting ball entry area, in order to perform the first special feature game, and in a predetermined profit state, right-handed shots are encouraged. Specifically, for example, in the time-saving game state (a-time-saving game state and b-time-saving game state), right-handed shooting is encouraged to execute the second special feature game as a bonus by fulfilling the bonus conditions by having the game ball enter the second prize entry area 315 or the through gate 317, which serve as the starting ball entry area. In the small win game state, which is a profitable game state, right-handed shooting is encouraged to generate a big win game as a bonus by fulfilling the bonus conditions by having the game ball enter the V prize entry area 833 of the feather mechanism device 83. In the big win game state, which is a profitable game state, right-handed shooting is encouraged to receive a large number of prize balls as a bonus by fulfilling the bonus conditions by having the game ball enter the variable prize entry area 316. Therefore, the player can receive the appropriate bonus by performing the prescribed game operation on the launch handle 22, which is encouraged according to the game state.

[Composition of inner frame 12]
As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball launching mechanism 32 as a launching means, a game board 31 on which a game area is set where game balls can flow down, and the like.

As shown in Figure 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 comprises a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid and supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launching rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, when the player performs a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the launch handle 22, and one game ball is launched towards the game area every 0.6 seconds. Note that the game ball launching mechanism 32 may use other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323 to launch the game balls.

As shown in Figure 328, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general prize entry point 313, a first prize entry point 314 and a second prize entry point 315 as starting ball entry areas, a V prize entry point 833 and a normal prize entry point 834 of the wing mechanism 83 (described later) which are activated in minor prize games, a variable prize entry point 316 as a variable ball entry means activated in major prize games, a through gate 317 as a starting ball entry area, an out entry point 318, a variable display unit 34 as a display means, a main display unit 36 as a display means, and the wing mechanism 83.

The inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending game balls, launched by a predetermined game operation performed by the player on the launch handle 22, towards the game area on the game board 31. Game balls launched from the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 by the player on the launch handle 22 are discharged from the out-out opening 318 if they do not enter the general prize opening 313, the first prize opening 314, the second prize opening 315, the V prize opening 833, the normal prize opening 834, or the variable prize opening 316. On the other hand, when a game ball launched by a player using a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 enters the general prize pocket 313, the first prize pocket 314, the second prize pocket 315, the V prize pocket 833, the normal prize pocket 834, or the variable prize pocket 316, a prize ball awarding process is executed as a bonus awarding control, and a predetermined number of prize balls are dispensed. For example, in the prize ball awarding process as a bonus awarding control, 10 prize balls are awarded for a game ball entering the general prize pocket 313, 3 prize balls are awarded for a game ball entering the first prize pocket 314 or the second prize pocket 315, and 10 prize balls are awarded for a game ball entering the V prize pocket 833, the normal prize pocket 834, or the variable prize pocket 316.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the through gate 317, no prize balls are paid out. However, as a condition for granting a bonus, the entry of a game ball into the through gate 317 triggers the execution of bonus granting control related to the general prize draw, which is the winning/losing lottery process. If the general prize draw results in a general prize win, a general prize game is executed as a bonus grant. In this general prize game, the electric mechanism 315b is activated as a bonus granting control, and the second prize entry area 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is opened. Thus, in the general prize game, the opening of the second prize entry area 315 allows game balls to enter the second prize entry area 315.

Furthermore, if the conditions for granting a bonus are met when a game ball enters either the first or second prize entry point 314, which serve as the starting ball entry area, a special jackpot lottery is executed as a bonus grant. This special jackpot lottery is realized by the execution of bonus granting control by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4). The result of the special jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 is notified by the execution of a special jackpot game (first special jackpot game or second special jackpot game) in which a predetermined special jackpot (first special jackpot or second special jackpot) is displayed in the second special jackpot display section 363 of the main display unit 36, which is a display means. Simultaneously, the result of the special jackpot lottery is also notified by the display of a predetermined decorative jackpot in the symbol display section 341 of the variable display unit 34, which is a display means.

Furthermore, if the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a minor win, thus fulfilling the conditions for granting a bonus, a minor win game will be executed as a bonus grant after the completion of the special feature game. In this minor win game, the movable wing section 832 and the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 are activated as bonus grant control, allowing game balls to enter the V-entry opening 833 and the normal entry opening 834. Also, if the conditions for granting a bonus are fulfilled when a game ball launched by the player through a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 enters the V-entry opening 833 or the normal entry opening 834, a prize ball will be awarded as a bonus. In addition, if the conditions for granting a bonus are fulfilled when a game ball launched by the player through a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 enters the V-entry opening 833 during a minor win game, a jackpot game will occur as a bonus grant after the completion of the minor win game. Thus, in a minor win game, the player can receive a prize ball as a bonus if the game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 or the regular entry slot 834, which is a condition for bonus granting, through a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 performed by the player. Conversely, if the game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 or the regular entry slot 834, which is a condition for bonus granting, through a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 performed by the player, it becomes possible to generate a jackpot game as a bonus granting. Conversely, if the player does not perform the predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22, the game will not receive a bonus because the game ball will not enter the V-entry slot 833 or the regular entry slot 834, and a jackpot game will not occur after the minor win game ends. Therefore, after the minor win game ends, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol game based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry slot 314 or the second entry slot 315.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if, in a minor win game, the conditions for granting a bonus are met when a game ball launched by the player through a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 enters the V-entry opening 833, a major win game will occur after the minor win game ends. In this major win game, as a bonus granting control, a predetermined number of round games (for example, 5 or 16 times) are repeatedly executed in the opening/closing execution mode. In each round game, the opening/closing door 319 operates between a position that closes the variable entry opening 316, which serves as a variable ball entry means, and a position that opens the variable entry opening 316. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the bonus granting control is executed on the opening/closing door 319, and a number of round games determined according to the result of the major win lottery is executed from a plurality of round game numbers (for example, 5 or 16 times). Thus, in a jackpot game, the variable prize entry point 316, which serves as a variable ball entry means, is repeatedly opened in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, based on the predetermined game operation performed by the player on the launch handle 22, the entry of game balls into the variable prize entry point 316, which is a condition for awarding a bonus, can be expected to result in the awarding of a large number of prize balls. Conversely, if the predetermined game operation is not performed by the player on the launch handle 22, the entry of game balls into the variable prize entry point 316, which is a condition for awarding a bonus, will not be met, and the bonus will not be awarded. After the jackpot game ends, the game will be in a state where it is possible to execute a special game based on the entry of game balls into the first prize entry point 314 or the second prize entry point 315.

[Feather accessory device 83]
Unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a type 1 and type 2 mixed machine rather than a loop probability variation machine, and is equipped with a feather mechanism 83 as described above. The feather mechanism 83 is activated in the minor win game, in which a bonus is awarded when the bonus awarding conditions are met by the result of the big win lottery being a minor win. When the feather mechanism 83 is activated in this minor win game, a type 2 big win game is executed as a bonus award, based on the fact that the game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 described later, which is a bonus awarding condition.

The wing mechanism 83 is located above the variable prize entry opening 316, which serves as a variable ball entry means, and to the right of the pattern display unit 341, which serves as a display means. As shown in Figure 329, the wing mechanism 83 has an entry opening 831 for introducing game balls 99 into the wing mechanism 83, and a movable wing section 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (position of the solid line in Figure 329) that closes the entry opening 831 and an open position (position of the dashed line in Figure 329) that opens the entry opening 831. When the movable wing section 832 is in the standby position and the entry opening 831 is closed by the movable wing section 832, game balls 99 cannot be introduced into the wing mechanism 83. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 330(A) and 330(B), when the movable wing section 832 is in the open position, the entry port 831 is open, allowing the movable wing section 832 to receive the game balls 99. The game balls 99 received by the movable wing section 832 can be introduced into the wing mechanism 83 via the entry port 831. The movable wing section 832 is activated to the open position when the result of the jackpot lottery, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry port 315 (the starting ball entry area), is a minor win (see Figure 341(A)). This opens the entry port 831 for a predetermined time, for example, the time it takes for 1 to 3 game balls 99 to enter the wing mechanism 83 (1.8 seconds or less). Of course, the opening time of the entry port 831 during a minor win can be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

The wing mechanism 83 contains a V-prize entry point 833, a regular prize entry point 834, and a V-prize entry point opening/closing section 835. The V-prize entry point 833 and the regular prize entry point 834 are each equipped with ball entry sensors 833a and 834a (see Figure 331). These sensors detect when a game ball enters the V-prize entry point 833 or the regular prize entry point 834. When the ball entry sensor 833a or 834a detects the entry of a game ball, and the conditions for awarding a prize are met, the prize award control is executed, and prize balls are awarded as a prize.

The V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (see Figure 330(A)) that closes the V-prize opening 833 and an open position (see Figure 330(B)) that opens the V-prize opening 833. Normally, the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 is in standby position, closing the V-prize opening 833. When the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, it is activated at a predetermined timing to open the V-prize opening 833.

In this embodiment, a V-prize entry point 833 and a normal prize entry point 834 are provided inside the wing mechanism 83, but the normal prize entry point 834 may be omitted. Also, in this embodiment, the wing mechanism 83 is provided separately from the variable prize entry point 316, which serves as a variable ball entry means, but the variable prize entry point 316 may be omitted, and the wing mechanism 83 may be used as a variable ball entry means that operates during a jackpot game.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to Figures 331 to 345, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 in this embodiment and the various tables used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 will be described.

Here, Figure 331 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in Figure 331, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 is basically the same as that of the first embodiment described above, but it differs from the first embodiment in that a feather mechanism 83 is provided, which includes an entry sensor 833a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the V-entry opening 833, and an entry sensor 834a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal entry opening 834.

[Electrical configuration of the display control device 6]
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 6 will be described with reference to Figure 332. Figure 332 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the display control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 328. As shown in Figure 332, the display control device 6 includes an MPU 631, a work RAM 633, a character ROM 634, a resident video RAM 635, a normal video RAM 636, an image controller 637, an input port 638, an output port 639, and bus lines 640 and 641.

The input side of input port 638 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 5. The output side of input port 638 is connected to the MPU 631, work RAM 633, character ROM 634, and image controller 637 via bus line 640. The image controller 637 is connected to the resident video RAM 635 and the normal video RAM 636, and output port 639 is connected via bus line 641. Furthermore, the pattern display unit 341 is connected to the output side of output port 639.

The following sections will first describe the MPU 631, character ROM 634, image controller 637, resident video RAM 635, and normal video RAM 636, followed by the work RAM 633.

First, the MPU 631 controls the display content of the graphic display unit 341 based on the display variable pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 5, which is based on the variable pattern command of the main control device 4. The MPU 631 has an instruction pointer 631a whose address is updated (moved) by an update process. It reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 631a and executes various processes according to that instruction code. The MPU 631 is configured to undergo a system reset from the power control device 9 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration after a power outage; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information is set to "0000H" by an update process automatically executed by the hardware of the MPU 631. Then, each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information is incremented by 1 by the update process. Furthermore, when the MPU 631 executes a setting instruction for the instruction pointer 631a, the value of the pointer, which is the update information indicated by that setting instruction, is set to the instruction pointer 631a.

In this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 631 and the various fixed value data used in that control program are stored in the character ROM 634, which is provided for storing image data to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341. Of course, the control program executed by the MPU 631 and the various fixed value data used in that control program may also be stored in a dedicated program ROM.

The character ROM 634 is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a, which enables high capacity in a small area. This allows for sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs and other data. Furthermore, by storing the control programs and other data in the character ROM 634, there is no need for a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs and other data. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 6 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be lowered, and the increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that its read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read quickly, but reading the data on the first page requires a significant amount of time from the time the address is specified until the data is output. Furthermore, reading non-contiguous data also requires a significant amount of time each time the data is read. Thus, because NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 631 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 634 and execute various processes, reading the instructions that make up the control program may take a long time. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 631, this could degrade the processing performance of the display control device 6.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 631 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 634a of the character ROM 634 is first transferred and stored in the work RAM 633, which is provided for temporary storage of various data. Then, the MPU 631 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 633. As described later, the work RAM 633 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so the MPU 631 can read the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and diverse and complex effects can be easily executed using the graphic display unit 341.

The character ROM 634 is a memory that stores control programs executed in the MPU 631 and image data displayed in the graphic display unit 341. It is connected to the MPU 631 via the bus line 640. After a system reset is released, the MPU 631 directly accesses the character ROM 634 via the bus line 640 and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 (described later) of the character ROM 634 to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633. The image controller 637 is also connected to the bus line 640. The image controller 637 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 634a2 (described later) of the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 and the normal video RAM 636, both connected to the image controller 637.

This character ROM 634 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 634a, a ROM controller 634b, a buffer RAM 634c, and a NOR type ROM 634d.

The NAND flash memory 634a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 634. It includes at least a second program storage area 634a1 for storing most of the control programs executed by the MPU 631 and fixed value data for driving the graphic display unit 341, and a character storage area 634a2 for storing image (character, etc.) data to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341.

Here, NAND flash memory has the characteristic of providing a large storage capacity in a small area, making it easy to increase the capacity of the character ROM 634. Therefore, in this gaming machine 10, by using, for example, a NAND flash memory 634a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 634a2 as images to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Thus, to further enhance the player's enjoyment, the images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be made more diverse and complex.

Furthermore, the NAND flash memory 634a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 634a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 634a1. In this way, since the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 634, which is provided for storing image data to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341, without the need for a dedicated program ROM, the number of components in the display control device 6 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be lowered, and the increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 634b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 634. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 631 or image controller 637 via the bus line 640, it reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 634a, etc., and outputs it to the MPU 631 or image controller 637 via the bus line 640.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 634a is prone to generating a relatively large number of error bits (bits with incorrect data written to them) during data writing, and also prone to generating bad data blocks that cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 634b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 634a and performs known data address conversion to avoid bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 634a.

This ROM controller 634b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 634a, including error bits. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 634a as the character ROM 634, it is possible to prevent the MPU 631 from processing based on incorrect data, and the image controller 637 from generating various images.

Furthermore, since the ROM controller 634b analyzes the bad data blocks in the NAND flash memory 634a and avoids access to those bad data blocks, the MPU 631 and image controller 637 can easily access the character ROM 634 without having to consider the different address locations of bad data blocks in each individual NAND flash memory 634a. Therefore, even when using NAND flash memory 634a for the character ROM 634, the complexity of access control to the character ROM 634 can be suppressed.

The buffer RAM 634c is a memory used as a buffer to temporarily store data read from the NAND flash memory 634a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 634 is specified via the bus line 640 from the MPU 631 or image controller 637, the ROM controller 634b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data containing the data corresponding to the specified address is already set in the buffer RAM 634c. If it is not set, it reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data containing the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 634a (or NOR ROM 634d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 634c. Then, after applying known error correction processing, the ROM controller 634b outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 631 or image controller 637 via the bus line 640.

This buffer RAM 634c is composed of two banks, with each bank capable of holding one page of data from the NAND flash memory 634a. This allows the ROM controller 634b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 634a to an external source while data is already set in one bank, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 631 or image controller 637, from the NAND flash memory 634a to one bank, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 631 or image controller 637 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 631 or image controller 637. Therefore, the responsiveness of character ROM 634 reading can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 634d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 634. It is configured to complement the NAND-type flash memory 634a, and therefore has a significantly smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND-type flash memory 634a. The NOR-type ROM 634d includes at least a first program storage area 634d1, which stores control programs stored in the character ROM 634 that are not stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 634a. Specifically, it stores a portion of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 631 after a system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 6 so that various controls on the graphic display unit 341 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 631 first executes this boot program. This allows the display control device 6 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 634d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of the boot program, within the capacity of one bank of buffer RAM 634c (i.e., one page of NAND flash memory 634a), starting with the instructions that the MPU 631 should process first after the system reset is released. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 634d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of buffer RAM 634c, and may be set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 6.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 631 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information to "0000H" via hardware, and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 631a to the bus line 640. Meanwhile, when the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified to the bus line 640, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR-type ROM 634d to one bank of the buffer RAM 634c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631.

When the MPU 631 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 634, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code and performs an update process that increments the instruction pointer 631a by 1, specifying the address indicated by the instruction pointer 631a to the bus line 640. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 640 points to a program stored in the NOR-type ROM 634d, the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634b reads the instruction code for the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 634c from the NOR-type ROM 634d and outputs it to the MPU 631.

In this embodiment, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 634a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program—specifically, those that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset—are stored in the NOR ROM 634d for the following reason: As mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 634a has a problem specific to NAND flash memory: when reading the first page of data, it takes a considerable amount of time from specifying the address until the data is output.

If the entire control program is stored in such a NAND flash memory 634a, when the MPU 631 specifies address "0000H" via bus line 640 to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 631 should execute first after a system reset, the character ROM 634 must read one page of data, including the data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H," from the NAND flash memory 634a and set it in buffer RAM 634c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 634a, reading and setting it in buffer RAM 634c takes a considerable amount of time. Therefore, the MPU 631 consumes a significant amount of waiting time between specifying address "0000H" and receiving the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H." Consequently, the startup time for the MPU 631 increases, resulting in the problem that control of the graphic display unit 341 in the display control device 6 may not start immediately.

In contrast, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory capable of high-speed data retrieval, by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program—specifically, the instructions that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released—in the NOR-type ROM 634d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 634 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR-type ROM 634d into the buffer RAM 634c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631. Therefore, the MPU 631 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H," enabling the MPU 631 to start up quickly. Consequently, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634, which is composed of the slower NAND-type flash memory 634a, control of the graphic display unit 341 in the display control device 6 can be started immediately.

The boot program is programmed to transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a—that is, the control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR ROM 634d—and the fixed value data used in that control program (for example, the display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc., described later) in predetermined amounts (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 634a) to the program storage area 633a and data table storage area 633b of the work RAM 633. Then, after the system reset is released, the MPU 631, following the boot program read from the first program storage area 634d1, transfers and stores the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a in predetermined amounts, using a different bank than the one in the buffer RAM 634c where the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 is set.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of buffer RAM 634c. Therefore, when the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 is set to buffer RAM 634c in response to the internal bus address being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set to only one bank of buffer RAM 634c. Thus, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank of buffer RAM 634c while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 set in one bank. Therefore, since it is unnecessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 to buffer RAM 634c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 631a to a first fixed location in the program storage area 633a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 is transferred to the program storage area 633a. Therefore, after a system reset is released, when the MPU 631 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the first fixed location in the program storage area 633a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 is stored in the program storage area 633a, the MPU 631 can read the control program stored in the program storage area 633a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 631 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 634a, which has the second program storage area 634a1, and fetch instructions; instead, it reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 633, which has the program storage area 633a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 633 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 634, which is composed of the slow NAND flash memory 634a, the MPU 631 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the processing for those instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 634d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 in predetermined amounts. Furthermore, it is programmed to set the instruction pointer 631a to the first default address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 633a.

As a result, the MPU 631, using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1, transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a, and then executes the remaining boot program contained within the transferred control program.

The remaining boot program executes a process to transfer all remaining control programs and fixed value data used by those control programs (for example, the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table described later) from the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a or data table storage area 633b in predetermined amounts. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 631a is set to a second fixed location within the program storage area 633a. Specifically, this second fixed location is set to the starting address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see step S4102 in Figure 377) that is executed after the boot process (see step S4101 in Figure 377) by the boot program, which is stored in the program storage area 633a.

The MPU 631 executes the remaining boot program, transferring all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a or data table storage area 633b. Once the boot program is fully executed by the MPU 631, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the second location, and thereafter, the MPU 631 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 633a without referring to the NAND flash memory 634a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, after the system reset is released, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633. The MPU 631 then reads the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a high read speed, and performs various controls. Consequently, the display control device 6 can maintain high processing performance, and the graphic display unit 341 can easily execute diverse and complex effects.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 634d, a predetermined number of instructions that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after a system reset are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 634a. Even then, the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 633a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 634d to the character ROM 634, the MPU 631 can be started in a short time, thus suppressing the cost increase of the character ROM 634 associated with this time reduction.

The image controller 637 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that executes an update process to draw an image as update information and displays the drawn image on the graphic display unit 341 at a predetermined timing. Based on the drawing list (see Figure 339) transmitted from the MPU 631 (described later), the image controller 637 executes an update process to draw one frame's worth of image as update information. It then expands the drawn image in either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c (described later), and simultaneously outputs the image information for the first frame expanded in the other frame buffer to the graphic display unit 341, thereby displaying the image on the graphic display unit 341. The image controller 637 processes the drawing process as the update process for one frame's worth of image and the display process for one frame's worth of image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the graphic display unit 341 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 637 sends a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 631 every 20 milliseconds, which is the completion of the drawing process for updating one frame of image information. Each time the MPU 631 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see Figure 378(B)) and instructs the image controller 637 to draw (update) the next frame of image information. In response to this instruction, the image controller 637 executes the drawing process (update process) for the next frame of image information and also executes the process of displaying the previously drawn image on the pattern display unit 341.

Thus, the MPU 631 executes a V-interrupt process in response to a V-interrupt signal from the image controller 637 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 637. Therefore, the image controller 637 can receive an image drawing instruction from the MPU 631 at every 20-millisecond interval between image drawing and display processing. Consequently, the image controller 637 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing is complete. This prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an existing image, and prevents the image from being expanded into the frame buffer containing the currently displayed image information due to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 637 also performs the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 and the normal video RAM 636 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 631 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Furthermore, image rendering is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 635 and the normal video RAM 636. That is, the image data necessary for rendering is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636 based on instructions from the MPU 631 before rendering takes place.

Here, while NAND flash memory facilitates large-capacity ROMs, its read speed is slower compared to other ROMs (such as mask ROMs and EEPROMs). In response to this, the display control device 6 is configured such that the MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 after power-on. Furthermore, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 635 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the power is turned on and the transfer of image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is complete, the image controller 637 can perform image rendering using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, if the image data used for rendering is stored in the resident video RAM 635, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, during image rendering. This eliminates the time required for reading the data, allowing for immediate image rendering and display of the rendered image on the graphic display unit 341.

In particular, the resident video RAM 635 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 4 or the display control unit 6. Therefore, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with NAND flash memory 634a, high responsiveness can be maintained until any image is displayed on the graphic display unit 341.

Furthermore, when the display control device 6 uses non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 635 to draw an image, the MPU 631 is configured to instruct the image controller 637 to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 636 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, during image drawing, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed. This eliminates the time required for reading the data, allowing for immediate image drawing and display of the drawn image on the graphic display unit 341.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the regular video RAM 636, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 635, thus eliminating the need for a large-capacity resident video RAM 635. Therefore, the cost increase associated with providing a resident video RAM 635 can be minimized.

The image controller 637 has a buffer RAM 637a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is equivalent to one block of the NAND flash memory 634a.

The image data transfer instructions issued by the MPU 631 to the image controller 637 via transfer instructions and transfer data information from the drawing list include the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 634 where the image data to be transferred is stored, information about the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636), and the starting address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the source ending address.

The image controller 637, in accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, reads one block of data as update information from a predetermined address in the character ROM 634 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 637a. When the resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636 is not in use, it transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 637a to the resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636. This process is repeated until all image data stored from the starting address to the ending address of the storage source, as indicated by the transfer instruction, has been transferred.

This allows image data read from the character ROM 634 over time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 637a, and then transferred from the buffer RAM 637a to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 from being occupied for a long time during the transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636. Consequently, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 from being occupied by image data transfer, preventing them from being used for image rendering processing, and thus preventing the image rendering and display on the graphic display unit 341 from being completed in time.

Furthermore, since the transfer of image data from buffer RAM 637a to resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636 is performed by the image controller 637, it is easy to determine the period during which resident video RAM 635 and normal video RAM 636 are not being used for image rendering or display processing on the pattern display unit 341, thereby simplifying the process.

The resident video RAM 635 is used to ensure that image data transferred from the character ROM 634 is retained without being overwritten while the power is on. It includes a main image area 635a, a background image area 635c, a character pattern area 635e, and an error message image area 635f, as well as at least a power-on variable image area 635b and a decorative pattern area 635d.

The power-on main image area 635a is a region that stores data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 from the time the power is turned on until all image data to be permanently stored in the resident video RAM 635 is stored. The power-on variable image area 635b is a region that stores image data corresponding to the power-on variable image, which is displayed by the main control device 4 as a special symbol game effect when the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and when a ball is detected entering the first prize slot 314.

When power is supplied from the power control device 9, the MPU 631 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 637 to transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuating image at power-on from the character ROM 634 to the main image area 635a at power-on (see steps S4103 and S4104 in Figure 377).

Here, with reference to Figure 333, the power-on image fluctuation will be explained. Figure 333 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the power-on image displayed on the graphic display unit 341 while the display control device 6 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 immediately after power-on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 6 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image from the character ROM 634 to the power-on main image area 635a and the power-on variable image area 635b. Subsequently, it transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. While this transfer of remaining image data is taking place, the display control device 6 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 635a to display the power-on main image shown in Figure 333(A) on the graphic display unit 341.

At this time, upon receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 4, which is the command to start the variation, the display control device 6 will, as shown in Figure 333(B), alternately display the power-on variation image of a "○" symbol in the lower right position on the main image display screen during the variation period, and the power-on variation image of a "×" symbol in the same position as the "○" symbol, as shown in Figure 333(C). Then, based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 4, the display control device 6 will determine the result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the main control device 4. If it is a "minor win," the image shown in Figure 333(B) will be displayed for a certain period after the special game performance stops, and if it is a "miss," the image shown in Figure 333(C) will be displayed for a certain period after the special game performance stops.

The MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 635a until all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 635. This allows players and hall staff to view the power-on main image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 while the remaining image data to reside is being transferred to the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, the display control device 6 can transfer the remaining image data to reside from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 over time while the power-on main image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the power is turned on, they can wait without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. They can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 635 is complete.

Furthermore, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the immediate display of the main image on the graphic display unit 341 upon power-up allows for immediate confirmation that the graphic display unit 341 has started operating without problems upon power-up. This prevents the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating due to the use of a slow-reading NAND flash memory 634a in the character ROM 634.

Furthermore, if the player starts playing while the main power-on image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and a ball is detected entering the first prize slot 314, the power-on variable image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image permanently stored in the power-on variable image area 635b. The MPU 631 then instructs the image controller 637 to alternately display the images shown in Figures 333(B) and 333(C) on the symbol display unit 341. This allows for a simple special game animation using the power-on variable image. Therefore, even while the main power-on image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably conducted through this simple special game animation.

Furthermore, since the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already permanently stored in the power-on variation image area 635b when the main image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 upon power-up, if a ball is detected entering the first prize slot 314 while the main image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the corresponding special game effect can be immediately displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Returning to Figure 332, the back image area 635c is a region that stores image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Here, referring to Figures 334 and 335, we will explain the back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 635c. Figures 334 and 335 are explanatory diagrams illustrating three types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 for each back image. Figure 334(A) shows back A corresponding to the "city stage," Figure 334(B) shows back B corresponding to the "sky stage," and Figure 335 shows back C corresponding to the "island stage."

Of the rear images A through C, the rear images corresponding to rear images A and B are, as shown in Figure 334, both of which are horizontally longer than the display area shown on the pattern display unit 341. These images are stored in the character ROM 634. The image controller 637 draws the images by scrolling them horizontally from left to right so that the rear images are displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

The images provided on each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d, and between positions a and a', are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. After the images between positions c and d are displayed as a display area on the graphic display unit 341, the images between positions a and a' are displayed as a display area on the graphic display unit 341, resulting in a smooth, continuous scrolling display of the back images on the graphic display unit 341.

When the player operates the control button 20 and the stage changes to the "City Stage" or "Sky Stage," the MPU 631 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 637 so that the image at this initial position is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Then, as time progresses, the display area moves from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 637 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 637 is controlled again so that the display area is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the image between position a and position c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a smooth, continuous flow from left to right.

On the other hand, the back image on back C, as shown in Figure 335, is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (A) → ... as time progresses. Specifically, on back C, images of mountains towering over the island, images of the sandy beach at the foot of the mountains, and images of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a fixed position. Meanwhile, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountains changes as time progresses.

When the stage is changed to the "Island Stage" by the player's operation button 20, the initial back image of back C is the back image shown in Figure 335(A). This back image shows an orange sky indicating sunrise. Then, as time passes, the sky's color gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time, the back image shown in Figure 335(B) is displayed. This back image shows a vivid blue sky indicating daytime. Next, as time passes, the sky's color gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time, the back image shown in Figure 335(C) is displayed. This back image shows a black sky indicating nighttime. Then, as time passes, the sky's color gradually changes from black to white and then back to orange. After a predetermined time, it returns to the back image shown in Figure 335(A), and the back images from Figures 335(A) to 335(C) are displayed again on the symbol display unit 341.

Next, we will explain the range of the back image stored in the back image area 635c for each back image. As shown in Figure 334(A), the entire range of back A, corresponding to the initial stage (the city stage), is stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, specifically the image data corresponding to positions a through d. Since the game is often played without changing the stage, displaying the initial city stage, keeping all the image data for back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage resident in the back image area 635c reduces the number of data accesses to the character ROM 634, thereby reducing the load on the display control device 6.

On the other hand, the back surface B, which corresponds to the empty stage, stores only the image data corresponding to a portion of its back surface, i.e., the image between position a and position b, in the back surface image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, as shown in Figure 334(B). Furthermore, the back surface C, which corresponds to the island stage, includes Figure 335(A), and the image data corresponding to the back surface image between Figures 335(A) and 335(B), excluding Figure 335(B), is stored and resides in the back surface image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 during the startup process after power-on.

Here, the operation of the control button 20, performed by the player to change the stage, is done at the player's discretion and at any time. Therefore, in order to instantly change the background image when the control button 20 is operated at any time, it would be ideal to store the full range of image data for all background images in the resident video RAM 635. However, doing so would require a very large amount of RAM for the resident video RAM 635, potentially leading to increased costs.

In contrast, in this gaming machine 10, the initial position of the background image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' or the range shown in Figures 335(A) to 335(B). Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, or the image between Figures 335(A) and 335(B), including the initial position, is stored in the background image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, the initial positions of background B and background C can be immediately displayed on the pattern display unit 341 by using the image data resident in the background image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, and the display can also be made to scroll or change color tone as time progresses. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a portion of the image is stored for rear B and rear C, the increase in the memory capacity of the resident video RAM 635 can be suppressed, thereby reducing the increase in cost.

Furthermore, the back image B is configured such that, after the initial image is displayed, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, while the image data corresponding to positions b' to d is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. This allows the image data from positions b' to d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 636 while the range from position a to position b is scrolled. Therefore, after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 636 and displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

Similarly, the back panel C is configured such that, after the initial image is displayed, while the images of Figures 335(A) to 335(B) are displayed using image data resident in the back panel image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, the image data corresponding to Figures 335(B) to 335(C) and Figures 335(C) to 335(A) can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. This allows the image data corresponding to Figures 335(B) to 335(C) and Figures 335(C) to 335(A) to be transferred to the normal video RAM 636 while displaying Figures 335(A) to 335(B). Therefore, after displaying Figures 335(A) to 335(B) using the image data resident in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, the images 335(B) to 335(C) and Figures 335(C) to 335(A) can be displayed sequentially on the pattern display unit 341 over time using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 636 without delay.

Furthermore, in the rear view B and rear view C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 is stored in a dedicated sub-area for rear view images provided in the image storage area 636a (see Figure 332) of the normal video RAM 636. This prevents the rear view image data stored in the dedicated sub-area from being overwritten by other image data, ensuring reliable display of the rear view image.

Furthermore, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 overlap, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 637 by the MPU 631, the image data stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 is used to display the image up to position b on the pattern display unit 341. Next, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 is used to display the image from position b' on the pattern display unit 341, resulting in a smooth, continuous scrolling display of the back image on the pattern display unit 341.

Furthermore, the MPU 631 uses the image data from the normal-use video RAM 636 to control the image controller 637 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed as a display area on the pattern display unit 341. Then, the MPU 631 uses the image data from the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 to control the image controller 637 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed as a display area on the pattern display unit 341. As a result, the image between position a and position c can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a smooth, continuous scrolling manner, flowing from left to right.

Returning to Figure 332, let's continue the explanation. The decorative pattern area 635d is an area for permanently storing decorative patterns, which are predetermined patterns displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a display means. Specifically, the decorative pattern area 635d permanently stores image data corresponding to nine types of decorative patterns (see Figure 344) numbered "1" through "9". This eliminates the need to read image data from the character ROM 634 each time a special feature game is performed on the pattern display unit 341. Therefore, even if a NAND flash memory 634a is used for the character ROM 634, the special feature game performance can be started quickly on the pattern display unit 341. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation where the special feature game performance does not immediately start on the pattern display unit 341, even though the first special feature display unit 362 has started displaying the first special feature after a ball enters the first prize entry area 314, which serves as the starting ball entry area.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern area 635d also permanently stores image data corresponding to decorative patterns that do not have numbers from "1" to "9" attached to them. These include decorative patterns consisting of background patterns such as a wooden box, and decorative patterns consisting of background patterns and accompanying patterns resembling characters such as a plane, furoshiki (wrapping cloth), and helmet. This image data is used in a demo sequence displayed on the pattern display unit 341, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first spin stopped, but the next spin resulting from a starting win has not begun. As a result, when the demo sequence is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, decorative patterns without numbers are displayed as decorative patterns. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the game machine 10 is in a demo state by visually confirming the decorative patterns without numbers from the display image on the pattern display unit 341.

The character pattern area 635e is a region that stores image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the pattern display unit 341, which serves as the display means. In this gaming machine 10, various characters, such as "Boy," are displayed according to various effects. Since the data corresponding to these characters is permanently stored in the character pattern area 635e, when the display control device 6 changes the character pattern based on the content of a command received from the sound lamp control device 5, it does not read new corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, but rather reads the image data pre-stored in the character pattern area 635e of the resident video RAM 635, allowing the image controller 637 to draw the predetermined image. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, so even if a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed is used in the character ROM 634, the character pattern can be changed instantly.

The error message image area 635f is a region that stores image data corresponding to the error message displayed when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10. In this gaming machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 5 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor attached to the back of the game board 31, the sound lamp control device 5 notifies the display control device 6 of the occurrence of a vibration error via an error command. Furthermore, if other errors occur, such as when magnetic force or radio waves are detected by a magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor, the sound lamp control device 5 also notifies the display control device 6 of the occurrence of that error along with its error type via an error command. The display control device 6 is configured to display the error message corresponding to the received error on the symbol display unit 341 upon receiving the error command.

Here, error messages are required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the perspective of preventing player misconduct and protecting players from errors. In this gaming machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-stored in the error message image area 635f. Therefore, the display control device 6, based on the received error command, reads the image data pre-stored in the error message image area 635f of the resident video RAM 635, allowing the image controller 637 to immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 634. Therefore, even if a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed is used in the character ROM 634, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after receiving an error command.

The standard video RAM 636 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 636a, a first frame buffer 636b, and a second frame buffer 636c.

The image storage area 636a is an area for storing image data necessary for drawing images to be displayed on the pattern display unit 341, but which is not permanently stored in the resident video RAM 635. The image storage area 636a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to transfer image data that is not permanently stored in the resident video RAM 635 but is necessary for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area within the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636, where the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 637 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 631 from the character ROM 634 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area in the image storage area 636a via the buffer RAM 637a.

Furthermore, the instruction to transfer image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list, which is described later, in which the MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to draw the image. This allows the MPU 631 to perform both the image drawing instruction and the image data transfer instruction simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 637, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c are buffers for displaying images to be shown on the graphic display unit 341, which serves as a display means. The image controller 637 writes a single frame's worth of image, representing update information drawn according to instructions from the MPU 631, to either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c through an update process, thereby displaying the single frame's worth of image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one frame buffer, the image controller 637 reads the previously displayed single frame's worth of image information from the other frame buffer and transmits this image information, along with a drive signal, to the graphic display unit 341, thereby displaying the single frame's worth of image on the graphic display unit 341.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, a first frame buffer 636b and a second frame buffer 636c, the image controller 637 can simultaneously unfold one frame's worth of image, representing update information, drawn in one frame buffer, while simultaneously reading the previously unfolded frame's worth of image from the other frame buffer and displaying that read frame's worth of image on the graphic display unit 341, which serves as the display means.

Furthermore, the frame buffer that displays one frame's worth of image data, and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame's worth of data is read as update information for displaying the image on the graphic display unit 341, are alternately selected by the MPU 631 every 20 milliseconds, when the rendering process for one frame's worth of image data is completed. The first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c are then alternately selected.

Specifically, at a certain point, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for displaying one frame's worth of image data, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image data for one frame's worth of data is read as update information. When the image drawing and display processes are executed, 20 milliseconds after the completion of the image drawing process for one frame's worth of data, the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for displaying one frame's worth of image data as update information, and the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image data for one frame's worth of data is read. This allows the image data previously displayed in the first frame buffer 636b to be read and displayed on the graphic display unit 341, while simultaneously displaying a new image in the second frame buffer 636c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame's worth of image data, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image data for one frame's worth of data as update information is read. This allows the image data previously unfolded in the second frame buffer 636c to be read and displayed on the pattern display unit 341, while simultaneously unfolding a new image in the first frame buffer 636b. Thereafter, by alternating between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c every 20 milliseconds, the rendering (update) of one frame's worth of image data as update information can be performed while the display of one frame's worth of image data is continuously performed in 20-millisecond increments.

The work RAM 633 is a memory that stores control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 634, and also temporarily stores work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 631. It is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 633 has at least a program storage area 633a, a data table storage area 633b, a simple image display flag 633c, a display data table buffer 633d, an additional data table buffer 633e, a transfer data table buffer 633f, a pointer 633g, a drawing list area 633h, a timing counter 633i, a stored image discrimination flag 633j, and a drawing target buffer flag 633k.

The program storage area 633a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 631. When the system reset is released, the MPU 631 reads the control programs from the character ROM 634, transfers them to the work RAM 633, and stores them in the program storage area 633a. Once all control programs are stored in the program storage area 633a, the MPU 631 then uses the stored control programs to execute various controls. As described above, since the work RAM 633 is composed of DRAM, high-speed read operations are performed. Therefore, even when the control programs are stored in the character ROM 634, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the display control device 6 can maintain high processing performance, and the graphic display unit 341 can easily execute diverse and complex effects.

The data table storage area 633b is a region that stores: a display data table containing the display content to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341 as time progresses for a particular performance based on a command from the main control unit 4; an additional data table containing the display content to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341 as time progresses for additional performances to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341 in addition to the performance based on a command from the main control unit 4; and a transfer data table that defines the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data used in the performance displayed by the display data table that is not permanently stored in the resident video RAM 635.

These data tables are typically stored as a type of fixed-value data in the second program storage area 634a1 located in the NAND flash memory 634a of the character ROM 634. Following a system reset, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 634 to the work RAM 633 according to the boot program executed by the MPU 631, and stored in the data table storage area 633b. Once all data tables are stored in the data table storage area 633b, the MPU 631 uses the stored data tables to control the display of the graphic display unit 341. As described above, since the work RAM 633 is composed of DRAM, high-speed read operations are performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 634, which is composed of the slow-reading NAND flash memory 634a, the display control device 6 can maintain high processing performance, and diverse and complex effects can be easily executed using the graphic display unit 341.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each type of animation displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on commands from the main control unit 4. For example, display data tables are provided for special animation, demo animation, confirmed display animation, restart animation, and the special animation, the re-draw animation (re-draw display) (see Figures 343 and 344).

Furthermore, the demo animation, as described above, is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous special symbol game animation stopped, and the next special symbol game animation resulting from a winning combination has not started. In this animation, a predetermined decorative symbol, without the numbers "1" through "9," is displayed, and only the background image changes. If the demo animation is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, players and hall staff can recognize that no game is being played on the gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, the confirmation display effect is an effect displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the stopped symbols are confirmed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a notification display control is performed to emphasize that the stopped symbols, as a notification display, are a losing symbols. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, a notification display control is performed to emphasize that the stopped symbols, as a notification display, are minor win symbols. By visually confirming this confirmation display effect, the player can easily determine the game value assigned by the content of the stopped symbols.

Furthermore, although the gaming machine 10 in this embodiment is configured as a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop probability variation machine, an ST machine, or a V-ST machine, if the stopping symbol for the notification display is a jackpot, a notification display control is performed that emphasizes the jackpot.

Furthermore, the restart animation is an animation in which, if a confirmation command is not received from the main control unit 4 even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative symbol, as a predetermined symbol, has stopped displaying, an image of the decorative symbol vibrating (oscillating) around a predetermined position is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. When the player sees the decorative symbol vibrating and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after its fluctuation has stopped displaying, they can recognize that the stopped symbol has not yet been confirmed at that point.

Furthermore, the special re-draw animation (re-draw display) is an animation (display) that occurs during gameplay in a special symbol game where a predetermined decorative symbol is displayed as a notification, and then the decorative symbol changes and is displayed as a confirmed notification. In this embodiment, the re-draw animation (re-draw display) includes at least a revival animation (revival display) (see Figure 343(B)) and an upgrade animation (upgrade display) (see Figure 343(C)).

In this embodiment, the revival effect (revival display) is an effect (display) that occurs in a special symbol game during gameplay when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win. The decorative symbols, as predetermined symbols, stop and are displayed in a combination corresponding to a loss, and then the decorative symbols stop and are displayed in a combination corresponding to a minor win. Specifically, the revival effect (revival display) is an effect (display) where the decorative symbols stop and are displayed in a combination other than matching numbers as a notification, and then the combination of matching numbers is confirmed and displayed as a notification (see Figure 343(B)).

In this embodiment, the upgrade animation (upgrade display) is an animation in which, during a special symbol game in progress, the decorative symbols stop displaying a notification indicating that it is a minor win resulting from the entry of a game ball into the V-entry slot 833 during a minor win game, which will generate a 4R time-saving jackpot game. Then, the decorative symbols are confirmed to be displayed by a notification indicating that it is a minor win resulting from the entry of a game ball into the V-entry slot 833 during a minor win game, which will generate a 16R time-saving jackpot game. Specifically, the upgrade animation (upgrade display) is an animation (display) in which the decorative symbols stop displaying a sequence of numbers other than "777" as a notification, and then the sequence of numbers "777" is confirmed to be displayed as a notification (see Figure 343(C)).

Furthermore, although the gaming machine 10 in this embodiment is configured as a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine, even when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop probability variation machine, an ST machine, or a V-ST machine, it is conceivable to execute a re-drawing effect (re-drawing display), which is a special effect in the special symbol game during gameplay, such as an upgrade effect (upgrade display) or a revival effect (revival display). In this case, an upgrade effect (upgrade display) could be, for example, an announcement of an upgrade from a normal jackpot to a probability variation jackpot in the special symbol game during gameplay, and a revival effect (revival display) could be, for example, an announcement of a jackpot after a miss.

Furthermore, the re-draw animation (re-draw display) in special feature games during gameplay does not include any animations (displays) that are disadvantageous to the player. For example, notifications of a reduction in the number of rounds played as a jackpot game (demotion), notifications of a probability-increasing jackpot to a normal jackpot (demotion), and notifications of a miss (win cancellation) from a jackpot or minor win are not included in the re-draw animation (re-draw display). Specifically, for example, after the execution of an upgrade animation (upgrade display), which is a special animation in special feature games, it is announced that a minor win will result in a 16R time-saving jackpot game due to a game ball entering the V-entry slot 833 in a minor win game, it will not be announced that it is a minor win that will result in a 4R time-saving jackpot game, or that it is a miss, at least until the minor win game starts or ends. Furthermore, in special feature games, the execution of a special upgrade animation (upgrade display) that announces the upgrade from a normal jackpot notification to a probability-increasing jackpot notification means that after the probability-increasing jackpot is announced, the player will not be announced as having a normal jackpot or a loss until at least the probability-increasing jackpot game begins or ends. In this way, by ensuring that the re-draw animation (re-draw display) does not include any animations (displays) that are disadvantageous to the player, the benefits that the player is informed of through the execution of special animations such as the upgrade animation (upgrade display) and revival animation (revival display) are not reduced or canceled, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game caused by the execution of unreasonable animations (displays).

The data table storage area 633b stores one display data table each for the demo effect, confirmation display effect, restart effect, and re-draw effect (re-draw display). Furthermore, for the variable display data tables used for special feature game effects, if there are, for example, 32 effect patterns, one table will be prepared for each effect pattern, totaling 32 tables.

Furthermore, the variable display data table also includes a special variable display pattern table, which is used when the performance pattern instructed by the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 does not match the stop symbols that should be displayed when the special game performance stops. For example, when the performance pattern is a winning performance pattern, but the main control unit 4 instructs a losing stop symbol. This special variable rapidly changes the decorative symbols until it receives a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5. Upon receiving the confirmation command, it confirms a special stop symbol indicating a loss (for example, symbols displayed as "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left column).

If the performance pattern instructed by the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 does not match the stop symbols that should be displayed when the special symbol game performance stops, the display control device 6 may not be able to correctly reflect the result of the lottery conducted by the main control unit 4 and display a confirmed win in the special symbol game performance. In contrast, in this game machine 10, in such cases a special variation performance is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special loss is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, even if the result of the lottery in the main control unit 4 is a loss, it is possible to prevent the symbol display unit 341 from mistakenly displaying a confirmed win. Furthermore, even if a special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, if the lottery result in the main control unit 4 is a minor win, the actual game state in the game machine 10 will transition to a minor win game state, so the player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by using a special stop symbol for the confirmation display, it is possible to suggest to the player that even if the confirmation display is a loss, the game machine 10 may still be in a minor win state. Therefore, even if the confirmation display is a loss, the game machine 10 entering a minor win state can prevent the player from feeling anxious.

[Display Data Table]
Here, with reference to Figure 336, the details of the display data table will be explained. Figure 336 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a variable display data table. The display data table corresponds to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of an image is displayed in the display unit, which is the display means, and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of the image, which is the update information to be displayed during that time.

The drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display element that makes up one frame of the image. Depending on the sprite type, drawing information is defined for rendering the sprite on the image display unit 341, including display position coordinates, scaling factor, rotation angle, transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information.

The sprite type is information used to identify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to identify the coordinates on the pattern display unit 341 where the sprite should be displayed. The scaling factor is information used to specify the scaling factor relative to the standard display size pre-set for that sprite, and the size of the displayed sprite is determined according to that scaling factor. If the scaling factor is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged beyond its standard size; if the scaling factor is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than both its standard size and its standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the rotation angle when displaying a sprite. The transparency value specifies the overall transparency of the sprite; the higher the transparency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will show through. The alpha blending information specifies the known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying with other sprites. The color information specifies the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Finally, the filter specification information specifies the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

In the variable display data table, the drawing content for one frame, which is the update information defined for each address, is defined for each address. This includes one background image, nine decorative patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that represent light shining through the image, and drawing information for each sprite used for various effects such as boy images and text. Note that information regarding effects and characters is defined one or more times, depending on the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the background image's display position is fixed across the entire screen of the pattern display unit 341. The magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are kept constant over time. Therefore, the variable display data table only specifies the background image type, which is the information used to identify the type of background image. This background image type contains information that determines whether to display one of the background images A through C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "City Stage," "Sky Stage," or "Island Stage"), or to display a background image different from A through C. Furthermore, if the background image type specifies displaying a background image different from A through C, it also includes information that specifies which background image to display.

If the MPU 631 determines that one of the back images A through C should be displayed based on the back image type, it identifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from back images A through C as the image to be drawn, and also determines the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame as time progresses. On the other hand, if a back image different from back images A through C is to be displayed, the MPU 631 identifies the back image to be displayed based on the back image type.

In this embodiment, the case where only the background type is specified as the content to be drawn for the background image in the display data table is described. Alternatively, the background type and position information indicating which range of the background image corresponding to that background type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may, for example, indicate the elapsed time since the background image corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 631 identifies the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the background image corresponding to the initial position, as indicated by the position information, was displayed.

Furthermore, the position information may also indicate the elapsed time since the rendering of the image (or the display on the graphic display unit 341) based on this display data table began. In this case, the MPU 631 determines the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the background image that was displayed at the time the rendering of the image (or the display on the graphic display unit 341) began, and the elapsed time since the rendering of the image (or the display on the graphic display unit 341) began, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, the position information may indicate either the elapsed time since the background image corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or the elapsed time since the rendering of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the pattern display unit 341) began, depending on the background type. Alternatively, along with the background type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it indicates the elapsed time since the background image corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the rendering of the image based on the display database (or the display of the pattern display unit 341) began) may be defined as the content of the background image rendering. In addition, the position information may not indicate elapsed time, but rather the address where the range of the background image to be displayed is stored.

The decorative symbols (Symbol 1, Symbol 2, ...) contain symbol type offset information to identify which symbol should be displayed. This offset information represents the difference in the numbers assigned to each decorative symbol. The reason for identifying the offset information rather than directly identifying the symbol type is that the display of decorative symbols in the special game animation changes depending on the stopped symbols in the previous special game animation and the stopped symbols in the current special game animation. Therefore, the symbol offset information for the period from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed contains the offset information from the stopped symbols of the previous special game animation. This ensures that the special game animation starts from the stopped symbols of the previous special game animation.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol, set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 4 via the audio lamp control device 5, is recorded. This allows the special game performance to stop at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 4.

Furthermore, since each decorative symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbols in the previous special game animation and the stop symbols corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 4 can be managed using the numbers assigned to those decorative symbols. Additionally, by representing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each decorative symbol, the decorative symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from that offset information.

Furthermore, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stopped symbols in the previous special game animation to the offset information of the stopped symbols in the current special game animation is set to coincide with the time during which the decorative symbols, as predetermined symbols, are rapidly changing and displayed. While the decorative symbols are rapidly changing and displayed, they are invisible to the player. Therefore, by switching the symbol offset information from the offset information of the stopped symbols in the previous special game animation to the offset information of the stopped symbols in the current special game animation during this time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the decorative symbols is interrupted, the player can not perceive this interruption.

The starting address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the final address of the display data table (in the example in Figure 336, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Each address between the address containing the "Start" information ("0000H") and the address containing the "End" information contains drawing content corresponding to the display mode defined in that data table.

The MPU 631, based on commands from the main control unit 4 and commands transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 5 (for example, display variation pattern commands), selects a display data table to be used from a plurality of pre-prepared display data tables according to the variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 633b, stores it in the display data table buffer 633d, and initializes the pointer 633g. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 633g is incremented by 1 as an update process, and the next image content to be drawn is identified based on the drawing content specified at the address pointed to by the pointer 633g in the display data table buffer 633d, and a drawing list (see Figure 339) is created, which will be described later. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 637, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, in accordance with the update of the pointer 633g by the update process, the drawing content as update information is identified in the order specified in the display data table, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed in the symbol display unit 341.

Thus, in this gaming machine 10, the display control device 6 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 631 in response to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4 (for example, display variation pattern commands). Instead, it simply performs an update process that appropriately replaces the display data table, which is the update information, with the display data table buffer 633d. This simple operation allows the display image to be changed (updated) on the symbol display unit 341.

In this case, if the system were configured, as in conventional pachinko machines, to launch a program executed by the MPU 631 each time the display image shown on the symbol display unit 341 is changed, the processing load on launching and executing the increasingly complex and voluminous program, which is required for the diversification of display images, would be immense. This would limit the processing capacity of the display control device 6, potentially restricting the diversification of controllable display images. In contrast, this gaming machine 10 allows the display image to be changed (updated) on the symbol display unit 341 simply by replacing the display data table, which contains update information, with the display data table buffer 633d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 6, a wide variety of display images can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341, which is the display means.

Furthermore, the ability to prepare a display data table corresponding to each performance mode, set a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and create a drawing list as update information frame by frame according to the set data table is possible because, in the gaming machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is predetermined from multiple performance patterns based on the lottery result and variation time of the jackpot lottery conducted based on the initial winning combination. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the fly based on user operation, making it impossible to predict the display content, and therefore, it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. Thus, the configuration of preparing a display data table corresponding to each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list as update information frame by frame through an update process according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the gaming machine 10 is configured to determine the performance mode to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in advance based on the jackpot lottery conducted based on the initial winning combination.

[Additional Data Table]
Next, the details of the additional data table will be explained with reference to Figure 337. Figure 337 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an additional data table. As described above, the additional data table contains the display content to be displayed over time for an additional effect to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341 in addition to an effect based on a command from the main control unit 4. Here, "adding to an effect" means changing the display content of an effect based on a command from the main control unit 4. This includes concepts such as displaying an image that is not normally displayed in an effect, overlaying another effect on that effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the effect, or changing the image displayed in the effect.

In other words, the additional data table defines the drawing content necessary to display an image that is not normally displayed for a particular effect, selected based on a command from the main control unit 4; the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of that effect; and the drawing content necessary to change the image displayed in that effect.

In this embodiment, we will explain the case where the display content for displaying a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) that is displayed in addition to the special game effect displayed by the display data table for variation selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 4 is defined by an additional data table.

In other words, the additional data tables are prepared to correspond to, for example, the consecutive notification effects that are added to the special game effects. Specifically, additional data tables corresponding to the display modes of the consecutive notification effects—"bubble," "egg," "chick," "chicken," and "flock of chickens"—are stored in the data table storage area 633b.

This additional data table specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table. For each sprite, which is a display object to be added to the image for one frame, the drawing content specifies the type of sprite, and, according to the sprite type, defines drawing information for rendering the sprite on the image display unit 341, such as display position coordinates, scaling factor, rotation angle, transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 337, the display data table defines the sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, scaling factor, rotation angle, transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information for two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2), corresponding to the address "0097H". On the other hand, if there are no additional display items to be displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, the additional data table defines Null data, meaning that there are no additional display items corresponding to that address (this corresponds to address "0001H" in Figure 337).

Furthermore, the starting address of the additional data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, similar to the display data table. The final address of the additional data table ("00FDH" in the example of Figure 337) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Each address between the address containing the "Start" information ("0000H") and the address containing the "End" information contains drawing content corresponding to the performance mode defined in that additional data table.

When the MPU 631 receives a continuous warning command from the audio lamp control device 5, it reads the additional data table corresponding to the continuous warning pattern indicated by the command from the data table storage area 633b and stores it in the additional data table buffer 633e of the work RAM 633, which will be described later. Then, with each update of the pointer 633g, it identifies the drawing content specified at the address pointed to by the pointer 633g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, identifies the image content to be drawn next, and creates a drawing list (see Figure 339) as update information, which will be described later.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 337, when pointer 633g is "0097H", MPU 631 adds the sprites Effect 1, Effect 2, Character 1, and Character 2 specified in the Additional Data Table address "0097H" to the various sprites specified in the Display Data Table address "0097H", creates a drawing list which is update information, and instructs the image controller 637 to draw the image. On the other hand, when pointer 633g is "0001H", Null data is specified in the Additional Data Table address "0001H", so it is determined that there are no display items to add, and a drawing list which is update information is generated based on the various sprites specified in the Display Data Table address "0001H". Furthermore, if the information specified by the address pointed to by pointer 633g in the additional data table is "End" information, or if pointer 633g points to an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, in the example in Figure 337, if pointer 633g points to an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there are no display items to add, and a drawing list, which is update information, is generated based on the various sprites specified in the display data table.

Then, the generated drawing list is sent to the image controller 637 to instruct it to draw the image. As a result, according to the update process of the pointer 633g (which contains update information), the drawing content is identified in the order defined in the display data table, and the drawing content defined in the additional data table is added. Therefore, the image as defined in the display data table and the additional data table is displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

Thus, in this gaming machine 10, when the display control device 6 displays other performance images (for example, continuous予告 performance images) in addition to the performance images to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (for example, special performance images) in response to commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4 (for example, display variation pattern commands), the additional data table corresponding to the additional performance image to be displayed is set in the additional data table buffer 633e, making it easy to add and display the performance image to the base performance image. For example, if there are 32 types of original performance images and 5 types of additional performance images to be displayed, if a separate display data table is prepared that defines the image with the other performance images superimposed on each original performance image, then 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables would have to be prepared. However, as in this gaming machine 10, by separately defining the data table corresponding to the other performance images as an additional data table, it is sufficient to prepare 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables, thereby suppressing an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 633b. Therefore, within the capacity provided in the data table storage area 633b, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of performance modes, making it easy to further diversify the performance images.

Furthermore, as in this gaming machine 10, by defining additional display images as additional data tables, even if the display of additional display images is decided after setting the display data table corresponding to the original display image in the display data table buffer 633d, the additional display images can be easily displayed in addition to the original display image simply by setting the additional data table corresponding to the other display image in the additional data table buffer 633e, without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d.

Furthermore, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g can be easily identified by updating the pointer 633g at time intervals, using the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 633e. Additionally, a single drawing list can be easily generated as update information through an update process corresponding to one frame. Therefore, even when the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, etc., in addition to the effects performed based on commands from the main control device 4, a wide variety of effects can be easily displayed from a small data table by defining the display content of the additional effects to be displayed in the additional data table.

[Transfer Data Table]
Next, the details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to Figure 338. Figure 338 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, it specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 of the sprite image data used in the performance defined in the display data table that is not permanently resided in the resident video RAM 635.

Furthermore, if all the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 635, then a corresponding transfer data table is not required. This helps to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 633b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information for sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 338 are relevant). Here, the transfer start timing for the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the rendering of that predetermined sprite begins according to the display data table. The transfer data table defines the transfer data information for the transfer target image data corresponding to the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred that should be initiated at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified for that address, indicating that there is no image data to be transferred that should be initiated (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 338).

The data transfer information includes the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 634 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636).

Furthermore, the starting address of the transfer data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, similar to the display data table. The final address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of Figure 338) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. The transfer data information for the image data to be transferred, as defined in that transfer data table, is contained at each address between the address "0000H" (where the "Start" information is located) and the address where the "End" information is located.

The MPU 631, based on commands from the main control unit 4 and other sources, selects a display data table in response to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 5 (for example, a display variation pattern command). If a corresponding transfer data table exists for that display data table, the MPU 631 reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 633b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 633f of the work RAM 633 (described later). Then, with each update of the pointer 633g, the MPU 631 identifies the drawing content specified at the address pointed to by the pointer 633g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, creating a drawing list (see Figure 339), which is update information (described later). Simultaneously, it obtains transfer data information for the image data of a predetermined sprite that should be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f and adds that transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 338, when pointer 633g becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 631 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table and the additional data table, and then sends the resulting drawing list to the image controller 637. On the other hand, when pointer 633g is "0002H", since Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, the MPU 631 determines that there is no transfer target image data to initiate transfer, and therefore sends the drawing list to the image controller 637 without adding transfer data information to the generated drawing list.

Then, if the image controller 637 receives transfer data information from the MPU 631 in the drawing list, it executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a, according to that transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred at a predetermined address so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite begins according to the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not permanently stored in the resident video RAM 635 necessary for drawing that sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 636a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 636a, the predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

This allows the character ROM 634 to be configured using the slow-reading NAND flash memory 634a, while simultaneously reading the necessary images for display from the character ROM 634 and transferring them to the normal-use video RAM 636 without delay. This enables the display of corresponding effects on the pattern display unit 341 while simultaneously rendering the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by using the transfer data table, only non-resident image data can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal-use video RAM 636 in the resident video RAM 635.

Furthermore, in this gaming machine 10, the display control device 6, in response to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4 (for example, display variation pattern commands), sets the display data table in the display data table buffer 633d. Simultaneously, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Therefore, the sprite image data used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 at the desired timing.

Furthermore, the transfer data table defines the transfer data information so that image data corresponding to each sprite is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the general-purpose video RAM 636. This allows for the management and control of image data transfer on a sprite-by-sprite basis, simplifying the transfer process. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the general-purpose video RAM 636 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer can be controlled in detail while simplifying the process. Therefore, the increase in the load associated with transfers can be efficiently suppressed.

Furthermore, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should be started at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, is defined. Therefore, the timing of the start of the transfer can be instructed so that the image data of a predetermined sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 636 before it is used, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. This allows for easy display of a wide variety of performance images on the graphic display unit 341, even when the character ROM 634 is configured with a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 332, the simplified image display flag 633c is a flag that indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 333(A) to 333(C) on the pattern display unit 341. This simplified image display flag 633c is set to ON during the main processing (see Figure 377) executed by the MPU 631 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image has been transferred to the power-on main image area 635a or power-on variable image area 635b of the resident video RAM (see step S4105 in Figure 377). Then, after all resident target image data has been stored in the resident video RAM 635 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the pattern display unit 341 (see step S6105 in Figure 389(B)).

This simplified image display flag 633c is referenced in the V-interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 each time a V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 is detected (see step S4301 in Figure 378). If the simplified image display flag 633c is on, a simplified command determination process (see step S4308 in Figure 378(B)) and a simplified display setting process (see step S4309 in Figure 378(B)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the graphic display unit 341. On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 633c is off, command determination processing (see Figures 379 to 383) and display setting processing (see Figures 384 to 387) are executed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4, etc.

Furthermore, the simplified image display flag 633c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 631 during V interrupt processing (see step S6001 in Figure 389(A)). If the simplified image display flag 633c is on, it indicates that there is resident image data not stored in the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, a resident image transfer setting process (see Figure 389(B)) is executed to transfer the resident image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. If the simplified image display flag 633c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 390) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

The display data table buffer 633d is a buffer for storing display data tables corresponding to the animation patterns to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341, based on commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4. The MPU 631 determines the animation pattern to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341 based on the commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5, selects the display data table corresponding to that animation pattern from the data table storage area 633b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 633d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 633g by one, the MPU 631 generates a drawing list (see Figure 339) as update information, which describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 637 for each frame, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the display data table buffer 633d. As a result, the animation corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is displayed on the graphic display unit 341.

The additional data table buffer 633e is a buffer for storing additional data tables corresponding to effects (such as continuous予告演出) that are displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, in response to commands from the sound lamp control device 5, etc. When the MPU 631 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 633d, it clears the contents of the additional data table buffer 633e by writing Null data, which indicates that there are no additional display items to be displayed.

Subsequently, based on commands from the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 631 determines whether there are any additional effects to be displayed in addition to those shown on the graphic display unit 341, using the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d. If there are additional effects to be displayed, the MPU 631 selects an additional data table corresponding to that effect from the data table storage area 633b and stores the selected additional data table in the additional data table buffer 633e.

Then, the MPU 631, while incrementing the pointer 633g by one through the update process, generates a drawing list (see Figure 339) as update information for each frame, which contains instructions for image drawing to the image controller 637, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the display data table buffer 633d and the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the additional data table buffer 633e. As a result, the graphic display unit 341 displays the effects corresponding to the display data table plus the effects corresponding to the additional data table. Furthermore, if no additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, and the graphic display unit 341 displays the effects corresponding to the display data table as is.

The transfer data table buffer 633f is a buffer for storing transfer data tables corresponding to display data tables stored in the display data table buffer 633d, in response to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4. The MPU 631, when storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 633d, selects a corresponding transfer data table from the data table storage area 633b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 633f. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is stored in the resident video RAM 635, then a corresponding transfer data table is not available. In this case, the MPU 631 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 633f by writing Null data, indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, the MPU 631, while incrementing pointer 633g by one through the update process, adds the transfer data information to the drawing list (see Figure 339), which is the update information generated for each frame and contains instructions for drawing the image to be transferred to the image controller 637, if the transfer data information for the image to be transferred specified at the address indicated by pointer 633g is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f (i.e., if Null data is not recorded).

As a result, if the image controller 637 receives transfer data information from the MPU 631 in the drawing list, it executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a according to that transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred at a predetermined address so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite begins according to the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, it is possible to ensure that image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635 necessary for drawing that sprite is always stored in the image storage area 636a.

This allows the character ROM 634 to be configured using the slow-reading NAND flash memory 634a, while simultaneously reading the necessary images for display from the character ROM 634 and transferring them to the normal-use video RAM 636 without delay. This enables the display of corresponding effects on the pattern display unit 341 while simultaneously rendering the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by using the transfer data table, only non-resident image data can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal-use video RAM 636 in the resident video RAM 635.

The pointer 633g is used to specify the address from which to retrieve the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the additional data table buffer 633e, and the transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively. The MPU 631 initializes the pointer 633g to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d. Then, in the display setting process (see step S4303 in Figure 384) executed by the MPU 631 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see step S5411 in Figure 384) is executed as an update process, and the value of pointer 633g, which is the update information, is incremented by 1.

Each time such an update process for pointer 633g is performed, MPU 631 identifies the drawing content specified at the address pointed to by pointer 633g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, and creates a drawing list (see Figure 384), which is update information described later. Simultaneously, it obtains the transfer data information for the image data of a predetermined sprite that should be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f, and adds that transfer data information to the created drawing list.

This allows the effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, if an additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, the effects corresponding to that additional data table can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in addition to the effects corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effects displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be easily changed simply by modifying the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. Thus, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 6.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f, then, based on that transfer data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 used for drawing a specific sprite can be stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of that sprite begins according to the corresponding display data table. This allows the character ROM 634 to be configured with a slow-reading NAND flash memory 634a, while simultaneously reading the images necessary for display from the character ROM 634 and transferring them to the normal video RAM 636 without delay. Therefore, while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table, the corresponding effects can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Additionally, by using the transfer data table, only image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

The drawing list area 633h is an area for storing a drawing list, which serves as update information instructing the image controller 637 to draw one frame of image, based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f.

[Drawing List]
Here, we will explain the details of the drawing list with reference to Figure 339. Figure 339 is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list, which is update information, is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 637 to draw one frame of image. As shown in Figure 339, it describes the detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite used in one frame of image, such as the background image, predetermined patterns such as decorative patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and characters (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 to the image controller 637.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 637 retrieves the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, scaling factor, rotation angle, transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 637 applies scaling processing according to the scaling factor, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, transparency processing according to the transparency value, compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the filter specification information, before drawing the image obtained by applying the various processing to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then updated by the image controller 637 and expanded into either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 633k.

The MPU 631 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g (which is update information) in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table buffer 633e, as well as the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold image that displays the number of held balls, or a warning image that notifies of an error). It then creates a drawing list by rearranging this detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the type of RAM and address of the storage for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, or the sprite type identified from other image content. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 635 where the sprite's image data is stored, or a sub-area of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636, is fixed. Therefore, the MPU 631 can immediately identify the type of RAM and address where the sprite's image data is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Furthermore, the MPU631 copies the other information (display position coordinates, scaling factor, rotation angle, transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the display data table and the additional data table, as they are defined.

Furthermore, when generating the drawing list, the MPU631 rearranges the sprites within a single frame's image, from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed closest to the front, and then describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. Specifically, the drawing list first describes detailed information corresponding to the background image, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: decorative patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and characters (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 637 executes the drawing process for each sprite as an update process, according to the order described in the drawing list, which serves as update information. The drawn sprites are then overwritten and expanded in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn is placed at the back, and the last sprite drawn is placed at the front.

Furthermore, if the MPU 631 finds that transfer data information is recorded in the transfer data table buffer 633f at the address indicated by the pointer 633g, it adds that transfer data information (the starting and ending source addresses in the character ROM 634 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the starting address of the destination sub-area in the image storage area 636a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the image controller 637 contains this transfer data information in the drawing list, it reads the image data from a predetermined area of the character ROM 634 (the area indicated by the starting and ending source addresses) based on that transfer data information and transfers the image data to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area (destination address) in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 332, the timing counter 633i is a counter that counts the duration of the animations displayed on the graphic display unit 341 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d. The MPU 631 sets time data indicating the duration of the animations displayed based on the display data table when a display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d. This time data is the animation duration divided by the image display time for one frame on the graphic display unit 341 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, every 20 milliseconds, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 to the MPU 631, the display setting process of the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378(B)) is executed, and each time this process is performed, the timing counter 633i, which contains update information, is decremented by 1 (see step S5413 in Figure 384). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 633i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 631 determines that the display effect, as shown in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, has finished, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the effect.

The stored image discrimination flag 633j is a flag that indicates the storage status for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not permanently stored in the resident video RAM 635, showing whether or not the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

The stored image discrimination flag 633j, which contains update information, is generated by the initial setup process (see step S4102 in Figure 377) executed by the MPU 631 during the main processing when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 633j generated here is set to "off," indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 636a.

The update process for the stored image discrimination flag 633j is performed during the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 390) executed by the MPU 631, when a transfer instruction is set for the image data to be transferred corresponding to a sprite. In this update process, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "on," indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 636a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 636a as that sprite will inevitably become unstored once the image data of that sprite is stored, so the storage status of the other sprites is set to "off."

Furthermore, when the MPU 631 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, it refers to the stored image discrimination flag 633j to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 (see step S6215 in Figure 390). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 636a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see step S3216 in Figure 390) and instructs the image controller 637 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the image data of the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 636a, so the transfer process of that image data is canceled. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 6 and reducing traffic on the bus line 640.

The drawing target buffer flag 633k is used to specify which frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 636b and second frame buffer 636c) will display the image drawn by the image controller 637. If the drawing target buffer flag 633k is 0, the first frame buffer 636b is specified as the drawing target buffer; if it is 1, the second frame buffer 636c is specified. This information about the specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 637 along with the drawing list, which is the update information (see step S6302 in Figure 391).

As a result, the image controller 637 executes a drawing process that expands the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the designated drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 637 reads the previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the graphic display unit 341 along with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process that displays the image on the graphic display unit 341.

The drawing target buffer flag 633k is updated in conjunction with the transmission of the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 637 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 633k; that is, setting it to "1" if its value was "0," and to "0" if it was "1." As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed each time the drawing process of the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378), which is executed by the MPU 631 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds after the completion of the drawing and display processing for one frame of image (see step S6302 in Figure 391).

In other words, at a certain point, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. When the image drawing and display processes are executed, 20 milliseconds after the completion of the image drawing process for one frame, the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. This allows the image information of the image previously unfolded in the first frame buffer 636b to be read and displayed on the pattern display unit 341, while simultaneously unfolding a new image in the second frame buffer 636c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame's worth of image data, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously unfolded in the second frame buffer 636c to be read and displayed on the pattern display unit 341, while simultaneously unfolding a new image in the first frame buffer 636b. Thereafter, by alternating between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c every 20 milliseconds, the rendering process for one frame's worth of image and the display process for one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20-millisecond increments.

[General Diagram Win/Loss Table]
Here, Figures 340(A) and 340(B) show an example of a normal win/loss table. In this embodiment, two types of normal win/loss tables are set: the normal game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 340(A) and the time-saving game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 340(B). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of winning a normal win differs depending on whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, with the probability of winning a normal win being set higher in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state.

The normal game state win/loss table shown in Figure 340(A) is used for the win/loss lottery, which is executed as a bonus when the conditions for bonus granting are met by the passing of a game ball through the through gate 317 during normal gameplay (low-frequency support mode, low-probability support mode). As shown in Figure 340(A), in the normal game state win/loss table, a value of the random number counter C4, which is the updated information, is set to 0 for a win, and 1 to 299 for a loss. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a win is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency and probability of the electric mechanism 315b are set low.

The time-saving game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 340(B) is used for the normal win lottery, which is executed as a bonus when the conditions for bonus granting are met by the passing of a game ball through the through gate 317 during the time-saving game state (a. time-saving game state, b. time-saving game state). As shown in Figure 340(B), in the time-saving game state normal win/loss table, contrary to the normal game state normal win/loss table, if the value of the normal win random number counter C4, which is the update information, is 0, it is a loss, and if the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299, it is set as a normal win. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the probability of a normal win is set to 299/300, which is higher than in the normal game state, and the operation frequency and probability of the electric mechanism 315b are also higher.

The normal win random number counter C4, which contains the update information, is periodically updated by the execution of the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. For example, it is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 299, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The values of the normal win random number counter C4 at the time a game ball enters the through gate 317 are then stored in the normal ball hold storage area 412c, specifically in the normal ball hold area SE1 to the normal ball hold area SE4.

Furthermore, the probability of winning a regular symbol during normal gameplay and during time-saving gameplay are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 340(A) and 340(B) and can be changed as appropriate.

[Table of Classification by General Diagram]
Here, Figures 340(C) and 340(D) show an example of a distribution table for the type of regular win. In this embodiment, two types of distribution tables for the type of regular win are set: the distribution table for the type of regular win in normal game mode shown in Figure 340(C), and the distribution table for the type of regular win in time-saving game mode shown in Figure 340(D). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the distribution probability of the type of regular win (short-open regular win and long-open regular win) differs depending on whether the game state is normal game mode or time-saving game mode.

Here, if the result of the regular winning lottery is a regular winning, thus fulfilling the conditions for granting a bonus, and the regular winning game executed as a bonus grant is a short-opening regular winning game, the electric mechanism 315b is activated for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), setting the maximum opening time of the second prize slot 315, which is the starting ball entry area, to a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-opening regular winning game, because the operation time of the electric mechanism 315b is short and the opening time of the second prize slot 315 is short, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315, and in most cases, the game ball does not enter the second prize slot 315.

On the other hand, if the result of the regular prize draw is a regular prize, thus fulfilling the conditions for granting a bonus, and the regular prize game executed as a bonus is a long-opening regular prize, the electric mechanism 315b operates for a long period (e.g., 6 seconds), setting the maximum opening time of the second prize slot 315, which is the starting ball entry area, to a long period (e.g., 6 seconds). Because this long-opening regular prize game involves a long operating time of the electric mechanism 315b and a long opening time of the second prize slot 315, it is easier for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315, and it is possible to reserve the right to execute the second special prize game up to the maximum number (e.g., 4).

The normal game state normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 340(C) is used to distribute normal win types in the normal game state, which is the state during gameplay. As shown in Figure 340(C), in the normal game state normal win type distribution table, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C5, which is the update information, is between 0 and 199, it is a short-open normal win, and there is no distribution of long-open normal wins. In other words, in the normal game state, if the result of the normal win lottery is a normal win and the conditions for granting a bonus are met, the short-open normal win game is executed as a bonus grant. Therefore, the normal game state is set as a state during gameplay where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second prize entry point 315.

The time-saving game state normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 340(D) is used to distribute normal win types in the time-saving game state (a) time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state as a game state. As shown in Figure 340(D), in the time-saving game state normal win type distribution table, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C5, which is the update information, is between 0 and 199, it becomes a long-open normal win, and there is no distribution of short-open normal wins. In other words, in the time-saving game state, if the result of the normal win lottery is a normal win and the conditions for granting a bonus are met, the long-open normal win game, which is executed as a bonus grant, is executed. Therefore, the time-saving game state is set as a game state in which game balls are more likely to enter the second prize entry point 315.

The normal win type random number counter C5, which contains the update information, is periodically updated by the execution of the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. For example, it is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win type random number counter C5 at the time a game ball enters the through gate 317 is stored in the normal win type first reserve area SE1 to normal win type fourth reserve area SE4 of the normal win type reserve storage area 412c. Furthermore, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C4 stored in the normal win type first reserve area SE1 to normal win type fourth reserve area SE4 indicates a normal win, the type of normal win (short-open normal win and long-open normal win), i.e., the operating time of the electric mechanism 315b (maximum opening time of the second prize entry opening 315), is set based on the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 stored in the normal win type first reserve area SE1 to normal win type fourth reserve area SE4.

Of course, the distribution ratios for short-opening normal symbol wins and long-opening normal symbol wins in normal gameplay and time-saving gameplay (a) time-saving gameplay state, b) time-saving gameplay state are not necessarily limited to the examples described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be possible to make long-opening normal symbol wins occur at a certain rate in normal gameplay, and to make short-opening normal symbol wins occur at a certain rate in time-saving gameplay.

Furthermore, the opening of the electric mechanism 315b is not limited to once per regular win, but may occur multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of the electric mechanism 315b during a single regular win may be of one type or multiple types.

[Big Win/Loss Table]
Next, with reference to Figures 341(A) to 341(C), we will explain the jackpot win/loss tables used in the special jackpot lottery. Here, Figure 341(A) is a diagram showing an example of the special 1 jackpot win/loss table, Figure 341(B) is a diagram showing an example of the b time-saving special 2 jackpot win/loss table, and Figure 341(C) is a diagram showing an example of the a time-saving special 2 jackpot win/loss table. In this embodiment, the following tables are set as jackpot win/loss tables: Special 1 jackpot win/loss table used in the special jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 shown in Figure 341(A); Special 2 jackpot win/loss table used in the special jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the b time-saving game state shown in Figure 341(B); and Special 2 jackpot win/loss table used in the special jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315 in the a time-saving game state shown in Figure 341(C).

As shown in Figure 341(A), in the special 1 jackpot win/loss table, out of the 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 206 random values from 0 to 205 correspond to minor wins, and the remaining random values correspond to losses. The probability of a minor win is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536). In other words, a minor win is unlikely to occur when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314.

In the normal gameplay state, it is difficult to get the game ball into the second prize slot 315 by shooting to the right. Therefore, shooting to the left is encouraged to get the game ball into the first prize slot 314. For this reason, the Special 1 jackpot win/loss table is primarily used in the normal gameplay state, where it is difficult to get the game ball into the second prize slot 315 by shooting to the right, and shooting to the left is encouraged to get the game ball into the first prize slot 314. As a result, in the normal gameplay state, when the player performs the recommended left-handed shooting through a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22, the special jackpot lottery is mainly conducted using the Special 1 jackpot win/loss table, making it difficult for minor wins to occur. Consequently, jackpots based on the entry of game balls 99 into the V prize slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 during minor wins are also less likely to occur.

As shown in Figure 341(B), in the b-Shortened Time Special 2 Big Win/Loss Table, out of the 65,536 values (random values) of the Big Win Random Number Counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535 in the updated state, 206 random values ranging from 0 to 205 correspond to minor wins, and the remaining random values correspond to misses, resulting in a minor win probability of approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536). In other words, the minor win probability in the b-Shortened Time Special 2 Big Win/Loss Table is set to be the same as in the Special 1 Big Win/Loss Table, and it is unlikely that a minor win will occur when a game ball enters the second prize entry point 315 during the b-Shortened Time game state. In other words, in the b-time-saving game state, the probability of a minor win is set to be the same for both the special jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot 314 and the special jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot 315 in the b-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the b-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the special jackpot lottery is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, minor wins are less likely to occur, resulting in a low probability of winning a jackpot.

Here, the b-time-saving game state is a state in which, after the end of a jackpot game and before the next jackpot game is executed, a predetermined number of special symbol games are played. As a result, the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter, which is the update information described later, becomes updated to the update completion state (e.g., 0) through an update process performed at the start or end of each special symbol game. In this b-time-saving game state, right-handed shooting is encouraged to get the game balls into the second prize entry point 315. Therefore, the b-time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table is mainly used when the player performs right-handed shooting, which is encouraged by a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22.

As shown in Figure 341(C), in the a-time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table, out of the 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 8,484 random values ranging from 0 to 8,483 correspond to minor wins, while the remaining random values correspond to losses. The minor win probability is set to approximately 1/7.725 (8,484/65,536). In other words, the minor win probability in the a-time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table is set significantly higher than in the special 1 jackpot success/failure table (see Figure 341(A)) and the b-time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see Figure 341(C)).

Here, the time-saving game state (a) is entered when, during a minor win game, the conditions for granting a bonus are met when a game ball launched by the player through a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 enters the V-entry slot 833, and the major win game that grants the bonus ends after the minor win game ends. Therefore, when a major win game ends, the state becomes more conducive to the occurrence of minor win games that can trigger a major win game.

The jackpot random number counter C1, which contains the update information, is periodically updated by the execution of the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 17. For example, it is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 65536 (0 to 65535), and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time a game ball enters the first or second prize slot 315 are stored in the first special symbol hold storage area RE1, specifically in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4, or in the second special symbol hold area REB, specifically in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REAB.

[Big Win Type Distribution Table]
Next, with reference to Figures 341(D) and 341(E), the jackpot type tables used in the special jackpot lottery will be explained. Here, Figure 341(D) is a diagram showing an example of the Special 1 jackpot type distribution table, and Figure 341(E) is a diagram showing an example of the Special 2 jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in Figure 341(D), in the special 1 jackpot type distribution table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19 that are in the updated state, 19 random values from 0 to 18 are for 4R time-saving jackpots, and the 1 random value of 19 is for 16R time-saving jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, and the bonus granting conditions are met based on the entry of game balls 99 into the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism device 83, the type of jackpot game to be executed as a bonus grant is set during the special jackpot lottery. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the special jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first entry slot 314, the distribution of 5R time-saving jackpots is 95%, and the distribution of 16R time-saving jackpots is 5%.

As shown in Figure 341(E), in the special 2 jackpot type distribution table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19 that are in an updated state, 5 random values from 0 to 4 are 4R time-saving jackpots, and 15 random values from 5 to 19 are 16R time-saving jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the type of jackpot game to be executed as a bonus is set at the time of the special jackpot lottery when the bonus granting conditions are met based on the entry of game balls 99 into the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 in the minor win game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win. In other words, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, a 16R jackpot is more likely to occur compared to when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, and the expected payout is higher when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315.

The jackpot type counter C2, which is the update information, is periodically updated by the execution of the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17. For example, it is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 20, from 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The values of the jackpot type counter C2 at the time a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 are stored in the first special prize slot RE1 to the fourth prize slot RE4 of the first special prize slot RE1, or the first special prize slot REB1 to the fourth prize slot REAB of the second special prize slot REB, in the special prize slot storage area 412b. Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a minor win, the type of jackpot (4R jackpot and 16R jackpot), i.e., the number of rounds played when a jackpot game is executed, is set based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserve area RE1, specifically in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4, or in the second special symbol reserve area REB, specifically in the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REAB of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b.

Here, the normal game state, which is the state during gameplay, is entered from the a-time-saving game state when a predetermined number (5 or 9) of game balls enter the second prize slot 315 during the a-time-saving game state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a minor win, and a minor win game is executed based on the entry of game ball 99 into the V prize slot 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 during the minor win game, then the jackpot game is started based on that entry. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving game rounds in the a-time-saving game state after the initial jackpot game has ended is set to 1, and the maximum number of reserved rights to execute the second special symbol game based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 is 4. Therefore, the number of special jackpot draws (second special game) that can be performed triggered by the opening of the second prize slot 315 when the a-time-saving game state is started is a maximum of 5 times (1 time-saving + 4 remaining reserved). As a result, in the first win from the normal game state, the number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state is set to 1, so the probability of entering RUSH, where jackpot games are more likely to occur consecutively, is 50%. On the other hand, when a jackpot game that occurred based on a game ball entering the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state or the b-time-saving game state has ended, the number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state is set to 5. Therefore, the number of special jackpot draws (second special game) that can be performed triggered by the opening of the second prize slot 315 when the a-time-saving game state or the b-time-saving game state is started is a maximum of 9 times (5 time-saving + 4 remaining reserved). As a result, the RUSH entry rate for the first win from the b-time-saving game state is 100%, and the b-time-saving game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is a profitable game state. Furthermore, the RUSH continuation rate in the a-time-saving game state, which is entered after the end of a big win, is 71.3%.

[Variable Table]
Next, referring to Figures 342(A) and 342(B), we will explain the variation tables used to set the variation patterns (variation display time) of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and decorative symbols in the special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game). Here, Figure 342(A) is a diagram showing an example of a losing variation table, and Figure 342(B) is a diagram showing an example of a winning variation table.

As shown in Figure 342(A), the losing variation table is used to set the display time for the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and decorative symbols when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss. Two types of losing variation tables are defined, depending on the type of loss. Specifically, there are two types: one for cases where the losing type involves a decorative symbol reach (pre- and post-loss reach, other than pre- and post-loss reach), and another for cases where the losing type does not involve a decorative symbol reach (complete loss).

If the losing type involves a decorative symbol reach (pre- and post-loss reach, reach other than pre- and post-loss), the display time for the 100 random values from 0 to 99 (special symbol variation pattern "01") out of the 200 special symbol variation type counter CS1 values (random values) from 0 to 199 in the updated state is 30 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "01"), the display time for the 50 random values from 100 to 149 is 60 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "02"), and the display time for the 100 random values from 150 to 199 is 90 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "03").

On the other hand, if the losing type does not involve a decorative symbol reach (a complete loss), the display time for the 150 random values (0 to 149) out of the 200 special symbol variation type counter CS1 values (random values) from 0 to 199, which are in the updated state, is 7 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "04"), and the display time for the 50 random values (150 to 199) is 10 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "05").

The special symbol variation type counter CS1, which contains the update information, is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing by 1 within a range of 200 (for example, 0 to 199) when the update process is executed in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17 and step S1414 in Figure 346. After reaching the maximum value, it is reset to 0. The values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 at the time a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 are stored in the first special symbol hold area RE1, specifically in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4, or in the second special symbol hold area REB, specifically in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REAB of the special symbol hold storage area 412b.

In this embodiment, the losing variation table selects one of the special variation patterns "01" to "05" according to the value of the special variation type counter CS1. When special variation pattern "01" is selected (when either a front/back losing reach or a reach other than a front/back losing reach is selected), the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the special game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the normal reach performance pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is executed after a high-speed variation performance (high-speed variation display), and the final individual performance type in the special game performance is a normal reach performance (see Figure 342(C)). Furthermore, if special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected (when a front/back miss reach or a reach other than a front/back miss is selected), the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 60s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and a special game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the super reach performance pattern. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed variation performance (high-speed variation display) is followed by a normal reach performance, and then the super reach performance pattern is executed, and the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance is the super reach performance (see Figure 342(D)). In addition, if special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected (when a front/back miss reach or a reach other than a front/back miss is selected), the sound lamp control device 5 determines a special reach performance pattern with the longest variation display time of 90s as the variation type (performance pattern), and a special game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the special reach performance pattern. The Special Reach演出 pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed reel spin (high-speed reel spin display) is followed by a normal reach performance, then a super reach performance pattern, and finally a special reach performance. This is the final individual performance type in the special symbol game performance, and it is the Special Reach performance (see Figure 342(E)). Furthermore, if special symbol reel spin pattern "04" is selected (a complete miss is selected), the sound lamp control device 5 determines the non-reach performance pattern, which has the shortest reel spin display time of 7s, as the reel spin type (performance pattern). If special symbol reel spin pattern "05" is selected (a complete miss is selected), the sound lamp control device 5 determines the non-reach performance pattern, which has the reel spin display time of 10s, as the reel spin type (performance pattern), and the special game performance is executed according to the non-reach performance pattern in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The non-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed reel spin (high-speed reel spin display) is executed without a reach performance (see Figure 342(F)).

As shown in Figure 342(B), the winning variation table is used to set the variation display time for the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and decorative symbols when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a minor win. In this winning variation table, of the 200 values (random values) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 (0-199) that are currently updated, the variation display time for the 20 random values from 0 to 19 is 30 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "01"), the variation display time for the 100 random values from 20 to 119 is 60 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "02"), and the variation display time for the 70 random values from 120 to 199 is 90 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "03").

The special symbol variation type counter CS1, which contains the update information, is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing by 1 within a range of 200 (for example, 0 to 199) when the update process is executed in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17 and step S1414 in Figure 346. After reaching the maximum value, it is reset to 0. The values of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 at the time a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 are stored in the first special symbol hold area RE1, specifically in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4, or in the second special symbol hold area REB, specifically in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REAB of the special symbol hold storage area 412b.

In this embodiment, the winning variation table selects one of the special variation patterns "01" to "03" according to the value of the special variation type counter CS1. When special variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 and the like execute a special game performance according to the normal reach performance pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is executed after a high-speed variation performance (high-speed variation display), and the final individual performance type in the special game performance is a normal reach performance. When special variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 60s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 and the like execute a special game performance according to the super reach performance pattern. The Super Reach animation pattern is an animation pattern in which a high-speed reel spin animation (high-speed reel spin display) is followed by a normal reach animation, and then the Super Reach animation pattern is executed. This animation pattern results in the Super Reach animation being the final individual animation type in the special symbol game animation. Furthermore, if the special symbol reel spin pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the Special Reach animation pattern, which has the longest reel spin display time of 90s, as the reel spin type (animation pattern), and the special game animation is executed according to the Special Reach animation pattern in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The Special Reach animation pattern is an animation pattern in which a high-speed reel spin animation (high-speed reel spin display) is followed by a normal reach animation, then the Super Reach animation pattern, and then the Special Reach animation. This animation pattern results in the Special Reach animation being the final individual animation type in the special symbol game animation.

Thus, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a minor win, one of "01" to "03" is selected as the special symbol variation pattern. Based on this, the symbol display unit 341 and the sound lamp control device 5 determine the variation type (performance pattern) as a reach performance pattern (normal reach performance pattern, super reach performance pattern, or special reach performance pattern).

Furthermore, unlike the losing variation table, the winning variation table of this embodiment includes, as a reach animation pattern (normal reach animation pattern, super reach animation pattern, or special reach animation pattern), a reach animation pattern in which the aforementioned special animation, the re-draw animation (re-draw display), is executed.

Here, Figure 343(A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance pattern in which a re-draw performance (re-draw display) is executed. The performance pattern shown in Figure 343(A) is an example of a special reach performance pattern in which, after the execution of the special reach performance, a revival performance (revival display) and an upgrade performance (upgrade display) are executed as a re-draw performance (re-draw display).

Although the diagrams are omitted, the special reach animation patterns may include animation patterns in which only a revival animation (revival display) is performed as a re-draw animation (re-draw display) after the special reach animation is executed, or animation patterns in which only an upgrade animation (upgrade display) is performed as a re-draw animation (re-draw display) after the special reach animation is executed.

Furthermore, in normal animation patterns where a re-draw animation (re-draw display) is performed, at least one of the following will be performed as the re-draw animation (re-draw display): a revival animation (re-draw display) or an upgrade animation (upgrade display) after the normal animation has finished. Also, in special animation patterns where a re-draw animation (re-draw display) is performed, at least one of the following will be performed as the re-draw animation (re-draw display): a revival animation (re-draw display) or an upgrade animation (upgrade display) after the special animation has finished.

Furthermore, unlike the losing variation table, the winning variation table of this embodiment does not include non-reach animation patterns. However, if non-reach animation patterns are included in the winning variation table, the non-reach animation pattern may be set to an animation pattern in which a re-draw animation (re-draw display) is executed.

Next, the re-draw animation (re-draw display) will be explained with reference to Figures 343(B), 343(C), and 344. Here, Figures 343(B), 343(C), and 344 are diagrams illustrating the re-draw animation (re-draw display).

As shown in Figure 343(B), the revival animation (revival display), a special effect in the special feature game during gameplay, is an effect (display) in which, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the decorative symbols, which are predetermined symbols, stop and are displayed as a notification in a combination corresponding to a loss, and then the decorative symbols stop and are displayed as a notification in a combination corresponding to a minor win. Specifically, the revival animation (revival display) is an effect (display) in which the decorative symbols stop and are displayed as a notification in a combination other than matching numbers, and then, for example, for a certain period of time, the decorative symbols do not stop completely in a combination other than matching numbers but instead vibrate, and then the decorative symbols change from a combination other than matching numbers to matching numbers and are displayed as a confirmed result.

As shown in Figure 343(C), the upgrade effect (upgrade display), which is a special effect in the special game during gameplay, is an effect in which, for example, when a game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 in a minor win game, a display indicates that it is a minor win that will result in a 4R time-saving big win game, and then the display indicates that it is a minor win that will result in a 16R time-saving big win game. Specifically, the upgrade animation (upgrade display) is an animation (display) in which, after the decorative symbols stop on a repeating number other than "777" as a notification display, the notification display alternates between a repeating number other than "777" (see Figure 344(A)) and a repeating number of "777" (see Figure 344(B)), and then the notification display confirms the repeating number of "777" (see Figure 344(C)). If the upgrade animation (upgrade display) is not performed, the notification display alternates between a repeating number other than "777" (see Figure 344(A)) and a repeating number of "777" (see Figure 344(B)), and then the notification display confirms the repeating number other than "777" (see Figure 344(D)).

In special symbol games where the game is in progress, the revival animation (revival display) and upgrade animation (upgrade display) are, as mentioned above, animations incorporated into a specific variation type (animation pattern) set for each special symbol game. In other words, the revival animation (revival display) and upgrade animation (upgrade display) in a special symbol game while it is in progress are executed as part of the special symbol game animation (part of the decorative symbol variation display) when a specific variation type (animation pattern) is set, which is used when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a minor win, from among multiple variation types (animation patterns) that are set according to the variation display time of the decorative symbols and the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery. Therefore, the revival animation (revival display) and upgrade animation (upgrade display) are executed by repeating the drawing list update process, which is update information, a number of times determined according to the variation type (animation pattern) set for the special symbol game. In other words, during a special feature game in progress, the decorative symbols are displayed as a notification before revival or upgrade during the update process up to a predetermined period before the update completion state where the final drawing list update process is executed as update information. By updating the drawing list, which is the update information, to the end through the update process using the subsequent period, the decorative symbols can be displayed as a confirmed notification. This makes it possible to smoothly and reliably execute the revival (revival display) or upgrade (upgrade display) of the decorative symbols as special effects in the symbol display unit 341 during a single special feature game that announces a jackpot.

[Startup and Prize Entry Processing]
Next, referring to Figure 345, the start-up prize-winning process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17 will be explained. Here, Figure 345 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process.

<Step S1101>
As shown in Figure 345, in the start-up prize-winning process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not there has been a prize awarded to the first prize-winning slot 314 (step S1101). If the MPU 41 determines that there has been a prize awarded to the first prize-winning slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process moves to step S1102. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been no prize awarded to the first prize-winning slot 314 (step S1101: No), the process moves to step S1110.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved balls N in the first special feature stored in the first special feature reserved ball storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved balls N in the first special feature is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1110. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N in the first special feature is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1103: No), the MPU 41 performs the process of adding 1 to the number of reserved balls N in the first special feature (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol win/loss information before it becomes subject to the jackpot determination in step S2102 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 353, and sets the number of reserved balls command as update information in the RAM 412 based on this confirmation result. This number of reserved balls command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process shown in Figure 346. When the sound lamp control device 5 receives the number of reserved balls command, it performs an update process for the image related to the special symbol data (special symbol data image) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 53).

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated information updated by the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which is updated information updated by the update processes in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 346, and stores these counter values in the RAM 412 in the first empty reserve area of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b. At this time, the first empty reserve area of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA stores the game state at the time of entry into the first prize slot 314 (normal game state, a) time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state.

<Steps S1106 and S1107>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 uses the special 1 jackpot win/failure table (see Figure 341(A)) to determine whether the result of the win/failure determination is a minor win or not, based on the various counter values stored in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, and determines whether the result of the win/failure determination is a minor win or not (step S1107). If the result of the win/failure determination is a minor win (step S1106: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1108, and if the result of the win/failure determination is not a minor win but a miss (step S1106: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1109.

<Step S1108>
If the result of the negative determination is a minor win (step S1106: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol hold command in the RAM 412 that can identify the type of big win and the variation pattern stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA. This first special symbol hold command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 346. When the sound lamp control device 5 receives the first special symbol hold command, it executes an update process for the special symbol data, which is update information stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

<Step S1109>
If the result of the win/loss determination is a loss and not a minor win (step S1106: No), the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol hold command in the RAM 412 that can identify the type of loss and variation pattern stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA. This first special symbol hold command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 346. When the sound lamp control device 5 receives the first special symbol hold command, it executes an update process for the special symbol data, which is update information stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a win in the second prize slot 315. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been a win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1110: Yes), it proceeds to step S1111. If it determines that there has been no win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1110: No), it terminates the start prize process.

<Steps S1111 and S1112>
In step S1111, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1111: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start-up winning process. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1111: No), the MPU 41 performs an update process in which it adds 1 to the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol (step S1112).

<Step S1113>
In step S1113, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol win/loss information before it becomes subject to the jackpot determination in step S2102 of the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 353, and sets the number of reserved balls command as update information in the RAM 412 based on this confirmation result. This number of reserved balls command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process shown in Figure 346. When the sound lamp control device 5 receives the number of reserved balls command, it performs an update process for the image related to the special symbol data (special symbol data image) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 53).

<Step S1114>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated information updated by the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1, which is updated information updated by the update processes in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 346, and stores these counter values in the RAM 412 in the first empty reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b. At this time, the first empty reserve area of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB stores the game state at the time of entry into the second prize slot 315 (normal game state, a) time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state.

<Steps S1115-S1117>
In step S1115, the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a profitable game state, is turned on. The a-time-saving game state flag is set to turn on in step S3638 of the game state transition process in Figure 367 when transitioning from a profitable game state, which is the jackpot game state, and is set to turn off in step S3651 of the game state transition process in Figure 368 when transitioning to a normal game state, etc.

If the a-time-saving game state flag, indicating that the game is in a-time-saving game state, is on (step S1115: Yes), the MPU 41 uses the a-time-saving special 2 jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 341(B)) to determine the outcome based on the various counter values stored in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (step S1116), and then proceeds to step S1118. On the other hand, if the a-time-saving game state flag, indicating that the game is in a-time-saving game state, is off (step S1115: Yes), the MPU 41 uses the b-time-saving special 2 jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 341(C)) to determine the outcome based on the various counter values stored in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (step S1117), and then proceeds to step S1118.

<Step S1118>
In step S1118, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the win/fail judgment is a minor win or not. If the result of the win/fail judgment is a minor win (step S1118: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1119. If the result of the win/fail judgment is not a minor win but a loss (step S1118: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1120.

<Step S1119>
If the result of the negative judgment is a minor win (step S1118: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol hold command in the RAM 412 that can identify the type of big win and the variation pattern stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB. This second special symbol hold command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 346. When the sound lamp control device 5 receives the second special symbol hold command, it executes an update process for the special symbol data, which is update information stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

<Step S1120>
If the result of the win/loss judgment is a loss and not a minor win (step S1118: No), the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol hold command in the RAM 412 that can identify the type of loss and the variation pattern stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB. This second special symbol hold command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 346. When the sound lamp control device 5 receives the second special symbol hold command, it executes an update process for the special symbol data, which is update information stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

[Main process]
Next, referring to Figures 346 to 368, the main processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in this embodiment will be described. The main processing of this embodiment differs from the main processing of the first embodiment described above in that it performs the special game count management processing (step S1406-1 in Figure 346) and the minor win game control processing (step S1406-2 in Figure 346), and some of the other processing also differs from the main processing of the first embodiment described above. The main processing of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the main processing of the first embodiment.

[General Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 347 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular symbol game control process executed in step S1404 of the main process in Figure 346. In the regular symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the display of changes and stops of regular symbols (regular symbols) in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. The regular symbol game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 347.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Figure 347, in the regular symbol game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the regular symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the game is in progress when the regular symbols are being displayed in a variation state (regular symbol game is being executed), is on (step S1501). The regular symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the variation display of the regular symbols (regular symbol game) starts in the regular symbol variation start process shown in Figure 349, which will be described later, and is set to off in step S1511 of the regular symbol game control process when the regular symbols are displayed in a stopped state (regular symbol game ends).

If the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., normal symbol gameplay is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508. Conversely, if the "Displaying Normal Symbol Variation" flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., normal symbol gameplay is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Display" flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if a normal diagram game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is open (a normal diagram winning game is being played), is on (step S1502). The "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in the normal diagram winning game control process shown in Figure 349, described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric mechanism 315b is closed.

If the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is ON (Step S1502: Yes), i.e., if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Opening" flag is OFF (Step S1502: No), i.e., if a regular winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, if a regular win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "minor win game state" flag, which indicates that the game is in progress during a minor win game, is on (step S1503). In the game state transition process shown in Figure 366 described later, the minor win game state flag is set to on in step S3602 when a minor win game is started, and to off in step S3614 when a minor win game ends.

If the minor win game status flag is on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the normal game control process if a minor win game is currently in progress. That is, in this embodiment, the normal game is not started while a minor win game is in progress. Of course, the normal game may be started while a minor win game is in progress. On the other hand, if the minor win game status flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if a minor win game is not currently in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the minor win game state flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if a minor win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the game is in progress while a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S1504). In the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 366 below, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3507 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S3554 when a jackpot game ends.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is ON (Step S1504: Yes), and the big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the normal game is not started while the big win game is in progress. Of course, the normal game may be started while the big win game is in progress. On the other hand, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is OFF (Step S1504: No), that is, if the big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1504: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of regular figure variable reserves X stored in the regular figure variable reserves storage area SNA set in the regular figure reserves storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1505). If the number of regular figure variable reserves X is 0 (step S1505: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the regular figure game control process, and if the number of regular figure variable reserves X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the process proceeds to step S1506.

<Step S1506>
If the number of reserved regular diagrams X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 performs regular diagram data setting processing for the regular diagram success/failure information stored in the regular diagram reservation storage area 412c (step S1506), and proceeds to step S1507. Details of the regular diagram data setting processing will be described later with reference to Figure 348.

<Step S1507>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 executes a regular symbol variation start process to cause the regular symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the variation of the regular symbols based on the information stored in the regular symbol hold storage area 412c, and then terminates the regular symbol game control process. Details of the regular symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 349.

<Step S1508>
If the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Display" flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if a normal diagram game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on (step S1508). In the big win game control process shown in Figure 366 below, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S3507 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S3554 when a big win game ends.

If the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is ON (Step S1508: Yes), i.e., if a big win game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. Conversely, if the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is OFF (Step S1508: No), i.e., if a big win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509.

<Step S1509>
If the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1508: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variation display (step S1509). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol that is being displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end of normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S1509: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation display time has not elapsed (step S1509: No), that is, if it is not time to stop displaying the normal symbol that is being varied on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol game control process.

<Steps S1510-S1512>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the "Big Win Game" flag is on (step S1508: Yes), that is, if a big win game is started while a normal symbol game is in progress, or if the normal symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbols has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the display of the fluctuating normal symbols (end of the normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the display of the normal symbols on the symbols corresponding to the result of the normal symbol win lottery for the normal symbol game (step S1510), and sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols are fluctuating (the normal symbol game is in progress), to off (step S1511). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop Display" flag, which indicates that the normal symbols have stopped displaying, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, to on (step S1512), and ends the normal symbol game control process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Diagram Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal diagram winning game control process shown in Figure 350 (described later) to determine whether or not it is time to start the normal diagram winning game (to release the electric mechanism 315b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the changing normal symbols stops (ends the normal symbol game) not only when the normal symbol display time has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game begins during the execution of a normal symbol game. In other words, if a jackpot game begins, the normal symbol stops (ends the normal symbol game).

[General drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 348 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general data setting process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Figure 347. In the general data setting process, the storage contents of the general data hold storage area 412c in the storage area of the main control device 4 in Figure 11 are updated. The general data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 348.

<Steps S1601-S1603>
As shown in Figure 348, in the general diagram data setting process, first the MPU 41 performs an update process to subtract 1 from the general diagram fluctuation reserve number X, which is update information stored in the general diagram fluctuation reserve number storage area SNA (step S1601), and then performs an update process to move the general diagram correct/fail information from the general diagram first reserve area SE1 to the general diagram execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 performs an update process to shift the general diagram correct/fail information stored in the general diagram second reserve area SE2 to the general diagram fourth reserve area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, an update process is performed to move the general diagram correct/fail information from the general diagram second reserve area SE2 to the general diagram first reserve area SE1, the general diagram correct/fail information from the general diagram third reserve area SE3 to the general diagram second reserve area SE2, and the general diagram correct/fail information from the general diagram fourth reserve area SE4 to the general diagram third reserve area SE3.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
Here, Figure 349 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1507 of Figure 347. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and an update process is executed in which various commands and flags, which are update information, are set based on the lottery result in the normal symbol win lottery. The normal symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 349.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Figure 349, in the normal game state change start process, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is on (step S1701). The normal game state is set to on in steps S3628 in Figure 367, S3649 and S3655 in Figure 368 when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state in the game state transition process described later, and is set to off in steps S3604 in Figure 366 and S3645 in Figure 367 when transitioning from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state is ON (Step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1702; if the normal game state is OFF (Step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1705.

<Steps S1702-S1704>
If the normal game state is ON (Step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are update information included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to the values of a normal win, based on the normal game state normal win/loss table (see Figure 340(A)) and the normal game state normal win type distribution table (see Figure 340(C)) (Step S1702). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal win/loss determination is a normal win (Step S1703).

If the result of the normal symbol win/loss determination is a normal symbol win (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open normal symbol win flag to ON (step S1704), indicating that the second prize slot 315 is open for a long time, and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol win/loss determination is not a normal symbol win (step S1703: No), i.e., a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1705-S1707>
If the normal game state is off (step S1701: No), that is, if the time-saving game state is in (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state), the MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are update information included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, correspond to the values of a normal win, based on the time-saving game state normal win/loss table (see Figure 340(B)) and the time-saving game state normal win type distribution table (see Figure 340(D)) (step S1706). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal win/loss determination is a normal win (step S1707).

If the result of the normal symbol win/loss determination is a normal symbol win (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal symbol win flag to ON (step S1707), indicating that the second prize slot 315 is briefly opened, and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol win/loss determination is not a normal symbol win (step S1706: No), i.e., a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 performs a regular symbol variation pattern setting process, which sets the regular symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the regular symbols in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 in regular symbol games, by referring to a regular symbol variation display table (not shown).

Then, in addition to the regular diagram variation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 sets a regular diagram variation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/loss determination in step S1702 or S1705 (the result of the regular diagram winning lottery) (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The regular symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the regular symbol variation pattern command, causes the symbol display unit 341 and other components to execute effects corresponding to the regular symbol game, such as effects indicating that the regular symbol game is being played or effects indicating the result of the regular symbol winning lottery.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts displaying the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, which indicates that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variation state, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being played (step S1711), and ends the normal symbol variation start process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 347 to determine whether the normal symbol game is currently running (normal symbol fluctuation display is active).

[General Winning Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 350 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal win game control process executed in step S1405 of the main process in Figure 346. In the normal win game control process, when the result of the normal win lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allow state, which permits the entry of game balls into the second prize pocket 315, and a restrict state, which restricts it, by controlling the opening and closing of the electric mechanism 315b. The normal win game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 350.

<Step S1801>
As shown in Figure 350, in the normal symbol win game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game. The normal symbol change stop display flag is set to on in step S1512 when the normal symbol stops being displayed in the normal symbol game control process shown in Figure 347.

If the normal symbol variation stop indicator flag is on (step S1801: Yes), meaning it is the right time to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop indicator flag is off (step S1801: No), meaning it is not the right time to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
If the normal diagram change stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when a normal diagram win game can be started, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 362 below, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3507 when a jackpot game is started, and to off in step S3554 when a jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forcibly terminated by the start of a jackpot game, the normal winning game will not start even if the result of the normal winning lottery for that normal winning game is a normal winning game. That is, in this embodiment, a normal winning game will not start while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, a new normal winning game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the flag indicating a jackpot game is off (step S1802: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S1803). The flag indicating a long-opening regular win is a flag that indicates the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win, and is set to on in step S1704 of the regular win variation start process in Figure 349 when the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular win lottery for a completed regular win game is a long-opening regular win. If the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1804, and if the flag indicating a long-opening regular win is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long-opening regular ball win flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular ball win lottery for the completed regular ball game is a long-opening regular ball win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to the 6 seconds of the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in the long-opening regular ball win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize pocket 315) as update information and sets it as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referenced in step S1815 of the regular ball win game control process to determine the return timing of the electric mechanism 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular ball win flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long-opening regular symbol win flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is not a long-opening regular symbol win, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the short-opening regular symbol win flag is set to on (step S1806). The short-opening regular symbol win flag is a flag that indicates the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win, and is set to on in step S1707 of the regular symbol variation start process in Figure 24 when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a short-opening regular symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a short-opening regular symbol win. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1807. If the short-open regular symbol win flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the regular symbol win lottery for the completed regular symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short-opening regular-number win flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular-number win lottery for the completed regular-number game is a short-opening regular-number win, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in a short-opening regular-number win game (the time during which game balls can enter the second prize slot 315), as update information and sets it as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-number win flag to OFF (step S1808) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809-S1811>
If the result of the regular prize draw is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long-open regular prize flag or short-open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric mechanism 315b (step S1809). This opens the second prize entry area 315, which is the starting ball entry area, and puts it in an allowable state that allows game balls to enter the second prize entry area 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism open command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1810), sets an electric mechanism open flag to ON to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric mechanism release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the sound lamp control device 5 can initiate an effect indicating, for example, that the electric mechanism 315b is released to the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the electric mechanism release command.

<Step S1812>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a win, the process of opening the electric mechanism 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or if both the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are set to off (the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss) (steps S1803 and S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended), to off (step S1812), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S1813>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop" indicator flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which is set to turn on when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal symbol winning game is in progress. If the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the "electric mechanism open" flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set as update information in step S1804 or S1807 of the regular winning game control process (step S1814), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, which indicates the update is complete (step S1815). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric mechanism 315b to its original position, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process.

<Steps S1816-S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric mechanism 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second prize entry area 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is closed, and the entry of game balls into the second prize entry area 315 is restricted. The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism close command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric mechanism open flag to off, indicating that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S1818), and terminates the normal winning game control process.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to terminate the animation indicating that the electric mechanism is open, for example, in the symbol display unit 341, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

[Special Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 351 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main process in Figure 346. In the special symbol game control process, the storage contents of the special symbol hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is controlled, for example, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 is controlled. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to Figure 351.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Figure 351, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is on. In the big win game control process shown later in Figure 366, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag is set to on in step S3507 when a big win game is started, and to off in step S3554 when a big win game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the special feature game control process if the jackpot game flag is on (step S1901: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the special feature game is not started while a jackpot game is in progress. Of course, the special feature game may be started while a jackpot game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is off (step S1901: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the minor jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in progress during a minor jackpot game, is on (step S1902). In the game state transition process shown in Figure 366 described later, the minor jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S3602 when a minor jackpot game is started, and to off in step S3614 when a minor jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process if the minor win game status flag is on (step S1902: Yes), i.e., if a minor win game is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the special symbol game is not started while a minor win game is in progress. Of course, the special symbol game may be started while a minor win game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the minor win game status flag is off (step S1902: No), i.e., if the minor win game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the minor win game state flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the minor win game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a variation display state (the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is in progress), is on (step S1903). The special symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S2107 or S2117 when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts in the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 353 described later, and is set to off in step S1912 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the special symbol game control process.

If the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S1903: Yes), meaning the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, if the "Special Symbol Variation Display" flag is off (step S1903: No), meaning the special symbol is not being displayed in a variation (special symbol game is not in progress) when a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol is changing is off (step S1903: No), that is, if the special symbol is not changing when neither a big win game nor a small win game is being played (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special symbol reserved ball count N, which is the update information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball count storage area NAA of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 412b, and the second special symbol reserved ball count M, which is the update information stored in the second special symbol reserved ball count storage area NAB, are 0 (step S1904).

The MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process if both the updated information, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol game (N) and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol game (M), are 0 (step S1904: Yes), i.e., there is no reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game. On the other hand, if either the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol game (N) or the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol game (M) is not 0 (step S1904: No), i.e., there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game or the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1905.

<Step S1905>
If either the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol N or the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol M, which are update information, is not 0 (step S1904: No), that is, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game and a reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process, which is an update process for the data of the special symbol win/failure information (special symbol data), which is update information stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b (step S1904), and proceeds to step S1906. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 352.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to start the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362, which is a display means, or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363, which is a display means (execute the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 353.

<Step S1907>
If the flag indicating that the special symbol is changing is on (step S1903: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, is changing (the special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol changing display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set in the special symbol changing pattern setting process in step S2103 or S2111 of the special symbol changing start process in Figure 353 described later, has elapsed since the start of the changing display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S1906). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the special symbol that is changing and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variation display time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the special symbol game due to the notification display by the stopping of the special symbol during variation display, the process proceeds to step S1907.

On the other hand, if the MPU 41 has not yet elapsed the aforementioned variation display time from the start of the variation display of the first or second special symbol (step S1907: No), that is, if it is not the timing to terminate the special symbol game by the notification display due to the stopping of the special symbol during variation display, it terminates the special symbol game control process.

<Step S1908>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, when it is time to terminate the special symbol game by displaying a notification by stopping the special symbol during the variable display, the MPU 41 executes notification display control to the display means, the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, so that the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 stops and displays the special symbol in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1908). Specifically, when the MPU 41 executes notification display control to the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, it stops and displays the special symbol corresponding to the minor win to notify that it is a minor win, while if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, it stops and displays the special symbol corresponding to the miss to notify that it is a minor win.

In this embodiment, even if the jackpot lottery results in a minor win or a loss and no jackpot is set, if the jackpot lottery results include a jackpot, and the result is a jackpot, notification display control is performed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 to stop and display the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot, thereby indicating that it is a jackpot.

<Steps S1909 and S1910>
In step S1909, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which are predetermined symbols, have stopped being displayed due to the execution of notification display control. Furthermore, it sets the special symbol variation display in progress flag to OFF, indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation state (special symbol game is in progress) (step S1910), and proceeds to step S1911.

<Step S1911>
In step S1911, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol game count flag to ON. This special symbol game count flag is referenced in step S3310 of the special symbol game count management process shown in Figure 354 to manage the remaining number of time-saving game turns in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state), and also to manage the remaining number of special symbol game turns required to transition to the b time-saving game state.

<Step S1912>
In step S1912, the MPU 41 sets a confirmation display command and terminates the special symbol game control process. The confirmation display command is a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the special symbol has stopped being displayed. This confirmation display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process shown in Figure 346. When the sound lamp control device 5 receives the confirmation display command, it executes a confirmation display animation for a predetermined decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and terminates the special symbol game animation.

[Special drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 352 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special feature data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of the special feature game control process in Figure 351. In the special feature data setting process, an update process is performed on the contents of the special feature hold storage area 412b, where the update information set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored. The special feature data setting process will be explained below with reference to Figure 352.

<Step S2001>
As shown in Figure 352, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game, which is update information for the second special symbol game, is 0. If the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, if there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol game and there are reserved balls for the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, if there are reserved balls for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2006. In other words, by determining whether the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is 0, the MPU 41 prioritizes starting the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game. However, the first special symbol game may be started with priority over the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order (retention order) of the game balls entering the first or second prize slot 314 or 315, so that either the first or second special symbol game is executed. Furthermore, without assigning a priority to the start of the first and second special symbol games, they may be executed independently of each other, or they may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol variation).

<Step S2002-S2005>
If the number of reserved balls M in the second special feature is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process to subtract 1 from the number of reserved balls N in the first special feature, which is the update information stored in the number of reserved balls NAA of the first special feature reserved storage area REA (step S2002), and then performs an update process to move the special feature win/loss information from the first reserved area REA1 of the first special feature reserved storage area REA to the special feature execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 performs an update process to shift the special feature win/loss information in the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special feature reserved storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in the update process of step S2004, the special symbol success/failure information of the second holding area REA2 in the first special symbol holding storage area REA is moved to the first holding area REA1, the special symbol success/failure information of the third holding area REA3 is moved to the second holding area REA2, and the special symbol success/failure information of the fourth holding area REA4 is moved to the third holding area REA3.

When the processing in step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 sets the first special feature game start flag to ON (step S2005), indicating that the first special feature game should be started, and proceeds to step S2010. This first special feature game start flag is referenced in step S2101 of the special feature game start processing shown in Figure 353 below to determine whether or not to start the first special feature game.

<Step S2006-S2009>
If the number of reserved balls in the second special feature M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 performs an update process to subtract 1 from the number of reserved balls in the second special feature M, which is the update information stored in the second special feature reserved ball storage area NAB of the second special feature reserved ball storage area REB (step S2006), and then performs an update process to move the special feature hit/fail information from the first reserved area REB1 of the second special feature reserved ball storage area REB to the special feature execution area AE (step S2007). Subsequently, the MPU 41 performs an update process to shift the special feature hit/fail information from the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special feature reserved ball storage area REB one by one (step S2008). Specifically, in step S2008, the special symbol win/loss information from the second reserve area REB2 is moved to the first reserve area REB1, the special symbol win/loss information from the third reserve area REB3 is moved to the second reserve area REB2, and the special symbol win/loss information from the fourth reserve area REB4 is moved to the third reserve area REB3. When the processing in step S2008 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2009.

When the processing in step S2008 is completed, the MPU 41 sets the second special feature game start flag to ON (step S2009), indicating that the second special feature game should be started, and proceeds to step S2010. This second special feature game start flag is referenced in step S2109 of the special feature game start processing shown in Figure 353 below to determine whether or not to start the second special feature game.

<Steps S2010 and S2011>
In step S2010, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special symbol win/loss information for the first special symbol hold storage area REA1 to the fourth special symbol hold storage area REA4 of the first special symbol hold storage area REA, or the first special symbol hold storage area REB1 to the fourth special symbol hold storage area REB4 of the second special symbol hold storage area REB, has shifted. This special symbol shift command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol shift command.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a reserved ball count command in the RAM 412 to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of reserved balls after the special feature game has started (step S2011), and then terminates the special feature data setting process. This reserved ball count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process shown in Figure 346. When the voice lamp control device 5 receives the reserved ball count command, it performs an update process for the image related to the special feature data (special feature data image) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 53).
The special drawing data setting process is terminated.

[Special Feature Fluctuation Start Processing]
Here, Figure 353 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1906 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 351. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started when the first special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, on the first special symbol display unit 362, which is a display means, or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, on the second special symbol display unit 363, which is a display means, starts to change, and various processes in the game state accompanying the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start process will be explained below with reference to Figure 353.

<Step S2101>
As shown in Figure 353, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special feature game start flag, which indicates that the first special feature game will be started, is set to ON. The first special feature game start flag is set to ON in step S2005 of the special feature data setting process in Figure 352 when the update process of the win/loss information for the special feature execution area AE of the special feature hold storage area 412b is completed in order to start the first special feature game.

If the first special symbol game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2102. If the first special symbol game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: No), the process proceeds to step S2109.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the first special symbol game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the win/loss information stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b (step S2102), sets the variation display time of the first special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36, which is a display means, as a special symbol variation pattern, and sets the stop type of the first special symbol as a notification display (step S2103), and proceeds to step S2104.

Furthermore, the display time for the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the updated information, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the winning variation table (see Figure 342(B)), if the result of the win/loss determination in step S2102 is a minor win. If the result of the win/loss determination in step S2102 is a loss, the pattern is set based on the updated information, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the losing variation table (see Figure 342(A)).

Furthermore, the stopping type of the first special symbol is determined as follows: if the result of the win/loss determination in step S2102 is a minor win, the symbol corresponding to the minor win is set; if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss, the symbol corresponding to the loss is set. Once the stopping type of the first special symbol is determined in this way, the result of the win/loss determination (minor win or loss) is displayed as a notification.

In this embodiment, even if the jackpot lottery results in a minor win or a loss, and no jackpot is set, if the jackpot lottery results include a jackpot, and the result is a jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set as the stopping type of the first special symbol. Once the stopping type of the first special symbol is determined in this way, the result of the win/loss determination is displayed as a jackpot.

<Steps S2104 and S2105>
In step S2104, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412 that includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is the result of the win/failure determination in step S2102, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S2103. Furthermore, it sets a stop type command that identifies the stop type of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 set in step S2103 (step S2105), and then proceeds to step S2107.

The special symbol variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. Based on these commands, the sound lamp control device 5 sets the performance pattern (special symbol game performance) on the symbol display unit 341, etc., and creates and displays the drawing list, which is the update information, based on that performance pattern. This allows for the execution of special performances such as re-draw performances (re-draw display), promotion performances (promotion display), and revival performances (revival display) during the first special symbol game, which is currently in play. Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command; the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the first special symbol.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts displaying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36, thereby putting the first special symbol game into a game-playing state, and proceeds to step S2107.

<Steps S2107 and S2108>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation display flag to ON, indicating that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation state (the state of being in play while a special symbol game is being executed), and then sets the first special symbol game start flag to OFF (step S2108), thereby ending the variation start process.

Furthermore, the "Special Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is referenced in step S1903 of the special symbol game control process shown in Figure 351 to determine whether the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable state (in the game state during special symbol game execution) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

<Step S2109>
If the first special symbol game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol game start flag, which indicates that the second special symbol game will be started, is set to ON (step S2109). The second special symbol game start flag is set to ON in step S2009 of the special symbol data setting process in Figure 352 when the update process of the win/loss information for the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b is completed in order to start the second special symbol game.

If the second special symbol game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2110. If the first special symbol game start flag is not set to ON (step S2109: No), the MPU 41 terminates the variation start process.

<Steps S2110 and S2111>
If the second special symbol game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the win/loss information stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b (step S2110), sets the variation display time of the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36, which is a display means, as a special symbol variation pattern, and sets the stop type of the second special symbol as a notification display (step S2111), and proceeds to step S2112.

Furthermore, the display time for the second special symbol's variation (special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the updated information, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the winning variation table (see Figure 342(B)) if the result of the win/loss determination in step S2110 is a minor win. If the result of the win/loss determination in step S2110 is a loss, the pattern is set based on the updated information, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the losing variation table (see Figure 342(A)).

Furthermore, the stopping type of the second special symbol is determined as follows: if the result of the win/loss determination in step S2110 is a minor win, the symbol corresponding to the minor win is set; if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss, the symbol corresponding to the loss is set. Once the stopping type of the second special symbol is determined in this way, the result of the win/loss determination (minor win or loss) is displayed as a notification.

In this embodiment, even if the jackpot lottery results in a minor win or a loss, and no jackpot is set, if the jackpot lottery results include a jackpot, then the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set as the stopping type of the second special symbol. Once the stopping type of the second special symbol is determined in this way, the result of the win/loss determination is displayed as a jackpot.

<Steps S2112 and S2113>
In step S2112, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412 that includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game, which is the result of the win/fail determination in step S2110, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S2111. Furthermore, it sets a stop type command that identifies the stop type of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 set in step S2111 (step S2113), and then proceeds to step S2114.

The special symbol variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. Based on these commands, the sound lamp control device 5 sets the performance pattern (special symbol game performance) on the symbol display unit 341, etc., and creates and displays the updated drawing list based on that performance pattern. This allows for the execution of special performances such as re-draw performances (re-draw display), promotion performances (promotion display), and revival performances (revival display) in the second special symbol game, which is currently in play. Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command; the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the second special symbol.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 41 starts displaying the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, thereby putting the second special symbol game into play mode, and proceeds to step S2115.

<Steps S2115 and S2116>
In step S2115, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation display flag to ON, indicating that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variation state (the state of being in play while the special symbol game is being executed), and then sets the second special symbol game start flag to OFF (step S2116), thereby ending the variation start process.

Furthermore, the "Special Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is referenced in step S1903 of the special symbol game control process shown in Figure 351 to determine whether the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable state (in the game state during special symbol game execution) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

[Special Game Count Management Processing]
Herein are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for managing the number of special symbol game plays performed in step S1406-1 of the main process shown in Figures 354, 355, and 346. In the special symbol game play count management process, based on the execution of a special symbol game, a process is executed to manage the remaining number of time-saving game plays, which is update information for the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) which is a profitable game state, and the remaining number of special symbol game plays, which is update information until the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) is generated. The special symbol game play count management process will be explained below with reference to Figures 354 and 355.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Figure 354, in the special game count management process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the ceiling activation remaining count set flag, which sets the ceiling activation remaining count counter, is set to ON, for setting the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is update information indicating the number of special game counts required to transition to the b time-saving game state (step S3301). This ceiling activation remaining count set flag is set to ON in step S3553 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 362, which will be described later, when the jackpot game state, which is a profitable game state, ends.

If the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), i.e., if the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is the update information, is to be set, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3302. On the other hand, if the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), i.e., if the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is the update information, is not to be set, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
If the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), that is, if the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is update information, is set, the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining count counter to 1000 as its initial value. In other words, in this embodiment, if 1000 special symbol games are played after the jackpot game state, which is a profitable game state, has ended, without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the bonus granting condition is met, and the b time-saving game state, which is a profitable game state, is generated as a bonus grant.

In this embodiment, the remaining number of ceiling activations counter, which is the update information, is set as a subtractive counter. However, it may also be set as an additive counter. Furthermore, the initial value set for the remaining number of ceiling activations counter, which is the update information, is not limited to 1000; it can be set appropriately according to the probability of a minor win, etc.

In this embodiment, the rate of entering the RUSH state, which is more likely to result in consecutive jackpots, is more favorable when a jackpot is triggered by a small win triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot 315, compared to when a jackpot is triggered by a small win triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot 314 (see Figures 341(D) and 341(E)). Specifically, the rate of entering the RUSH state after a jackpot triggered by a small win triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot 314 is 50%, while the rate of entering the RUSH state after a jackpot triggered by a small win triggered by a game ball entering the second prize slot 315 is 100%.

On the other hand, in normal gameplay where left-handed play is encouraged, left-handed play makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first prize slot 314. In time-saving gameplay states, including the time-saving b state where right-handed play is encouraged, right-handed play makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second prize slot 315. Therefore, the rate of entering RUSH state and the expected payout are higher after transitioning to the time-saving b state compared to before transitioning to the time-saving b state. As a result, there is a break-even point, described later, where it is more advantageous not to trigger a jackpot when approaching the time-saving b state.

Similarly, in conventional gaming machines, there is a break-even point where it is more advantageous not to trigger a jackpot when the transition to the b-time-saving game state is approaching. In conventional gaming machines with such a break-even point, even if the player desires to transition to the b-time-saving game state, a jackpot may occur against the player's wishes, preventing the transition to the b-time-saving game state. In other words, because conventional gaming machines cannot control the timing of jackpots, a jackpot may occur at a time when triggering a jackpot results in a lower expected payout than transitioning to the b-time-saving game state—for example, just before transitioning to the b-time-saving game state. In this case, the player cannot enjoy the benefit of transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (higher expected payout), and the expected payout is also reduced.

In contrast, the win/loss table of this embodiment does not have a distribution for big wins; only small wins and misses are set (see Figures 341(A) to 341(E)). Therefore, the result of the big win lottery will never be a big win. Furthermore, when a predetermined game operation is performed on the launch handle 22 to shoot to the right during a small win, fulfilling the predetermined game condition of getting the game ball into the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83, a specific win state is generated. Therefore, the big win state cannot be generated without going through a small win game; in order to generate the big win state, it is necessary to perform a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 to shoot to the right during a small win game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is not set to the initial value of 1000 when a minor win occurs. When a major win occurs, upon the end of the major win, the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is set to the initial value of 1000, regardless of the value of the counter at the end of the major win. On the other hand, if the predetermined game operation is not performed on the launch handle 22 in order to shoot to the right during a minor win, the game ball will not enter the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism device 83, which is a predetermined game condition, and therefore a major win will not occur (a so-called "bust" state). In other words, even if a minor win is achieved, if the predetermined game condition of a game ball entering the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 is not met and the specific benefit of a major win is not generated, the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter at the end of the minor win is carried over. If a special feature game is then performed, the number of times the special feature game is performed is subtracted from the carried-over value of the remaining ceiling activation counter. As a result, even if a minor win occurs, the player can intentionally prevent the predetermined game condition of a game ball entering the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 by stopping the launch of the game ball or by shooting to the left, that is, by not performing the predetermined game operation for shooting to the right on the launch handle 22.

Thus, in this embodiment, since the win/loss table does not have a distribution for jackpots, the result of the jackpot lottery will never be a jackpot. This prevents a situation where, against the player's wishes, a jackpot occurs before the ceiling is activated, setting the remaining ceiling activation count to its initial value of 1000, when the player prefers the activation of the time-saving mode (b) due to the ceiling being reached rather than a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, a minor win game is executed. In this minor win game, if a predetermined game operation is performed on the launch handle 22 in order to shoot to the right, the predetermined game condition of the game ball entering the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 is met, and a jackpot game state, which is a specific benefit, is generated. On the other hand, if the predetermined game operation is not performed on the launch handle 22 in order to shoot to the right during the minor win game, the predetermined game condition of the game ball not entering the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 is not met, and therefore a jackpot game is not generated (a so-called "bust" state). In other words, in this embodiment, during a minor win game, by selecting whether or not to perform a predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 in order to shoot to the right, that is, whether or not to fulfill the predetermined game condition of getting a game ball into the V-entry opening 833 of the feather mechanism device 83, it is possible to choose whether or not to generate a big win game (initialize the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter), or not to generate a big win game (without initializing the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter), and whether or not to carry over the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter from before the minor win game occurred. In other words, even if a minor win game occurs, it becomes possible to execute a new special feature game while enjoying the same benefits as before the minor win game occurred (maintaining the same state) without enjoying the benefits of a big win game. As a result, when the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter approaches zero and the transition to the shortened time game state b, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, is imminent, that is, when it is more advantageous for the player not to trigger a jackpot, the player can avoid triggering a jackpot (initializing the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter) by preventing the game ball from entering the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 when a minor win game is performed, and at the same time, trigger the shortened time game state b, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, as desired by the player by performing a specified number of special symbol games. In other words, in this embodiment, even if a minor win occurs, a major win does not occur. This allows the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter at the end of the minor win to be carried over, and subsequent special feature games can subtract this value, thereby generating the b-time-saving game state, which is a ceiling-saving game state. Therefore, when a minor win occurs around the break-even point, the player can choose, based on their own judgment, whether to generate a major win or activate the ceiling. Specifically, by choosing to generate the b-time-saving game state through ceiling activation, the player can enjoy the benefits of the b-time-saving game state (preferential RUSH entry rate and high expected payout) at their own discretion. On the other hand, by choosing to generate a major win, the player can prioritize generating a major win over ceiling activation when there is limited time remaining (for example, when there is little time left until the arcade closes, or when there are restrictions on remaining time due to personal reasons).

In this embodiment, the notification method of the opening sequence of a minor win game differs before and after reaching the break-even point (see Figures 359(A) and 359(B)), thereby informing the player whether or not the break-even point has been reached. Therefore, based on the notification method of the opening sequence of the minor win game, the player can choose whether or not to trigger a major win game when a minor win occurs. Details of the notification method of the opening sequence will be described later.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initial value of the remaining number of jackpot activations counter, which is the update information, is set to 1000. However, the initial value set as the remaining number of jackpot activations counter is not limited to 1000; other values may also be used.

Furthermore, multiple initial values may be set for the remaining number of jackpot activations counter. When the conditions for setting an initial value for the jackpot activation counter are met, the initial value may be selected from these multiple values through a lottery or other means. For example, the initial values could be set to 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000, and one of these could be selected by lottery with equal or unequal probability.

In this way, by setting the initial value through a lottery or other means from multiple pre-set initial values, it becomes difficult for players to grasp the remaining number of special symbol plays required before the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling-time-saving game state, occurs. Therefore, it becomes difficult for players to grasp whether the remaining number of ceiling-time-saving plays (the value of the remaining number of ceiling-time-saving plays) has been set or not, for example, whether the gaming hall has performed a RAM reset on the gaming machine or changed the setting value that defines the small win probability (big win probability). This prevents a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine that would result from players being aware of whether or not a RAM reset or setting value has been changed. In addition, because it becomes difficult for players to grasp the remaining number of ceiling-time-saving plays (the value of the remaining number of ceiling-time-saving plays), it is suppressed from becoming a target for so-called "hyena" behavior, which involves targeting gaming machines 10 with a small number of remaining special symbol plays required before the b-time-saving game state occurs. Furthermore, because it becomes difficult for players to grasp the remaining number of ceiling activations (the value of the remaining ceiling activations), it also becomes difficult to grasp the timing of the change in the opening animation notification mode when a minor win occurs, from the first notification mode, the gain indication (see Figure 359(A)), to the second notification mode, the loss indication (see Figure 359(B)). Therefore, when a minor win occurs, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the change from the first notification mode, the gain indication (see Figure 359(A)), to the second notification mode, the loss indication (see Figure 359(B)), thus enhancing their interest and enjoyment of the game.

<Steps S3303 and S3304>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 354, in step S3303, the MPU 41 sets the "Ceiling Not Activated" flag to ON, which indicates that the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is set, that is, the time-saving game state (b), which is the profit game state that is the ceiling time-saving game state, has not occurred (step S3303), and proceeds to step S3304. The "Ceiling Not Activated" flag is referenced in step S3312 of the special game count management process to determine whether or not to subtract the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter, which is the update information.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the remaining count counter flag for ceiling activation to off (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3305.

<Step S3305>
In step S3305, the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving 5-times set flag is set to ON. The a-time-saving 5-times set flag is a flag that sets 5 times as the number of times to be played in the a-time-saving game state, which is a profitable game state to which the player transitions when the jackpot game state, which is a profitable game state, ends (the initial value of the a-time-saving remaining count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state, is set to ON in step S3622 or step S3625 of the game state transition process described later, when a jackpot game state, which is a profitable game state, is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry port 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 during a small win game that was triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second entry port 315 in the time-saving game state (a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state).

If the MPU 41 has the "a-Short Time 5-Time Set" flag set to ON (step S3305: Yes), that is, if it sets the initial value of the "a-Short Time Remaining Count Counter," which indicates the remaining number of short-time games in the "a-Short Time Game" state, to 5, it proceeds to step S3306. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 has the "a-Short Time 5-Time Set" flag set to OFF (step S3305: No), that is, if it does not set the initial value of the "a-Short Time Remaining Count Counter," which indicates the remaining number of short-time games in the "a-Short Time Game" state, it proceeds to step S3308.

<Steps S3306 and S3307>
If the "a. Shortened Time 5-Time Set" flag is set to ON (Step S3305: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial value of the "a. Shortened Time Remaining Count Counter," which is updated information indicating the remaining number of shortened time games in the shortened time game state, to 5 (Step S3306), and sets the "a. Shortened Time 5-Time Set" flag to OFF (Step S3307), and terminates the special symbol game count management process.

<Step S3308>
If the a-time reduction 5-set flag is set to off (step S3305: No), that is, if the a-time reduction remaining count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time reduction games in the a-time reduction game state, is not set to 5, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a-time reduction 1-set flag is set to on (step S3308). The a-time reduction 1-set flag is a flag that sets 1 as the number of times in the a-time reduction game state, which is a profitable game state to which the player transitions when the jackpot game state, which is a profitable game state, ends (setting 1 as the initial value of the a-time reduction remaining count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time reduction games in the a-time reduction game state). It is set to on in step S3618 of the game state transition process described later when the jackpot game state, which is a profitable game state, is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry port 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 during a small win game that was triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry port 314 in the normal game state.

If the 'a-Shortened Time Set' flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), that is, if the 'a-Shortened Time Remaining Count' counter, which indicates the remaining number of shortened time games in the 'a-Shortened Time Game' state, is set to 1, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3309. On the other hand, if the 'a-Shortened Time Set' flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), that is, if the 'a-Shortened Time Remaining Count' counter, which indicates the remaining number of shortened time games in the 'a-Shortened Time Game' state, is not set to 1, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game count management process.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the "a-Shortened Time 1 Set" flag is set to ON (Step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial value of the "a-Shortened Time Remaining Count Counter," which is updated information indicating the remaining number of shortened time games in the shortened time game state, to 1 (Step S3309), and sets the "a-Shortened Time 1 Set" flag to OFF (Step S3310), and terminates the special symbol game count management process.

<Steps S3311 and S3312>
If the remaining number of ceiling activations counter set flag is set to off (step S3301: No), that is, if the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is not set as update information, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special symbol game count flag is set to on (step S3311). The special symbol game count flag is a flag that causes the update process of the values of various counters managed in the special symbol game count management process to be executed, and is set to on in step S1911 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 351 when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, which is a display means, stops displaying a predetermined symbol, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

If the special symbol game count flag is set to ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special symbol game count flag to OFF (step S3312) and proceeds to step S3313. Conversely, if the special symbol game count flag is set to OFF (step S3311: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game count management process.

<Step S3313>
In step S3313, the MPU 41 determines whether the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is the update information, is set, that is, whether the ceiling not activated flag, which indicates that the game is in a state where the time-saving game state (a profitable game state) has not occurred, is set to ON.

If the MPU 41 has the "Ceiling Not Activated" flag set to ON (Step S3313: Yes), indicating that the game is in a state where the "Ceiling Time-Saving Game State" (a profitable game state) has not occurred, and the update information, the "Remaining Ceiling Activation Counter," is set, then the process proceeds to step S3314. On the other hand, if the "Ceiling Not Activated" flag, indicating that the "Ceiling Time-Saving Game State" (a profitable game state) has not occurred, is set to OFF (Step S3313: No), meaning that the game has ended and the "Ceiling Time-Saving Game State" has already occurred, then the special feature game count management process ends. In other words, in this embodiment, if the "Ceiling Time-Saving Game State" occurs and no jackpot game occurs during that "Ceiling Time-Saving Game State," the game transitions to a normal game state, and the "Ceiling Time-Saving Game State" will not occur again.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
If the MPU 41 has set the "Ceiling Not Activated" flag, which indicates that the player is in a specific game state where the "Ceiling Time-Saving Game State" (a profitable game state) has not occurred, and if the specific information, the "Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter," is set, then the MPU 41 performs an update process to subtract 1 from the value of the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter (step S3314), and determines whether the value of the Ceiling Activation Remaining Count Counter after the subtraction is 0, indicating that the update is complete (step S3315).

If the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3315: Yes), the mPU 41 proceeds to step S3316. If the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3315: No), the process proceeds to step S3320 in Figure 355.

<Steps S3316-S3319>
If the value of the remaining number of times the ceiling is activated after the deduction is 0, which is a predetermined update state (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial value of the remaining number of times of time-saving gameplays b as update information indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving gameplays that can be performed in the time-saving gameplay state b to 1000 (step S3316). That is, when the value of the remaining number of times the ceiling is activated becomes 0, which is a predetermined update state, and the predetermined game conditions are met, the time-saving gameplay state b is generated as a profitable gameplay state in which a maximum of 1000 times of time-saving gameplay is possible as a predetermined profitable state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag to ON, indicating that the update information, b-time-saving remaining count counter, is set (step S3317). The b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag is referenced in step S3325 of Figure 355 of the special game count management process to determine whether or not to execute the update process for the b-time-saving remaining count counter when the update information, b-time-saving remaining count counter, is set.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state transition flag to ON (step S3318), which transitions the game state to the b-time-saving game state (a profitable game state), and sets the ceiling not activated flag to OFF (step S3319), which indicates that the game is in a state where the b-time-saving game state (a profitable game state) has not occurred (a ceiling-saving game state), and then terminates the special symbol game count management process.

Furthermore, the b-time-saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S3642 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 367 to determine whether or not to transition to the b-time-saving game state, which is a profitable game state.

<Step S3320>
If the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter after subtraction is not 0, which is a predetermined update state (step S3315: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time reduction remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the update information a-time reduction remaining number counter has been set, is set to ON, as shown in Figure 355 (step S3320).

If the MPU 41 has the "a" time-saving remaining count counter set flag set (indicating that the update information, a time-saving remaining count counter, is set) turned ON (step S3320: Yes), it proceeds to step S3321. If the "a" time-saving remaining count counter set flag is turned OFF (indicating that the update information, a time-saving remaining count counter, is set) it proceeds to step S3325.

<Steps S3321 and S3322>
If the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the update information a-time-saving remaining count counter has been set, is set to ON (step S3320: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the a-time-saving remaining count counter (step S3321), and determines whether the value of the a-time-saving remaining count counter after the subtraction is 0, which indicates the update is complete (step S3322).

If the value of the remaining a-time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3322: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3323. If the value of the remaining a-time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3322: No), the special game count management process is terminated.

<Steps S3323 and S3324>
If the value of the remaining number of a-time-saving counters after subtraction is 0, which indicates the update completion state (step S3322: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON to transition the game state to the normal game state (step S3323), and sets the a-time-saving counter set flag, which indicates that the a-time-saving counter, which is the update information, has been set, to OFF (step S3324), and terminates the special game count management process.

The normal game state transition flag is referenced in steps S3648 or S3654 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 368 to determine whether or not to transition the game state to the normal game state.

<Step S3325>
If the a-time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the update information a-time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to off (step S3320: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the update information b-time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to on (step S3325).

If the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the update information b-time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to ON (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3326. If the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the update information b-time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to OFF (step S3325: No), the special game count management process is terminated.

<Steps S3326 and S3327>
If the b-time-saving remaining count counter set flag, which indicates that the update information b-time-saving remaining count counter is set, is set to ON (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the b-time-saving remaining count counter (step S3326), and determines whether the value of the b-time-saving remaining count counter after the subtraction is 0, which indicates the update is complete (step S3327).

If the value of the remaining b-time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3328. If the value of the remaining b-time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3327: No), the special game count management process is terminated.

<Steps S3328 and S3329>
If the value of the remaining b-time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, which indicates the update completion state (step S3327: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON to transition the game state to the normal game state (step S3328), and sets the b-time reduction remaining counter set flag to OFF, which indicates that the b-time reduction remaining counter, which is the update information, has been set (step S3329), and terminates the special feature game count management process.

The normal game state transition flag is referenced in steps S3648 or S3654 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 368 to determine whether or not to transition the game state to the normal game state.

[Small win game control processing]
Here, Figures 356 and 357 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the minor prize game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-2 of the main process in Figure 346. In the minor prize game control process of this embodiment, in a minor prize game that is executed based on the result of a lottery in a big prize lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry area 314 or the second prize entry area 315, a process is executed to control the operation of the feather mechanism 83.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 214, in the mini-win game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that a predetermined symbol, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, has been stopped, is set to ON (step S3401). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state of the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) has ended due to the stopping of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and whether it is now the timing to start the mini-win game. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON in step S1909 of the special symbol game control process in Figure 351 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the game state of the special symbol game has ended and it is time to start the minor win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, if it is not time to start the minor win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3412.

<Step S3402>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when the game state of the special symbol game has ended and it is possible to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game is a minor win (step S3402). Whether the result of the big win lottery is a minor win is determined based on the win/loss information read from the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol hold storage area 412b in step S2102 or S2110 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 353.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game is a minor win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3403. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a minor win (step S3402: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 terminates the minor win game control process.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special feature game is a minor win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the minor win game start flag to ON, indicating that the minor win game will begin (step S3403). The MPU 41 then sets a minor win game start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the minor win game will begin (step S3404), and proceeds to step S3405.

The command to start the minor win game is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the main processing shown in Figure 346. Upon receiving the command to start the minor win game, the sound lamp control device 5 can set the minor win game animation to be executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to ON, indicating that the opening for the minor win game is being executed. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the opening time counter, which is updated information indicating the remaining time for the opening (step S3406), and proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the remaining number of special feature games counter, which is updated information indicating the number of special feature games required to transition to the b-time-saving game state, is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in step S3407 is set as the break-even point, which determines whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to achieve the predetermined game condition of getting the game ball into the V-entry slot 833 of the feather mechanism device 83 in the small win game and generating the big win game state, which is a specific benefit.

This break-even point is set, for example, based on the design value for the gaming machine 10 at the time of factory shipment of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, as shown in Figure 346(A), if the factory-shipped design values for the gaming machine 10 are: (1) when left-handed play is performed as recommended in normal gameplay, the number of balls required to execute one special symbol game is 12.5 balls (20 times per difference of -250 balls); (2) when the first big win (initial win) occurs before reaching the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling-time-saving game state, the expected difference in balls is +3000 balls; and (3) when the first big win (initial win) occurs after reaching the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling-time-saving game state, the expected difference in balls is +4500 balls, then the calculated values are: (1) the difference in expected difference in balls between the initial win in the b-time-saving game state and the initial win before reaching the b-time-saving game state is 1500 balls; and (2) the theoretical number of times the special symbol game can be executed with this difference in expected balls of 1500 balls is 120. Therefore, the results are as follows: (1) If the remaining number of spins until reaching the b-time-saving game state (ceiling-level time-saving game state) is 120 or less, the expected number of balls won upon reaching the b-time-saving game state will be positive. (2) If the remaining number of spins until reaching the b-time-saving game state (ceiling-level time-saving game state) is 121 or more, the expected number of balls won upon reaching the b-time-saving game state will be negative. Therefore, if the design values for the gaming machine 10 at the time of factory shipment are as shown in Figure 346(A), the break-even point will be set to 121.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 356, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (step S3407: Yes), for example, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is 121 or greater, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is less than 121 (120 or less), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3408.

<Step S3408>
If the value of the remaining number of times the ceiling can be activated is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the remaining number of times the ceiling can be activated is less than 121 (120 or less), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the b time-saving game state is in effect, is set to ON (step S3408).

Here, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is less than 121 (120 or less), this includes the case where the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is 0. On the other hand, the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter becomes 0 when the game is in the b-time-saving game state (while the ceiling time-saving game state is active), or when the game is in the normal game state after the end of the b-time-saving game state (the ceiling time-saving game state has been activated). Therefore, by determining whether the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is 0 because the game is in the b-time-saving game state (while the ceiling time-saving game state is active), or because the game is in the normal game state after the end of the b-time-saving game state (the ceiling time-saving game state has been activated).

If the b-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), i.e., the b-time-saving game state (ceiling time-saving game state is active), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3408: No), i.e., the normal game state after the end of the b-time-saving game state (ceiling time-saving game state has been activated), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3410.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 41 sets a bonus display OP command to the sound lamp control device 5, which instructs the symbol display unit 341 to set a bonus display opening animation (see Figure 359(A)) as the opening animation for the minor win game. This bonus display OP command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing shown in Figure 346. Upon receiving the bonus display OP command, the sound lamp control device 5 can set the bonus display opening animation as the opening animation for the minor win game to be executed in the symbol display unit 341.

As shown in Figure 359(A), the profit-indicating opening animation is an animation that, in the first notification mode, notifies the player that the break-even point has not been reached, that is, that it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot during the minor win game. In the example shown in Figure 359(A), the symbol display unit 341 displays the text image "Aim for V by shooting to the right! Because it's more profitable that way!" in the first notification mode, indicating that it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot based on the minor win game.

<Step S3410>
If the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is less than 121 (120 or less), and the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the b-time-saving game state is active, is set to off (step S3408: No), the MPU 41 sets a loss display OP command to the sound lamp control device 5 to set the loss display opening sequence (see Figure 359(B)) in the symbol display unit 341 as the opening sequence for the small win game (step S3410). This loss display OP command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of Figure 346. Upon receiving the loss display OP command, the sound lamp control device 5 can set the loss display opening sequence as the opening sequence for the small win game to be executed in the symbol display unit 341.

As shown in Figure 359(B), the loss-indicating opening animation is a second notification method used at the beginning of a minor win game to inform the player that the break-even point has been reached, that is, that it is more advantageous not to trigger a major win during that minor win game. In the example shown in Figure 359(B), the symbol display unit 341 displays a second notification method using text and images: "Well, if you wait a little longer, you'll definitely enter RUSH mode, so I don't think you need to put it in V now and take a 1/2 chance, but if you really want to, you can shoot to the right?" This indicates that it is more advantageous not to trigger a major win during that minor win game.

Here, step S3409, where the "Profit Display OP" command is set, is initiated when the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (step S3407: Yes), for example, when the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter is 121 or greater. That is, until the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter falls below the predetermined value, for example, until the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter falls below 120, the expected value of the difference in balls is higher than transitioning to the b-time-saving game state. Therefore, at the opening of the minor win game, the symbol display unit 341 is notified by the first notification mode that it is more advantageous to generate a major win game based on the minor win game.

Furthermore, step S3409, where the "Advantage Display OP" command is set, is also performed when a minor win occurs during the b-time-saving game state (step S3408: Yes). That is, in the b-time-saving game state, the probability of entering the RUSH state after the jackpot game ends is 100%, which is advantageous. Therefore, at the opening of the minor win game, the symbol display unit 341 is notified in the first notification mode that it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot game based on the minor win game.

In contrast, step S3410, where the loss display OP command is set, is performed when the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, when the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is less than 121 (120 or less), and the b time-saving game state flag, which indicates the b time-saving game state, is set to off (step S3408: No). That is, from the time the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter falls below a predetermined value until the transition to the b time-saving game state, for example, when the value of the remaining ceiling activation count counter is between less than 120 and 0, transitioning to the b time-saving game state results in a higher expected value of ball gain. Therefore, at the opening of the minor win game, the symbol display unit 341 is notified by the second notification mode that it is advantageous not to generate a major win game based on the minor win game.

In other words, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 358(B), even if the result of the jackpot lottery is the same minor win, as the opening performance of the minor win game, the first notification mode for showing profit is executed until the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is above a predetermined value and the break-even point is reached (for example, until the remaining number of times until transitioning to the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling-time-saving game state, is 121). After the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is below the predetermined value and the break-even point is reached (for example, from the remaining number of times until transitioning to the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling-time-saving game state, is 120), the second notification mode for showing loss is executed. After transitioning to the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling-time-saving game state, the first notification mode for showing profit is executed.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 356, if the profit display OP command is set (step S3409) or the loss display OP command is set (step S3410), the MPU 41 sets a small win opening start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the small win game has started (step S3411), and then terminates the small win game control process.

The small win opening start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the main processing shown in Figure 346. Upon receiving the small win opening start command, the audio lamp control device 5 can initiate either the first notification mode, shown in Figure 359(A), which is the win/loss opening sequence, or the second notification mode, shown in Figure 359(B), which is the loss/loss opening sequence, as the opening sequence for the small win game executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc.

Incidentally, some conventional gaming machines, similar to the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, generate a time-saving game state (b) after a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played. Conventional gaming machines equipped with such a ceiling function, as mentioned above, for example, notify the remaining number of special symbol games needed to reach the predetermined number. However, with such notification, it is difficult to determine whether the break-even point has been exceeded, that is, whether generating a jackpot is advantageous for the player. Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines equipped with a ceiling function, when a minor win occurs, a prompt to shoot to the right is displayed during the opening sequence of that minor win. Therefore, when a minor win occurs, players unconditionally shoot to the right in accordance with the prompt.

On the other hand, in a gaming machine 10 like this embodiment, where the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter is not reset by not generating a jackpot even when a minor win occurs, if a display prompting right-hand shooting is shown during the opening sequence of a minor win, similar to conventional gaming machines, there is a concern that players may unconditionally shoot to the right when it is more advantageous to receive the benefits of the time-saving game state (b) without generating a jackpot, thus failing to receive the benefits of the time-saving game state (b).

In contrast, in this embodiment, if the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is the result of a predetermined judgment, is a minor win, the fact that it is a minor win is announced by the first notification mode, which is a profit-indicating opening performance, until the break-even point, which is a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is specific information, becomes 0, is reached. After the break-even point, which is a predetermined timing, the fact that it is a minor win is announced by the second notification mode, which is a loss-indicating opening performance. In other words, in this embodiment, the profit or loss of the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at the stage when the minor win game occurs is announced in a notification mode corresponding to the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at that time, in the opening of the minor win game. Therefore, when a minor win game occurs, the player can grasp the profit or loss of the profit that the player can obtain by paying attention to the opening performance of the minor win game, and the player can decide whether or not to generate a jackpot game based on the notification mode in the opening performance of the minor win game. As a result, it becomes possible to choose not to generate a jackpot when the expected value of the profit obtainable from not generating a jackpot based on the minor win is higher, and to choose to generate a jackpot when the expected value of the profit obtainable from generating a jackpot based on the minor win is higher. This allows players to avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (a state where players are close to reaching the ceiling limit) due to a jackpot occurring just before reaching that state, thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the notification mode of the opening sequence of the minor win game is switched after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing advantageous to the player, even if a minor win game occurs during a period near the break-even point where profit and loss judgment is difficult, it becomes possible to make a more reliable decision advantageous to the player based on the notification mode of the opening sequence of the minor win game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as an opening animation for a minor win game, a profit-indicating opening animation using the first notification mode is executed until the break-even point is reached, and after the break-even point is reached, a loss-indicating opening animation using the second notification mode is executed. In other words, if a loss-indicating opening animation using the second notification mode is executed as the opening animation for a minor win game that occurs before transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (ceiling-reduced-time-saving game state), the profit-indicating opening animation using the first notification mode will not be executed until transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (ceiling-reduced-time-saving game state).

Thus, when a loss-displaying opening animation using the second notification mode is executed as the opening animation for a minor win game that occurs before transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (ceiling-reduced game state), the gain-displaying opening animation using the first notification mode will not be executed. This allows the player to continuously understand that it is advantageous not to trigger a major win game when a minor win game occurs. Therefore, if a loss-displaying opening animation using the second notification mode is executed first as the opening animation for a minor win game, and then another loss-displaying opening animation using the second notification mode is executed, the player can determine that it is advantageous not to trigger a major win in a short time. As a result, the possibility of mistakenly triggering a major win game when it is more advantageous not to trigger one when a minor win game occurs is reduced, thus preventing the player from suffering unexpected disadvantages.

By the way, the break-even point set as a characteristic of the gaming machine 10 is effective for players with ample playing time, but the amount of time a player can play varies depending on factors such as the remaining time until the gaming hall closes and the player's own circumstances. In other words, the break-even point may not be effective when a player does not have ample playing time.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the break-even point is set precisely based on, for example, the design value at the time of factory shipment. On the other hand, the actual break-even point differs for each gaming machine 10 depending on the condition of the game pins installed in the game board 31 at the time of shipment and the degree of deterioration over time, and also differs depending on the force with which the player fires the game balls. In other words, since the rate at which game balls enter the various prize winning holes 313 to 316 can change due to deterioration over time and the force with which the player fires the game balls, the break-even point is not constant. In addition, the break-even point also differs depending on the gameplay technique, such as whether or not the player stops shooting when there is a certain number of reserved rights to perform special symbol games, whether or not the player stops shooting when a reach animation with a long display time occurs, and whether or not the player stops shooting at the opening of small win games and big win games. In short, the actual break-even point fluctuates depending on factors unique to each gaming machine 10 and factors based on the player's gameplay technique. Therefore, the actual break-even point cannot be set precisely and fixedly; rather, it is an approximate value based on the design specifications at the time of factory shipment.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a minor win, a predetermined timing may be set as a certain period before reaching the break-even point, and a specific timing may be set as a certain period after reaching the break-even point. That is, an intermediate period including the break-even point may be set between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. Even in this case, as the opening performance of the minor win game, the first notification mode, the profit-indicating opening performance, is executed until the predetermined timing, and the second notification mode, the loss-indicating opening performance, is executed from the specific timing onward. Furthermore, during the intermediate period including the break-even point set between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, it is conceivable that the opening performance of the minor win game be executed in a third notification mode different from the first and second notification modes.

For example, as shown in Figure 359(A), if the number of remaining special symbol plays (remaining ceiling activations) until the b-time-saving game state occurs, which is the break-even point, is 120, then it is conceivable to set the point where the remaining ceiling activations are 140 (20 plays before the break-even point) as a predetermined timing, the point where the remaining ceiling activations are 100 (20 plays after the break-even point) as a specific timing, and the period from 100 to 140 remaining ceiling activations as an intermediate period. Then, as the opening animation for the small win game, it is conceivable to execute the first notification mode, a profit-indicating opening animation, up to the predetermined timing when the remaining ceiling activations are 140, execute the second notification mode, a loss-indicating opening animation, from the specific timing when the remaining ceiling activations are 100, and execute the third notification mode, an opening animation, during the intermediate period from 100 to 140 remaining ceiling activations.

Furthermore, as an opening presentation for a third notification mode during the opening of a minor win game, a border notification between gain and loss is conceivable. As a border notification, for example, as shown in Figure 360(B), a third notification mode could be conceivable, with text and images on the symbol display unit 341 stating, "Well, I can't really say either way—it's up to you to decide whether to shoot to the right and get it into the V." This would ambiguously inform the player of the advantage or disadvantage of generating a major win game based on the minor win game.

Furthermore, other types of border notifications for the third notification mode during the intermediate period including the break-even point are also conceivable. For example, as shown in Figure 360(C), a possible border notification for the third notification mode is one that alternately displays the profit indication of the first notification mode and the loss indication of the second notification mode.

Thus, in this embodiment, an intermediate period including the break-even point between a predetermined timing and a specific timing is set, and the third notification mode border notification is provided during this intermediate period. Even if the actual break-even point is variable and differs from the break-even point set precisely based on the factory design value, the third notification mode border notification during the intermediate period including the break-even point informs the player that it is difficult to determine the profit or loss of generating a jackpot when a minor win occurs. As a result, when the third notification mode border notification is provided as an opening effect after a minor win, the player can decide whether to generate a jackpot based on their own judgment, taking into account the fluid factors.

<Step S3412>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 356, if the special symbol variation stop flag is set to off (step S3401: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start a minor win game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag, which indicates that the opening of the minor win game is being executed, is set to on (step S3412).

If the opening flag is set to ON (step S3412: Yes), i.e., the opening for the minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3413. On the other hand, if the opening flag is set to OFF (step S3412: No), i.e., the opening for the minor win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3423 in Figure 257.

<Steps S3413-S3416>
If the opening flag is set to ON (step S3412: Yes), that is, if the opening of the minor win game is being executed, the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S3413), and determines whether the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3414). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening of the minor win game and to start the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing mechanism device 83.

If the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3414: Yes), that is, in a minor win game, it is time to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing mechanism 83, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to off (step S3415) to indicate that the opening is being performed, and then sets a minor win opening end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the minor win opening has ended (step S3416), and proceeds to step S3417.

The "minor win opening end command" is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the main processing shown in Figure 346. Upon receiving the "minor win opening end command," the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the opening sequence of the minor win game, which is executed on the symbol display unit 341 and other components.

On the other hand, if the opening time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S3414: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing portion 832 of the wing mechanism 83 in a minor win game, the MPU 41 terminates the minor win game control process.

<Steps S3417 and S3418>
In step S3417, the movable wing portion 832 of the wing mechanism 83 is started to operate (step S3417), and the process proceeds to step S3418. In this way, when the movable wing portion 832 of the wing mechanism 83 is started to operate during a minor win game, the entry port 831 of the wing mechanism 83 is opened, and it becomes possible for game balls to enter the inside of the wing mechanism 83.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a movable wing operation start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the movable wing section 832 of the wing mechanism device 83 has started operating (step S3418), and proceeds to step S3419.

The command to start the movable wing operation is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the main processing shown in Figure 346. Upon receiving the command to start the movable wing operation, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute the movable wing operation animation for the minor win game, which is performed on the symbol display unit 341, etc.

<Steps S3419 and S3420>
In step S3419, the MPU 41 sets the movable blade operation flag to ON, indicating that the movable blade 832 is operating. Then, the MPU 41 performs a process to set the movable blade operation time counter, which is updated information indicating the remaining operating time of the movable blade 832 (step S3420), and proceeds to step S3421.

<Steps S3421 and S3422>
In step S3421, the MPU 41 starts operating the V-prize opening/closing unit 835, and further sets the V-prize opening/closing unit operation time counter, which is updated information indicating the remaining time for the V-prize opening/closing unit 835 (step S3422), and ends the minor prize game control process.

<Step S3423>
If the opening flag is set to off (step S3412: No), that is, if the opening of the minor prize game is not performed, the MPU 41 determines whether the V prize opening opening operation flag, which indicates that the V prize opening opening 835 is in operation, is set to on (step S3423), as shown in Figure 357. If the V prize opening opening operation flag is set to on (step S3423: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3424, and if the V prize opening opening operation flag is set to off (step S3423: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3432.

<Step S3424>
If the V-prize opening/closing operation flag is set to ON (step S3423: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-prize flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-prize opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is set to ON (step S3424). The V-prize flag is set to ON in step S3426 when a game ball enters the V-prize opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83.

If the V-entry flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is set to ON (step S3424: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3428. If the V-entry flag is set to OFF (step S3424: No), the process proceeds to step S3425.

<Steps S3425-S3427>
If the V-winning flag is set to off (step S3424: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3425). Whether or not a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 is determined, for example, by whether or not the entry sensor (not shown) detects that a game ball 99 has entered the V-winning opening 833 during the prize ball command setting process in step S1403 of the main process in Figure 346.

When a game ball enters the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-entry flag to ON (step S3426), and then sets a V-entry command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that a game ball has entered the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3427), before proceeding to step S3428.

The V-winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the main processing shown in Figure 346. Upon receiving the V-winning command, the audio lamp control device 5 can terminate the V-winning animation in the minor win game, which is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc.

On the other hand, if no game ball has entered the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3425: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3428.

<Steps S3428 and S3429>
In step S3428, the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the V-entry opening opening operation time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operating time of the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83. Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the V-entry opening opening/closing operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which indicates the update is complete (step S3429). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the V-entry opening opening/closing section 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-entry opening 833).

If the value of the V-prize opening/closing time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3429: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing part 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3430. On the other hand, if the value of the V-prize opening/closing time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3429: No), that is, if it is not time to return the V-prize opening/closing part 835 of the wing mechanism 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3432.

<Steps S3430 and S3431>
If the value of the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation time counter after subtraction is 0, which indicates the update is complete (step S3430: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 of the feather mechanism device 83 to its original position (close the V-prize opening 833), the MPU 41 returns the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 to its original position (step S3430), sets the V-prize opening/closing mechanism operation flag, which indicates that the V-prize opening/closing mechanism 835 is in operation, to off (step S3431), and proceeds to step S3433.

<Step S3432>
In step S3432, the MPU 41 determines whether the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is operating, is set to ON. If the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S3432: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3433. If the movable wing operation flag is set to OFF (step S3432: No), the MPU 41 terminates the mini-game control process.

<Steps S3433 and S3434>
If the movable blade operation flag is set to ON (step S3432: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the movable blade operation time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operating time of the movable blade 832 (step S3433). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which indicates the update completion state (step S3434). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the movable blade 832 to its original position and close the entry opening 831 to end the mini-win game.

If the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3434: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the movable vane 832 and close the entry opening 831 to end the mini-win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3435. On the other hand, if the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3434: No), that is, if it is not time to return the movable vane 832 and close the entry opening 831 to end the mini-win game, the MPU 41 terminates the mini-win game control process.

<Steps S3435-S3438>
If the value of the movable blade operation time counter after subtraction is 0, which indicates the update completion state (step S3434: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the mini-game by returning the movable blade 832 to its original position (step S3435). The MPU 41 then sets the movable blade operation flag, which indicates that the movable blade 832 is operating, to off (step S3436), sets the mini-game termination flag, which indicates that the mini-game has ended, to on (step S3437), and further sets a mini-game termination command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the mini-game has ended (step S3438), and terminates the mini-game control process.

The command to end the minor win game is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the main processing shown in Figure 346. Upon receiving the minor win game end command, the audio lamp control device 5 can terminate the minor win game animation performed on the symbol display unit 341, etc.

[Big Win Game Control Processing]
Here, Figures 362 to 365 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 of the main process in Figure 346. In the jackpot game control process, when a predetermined game condition is met in a minor win game by a game ball entering the V-entry opening 833 of the feather mechanism 83, the profit-generating means executes a process to generate a jackpot game as a specific profit, such as controlling the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable entry opening 316, which is a variable ball entry means. The jackpot game control process will be explained below with reference to Figures 362 to 365.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 362, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the minor jackpot game termination flag, which indicates the end of the minor jackpot game, is on (step S3501). The minor jackpot game termination flag is set to on in step S3447 of the minor jackpot game control process in Figure 357 when the minor jackpot game is to be terminated.

If the minor win game termination flag is ON (step S3501: Yes), i.e., it is time for the minor win game to end, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the minor win game termination flag is OFF (step S3501: No), i.e., it is not time for the minor win game to end, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3512.

<Step S3502>
If the minor win game end flag is ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is time for the minor win game to end, the minor win game end flag is set OFF (step S3502), and the process proceeds to step S3503.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
In step S3503, the MPU 41 determines whether the V-entry flag is set to ON, indicating that a game ball has entered the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 during a minor win game. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 during a minor win game, which is a predetermined game condition in which a specific benefit, the execution of a major win game, is generated by the benefit-generating means.

Furthermore, the V-winning flag is set to ON in step S3426 of the mini-win game control process shown in Figure 357 when a game ball enters the V-winning slot 833 of the feather mechanism 83 during a mini-win game.

If the V-winning flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V-winning flag to OFF (step S3504) and proceeds to step S3505. On the other hand, if the V-winning flag is set to OFF (step S3503: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the start of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (4R time-saving jackpot game or 16R time-saving jackpot game), and then proceeds to step S3506. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game performance according to the type of jackpot game based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S3506>
In step S3506, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to ON, indicating the start of a jackpot game, and proceeds to step S3507. The jackpot game start flag is referenced in step S3516 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 357, described later, when determining whether or not to set the initial value of the remaining a-time-saving game counter, which is update information indicating the remaining number of a-time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state that is transitioned to after the jackpot game ends.

<Step S3507>
In step S3507, the MPU 41 sets the "In-Bonus Game" flag to ON, indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, and proceeds to step S3508. The "In-Bonus Game" flag is referenced in step S1504 of the regular game control process in Figure 347 and in step S1901 of the special game control process in Figure 351 to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S3508>
In step S3508, the MPU 41 sets the round counter, which is updated information indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the open/close execution mode, and proceeds to step S3507. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round counter to "4" if the type of jackpot is a 4R time-saving jackpot, and sets the round counter to "16" if the type of jackpot is a 16R probability-changing jackpot.

<Step S3509>
In step S3509, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S3510. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S3510>
In step S3510, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter, which is updated information indicating the remaining time for the opening, and proceeds to step S3511. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3514 of Figure 363 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

<Step S3511>
In step S3511, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening" flag to ON, indicating that the opening is in progress, and terminates the jackpot game control process. The "Opening" flag is referenced in step S3512 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S3512>
If the small win start flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not time to start the small win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag, which indicates that the opening is being executed, is on (step S3512).

If the opening flag is on (step S3512: Yes), i.e., opening is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513 in Figure 363. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3512: No), i.e., opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S3523.

<Steps S3513 and S3514>
If the opening flag is on (step S3512: Yes), that is, if opening is in progress, as shown in Figure 363, the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of opening (step S3513), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3514). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to finish opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3515. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), i.e., it is not time to end the opening, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3515 and S3516>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 sets an opening end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is ending (step S3515). This opening end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the opening effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Opening" flag, which indicates that the opening is in progress, to off (step S3516), and proceeds to step S3517.

<Step S3517>
In step S3517, the MPU 41 sets an open/close execution mode start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that an open/close execution mode in which multiple rounds of gameplay (4 or 16 rounds) are to be started, and then proceeds to step S3518. The open/close execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the open/close execution mode effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the open/close execution mode start command.

<Step S3518>
In step S3518, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that a round game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S3519. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start round game effects corresponding to each round game, including displaying the number of rounds on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game start command.

<Steps S3519 and S3520>
In step S3519, the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the round counter, which is update information indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, it opens the variable prize entry opening 316, which is a variable ball entry means, by operating the opening/closing door 319 (step S3520), and proceeds to step S3521.

<Steps S3521 and S3522>
In step S3521, the MPU 41 sets a round game flag to ON, indicating that a round game is in progress, and then sets a round game time counter, which is updated information indicating the remaining time for the round game (step S3522), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S3525 of Figure 364 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to terminate the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 to its original position and close the variable prize entry opening 316) due to the elapsed time.

<Step S3523>
Returning to Figure 362, if the Opening flag is off (step S3512: No), i.e., the opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Round Game flag, which indicates that a round game is in progress, is set to on (step S3523). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether a round game is in progress.

If the round game flag is ON (step S3523: Yes), i.e., if a round game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3524 in Figure 364. On the other hand, if the round game flag is OFF (step S3523: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3537.

<Steps S3524 and S3525>
If the Round Game in Progress flag is ON (step S3523: Yes), that is, if a round game is in progress, as shown in Figure 364, the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the round game time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S3524). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3525). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed time (by closing the variable prize entry opening 316, which is a variable ball entry means, by returning the opening/closing door 319 to its original position).

If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed prescribed time (the variable prize entry opening 316, which is a variable ball entry means, is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3529. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3525: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the elapsed prescribed time (the variable prize entry opening 316, which is a variable ball entry means, is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3526.

<Step S3526>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3525: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the round game due to the elapsed time (the variable prize entry opening 316, which is a variable ball entry means, is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize entry opening 316 (step S3526). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable prize entry opening 316 is determined based on the prize entry detection information stored in the RAM 412 when the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 316a is detected in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17.

If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3526: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3527. If no game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3526: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3527 and S3528>
If a game ball enters the variable prize slot 316 (step S3526: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process that adds 1 to the value of the ball entry counter, which is update information indicating the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize slot 316 during that round of play (step S3527). The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the ball entry counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S3528), that is, whether it is time to end the round of play due to the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable prize slot 316 (by returning the opening/closing door 319 to its original position and closing the variable prize slot 316, which is the variable ball entry means).

If the value of the ball count counter after addition has reached 10 (step S3528: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable prize slot 316 (by closing the variable prize slot 316, which is the variable ball entry means, by returning the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3529. On the other hand, if the value of the ball count counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S3528: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable prize slot 316 (by closing the variable prize slot 316, which is the variable ball entry means, by returning the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3529>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), or if the value of the ball entry counter reaches 10 (step S3528: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable prize entry opening 316 by returning the opening/closing door 319 to its original position (step S3529), and proceeds to step S3530. That is, if it is time to end the round game due to the elapsed time or the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable prize entry opening 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable prize entry opening 316 and ends the round game.

<Steps S3530-S3532>
In step S3530, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game has ended. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 performs an update process to clear the ball entry counter, which is updated information indicating the number of game balls entered into the variable prize entry slot 316 during the round game (step S3531), and sets the round game flag, which indicates that the round game is in progress, to off (step S3532), before proceeding to step S3533.

<Step S3533>
In step S3533, the MPU 41 determines whether the round counter, which is updated information indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode, is 0 (step S3533), that is, whether it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode (there are still rounds to be played).

If the round counter of the MPU 41 is 0 (step S3533: Yes), i.e., it is time to terminate the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3542. On the other hand, if the round counter of the MPU 41 is not 0 (step S3533: No), i.e., there are unexecuted rounds of gameplay, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3534.

<Step S3534>
If the round counter is not zero (step S3533: No), that is, if there are unplayed rounds, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 to start the interval between rounds (step S3534), and proceeds to step S3535. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the interval effect on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval start command.

<Steps S3535 and S3536>
In step S3535, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, indicating that an interval between rounds of gameplay is currently being performed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter (in step S3536) which indicates that the remaining time of the interval is update information, and terminates the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referenced in step S3539 of Figure 365 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start a round of gameplay).

<Step S3537>
Returning to Figure 365, if the Round Game in Progress flag is off (step S3523: No), i.e., if a round game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the Interval in Progress flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is in progress, is on (step S3537). The Interval in Progress flag is set to on in step S3534 of Figure 364 in the jackpot game control process when an interval begins, and is set to off in step S3541 of Figure 365 in the jackpot game control process when an interval ends.

If the interval flag is on (step S3537: Yes), i.e., the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3538 in Figure 365. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S3537: No), i.e., the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3547.

<Steps S3538 and S3539>
If the Interval flag is on (step S3537: Yes), that is, if an interval between rounds is being performed, the MPU 41 performs an update process to subtract 1 from the value of the interval time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3538), as shown in Figure 365. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3539), that is, whether it is time to end the interval (start round play).

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3539: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3540. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3539: No), i.e., it is not time to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3540 and S3541>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3539: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the interval has ended (step S3540). The interval end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the interval effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is being executed, to off (step S3541), and proceeds to step S3518 in Figure 363. By proceeding to step S3517 in Figure 363, the processes of steps S3518 to S3522 related to the start of a round game are executed, and the jackpot game control process ends.

<Step S3542>
Returning to Figure 364, if the round counter is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ending (step S3542), and proceeds to step S3543. The opening/closing execution mode termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening/closing execution mode termination command.

<Step S3543>
In step S3543, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is about to begin, and then proceeds to step S3544. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the ending effect on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3544 and S3545>
In step S3544, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag to ON, indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending time counter, which is the update information indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3545), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3548 in Figure 365 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S3546>
Returning to Figure 362, if the Interval flag is off (step S3537: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being performed, it is determined whether the Ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being performed, is on (step S3546).

If the ending flag is on (step S3546: Yes), i.e., the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3547 in Figure 365. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S3546: No), i.e., the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3551.

<Steps S3547 and S3548>
If the ending flag is on (step S3546: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, as shown in Figure 365, the MPU 41 performs an update process that subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3547). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3548). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3548: Yes), i.e., it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3549. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3548: No), i.e., it is not time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3549 and S3550>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3548: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is ending (step S3549). The ending end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the ending effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to off (step S3550), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3551>
Returning to Figure 362, if the ending flag is off (step S3546: No), that is, if it is not during the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game termination command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game has ended (step S3551), and proceeds to step S3552. The jackpot game termination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the jackpot game effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the jackpot game termination command.

<Steps S3552-S3554>
In step S3552, the jackpot game end flag is set to ON to indicate that the jackpot game has ended. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S3621 of the game state transition process shown in Figure 367, described later, to determine whether or not to transition from the jackpot game state to the a-time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "Remaining Ceiling Activation Counter Set Flag" to ON (step S3553) to set the "Remaining Ceiling Activation Counter," which is update information indicating the number of special symbol games required to transition to the b-time-saving game state, and proceeds to step S3554. The "Remaining Ceiling Activation Counter Set Flag" is referenced in step S3301 of the special symbol game game count management process shown in Figure 354 to determine whether or not to set the "Remaining Ceiling Activation Counter," which is update information.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "In Progress of Jackpot Game" flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played, to off (step S3554), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition process]
Here, Figures 366 to 368 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Figure 346. The game state transition process controls the transition between various game states (normal game state, a) time-saving game state, b) time-saving game state, minor win game state, and major win game state). The game state transition process will be explained below with reference to Figures 366 to 368.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 366, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether the mini-win game start flag, which indicates the start of a mini-win game, is on. The mini-win game start flag is set to on in step S3403 when a mini-win game is to be started in the mini-win game control process shown in Figure 356.

If the mini-win game start flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), i.e., it is time to start the mini-win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, if the mini-win game start flag is OFF (step S3601: No), i.e., it is not time to start the mini-win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
If the small win game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if a small win game is to be started, the MPU 41 sets the small win game state flag to on, indicating that the game is in progress while a small win game is being played (step S3602). The small win game state flag is referenced in step S1503 of the regular game control process in Figure 347 when determining whether to start a regular game, and in step S1902 of the special game control process in Figure 351 when determining whether to start a special game.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the small win game start flag to off (step S3603), and proceeds to step S3604.

<Steps S3604-S3606>
In step S3604, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is turned on.

If the normal game state flag is on (step S3604: Yes), i.e., the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal minor win flag to on (step S3605), indicating that the game is in the normal game state and that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first or second prize slot 314 in the normal game state is a minor win. Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S3606), and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S3604: No), i.e., the game is not in the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3607.

<Steps S3607-S3609>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S3604: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state (a-time-saving game state) which is a profitable game state, is set to on (step S3607).

If the a-time-saving game state flag is on (step S3607: Yes), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving mini-win flag to on (step S3608), indicating that the mini-win is initiated based on the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first or second prize slot 314 or 315 in the a-time-saving game state being a mini-win. Then, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag to off (step S3609), ending the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the a-time-saving game state flag is off (step S3607: No), i.e., the a-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3610.

<Steps S3610-S3612>
If the time-saving game state flag (a) is off (step S3607: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag (b), which indicates that the game is in a profitable game state (b), is set to on (step S3610).

If the b-time-saving game state flag is on (step S3610: Yes), i.e., the b-time-saving game state is active, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving mini-win flag to on (step S3611), indicating that the mini-win is initiated based on the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first or second prize slot 314 or 315 in the b-time-saving game state being a mini-win. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to off (step S3612), ending the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the b-time-saving game state flag is off (step S3610: No), i.e., if the b-time-saving game state is not active, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3613>
If the mini-win game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, if it is not time to start the mini-win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the mini-win game end flag, which indicates the end of the mini-win game, is on (step S3613). The mini-win game end flag is set to on in step S3437 when the mini-win game is to be ended in the mini-win game control process shown in Figure 356.

If the mini-win game termination flag is ON (step S3613: Yes), i.e., it is time to terminate the mini-win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the mini-win game termination flag is OFF (step S3613: No), i.e., it is not time to terminate the mini-win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3636 in Figure 367.

<Steps S3614 and S3615>
If the minor win game termination flag is on (step S3613: Yes), that is, if the minor win game is to be terminated, the MPU 41 sets the minor win game status flag, which indicates that the game is in progress while the minor win game is being played, to off (step S3614). Then, the MPU 41 sets the minor win game termination flag to off (step S3615) and proceeds to step S3616.

<Steps S3616 and S3617>
In step S3616, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which indicates the start of a jackpot game, is set to ON. The jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3506 when a jackpot game is to be started in the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 362.

If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3616: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is to be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game status flag, indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, to on (step S3617), and proceeds to step S3618. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3616: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not to be started, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3627 in Figure 367.

<Steps S3618-S3620>
In step S3618, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal minor win flag, which indicates that the minor win is initiated based on the result of a minor win in a jackpot lottery triggered by the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 during normal gameplay, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be initiated is based on a minor win game that occurred during normal gameplay.

If the normal minor win flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 'a' time-saving game set flag to ON, which sets the number of time-saving games to 1 in the time-saving game state (a) that is entered when the big win game state ends (step S3619). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal minor win flag to OFF (step S3620) and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is normally set to off (step S3618: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3621.

<Steps S3621-S3623>
Normally, if the minor win flag is set to off (step S3618: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving minor win flag, which indicates that the minor win is initiated based on the result of a major win lottery triggered by the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state being a minor win, is set to on (step S3621). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the major win game to be initiated is based on a minor win game that occurred in the a-time-saving game state.

If the a-time-saving mini-win flag is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving 5-times set flag to ON, which sets the number of time-saving game rounds to 5 in the a-time-saving game state that is entered when the big win game state ends (step S3622). Then, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving mini-win flag to OFF (step S3623), and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the time-saving bonus flag (a) is set to off (step S3621: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3624.

<Steps S3624-S3626>
If the time-saving mini-win flag is set to off (step S3621: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving mini-win flag, which indicates that the mini-win is started based on the result of a mini-win lottery triggered by the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the starting jackpot game is based on a mini-win game that occurred in the time-saving game state.

If the b-time-saving mini-win flag is set to ON (step S3624: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving 5-times set flag to ON, which sets the number of time-saving game rounds to 5 in the a-time-saving game state that is entered when the big win game state ends (step S3625). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving mini-win flag to OFF (step S3626), and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the b-time-saving mini-win flag is set to off (step S3624: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3627-S3629>
If the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3616: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not started, as shown in Figure 367, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal minor win flag, which indicates that the minor win is started based on the result of a jackpot lottery triggered by the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 in the normal game state being a minor win, is set to on (step S3627). That is, if the minor win game ends without a jackpot game occurring, the MPU 41 determines whether the minor win game occurred in the normal game state.

If the MPU 41 is normally set to ON (step S3627: Yes), that is, if a minor win game that ends without generating a jackpot game occurred in the normal game state, it sets the normal game state flag to ON (step S3628) in order to return the game state to the normal game state before the minor win game occurred. Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal minor win flag to OFF (step S3629) and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the minor win flag is normally set to off (step S3627: No), that is, if the minor win game that ends without generating a big win game did not occur in the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3630.

<Steps S3630-S3632>
Normally, if the minor win flag is set to off (step S3627: No), that is, if a minor win game that ends without generating a big win game did not occur in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the a-time-saving minor win flag, which indicates that the minor win is started based on the result of a big win lottery triggered by the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 in the a-time-saving game state being a minor win, is set to on (step S3630). In other words, when a minor win game ends without generating a big win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the minor win game occurred in the a-time-saving game state.

If the a-time-saving mini-win flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, if a mini-win game that ends without generating a jackpot game occurred in the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag to ON (step S3631) in order to return the game state to the a-time-saving game state before the mini-win game occurred. Then, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving mini-win flag to OFF (step S3632) and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the a-time-saving mini-win flag is set to off (step S3630: No), that is, if the mini-win game that ends without generating a jackpot game did not occur in the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3633.

<Steps S3633 to S3635>
If the time-saving mini-win flag is set to off (step S3630: No), that is, if a mini-win game that ends without generating a jackpot game did not occur in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving mini-win flag, which indicates that the mini-win is started based on the result of a jackpot lottery triggered by the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state being a mini-win, is set to on (step S3633). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the mini-win game occurred in the time-saving game state when the mini-win game ends without generating a jackpot game.

If the b-time-saving mini-win flag is set to ON (step S3633: Yes), that is, if a mini-win game that ends without generating a jackpot game occurred in the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag to ON (step S3634) in order to return the game state to the b-time-saving game state before the mini-win game occurred. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving mini-win flag to OFF (step S3635) and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the b-time-saving mini-win flag is set to off (step S3633: No), that is, if the mini-win game that ends without generating a jackpot game did not occur in the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3636>
If the minor win game end flag is off (step S3613: No), that is, if it is not time to end the minor win game, then, as shown in Figure 367, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in progress during a jackpot game, is set to on (step S3636).

If the jackpot game status flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is set to ON (step S3636: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3637. If the jackpot game status flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is set to OFF (step S3636: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Step S3637>
If the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the state of being in a jackpot game, is set to ON (step S3636: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game has ended, is set to ON (step S3637).

If the jackpot game termination flag, which indicates the end of a jackpot game, is set to ON (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3638. If the jackpot game termination flag, which indicates the end of a jackpot game, is set to OFF (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3638-S3640>
If the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game has ended, is set to ON (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a-time-saving game state (step S3638), and sets the a-time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in a-time-saving game state (step S3639).

The "a" time-saving game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to execute the special game effects corresponding to the "a" time-saving game state based on the "a" time-saving game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game termination flag, which indicates the end of the jackpot game, to OFF (step S3640), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3641>
If the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the state of a jackpot game, is off (step S3636: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the normal game state, is set to on (step S3641).

If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the machine is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3642. If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the machine is in a normal game state, is set to OFF (step S3641: No), the process proceeds to step S3647 in Figure 368.

<Step S3642>
If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions to the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3642). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to transition from the normal game state to the b-time-saving game state.

If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3642: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3643. If the b-time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3642: No), the game state transition process terminates.

<Steps S3643 to S3646>
If the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions to the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3642: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the b-time-saving game state is in effect (step S3643), and sets a b-time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the b-time-saving game state is in effect (step S3644).

The b-time-saving game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to execute the special game effects corresponding to the b-time-saving game state based on the b-time-saving game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the normal game state, to off (step S3645), and further sets the b-time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions to the b-time-saving game state, to off (step S3646), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3647>
If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to off (step S3641: No), then, as shown in Figure 368, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a-time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3647).

If the MPU 41 has the "a" time-saving game state flag set to ON (step S3647: Yes), it proceeds to step S3648. If the "a" time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3647: No), it proceeds to step S3653.

<Step S3648>
If the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game to a normal game state, is set to ON (step S3648). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to transition from a-time-saving game state to a normal game state.

If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3648: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3649. If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3648: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3649-S3652>
If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S3648: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the normal game state, to ON (step S3649), and sets a normal game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in the normal game state (step S3650).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute special game effects corresponding to the normal game state based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the "a" time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the "a" time-saving game state, to off (step S3651), and further sets the "normal game state transition" flag, which transitions to the normal game state, to off (step S3652), thereby ending the game state transition process.

<Step S3653>
If the a-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to off (step S3647: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3653).

If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3654. If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to OFF (step S3653: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3654>
If the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S3654). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to transition from the b-time-saving game state to the normal game state.

If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3655. If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3654: No), the game state transition process terminates.

<Steps S3655-S3658>
If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the normal game state, to ON (step S3655), and sets a normal game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in the normal game state (step S3656).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1401 of the next main processing (see Figure 346) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute special game effects corresponding to the normal game state based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b-time-saving game state, to off (step S3657), and further sets the normal game state transition flag, which transitions to the normal game state, to off (step S3658), and terminates the game state transition process.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, referring to Figures 369 to 376, the main processing performed by the MPU 51 within the audio lamp control device 5 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described. Figure 369 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

[Main processing of the sound lamp control device 5]
<Step S3701>
As shown in Figure 369, in the main process, it is first determined whether 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or since the execution of the previous step S3701 (step S3701). If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (step S3701: No), the process proceeds to step S3712 without performing steps S3702 to S3711. The reason for determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed in step S3701 is that steps S3702 to S3711 are processes related to display (effects) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination process in step S3713 in a short cycle. By executing the process in step S3713 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of commands transmitted from the main control device 4 from being missed, and by executing the process in step S3712 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform settings related to special game effects without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

<Steps S3702-S3704>
If more than 1 millisecond has elapsed since step S3701 (step S3701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 6, which were set in steps S3703 to S3713, are sent to the display control device 6 (step S3702). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting pattern of the illuminated section 27 and the lighting pattern of the lamps edited in step S3709, which will be described later (step S3703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (step S3704). The power-on notification process provides a notification for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on, and this notification is made by the speaker 26 or the illuminated section 27. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 6 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the graphic display section 341. If the power is not turned on, the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to step S3705.

<Steps S3705-S3707>
In step S3705, a customer waiting animation is performed, followed by a reserved number display update process (step S3706). In the customer waiting animation, if a predetermined amount of time has elapsed without the game machine 10 being played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the symbol display unit 341 to the title screen, and these settings are sent as a command to the display control device 6. In the reserved number display update process, a process is performed to display the special symbol data images (see Figures 51 and 52) set in the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 of the symbol display unit 341.

Subsequently, the operation button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (step S3707). This operation button input monitoring and effect processing monitors whether the operation button 20, which is operated by the player to enhance the effect, has been pressed. If the operation button 20 is confirmed to have been pressed, the system is configured to perform the corresponding effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the operation button 20 is detected, an operation button operation command is set to notify the display control device 6 that the operation button 20 has been operated.

Furthermore, if the operation button 20 is pressed during a period when the special game animation is not being executed, or during a period of high-speed variation of decorative symbols, a process to change the stage is performed, for example, and a background image change command is set for the display control device 6. By including information about the type of background image corresponding to the changed stage in this background image change command, the display control device 6 performs a process to change the background image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 to an image corresponding to the stage. Also, pressing the operation button 20 when a予告 character appears at the start of the variation display will display the expected value of a jackpot from the current variation, or pressing the operation button 20 during a reach animation will change the animation to one that creates a sense of anticipation for a jackpot, or the operation button 20 may also be used as a confirmation button to select one of several reach animations. Note that if the operation button 20 is not provided, the process in step S3707 is omitted.

<Step S3708>
Once the operation button input monitoring and performance processing is complete, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (step S3708). This vibration sensor input monitoring processing involves monitoring the input signal from the vibration sensor (not shown) and detecting whether or not vibration has been applied to the gaming machine 10.

[Vibration sensor input monitoring process of the sound lamp control device 5]
Here, with reference to Figure 370, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (step S3708) will be explained. Figure 370 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5.

<Steps S3801 and S3802>
In the vibration sensor input monitoring process, first, the output value (vibration level) from the vibration sensor (not shown) is read (step S3801), and it is determined from the read output value whether or not the vibration level is above a predetermined level (step S3802). If the vibration level is below the predetermined level (step S3802: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (Figure 369).

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
On the other hand, if the vibration level is above a predetermined level (step S3802: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the gaming machine 10, and the system is set to output an alarm sound from the lighting unit 27 (step S3803). At the same time, an error command is set to notify the display control device 6 of the occurrence of a vibration error (step S3804), and the system returns to the main process (Figure 369). As a result, the display control device 6 performs the process of displaying an error message image indicating a vibration error on the pattern display unit 341.

<Steps S3709-S3711>
Returning to Figure 369, let's continue the explanation of the main process. After the vibration sensor input monitoring process (step S3708) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (step S3709), followed by the sound editing and output process (step S3710). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination unit 27 are set to correspond to the displays made by the pattern display unit 341. In the sound editing and output process, the output patterns of the speaker 26 are set to correspond to the displays made by the pattern display unit 341, and sound is output from the speaker 26 according to these settings. Also, if the output of an alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see Figure 370) (see step S3710), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing and output process, and the alarm sound is output from the speaker 26.

After the processing in step S3710, the LCD effect execution management process is executed (step S3711), and the process proceeds to step S3712. In the LCD effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the symbol display unit 341 is set based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 4. Based on the time set in this LCD effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in step S3709 is executed. The sound editing and output process in step S3710 is also executed with a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, in order to display the special game effects on the symbol display unit 341, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the special variation pattern command received from the main control unit 4, and this command is set to be transmitted to the display control unit 6. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figure 371. After this process, processing is performed according to the command received from the main control unit 4 (Figures 371 and 372).

<Steps S3713-S3717>
After the processing in step S3712 is completed, it is determined whether or not power outage information is stored in RAM 512 (step S3713). Power outage information is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 4. If power outage information is stored in the processing of step S3713 (step S3713: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing flag are turned on (step S3715), and the power outage process is executed (step S3716). After the power outage process is executed, the power outage processing flag is turned off (step S3717), and then the process is looped indefinitely. During the power outage process, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, turning off the output from speaker 26 and lighting unit 27. The stored power outage information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage information is not stored in step S3713 (step S3713: No), it is determined whether or not RAM 512 is damaged based on the keyword stored in RAM 512 (step S3714). If RAM 512 is not damaged (step S3714: No), the process returns to step S3701, and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 512 is damaged (step S3714: Yes), the process enters an infinite loop to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if RAM damage is detected and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the symbol display unit 341 does not change afterward. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred and can call a hall employee or other person to request repair of the gaming machine 10. Alternatively, if it is confirmed that RAM 512 is damaged, the speaker 26 or the illuminated unit 27 may be used to notify the player of the RAM damage.

[Command determination process of the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figures 371 to 375, the command determination process executed in step S3712 of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 5 will be described. Figures 371 to 375 are flowcharts showing this command determination process. As described above, this command determination process determines the command received from the main control device 4. This process also determines the start of the continuous予告演出 (preview) by the symbol display unit 341 when it receives a command for the number of held balls from the main control device 4.

<Step S3901>
As shown in Figure 371, the command determination process of the audio lamp control device 5 first determines whether or not there are any unprocessed commands in the command storage area provided in the RAM 512 (step S3901). If there are any unprocessed commands (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and if there are no unprocessed commands (step S3901: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3902>
If there are unprocessed commands (step S3901: Yes), the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 4 is read from the command storage area in RAM 512 and analyzed to determine whether or not a special pattern variation command has been received from the main control unit 4 (step S3902). If it is determined that a special pattern variation command has been received (step S3902: Yes), the process moves to step S3903. If it is determined that a special pattern variation command has not been received (step S3901: No), the process moves to step S3908.

<Step S3903>
If it is determined that a special symbol variation pattern command has been received (step S3902: Yes), the variation type (performance pattern) setting process (step S3903) is executed based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4, and then the process in step S3904 is executed. In this variation type (performance pattern) setting process, the special symbol game performances to be executed by various performance means (symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27) in the special symbol game are set. Specifically, as described above, based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the variation type (performance pattern) and variation display time are set by referring to the variation type table (see Figure 49), and then the performance pattern type is set based on the performance pattern type selection table (see Figure 50) corresponding to the variation type (performance pattern).

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the variation display time corresponding to the received special pattern variation command is set in the variation display counter, and then the process in step S3905 is executed. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special pattern variation command. The variation display counter is then decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process shown in Figure 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variation is being displayed, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the variation display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the type of performance pattern set in step S3103 of the command determination process, and the process moves to step S3906. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the type of performance pattern. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores performance images and the like corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the performance display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the type of performance corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Steps S3908 and S3909>
If it is determined that no special pattern variation command has been received (step S3902: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 4 (step S3908). If it is determined that a stop type command has been received (step S3908: Yes), a display stop type command is set in order to send the stop type command directly to the display control device 6 (step S3909). On the other hand, if it is determined that no stop type command has been received (step S3908: No), the process proceeds to step S3910.

<Steps S3910-S3913>
If it is determined that no stop type command has been received (step S3908: No), it is determined whether or not a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control device 4 (step S3910). If it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (step S3910: Yes), the value of the first special feature reserved ball count storage area NAA or the second special feature reserved ball count storage area NAB (i.e., the number of special feature games reserved in the main control device 4), which is the update information of the main control device 4 included in the reserved ball count command, is extracted and stored in the reserved ball count counter of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S3911).

Here, the reserved ball count command is transmitted from the main control unit 4 when a game ball enters the first or second prize slot 314 (start prize), or when a special feature game is started. Therefore, each time a start prize is obtained or a special feature game is started, the value of the reserved ball count counter in the audio lamp control unit 5 can be adjusted to match the value of the reserved ball count counter in the main control unit 4 through the processing in step S3911. Thus, even if the value of the reserved ball count counter in the audio lamp control unit 5 deviates from the value of the reserved ball count counter in the main control unit 4 due to noise or other factors, the value of the reserved ball count counter in the audio lamp control unit 5 can be corrected and matched to the value of the reserved ball count counter in the main control unit 4 when a start prize is detected.

Furthermore, after the processing in step S3911, a display command for the number of reserved balls is set to notify the display control device 6 of the value of the reserved ball counter updated by the processing in step S3911 (step S3912). As a result, the display control device 6 executes a process to display the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the number of reserved balls on the symbol display unit 341.

Subsequently, the continuous予告 (preview) determination process is executed (step S3913), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous preview determination process, based on the value of the number of reserved balls received from the main control device 4 via the reserved ball command, and the updated values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous preview animation, which displays preview images consecutively across the special feature game animations currently reserved. Furthermore, if such a continuous preview animation is performed, it is determined whether to use a same-image type continuous preview animation, where the same image (e.g., a "bubble" image) is displayed across multiple special feature game animations, or a step-up type continuous preview animation, where related images are displayed sequentially each time a special feature game animation is performed (e.g., displaying each image in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken" → "flock of chickens").

The decision of whether or not to perform a consecutive予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence) is made based on the updated values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3. This decision is made by estimating the result of the lottery corresponding to the held balls when the held ball count command is transmitted, and the stop type after the special symbol game sequence. The decision is then based on this estimation and the number of held balls at that time. For example, if the stop type after the special symbol game sequence is estimated to be a 16R probability-changing jackpot or a reach with a previous or subsequent miss, the system may decide to perform a consecutive pre-announcement sequence with a predetermined probability. In this case, the system may also decide to perform a consecutive pre-announcement sequence with a higher probability the more held balls there are.

In addition to the above, if the estimated result of the lottery is a jackpot, a consecutive予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) may be performed with a predetermined probability, regardless of the type of stop. Even if the lottery result is a loss, if the stop type is a reach, that is, if it is estimated to be a reach with both consecutive misses or a reach with neither consecutive misses, a consecutive予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Thus, the conditions for deciding whether to perform a consecutive予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) may be set appropriately according to the gameplay characteristics of the gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, the conditions for whether the continuous予告演出 (preview/announcement) sequence is the same type of sequence or a step-up type may be set as appropriate. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the sound lamp control device 5, and the continuous preview/announcement sequence may be determined according to the value of that random number counter.

In this gaming machine 10, the main control unit 4 notifies the audio lamp control unit 5 of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated information acquired at the time of initial ball entry, via a ball retention command. The audio lamp control unit 5 then determines the start of a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) and sets the mode of the continuous予告演出 based on the values of the various counters notified by the ball retention command and the number of balls retained. This allows the processing in the main control unit 4 to be concentrated on the most important processing of the gaming machine 10: the lottery process that determines the game state to transition to based on ball entry into the first or second entry slot 314. Furthermore, by using a high-performance MPU 51 in the audio lamp control unit 5, the execution conditions for the continuous予告演出 can be set to various modes.

Furthermore, a single command for the number of held balls allows the main control unit 4 to transmit the number of held balls and the values of various counters to the audio lamp control unit 5. This allows the audio lamp control unit 5 to accurately determine the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired upon a starting win and the number of held balls at the time the starting win was detected. Therefore, when the execution of a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is decided, the number of held balls to which that continuous予告演出 will be applied can be accurately determined. Thus, compared to the case where the number of held balls and the values of the various counters are transmitted from the main control unit 4 to the audio lamp control unit 5 via a separate command, control in the audio lamp control unit 5 can be simplified.

<Steps S3914 and S3915>
If the result of the processing in step S3910 determines that the number of balls held command has not been received (step S3910: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation display command has been received (step S3914). If it is determined that the confirmation display command has been received (step S3914: Yes), a demo command for display is set (step S3915), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation display command has not been received (step S3914: No), the process proceeds to step S3916.

<Step S3916>
If it is determined that a confirmation display command has not been received (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol shift command (step S3916). A special symbol shift command is a command that indicates that the special symbol win/loss information, which shows the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see Figure 8), has shifted when the number of first special symbol reserves N or the number of second special symbol reserves M decreases due to the start of a special symbol game (display of special symbols).

If the received command is a special-purpose shift command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3917. If the received command is not a special-purpose shift command (step S3916: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3918.

<Step S3917>
If the received command is a special feature shift command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special feature data setting process (step S3917) and returns to the main process.

Here, the special feature data setting process performed in step S3917 is a process of shifting (updating) the data of special feature win/loss information (special feature data) stored in the special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. The special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special feature hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, and stores special feature data equivalent to that of the special feature hold storage area 412b. The special feature hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes the first special feature hold storage area corresponding area, the second special feature hold storage area corresponding area, and the special feature execution area corresponding area, respectively, for the first special feature hold storage area REA, the second special feature hold storage area REB, and the special feature execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special feature hold storage area 412b. Furthermore, the first special feature hold storage area corresponding region includes the first to fourth special feature hold area corresponding region (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth hold areas REA1 to REA4 (see Figure 8) of the first special feature hold storage area REA in the special feature hold storage area 412b, and the first special feature hold number storage area corresponding region (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first special feature hold number storage area. In addition, the second special feature hold storage area corresponding region includes the second special feature hold area corresponding region (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first to fourth hold areas REB1 to REB4 (see Figure 8) of the second special feature hold storage area REB in the special feature hold storage area 412b, and the second special feature hold number storage area corresponding region (see Figure 8) corresponding to the second special feature hold number storage area.

<Step S3918>
If the received command is not a special feature shift command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special feature hold command (step S3918). The first special feature hold command includes information indicating that the number of second special feature holds N for the first special feature game will increase, information regarding the increased number of second special feature holds M, and information regarding the special feature variation pattern (special feature variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery for the increasing second hold.

If the received command is a first special-purpose print hold command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3919. If the received command is not a first special-purpose print hold command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3920.

<Step S3919>
If the received command is a second special feature hold command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special feature hold information update process (step S3919) and returns to the main process.

Here, the first special figure hold information update process executed in step S3919 is a process that adds (updates) special figure validity information data (special figure data) to the first special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the first special figure hold information update process, the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 (see Figure 8) of the first special figure hold storage area REA of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the first special figure 1 to 4 hold area corresponding area (not shown) which is set to correspond to the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the said special figure validity information is stored. For example, when special feature win/loss information is stored in the third holding area REA3 (see Figure 8) of the second special feature holding storage area REA in the special feature holding storage area 412b, the special feature data is stored in the first special feature third holding area corresponding area (not shown) which is set in accordance with the third holding area REA3. Furthermore, in the first special feature holding information update process, 1 is added to the first special feature holding count N stored in the first special feature holding count storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special feature holding storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3920>
If the received command is not a first special symbol hold command (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol hold command (step S3920). The second special symbol hold command includes information indicating that the number of second special symbol holds M for the second special symbol game will increase, information regarding the increased number of second special symbol holds M, and information regarding the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery for the increasing second hold.

If the received command is a second special print hold command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3921. If the received command is not a second special print hold command (step S3920: No), the process proceeds to step S3922 in Figure 372.

<Step S3921>
If the received command is a second special feature hold command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special feature hold information update process (step S3921) and returns to the main process.

Here, the second special figure hold information update process executed in step S3921 is a process that adds (updates) special figure validity information data (special figure data) to the second special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the second special figure hold information update process, the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty hold area among the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 (see Figure 8) of the second special figure hold storage area REB of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the second special figure first to fourth hold area corresponding area (not shown) which is set to correspond to the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the said special figure validity information is stored. For example, when special feature win/loss information is stored in the third hold area REB3 (see Figure 8) of the second special feature hold storage area REB in the special feature hold storage area 412b, the special feature data is stored in the second special feature third hold area corresponding area (not shown) set in conjunction with the third hold area REB3. Furthermore, in the second special feature hold information update process, 1 is added to the second special feature hold count M stored in the second special feature hold count storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special feature hold storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3922>
If the received command is not a second special symbol hold command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a minor win game start command, as shown in Figure 372 (step S3922). A minor win game start command is a command that indicates the start of a minor win game, and is set in step S3404 of the minor win game control process shown in Figure 356, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a minor win game is to be started.

If the received command is a command to start a minor win game (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3923. If the received command is not a command to start a minor win game (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3930.

<Steps S3923 and S3924>
If the received command is a minor win game start command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it has received a bonus display OP command (step S3923). The bonus display OP command sets the first notification mode of the bonus display opening performance (see Figure 359(A)) as a performance to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 at the opening of the minor win game, and is set in step S3409 when it is determined that the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is the update information at the time the minor win game occurs, is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 121) in the minor win game control process of Figure 356.

If the MPU 41 receives a bonus display OP command (step S3923: Yes), it sets the first notification mode of the bonus display opening animation (see Figure 359(A)) as the animation to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 at the opening of the bonus game (step S3924), and then proceeds to step S3927.

<Steps S3925 and S3926>
If the profit display OP command has not been received (step S3923: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the loss display OP command has been received (step S3925). The loss display OP command sets the loss display opening animation of the second notification mode (see Figure 359(B)) as an animation to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 at the opening of a minor win game, and is set in step S3410 when it is determined that the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is the update information at the time a minor win game occurs, is less than a predetermined value (for example, 121) in the minor win game control process of Figure 356.

If the MPU 41 receives a loss display OP command (step S3925: Yes), it sets the second notification mode of the loss display opening animation (see Figure 359(B)) as the animation to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 at the opening of the small win game (step S3926), and then proceeds to step S3927.

<Steps S3927-S3929>
In step S3927, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation animation, which is an animation that occurs while the movable wing part 832 of the wing mechanism 83 is operating during a minor win game, and further sets the V-entry animation that occurs when a game ball enters the V-entry opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 during a minor win game (step S3928). Then, the MPU 41 turns on the minor win game flag, which indicates that the game is in progress and a minor win game is being played (step S3929), and terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3930 and S3931>
If the received command is not a mini-win game start command (step S3922: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a mini-win opening start command (step S3930). A mini-win opening start command is a command that indicates the start of the opening of a mini-win game, and is set in step S3411 in the mini-win game control process shown in Figure 356 when the opening of a mini-win game is to be started.

If the received command is a "minor win opening start" command (step S3930: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the "minor win opening start" flag to "on" (step S3931), which initiates the opening animation during the minor win game, and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a "minor win opening start" command (step S3930: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3932.

<Sports S3932 and S3933>
If the received command is not a mini-win opening start command (step S3930: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a mini-win opening end command (step S3932). A mini-win opening end command is a command that indicates that the opening of the mini-win game is ending, and in the mini-win game control process shown in Figure 356, it is set in step S3416 when the opening of the mini-win game is ending.

If the received command is a "minor win opening end" command (step S3932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the "minor win opening end" flag to ON, which terminates the opening sequence in the minor win game (step S3933), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a "minor win opening end" command (step S3932: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3934 in Figure 373.

<Steps S3934 and S3935>
If the received command is not a minor win opening end command (step S3932: No), as shown in Figure 373, the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a movable wing operation start command (step S3934). The movable wing operation start command indicates that the movable wing 832 of the wing mechanism 83 will start operating during a minor win game, and is set in step S3419 in the minor win game control process shown in Figure 356 when the movable wing 832 of the wing mechanism 83 will start operating.

If the received command is a command to start the movable wing operation (step S3934: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation effect start flag to ON (step S3935), which starts the movable wing operation effect during a minor win game, and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a command to start the movable wing operation (step S3932: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3936 in Figure 373.

<Steps S3936-S3938>
If the received command is not a command to start the movable wing unit (step S3934: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a V-winning command (step S3936). A V-winning command indicates that a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 during a minor win game. In the minor win game control process shown in Figure 356, the V-winning command is set in step S3427 when it is confirmed that a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 during a minor win game.

If the received command is a V-winning command (step S3936: Yes), the MPU 41 sets up a V-winning animation to notify that a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3937), and further sets the V-winning flag to ON to indicate that a game ball has entered the V-winning opening 833 of the wing mechanism 83 (step S3938), and then terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a V-winning command (step S3936: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3939.

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the received command is not a V-winning command (step S3936: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a minor win game termination command (step S3939). A minor win game termination command indicates that the minor win game is ending, and in the minor win game control process shown in Figure 356, it is set in step S3438 when the minor win game is ending.

If the received command is a minor win game termination command (step S3939: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the minor win game animation termination slag to ON (step S3940), which terminates the minor win game animation (movable wing operation animation), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a minor win game termination command (step S3939: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3941 in Figure 374.

<Step S3941>
If the received command is not a minor win game end command (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command, as shown in Figure 374 (step S3941). A jackpot game start command is a command that indicates the start of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3505 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 362, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a jackpot game is to be started.

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3942. If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3944.

<Steps S3942 and S3943>
If a command to start a jackpot game is received (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game performance setting process (step S3942), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON (step S3943), and returns to the main process.

The jackpot game animation setting process executes the settings for the jackpot animation, including the opening animation, opening/closing execution mode animation (round game animation and interval animation), and ending animation, which are performed during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, the "Big Win Game in Progress" flag indicates that a big win game is currently being played. This flag is referenced in the big win game presentation control process (described later) to determine whether or not a big win game is currently being played, i.e., whether or not to control the progress of the big win game presentation.

<Step S3944>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3944). An opening start command is a command that indicates the start of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3509 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 362, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be started.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3944: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3945; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3944: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3946.

<Step S3945>
If the opening start command is received (step S3944: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening performance start flag to ON (step S3945) and returns to the main process. The opening performance start flag is a flag that starts the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to start the opening performance.

<Step S3946>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3944: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3946). An opening end command is a command that indicates the end of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3515 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 363, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the opening is to be terminated.

If the received command is an opening/closing command (step S3946: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3947; if the received command is not an opening/closing command (step S3946: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3948.

<Step S3947>
If an opening end command is received (step S3946: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening performance end flag to ON (step S3947) and returns to the main process. The opening performance end flag is a flag that ends the opening performance of a jackpot game, and is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to end the opening performance.

<Step S3948>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3946: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3948). A round game start command indicates the start of a round game in opening/closing execution mode and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. It is set in step S3518 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 363, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when a round game in opening/closing execution mode is to be started.

If the received command is a round game start command (step S3948: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3949. If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3948: No), the process proceeds to step S3951 in Figure 375.

<Steps S3949 and S3950>
If a round game start command is received (step S3948: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to ON (step S3949), sets round number information indicating which round the game is in to RAM 512 (step S3950), and returns to the main process. The round game performance start flag is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to start each round game performance in the open/close execution mode performance.

<Step S3951>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3948: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3951). A round game end command is a command that indicates the end of a round game in open/close execution mode, and is set in step S3530 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 364, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the round game is to be ended.

If the received command is a round game end command (step S3951: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3952. If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3951: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3953.

<Step S3952>
If a round game end command is received (step S3951: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S3952) and returns to the main process. The round game end flag is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to end the round game performance.

<Step S3953>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3951: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3953). An interval start command is a command that indicates the start of an interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S3534 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 364, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when an interval is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3953: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3954; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3953: No), the process proceeds to step S3955.

<Step S3954>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3953: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to ON (step S3954) and returns to the main process. The interval performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the interval performance in the jackpot game performance control process described later.

<Step S3955>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3953: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3955). An interval end command is a command that indicates the end of the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set in step S3540 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 365, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the interval is to be ended.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3955: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3956; if the received command is not an interval end command (step S395: No), the process proceeds to step S3957.

<Step S3956>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3955: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to ON (step S3956) and returns to the main process. The interval performance end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the interval performance in the jackpot game performance control process described later.

<Step S3957>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3956: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3957). An ending start command is a command that indicates the start of the ending in a jackpot game, and is set in step S3543 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 364, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be started.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S3957: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3958; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3957: No), the process proceeds to step S3959.

<Step S3958>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3957: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON (step S3958) and returns to the main process. The ending performance start flag is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to start the ending performance.

<Step S3959>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3957: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3959). An ending end command is a command that indicates the end of the jackpot game, and is set in step S3549 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 365, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the ending is to be terminated.

Here, if the received command is an ending command (step S3959: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3960; if the received command is not an ending command (step S3959: No), the process proceeds to step S3961.

<Step S3960>
If the received command is an ending termination command (step S3959: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance termination flag to ON (step S3960) and returns to the main process. The ending performance termination flag is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to terminate the ending performance.

<Step S3961>
If the received command is not an ending command (step S3959: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3961). A jackpot game end command is a command that indicates the end of a jackpot game, and is set in step S3551 of the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 362, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, when the jackpot game is to be ended.

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game termination command (step S3961: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3962. If the received command is not a jackpot game termination command (step S3961: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3963.

<Step S3962>
If the received command is a jackpot game termination command (step S3961: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, to off (step S3962), and returns to the main process.

<Step S3963>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3961: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control unit 4 (step S3963), and then terminates the command determination process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figure 376, the sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described. Here, Figure 376 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51, for example, performs the sub-timer interrupt processing as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in Figure 376, the MPU 51 executes the following processes in the sub-timer interrupt processing: counter update processing (step S4001), special feature game performance control processing (step S4002), minor win game performance control processing (step S4003), and big win game performance control processing (step S4004).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S4001), the MPU 51 performs update processing for update information such as the performance pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, and the variation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the performance pattern type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when they reach their maximum values. The performance pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (performance pattern) based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance pattern type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. The first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol that is stopped first based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variation display counter is used to measure the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to determine the remaining variable display time, whether the display is in progress, and whether the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has finished.

[Special Game Performance Control Processing]
In the special feature game performance control process (step S4002), when the MPU 51 receives a special feature variation pattern command, it executes a process to control the progress of the special feature game performance according to the variation type (performance pattern) set in step S3903 of the command determination process in Figure 371.

[Small win game animation control processing]
In the minor win game performance control processing (step S4003), when the MPU 51 receives a minor win game start command, it executes processing to control the progress of the minor win game performance according to the opening performance set in step S3923 or S3926 of the command determination processing in Figure 372, the movable wing operation performance set in step S3927, and the V-winning performance set in step S3928.

[Big Win Game Performance Control Processing]
In the jackpot game performance control process (step S4004), when the MPU 51 receives a jackpot game start command, it executes a process to control the progress of the jackpot game performance according to the jackpot game performance set in step S3942 of the command determination process in Figure 374.

[Processing of the display control device 6]
Next, with reference to Figures 377 to 391, the various controls performed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. The processing of the MPU 631 can be broadly divided into three parts: the main processing, which is repeatedly performed after power-on; the command interrupt processing, which is performed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 5; and the V interrupt processing, which is an update processing that is performed when the MPU 631 detects the V interrupt signal, which is sent every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 637 completes the drawing process for one frame of the image. Normally, the MPU 631 performs the main processing, and then performs the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal occur simultaneously, the command reception processing is given priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 5 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be performed.

[Main processing of the display control device 6]
First, with reference to Figure 377, the main process executed by the MPU 631 in the display control device 6 will be explained. Figure 377 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

The startup of this main process is specifically performed according to the following procedure. When power is supplied from the power control device 9 to the display control device 6 and the system reset is released, the MPU 631, depending on its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 631a, which is update information stored within the MPU 631, to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 631a to the bus line 640. When the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 detects that the address specified on the bus line 640 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d to the buffer RAM 634c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631. Then, the MPU 631 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 634 and starts executing the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

Here, if we assume that the boot program, which is processed first by the MPU 631 after a system reset is released, is stored entirely in the NAND flash memory 634a, then when the character ROM 634 detects that the address specified on bus line 640 is "0000H", it must perform an update process to read one page of update information, which includes the data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H", from the NAND flash memory 634a and set it in the buffer RAM 634c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 634a, reading it and setting it in the buffer RAM 634c takes a considerable amount of time. Therefore, the MPU 631 will consume a significant amount of waiting time between specifying address "0000H" and receiving the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H". Consequently, the startup time for the MPU 631 will be longer, resulting in the problem that control of the graphic display unit 341 in the display control device 6 may not start immediately.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with those that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR-type ROM 634d. Since the NOR-type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 634 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR-type ROM 634d into the buffer RAM 634c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631. Therefore, the MPU 631 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H", enabling the MPU 631 to start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, control of the graphic display unit 341 in the display control device 6 can be started immediately.

<Step S4101>
Once the main process is executed as described above, the boot process performed by the boot program is executed first (step S4101), and the display control device 6 is started up so that various controls on the graphic display unit 341 can be executed. During the boot process, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633, and the various data tables (display data table, additional data table, transfer data table) from the fixed value data are stored in the data table storage area 633b.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 631 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but rather in a character ROM 634 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Since the character ROM 634 is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a, which allows for large capacity storage in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc., while eliminating the need for a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs, etc. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 6 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be lowered, and the increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 631 were to directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 634a, even with a high-performance processor, it could degrade the processing performance of the display control device 6. Thus, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 633a and data table storage area 633b provided in the work RAM 633, which is composed of DRAM. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the aforementioned second location, and thereafter, the MPU 631 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 633a and the data table storage area 633b without referring to the NAND flash memory 634a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, after the system reset is released, the control program and other data can be transferred to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633. The MPU 631 can then read the control program and other data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a high read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 6 to maintain high processing performance, and enables the easy execution of diverse and complex effects using the graphic display unit 341.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 634d, a predetermined number of instructions that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after a system reset are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 634a. Even then, the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 633a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 634d to the character ROM 634, the MPU 631 can be started in a short time, thus suppressing the cost increase of the character ROM 634 associated with this time reduction.

<Step S4102>
After the boot process is completed, the system then performs an initial setup process according to the control program that has been transferred to and stored in the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 (step S4102). Specifically, the MPU 631 is initialized, and the memory of the work RAM 633, resident video RAM 635, and normal video RAM 636 is cleared. In addition, various flags are set in the work RAM 633 as update information, and initial values are set for each flag. Unless otherwise specified, the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0".

Furthermore, during the initial setup process, after initializing the image controller 637, the image controller 637 is instructed to perform image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed across the entire screen of the symbol display unit 341. As a result, immediately after power-on, the symbol display unit 341 initially displays an image of a specific color across the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed across the entire screen of the symbol display unit 341 immediately after power-on is set to differ depending on the model of the gaming machine. This allows for a simple and immediate determination of whether the gaming machine 10 can start up normally during operational checks at the manufacturing plant, etc., by checking whether an image of the appropriate color for the model is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 immediately after power-on.

<Step S4103>
Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 637 to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-up to the main image area 635a of the resident video RAM 635 (step S4103). This transfer instruction includes the starting and ending addresses of the character ROM 634 where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-up is stored, information about the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 635), and the starting address of the main image area 635a at power-up, which is the transfer destination. The image controller 637 then transfers the image data corresponding to the main image at power-up from the character ROM 634 to the main image area 635a of the resident video RAM 635 according to this transfer instruction.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, the image controller 637 sends a transfer completion signal to the MPU 631 to indicate the completion of the transfer. Upon receiving this transfer completion signal, the MPU 631 can determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. The image controller 637 may also write transfer completion information to a register or a portion of its internal memory when it has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction. The MPU 631 may then read this register or portion of its internal memory as needed and detect the writing of the transfer completion information by the image controller 637, thereby determining that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed.

Image data transferred to the main image area 635a when the power is turned on is retained and not overwritten until the power is cut off.

<Step S4104>
Based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 637 in step S4103, once the transfer of image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 635a at power-on is completed, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the variable image at power-on to the variable image area 635b at power-on in the resident video RAM 635 (step S4104). This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 634 where the image data corresponding to the variable image at power-on is stored, the data size of the image data, information about the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 635), and the starting address of the destination, the variable image area 635b at power-on. The image controller then transfers the image data corresponding to the variable image at power-on from the character ROM 634 to the variable image area 635b at power-on in the resident video RAM 635 according to this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the variable image area 635b at power-on is then retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off.

<Step S4105>
Based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 637 in step S4104, once the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 635b is completed, the simplified image display flag 633c is then turned on (step S4105). As a result, while the simplified image display flag 633c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in the transfer setting process described later (see Figure 389(A)), which instructs the image controller 637 to transfer all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 (see step S3002 in Figure 389(B)).

Furthermore, the simplified image display flag 633c remains on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 is completed, based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 637 by this resident image transfer setting process. During this time, the simplified command determination process (see step S4308 in Figure 378(B)) and the simplified display setting process (see step S4309 in Figure 378(B)) are executed in the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378(B)) so that the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figure 333 are drawn.

As described above, in this gaming machine 10, NAND flash memory 634a is used for the character ROM 634. Due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 to be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power on and the variable image at power on are first transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. By displaying the main image at power on the symbol display unit 341, players and hall staff can see the main image at power on displayed on the symbol display unit 341 while the remaining image data to be stored is being transferred to the resident video RAM 635. Thus, the display control device 6 can take its time to transfer the remaining image data to be stored from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 while the main image at power on is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the power is turned on. Therefore, they can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying about whether the system has stopped working while the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635.

Furthermore, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the immediate display of the main image on the graphic display unit 341 upon power-up allows for immediate confirmation that the graphic display unit 341 has started operating without problems upon power-up. This prevents the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating due to the use of a slow-reading NAND flash memory 634a in the character ROM 634.

Furthermore, in the display control device 6 of the gaming machine 10, after power-on, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 along with the main power-on image. Therefore, if a player starts playing while the main power-on image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, resulting in a ball entering the first prize slot 314 (start prize), and a special symbol game performance start instruction is given from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5—that is, when a display fluctuation pattern command is received—the power-on fluctuation image shown in Figures 333(B) and 333(C) is immediately displayed during the special symbol game performance period, allowing for a simple fluctuation performance. Thus, even while the main power-on image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the player can confirm that a lottery has been reliably conducted through this simple special symbol game performance.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, the main image displayed at power-on continues to be shown on the symbol display unit 341. However, since the character ROM 634 is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and therefore the time during which the main image displayed at power-on continues to be shown after power-on is also extended. However, in this gaming machine 10, a simple special feature game effect can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 635 after power-on. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed immediately after power-on, for example, immediately after a power outage is restored, players can play with peace of mind.

<Step S4106>
After the processing in step S4105, interrupt enable is set (step S4106), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is cut off. As a result, after interrupt enable is set by the processing in step S4106, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of commands and the detection of V interrupt signals.

[Command interrupt processing of display control device 6]
Next, with reference to Figure 378(A), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. Figure 378(A) is a flowchart of the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 5, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 631.

As shown in Figure 378(A), the command interrupt process extracts the received command data and sequentially stores it in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 633 (step S4201), thereby terminating the command interrupt process. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simplified command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and processing is performed according to the command.

[V interrupt processing of display control device 6]
Next, with reference to Figure 378(B), the V interrupt processing performed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be explained. Figure 378(B) is a flowchart of the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt processing, which is an update process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after identifying the image to be displayed on the graphic display unit 341, a drawing list (see Figure 339), which is update information for that image, is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 637, thereby instructing the image controller 637 to execute the drawing process and display process for that image.

As described above, this V-interrupt processing is initiated when a V-interrupt signal, which is update information from the image controller 637, is detected. This V-interrupt signal is generated by the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds, corresponding to the completion of the image rendering process for one frame, and is transmitted to the MPU 631. Therefore, by executing the V-interrupt processing in synchronization with this V-interrupt signal, a rendering instruction is sent to the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds, corresponding to the completion of the image rendering process for one frame. Consequently, the image controller 637 does not receive a rendering instruction for the next image before the rendering or display process of the current image is complete. This prevents the start of rendering of a new image during the rendering process, and prevents the image from being expanded into the frame buffer containing the currently displayed image information in response to a new rendering instruction.

<Steps S4301-S4303>
Here, we will first explain the general flow of the V interrupt processing, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other diagrams. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in Figure 378(B), first, it is determined whether the simplified image display flag 633c is on or off (step S4301). If the simplified image display flag 633c is not on, i.e., off (step S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 has been completed. Therefore, instead of the power-on image shown in Figure 333, a normal animation image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. This is followed by a command determination process (step S4302), and then a display setting process (step S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (step S4302), the contents of the command from the audio lamp control device 5 stored in the command buffer area via command interrupt processing are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Furthermore, if a continuous予告 command is stored, the continuous予告 additional data table corresponding to the continuous予告 image type is set in the additional data table buffer 633e.

This command judgment process analyzes all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time and executes the processing. This is because the command judgment process is performed at 20-millisecond intervals, coinciding with the execution of the V-interrupt process, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 4 determines the start of a variation effect, it is highly likely that display variation pattern commands, stop type commands, and continuous予告 commands are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of special game effects and continuous予告 effects selected by the main control device 4 and the sound lamp control device 5 can be quickly grasped, and the image drawing can be controlled to display the corresponding effect image on the symbol display unit 341. Details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to Figures 379 to 383.

In the display setting process (step S4303), based on the contents of the display data table and additional data table set in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table buffer 633e by the command determination process (step S4302), the content of the next frame of image to be displayed in the pattern display unit 341 is specifically identified. Furthermore, depending on the processing status, the animation mode to be displayed in the pattern display unit 341 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined animation mode is set in the display data table buffer 633d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 384 to 387.

<Step S4304>
After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (step S4304). In this task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display unit 341, which was identified by the display setting process (step S4303) or the simplified display setting process (step S4309), the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the image is identified, and various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, scaling factor, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

<Step S4305>
Next, the transfer setting process is executed (step S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 633c is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 637 to transfer image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 635. Also, while the simplified image display flag 633c is off, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 637 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. In addition, when a continuous予告 command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 5, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 637 to transfer image data of the continuous予告 image used in the continuous予告 effect and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

<Step S4306>
Next, the drawing process is executed (step S4306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as update information shown in Figure 339 is generated from the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task processing (step S4304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting processing (step S4305). This drawing list is then sent to the image controller 637 along with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 637 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to Figure 391.

<Step S4307>
Next, the display control device 6 performs update processing for various counters, which are update information (step S4307). Then, the V interrupt processing is terminated. One example of a counter updated by the processing in step S4307 is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining the stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 633, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (minor win, front/back miss reach, reach other than front/back miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the special game performance of the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is finally set.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
In step S4301, if it is determined that the simplified image display flag is on (step S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in Figure 333 on the pattern display unit 341, a simplified command determination process (step S4308) is executed, followed by a simplified display setting process (step S4309), and then the process proceeds to step S4304.

[Command determination process of the display control device 6]
Next, referring to Figures 379 to 391, we will explain in detail the command determination process of the interrupt processing executed in step S4302 of the V interrupt processing in Figure 378(B). First, Figure 379 is a flowchart of the command determination process.

<Steps S4401-S4403>
As shown in Figure 379, in the command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (step S4401). If there are no unprocessed new commands (step S4401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there are any unprocessed new commands (step S4401: Yes), the new command flag is set to ON to notify the display setting process (step S4303 in Figure 378) that the new command has been processed (step S4402). Next, the type of command is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (step S4403).

<Steps S4404 and S4505>
Then, it is determined whether or not there is a command for displaying the number of reserved balls among the unprocessed commands (step S4404). If there is a command for displaying the number of reserved balls (step S4404: Yes), the reserved balls command processing is executed (step S4405), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Reserved ball count command processing]
Now, referring to Figure 380(A), the reserved ball count command processing executed in step S4405 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in Figure 379 will be explained. Figure 380(A) is a flowchart of the reserved ball count command processing. This reserved ball count command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display reserved ball count command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

As shown in Figure 380(A), in the reserved ball count command processing, first, the new reserved ball count command flag is turned on (step S4501) to notify the display setting process (step S4303 in Figure 378) that the display reserved ball count command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the reserved ball count information contained in the display reserved ball count command is acquired (step S4502). Note that in step S4502, if two or more display reserved ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball count information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball count command. This allows the latest reserved ball count information to be obtained.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls obtained in step S4502 is turned on, and the number discrimination flags corresponding to the other numbers of reserved balls are turned off (step S4503), and the process returns to the command determination process shown in Figure 379.

Therefore, in the display setting process, if the new reserved ball count command flag is set to ON, the reserved ball image data is expanded so that the reserved ball count symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the set number of reserved balls are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by referring to the quantity discrimination flag.

<Steps S4406 and S4507>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in step S4404, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of balls to be displayed (step S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display among the unprocessed commands (step S4406). If there is a confirmation command for display (step S4406: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (step S4407), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Confirmed command processing]
Now, referring to Figure 380(B), we will explain the confirmed command processing performed in step S4407 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 shown in Figure 379. Figure 380(B) is a flowchart of the confirmed command processing. This confirmed command processing executes the processing corresponding to the confirmed display command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

As shown in Figure 380(B), in the confirmation command processing, the confirmation command flag, which notifies the display setting processing (step S4303 in Figure 378) that a confirmation command for display has been received in the ON state, is set to ON (step S4601), and this process ends, returning to the command judgment processing in Figure 379. As a result, the display setting processing monitors the state of the confirmation command flag, and when the flag is ON, it executes the display setting processing so that the confirmation display effect is started on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, if the display setting for a special game effect has been processed, and the confirmation command flag does not turn ON even after the effect time set for that special game effect has elapsed, the display setting processing is executed so that the restart effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Steps S4408 and S4509>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in the process of step S4406, if it is determined that there is no confirmed command for display (step S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a demo command for display among the unprocessed commands (step S4408). If there is a demo command for display (step S4408: Yes), the demo command process is executed (step S4409), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Demo command processing]
Now, referring to Figure 380(C), the demo command processing performed in step S4409 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in Figure 379 will be explained. Figure 380(C) is a flowchart of the demo command processing. This demo command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S4701 and S4702>
As shown in Figure 380(C), in the demo command processing, first, a demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the data table storage area 633b and set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S4701). Next, the contents of the additional data table buffer 633e are cleared by writing Null data to it. Also, since the demo display data table specifies that there is no need to transfer image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, and therefore a corresponding transfer data table is not provided in the data table storage area 633b, Null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 633f to clear its contents (step S4702).

<Steps S4703-S4705>
Next, the time data corresponding to the demo performance is set to the timing counter 633i (step S4703), and the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S4704). Then, the demo display flag is set to ON to indicate that the demo performance is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when it is ON, the confirmation display flag is set to OFF to indicate that the confirmation display performance is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when it is ON, and the confirmation display flag is set to OFF to indicate that the confirmation display performance is in progress when it is ON (step S4705), ending the command processing and returning to the command judgment processing.

When this demo command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 633g, which is the update information initialized by the processing in step S4701. While doing so, it extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by pointer 633g from the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d by the processing in step S4701, and identifies the content of the next frame of image to be displayed in the graphic display unit 341. Furthermore, the display setting processing uses the timing counter 633i, which is the update information with time data corresponding to the demo performance set by the processing in step S4703, to measure the time of the demo performance specified in the demo display data table. Based on the state of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag, which are the update information set by the processing in step S4705, if it is determined that the demo performance in the demo display data table has finished based on the timing of the display setting control timing counter 633i, the system controls the display to show the demo performance again as the next performance to be displayed.

<Steps S4410 and S4511>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in step S4408, if it is determined that there is no demo command for display (step S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a variable pattern command for display among the unprocessed commands (step S4410). If there is a variable pattern command for display (step S4410: Yes), the variable pattern command processing is executed (step S4411), and then the process returns to step S4401.

[Variable pattern command processing]
Now, referring to Figure 381(A), the variable pattern command processing executed in step S4411 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in Figure 379 will be described. Figure 381(A) is a flowchart of the variable pattern command processing. This variable pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variable pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Step S4801>
As shown in Figure 381(A), in the variable pattern command processing, first, a variable display data table corresponding to the variable effect pattern indicated by the display variable pattern command is determined, and the determined variable display data table is read from the data table storage area 633b and set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S4801).

Here, the main control unit 4 always makes a determination of the start of a variation after a delay of several seconds or more. Therefore, it will not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Consequently, when executing the command determination process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, due to the influence of noise or other factors, part of a command may change, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the processing of step S4801, to prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 633d.

If a display data table for fluctuations corresponding to fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times were set in the display data table buffer 633d, and in reality, the main control unit 4 instructed a special game animation with a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table, the main control unit 4 would receive a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while the special game animation according to the set fluctuation display data table was being displayed on the symbol display unit 341. This would cause the decorative symbols in the fluctuation to suddenly stop displaying, potentially causing the player to feel uneasy.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 633d, even if the main control device 4 actually instructs a special game performance with a longer variation time than the set display data table, the display setting process controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 so that the restart performance is displayed from the end of the special game performance according to the display data table buffer 633d until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 4. As described later, the player can perceive the restart performance as part of the special game performance and continue to watch the variation of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 without any sense of incongruity until the stop display of the decorative symbols is confirmed.

<Steps S4802 and S4803>
Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in step S4801 is determined and read from the data table storage area 633b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 633f (step S4802). Then, the contents of the additional data table buffer 633e are cleared by writing Null data to it (step S4803).

<Step S4804>
Subsequently, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process in step S4801 is turned ON, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are turned OFF (step S4804). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process in step S4804, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d corresponds to. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether there is any inconsistency between the variation pattern of the set variation display data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later. If there is an inconsistency, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 633d, as will be described later.

<Steps S4805-S4808>
Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d by the processing in step S4801, the time data representing that variation time is set in the timing counter 633i (step S4805), and the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S4806). Then, the confirmation command flag, demo display flag, and confirmation display flag are all set to off (step S4807), and further, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (step S4808), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 633g, which is the update information initialized by the processing in step S4806. Simultaneously, it extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by pointer 633g from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d by the processing in step S4801, and identifies the content of the next frame of image to be displayed in the pattern display unit 341. At the same time, it extracts the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by pointer 633g from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f by the processing in step S4802, and controls the image controller 637 so that the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

Furthermore, in the display setting process, the time counter 633i, which is the updated information of the variable time data set by the process in step S4805, is used to measure the time of the special symbol game performance defined in the variable display data table. If it is determined that the special symbol game performance in the variable display data table has ended, and a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 4, the confirmation display performance is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. If a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is not received within a predetermined time after the special symbol game performance ends, the restart performance is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The display settings are controlled accordingly.

Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, prioritizing the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command would prevent the special game animation associated with the display variation pattern command from being performed. Therefore, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command. In contrast, this command determination process first checks for the presence or absence of the display confirmation command. As a result, the confirmation command processing, which corresponds to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later. This allows the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command to be overwritten and turned off, as shown in step S4807. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the special game animation associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 with priority.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, prioritizing the processing corresponding to the display demo command would prevent the special game animation associated with the display variation pattern command from being performed. Therefore, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command. In contrast, this command determination process first checks for the presence or absence of the display demo command. As a result, the demo command processing, which corresponds to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later. This allows the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d by the display demo command to be overwritten and rewritten into the variation display data table. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the special game animation associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Steps S4412 and S4413>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in the process of step S4410, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (step S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (step S4412). If there is a display variation type command (step S4411: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (step S4413), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Stop Type Command Processing]
Now, with reference to Figure 381(B), the stop type command processing will be explained. Figure 381(B) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed in step S4413 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in Figure 379. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S4901-S4903>
As shown in Figure 381(B), in the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (either a minor win, a near miss, a near miss other than near miss, or a complete miss) is determined (step S4901). Then, the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated information that is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378(B)) is executed, and the stop symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after the special game performance are finally set (step S4902).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in step S4542 is turned ON, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned OFF (step S4903).

As described above, the variable display data table contains offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process in step S4902 as type information to identify the decorative symbol to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable based on the data table. In the task processing in the V interrupt processing described above (step S4304 in Figure 378(B)), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable, the stop symbol set by the process in step S4902 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in step S4543, and the decorative symbol to be actually displayed is identified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified decorative symbol is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol area 635d of the resident video RAM 635, as described above.

<Step S4904>
After the processing in step S4903, the comparison flag is turned on (step S4904) to terminate this stop type command processing and return to the command determination processing in Figure 379. By turning on this comparison flag, the display setting processing determines whether there is any inconsistency between the variation pattern of the variation display data table set by the variation pattern command setting processing described above and the stop symbol set by the processing in step S4902. If there is an inconsistency, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 633d, as will be described later.

Furthermore, since the main control unit 4 always determines the start of a fluctuation after a delay of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, due to the influence of noise or other factors, part of a command may change, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of step S4901, to prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type table is determined assuming that the stop type is completely wrong. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to a completely wrong state is set in the process of step S4902.

If a stop symbol corresponding to a jackpot were set, even if the result was actually a loss, the symbol display unit 341 would display the jackpot symbol. This could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the game machine 10 was in a jackpot state, potentially reducing the reliability of the game machine 10. In contrast, as in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete loss, if the result is actually a jackpot, even if the symbol display unit 341 displays a complete loss symbol, the game machine 10 will transition to a jackpot state, thus pleasing the player.

<Steps S4414 and S4415>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in the process of step S4412, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (step S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous warning command among the unprocessed commands (step S4414). If there is a continuous warning command (step S4414: Yes), the continuous warning command process is executed (step S4415), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Continuous notification command processing]
Here, with reference to Figure 382(A), the details of the continuous warning command processing will be explained. Figure 382(A) is a flowchart of the continuous warning command processing executed in step S4415 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in Figure 379. This continuous warning command processing executes the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S5001 and S5002>
As shown in Figure 382(A), in the continuous予告 command processing, first, a new continuous予告 command flag is set to ON to notify the V interrupt processing transfer setting process (step S4305 in Figure 378(A)) that the continuous予告 command has been processed in the ON state (step S5001). Next, an additional data table for continuous予告 corresponding to the continuous予告 image type indicated by the continuous予告 command (one of "bubble", "egg", "chick", "chick", and "flock of chickens") is determined, the determined additional data table for continuous予告 is read from the data table storage area 633b, and it is set in the additional data table buffer 633e (step S5002).

As a result, the display setting process determines the display content of the next frame of the image in the symbol display unit 341 so that the continuous予告演出 (continuous予告演出) corresponding to the additional data table for continuous予告 (continuous予告) stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, which is processed in step S4552, is added and displayed to the演出 corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d.

<Step S5003>
Subsequently, the continuous preview determination flag corresponding to the continuous preview image type included in the continuous preview command is turned ON, and the continuous preview determination flags corresponding to the other continuous preview image types are turned OFF (step S4553), thereby ending the continuous preview command processing and returning to the command determination processing shown in Figure 379.

In the V-interrupt processing transfer setting process (step S4305 in Figure 378(A)), upon detecting that the new continuous予告 command flag set in step S5001 is turned on, it is determined that a predetermined additional data table for continuous announcements has been set in the additional data table buffer 633e by the continuous announcement command processing. The continuous announcement type corresponding to the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 633e is then identified from the continuous announcement discrimination flag set in step S4553. Finally, an instruction is given to the image controller 637 to transfer the image data necessary to display the identified continuous announcement type.

<Steps S4416 and S4417>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in step S4414, if it is determined that there are no consecutive notification commands (step S4414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (step S4416). If there is a rear image change command (step S4416: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (step S4417), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Processing of command to change background image]
Now, with reference to Figure 382(B), the rear image change command processing will be explained. Figure 382(B) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed in step S4417 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in Figure 379. This rear image change command processing executes the processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S5101 and S5102>
As shown in Figure 382(B), in the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag is set to ON (step S5101) to notify the transfer setting process (step S2405) of the change in the rear image resulting from receiving the rear image change command in the ON state. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear A to rear C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are turned OFF (step S5102), and this rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination process in Figure 379.

In the V-interrupt processing transfer setting process (step S4305 in Figure 378(A)), when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in step S5101 is turned on, the type of rear image after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set in step S5102. If the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since some of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not permanently stored in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 637 to transfer the image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

Furthermore, in the V-interrupt processing task (step S4304 in Figure 378(A)), if it is specified in the display data table that one of the back images A through C should be displayed based on the back image type defined, the back image type to be displayed at that time is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in step S5102. Then, the range of the back image to be displayed is identified as time progresses, and the type of RAM (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) and the address of the RAM in which the image data corresponding to that range of back image is stored are identified.

Furthermore, since the player will not operate the operation button 20 consecutively within 20 milliseconds or less, it is impossible to receive two or more back image change commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area. However, due to the influence of noise or other factors, part of a command may change, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a back image change command. In the processing of step S5102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received first may be turned on, or the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by that command may be turned on. Since this back image change does not directly affect the game value of the gaming machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the gaming machine 10.

<Steps S4418 and S4419>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in the process of step S4416, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (step S4416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an operation button operation command among the unprocessed commands (step S4418). If there is an operation button operation command (step S4418: Yes), the operation button operation command process is executed (step S4419), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Operation button operation command processing]
Here, the operation button operation command processing will be explained with reference to Figure 383(A). Figure 383(A) is a flowchart showing the operation button operation command processing executed in step S4419 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in Figure 379. This operation button operation command processing executes the processing corresponding to the operation button operation command received from the voice lamp control device 5.

As shown in Figure 383(A), in the operation button operation command, the operation button operation flag, which indicates that the operation button was operated while in the ON state, is set to ON (step S5201), and this process ends, returning to the command determination process.

In the V-interrupt processing display setting process (step S4303 in Figure 378(A)), based on the operation button operation flag set in step S5201, if an operation button is detected while the super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the variable display data table, a process is executed to update the type of super reach to be displayed later. This allows the player to select their preferred super reach animation.

<Steps S4420 and S4421>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, in step S4418, if it is determined that there is no operation button operation command (step S4418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (step S4420). If there is an error command (step S4420: Yes), the error command processing is executed (step S4421), and then the process returns to step S4401.

[Error command handling]
Here, we will explain the error command processing with reference to Figure 383(B). Figure 383(B) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed in step S4421 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in Figure 379. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

As shown in Figure 383(B), in the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag, which indicates that an error has occurred in the ON state, is set to ON (step S5301). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (step S5302), ending the error command processing and returning to the command judgment processing in Figure 379.

In the V-interrupt processing display setting process (step S4303 in Figure 378(A)), if an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in step S5301, the type of error is determined from the error discrimination flag set in step S5302, and a warning image corresponding to that error type is displayed on the graphic display unit 341.

Furthermore, if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in step S5302 sets the error detection flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command to "on". This causes warning images corresponding to all error types to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error situation.

<Step S4822>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Figure 379, if it is determined that there are no error commands in step S4420 (step S4420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (step S4422), and the process returns to step S4401.

In step S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If there are any unprocessed new commands (step S4401: Yes), steps S4402 to S4422 are executed again. Steps S4401 to S4422 are repeatedly executed until there are no more unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. When step S4401 determines that there are no more unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process terminates.

Furthermore, the simplified command determination process (step S4308), which is executed when the simplified image display flag 633c is on during the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378(B)), performs the same processing as the command determination process. However, in the simplified command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in Figure 333—namely, the display table confirmation command, the display variation pattern command, and the display stop type command—are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. The corresponding processing for each command, namely the confirmation command processing (see Figure 380(B)), variation pattern command processing (see Figure 381(A)), and stop type command processing (see Figure 381(B)), is executed, while other commands are discarded without executing the corresponding processing.

In this case, the variable pattern command processing (see Figure 381(A)) is executed. In step S4801, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variable image is set in the display data table buffer 633d. Furthermore, the image data for the power-on main image and power-on variable image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 635a and power-on variable image area 635b of the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, in step S4802, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 633f, clearing its contents.

[Display settings processing]
Next, referring to Figures 384 to 387, the display setting process (step S4303) of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 in Figure 378(B) will be described. Here, Figures 384 and 385 are flowcharts of this display setting process.

<Steps S5401 and S5402>
As shown in Figure 384, the display setting process determines whether the new command flag is on or off (step S5401). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., off (step S5401: No), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and steps S5402 to S5410 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S5411. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (step S5401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (step S5402), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by steps S5403 to S5410.

<Steps S5403 and S5404>
In step S5403, it is determined whether the new reserved ball count command flag is on (step S5403). If the new reserved ball count command flag is on (step S5403: Yes), it is determined that the reserved ball count command for display was processed in the previous command determination process, and the reserved image setting process is executed (step S5404).

[Setting the held image]
Here, with reference to Figure 386(A), the details of the hold image setting process will be explained. Figure 386(A) is a flowchart of the hold image setting process. This hold image setting process is a process for developing image data to display the number of hold balls corresponding to the number of hold balls notified by the voice lamp control device 5 on the pattern display unit 341, in accordance with the processing of the display hold ball count command.

<Steps S5501 and S5502>
As shown in Figure 386(A), in the reserved image setting process, first, the number discrimination flag is referenced, and reserved image data is expanded to display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls for which the number discrimination flag is set to ON in a small area of the pattern display unit 341 (step S5501). In the task processing of the V interrupt processing (step S4304 in Figure 386(A)), based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the reserved image is identified, and various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, scaling factor, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

In the pending image setting process, after the processing in step S5501, the new pending ball count command is set to OFF (step S5502), and the process returns to the display setting process shown in Figure 384.

<Steps S5405 and S5406>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in Figure 384, after the hold image setting process (step S5404), or during the process in step S5403, if it is determined that the new hold ball count command flag is not on, i.e., off (step S5403: No), then it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (step S5405). If the error occurrence flag is on (step S5405: Yes), then the warning image setting process is executed (step S5406).

[Warning image setting process]
Now, with reference to Figure 386(B), the warning image setting process will be explained. Figure 386(B) is a flowchart of the warning image setting process.

<Steps S5601 and S602>
As shown in Figure 386(B), the warning image setting process is a process for developing image data to display a warning image corresponding to the error that occurred on the graphic display unit 341. First, the error discrimination flag is referenced, and warning image data is developed to display warning images for errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON on the graphic display unit 341 (step S5601).

In the V-interrupt processing task (step S4304 in Figure 378), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is identified based on the expanded warning image data. Furthermore, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, scaling factor, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the processing in step S5601, the error occurrence flag is set to off (step S5602), and the process returns to the display setting process shown in Figure 384.

<Steps S5407 and S5408>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in Figure 384, after the warning image setting process (step S5406), or during the process in step S5405, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., off (step S5405: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation button operation flag is on (step S5407). If the operation button operation flag is on (step S5407: Yes), the operation button operation process is executed (step S5408).

[Operation Button Processing]
Now, with reference to Figure 386(C), the operation button operation process will be explained. Figure 386(C) is a flowchart showing the operation button operation process. The operation button operation process is a process for selecting the mode of the super reach to be displayed when the operation button 20 is operated by the player while a selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach is displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Steps S5701 and S5702>
As shown in Figure 386(C), in the operation button operation process, first the operation button operation flag is set to off (step S5701), and then it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (step S5702). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. If, in the V interrupt processing executed last time, the image controller 637 was instructed to draw a sprite for the super reach selection screen based on the set variable display data table, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S5703>
In step S5702, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (step S5702: No), the operation button operation process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process shown in Figure 384. On the other hand, if, as a result of step S5702, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (step S5702: Yes), the super reach type flags are updated in a predetermined order among the super reach type flags provided for each super reach display mode, so that only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on, and the other super reach type flags are turned off (step S5703), and the process returns to the display setting process shown in Figure 384.

In this embodiment, when defining the display of a Super Reach in a mode selected by the player within the variable display data table, the drawing content corresponding to each Super Reach display mode is defined for each address. In the display setting process, when expanding the contents of the display data table in step S5412 (described later), only the drawing content corresponding to the Super Reach display mode for which the Super Reach type flag is set is extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the selected Super Reach display mode is identified, and various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, scaling factor, and rotation angle, are set for each sprite. Therefore, the Super Reach animation is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the selected display mode.

<Steps S5409 and S5410>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in Figure 384, after the operation button operation process (step S5408), or during the process in step S5407, if it is determined that the operation button operation flag is not on, i.e., off (step S5407: No), it is determined whether the comparison flag is on or off (step S5409). If the comparison flag is on (step S5409: Yes), the comparison process is executed (step S5410).

[Comparison process]
Here, with reference to Figure 387, the details of the comparison process will be explained. Figure 387 is a flowchart of the comparison process. This process is performed when there is a discrepancy between the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 633d based on the display variation pattern command and the stop symbols set based on the display stop type command. In such cases, the special feature game performance is changed to a special variation performance in which decorative symbols are rapidly varied until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5.

<Steps S5801 and S5802>
As shown in Figure 387, in the comparison process, first, the data table discrimination flag that is set to the ON state is identified, and from the identified data table discrimination flag, the type of variable display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is identified (step S5801). Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag that is set to the ON state is identified, and from the identified stop symbol discrimination flag, the set stop symbol is identified (step S5802).

<Steps S5803 and S5804>
Then, step S5803 determines whether the type of variable display data table identified in step S5802 matches the stop symbol identified in step S5802. As mentioned above, a variable display data table is prepared for each variable pattern, and each variable pattern has variations such as a losing pattern and a small winning pattern. Therefore, in step S5803, for example, if the variable display data table corresponds to a losing variable pattern, but the stop symbol is set to a big winning symbol, it is determined that they do not match.

In step S5803, if a match is determined (step S5803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5808. After setting the comparison flag to off (step S5808), the process returns to the display setting process shown in Figure 384. On the other hand, if a match is determined (step S5803: No), the special variation display data table, which defines the special variation, is first set in the display data table buffer 633d. Null data is then written to the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively, to clear their contents (step S5804).

<Steps S5805-S5808>
Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the special stop symbols (for example, symbols that display "3", "4", and "1" from the left column) is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off (step S5805). Furthermore, the time data corresponding to the duration of the special variation effect is set in the timing counter 633i (step S5806). As mentioned above, the special variation effect causes the decorative symbols to change rapidly until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5, so the duration of the effect is set to a long time (for example, 90 seconds). Accordingly, the timing counter 633i, as update information, is set to 90 seconds (90000 milliseconds) ÷ 20 milliseconds = 4500 as the time data corresponding to the duration of the special variation effect.

Then, the pointer 633g, representing the update information, is initialized to 0 (step S5807), the comparison flag is set to off (step S5808), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Thus, if the display data table for variations set in the display data table buffer 633d based on the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, the special variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d. Therefore, the symbol display unit 341 displays a special variation effect in which decorative symbols continuously change at high speed. Since the special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5, the special stop symbol can be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Here, if the variation animation pattern instructed by the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 does not match the stop symbol that should be displayed when the variation animation stops, the display control device 6 may not be able to correctly reflect the result of the lottery conducted by the main control unit 4 and perform the variation animation or the confirmation display animation. In contrast, in this gaming machine 10, in such cases, a special variation animation is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special loss is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, even if the result of the lottery in the main control unit 4 is a loss, it is possible to prevent the symbol display unit 341 from mistakenly displaying a confirmation animation for a big win. Furthermore, even if a special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, if the lottery result in the main control unit 4 is a big win, the actual game state in the gaming machine 10 will transition to a special game state, so the player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by using a special stop symbol for the confirmation display, it is possible to suggest to the player that even if the confirmation display is a miss, the game machine 10 may still be in a jackpot state. This prevents the player from feeling anxious when the game machine 10 enters a jackpot state despite the confirmation display being a miss.

<Step S5411>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in Figure 384, if it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, i.e., off, after the comparison process (step S5410) or during the process in step S5409 (step S5409: No), the pointer update process is executed (step S5411).

[Pointer update process]
Now, with reference to Figure 388, the pointer update process will be explained. Figure 388 is a flowchart of the pointer update process. This pointer update process updates the pointer 633g, which specifies the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, from the display data table buffer 633d, the additional data table buffer 633e, and the transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively.

<Step S5901>
As shown in Figure 388, in the pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 633g, which is the update information (step S5901). That is, in principle, the pointer 633g is updated so that 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as mentioned above, the various data tables have Start information at address "0000H", and the actual data for each is defined from address "0001H" onwards. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the value of pointer 633g is initialized to 0, and this pointer update process updates its value to 1, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order from address "0001H".

<Steps S5902-S5905>
In the update process of step S5901, after updating the value of pointer 633g, which is update information, it is determined in the display data table buffer 633d whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 633g is End information or not. If the result is End information (step S5902: Yes), it means that pointer 633g has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table buffer 633d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is a demo display data table or a restart display data table (step S5903). If it is a demo display data table or a restart display data table (step S5903: Yes), the pointer 633g is set to 1 (step S5904). Furthermore, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table or restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d is set in the timing counter 633i (step S5905), and the process proceeds to step S5907. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be unfolded sequentially from the beginning of the demo display data table or restart display data table, so that the pattern display unit 341 can repeatedly display the demo performance or restart performance.

<Step S5906>
In step S5903, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (step S5903: No), the value of the pointer 633g, which is the update information, is deducted by 1 (step S5906), and the process proceeds to step S5907. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, such as the variable display data table or the confirmed display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 633d, the drawing content of the address immediately preceding the address containing the End information is always expanded, so the last image defined in that display data table can be displayed in a stopped state on the graphic display unit 341.

If, as a result of the processing in step S5902, it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 633g after the update in the display data table buffer 633d is not End information, then the processing in steps S5903 to S5905 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S5907.

<Steps S5907-S5909>
In step S5907, it is determined whether the confirmation command flag is on or off. If the confirmation command flag is off (step S5907: No), the pointer update process ends and the process returns to the display setting process shown in Figure 384. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (step S5907: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control unit 5. Therefore, the value of the pointer 633g is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S5908). Furthermore, the value of the timing counter, which is the update information, is set to 1 (step S5909), and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when a confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

<Step S5412>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in Figure 384, after the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 633g updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table buffer 633e, respectively (step S5412). In the V interrupt processing task processing (step S4304 in Figure 378(B)), the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the image is identified based on the drawing content expanded in step S5412, along with the previously expanded pending image and warning image, and various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, scaling factor, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite. If Null data is entered in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there are no sprites to add. Also, if the additional data table buffer 633e is cleared with Null data, Null data will always be expanded from the additional data table buffer 633e.

<Steps S5413-S5421>
Next, an update process is executed to subtract 1 from the value of the timing counter 633i, which is the update information (step S5413), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 633i after the subtraction is 0 or less (step S5414). If the value of the timing counter 633i is 1 or greater (step S5414: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 633i is 0 or less (step S5414: Yes), it means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) should be sent from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control unit 5 in conjunction with the end of that performance, so in the subsequent step S5415, it is checked whether the confirmation command flag is on or not (step S5415).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (step S5415: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control unit 4 via the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively, to clear their contents (step S5416). Next, the time data corresponding to the confirmation display duration is set in the timing counter 633i, which is update information (step S5417), and further, the value of the pointer 633g, which is update information, is initialized to 0 (step S5418). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off (step S5419), and then, after setting the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is in progress when it is on, to on (step S5420), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 633 (step S5421), and the process returns to the V interrupt processing in Figure 378(B).

This allows the display data buffer 633d to contain a variable display data table, and when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 at the end of the animation, the display content can be set so that the confirmation display animation for the stopped symbols in the special game animation is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d to a confirmation display data table, the animation displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be easily changed to a confirmation display animation. Compared to the conventional method of changing the display content by launching a separate program, this method avoids program complexity and bloat, and therefore does not place a heavy load on the MPU 631. Consequently, various types of animation images can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 6.

The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process in step S5421 is used to identify the decorative symbol to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the next special game performance. That is, as described above, the display of decorative symbols in the special game performance changes according to the stopped symbol of the previous special game performance. Therefore, the display data table for variation contains symbol offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous special game performance until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variation based on that data table. In the V-interrupt processing task processing (step S4304 in Figure 378(B)), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variation, the previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by step S5421 is used to identify the stopped symbol of the previous special game performance. Furthermore, the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process is added to the identified stopped symbol to determine the decorative symbol to be actually displayed. As a result, the special game performance starts from the stopped symbol of the previous special game performance.

<Steps S5422-S5427>
In step S5415, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on (step S5415: No), the process proceeds to step S5422 shown in Figure 385 to determine whether the confirmation display flag is on or off (step S5422). If the confirmation display flag is on (step S5422: Yes), the result of the determination in step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) means that the confirmation display effect has finished, so the confirmation display flag is set to off (step S5423), the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 633d (step S5424), and then the time data corresponding to the effect time of the data display is set to the time counter 633i, which is update information (step S5425). Then, the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S5426), the demo display flag indicating that the demo effect is in progress is set to on (step S5427), and the V interrupt process in Figure 378(B) is terminated.

This allows the display unit 341 to automatically set the content of the demo animation so that if it does not receive a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next special game animation or a display demo animation command indicating the start of a demo animation before the confirmation display animation finishes, the demo animation will be displayed.

Note that the branching condition for step S5422: Yes is met only when the confirmation display animation is performed. In this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data table buffer 633f are cleared by the processing in step S5416. Therefore, the clearing process of these data table buffers is omitted in the processing of step S5424. This reduces the processing load on the MPU 631.

<Step S5428>
In step S5422, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (step S5422: No), then it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or off (step S5428). If the demo display flag is on (step S5428: Yes), then the result of the determination in step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) means that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process makes various settings so that the demo performance starts again as described above, so the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the symbol display unit 341 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 5.

<Steps S5429 and S5430>
In step S548, if the demo display flag is off instead of on (step S5428: No), the result of the determination in step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) means that the special symbol game performance has ended. Therefore, if a confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special symbol game performance ended, an update process is executed to start the restart performance by adding 1 to the restart timer counter, which is update information that was initialized to 0 when the variable display data table corresponding to the special symbol game performance was set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S5429), and it is determined whether the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (step S5430).

<Steps S5431-S5433>
If the restart timer counter is not at a predetermined value (step S5430: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process in Figure 378(B). If the restart timer counter, which is the update information, is at a predetermined value (step S5430: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the contents of the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data table buffer 633f are cleared by writing Null data to them (step S5431). Then, the time data, which is the update information corresponding to the performance time of the restart performance, is set in the timing counter 633i (step S5432), and further, the value of the pointer 633g, which is the update information, is initialized to 0 (step S5433), and the process returns to the V interrupt process in Figure 378(B).

As a result, the display control device 6 can be configured to display a restart animation on the symbol display unit 341 if, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative symbols stopped displaying following the end of the special game animation, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 has not been received. Furthermore, as described above, the restart animation displays an image of the vibrating decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, when the player sees the decorative symbols vibrating on the symbol display unit 341 after their movement has stopped, they can recognize that the stopped symbols have not yet been confirmed.

Furthermore, after the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table has been unfolded, the pointer update process described above causes the drawing content to be unfolded again from the beginning of the restart display data table. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the symbol display unit 341 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 5 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a manner in which the decorative symbols vibrate (oscillate) around a predetermined position, and the restart display data table defines only the drawing content necessary to display the decorative symbols oscillate at least once. Then, by repeatedly unfolding the drawing content from the beginning of this restart display data table, the restart effect in which the decorative symbols vibrate repeatedly is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In this way, by making the restart animation an animation in which decorative symbols are displayed by vibrating the symbol display unit 341, the restart display data table only needs to store the drawing content necessary to vibrate and display the decorative symbols at least once. Therefore, the capacity required to store the restart display data table can be kept small.

Furthermore, if a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 5 while the restart animation is being performed using the restart display data table, the process shown in step S5416 in Figure 384 is executed, and the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d. As a result, even during the restart animation, upon receiving the display confirmation command, the stop display of the decorative symbols is performed using the stop symbols indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag, and the confirmation display is shown on the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 5 while the restart animation is being performed by the start display data table, the process in step S4801 of Figure 381(A) is performed, the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the special game animation is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Also, if a display demo command is received from the audio lamp control device 5 while the restart animation is being performed by the start display data table, the process in step S4701 of Figure 380(C) is performed, the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the demo animation is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The restart animation is an animation that is displayed when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received from the main control device 4 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative symbols stopped displaying following the end of the special game animation. Therefore, due to the effects of noise or malfunctions, there is a possibility that the confirmation command may not be received even while the restart animation is being displayed. In contrast, in this embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart animation, the animation corresponding to that command can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, various animations on the symbol display unit 341 can be performed in accordance with the game state of the gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, the simplified display setting process (step S4309), which is executed when the simplified image display flag 633c is on during the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378(B)), performs the same processing as the display setting process. However, in the simplified display setting process, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 after the performance time of the special game animation using the power-on fluctuating image has ended, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d that specifies that one of the power-on fluctuating images (either Figure 333(B) or Figure 333(C)) corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command will be displayed for a predetermined time. Also, if, after the performance time of the special game animation using the power-on fluctuating image has ended, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should have been received from the main control unit 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 is not received, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d that specifies that the special game animation using the power-on fluctuating image will be restarted as is.

Furthermore, the comparison process compares the variation pattern specified by the display variation pattern command with the stop type specified by the display stop type command. If they do not match, a losing symbol is set as the stop symbol.

[Transfer settings process]
Next, with reference to Figures 389 and 390, the transfer setting process (step S4305) of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. Here, Figure 389(A) is a flowchart of the transfer setting process.

<Steps S6001-S6003>
As shown in Figure 389(A), the transfer setting process first determines whether the simplified image display flag 633c is on or off (step S6001). If the simplified image display flag 633c is on (step S6001: Yes), then all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has not been transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is executed (step S6002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 637 to transfer the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 389(B).

On the other hand, if the result of step S6001 is that the simplified image display flag 633c is not on, i.e., off (step S6001: No), then all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has been transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (step S6003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent image data transfers from the character ROM 634 are performed to the normal video RAM 636. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 390.

[Resident image transfer settings process]
Next, referring to Figure 389(B), the resident image transfer setting process (step S6002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (step S4305) executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6, will be described. Figure 389(B) is a flowchart of this resident image transfer setting process (step S6002).

<Steps S6101 and S6102>
As shown in Figure 389(B), in the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction has been sent to the image controller 637 to transfer untransferred image data (step S6101). If an instruction has been sent (step S6101: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 637 based on that instruction has been completed (step S6102). In this step S6102 process, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 637, if a transfer completion signal indicating the completion of the transfer process is received from the image controller 637, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. If it is determined in step S6102 that the transfer process has not been completed (step S6102: No), the image transfer process is still being performed by the image controller 637, and this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (step S6102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S6103. Furthermore, if, as a result of the processing in step S6101, a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 637 (step S6101: No), the process proceeds to step S6103.

<Steps S6103 and S6104>
In step S6103, it is determined whether all resident image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has been transferred (step S6103). If there is any resident image data that has not been transferred (step S6103: No), a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 637 to transfer the untransferred resident image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 (step S6104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list, which is sent to the image controller 637 as update information during the drawing process, will include transfer data information regarding untransferred resident image data. Based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list, the image controller 637 can transfer the resident image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. The transfer data information includes the starting and ending addresses of the character ROM 634 where the resident image data is stored, information about the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 635), and the starting address of the transfer destination (the area in the resident video RAM 635 where the resident image data to be transferred should be stored). Based on this transfer data information, the image controller 637 executes the image transfer process, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 634, stores it temporarily in the buffer RAM 637a, and then transfers it to the specified address in the resident video RAM 635 during the unused period of the resident video RAM 635. Once the transfer is complete, it sends a transfer completion signal to the MPU 631.

<Step S6105>
If, as a result of the processing in step S6103, all resident target image data has been transferred (step S610: Yes), the simplified image display flag 633c is set to off (step S6105), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378(B)), the command determination process (see Figures 379 to 383) and the display setting process (see Figures 384 to 387) are executed instead of the simplified command determination process (see step S4308 in Figure 378(B)) and the simplified display setting process (see step S4309 in Figure 378(B)), so that the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Furthermore, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 is performed to the normal video RAM 636 by the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 390) (see step S6001: No in Figure 389(A)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 631 can transfer all resident image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, excluding the main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 631 then controls the resident video RAM 635 to retain the transferred image data without overwriting it while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 635 by the resident image transfer setting process will reside in the resident video RAM 635 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 635, the display control device 6 can perform image rendering processing using the image controller 637 while using the image data resided in the resident video RAM 635. This means that if the image data used for rendering is resided in the resident video RAM 635, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, thus eliminating the time required for reading the data. This allows for immediate image rendering and the display of the rendered image on the graphic display unit 341.

In particular, the resident video RAM 635 stores image data for frequently displayed images such as background images, decorative patterns, character patterns, and error messages, as well as image data for images that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 4, sound lamp control unit 5, and display control unit 6. Therefore, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with NAND flash memory 634a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any given time to the display of any image on the pattern display unit 341.

[Normal image transfer settings process]
Next, referring to Figure 390, the normal image transfer setting process (step S6003), which is one of the transfer setting processes (step S4305) executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6, will be described. Figure 390 is a flowchart of this normal image transfer setting process.

<Steps S6201-S6204>
As shown in Figure 390, in the normal image transfer setting process, first, information is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f, specifically the address indicated by the pointer 633g updated by the pointer update process (step S5411) of the previously executed display setting process (step S4303) (step S6201). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (step S6202). If it is transfer data information (step S6202: Yes), the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 634 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 633 (step S6203). Furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 633, which indicates the existence of image data to be transferred when it is ON, is set to ON (step S6204), and the process proceeds to step S6205.

<Steps S6205 and S6206>
Furthermore, in the process of step S6202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (step S6202: No), the processes of steps S6203 and S6204 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S6205. In the process of step S6205, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 637 after the completion of the previously performed image data transfer (step S6205). If a transfer instruction has been set (step S6205: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 637 based on that transfer instruction has been completed (step S6206).

In step S6206, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 637, the system determines that the transfer process is complete when it receives a transfer completion signal from the image controller 637 indicating the end of the transfer process. If step S6206 determines that the transfer process is not complete (step S6206: No), the image transfer process is still ongoing in the image controller 637, and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the transfer process is complete (step S6206: Yes), the system proceeds to step S6207. Furthermore, if, as a result of step S6205, no image data transfer instruction was set to the image controller 637 after the end of the previous transfer process (step S6205: No), the system also proceeds to step S6207.

<Steps S6207-S6211>
In step S6207, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or off. If the transfer start flag is on (step S6207: Yes), it is determined that there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (step S6208). Then, the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by step S6203 is set as the image to be transferred, and the process proceeds to step S6215. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is off instead of on (step S6207: No), it is then determined whether the new continuous予告 command flag is on or off (step S6209).

Then, if the new continuous予告 command flag is on (step S6209: Yes), the continuous予告 command is processed, meaning that the additional data table for continuous予告演出 (continuous予告演出) is set in the additional data table buffer 633e. Therefore, after setting the new continuous予告 command flag to off (step S6210), the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 634 where the image data of the continuous予告 image corresponding to the on-state continuous予告 discrimination flag is stored, and the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) are identified (step S6211). The sprite image data indicated by this identified information is then used as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to step S6215.

<Steps S6212-S6214>
In step S6209, if the new continuous notification command flag is off instead of on (step S6209: No), then it is determined whether the background image change flag is on or off (step S6212). If the background image change flag is off instead of on (step S6212: No), then there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the background image change flag is on (step S6212: Yes), it means that the background image has been changed. Therefore, after setting the background image change flag to off (step S6213), the system identifies the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 634 where the image data of the background image corresponding to the on-state background image identification flag is stored, as well as the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) (step S6214). The image data of the sprite indicated by this identified information is then used as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to step S6215.

Furthermore, if the rear image detection flag is in the ON state and it is set to Rear Image A, then all corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, there is no image data to transfer to the normal video RAM 636. Thus, in step S6214, if the rear image detection flag is in the ON state and it is set to Rear Image A, the normal image transfer process is terminated.

<Steps S6215-S6217>
In step S6215, it is determined whether the image to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 636. This determination in step S6215 is made by referring to the stored image determination flag 633j. Specifically, the storage status corresponding to the sprite designated as the image to be transferred is read from the stored image determination flag 633j. If the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 636. If the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 636.

Then, as a result of the processing in step S6215, if the image to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 636 (step S6215: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This prevents unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 6 and reducing traffic on the bus line 640.

On the other hand, if, as a result of the processing in step S6215, the image to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 636 (step S6215: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image to be transferred is set (step S6216). As a result, the transfer data information for the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 637 during the drawing process, and the image controller 637 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the starting and ending addresses of the character ROM 634 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information about the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 636), and the starting address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 where the image data of the image to be transferred should be stored). The image controller 637 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information. It reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 634 and transfers it to the specified address in the specified video RAM (in this case, the normal video RAM 636). Upon completion of the transfer, it sends a transfer completion signal to the MPU 631.

After the processing in step S6216, the stored image discrimination flag 633j is updated (step S6217), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image discrimination flag 633j is updated, as described above, by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image to be transferred to "on," and setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 636a as that sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the processing for the continuous予告 command is executed in the previously executed command judgment process, and an additional data table corresponding to the continuous予告 image indicated by that continuous予告 command is set in the additional data table buffer 633e, the image data of the continuous予告 image used in that additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 without delay. Furthermore, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command judgment process, the image data used in that back image that is not stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 without delay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in response to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4 (for example, display variation pattern commands), the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and at the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 631 sets a transfer instruction for the image to be transferred to the image controller 637 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 633g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. This ensures that the image data of the sprites used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 at the desired timing.

Here, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred at a predetermined address, so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite begins according to the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, it is possible to ensure that image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635 necessary for drawing that sprite is always stored in the image storage area 636a.

This allows the character ROM 634 to be configured using the slow-reading NAND flash memory 634a, while simultaneously reading the necessary images for display from the character ROM 634 and transferring them to the normal-use video RAM 636 without delay. This enables the display of corresponding effects on the pattern display unit 341 while simultaneously rendering the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by using the transfer data table, only non-resident image data can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal-use video RAM 636 in the resident video RAM 635.

Furthermore, the transfer data table defines the transfer data information so that image data corresponding to each sprite is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the general-purpose video RAM 636. This allows for the management and control of image data transfer on a sprite-by-sprite basis, simplifying the transfer process. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the general-purpose video RAM 636 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer can be controlled in detail while simplifying the process. Therefore, the increase in the load associated with transfers can be efficiently suppressed.

[Drawing process]
Next, with reference to Figure 391, the drawing process (step S4306) of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. Figure 391 is a flowchart of the drawing process.

<Step S6301>
As shown in Figure 390, in the drawing process, a drawing list as update information shown in Figure 339 is generated (step S3301) from the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the V interrupt processing task (step S4304 in Figure 378), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, scaling factor, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, α blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the V interrupt processing transfer setting process (step S4305 in Figure 378). Specifically, in the process of step S6301, the type of storage RAM and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite from the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the V interrupt processing task (step S4304 in Figure 378), and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the V interrupt processing task (step S4304 in Figure 378) are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back in the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed furthest forward. After rearranging the sprites in this order, a drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM where the sprite's image data is stored, as well as the parameters necessary for drawing that sprite, as detailed drawing information for each sprite. Furthermore, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process of the V interrupt (step S4305 in Figure 378), the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 634 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) are added to the end of the drawing list as transfer data information.

As mentioned above, since each sprite has a fixed area in the resident video RAM 635 where its image data is stored, or a fixed sub-area in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636, the MPU 631 can instantly identify the type of RAM and address where the sprite's image data is stored, according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

<Step S6302>
When a drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information identified by the drawing target buffer flag 633k are sent to the image controller (step S6302). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 633k is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the image drawn on the first frame buffer 636b to be expanded, and if the drawing target buffer flag 633k is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the image drawn on the second frame buffer 636c to be expanded.

The image controller 637, based on the drawing list received from the MPU 631, draws images sequentially starting with the sprite listed first in the drawing list, and then overwrites the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This ensures that in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn is placed at the back, and the last sprite drawn is placed at the front.

Furthermore, if the drawing list contains transfer data information, the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 634 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the starting address of the destination (normal video RAM 636), are extracted from that transfer data information. The image data stored from the source starting address to the source ending address is then read sequentially from the character ROM 634 and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 637a. Then, when normal video RAM 636 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 637a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the destination starting address of normal video RAM 636. The image data stored in normal video RAM 636 is then used based on the drawing list transmitted from MPU 631, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

Furthermore, the image controller 637 reads the image information of the previously unfolded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits this image information to the pattern display unit 341 along with the drive signal. This allows the pattern display unit 341 to display the image unfolded in the frame buffer. Additionally, it is possible to unfold the image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously displaying the image unfolded from the other frame buffer on the pattern display unit 341, enabling simultaneous and parallel processing of drawing and display.

<Step S6303>
The drawing process, after the processing in step S6302, executes the process of updating the drawing target buffer flag 633k (step S6303). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing in Figure 378. The drawing target buffer flag 633k is updated by inverting its value, that is, setting it to "1" if the value was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is set alternately between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c each time a drawing list is sent.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt processing (see Figure 378(B)) executed by the MPU 631 is performed, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds, which is the time it takes for the drawing and display processing of one frame of image to be completed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. When the image drawing and display processing is executed, 20 milliseconds after the completion of the drawing process for one frame of image, the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously unfolded in the first frame buffer 636b can be read and displayed on the pattern display unit 341, and at the same time, a new image is unfolded in the second frame buffer 636c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame's worth of image data, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously unfolded in the second frame buffer 636c can be read and displayed on the pattern display unit 341, while at the same time, a new image is unfolded in the first frame buffer 636b. Thereafter, by alternately designating either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c as the frame buffer for unfolding one frame's worth of image data and the frame buffer from which one frame's image information is read, every 20 milliseconds, the image rendering process for one frame can be performed while the image display process for one frame's worth of image data is continuously performed in 20-millisecond increments.

Thus, in this embodiment, the special game performance executed in the symbol display unit 341 for each special game is performed by repeating the drawing list update process, which is update information, a predetermined number of times, according to the variation type (performance pattern) set for each special game based on the result of the special jackpot lottery. In other words, the special game performance in the symbol display unit 341 ends when the drawing list update process, which is update information, is executed a number of times corresponding to the variation display time of the decorative symbols after the special game has started. When the drawing list update process, which is update information, corresponding to the variation display time of the special game has ended, it indicates that the result of the special jackpot lottery for that special game is a loss. If there are any special games to be executed after the end of the special game, the special game for those games is started, and the special game performance is executed for those games by repeating the drawing list update process, which is update information, a predetermined number of times. In other words, the special feature game is repeatedly executed until the special feature game that announces that the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a minor win is executed. In each special feature game, the special feature game animation performed by the symbol display unit 341 is executed by repeating the update process of the drawing list, which is the update information, a predetermined number of times. This makes it possible to smoothly and reliably execute the special feature game animation on the symbol display unit 341 for each special feature game.

On the other hand, if the special feature game is one that notifies the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a minor win, then after the update process of the drawing list, which is the update information corresponding to the display time of the special feature game, is completed, the minor win game is executed after the special feature game performance ends, creating a minor win game state, which is a profitable game state. During the gameplay of the special feature game that generates a minor win, the decorative symbols are displayed as matching numbers as a notification display to inform the player that the result of the special feature jackpot lottery is a minor win. Furthermore, during the gameplay of the special feature game that generates a minor win, as mentioned above, special performances such as a re-draw performance (re-draw display) may be executed, including a revival performance (revival display) (see Figure 343(B)) or an upgrade performance (upgrade display) (see Figure 343(C)).

In a special game mode featuring symbols, the revival animation (revival display) is a special effect where, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a minor win, the decorative symbols, which are predetermined symbols, stop in a combination corresponding to a loss, and then stop again in a combination corresponding to a minor win. Specifically, in a special game mode featuring symbols, the revival animation (upgrade display) is an effect where the decorative symbols stop in a combination other than matching numbers as a notification, and then a combination of matching numbers is confirmed as a notification (see Figure 343(B)).

On the other hand, in the special promotion animation (promotion display) of a special symbol game during gameplay, for example, in a minor win game, the decorative symbols stop to indicate that it is a minor win resulting in a 4R time-saving jackpot game when a game ball enters the V-entry slot 833. Then, the decorative symbols are confirmed to indicate that it is a minor win resulting in a 16R time-saving jackpot game when a game ball enters the V-entry slot 833. Specifically, in the promotion animation (promotion display) of a special symbol game during gameplay, the decorative symbols stop to indicate a sequence of numbers other than "777" as a notification, and then the sequence of numbers "777" is confirmed to be displayed as a notification (see Figure 343(C)).

As mentioned above, the upgrade (upgrade display) and revival (revival display) effects in special symbol games, which are in a game state, are effects incorporated into a specific variation type (effect pattern) set for a single special symbol game that is in a game state that notifies a jackpot (see Figure 343(A)). In other words, the upgrade (upgrade display) and revival (revival display) effects are executed as part of the special symbol game effects (part of the variation display of decorative symbols) when a specific variation type (effect pattern) is set from among multiple variation types (effect patterns) that are set according to the variation display time of the decorative symbols and the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a minor win. Therefore, the upgrade (upgrade display) and revival (revival display) effects are executed by repeating the drawing list update process, which is update information, a number of times determined according to the variation type (effect pattern) set for the special symbol game. In other words, when performing an upgrade animation (upgrade display) or revival animation (revival display) during a single special symbol game that announces a jackpot, the decorative symbols are displayed as a pre-upgrade or pre-revival notification during the update process up to a predetermined period before the update completion state update process, which is the update information update process for the last drawing list. By updating the drawing list, which is the update information, to the end through the update process using the subsequent period, the decorative symbols can be confirmed and displayed as the notification. This makes it possible to smoothly and reliably execute the upgrade animation (upgrade display) or revival animation (revival display) of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 during a single special symbol game that announces a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine. However, even when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop probability variation machine, an ST machine, or a V-ST machine, it is possible to execute special effects such as promotion effects (promotion display) and revival effects (revival display), which are re-drawing effects (re-drawing display), during the special symbol game that is in the game state where a jackpot is announced. Furthermore, during the special symbol game that is in the game state where a jackpot is announced, it is conceivable to announce, for example, an upgrade from a normal jackpot to a probability variation jackpot, an upgrade that increases the number of rounds in a jackpot game, or a revival from a miss to a jackpot. In this case, during the promotion or revival effects, the decorative symbols are displayed as a notification display before the upgrade or revival during the update process up to a predetermined period before the update completion state where the last drawing list update process is executed as update information. By updating the drawing list, which is the update information, to the end through the update process using the subsequent period, the decorative symbols can be displayed as a confirmed notification display.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the break-even point is set based on, for example, the design value at the time of factory shipment. Alternatively, the break-even point may be set based on other criteria. For example, a test play test could be conducted on the gaming machine 10 before factory shipment, and the break-even point could be set based on the results of this test play test.

Furthermore, the break-even point is not fixed, but can be changed based on a program incorporated into the gaming machine 10. For example, the break-even point could be changed based on one or more pieces of game information (performance information) stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "base information," "continuous bonus ratio information," "bonus ratio information," and "unit jackpot draw count." This allows the break-even point to be adjusted to accommodate variations in the game pins installed on the game board 31 of each gaming machine 10 at the time of shipment, as well as the deterioration of the game pins over time. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the break-even point in accordance with the current state of the gaming machine 10.

The timing for changing the break-even point could be when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the RAM is cleared, after a certain number of special feature games are played (for example, every 10,000 times), or after a certain number of jackpot games are played (for example, every 1,000 times).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the opening sequence performed by the symbol display unit 341 when a minor win occurs is switched from a first notification mode, a profit-indicating opening sequence, to a second notification mode, a loss-indicating opening sequence, before and after the break-even point. However, in addition to or instead of the symbol display unit 341, the profit or loss of generating a major win based on the minor win may be announced by other presentation means, such as a speaker 26, an illuminated unit 27, or a movable mechanism member 39 (see Figure 4). Specifically, in the opening sequence of a minor win, it is conceivable that the speaker 26 could output a voice message such as "You should shoot to the right" as a profit notification (first notification mode), while simultaneously outputting a voice message such as "You shouldn't shoot to the right" as a loss notification (second notification mode). Furthermore, in the opening sequence of a minor win game, it is conceivable to perform a win notification (first notification mode) by, for example, illuminating the illuminated section 27 in blue, while performing a loss notification (second notification mode) by illuminating the illuminated section 27 in red, etc. Additionally, in the opening sequence of a minor win game, it is conceivable to set two types of movement modes for the movable mechanism member 39, with one of these movement modes being used for win notification (first notification mode) and the other for loss notification (second notification mode). As for the two movement modes for notifying the gain or loss of generating a jackpot game using the movable mechanism member 39, for example, when the movable mechanism member 39 is moved while overlapping with the display surface of the symbol display section 341, it is conceivable to set two types of movement distances (stroke, amplitude) and movement speeds for reciprocating movements such as vertical movement.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a minor win occurs during an intermediate period (for example, between 100 and 140 remaining ceiling activations) that includes the break-even point between a predetermined timing (for example, when the remaining ceiling activation count is 140, 20 times before the break-even point) and a specific timing (for example, when the remaining ceiling activation count is 100, 20 times after the break-even point), the symbol display unit 341 displays a border notification of the third notification type as an opening effect for the minor win. However, such a border notification may also be executed in a special symbol game performed during the intermediate period. For example, as shown in Figure 361, in a special symbol game performed during the intermediate period, it is conceivable to display text images as text overlays in an area that does not obstruct the visibility of the special symbol game effects, including the display of changing decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341.

Here, if a minor win occurs during an intermediate period including the break-even point between a predetermined timing and a specific timing, and a border notification of the third notification mode is given at the opening of the minor win, the period during which the border notification is given is limited to the opening when a minor win occurs. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the time available to decide whether or not to trigger a major win, that is, whether or not to shoot to the right to get the game ball into the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83, is short. As a result, while the player is considering whether or not to shoot to the right, the period during which it is possible to get the game ball into the V-entry slot 833 of the wing mechanism 83 may have passed, and it may not be possible to trigger a major win. In particular, for players with limited knowledge of the gaming machine 10, even if a border notification of the third notification type is given at the start of a minor win game, they may not understand its meaning, or it may take them a long time to understand it. Therefore, it becomes easier for them to fail to trigger a major win game based on a minor win game where a border notification of the third notification type was given at the start. Conversely, the start of a minor win game may cause players to unconditionally play to the right, resulting in a major win game against their will.

In contrast, the probability of a minor win occurring is low (approximately 1/318.1 in this embodiment (see Figure 341(A))), and the number of times special feature games can be executed during the intermediate period is relatively high (40 times in this embodiment (see Figure 360(A))). Therefore, by providing border notification during special feature games executed in the intermediate period including the break-even point between a predetermined timing and a specific timing, border notification can be provided over a long period of time. This makes it possible to pre-determine whether to generate a major win game if a minor win occurs, provided that border notification is provided during the special feature game. As a result, it is prevented from either failing to generate a major win game against the player's wishes, or conversely, generating a major win game against the player's wishes, allowing the player to enjoy the desired profit.

While there are no specific restrictions on the timing of the border notification during special feature games, it is preferable to set it to coincide with the high-speed variation effect, where decorative symbols are displayed rapidly. By setting the border notification timing during the high-speed variation effect, even if a reach effect occurs later, the border notification will not interfere with the visual confirmation or audible output of that reach effect.

Furthermore, the border notification (third notification mode) in the special game played during the intermediate period including the break-even point between a predetermined timing and a specific timing may be performed by other performance means, such as a speaker 26, an illuminated section 27, or a movable mechanism member 39 (see Figure 4), in addition to or instead of the symbol display section 341. Specifically, in the special game played during the intermediate period, it is conceivable that the speaker 26 could output an ambiguous voice message such as "Loss, gain, loss, gain, loss, gain..." as a border notification (third notification mode). Also, in the special game played during the intermediate period, it is conceivable that the illuminated section 27 could be made to flash in a specific manner, such as high-speed flashing, low-speed flashing, or flashing at irregular intervals, to create an effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, in the special game played during the aforementioned intermediate period, it is conceivable to move the movable mechanism member 39 in a specific manner, overlapping it with the display surface of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the movable mechanism member 39 could be used to perform effects that would cause the player to feel uneasy, such as high-speed micro-vibrations, low-speed micro-vibrations, or micro-vibrations at irregular intervals.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is the result of a predetermined judgment, is a minor win, the fact that it is a minor win is announced by the first notification mode, which is a profit-indicating opening performance, until the break-even point, which is a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter, which is specific information, becomes 0, is reached. After the break-even point, which is a specific timing, the fact that it is a minor win is announced by the second notification mode, which is a loss-indicating opening performance. In other words, in this embodiment, the profit or loss of the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at the stage in which the minor win game occurs is announced in a notification mode corresponding to the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at that stage in the opening of the minor win game. Therefore, when a minor win game occurs, the player can grasp the profit or loss of the profit that the player can obtain at that stage by paying attention to the opening performance of the minor win game, and the player can decide whether or not to generate a jackpot game based on the notification mode in the opening performance of the minor win game. As a result, it becomes possible to choose not to generate a jackpot when the expected value of the profit obtained by not generating a jackpot based on the minor win is higher, and to choose to generate a jackpot when the expected value of the profit obtained by generating a jackpot based on the minor win is higher. This allows players to avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the b-time-saving game state (a state where players are close to reaching the ceiling limit) due to a jackpot occurring just before reaching that state, thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the notification mode of the opening sequence of the minor win game is switched after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing advantageous to the player, even if a minor win game occurs during a period near the break-even point where profit and loss judgment is difficult, it becomes possible to make a more reliable decision advantageous to the player based on the notification mode of the opening sequence of the minor win game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to fourteenth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Summary of the Invention]
The following is an overview of the inventions extracted from each of the embodiments described above. For convenience, reference numerals and other symbols may be used to explain the correspondence between each annotation and each embodiment; however, the invention related to such annotation is not limited to the specific configuration indicated by the reference numeral. Furthermore, it is possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions described below as desired.

[Note A1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific condition is met in the particular first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, a specific performance image is continuously displayed during a specific first notification game that is executed after the completion of a predetermined second notification game that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize pocket in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is met during the specific first notification game, the specific performance image can be switched to a predetermined performance image. In this way, by continuously displaying a specific performance image during a specific first notification game that is executed after the completion of a predetermined second notification game that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize pocket in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is met during the specific first notification game, it becomes possible to choose whether to continue displaying the specific performance image or switch to displaying a predetermined performance image based on whether or not a specific condition is met. For example, if no problems arise from continuously executing a specific animation image, that image will be executed continuously. If problems arise from continuously executing that image, a predetermined animation image will be switched and executed. As a result, problems caused by continuously executing a specific animation image are prevented.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, it becomes possible to select whether to continue displaying a specific animation image or switch to a predetermined animation image based on whether a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game in the first judgment state. This reduces the possibility that the player might feel uncomfortable when the specific animation image is resumed after it has finished, or conversely, when the specific animation image is not resumed, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the player feeling uncomfortable with the animation during gameplay.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, if a specific condition is not met during a particular first notification game in the first judgment state, a specific visual effect image is continuously displayed. This allows the specific visual effect image displayed during the first notification game to be usefully utilized during the second notification game as well.

[Appendix A2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A2, the specific condition includes the absence of any rewards for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any rewards for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no rewards for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward will be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note A3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special picture game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A3, the game ball enters the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game when a specific visual image is displayed. By defining the game ball entering the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game when a specific visual image is displayed, it prevents the specific visual image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no reward to be given to the player. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward will be given upon display during the notification game.

[Note A4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A4, the first notification game, in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means, includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite the display in the notification game clearly indicating that a benefit will be granted, the player does not receive that benefit.

[Note A5]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendix A2 to Appendix A4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the gaming machines related to Appendix A5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be performed.

[Note A6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A5, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A6, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note A7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to A6, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A7, the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of these images. Furthermore, when these images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A7, characterized in that the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image in the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A8, if a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific performance image in a predetermined second notification game may be switched to a predetermined performance image. In this way, by switching the specific performance image in a predetermined second notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the predetermined second notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific performance image resulting from the fulfillment of a specific condition in the particular first notification game. Furthermore, even if problems occur in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the occurrence of such problems is avoided before the execution of the first notification game.

[Note A9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed after the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined conditions are met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A9, the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met. Because the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met, the occurrence of the problem is immediately avoided once it is detected that a problem would arise from continuously executing a specific animation image.

[Note A10]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A9, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) of a specific number of times in which the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A10, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game allows the specific performance image to be displayed consecutively for the maximum possible time. This maximizes the player's expectation of seeing the specific performance image consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game when the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A11]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A7, characterized in that in a predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A11, when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific animation image in a predetermined first notification game can be switched to a predetermined animation image. In this way, by switching the specific animation image in a predetermined first notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the first notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific animation image upon the fulfillment of the specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image. This ensures that the number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed consecutively is increased, even if continuous execution of the specific performance image would cause problems. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed consecutively, players can fully enjoy the specific performance image, even if continuous execution of the specific performance image would cause problems due to the fulfillment of certain conditions.

[Note A12]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A11, characterized in that the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) is the first notification game (first special symbol game) of the specific number of times the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A12, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during that first notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during that first notification game allows the specific performance image to be displayed consecutively for the maximum possible time. This maximizes the player's expectation of seeing the specific performance image consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game when the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A13]
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A12, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image have the same or substantially the same expected value.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A13, the expectation level of transitioning to a special game state is set to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image. By setting the expectation level of transitioning to a special game state to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means switches from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image is maintained without decreasing. Therefore, a decrease in the player's interest due to the image switch is prevented, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game is prevented.

[Note A14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Note A15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A14, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix A14 and Appendix A15, the difference in expected value between a specific presentation image and a predetermined presentation image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. By setting the difference in expected value between the specific presentation image and the predetermined presentation image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained. Therefore, a decrease in player interest due to the switching of the predetermined image is more effectively prevented, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is more effectively prevented.

[Note A16]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A13 to A15, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A16, the probability of a specific animation image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined animation image being displayed. Thus, by setting the probability of a specific animation image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state higher than the probability of a predetermined animation image being displayed, the occurrence of problems is appropriately avoided when a specific animation image, which has a high probability of causing problems if executed continuously, is displayed consecutively.

[Note A17]
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A12, characterized in that the predetermined performance image is set to have a higher expectation level than the specific performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A17, the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch. Thus, because the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch, when the predetermined image is switched from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image, the expectation suggested to the player by the switch is enhanced. As a result, when a specific presentation image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the switch to the predetermined presentation image occurs, the player can enjoy the game while having a strong expectation that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will lead to a transition to a special game state. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image.

[Note A18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Note A19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A18, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix A18 and Appendix A19, the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. By setting the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when the specific presentation image is displayed, players can enjoy the game with a greater expectation that the game will switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the game switches to the predetermined presentation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will transition to a special game state, allowing players to enjoy the game with great anticipation. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the predetermined image switching from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image.

[Note A20]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A17 to A19, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A20, the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed. Thus, because the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed, the frequency of the specific performance image being displayed increases. This increases the opportunities for players to anticipate the specific performance image being switched to the predetermined performance image, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by setting a lower probability of the predetermined performance image being selected after the switch, the frequency of the predetermined performance image being displayed decreases, further increasing the player's enjoyment when the predetermined performance image is displayed, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A20, characterized in that when the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) is switched to the predetermined performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance), the display means (341) displays a specific information image different from the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image that explicitly indicates or suggests specific information in a notification game performed between the notification game before the switch and the notification game after the switch.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A21, a specific information image that explicitly or suggestively displays specific information is displayed during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change. In this way, by displaying a specific information image that explicitly or suggestively displays specific information during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change, the continuity between the display of the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image is interrupted, rather than the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image being displayed consecutively in multiple notification games. This creates the illusion for the player that the predetermined performance image was displayed independently of the specific performance image after its display ended, rather than the player being switched from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image. Therefore, it is possible to disguise the fact that no switch occurred between the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image. Thus, the inconvenience caused by the continuous display of the specific performance image can be avoided without the player noticing.

Furthermore, if a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image to avoid inconveniences arising from the continuous execution of that specific animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, there is a concern that players may realize that when a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising the fact that a switch from the specific animation image to the predetermined animation image did not occur, it is possible to prevent players from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Note B1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, if a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific performance image in a predetermined second notification game may be switched to a predetermined performance image. In this way, by switching the specific performance image in a predetermined second notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the predetermined second notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific performance image resulting from the fulfillment of a specific condition in the particular first notification game. Furthermore, even if problems occur in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the occurrence of such problems is avoided before the execution of the first notification game.

[Note B2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed after the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B2, the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met. In this way, because the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met, the occurrence of the problem is immediately avoided once it is detected that a problem would arise from continuously executing a specific animation image.

[Note B3]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) of the specified number of times in which the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B3, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game allows for the maximum possible consecutive display of the specific performance image. This maximizes the player's expectation of the specific performance image being displayed consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the switch from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note B4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B3, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B4, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B4, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B5, the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of these images. Furthermore, when these images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific animation image can be switched to a predetermined animation image in a predetermined first notification game. In this way, by switching the specific animation image to a predetermined animation image in a predetermined first notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the first notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific animation image upon the fulfillment of the specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image. This ensures that, if continuously executing the specific performance image would cause problems, a greater number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed are secured. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed continuously, even if continuous execution of the specific performance image would cause problems due to the fulfillment of certain conditions, the player can enjoy the specific performance image to the fullest.

[Note C2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) is the first notification game (first special symbol game) of the specific number of times the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C2, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during the first notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during the first notification game allows the specific performance image to be displayed consecutively for the maximum possible time. This maximizes the player's expectation of seeing the specific performance image consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game when the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C3]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C3, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note C4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1 to C3, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C4, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the specific and predetermined performance images. Furthermore, when the specific and predetermined performance images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the aforementioned specific presentation image and the aforementioned predetermined presentation image are set to have the same or substantially the same expected value.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, the expected probability of transitioning to a special game state is set to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image. By setting the expected probability of transitioning to a special game state to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image is maintained without decreasing. Therefore, a decrease in the player's interest due to the image switch is prevented, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game is prevented.

[Note D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Note D3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix D2 and Appendix D3, the difference in expected value between a specific presentation image and a predetermined presentation image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. By setting the difference in expected value between the specific presentation image and the predetermined presentation image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained. Therefore, a decrease in player interest due to the switching of the predetermined image is more effectively prevented, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is more effectively prevented.

[Note D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D3, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D4, the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed. Thus, by setting the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed, the occurrence of problems is appropriately avoided when a specific performance image, which has a high probability of causing problems if executed continuously, is displayed consecutively.

[Note D5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D5, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note E1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special game executed for the holding of the first special game after the end of the second special game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined performance image is set to have a higher expectation level than the specific performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch. Thus, because the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch, when the predetermined image is switched from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image, the expectation suggested to the player by the switch is enhanced. As a result, when a specific presentation image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the switch to the predetermined presentation image occurs, the player can enjoy the game while having a strong expectation that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will lead to a transition to a special game state. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Note E3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E2, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix E2 and Appendix E3, the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. By setting the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when the specific presentation image is displayed, players can enjoy the game with a greater expectation that the game will switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the game switches to the predetermined presentation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will transition to a special game state, allowing players to enjoy the game with great anticipation. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the predetermined image switching from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image.

[Note E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E1 to E3, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E4, the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed. Thus, because the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed, the frequency of the specific performance image being displayed increases. This increases the opportunities for players to anticipate the specific performance image being switched to the predetermined performance image, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by setting a lower probability of the predetermined performance image being selected after the switch, the frequency of the predetermined performance image being displayed decreases, further increasing the player's enjoyment when the predetermined performance image is displayed, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note E5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E1 to E4, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E5, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note F1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the aforementioned specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) is switched to the aforementioned predetermined performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance), the display means (341) displays a specific information image different from the aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image, which explicitly indicates or suggests specific information, in a notification game performed between the notification game before the switch and the notification game after the switch.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F1, a specific information image that explicitly or suggestively displays specific information is displayed during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change. In this way, by displaying a specific information image that explicitly or suggestively displays specific information during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image are not displayed consecutively in multiple notification games. Instead, the continuity between the display of the specific performance image and the display of the predetermined performance image is interrupted. This creates the illusion for the player that the predetermined performance image was displayed independently of the specific performance image after its display ended, rather than that a switch occurred from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image. Therefore, it is possible to disguise the fact that no switch occurred from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image. Thus, the inconvenience caused by the continuous display of the specific performance image can be avoided without the player noticing.

Furthermore, if a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image to avoid inconveniences arising from the continuous execution of that specific animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, there is a concern that players may realize that when a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising the fact that a switch from the specific animation image to the predetermined animation image did not occur, it is possible to prevent players from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Note F2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In gaming machines related to Appendix F2, the specific condition includes the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no benefits for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note F3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F3, this refers to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed. In this way, by referring to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed, it is prevented that the specific visual effect image will be displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where the player is not granted a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display during the notification game.

[Note F4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F4, the first notification game, in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means, includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite the display in the notification game clearly indicating that a benefit will be granted, the player does not receive that benefit.

[Note F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F2 to Appendix F4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the gaming machine related to Note F5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be executed.

[Note F6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1 to Appendix F5, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F6, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to F6, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F7, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the specific and predetermined performance images. Furthermore, when the specific and predetermined performance images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G1, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Appendix G2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In gaming machines related to Appendix G2, the specific condition includes the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no benefits for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit would be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note G3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix G2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G3, this refers to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed. In this way, by requiring the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed, it is prevented that the specific visual effect image will be displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display in the notification game, the player does not receive the benefit.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G4, the first notification game in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where the player is not granted a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display in the notification game.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendix G2 to Appendix G4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the case of gaming machines related to Appendix G5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be executed.

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix G1 to Appendix G5, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G6, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. In this way, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the specific and predetermined performance images. Furthermore, when the specific and predetermined performance images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note H1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of these images. Furthermore, when these images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note H2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In gaming machines related to Appendix H2, the specific condition includes the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no benefits for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit would be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note H3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special picture game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H3, this refers to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed. By defining this as the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed, it prevents the specific visual effect image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite it being clearly stated that a benefit is granted through the display in the notification game, the player does not receive that benefit.

[Note H4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H4, the first notification game in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where the player is not granted a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display in the notification game.

[Note H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H2 to Appendix H4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the gaming machines related to Appendix H5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be executed.

[Note H6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H5, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H6, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note I1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when a specific visual effect image is displayed during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information when a specific visual effect image is displayed during the second notification game, players can understand that predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This prevents players from forgetting that predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and allows them to know in advance that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable when the display of predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.
[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information without changing it when the predetermined suggestion information is to be displayed continuously.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I2, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed without change. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I2, wherein the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the manner in which it was displayed in the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I3, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game. This allows the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game, thereby preventing a further decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the predetermined suggestion information in a different manner than the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I4, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. In this way, by displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a different manner in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. Furthermore, this understanding can be conveyed to the player without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes displayed during the second notification game.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1 to Appendix I4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information without changing the display position of the predetermined suggestion information when displaying the predetermined suggestion information continuously.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I5, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged. This continuous display of the predetermined suggestive information allows players to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents players from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows them to anticipate that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a captured image 78) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, as described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I5.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I6, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations displayed during the second notification game.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I6, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbols in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I7, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Appendix I8]
The system includes a first holding means (41) that can hold up to a first upper limit (for example, 4) the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314),
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it continues to display the predetermined suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game) is reserved by the first retention means (41), as described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I7.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I8, if the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, the prescribed suggestion information is continuously displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the prescribed suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, it is prevented that the prescribed suggestion information will not be displayed for the first notification game if the right to execute the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being executed in a specific game state. This prevents the prescribed suggestion information from being displayed for the first notification game more times than the number of consecutive instances of the prescribed suggestion information that was set before transitioning to the specific game state, after the end of the specific game state. As a result, when a player is granted a reward for displaying a specific suggestive information consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times, the system prevents the specific suggestive information from being displayed consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times even when there is no reward to be granted to the player. Therefore, it prevents situations where a player is not granted a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward will be granted upon display during the notification game.

[Note I9]
A permissible frequency control means that switches between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a first frequency, and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a second frequency that is higher than the first frequency,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I8, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Note I10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Note I11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9 or Appendix I10, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix I9 to Appendix I11, a specific game state is generated in at least one of the following states: a first frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low, and a second frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. In the first frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is low, and the specific game state occurs as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is high, and the specific game state occurs as a non-special state. Thus, the frequency of occurrence of specific game states differs between the first and second frequency states, and their positioning also differs. Therefore, different gameplay characteristics are provided depending on whether the specific game state occurs in the first frequency state (where the second prize entry point is less likely to be in an acceptable state) or in the second frequency state (where the second prize entry point is more likely to be in an acceptable state). This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I12]
The first display means (341) on which the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51),
A second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by the suggestive information continuation display means (51),
A gaming machine as described in any one of Appendix I1 to I11, characterized by comprising the above.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I12, the first display means, which displays a specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays predetermined suggestive information, are different. Because the first display means, which displays the specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays the predetermined suggestive information, are different, the predetermined suggestive information can be displayed in the second display means without obstructing the display of the specific performance image in the first display means. This ensures that both the specific performance image and the predetermined suggestive information are displayed reliably and appropriately without obstructing each other's visibility.

[Note I13]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I12, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed on the display means (341) as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I13, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note I14]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I13, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I14, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I15]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I14, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I15, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I16]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front or back side of the fluctuating symbols, as described in any of the appendices I1 to I15.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I16, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Appendix I17]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I16, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I17, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I18]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I17, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I18, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, the player can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows the player to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I19]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I18, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I19, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note J1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, when the predetermined suggestion information is to be displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed continuously without changing it.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J1, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed without change. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents players from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows them to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, it is less likely that players will feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note J2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information (displayed as a captured image 78) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations displayed during the second notification game.

[Note J3]
The game machine according to Appendix J1 or Appendix J2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a capture image 78) at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note J4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine according to Appendix J1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the fluctuating symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J4, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note J5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J4, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J1 to Appendix J5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note K1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The suggestive information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the manner in which it was displayed in the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K1, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game. This allows the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game, thereby preventing a further decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note K2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information (displayed as a captured image 78) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations performed during the second notification game.

[Note K3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a capture image 78) at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note K4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the fluctuating symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K4, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed either in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note K5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices K1 to K4, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix K5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices K1 to K5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix K6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note L1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The suggested information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, when the predetermined suggested information is to be displayed continuously, the display position of the predetermined suggested information is not changed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L1, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents players from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows them to anticipate that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, it is less likely that players will feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note L2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the fluctuating symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note L3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L1 or Appendix L2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L3, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note L4]
The game machine according to any one of Appendix L1 to L3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L4, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note L5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices L1 to L4.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix L5, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note L6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L6, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note L7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note L8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix L1 to L7, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note M1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a captured image 78) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix M1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations displayed during the second notification game.

[Note M2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note M3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1 or Appendix M2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M3, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. Furthermore, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, it is prevented that the player will feel uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note M4]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M4, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note M5]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M5, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note M6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M6, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note M8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M7, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note N1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A first holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), up to a first upper limit number (for example, 4),
A second holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening (315), up to a second upper limit number (for example, 4),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second notification game can be continuously generated for a specified number of times equal to or greater than the second upper limit, based on the second prize entry opening (315) being in the predetermined permissible state (long open).
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it continues to display the predetermined suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game) is reserved by the first retention means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N1, if the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, it is prevented that the predetermined suggestive information will not be displayed for the first notification game if the right to execute the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being executed in a specific game state. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game more times than the number of consecutive instances of predetermined suggestive information set before transitioning to the specific game state, after the end of the specific game state. As a result, when a player is granted a reward for displaying a specific suggestive information consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times, the system prevents the specific suggestive information from being displayed consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times even when there is no reward to be granted to the player. Therefore, it prevents situations where a player is not granted a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward will be granted upon display during the notification game.

[Note N2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note N3]
The game machine according to Appendix N1 or Appendix N2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N3, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note N4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note N7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note O1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
A permissible frequency control means that switches between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a first frequency, and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a second frequency that is higher than the first frequency,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Note O2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O1, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Note 03]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O1 or Appendix O2, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix O1 to Appendix O3, a specific game state is generated in at least one of the following states: a first frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low, and a second frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. In the first frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is low, and the specific game state occurs as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is high, and the specific game state occurs as a non-special state. Thus, the frequency of occurrence of specific game states differs between the first and second frequency states, and their positioning also differs. Therefore, different gameplay characteristics are provided depending on whether the specific game state occurs in the first frequency state (where the second prize entry point is less likely to be in an acceptable state) or in the second frequency state (where the second prize entry point is more likely to be in an acceptable state). This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note 04]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices O1 to O3.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O4, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note 05]
The game machine according to any one of Appendix O1 to Appendix O4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O5, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note 06]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices O1 to O5.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O6, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note 07]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices O1 to O6, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O7, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note 08]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices O1 to O7, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O8, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note 09]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix O1 to Appendix O8, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O9, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix P1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
The first display means (341) on which the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51),
A second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by the suggestive information continuation display means (51),
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P1, the first display means, which displays a specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays predetermined suggestive information, are different. Because the first display means, which displays the specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays the predetermined suggestive information, are different, the predetermined suggestive information can be displayed in the second display means without obstructing the display of the specific performance image in the first display means. This ensures that both the specific performance image and the predetermined suggestive information are displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

[Appendix P2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix P1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix P3]
The game machine according to Appendix P1 or Appendix P2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P3, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P4]
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices P1 to P3.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices P1 to P4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices P1 to P5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note P7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices P1 to P6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note Q1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q1, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. In this way, by displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a different manner in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. Furthermore, this understanding can be conveyed to the player without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes displayed during the second notification game.

[Note Q2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix Q1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note Q3]
The game machine according to Appendix Q1 or Appendix Q2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q3, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note Q4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note Q5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix Q1 to Q4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note Q6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note Q7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note R1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front or back side of the fluctuating symbols.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note R2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix R1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note R3]
The game machine according to Appendix R1 or Appendix R2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R3, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note R4]
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices R1 to R3.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note R5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices R1 to R4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix R5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note R6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices R1 to R5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix R6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note R7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices R1 to R6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix R7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note S1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image that includes an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S1, the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is notified by stopping the displayed symbols, and predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped, so that the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows the player to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note S2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix S1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note S3]
The game machine according to Appendix S1 or Appendix S2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S3, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note S4]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices S1 to S3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note S5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices S1 to S4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices S1 to S5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note T1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 78),
Equipped with,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix T1, the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected degree that the transition determination result by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. This allows players to enjoy the game while anticipating the display of predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note T2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix T1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note T3]
The game machine according to Appendix T1 or Appendix T2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T3, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices T1 to T3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note T5]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices T1 to T4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a character image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T5, a text image corresponding to the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a text image corresponding to the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. Furthermore, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, it is prevented that the player will feel uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices T1 to T5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix T6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they can anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note A1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is characterized in that, at the stage when a predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the predetermined state ends, among the execution periods that can be executed based on a predetermined specific value, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, if a second trigger different from the first trigger occurs in a predetermined state executed upon the occurrence of the first trigger, and a specific state is established, the second state, which offers higher profits than the first state, is executed. Conversely, if the specific state is not established, the first state is executed. Thus, in a predetermined state executed upon the occurrence of the first trigger, if a second trigger different from the first trigger occurs, and a specific state is established, the second state, which offers higher profits than the first state, is executed. Conversely, if the specific state is not established, the first state is executed. This provides a novel gameplay feature in which the execution of the higher-profit second state is conditional on the execution of the predetermined state due to the occurrence of the first trigger, the occurrence of the second trigger in the predetermined state, and furthermore, if the second trigger occurs, the establishment of a specific state. This enhances the enjoyment of the game, as players can enjoy the game's progression while anticipating the occurrence of the first trigger, then enjoy the game's progression while paying attention to whether or not the second trigger occurs in a predetermined state after the first trigger occurs, and further enjoy the game's progression while paying attention to whether or not specific conditions are met if the second trigger occurs.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, an execution period is set that can be executed based on a predetermined specific value determined when the second trigger is established. In this way, by setting an execution period that can be executed based on a predetermined specific value determined when the second trigger is established, the duration of the second state is set as a value dependent on the predetermined specific value. Therefore, players can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the predetermined specific value when the second trigger is established, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, the specific state is a state in which the period that can be executed after the end of the specified state, based on a predetermined specific value at the stage when a predetermined second trigger is established, is longer than a predetermined amount. In this way, because the specific state is defined as a state in which the period that can be executed after the end of the specified state, based on a predetermined specific value at the stage when a predetermined second trigger is established, the stage at which the specific state can be established and the criteria for success or failure of the specific state are clarified, making it easier to grasp the stage at which the specific state can be established and whether or not the specific state is successful. As a result, players can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note B1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, which can be executed after the predetermined state ends, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the second trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurring in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state) is the same throughout the entire predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, the probability of the second trigger occurring in a predetermined state is the same throughout the entire predetermined period. Because the probability of the second trigger occurring in a predetermined state is the same throughout the entire predetermined period, the timing of the second trigger occurring within that period becomes random, meaning the second trigger can occur throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state. Therefore, since the second trigger can be expected to occur throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state, players do not suffer the disadvantage of the second trigger not occurring during a portion of the predetermined period in the predetermined state, and can enjoy the game's progression throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state.

[Note B2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that when the second trigger occurs (the time-saving symbol fails to stop) during the predetermined period of the predetermined state (second time-saving game state), the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining number of time-saving rounds), the more likely the specific state is to occur.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B2, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific conditions to be met. Thus, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific conditions to be met. Therefore, as the remaining time in the predetermined state shortens (as the end of the predetermined period approaches), the probability of the specific conditions being met increases, and the expectation of the second state being executed increases, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note B3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving symbol fails to stop) in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is met, the amount of profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving game state) differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining number of time-saving games).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B3, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state and specific conditions are met, the amount of profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining time in the predetermined state. Thus, because the amount of profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining time in the predetermined state when a second trigger is established and specific conditions are met, players can enjoy the game by paying attention to the timing of when the second trigger is established within the predetermined period of the predetermined state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note B4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3, characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving symbol fails to stop) in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is met, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining number of time-saving rounds), the greater the profit (number of time-saving rounds) in the second state (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B4, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state and specific conditions are met, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. Thus, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state and specific conditions are met, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. This provides a gameplay feature where, as the remaining time in the predetermined state shortens (as the end of the predetermined period approaches), players are more likely to receive higher profits in the second state. This enhances the enjoyment of the game, as players can enjoy the game while simultaneously feeling anxiety about the approaching end of the predetermined period, while also anticipating the high profits they will receive in the second state due to the establishment of a second trigger as the predetermined period nears its end.

[Note C1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, which can be executed after the predetermined state ends, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is set to be longer than the execution period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, the predetermined period is set to be longer than the execution period. Because the predetermined period is set to be longer than the execution period, in the predetermined state, when the second trigger is established, situations may occur where a specific state is established or where the specific state is not established. Therefore, whether or not a specific state is established in the predetermined state depends on the timing of the establishment of the second trigger during the predetermined period from the start to the end of the predetermined state, thus adding a gameplay element. This allows players to enjoy the game by anticipating the establishment of the second trigger in the predetermined state and paying attention to the timing of its establishment, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C2]
Multiple types of specific values are set, including the predetermined specific values.
The aforementioned execution period is set in multiple types corresponding to the aforementioned specific value,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that the specific value determination means sets a predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C2, when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set from multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value derived from multiple specific values. Because the execution period is set from multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value derived from multiple specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period will differ depending on the type of predetermined specific value. Therefore, the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of predetermined characteristic value. This makes it difficult to determine the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value when the second trigger is established. Consequently, players can enjoy the game by paying attention to the type of predetermined characteristic value when the second trigger is established and anticipating the establishment of the specific state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, characterized in that the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods that offer different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C3, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods in which the benefits when the second state is achieved differ. Thus, by including two or more execution periods in which the benefits when the second state is achieved differ, the benefits when the second state is achieved are set according to the execution period. Therefore, players can understand the level of benefit when the second state is achieved by focusing on the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is established. This increases attention to and interest in the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is established, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C3, characterized in that the probability of the specific state being established is higher the greater the benefit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41) during the two or more execution periods.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C4, the probability of a specific state occurring increases as the benefit of executing the second state increases for two or more execution periods. Thus, because the probability of a specific state occurring increases as the benefit of executing the second state increases for two or more execution periods, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that an execution period with a high benefit of executing the second state will be set, and they can also enjoy the game while anticipating that a specific state will occur when an execution period with a high benefit is set, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that the execution period is of one type.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C5, there is only one execution period. Because there is only one execution period, the execution period for when the second trigger occurs is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to determine whether a specific state is achieved based on the timing of when the second trigger occurs in a given state. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while paying attention to the timing of when the second trigger occurs in a given state and anticipating the achievement of the specific state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, which can be executed after the predetermined state ends, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
A specific timing determination means (41) that determines whether or not the predetermined state is performed at a specific timing within the predetermined period,
An effect execution means (51) that performs a predetermined effect in the predetermined state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned performance execution means (51)
A means for executing the first performance as the predetermined performance from the time the execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41) until the specific timing is determined to be reached by the specific timing determination means (41),
After the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing has occurred, means for executing a second performance different from the first performance as the predetermined performance during the predetermined period,
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, the first performance is executed from the start of the predetermined state until a specific timing within a predetermined period, and then a second performance, different from the first performance, is executed after that specific timing. In this way, by executing the first performance from the start of the predetermined state until a specific timing within a predetermined period, and then executing a second performance, different from the first performance, during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, the player can avoid feeling bored or losing interest in the game, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that, during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is performed, the benefit state granted to the player differs before the specific timing and after the specific timing.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D2, the benefit status granted to the player differs before and after a specific timing during a predetermined period in which a predetermined state is executed. Furthermore, during the predetermined period, the first animation is executed until the specific timing, and after that timing, a second animation, different from the first animation, is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize the arrival of the specific timing when the predetermined animation switches from the first to the second animation. In other words, the player can recognize that the benefit status granted has changed due to the switch from the first to the second animation. This allows the player to enjoy the game by paying attention to the switch from the first to the second animation and the change in the benefit status during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, characterized in that, during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is performed, the profit state is higher after the specific timing than before the specific timing.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D3, the profitable state is higher after a specific timing compared to before a specific timing during a predetermined period in which a predetermined state is executed. That is, when switching from the first to the second performance during the predetermined period, the profitable state is higher when the second performance is executed compared to when the first performance is executed. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while anticipating a switch to the second performance, which is executed when the profitable state is higher than when the first performance is executed, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D3, characterized in that the specified timing is the timing at which the specified state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D4, the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state. Thus, because the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established, the player can understand, based on the type of predetermined performance, that if the first performance is executed within a predetermined period, it is the first state, and if the second performance is executed within a predetermined period, it is the second state, which offers higher benefits than the first state. In other words, the player can understand that they have transitioned from the first state to the more beneficial second state by switching from the first performance to the second performance within a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating a switch from the first performance to the second performance within a predetermined period, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note E1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is,
At the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value after the predetermined state ends is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that, from the time the execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41) until a predetermined timing, the predetermined second trigger does not occur even if it is established.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, the specific state will not be established from the start of the execution of the predetermined state until a predetermined timing, even if a predetermined second trigger is met. Thus, because the specific state will not be established from the start of the execution of the predetermined state until a predetermined timing, situations can arise in the predetermined state where the specific state is established when the second trigger is met, or where the specific state is not established. Therefore, whether or not the specific state is established in the predetermined state depends on the timing at which the second trigger is established during the predetermined period from the start to the end of the predetermined state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E2]
Multiple types of specific values are set, including the predetermined specific values.
The aforementioned execution period is set in multiple types corresponding to the aforementioned specific value,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that the specific value determination means sets a predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E2, when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set from multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from multiple specific values. Because the execution period is set from multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from multiple specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period will differ depending on the type of predetermined specific value. Therefore, the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of predetermined characteristic value. This makes it difficult to determine the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value when the second trigger is established. Consequently, players can enjoy the game by paying attention to the type of predetermined characteristic value when the second trigger is established and anticipating the establishment of the specific state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note E3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E2, characterized in that the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods that offer different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E3, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods in which the benefits when the second state is executed differ. Thus, by including two or more execution periods in which the benefits when the second state is executed differ, the benefits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, players can understand the level of benefit when the second state is executed by focusing on the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is established. This increases attention to and interest in the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is established, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E3, characterized in that the probability of the specific state being established is higher the greater the benefit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41) during the two or more execution periods.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E4, the probability of a specific state occurring increases as the benefit of executing the second state increases for two or more execution periods. Thus, because the probability of a specific state occurring increases as the benefit of executing the second state increases for two or more execution periods, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that an execution period with a high benefit of executing the second state will be set, and they can also enjoy the game while anticipating that a specific state will occur when an execution period with a high benefit is set, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note E5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that the execution period is of one type.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E5, there is only one execution period. Because there is only one execution period, the execution period for when the second trigger occurs is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to determine whether a specific state is achieved based on the timing of when the second trigger occurs in a given state. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while paying attention to the timing of when the second trigger occurs in a given state and anticipating the achievement of the specific state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note F1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is,
When the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value after the predetermined state ends is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state),
Multiple types of specific values are set, including the predetermined specific values.
The aforementioned execution period is set in multiple types corresponding to the aforementioned specific value,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific value determination means sets a predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is met.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F1, when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set from multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from multiple specific values. Because the execution period is set from multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from multiple specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period will differ depending on the type of predetermined specific value. Therefore, the success or failure of the specific state will depend on the type of predetermined characteristic value. This makes it difficult to determine the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value when the second trigger is established. Therefore, when the second trigger is established, players can enjoy the game by paying attention to the type of predetermined characteristic value and anticipating the establishment of the specific state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note F2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, characterized in that the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods that offer different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F2, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods in which the benefits when the second state is executed differ. Thus, by including two or more execution periods in which the benefits when the second state is executed differ, the benefits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, by focusing on the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is established, players can grasp the level of benefit when the second state is executed. This makes it possible to increase attention to and interest in the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is established, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Note F3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F2, characterized in that the probability of the specific state being established is higher the greater the benefit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41) during the two or more execution periods.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F3, the probability of a specific state occurring increases as the benefit of executing the second state increases for two or more execution periods. Thus, because the probability of a specific state occurring increases as the benefit of executing the second state increases for two or more execution periods, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that an execution period with a high benefit of executing the second state will be set, and they can enjoy the game while anticipating that a specific state will occur when an execution period with a high benefit is set, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, which can be executed after the predetermined state ends, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
The amusement machine is characterized in that the second trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbols do not stop) can occur throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G1, the second trigger can occur throughout the entire duration of the predetermined period in the predetermined state. Because the second trigger can occur throughout the entire duration of the predetermined period in the predetermined state, the timing of its occurrence within that period becomes random, allowing the second trigger to occur throughout the entire duration of the predetermined period in the predetermined state. Therefore, since the second trigger can be expected to occur throughout the entire duration of the predetermined period in the predetermined state, players do not suffer the disadvantage of the second trigger not occurring during a portion of the predetermined period in the predetermined state, and can enjoy the game's progression throughout the entire duration of the predetermined period in the predetermined state.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1, characterized in that when the second trigger occurs (the time-saving symbol fails to stop) during the predetermined period of the predetermined state (second time-saving game state), the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining number of time-saving rounds), the more likely the specific state is to occur.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G2, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific conditions to be met. Thus, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific conditions to be met. Therefore, as the remaining time in the predetermined state shortens (as the end of the predetermined period approaches), the probability of the specific conditions being met increases, and the expectation of the second state being executed increases, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving symbol fails to stop) in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is met, the amount of profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving game state) differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining number of time-saving games).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G3, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state and specific conditions are met, the amount of profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining time in the predetermined state. Thus, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state and specific conditions are met, the amount of profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining time in the predetermined state. This allows players to enjoy the game by paying attention to the timing of when the second trigger is established within the predetermined period of the predetermined state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G3, characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving symbol fails to stop) in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is met, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining number of time-saving rounds), the greater the profit (number of time-saving rounds) in the second state (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G4, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state and specific conditions are met, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. Thus, when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state and specific conditions are met, the shorter the remaining time in the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. This provides a gameplay feature where, as the remaining time in the predetermined state shortens (as the end of the predetermined period approaches), players are more likely to receive high profits in the second state. This enhances the enjoyment of the game, as players can enjoy the progression of the game while simultaneously feeling anxiety about the approaching end of the predetermined period, and anticipating the high profits they will receive in the second state when the second trigger is established as the predetermined period nears its end.

[Note H1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, after the predetermined state has ended, is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
The predetermined state execution means (41) is characterized in that it executes the predetermined state until the predetermined period expires, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved or not during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1, the predetermined state is maintained until the predetermined period expires, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved or not during the predetermined period. In this way, because the predetermined state is maintained until the predetermined period expires, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved or not during the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the benefits of the predetermined state for the entire duration of the predetermined period.

Furthermore, regardless of whether a specific state is achieved or not during a predetermined period, the predetermined state is executed until the predetermined period expires. This allows for a gameplay feature that notifies the player of the establishment of the specific state at the end of the predetermined period. In this case, the player can understand whether the specific state was achieved or not during the predetermined period at the end of the predetermined period. This enhances the enjoyment of the game, as the player can anticipate the establishment of the specific state during the predetermined period and eagerly await its end.

[Note H2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, characterized in that the state execution means (41) executes the second state after the predetermined period expires if a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H2, if a specific state is established when a second trigger is activated in a predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period expires. Thus, when a specific state is established when a second trigger is activated in a predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period expires. This allows the player to enjoy the benefits of the predetermined state throughout the entire predetermined period, and then again enjoy the benefits of the second state after the predetermined period expires.

[Note I1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, which can be executed after the predetermined state ends, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
A gaming machine characterized by having a resetting means that allows the profit in the second state (third time-saving game state) to be reset when the second trigger is established in the second state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I1, the benefits for the second state can be reset when the second trigger is established in the second state. By allowing the benefits for the second state to be reset when the second trigger is established in the second state, it prevents players from feeling uncomfortable when no benefits are granted upon the establishment of the second trigger in the second state, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I2]
In the second state (third time-saving game state), when the second trigger occurs, the system is provided with a profit determination means that determines a predetermined profit for the occurrence of the second trigger.
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that the resetting means resets the profit in the second state to the predetermined profit when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-saving game state), if the predetermined profit determined by the profit determination means is greater than the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I2, if a second trigger is established in the second state, and the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of that second trigger is greater than the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger was established, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. In this way, if a second trigger is established in the second state, and the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of that second trigger is greater than the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger was established, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. As a result, when the profit in the second state is reset due to the establishment of a second trigger, the profit in the second state is always increased. This allows players to enjoy the game while expecting the second trigger to be established in the second state, and when a second profit is established, they can enjoy the game while focusing on the profit resulting from the establishment of the second trigger, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state is greater than the profit at the time the second trigger occurs in the second state, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. This prevents a decrease in the profit in the second state when the profit is reset. As a result, the player is prevented from suffering a disadvantage due to the resetting of the profit in the second state, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I3]
The profit determination means determines the predetermined profit as the profit period of the second state (third time-saving game state),
The gaming machine according to Appendix I2, characterized in that the resetting means resets the remaining period of the second state to the profit period determined by the profit determination means when the profit period determined by the profit determination means is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I3, if the profit period for the second state, determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state, is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time the second trigger occurs, the remaining period of the second state is reset to the profit period. In this way, if the profit period for the second state, determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state, is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time the second trigger occurs, the remaining period of the second state is reset to the profit period. As a result, when the profit period in the second state is reset, the profit period will always be longer. This allows players to enjoy the game while expecting the second trigger to occur in the second state, and when the second profit is achieved, they can enjoy the game while focusing on the profit period resulting from the second trigger, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if the profit period for the second state, determined when a second trigger occurs in the second state, is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time the second trigger occurs, the remaining period of the second state is reset to the profit period. This prevents the profit period in the second state from being shortened when it is reset. This prevents players from suffering disadvantages due to the resetting of the profit period in the second state, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I4]
In the second state (third time-saving game state), when the second trigger occurs, the system is provided with a profit determination means that determines a predetermined profit for the occurrence of the second trigger.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I3, characterized in that the resetting means resets the predetermined profit determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-saving game state) as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I4, the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state is reset as the profit for the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger occurs. Thus, because the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state is reset as the profit for the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger occurs, the profit in the second state fluctuates depending on whether the second trigger occurs in the second state. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on the predetermined profit when the second trigger occurs and on the fluctuations in the profit in the second state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I5]
The profit determination means determines the predetermined profit as the profit period of the second state (third time-saving game state),
The gaming machine according to Appendix I4, characterized in that the resetting means resets the profit period determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger occurs in the second state (third time-saving game state) as the remaining period in the second state, regardless of the remaining period in the second state at the time the second trigger occurs.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I5, the profit period determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state is reset as the profit period in the second state, independently of the profit period in the second state at the time the second trigger occurs. Thus, the profit period in the second state is shortened or shortened depending on whether the second trigger occurs in the second state. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on the profit period when the second trigger occurs and by observing the length of the profit period in the second state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note J1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, which can be executed after the predetermined state ends, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
The device is equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (315) that allows game balls to enter when opened in a predetermined opening mode selected from multiple types of opening modes (short opening, long opening),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first state (second time-saving game state) and the second state (third time-saving game state) differ in the predetermined opening mode of the predetermined ball entry means (315).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J1, the opening mechanism of the predetermined ball entry means differs between the first and second states. This difference in the opening mechanism between the first and second states results in a gameplay feature where the opening mechanism differs depending on whether a specific condition is met when the second trigger is established; that is, the ease with which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means differs depending on whether that specific condition is met. As a result, the benefits in the first and second states are directly linked to the ease with which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means, i.e., the direct benefits to the player obtained from game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means (e.g., the number of jackpot draws, prize balls), thus increasing attention and interest in the game and enhancing its appeal.

[Note J2]
The aforementioned multiple types of opening modes include a first opening mode (short opening) and a second opening mode (long opening) that makes it easier for game balls to enter than the first opening mode.
In the first state (second time-saving game state), the predetermined ball entry means (315) is opened in the first opening mode,
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, characterized in that in the second state (third time-saving game state), the predetermined ball entry means (315) is opened in the second opening mode.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J2, it is easier for game balls to enter the designated ball entry mechanism in the second state than in the first state. Thus, because it is easier for game balls to enter the designated ball entry mechanism in the second state than in the first state, it is easier for game balls to enter the designated ball entry mechanism in the second state, which is executed when the specific conditions for the second trigger are met, and more difficult for game balls to enter the designated ball entry mechanism in the first state, which is executed when the specific conditions for the second trigger are not met. As a result, the second state offers a gameplay experience that makes it easier to enjoy the benefits obtained from game balls entering the designated ball entry mechanism compared to the first state, thus increasing attention and interest in the game and enhancing its enjoyment.

[Note K1]
Based on the establishment of the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot), a predetermined state execution means (41) is provided to execute a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit during a predetermined period,
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is disabled (a state in which the second time-saving game rounds are maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving game rounds is enabled (a third time-saving game rounds)) which is more advantageous than the first state,
Equipped with,
The state execution means (41) is,
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving game rounds) when a second trigger different from the first trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is that the time-saving symbol stops and fails) occurs in the predetermined state,
When the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, if a specific state is established, means for executing the second state,
If the second trigger is met but the specific state is not met, means to execute the first state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, which can be executed after the predetermined state ends, is predetermined or greater (a state in which the number of time-saving game rounds set for a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state being a failure to stop the time-saving symbols, is greater than the remaining number of time-saving rounds in the second time-saving game state).
It is equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (315) that allows game balls to enter when opened in a predetermined opening manner,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the first state (second time-saving game state) and the second state (third time-saving game state), a predetermined win/loss determination (jackpot lottery) is performed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means (315).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K1, a predetermined win/loss determination is performed when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry mechanism in the first and second states. In this way, by performing a predetermined win/loss determination based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry mechanism in the first and second states, the frequency (probability) of the predetermined win/loss determination and the probability of winning in the predetermined win/loss determination can be varied depending on whether or not specific conditions for the second trigger are met, i.e., between the first and second states. This enhances the game's appeal and increases its level of attention and interest.

[Note K2]
The game machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of the predetermined win/failure determination by the win/failure determination means (41) is a predetermined result (time-saving symbol not stopping).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K2, the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of a predetermined win/failure determination, triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means, is a predetermined result. Thus, because the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of a predetermined win/failure determination, triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means, is a predetermined result, the establishment of the second trigger and the benefits in the first and second states are determined by the predetermined ball entry means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, the success or failure of the second trigger can be determined using an existing ball entry means (e.g., the second prize entry point) where the win/failure determination is performed, and benefits in the first and second states can be granted. This allows for the addition of new means to the gaming machine, thereby providing a novel gameplay experience.

[Note A1]
A first game means (41) performs a first game round operation (first special game) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first prize winning slot 314),
A second game means (41) performs a second game round operation (second special game) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second prize winning slot 315),
Equipped with,
When a game operation is defined as the period from the fulfillment of the starting conditions to the termination of notification for a predetermined period regarding the game result of the fluctuation display at the end of the fluctuation, the first game means and the second game means are game machines in which the fluctuation display can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined display means,
The system includes a setting means for setting a predetermined time for displaying fluctuations (long fluctuations) when the first starting condition is met and a specific lottery result (failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurs during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The system is configured to be able to complete a predetermined number of the second game rounds within the predetermined time display period set by the setting means.
The predetermined game state ends when the second game operation is performed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times).
If the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state execution means (41) allows the predetermined game state to continue to be executed,
Means for assigning a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game round operation during the predetermined variable display time,
When a predetermined second game operation (a second special game that terminates the time-saving game state) performed during the predetermined time display period is completed, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed (41),
A means (41) that can assign a specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined second game operation is completed and the normal game state is returned, and the predetermined time for displaying the variation ends,
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, if the first game round operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends during a predetermined game state, the predetermined game state is maintained. If the first game round operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends after the predetermined second game round operation has finished and the game has entered a normal game state, a specific game value different from the predetermined game value that would be granted if the predetermined lottery result occurred is granted. Thus, the game is designed so that whether or not a specific game value is granted depends on the timing of the end of the first game round operation corresponding to a specific lottery result. This allows players to enjoy each second game round while expecting the second game round to end early, in a game machine where the fluctuation display for the first game round and the fluctuation display for the second game round can be executed simultaneously. Furthermore, players can enjoy the first game round by focusing on when the first game round corresponding to a specific lottery result will end, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note B1]
A first game means (41) performs a first game round operation (first special game) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first prize winning slot 314),
A second game means (41) performs a second game round operation (second special game) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second prize winning slot 315),
Equipped with,
When a game operation is defined as the period from the fulfillment of the starting conditions to the termination of notification for a predetermined period regarding the game result of the fluctuation display at the end of the fluctuation, the first game means and the second game means are game machines in which the fluctuation display can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined display means,
The system includes a setting means for setting a predetermined time for displaying fluctuations (long fluctuations) when the first starting condition is met and a specific lottery result (failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurs during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The system is configured to be able to complete a predetermined number of the second game rounds within the predetermined time display period set by the setting means.
The predetermined game state ends when the second game operation is performed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times).
If the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state execution means (41) allows the predetermined game state to continue to be executed,
Means for assigning a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game round operation during the predetermined variable display time,
When a predetermined second game operation (a second special game that terminates the time-saving game state) performed during the predetermined time display period is completed, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed (41),
A means (41) that can assign a specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined second game operation is completed and the normal game state is returned, and the predetermined time for displaying the variation ends,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the predetermined gaming state (a) time-saving gaming state, a plurality of specific variable display times are set for the second game round operation (second special symbol game) initiated by the second gaming means (41), and the longer the specific variable display time, the higher the expected value (expected value of a jackpot) of the predetermined lottery result (jackpot) that is awarded the predetermined gaming value (execution of a jackpot game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, multiple specific display times are set for the second game round operation in a predetermined game state. The longer the specific display time, the higher the expectation of achieving a predetermined lottery result that grants a predetermined game value. However, for the game to enter a normal game state where a predetermined game value can be granted upon completion of the predetermined second game round operation, a longer specific display time is disadvantageous. Conversely, the longer the specific display time, the higher the expectation of achieving a predetermined lottery result that grants a predetermined game value. Therefore, in situations where a long specific display time is disadvantageous to the player and could potentially decrease their interest in the game, increasing the expectation of achieving the predetermined game value prevents this decline in interest. Instead, players can enjoy the game's progression while anticipating the predetermined lottery result, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C1]
A first game means (41) performs a first game round operation (first special game) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first prize winning slot 314),
A second game means (41) performs a second game round operation (second special game) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second prize winning slot 315),
Equipped with,
When a game operation is defined as the period from the fulfillment of the starting conditions to the termination of notification for a predetermined period regarding the game result of the fluctuation display at the end of the fluctuation, the first game means and the second game means are game machines in which the fluctuation display can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined display means,
The system includes a setting means for setting a predetermined time for displaying fluctuations (long fluctuations) when the first starting condition is met and a specific lottery result (failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurs during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The system is configured to be able to complete a predetermined number of the second game rounds within the predetermined time display period set by the setting means.
The predetermined game state ends when the second game operation is performed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times).
If the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state execution means (41) allows the predetermined game state to continue to be executed,
Means for assigning a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game round operation during the predetermined variable display time,
When a predetermined second game operation (a second special game that terminates the time-saving game state) performed during the predetermined time display period is completed, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed (41),
A means (41) that can assign a specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined second game operation is completed and the normal game state is returned, and the predetermined time for displaying the variation ends,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that whether or not to assign the specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) as a result of the first game round operation (first special symbol game) is determined by referring to predetermined game state information (e.g., high probability mode, low probability mode) at the end of the first game round operation (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, whether or not to assign a specific game value as a result of the first game round is determined by referring to predetermined game state information at the end of the first game round. However, when a predetermined game state ends and the normal game state is executed upon the end of a predetermined number of second game rounds, there are cases where the first game round corresponding to a specific lottery result ends in the predetermined game state and cases where it ends in the normal game state. That is, there are cases where the game state at the start of the first game round and the game state at the end of the first game round are the same and cases where they are different. Therefore, by determining whether or not to assign a specific game value as a result of the first game round by referring to predetermined game state information at the end of the first game round, the decision of whether or not to assign a specific game value is made at a uniform timing, regardless of whether the game state at the start of the first game round and the game state at the end of the first game round are the same or different. This simplifies the decision-making process regarding whether or not to assign a specific game value as a result of the first game round, and also improves the reliability of this decision-making process.

[Note D1]
A first game means (41) performs a first game round operation (first special game) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first prize winning slot 314),
A second game means (41) performs a second game round operation (second special game) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second prize winning slot 315),
Equipped with,
When a game operation is defined as the period from the fulfillment of the starting conditions to the termination of notification for a predetermined period regarding the game result of the fluctuation display at the end of the fluctuation, the first game means and the second game means are game machines in which the fluctuation display can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined display means,
The system includes a setting means for setting a predetermined time for displaying fluctuations (long fluctuations) when the first starting condition is met and a specific lottery result (failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurs during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The system is configured to be able to complete a predetermined number of the second game rounds within the predetermined time display period set by the setting means.
The predetermined game state ends when the second game operation is performed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times).
If the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state execution means (41) allows the predetermined game state to continue to be executed,
Means for assigning a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game round operation during the predetermined variable display time,
When a predetermined second game operation (a second special game that terminates the time-saving game state) performed during the predetermined time display period is completed, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed (41),
A means (41) that can assign a specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined second game operation is completed and the normal game state is returned, and the predetermined time for displaying the variation ends,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined gaming value is higher than the specific gaming value.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value. Thus, because the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value, a predetermined game value higher than the specific game value that can be granted by executing the normal game state resulting from the completion of the predetermined number of second game rounds may be granted before the predetermined number of second game rounds of operations are completed. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of each second game round operation while expecting a predetermined lottery result until the predetermined number of second game rounds of operations are completed. Furthermore, even if the second game round operation does not correspond to a predetermined lottery result, the probability of executing the second game round operation resulting in the execution of the normal game state, which can grant a specific game value, is increased. Therefore, in the second game round, players can enjoy the game while expecting a predetermined lottery result. Even if the result is not predetermined, it does not mean that no game value is obtained. Rather, although the value is lower than the predetermined value, repeating it a predetermined number of times can lead to a certain level of game value, thus reducing the decline in interest in the game when the second game round does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result.

[Note D2]
The predetermined game value is that a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the expected value of the number of game balls acquired is higher than that of the normal game state and the predetermined game state (a) time-saving game state.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific gaming value increases the opportunities for the second starting condition to be met (the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening 315).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D2, the predetermined game value is the execution of a special game with a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than in the normal game state and the predetermined game state, and the specific game value is the increase in the chances of the second starting condition being met. Thus, the predetermined game value is the execution of a special game with a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than in the normal game state and the predetermined game state, and the specific game value is the increase in the chances of the second starting condition being met, so that a special game with a high expected value for the number of game balls acquired can be executed before the predetermined number of second game rounds are completed. As a result, until the predetermined number of second game rounds are completed, the player can enjoy the progress of each second game round while expecting that a special game will be executed based on the predetermined lottery result. Furthermore, even if the second game round does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result, the execution of the second game round increases the possibility of obtaining a game value that increases the chances of the second starting condition being met. Therefore, in the second game round, players can enjoy the game while expecting a predetermined lottery result. Even if the result is not predetermined, it is not the case that no game value is gained. Rather, players can enjoy the game while expecting the possibility of gaining game value as the second game round is repeated a predetermined number of times, increasing the chances of the second starting condition being met. This reduces the decline in interest in the game when the second game round does not result in the predetermined lottery result.

[Note E1]
A first game means (41) performs a first game round operation (first special game) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first prize winning slot 314),
A second game means (41) performs a second game round operation (second special game) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second prize winning slot 315),
Equipped with,
When a game operation is defined as the period from the fulfillment of the starting conditions to the termination of notification for a predetermined period regarding the game result of the fluctuation display at the end of the fluctuation, the first game means and the second game means are game machines in which the fluctuation display can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined display means,
The system includes a setting means for setting a predetermined time for displaying fluctuations (long fluctuations) when the first starting condition is met and a specific lottery result (failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurs during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The system is configured to be able to complete a predetermined number of the second game rounds within the predetermined time display period set by the setting means.
The predetermined game state ends when the second game operation is performed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times).
If the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state execution means (41) allows the predetermined game state to continue to be executed,
Means for assigning a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game round operation during the predetermined variable display time,
When a predetermined second game operation (a second special game that terminates the time-saving game state) performed during the predetermined time display period is completed, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed (41),
A means (41) that can assign a specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined second game operation is completed and the normal game state is returned, and the predetermined time for displaying the variation ends,
A means (51) for notifying the remaining period (number of time-saving game rounds) of the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) in a predetermined manner (number),
During the predetermined game state (a) time-saving game state, means (51) for notifying the remaining period of the second game round operation (second special symbol game) in a more emphasized manner than the predetermined manner (for example, color, size, pattern, effect, or combination thereof),
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, the remaining period of a predetermined game state is notified in a predetermined manner, and during the predetermined game state, the remaining period of the second game round operation is notified with more emphasis than in the predetermined manner. In this way, by notifying the remaining period of the predetermined game state in a predetermined manner, and by notifying the remaining period of the second game round operation with more emphasis than in the predetermined manner during the predetermined game state, it becomes easier to grasp the numerical value of the remaining period of the first game round operation. As a result, players can more easily predict, based on the information obtained from the numerical value of the remaining period of the first game round operation, whether the first game round operation corresponding to a specific lottery result will end after the completion of a predetermined number of second game round operations (whether the predetermined number of second game round operations can end while the first game round operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is being executed). Therefore, by focusing on the remaining period of the second game round, which is indicated with greater emphasis than the predetermined pattern, players can enjoy the game's progression by predicting the end timing of the first game round and the predetermined end timing of the second game round, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note F1]
A first game means (41) performs a first game round operation (first special game) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first prize winning slot 314),
A second game means (41) performs a second game round operation (second special game) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second prize winning slot 315),
Equipped with,
When a game operation is defined as the period from the fulfillment of the starting conditions to the termination of notification for a predetermined period regarding the game result of the fluctuation display at the end of the fluctuation, the first game means and the second game means are game machines in which the fluctuation display can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined display means,
The system includes a setting means for setting a predetermined time for displaying fluctuations (long fluctuations) when the first starting condition is met and a specific lottery result (failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurs during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The system is configured to be able to complete a predetermined number of the second game rounds within the predetermined time display period set by the setting means.
The predetermined game state ends when the second game operation is performed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times).
If the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state execution means (41) allows the predetermined game state to continue to be executed,
Means for assigning a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game round operation during the predetermined variable display time,
When a predetermined second game operation (a second special game that terminates the time-saving game state) performed during the predetermined time display period is completed, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed (41),
A means (41) that can assign a specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined second game operation is completed and the normal game state is returned, and the predetermined time for displaying the variation ends,
Equipped with,
The variation display time of the second game round operation (second special symbol game) that is started during the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) includes a predetermined variation display time that is longer than the longest variation display time set for the first game round operation (first special symbol game) that is started during the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second game round operation in which the predetermined variable display time is set has a high expectation that it will be the predetermined lottery result (jackpot) to which the predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) is granted.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F1, the variable display time of the second game round operation, which is started during a predetermined game state, includes a predetermined variable display time that is longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game round operation, which is started during a predetermined game state. The probability of the second game round operation, for which a predetermined variable display time is set, being a predetermined lottery result that grants a predetermined game value is set to be high. However, in order to enter a normal game state in which a specific game value can be granted upon the completion of a predetermined number of second game round operations, the longer the specific variable display time, the more disadvantageous it is. In contrast, the probability of the second game round operation, for which a predetermined variable display time is set that is longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game round operation, which is started during a predetermined game state, being a predetermined lottery result that grants a predetermined game value is set to be high. Therefore, in situations where a specific fluctuation display time is long and disadvantageous to the player, potentially leading to a decrease in interest in the game, increasing the expectation of receiving a predetermined game value can prevent a decline in interest. In fact, players can enjoy the game's progression while anticipating the predetermined outcome, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G1]
A first game means (41) performs a first game round operation (first special game) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first prize winning slot 314),
A second game means (41) performs a second game round operation (second special game) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second prize winning slot 315),
Equipped with,
When a game operation is defined as the period from the fulfillment of the starting conditions to the termination of notification for a predetermined period regarding the game result of the fluctuation display at the end of the fluctuation, the first game means and the second game means are game machines in which the fluctuation display can be executed simultaneously by a predetermined display means,
The system includes a setting means for setting a predetermined time for displaying fluctuations (long fluctuations) when the first starting condition is met and a specific lottery result (failure to stop the time-saving symbols) occurs during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The system is configured to be able to complete a predetermined number of the second game rounds within the predetermined time display period set by the setting means.
The predetermined game state ends when the second game operation is performed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times).
If the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state execution means (41) allows the predetermined game state to continue to be executed,
Means for assigning a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game round operation during the predetermined variable display time,
When a predetermined second game operation (a second special game that terminates the time-saving game state) performed during the predetermined time display period is completed, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed (41),
A means (41) that can assign a specific game value (c transition to a time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined second game operation is completed and the normal game state is returned, and the predetermined time for displaying the variation ends,
Equipped with,
The predetermined game state execution means (41) is characterized in that, when the predetermined game state is executed after the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, it provides predetermined game value (for example, execution of a minor win game, opening of the second prize slot 315 by operation of the electric mechanism 315b, display of a premium image or execution of a premium effect, unlocking a specific song, etc.).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G1, if the first game round operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is completed during a predetermined game state and the predetermined game state continues, a third game value, different from the predetermined game value and the specific game value, is assigned. In this way, if the predetermined game state continues after the first game round operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is completed during a predetermined game state, the assignment of a third game value, different from the predetermined game value and the specific game value, can mitigate the decrease in enjoyment of the game caused by this unfavorable outcome, even if the timing of the completion of the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result results in an unfavorable outcome for the player, by assigning this third game value.

[Note A1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means can be seen through the rotating plate portion of the rotating first rotating means, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion, thereby blocking the light from the light-emitting means, and the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion. As a result, the operation of the first and second rotating means can result in two states, the first and second states, and thus the effects performed by the operation of the first and second rotating means are diversified. For example, in the first state in which the light from the light-emitting means can be seen through the rotating plate portion of the rotating first rotating means, effects can be performed according to the way the light from the light-emitting means is seen through the rotating plate portion. Specifically, depending on how the light from the light-emitting means is visible through the rotating plate, it becomes possible to perform effects that provide information about the game to the player, such as effects that explicitly or suggest the degree of expectation that special information will meet predetermined conditions, effects that explicitly or suggest the game value that will be given to the player when the special information meets predetermined conditions, and effects that explicitly or suggest the type of effect to be performed later. Furthermore, in a second state where the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light-emitting means, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to how the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate. Specifically, the way light is perceived through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means allows for the execution of effects that provide information about the game to the player, such as effects that explicitly or suggest the degree of expectation that special information will meet predetermined conditions, effects that explicitly or suggest the game value that will be given to the player when the special information meets predetermined conditions, and effects that explicitly or suggest the type of effect to be executed later. Thus, having a first state and a second state diversifies the effects executed by the operation of the first and second rotating means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that at least a portion of the rotating plate portion (370) is translucent.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A2, at least a portion of the rotating plate is translucent. Thus, by having at least a portion of the rotating plate translucent, a first state can be achieved in which the light from the light-emitting means is visible through the translucent portion, while a second state can be achieved in which the first rotating means is visible through the translucent portion.

[Note A3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, characterized in that the rotating plate portion (370) is entirely translucent.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A3, the entire rotating plate is translucent. This translucency of the entire rotating plate makes it easier to construct the rotating plate compared to a case where only a portion of the rotating plate is translucent.

[Note A4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, characterized in that the rotating plate portion (370) has a translucent region with higher light transmission compared to other regions.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A4, the rotating plate section has a translucent region with higher light transmission compared to other areas. This translucent region in the rotating plate section allows for the designation of the translucent region as the area where the light from the light-emitting means is visible in the first state, and as the area where the second rotating means is visible in the second state. This clearly identifies the translucent region as the area the player should focus on during the performances executed in the first and second states. Therefore, when performances are executed in the first and second states, players can enjoy the game by focusing on the translucent region. Furthermore, if a portion of the rotating plate section is designated as a translucent region, it is possible to designate the other parts as non-translucent regions, thereby improving the decorative appeal of the rotating plate section.

[Note A5]
The gaming machine as described in Appendix A4, characterized in that the light-transmitting region is a magnifying lens.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A5, the translucent area is a magnifying lens. This magnifying lens configuration allows for the enhanced display of information related to the game, particularly the light from the light-emitting means visible through the rotating plate and the information provided by the second rotating means. This makes it easier for players to grasp the information provided in the first and second states, thereby enhancing their enjoyment of the gameplay and the effects performed in those states.

[Note A6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4, characterized in that the light-transmitting region is a through hole.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A6, the translucent region is a through-hole. This through-hole configuration facilitates the formation of the translucent region. For example, when the rotating plate is formed by resin molding, the translucent region can be formed without complicating the shape of the molding die, and without employing techniques such as insert molding.

[Note B1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
It has,
The first rotating means (37) is rotatable at a predetermined position,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is movable toward and toward the first rotating means (37) which rotates at the predetermined position,
The first state can be achieved when the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are separated from the predetermined position.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that the second state can be achieved when the second rotating means (38L, 38R) is close to the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, the first state can be achieved by moving the second rotating means away from the first rotating means rotating at a predetermined position, and the second state can be achieved by moving the second rotating means closer to the first rotating means rotating at a predetermined position. Thus, since the first state can be achieved by moving the second rotating means away from the first rotating means rotating at a predetermined position, and the second state can be achieved by moving the second rotating means closer to the first rotating means rotating at a predetermined position, the first and second states can be achieved by a simple control method of moving the second rotating means closer to and further away from the first rotating means rotating at a predetermined position.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, when the first rotating mechanism rotates at a predetermined position, the player can grasp the timing of the transition to the first state and the timing of the transition to the second state by focusing on the second rotating mechanism. This allows the player to grasp the timing of the execution of the effects in the first state and the timing of the execution of the effects in the second state. In other words, by clarifying the timing to focus on during gameplay, the player can easily and reliably enjoy the effects performed in the first and second states.

[Note C1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
It has,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a plurality of the second rotating means (38L, 38R) capable of realizing the second state.

The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 is equipped with multiple second rotation means capable of realizing the second state. By providing multiple second rotation means capable of realizing the second state, it becomes possible to realize the second state using each of the multiple second rotation means. This makes it possible to execute a variety of effects based on the visual perception of the second state realized by each of the multiple second rotation means.

[Note C2]
The plurality of the aforementioned second rotating means (38L, 38R) include a specific second rotating means (38L) and a predetermined second rotating means (38R) that is different from the specific second rotating means (38L),
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that the first viewing mode of the specific second rotating means (38L) as seen through the rotating plate portion (370) when the second state is achieved by the specific second rotating means (38L) moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), is different from the second viewing mode of the predetermined second rotating means (38R) as seen through the rotating plate portion (370) when the second state is achieved by the predetermined second rotating means (38R) moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C2, the first viewing pattern of a specific second rotating means, as seen through the rotating plate when the second state is achieved by a specific second rotating means, differs from the second viewing pattern of a predetermined second rotating means, as seen through the rotating plate when the second state is achieved by a predetermined second rotating means. This difference between the first viewing pattern of a specific second rotating means as seen through the rotating plate when the second state is achieved by a specific second rotating means, and the second viewing pattern of a predetermined second rotating means as seen through the rotating plate when the second state is achieved by a predetermined second rotating means, makes it possible to execute effects corresponding to the first viewing pattern of the specific second rotating means and the second viewing pattern of the predetermined second rotating means in the second state. This allows for the execution of diverse effects based on the first and second viewing patterns in the second state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that first information relating to the game is provided in the first viewing mode, and second information different from the first information relating to the game is provided in the second viewing mode.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C3, first information relating to the game is provided in the first viewing mode, and second information different from the first information relating to the game is provided in the second viewing mode. Thus, by providing first information relating to the game in the first viewing mode and second information different from the first information relating to the game in the second viewing mode, the player can obtain information that is visible in the second state according to the type of second rotating means. This allows the player to enjoy the game based on the information relating to the game provided from the viewing mode of the second rotating means, while focusing on the type of second rotating means in the second state.

[Note D1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
It has,
The amusement machine is characterized in that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) is capable of moving along multiple different paths.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, the second rotating mechanism is capable of moving along multiple different paths. Because the second rotating mechanism can move along multiple different paths, it is possible to perform effects corresponding to the type of path the second rotating mechanism moves along, thus diversifying the effects.

[Note E1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
It has,
A means (41) for executing a notification game (special symbol game) that notifies whether or not the determination means has met the predetermined conditions,
In the aforementioned notification game, when a predetermined trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot) is met, a first switching means (51) is provided that can switch the rotating plate (370) between the predetermined rotating state and the predetermined stopped state,
In the aforementioned notification game, when a specific trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot) is met, the second rotating means (38L, 38R) is moved to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), and a second switching means (51) is provided that can switch from the first state to the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, in a notification game in which a determination means announces whether or not predetermined conditions are met, the rotating plate is switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is met, and the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate when a specific trigger is met, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. In this way, in a notification game in which a determination means announces whether or not predetermined conditions are met, the rotating plate is switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is met, and the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate when a specific trigger is met, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, the operation of the first and second rotating means can result in two states, the first state and the second state, thus diversifying the effects performed in the notification game through the operation of the first and second rotating means. For example, in a notification game, it becomes possible to perform effects that provide the player with information about the game in at least one of the first and second states, such as effects that explicitly or suggest the expected level of special information meeting predetermined conditions, effects that explicitly or suggest the game value granted to the player when the special information meets predetermined conditions, and effects that explicitly or suggest the type of effect to be performed later. In this way, by realizing the first and second states in a notification game, the effects performed by the operation of the first and second rotating means become more diverse, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Note F1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
It has,
A means (41) for executing a special game that is advantageous to the player when the determination means determines that the predetermined conditions are met,
In the special game described above, when a predetermined trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot) is met, a first switching means (51) is provided that can switch the rotating plate (370) between the predetermined rotating state and the predetermined stopped state,
In the aforementioned special game, when a specific trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot) is met, the second rotating means (38L, 38R) is moved to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), and a second switching means (51) is provided that can switch from the first state to the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine relating to Appendix F1, in a special game advantageous to the player that is executed when the determination means determines that predetermined conditions are met, the rotating plate can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is met, and when a specific trigger is met, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. Thus, in the special game, in a special game advantageous to the player that is executed when the determination means determines that predetermined conditions are met, the rotating plate can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is met, and when a specific trigger is met, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, the operation of the first and second rotating means can result in two states, the first state and the second state, and the operation of the first and second rotating means can result in a diversification of the effects executed in the special game. For example, in a special game, it becomes possible to perform effects that provide the player with information about the game in at least one of the first and second states, such as effects that explicitly or suggest the expectation level of the special information meeting predetermined conditions, and effects that explicitly or suggest the game value granted to the player when the special information meets the predetermined conditions, and further effects that explicitly or suggest the type of effects to be performed later. In this way, by realizing the first and second states in a special game, the effects performed by the operation of the first and second rotating means are diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
It has,
The rotating plate portion (370) is characterized in that its rotation is initiated when a member other than the first rotating means (37) (38L, 38R) interferes with the first rotating means (37).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix G1, the rotation of the rotating plate begins when a component other than the first rotating mechanism interferes with the first rotating mechanism. Because the rotation of the rotating plate begins when a component other than the first rotating mechanism interferes with the first rotating mechanism, the player can grasp the timing of the rotation's commencement. This allows the player to focus on the movement of the first rotating mechanism and the component that may interfere with it, thereby grasping the timing at which the second state can be reached, i.e., the timing at which the second rotating mechanism becomes visible through the rotating plate. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on the first rotating mechanism and the component that may interfere with it, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, characterized in that the member that can interfere with the first rotating means (37) is the second rotating means (38L, 38R).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix G2, the component that can interfere with the first rotating component is the second rotating component. Because the component that can interfere with the first rotating component is the second rotating component, the player can focus on the movement of the first and second rotating components to grasp the timing at which the second state can be reached, i.e., the timing at which the second rotating component becomes visible through the rotating plate. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced because the player can enjoy the progression of the game by focusing on the first and second rotating components.

[Note G3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, characterized in that the member that can interfere with the first rotating means (37) is a game ball.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix G3, the component that can interfere with the first rotating mechanism is the game ball. Because the component that can interfere with the first rotating mechanism is the game ball, the player can focus on the movement of the first rotating mechanism and the game ball to grasp the timing at which the second state can occur, that is, the timing at which the second rotating mechanism becomes visible through the rotating plate. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced because the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the first rotating mechanism and the game ball.

[Note H1]
A light-emitting means (341) visible from the front of the game board (31),
An information acquisition means (41) that acquires special information (jackpot random number) when the acquisition conditions are met (game balls enter the prize slots 314 and 315),
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies predetermined conditions (whether or not it is a jackpot random number that executes a jackpot game),
The first rotating means (37) and
A second rotating means (38L, 38R),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that can rotate about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means (341) located on the back side to be visible, and is configured to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state.
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable and displaceable between a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
This gaming machine is
In a predetermined game state, there is a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370),
As the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light from the light-emitting means (341) at the specific position, resulting in a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370).
It has,
A gaming machine characterized in that, depending on the positional relationship between the first rotating means (37) and the second rotating means (38L, 38R), it is possible to generate a first advantageous mode (e.g., notification mode A) and a second mode (e.g., notification mode D) that is less advantageous than the first mode.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1, the relative positions of the first and second rotating means can generate a favorable first configuration and a less favorable second configuration. Because the relative positions of the first and second rotating means can generate both a favorable first configuration and a less favorable second configuration, players can enjoy the game by focusing on the relative positions of the first and second rotating means when they are activated. In other words, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the relative positions of the first and second rotating means will result in the favorable first configuration, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note H2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, characterized in that the first and second embodiments are possible in the second state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H2, the first and second embodiments can occur in the second state. Thus, because the first and second embodiments can occur in the second state, when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating that the first and second rotating means will be in a favorable positional relationship representing the first embodiment, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A1]
A determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variation jackpot game, or 16R probability variation jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state, the variation display means (41, 51) executes a variation display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol),
A retaining means (41, 51) that reserves the right to perform the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is performed by the variable display means (41, 51),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between an unfavorable state in which the entry of game balls is restricted (normal game state) and an advantageous state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the unfavorable state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state).
In a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is maintained after the completion of the aforementioned predetermined special game until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games),
In the aforementioned predetermined special game state and the aforementioned advantageous state, a first output means (41) continuously outputs predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) that can identify the state to the outside,
At the end of the advantageous state, the output stop means (41) stops the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41),
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to perform the predetermined symbol variation display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state,
A second output means (41) continuously outputs specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period of time, which identifies that after the end of the advantageous state, it is a period during which a predetermined variation display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in at least the storage means (41) can be performed.
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, during predetermined special game states and advantageous states, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that allows for the identification of these states to an external source. For example, a gaming hall's hall computer can determine that the machine is in a predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on this predetermined identification information. This allows the hall computer to determine the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. Meanwhile, a data display unit attached to the gaming machine can display the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state, based on information generated from the predetermined identification information output by the hall computer.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means continuously outputs specific identification information for a predetermined period in an output manner different from the predetermined identification information, which identifies that the period is one in which a predetermined variation display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to a reserved right stored in at least the storage means can be executed. For example, the hall computer of a gaming hall can understand, based on this specific identification information, that the predetermined variation display based on the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. As a result, the hall computer can understand, based on the specific identification information, that the predetermined variation display is the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state, if the judgment result by the judgment means leads to a special game state. Therefore, the hall computer can count the special game executed based on the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games from the start of the first special game, as determined based on the predetermined identification information. Consequently, the data display attached to the gaming machine can display the special game executed based on the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games.

Thus, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, the first output means can determine whether a predetermined special game state and advantageous state are in effect based on predetermined identification information, and the second output means can determine whether a predetermined fluctuation display is due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state based on specific identification information. Therefore, the data display attached to the gaming machine can include the special game performed based on the predetermined fluctuation display due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state in the count of consecutive special games. Consequently, when a predetermined special game state is transitioned due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state, a discrepancy between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games perceived by the player is prevented. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display is prevented, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2]
The first output means (41) outputs the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a level signal,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a pulse signal or an on/off signal.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A2, predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or on/off signal. In this way, by outputting predetermined identification information as a level signal and specific identification information as a pulse signal or on/off signal, external devices such as the hall computer 102 on the gaming side, which receive the predetermined and specific identification information, can easily and reliably distinguish and identify the predetermined and specific identification information.

[Note A3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1 or Appendix A2, wherein the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), takes precedence over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A3, the display of predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means takes precedence over the display of predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the display of predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means will take precedence even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, specific identification information is output after the end of the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, during the period in which the display of predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means in the advantageous state can be performed. This allows the gaming machine to continuously output specific identification information, which represents the period during which the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state is executable, not only during the favorable state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification information stops following the end of the favorable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can also output the right to display the predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state—that is, the profit state obtained through the favorable state—to external devices such as the hall computer at the store. This allows the hall computer and other external devices at the store to grasp the profit state obtained through the favorable state even after the end of the favorable state, making it easier to include special games initiated during that profit state in the count of consecutive wins.

[Note B1]
A determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variation jackpot game, or 16R probability variation jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state, the variation display means (41, 51) executes a variation display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol),
A retaining means (41, 51) that reserves the right to perform the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is performed by the variable display means (41, 51),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between an unfavorable state in which the entry of game balls is restricted (normal game state) and an advantageous state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the unfavorable state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state).
The display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).
In a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is maintained after the completion of the aforementioned predetermined special game until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games),
In the aforementioned predetermined special game state and the aforementioned advantageous state, a first output means (41) continuously outputs predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) that can identify the state to the outside,
At the end of the advantageous state, the output stop means (41) stops the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41),
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to perform the predetermined symbol variation display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state,
After the end of the advantageous state, a second output means (41) continuously outputs specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) that can identify the period for a predetermined period, during which a predetermined variation display of the predetermined symbols can be performed at least a predetermined number of times corresponding to the number of reserved symbols stored in the storage means (41).
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) in a manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, when a predetermined special game state and advantageous state are reached, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information to the outside, allowing the gaming hall's hall computer, for example, to recognize that the machine is in a predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on this predetermined identification information. This allows the hall computer to determine the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. Meanwhile, a data display unit attached to the gaming machine can display the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state, based on information generated from the predetermined identification information output by the hall computer.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means continuously outputs specific identification information for a predetermined period in an output manner different from the predetermined identification information, which identifies that the period is one in which a predetermined variation display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to a reserved right stored in at least the storage means can be executed. For example, the hall computer of a gaming hall can understand, based on this specific identification information, that the predetermined variation display based on the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. As a result, the hall computer can understand, based on the specific identification information, that the predetermined variation display is the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state, if the judgment result by the judgment means leads to a special game state. Therefore, the hall computer can count the special game executed based on the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games from the start of the first special game, as determined based on the predetermined identification information. Consequently, the data display attached to the gaming machine can display the special game executed based on the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games.

Thus, in the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, the first output means can determine whether a predetermined special game state and advantageous state are in effect based on predetermined identification information, and the second output means can determine whether a predetermined fluctuation display is due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state based on specific identification information. Therefore, the data display attached to the gaming machine can include the special game performed based on the predetermined fluctuation display due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state in the count of consecutive special games. Consequently, when a predetermined special game state is transitioned due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state, a discrepancy between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games perceived by the player is prevented. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display is prevented, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

[Note B2]
The first output means (41) outputs the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a level signal,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a pulse signal.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B2, predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or on/off signal. In this way, by outputting the predetermined identification information as a level signal and the specific identification information as a pulse signal or on/off signal, external devices such as the hall computer 102 on the gaming side, which receive the predetermined and specific identification information, can easily and reliably distinguish and identify the predetermined and specific identification information.

[Note B3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, wherein the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), takes precedence over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B3, the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means takes precedence over the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means will take precedence even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, specific identification information is output after the end of the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, during the period in which the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means in the advantageous state can be performed. This allows the gaming machine to continuously output specific identification information, which represents the period during which the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state is executable, not only during the favorable state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification information stops following the end of the favorable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can also output the right to display the predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state—that is, the profit state obtained through the favorable state—to external devices such as the hall computer at the store. This allows the hall computer and other external devices at the store to grasp the profit state obtained through the favorable state even after the end of the favorable state, making it easier to include special games initiated during that profit state in the count of consecutive wins.

[Note C1]
A determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variation jackpot game, or 16R probability variation jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state, the variation display means (41, 51) executes a variation display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol),
A reservation means (41, 51) that reserves the right to perform the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is performed by the variable display means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between an unfavorable state in which the entry of game balls is restricted (normal game state) and an advantageous state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the unfavorable state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state).
The display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).
In a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is maintained after the completion of the aforementioned predetermined special game until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games),
In the aforementioned predetermined special game state and the aforementioned advantageous state, a first output means (41) continuously outputs predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) that can identify the state to the outside,
At the end of the advantageous state, the output stop means (41) stops the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41),
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to perform the predetermined symbol variation display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state,
A second output means (41) continuously outputs specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period of time, which identifies that after the end of the advantageous state, it is a period during which a predetermined variation display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in at least the storage means (41) can be performed.
Equipped with,
The second output means (41) is,
The first output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) in an output mode different from the output mode of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2),
A gaming machine characterized in that it can continuously output the specific identification information until a specific period of time has elapsed after the last predetermined variable display, which is executed in accordance with the number of reserved items stored in the storage means, has been stopped.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, when a predetermined special game state and advantageous state are reached, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information to the outside, allowing, for example, the hall computer of a gaming hall to recognize that the machine is in a predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on this predetermined identification information. This allows the hall computer to determine the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. Meanwhile, a data display unit attached to the gaming machine can display the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state, based on information generated from the predetermined identification information output by the hall computer.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means continuously outputs specific identification information for a predetermined period in an output manner different from the predetermined identification information, which identifies that the period is one in which a predetermined variation display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to a reserved right stored in at least the storage means can be executed. For example, the hall computer of a gaming hall can understand, based on this specific identification information, that the predetermined variation display based on the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. As a result, the hall computer can understand, based on the specific identification information, that the predetermined variation display is the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state, if the judgment result by the judgment means leads to a special game state. Therefore, the hall computer can count the special game executed based on the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games from the start of the first special game, as determined based on the predetermined identification information. Consequently, the data display attached to the gaming machine can display the special game executed based on the predetermined variation display due to the reserved right at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, specific identification information is output until a specific period has elapsed after the last predetermined variation display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to a reserved right stored in the memory means at the end of the advantageous state has stopped. This allows external devices such as the hall computer on the store side to distinguish and understand whether the specific identification information was temporarily unreceived due to, for example, noise, or whether the output of the specific identification information has stopped. Therefore, even if the specific identification information is temporarily unreceived due to, for example, noise, external devices such as the hall computer on the store side can understand that the predetermined variation display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in the memory means is still within the period when it can be executed after the end of the advantageous state.

Thus, in the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, the first output means can determine whether a predetermined special game state and advantageous state are in effect based on predetermined identification information, and the second output means can determine whether a predetermined fluctuation display is due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state based on specific identification information. Therefore, the data display attached to the gaming machine can include the special game performed based on the predetermined fluctuation display due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state in the count of consecutive special games. Consequently, when a predetermined special game state is transitioned due to a hold at the end of the advantageous state, a discrepancy between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games perceived by the player is prevented. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display is prevented, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game.

[Note C2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, wherein the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), takes precedence over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C2, the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means takes precedence over the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means takes precedence even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, specific identification information is output after the end of the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, during the period in which the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means in the advantageous state can be performed. This allows the gaming machine to continuously output specific identification information, which represents the period during which the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state is executable, not only during the favorable state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification information stops following the end of the favorable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can also output the right to display the predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state—that is, the profit state obtained through the favorable state—to external devices such as the hall computer at the store. This allows the hall computer and other external devices at the store to grasp the profit state obtained through the favorable state even after the end of the favorable state, making it easier to include special games initiated during that profit state in the count of consecutive wins.

[Note D1]
A determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variation jackpot game, or 16R probability variation jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state, the variation display means (41, 51) executes a variation display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol),
A reservation means (41, 51) that reserves the right to perform the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is performed by the variable display means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between an unfavorable state in which the entry of game balls is restricted (normal game state) and an advantageous state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the unfavorable state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state).
The display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).
In a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is maintained after the completion of the aforementioned predetermined special game until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games),
In the aforementioned predetermined special game state and the aforementioned advantageous state, a first output means (41) continuously outputs predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) that can identify the state to the outside,
At the end of the advantageous state, the output stop means (41) stops the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41),
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to perform the predetermined symbol variation display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state,
A second output means (41) continuously outputs specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period of time, which identifies that after the end of the advantageous state, it is a period during which a predetermined variation display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in at least the storage means (41) can be performed.
When the predetermined patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern, decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner, an image display means (341) that displays an image during the execution of the variable display,
An effect execution means (51) that performs a predetermined background effect by displaying a predetermined background image on the image display means (341) in the unfavorable state, and a specific background effect by displaying a specific background image different from the predetermined background image on the image display means (341) in the favorable state,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, a predetermined background effect is performed in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in a disadvantageous state, and a specific background effect is performed in which a specific background image different from the predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in a favorable state. Thus, by performing a predetermined background effect in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in a disadvantageous state, and a specific background effect in which a specific background image different from the predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in a favorable state, the player can easily and visually determine whether they are in a disadvantageous or favorable state based on the background image displayed on the image display means.

[Note D2]
The aforementioned predetermined conditions include a first predetermined condition for transitioning from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state, and a second predetermined condition for transitioning from the advantageous state to the special game state.
The game machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that, when the performance execution means (51) transitions from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state due to the fulfillment of the first predetermined condition, it performs a predetermined initial background performance as the predetermined background performance from the transition to the disadvantageous state until the predetermined condition is fulfilled.

[Note D3]
The aforementioned condition is that, after transitioning from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state, the display of the predetermined symbols changes a specific number of times, as described in Appendix D2 of the gaming machine.

[Note D4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2 or Appendix D3, characterized in that the condition of the aforementioned provision is winning a lottery to determine whether or not to terminate the execution of the specific background effect.

In gaming machines related to Appendix D2 to Appendix D4, a predetermined initial background animation is executed from the time the game transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until the specified conditions are met. In this way, by executing the predetermined initial background animation from the time the game transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until the specified conditions are met, the player can easily visually understand that the game has transitioned from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state.

[Note D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D2 to D4, characterized in that the aforementioned specific background effect is a unique background effect that is executed only during the period from when the player transitions from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state until the prescribed condition is met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D5, a specific background effect is a unique effect that is executed only during the period from when the game transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until a predetermined condition is met. Because this specific background effect is a unique effect that is executed only during the period from when the game transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until a predetermined condition is met, even in situations where a player's interest in the game might decrease due to an unfavorable transition, the unique background effect prevents a decline in interest by allowing the player to see it.

[Note D6]
A gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D5, wherein the display of a predetermined pattern that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315) takes precedence over the display of a predetermined pattern that is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D6, the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means takes precedence over the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means takes precedence even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, specific identification information is output after the end of the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, during the period in which the display of a predetermined symbol change triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means in the advantageous state can be performed. This allows the gaming machine to continuously output specific identification information, which represents the period during which the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state is executable, not only during the favorable state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification information stops following the end of the favorable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can also output the right to display the predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state—that is, the profit state obtained through the favorable state—to external devices such as the hall computer at the store. This allows the hall computer and other external devices at the store to grasp the profit state obtained through the favorable state even after the end of the favorable state, making it easier to include special games initiated during that profit state in the count of consecutive wins.

[Note E1]
A determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variation jackpot game, or 16R probability variation jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state, the variation display means (41, 51) executes a variation display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol),
A retaining means (41, 51) that reserves the right to perform the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is performed by the variable display means (41, 51),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between an unfavorable state in which the entry of game balls is restricted (normal game state) and an advantageous state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the unfavorable state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state).
The display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).
In a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is maintained after the completion of the aforementioned predetermined special game until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games),
In the aforementioned predetermined special game state and the aforementioned advantageous state, a first output means (41) continuously outputs predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) that can identify the state to the outside,
At the end of the advantageous state, the output stop means (41) stops the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41),
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to perform the predetermined symbol variation display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state,
A second output means (41) continuously outputs specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period of time, which identifies that after the end of the advantageous state, it is a period during which a predetermined variation display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in at least the storage means (41) can be performed.
In the aforementioned predetermined special game state, a third output means (41) continuously outputs to the outside a predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) that can identify the state and a third identification information (jackpot signal 1) that is different from the aforementioned specific identification information (extended signal of the jackpot signal 2),
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, in addition to predetermined identification information that identifies a predetermined special game state and advantageous state, a third identification information that identifies a predetermined special game state is output. By outputting this third identification information, external devices such as the hall computer at the store can determine that the machine is in the predetermined special game state based on this third identification information. This allows the hall computer and other external devices at the store to track the number of transitions to the predetermined special game state (number of special game executions) and display this number on data displays, etc.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine related to Appendix E1, it is possible to determine whether the transition is from a favorable state to a predetermined special game state or from a disadvantageous state, depending on whether predetermined identification information is received when the third identification information is received. Specifically, if predetermined identification information is received when the third identification information is received, it can be determined that the transition is from a favorable state to a predetermined special game state. If predetermined identification information is not received when the third identification information is received, it can be determined that the transition is from a disadvantageous state to a predetermined special game state. As a result, external devices such as the hall computer on the store side can grasp the number of times the special game state has been transitioned from a favorable state, which is the number of consecutive transitions to the predetermined special game state (number of consecutive executions of special games), and can also display the number of consecutive transitions to the predetermined special game state (number of consecutive executions of special games) on data displays, etc.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, wherein the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315), takes precedence over the display of the predetermined symbols, which is performed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E2, the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means takes precedence over the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means will take precedence even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, specific identification information is output after the end of the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to perform the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, during the period in which the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means in the advantageous state can be performed. This allows the gaming machine to continuously output specific identification information, which represents the period during which the display of a predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state is executable, not only during the favorable state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification information stops following the end of the favorable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can also output the right to display the predetermined symbol variation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during a favorable state—that is, the profit state obtained through the favorable state—to external devices such as the hall computer at the store. This allows the hall computer and other external devices at the store to grasp the profit state obtained through the favorable state even after the end of the favorable state, making it easier to include special games initiated during that profit state in the count of consecutive wins.

[Note A1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, even if a specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round while a specific performance is being executed, the specific corresponding display will not start. Furthermore, in this invention, even if an update condition is met during the execution of the second game round while a specific performance is being executed, the updated specific corresponding display will not start. Thus, by preventing the specific corresponding display from starting when a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game round while a specific performance is being executed, the specific performance is prevented from being terminated prematurely by the specific corresponding display, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the premature termination of the specific performance.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, a specific corresponding display is initiated based on the completion of a specific performance, corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the completion of the specific performance. In this way, by initiating a specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the completion of the specific performance, the specific corresponding display can be initiated without prematurely ending the specific performance. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the failure to initiate the specific corresponding display is prevented.

[Note B1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
When the aforementioned specific performance is terminated, means (51) to execute a performance (such as a branching performance or a left-hand play display) that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the termination of the aforementioned specific performance,
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, when a specific performance ends, an animation is performed that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the performance ends. In this way, when a specific performance ends, an animation that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the performance ends is performed, allowing the player to understand the game state after the performance ends based on that animation. This allows the player to enjoy the game even in situations where their interest in the game might decrease because the end of a favorable state for the player is clearly indicated or suggested by the completion of the specific performance, while anticipating what kind of animation will be performed, i.e., that the game state after the specific performance will be favorable to the player.

[Note B2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that the performance that clearly indicates or suggests the state of play after the completion of the aforementioned specific performance includes a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the area on the game board (31) from which the game balls are launched.

In gaming machines related to Appendix B2, the effects that clearly indicate or suggest the game state after the completion of a specific effect include effects that clearly indicate or suggest the area on the game board where the game balls are launched. Thus, by including effects that clearly indicate or suggest the area on the game board where the game balls are launched based on the effects, players can understand the area on the game board where the game balls are launched after the completion of the specific effect. This allows players to launch the game balls appropriately after the completion of the specific effect, preventing the loss of unnecessary game balls due to inappropriate launches (so-called wasted shots), and ensuring the player's profits are appropriately secured.

[Note C1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that the method of playing after the completion of the specific performance (recommended way to launch game balls) is the same whether the specific condition is met during the execution of the specific performance or whether the specific condition is not met during the execution of the specific performance.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, the method of playing after the completion of a specific performance is the same regardless of whether a specific condition is met during the performance or not. Thus, because the method of playing after the completion of a specific performance is the same regardless of whether a specific condition is met during the performance or not, players can proceed with the game using the same method regardless of whether a specific condition is met during the performance. This prevents the method of playing after the completion of a specific performance from becoming complicated and prevents any disadvantage to the player.

[Note C2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that the aforementioned gaming method relates to a method of launching game balls onto a game board that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine described in Appendix C2 concerns a method of launching game balls onto the game board that is advantageous to the player. By focusing on a method of launching game balls onto the game board that is advantageous to the player, the method of launching game balls that is advantageous to the player is standardized after the completion of a specific performance, regardless of whether specific conditions are met during the performance. This prevents the method of launching game balls that is advantageous to the player from becoming complicated after the completion of a specific performance, thus preventing any disadvantage to the player.

[Note C3]
The aforementioned game method includes a first game method in which game balls are encouraged to be entered into the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second game method in which game balls are encouraged to be entered into the second starting ball entry means (315),
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, characterized in that the method of playing after the completion of the aforementioned specific performance is the first method of playing.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C3, the game method includes a first game method in which game balls are encouraged to be entered into the first starting ball entry means, and a second game method in which game balls are encouraged to be entered into the second starting ball entry means, with the game method after the completion of a specific performance being the first game method. Thus, since the game method includes a first game method in which game balls are encouraged to be entered into the first starting ball entry means, and a second game method in which game balls are encouraged to be entered into the second starting ball entry means, and the game method after the completion of a specific performance is the first game method, regardless of whether specific conditions are met during the execution of the specific performance, it is sufficient to implement the first game method in which game balls are encouraged to be entered into the first starting ball entry means after the completion of the specific performance. This simplifies the method of launching game balls that are advantageous to the player after the completion of the specific performance, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Note D1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified corresponding display is a display capable of identifying the second game round operation in which the specified condition is met, among the second game round operations performed during the execution of the specified performance.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, the specific corresponding display is a display that can identify the second game round action performed during the execution of a specific performance in which a specific condition was met. Because the specific corresponding display is such that it can identify the second game round action performed during the execution of a specific performance in which a specific condition was met, the player can determine which second game round action performed during the execution of the specific performance met the specific condition. Therefore, when the specific corresponding display is shown after the completion of a specific performance, the player can infer which second game round action performed during the execution of the specific performance met the specific condition and enjoy playing the game after the performance has ended.

[Note E1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
A means by which, upon completion of the aforementioned specific performance, different performances can be performed depending on whether the aforementioned specific condition was met during the execution of the aforementioned specific performance or whether the aforementioned specific condition was not met during the execution of the aforementioned specific performance.
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, when a specific animation finishes, different animations are performed depending on whether a specific condition was met during the execution of that animation or not. Thus, by performing different animations upon the completion of the specific animation depending on whether a specific condition was met or not, players can determine whether a specific condition was met during the execution of the animation based on the animation performed upon its completion. This allows players to enjoy the game while anticipating that an animation indicating the meeting of a specific condition (such as a specific corresponding display) will be performed upon the completion of the animation.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that the performance that may be performed when the aforementioned specific performance ends includes a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the profit status at the time the aforementioned specific performance ends.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E2, the effects that may be executed after a specific effect has ended include effects that clearly indicate or suggest the profit status at the time the specific effect has ended. Thus, by including effects that clearly indicate or suggest the profit status at the time the specific effect has ended, players can understand their profit status after the specific effect has ended based on these effects. As a result, even in situations where a player's interest in the game decreases because the end of a favorable state for the player is clearly indicated or suggested by the end of the specific effect, players can still enjoy the game while looking forward to what kind of effects will be executed, that is, while expecting the profit status after the end of the specific effect to be favorable for the player.

[Note F1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
Equipped with,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined game state is a state that makes it easy to generate the special game state (jackpot game state) (a state in which the second special symbol game is executed based on the entry of game balls into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F1, a predetermined game state is one that makes it easy to trigger a special game state. Here, in the predetermined game state, even if specific conditions are met, the specific animation continues to run until the first numerical information reaches a specific value. Therefore, because the predetermined game state is one that makes it easy to trigger a special game state, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the state is prone to triggering a special game state while the specific animation continues to run. This allows the player to understand whether or not the state is prone to triggering a special game state by focusing on whether or not the specific animation continues, thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the aforementioned specific performance is a performance that clearly indicates or suggests that the state is such that it is easy to generate the aforementioned special game state (jackpot game state) (a state in which the second special symbol game is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry 315 in the time-saving game state).

In gaming machines related to Appendix G1, the specific animation is one that explicitly or suggestively indicates a state that makes it easier to trigger a special game state. Because the specific animation explicitly or suggestively indicates a state that makes it easier to trigger a special game state, players can understand that the state is more likely to trigger a special game state while the specific animation is being performed. This allows players to determine whether or not they are in a state that makes it easier to trigger a special game state by focusing on whether or not the specific animation continues, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note H1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
In the predetermined game state (a state in which the second special symbol game is executed based on the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 in the time-saving game state), means for displaying an image (second special symbol reserve image) that allows recognition of the number of the second reserve (second special symbol reserve),
In a specific game state that can be transitioned to after the termination of the predetermined game state, means for displaying an image (first special symbol reserve image) that allows recognition of the number of the first reserve (first special symbol reserve),
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1, an image that allows recognition of the number of second reserved balls is displayed in a predetermined gaming state, and an image that allows recognition of the number of first reserved balls is displayed in a specific gaming state that can be transitioned to after the predetermined gaming state has ended. In this way, the display of an image that allows recognition of the number of second reserved balls in a predetermined gaming state makes it possible to make the player understand that it is preferable to have the game balls entered into the second starting ball entry means to execute the second game round, while the display of an image that allows recognition of the number of first reserved balls in a specific gaming state that can be transitioned to after the predetermined gaming state has ended makes it possible to make the player understand that it is preferable to have the game balls entered into the first starting ball entry means to execute the first game round. Therefore, when transitioning from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state, it becomes possible to make the player understand, based on the type of display of the number of reserved balls, that the state has transitioned from a state where it is preferable to have the game balls entered into the second starting ball entry means to a state where it is preferable to have the game balls entered into the first starting ball entry means. This allows players to understand, based on the display type of the number of reserved balls, whether the most advantageous method for launching the game balls is one that makes it easier to get the balls into the first starting ball entry mechanism or one that makes it easier to get the balls into the second starting ball entry mechanism. As a result, players can enjoy the game by paying attention to the display type of the number of reserved balls, ensuring they are not at a disadvantage.

[Note I1]
A determination means (41) that performs a determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315),
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state, and triggers this determination, the game round operation execution means (41) executes a game round operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
A holding means (41) that reserves the right to execute the game round operation executed by the game round operation execution means (41),
Equipped with,
The predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball entry means (314) and a second starting ball entry means (315) different from the first starting ball entry means (314), which switches between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a favorable state in which the entry of game balls is easier than in the disadvantageous state.
The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern (first special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second pattern (second special pattern) that changes and is displayed in response to a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315),
The aforementioned game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a second game round operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.
The game machine includes a first hold (first special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the game round operation by the hold means (41), and a second hold (second special symbol hold) which is a hold on the right to perform the first game round operation,
A first numerical information setting means (41, 51) sets first numerical information in a first counting means (second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB, second special symbol reserve number storage area corresponding area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number of second reserves (second special symbol reserve number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game can be executed based on game balls entering the second prize entry 315 in a time-saving game state),
A subtraction means (41, 51) subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when the subtraction condition is met (start of the second special symbol game),
During the execution of the display of the second symbol variation in the predetermined game state, the performance display means (51) executes a corresponding specific performance (RUSH performance, instant notification performance, battle performance),
When a specific condition (short-time symbol stop failure) is met that makes it possible to generate a specific game state (c-short-time game state) in which a specific game can be played, a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) that sets a second numerical information different from the first numerical information (number of special symbol games that can be played in the c-short-time game state) in a second counting means (c-short-time count counter) that is capable of counting corresponding to the specific game,
Update means (41, 51) update the second numerical information set in the second counting means when the update condition is met (start of special game),
In the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, if the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, means (41, 51) for continuing to execute the specific performance during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information set in at least the first counting means becomes a specific value (for example, 0) when it is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the fulfillment of the subtraction condition,
A means (51) that, when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, sets specific numerical information (the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state) in the second counting means, but does not execute a specific corresponding display (display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds in the time-saving game state (performance)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, updates the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is met during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific performance is being executed, but does not execute the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and executes the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance,
A means for switching between a first state (normal game state) in which the second starting ball entry means (315) is in the advantageous state, and a second state (a time-saving game state including time-saving game state a) in which the probability of the second starting ball entry means (315) being in the advantageous state is higher than the first probability,
Equipped with,
The game is characterized in that at least a portion of the game state is in the second state (a) time-saving game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I1, for at least a portion of the predetermined game state, the probability of the second ball entry mechanism being in a favorable state is high. Here, in the predetermined game state, even if specific conditions are met, the specific animation continues to run until the first numerical information reaches a specific value. Therefore, because the predetermined game state is such that for at least a portion of the predetermined game state, the probability of the second ball entry mechanism being in a favorable state is high, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the probability of the second ball entry mechanism being in a favorable state is high while the specific animation continues to run. This allows the player to grasp whether or not the probability of the second ball entry mechanism being in a favorable state is high by focusing on whether or not the specific animation continues, thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A1]
Multiple starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area,
A win/loss lottery means (41) that performs a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A display control means (51) determines and executes one specific performance to be performed on the display means (341) provided in the game area, according to the result of the lottery by the aforementioned success/failure lottery means (41), from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns),
A movable control means (51) is provided in the game area and determines and executes one movable mode (movable mode A to D) of a movable means (37) which operates during the display of the one specific performance on the display means (341), from among a plurality of options.
A gaming machine equipped with,
The movable control means (51) causes the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set in accordance with the 1 movable mode (movement mode A to D) determined from the plurality based on the fulfillment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change upgrade, 16R probability change non-upgrade), and the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement).
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position, and a second position (operating position), which is the most moved position, during the series of specific operations.
The series of specific operations described above is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (operating position) or near the first position (intermediate operating position 1),
The aforementioned movable control means (51)
A determination means (51) that determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met (completion of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined operation is executed during the movable control of the series of specific operations based on the specified information,
If the determination means (51) determines that the termination condition is met, the termination means (51) stops the movement of the movable means (37) located at or near the first position to terminate the series of specific operations,
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, when a series of specific operations on the movable means are performed by the movable control means based on specific information set in accordance with the movable mode of 1 while the display control means is displaying a specific performance of 1, the determination means determines whether the termination condition of the series of specific operations is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position. In this way, when a series of specific operations on the movable means are performed by the movable control means based on specific information set in accordance with the movable mode of 1 while the display control means is displaying a specific performance of 1, the determination means determines whether the termination condition of the series of specific operations is met each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position, by the movable control means. Furthermore, in this gaming machine, if the determination means determines that the termination condition is met during a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on specific information, the termination means stops the movement of the movable means located at or near the first position, thereby terminating the series of specific operations. In other words, in this gaming machine, even before all movable control of the movable means based on specific information is terminated during a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on specific information, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific operations each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, provided that the termination condition is met. As a result, if the termination condition is met during the execution of a series of specific operations of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on specific information can be stopped and the series of specific operations terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition has been met. Consequently, if it is determined that the termination condition for a series of specific operations has been met, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be terminated immediately, thus enabling smooth termination control of the movable means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, a smooth transition from one specific operation of the movable means to the next is possible. As a result, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be terminated without causing any discomfort to the player after the completion condition for that series of specific operations has been determined. Consequently, if other individual operations are performed immediately after the completion of the series of specific operations of the movable means, a smooth transition from the series of specific operations to the other individual operations is possible, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort during the transition. This makes it possible to operate the movable means for performance purposes even when a specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, without impairing the performance effect.

[Note B1]
Multiple starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area,
A win/loss lottery means (41) that performs a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry means,
A display control means (51) determines and executes one specific performance to be performed on the display means (341) provided in the game area, according to the result of the lottery by the aforementioned success/failure lottery means (41), from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns),
A movable control means (51) is provided in the game area and determines and executes one movable mode (movable mode A to D) of a movable means (37) which operates during the display of the one specific performance on the display means (341), from among a plurality of options.
A gaming machine equipped with,
The movable control means (51) causes the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set in accordance with the 1 movable mode (movement mode A to D) determined from the plurality, based on the fulfillment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change upgrade, 16R probability change non-upgrade),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position, and a second position (operating position), which is the most moved position, during the series of specific operations.
The series of specific operations described above is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (operating position) or near the first position (intermediate operating position 1),
The aforementioned movable control means (51)
A determination means (51) that determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met (completion of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined operation is executed during the movable control of the series of specific operations based on the specified information,
If the determination means (51) determines that the termination condition is met, the termination means (51) stops the movement of the movable means (37) located at or near the first position to terminate the series of specific operations,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the period for performing the series of specific operations includes a first period (for example, when the operation by drive data 1 is completed by a button operation) and a second period that is longer than the first period (for example, when the operation by drive data 1 is completed by the execution of all processes).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, the period for executing a series of specific actions by the movable means includes a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period. That is, in the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, at least two different modes of execution for the series of specific actions by the movable means are set, each with a different execution time. By setting at least two different modes of execution for the series of specific actions by the movable means, it becomes possible to provide the player with various information (e.g., display effects) according to the execution time of the series of specific actions by the movable means. For example, executing the series of specific actions from the first period provides the player with information advantageous to them (e.g., a premium display effect), while executing the series of specific actions from the second period provides the player with information disadvantageous to them (e.g., a default display effect). As a result, the player can focus on the period during which the series of specific actions are executed and enjoy the game while expecting to be provided with advantageous information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C1]
Multiple starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area,
A win/loss lottery means (41) that performs a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A display control means (51) determines and executes one specific performance to be performed on the display means (341) provided in the game area, according to the result of the lottery by the aforementioned success/failure lottery means (41), from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns),
A movable control means (51) is provided in the game area and determines and executes one movable mode (movable mode A to D) of a movable means (37) which operates during the display of the one specific performance on the display means (341), from among a plurality of options.
A gaming machine equipped with,
The movable control means (51) causes the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set in accordance with the 1 movable mode (movement mode A to D) determined from the plurality, based on the fulfillment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change upgrade, 16R probability change non-upgrade),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position, and a second position (operating position), which is the most moved position, during the series of specific operations.
The series of specific operations described above is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (operating position) or near the first position (intermediate operating position 1),
The aforementioned movable control means (51)
A determination means (51) that determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met (completion of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined operation is executed during the movable control of the series of specific operations based on the specified information,
If the determination means (51) determines that the termination condition is met, the termination means (51) stops the movement of the movable means (37) located at or near the first position to terminate the series of specific operations,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the period during which the movable means (37) is moved toward the second position includes a first period (processing No. 03 and No. 06 of drive data 1) and a second period (processing No. 11 and No. 15 of drive data 1) which is longer than the first period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, the period during which the movable means is moved to the second position includes a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period. That is, in the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, at least two different modes are set for a series of specific operations by the movable means, each with a different duration for which the movable means is positioned to the second position. By setting at least two different modes for a series of specific operations by the movable means, each with a different duration for which the movable means is positioned to the second position, the movable means can be moved in different modes depending on the duration for which it is moved to the second position. This makes it possible to diversify the operation of the movable means in a series of specific operations. Furthermore, when the movable means is moved for performance purposes, the performance aspect can be enhanced, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D1]
Multiple starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area,
A win/loss lottery means (41) that performs a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A display control means (51) determines and executes one specific performance to be performed on the display means (341) provided in the game area, according to the result of the lottery by the aforementioned success/failure lottery means (41), from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns),
A movable control means (51) is provided in the game area and determines and executes one movable mode (movable mode A to D) of a movable means (37) which operates during the display of the one specific performance on the display means (341), from among a plurality of options.
A gaming machine equipped with,
The movable control means (51) causes the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set in accordance with the 1 movable mode (movement mode A to D) determined from the plurality based on the fulfillment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change upgrade, 16R probability change non-upgrade), and the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement).
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position, and a second position (operating position), which is the most moved position, during the series of specific operations.
The series of specific operations described above is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (operating position) or near the first position (intermediate operating position 1),
The aforementioned movable control means (51)
A determination means (51) that determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met (completion of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined operation is executed during the movable control of the series of specific operations based on the specified information,
If the determination means (51) determines that the termination condition is met, the termination means (51) stops the movement of the movable means (37) located at or near the first position to terminate the series of specific operations,
Equipped with,
As controls to be executed after the completion of the aforementioned series of specific operations, a first control (SP development, SPSP development, 16R probability change upgrade) and a second control different from the first control (SP non-development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change non-upgrade) can be executed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the case of the control performed after the completion of the series of specific operations, the movable means (37) is started with the movable means (37) positioned on the first position side, regardless of whether it is the first control or the second control.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, regardless of whether the control executed after the completion of a series of specific operations is the first control or a second control different from the first control, the movable means is started with the movable means positioned towards the first position. On the other hand, if the termination condition for the series of specific operations is met, the movable means located at or near the first position is stopped, and the series of specific operations is terminated. In other words, both the position of the movable means at the end of the series of specific operations and the starting positions of the first and second controls executed after the completion of the series of specific operations are towards the first position. Therefore, when the series of specific operations is completed, regardless of whether the subsequent control to the movable means is the first or second control, the subsequent control to the movable means can be started smoothly and without any sense of incongruity. As a result, if the termination condition for the series of specific operations is met and termination is determined, even if the timing of the termination determination is uncertain, the system can transition from the series of specific operations to the next operation executed by the first or second control.

[Note E1]
Multiple starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area,
A win/loss lottery means (41) that performs a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A display control means (51) determines and executes one specific performance to be performed on the display means (341) provided in the game area, according to the result of the lottery by the aforementioned success/failure lottery means (41), from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns),
A movable control means (51) is provided in the game area and determines and executes one movable mode (movable mode A to D) of a movable means (37) which operates during the display of the one specific performance on the display means (341), from among a plurality of options.
A gaming machine equipped with,
The movable control means (51) causes the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set in accordance with the 1 movable mode (movement mode A to D) determined from the plurality, based on the fulfillment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change upgrade, 16R probability change non-upgrade),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position, and a second position (operating position), which is the most moved position, during the series of specific operations.
The series of specific operations described above is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (operating position) or near the first position (intermediate operating position 1),
The aforementioned movable control means (51)
A determination means (51) that determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met (completion of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined operation is executed during the movable control of the series of specific operations based on the specified information,
If the determination means (51) determines that the termination condition is met, the termination means (51) stops the movement of the movable means (37) located at or near the first position to terminate the series of specific operations,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the termination conditions for the series of specific operations is met based on a predetermined game operation (operation of an operation button) by a player.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, at least one of the termination conditions for a series of specific operations of the movable means is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player. Thus, because at least one of the termination conditions for a series of specific operations of the movable means is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player, even if the termination condition for the series of specific operations is met before all control processing for the series of specific operations of the movable means is completed by the predetermined game operation by the player, the determination means can determine whether or not the termination condition for the series of specific operations is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position. Therefore, if the termination condition for a series of specific operations is met before all control processing for the series of specific operations of the movable means is completed by the predetermined game operation by the player, the series of specific operations can be terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition is met. As a result, since the series of specific operations of the movable means can be terminated immediately when the termination condition for the series of specific operations is met, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be terminated without causing any discomfort to the player after the termination condition is met. Therefore, when other operations are performed immediately after a series of specific operations by the movable means, a smooth transition from the series of specific operations to other operations is possible, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort during the transition. This makes it possible to operate the movable means for performance purposes while a specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, without impairing the performance effect.

[Note F1]
Multiple starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area,
A win/loss lottery means (41) that performs a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A display control means (51) determines and executes one specific performance to be performed on the display means (341) provided in the game area, according to the result of the lottery by the aforementioned success/failure lottery means (41), from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns),
A movable control means (51) is provided in the game area and determines and executes one movable mode (movable mode A to D) of a movable means (37) which operates during the display of the one specific performance on the display means (341), from among a plurality of options.
A gaming machine equipped with,
The movable control means (51) causes the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set in accordance with the 1 movable mode (movement mode A to D) determined from the plurality, based on the fulfillment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change upgrade, 16R probability change non-upgrade),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position, and a second position (operating position), which is the most moved position, during the series of specific operations.
The series of specific operations described above is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (operating position) or near the first position (intermediate operating position 1),
The aforementioned movable control means (51)
A determination means (51) that determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met (completion of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined operation is executed during the movable control of the series of specific operations based on the specified information,
If the determination means (51) determines that the termination condition is met, the termination means (51) stops the movement of the movable means (37) located at or near the first position to terminate the series of specific operations,
Equipped with,
The game machine is characterized in that the control performed after the completion of the series of specific operations includes a control target (symbol display unit 341, display effects) different from the movable means (37).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F1, the control executed after the completion of a series of specific actions of the movable means includes a control target different from the movable means. By including a control target different from the movable means in the control executed after the completion of the series of specific actions of the movable means, it becomes possible to re-assign information to a control target different from the movable means after the completion of the series of specific actions of the movable means. This makes it possible to re-assign information to the player at a control target different from the movable means, even if the player misses the action of the movable means or does not understand the content assigned by the action of the movable means. Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix F1, by including a control target different from the movable means in the control executed after the completion of a series of specific actions of the movable means, it becomes possible to explicitly or suggest subsequent effects to be executed in accordance with the action of the movable means. This enhances the enjoyment of the game, as the player can focus on the action of the movable means and enjoy the game while expecting that an effect advantageous to the player will be explicitly or suggested.

[Note G1]
Multiple starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area,
A win/loss lottery means (41) that performs a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A display control means (51) determines and executes one specific performance to be performed on the display means (341) provided in the game area, according to the result of the lottery by the aforementioned success/failure lottery means (41), from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns),
A movable control means (51) is provided in the game area and determines and executes one movable mode (movable mode A to D) of a movable means (37) which operates during the display of the one specific performance on the display means (341), from among a plurality of options.
A gaming machine equipped with,
The movable control means (51) causes the movable means (37) to perform a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set in accordance with the 1 movable mode (movement mode A to D) determined from the plurality, based on the fulfillment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability change upgrade, 16R probability change non-upgrade),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position, and a second position (operating position), which is the most moved position, during the series of specific operations.
The series of specific operations described above is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (operating position) or near the first position (intermediate operating position 1),
The aforementioned movable control means (51)
A determination means (51) that determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met (completion of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined operation is executed during the movable control of the series of specific operations based on the specified information,
If the determination means (51) determines that the termination condition is met, the termination means (51) stops the movement of the movable means (37) located at or near the first position to terminate the series of specific operations,
Equipped with,
The game machine is characterized in that when the movable control means (51) performs control to move the movable means (37) toward the second position in the series of specific operations, it does not determine whether the termination condition for the series of specific operations has been met.

In the gaming machine relating to Appendix G1, when control is executed to move the movable means to the second position during a series of specific operations of the movable means, it is not determined whether the termination condition of that series of specific operations has been met. By not determining whether the termination condition of that series of specific operations has been met when control is executed to move the movable means to the second position during a series of specific operations of the movable means, it is prevented from being mistakenly determined that the termination condition has been met when the movable means is moved to the second position. Therefore, since the series of specific operations of the movable means is not terminated when the movable means is moved to the second position, it is prevented from causing the player to feel a sense of unease when transitioning from a series of specific operations to other operations. As a result, even when the movable means is operated for the purpose of a performance during the display of a specific performance by the display control means, it is possible to operate the movable means without impairing the performance effect.

[Note A1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state after the end of the b time-saving gaming state), when a predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, in a predetermined gaming state where the control state of the auxiliary means assisting in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a symbol variation game is in a first control state that does not correspond to a specific gaming state, if a game ball enters a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for a predetermined period, and a specific period game different from a special game as a profit game ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state. That is, in this invention, even in a predetermined gaming state where the control state of the auxiliary means is in a first control state that does not correspond to a specific gaming state, it is possible to generate a specific gaming state where the control state of the auxiliary means is in the second control state by having a game ball enter a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open and executing a game for a predetermined specific period. This makes it possible to generate a specific gaming state again even after the specific gaming state has ended, thus preventing the gaming machine from being left idle because the specific gaming state has ended and no specific gaming state is generated, and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

[Note B1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the aforementioned variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine in question is,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
The gaming machine is equipped with a signal output means (101) that can output a signal corresponding to the game state to the outside of the gaming machine.
The aforementioned signal output means outputs a special signal (jackpot signal 1) when the special game is performed as the profit game, and does not output the special signal when the specific period game is performed as the profit game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, the signal output means capable of outputting signals corresponding to the game state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when a special game is being executed as a profit-generating game, and does not output a special signal when a specific-period game is being executed as a profit-generating game. In this way, the signal output means capable of outputting signals corresponding to the game state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when a special game is being executed as a profit-generating game, and does not output a special signal when a specific-period game is being executed as a profit-generating game. This allows the hall computer in the gaming parlor to determine, based on the special signal, whether a special game is being executed or the number of times it has been executed. Furthermore, because a special signal is not output when a specific-period game is being executed, the number of specific-period games is not added to the count of special games executed. This makes it possible to display the accurate number of special game executions, without reflecting the number of specific-period games, on the so-called data display installed on top of the gaming machine.

[Note C1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
A gaming machine characterized by having means for displaying game state information corresponding to the end of the game state when the execution of the game for the specified period has ended.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, when the execution of a specific period game, which is performed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means is open, is completed, game state information corresponding to the game state at the end of the execution of the specific period game is displayed on the display means capable of executing the symbol variation game. That is, in the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, when the execution of the specific period game is completed, game state information indicating that the control state of the auxiliary means assisting in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the symbol variation game is a second control state corresponding to the specific game state is displayed on the display means capable of executing the symbol variation game. This allows the player to understand that the second control state corresponding to the specific game state is in effect, that is, that the specific game state can be generated when the predetermined number of executions of the variation game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game.

[Note D1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine in question is,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
The gaming machine is equipped with a signal output means (101) that can output a signal corresponding to the game state to the outside of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the signal output means outputs an identifiable identification signal when the specified period game is performed as the profit game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, the signal output means, which is capable of outputting signals corresponding to the game state to the outside of the gaming machine, outputs an identifiable identification signal when a specific period of gameplay is being performed as a profit-generating game. In this way, when the signal output means, which is capable of outputting signals corresponding to the game state to the outside of the gaming machine, outputs an identifiable identification signal (V-winning jackpot game signal) when a specific period of gameplay is being performed, the hall computer of the gaming parlor can determine, based on the identification signal, that a specific period of gameplay is being performed and the number of times the specific period of gameplay has been performed.

[Note E1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that it includes a third ball entry means (316) different from the second ball entry means as a ball entry means that enters a specific open/closed state in the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, a third ball entry means, different from the second ball entry means, is provided as a ball entry means that enters a specific open/closed state in the special game as a profit-generating game. Here, the second ball entry means has a specific ball entry area, and the entry of a game ball into this specific ball entry area provides an opportunity for the execution of the specific period game as a profit-generating game. That is, in the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, the third ball entry means that opens and closes in the special game is provided as being different from the second ball entry means that provides an opportunity for the execution of the specific period game. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide the player with a different game benefit from the special game than from the specific period game. Furthermore, because the third ball entry means is different from the second ball entry means, it is possible to execute the special game and the specific period game independently, making it possible to realize a gameplay where the special game and the specific period game are executed simultaneously, or conversely, where the special game and the specific period game are not executed simultaneously. For example, it is possible to allow the execution of special games while a specific period of gameplay is in progress, while simultaneously preventing the execution of a specific period of gameplay while a special game is in progress.

[Note F1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the predetermined game state, when a specific number of game balls are launched towards the specific flow path, the number of profitable game balls that the player can obtain is less than the specific number of balls.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F1, when a specific number of game balls are launched towards a specific flow path into which game balls can enter the first ball entry means in a predetermined game state, the number of profitable game balls that the player can obtain is configured to be less than the specified number. Here, the control state of the auxiliary means changes from a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state when a specific period of gameplay as profitable gameplay ends. This specific period of gameplay is executed when the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means is opened based on game balls entering the first ball entry means after flowing down a specific flow path, and game balls enter the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means while the opening/closing means is open. Therefore, in order to execute a game for a specific period of time in order to change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state, it is necessary to launch game balls towards a specific channel and have them enter the first ball entry means. However, if the number of game balls that can be obtained when changing the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state at the player's convenience exceeds the number of game balls launched, then launching game balls towards a specific channel will increase the number of game balls the player has, thus inducing so-called "strategic play." Therefore, as in the game machine described in Appendix F1, when a specific number of game balls are launched towards a specific channel into which game balls can enter the first ball entry means in a predetermined game state, the number of profitable game balls that the player can obtain is less than the specific number of balls. This makes it possible to reduce the number of game balls that can be obtained when changing the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state to less than the number of game balls launched, thus preventing the induction of so-called strategic play.

[Note G1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
A gaming machine characterized by having means to set the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means not to open for a predetermined period of time in response to a predetermined game ball entering the first ball entry means during the execution of the special game as a profit game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix G1, when a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entry means during the execution of a special game as a profit-generating game, the opening/closing mechanism of the second ball entry means is not opened for a predetermined period of time in response to that ball. In this way, when a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entry means during the execution of a special game as a profit-generating game, the opening/closing mechanism of the second ball entry means is not opened for a predetermined period of time in response to that ball. Therefore, since no game balls enter the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means during the execution of the special game, the specific period game as a profit-generating game is not executed during the execution of the special game. As a result, the specific period game does not end during the execution of the special game, and thus the control state of the auxiliary means is prevented from changing from the first control state to the second control state during the execution of the special game.

[Note H1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the aforementioned variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
The opening execution means is characterized in that it can open the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means while the variable game is being executed based on the fulfillment of the starting condition.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1, it is possible to open the opening/closing mechanism of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means while the variable game is being executed based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions. Thus, because it is possible to open the opening/closing mechanism of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means while the variable game is being executed based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, a game ball can be entered into a specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means during the execution of the variable game. Therefore, a specific period game as a profit game can be executed during the execution of the variable game. As a result, the specific period game may end during the execution of the variable game, making it possible to change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state during the execution of the variable game.

[Note I1]
The system includes a launching means (32) that allows the player to adjust the launching force to launch game balls into the game area,
It is possible to perform a first game (played with left-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a first direction, and a second game (played with right-handed shooting) by firing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable gameplay (special symbol gameplay) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols),
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating the starting conditions for executing the aforementioned variable game,
Auxiliary means (315b) that assists in the fulfillment of the aforementioned starting conditions,
A special game execution means (41) that executes a special game (special symbol jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the aforementioned variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot),
A gaming machine capable of switching the control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 times) without executing the special game,
A first ball entry means (37) is provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific channel (392),
A second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) that can switch between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383),
An opening execution means (41) that opens the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means,
A special period game execution means (41) that executes a special period game (V-winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game, based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine in question is,
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-saving game state), when the predetermined specific period of gameplay ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) that corresponds to the specific game state.
The probability that the result of the variable game will be the predetermined result and that the special game as the profit game will be executed includes a first probability and a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the probability is one of the first probability and the second probability before the execution of the game during the specified period, the probability is not changed from one of the probabilities to the other probability of the first probability and the second probability, which is different from one of the probabilities, based on the execution of the game during the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I1, if the probability of the variable game resulting in a predetermined outcome and the execution of the special game as a profitable game before the execution of the specific period game is one of the first probability and a second probability that is higher than the first probability, the machine is configured so that, based on the execution of the specific period game, the probability does not change from one of the two probabilities to the other probability that is different from the first probability. In other words, in the gaming machine described in Appendix I1, the probability of the variable game resulting in a predetermined outcome is the same before and after the execution of the specific period game. Because the probability of the variable game resulting in a predetermined outcome is the same before and after the execution of the specific period game, it is prevented from changing from the second probability, which is advantageous to the player, to the first probability, which is disadvantageous to the player, after the end of the specific period game. Therefore, the player is prevented from suffering any disadvantage as a result of the execution of the specific period game.

[Note A1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means is characterized in that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, it notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, the specific information updated by the update means based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the variable display is notified by the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. In this way, the fact that the result of a predetermined judgment has become a specific judgment result is notified by the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. This allows the player to determine whether it is advantageous to receive the specific benefit based on the specific judgment result, that is, whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions, based on the type of notification mode that allows for the determination of the timing of the specific judgment result. As a result, players can choose whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific benefit, or to not fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and not receive a specific benefit, and instead fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, thereby receiving a specific benefit at a time they deem advantageous. Therefore, players can avoid receiving a specific benefit when they deem it disadvantageous, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game caused by receiving a specific benefit at a time they deem disadvantageous.

[Note B1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means (51) that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.
A gaming machine characterized by having means for providing notification in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, the specific information updated by the update means based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the variable display is notified in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the notification is made in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until the predetermined timing, the notification is made in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, and the notification is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, making it possible to determine in three different periods whether or not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions and receive a specific benefit in response to the current specific judgment result. Specifically, in the notification timing of the first notification mode (the period until the predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), and the notification timing of the second notification mode (the period after the specific timing), based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific judgment result can be determined, it is possible to determine whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific benefit, or not fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and not receive a specific benefit, and then fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, and receive a specific benefit.

Here, whether it is more advantageous for the player to receive a specific benefit by fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result, or to not receive a specific benefit by not fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result, and then receive a specific benefit by fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, depends on the timing of the specific judgment result. However, the borderline for which is more advantageous is not uniformly determined and can change depending on the game situation. For example, it can change due to various factors such as differences in the rate of balls entering the starting ball entry area based on differences in the launch intensity of game balls in the game area, the stability of the launch intensity of game balls originating from the game machine, the degree of deterioration of game nails installed in the game area over time, and the presence or absence of so-called stop-shooting aimed at firing unnecessary game balls. Therefore, by notifying in the third notification mode that the result of a predetermined judgment has become a specific judgment result, between the first notification mode and the switch to the second notification mode, it becomes possible for the player to make a choice that corresponds to the variation in the aforementioned borderline. As a result, when a predetermined judgment result occurs near the expected borderline, the player can consider the game situation, such as the rate of balls entering the starting ball entry area up to the point where the predetermined judgment result becomes the specific judgment result, and determine whether it is advantageous to fulfill the predetermined game conditions and receive a specific benefit.

Furthermore, by providing notification in a third notification mode between a predetermined timing near the borderline and a specific timing, if notification is provided in the first notification mode, it becomes clear that it is advantageous to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and receive the specific benefit because the borderline has not yet been reached. On the other hand, if notification is provided in the second notification mode, it becomes clear that it is better not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and not receive the specific benefit, but to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, thereby receiving the specific benefit. This allows players to easily determine whether fulfilling the predetermined game conditions is advantageous or disadvantageous to them when notified by the first or second notification mode, making it possible to more reliably receive a benefit that is advantageous to them.

[Note C1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means (51) that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.
The system includes means for providing notification in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third notification mode is a mode in which the first notification mode and the second notification mode are switched and displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, the specific information updated by the update means based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the variable display is notified in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the notification is made in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until the predetermined timing, the notification is made in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, and the notification is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, making it possible to determine in three different periods whether or not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions and receive a specific benefit in response to the current specific judgment result. Specifically, in the notification timing of the first notification mode (the period until the predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), and the notification timing of the second notification mode (the period after the specific timing), based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific judgment result can be determined, it is possible to determine whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific benefit, or not fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and not receive a specific benefit, and then fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, and receive a specific benefit.

Here, whether it is more advantageous for the player to receive a specific benefit by fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result, or to not receive a specific benefit by not fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result, and then receive a specific benefit by fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, depends on the timing of the specific judgment result. However, the borderline for which is more advantageous is not uniformly determined and can change depending on the game situation. For example, it can change due to various factors such as differences in the rate of balls entering the starting ball entry area based on differences in the launch intensity of game balls in the game area, the stability of the launch intensity of game balls originating from the game machine, the degree of deterioration of game nails installed in the game area over time, and the presence or absence of so-called stop-shooting aimed at firing unnecessary game balls. Therefore, by notifying in the third notification mode that the result of a predetermined judgment has become a specific judgment result, between the first notification mode and the switch to the second notification mode, it becomes possible for the player to make a choice that corresponds to the variation in the aforementioned borderline. As a result, when a predetermined judgment result occurs near the expected borderline, the player can consider the game situation, such as the rate of balls entering the starting ball entry area up to the point where the predetermined judgment result becomes the specific judgment result, and determine whether it is advantageous to fulfill the predetermined game conditions and receive a specific benefit.

In particular, when the timing at which the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result falls between a predetermined timing and a specific timing, the notification can be switched between the first and second notification modes as a third notification mode. This makes it possible to clearly indicate that the situation falls between the benefit situation corresponding to the first notification mode and the benefit situation corresponding to the second notification mode. This makes it possible to more reliably convey to the player the difficulty in determining whether it is more advantageous to receive benefits based on achieving a specific judgment result, or to receive benefits based on the specific information reaching a predetermined update state without receiving benefits based on achieving a specific judgment result.

Furthermore, by providing notification in a third notification mode between a predetermined timing near the borderline and a specific timing, if notification is provided in the first notification mode, it becomes clear that it is advantageous to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and receive the specific benefit because the borderline has not yet been reached. On the other hand, if notification is provided in the second notification mode, it becomes clear that it is better not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and not receive the specific benefit, but to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, thereby receiving the specific benefit. This allows players to easily determine whether fulfilling the predetermined game conditions is advantageous or disadvantageous to them when notified by the first or second notification mode, making it possible to more reliably receive a benefit that is advantageous to them.

[Note D1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means (51) that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.
The system includes means for providing notification in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
The third notification mode is characterized in that a specific movable object (39) is moved so as to overlap with the display surface of the display means.

In the gaming machine relating to Appendix D1, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, the specific information updated by the update means based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions in the variable display is notified in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the notification is made in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until the predetermined timing, the notification is made in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, and the notification is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, making it possible to determine in three different periods whether or not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions and receive a specific benefit in response to the current specific judgment result. Specifically, in the notification timing of the first notification mode (the period until the predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), and the notification timing of the second notification mode (the period after the specific timing), based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific judgment result can be determined, it is possible to determine whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific benefit, or not fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the current specific judgment result and not receive a specific benefit, and then fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, and receive a specific benefit.

Here, whether it is more advantageous for the player to receive a specific benefit by fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result, or to not receive a specific benefit by not fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result, and then receive a specific benefit by fulfilling predetermined game conditions for a specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, depends on the timing of the specific judgment result. However, the borderline for which is more advantageous is not uniformly determined and can change depending on the game situation. For example, it can change due to various factors such as differences in the rate of balls entering the starting ball entry area based on differences in the launch intensity of game balls in the game area, the stability of the launch intensity of game balls originating from the game machine, the degree of deterioration of game nails installed in the game area over time, and the presence or absence of so-called stop-shooting aimed at firing unnecessary game balls. Therefore, by notifying in the third notification mode that the result of a predetermined judgment has become a specific judgment result, between the first notification mode and the switch to the second notification mode, it becomes possible for the player to make a choice that corresponds to the variation in the aforementioned borderline. As a result, when a predetermined judgment result occurs near the expected borderline, the player can consider the game situation, such as the rate of balls entering the starting ball entry area up to the point where the predetermined judgment result becomes the specific judgment result, and determine whether it is advantageous to fulfill the predetermined game conditions and receive a specific benefit.

In particular, when the timing at which the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result falls between a predetermined timing and a specific timing, the third notification mode involves moving a specific movable object so as to overlap with the display surface of the display means. This movement of the movable object clarifies that the situation falls between the benefit situation corresponding to the first notification mode and the benefit situation corresponding to the second notification mode. This makes it possible to more reliably convey to the player that it is difficult to determine whether it is more advantageous to receive the benefit based on achieving a specific judgment result, or to receive the benefit based on the specific information reaching a predetermined update state without receiving the benefit based on achieving a specific judgment result.

Furthermore, by providing notification in a third notification mode between a predetermined timing near the borderline and a specific timing, if notification is provided in the first notification mode, it becomes clear that it is advantageous to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and receive the specific benefit because the borderline has not yet been reached. On the other hand, if notification is provided in the second notification mode, it becomes clear that it is better not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and not receive the specific benefit, but to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, thereby receiving the specific benefit. This allows players to easily determine whether fulfilling the predetermined game conditions is advantageous or disadvantageous to them when notified by the first or second notification mode, making it possible to more reliably receive a benefit that is advantageous to them.

[Note E1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means (51) that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, and the second notification mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a new variation display of the predetermined pattern without generating the specific benefit.

In the gaming machine relating to Appendix E1, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result and is displayed in the second notification mode, it is possible to perform a new variation display of the predetermined symbols without generating any specific benefits. In this way, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result and is displayed in the second notification mode, it is possible to perform a new variation display of the predetermined symbols without generating any specific benefits. Therefore, if the predetermined game conditions are not met when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, the specific information can be updated thereafter based on the fulfillment of the update conditions in the variation display. As a result, by not meeting the predetermined game conditions when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, it becomes possible to continue updating the specific information and keep the specific information in the predetermined updated state. This allows players to avoid receiving specific benefits by not fulfilling the predetermined game conditions for a particular judgment result. Later, after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred, players can fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and receive the specific benefit. This prevents players from receiving specific benefits at a time deemed disadvantageous to them, thus preventing a decline in interest and enjoyment of the game caused by receiving specific benefits at an unintended time.

[Note F1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means (51) that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.
A gaming machine characterized by performing a special effect during the display of the predetermined pattern between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

As mentioned above, when a predetermined judgment result becomes a specific judgment result, whether it is more advantageous for the player to receive a specific benefit by fulfilling the predetermined game conditions for that specific judgment result, or to not receive a specific benefit by not fulfilling the predetermined game conditions for that specific judgment result, and then receive a specific benefit by fulfilling the predetermined game conditions for that specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has been generated, depends on the timing of the specific judgment result. However, the borderline for which is more advantageous is not uniformly determined and can change depending on the game situation. On the other hand, when a predetermined judgment result becomes a specific judgment result, the period during which the predetermined game conditions for generating a specific benefit can be fulfilled is restricted due to the timing of generating the specific benefit. Therefore, when a predetermined notification is given in the first or second notification mode when a predetermined judgment result becomes a specific judgment result, the notification time is also restricted. As a result, players are forced to decide whether or not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions relatively quickly after the predetermined notification begins in the first or second notification mode. This makes judgment errors more likely, potentially leading to unintended disadvantages for the player.

In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix F1, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, a special effect is executed during the display of a predetermined symbol between a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information, which is updated by the update means based on the fulfillment of the update conditions in the display of the variable symbols, reaches a predetermined update state, and a specific timing after the predetermined timing. In other words, even if the result of the predetermined judgment is not a specific judgment result between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a special effect is executed during the display of the variable symbols. Therefore, during the display of the variable symbols at a time when the result of the predetermined judgment is not a specific judgment result, it becomes possible to execute a predetermined notification by a special effect instead of the first notification mode or the second notification mode. In other words, by performing a predetermined notification by executing a special effect during the display of the variable symbols, the player can grasp the current situation before the result of the predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result. Therefore, during the display of the predetermined symbols, players can decide in advance whether or not to fulfill the predetermined game conditions if the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, based on special effects. That is, they can decide whether to fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and receive a specific benefit, or not fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and not receive a specific benefit, and then fulfill the predetermined game conditions for the specific judgment result and receive a specific benefit after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and the predetermined benefit state has occurred. This makes it less likely for players to make judgment errors when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result, and prevents them from unintentionally finding themselves in a disadvantageous situation.

[Note G1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means (51) that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode by the switching means (51), it will not switch back to the first notification mode until at least the specific benefit occurs.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G1, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after a specific period prior to the specific update state of the specific information, it will not switch back to the first notification mode until at least a specific benefit is generated. Here, for example, if a player does not receive a specific benefit by not fulfilling a predetermined game condition, and then, after a specific information is updated to a predetermined state and a predetermined benefit state occurs, it is advantageous for the player to fulfill the predetermined game condition and receive a specific benefit based on the predetermined judgment result, the first notification mode is used to provide a predetermined notification. On the other hand, if it is advantageous for the player to receive a specific benefit by fulfilling the predetermined game condition based on the predetermined judgment result, the second notification mode is used to provide a predetermined notification. If the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing, and then the first notification mode is used to provide a predetermined notification, that is, if the notification mode is switched from one that is advantageous to the player to one that is disadvantageous to the player, the player may become confused. Furthermore, this could lead to the player making a judgment error by not fulfilling the predetermined game condition even though it would be advantageous to do so, thus failing to fully ensure the player's benefit. In contrast, once the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing, it will not switch back to the first notification mode until at least a specific benefit occurs. This allows players to continuously understand that they are in a favorable position until they receive that benefit, thus preventing confusion and avoiding unexpected disadvantages for the player.

[Note H1]
A launching means (32) capable of launching game balls,
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area, the display means (362, 363, 341) displays a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) in a changing manner,
A variable ball entry means (316) is provided in the game area and performs multiple opening and closing operations,
A gaming machine equipped with,
An update means (41) that updates specific information (remaining number of times ceiling activation is triggered) based on the fulfillment of predetermined update conditions (execution of special game) in the aforementioned variable display,
In a specific game state (low probability mode), a profit state generating means (41) generates a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (remaining number of ceiling activations counter = 0),
A notification control means (51) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (indicating gain) or a second notification mode (indicating loss) different from the first notification mode,
A determination means (41) that performs a predetermined determination (special jackpot lottery) based on whether a game ball enters the aforementioned starting ball entry area,
When the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes a specific determination result, a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game) when a predetermined game condition (winning a V in a minor win game) is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player,
Equipped with,
The notification control means includes a switching means (51) that, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result, notifies that the specific information has become the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing (break-even point) a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of updates until the aforementioned specific information reaches the predetermined update state (initial value of the remaining number of ceiling activations counter) is determined by lottery from among multiple update counts to be 1.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1, the number of updates required for specific information to reach a predetermined update state is determined by a lottery from among multiple update counts. Because the number of updates required for specific information to reach a predetermined update state is determined by a lottery from among multiple update counts, the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined profit state becomes non-uniform. This makes it difficult for players to grasp the number of updates required for specific information to reach a predetermined update state. Therefore, it becomes difficult for players to determine whether the number of updates for specific information has been cleared, for example, whether the gaming hall has performed a RAM clear on the gaming machine or changed the setting value that defines the jackpot probability. This prevents a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine caused by players being aware of whether a RAM clear or setting value change has occurred. Furthermore, because it becomes difficult for players to grasp the number of updates required for specific information to reach a predetermined update state, it suppresses so-called "hyena" behavior, where players target gaming machines that have a low number of display cycles of the predetermined symbols necessary to generate the predetermined profit state. Furthermore, because it becomes difficult for players to grasp the number of updates required for specific information to reach a predetermined state, it also becomes difficult to determine when the predetermined notification switches to the second notification mode when the predetermined judgment result becomes a specific judgment result. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the predetermined notification will switch to the second notification mode when the predetermined judgment result becomes a specific judgment result, thus enhancing their interest and enjoyment of the game.

10: Gaming machine 31: Game board 314: First prize slot 315: Second prize slot 316: Variable prize slots 317L, 317R: Through gate 341: Symbol display unit 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM

Claims (1)

A game board having the game area on the front side,
A predetermined decorative means that is visible in a front view of the game board and is provided at a specific position corresponding to the game board,
An information acquisition means that can acquire special information when the acquisition conditions are met based on a predetermined game played by the player,
A determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies predetermined conditions,
A first rotating means and
A special game execution means that executes a special game advantageous to the player when the determination means determines that the predetermined conditions are met,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The first rotating means is,
It comprises at least a rotating shaft portion provided in a direction intersecting the game board, and a rotating plate portion that can rotate about the rotating shaft portion,
The aforementioned rotating plate portion is
A specific area, which is part of the predetermined decorative means located on the reverse side, is provided with a viewing section that is visible from the front view of the game board.
The system is configured to switch from a predetermined stopped state to a predetermined rotating state when a predetermined trigger is established based on the predetermined game played by the player.
This gaming machine is
In a front view of the game board, a second rotating means that is movable and rotatable in a predetermined manner over the game area is configured to be displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the viewing portion of the rotating plate and a second position that is visible through the viewing portion of the rotating plate.
In the execution state of the predetermined game, a first state in which the specific area of the predetermined decorative means can be seen through the viewing portion of the rotating plate,
The second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion and displaces the second rotating means to the second position, thereby enabling a second state in which a predetermined area of the second rotating means becomes visible through the viewing portion of the rotating plate portion, and the area of the predetermined decorative means that is obstructed by the second rotating means becomes invisible.
The rotating plate portion is configured to start rotating when the second rotating means interferes with a specific part of the first rotating means.
Based on the correspondence between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, the system is configured to generate a first mode that the player may perceive as advantageous, and a second mode that the player may perceive as less advantageous than the first mode.
When the second rotating means moves toward the back side of the rotating plate portion, it is configured such that the rotation direction of the second rotating means can change during its movement toward the back side of the rotating plate portion.
In the special game described above, the rotating plate is configured to switch from the predetermined stopped state to the predetermined rotating state when the predetermined trigger is met.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the special game described above, the second rotating means is configured to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion to generate the second state.